Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia"

See other formats 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF   THE 


ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


OF 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1896. 


COMMITTEE  ON   PUBLICATION: 
Thomas  Meehan,  Charles  E.  Smith, 

Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  George  H.  Horn,  M.  D., 

Henry  Skinner,  M.  D. 

Editor:  EDWARD  J.  NOLAN,  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA : 
ACADEMY     OF    NATURAL    SCIENCES, 

LOGAN    SQUARE. 

1897. 


Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia, 

February  4,  1897. 


I  hereby  certify  that  printed  copies  of  the  Proceedings  of  the- 
Academy  for  1896  have  been  presented  to  the  meetings  of  the  Academy 
as  follows : — 


Pages      9  to    24 

'       25  to  104 

'     105  to  168 

'     169  to  200 

'     201  to  216 

'     217  to  264 

'  •  265  to  280 

'     281  to  312 

'     313  to  376 

'     377  to  392 

'     393  to  456 

'     457  to  466 

'     467  to  482 

"     483  to  546 

'     547  to  562 

"     563  to  594 

February 

25,  1896. 

March 

17,  1896. 

April 

14,  1896. 

.     April 

21,  1896. 

May 

12,  1896. 

.     May 

26,  1896. 

June 

16,  1896. 

.    July 

21,  1896. 

.     August 

4,  1896. 

.     August 

11,  1896. 

.     September 

15,  1896. 

.     September 

22,  1896. 

.     October 

27,  1896. 

.     December 

8,  1896. 

.     December 

15,  1896. 

.     February 

2,  1897. 

EDWARD  J. 

NOLAN, 

Recording  Secretary 

THE   EDWARDS    &   DOCKER   CO  ,    PRINTERS,    PHILA 


LIST  OF  CONTRIBUTORS. 

With  reference  to  the  several  articles  contributed  by  each. 


For  Verbal  Communications  see  General  Index. 


Allen,  Harrison,  M.  D.     A  biographical  sketch  of  John  Adams 

Ryder      222 

Note  on  a  uniform  plan  of  describing  the  human  skull     .    .     170 

Brown,  Amos  P.    The  crystallization  of  Molybdenite 210 

Cockerell,  T.  D.  A.     The  Bees  of  the  Genus  Perdita  F.  Smith    .       25 
Cook,  O.  F.     Summary  of  the  new  Liberian  Polydesmoidea    .    .     257 

Cope,  Edward  D.   The  Mesenteries  of  the  Sauria 308 

New  and  little-known  Mammalia  from  the  Port  Kennedy 

Bone  Deposit 378 

On  the  Hemipenes  of  the  Sauria 461 

Dall,  WilHam  Healey.    Insular  landshell  faunas,  especially  as 
illustrated  by  the  data  obtained  by  Dr.  G.  Baur  in  the 

Galapagos  Islands  (Plates  XV,  XVI,  XVII) 395 

Dolley,  Charles  S.,  M.  D.     The  Planktonokrit,  a  centrifugal  ap- 
paratvis  for  the  volumetric  estimation  of  the  food-supply 

of  oysters  and  other  aquatic  animals      276 

Fox,  William  J.     Contributions  to  a  knowledge  of  the  Hymen- 

optera  of  Brazil.    No.  1,  Scoliidae 292 

The  Hymenoptera  collected   by  A.  Donaldson    Smith   in 

Northeastern  Africa       547 

Harris,  Gilbert  D.     New  and  interesting  Eocene  Mollusca  from 
the  Gulf  States  (Plates  XVIII,  XIX,  XX,  XXI,  XXII, 

XXIII) 470 

Henry,  Fredk.  P.,  M.  D.    Remarks  on  Filaria 271 

Keller,   Ida  A.     The  coloring  matter  of  the  Aril  of  Celastrus 

scandens      212 

Pilsbry,  Henry  A.   New  species  of  the  Helicoid  Genus  Polygyra 

(Plates  II  and  III) 15 

Description  of  new  species  of  Mollusks 21 

A  remarkable  Central  American  Melanian      269 


/  f   3  3 


New  species  of  fresh  water  Mollusks  from  South  America 

(Plates  XXVI  and  XXVII) 561 

Geology  of  the   mussel-bearing  clays  of  Fish-house,  New 

Jersey      567 

Pilsbry,  Henry  A.  and  Samuel  N.  Ehoads.     Contributions  to  the 

Zoology  of  Tennessee.    No.  4,  Mollusks 487 

Pilsbry,  Henry  A.  and  E.  G.  Vanatta.     Catalogue  of  the  species 

of  Cerion,  with  descriptions  of  new  forms  (Plate  XI)    .    .     315 
Revision   of  the   North  American   Slugs :    Ariolimax   and 

Aphallarion  (Plates  XII,  XIII,  XIV)       350 

Rhoads,  Samuel  N.     Contributions  to  the  Zoology  of  Tennessee. 

No.  3,  Mammals 175 

Synopsis  of  the  Polar  Hares  of  North  America  (Plates  VI, 

VII,  VIII,  IX,  X) 351 

Mammals  collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith  during  his 
expedition  to  Lake  Rudolf,  Africa  (Plate  XXV)    '.    .    .    .     517 
Shufeldt,  R.  W.,  M.  D.    Fossil  birds  and  Mammals  from  Grotto 

Pietro  Tamponi  and  Grive-St.  Alban  (Plate  XXIV)       .    .     507 
Stone,  Witmer.     The  molting  of  birds,  with  special  reference  to 
the  plumage  of  the  smaller  land  birds  of  Eastern  North 
America  (Plates  IV  and  V) 108 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF  THE 


ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 


OF 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1896. 


January  7. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

One  hundred  and  forty-three  persons  present. 

The  deaths  of  R.  B.  Haines  and  A.  C.  Gorgas,  M.  D.,  members, 
were  announced. 

The  Council  reported  that  the  following  Standing  Committees 
have  been  appointed  to  serve  during  the  current  year : — 

On  Library. — Arthur  Erwin  Brown,  Harrison  Allen,  M.  D., 
Henry  C.  Chapman,  M.  D.,  Chas.  P.  Perot  and  Henry  A.  Pilsbry. 

On  Publications. — Thomas  Meehan,  Charles  E.  Smith,  George 
H.  Horn,  M.  D.,  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.  and  Henry  Skinner,  M.  D. 

On  Instruction  and  Lectures. — Harrison  Allen,  M.  D., 
Benjamin  Sharp,  M.  D.,  George  Vaux,  Jr.,  C.  Newlin  Peirce, 
D.  D.  S.  and  Uselma  C.  Smith. 

Standing  Committee  of  Council  on  By-Laws. — Isaac  J. 
Wistar,  Theodore  D.  Rand,  William  Sellers  and  Benjamin  Tilgh- 
man . 

2 


10  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  following  minute  was  unanimously  adopted : 
In  view  of  the  fact  that  General  Isaac  J.  Wistar  has  served 
four  consecutive  years,  the  limit  defined  by  the  By-Laws,  as  Presi- 
dent of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  his 
fellow  members  desire  to  indicate  their  esteem  and  affection  by  a 
cordial  endorsement  of  the  minute  of  recognition  adopted  by  the 
Council  and  to  express  the  hope  that  the  Academy  may  long  profit 
by  the  clearness  of  judgment,  the  knowledge  of  affairs  and  the 
courtesy  of  personal  intercourse  which  have  been  the  characteristics 
of  his  administration. 

Dr.   Benjamin   Sharp  made  a  second  communication  on  his 
ethnological  studies  in  Alaska  and  Siberia.     (No  abstract). 


January  14. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Thirty-four  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Samuel  G.  Lewis,  a  member,  was  announced. 

A  paper  entitled  "  New  Species  of  the  Helicoid  Genus  Polygyra," 
by  H.  A.  Pilsbry,  was  presented  for  publication. 

Pleurotomaria  erotaloides  Morton  in  the  New  Jersey  Cretaceous. — 
Mr.  H.  a.  Pilsbry  exhibited  a  fossil  Pleurotomaria  from  Mullica 
Hill,  New  Jersey,  found  by  Henry  L.  Balderston  when  on  a  excur- 
sion of  the  geological  class  of  Westtown  School,  and  submitted  to 
the  speaker  by  Lewis  Woolman.  ^ 

The  specimen  is  an  internal  cast  and  has  lost  the  earlier  whorls. 
Enough  remains,  however,  to  distinguish  it  as  a  strongly  marked 
species,  apparently  identical  with  Cirrus  erotaloides  Morton\  des- 
cribed from  Erie,  Alabama. 

The  species  has  not  been  noticed  since  its  original  publication  in 
1834,  and  as  Morton's  description  is  very  brief  (less  than  three 
lines  long)  and  involves  a  grave  inaccuracy,  and  his  figure  is 
decidedly  uncharacteristic,  a  more  detailed  description  of  the  spec- 
imen discovered  by  Mr.  Balderston  is  here  given,  followed  by  notes 
on  Morton's  type  specimen.  It  may  be  described  as  follows : 
Pleurotomaria  crotaloides  Morton.    (Plate  I). 

Shell  (cast)  rather  discoidal,  the  spire  low-conic,  base  flattened 
and  very  broadly  umbilicated.  Whorls  slowly  increasing,  very 
convex,  separated  by  deep  sutures ;  the  last  whorl  strongly  convex 
on  the  upper  surface,  thence  sloping  outward  to  the  periphery,  which 
is  quite  convex  again,  and  near  the  base  of  the  whorl.      Base  dis- 

*  Synopsis  of  the  Organic  Remains  of  the  Cretaceous  Group  of  the  U.  S. 
p.  49,  pi.  19,  fig.  5. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  11 

tiuctly  flattened,  though  convex.  Umbilicus  somewhat  exceeding 
one-third  the  total  diameter,  broad,  deep  and  perspective,  the  sutures 
within  it  strongly  impressed. 

Diameter  7  cm. ;  width  of  last  whorl  at  aperture  (measured  below) 
26  mm.;  alt.  of  same  about  19  mm. 

The  surface  of  the  cast  is  smooth,  not  showing  the  impression  of 
the  anal  fasciole.  The  sinus  was  probably  short,  at  least  in  compar- 
ison with  the  large  recent  species ;  but  as  the  latter  third  of  the 
specimen  is  largely  concealed  by  a  hard  arenaceous  matrix,  no  im- 
pression of  the  anal  sinus  can  be  made  out.  The  unremoved  matrix 
shows  clear  impressions  (external  moulds)  of  the  characteristic  Lower 
and  Middle  Marl  bed  species  Plicatula  urticosa  Mort.  and  Ostrcea 
larva  Lam. 

In  Pleurotomaria  perlata  Conr.,  the  periphery  is  more  strongly 
keeled  and  the  umbilicus  narrower  than  in  this  species.  In  Pleuro- 
trema  solariformis  Whitf.  the  whorls  are  flatter  both  outside  and 
within  the  umbilicus,  and  the  slit  is  said  to  be  bridged  at  intervals, 
though  this  last  feature  is  excessively  obscure  if  present  in  the  type 
specimen. 

The  specimen  described  above  is  the  property  of  Henry  L.  Bal- 
derston  and  has  for  the  present  been  deposited  in  the  museum  of 
the  Academy. 

The  type  of  Cirrus  crotaloides  Morton  is  a  much  smaller  shell, 
alt.  18,  diara.  39  mm.  It  is  an  internal  cast  of  whitish  calcareous 
material  ("rotten  limestone").  The  last  whorl  has  been  broken 
above  near  the  aperture,  and  the  whorls  of  spire  are  slightly  distorted 
on  one  side  by  pressure,  and  have  lost  considerable  material  by  ero- 
sion. The  umbilicus  is  filled  to  its  verge  with  a  calcareo-arenaceous 
matrix,  harder  than  the  cast  itself,  and  a  narrowly  conic  protuber- 
ance of  the  same  material  projects  over  the  apex.  This  has  been 
mistaken  by  Morton  for  the  true  spire,  which  accounts  for  his  words 
"  the  two  first  whorls  [sic]  suddenly  produced."  In  reality  the  true 
apex  of  the  shell  is  concealed  by  this  bit  of  hard  matrix,  about  three 
whorls  being  visible.  The  contour  of  the  last  whorl  is  practically 
identical  with  that  shown  in  the  middle  figure  of  the  plate  illustrat- 
ing the  Mullica  Hill  specimen.  No  impression  of  the  anal  sinus  or 
fasciole  is  visible  on  the  cast. 

Erie,  the  locality  Avhere  Conrad  collected  the  type  of  crotaloides, 
is  on  the  Black  Warrior  River,  in  the  Selma  Chalk  or  "  Rotten 
Limestone  "  member  of  the  Alabama  Cretaceous. 


January  21. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Fifty-two  persons  present. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  publication  : — 


12  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

"  Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Mollusks,"  by  H.  A.  Pilsbry. 

"The  Molting  of  Birds  with  special  reference  to  the  Plumage 
of  the  Smaller  Birds  of  Eastern  North  America,"  by  Witmer 
Stone. 

The  deaths  of  George  Edward  Dobson  and  Don  Antonio  del 
Castillo,  correspondents,  were  announced. 


January  28. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Thirteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "Contributions  to  the  Zoology  of  Tennessee, 
No.  3,  Mammals,"  by  Samuel  N.  Rhoads,  was  presented  for  publica- 
tion. 

A  resolution  having  been  adopted  at  the  preceding  meeting  pro- 
viding for  an  inquiry  as  to  the  best  method  of  exterminating  the 
Tussock  JSIoth,  Orgyia  leucostigma,  with  which  the  city  squares  and 
trees  are  infested,  the  subject  was  referred  to  the  Entomological 
Section,  a  committee  of  which  reported  as  follows  : — 

AVe  would  recommend  for  the  destruction  and  extermination  of 
the  Tussock  Moth,  Orgyia  leucostigma,  that  as  soon  as  possible  all 
the  egg  masses  be  hand-picked  from  the  trees  and  destroyed.  To  be 
effective,  this  must  be  done  before  the  first  day  of  April.  The 
trunk  of  each  tree  should  be  encircled  about  five  feet  from  the 
ground  by  a  band  of  "  Raupenleim  "  or  Dendroline,  four  inches 
wide  and  a  quarter  of  an  inch  thick  ;  this  band  should  be  renewed 
once  a  month  during  the  summer  season.  All  eggs,  cocoons  and 
caterpillars  segregated  below  the  band  should  be  gathered  and 
burned  ;  or  they  may  be  killed  by  steam  or  by  the  flame  apparatus 
used  by  house  painters. 

The  committee  is  confident  that  the  above  method,  if  properly 
carried  out,  will  exterminate  the  species  in  a  given  locality  in  two 
or  three  seasons,  and  put  them  under  control  the  first  summer.  The 
committee  has  never  seen  this  method  properly  carried  out.  Failure 
in  the  past  has  been  due  to  the  integrity  of  the  band  not  being 
maintained  and  to  the  fact  that  a  few  segregated  insects  and  eggs 
were  simply  brushed  to  the  ground  where  the  eggs  hatched  and  the 
caterpillars  reascended  the  trees.  The  life-history  of  the  species 
will  show  why  the  methods  described  must  prove  successful,  and  we 
append  an  account  of  the  transformations  of  this  defoliator  of  our 
shade  trees : — 

"  These  caterpillars  are  first  noticed  on  the  trees  in  May,  quite 
small,  feeding  on  the  leaves,  and  somewhat  indifferently  on  either 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  13 

the  upper  or  under  side.  When  suddenly  disturbed  they  drop  from 
their  perch,  suspending  themselves  by  a  silken  thread,  which  is  at- 
tached to  the  leaf  from  which  they  started.  They  retain  this  habit 
until  they  are  nearly  full-grown,  which  occurs  about  the  middle  or 
toward  the  end  of  June.  They  then  begin  to  wander,  leaving  the 
trees  on  which  they  have  fed,  often  crawling  to  others,  and  some- 
times travelling  several  hundred  feet  from  the  starting  point  before 
deciding  to  pupate.  When  they  are  ready  for  the  change  they  spin 
their  whitish  cocoon  in  any  convenient  place  ;  in  the  angles  of 
wooden  tree  boxes,  under  the  rails  of  fences,  in  the  interstices  of  bark 
of  the  trees  themselves,  and  in  fact  in  any  likely  or  unlikely  place 
except  a  perfectly  Hat,  smooth  surface.  The  caterpillar  has  a  very 
small  supply  of  silk  only,  and  to  eke  this  out  uses  its  own  hair 
which  it  breaks  off  close  to  the  body  and  forms  the  cocoon  by  a  sort 
of  felting  process,  the  silk  serving  to  give  form  and  holding  together 
the  hair.  In  the  cocoon  the  larvse  change  to  dirty  yellowish  or 
gray  pupre,  the  male  much  smaller  than  the  female  and  showing 
rudiments  of  the  future  wings,  while  the  female  is  nearly  double  the 
size  and  is  grub  or  slug-like  in  form.  Less  than  two  weeks  there- 
after  the  final  change  takes  place  and  the  adults  emerge — the  sexes 
strikingly  dissimilar  in  appearance.  The  male  has  two  pairs  of 
broad  dusty  gray  wings,  the  anteriors  crossed  by  narrow  black 
lines,  and  with  a  more  or  less  prominent  white  spot  toward  the 
lower  outer  angle.  The  feelers  or  antennae  are  broadly  feathered 
and  prominent,  while  the  fore-legs  are  plumed  and  tufted,  stretched 
straight  forwaixl  when  the  moth  is  at  rest,  so  as  to  be  the  most 
conspicuous  feature  of  the  insect.  The  female,  on  the  other  hand,  is 
entirely  without  wings,  and  somewhat  slug-like,  consisting  princi- 
pally of  an  abdomen,  which  is  enormously  distended  with  eggs. 
AVhen  she  emerges  from  the  pupa,  she  crawls  upon  the  cocoon  to 
which  she  clings,  almost  motionless  for  the  balance  of  her  life. 
Egg-laving  begins  soon  after  impregnation,  the  eggs  being  laid  upon 
the  old  cocoon  and  covered  with  a  frothy  mass,  which  soon  be- 
comes bard  and  brittle  and  is  snowy-white.  As  the  eggs  are  laid, 
the  female  diminishes  in  size,  eventually  shrinking  almost  into 
nothingness  and  finally  drops  off  dead.  Neither  male  nor  female 
takes  food  in  this  stage,  their  adult  existence  is  devoted  merely  to 
reproduction.  From  the  egg-masses  above  described,  a  second 
brood  of  larvre  hatches  in  July  and  the  same  life  cycle  is  repeated, 
the  adults  of  this  brood  appearing  in  September.  The  eggs  laid  at 
this  time  of  life  remain  unhatched  during  the  winter."^ 

It  will  be  readily  seen  from  this  life  history  that  the  females 
being  wingless  the  species  can  only  be  distributed  by  the  crawling 
propensity  of  the  caterpillar  ;  this,  together  with  the  fact  that  the 
eggs  are  all  laid  in  a  mass,  gives  the  key  to  the  method  of  destroy- 
ing them.     Each  egg-mass  destroyed  means  the  death  of  about  three 

^Eept.  Ent.  Dep.,  N.  J.  Agric.  Col.  Exp.  Station,  1894. 


14  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

hundred  and  fifty  caterpillars.  It  takes  a  little  experience  to  find  the 
egg-masses  in  the  winter,  and  very  few  would  escape,  to  hatch  out,  if 
they  were  intelligently  sought  for.  It  must  be  remembered  that 
they  go  through  their  metamorphoses  almost  in  an  automatic  way 
and  human  endeavor  to  check  them  must  proceed  after  the  same 
plan,  an  old  Latin  phrase  not  being  forgotten:  '  Nihil  sine  labore.' 
Generally  no  attention  is  paid  to  pests  of  this  kind  until  they 
become  so  bad  as  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  general  public. 
Respectfully  submitted  by 

Wm    7   F  V         '  I  (^(^^^^^^ii^^  of  the  Ento77iological  Section. 

The  following  were  elected  members:  Henry  Trimble,  Charles 
E.  Hite,  C.  Howard  Colket,  George  de  Schweinitz,  M.  D.,  James 
C.  Corry,  D.  Calvin  Mensch,  Edward  Gideon,  I.  Norris  de  Haven, 
Ruth  Clement,  M.  D.,  and  Sarah  Y.  Stevenson. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  15 


NEW  SPECIES   OF  THE  HELICOID  GENUS  POLYGYRA. 
BY    HENRY   A.    PILSBRY. 

At  the  request  of  Mr.  John  Ponsonby  of  London,  the  determina- 
tion of  a  series  of  Polygyras  of  unknown  or  doubtful  specific 
identity,  from  his  collection,  was  undertaken  by  the  writer.  In  the 
course  of  this  work,  the  Mexican  species  of  the  genus  were  reviewed, 
the  identification  of  the  Academy's  material  verified,  and  several 
specific  forms,  hitherto  nameless  or  under  incorrect  names,  were 
studied. 

The  following  communication  relates  to  species  of  that  character- 
istic "  Lower  Sonoran  "  group  of  Polygyra,  of  which  P.  plagioglossa 
and  P.  ventrosula  represent  approximately  the  extremes  in  the 
cycle  of  form  changes. 

The  types  of  P.  latispira,  matermontana  and  eiighjpta' are  in  the 
collection  of  the  Academy.  The  types  of  P.  Ponsonbyi  are  in  the 
same  collection  and  that  of  Mr.  Ponsonby ;  and  the  type  of  P. 
albicostulata  is  in  Ponsonby's  collection. 

These  five  species,  with  P.  Mearnsii  and  P.  chiricahuana  Dall 
(Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1895),  and  P.  solidens  and  P.  triangularis 
Mabille  (Bull.  Soc.  Philomath,  de  Paris,  1895)  complete  the  list  of 
Polygyras  given  in  the  Guide  to  the  Study  of  Helices,  pp.  73,  74. 

P.  latispira  n.  sp.     PI.  Ill,  figs.  13, 14,  15,  16. 

Shell  depressed,  with  convex  spire,  rounded  but  noticeably  shoul- 
dered periphery  and  convex  base;  unibilicated,  the  umbilicus 
within  deep  and  cylindrical,  about  "8  mm.  diam.,  at  the  last  whorl 
rapidly  enlarging,  2"3  mm.  diam.,  or  contained  about  five  times  in 
the  diameter  of  the  shell,  conspicuously  grooved  inside.  Surface 
very  closely  and  regularly  rib-striate,  moderately  shining.  Light 
yellow  or  buff"  in  color.  Whorls  52,  closely  coiled,  slowly  widening, 
rather  convex,  having  an  oblique  impression  behind  the  outer,  and 
an  excavation  behind  the  basal  lip.  Suture  well  impressed,  descend- 
ing only  a  trifle  at  the  aperture. 

Aperture  quite  oblique,  roundly  lunate,  the  lip  forming  two-thirds 
of  a  circle,  rather  narrowly  reflexed  ;  outer  lip  bearing  an  inwardly 
projecting  pointed  tooth  ;  basal  lip  with  a  slightly  keeled  face  along 


16  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

its  outer  half,  the  inner  part  bearing  a  rather  long,  low,  callous 
tooth  with  the  summit  a  trifle  flanged  outwardly.  Deep  within  the 
aperture  a  lobe-like  tooth  may  be  seen  on  the  columella.  Parietal 
tooth  small,  V-shaped,  the  outer  ridge  of  the  V  extremely  short. 

Alt.  6,  greater  diam.  lit,  lesser  IO2  mm. 

The  specimens  serving  as  types  were  collected  some  years  ago 
(about  1880)  by  Dr.  Horatio  C.  Wood  in  western  Texas,  either  in 
the  "  Great  Bend "  of  the  Rio  Grande  or  near  El  Paso,  exact 
locality  not  noted. 

The  species  is  somewhat  allied  to  P.  plag log lossa,  having  about 
the  same  general  contour  and  agreeing  in  the  proportions  of  the 
parietal  lamella;  but  the  armature  of  the  basal  lip  is  conspicuously 
different,  and  there  is  a  deep-seated  lamella  on  the  columella,  such 
as  well  developed  examples  of  P.  Mooreana  show,  but  apparently 
united  by  a  low  ridge  with  the  inner  end  of  the  basal  tooth.  This 
lamella  corresponds  to  the  groove  within  the  umbilicus,  and  is  not 
visible  in  the  drawings. 

P.  matermontana  n.  sp.    PI.  Ill,  figs.  10,  11,  12. 

Shell  depressed,  with  low,  convex  spire,  rounded  periphery  and 
convex  base  ;  umbilicated,  the  axial  perforation  small  and  deep,  at 
the  last  whorl  rapidly  enlarging  to  about  one-fifth  the  diameter  of 
shell.  Surface  shining,  faintly  wrinkled  by  growth-lines  and  show- 
ing under  the  lens  superficial  close  spirals  in  some  places;  light 
horn  colored.  Whorls  5i,  quite  convex,  the  inner  slowly  increas- 
ing, narrow,  the  last  decidedly  wider,  notably  convex  above,  with 
the  periphery  above  the  middle  ;  deeply  and  narrowly  constricted 
behind  the  lip.     Suture  well  impressed,  abruptly  deflexed  in  front. 

Aperture  quite  oblique,  rounded  oval,  the  lip  forming  over  two- 
thirds  of  the  circumference ;  outer  lip  broadly  expanded,  flaring, 
bearing  a  concave  lamella  with  a  denticle  at  the  lower  end  on  its 
inner  edge ;  basal  lip  reflexed,  with  a  compressed,  slightly  entering 
tooth.  Parietal  callus  a  translucent  film,  bearing  a  V-shaped  lam- 
ella not  connected  with  the  peristome,  the  outer  branch  of  the  V 
very  short. 

Alt.  5"2,  greater  diam.  9*5,  lesser  8  mm. 

Colima,  Sierra  Madre  Mts.,  Mexico. 

Besides  the  types  from  above  locality,  there  is  one  specimen  in 
the  collection  of  the  Academy  labelled  "  ^Mexico  "  differing  in  size, 
alt.  6*1,  greater  diam.  11  mm.,  and  having  6  whorls.  It  agrees  in 
all  other  characters  and  is  doubtless  the  same  specifically.  Two 
other  specimens  labelled  "Texas"  are  altogether  like  the  types. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  17 

P.  matermontana  is  like  texasiana  in  the  notch  between  the  two 
lip-teeth,  but  the  outer  tooth  is  a  more  pronounced  and  shorter 
lamella,  the  parietal  "  V  "  is  less  developed,  and  the  upper  surface 
is  not  costalate.  The  parietal  lamella  is  much  alike  in  matermon- 
tana and  laUsjiira,  the  outer  branch  being  much  less  developed  than 
in  Ixichardsoni,  veidrosula  or  bicru7-is.  The  umbilicus  is  like  that  of 
latispira,  being  slightly  more  ample  than  in  texasiana,  and  with 
the  central  well,  or  perforation  decidedly  larger. 

This  species  and  the  three  following  have  nearly  the  same 
form  of  aperture  teeth  and  are  very  similar  to  other  species  group- 
ing immediately  around  P.  ventrosula  in  this  respect.  The  compar- 
ative width  of  umbilicus,  the  sculpture,  and  to  a  less  extent,  the 
contour,  differ  in  the  several  forms.  The  inverted  T  shaped  tooth 
upon  the  outer  lip,  formed  by  a  lamella  parallel  to  the  lip-edge  with 
a  shorter  one  at  its  lower  end,  transverse  to  it,  is  characteristic  of 
the  group. 

P.  Ponsonbyi  n.  sp.     PI.  II.  figs.  1,  2,  .3. 

Shell  globose-depressed,  with  low  conoid-convex  spire,  rounded 
periphery  and  convex  base.  Umbilicus  one-sixth  the  diameter  of 
shell,  with  flattened,  nearly  vertical  w^alls,  narrowing  to  a  perfora- 
tion beyond  the  last  whorl.  Surface  shilling,  smooth  except  for 
extremely  faint  growth-wrinkles  ;  corneous-brown,  with  a  chestnut- 
brown  super-peripheral  band  on  the  body- whorl,  appearing  on  the 
spire  as  a  narrow  sutural  margiuation.  AVhorls  5?,  convex,  slowly 
widening,  the  last  decidedly  wider,  tumid  on  the  latter  half  of  the 
base,  deeply  and  narrowdy  constricted  behind  the  outer  and  basal 
lips.  Suture  well  and  evenly  impressed,  abruptly  and  deeply 
deflexed  in  front. 

Aperture  very  oblique,  rounded-oval,  the  lip  forming  three-fourths 
of  the  circumference.  Outer  lip  broadly  flaring,  its  inner  edge  bear- 
ing a  short  concave  lamella,  with  a  projecting  compressed  tooth  at 
its  lower  end ;  basal  lip  reflexed,  with  a  similar  compressed  tooth. 
Parietal  wall  bearing  a  short,  erect,  straight  lamina  parallel  with 
the  basal  lip,  and  having  a  very  short  V-branch  at  the  outer  end  ; 
the  inner  termination  not  extending  to  the  columella  insertion. 

Alt.  5,  greatest  diam.  8*2,  lesser  7*2  mm. 

Types  from  Mexico,  exact  locality  not  known,  in  the  collections 
of  John  Ponsonby  and  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philad. 

Like  ventrosula  and  Richardsoni  in  the  teeth  of  the  lip,  but  more 
globose  than  either,  parietal  tooth  with  only  a  trace  of  the  outer 


18  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

branch  of  the  V,  base  more  tumid,  and  umbilicus  of  last  whorl  more 
well-like. 

P.  euglypta  n.  sp.     PI.  II,  figs.  7,  8,  9. 

Shell  obese,  with  low  conic  spire,  rounded-angular  periphery- 
near  the  top  of  last  whorl,  sloping  outer  wall  and  convex,  tumid 
base.  Umbilicated,  a  central  perforation  expanding  at  last  whorl 
to  form  an  umbilicus  about  one-sixth  the  diam.  of  shell,  and  with 
the  wall  rising  almost  vertically  from  its  suture.  Surface  of  outer 
1^  whorls  sculptured  with  sharp,  strong  and  regular  thread-like  sig- 
moid riblets,  subobsolete  and  more  numerous  by  intercalation  in  the 
immediate  vicinity  of  the  umbilicus  ;  the  inner  whorls  of  spire 
smooth.  Whorls  4^-41,  the  inner  slowly  increasing,  last  whorl 
much  wider,  very  deeply  constricted  and  excavated  behind  the  outer 
and  basal  lips.     Suture  impressed,  deeply  descending  in  front. 

Aperture  extremely  oblique,  transversely  oval,  the  lip  forming 
three-fourths  of  the  circumference,  upper  and  basal  margins  sub- 
parallel.  Outer  lip  broadly  flaring,  with  a  short  lamella  on  its 
inner  edge,  formed  of  a  compressed,  slightly  entering  portion  joined 
T-like  to  a  short  lamella  parallel  to  the  inner  lip-edge  ;  basal  lip 
reflexed,  bearing  a  compressed,  entering  tooth  similar  to  the  lower 
portion  of  the  T  on  outer  lip.  Parietal  tooth  like  a  narrow,  slanting 
V,  the  two  branches  united  with  the  ends  of  the  lip. 

Alt.  5*3.  greater  diam.  9"5,  lesser  8'2  mill. 

Alt.  4"3,  greater  diam.  7"5,  lesser  6'4  mill. 

Cinaloa  (larger  form)  and  Mazatlan  (smaller  form). 

A  member  of  the  P.  ventrosula  group,  distinguished  from  veyitro- 
sula,  Hindsi,  Richardsoni  and  bicruris  by  the  very  strong,  sharp  rib- 
striation  of  the  last  IJ  whorls. 

P.  albicostulata  n.  sp.     PI.  II,  figs.  4,  5,  6. 

Shell  obese,  with  convex  spire,  periphery  much  above  middle  of 
body-whorl,  and  tumid  base.  Umbilicated,  the  umbilicus  narrow 
and  deep,  with  vertical  walls,  not  much  enlarging  at  last  whorl, 
where  it  measures  about  one-ninth  the  diameter  of  the  shell;  within 
the  umbilicus  the  last  Avhorl  has  a  deep  spiral  furrow,  obliquely 
passing  into  the  groove  behind  the  basal  lip.  Surface  shining,  the 
latter  two  whorls  sculptured  with  coarse  whitish  riblets  with  corneous 
brown  spaces  ;  inner  whorls  nearly  smooth,  corneous  brown.  Whorls 
54,  weakly  convex,  the  last  very  obtusely  angular  at  its  origin, 
becoming  rounded  and  tumid  on  the  latter  half,  deeply  and  narrowly 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  19 

constricted  behind  the  outer  and  basal  lips.  Suture  slightly  im- 
pressed, rather  abruptly  and  deeply  deflexed  in  front. 

Aperture  oblique,  oblong,  the  upper  and  basal  margins  subparal- 
lel ;  outer  lip  reflexed,  its  inner  edge  bearing  a  concave  lamina 
ending  below  in  a  denticle  ;  basal  lip  reflexed,  impinging  on  the 
umbilicus,  with  a  compressed  tooth  separated  from  the  lamella  on 
outer  lip  by  a  deep  squarish  sinus,  a  gentle  swelling  to  the  left  of  it. 
Parietal  wall  glazed  with  a  translucent  film,  and  bearing  a  long  V- 
shaped  tooth,  the  outer  branch  of  which  is  short  and  not  connected 
with  the  upper  insertion  of  outer  lip. 

Alt.  5*5,  greatest  diam.  85,  lesser  7'5  mm. 

Type  in  collection  of  Mr.  John  Ponsonby  of  London.  It  is  said 
to  be  from  Mexico,  and  has  the  appearance  of  a  northern  Mexican 
shell. 

The  strong,  whitish  rib-strise,  narrow  and  nearly  regular  umbilicus 
with  spiral  groove  within  on  the  last  whorl,  and  the  aperture  much 
as  in  euglypta,  Riehardsoni  and  ventrosula,  are  a  combination  of 
characters  amply  sufficient  to  distinguish  this  species  from  other 
forms  now  known ;  and  while  I  am  opposed  on  principle  to  the 
description  of  species  without  exact  locality  record,  it  seems  best  in 
some  cases  to  depart  from  this  salutary  rule.  I  do  not  think  any  one 
will  have  difficulty  in  recognizing  the  species,  as  no  other  Polygyra 
having  the  apertural  characters  of  this  one,  presents  a  similar  um- 
bilicus or  sculpture. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  II  and  III. 

Polygyra  Ponsonbyi  n.  sp.,  seen  from  below. 
Polygyra  Ponsonbyi  n.  sp.,  anterior  view. 
Polygyra  Ponsonbyi  u.  sp.,  aperture,  the  plane  of  peri- 
stome at  a  right  angle  to  line  of  vision, 
Polygyra  albicostulata  n.  sp.,  from  below. 
Polygyra  albicostulata  n.  sp.,  anterior  view. 
Polygyra  albicostulata  n.  sp.,  aperture,  the  plane  of  peri- 
stome at  a  right  angle  to  line  of  vision. 
Fig.     7.     Polygyra  euglypta  n.  sp.,  aperture,  the  plane  of  peristome 

at  right  angle  to  line  of  vision. 
Fig.     8.     Polygyra  euglypta  n.  sp.,  seen  from  below. 
Fig.     9.     Polygyra  euglypta  n.  sp.,  anterior  view. 
Fig.  10.     Polygyra  matermontana  n.  sp.,  anterior  view. 
Fig.  11.     Polygyra  matermontana  n.  sp.,  seen  from  above. 


Fig. 

1. 

Fig. 

2 

Fig. 

3, 

Fig. 

4 

Fig. 

5, 

Fig. 

6, 

20  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Fig.  12.  Polygyra  materraontana  n.  sp.,  seen  from  below.  • 

Fig.  13.  Polygyra  latispira  n.  sp.,  anterior  view. 

Fig.  14.  Polygyra  latispira  u.  sp.,  seen  from  below. 

Fig.  15.  Polygyra  latispira  n.  sp.,  seen  from  above. 

Fig.  16.  Polygyra  latispira  n.  sp.,  aperture,  the  plane  of  peristome 
at  a  right  angle  to  line  of  vision. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  21 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  MOLLUSKS. 

BY  HENRY  A.  PILSBRY. 

Marginella  Veliei  n.  sp. 

Shell  oblong,  the  body-whorl  tapering  (somewhat  Conus-like)  from 
the  rounded  shoulder  to  the  base,  spire  conic.     Surface  brilliant, 
enamelled    over    the    sutures  and  throughout,  pale 
olivaceous-buff,  slightly  bluish  around  the  middle  of 
body-whorl,  the  outer  lip  white.     Whorls  about  5, 
nearly  flat,  the  last  convex  above,  rather  flattened 
in  the  middle.     Aperture  about  four-fifths  the  length 
of  shell,  its  upper  half   narrow,  lower    half   about 
twice  as  wide  ;  pale  buff"  inside ;  outer  lip  slightly  re- 
tracted at  the  two  ends,  smooth  within,  thickened  by 
a  moderate  white  callus   outside,  which  is  not  pro- 
M.  VelieiX^-      ^uced  upward  to  the  preceding  suture.     Columella 
bearing  four  plaits,  the  lower  three  subequal,  upper 
one  slightly  smaller  and  more  deeply  inserted. 
Alt,  15,  diam.  7*1  ;  alt.  of  aperture  12  mm. 
Alt.  14'(3,  diam.  7'5 ;  alt.  of  aperture  11*8  mm. 
Boca  Ciega  Bay,  Florida  (Dr.  J.  W.  Velie!). 
This  species  resembles  M.  Hindsi  Petit  in  outline,  Imt  the  callous 
rib  of  the  outer  lip  is  not  continued  upward  as  in  that  species.     It 
is  notable  for  the  rather  slender  and  tapering  form  of  the  body- 
whorl  and  slight  inward  bend  of  the  outer  lip.     It  is  somewhat  re- 
markable that  so  large  a  Marginella  as  this  has  until  now  escaped 
notice  on  our  Florida  coast. 

Siphonalia  semiplicata  n.  sp. 

Shell  fusiform,  tapering  about  an  equal  distance  above  and  below, 
solid  and  strong,  gray  with  some  indistinct  brownish  patches.  Whorls 
about  8,  nucleus  smooth  (partly  lacking  by  erosion) ;  5*  later 
whorls  sculptured  with  cord-like  spirals  about  equal  to  their  inter- 
vals in  width,  about  11  in  number  on  penultimate  and  three  preced- 
ing whorls;  last  Ih  whorls  having  short,  sometimes  indistinct,  sub- 
vertical  waves  at  the  shoulder,  the  preceding  whorls  merely  convex, 
with  no  vertical  folds.     Last  whorl  contracted  and  produced  at  base 


22  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

as  usual,  the  siphon  nearly  straight,  a  little  recurved.  Aperture 
livid  brown  within,  contained  1"8  times  in  length  of  shell ;  outer  lip 
regularly  arched,  multilirate  within,  the  lirse  extending  to  within 
about  I2  mm.  of  lip-edge;  columella  concave  above,  straight,  verti- 
cal and  more  heavily  calloused  in  the  middle,  slanting  to  the  left 
below.     Alt.  47,  diam.  24  mm. 

Yokohama,  Japan. 

Allied  to  S.  ficsoides,  fiiscolineata,  etc.,  but  in  this  species  the  ver- 
tical waves  of  the  shoulder  are  entirely  absent  on  the  spii  e ;  the 
canal  is  nearly  straight. 

In  this  connection  it  may  be  well  to  call  attention  to  the  fact, 
kindly  communicated  to  me  by  Mr.  J.  Cosmo  Melvill,  that  Siphon- 
alia  Stearnsii  Pilsbry  is  identical  with  S.  psexidohuccinum  Melv.  and 
S.  hyperodon  Pils.  is  the  same  as  IS.  Mikado  Melv.  Mr.  Melvill's 
names  were  proposed  in  the  Journal  of  Conchology  (Leeds),  V,  p.  348, 

Ischnochiton  aspidaulax  n.  sp. 

Shell  oblong,  slightly  narrower  in  front,  moderately  elevated, 
carinated,  the  side  slopes  nearly  straight.  Surface  somewhat  shin- 
ing, and  (a)  dark  olive  at  the  sides,  a  light  olive  band  dappled  with 
darker  spots  along  the  ridge,  or  (6)  light  dull  bluish  dappled  with 
brown,  and  with  some  snow-white  patches  on  valves  ii,  iii,  v  and  vi ; 
yellowish  at  the  apices  of  valves. 

Median  valves  not  beaked,  the  sutures  concave.  Lateral  areas 
well  defined,  but  only  a  trifle  raised,  sculptured  with  numerous  dis- 
tinct, unequal  radial  grooves,  not  extending  to  the  apex,  and  parted  by 
unequal  spaces,  densely  sculptured  with  oblique  or  Y-shaped  scale- 
like granules,  the  apices  of  the  V's  directed  toward  the  beaks.  Central 
areas  very  densely  and  minutely  sculptured  with  longitudinal  irreg- 
ular wrinkles,  somewhat  converging,  becoming  finer  toward  the 
ridge,  coarser  in  front  of  the  diagonal  line.  Posterior  valve  with 
the  mucro  slightly  projecting,  somewhat  in  front  of  the  middle,  pos- 
terior slope  somewhat  concave. 

Interior  bluish,  with  olive  stains  behind  the  valve-callus.  Sinus 
rather  i\arrow,  straight  and  smooth,  angular  at  the  sides.  Valve  i 
with  10,  valves  ii  to  vii  with  1-1,  valve  viii  with  10  slits.  Teeth 
rather  long,  sharp  and  smooth.  Eaves  narrow,  deeply  grooved 
above  the  teeth. 

Girdle  covered  with  compactly,  irregularly  imbricated  glossy 
scales,  very  weakly  striated,  and  measuring  "8  to  '25  mm.  in  width  ; 
each  scale  olive-blackish  with  a  broad  outer  border  of  white.     In  a 


1896.]  .NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  23 

general  view,  the  girdle  appears  light  olive  with  an  ill-defined  dusky 
bar  opposite  each  valve. 

Length  18,  breadth  9  mm.  (exclusive  of  girdle).  Angle  of  di- 
vergence 119°. 

Panamic  region,  exact  locality  not  known. 

Specimens  of  this  elaborately  sculptured  Ischnochiton  were  re- 
ceived from  Mr.  W.  J.  Raymond  some  years  ago.  Mr.  E.  R.  Sykes, 
of  London,  has  kindly  compared  it  with  the  type  of/,  dispar  Sowb., 
and  informs  me  that  it  is  quite  distinct,  confirming  the  opinion  I 
had  already  formed  from  a  study  of  the  description  and  figures  of 
that  species.  From  other  West  American  species  it  is  readily  dis- 
tinguished by  the  peculiar  sculpture,  dorsal  keel  and  the  coloration 
of  the  girdle  scales. 

Sagda  (?)  Gabbi  n.  sp. 

Shell  depressed,  with  low,  conoid-convex  spire,  round  periphery 
and  somewhat  flattened,  convex  base,  rather  deeply  indented  around 
the  minute  umbilical  perforation  ;  solid  though  rather  thin  ;  whitish 
corneous  or  faintly  buflf;  the  surface  rather  dull  though  shining, 
smooth  except  for  irregular,  very  faint  growth-marks.  Whorls 
about  5i,  convex,  slowly  widening,  the  last  decidedly  wider,  not 
descending  in  front.  Suture  impressed  and  narrowly  translucent- 
margined  below.  Aperture  subvertical,  a  little  oblique,  lunate ; 
peristome  evenly  curved,  sharp-edged,  the  columellar  margin  lined 
with  white  callus  inside,  and  reflexed  in  the  vicinity  of  the  umbilical 
perforation,  nearly  concealing  it. 

Alt.  7,  greater  diam.  11,  lesser  diam.  10  mm.  (Type). 

Alt.  8,  greater  diam.  12,  lesser  diam.  10'8  mm.  (specimen  in  Pon- 
souby  Coll.). 

San  Domingo  (W.  M.  Gabb !). 

Compared  with  Helix  effusa  Pfr.  (Monographia,  V,  p.  105,  Tryon, 
Manual  II,  p.  163),  of  which  part  of  the  original  lot  collected  by 
Smith  are  before  me,  this  species  is  more  solid,  with  smaller  perfor- 
ation, smoother  surface  and  fewer,  more  rapidly  widening  whorls ; 
but  it  is  especially  distinguished  by  the  different  form  of  the  peris- 
tome. In  effusa  the  basal  lip  (in  a  ventral  view  of  the  shell)  is  seen 
to  bend  forward  in  a  broad  convex  lobe,  the  outer  point  of  the  curve 
extending  as  far  forward  as  the  insertion  of  the  outer  lip  ;  and  upon^ 
the  base  the  usual  direction  of  the  arcuate  growth-lines  is  reversed. 
In  the  new  species,  while  there  is  a  slight  bend,  no  such  effuse  con- 
dition of  the  basal  lip  is  developed. 


24  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

This  species  is  described  from  four  specimens  collected  by  Gabb 
(the  types),  and  one  in  the  collection  of  Mr.  John  Ponsonby,  of 
London.  The  latter  is  slightly  larger,  and,  at  first  glance,  seems  to 
have  the  aperture  more  vertical,  but  this  is  caused  by  the  breaking 
away  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  lip-edge. 

The  columellar  callus  becomes  a  little  heavier,  slightly  convex, 
toward  the  lower  end  of  columella.  Upon  breaking  a  specimen  a 
minute  embryonic  shell  was  found.  The  species  is  therefore  prob- 
ably viviparous,  as  I  have  shown  some  other  species  of  Thysanophora 
and  Sagda  to  be.  The  callous  lining  of  the  interior  in  the  columellar 
region  is  conspicuous  in  this  species  but  absent  in  H.  effusa  Pfr. 
Both  species  seem  to  me  referable  to  Sagda  rather  than  to  Thysano- 
phora; but  the  two  genera  are  intimately  allied. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  25 


THE  BEES  OF  THE  GENUS  PEKDITA  F.  Smith. 
BY   T.   D,    A.   COCKERELL. 

Ill  attempting  to  teach  entomology  to  the  students  of  the  New 
Mexico  Agricultural  College,  the  difficulty  was  early  felt,  that  there 
existed  no  work  treating  in  an  adequate  manner  of  any  group  of 
insects  obtainable  in  the  vicinity.  While  it  was  possible  to  indicate 
the  outlines  of  the  subject  without  any  very  profound  knowledge  of 
the  insects  which  were  collected  and  studied,  it  appeared  to  the  writer 
that  this  superficial  method  of  work  could  not  lead  to  the  best 
results.  It  is  quite  true  that  an  ordinary  student  has  not  time  to 
master  even  the  families  of  insects ;  but  the  writer  has  long  felt 
persuaded  that  the  plan  of  teaching  the  elements  without  entering 
into  detail  is  essentially  a  vicious  one,  calculated  in  extreme  cases, 
even  to  convey  a  totally  false  impression  of  the  true  lessons  of 
biology. 

In  the  first  place,  the  main  purpose  of  biological  study  in  educa- 
tion is  not  so  much  to  load  the  mind  with  information,  as  to  prompt 
a  habit  of  observation  and  deduction.  Owing  to  the  unfortunate 
trend  of  the  present  educational  system,  the  students  almost  inva- 
riably come  to  the  entomology  class  prepared  to  learn  by  heart  any 
lessons  that  may  be  assigned  to  them,  but  very  ill-prepared  to 
notice  what  has  not  been  actually  pointed  out.  It  is,  perhaps,  not 
an  exaggeration  to  say  that  the  average  junior  or  senior  student  in  a 
college  possesses  less  inclination  and  ability  to  notice  and  compare 
than  a  child  of  from  five  to  ten  years  of  age. 

The  entomological  studies,  if  successful,  should  tend  to  break 
down  this  acquired  mental  habit,  and  restore  in  some  measure  the 
inquisitiveness  of  childhood.  Therefore,  nothing  can  be  worse  than 
limiting  the  student's  knowledge  by  what  may  be  written  in  a  text- 
book, and  checking  his  budding  interest  in  every  direction  by  "  I 
don't  know,"  with  the  implication  that  it  is  no  use  trying  to  find 
out.  The  idea  that  some  facts  are  to  be  regarded  by  the  student, 
and  all  others  ignored,  is  an  entire  perversion  of  the  proper  spirit  of 
biological  inquiry. 


26  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Another  consideration  is,  that  after  all  the  cell,  the  individual 
and  the  species  are  the  three  natural  units  in  biology,  without  a  just 
conception  of  which,  all  reasoning  must  be  futile.  The  orders,  fami- 
lies, genera  and  other  higher  groups  do  not  stand  at  all  on  the  same 
plane,  being  essentially  artificial  arrangements  for  convenience  in 
classification.  Consequently  a  student  who  might  be  thoroughly 
acquainted  with  the  higher  groups  and  ignorant  of  species,  would 
be  very  little  prepared  to  form  just  conceptions  of  the  phenomena 
of  life. 

When  these  ideas  dawned  upon  the  writer,  he  was  somewhat  dis- 
concerted to  reflect  that  in  the  whole  range  of  zoology  he  possessed 
an  intimate  acquaintance  with  only  two  series,  the  slugs  in  Mollusca 
and  the  Coccidse  in  Insecta.  Of  the  former,  which  might  have  been 
used  in  zoological  studies,  there  is  but  one  species  in  New  Mexico, 
and  that  not  found  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  college ;  of  the  lat- 
ter, the  species  are  more  numerous,  but  very  unsuited  for  the  pur- 
pose required,  since  they  are  exceptions  to  almost  every  ordinary 
entomological  rule. 

It  is  perfectly  true,  that  there  already  exist  many  very  admirable 
monographs  of  North  American  insects  of  diflfereut  groups  ;  but 
there  are  two  reasons  why  even  the  best  of  these  do  not  entirely 
serve  our  purpose.  The  first  is,  that  comparatively  little  collecting 
has  been  done  in  southern  New  Mexico,  so  that  many  of  our  very 
common  species  are  even  unknown  to  science,  and,  therefore,  not  to 
be  found  in  the  monographs  ;  the  second,  that  very  few  of  the  pub- 
lished writings  contain  anything  like  a  careful  account  of  the  habits 
of  the  species.  One  of  the  very  first  lessons  that  the  student  has  to 
learn  is  that  structure  is  as  intimately  related  to  environment,  as 
lock  to  key,  and  a  work  which  practically  ignores  one  side  of  this 
question  cannot  be  entirely  satisfactory. 

The  nearest  approximation  to  what  is  wanted  is  found  among  the 
higher  lepidoptera,  which  are  illustrated  by  such  admirable  works 
as  those  of  Scudder  and  AV.  H.  Edwards.  Yet  these  insects  are  not 
very  easily  studied  by  a  beginner,  except  in  a  superficial  way,  nor  is 
their  classification  yet  upon  a  perfectly  sound  basis.  So  finally,  it 
was  concluded  to  take  up  the  bees  and  endeavor  to  work  them  up 
in  such  a  manner  that  they  might  be  used  as  desired.  They  are 
good  typical  insects,  their  principal  structural  characters  are  easily 
observed,  their  habits  are  most  interesting,  and  they  abound  in  New 
Mexico.      Moreover,  the  bee-studies  go  very  nicely  hand-in-hand 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  27 

with  flower-studies  undertaken  in  botany,  the  relations  between  bees 
and  flowers  being  among  the  most  fascinating  phenomena  in  natural 
history. 

The  present  essay  on  Perdita  is  the  first  step  toward  the  realiza- 
tion of  the  above  mentioned  ideal.  Imperfect  as  it  undoubtedly  is, 
it  has  grown  like  a  mushroom  under  the  hands  of  the  writer  ;  so 
that  the  probability  of  finishing  the  whole  series  of  bee-genera  seems 
remote  indeed,  if  each  is  to  increase  in  a  similar  fiish ion.  Seventeen 
North  American  species  of  Perdita  were  known  before  the  writer 
began  to  study  them  ;  of  these,  two  are  not  considered  valid,  but  55 
have  been  added,  bringing  the  list  up  to  seventy  !  Thus,  in  number 
of  species  described,  Perdita  becomes  at  a  bound  the  largest  of  North 
American  bee  genera. 

MATERIAL    EXAMINED. 

By  far  the  greater  part  of  the  material  studied  has  been  collected 
by  the  writer  in  New  Mexico.  With  great  kindness,  Mr.  AY.  J.  Fox 
loaned  a  series  of  specimens  containing  his  Lower  Californian  types, 
and  all  the  species  of  Cresson  except  cephalotes,  as  well  as  several 
herein  described  as  new.  In  various  other  ways,  such  as  comparing 
types,  Mr.  Fox  has  throughout  the  whole  investigation  given 
invaluable  assistance.  Mr.  C.  F.  Baker  was  so  good  as  to  send  me 
the  specimens  he  and  his  wife  had  collected  in  Colorado,  which 
included  some  new  forms.  Mr.  C.  Robertson  has  given  some 
very  valuable  information  regarding  the  habits  of  the  two  eastern 
species.  Some  interesting  species  have  been  found  by  students  of 
the  college.  Miss  Mae  Gilmore,  Miss  J.  E.  Casad,  Mr.  Alfred  Holt 
and  Mr.  C.  Rhodes,  as  duly  indicated  below.  My  botanical  col- 
league, Professor  Wooton,  found  one  new  species. 

The  writer  has  seen  all  the  species  treated  of,  except  cephalotes, 
halictulus  and  bicolor.  Of  the  70  species,  26  are  known  in  both 
sexes,  26  only  in  the  ^  ,  18  only  iu  the  9  .  23  are  at  present  only 
known  from  uniques.  The  flower-visiting  habits  of  50  species  are 
known.     The  nesting  habits  are  as  yet  unknown. 

CHARACTERS   USED. 

It  is  hoped  that  those  who  may  have  occasion  hereafter  to  describe 
species  of  Perdita  will  read  this  section,  as  a  study  of  the  published 
descriptions  shows  that  some  important  characters  are  almost  always 
omitted. 


28  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  coloration  of  the  head  and  thorax  is  black,  green  or  blue  ; 
frequently  the  parts  are  not  colored  alike,  the  metathorax  especially- 
being  usually  bluer  than  the  mesothorax  and  scutellum.  The 
metallic  color  does  not  extend  on  to  the  abdomen,  except  to  a  slight 
extent  in  intermpta.  The  sculpture  of  the  metallic  portions  differs, 
and  a  good  character  is  found  in  the  smoothness  or  otherwise  of  the 
mesothorax  ;  in  some  it  is  very  smooth  and  shining,  in  others  gran- 
ular or  striatulate  and  comparatively  dull.  The  dulness  or  other- 
wise of  the  front,  and  the  puuctation  of  the  area  close  to  the  ocelli^ 
may  also  be  used. 

The  pale  markings  may  be  absent ;  when  developed  they  are 
from  pure  white  to  deep  yellow,  never  red,  though  the  yellow  of 
many  males  may  be  reddened  by  cyanide.  The  reddest  color  ob- 
served is  in  the  bright  orange-rufous  of  the  latter  end  of  the  abdomen 
in  crotonis,  and  the  orange-rufous  legs  of  foxi.  The  abdomen,  as  in 
latior,  may  be  bright  ferruginous.  These  colors  are  entirely  differ- 
ent from  the  scarlet  induced  by  cyanide.  In  some  species  which 
live  on  yellow  flowers  {hdeola,  heata,  larrece)  the  whole  body -color 
is  deep  yellow,  the  dark  markings  being  reduced  to  a  mininmm. 
No  species  is  known  similarly  white,  nor  is  any  species  all  rufous 
like  some  forms  of  Noinada. 

The  head  may  be  comparatively  small,  round,  or  broader  than 
long  or  longer  than  broad ;  in  some  species  it  is  very  large  and  sub- 
quadrate.  The  males  may  or  may  not  have  a  conspicuous  tooth  or 
spire  on  the  cheeks  beneath ;  this  character  appears  to  be  a  valid 
specific  one,  but  appears  in  species  which  are  not  closely  allied,  (e. 
g.,  larrece  and  pulchrioj-'),  while  it  distinguishes  certain  forms  from 
their  closest  allies,  as  pulchrior  from  pallidior,  the  latter  having  un- 
armed cheeks.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  in  the  Mutillid  genua 
Sphcerophthahna  a  similar  state  of  affairs  occurs,  only  it  is  the 
females  that  possess  the  armed  cheeks.  Thus  *S.  montivaga  is  ex- 
tremely like  S.  megaeantha,  but  lacks  the  spine  on  the  cheeks.  S^- 
towneyi  also  differs  from  its  allies  by  its  spinose  head.  The  charac- 
ter is,  therefore,  one  of  those  which  has  been  termed  "  kaleido- 
scopic." 

The  mandibles  may  be  bifid  at  the  tip  (latior,  texana),  or  may  be 
notched  within  (sphceralcece  9  )  or  even  present  a  distinct  tooth  on 
the  inner  side  (oRneifrons).  They  are,  however,  usually  simple,  and 
more  slender  in  the  males.  In  the  females  of  the  albipennis  group 
they  are  very  stout  and  strongly  elbowed,  quite  different  from  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  29 

males.  There  is  also  a  marked  sexual  difference  in  the  mandibles 
of  venfralis.  The  tongue  differs  in  length  and  in  the  degree  of 
development  of  the  hairs.  As  will  be  seen  below,  the  tongue  has  on 
two  or  three  occasions  proved  useful  in  distinguishing  allied  forms 
(as  affinis  and  senecionis),  but  it  has  not  been  studied  throughout 
the  series.  In  one  instance,  a  useful  distinction  was  found  in  the 
relative  lengths  of  the  joints  of  the  maxillary  palpi. 

The  form  of  the  clypeus  differs  very  much  both  between  the  spe- 
cies and  the  sexes  of  the  same  species  (e.  g.,  ventralis).  For  conven- 
ience I  have  compared  the  shapes  noted  to  the  outlines  of  different 
kinds  of  hats. 

The  degrees  of  hairiness  of  the  face  and  cheeks,  as  also  of  the 
thorax  (especially  of  the  mesothorax)  offer  useful  characters.  The 
hairs  are  usually  white,  but  may  in  part  be  grayish  or  brownish,  or 
even,  in  a  yellow  species  (beata),  yellow.  They  are  very  rarely 
(cdbovittata)  dense  enough  on  the  face  to  obscure  the  markings. 

The  antennae  present  different  grades  of  color  (usually  paler  be- 
neath) from  yellow  and  orange  to  black.  In  the  albipennis  group 
the  color  of  the  flagellum  has  served  to  distinguish  the  males  of 
allied  forms. 

The  face  markings  at  first  seem  complicated  and  hard  to  describe, 
but  are  easily  reduced  to  a  simple  system.  The  face  may  be  wholly 
dark,  but  if  the  pale  marks  are  much  reduced  they  are  generally 
seen  to  linger  last  upon  the  clypeus.  An  exception  to  this  is  found 
however  in  semiccerulea,  with  its  shining  yellow  mark  on  each  side 
of  a  perfectly  dark  clypeus.  The  clypeus  may  be  wholly  light, 
usually  retaining  a  black  dot  on  each  side  near  the  margin.  The 
clypeal  dark  markings  appear  frequently  in  the  form  of  two  longi- 
tudinal black  bars,  as  in  numerata. 

The  lateral  light  markings  of  the  face  are  commonly  triangular, 
the  inner  angle  being  about  opposite  the  dot  on  the  clypeus,  and  the 
upper  angle  usually  on  a  level  with  the  antennal  socket  on  the 
orbital  margin.  Soaietimes  the  lateral  mark  extends  up  along  the 
margin  of  the  orbit  much  further ;  and  it  may  terminate  variously, 
being  either  pointed  or  truncate.  The  shapes  of  the  lateral  face 
marks  afford  excellent  specific  characters. 

Above  the  clypeus,  between  its  upper  border  and  the  level  of  the 
anteunse,  is  the  siipradypeal  mark,  which  differs  very  much  in  its 
degree  of  development,  and  even  in  its  shape  in  some  allied  species. 
It  may  be  produced  upward  in  the  median  line  to  an  enlarged  yel- 


30  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

low  mark  ou  the  front,  the  frontal  mark,  but  this  is  not  very  com- 
mon. 

Finally,  just  below  each  antenna  may  be  a  small  subtriangular 
mark,  which  I  have  called  the  dog-ear  mark,  because  of  its  resem- 
blance to  the  ear  of  a  hound,  first  observed  In  the  $  form  described 
as  canina. 

In  the  males  the  face  is  frequently  all  yellow  or  white  up  to  the  level 
of  the  antennce;  and  then  good  characters  are  found  in  the  degree  of  its 
further  upward  extension,  and  in  the  form  of  its  upper  limit. 

The  face  markings  are  nearly  always  conspicuously  different  in 
the  sexes,  but  not  so  in  alhovittata  and  the  albipermis  group,  nor  in 
luteola,  nor  the  texana  group. 

The  pale  markings  of  the  thorax  are  confined  to  different  degrees 
of  yellow  on  the  prothorax,  often  affording  good  characters,  and 
occasional  very  characteristic  yellow  patches  on  the  pleura,  except 
in  mexicanorum,  which  has  a  yellow  postscutellum,  and  luteiceps, 
which  has  a  little  yellow  on  mesothorax  and  scutellum.  Two  spe- 
cies, punctoslgnata  and  cephalotes,  have  the  thorax  yellow  with  black 
markings ;  marcialis  has  it  yellow  with  green  markings,  the  meso- 
thorax being  green  with  yellow  lateral  margins. 

The  wings  may  be  simply  hyaline  or  milky-hyaline,  or  slightly 
smoky;  never  really  dark  and  never  spotted  or  banded.  The 
nervures  and  stigma  may  be  dark  brown,  light  brown,  yellowish  or 
colorless  ;  the  stigma  is  usually  hyaline  centrally.  In  the  texana 
group  the  stigma  is  hardly  developed. 

Very  good  characters  are  'found  in  the  venation.  The  marginal 
cell  differs  greatly  in  size  and  length,  but  I  never  saw  one  so 
long  as  to  suggest  the  condition  of  Calliopsis.  It  may  be  obliquely 
or  squarely  truncate.  It  may  have  the  portion  below  the  stigma 
(substigmatal)  longer  than  that  beyond  ( poststigmataV),  but  usually 
they  are  about  equal  or  the  latter  is  longer.  There  are  but  two  sub- 
marginal  cells  ;  and  the  shape  of  the  second,  whether  triangular  or 
how  much  narrowed  to  the  marginal,  should  in  each  case  be  noted. 
The  so-called  second  submarginal  is  morphologically  the  third,  the 
true  second  of  genera  with  three  submarginals  being  absent.  On 
one  side  of  the  type  9  of  obscui-ata,  the  true  second  submarginal 
actually  appears,  small,  triangular  and  petiolate,  much  as  in  the 
Larrid  genus  Plenoculus. 

The  third  discoidal  cell  may  be  very  weak  or  even  entirely  want- 
ing, according  to  the  development  of  the  second  recurrent  nervure. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  31 

The  legs  may  be  dark  or  yellow,  or  variously  marked  with  these 
colors,  and  the  proportions  of  dark  and  light,  though  variable, 
afford  good  characters  within  reasonable  limits.  The  anterior  tibise 
are  usually  yellow  in  front  at  least. 

The  abdomen  differs  somewhat  in  shape,  and  may  be  either  wholly 
dark  or  variously  banded  or  spotted.  In  every  case  it  should  be 
carefully  described,  and  the  color  of  the  ventral  surface  should  also 
be  mentioned. 

The  $  genitalia  differ  in  one  or  two  species  I  have  examined,  but 
I  have  not  studied  them  sufficiently  to  be  able  to  introduce  them 
into  the  classification. 

In  addition  to  the  above  structural  and  colorational  characters, 
too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  on  the  importance  of  noting  the 
exact  localities  and  the  flowers  visited.  Without  the  assistance 
derived  from  such  information,  it  would  have  been  impossible  to 
unravel  the  mentzelke  series,  or  satisfactorily  arrange  the  forms 
allied  to  affirds.  Further,  facts  of  this  kind  are  invaluable  in  the 
difficult  task  of  correctly  associating  the  sexes. 

The  time  of  flight  should  also  be  carefully  noted.  Some  species 
are  vernal,  others  (the  great  majority)  fly  in  late  summer  and 
autumn. 

GEOGRAPHICAL  AND  VERTICAL  DISTRIBUTION. 

The  species  of  Perdita  are  characteristic  of  the  arid  region  of 
North  America.  Of  the  70  species,  49  are  found  in  New  Mexico, 
and  of  these,  no  less  than  34  are  in  the  Mesilla  Valley,  in  the  Middle 
Sonoran  (=  lower  part  of  Upper  Sonoran)  zone,  at  3,800  feet. 
Ascending  the  Valley  of  the  Rio  Grande,  four  species  were  taken 
at  San  Marcial,  one  at  Socorro  and  nine  at  Albuquerque,  but  at  none 
of  these  places  was  more  than  a  few  day's  collecting  done.  One 
species  was  found  at  San  Augustine,  on  the  east  side  of  the  Organ 
Mountains,  but  has  since  been  observed  in  the  Mesilla  Valley. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  that  Perdita  abounds  throughout  the  Upper 
Sonoran  zone  in  New  Mexico. 

At  Santa  Fe,  7,000  feet,  in  the  transition  zone  of  New  Mexico,  a 
good  deal  of  collecting  was  done  in  two  seasons,  but  the  species  of 
Perdita  do  not  appear  to  be  so  numerous  as  in  the  Upper  Sonoran. 
Only  seven  species  were  taken,  although  one  or  two  were  very 
numerous  in  individuals.  In  the  mid-alpine  zone  no  species  were 
seen,  either  in  New  Mexico  or  in  the  three  years  residence  in  Colo- 
rado. 


82  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

In  Colorado,  species  of  Perdita  have  been  found  at  La  Junta, 
Fort  Collins,  Estes  Park  and  Glenwood  Springs.  On  August  12, 
1887,  I  found  a  species  at  Cottonwood  Creek,  Pleasant  Valley,  Fre- 
mont County,  Colorado  ;  it  was  sent  to  Mr.  Ashmead,  but  the  species 
WAS  not  determined.  In  my  note-book  I  recorded  that  it  was  3^  mm. 
long,  head  black,  thorax  gray,  abdomen  red-brown;  surely  it  was  a 
new  species,  different  from  any  herein  described.  A  few  species  of 
Perdita  have  been  found  in  other  parts  of  the  west — three  in  Lower 
California,  three  in  California,  three  in  Nevada.  Two  are  known 
from  Texas,  one  from  the  State  of  Chihuahua,  Mexico.  Two 
vaguely  from  Mexico. 

In  the  Eastern  States,  Perdita  is  represented  by  only  two  species, 
odomaculata  of  the  northern  region,  from  Illinois  to  New  Hamp- 
shire ;  and  obseurata  in  the  south,  Georgia  and  Florida.  One  of 
the  Rocky  Mountain  species,  alhipennis,  extends  northeastward  to 
South  Dakota. 

As  regards  vertical  distribution,  one  species,  spJueralcece,  extends 
from  the  Mesilla  Valley  to  Santa  Fe,  but  the  Santa  Fe  form  is  an 
easily  distinguishable  race.  P.  lepachidis  extends  unaltered  from 
Socorro  to  Santa  Fe ;  and  zebrata  and  chamcesarachcB  extend  from 
Albuquerque  to  Santa  Fe.  P.  austini  and  bigelovice  extend  from 
the  Mesilla  Valley  to  Albuquerque. 

THE    FLOWERS    VISITED. 

It  may  be  laid  down  as  a  general  rule  that  each  species  of  Perdita 
visits  normally  but  one  species  of  flower,  but  occasional  speci- 
mens may  be  found  on  flowers  to  which  they  do  not  normally  belong. 
The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  found  in  P.  odomaculata  visiting 
Solidago,  Coreoj^sis  and  Aster ;  P.  cladothricis  visiting  various 
Compositee  as  well  as  Cladothrix ;  P.  pedidis  visiting  Pedis,  Tribulus 
and  Wedelia;  P.  fallax  visiting  Bigelovia,  Verbesina  and  Pedis; 
P.  phyiiiatce  visiting  Bigelovia  and  Gutierrezia ;  and  P.  seviicrocea 
visiting  Solidago,  Bigelovia  and  Gutierrezia. 

In  the  case  of  several  uniques,  it  is  not  certain  that  they  normally 
belong  to  the  flowers  on  which  they  were  found.  Thus  a  single  P. 
pnlchrior  was  found  on  Bigelovia  at  Las  Cruces,  and  it  would  have 
gone  in  as  a  Bigelovia  species  but  for  its  previous  discovery  on 
3feiitzelia  at  Albuquerque.  In  the  Mesilla  Valley,  toward  and  at 
the  base  of  the  Organ  Mountains,  are  many  species  of  flowers  which 
should  by  all  analogy  have  their  species  of  Perdita.     But  theoppor- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  33 

tuiiity  has  not  offered  to  make  excursions  to  determine  this  at  the 
right  season,  and  we  can  only  surmise  that  some  of  the  uniques 
taken  on  Verbesina,  Bigelovia,  etc.,  will  be  hereafter  found  abun- 
dantly attached  to  some  other  plant  in  the  neighborhood. 

The  flowers  visited  are  cited  in  their  systematic  order,  following 
the  arrangement  of  Eugler  and  Prantl,  as  recently  adopted  in  the 
A.  A.  A.  S.  list.  The  number  of  known  Perdita  flowers  is  25,  of 
which  13,  more  than  half,  are  Compositie.  Twelve  species  of  flow- 
ers have  furnished  more  than  one  Perdita  species,  the  greatest  num- 
ber (12)  being  from  Bigelovia  ivrightii. 

It  is  to  be  explained  in  reference  to  the  names  used  for  the  flow- 
ers, that  the  writer  is  in  favor  of  using  the  earliest  generic  name  in 
every  case,  when  not  jireoccupied  by  a  valid  homonym  ;  and  also 
the  earliest  specific  name  when  not  preoccupied  by  a  valid  homonym 
in  the  same  genus.  But  he  is  entirely  opposed  to  the  practice  of 
■displacing  names  because  antedated  by  synonyms,  which  are  not 
and  never  were  deserving  of  recognition  ;  and  he  does  not  consider 
a  varietal  name  invalid  because  previously  used  for  a  different  spe- 
cies, or  a  variety  of  a  different  species,  in  the  same  genus.  He  thus 
objects  to  the  substitution  of  Chondrophora  for  Bigelovia  (or  Bige- 
lowia),  or  of  Covillea  for  Larrea.  Likewise  of  ya.r.  jnlosus  for  var. 
villosus  of  Aster  ericoides* 

SALICACE^. 

(1).  Salix.  The  willow-frequenting  bees  at  Las  Cruces  in  May 
are  Perdita  salicis,  P.  nnmerata,  Andrena  salicinella  Ckll., 
Andrena  n.  sp.,  Halictus  sp.,  and  Prosopis  sp.  P.  salicis 
abounds,  but  of  numerata  only  one  was  taken. 

AMARANTHACEJE. 

(2).  Cladothrix  cryptantha  S.Watson.  P.  cladothricis  abounds 
on  this ;  it  was  rather  surprising  to  find  so  simple  a  flower  so 
abundantly  visited  by  a  particular  species  of  bee.  The  genus 
Cladothrix  has  cited  in  the  Index  Kewensis  only  two  species, 
both  from  Western  North  America. 

NYCTAGINAOE^. 

(3).  Wedelia  iNCARNATA  (L.)  Kuntze.  Visited  by  P.  pectidis. 
The  Boerhaavia,  common  at  Las  Cruces,  is  not  visited  by  Per- 
dita; while  the  large  purple  mirabilis  is,  of  course,  a  moth 
flower,  and  is  visited  by  Deilephila  lineata. 


34  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

CAPPARIDACEiE. 

(4).  Cleome  serrulata  Piirsh,  This  is  not  found  growing  wild 
at  Las  Cruces,  but  it  abounds  from  Albuquerque  to  Santa  Fe 
and  northward  into  Colorado,  being  visited  in  great  numbers 
by  Perdita  zebrata.  There  is  a  not  uncommon  white-flowered 
form  (  C.  albiflora)  which  I  observed  at  WatrouB,  N.  M.,  and 
other  places. 

While  P.  zebrata  is  the  only  Perdita  of  the  Cleome,  it  has  to 
compete  with  numerous  bees  of  other  genera.  At  Santa  Fe, 
on  August  2d,  I  noted  that  Nomia  punctata  was  in  full  force  on 
ihe^Cleome,  its  hind  legs  loaded  with  the  green  pollen.  Other 
Cleome  bees  at  Santa  Fe  are  Melecta  miranda,  Anthophora, 
Megachile,  Melissodes  and  Bombus.  At  Albuquerque  a  Cal- 
liopsis  is  common  on  the  Cleome ;  and  I  saw  at  this  locality 
on  August  16th,  a  humming-bird  visiting  it. 

LEGUMINOSJE. 

(5).  Prosopis  juliflora  var.  glandulosa  (Torrey).  The  mes- 
quite  furnishes  Perdita  exclamans  and  P.  punctosignata.  Mr. 
Alfred  Holt  has  also  taken  an  Anthidium  on  mesquite  at  Las 
Cruces, 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  generic  name  of  this  plant  is  the 
same  as  that  of  a  genus  of  bees.  This  inconvenience  might  be 
avoided  by  spelling  the  bee-genus  Pi'osapis,  as  has  already 
been  done  by  Mr.  Ashmead  (Hym.  Colo.,  p.  31).  The  botan- 
ical genus  has  priority.  The  mesquite  extends  in  modified 
form  to  sea-level  in  the  neotropical  region  ;  it  is,  in  fact,  essen- 
tially a  neotropical  type. 

ZYGOPHYLLACEJE. 

(6).  Tribulus  maximus  L.  Visited  by  P.  pectidis.  The  plant 
cannot  be  other  than  maximus,  but  it  does  not  agree  in  detail 
with  published  descriptions.  I  have  found  the  plant  (though 
not  the  bee)  as  far  north  as  La  Junta,  Colorado. 

(7).  Larrea  DivARiCATA  var.  TRiDENTATA  (DC).  At  San  Mar- 
cial  were  found  on  this  P.  marcialis,  P.  larrece,  P.  larrearum 
and  P.  semicmndea.  The  P.  larrece  is  colored  yellow  like  the 
flowers  of  the  plant.  The  genus  Larrea  consists  of  four  or 
five  species,  confined  to  the  Mexican  region  and  the  Argen- 
tine Republic.  Our  species  is  a  variety  of  one  of  the  Argen- 
tine ones. 

EUPHORBIACE^. 

(8).  Croton  texensis  (Klotzch)  Muell.  Arg.  At  Albuquerque 
I  found  numbers  of  P.  crotonis  on  this.      The  same  plant  is 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  35 

common  at  Saata  Fe,  but  yields  no  Perdita.  The  constancy 
of  Perdita  spp.  to  their  proper  flowers  was  well  illustrated  at 
Albuquerque,  where  on  the  Cruton  was  only  P.crotonis,  while 
on  the  Cleome  only  8  paces  distant  was  only  P.  zebrata.  At 
Las  Cruces,  Croton  neomexicanus  is  common,  but  I  found  on 
it  no  Perdita,  or  even  bees,  only  Larridse  and  especially  Phil- 
anthidce,  including  Aphilanthops  taurulus.  This  was  on  Sep- 
tember 25th,  and  only  staminate  flowers  were  to  be  found. 
Croton  is  a  very  large  genus,  with  many  neotropical  species, 
but  also  found  in  the  tropics  of  the  Old  World. 

MALVACEiE. 

(9).  Sph^ralcea  angustifolia  Spach.  Abundant  and  variable 
from  Las  Cruces  to  Santa  Fe,  in  the  former  locality  furnish- 
ing P.  latior  and  P.  sphceraleece ;  in  the  latter  a  distinct  race 
of  sphceralcecB.  At  Santa  Fe  the  Sphceralcea  is  visited  also  by 
Epeohis,  Bombxis,  Colletes,  Melissodes,  etc.  At  Las  Cruces  it 
is  principally  visited  by  Dladasia. 

LOASACE^. 

(10).  Mentzelia  nuda  (Pursh)  Torr.  and  Gray.  Visited  at  Santa 
Yi  by  P.  mentzelke,  and  at  Albuquerque  by  P.  paUidior  and 
pulchrior.  It  is  a  favorite  i?ow6its  flower.  The  genus  goes 
south  to  Chili. 

UMBELLIPERiE. 

(11).  Hydrocotyle  umbellata  L.  Mr.  Robertson  reports  P. 
obscuraiaiYom  this.  I  have  never  myself  found  any  Perdita 
on  an  Umbellifer. 

SOLANACE^. 

(12).  Cham^saracha  coronopus  (Dunal)  A.  Gray.  P.  cIuwkb- 
sarachce  abounds  on  this  at  Albuquerque,  and  was  also  taken 
on  it  at  Santa  Fe.  The  genus  is  a  small  one,  the  Index 
Kewensis  cites  1  Texas,  Mexico,  2  California  (here  includiug 
our  coronopus),  1  Mexico,  and  1  Japan.  Thus  it  is  not  ap- 
parently of  neotropical  origin. 

COMPOSITE. 

(13).  GuTiERREZiA  SAROTHK.E  (Pursh)  Britt.  and  Rusby.  At 
Albuquerque  were  found  on  this,  one  each  of  P.  austini, 
gutierrezice  and  pallidior — the  last  doubtless  accidental. 

(14).  GuTiERREZiA  SAROTHR.E  var.  MiCROCEPHALA  (Gray)  Coul- 
ter. This  is  common  at  Las  Cruces,  and  has  furnished  P. 
austini,  semicrocea,  luteola,  phymatce,  tarda  and  cladothrieis. 
On  September  25th,  a  single  9  verbesince  was  also  taken  on 


36 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896 


it,  but  this  was  undoubtedly  accidental,  as  verbesinoe  was 
extremely  numerous  on  Verbesina  close  by,  and  if  it  had 
anything  to  gain  by  visiting  Gutierrezia,  it  would  be  seen 
there  more  than  once. 

The  genus  Gutierrezia  goes  south  to  the  Magellan  Strait 
region.  It  is  moderately  numerous  in  species  in  the  Mexican 
(Sonoran)  region  and  arid  region  of  the  U.  S.,  and  again  in 
in  the  southern  part  of  the  neotropical  region,  as  far  north 
as  Chili. 

(15).     SoLiDAGO  CANADENSIS  L.    Fig  1.    This  common  Goldcn-rod 

has  a  wide  range  over  the  continent,  and 
extends  from  Las  Cruces  to  Santa  Fe, 
being  usually  seen  on  or  about  the  ace- 
quia  banks.  Mr.  Robertson  records  it  as 
one  of  the  plants  visited  by  P.  octomacu- 
lata  in  Illinois ;  in  Colorado  Mr.  Baker 
has  taken  from  it  bakerce,  affinis,  sexmac- 
ulata  var.  and  rectangulata.  At  Las 
Cruces  it  furnished  fair  numbers  of  semi- 
erocea,  and  a  single  grandiceps.  It  is 
worthy  of  note  that  it  is  not  at  all  visited 
by  luteola,  or  indeed  any  of  the  Bigelovia 
species  except  semicrocea. 

(16).  Bigelovia  WRiGHTii  Gray.  Fig.  2.  This  is  the  very  abund- 
ant Bigelovia  of  comparatively  dry  sandy  ground  between  the 
river  bottoms  and  the  benches  at  Las  Cruces  and  Albuquer- 
que, N.  M.  Hitherto  it  had  been  confounded  by  us  with  B. 
rusbyi,  owing  to  a  specimen,  apparently  quite  identical  with 
our  plant,  having  been  so  named  at  the  California  Academy 

of  Sciences.  As  I  was  somewhat 
uneasy  about  this  determination, 
Professor  Wooton  at  my  request 
sent  a  specimen  to  Columbia  Col- 
lege, and  word  comes  back  that 
it  is  assuredly  ivrighiii  and  not 
rusbyi.  This  explanation  is  need- 
ed, because  I  have  sent  out 
various  insects  labelled  as  from 
B.  rusbyi. 

Besides  being  most  prolific  in 
Perdiia  species,  this  plant  is  won- 
derfully attractive  to  many  kinds 
of  insects.  At  Albuquerque  I 
got  from  it  P.  bigelovice,  and 
among  other  things  the  ant,  Tap- 
inoma  anale  Andre,  and  quanti- 


FiG.  2. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  37 

ties  of  a  pretty  Chalcidid,  Orasema  viridis  Ashraead  (Det. 
Dep.  Agric).  The  latter  is  new  to  the  U.  S.  Fauna,  having 
been  only  lately  described  from  a  specimen  found  at  Tepic, 
Mexico  (Proc.  Cal.  Ac.  Sci.,  1895,  p.  553). 

At  Las  Cruces  I  found  on  B.  lorightii  plenty  of  P.  luteola 
especially,  accompanied  by  semicrocea,  oeneijrons,  phymatce, 
fallax,  higelovi(je,  nilidella,  austini,  while  cladothrieis,  pulch- 
rior,  macidipes  and  pellucida  were  occasional.  Here  the 
flowers  are  peopled  by  the  same  species  of  ant,  Tapinovia 
anale  Andre  (det.  Ernest  Andre)  as  was  found  on  them  at 
Albuquerque  ;  its  color  is  such  as  to  render  it  inconspicuous. 
Three  species  of  beetles  are  particularly  noticed  on  the  flow- 
ers, Chauliognathus  Scutellaria  Lee,  Crossidius  pulchelhis 
Lee,  and  Clems  abruptus  Lee.  (det.  Wickham),  of  which 
the  first  two  are  yellow  like  the  flowers,  with  some  black ; 
and  the  last  (appearing  in  October)  is  beautifully  marked 
with  red,  resembling  at  a  glance  Sphcerophthalma  heterochroa, 
which  is  found  in  the  same  vicinity,  though  never  on  flow- 
ers. Sundry  Coccinellidje,  Chrysomelidse  and  Bruchidre  also 
frequent  the  flowers.  Some  Heteropterous  insects  found  on 
the  flowers  are  colored  yellow  to  escape  observation  ;  one  of 
these,  Phymata  fasciata,  is  predaceous,  and  a  serious  enemy  of 
the  bees.  So  there  are  also  yellow  or  yellowish  Thoniisidse, 
and  certain  Bombyliidie  and  Trypetidse  among  the  Diptera 
which  visit  the  Bigelovia  flowers  are  more  or  less  strongly 
yellow — more  especially  the  beautiful  little  Phthiria  sulphu- 
rea  Loew  (see  Psyche,  January,  1895,  p,  188).  Among 
Hymenoptera,  besides  various  bees,  are  found  several  Phil- 
anthidpe,  Scoliidse,  Eumenidpe,  Chalcididse,  Chrysidida^,  etc., 
some  of  the  species  being  new  or  rare  in  collections,  for  ex- 
ample, Aphilanthops  taurulus  Ckll.,  A.  quadrinotahis  Ashm. 
(heretofore  only  known  from  a  specimen  found  at  Denver, 
Colo.),  Acanthochalcis  nigricans  Cam.,  and  Chrysis  mesillce 
Ckll.  The  genus  Bigelovia  belongs  especially  to  the  arid 
region,  but  there  are  two  species  in  Ecuador. 

(17).  Chrysopsis  villosa  (Pursh)  Nutt.  This  is  properly  a 
mountain  plant  (abundant,  for  example,  in  the  mid-alpine 
of  Colorado),  but  several  vigorous  plants  are  growing  in  a 
dry  watercourse  near  the  N.  M.  Agricultural  College,  the 
seeds  having  doubtless  been  washed  from  the  Organ  Mount- 
ains. On  one  of  these  I  caught  the  unique  of  P.  vespertilio. 
At  Santa  Fe  I  watched  some  Chrysopsis  villosa,  but  only  got 
one  specimen  of  an  Antlwphora. 

(18).  Aster  ericoides  var.  villosus  (Michx.)  Torn  and  Gray. 
Mr.  Robertson  reports  this  as  visited  by  P.  octomaculata. 


38 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


(19).     Aster  CANEscENs  var.  viscosus  (Nutt.)  Gray.     Fig.  3.     At 

Las  Cruces  this  is  freely  visited  by  P. 
asteris.  Two  species  of  Aster  which  are 
common  at  Las  Cruces,  A.  spinosus  and  A. 
hesperkis,  have  produced  no  Perdita.  The 
former  is  a  weed  of  waste  grounds,  the 
latter  occurs  on  the  acequia  banks,  so 
they  may  not  be  natives  of  the  immediate 
region.  It  has  occurred  to  me  that  by 
watching  the  bees  on  a  flower,  some  evi- 
dence might  be  obtained  as  to  the  length 
of  time  the  flower  has  grown  in  the  local- 
ity. Thus,  to  take  an  extreme  class  of 
cases,  garden  exotics  are  visited  by  com- 
paratively few  bees,  and  of  course  have 
none  peculiar  to  them,  as  P.  asteris  to 
Asler  caneseens  var. 


(21). 


(22). 


(20).  Lepachys  tagetes  ( James)Gray. 
Visited  by  P.  lepachidis ;  also,  at 
Santa  Fe,  by  Melissodes,  Agaj)oste- 
mo7i,  Halictus  and  Bemhex. 


-/ffScfe 


Helianthus  annuus  L.  Fig.  4. 
The  sunflower  is  the  flower  of  P. 
albipennis ;  very  rarely  a  verbesince 
may  also  be  found  upon  it.  Other 
sunflower  bees  ixrePanurgiis,3Ielis- 
sodes  and  Andrena,  all  at  Las 
Cruces.  Phymata  fasciata  also 
occurs  on  the  sunflower  heads. 
It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  Andrena 
found  on  sunflowers  at  Las  Cruces 
is  not  the  same  as  Mr.  Robertson's 
Illinois  A.  heliantld. 


Verbesina  encelioides  (Cav.) 
Gray.  Fig.  5.  At  Las  Cruces 
this  produces  commonly  P.  ver- 
besinoi,    rarely   beata,  perpulchra  Fig.  4. 

and  albovittata,  and  occasionally  or  accidentally  albipennis, 
var.  vagans,  latieeps  and  fallax.  In  October  I  noticed  Apis 
mellifica  visiting  the  flowers  in  numbers  ;  the  honey-bee  flies 
longer  and  visits  more  species  of  flowers  than  any  wild  bee 
I  know,  and  m^ust  surely  prove  rather  a  serious  competitor 
of  the  wild  species.  The  competition  would  be  most  severely 
felt,  of  course,  in  those  years  when,  owing  to  unfavor- 
able weather,  the  flowers  were  less  numerous  than  ordinary. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 

The  yellow  bug  Phymata  fasciata  Gray, 
abounds  on  the  Verbesina ;  on  September  28th, 
I  found  one  which  had  caught  a  P.  verbesince. 
This  Phymata  not  only  preys  on  bees,  but  the 
butterfly,  Lycama  exilis,  the  house  fly,  Musca 
domestica,  and  doubtless  many  other  insects. 
Another  enemy  of  bees  which  is  found  on  Ver- 
besina  is  a  Thomisid  spider  ;  on  September 
22d,  I  found  one  of  these  had  caught  a  P. 
verbesinw. 

There  are  various  other  Verbesma  bees,  in- 
cluding the  pretty  Agapostemon  melliventris, 
which  also  appears  in  the  spring,  then  visiting 
Sisymbrium  and  Streptanthus. 

(23).  BiDENs  ARisTOSA  (Michx)  Britt.,  (=  Core- 
opsis ARiSTOSA  Michx).  Mr.  Robertson  cites 
this  as  visited  by  P.  octomaculata. 


39 


tlG.  5. 


(24).  Senecio  douglasii  DC.  On  this  Professor  Wooton  found 
P.  senecionis,  as  also  an  Anclrena  and  other  bees. 

(25).  Pectis  papposa  Gray.  This  is  visited  by  P.  pedidis,  but 
cladothricis,  fallax  and  biparticepshave  also  been  taken  on  it, 
while  once  only  a  luteola  was  seen  in  the  net  after  sweeping 
Pectis.  The  flowers  are  frequented  by  an  ant,  Dorymyrmex 
pyramicus  Rog.  (det.  Andre).  One  also  finds  upon  them 
Panurgus  (commonly)  and  Epeolus  (rarely),  as  well  as  sun- 
dry Philanthidpe  and  Bombyliidae,  etc. 

The  genus  Pectis  has  many  neotropical  species,  extending 
even  south  to  the  Argentine  Republic.  It  has  also  AVest 
Indian  representatives  in  Cuba,  San  Domingo  and  Cura9oa. 

In  reviewing  the  above  list  of  plants,  it  will  be  readily  seen  that 
Perdita  does  not  usually  frequent  the  boreal  types  of  flowers,  but 
rather  those  which  extend  northward  from  the  neotropical  region. 
This,  taken  with  the  known  distribution  of  the  genus,  strongly  sug- 
gests that  in  the  main  we  have  to  do  with  an  austral  series  of  types, 
which  have  spread  northward  and  become  largely  differentiated 
into  species  since  the  glacial  epoch.  P.  octomaculata,  however, 
must  be  looked  upon  as  a  survival  from  preglacial  times ;  and 
here  it  is  especially  significant  that  affinis  and  senecionis,  which 
more  especially  represent  octomaculata  in  the  west,  are  the  very  ones 
which  visit  boreal  flowers,  Solidago  and  Seneeio  to  wit.  Further, 
bakerm  which  does  indeed  visit  Solidago  also,  shows  every  indication 
of  being  a  recent  derivative  from  the  Cleome  type  zebrata ;  an  in- 


40  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

stance,  in  fact,  of  the  neotropical  immigrants  adapting  themselves 
through  modification  to  subboreal  conditions. 

Another  thing  that  deserves  notice  is  the  relationship  between  the 
size  of  the  bees,  the  length  of  their  tongues,  and  the  kinds  of  flowers. 
It  would  appear  that  a  longer  tongue  is  not  always  developed  inde- 
pendently to  meet  requirements,  but  that  the  total  size  of  the  bee 
may  be  increased,  and  with  it  the  tongue.  Or  conversely,  the  size 
of  the  bee  may  be  reduced.  Speculations  of  this  kind  are,  perhaps, 
not  very  profitable,  but  it  will  be  advantageous  to  give  the  facts 
which  suggest  them. 

Close  to  the  N.  M.  Agricultural  College  Verhesina  encelioides  und 
Bigelovia  ivrigJitii  grow  in  the  utmost  profusion.  In  September  col- 
lections were  made  off  both,  the  plants  being  but  a  few  yards  from 
one  another,  with  the  following  results: — 

Verbesina  : — Perdita,  Calliopsis,  Pamir'gus,  Melissodes,  CcelioxySy 
Andrena,  Epeolus ;  but  on  October  5th  when  the  Bigelovia  was  getting 
over,  Halidus  ligatus,  H.  pedoraloides  and  Agapostemon  inelliven- 
tris. 

Bigelovia: — Perdita,  Agapostemon,  Anthophora  (small  species), 
Megachile  (one),  Colletes,  Halidus  $ ,  Halictus  stultus  9  ,  Prosopis^ 
Nomia  nevadensis. 

Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  the  bees  of  these  two  plants  were  almost 
entirely  of  different  genera  in  September,  those  on  the  Verbesina 
being  Apidte  with  few  exceptions,  those  on  the  Bigelovia  largely 
AndrenidjB.  But  as  the  Bigelovia  began  to  be  over,  the  large 
Andrenidre  visited  the  Verbesina,  which  had  given  a  second  crop 
of  flowers.  Now  although  Perdita  appears  equally  in  both  lists,  the 
species  are  different,  and  if  we  except  unique  specimens,  as  we  justly 
may,  those  on  the  Verbesina  are  of  larger  size,  those  on  the  Bigelo- 
via comparatively  small.  The  abundant  larger  verbesince  is  never 
seen  on  Bigelovia,  nor  the  not  less  abundant  smaller  luteola  on  Ver- 
besina. 

And  when  we  come  to  look  at  the  Perdita  spp.  of  the  Gutierreziay 
they  average  still  smaller  than  those  of  the  Bigelovia. 

I  am  fortunate  in  being  able  to  present  some  figures  of  the  flow- 
ers of  some  of  the  Perdita  Compositfe,  drawn  by  Miss  Mae  Gilmore 
under  the  supervision  of  Professor  E.  O.  Wooton.  As  they  are  all  on 
the  same  scale,  (diam.  x  5)  the  reader  will  be  able  to  form  his  own 
conclusions  by  studying  them  in  connection  with  the  facts  above  cited. 
"  The  honey  ...  in  Compositse  is  secreted  by  a  ring  surrounding 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  41 

the  style  at  the  base  of  a  narrow  tubular  corolla,  and  as  it  accu- 
mulates it  rises  up  into  the  wider  part  of  the  corolla  where  it  is  ac- 
cessible to  the  most  short-lipped  insects,  and  where  the  anthers 
shelter  it  from  rain." — (Hermann  Miiller).  In  the  Blgelovia,  Aster 
and  Solidago  the  tube  is  seen  to  be  narrow,  permitting  the  rapid 
rise  of  the  nectar,  and  probably  preventing  the  insertion  of  the 
tongue  of  large  bees.  Hence,  these  flowers  are  visited  only  by  the 
smaller  species  of  Perdita,  with  other  small  Apidse  and  Andrenidse. 
In  Verbesina  and  Helianthns  the  tube  is  wider,  doubtless  permitting 
the  larger  bees  to  readily  insert  their  tongues ;  but  it  it  is  narrower 
at  the  neck  than  Blgelovia  or  Solidago,  preventing  small  insects 
from  so  readily  thrusting  their  heads  inward  to  stretch  for  the 
nectar.  The  wider  tube  also  may  prevent  the  nectar  from  rising  so 
far,  while  in  Helianthus  there  is  a  large  bulb  to  contain  it. 

Solidago  canadensis  is  commonly  cultivated  in  gardens  in  Europe 
and  there  H.  Miiller  mentions  only  flies  as  visiting  it  (Fertilization 
of  Flowers,  p.  321),  though  he  gives  a  further  reference  to  a  paper 
which  1  have  not  seen.  With  us,  as  has  been  shown,  it  is  native 
and  visited  by  several  bees. 

THE    NATURE   OP   SPECIFIC   DIFFERENCES. 

It  is  a  commonplace  observation  that  specific  characters  are  of 
all  kinds,  and  may  be  either  strongly  marked  or  diflScult  to  discern. 
A  very  small  amount  of  study  teaches  us  that  there  is  no  essential 
difference  between  those  characters  called  specific  and  those  called' 
varietal ;  in  fact,  the  very  same  kind  of  difference  which  marks 
species  in  one  group,  may  only  mark  varieties  or  mutations  in 
another.  Thus  we  come  to  see  that  the  essential  distinctions 
between  species  are  physiological,  the  morphological  ones  being 
only  valid  for  diagnostic  purposes  just  s©  far  as  they  happen  te* 
coincide  with  the  physiological. 

There  are  even  what  I  have  termed  "  physiological  species,"  i.  e.^ 
species  separated  only  by  habit ;  not  at  all,  so  far  as  we  can  judge,. 
by  structure,  or  if  at  all,  in  only  a  very  slight  degree.  I  have  else- 
where cited  examples  of  this  kind  in  Coccidge,  but  in  Hymeoopterai 
we  find  many  instances  in  which  the  tangible  characters  are  reducedl 
to  a  minimum.  Thus,  Schmiedeknecht  cites  the  case  of  Bomhus: 
silvarxnn  var.  $  nigrescens  Perez,  a  submelanic  mountain  form^ 
which  is  only  to  be  separated  from  B.  pratorum  by  an  examination 
of  the  genitalia.      Among  the  European  Sphecodes  also,  a  study  o£ 

4 


42  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

microscopical  characters  has  led  to  a  remarkable  increase  in  the 
number  of  recognized  species.  Only  the  other  day,  I  received  a  new 
part  of  Marshall's  Monograph  of  British  Braconida?,  in  which  the 
following  paragraph  is  sufficiently  significant : — 

"  Nearly  a  dozen  species  [of  Asj)ilota]  have  been  indicated  or 
described  ;  tiieir  inconstant  characters  render  precise  definition  ex- 
tremely difficult,  and  tabulation  almost  impossible.  .  .  .  Accident 
has  brought  to  light  some  facts  relative  to  one  species,  nervosa  Hal., 
from  which  it  appears  that  the  varieties  mentioned  by  that  author 
[Haliday]  belong  almost  certainly  to  several  distinct  species.  The 
fascicornis  Hal.,  requires  to  be  elucidated  in  a  similar  way,  for  the 
capture  and  examination  of  isolated  examples  of  unknown  ori- 
gin, lead  to  very  uncertain  results."  (Tr.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.,  1895, 
p.  375). 

Now  in  Perdita  precisely  the  same  state  of  afiairs  occurs,  and  it 
will  thus  be  found  that  while  certain  species  (e.  g.,  crotonis,  luteola) 
are  very  easily  recognized,  some  others  (e.  g.,  bakerce,  verbesmce)  are 
almost  as  well  to  be  called  races  or  varieties  as  species.  In  the 
opinion  of  the  writer,  we  have  indeed  the  process  of  evolution  going 
on  under  our  eyes,  the  puzzling  forms  being  those  which  have  only 
lately  segregated  themselves,  and  have  not  yet  developed  striking 
peculiarities. 

Take  for  example  bakerce,  the  closest  ally  of  the  Cleome  species 
zebrata.  It  does  not  appear  to  diflTer  more  from  zebrata  than  the 
mutations  of  the  latter  do  from  one  another,  and  in  the  female  is 
practically  identical  with  it  so  far  as  outward  signs  go.  But  the  S 
bakerce  has  a  slight  but  constant  difference  in  its  wider  supraclypeal 
mark,  and  it  also  differs  in  its  genitalia.  These  differences  would 
never  have  been  noticed,  in  all  probability,  had  not  bakerce  been 
observed  to  differ  in  its  habits  from  zebrata,  to  frequent  not  the 
Cleome,  but  Golden-rod.  In  fact,  the  similarity  is  so  great  that  Mr. 
Fox,  after  seeing  specimens,  expressed  the  opinion  that  bakerce  was 
a  synonym  of  zebrata. 

Another  case,  not  less  perplexing,  is  found  in  the  albipennis-ver- 
besince-lepachiclis  series.  The  males  of  this  series,  placed  in  a  row, 
readily  separate  into  those  which  have  narrow  yellow  bands  on  the 
abdomen  and  those  which  have  not.  Those  with  the  bands  separate 
into  a  series  with  the  flagellum  orange,  and  one  with  it  blackish,  and 
it  is  seen  that  the  former  are  from  Verbesina,  the  latter  from  Helian- 
thus. 


1896,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  43 

Now  the  females  of  this  series  (that  of  lepachidis  being  unknown) 
separate  at  once  into  those  with  broad  distinct  yellow  abdominal 
bands,  and  those  with  the  abdomen  only  spotted.  The  former  are 
from  HeManthus  (rarely  from  Verhesina),  the  latter  very  abundant 
on  Verhesina.  But  now  we  find,  to  our  surprise,  that  some  of  the 
males  with  yellow  on  the  abdomen  belong  to  the  spotted  females, 
and  come  from  Verhesina ;  while  others  (with  the  dark  flagellum) 
belong  to  the  well  banded  Helianthus  females.  Further  than  this, 
other  males  without  the  yellow  belong  to  other  well  banded  Helian- 
thus females  from  a  different  locality.  Thus  among  the  Helianthus 
forms  (alhipennis)  the  females  from  two  localities  (La  Junta  and 
Las  Cruces)  are  hardly  at  all  different,  while  their  males  are 
decidedly  different ;  and  the  male  of  the  Las  Cruces  form  more 
resembles  the  $  of  verhesince,  which  is  common  on  Verhesina  in 
the  same  locality.  But  the  Las  Cruces  males  differ  from  verhesince 
in  the  color  of  the  flagellum  ;  while  the  La  Junta  males,  differing 
from  verhesince  in  the  abdomen,  resemble  it  in  the  antennae  !  The 
difficulty  is  still  further  increased  by  the  occurrence  of  individual 
varieties  presenting  other  combinations  of  the  "specific"  characters. 
In  such  a  case  as  this  we  should  be  hopelessly  adrift  without  bio- 
logical observations.  There  is  no  apparent  reason  why  the  varia- 
tions in  clypeal  markings  should  not  be  just  as  "  specific"  as  those 
in  the  color  of  the  flagellum,  or  (as  in  lepachidis)  in  the  color  of 
the  head  and  thorax.  Mr.  Fox,  after  examining  a  series,  concludes 
that  we  do  not  know  the  $  of  alhipennis,  and  that  my  alhipennis 
$ ,  verhesina'  and  lejmchidis  are  all  varieties  of  hyalina.  But  all 
this  is  contradicted  by  actual  observation  of  the  insects  on  the  flow- 
ers. The  characters  which  I  have  used  occur  uniformly  in  series 
from  the  same  flowers,  except  in  the  case  of  widely  separated  local- 
ities, where  they  are  still  uniform  for  a  given  flower  in  a  given  locality. 
There  will  be  very  rarely  an  individual  proper  to  one  flower  found 
on  another,  as  one  or  two  helianthi  on  Verhesina,  but  such  excep- 
tions do  not  vitiate  the  general  rule.  Some  characters,  as  the  differ- 
ence in  clypeal  markings,  belong  especially  to  no  one  of  these  series, 
and  hence  have  no  specific  value. 

If,  as  believed,  evolution  is  in  progress  among  the  species  of  Per- 
dita,  we  are  naturally  led  to  seek  for  evidence  of  natural  selection. 
In  some  cases,  as  of  the  yellow  lideola,  heata  and  marcialis,  all  on 
yellow  flowers,  we  note  at  once  the  utility  of  the  peculiarity ;  and 
when  we  see  the  yellow  predaceous  bug  Phymata  also  on  the  flow- 


44  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ers,  the  whole  matter  seems  clear.  Yet  it  must  be  confessed  that  on 
Verbesina  the  yellow  beata  is  extremely  rare,  while  the  dark  verbe- 
since  abounds. 

The  face-markings,  so  distinctive  of  species,  differ  greatly  as  a 
rule  in  the  sexes,  and  in  most  species  are  very  constant.  There  is 
every  probability  that  they  serve  as  recognition  marks ;  and  it  is 
here  significant  that  when  they  are  very  variable,  as  in  9  zebrata, 
there  is  no  other  species  of  Perdita  on  the  same  flowers  that  could 
be  confused  with  the  varying  one. 

The  species  appear  to  be  all  single  brooded,  but  the  great  resem- 
blance between  the  vernal  numerata  and  the  late  summer  bigelovice, 
suggested  the  possibility  of  double-brooded  seasonally  dimojphic 
species.  The  strongest  fact,  however,  that  militates  against  this 
idea  is  that  there  are  so  many  more  late  summer  and  autumn  spe- 
cies than  vernal  ones,  while  the  eastern  odomaculata  is  represented 
by  no  congener  at  all  in  the  spring. 

Another  question  arose  as  to  the  possibility  of  dimorphism  in  the 
males  of  some  species ;  references  to  this  matter,  which  deserves 
further  study,  will  be  found  under  the  species  concerned. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  grouping  of  the  species  is  arbitary, 
those  being  associated  which  the  student  is  likely  to  meet  with  on 
the  same  flowers,  or  in  the  same  part  of  the  country.  This  was  done 
because  it  was  felt  that  no  natural  arrangement  could  yet  be  arrived 
at,  and  a  purely  artificial  one,  based  solely  on  considerations  of  con- 
venience, was  better  than  one  which  might  give  a  false  idea  of  rela- 
tionships. The  difficulty  arises  in  many  cases  from  the  so-called 
"  kaleidoscopic  "  characters,  the  possession  of  which  by  two  species 
does  not  necessarily  imply  descent  from  an  ancestor  exhibiting  them. 
Thus  hiteola  and  beata  are  colored  alike  in  almost  every  detail 
(except  the  black  on  the  pleura  of  beata),  and  are  extremely  diflfer- 
ent  from  any  other  Perdita.  But  beata  in  its  size  and  hairy  meso- 
thorax  approaches  the  albipeunis  group  and  departs  widely  from 
hdeola.  The  character  of  armed  cheeks  has  already  been  referred 
to,  and  several  others  might  be  cited.  How  strangely  the  several 
"specific"  characters  may  appear  or  disappear, is  shown  well  in  the 
series  of  alblpennis  and  verbesince. 

There  is,  however,  one  natural  group,  that  of  texana  and  latioVy 
which  is  very  distinct  and  may  ultimately  be  regarded  as  forming 
a  distinct  genus.  F.  Smith's  generic  name  Macrotera  has  been  used 
for  texana,  but  perhaps  incorrectly. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  45 

Summing  up,  the  writer  has  to  express  the  opinion  that  variations 
in  Perdita  certainly  do  not  occur  indefinitely  in  all  directions,  but 
that  they  do  occur  independently,  so  that  the  several  species  differ 
from  one  another  hardly  soliuich  in  absolute  characters,  as  in  the 
various  combinations  presented  of  similar  or  identical  characters 
Furthermore,  it  is  apparent  that  the  earliest  distinctions  between 
species  are  at  least  often  of  a  very  subtle  character,  so  that  the  work- 
ings of  natural  selection  during  the  actual  process  of  segregation 
are  anything  but  easy  to  observe.  And  this  need  not  surprise  us 
when  we  reflect  that  among  ourselves  constitutional  characters,  not 
easily  identified  by  any  coincident  structural  features,  play  so  large 
a  part  in  determining  our  ability  to  reach  manhood  and  beget  off- 


spring. 


ARTIFICIAL    KEY. 


(Note. — The  numbers  before  the  specific  names  coincide  with  the 
numbers  of  the  same  in  the  descriptive  portion.) 

Entirely  yellow,  with  no  conspicuous  markings 1 

Yellow  or  orange,  with  dark  markings 3 

Head  and  thorax  dark 5 

1.  8  mm.  long,   mesothorax  pubescent,  pleura  with  a  black 

patch 63  beata      $ 

About  4  mm.  long,  head  very  large,  cheeks  armed  15  larrece      $ 
Over  5  mm.  long,  head  ordinary,  cheeks  unarmed,  meso- 
thorax not  pubescent 2 

2.  Antennae  dark  above,  a  black  line  before  the  eyes,  55  hiteola     9 
Antennse  not  dark,  a  black  dot  before  the  eyes  .  55  luleola      S 

3.  Extremely  small,  cheeks  armed,  mesothorax  mostly  green, 

16  'inarcialis      $ 
Not  so  small,  vertex  with  a  black  band  from  eye  to  eye, 
thorax  with  black  markings 4 

4.  Size  6  mm.,  head  very  large,  abdomen   without  distinct 

bands 34  cephalotes      $ 

Size  4i  mm.,  head  not  very  large,  abdomen  with  distinct 
bands 35  puiietosignata      $ 

5.  Abdomen  orange,  or  orange-brown,  or   ferruginous;    not 

banded,  unless  at  base 6 

Abdomen  dark  brown,  or  black,  or  spotted,  or  banded     .    .     13 

6.  Head  large,  abdomen  short  and  broad,  ferruginous,  mar- 

ginal cell  obliquely  truncate,  mandibles  bidentate    ...      7 
Not  so 8 


46  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

7.  Head  brown,  thorax  black 1  texana  $ 

Head  and  thorax  dark  green 2  latior  $ 

8.  Cheeks  toothed  beneath,  legs  entirely  yellow  .  14  pulchriov  $ 
Cheeks  unarmed , 9 

9.  Face  all  dark 10 

Face  partly  pale 11 

10.  Nervures  colorless,  abdomen  orange  ....  54  semicrocea  2 
Nervures  fuscous,  abdomen  dark  testaceous,  32  halictoides  ? 
Nervures  ferruginous,  abdomen  ferruginous  .    .  33  hicolor  $ 

11.  The  pale  color  confined  to  clypeus  and  triangular  marks  at 

side    of  face 20    chamcesarachce  9 

Face  all  light  below  antenure ;  length  3?  mm 12 

12.  Area  between  eyes  and  ocelli  smooth  and  shining  likemeso- 

thorax,2d  segment  of  abdomen  with  a  dark  band,  vertex 

and  mesothorax  not  blue 54  semicrocea  S 

Area  between  eyes  and  ocelli  di.stinctly  granular,  much 
duller  than  the  shining  mesothorax,  2d  segment  of  abdo- 
men without  a  band,  vertex  and  mesothorax  dark  blue, 

20  cham(esarachce  $ 

13.  Clypeus  entirely  dark 14 

Clypeus  not  entirely  dark 24 

14.  Abdomen  piceous  with  yellow  spots  or  dots,  legs  with  yellow 

markings 15 

Abdomen  not  spotted ](> 

15.  Length  about  6  mm.,  abdomen  with  only  4  pale  dots  .    . 

26  var.  punctata  9 
Length  about  5  mm.,  abdomen  with  6  pale  yellow  spots  or 

blotches 26  sexmnculata  9 

16.  Abdomen  black  with  pale  yellowish  bands 17 

Abdomen  not  banded 20 

Abdomen  dark  brown,  with  a  short  white  band  on  2d  seg- 
ment; size  very  small,  less  than  4  mm.  .    41   cladothricis  9 

Abdomen    testaceous    with    suffused     bands,    mesothorax 

smooth,  shiny 6  ventralis  9 

17.  Stigma  brownish,  mesothorax  hairy,  size  larger,  7  mm.  or 

over 18 

Stigma  entirely  pallid,  mesothorax  practically  nude,  size 

smaller,  not  over  6  mm 19 

18.  Nervures  almost  colorless 22  sp}iceralce(e  9 

Nervures  dark  brown 22  y.alticola  9 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  47 

19.  Anterior  femora  mostly  black,  abdomen  with  heavy  dark 

bands 12  mentzelice      9 

Anterior  femora  entirely  pale,  abdomen  with  evanescent 
bands 13  pallid'wr      9 

20.  Head  and  thorax  piceous,  marginal  cell  obliquely  truncate, 

abdomen  ovate,  size  rather  large 1  texana      9 

Thorax  black  except  the  green  metathorax ;  head  green, 

front  feneous 53  (eneifrons      9 

Thorax  black  except  the  blue  metathorax ;  head  blue ;  a 

yellow  spot  on  each  side  of  clypeus  ...  18  semmerulea  9 
Head  and  thorax  green 21 

21.  Females 22 

Males,  size  small,  nervures  and  stigma  testaceous,  fore  tibise 

yellow  in  front 4  arcuaia      $ 

22.  Abdomen  broad,  mandibles  bidentate,  marginal  cell  ob- 

liquely truncate 2  latior  9 

Not  so 23 

23.  Small,  about  4?  mm.  long,  nervures  brown  .    .  52  phymatiz  9 
Larger,  nervures  nearly  colorless 68  v.  nigrior  9 

24.  Face  below  level  of  antenn?e  all  yellow  or  white,  except 

clypeal  dots  in  some.     Males 25 

Face  below  level  of  antennae  not  all  pale 43 

25.  Face  below  antenna;  white 2(i 

Face  below  antenme  yellow 28 

26.  Last  three  segments  of  abdomen  rufous,  the  other  banded 

19  crotonis. 

Abdomen  yellowish-white,  banded,  face  below  antennre  pel- 
lucid white,  first  4  legs  all  dull  white  except  a  dark  streak 
on  middle  tibiae 50  pellucida. 

Abdomen  dark  brown  with  white  m"arkings 27 

27.  Abdomen  with  about  6  white  marks,  or  fewer  yellowish 

spots 42  pectidis. 

Abdomen  with  two  more  or  less  developed  w'hite  bands, 

41  cladothricis. 

28.  Legs  black  with  a  little  yellowish 25  affinis. 

Anterior  and  middle  femora  marked  with  black,  cheeks 

unarmed    .    .     .    . 29 

Anterior  femora  all  yellow,  the  4  anterior  tibite  not  all  yel- 
low   33 

First  4  legs  all  yellow,  or  at  least  not  marked  with  black  or 
brown 34 


48  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

29.  Nervures  pallid 22  sphceralcece. 

Nervures  dark 30 

30.  Face  and  disc  of  mesothorax  nearly  bare,  face  below  anteu- 

iise  bright  yellow 31 

Face  and  disc  of  mesothorax  hairy 32 

31.  Very  small,  abdomen  yellow  with   pale   suffused    brown 

bands 43  biparticeps. 

Larger,  abdomen    dark  with  clean-cut  interrupted    light 
bands 27  redan gulata. 

32.  Head  broader  than  long,  distal  band  on  2d  abdominal  seg- 

ment broadly  continued  to  lateral  margin,  dog-earmarks 

with  more  or  less  of  a  dark  border  below  .  22  v.  alticola. 

Head  round,  distal  band  of  2d  abdominal  segment  failing 

some  distance  before  lateral  margin   ....   38  hirsuta. 

33.  Face  all  yellow  (except  the  anteorbital  spots)  up  to  middle 

ocellus 29  hdeiceps. 

Face  not  all  yellow  up  to  middle  ocellus  .    .   49  maculipes. 

34.  Legs   entirely   orange-rufous,   abdomen     black,    nervures 

brown 21  Joxi. 

Legs  not  orange-rufous,  abdomen  banded 35 

So.  The  yellow  extending  above  antenna  in  median  line  ...  36 

The  yellow  not  extending  above  antennae  in  median  line  .  41 

36.  The  yellow  extending  above  across  the  face 37 

The  yellow  extending  above  only  at  sides  and  middle  line .  39 

37.  Larger,  about  5  mm.  long,  face-markings  resembling  ^»<ter- 

rezioe 48  bigelovice. 

Smaller,  about  4  mm.  long 38 

38.  Face  yellow  up  to  anterior  ocellus 37  martini. 

Face  not  yellow  up  to  anterior  ocellus  ...  45  cjntierrezke. 

39.  Upward  extension  of  yellow  in  median  line  narrow,  shaped 

like  a  spear-head,  abdomen  above  with  only  3  or  4  bands, 

40  salicis. 
Upward  extension  of  yellow  in  median  line  broader    ...    40 

40.  Incursion  of  blue  downward  terminating  at  a  right  angle  ; 

pleura  dark 47  nltldella. 

Incursion  of  blue  terminating  at  an  acute  angle ;  pleura 
largely  yellow 36  exclamans. 

41.  Cheeks  armed,  abdomen  heavily  banded   .    .12  mentzelioi. 
Cheeks  unarmed 42 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  49 

42.  Abdomeu  not  heavily  marked 13  pallidior. 

Abdomen  piceous  with  ill-defined  yelloAvish  bands  .... 

10   ohscurata. 

43.  The  pale  color  confined  to  clypeus  and  sides  of  face  ...  44 
The  pale  color  not  confined  to  clypeus  and  sides  of  face  .    .  72 

44.  Abdomen  dark,  not  banded,  or  the  bands  discontinuous  .  45 
Abdomen  with  continuous  bands 63 

45.  Larger  species,  length  over  6  mm 46 

Smaller  species,  6  mm.  or  less 51 

46.  Mesothorax  practically  nude 47 

Mesothorax  hairy 49 

47.  Abdomen  dark  brown  without  pale  marks  .    .    .56  nuda  9 
Abdomen  with  pale  marks,  clypeus  pale  with  two  black  bars,  48 

48.  Abdominal  markings  yellow 11  odomaculata  9 

Abdominal  markings  creamy  white  ....  58  seneeionis.  9 

49.  Female  ;  abdomen  more  or  less  spotted    .    .    68  verhesime. 
Males 50 

50.  Head  and  thorax  brassy-green 70  lej)achidU. 

Head  and  thorax  rather  bluish-green  .    .    .  ()9  albipennis. 

51.  Abdomen  without  distinct  light  markings 51a 

Abdomen  with  yellow  or  white  markings .  58 

51a Pale  face-marks  reduced  to  a  spot  on  clypeus;   nervures 

brown 52  phymatce  var.  9 

Pale  face-marks  not  so  reduced,  lateral  marks  present  .    .  52 

52.  Nervures  brown,  Californian  species 53 

Nervures   pallid 54 

53.  Lateral  face-marks  with  their  upper  angle  a  right  angle. 

3  californica    $    var.- 
Lateral  face-marks  with   their  upper  angle  a  very  acute 
angle 31  trisignata      9 

54.  Clypeus  with  two  large  dark  patches  on  hind  margin,  up- 

per angle  of  lateral  face-marks  a  very  acute  angle,  meso- 
thorax very  hairy 57  asteris      9 

Clypeus  pale  except  the  usual  dots 55 

55.  Anterior  tibiae  black  in  front ;  face  extremely  hairy    .    .    . 

65  albovittata    S 

Anterior  tibiie  yellow  or  rufotestaceous  in  front 56 

■56.  Marginal  cell  with  the   substigmatal  portion  very  much 

longer  than  the  poststigmatal,  size  very  small 

17  larrearum      9 
Marginal  cell  ordinary 57 


50  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

57.  Larger  (4i  mm.),  face  less  hairy,  lateral  face-marks  shaped 

like  the  main-sail  of  a  schooner 66  vagans  $ 

Smaller  (4  mm.),  face  more  hairy,  lateral  face-marks  tri- 
angular      59  vespertilio  <? 

58.  Abdomen  with  6  or  8  white  marks 59 

Abdomen  with  yellowish  markings 60 

59.  Mesothorax  shiny ;  clypeus  dark  with  a  light  spot ;  face- 

markings  white 42  pectidis      $ 

Mesothorax  dull;  clypeus  light  with  dark  spots  or  bars; 
face-markings   yellowish 51  fallax      9 

60.  Face-markings  white,  1st  segment  of  abdomen  largely  blue, 

5  interrupta  $ 

Face-markings  yellowish  or  yellow 61 

61.  Postscutellum  yellow 7  mexicanorvm  $ 

Postscutellum  not  yellow H2: 

62.  Nervures  dark  brown,  lateral  face-marks  truncate   above, 

clypeus  light  marked  with  dark,  mesothorax  dullish,  ab- 
dominal marks  very  pale 25  affinis      9 

Nervures  colorless,  lateral  face-marks  pointed  above,  cly- 
peus dark  marked  with  light,  mesothorax  shining,  ab- 
dominal marks  yellower 10  obscnrata      9 

63.  Larger  species,  length  over  6  mm 64 

Smaller  species,  6  mm.  or  less 68' 

64.  Males,  abdominal  bands  narrow,  inconspicuous,  dull  yellow, 

emarginate  at  sides 65 

Females,  bands  conspicuous 66 

65.  Front  comparatively  shining,  flagellum  blackish 

69  var.  heliantld      $ 
Front  dull,  flagellum  orange 68  verbesiiice      $ 

66.  Abdomen  white  with  black  bands,  clypeus  white  with  two 

black  dots 64  perpulchra  9 

Abdomen  dark  with  yellow  bands 67 

67.  Nervures  dark 67  sparsa  9 

Nervures  colorless 69  albipennis  9 

68.  Clypeus  hairy,  legs  black,  face-markings  and  abdominal 

bands  white 65  albovittata      9 

Not  so 69 

69.  Yellow  at  sides  of  face  extending  above  level  of  insertion  of 

antennae :  size  very  small 44  mistini      $ 

Yellow  or  whitish  at  sides  of  face  only  extending  to  level 
of  insertion  of  antennie ;  size  not  so  small 70' 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  51 

70.  Abdomen  dark  Avith  light  bands 48  bigelovice  9 

Abdomen  light  with  dark  bands 71 

71.  Mesothorax  very  shiny,  dark  blue-green  ...  47  nitidella  9 
Mesothorax  dull,  hairy,  brassy-green 28  snowii  9 

72.  Dog-ear  marks  absent 73 

Dog-ear  marks  present,  or  at  least  represented  by  dots    .    .  88 

73.  Abdomen  with  the  last  two   segments  bright  rufous,  the 

others  white  with  black  bands 19  crotonis  9 

Not  so 74 

74.  Bands  of  abdomen  at  least  mostly  entire 75 

Bands  of  abdomen  all  interrupted 80 

Abdomen  dark  without    bands 82 

75.  Stigma  solid  dark  brown  or  black,  clypeus  with  two  broad 

black  bars,  lateral  pale  areas  of  face  pinkish,  39  numerata     9 
Stigma  hyaline,  at  least  centrally 7t> 

76.  Anterior  legs  entirely  yellow,  mesothorax  dull,  sides  of  face 

broadly  yellow  up  to  level  of  antennoe,  then  for  a  short 

way  suddenly  very  narrowly 27  rectangulata      9 

Anterior  legs  partly  black 77 

77.  The  black  bands  of  abdomen  not  united  on  lateral  margin, 

anterior  tibiae  all  yellow,  lateral   pale  triangle  of  face 
coming  to  a  point  above,  face-markings  lemon-yellow  .    . 

8  zonalis      9 
The  black  bands  of  abdomen  more  or  less  united  on  lateral 
margin,  anterior  tibire  with  a  black  mark  behind  ....     78 

78.  Lateral  triangle  of  face  obliquely  truncate  above  ;  a  bluer 

species 48  bigelovice.  9  var. 

Lateral  triangle  of  face  coming  to  a  point  above,  but  nar- 
rower than  in  zonalis,  face-markings  pallid  ;  a  greener  spe- 
cies   79 

79.  Supraclypeal  mark  broad,  notched  in  middle  .   24  bakerce     9 
Supraclypeal  mark  narrower,  or  reduced  to  two  spots  .    . 

23  zebrata      9 

80.  Female,  flagellum  only  pale  testaceous  beneath 

25  affinis  9  var. 
Males 81 

81.  Flagellum  dark;  species  of  eastern  U.  S.  .  11  odomaculata. 
Flagellum  mostly  yellow ;  species  of  Lower  California  .    .    . 

67  sparsa. 

82.  Head  large,  quadrate,  face  very  hairy   ....   62  latlceps      $ 


52  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Head  ordinary,  face  not  so  hairy  ...    57  asteris  9  var. 

83.  Abdomen  black  or  dark  brown,  without  pale  marks    ...     84 

Abdomen  not  banded,  but  with  yellow  marks 86 

Abdomen  distinctly  banded 87 

84.  Cheeks  armed,  head  large,  clypeus  with  a  narrow  median 

line  and  broad  anterior  border  yellow,  two  yellow  spots 

above  clypeus 60  grandiceps      $ 

Cheeks  unarmed,  clypeus  all  pale  except  the  usual  dots  .    .    85 

85.  Lateral  corners  of  clypeus  reaching  base  of  mandibles,  mar- 

ginal cell  shorter 3  californica      $ 

Lateral  corners  of  clypeus  not  reaching  base  of  mandibles, 
marginal  cell  longer 61  crassiceps      $ 

86.  The  yellow  abdominal  marks  oblique,  dog-ear  marks  rep- 

resented by  dots  only 9  nevadensis  9 

The  yellow  abdominal  marks  small  and  straight  .  46  tarda  S 

87.  Males 88 

Females 92 

^^.  Cheeks  armed 6  ventralis. 

Cheeks  unarmed 89 

89.  Mesothorax   granular,    abdominal   bands   without   lateral 

bulgings  on  proximal  margin,  face-markings  deep  yellow, 

22  sjyhoiralcece  var. 
Mesothorax  smooth  and  shining 90 

90.  Middle  and  posterior  femora  yellow,  without  black  patches, 

abdominal  bands  regular,  though  with  sublateral  bulg- 
ings on  proximal  margins,  marginal  cell  longer,  30  duhia      S 
Middle  and  posterior  femora  with  black  spots  or  patches, 
marginal  cell  shorter 91 

91.  Siipraclypeal  mark  very  little  broader  than  long,  23  zebrata      $ 
Supraclypeal  mark  nearly  twice  as  broad  as  long  .... 

24  hakerce      $ 

92.  Nervures  colorless ;  pale  stripe  along  anterior  orbits  not 

extending  to  level  of  middle  ocellus    ....    40  salicis. 

Nervures  dark  ;  pale  stripe  along  anterior  orbits  extending 

to  level  of  middle  ocellus 36  exclamans. 

Species  of  Texas  and  Mexico,  ivitli  the  mandibles  bifid  at  tips,  the 
head  large,  the  digma  subobsolete,  the  abdomen  broad,  rufous  in  the 
S  ,  black  or  piceous  in  the  9  • 

1.  Perdita  texana  (Cr.)  Cr.,  Cat.  Hym.,  1887,  p.  296. 

9  Macrotera  texana  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  70.      (Hab.,  Texas). 
cf  Macrotera  me<jacephala  Cr.,  1.  c,  p.  71.     (Hab.,  Texas). 

This  species  was  discovered  by  Mr.  L.  Heiligbrodt,  who  took  three 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  53 

of  each  sex.  I  know  of  no  other  specimens,  and  nothing  is  known 
of  the  exact  locality  or  habits.  The  dark  chocolate-brown  head  and 
black  thorax  at  once  separate  this  species  from  P.  latior.  In  both 
species  the  marginal  cell  is  obliquely  truncate. 

2.  Perdita  latior  n.  sp.     Fig.  6,  (part  of  wing). 

S  9  ,  length  52-6  mm.,  broad,  head  large,  broader  than  long ; 
head,  thorax,  legs  and  tip  of  abdomen  with  pubescence  consisting  of 
dull  white  erect  hairs :  punctuation  of  vertex,  mesothorax  and 
scutellum  very  fine  and  close;  upper  surface  of  nieta- 
thorax  bare,  shining,  minutely  granular;  dorsum  of 
abdomen   very    minutely  punctured,  the  punctures  on 

Fig,  6.  first  segment  very  sparse.  Tegulse  pale  testaceous ; 
■wings  hyaline,  nervures  pale  brown,  stigma  little  developed,  3d 
discoidal  present,  marginal  about  as  long  as  1st  submarginal,  2d  sub- 
marginal  narrowed  more  than  half  to  marginal. 

$  . — Clypeus  prominent,  with  a  minute  tooth  on  each  side.  Head 
and  thorax  dark  green,  metathorax  strongly  tinged  bluish.  Mandi- 
bles except  their  dark  tips,  clypeus,  lower  corner  of  face,  and  a  broad 
transverse  band  between  antennae,  dull  testaceous.  The  punctua- 
tion, which  is  close  before  the  ocelli,  becomes  sparse  behind  them. 
Antennae  dull  testaceous,  more  or  less  suffused  with  blackish.  Legs 
dark  piceous,  the  front  of  the  anterior  tibiae  and  all  the  tibial  spurs, 
dull  testaceous.  Abdomen  shining,  ferruginous  ;  first  segment  more 
or  less  suflTused  with  blackish. 

9  . — Head  and  thorax  dark  green,  face  almost  black,  dorsum  of 
mesothorax  and  scutellum  purplish,  dorsum  of  metathorax  bluish. 

Antennae  dark  brown,  the  last  7  joints  of  flagellum  beneath  be- 
coming dull  testaceous  or  ferruginous.  Mandibles  yellowish-ferru- 
ginous, dark  at  tips.  Legs  colored  as  in  ^ .  Abdomen  brown- 
black,  the  margins  of  the  segments  subtestaceous. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  middle  of  August,  1895,  on  flowers  of 
Sphceralcea  angustifolia,  3^,3?.  (Ckll.,  4,806,  4,809,  4,814,  etc.) 
It  was  associated  with  Diadasia  and  Halictus. 

Ohs..  P.  arcuata  Fox,  the  description  of  which  reads  rather  like 
latior,  is  of  a  different  group,  viz.  that  of  californica,  etc. 

Species   of    California  and  Mexico,  with   the   cly2yeus   in    the    $ 
narroivly  produced  at  the  sides  to  the  bases  of  the  mandibles,  resemb- 
ling in,  shape  a  panama  hat. 

8.  Perdita  californica  (Cr.)  Cr.,  Cat.  Hym.,  1887,  p.  296. 

^  Macrotera  californica  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.^Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  71.      (Hab.,  California). 

Three  specimens  are  known,  collected  by  Edwards  and  Crotch. 


54  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Nothing  is  known  of  exact  locality  or  habits.  The  following  notes 
were  made  from  one  of  the  types. 

Clypeus  panama-hat-shaped,  as  in  interrupta.  Cheeks  unarmed. 
Dog-ear  marks  distinct,  but  supraclypeal  mark  wanting.  Head 
quite  large.     Mandibles  simple. 

The  lateral  face-marks  have  their  upper  angle  a  right  angle,  and 
are  so  placed  as  to  be  exactly  level  with  top  of  clypeus,  the  dog-ear 
marks  projecting  a  little  above  the  same  level. 

The  mesothorax  is  tolerably  shiny,  but  quite  closely  and  strongly 
punctured.  The  stigma  and  veins  are  brown,  not  very  dark  ;  mar- 
ginal long,  obliquely  truncate,  appendiculate,  poststigmatal  portion 
considerably  longer  than  substigmatal.  Stigma  small.  2d  sub- 
marginal  large,  narrowed  fully  one-half  to  marginal.  3d  discoidal 
distinct  but  rather  weak. 

The  following  tables  separate  calijornica  from  two  species  present- 
ing a  certain  superficial  resemblance  to  it. 

A.  (1).  Upper  margin  of  face-marks  forming  nearly  a  straight  line. 

Head    larger.     Marginal  cell  appendiculate.     Margins   of 
abdominal  segments  very  distinctly  reddish-testaceous, 

=californica  $ . 

(2).  Upper  margin  of  face-marks  forming  a  broad  W.  Head 
smaller.  Marginal  cell  not  appendiculate.  Margins  of 
abdominal  segments  not  reddish-testaceous,        =asteris  9  • 

B.  (1).  Larger.     Supraclypeal   mark  absent.     Lateral  face-marks 

not  reaching  level  of  insertion  of  antennse.     Clypeus  shaped 
like  a  panama  hat,      ....         =californica  $  . 

(2).  Smaller.  Supraclypeal  mark  present.  Lateral  face-marks 
going  above  level  of  insertion  of  antennse.  Clypeus  shaped 
like  a  rather  low  cork  helmet,  .         .         =tarda  $  . 

4.  Perdita    arcuata    Fox,    Proo.   Cala.    Acad.,   1893,    p.    18.      cf    (Hab.,    Calmalli 
Mines,  L.  Cala.,  in  April). 

Two  specimens  known,  found  by  Mr.  Haines.  From  one  of  these  I 
noted  as  follows:  Mandibles  simple;  cheeks  unarmed.  Diflfers 
from  semicoerulea,  phymatce  and  latior  in  having  margins  of  abdom- 
inal segments  broadly  rufotestaceous,  exactly  as  in  californica.  In 
the  shape  of  the  head,  and  general  structure,  it  precisely  agrees  with 
californica ;  but  differs  from  that  by  its  entirely  dark  face,  the  labrum 
and  the  base  of  the  mandibles  only  being  yellowish.  The  vertex  is 
well  punctate,  and  it  and  the  mesthorax  are  quite  dull. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  55 

5.  Perdita  interrupta  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.   Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  70.      $    (Hab.,  California). 

Three  specimens  were  found  by  Crotch  ;  we  have  no  information 
as  to  exact  locality  or  habits.  From  one  of  the  types  I  noted  the 
following : 

•  Cheeks  unarmed,  quite  densely  (for  a  Perdita)  white  pubescent. 
Face  more  hairy  than  usual.  Clypeus  with  two  black  dots.  Lateral 
pale  patches  efface  forming  nearly  right-angled  triangles,  the  upper 
angle  being  the  right  angle.  Mesothorax  granular,  dull.  Wings 
distinctly  smoky,  nervures  dark  brown.  Marginal  rather  long,  sub- 
stigraatal  portion  equal  topoststigmatal.  Second  submarginal  nar- 
rowed about  or  hardly  one-half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal  dis- 
tinct. Fir.st  segment  of  abdomen,  except  its  distal  margin,  blue, 
granular,  in  strong  contrast  with  the  piceous  remaining  segments. 
P.fallax,  which  presents  a  certain  superficial  resemblance  to  inter- 
rupta, differs  as  follows : 

(1).  Its  clypeus  is  shaped  like  a  felt  hat,  not  like  a  pauama  hat  as 
in  interrupta. 

(2).  The  upper  angle  of  lateral  face-marks  is  a  very  acute  angle. 

(3).  The  poststigmatal  portion  of  marginal  cell  is  distinctly  longer 
than  the  substigmatal. 

(4).  The  head  and  thorax  are  green,  whereas  they  are  blue  in 
interrupta. 

6.  Perdita  ventralis  Fox,  Proc.  Gala.  Acad.,  1893,  p.  17.      cj  (as  $  ex.  err.) ;    Proc. 

Gala.  Acad.,  189.^,  p.  116  9. 

The  original  types,  three  specimens,  were  found  by  Mr.  Haines  on 
Margarita  Island,  L.  Cala.,  in  March.  Later,  the  same  collector 
obtained  numerous  examples  including  females,  on  Magdalena 
Island,  also  in  March.  These  islands  are  close  together,  a  little  south 
of  the  25th  parallel  of  latitude. 

The  $  has  the  cheeks  armed,  and  the  clypeus  panama-hat  shaped. 
In  the  9  the  cheeks  are  unarmed,  and  the  clypeus  differently 
shaped.  In  the  $  the  mandibles  are  very  slender,  pointed  ;  in  the 
9  stout,  notched  within.  In  view  of  these  differences,  it  is  at  first 
hard  to  believe  that  they  are  sexes  of  one  species,  for  all  that  they 
agree  in  the  abdomen  with  its  suffused  banding,  in  the  mesothorax, 
etc. 

P.  ventralis  is  smaller  than  mentzelice  and  pallidior,  and  differs  by 
the  suffused  banding  of  abdomen.  P.  mentzelice  and  pallidior  have 
the  mesothorax  microscopically  tessellate,  with  distinct  sparse 
punctures  ;  ventralis  has  it  very  shiny,  smooth,  hairless  except  the 


56  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896.. 

anterior  third,  which  is  sparsely  hairy  and  punctured.  The  thorax 
shines  distinctly  blue  in  ventralis  $ ,  but  in  the  9  it  hardly  goes  off 
a  pure  black.  The  $  resembles  californica  in  its  face-markings, 
but  is  so  much  smaller,  and  the  dog-ear  marks  are  much  more 
prominent.  The  vertex  is  minutely  roughened  in  the  same  way  in 
$  and  9  . 

The  face  in  the  9  is  all  dark,  not  so  in  the  $ .  The  S  has  the 
lateral  face-marks  much  broader  than  long,  the  dog-ear  marks  well- 
developed,  but  the  supraclypeal  mark  represented  only  by  a  dot 
adjacent  to  each  dog  ear  mark. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  ventralis  is  the  only  undoubted  member 
of  the  californica  group  of  which  we  know  the  9  •  The-sexual  dif- 
ferences in  Perdita  are  very  unequal  in  the  different  species,  whether 
occurring  as  face-markings  or  as  structural  characters.  In  the  un- 
doubted sexes  of  P.  verbesuue,  the  elypeal  differences  are  not  so  great 
as  in  ventralis,  but  the  difference  in  the  mandibles  is  actually  much 
greater. 

7.  Perdita  mexicanorumn.  sp. 

$ . — Length  about  5J  ram.  Head  and  thorax  dark  blue.  Head 
rather  large,  cheeks  unarmed,  clypeus  panama-hat  shaped,  glossa 
very  long  and  unusually  hairy.  Cheeks  and  face  very  sparsely  hairy 
with  short  hairs.  Vertex  strongly  granular,  and  with  rather  close 
but  shallow  punctures.  Antennae  entirely  sepia-brown,  the  same 
color  above  as  below.  Mandibles  yellowish,  subtestaceous,  dark  at 
tips,  simple,  not  particularly  slender.  Face-markings  sulphur-yellow ; 
clypeus  yellow  with  the  usual  two  black  dots  very  small  and  near 
the  edge,  and  its  proximal  margin  (the  crown  of  the  panama-hat) 
broadly  dark,  the  edge  of  the  yellow  somewhat  irregular  and  medi- 
ally emarginate.  Supraclypeal  and  dog-ear  marks  absent.  Sides  of 
face  with  large  squarish  yellowish  patches,  their  upper  margins 
truncate  and  rather  irregular,  about  level  with  the  top  of  the  clypeus. 
Inwardly,  these  patches  do  not  join  the  elypeal  margin,  but  leave  a 
thin  wedge  of  dark  color  between. 

Thorax  dark  blue,  the  mesothorax  slightly  inclined  to  greenish. 
Prothorax  and  tubercles  entirely  dark ;  postscutellum  sulphur- 
yellow.  Mesothorax  moderately  shining,  but  distinctly  granular 
and  punctuate,  median  groove  distinct.  Metathorax  shining  but 
very  distinctly  granular. 

Tegulse  testaceous ;  wings  slightly  smoky,  nervures  and  stigma 
dull   brownish-ochreous,  stigma   not  centrally   hyaline.     Marginal 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  57 

cell  rather  loug,  very  distinctly  appeudiculate,  poststigmatal  portion 
a  little  longer  than  substigmatal.     Second  submarginal  rather  large, 
narrowed  hardly  one-half  to  marginal,  the  narrowing  more  proximal, 
than   distal.     Third  discoidal   distinct.     Cubital  and  subdiscoidal 
nervures  produced  almost  to  wing-margin. 

Legs  sepia-brown  ;  anterior  tibise  in  front,  and  a  stripe  on  middle 
tibiae,  yellow. 

Abdomen  shining,  sepia-brown,  darker  toward  the  apex ;  venter 
nearly  the  same.  There  are  well-defined  yellow  marks  at  sides  of 
segments  2-5,  partly  passing  over  to  the  venter. 

Hab. — Mexico,  one  example  sent  by  Mr.  Fox.  Unhappily  we 
know  nothing  of  the  exact  locality  or  habits  of  this  interesting  species. 
It  is  the  only  Perdita  I  know  with  a  yellow  postscutellum. 

Two  species  from  Nevada,  known  only  in  the  $  ;  exact  locality  and 
habits  unknown. 

8.  Perdita  zonalis  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1879,  p.  202.     9   (Hab.,  Nevada). 

Ten  specimens  were  collected  by  Morrison.  From  one  of  these  I 
have  noted  as  follows : 

Clypeu?  low  cork-helmet  type,  reaching  base  of  mandibles. 
Mesothorax  excessively  shiny,  dark  brassy-green,  very  sparsely  but 
distinctly  punctured.  Face  markings  pale  yellow.  Upper  margin 
of  clypeus  medially  truncate,  not  rounded.  Clypeus  all  yellow 
except  two  dark  dots.  Supraclypeal  patch  well-developed,  broad, 
but  not  twice  as  broad  as  long.  No  dog-ear  marks.  Sockets  of 
antennse  narrowly  ringed  with  yellow.  Lateral  face  marks  trian- 
gular, rather  broad,  coming  to  a  point  at  level  of  insertion  of 
antennse.  Upper  margin  of  face  marks  not  forming  a  W  but  V  V. 
Stigma  and  nervures  pale  testaceous,  stigma  large,  marginal  cell  with 
poststigmatal  portion  longer  than  substigmatal.  Second  submarginal 
large,  narrowed  one-half  to  marginal.     Third  discoidal  distinct. 

Abdomen  above  yellow  with  four  black  bands,  and  a  black  mark 
on  each  side  of  first  segment.  The  abdomen  is  peculiar  for  the 
black  bands  being  very  distinct,  neither  notched  nor  interrupted  in 
the  middle,  and  narrower  than  the  yellow  between  them. 

From  zebrata  and  bakerce  it  may  be  known  by  the  black  bauds  of 
abdomen  not  being  united  on  lateral  margin,  the  anterior  tibiae  all 
yellow,  the  lateral  triangle  of  face  broader  and  the  face  markings 
lemon-yellow.  From  salicis  9  it  is  distinguished  at  once  by  the 
very  much  broader  lateral  face-marks. 

5 


58  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

9.  Perdita  nevadensis  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  almost  6  mm.  Head  so  dark  green  as  to  seem 
black ;  thorax  pitch  black,  with  the  metathorax  green.  In  certain 
lights  the  prothorax  and  anterior  part  of  the  mesothorax  present  a 
greenish  lustre.  Head  moderately  large,  broader  than  long,  de- 
pressed on  vertex ;  clypeus  shaped  like  a  rather  low  cocked-hat, 
flattened  at  the  top,  the  teeth  of  anterior  margin  dark  and  rather 
long.  Vertex  dull,  rugulose.  Face  and  cheeks  with  sparse  incon- 
spicuous hairs.  Antennae  dark  brown  ;  the  flagellum  paler,  inclin- 
ing to  yellow  beneath.  Face-markings  pale  dull  yellowish  ;  clypeus 
pale  with  two  broad  divergent  black  bars  and  a  black  dot  distad  of 
each,  supraclypeal  mark  represented  by  two  round  or  suboval  spots; 
dog-ear  marks  represented  by  obscure  small  spots,  not  alike  on  both 
sides  ;  lateral  pale  patches  triangular,  the  upper  angle  an  acute  one 
and  level  with  the  insertion  of  the  antennae,  the  shortest  side  of  the 
triangle  at  least  two-thirds  the  length  of  the  longest.  Mesothorax 
shiny,  hardly  granular,  sparsely  hairy  and  punctate.  Thorax  all 
dark,  except  the  tubercles,  which  are  pale  yellow.  Metathorax 
granular. 

Tegulsepale  testaceous.  Wings  hyaline,  faintly  smoky,  uervures 
and  stigma  pale  brown,  stigma  centrally  subhyaline.  Marginal 
cell  moderately  long,  obliquely  truncate,  poststigmatal  portion  a 
very  little  longer  than  substigmatal.  Second  submarginal  large, 
narrowed  on  its  distal  side  one-half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal 
distinct.  Legs  dark  brown,  anterior  knees,  anterior  tibiae  in  front 
and  stripe  on  middle  tibiae,  yellow. 

Abdomen  rather  broad,  above  and  below  piceous,  segments  2-4 
above  with  distinct  oblique  lateral  yellow  marks.  The  mark  on  the 
2d  segment  is  on  one  side  broken  into  two. 

Hab. — Nevada,  one  specimen  sent  by  Mr.  Fox. 

The  following  tables  will  separate  nevadensis  from  some  species 
which  it  superficially  resembles. 

A.  (1).  Lateral  marks  efface  triangular,  terminating  in  a  point, 

^=^nevadensis  $  . 
(2).  Lateral  marks  of  face  truncate  at  end  and  notched  within, 

=affi7iis  9  • 

B.  (1).  Face-markings  whitish,  lateral  marks  narrower,  abdom- 

inal marks  white,    .....         =Jallax  9  . 

(2).  Face-markings  yellow,  lateral  marks  broader,  abdominal 

marks  yellow,  ....  =^nevadensis  9  . 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  59 

C.  (1).  Larger,  clypeus  higher,  siipraclypeal  mark  absent,  lateral 

marks  notched  within,    .         .         .  odomaculata  9 . 

(2),  Smaller,  clypeus  lower,  siipraclypeal  mark  present,  lateral 

marks  not  notched  within.       .         .  ^nevadensis  9  . 

Species  found  east  of  the  95th  meridian. 
10.  Perdita  obscurata  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  70.     cf  ?   (Hab.,  Georgia). 

One  male  and  one  female  were  found  by  Morrison.  I  have  made 
the  following  description  from  the  female  ;  the  student  will  observe 
that  in  some  points  it  disagrees  with  that  of  Cresson,  notwithstand- 
ing that  it  is  from  the  same  specimen. 

$  . — Head  and  thorax  dark  bluish -green.  Clypeus  broad,  not 
much  attenuate  at  sides,  reaching  base  of  mandibles.  Face-mark- 
ings pale  yellow,  lateral  marks  very  narrow,  inversely  club-shaped, 
reaching  as  far  as  level  of  insertion  of  antennae.  Clypeus  without 
marks,  except  a  very  distinct  central  one,  shaped  like  an  inverted 
egg-cup  with  the  egg  in  it,  the  base  at  posterior  clypeal  border,  the 
apex  not  reaching  anterior  border  of  clypeus.  Mandibles  except 
tips  pale  yellow.  Mesothorax  shiny.  Tubercles  rather  pale  brown- 
ish. Hind  margin  of  prothorax  with  two  small  yellow  spots.  Wings 
hyaline,  stigma  very  large,  pale  yellowish,  veins  colorless.  Mar- 
ginal cell  with  the  substigmatal  portion  a  little  longer  than  the  post- 
stigmatal.  First  submarginal  very  long,  longer  than  marginal. 
Second  submarginal  short,  suboval  and  high,  narrowed  about  one- 
half  to  marginal.  On  one  side  there  is  a  small  petiolate  submarginal 
•cell  between  normal  1st  and  2d  submarginals,  it  receives  the  first 
recurrent  nervure,  and  is  approximately  an  equilateral  triangle. 
Third  discoidal  distinct.  The  broadly  interrupted  narrow  fascise 
on  abdomen  are  not  obscure  or  suffused,  but  clean-cut  and  distinct. 
It  differs  from  the  9  of  affinis  by  the  lateral  face-marks  being 
pointed  above,  the  clypeus  dark  marked  with  light,  the  mesothorax 
shiny,  the  nervures  colorless,  and  the  abdominal  marks  yellowish. 

The  $  I  have  not  seen  ;  Mr.  Fox  has  kindly  sent  me  a  sketch  of 
the  face-markings,  showing  the  face  entirely  yellow  below  the  level 
of  the  antennae,  the  yellow  not  extending  upward  at  all  in  the 
median  line,  but  obliquely  extending  upward  at  the  sides  from  the 
antennal  socket  to  the  orbital  margin,  where  it  ends  at  an  angle  of 
about  50°.     The  cheeks,  Mr.  Fox  informs  me,  are  not  armed. 

Mr.  Charles  Robertson  tells  me  that  at  Orlando,  Florida,  on  March 
16th,  he  captured  a  $  obscurata  on  lowers  of  Sydrocotyle  icmbellata. 


60  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

11.  Perdita  octomaculata  (Say).    Cr.,  Cat.  Apidse,  1879,  p.  216. 

PanurguB  8-maculatiis  Say,  Long's   2d.   Exped.,  ii,  p.   350,  1824.     ^$  (Hab.,  U, 
S.). 

I  have  a  9  from  New  York  State,  sent  by  Dr.  Skinner,  and  a  ^ 
from  southern  Illinois,  sent  by  Mr.  Roberston.  Mr,  Fox  informs  me 
that  he  has  seen  specimens  from  the  White  Mts.,  N.  H.,  collected  by 
Mrs.  Slosson,New  York,  New  Jersey  and  Virginia.  He  has  taken  it  in 
southern  New  Jersey,  but  sparingly.  Prof.  J.  B.  Smith  reports  it 
from  Westville,  N.  J.,  on  Cresson's  authority.  Of  its  habits,  nothing 
has  been  recorded,  but  Mr.  C.  Robertson  informs  me  that  he  has 
taken  it  from  Aug.  13th  to  Sept.  20th,  on  flowers  o^  Solidago  canad- 
ensis, Coreopsis  aristosa  and  Aster  ericoides  var.  villosus. 

Three  allied  species  found  on  Mentzelia  in  New  Mexico. 

12.  Perdita  mentzeliae  n.  sp. 

$ . — About  5j  mm.  long.  Head  rather  large,  quadrate,  broader 
than  thorax,  mandibles  simple,  cheeks  beneath  with  a  prominent 
tooth,  lower  margin  of  clypeus  nearly  straight;  vertex  finely 
rugulose,  with  sparse  feeble  punctures  between  the  ocelli  and  the 
antennae  ;  eyes  narrow.  Color  very  dark  blue-green,  with  the  whole 
of  the  face  beneath  the  antennse,  and  the  lower  half  of  the  cheeks, 
including  the  spines,  orange-yellow.  On  each  side  of  the  face  the 
yellow  extends  upward,  narrowing  to  a  point  on  the  orbital  margin 
about  two-thirds  the  length  of  the  scape  above  the  level  of  the 
insertion  of  the  antennae.  Mandibles  yellow  with  ferruginous  tips. 
Antennae  yellow,  becoming  deep  orange  toward  their  tips ;  the 
flagellum  slightly  marked  with  blackish  above. 

Thorax  shiny,  very  dark  blue-green,  becoming  black  on  the 
scutellum  and  hind  part  of  mesothorax,  metathorax  tinged  with 
blue.  Collar,  tubercles,  under  side  and  part  of  hind  border  of  pro- 
thorax  orange-yellow.  Mesothorax  with  only  a  few  scattered  indis- 
tinct punctures.  Metathorax  minutely  granular.  Pleura,  anterior 
border  of  mesothorax  and  sides  of  metathorax  with  scattered  white 
hairs, 

Tegulse  hyaline ;  wings  hyaline,  nervures  very  pale  yellowish. 
Marginal  cell  about  or  hardly  as  long  as  stigma.  Second  sub- 
marginal  not  narrowed  one-half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal 
hardly  perceptible. 

Legs  orange ;  posterior  femora  with  a  brown  patch  behind  ;  poste- 
rior tibiae  and  tarsi  mostly  brown.  Abdomen  orange-yellow,  first 
segment  almost  all  black,  segments  2,  3  and  4  with  broad  suffused 


1896.]  NATUKAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  61 

black  bands.  Venter  orange,  immaculate.  Quite  as  often,  perhaps 
more  frequently,  the  abdomen  is  shining  black  above,  except  the 
terminal  segment  which  is  testaceous,  and  the  more  or  less  obviously 
testaceous  distal  margins  of  the  other  seo:ments. 

9  . — Somewhat  larger  ;  head  rounder,  not  broader  than  thorax. 
Punctures  of  mesothorax  distinct  but  scattered.  The  pale  markings 
all  yellowish-white  instead  of  yellow.  Face  dark,  clypeus  black 
contrasting  with  the  green  upper  part  of  face.  An  irregularly 
triangular  yellowish-white  patch  on  each  lower  corner  of  face 
between  clypeus  and  orbit.  Coxje  black,  their  ends  whitish.  Femora 
black,  their  tips  whitish.  Tibise  whitish,  middle  and  hind  tibise 
largely  suffused  with  black.  Dorsum  of  abdomen  with  the  black 
nearly  covering  the  segments,  leaving  transverse  white  areas  or 
bands,  not  continued  to  lateral  margin,  on  segments  2-4.  Venter 
whitish,  not  banded. 

Hab. — Santa  Fe,  N.  M.,  close  to  the  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  depot, 
at  flowers  of  3Ienzelia  nuda,  Aug.  3,  1895,  many  specimens.  They 
were  associated  with  Bomhus  (abundant)  and  Andrena  (rare). 

13.  Perdita  pallidior  n.  sp. 

S  . — Resembles  the  $  of  mentzelice,  but  differs  in  the  cheeks  being 
unarmed  beneath,  in  the  smaller  head,  the  second  submarginal  cell 
more  narrowed  above,  the  legs  entirely  yellow,  the  abdomen  above 
orange-yellow,  with  the  first  segment  nearly  all  dark  brown  or 
black,  and  a  dark  brown  band  on  segments  2  and  3,  that  on  3d  fail- 
ing some  distance  before  the  lateral  margin. 

9  . — Resembles  the  9  of  mentzelice,  but  differs  in  the  legs  being 
all  yellowish-white,  except  a  dusky  shade  on  inside  of  anterior 
femora,  and  outside  of  middle  and  posterior  tibise.  The  white  sub- 
triangular  marks  on  sides  of  face  are  rather  more  produced  upward 
along  the  orbital  margin.  The  abdomen  above  is  yellowish-white, 
the  first  segment  with  a  broad  brown-black  ring,  the  second  and 
third  segments  with  dark  bauds,  the  fourth  segment  with  a  pair  of 
dark  spots,  suffused  in  outline. 

Hab. — Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  close  to  Prof.  Hadley's  house,  abun- 
dant on  flowers  of  Mentzelia  nuda,  Aug.  15,  1895.  A  single  9  was 
also  swept  from  Gutierrezia  sarothrce  (det.  E.  O.  Wooton)  at  the 
same  time  and  place.  No  other  bees  were  then  found  upon  the 
Mentzelia,  except  Perdita  pulchrior.  On  the  G^ltierrezia  were  found 
also  Perdita  gidierrezice  and  P.  austini,  one  each. 


62  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

14.  Perdita  pulchrior  n.  sp.     Fig.  7,  (part  of  wing). 

$  . — Resembles  the  ^  of  pallidior,  but  rather  larger  and  stoutly 

built,  with  the  cheeks  armed  below  with  a  pi'ominent  spine.     Head 

large  and  subquadrate.     Second  submarginal  not  so  much  narrowed 

above.      Legs  entirely  yellow.      Abdomen  above  shiny 

pale  orange-yellow,  the  first  segment  mostly  black,  second 

with  a  pair  of  dark  spots  ;  no  dark  bands.     The  second 

Fig.  7.       segment   may  have  its  lateral  margins  also  dark,  and  the 

third  segment  may  show  spots. 

Hab. — Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  on  Mentzelia  7n(f?a,same  time  and  place 
as  pallidior,  two  males  (Ckll.,  4,537,  4,538).  On  Sept.  12th,  I  was 
surprised  to  take  another  example,  also  a  male,  on  Bigelovia  wrightii 
close  to  the  Agricultural  College,  Las  Cruces,  N.  M.  This  species- 
may  possibly  represent  9.  dimorphic  $  of  pallid  lor ;  the  9  is  either 
unknown,  or  not  to  be  separated  from  those  presumably  referable  ta 
pallid  ior. 

Four  species  found  on  Larrea  in  Neiv  Mexico. 

15.  Perdita  larreae  n.  s}).    Fig.  8.  (stigma  etc). 

$  . — Hardly  4  mm.  long,  bright  orange-yellow,  smooth  and  shiny  • 

pubescence  consisting  of  sparse  white  hairs  on  vertex,  cheeks  beneath^ 

mesothorax,   pleura,    tibise,   tarsi,  apex   and  venter  of 

abdomen.    Head   very  large,  considerably  larger  than 

the  small  thorax,  subquadrate  ;  clypeus  joroduced  into 

Fig.  8.        ^  spine  at  each  lower  corner,  cheeks  with  a  stout  spine 

beneath,  eyes  rather  small  and  narrow. 

Wings  small,  hyaline,  nervures  white,  stigma  hyaline  in  middle. 
Marginal  cell  narrow  but  hardly  produced  beyond  stigma,  not 
quite  as  long  as  first  submarginal,  appendiculate.  Second  submar- 
ginal very  small,  triangular,  coming  to  a  point  at  its  junction  with 
marginal.  First  recurrent  joining,  first  transverse  cubital.  Third 
discoidal  cell  wanting. 

The  mandibles  are  elongate,  simple,  dark  at  tips.  The  ocelli  are 
more  or  less  dark,  with  some  dark  marbling  about  them.  Tongue 
about  as  long  as  head. 

Hab. — San  Marcial,  N.  M.,  close  to  Mr.  Shope's  house,  at  flowers 
of  Larrea  divaricata  var,  tridentata,  June  28, 1895.    Five  specimens. 

16.  Perdita  marcialis  n.  sp. 

$  . — Size  and  form  of  P.  larrece.     Anterior  margin  of  clypeus  not 
so  broad,  with   the  spines  longer  and  parallel ;  whereas  in   larrece 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  63 

they  are  divergent.  Wings  as  in  larrece,  but  the  marginal  cell 
rather  more  produced  beyond  stigma.  A  keel  between  antennae, 
giving  place  to  a  groove  running  upward  to  middle  ocellus.  Color 
deep  orange,  with  dark  markings.  A  black  spot  before  the  upper 
part  of  each  anterior  orbital  margin  ;  a  large  green-metallic  patch 
on  vertex,  enclosing  the  two  posterior  ocelli,  but  just  escaping  the 
anterior  one  or  only  partly  enclosing  it ;  mesothorax  shiny  metallic 
olive-green,  except  rather  broad  yellow  lateral  margins  ;  dorsum  of 
metathorax  dark  green  ;  a  large  round  dark  patch  on  sides  of  thorax 
beneath.  Abdomen  above  more  or  less  suffused  with  brown,  which 
is  dark  at  base  of  first  and  apex  of  second  segments,  and  becomes 
reddish  on  last  two  segments.  Hind  legs  tinged  with  brown. 
Mandibles  simple  as  in  larrecB. 

Hah. — San  Marcial,  N.  j\I.,  on  Larrea  at  the  same  time  and  place 
as  P.  larrece.     One  specimen. 

17.  Perdita  larrearum  n.  sp. 

9  . — 4  mm.  long.  Head  dark  brassy-green,  thorax  black,  pleura 
and  metathorax  bluish,  abdomen  dark  sepia-brown.  Head  rounded, 
rather  large,  vertex  conspicuously  roughened,  cheeks  and  occiput 
with  a  rather  dense  fringe  of  white  hairs,  clypeus  and  sides  of  face 
very  narrowly  pale  yellowish-ferruginous,  the  pale  color  continuing 
along  orbital  margin  some  distance  above  level  of  antennae,  but  so 
thin  that  its  termination  is  difRult  to  trace. 

Antennae  blackish  above,  yellowish  beneath. 

Tubercles  and  hind  border  of  prothorax  narrowly,  yellowish. 
Anterior  portion  of  mesothorax  curiously  ornamented  with  appressed 
pure  white  hairs.  Mesothorax  appearing  granular,  microscopically 
reticulate,  with  very  sparse  shallow  punctures. 

Legs  brown,  anterior  tibiae  and  tarsi  dull  yellow.  Tegulae  yellow- 
ish-hyaline. Wings  hyaline,  nervures  white  or  colorless.  Marginal 
cell  with  its  substigmatal  portion  fully  twice  as  long  as  the  post- 
stigmatal.  Second  submarginal  triangular,  bulging  without,  nar- 
rowing to  a  point  at  marginal.     Third  discoidal  distinct. 

Abdomen  above  sepia-brown,  the  proximal  ends  of  the  first  two 
segments  slightly  yellowish.     Venter  dull  brownish-yellow. 

Hab. — San  Marcial,  N.  M.,  on  Larrea  at  the  same  time  and  place 
as  P.  larrece.     Three  specimens. 

There  are  three  possibilities  regarding  the  last  three  species  : 

(1).  That  they  are  three  distinct  species. 

(2).  That  the  males  represent  two  valid  species,  and  larrearum 
the  9  of  one  of  them. 


64  PEOCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

(3).  That  there  is  only  one  species,  larrece,  marcialis  being  the 
dimorphic  $  and /arreor»9?i  the  normal  $   of  the  same. 

While  I  incline  to  one  of  the  latter  suppositions,  the  difference 
between  the  three  forms  is  very  great,  so  that  ia  the  absence  of 
further  evidence  they  must  be  provisionally  regarded  as  species. 

18.  Perdita  semicaerulea  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  6  mm.  Unusually  hairy,  the  pubescence  erect  and 
white.  Head  of  ordinary  size,  dark  greenish-blue,  bluer  at  sides  of 
face,  more  brassy-green  between  antennre.  Vertex  finely  rugulose, 
punctured.  Clypeus  high,  pitch-black,  smooth  with  large  moder- 
ately close  punctures.  The  only  face-markings  consist  of  a  shining, 
hairless,  bright  sulphur-yellow  oval  patch  on  each  side  of  the  clypeus, 
separated  from  the  eye  margin  by  a  distance  at  least  equal  to  its 
own  diameter. 

Antennse  dark-brown,  scape  black,  last  joint  of  flagellum  becom- 
ing pale.  The  antennse  are  rather  conspicuously  enlarged  toward 
their  ends. 

Mesothorax  and  scutellum  smooth  and  shining,  but  with  deep, 
large  and  rather  close  punctures.  Thorax  all  black,  except  the 
metathorax  which  is  l)lue.     Pleura  with  quite  long  white  hairs. 

Tegulse  hyaline.  Wings  milky-hyaline,  stigma  very  pale  yellow, 
hyaline  in  middle,  nervures  colorless,  costal  uervure  black.  Marginal 
cell  rather  short,  appendiculate,  poststigmatal  portion  hardly  longer 
than'substigmatal.  Second  submarginal  large,  narrowed  about  one- 
half  to  marginal.     Third  discoidal  distinct. 

Legs  brown-black,  a  little  yellow  on  anterior  tibipe  and  knees. 

Abdomen  shining,  brown-black  above  and  beneath.  Sides  of 
first  segment,  and  in  a  less  degree  those  of  the  others,  with  tufts  of 
white  hairs.  Dorsum  of  last  three  segments  more  or  less  hairy,  that 
of  the  last  one  considerably  so. 

Hab. — San  Marcial,  N.  M.,  on  Larrea,  at  the  same  time  and  place 
as  P.  larrece.  One  specimen.  (Ckll.,  3,077).  This  species  is  easily 
recognized  by  the  dark  clypeus,  with  a  shining,  smooth,  yellow  spot 
on  each  side  of  it.  It  is  not  nearly  related  to  P.  larrece,  but  rather 
to  P.  phymake,  which,  however,  has  not  the  yellow  spots. 

A  species  uith  the  end  of  the  abdomen  rufou.'<,  found  on  Croton. 

19.  Perdita  crotonis  n.  sp. 

9  . — About  5  mm.  long.  Head  rather  broad,  shining,  dark  blue 
or  greenish-blue  ;  clypeus  except  two  black  dots,  a  transversely 


1896]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  65 

elongate  mark  adjacent  to  hind  border  of  clypeus,  narrowing  medi- 
ally, and  a  triangular  patch  on  each  side  of  face,  not  quite  reaching 
to  level  of  insertion  of  antenna,  white.  Mandibles  white  with  rufous 
tips.  Cheeks  rather  densely  white-hairy.  Antennje  with  the  scape 
black  above,  white  beneath ;  funicle  and  flagellum  black  or  very 
dark  brown,  last  joint  of  latter  pale  at  tip.  Thorax  shiny,  rather 
<lensely  pubescent  for  a  Perdita,  mesothorax  very  dark  bottle  green, 
median  groove  very  distinct.  Tubercles  and  posterior  median  border 
of  prothorax  white.  Tegulse  brownish,  with  a  white  spot  on  ante- 
rior half  Scutellum  quite  brassy-green.  Metathorax  dark  blue, 
distinctly  rugulose.     Pleura  smooth,  dark  blue. 

Legs  white;  with  the  femora  except  ends,  most  of  hind  coxae,  a 
patch  behind  each  of  the  four  anterior  tibise,  the  hind  tibiae  except 
basal  third,  and  the  hind  tarsi,  black.  Wings  hyaline,  nervures 
fuscous,  stigma  margined  with  fuscous.  Marginal  cell  with  thepost- 
stigmatal  portion  about  or  hardly  as  long  as  the  substigmatal ; 
second  submarginal  narrowed  about  one-half  to  marginal ;  third 
discoidal  distinct. 

Abdomen  above  and  below  with  the  last  two  segments  entirely 
rufous,  without  markings.  Segments  1-3  above  white,  with  black 
bands  at  proximal  and  distal  margins  of  segn'ients,  those  on  proximal 
margins  of  segments  2  and  3  very  narrow,  and  that  on  distal  mar- 
gin of  3d  represented  only  by  a  line  of  mottling.  (Ckll.,  3,262,  etc.) 

Mut.  9  . — Clypeus  with  two  longitudinal  black  lines  or  bands  in 
addition  to  the  marks  above  described.     (Ckll.,  3,259). 

S  . — The  whole  of  the  face  beneath  the  level  of  the  antennae  white, 
except  the  two  black  dots  on  clypeus.  Along  the  orbits  the  white 
is  further  produced  a  short  distance,  rapidly  narrowing  to  a  point. 
Second  submarginal  narrowed  distinctly  more  than  half  to  marginal. 
Last  three  segments  of  abdomen  rufous.  Cheeks  unarmed.  (Ckll., 
3,261). 

Hah. — Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  June  30,  1895,  in  numbers  at  flowers 
of  Croton  texensis.  In  August,  Miss  Myrtle  Boyle  found  a  single 
specimen  at  La  Tenaja,  near  Santa  Fe.  I  looked  for  it  at  Santa  Fe, 
but  failed  to  find  it,  though  the  Croton  is  abundant. 

A  small  species  vith  orange  or  orange-rufous  abdomen  found  on 
Ch  ama'saracha. 

20.  Perdita  chamsesarachae  n.  sp. 

S  . — 3i  mm.  long.     Head  and  thorax  shining  dark  blue,  abdomen 


66  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

brownish-orange.  Vertex  granular.  Head  rounded.  Face  below 
antenna  yellowish-white,  the  upper  border  of  the  pale  color  coinci- 
dent with  the  loAver  level  of  the  insertion  of  the  antennje,  except 
that  on  each  side  of  the  dog-ear  plate  there  is  a  notch  formed  by  an 
incursion  of  the  dark  color.  Clypeus  Avith  a  small  black  spot  on 
each  side.  Mandibles  rufous  at  tips.  Antennae  dark  above,  below 
dirty  yellowish,  the  scape  whiter.  Sides  of  face  with  appressed  white 
hairs.  Cheeks  unarmed,  rather  densely  clothed  beneath  with  erect 
white  hairs.  Sides  of  metathorax,  and  postscutellum,  with  similar 
hairs.  Tubercles  yellowish-white,  tegulse  hyaline.  Wings  hyaline, 
nervures  very  pale  straw-yellow,  third  discoidal  very  weak,  second 
submarginal  narrowing  about  one-half  to  marginal.  Legs  pale 
yellow,  a  dark  patch  on  anterior  femora,  and  middle  and  posterior 
femora  and  tibiae  largely  dark.  Abdomen  above  bandless,  first 
segment  dark  at  base.     Venter  entirely  orange.     (Ckll.,  4,568,  etc.). 

9  • — Closely  similar,  but  the  dog-ear  marks  and  pale  mark  above 
clypeus  wanting,  i.  e.,  the  pale  color  on  face  is  confined  to  the  clypeus 
and  triangular  marks  at  sides  of  face.     (Ckll.,  4,573). 

Hab. — Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  in  the  old  town  at  flowers  of  ChamoB- 
saracha  coronopus,  Aug.  16,  1895,  abundant.  Also  at  Santa  Fe,  in 
the  capitol  grounds,  on  flowers  of  C.  coronopus,  Aug.  2,  1895,  two 
specimens.  At  Santa  Fe  it  was  associated  on  the  flowers  with  Halic- 
tus  S  and  Colletes.  This  species  resembles  P.  semicrocea,  but  that 
has  the  face  dark  in  the  9  . 

A  species  from  the  transition  zone  in  New  Mexico,  habits  unknoum. 

21.  Perdita  foxi  Ckll.     Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  18.      ^  (Hab.,  Santa  Fe,  N.  M.) 

The  unique  type,  taken  on  June  25th,  is  only  known.  The  species 
may  be  known  by  its  orange-rufous  legs,  and  black  unhanded 
abdomen. 

A  species  found  on  Sphoiralcea,  very  different  in  the  sexes,  ranging 
in  modified  form  over  3,200  feet  altitude. 

22.  Perdita  sphaeralceae  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  7 5  mm.  Head  and  thorax  dark  greenish,  abdomen 
black  with  three  light  bands.  Head  rather  small,  rounded,  some- 
what broader  than  long,  vertex  and  occiput  dark  olive-green,  gran- 
ular; a  shining  brassy  prominence  between  the  antennse;  clypeus 
black,  shining,  sparsely  punctured  toward  the  sides.  No  pale 
marks  on  face,  except  a  small  yellow  spot  on  extreme  lower  corner. 
Mandibles  brownish,  ferruginous   at  apex,   sharply  and  squarely 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  67 

notched  on  inner  side  near  end,  but  not  actually  bifid.     Cheeks  quite 
densely  hairy.     Antennie  dark  brown,  almost  black  above. 

Tubercles,  and  hind  border  of  prothorax  more  or  less,  very  pale 
yellowish.  Mesothorax  bulging  in  front,  not  very  shiny,  dark  brassy, 
hardly  green,  quite  pubescent  with  erect  whitish  hairs.  Sides  of 
metathorax  with  tufts  of  hairs,  but  i^ostscutellum  not  conspicuously 
hairy. 

Teguke  hyaline.  Wings  hyaline,  nervures  very  pale  yellowish, 
almost  colorless,  stigma  margined  with  brown.  Marginal  cell  rather 
long,  poststigmatal  portion  distinctly  longer  than  substigmatal.  First 
submarginal  not  nearly  so  large  as  first  discoidal.  Second  sub- 
marginal  large,  narrowing  hardly  one-half  to  marginal.  Third  dis- 
coidal quite  distinct. 

Legs  black  ;  anterior  knees,  anterior  tibiae  in  front,  middle  tibise 
at  tip  behind,  dull  yellow.  Abdomen  rather  narrow,  black  ;  second, 
third  and  fourth  segments  at  base  with  a  broad  pale  yellowish  band, 
slightly  notched  in  middle  behind.  Venter  dark  brown.  The 
abdominal  bands  have  a  slightly  greenish  tint,  so  that  when  the 
insect  is  alive  on  the  flowers  it  rather  suggests  a  miniature  Nomia 
similar  to  N.  punctata. 

$. — Length  6  mm.  Cheeks  unarmed.  Light  markings  all  deep 
saffron-yellow,  instead  of  pale  greenish-yellow.  Mandibles  simple, 
yellow  with  ferruginous  tips.  Face  beneath  antennae  all  yellow, 
except  two  black  dots  on  clypeus,  the  yellow  moreover  extending 
upward  at  sides  of  face,  coming  to  a  point  at  an  angle  of  about  50°, 
not  quite  so  far  up  as  the  length  of  the  scape  above  level  of  insertion 
of  autenme.  Antenna  yellow;  funicle,  flagellum  and  end  of  scape 
above,  dark  brown. 

Yellow  hind  margin  of  prothorax  connecting  with  yellow  tuber- 
cles. Legs  yellow;  part  of  middle  coxae,  posterior  coxae  except  ends 
and  a  spot  behind,  a  large  patch  on  anterior  and  middle  femora 
behind,  a  patch  on  both  sides  of  hind  femora,  a  large  patch  on 
middle  tibiae,  and  outer  side  of  hind  tibiae  and  tarsi,  black.  Pleura 
with  a  round  yellow  patch,  not  very  conspicuous,  in  front. 

Abdomen  above  shining,  dark  brown,  with  rather  broad  yellow 
bands  at  proximal  margins  of  segments  2-5,  that  on  4  narrowest, 
that  on  /)  broadest,  and  notched  behind  medially.  Sixth  segment 
dull  rufous  with  a  brown  rather  suffused  band.   Venter  dull  orange. 

Hah. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  common  at  flowers  of  Sphceralcea  an- 
gustijolia,  middle  of  August  to  middle  of  September,  1895. 


68  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

P.  sphaeralceae,  race  alticola. 

9  . — Nervures  dark  brown.  A  light  spot  on  each  side  of  5th 
abdominal  segment.  (Ckll.,  3,850).  The  spots  on  5th  segment  may 
be  absent  as  in  the  type. 

$  . — Nervures  dark,  as  in  the  9  •  The  dog-ear  marks  have  more 
or  less  of  a  dark  border  below. 

Mut.  SUFFUSA.  $  . — Abdomen  above  suffused  with  brown,  only 
the  yellow  bands  on  segments  2  and  3  remaining.  Dog-ear  marks 
reduced,  their  lower  half  often  wanting. 

Mut.  9  • — Only  6  mm.  long.  Abdominal  bands  narrow^  that  on 
segment  5th  present  though  interrupted  in  the  middle,  (Ckll.,  3,849). 
This  may  be  the  proper  9  of  mut.  suffusa. 

Hah. — Santa  Fe,  N.  M.,  common  at  flowers  of  Sphceralcea  angus- 
tifolia;  the  males  much  more  frequent  than  the  females.  The 
species  was  first  taken  in  Mr.  Boyle's  garden  on  July  25,  1895;  2 
normal  S  alticola,  2  <^  sxiffnsa.  On  July  27th  were  taken  several 
males,  about  equally  divided  between  alticola  proper  and  suffusa, 
and  also  two  females.  The  latest  date  I  have  is  Aug.  8th,  a  9  taken 
by  Miss  Myrtle  Boyle.  The  S  differs  from  zehrata  $  by  its  very 
dark  (not  bluish)  thorax,  much  yellower  light  markings,  darker 
stigma,  and  rather  differently  shaped  face-markings. 

A  species  found  on  Cleome  serrulata  (C.  integrifolia). 

23.  Perdita  zebrata  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  69.      $  (Hab.,  Colorado). 

S  Perdita  canina  Ckll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  17.    (Hab.,  Santa  F6,  N.  M.). 
Figs.  9,  10,  (face-marks  and  <}  genitalia). 

Originally  described  from  seven  specimens  taken  by  Ridings  and 
Morrison.  The  $  was  not  known  until  described  by  me  as  canina. 
My  No.  1,270  (1.  c,  p.  18)  proves  to  have  been  the  true  9  ,  and  is 

identical  with  at  least  some  of  Cresson's  types 
of  zebrata,  though  it  is  possible  that  under 
this  name  more  than  one  species  was  in- 
cluded. The  matter  is  complicated  from  the 
variability  of  9  zebrata  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  discovery  of  I',  bakeroi  on  the  other, 
the  latter  species  being  easily  distinguished 
in  the  $ ,  but  only  with  ex-  -.^ 
treme  difficulty  in  the  9  • 
Mr.  Fox  has  sent  me  a  9 
Fig.  10.  Qf  zebrata  from  the  Magdalena        ^'^-  ^• 

Mts.,  N.  M.,  Aug.,  1894,  collected  by  Snow.     Mr.  C.  F.  Baker  sends 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  69 

it  from  Fort  Collins,  Colorado,  where  it  was  collected  in  August ; 
this  is  the  most  uorlhern  locality  known  for  it.  The  most  southern 
locality  is  Alma,  Socorro  Co.,  N.  M.,  where  it  was  found  by  Mr. 
Alfred  Holt.     I  have  myself  collected  it  as  follows : 

(1).  Albuquerque,  June  oOth  and  Aug.  16, 1895.  (2).  Lamy,  N. 
M.,  July  2d  and  July  13th.  (3).  Santa  Fe,  N.  M.,  July  5th  to 
Aug.  3d.  (4).  Watrous,  N.  M.,  July  13th.  (5).  Las  Vegas,  N. 
M.,  July.    (6).  lia  Junta,  Colo.,  July. 

Everywhere  it  is  found  in  great  abundance  on  flowers  of  Cleome 
serrulata,  and  on  nothing  else ;  whereas  the  closely  allied  P.  bakerce 
is  found  on  Solidago.  On  July  12th,  at  Santa  Fe,  I  saw  them  settle 
on  the  stamens  of  the  Cleovie,  climb  to  the  top,  and  collect  the  pollen. 
At  Watrous  I  saw  one  inserting  its  tongue  in  the  base  of  the  flower, 
running  down  the  inner  surface  of  the  petals. 

In  the  $  s  the  face-markings  are  very  constant,  but  frequently  the 
light  bands  of  the  abdomen  will  be  interrupted  on  segments  3  and  4. 
The  9  s  vary  much  in  the  clypeal  marks,  from  no  marks  on  the 
clypeus  but  the  usual  pair  of  dots,  to  two  black  bars  or  even  an 
almost  wholly  black  clypeus.  These  variations  do  not  seem  to  have 
any  reference  to  the  environment. 

Mr.  Fox  has  examined  for  me  all  Cresson's  type  specimens  of 
zehrata  ( 9  )  and  reports  that  they  have  the  supraclypeal  spot 
notched  above,  except  one,  which  has  it  divided  in  two.  This  last 
was  the  one  Cresson  actually  had  in  hand  when  describing,  as  may 
be  seen  from  his  description.  The  clypeus  in  four  specimens  is  bi- 
spotted  with  black,  in  one  entirely  yellow. 

A  species  very  like  P.  zehrata,  found  on  Solidago  in  Colorado. 
24.  Perdita  bakerae  n.  sp.  or  race.     Figs.  11,  12,  (head  and  cf  genitalia). 

$ . — Like  the  $  of  P.  zehrata,  but  seems  to  average  smaller,  the 
pale  bands  of  the  abdomen  are  small  and  interrupted,  at  least  on 
the  third  and  fourth  segments,  and  the  supraclypeal  mark  is  nearly 
twice  as  broad  as  long.  Sometimes  the  abdominal  bands  are  entire, 
but  the  supraclypeal  mark  still  affords  a  distinguishing  character. 

9  . — Seems  to  diflTer  only  from  9  zehrata  in  its  broader  supra- 
clypeal mark,  notched  in  the  middle. 

Hah.—¥on  Collins,  Colorado,  12  $,  3  9,  sent  by  Mr.  C.  F. 
Baker.  They  were  collected  as  follows:  (1).  On  Solidago  canad- 
ensis, Aug.  8,  1895,  both  sexes.  (2).  On  Solidago  canadensis,  Aug. 
15,  1895,  a  $ .  (3).  On  sticky  flower-buds  of  Helianthiis  annutis, 
Aug.  20,  1895,  two  ^s. 


70 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 

When  Mr.  Baker  sent  me  this  species,  with  the  statement  that  it 
was  found  on  Solidago,  I  could  hardly  believe  there  had  not  been 
some  mistake,  as  it  so  nearly  resembled  P.  zebrata,  which  I  have 


Fig.  12.  Fig.  11. 

found  always  on  Cleome,  never  on  Solidago.  Mr.  Baker,  however, 
assures  me  that  there  has  been  no  mistake  ;  and  on  re-examining  the 
series  I  find  that  it  differs  from  zebrata,  in  the  males  at  least,  by  the 
average  greater  reduction  of  the  pale  bands  of  the  abdomen,  and 
constantly  in  the  broader  supraclypeal  mark.  We  thus  appear  to 
have  a  species  in  the  early  stages  of  difterentiation,  perhaps  hardly 
to  be  regarded  as  more  than  a  race  of  zebrata.  I  have  taken  the 
liberty  of  naming  it  after  Mrs.  Baker,  who  has  collected  part  of  the 
material  received  from  Fort  Collins. 

Since  the  above  was  written,  I  have  examined  the  $  genitalia  of 
canina  (zebrata)  and  bakerce,  and  find  apparently  good  distinctions. 
See  fig.  12. 

Three  species  found  on  Solidago  in  Colorado,  one  being  also  found 
at  Santa  Fe,  N.  M. 

25.  Perdita  affinis  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  fi'j.     c?  5    (Hab.,  Colorado). 

Five  specimens  were  collected  by  Ridings  ;  I  have  examined  one 
of  the  types.  Mr.  Baker  sends  me  two  9  s  taken  at  Fort  Collins, 
Colo.,  one  on  Aug.  8th,  the  other  on  Aug.  15,  1895.  The  latter  was 
on  Solidago  canadensis. 

Cressou's  description  is  not  entirely  satisfactory.  The  nervures 
and  stigma  (except  the  hyaline  centre)  are  dark.  The  clypeus  in 
Mr.  Baker's  examples  has  two  black  bars ;  in  the  type  specimen 
examined  these  bars  are  present,  though  not  so  much  developed. 

The  vertex  and  mesothorax  are  dark  green,  granulai',  dull.  The 
clypeus  is  not  hairy.      The  wings  are  slightly  smoky ;  the  marginal 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  71 

cell  has  the  poststigmatal  portion  appreciably  longer  than  the  sub- 
stiofmatal,  the  third  discoidal  is  distinct. 

From  P.  pedidis,  it  differs  thus : 

(1).  Larger,  niesothorax  dull,  granulated,  markings  of  face  and 
abdomen  yellowish,      .....         z=zajffinis  9  . 

(2).  Smaller,  niesothorax  smooth,  very  shiny,  markings  of  face 
and  abdomen  white,     .....      =pectidis  9  • 

In  its  face-markings,  dull  mesothorax  and  dark  nervures  P. 
<(ffinis  9  agrees  precisely  with  octomaculata  9  ,  but  it  differs  thus : 

(1).  Larger,  markings  of  abdomen  chrome-yellow,  wings  tinged 
smoky  or  yellowish,     ....       =octomaculata  9  • 

(2).  Smaller,  markings  of  abdomen  creamy  or  yellowish-white, 
wings  clear  or  nearly  so,      .         .         .         .         =^affinis  9  • 

I  have  not  seen  the  $  of  affinis.  Mr.  Fox  kindly  sends  me  a 
sketch  of  the  face-markings,  showing  the  face  all  yellow  below  the 
level  of  the  antennse,  the  yellow  extending  above  in  the  median  line 
as  a  small  rounded  projection,  and  at  the  sides  obliquely  from  the 
antennal  sockets  to  the  orbital  margin,  where  it  ends  at  an  angle 
of  about  50".  Thus  the  face-markings  of  affinis  $  differ  at  once 
from  those  of  octomaculata  $ ,  which  has  the  yellow  confined  to 
clypeus  and  sides  of  face,  except  a  couple  of  small  spots  or  streaks 
in  the  place  of  the  supraclypeal  mark. 

26.  Perdita  sexmaculataCkll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  12.     9  (Hab,,  Santa  Fe, 

N.  M.). 

The  unique  type  was  taken  on  July  25th  ;  it  could  hardly  have  been 
on  Solidago,  which  would  not,  I  think,  be  in  flower  at  Santa  Fe  at 
that  time.  I  have  a  note  in  my  diary  that  on  Aug.  2,  1895,  Solid- 
ago canadensis  was  only  beginning  to  flower,  and  was  visited  by  a 
few  Halictus.  The  form  found  on  Solidago  in  Colorado  represents 
a  variety,  as  follows : 

Var.  punctata  $ . 

Length  about  6  mm. ;  abdomen  with  only  4  pale  dots,  on  segments 
3  and  4.  As  it  is  possible  that  this  will  prove  to  be  a  distinct 
species  when  a  good  series  is  collected,  the  following  additional 
particulars  are  oflered : 

Head  and  thorax  greenish-black,  metathorax  blue-black.  Man- 
dibles yellowish  with  rufous  tips.  Face  and  mesothorax  very  little 
hairy.  Vertex  and  mesothorax  granular,  quite  distinctly  dark 
greenish.  Clypeus  black,  minutely  granular,  sparsely  and  irregu- 
larly punctate.     Scutellum  with  the  granulations  becoming  obsolete 


72  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

on  the  shining  disc.  Wings  slightly  smoky,  nervures  and  stigma 
dark  brown,  stigma  not  hyaline  in  middle.  Marginal  cell  short,, 
distinctly  appendiculate,  the  poststigmatal  portion  shorter  than  the 
substigmatal.  Recurrent  and  transverse  cubital  nervures  broken  by 
hyaline  dots.  Third  discoidal  distinct.  Cubital  and  subdiscoidal 
nervures  produced  far  beyond  the  cells,  the  latter  to  the  margin  of 
the  wing.  Four  middle  tarsi  rufotestaceous,  as  also  the  anterior 
knees,  and  anterior  tibiie  before.  The  light  dots  on  abdomen  are 
inconspicuous,  so  that  it  appears  at  first  sight  immaculate  brown- 
black. 

Hah. — Fort  Collins,  Colorado,  Aug.  8, 1895,  on  Solidago  canaden- 
sis;  one  example,  sent  by  Mr.  Baker.  The  head  is  shorter  than  in 
affinis,  and  the  pale  face-marks  are  wanting ;  the  marginal  cell  is 
also  shorter. 

27.  Perdita  rectangulata  n.  sp.    Fig.  13,  (face-marks). 

$  . — About  5^  mm.  long.  Head  and  thorax  dark  brassy -green , 
granular,  dull ;  metathorax  bluish.  Head  of  ordinary  shape  and 
size.  Clypeus,  supraclypeal  mark,  lateral  face-marks,  and  spot  mid- 
way between  antennse  and  middle  ocellus,  lemon-yellow.  Between 
the  supraclypeal  mark  and  the  frontal  spot,  the  usual  facial  keel  is 
well-developed,  slightly  intruding  into  the  spot.  The  supraclypeal 
mark  is  approximately  rectangular,  clear  cut,  about  twice  as  broad 
as  long.  The  dots  on  the  clypeus  are  obscure.  The  lateral  fiice- 
marks  are  broad  at  base,  reaching  the  point  on  the  cly- 
peus next  to  the  dot,  gradually  narrowing  upward,  un- 
til at  a  point  about  level  with  the  upper  edge  of  the 
antennal  sockets  they  are  squarely  truncate  nearly  to 
Fig  T'  the  orbital  margin,  but  still  are  continued  upward  along 
the  latter  as  a  narrow  stripe  a  little  longer  than  the 
width  at  the  truncation.  The  clypeus  is  rather  of  the  Panama-hat 
type,  with  the  lateral  narrow  prolongation  to  the  base  of  the  mandi- 
bles, but  the  central  portion  (crown  of  the  hat)  is  higher.  The  face 
is  nearly  hairless.  Mandibles  stout,  simple,  curved,  pale  yellow 
with  dark  tips. 

Antennse  with  the  scape  entirely  yellow  ;  funicle  and  flagellum 
dark  brown  above,  yellow  below. 

Mesothorax  moderately  hairy  for  a  Perdita.  Collar,  hind  border 
of  prothorax  and  tubercles  connecting  with  it,  yellow.  Tegulse 
yellowish-hyaline.  Wings  hyaline,  nervures  and  stigma  pale  yel- 
low ;  marginal  cell  with  the  poststigmatal  portion  longest ;  3d  sub- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  73 

marginal  large,  narrowed  more  than  half  to  the  marginal  ;  3d  dis- 
coidal  distinct.  Legs  yellow,  tarsi  pale  testaceous ;  spot  on  middle 
femora  and  tibiae,  a  large  blotch  on  hind  femora,  and  hind  tibiae 
except  basal  third,  black. 

Abdomen  above  lemon-yellow,  the  last  segment  slightly  orange. 
First  segment  with  two  black  spots ;  rather  broad  black  bands  at 
hind  margins  of  segments  1-4,  intruding  a  little,  especially  at  sides, 
on  the  base  of  the  segment  following,  not  at  all  notched,  nor  joined 
together.     Venter  yellow  without  bands. 

S  . — Differs  as  follows  :  Scape  with  a  small  black  stripe  above. 
Face  below  antennae  all  yellow,  owing  to  the  space  beneath  the 
antennat  being  filled  in  by  well-developed  dog-ear  marks,  and  to  the 
supraclypeal  mark  being  higher.  The  lateral  face-marks  are  rather 
obliquely  (not  squarely)  truncate,  and  are  scarcely  at  all  produced 
along  the  orbital  margin  above  the  truncation.  The  frontal  pale 
spot  is  wanting.  The  collar  is  not  yellow,  and  the  yellow  border  of 
prothorax  is  reduced  to  two  marks,  the  tubercles  also  remaining 
yellow.  The  nervures  and  stigma  are  dark  brown,  the  marginal 
cell  is  longer,  and  the  second  submarginal  less  narrowed  above. 
Legs  black,  with  the  knees  and  anterior  femora  and  tibiae  in  front, 
yellow.  The  abdomen  is  black,  with  orange  or  yellow  clean-cut 
interrupted  bands  on  segments  1-4.  Venter  dark.  The  cheeks  are 
unarmed. 

Hab. — Fort  Collins,  Colorado,  Aug.  15,  1895,  on  Solidago  cana- 
densis; one  9,  one  $ ,  sent  by  Mr.  Baker.  The  S  is  so  different 
from  the  9  ,  that  it  may  be  a  distinct  species  ;  but  the  face-markings 
are  exactly  such  as  might  belong  to  the  sexes  of  a  species,  and  there 
are  several  points  of  similarity  in  structure.  In  a  case  of  this  sort, 
one  decides  partly  by  the  circumstances  of  the  capture,  the  two  sexes 
having  been  taken  from  the  same  flowers  on  the  same  day. 

Three  other  species  from  Colorado,  habits  unknoicn. 
28.  Perdita  snowii  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  5*  mm.  Head  and  thorax  dark  brassy-green,  dull 
and  granular,  metathorax  bluish  and  more  shining.  Head  fairly 
large,  approximately  round  ;  face  very  little  hairy,  although  the 
mesothorax  and  other  parts  of  thorax  are  quite  hairy,  the  hairs 
being  of  a  pale  brownish  color,  dirty  white  on  the  under  parts. 
Mandibles  stout,  simple,  yellowish  with  rufous  ends.  Antennae  dark 
brown,  scape  pale  beneath.     Clypeus,  and  sides  of  face  rather  nar- 

6 


74  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

rowly  up  to  level  of  antennae,  dull  pale  yellowish.  The  face-marks 
at  sides  are  abruptly  truncate  at  their  upper  end,  the  truncation  a 
little  oblique.  Supraclypeal  and  dog-ear  marks  wanting.  Tuber- 
cles and  two  spots  on  hind  border  of  prothorax,  pale  yellowish  or 
subtestaceous.  Wings  dull  hyaline,  iridescent,  nervures  and  stigma 
rather  dark  yellowish-brown,  stigma  centrally  subhyaline.  Mar- 
ginal cell  large,  appendiculate,  poststigmatal  portion  longest.  Second 
submarginal  large,  narrowed  more  than  one-half  to  marginal ;  3d 
discoidal  distinct.     Tegulse  hyaline. 

Legs  brown-black,  hairy ;  anterior  femora  at  ends,  and  anterior 
tibise,  except  a  patch  behind,  yellow;  anterior  tarsi,  middle  and 
hind  knees,  and  much  of  middle  tibise,  yellowish  testaceous.  Hind 
tibise  in  the  type  specimen  with  a  mass  of  dull  orange  pollen. 

Abdomen  above  dull  brownish-white  ;  first  segment  black  at  base  ; 
segments  1-4  with  broad  brown-black  bands  on  their  hind  halves, 
these  bands  not  at  all  interrupted,  those  on  segments  2-3  conspicu- 
ously thickest  in  the  middle,  those  on  1-2  joined  laterally  by  a 
longitudinal  line  ;  5th  segment  hairy,  with  a  rudimentary  band. 
Venter  brown. 

Hab. — Estes  Park,  Colorado,  August,  1892  (F.  H.  Snow,  No. 

210).     One  specimen,  sent  by  Mr.  Fox.     The  abdomen  may  have 

been  more  brightly  colored  in  life.     P.  snotvii  differs  from  nitidella 

9   at  once  by  its  dull  hairy  mesothorax;  from  bigelovice  9  it  differs 

in  shape  of  lateral  marks  of  face,  as  well  as  in  abdomen. 

29.  Perdita  luteiceps  n.  sp. 

$ . — Length  about  5  mm.  Cheeks  unarmed.  Head  moderately 
large,  rounded,  somewhat  broader  than  long,  deep  yellow  with  dark 
green  markings.  There  is  a  spot  close  to  each  anterior  orbital  mar- 
gin above  the  level  of  the  antennae  (as  in  pundosignata) ,  the  ocelli 
are  situated  on  an  irregular  transverse  dark  patch,  and  the  occiput 
is  dark,  from  it  also  coming  a  narrow  dark  stripe  toward,  but  not 
reaching,  the  upper  end  of  the  eye.    Labrum  and  mandibles  yellow. 

Antennae  yellow,  funicle  with  a  black  patch  above,  joints  of 
flagellum  slightly  darkened  above. 

Thorax  dark  bronzy -green,  very  granular,  moderately  dull,  meta- 
thorax  a  bluer  green.  Prothorax  yellow  except  a  transverse  dark 
stripe.  A  transverse  yellow  patch  near  hind  border  of  mesothorax, 
and  a  little  yellow  along  hind  border  of  scutellura.  Pleura  hairy, 
dark  with  a  moderately  small  yellow  patch.  Mesothorax  hairy  in 
front,  nearly  hairless  behind. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  75 

Tegulse  yellowish  hyaline.  Wings  hyaline,  nervures  and  stigma 
(except  its  hyaline  centre)  very  pale  yellow.  Marginal  cell  rather 
long,  substigmatal  portion  about  as  long  as  poststigniatal ;  a  linear 
appendiculate  nervure  longer  than  the  marginal  itself;  2d  sub- 
marginal  rather  large,  narrowed  a  little  more  than  half  to  marginal ; 
3d  discoidal  distinct. 

Legs  yellow ;  a  blackish  patch  on  middle  femora  and  tibiae  be- 
behind,  hind  legs  blackish  except  knees. 

Abdomen  above  yellow  ;  first  segment  narrowly  dark  at  base;  at 
the  sutures  of  all  the  segments  is  a  narrow  black  band,  which  takes 
the  form  of  two  transversely  elongate  spots  on  the  hind  margin  of 
each  segment,  adjacent  to  a  narrow  entire  band  on  anterior  margin 
of  the  next.  None  of  the  bands  are  united  laterally.  The  yellow 
is  much  more  developed  in  proportion  to  the  black  than  in  martini. 
Venter  yellow,  immaculate. 

Hab. — Glen  wood  Springs,  Colorado,  Aug.  24, 1894.  Collected  by 
Prof.  Gillette  ;  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  Fox.  The  unique  specimen  is 
unfortunately  reddened  by  cyanide.  P.  luteiceps  is  very  near  martini, 
but  differs  by  the  brassy-green  (not  blue)  thorax,  the  vertex  with  a 
transverse  yellow  band  above  the  ocelli,  and  in  the  greater  develop- 
ment of  yellow  on  the  abdomen.  It  is  to  be  added  that  martini  is  a 
spring  species,  while  luteiceps  was  caught  in  late  summer.  It  is 
curious  that  among  the  numerous  late  summer  species  of  Per dita  at 
Las  Cruces,  the  locality  of  martini,  none  resemble  it  so  closely  as 
luteiceps. 

30.  Perdita  dubia  n.  sp. 

^ . — About  or  slightly  over  5  mm.  long.  Very  like  the  3'  of 
hakerce  or  zebrata,  resembling  them  in  the  shining  mesothorax,  color 
of  head  and  thorax,  face-markings,  etc.  The  mesothorax  is  a  rather 
yellower-green.  The  supraclypeal  mark  is  heart-shaped  with  the 
apex  cut  off,  thus  differently  shaped  from  that  of  bakerce  or  zebrata, 
but  nearest  to  zebrata.  The  dog-ear  marks  are  a  little  reduced, 
leaving  a  perceptible  amount  of  dark  color  between  them  and  the 
clypeus.  The  lateral  face-mark,  formed  as  in  zebrata,  presents  an 
obscure  dark  streak  on  its  upper  portion.  The  sides  of  the  face  are 
more  hairy  than  in  zebrata  or  bakerce.  The  cheeks  are  very  hairy. 
The  labrum  presents  a  conspicuous  pit.  The  thorax  is  rather  more 
hairy  than  in  bakerce  or  zebrata.  The  posterior  and  middle  femora 
are  entirely  yellow,  except  for  the  slightest  indication  of  black  on 
the  posterior  ones;  otherwise  the  legs  resemble  those  of  bakerce. 


76  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Wings  hyaline,  nervures  sepia-brown,  stigma  hyaline  in  middle. 
The  marginal  cell  is  distinctly  longer  than  in  bakerce  or  zebrata,  and 
has  the  poststigmatal  portion  longest.  Second  submarginal  large, 
narrowed  one-half  to  marginal ;  3d  discoidal  absent. 

Abdomen  above  with  nearly  equally  broad  bands  of  yellow  and 
black.  First  segment  all  black ;  then  follow  four  black  bands  at 
the  junction  of  the  segments,  none  interrupted,  nor  joined  at  the 
middle  or  the  sides.  Tip  blackish.  Venter  yellow,  with  a  little 
black  along  the  sutures. 

Hab. — Glenwood  Springs,  Colorado,  Aug.  24, 1894.  Collected  by 
Prof.  Gillette,  sent  by  Mr.  Fox.  Like  the  last,  taken  at  the  same 
time,  it  is  reddened  by  cyanide.  It  is  unfortunate  that  we  know 
nothing  about  the  habits  of  this  species,  and  have  only  a  single 
specimen.  It  will  be  recognized  by  the  regular  entire  abdominal 
bands,  the  coloration  of  the  legs,  etc. 

A  species  from  California,  habitat  unknown,  S  unknown. 
31.  Perdita  trisignata  n.  sp.     Fig.  14,  (face-marks). 

9  . — Length  about  bi  mm.  Head  and  thorax  blue-black  or 
greenish-black,  the  tint  difficult  to  define.  Head  of  ordinary  size, 
nearly  round,  somewhat  depressed  on  vertex  ;  face  very  sparsely 
hairy,  cheeks  not  so  hairy  as  in  many  species.  Vertex  dull  and 
very  distinctly  granulose.  Middle  ocellus  in  a  distinct  depression. 
Mandibles  stout,  yellowish,  with  rufous  tips  and  bases.  Clypeus 
brown-black,  contrasting  with  the  distinctly  green  face  above  it ;  in 
shape  high,  something  like  a  cocked-hat.  Face-markings  pale  lemon- 
yellow,  consisting  of  a  longitudinal  median  stripe  on  clypeus,  start- 
ing from  its  hind-border  but  not  reaching  its  anterior  border ;  and 
the  lateral  marks,  elongate-pyriform,  with  the  upper  end  pointed 
and  level  with  the  sockets  of  the  antennse.  The  clypeal 
mark  suggests  that  of  obscurata.  Antennse  dark  brown. 
Mesothorax  only  sparsely  hairy,  distinctly  granular 
and  punctured,  the  punctures  sparse  but  distinct. 
Fig  14.  Metathorax  granular,  very  dull,  duller  than  scutellum 
and  postscutellum.  Pleura  hairy,  with  white  hairs. 
Tubercles  and  two  spots  on  hind  margin  of  prothorax  yellow. 
Tegulse  testaceous,  subhyaline. 

Wings  rather  small,  yellowish-hyaline,  nervures  and  stigma  tes- 
taceous. Stigma  small  and  narrow  ;  marginal  cell  very  large,  post- 
stigmatal portion  noticeably  longest.  Second  submarginal  large, 
narrowed  more  than  one-half  to  marginal ;  3d  discoidal  distinct. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  77 

Legs  dark  brown  with  the  tarsi  testaceous  ;  anterior  and  middle 
tibiae  in  front,  and  corresponding  knees,  dull  yellow.  Abdomen 
above  and  below  dark  reddish-brown,  without  markings. 

Hab. — California,  collector  and  exact  locality  unknown  ;  sent  by 
Mr.  Fox.  One  specimen,  known  by  the  yellowish  wings,  abdomen 
Avithout  markings,  etc. 

Two  species  described  by  F.  Smith,  exact  locality  and  habits  unknown. 

32.  Perdita  halictoides  Sm.,  Br.  Mus.  Cat.,  Vol.  I,  p.  128,  (1853).     $   (Hab.  North 
America). 

The  description  indicates  that  this  species  is  similar  to  P.  semiero- 
cea,  but  differs  in  having  the  nervures  fuscous  (in  semicrocea  they 
are  colorless),  the  abdomen  dark  testaceous,  and  the  legs  rufotesta- 
ceous  with  the  tarsi  pale. 

33.  Perdita  bicolor  (Sm.). 

Macrotera  bicolor  Sm.,  Br.  Mus.  Cat.,  Vol.  I,  p.  130,  (1853).  "9"  (Hab.  Mexico). 

The  description  shows  that  this  species  is  twice  as  large  as  the 
last,  the  head  and  thorax  black  and  the  abdomen  ferruginous,  more 
or  less  fuscous  at  base.  It  might,  perhaps,  be  confused  with  M.  texana, 
but  the  abdomen  is  elongate-ovate  and  the  mandibles  are  rounded  at 
their  apex,  simple.  The  wing  nervures  are  ferruginous.  P.  texana 
has  a  ferruginous  abdomen  only  in  the  i  . 

As  the  description  of  this  insect  did  not  enable  me  to  ascertain 
definitely  whether  it  belonged  to  the  group  (or  genus)  of  P.  texana 
=  megacephala  and  P.  latior,  I  applied  to  Mr.  E.  A.  Smith,  of  the 
British  Museum,  asking  him  to  kindly  examine  his  father's  type, 
and  report  on  certain  points  specified.  He  handed  my  letter  to  Lt. 
Col.  Bingham,  who  very  kindly  examined  the  typical  specimen,  and 
reported  as  follows : 

"  1.  The  type  is  a  ^ ,  not  a  9  .  It  has  the  two  basal  segments  fus- 
cous, the  3d  and  following  segments  ferruginous,  with  the  apical  one, 
which  is  very  small  and  somewhat  hidden  by  the  fimbria  of  pale 
hairs  on  the  posterior  margin  of  the  6th  segment,  black. 

"  2.  The  mandibles  are  deeply  grooved  on  the  outside  from  near 
the  base  to  the  apex,  which,  however,  does  not  appear  to  be  bifid. 

"3.  The  figure  of  the  marginal  cell  given  in  Part  I,  pi.  V,  f.  22, 
of  Smith's  Catalogue,  is  fairly  good,  the  cell  may  be  a  little  more 
obliquely  truncate  at  apex,  perhaps. 

"  4.  From  Cresson's  description  of  31.  megacephala  $ ,  Smith's 
type  of  bicolor  difiers  as  noted  above  in  the  basal  segments  of  the 


78  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

abdomeu  being  fuscous,  and  in  the  posterior  tibise  being  clothed  with 
a  '  a  thin  scopa  '  of  pale  yellow  pubescence,  as  Smith  described, 
which  has  now  faded  to  a  dirty  white." 

While  I  am  not  yet  certain,  I  am  decidedly  inclined  to  suppose 
that  we  may  after  all  recognize  Macrotera  as  a  valid  genus,  with 
these  species,  M.  bicolor  Sm.,  31.  texana  Cr.,  and  3/.  latior  (Ckll.). 

A  species  from  Nevada,  yellow  loith  black  markings,  habits  unknown^ 
9  unknown. 

34.  Perdita  cephalotes  (Cr.)  Cr.,  Cat.  Hym.,  1887,  p.  296. 

Macrotera  cephalotes  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  71.  cT  (Hab.  Nevada). 

Described  from  a  single  specimen,  collected  by  Mr.  Hy.  Edwards, 
It  has  a  very  large  head,  after  the  manner  of  grandiceps  and  crassi- 
ceps,  but  the  markings  are  very  like  those  of  punctosignata. 

Two  specimens  were  obtained  by  the  Death  Valley  Expedition  in 
the  Panamint  Mountains.    (N.  Amer.  Fauna,  No.  7,  1893,  p.  246). 

Tivo  species  found  on  mesquite  in  New  Mexico. 

35.  Perdita  punctosignata  Ckll.,  Suppt.  to  Psyche,  Sept.,  1895,  p.  6.  cf .  (Hab.  Las 
Cruces,  N.  M.). 

Two  specimens  are  known,  both  from  mesquite;  one  taken  by 
Miss  J.  Casad,  the  other  by  Mr.  Alfred  M.  Holt.  The  latter  speci- 
men has  a  large  yellow  patch  on  dorsum  of  metathorax,  instead  of 
two  spots.     The  eyes  are  pale  coffee-color  Avith  a  purplish  tint. 

36.  Perdita  exclamans  (Ckll.). 

Perdita  7iitidella  var.  exclamans  Ckll.,  Suppl.  to  Psyche,  Sept.,  1895,  p.  5.  ^.    (Hab. 
Las  Cruces,  N.  M.). 

This  and  the  last  are  spring  species,  found  in  May.  P.  nitidella^ 
which  frequents  Bigelovia  in  the  late  summer  and  early  autumn,  is 
unquestionably  distinct  from  exelamans.  'Of  the  latter  we  know 
four  specimens,  3^,1?.  Prof.  Townsend  took  a  $  some  years 
ago ;  this  is  the  specimen  formerly  reported  in  error  as  nitklella. 
Miss  Casad  found  the  type  specimen,  and  the  other  two  were  ob- 
tained at  the  same  locality  by  Mr.  A.  M.  Holt  in  1895,  a  <?  on  a 
young  Cottonwood  tree,  not  in  flower,  and  near  some  mesquite 
bushes,  May  9th,  and  a  9  on  mesquite.  May  13th. 

The  9   may  be  described  as  follows  : 

9  . — Larger,  about  6  mm.  long,  Antennre  dark  brown  above^ 
yellow  beneath.  Clypeus  cocked-hat  shape,  flattened  above,  very 
pale  yellowish  with  the  usual  two  dark  dots.  Supraclypeal  yellow 
mark  well-developed,  produced  above  into  a  narrow  stripe  widening 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  79 

into  a  large  frontal  patch,  so  that  the  whole  has  the  shape  of  an 
hour-glass.  The  frontal  patch  is  separated  by  a  moderately  wide 
interval  from  the  anterior  ocellus.  Dog-ear  marks  present  but 
small,  their  tips  about  level  with  the  top  of  the  clypeus.  Lateral 
ftice-marks  receding  from  the  clypeus  close  to  the  dark  dots,  leaving 
a  wide  band  of  dark  color  between  them  and  the  upper  part  of  the 
clypeus,  etc.  ;  at  the  level  of  the  antennal  sockets  they  are  suddenly 
narrowed,  ascending  the  orbital  margin  as  a  thin  band,  rather  sud- 
denly widening  opposite  the  middle  of  the  frontal  patch,  and  termi- 
nating roundly  and  abruptly  at  the  level  of  the  hind  margin  of  the 
anterior  ocellus.     Lower  part  of  cheeks  pale  yellow. 

Prothorax  and  narrow  lateral  borders  of  mesothorax  yellow- 
Pleura  entirely  dark.  Metathorax  blue,  rugulose,  contrasting  with 
the  scutellum,  postscutellum  and  mesothorax,  which  are  brassy- 
greenish,  very  smooth,  shining,  polished,  the  scutellum  with  distinct 
sparse  punctures.  The  vertex  is  green,  but  rugulose  and  punctured. 
Legs  as  in  $ ,  but  hind  tibia  and  tarsus  all  brown.  Wings  with  3d 
discoidal  cell  distinct ;  2d  submargiual  narrowed  less  than  half  to 
marginal. 

Abdomen -above  yellow  ;  markings  dark  sepia,  first  segment  dark 
at  base,  connecting  with  a  blotch  on  each  side,  hind  margins  of  seg- 
ments 1-4  with  dark  bands,  connecting  laterally  with  a  spot  on 
proximal  margins  of  3  and  4,  but  these  spots  lacking  on  fifth  seg- 
ment, while  the  bands  on  1  and  2  are  broadly  confluent  along  lateral 
margin.     Vertex  yellow,  immaculate. 

This  is  very  different  from  the  9   of  nitidella. 

Two  species  found  in  spring  in  the  Mesilla  Valley,  N.  M.,  habits 
unknown,  9  unknown. 

37.  Perdita  martini  Ckll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  14.    c?.   (Hab.  Las  Cruees, 
N.  M.). 

The  unique  specimen  was  taken  on  April  26th. 

38.  Perdita  hirsuta  n.  sp. 

$ . — Length  about  5  mm.  Head  and  thorax  blue,  granular, 
unusually  hairy  with  white  hairs,  but  the  disc  of  metathorax,  and 
yellow  face  below  antennre,  bare.  Head  of  ordinary  size,  rounded, 
a  little  broader  than  long;  cheeks  unarmed.  Face  just  above  the 
level  of  the  antennae  conspicuously  hairy,  the  hairs  arranged  so  as  to 
appear  to  radiate  from  the  antennse.  Antennre  black  above,  yellow 
beneath,  the  scape  with  only  a  black  blotch  above.     Mandibles  very 


80  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

straight,  very  pale  yellowish  with  rufescent  tips.  Clypeus  rather 
cocked-hat  shape,  flattened  above,  with  the  sides  very  rapidly  de- 
scending and  the  prolongation  to  the  base  of  mandibles  very  nar- 
row. Face  below  antennae  all  lemon-yellow,  except  the  usual  cly- 
peal  dots.  Above  the  antennre  the  yellow  extends  only  as  a  small 
projection  in  the  median  line,  and  a  little  along  the  orbits,  so  that 
the  upper  angle  of  the  yellow  with  the  orbital  margin  is  about 
50°  instead  of  a  right  angle.  Lower  half  of  the  cheeks  with  a  yel- 
low band  along  orbital  margin. 

Collar  and  hind  margin  of  prothorax  connecting  with  tubercles 
but  failing  in  the  middle  line,  yellow.  Tegulse  hyaline.  Wings 
hyaline,  nervures  sepia-brown,  stigma  margined  with  brown.  Mar- 
ginal cell  moderately  long,  appendiculate,  the  poststigmatal  portion 
about  as  long  as  substigmatal.  Second  submarginal  not  narrowing 
quite  one-half  to  marginal ;  3d  discoidal  fairly  distinct.  Legs  yel- 
low, anterior  and  middle  femora  and  tibice  with  a  black  patch  be- 
hind, hind  femora  and  tibiae  black  with  a  yellow  stripe  in  front,  hind 
tarsi  blackish. 

Abdomen  above  with  about  equally  broad  bands  of  black  and 
yellow.  First  segment  basally  black.  The  five  dark  bands  are  not 
interrupted,  nor  joined  medially  or  laterally.  Sixth  segment  with 
three  dark  spots.     Venter  yellow,  immaculate. 

Hah. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  on  the  College  Farm,  May  2d,  1895. 
One  specimen  collected  by  A,  M.  Holt. 

Two  species  found  on  willow  in  the  Mesilla  Valley,  N.  M. 

39.  Perdita  numerata  Ckll.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1895,  p.  296.    ?.    (Hab.  Las  Cruces, 

N.  M.). 

One  specimen  is  known,  taken  on  May  2d,  associated  with  P. 
salicis.  It  resembles  most  the  9  of  bigelovice,  but  the  stigma  is 
entirely  dark  and  the  clypeus  has  two  broad  black  bars.  The  mar- 
ginal cell  is  short,  appendiculate  ;  the  2d  submarginal  is  large,  very 
broad  below,  narrowed  considerably  more  than  half  to  marginal. 

40.  Perdita  salicis  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  5  mm.  Head  and  thorax  shining  dark  green  ;  head 
bluish-green,  mesothorax  and  scutellum  brassy-green,  metathorax 
dark  blue.  Head  rounded,  of  ordinary  size;  vertex  minutely 
roughened,  cheeks  only  sparsely  hairy  ;  clypeus  except  two  black 
dots,  the  area  between  clypeus  and  antennae,  and  sides  of  face  nar- 
rowly terminating  in  an  acute  point  about  half  the  length  of  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  81 

scape  above  the  level  of  insertion  of  antennae,  dull  pale  yellow.  In 
the  median  line  the  pale  color  is  sometimes  carried  upward  as  a 
narrow  stripe  about  two-thirds  of  the  distance  between  insertion  of 
antennae  and  middle  ocellus.  Mandibles  simple,  unusually  stout, 
blunt  at  tips,  dull  pale  yellowish  with  rufous  ends.  Mouth  parts 
only  moderately  elongated.  Antennae  black  above,  yellow  beneath, 
the  yellow  predominating  on  scape,  the  black  on  flagellum. 

Mesothorax  very  shiny,  sparsely  punctured.  Prothorax  includ- 
ing tubercles  either  entirely  yellow,  or  the  anterior  and  posterior 
borders  broadly  yellow,  leaving  a  narrow  transverse  dark  band. 
Legs  entirely  yellow,  except  hind  tibiae  and  tarsi,  which  are  brown- 
ish.    The  middle  tibiae  sometimes  show  a  brown  patch. 

Tegulae  yellowish  hyaline.  Wings  hyaline,  costal  nervure  and 
margin  of  stigma  dark  brown,  tiie  other  nervures  practically  color- 
less. Marginal  cell  rather  obliquely  truncate,  the  substigmatal 
portion  about  as  long  as  poststigmatal ;  2d  submarginal  not  or 
hardly  narrowed  one-half  to  marginal,  the  degree  of  narrowing 
variable ;  3d  discoidal  distinct.  Abdomen  above  black,  with  five 
very  regular  yellow  bands,  the  first  slightly  interrupted.  The  black 
and  yellow  are  nearly  of  equal  width,  so  that  the  abdomen  might  be 
said  to  be  alternately  black  and  yellow-banded.  Venter  entirely 
yellow  with  an  orange  tinge. 

$  . — Length  4  mm.  Cheeks  unarmed.  More  pubescent,  antennae 
more  yellow.  Mandibles  pointed  but  not  slender,  the  shining 
rufous  tips  very  distinctly  separated  from    the  yellowish  portion. 

Face  all  pale  yellow  up  to  level  of  antennae,  the  yellow  extending 
further  upward,  in  the  median  line  as  a  narrow  mark  of  the  shape 
of  a  spear-head,  scarcely  the  length  of  the  scape,  and  at  the  sides 
about  the  length  of  the  scape  along  orbital  margiq,  but  very  obliquely 
truncate,  and  notched  on  its  inner  side  below  the  truncation.  Pro- 
thorax  with  more  black.  Mesothorax  and  scutellum  bluer.  Hind 
femora  with  a  dark  brown  patch  near  the  end.  Nervures  brown  ; 
3d  discoidal  very  indistinct. 

Abdomen  above  with  only  four  bands;  these  narrower,  and 
divided  or  deeply  notched  in  middle.  Sometimes  the  abdomen  has 
only  three  bands. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  in  the  town,  numerous  at  flowers  of 
narrow-leaved  willow  and  another  species  of  willow,  May  2,  May  3, 
May  5,  1895.  They  are  associated  on  the  willows  with  Halictus, 
Andrena  and  Prosopis. 


82  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  small  ■■species  of  the  Pedis  and  Cladothrix. 

41.  Perdita  cladothricis  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  3i-3S  mm.  Head  and  thorax  shining,  very  dark 
peneous,  face  entirely  dark,  clypeus  and  metathorax  black.  Abdo- 
men dark  sepia-brown,  with  a  transversely  elongate  mark  or  band 
of  white  at  base  of  second  segment.  Legs  dark  brown,  the  anterior 
knees  and  the  tarsi,  pale  or  whitish.  Antennae  dark  brown.  Vertex 
very  minutely  sculptured.  The  usual  pale  hairs  are  very  little  de- 
veloped anywhere,  except  at  sides  of  end  of  abdomen ;  the  post- 
scutellum  and  the  sides  of  the  metathorax  are  bare  and  shining. 
Wings  hyaline,  beautifully  iridescent,  nervures  fuscous,  stigma  pale 
brown,  3d  discoidal  cell  distinct,  marginal  with  the  substigmatal 
portion  longer  than  the  poststigmatal,  1st  submarginal  broad,  2d 
submarginal  small  and  triangular,  narrowing  to  a  j^oint  at  junction 
with  marginal. 

S. — Length  2j-3  mm.  Cheeks  unarmed.  IDiffers  from  the  female 
at  once  by  the  foce,  which  (with  the  mandibles  except  their  reddish 
tips)  is  entirely  ivory-wliite  below  level  of  antennse,  the  white  more- 
over extending  a  short  distance  above  the  antennse,  in  the  form  of  a 
narrow  line  between  them,  and  a  broad  prolongation  on  each  side 
between  the  antennse  and  the  orbits,  not  quite  as  long  as  the  scape, 
and  ending  in  an  abrupt  truncation.  The  antennse  are  mainly  white 
beneath.  The  tubercles,  and  the  border  of  prothorax  adjacent  and 
in  front,  and  a  portion  of  the  anterior  part  of  the  pleura,  are  white. 
The  coxse,  a  considerable  portion  of  the  anterior  and  middle  femora, 
and  part  of  the  anterior  tarsi,  are  white. 

The  abdomen,  in  addition  to  the  white  band  of  the  9  ,  usually 
shows  a  longer  and  narrower  white  band  at  base  of  3d  segment. 
Venter  dirty  whitish,  becoming  brown  at  base  and  apex. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  very  abundant  on  Cladothrix  cryptan- 
tha  (det.  E.  O.  Wooton),  Sept.  15,  1895.  On  this  occasion  I  took  6 
^,12  9  ;  I  do  not  think  the  males  were  really  less  numerous,  but 
owing  to  their  small  size  and  incessant  activity  they  were  less  easily 
caught  than  the  females.  The  earliest  date  I  have  for  this  species 
is  a  ^  taken  on  Cladothrix,  associated  with  a  new  Oxyhelus,  in  the 
beginning  of  September.  Stray  examples  Avill  be  found  at  times  on 
other  plants.  On  September  17th,  four  9  were  obtained  by  sweeping 
from  Pedis  papposa,  but  Cladothrix  was  growing  within  a  few  feet 
of  the  Pedis.     On  September  2od,  a  9  Avas  obtained  from  Bigelovia 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  83 

wrlghtii.     On  September  25th,  a  few  9  were  caught  on  Gutierrezia 
sarothrce  v.  microcephala. 

42.  Perdita  pectidis  n.  sp. 

9  • — Head  and  thorax  black,  vertex  greenish.  Head  of  moderate 
size,  rounded,  somewhat  depressed  on  vertex.  Sides  of  clypeus  and 
sides  of  face  adjacent  to  orbital  margin  with  sparse  but  large  and 
deep  punctures.  Vertex  minutely  rugulose,  with  sparse  small  punc- 
tures. Cheeks  less  hairy  than  usual.  Mandibles  rufescent,  whitish 
at  base,  with  dark  tips.  Clypeus  with  three  rather  large  white 
marks,  the  central  one  longitudinally  oval.  Sides  of  face  with  an 
irregularly  subtriangular  white  patch,  narrowing  to  a  point  above, 
about  the  upper  level  of  the  sockets  of  the  antennae.  Antennae  with 
the  scape  black,  the  flagellum  sepia-brown. 

Mesothorax  smooth,  sparsely  punctured,  very  shiny.  Metathorax 
blue-black.  Collar,  tubercles,  and  a  couple  of  small  spots  on  hind 
border  of  prothorax,  white.  Tegulae  hyaline  subtestaceous.  Femora 
black,  knees  whitish.  Tibiae  and  tarsi  brown  ;  anterior  tibiae  in  front, 
and  a  stripe  on  middle  tibiae  pale  yellow. 

Wings  smoky,  nervures  and  stigma  sepia-brown.  Poststigmatal 
portion  of  marginal  cell  hardly  as  long  as  substigmatal ;  2d  submar- 
ginal  narrowed  more  than  half  to  marginal ;  3d  discoidal  distinct. 

Abdomen  above  very  dark  brown,  segments  1-4  each  with  an 
oblique  white  stripe  on  each  side.  Pygidial  area  dark  subrufescent. 
Venter  dark  brown. 

S. — Wings  clear.  Metathorax  quite  blue.  Mandibles  white  with 
rufescent  tips.  White  markings  of  face  as  in  cladothricis  $  .  Pale 
marks  of  abdomen  reduced,  sometimes  to  4  or  5  small  spots,  which 
are  then  pale  yellowish. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  in  numbers  on  Pedis  papposa,  Sept.  17, 
1895.  It  is  closely  allied  to  cladothricis,  but  differs  at  once  by  the 
face  of  the  9  iiot  being  all  dark,  and  the  different  abdominal  mark- 
ings. 

On  September  20th,  I  took  four  9  P. pectidis  from  flowers  of  Tri- 
hulus  maximus,  and  two,  also  9  >  from  flowers  of  Wedelia  incarnata. 

With  the  P.  pectidis  on  Pedis  papposa  were  a  few  P.  fallax,  9 
which  I  at  first  supposed  to  be  a  variety  of  it.  P.  fallax  is,  however, 
distinguished  by  its  greenish  head  and  thorax  (or  at  least  the  meso- 
thorax more  or  less  greenish),  scape  pale  yellowish  below  or  with  a 
yellow  stripe,  face-markings  tinged  distinctly  yellowish,  clypeus  pale, 
sometimes  with  two  black  bars,  diverging  below,  and  the  usual  black 


84  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

dots,  wings  clear,  abdominal  markings  inclined  to  be  smaller,  or 
wanting  on  4th  segment. 

43.  Perdita  biparticeps  n.  sp. 

S  . — Length  SJ  mm.  Head  and  thorax  very  dark  blue;  thorax 
practically  black,  except  the  metathorax.  Head  large  in  compari- 
son with  the  small  thorax,  rounded,  somewhat  broader  than  long, 
cheeks  unarmed.  Face  below  antennae,  labrum  and  mandibles  ex- 
cept their  slightly  rufescent  tips,  lemon-yellow.  The  yellow  extends 
above  the  antennae  a  short  distance  (and  equally)  in  the  median  line 
and  at  the  sides,  almost  exactly  as  in  the  $  of  affinu,  the  limit  of  the 
lateral  extension  marked  by  a  small  pit  close  to  the  ocular  margin, 
where  the  yellow  forms  an  angle  of  about  55°.  Cheeks  yellow  below, 
the  yellow  extending  furthest  upward  along  the  orbital  margin. 
Antennae  sepia  above,  yellow  below,  the  scape  all  yellow  except  end 
above.  Vertex  granular.  Mandibles  simjDle.  Mesothorax  shining 
but  noticeably  sculptured,  the  surface  liueolate  rather  than  granu- 
lar. The  mesothorax,  as  also  the  face,  is  very  free  from  hairs ;  and 
even  on  the  pleura  and  sides  of  metathorax  there  are  comparatively 
few.  The  upper  part  of  the  cheeks,  however,  exhibits  conspicuous 
white  hairs. 

Tegulae  hyaline  ;  wings  slightly  smoky,  nervures  and  stigma  sepia- 
brown,  the  latter  pallid  in  middle.  Marginal  cell  rather  large, 
appendiculate,  substigmatal  portion  about  as  long  as  poststigmatal ; 
2d  submarginal  rather  large,  narrowed  one-half  to  marginal;  3d 
discoidal  distinct. 

Legs  yellow,  anterior  and  middle  femora  and  tibiae  with  a  dark 
brown  patch  behind ;  posterior  femora  brown  with  yellow  ends  and 
an  obscure  yellow  stripe  in  front,  posterior  tibiae  brown  with  the 
proximal  fourth  pallid,  tarsi  whitish. 

Abdomen  above  pale  sepia-brown,  shining,  with  rather  obscure 
and  suffused  yellow  markings,  namely  a  patch  on  disc  of  1st  segment, 
and  bands  at  bases  of  segments  2-4,  the  last  two  of  these  shorter  and 
emarginate  posteriorly.      Venter  dull  yellow,  brownish  toward  tip. 

Hub. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  on  Pedis  paj^posa,  Sept.  17,  1895,  one 
example. 

Differs  from  rectangulata  by  its  small  size  and  shiny  mesothorax, 
as  well  as  the  markings  of  the  abdomen.  The  pleura  has  not  the 
yellow  patch  seen  in  maculipes. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  85 

Small  species  found  on  Gutierrezia,   9  unknown. 

44.  Perdita  austini  Ckll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  13.  cf  •    (Hab.,  Las  Cruces, 

N.  M.). 

The  type  was  taken  in  September.  The  cheeks  are  unarmed,  the 
mandibles  simple,  the  clypeus  of  the  Panama-hat  type,  with  the 
crown  higher,  more  like  a  Puritan's  hat.  The  mesothorax  is  shiny, 
it  and  the  face  nearly  bare;  but  the  cheeks  and  pleura,  as  well  as 
the  thorax  beneath  generally,  with  conspicuous  white  hairs.  The 
marginal  cell  is  rather  long,  but  the  substigmatal  portion  is  notice- 
ably longer  than  the  poststigmatal ;  the  second  submarginal  is  nar- 
rowed nearly  to  a  point  above. 

I  took  one  specimen  at  Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  on  Gutierrezia  saro- 
thrce,  Aug.  15, 1895.  At  Las  Cruces  it  is  quite  rare  so  far  as  observed. 
Mr.  C.  Rhodes  took  one  on  Bigelovia  wrightii,  toward  the  end  of 
September.  I  took  it  on  Gutierrezia  sarothrce  var.  microcephala  on 
Sept.  25th.     The  9  is  unknown. 

45.  Perdita  gutierrezise  n.  sp.  or  variety. 

S . — About  4  mm.  long,  size  and  appearance  of  nitidella  S . 
Cheeks  unarmed,  but  projecting  at  base  of  mandibles  so  as  to  simu- 
late a  small  tooth.  Face  entirely  yellow  up  to  nearly  the  length  of 
scape  above  level  of  insertion  of  antennte,  the  yellow  enclosing  a 
black  spot  on  each  side  at  its  extreme  upper  border  close  to  margin 
of  eye.  On  each  side,  midway  between  the  eye  and  the  median  line, 
the  yellow  is  depressed  by  a  slight  invasion  of  the  blue,  which  forms 
thereat  an  angle  considerably  greater  than  a  right  angle.  Lower 
half  of  cheeks  broadly  yellow,  pleura  with  a  yellow  patch,  which  is 
wanting  in  nitidella;  2d  submarginal  cell  more  narrowed  above 
than  in  nitidella ;  3d  discoidal  distinct.  Veins  dark  brown.  The 
rest  much  as  in  nitidella. 

Hah. — Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  one  specimen  on  Gutierrezia  saro- 
thrce, August  15th.  This  is  certainly  distinct  from  nitidella,  but  it 
may  be  only  a  variety  of  bigelovice ;  see  below  under  macidipes. 

46.  Perdita  tarda  n.  sp. 

S  . — Length  42  mm.  Head  and  thorax  dark  blue.  Head  mod- 
erately large,  distinctly  broader  than  long,  cheeks  unarmed,  vertex 
rugulose  and  punctured.  Face  very  free  from  hairs,  except  sides 
near  antennie,  where  they  are  rather  conspicuous ;  cheeks  thickly 
clothed  with  long  white  hairs.  Antennse  dark  brown  above,  yel- 
lowish beneath,  the  scape  all  yellow  beneath  and  at  base  above. 


86  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Mandibles  very  little  curved,  yellow,  rufescent  at  ends.  Clypeus 
approximately  cocked-hat  shaped,  the  lateral  prolongations  broad. 
Face  below  antennse  all  lemon-yellow  except  a  notch  of  the  dark 
color  distad  of  each  dog-ear  mark,  and  not  quite  so  large  as  it.  The 
supraclypeal  mark  is  roundly  emarginate  above.  The  clypeus  has 
the  usual  two  dark  dots.  Along  the  orbital  margins  the  yellow 
ascends  about  half  the  length  of  the  scape  above  the  level  of  the  an- 
tennse, and  ends  in  an  oblique  truncation  ;  this  upward  band  of  yel- 
low is  a  little  wider  than  the  scape.  The  cheeks  are  entirely  dark. 
Mesothorax  smooth  and  shining,  though  minutely  lineolately  sculp- 
tured, nearly  black  ;  mesothorax  finely  sculptured,  very  distinctly 
blue.     Pleura  all  dark.     Tubercles  yellowish. 

Tegulse  pale  brown  ;  wings  slightly  smoky,  nervures  and  stigma 
sepia-brown,  the  latter  pale  in  middle.  Marginal  cell  large,  appendi- 
culate, poststigmatal  portion  longest;  2d  submarginal  narroAved  less 
than  half  to  marginal ;  3d  discoidal  distinct.  Transverse  cubital 
nervures  more  or  less  broken  by  hyaline  dots.  Legs  black,  all  the 
knees,  anterior  and  middle  tibiae  in  front,  and  base  of  hind  tibiiB> 
yellow  ;  tarsi  pale  brownish,  the  anterior  ones  yellowish. 

Abdomen  above  piceous,  w'ith  narrow  whitish  bands,  interrupted 
in  the  middle,  rather  obscurely  indicated  on  disc  of  1st  segment,  and 
at  base  of  segments  2  and  3.  The  markings  are  in  the  form  of  nar- 
row straight  stripes,  not  oblique  ones  as  in  some  species.  Venter 
dark  brown. 

Hah. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  one  specimen  on  Gutierrezia  sarothrce 
var.  microcephala,  Sept.  23,  1895.  Allied  to  P.  biparticeps,  from 
which  it  differs  at  once  in  the  face-markings,  the  abdomen,  etc. 
From  austlni  it  differs  radically  in  the  face-markings. 

Small  species  found  on  Bigelovia  wrightii,  having  the  abdomen 
banded. 

47.  Perdita  nitidella  Ckll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  16.  (f.  (Hab.,  Las  Cruces, 

N.  M.). 

On  Bigelovia  wrightii  at  Las  Cruces,  several  males  on  September 
2d,  one  9  on  September  11, 1895.     The  latter  is  herewith  described  : 

9  . — Length  5  mm.  Face-markings  creamy-white.  Clypeus  white 
with  two  black  dots,  the  anterior  margin  narrowly  brown,  and  traces 
of  the  two  longitudinal  bars  in  brown.  Sides  of  face  with  an  irregu- 
larly subtriangular  white  mark,  the  upper  obliquely  truncate  end  of 
which  is  level  with  the  insertion  of  the  autennie.     Cheeks  quite 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  87 

densely  white-hairy.  Prothorax  with  less  pale  marking,  the  tuber- 
cles not  connected  with  yellow  of  margin  of  prothorax.  Nervures 
dark  brown ;  3d  discoidal  distinct.  Legs  about  as  in  austini,  but 
anterior  femora  partly  black  in  front,  and  middle  femora  with  less 
black.     Abdomen  banded  as  in  ^ ,  but  the  banding  yellowish-white. 

48.  Perdita  bigeloviae  n.  ?p. 

$. — About  5  mm.  long.  Resembles  nitldella  $,  but  larger; 
face-markings  as  in  gutierrezice  $ ,  but  the  black  spots  close  to  eyes 
above  are  not  enclosed,  but  only  produce  a  notch  in  the  yellow  ;  and 
the  yellow  is  in  the  middle-line  rather  more  produced  upward,  not 
reaching  the  ocelkis,  but  terminating  some  distance  before  it  in  an 
emarginate  truncation.  Venation  as  in  nitidella,  with  3d  discoidal 
cell  very  indistinct.  Pleura  largely  yellow,  the  amount  of  yellow 
on  it  variable.  Legs  and  abdomen  as  in  nitidella.  Cheeks  unarmed. 
(1  S%  examined.) 

9  . — Length  6mm.  Similar  to  nitidella  9  ,  the  pale  marks  of 
fiice  rather  inclining  to  pinkish-brown  ;  and  the  marks  of  sides  of 
face  distinctly  notched  on  inner  side,  and  sometimes  also  at  end. 
Sometimes  there  are  two  pale  spots  above  the  clypeus ;  3d  discoidal 
cell  distinct.  Abdomen  brown-black,  with  creamy-white  bands  on 
segments  1-4,  that  on  1  interrupted  ;  5  with  a  rudimentary  linear 
broken  band,  or  frequently  with  a  distinct  broad  band. 

Hah. — Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  several  of  both  sexes  between  the 
old  and  new  towns,  on  Bigelovia  ivrightii,  Aug.  16, 1895.  The  males 
of  this  lot  were  unfortunately  reddened  by  the  cyanide  ;  but  the 
females,  collected  in  the  same  bottle  at  the  same  time,  were  not  so 
affected.  On  September  11th,  a  specimen  of  each  sex  was  taken  on 
Bigelovia  ivrightii  close  to  the  Agricultural  College  at  Las  Cruces. 
The  9  is  very  similar  to  that  of  P.  mmierata. 

49.  Perdita  maculipes  n.  sp.,  or  variety. 

S  • — A  small  form,  4  mm.  long,  similar  to  nitidella,  anterior  and 
middle  femora  all  yellow,  anterior  and  middle  tibise  each  with  a  black 
patch. 

From  nitidella  it  is  readily  separated,  thus : 
(1).  Median  and  lateral  upward  extensions  of  yellow  on  face  ir- 
regularly truncate  ;  anterior  and  middle  tibiie  with  a  black 
patch ;  pleura  with  a  large  yellow  patch  ;    bands  of  abdo- 
men united  at  sides ;  lower  part  of  cheeks  broadly  yellow, 

^^  maculipes  S . 


88  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

(2).  Median  and  lateral  upward  extensions  of  yellow  on  face  not 
truncate,  or  lateral  ones  notched  and  subtruncate ;  anterior 
and  middle  tibise  all  yellow  ;  pleura  without  a  large  yellow 
patch ;  bauds  of  abdomen  not  united  (or  only  the  first  two 
or  three  united)  at  sides;  lower  part  of  cheeks  very  nar- 
rowly yellow =niiidella  S . 

From  biparticeps  it  is  thus  distinguished  : 

(1).  Size  smaller,  abdomen  suffused  ;  pleura  without  yellow  patch, 

==  biparticeps  $ . 

(2).  Size  larger,  abdomen  not  suffused  ;  pleura  with  a  large  yellow 

patch  :  median  face-marks  more  developed  above  antennae, 

=  maculipes  S  . 
It  is  very  much  like  gutierrezice,  but  differs  from  that  in  its  longer 
marginal  cell,  the  abdominal  bands  joined  laterally,  and  the  upper 
margin  of  the  yellow  of  face  much  more  distinctly  trifid,  besides  the 
marks  on  the  tibia?.  It  resembles  fjutierrezicB  in  the  broadly  yellow 
lower  part  of  cheeks,  and  the  yellow  blotch  on  pleura. 

From  small  examples  of  $  bigelovice  it  is  distinguished  by  the 
abdominal  bands  being  united  at  the  sides,  the  fiice-markings  as 
already  mentioned,  and  the  tibiae  with  dark  marks — though  the 
middle  tibite  of  bigelovice  sometimes  show  a  small  spot.  The  mar- 
ginal cell  is  as  in  bigelovice. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  one  example  on  Big loviawrightii,  Sept. 
5,  1895.  (A.M.Holt.)  The  above  form  allies  itself  very  closely 
with  bigelovice  and  gutierrezice,  which  have  the  cheeks  more  or  less 
broadly  yellow  and  the  yellow  patch  on  the  pleura.  The  more  one 
studies  these  forms  the  more  apparent  does  it  become  that  nitidellay 
with  its  dark  pleura  and  narrow  yellow  line  only  on  the  cheeks,  is 
distinct ;  while  bigelovice,  gutierrezice  and  maculipes  run  each  other  so 
close  that  they  seem  to  be  varieties  of  one  species.  Yet  I  leave  them 
as  they  stand,  not  because  I  think  that  they  are  what  would  be  called 
good  species,  but  rather  to  draw  attention  to  the  divergence  which 
may  represent  an  early  stage  in  species-formation.  It  will  be  noted 
that  mactdipes,  while  retaining  the  essential  characters  of  bigelovice, 
departs  in  its  face-markings  toward  the  condition  of  nitidella. 

50.  Perdita  pellucida  n.  sp. 

$ . — Length  about  5  mm.  Head  very  dark  blue,  thorax  black 
except  the  dark  blue  metathorax.  Head  of  ordinary  size,  rounded, 
broader  than  long;  cheeks  unarmed,  mandibles  moderately  stout, 
simple.     Vertex  granular.     Face  with  rather  conspicuous  but  very 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  89 

scattered  hairs,  a  tuft  of  erect  hairs  behind  the  ocelli  being  most 
noticeable,  Clieeks  with  long  white  hairs.  Face  below  antennae 
semitransparent  dull  white,  the  clypeus  prominent  and  shining. 
The  upper  margin  of  the  white  is  not  very  clearly  defined,  but  it 
ends  abruptly  in  the  median  line  at  the  lower  level  of  the  antennal 
sockets,  while  at  the  sides  of  the  face  it  ascends  rather  broadly  not 
quite  the  length  of  the  scape  above  the  level  of  the  autennie.  Thus 
the  pale  color  of  the  face  is  distributed  as  in  obsctirata  $ ,  except 
that  it  perhaps  ascends  a  little  higher  at  the  sides.  (In  bigelovice 
and  nitidella  it  ascends  al)ove  the  level  of  the  autennre  in  the  median 
line).  Clypeus  narrowly  produced  at  sides  to  bases  of  mandibles, 
but  higher  than  in  the  Panama-hat  type.  Mandibles  white  with 
rufous  tips.  Antennse  pale  testaceous ;  flagellum,  funicle  and  end 
of  scape  becoming  dark  brown  above.  Lower  half  of  cheeks  nar- 
rowly white  along  orbital  margin,  thus  recalling  the  cheek-marking 
of  nitidella. 

Thorax  with  sparse  but  rather  conspicuous  hairs.  Mesothorax 
shining,  appearing  slightly  bluish  in  some  lights,  very  finely  lineo- 
lately  sculptured,  median  groove  distinct.  Metathorax  microscopic- 
ally reticulate.  Part  of  collar,  and  whole  hind  margin  of  prothorax, 
connecting  with  tubercles,  but  very  narrowly  interrupted  in  median 
line,  white.  The  margin  of  the  prothorax  below  the  tubercles  is 
broadly  white.  Pleura  hairy,  dark  except  a  white  spot  about  as  big 
as  a  tubercle,  anteriorly,  Tegulfe  hyaline.  Wings  hyaline  ;  costal 
nervure,  margin  of  stigma,  and  marginal  nervure,  sepia-brown,  the 
other  nervures  colorless.  Marginal  cell  unusually  long,  poststig- 
matal  portion  considerably  the  longest,  minutely  appendiculate. 
(In  nitidella  and  higelovice  the  marginal  is  conspicuously  shorter.)' 
Second  submarginal  narrowed  more  than  one-half  to  marginal;  3d 
discoidal  very  weak. 

Four  anterior  legs    yellowish-white,  tarsi   becoming  testaceous 
middle  tiliia?  with  a  dark  brown  line  behind.     Hind  legs  with  the 
basal  two-thirds  of  coxa^  above,  most  of  distal  half  of  femora  above 
and  behind,  and  tibise  except  anterior  margin,  dark  brown;    the 
tarsi  brownish. 

Abdomen  above  with  nearly  equally  broad  bands  of  dull  white 
(becoming  pale  brownish  toward  tip)  and  dark  sepia-brown  ;  these 
bands  not  interrupted,  nor  united  at  sides  or  in  the  middle,  nor 
notched.  First  segment  all  brown-black  except  the  hind  margin 
narrowly.     The  dark  bands  are  four  in  number,  the  sixth  segment 

7 


90  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

having  no  band.      Venter  pale  yellowish,  slightly  orange  toward 
the  tip. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  IST.  M.,  one  specimen  on  Bigelovia  ivrightil, 
close  to  the  Agricultural  College,  Sept.  12, 1895.  (Ckll.  5,100).  The 
type  specimen  may  be  a  little  immature,  but  it  is  clearly  distinct. 

Small  species  found  on  Bigelovia  tvrightii,the  abdomen  not  banded. 
51.  Perdita  fallax  n.  sjj.,  or  race. 

9  . — 5  mm.  long.  Head  and  thorax  dark  green,  dullish,  rather 
hairy  but  the  hairs  short,  face  below  antennae  bare  and  shining. 
Head  of  ordinary  size,  rounded,  not  broader  than  long,  occiput  and 
cheeks  well  fringed  with  short  hairs,  vertex  granular.  Clypeus 
moderately  high,  flat  above,  with  the  sides  very  narrowly  produced. 
Face-markings  yellowish-white  ;  clypeus  all  pale  except  the  two 
usual  dots,  and  two  dots  near  the  upper  margin,  representing  the 
ends  of  the  bars  seen  in  some  species,  or  the  bars  may  be  even 
fairly  well-developed.  Supraclypeal  mark  absent,  though  there 
may  be  a  pair  of  scarcely  perceptible  pale  specks  close  to  upper 
border  of  clypeus.  Dog-ear  marks  absent.  Pale  lateral  marks  at 
first  rapidly  narrowing,  and  then  gradually,  ending  in  a  narrow 
truncation  at  the  level  of  the  antennte.  Cheeks  dark,  mandibles 
rufous  at  tips.  Autennre  dark  brown,  yellow  beneath,  the  sutures 
of  the  flagellar  joints  dark. 

Mesothorax  minutely  lineolately  sculptured.  Pleura  all  dark. 
Tubercles  and  two  spots  on  hind  border  of  prothorax  white.  Teguhe 
hyaline  subtestaceous.  Wings  hyaline,  nervures  and  margin  of 
stigma  sepia-brown.  Marginal  cell  appendiculate,  poststigmatal 
portion  a  little  the  longest.  Second  submarginal  large,  narrowed  a 
little  more  than  one-half  to  marginal ;  od  discoidal  distinct.  Legs 
brown-black ;  anterior  knees  and  anterior  tibia?  in  front  pale  prim- 
rose-yellow.    Middle  and  hind  knees  whitish. 

Al)domen  rather  broad  and  flat ;  above  piceous,  with  an  oblique 
white  mark  on  each  side  of  segments  1-3,  those  on  1  very  narrow 
and  closely  approximating  in  the  median  line.  Tip  orange,  or  to 
be  more  precise,  the  pygidium  is  orange  with  the  border  colorless 
and  hyaline,  the  tip  emargiuate,  as  is  also  the  case  in  affinis.  Ven- 
ter piceous. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  on  Bigelovia  ivrightii,  Sept.  23,  1895, 
two  specimens  (Ckll.).  This  is,  in  all  respects,  very  closely  allied  to 
P.  affinis,  but  it  is  smaller,  the  abdominal  markings  are  white  and 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  91 

the  abdomen  is  not  so  conspicuously  marked.  Yet  in  all  essential 
particulars  it  agrees  so  nearly  with  affinis  that  it  might  well  be 
deemed  a  southern  race  of  it.  The  clypeal  markings  vary  as  in 
affinls.  On  Sept.  20th,  I  took  one  example  of  P.Jallax  on  flowers 
of  Verbesina  encelioides,  and  on  Sept.  17th,  three  on  Pedis  2)apposa. 

52.  Perdita  phymatae  Ckll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  12.   $.  (Hab.,  Las  Cruees 

N.  M.). 

In  the  original  description  the  legs  are  described  as  dark  brown 
without  markings,  but  in  the  normal  form  of  the  species  the  knees 
are  all  pallid  and  the  anterior  tibia?  are  yellow  in  front,  as  in  fallax. 
The  original  type  specimen,  now  in  Coll.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  was  ex- 
amined for  me  by  Mr.  Fox,  who  reports  that  the  yellow  is  repre- 
sented by  pale  testaceous. 

The  mesothorax  is  minutely  sculptured,  though  shining.  The 
second  subraarginal  cell  is  large,  and  narrows  more  than  half  to 
marginal;  3d  discoidal  distinct.  The  clypeus  is  strongly  punctured, 
and  frequently  presents  a  small  yellow  median  spot.  Glossa  not 
hairy. 

This  species  was  common  on  Bigelovia  xvrightii  at  Las  Cruees, 
Sept.  23,  1895,  but  the  $  has  not  been  observed.  It  was  also  taken 
on  B.  wrightii  on  Sept.  2d,  together  with  P.  nitidella,  P.  hdeola, 
Halidus  stultus  and  Prosopis.  On  Sept.  25th,  it  was  taken  on  Gutler- 
rezia  sarothrce  var.  inicrocejihala,  together  with  P.  semicrocea,  etc. 

53.  Perdita  aeneifrons  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  5  mm.  Head  dark  green  with  the  front  very  dis- 
tinctly brassy,  and  the  clypeus  black  ;  thorax  pitch  black,  with  the 
metathorax  dark  green.  Abdomen  black,  shiny,  without  bands  or 
spots,  venter  dark  subolivaceous  brown. 

Head  rounded,  of  ordinary  size,  not  broader  than  long,  vertex 
minutely  rugulose  and  very  sparsely  punctured.  Clypeus  shining 
prominent,  high,  but  not  produced  laterally  to  bases  of  mandibles, 
very  sparsely  punctured  on  its  lower  portion.  Mandibles  pale  yel- 
low at  base,  rufescent  otherwise,  with  a  distinct  tooth  on  inner  side. 
Face  all  dark,  medially  free  from  hairs,  laterally  with  short  hairs. 
Cheeks  moderately  hairy.     Antennae  dark  brown. 

Mesothorax  shining,  perfectly  smooth,  bare  ;  except  its  anterior 
border,  which  presents  short  hairs  and  is  very  feebly  sculptured,  and 
even  presents  in  some  lights  a  vague  greenish  tinge.  Scutellum 
bare,  postscuteilum  with  a  thin  fringe  of  white  hairs. 

Metathorax   granular.      Prothorax,   even  including    tubercules, 


92  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

wholly  dark.  (In  phymakc  the  tubercles  are  more  or  less  pallid.) 
Tegulse  hyaline.  Wings  milky  hyaline,  nervures  and  stigma  al- 
most colorless,  the  latter  yellowish.  (In  its  pallid  wings  it  resem- 
bles semicrocea.)  Stigma  large  ;  marginal  cell  short,  substigmatal 
portion  longest,  2d  submarginal  narrowed  about  one-half  to  mar- 
ginal ;  3d  discoidal  distinct. 

Legs  black,  knees  pallid,  anterior  tibise  in  front,  anterior  tarsi 
and  an  obscure  stripe  on  middle  tibire,  yellow.  Tip  of  abdomen 
rounded  or  subtruncate,  not  emarginate.  (It  is  emarginate  in  fal- 
lax.) 

Hub. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  on  Bigelovia  wrightii,  Sept.  23,  1895, 
in  some  numbers  with  P.  phymatce.  Its  superficial  resemblance  to 
phymatce  is  such  that  when  catching  the  specimens  I  thought  I  had 
only  one  species,  but  a  careful  examination  shows  striking  differ- 
ences in  the  head,  thorax  and  wings.     The  $  was  not  found. 

54.  Perdita  semicrocea  Ckll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1895,  p.  13.     $.     (Hab.,  Las 
Cruces,  N.  M.). 

In  1895  this  species  has  been  taken  commonly  at  Las  Cruces  ;  on 
Bigelovia  ^vrightii,  Sept.  2d  and  Sept.  12th  ;  on  Solidago  canadensis, 
Sept.  3d  ;  on  Giitierrezia  sarothrce  var  microcephala,  Sept.  25th.  The 
original  specimen  was  taken  in  October.  P.  semicrocea  is  less 
strictly  limited  to  one  flower  than  most  of  the  genus,  being  taken 
rather  freely  on  all  the  plants  mentioned — perhaps  most  freely  on  the 
Solidago.  The  ^  differs  in  having  the  face  below  the  level  of  the 
antennae  entirely  yellowish-white,  except  the  clypeal  dots.  The 
pale  color  does  not  extend  further  upward,  but  is  slightly  notched 
on  each  side  of  the  antennse,  the  outer  margin  of  the  notch  being  a 
little  higher  than  the  termination  of  the  pale  color  on  the  orbital 
margin.  The  cheeks  are  unarmed.  The  narrow  tip  of  the  abdo- 
men is  very  narrowly  truncate,  not  em*arginate.  The  anterior  and 
middle  legs  are  yellow,  except  a  dark  patch  on  the  femora  behind. 

66.  Perdita  luteola  Ckll.,  Ent.  News,  1894,  p.  328.     S-     (Hab.,  Las  Cruces,  N.  M.). 

Very  abundant  on  Bigelovia  wrightii,  Sept.  2d,  etc.  On  Sept.  23d, 
I  caught  several  on  Gutierrezia  sarothroe  var.  microcephala.  I  have 
found  them  on  no  other  flowers,  except  that  once  I  saw  one  in  the 
net  after  sweeping  over  Pedis  papposa. 

The  9  differs  in  having  a  black  line  in  place  of  a  black  spot  be- 
fore the  eyes,  being  really  the  groove  usually  seen  in  that  situation, 
wholly  black  ;  a  similar  black  line  placed  longitudinally  on  each 
side  of  the  anterior  half  of  the  second  segment  of  the  abdomen  ;  and 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  93 

the  antennpe  brown-black  or  dark  brown  above.     The  ^  has  the 
cheeks  unarmed. 

When  left  too  long  in  a  damp  cyanide  bottle  the  $  turns  a  bril- 
liant crimson  all  over. 

A  species  found  in  Neiv  Mexico,  habits  and  exact  locality  unhiown. 

56.  Perdita  nuda  n.  sp, 

9  . — Length  7i  mm.  Head  and  thorax  green,  legs  and  abdomen 
dark  chocolate-brown.  The  body  in  general  is  remarkably  free 
from  hairs  ;  the  face  is  bare  but  the  occiput  and  cheeks  present 
scattered  short  hairs;  the  thorax  is  practically  bare,  even  including 
the  pleura  and  sides  of  metathorax  ;  the  tip  of  the  abdomen  has  a 
fairly  dense  fringe  of  hairs  ;  the  tibise  and  tarsi  are  quite  hairy,  the 
hairs  of  a  dull  whitish  color. 

Head  of  ordinary  size,  a  little  broader  than  long,  dark  green,  the 
face  very  flat,  vertex  granular,  clypeus  punctured.  There  are  no 
face-markings  except  an  oblong  dull  yellow  spot  on  the  clypeus. 
Basal  ))ortion  of  mandibles  yellow  with  a  large  dark  spot.  Glossa 
not  hairy.  Antennre  brown-black  ;  flagellum  whitish,  scape  and 
funicle  testaceous  beneath. 

Thorax  dark  olive-green,  metathorax  bluish  ;  the  whole  rather 
dull  and  finely  sculptured.  The  pleura  is  quite  shiny,  but  still 
sculptured.  There  are  no  pale  marks  on  the  thorax,  but  the  tuber- 
cles, quite  prominent,  are  dark  brown. 

Teguloe  hyaline  with  an  opaque  spot  in  front.  Wings  milky-hy- 
aline, nervures  and  stigma  dark  brown,  the  latter  pallid  in  middle. 
Marginal  cell  with  the  poststigmatal  portion  as  long  or  a  little  longer 
than  the  substigmatal.  Second  submarginal  large,  narrowed  more 
than  one-half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal  distinct.  Anterior 
knees,  and  anterior  tibise  in  front,  pale  yellow.  Abdomen  above 
and  below  dark  brown,  without  any  pale  markings.  Tip  eraargi- 
nate. 

Hab. — New  Mexico,  one  specimen  sent  by  Mr.  Fox.  Locality, 
«tc.,  unknown.  It  resembles  P.  phymatce,  but  is  much  larger  than 
that  or  asteris.  P.  asteris  has  a  hairy  raesothorax  ;  phymatce  has  a 
nude  mesothorax,  but  is  much  more  shiny  as  well  as  being  so  much 
smaller.     P.  semiccerulea  has  a  hairy  mesothorax. 

A  species  found  on  Aster  eanescens. 

57.  Perdita  asteris  u.  sp. 

9  . — Length  about   or  hardly  6  mm.      Head  very  dark  blue, 


94  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

thorax  very  dark  green,  metatborax  dark  blue.  Both  bead  and 
thorax  are  very  hairy,  with  short  hairs  ;  the  disc  of  metatborax 
bare,  and  the  disc  of  clypeus  seeming  bare,  but  seen,  when  side- 
ways, to  have  a  fine  down.  Head  rather  large,  rounded,  about  as 
broad  as  long.  Vertex  very  finely  granular,  punctate  ;  sides  of 
clypeus  punctate.  Mandibles  with  the  basal  two-thirds  very  broad, 
whitish,  becoming  rufesceut ;  the  terminal  third  black,  compara- 
tively slender,  coming  to  a  point.  Antennie  dark  brown  above,^ 
yellowish  beneath.  Pale  markings  of  fi\ce  yellowish- white,  restricted 
to  clypeus  and  sides  of  face.  Clypeus  high,  pale  with  the  usual  dots^ 
but  with  a  dark  blotch  on  each  side  above,  so  that  the  yellowish- 
white  color  rapidly  narrows,  but  instead  of  coming  to  a  point,^ 
broadens  a  little  to  an  abrupt  truncation  on  the  upper  clypeal  mar- 
gin. Lateral  marks  of  face  broadly  triangular,  the  inner  angle  of 
the  triangle  being  opposite  to  the  point  on  the  clypeus  where  the 
pale  color  suddenly  narrows,  and  the  upper  angle  (of  about  30°)  on 
a  level  with  the  antennal  sockets. 

Thorax  with  a  very  narrow  yellow  line  on  hind  border  of  pro- 
thorax,  and  a  very  small  yellow  stripe  on  tubercles.  Mesothorax 
dullish,  granular. 

Tegulffi  pale,  testaceous ;  wings  milky-hyaline,  nervures  and 
stigma  very  pale  yellow,  nearly  colorless,  the  latter  centrally  hya- 
line. Marginal  cell  moderately  long  and  narrow,  with  its  poststig- 
matal  portion  a  little  the  longer.  Second  submarginal  rather  large,^ 
narrowed  more  than  half  to  marginal,  being  not  far  from  an  equi- 
lateral triangle.     Third  discoidal  distinct. 

Legs  pubescent,  black  ;  the  tarsi  all  white  with  a  testaceous  or 
yellowish  tinge;  hind  margin  of  first  joint  of  hind  tarsi  blackish, 
anterior  knees  and  anterior  tibia^  in  front  pale  yellow.  Abdomen 
above  shining  piceous  without  markings,  the  hind  margins  of  the 
segments  a  little  rufescent.  Venter  dark  brown. 
*  Mut.  9  . — Clypeus  all  yellowish-white  except  the  usual  dots  and 
two  ill-defined  brown  spots  above.  A  semilunar  dull  yellowish  su- 
praclypeal  mark.     One  specimen. 

Hah. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  Sept.  19,  1895,  four  specimens  on 
flowers  of  Aster  canescens  var.  viscosus.  Prof.  E.  O.  Wooton  took 
one  on  the  same  flowers  as  late  as  the  middle  of  October. 

A  species  found  on  Senecio  doughmi. 
58.  Perdita  senecionis  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  about  7  mm.     Head  and  thorax  dark,  dull  olive- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  95 

green,  even  including  the  metathorax ;  conspicuously  granular. 
Head  a  little  longer  than  broad  ;  face  practically  hairless,  cheeks 
and  occiput  with  short'  whitish  hairs.  Vertex  depressed  between 
ocelli  and  orbits.  Mandibles  stout,  simple,  gradually  tapering, 
blunt  at  tips,  pale  yellowish  with  the  apical  half  rufescent.  Anten- 
nae very  dark  brown,  dull  pale  yellowish  beneath.  Face-markings 
cream  color,  very  distinct,  restricted  to  clypeus  and  side's  of  face. 
Clypeus  high,  flattened  above,  prominent,  cream  color  with  broad 
black  bars.  Supraclypeal  region  dark,  elevated,  convex.  Lateral 
face-marks  club-shaped,  rapidly  narrowing  and  continuing  upward, 
to  a  subtruncate  termination  on  a  level  with  the  antennal  sockets. 

Thorax  nearly  hairless,  as  in  P.  nuda ;  the  greater  part  of  tuber- 
cles, and  a  broadly  triangular  patch  on  each  side  of  hind  margin 
of  prothorax,  shining  pale  yellow.  (In  nuda  these  pale  markings 
are  lacking.)  Tegulse  hyaline,  with  a  kidney-shaped  pale  yellow 
opaque  patch.  AVings  slightly  smoky,  uervures  and  stigma  dark 
brown,  the  latter  pallid  in  center.  Marginal  cell  rather  long,  ap- 
pendiculate,  its  poststigmatal  portion  a  little  the  longest.  Second 
siibmarginal  large,  subtriangular,  narrowed  more  than  half  to  mar- 
ginal. Third  discoidal  distinct.  Legs  black,  knees  ])allid,  anterior 
tarsi  testaceous,  anterior  tibise  yellow  in  front,  middle  tibiae  with  a 
yellow  stripe  in  front. 

Abdomen  above  black,  with  eight  creamy-white  marks,  just  like 
those  of  affinis.     Venter  piceous. 

Mut.  9  . — The  abdominal  pale  marks  reduced  to  six,  the  last  two 
failing,  one  specimen. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  six  examples  on  flowers  of  Senecio 
douglasii,  collected  by  Prof.  E.  O.  Wooton,  Oct.  9,  1895. 

This  interesting  species  is  extremely  close  to  affinis,  and  would  be 
taken  for  it  upon  superficial  examination.  It  differs,  however,  by 
the  somewhat  longer  head,  the  narrower  lateral  face  marks,  the 
larger  size,  and  especially  by  the  glossa  presenting  only  a  small 
patch  of  hairs  near  its  tij),  whereas  in  affinis  it  is  strongly  hairy  for 
a  considerable  distance.  P.  odoinaculata  has  the  glossa  also  more 
hairy  than  in  senecionis. 

A  small  species  found  on  Chrysopsis  villosa. 
59.  Perdita  vespertilio  n.  sp. 

S  . — Length  about  4  mm.      Head   and  thorax    shining   black. 
Cheeks  unarmed.     Head  rather  large,  especially. in  comparison  with 


96  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

the  small  thorax,  when  seen  from  the  front  almost  precisely  circu- 
lar. Front  quite  hairy,  with  white  hairs  ;  cheeks  hairy.  Antenna 
dark  brown  above,  pale  yellowish  beneath.  Clypeus  rather  cocked- 
hat-shaped.  Pale  markings  of  face  cream  color,  confined  to  clypeus 
and  sides  of  face,  with,  of  course,  the  labrum  and  basal  portion  of 
mandibles.  Seen  all  together,  they  suggest  the  head  of  one  of  the 
long-eared  bats,  whence  the  specific  name.  The  darkened  upper 
portion  of  the  labrum  represents  the  bat's  mouth.  Clypeus  cream- 
color,  with  the  usual  dots  obscui'e.  Lateral  face-marks  broadly  tri- 
angular, the  inner  angle  opposite  the  clypeal  dots,  the  upper  one 
(of  al)out  45°)  on  a  level  with  the  antennal  sockets.  Thorax  shin- 
ing, smooth,  tolerably  hairy.  Prothorax,  including  tubercles,  dark, 
the  tubercles  brownish.  Teguloe  hyaline ;  wings  hyaline,  irides- 
cent, nervures  colorless,  stigma  margined  with  very  pale  yellowish. 
JNIarginal  cell  fairly  long  and  narrow,  the  poststigmatal  portion  a 
little  the  longer.  Second  submarginal  subtriaugular,  narrowed  a 
little  more  than  half  to  marginal.     Third  discoidal  absent. 

Legs  dark  brown  with  the  tarsi  brownish-white  ;  anterior  tibiae 
yellowish  except  a  suftused  brownish  patch  behind,  middle  tibiae  pal- 
lid in  front. 

Abdomen  short  and  broad,  above  dark  brown  without  pale  mark- 
ings, but  the  distal  margins  of  the  segments  more  or  less  pale. 
Venter  brown, 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  Oct.  5,  1895,  one  specimen  on  Chry- 
sopsis  villosa.  No  more  could  be  seen.  The  locality  is  about  a  mile 
southeast  of  the  Agricultural  College.  This  little  species  has  some 
resemblance  to  californica  and  its  allies,  but  a  glance  at  the  face 
will  distinguish  it. 

Three -yjecies  ivith  larr/e  heads,  from  New  Mexico,  found  on  Compositce. 
60.  Perdita  grandiceps  n.  sp. 

$. — Length  about  5  mm.  Form  stout;  head  quadrate,  ex- 
tremely large,  larger  than  the  thorax,  eyes  nari'ow,  cheeks  armed 
with  blunt  teeth.  Face  flattened,  very  sparsely  and  inconspicuously 
hirsute,  cheeks  hairy  beneath.  Color  of  head  very  dark  bottle- 
green  ;  vertex  granular,  it  and  front  looking  almost  silky,  cheeks 
much  more  shiny.  Mandibles  stout,  curved,  scimitar-shaped,  base 
pale  yellowish,  end  rufescent,  blackish  on  inner  side.  Antennre 
blackish  above,  yellowish-brown  beneath  ;  scape  piceous,  with  a 
light  yellowish  spot  at  base  in  front.     Clypeus  rather  low,  anterior 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  97 

margin  not  produced  into  spines.  Face-markings  dull  sulphur-yel- 
low. Clypeus  with  a  yellow  longitudinal  band,  uniting  with  the 
broadly  yellow  anterior  portion — or  one  might  say,  clypeus  yellow 
with  a  pair  of  large  triangular  dark  patches,  the  triangles  having 
one  side  coincident  with  the  hind  margin.  The  extreme  anterior 
edge  of  the  clypeus  is  bordered  with  a  black  line.  The  supracly- 
peal  mark  is  represented  by  a  pair  of  squarish  yellow  patches  ;  the 
dog-ear  marks,  on  each  side  of  these,  are  not  much  larger.  The 
lateral  yellow  face-marks  would  form  nearly  equilateral  triangles, 
but  that  the  innermost  angle  is  narrowly  produced.  The  upper 
angle  scarcely  reaches  the  level  of  the  antennal  sockets. 

Thorax  not  very  shiny,  the  surface  granular.  No  pale  markings. 
Prothorax  with  prominent  shoulders.  Color  of  thorax  black  with  a 
slight  metallic  tinge,  becoming  distinctly  brassy-green  on  anterior 
half  of  mesothorax  ;  metathorax  blue-black.  Pleura  and  sides  of 
metathorax  with  white  hairs  ;  mesothorax  with  sparse  hairs.  Teg- 
ul?e  hyaline  subtestaceous.  Wings  milky-hyaline,  nervures  (except 
the  dark  costal  nervure)  practically  colorless  ;  stigma  very  pale  yel- 
lowish. jNIarginal  cell  obliquely  truncate,  substigmatal  portion  a  lit- 
tle the  longer.  Second  subnjarginal  narrowed  hardly  one-half  to 
marginal,  third  discoidal  excessively  weak. 

Legs  shining  black,  with  white  hairs.  Anterior  coxoe  with  a  very 
noticeable  tuft  of  white  hairs.  Tarsi  becoming  brownish.  Ante- 
rior knees,  and  anterior  tibiie  in  front,  yellow. 

Abdomen  oval,  shining  piceous  without  light  markings.  Mar- 
gins of  the  segments  a  little  rufescent.     Venter  brown. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  on  Solidago  canadensis,  8ept.  3,  1895, 
one  specimen  (Ckll.,  4,746).  It  was  associated  on  the  flowers  with 
Melecta  maculata,  Anthophora  maculifrons,  Perdita  semicrocea,  Col- 
ietes,  Heriades,  Prosojns  2  spp.,  Oxyhelus  2  spp.,  Fhilanthus  and 
Odynerxis. 

61.  Perdita  crassiceps  n.  sp.    Fig.  15  (head.) 

S . — 6  mm.  long.  Smooth  and  shiny  ;  head  and  thorax  so  dark 
green  as  to  seem  black,  metathorax  very  dark  blue.  Head  quad- 
rate, extremely  large,  eyes  comparatively  small  and  narrow.  Ver- 
tex minutely  granular,  but  nevertheless  shining,  with  a  transverse 
ridge  behind  the  ocelli.  The  punctuation  is  sparse.  Cheeks  un- 
armed ;  mandibles  rather  long,  scimitar-shaped,  blunt  at  tips, 
pale  yellowish  becoming  rufescent  distally,  the  tips  blackish.  An- 
tennae dark  brown  above,  yellow  beneath.      Clypeus  wholly  pale 


98  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

yellowish,  except  the  usual  black  dots,  and  a  pair  of  obscure  suf- 
fused brownish  spots  adjacent  to  hind  margin.  Supraclypeal  mark 
wanting.  Dog-ear  marks  present.  Lateral  face-marks  white, 
broad,  subquadrate,  the  lower  border  occupied  by  a  black  line,  the 
upper  border  passing  somewhat  obliquely  from  the  point  on  orbital 
margin  opposite  the  antennal  sockets,  to  slightly  below  the  upper 
end  of  the  dog-ear  marks. 

Thorax  smooth   and  shining,  mesothorax   sparsely   punctured ; 
hairs  on  thorax  above  sparse,  brownish,  those  on  pleura  white.     No 
light  markings  except  that  the  tubercles  are  pale 
yellow  with  a  dark  spot,  and  the  collar  shows  a  lit- 
tle yellow. 

Tegulfe  pale  testaceous  ;  wings  hyaline,  nervures 
Fig.  15.  jaractically  colorless,  stigma  very   pale   yellowish. 

Marginal  cell  rather  long  and  narrow,  its  poststigmatal  and  substig- 
matal  portions  about  equal.  Second  submarginal  subtriangular, 
narrowed  more  than  half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal  very  weak. 
Legs  black  with  the  knees  and  tarsi  testaceous  ;  anterior  and 
middle  tibiae  testaceous  in  front.  Abdomen  above  shining  dark 
brown,  the  hind  margins  of  the  segments  a  little  pale;  no  light 
marks.     Venter  light  brown. 

Hab. — Albuquerque,  N.  M.,  June  30,  1895,  one  specimen  on  a 
yellow-flowered  species  of  Corapositpe  not  identified.     (Ckll.,  3,253.) 

62.  Perdita  laticeps  n.  sp. 

S  . — 5i  mm.  long.  This  greatly  resembles  cfrassiceps,  in  fact  I  had 
regarded  them  as  the  same  until  a  close  examination  was  made  when 
writing  the  description  of  the  latter.  P.  laticeps  diflTers  from  crassi- 
ceps  as  follows  : 

The  head  is  a  little  larger,  the  face  is  much  more  hairy,  the  sides 
of  the  cheeks  are  covered  with  short  hairs  (whereas  in  crassiceps 
they  are  bare  and  shining),  the  clypeus  is  distinctly  panama-hat- 
shaped,  the  supraclypeal  mark  is  represented  by  a  narrow  trans- 
verse line,  adjacent  to  the  upper  border  of  the  clypeus,  the  dog-ear 
marks  are  absent,  the  antennae  are  dark  brown  above  and  below, 
the  mandibles  are  stouter,  the  anterior  and  middle  tibiae  are  not 
testaceous  in  front,  the  hind  tibipe  are  more  hairy,  the  abdomen  is 
considerably  shorter  and  broader,  with  the  hind  margins  of  the  seg- 
ments broadly  hyaline.  The  tip  of  the  abdomen  is  narrowly  but 
abruptly  truncate.  There  is  no  transverse  ridge  behind  the  ocelli,^ 
but  this  area  shows  strong  punctures,  which  are  wanting  in  crassi- 
ceps.    The  wings  are  as  in  crassiceps. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  99 

Hah. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  one  collected  by  Mr.  A.  M.  Holt  on 
Verbesina  encelioides,  Sept.,  1895.  This  species  is  allied  to  wter- 
rupta  and  californica. 

Species  found  on  Verbesina  encelioides  in  the  Mesllla  Valley,  N.  M. 

63.  Perdita  beata  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  8-8*  mm.  Entirely  bright  canary-yellow  ;  except 
the  flagellum  blackish  above,  the  usual  clypeal  dots,  an  obscure 
black  line  round  the  lower  part  of  the  dog-ear  marks,  especially  on 
the  inner  side  ;  a  black  band,  not  quite  as  long  as  the  scape,  before 
each  orbit ;  a  short  black  line  on  each  side  of  second  abdominal  seg- 
ment ;  a  dark  shining  pit  on  the  hind  part  of  the  raetathorax  ;  and 
the  lower  (ventral)  half  of  the  pleura  black.  Wings  hyaline,  nerv- 
ures.and  stigma  very  pale  yellow.  Marginal  cell  large,  poststig- 
matal  portion  longest.  Second  submarginal  narrowing  hardly  one- 
half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal  distinct.  Hind  tibiae  and  tarsi 
very  hairy.  Mesothorax,  scutellum  and  postscutellum  with  short 
dense  erect  yellow  hairs.  Ocelli  dark.  Ends  of  mandibles  dark, 
the  mandibles  being  quite  abruptly  bent  before  the  dark  portion. 
Terminal  portion  of  glossa  not  hairy. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  on  flowers  of  Verbesina  encelioides. 
The  first  was  taken  in  September,  1895,  by  Mr.  A.  M.  Holt.  On 
Sept,  20th  I  took  one,  and  again  another  on  Sept.  28th. 

This  lovely  insect  is  a  sort  of  gigantic  P.  luteola ;  but  the  meso- 
thorax of  luteola  is  bare,  while  that  of  beata  is  very  bristly  ;  luteola 
also  does  not  show  the  black  on  under  part  of  pleura. 

64.  Perdi?a  perpulchra  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  82-9  mm.  Head  and  thorax  bronzy-green,  densely 
covered  (except  the  smooth  disc  of  metathorax  and  middle  of  face) 
with  short  erect  pale  yellowish  hairs,  v/hich  become  longer  on  the 
the  pleura  and  cheeks  beneath,  and  sparse  on  the  vertex.  Head  of 
ordinary  size,  subtriangular  or  broadly  subcordiform  ;  vertex  dull- 
ish, granular  ;  clypeus  approximately  cocked-hat-shaped.  The  con- 
spicuous white  hairs  on  face  are  arranged  so  as  to  seem  to  radiate 
from  the  antennae  ;  but  the  disc  of  the  clypeus,  and  the  area  above 
it  and  between  the  antennae,  are  bare.  Mandibles  abruptly  bent 
before  their  dark  ends.  End  of  glossa  with  a  conspicuous  brush  of 
hairs.  Antennae  yellow  ;  flagellum,  funicle  and  end  of  scape  black 
above.  Clypeus  (except  the  usual  pair  of  dots)  and  lateral  face- 
marks  yellowish-white.     No  supraclypeal  or  dog-ear  marks.     Lat- 


100  '  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

eral  pale  marks  subtriangular,  the  inner  angle  next  to  clypeal  dot, 
the  upper  one  (of  about  30°)  on  a  level  with  the  antennal  sockets. 
Mesothorax  dullish,  finely  punctured  as  well  as  very  bristly.  Disc 
of  metathorax  bare  and  shining,  with  very  fine  striatulate  sculpture. 
Prothorax  (including  tubercles)  yellowish-white,  except  a  transverse 
dark  line  widening  centrally  into  a  large  dark  patch. 

Tegulte  hyaline.  Wings  hyaline,  nervures  and  stigma  very  pale 
yellowish. 

Stigma  small ;  marginal  cell  long,  its  poststigmatal  part  much 
the  longest.  Second  submarginal  large,  subtriangular,  narrowed 
considerably  more  than  half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal  distinct. 
Legs  yellowish-white,  posterior  tibia  very  hairy  ;  anterior  femora 
below,  except  at  distal  end,  a  patch  on  anterior  tibire  behind,  mid- 
dle femora  below,  a  patch  on  middle  tibiae  behind,  hind  femora 
with  a  band  above  and  an  oblique  streak  near  base  within,  hind 
tibire,  except  proximal  fourth  and  middle  and  hind  tarsi,  black. 

Abdomen  above  white  with  black  bands.  First  segment  with  two 
black  spots  in  front,  and  a  large  broad  black  triangle,  having  for 
its  base  the  whole  distal  margin  of  the  segment.  Segments  2-4 
each  with  a  distal  black  band,  which  is  swollen  in  front  sublaterally, 
and  behind  laterally,  the  swelling  or  patch  in  the  latter  case  being 
on  the  next  segment.  Tip  of  abdomen  dark  brown,  the  pygidial 
area  smooth  and  shining,  though  microscopically  subpunctate,  ex- 
treme tip  rather  broadly  truncate,  subemarginate.  Venter  mostly 
black,  with  a  white  spot  on  hind  margin  of  each  segment,  and  the 
sides  largely  whitish. 

Mut.  9  • — The  dark  triangle  on  first  abdominal  segment  with  a 
small  central  light  triangle.  Abdominal  bands  broader,  and  con- 
tinuously invading  the  segment  following. 

Hah. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  on  flowers  of  Yerbesina  encelioides,  one 
taken  by  Mr.  A.  M.  Holt  in  the  fall  of  1895,  and  one  by  myself  on 
Oct.  5th.  A  very  beautiful  and  distinct  species.  It  differs  at  once 
from  albovittata  hy  \ts  larger  size,  non-hairy  clypeus,  lateral  face- 
markings  narrowing  above,  etc. 

65.  Perdita   albovittata   Ckll.,  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.,  1S95,    p.  15.     $.     (Hab.,  San 
Augustine,  N.  M.). 

The  two  specimens  taken  at  San  Augustine  on  Aug.  29th  are  both 
females,  not  ^  and  9  ,  as  formerly  stated.  Miss  Mae  Gilmore  took 
a  9  in  the  Mesilla  Valley,  close  to  the  Agricultural  College,  Sept. 
23d,  on  Verbesina  encelioides. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  101 

♦ 

On  Oct.  4th,  at  the  same  locality,  Mr.  C.  Rhodes  was  so  fortunate 
as  to  find  a  $  on  Verbesina  encelioides.  The  glossa  of  the  9  shows 
two  brushes  of  hairs,  separated  by  an  interval ;  that  of  the  $  is 
bare. 

The  S  is  only  about  4i  mm.  long  (  $  5i),  and  differs  at  once  by 
the  abdomen,  which  is  short  and  broad,  black,  with  the  margins  of 
the  segments  appearing  broadly  whitish  because  hyaline.  The  sides 
of  the  first  three  segments  show  obscure  whitish  marks — all  that  is 
left  of  the  bands  of  the  9  .  The  venter  resembles  the  upi^er  surface. 
The  tip  is  rufous,  produced,  narrowly  truncate. 

The  face-markings,  differently  from  most  species,  are  as  in  the  9  . 
The  antennse  are  entirely  brown-black.     Cheeks  unarmed. 

There  is  a  singularly  close  resemblance  between  the  $  of  albovit- 
tata  and  laticeps,  so  that  the  idea  suggests  itself  that  laticeps  may  be 
a  dimorphic  large-headed  $  of  albovittata.  But  this  could  not  be 
taken  as  proven  without  positive  evidence,  or  at  least  some  analo- 
gous case  in  the  genus  to  guide  us.  Cresson  has  referred  to  a  ^ 
specimen  of  texana  (megacephala)  in  which  the  head  was  unusually 
large,  but  it  may  have  been  a  different  species. 
66.  Perdita  vagans  n.  sp. 

$ . — Length  4-2  mm.  Head  and  thorax  shining,  blue-black,  with 
sparse  hairs  which  are  quite  long  behind  the  ocelli.  Head  moder- 
ately large,  rather  broader  than  long,  cheeks  unarmed,  vertex  shiny 
though  feebly  microscopically  granular ;  clypeus  panama-hat- 
shaped,  with  the  crown  rather  high.  Cheeks  wholly  dark  ;  labrum 
and  mandibles  pale  yellowish.  Clypeus  pale  yellow  with  the  usual 
black  dots.  Dog-ear  and  supraclypeal  marks  wanting,  though  the 
former  are  represented  by  hardly  noticeable  pallid  specks.  Lateral 
pale  yellow  face-marks  subquadrate,  nearly  the  shape  of  the  main- 
sail of  a  schooner,  though  shorter,  the  upper  outer  angle  (of  about 
50°)  about  on  a  level  with  the  antennal  sockets.  Antennae  sepia- 
brown  above,  yellowish  beneath.  Thorax  smooth  and  shining. 
Tubercles,  and  a  couple  of  small  spots  on  hind  margin  of  prothorax 
pale  yellow.  Pleura  not  very  hairy.  Tegulse  hyaline.  Wings 
hyaline;  stigma  pale  yellow,  nervures  colorless.  Marginal  cell 
rather  long,  its  poststigmatal  portion  a  little  the  longest.  Second 
submarginal  nearly  triangular,  narrowed  more  than  half  to  mar- 
ginal.    Third  discoidal  absent. 

All  the  femora,  and  the  hind  tibite,  black  with  the  ends  subtesta- 
ceous  yellowish.  Anterior  and  middle  tibi?e  yellowish  with  a  dark 
patch  behind.     Tarsi  all  pale  yellowish  testaceous. 


102  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

i 

Abdomen  rather  broad,  dark  sepia-brown,  without  light  mark- 
ings, the  distal  margins  of  the  segments  more  or  less  pallid.  Ven- 
ter pale  brown.     Tip  pale  testaceous. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  one  on  Verhesina  encelioides,  Sept.  28, 
1895. 

I  had  considered  the  possibility  that  this  might  be  the  $  of  as- 
teris,  but  it  differs  too  much  from  it  for  this  to  be  likely,  I  think. 

Group  of  P.  alhipennis. 

67.  Perdita  sparsa  Fox,  Proc.  Cal.  Ac.  Sci.,  1893,  p.   16.       cf  ?     (Hab.,  Margarita 
and  Magdalena  Islands,  L.  Cal.) 

Collected  by  Mr.  Haines  in  March,  being,  therefore,  distinct  from 
the  other  members  of  the  group  by  its  vernal  appearance.  I  have 
examined  a  9  from  Magdalena  I.,  March,  1889,  one  of  the  types. 
It  is  very  near  to  albipeiinis,  and  the  difference  of  punctuation, 
mentioned  by  Mr.  Fox,  is  not  a  very  satisfactory  character.  It  is, 
however,  readily  distinguished  thus  : 


P.  alhipennis  9  • 

Nervures  colorless. 
Stigma  not  so  margined. 
Median  mark  broadening  above 
to  a  T-shape. 


P.  sparsa  9  • 

Nervures  dark. 

Stigma  margined  with  brown. 

Size  a  little  smaller. 

Median  mark  of  clypeus  broad, 

lance-head-shaped,  going  to  a 

point  above. 
Three  yellow  bands  on  abdomen, 

first  entire,  the  other  two  with 

a  linear  interruption. 

68.  Perdita  verbesinae  n.  sp. 

5  . — Length  7  mm.  Head  and  thorax  green,  abdomen  black, 
wings  milky-hyaline.  Head  rounded,  moderately  small,  unusually 
pubescent,  especially  on  occiput  and  cheeks,  the  hairs  on  occiput 
pale  fulvous,  those  on  face  and  cheeks  white.  Face  and  vertex 
brassy-green,  vertex  rather  strongly  rugulose,  and  sparsely  punc- 
tured. Mandibles  rufescent,  yellowish  at  base,  simple  but  strongly 
elbowed  ;  clypeus  black,  punctured,  with  a  longitudinal  central  yel- 
low line,  not  always  produced  to  the  margins,  and  a  more  or  less 
developed  yellow  patch  on  each  side  at  anterior  margin.  Sides  of 
face  below,  adjacent  to  clypeus,  with  a  yellow  patch.  These  face- 
markings  are  of  essentially  the  same  pattern  as  those  of  alhipennis. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  103 

Antenna3  blackish,  a  yellowish  spot  at  base  of  scape  beneath,  and 
flagellum  yellowish  below.  Mouth-parts  much  elongated,  glossa  al- 
most naked,  or  with  the  terminal  half  hairy. 

Thorax  shining  brassy-green,  pubescent  as  in  albipenms,  and  with 
the  yellow  also  more  or  less  developed  on  collar  and  hind  border  of 
prothorax,  but  not  on  tubercles,  except  in  the  form  of  a  very  small 
spot,  which  may  be  absent.  Metathorax  dark  green,  sometimes  a 
little  bluish. 

Legs  dark,  pubescent,  the  hairs  on  posterior  tibiae  especially  long 
and  dense,  as  in  albipennis ;  tips  of  anterior  femora,  upper  two- 
thirds  of  anterior  tibise  in  front,  yellow.  Tegulse  yellowish-hyaline. 
Stigma  very  pale  yellowish,  nervures  almost  colorless,  the  portion  of 
marginal  cell  beyond  stigma  conspicuously  longer  than  that  below 
it;  second  submarginal  narrowed  about  one-half  to  marginal,  third 
discoidal  distinct. 

Abdomen  above  black,  nearly  naked,  except  the  last  segment, 
Avhich  is  densely  fringed  with  white  hairs.  Fourth  segment  with 
two  yellow  spots,  absent  in  specimens  lacking  the  face-markings 
(mut.  nigrior).     Pygidial  area  conspicuously  rufous.     Venter  dark. 

Mut.  9  )  nigrior. — Stigma  colorless,  pale  marks  of  head  and 
thorax  absent,  pubescence  of  mesothorax  white  instead  of  yellowisli, 
vertex  a  slightly  bluer  green,  metathorax  tinged  with  blue  above, 
last  joint  of  antennie  with  a  slight  hook,  abdomen  without  yellow 
spots.     (Ckll.,  4,908.) 

Mut.  9  ,  intermedia. — Stigma  pale  yellow  ;  vertex  rather  more 
brassy,  lateral  pale  marks  of  clypeus  absent.  Abdomen  with  seg- 
ments 2-4  each  with  a  pair  of  yellow  marks,  those  on  2  and  3  trans- 
versely elongate,  those  on  4  larger  and  rounder.  First  taken  by  C. 
Rhodes  on  Verbesina.  Sometimes  the  spots  on  segment  2  are  lack- 
ing. The  lateral  pale  marks  of  clypeus  may  also  be  more  or  less 
developed. 

$. — Head  larger  and  broader,  cheeks  strongly  bulging  below 
but  not  spined  ;  antenna?  with  the  scape  and  funicle  black  above 
and  yellow  beneath,  flagellum  orange  with  the  first  two  joints  black 
or  blackish  above.  Lower  corners  of  face,  and  clypeus,  yellow,  the 
clypeus  with  two  longitudinal  black  marks,  and  a  black  dot  on  the 
outside  of  each,  after  the  manner  of  P.  numerata.  In  some  exam- 
ples the  clypeus  is  black  with  a  median  longitudinal  yellow  line, 
and  the  lower  corners  broadly  yellow,  the  yellow  sometimes  enclos- 
ing a  black  spot  near  its  upper  limit.     (Ckll.,  4,906,  5,054.)     Pro- 


104  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

thorax  without  any  yellow,  except  on  collar  above.  Tarsi  mostly 
pale,  in  addition  to  the  pale  leg-markings  of  the  9  .  Ends  of  mid- 
dle tibite  also  pale. 

Abdomen  without  the  two  spots  of  the  $  ,  but  the  distal  margins 
of  the  segments  hyaline,  with  narrow  dull  yellowish  bands,  broadly 
emarginate  on  each  side  proximally. 

Mut.  $  ,  macxdata. — Hind  margin  of  prothorax  with  two  small 
yellow  marks.     (One  on  Verbesina  encelioides,  Sept.  28th.) 

Mut.  $  ,  cyanella. — Size  small.  Metathorax  blue.  (One  on  Hel- 
iatithus  annuiis,  Sept.  21st).  This  agrees  with  true  $  verbesince  in 
the  dull  front,  orange  flagellura,  absence  of  spots  on  hind  border  of 
prothorax,  etc. 

Hab. — Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  abundant  on  flowers  of  Verbesina  en- 
celioides, Sept.  11th  to  20th  of  October.  On  Sept.  28th,  after  wet 
weather,  they  were  freely  copulating  on  the  flowers.  One  had  been 
caught  hy  a  Phymata.  On  Sept.  21st,  a  9  of  mut.  intermedia  and 
the  S  mut.  cyanella  were  taken  on  Helianthus  annuus. 

69.  Perdita  albipennis  Or..  Tr.   Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1868,   p.  386.      $     (Hab.,  New 
Mexico,  Colorado). 

<?.     Perdita  hyalina  Cr.,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1878,  p.  68.     (Hab.,  Colorado). 

The  original  type  of  albipennis  was  taken  in  1867  by  Dr.  Samuel 
Lewis,  on  a  journey  from  Fort  Wallace,  Colo.,  to  Fort  Craig,  N.  M. 
The  types  of  hyalina  were  taken  by  Messrs.  Ridings  and  Morrison. 
In  the  latter  part  of  July,  1895,  I  took  the  typical  form,  in  both 
sexes,  on  flowers  of  UeliaMJms  annuus  at  La  Junta,  Colorado.  The 
males  have  the  flagellum  mostly  orange,  spots  on  hind  margin  of 
prothorax,  front  shiny.  P.  hyalina  is  apparently  a  slight  variety. 
Var.  helianthi. 

$ . — Differs  from  verbesince  $  by  its  comparatively  shining 
front,  blackish  flagellum,  and  two  spots  on  hind  border  of  prothorax. 
Differs  from  albijiennis  $  by  having  the  yellow  marking  on  abdo- 
men as  in  verbesince,  and  the  dark  flagellum. 

9  . — Abdomen  striped  as  in  albipennis,  from  which  it  is  hardly 
to  be  distinguished.  In  helianthi  the  stigma,  when  well  colored,  is 
lemon-yellow,  while  in  albipennis  it  becomes  pale  orange,  and  is 
quite  large.  From  verbesince,  the  9  helianthi  differs  by  its  well- 
striped  abdomen,  and  the  head  is  a  little  larger. 

The  var.  helianthi  is  occasionally  taken  (at  least  the  9  s)  on  Ver- 
besina encelioides  (Oct.  5th,  etc.),  at  Las  Cruces,  N.  M.,  but  it  is  the 
usual  form  in  that  locality  on  Helianthus  annuus  (Sept.  22d,  etc.). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  105 

Of  46  $  s  from  Verbesina,  43  are  verbesince  and  3  helianthi.  The 
The  earliest  date  for  helianthi  is  July  29,  1893.  (CklL,  339,  a  ^ .) 
On  Aug.  26,  1893,  I  took  both  sexes  at  Juarez,  Mexico  ;  these  were 
recorded  as  alhipennis  and  hyalina  in  Ann.  Mag.  N.  Hist.,  Feb., 
1895,  p.  206. 

Mut.  ^ ,  pasonis. — Length  8J  mm.  Resembles  verbesince  in  its 
dull  front  and  the  absence  of  spots  on  hind  margin  of  prothorax. 
Resembles  typical  albipennis  by  the  absence  of  yellow  on  the  abdo- 
men. Resembles  helianthi  by  the  dark  flagellum  which  is  black 
above,  dull  testaceous  below.  Maxillary  palpi  with  the  last  four 
joints  practically  equal.  Front  and  mesothorax  olive-green,  cheeks 
and  metathorax  greenish-blue  or  prussian-green,  in  strong  contrast. 
Tip  of  abdomen  unusually  broad.  Marginal  cell  somewhat  longer 
than  usual. 

I  took  one  specimen  of  this  at  El  Paso,  Texas,  Aug.  25,  1893.  I 
was  a  little  perplexed  whether  to  refer  it  to  verbesinoi  or  albipennis. 
Mr.  Fox  named  it  hyalina  Cr.,  and  indeed  it  must  come  very  near 
the  form  so  named  by  Cresson,  which  had  the  dark  flagellum, 
though  the  head  and  thorax  were  bluish-green. 
Var.  $  lingualis. 

Length  about  10  mm.  Abdomen  above  with  yellow  bands  on 
segments  2-4,  the  first  two  narrowly  interrupted  in  the  middle,  the 
last  two  failing  some  distance  before  the  lateral  margin.  Metatho- 
rax dark  blue,  head  dark  blue-green,  mesothorax  and  scutellum 
dark  olive-green.  Front  moderately  shiny.  Hind  border  of  pro- 
thorax  marked  with  yellow.  Stigma  inclining  to  pale  orange.  Sec- 
ond subraarginal  cell  not  narrowed  half  to  marginal.  Flagellum 
dark.  Clypeus  yellow  with  two  black  blotches  above,  sufficient 
to  mark  out  the  yellow  T. 

The  above  characters  are  probably,  in  part,  individual  ones,  but 
the  glossa  is  very  conspicuously  hairy  all  along,  thus  differing  from 
that  of  helianthi,  albipennis  type,  and  verbesince,  in  which  it  is  com- 
paratively naked,  except  the  terminal  half  in  some  examples  oi  ver- 
besince. When  using  a  compound  microscope  to  more  accurately 
determine  the  character  of  the  glossa,  I  was  surprised  to  find  also  a 
difference  in  the  maxillary  palpi.  In  lingualis  the  last  two  joints 
of  these  palpi  are  short  and  of  equal  length,  while  the  two  before 
them  are  long  and  also  equal.  In  helianthi  the  last  joint  is  long, 
the  two  before  it  short  and  equal,  and  the  two  before  them  long  and 
equal  to  one  another  and  to  the  last. 

The  var.  lingualis  is  founded  on  a  single  9  from  Fort  Collins, 
Colorado,  Aug.  8,'1895.     (Baker.)  8 


106  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  known  range  of  P.  albipen7iis  is  greatly  extended  by  a  9 
sent  to  me  by  Mr.  Fox,  caught  in  Nowlin  Co.,  South  Dakota.  The 
name  of  the  collector  does  not  appear  on  the  label.  The  clypeus  is 
marked  practically  as  in  lingualis,  but  the  glossa  is  not  hairy. 
Stigma  pale  orange.  Second  submarginal  cell  narrowed  fully  one- 
half  to  marginal. 

Since  the  above  was  written,  Mr.  Fox  has  examined  for  me  Cres- 
son's  types  of  hyalina  (  <?  ),  and  reports  that  one  has  the  abdominal 
marks  as  in  verbesince  and  helianthi ;  but  the  other  must  be  held  to 
be  the  true  type,  as  Cresson  does  not  mention  the  marks.  The  form 
above,  described  as  pasonis,  has  only  a  very  small  clypeal  mark,  so 
it  is  in  all  respects  very  similar  to  what  we  must  call  albipennis  var. 
hyalina  (Cr.). 

Many  years  ago,  P.  albipennis  was  taken  by  Belfrage  in  Bosque 
Co.,  Texas.  (Cresson,  Tr.  Am.  Ent.  Soc,  1872,  p.  261.)  This  is 
a  little  east  of  the  98th  meridian. 

70.  Perdita  lepachidis  n.  sp.,  or  race. 

$. — Length  about  6  J  mm.  Resembles  the  $  of  albipemiis,  hut 
head  and  thorax  brassy-green,  not  at  all  bluish-green.  Vertex 
quite  densely  and  deeply  punctured.  Clypeal  markings  reduced  to 
a  yellow  median  line  and  yellow  lower  corners,  occasionally  the 
whole  anterior  margin  of  clypeus  yellow,  connecting  with  the  longi- 
tudinal line.  Mandibles  simple.  Metathorax  rather  inclined  to 
bluish.     Wings  and  abdomen  as  in   ^  albipennis. 

The  flagelkim  is  orange,  the  two  spots  on  the  hind  margin  of  pro- 
thorax  are  feebly  developed,  the  front  is  fairly  shiny,  not  nearly  so 
dull  as  in  verbesince. 

Hab. — On  flowers  of  Lepachys  tagetes  (James),  Santa  Fe,  N.  M., 
July  30,  1895,  and  Socorro,  N.  M.,  June29th.  I  do  not  know  how 
late  it  flies,  but  the  Lepachys  is  over  sooner  than  the  Verbesina  or 
Helianthus.  The  characters  of  this  species  or  race  are  slight,  but 
constant  in  the  specimens  examined.  The  9  is  unfortunately  un- 
known. 

Appe7idix :  Species  received  since  the  above  paper  was  ivritten. 
Perdita  utahensis  n.  sp. 

9  . — Length  8  mm.  Head  dark  blue-green,  thorax  brassy-green  ; 
Metathorax  green,  not  blue,  but  so  dark  as  to  be  almost  black. 
Head  of  ordinary  size,  about  as  broad  as  long ;  face  and  cheeks 
hairy,  the  hairs  dull  white,  those  on  occiput  gray.  Front  strongly 
granular,  with  moderately  close  punctures  ;  facial  ridge  with  a  median 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  107 

linear  groove,  extending  down  on  the  ridge  as  far  as  the  level  of  the 
anteunal  sockets,  Clypeus  cocked-hat-shaped,  but  rounded  and 
broad  above,  and  unusually  high,  entirely  pale  yellow  except  the 
usual  two  dots.  Lateral  pale  yellow  face-marks  triangular,  the  in- 
ner angle  opposite  the  clypeal  dot,  the  upper  angle  (of  about  40°) 
level  with  the  antennal  sockets,  on  the  orbital  margin.  The  inner 
side  of  the  triangle  is  straight  or  nearly  so,  not  notched  as  in  bige- 
lovloi.  Supraclypeal  and  dog-ear  marks  absent.  Mandibles  simple, 
with  the  basal  three-fifths  very  broad  and  pale  yellowish  ;  and  the 
terminal  two-fifths  strongly  bent  inward,  dark  rufous-brown, 
slender,  coming  to  a  point.  Antennae  with  the  scape  all  yellow,  fun- 
icle  yellow  with  a  brown  blotch  above ;  flagellum  brown,  dark 
above,  pale  below,  first  joint  all  yellow  below. 

Thorax,  including  mesothorax  and  pleura,  quite  hairy,  disc  of 
metathorax  bare.  The  abundant  short  bristles  on  the  mesothorax 
have  a  yellowish  tinge.  Pleura  all  dark.  Collar  and  hind  border 
of  prothorax  broadly,  connecting  with  tubercles,  pale  yellow.  The  pro- 
thorax  is  thus  practically  all  yellow  except  a  large  wedge-shaped 
portion  on  each  side.     Mesothorax  shiny. 

Tegulse  hyaline,  with  a  yellowish  opaque  subreniform  mark. 
AVings  hyaline,  nervures  and  stigma  pale  brown,  the  latter  not  cen- 
trally hyaline.  Marginal  cell  long  and  rather  narrow,  squarely 
truncate,  its  poststigmatal  portion  much  the  longest.  Second  sub- 
marginal  large,  not  narrowed  half  to  marginal.  Third  discoidal 
distinct,  rather  narrower  below  than  is  usual.  Legs  hairy  ;  femora 
yellow,  middle  femora  with  a  little  brown  at  base  below.  Tibiae 
and  tarsi  pale  brown  ;  anterior  tibiae  yellow  in  front  and  with  a  yel- 
low streak  behind. 

Abdomen  above  with  about  equally  broad  dull  yellow  and  black 
bands,  the  latter  five  in  number,  but  the  last  not  so  well-defined. 
First  segment  with  an  oblique  black  mark  on  each  side  before  the 
band.  The  first  baud  touches  on  each  side  a  black  longitudinal 
groove  such  as  is  seen  on  the  side  of  the  second  segment  in  luteola 
9  .  The  second  and  third  bands  present  a  small  lobe  on  each  side 
below.  The  fourth  band  below  has  a  median  projecting  tongue. 
Venter  pale  dull  yellow,  broadly  mottled  with  brown  medially. 

Hab. — Southwest  Utah,  collected  by  Mr.  Palm,  sent  by  Mr.  C. 
F.  Baker,  one  specimen.     Type  in  coll.  Baker. 

This,  the  first  Perdita  recorded  from  Utah,  belongs  near  albipen- 
nis,  etc.,  but  will  be  readily  I'ecognized  by  the  characters  I  have 
italicized. 


108  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


THE  MOLTING    OF  BIEDS  WITH  SPECIAL   REFERENCE  TO  THE 
PLUMAGES  OF  THE  SMALLER  LAND  BIRDS  OF  EASTERN 
NORTH  AMERICA. 

BY  WITHER  STONE. 

The  lack  of  definite  information  regarding  the  seasonal  plumages 
of  our  birds  which  characterizes  most  of  the  works  on  North  Amer- 
ican ornithology,  as  well  as  the  scarcity  of  recorded  facts  relative  to 
the  methods  by  Avhich  the  plumages  are  assumed,  must  have  im- 
pressed all  who  have  had  occasion  to  seek  for  information  upon 
these  subjects.  This  is  unquestionably  due,  in  a  great  measure,  to 
the  scarcity,  in  collections,  of  molting  specimens  and  adults  in  fall 
or  winter  plumage.  Molting  specimens  are  only  to  be  obtained  dur- 
ing July  and  August  in  this  latitude,  and  collecting  at  this  season 
is  not  only  difficult  on  account  of  the  retiring  habits  of  the  birds 
during  the  period  of  molt,  but  also  exceedingly  unpleasant,  being 
the  height  of  our  hot  season.  Furthermore,  professional  collectors 
have  not  been  encouraged  to  collect  molting  birds  since  the  most 
marketable  specimens  are  full-plumaged  spring  birds.  To  this 
cause,  too,  is  probably  due  the  great  scarcity  of  North  American 
birds  from  the  tropics,  showing  the  progress  and  nature  of  the  early 
spring  molt,  since  collectors  visiting  these  regions  have  paid  more 
attention  to  securing  fine  specimens  of  the  native  species. 

In  view  of  the  state  of  our  knowledge  of  molts  and  seasonal  plum- 
ages and  the  scattered  nature  of  the  literature  bearing  upon  the 
subject,  I  have  prepared  the  following  pages,  more  with  the  hope 
of  attracting  attention  to  this  branch  of  ornithological  investigation, 
than  of  assuming  to  present  a  finished  treatise. 

For  some  years  past  I  have  been  paying  special  attention  to  the 
acquisition  of  a  series  of  molting  specimens  of  our  eastern  North 
America  birds  and  my  own  collection,  together  with  that  of  the 
Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  furnishes  a  consider- 
able amount  of  such  material.  I  have  also  examined  a  large 
number  of  specimens  in  the  United  States  National  Museum,  and 
additional  series  have  been  kindly  loaned  by  Mr.  Robert  Ridgway 
of  the  above  institution,  Mr.  Wm.  Brewster,  of  Cambridge,  Mass., 
and  Dr.  J.  A.  Allen  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  Hisfory. 

In  spite  of  this,  however,  I  have  frequently  been  confronted  with 
questions  which  can  only  be  settled  by  the  acquisition  of  additional 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  109 

material.  Owing  to  this  lack  of  specimens,  I  have  no  doubt  that 
alterations  will  have  to  be  made  in  my  accounts  of  the  molt  in 
several  species,  in  the  light  of  future  investigation.  I  nevertheless 
think  it  desirable  to  publish,  at  once,  such  information  as  I  have 
collected,  as  a  basis  for  future  work. 

In  the  first  part  of  this  paper  will  be  found  a  general  account  of  the 
methods  of  plumage  change,  based  upon  my  studies,  and  all  state- 
ments will  be  understood  to  refer  only  to  the  groups  here  under  con- 
sideration. As  no  general  paper  on  molting  has  aj)peared  recently, 
it  seemed  best  to  treat  the  subject  at  some  length  in  this  connection  ; 
but  it  must  be  understood  that  I  do  not  claim  originality  for  all  the 
statements  given  below  as  many  of  the  facts  have  long  been  known. 
I  have,  however,  made  no  statements  that  have  not  seemed  to  be 
verified  by  my  own  investigations.  The  second  part  consists  of  brief 
accounts  of  the  molts  and  seasonal  plumages  of  most  of  the  smaller 
land  birds  of  eastern  North  America,  from  the  Cuckoos  through 
the  Passeres  in  the  order  of  the  American  Ornithologists'  Union 
Check  List.  The  Raptores,  Columbse,  Gallinse  and  all  the  Water 
Birds  have  been  omitted  for  want  of  sufficient  material  for  their 
proper  study,  though  they  will  probably  exhibit  still  more  interest- 
ing facts  than  those  furnished  by  the  groups  here  under  consideration. 

The  difficulties  that  present  themselves  in  a  study  of  this  nature 
are  many.  Chief  among  them  is  the  impossibility  of  telling  the  age 
of  most  of  the  specimens  upon  which  we  must  base  our  investigation. 
The  study  of  live  birds  is,  of  course,  out  of  the  question,  and  even 
were  it  possible  the  results  would  not  prove  satisfactory,  as  it  has 
been  shown  that  plumage  changes  in  captive  birds  are  often  abnor- 
mal. 

Thrown  back  upon  a  study  of  prepared  skins,  our  only  method  of 
telling  what  year  in  the  life  of  the  bird  a  certain  plumage  represents, 
is  by  having  a  sufficient  series  of  specimens,  taken  while  actually  in 
the  molt,  to  connect  the  various  known  plumages.  Such  series  are 
at  present  very  hard  to  obtain,  as  has  already  been  stated,  and  we 
are,  therefore,  often  forced  to  judge  from  comparison  of  series  taken 
before  and  after  the  molts,  which  is  of  course  much  less  satisfactory. 
Many  specimens,  however,  which  are  apparently  not  molting,  often 
show  traces  of  an  old  plumage  which  has  just  been  lost  or  a  new  one 
just  appearing,  when  the  feathers  are  carefully  raised  on  various 
parts  of  the  body  ;  and  much  of  ray  information  has  been  gained 
from  such  specimens. 


110  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

It  is  generally  considered,  and  in  many  cases  actually  proven, 
that  the  most  perfect  and  brilliantly  plumaged  individuals  of  a 
species  are  the  oldest,  or  at  least  are  birds  of  several  years  of  age, 
and  I  have  followed  this  idea  in  treating  of  the  species  in  the  latter 
part  of  the  present  paper.  It  is,  however,  quite  likely  that  certain 
individuals,  whether  from  excessive  vitality  or  some  other  cause, 
assume  the  adult  dress  at  an  earlier  period  in  their  life  than  others 
and  that  certain  other  individuals  never  attain  the  highest  develop- 
ment of  plumage  coloration  exhibited  by  the  species. 

The  scarcity  of  adult  birds  in  winter  plumage  (i.  e.  the  dress 
assumed  at  the  end  of  the  breeding  season)  has  already  been  men- 
tioned. The  fact  that  the  number  of  these  birds  taken  in  September 
and  October  is  often  so  remarkably  small  as  compared  with  the 
birds  of  the  year,  seems  to  me  good  evidence  that  they  not  only  start 
on  their  southward  migration  sooner  than  the  young,  but  that  they 
make  a  more  continuous  journey  with  fewer  and  shorter  stops. 

The  diti'erence  in  the  numbers  of  these  birds  taken  by  autumn  col- 
lectors is  real  and  not  imaginary.  Mr.  C.  W,  Beckham  in  1887  called 
especial  attention  to  it\  giving  the  above  explanation.  He  stated 
that  between  Sept.  1  and  Nov.  22,  1886,  he  collected  367  birds  of 
which  348  were  birds  of  the  year,  the  determination  of  age  being 
based  upon  examination  of  the  skeleton.  In  the  fall  series  that  I  have 
examined,  where  the  difference  between  the  bird  of  the  year  and 
adult  was  clearly  indicated  by  the  plumage,  I  find  the  proportion 
of  old  birds  very  small ;  but  I  think  that  careful  collecting  carried 
on  through  August  will  result  in  the  discovery  of  a  large  number 
of  adult  birds  present  at  that  time,  which  leave  before  the  usual  fall 
collecting  begins. 

As  a  result  of  the  studies  given  in  detail  farther  on,  the  following 
generalizations  may  be  made : 
1.  The  annual  molt  at  the  close  of  the  breeding  season  is  a  physio- 
logical necessity  and  is  common  to  all  birds. 
II.  The  spring  molt  and  striking  changes  of  plumage  effected  by 
abrasion  are  not  physiological  necessities  and  their  extent  is  de- 
pendent  upon   the   height   of  development    of  coloration    in 
the  adult  plumage,  and  does  not  necessarily  bear  any  relation 
to  the  systematic  relationships  of  the  species. 

It  naturally  follows  that  closely  related  species  may  differ 
materially  in  the  number  and  extent  of  their  molts,  and  that 

1  Auk,  1887,  p.  79. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  Ill 

males  and  females  of  the  same  species  differ  greatly  in  this 
respect  when  the  nuptial  plumage  of  the  adult  male  is  highly 
developed  as  compared  with  that  of  the  female  or  with  its  own 
winter  plumage. 

III.  The  amount  of  change  effected  in  the  plumage  at  any  partic- 
ular molt  varies  considerably  in  different  individuals  of  the 
same  species  and  sex. 

IV.  Some  species  which  have  a  well  marked  spring  molt  in  their 
first  and  second  yeard  may  discontinue  it  afterwards,  when  the 
adult  plumage  has  once  been  acquired.  And,  on  the  other 
hand,  some  individuals  may  continue  to  molt  in  the  spring, 
while  otliers  of  the  same  species  cease  to  do  so. 

V.  The  remiges  are  molted  less  frequently  than  any  other  part  of 
the  plumage.     As  a  rule,  they  are  only  renewed  at  the  annual 
molt  (exception  Dolichonyx). 
VI.  Variability  in  the  order  of  molt  in  the  remiges  and  presence  or 
absence  of  molt  in  the  flight  feathers  at  the  end  of  the  first 
summer  are  generally  family  characters  i.  e.,  Ceryle  differs  from 
any  other  species  treated  of  in  this  paper  in  the  order  of  molt  in 
the  primaries.     All  Picidse  and  all  Icterid?e  except  Icterus,  (and 
Dolichonyx'^)  molt  the  flight  feathers  with  the  rest  of  the  first 
plumage.     None  of  the  Oscines  except  IcteridjB  (as  above),  some 
(all?)   Hirundinidse,   Otocoris   and  Cardinalis  molt  the  flight 
feathers  at  this  time. 
Some  other  exceptions  to  the  above  statements  no  doubt  occur, 
but  they  cover  the  vast  majority  of  cases. 

In  connection  with  the  second  statement  attention  should  be  called 
to  Ammodramus  sandwichensis  savanna  which  has  practically  the  same 
plumage  at  all  seasons,  but  which  has  an  extensive  molt  of  the  body 
plumage  in  spring.  3Ielospiza  fasciata,  which  closely  resembles  it  in 
plumage  at  all  seasons,  has  scarcely  a  trace  of  spring  molt.  Avww- 
dramus  caudacntus  is  the  only  other  species  that  shows  any  consider- 
able spring  molt,  and  in  which  the  sexes  are  not  strikingly  different. 
As  stated  above,  the  number  and  extent  of  the  molts  do  not  of 
necessity  bear  any  relation  to  the  systematic  position  of  the  species. 
The  Friugillidse  include  species  which  exhibit  the  simplest  series  of 
molts  as  well  as  some  examples  of  the  most  complicated  molting 
known  among  the  Passeres.  The  species  of  certain  families  do  show 
practical  uniformity  in  their  molts,  but  in  such  cases  there  is  also 
uniformity  in  the  relative  development  of  plumage  of  the  sexes. 


112  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  Icterid^e  exhibit  the  greatest  number  of  exceptions  to  the 
general  rules  of  molting  and  are  more  complicated  in  their  molts 
than  any  other  family.  In  most  families  complicated  molting  is 
the  excejJtion,  in  the  Icteridse  it  is  the  rule. 

ORDER  OF  MOLT. 

The  molt  is  occasioned  by  the  growth  of  new  feathers  from  the 
old  papillse,  each  new  feather  forcing  out  the  old  one  on  its  tip.  The 
point  of  attachment,  however,  is  so  brittle  that  the  old  feather  is 
almost  immediately  broken  off,  but  in  young  birds  molting  from  the 
first  plumage  into  their  winter  plumage,  the  old  feathers  are  not 
infrequently  found  still  attached  to  the  tips  of  the  new  ones.  A  young 
Meadow  Lark,  Sturnella  magna,  in  my  collection  shows  this  very 
nicely,  and  Mr.  William  Palmer  mentions  a  young  Hooded  Warbler, 
Sylvania  mitrata,  in  which  the  down  of  the  nestling  was  to  be  seen 
at  the  tip  of  the  first-plumage  feather  while  it  was  in  turn  attached 
to  the  new  feather  of  the  winter  plumage  (PI.  IV,  figs,  5,  6). 

The  feathers  are,  of  course,  not  all  shed  at  once,  but  the  new 
feathers  on  certain  parts  of  the  body  have  nearly  completed  their 
growth  before  those  on  the  other  parts  make  their  appearance. 

The  first  body-feathers  to  appear,  in  our  passerine  birds  at  least, 
are  those  of  the  abdominal  tracts,  forming  a  conspicuous  V-shaped 
patch  against  the  old  plumage  of  the  rest  of  the  lower  surfoce. 
Almost  coincident  with  these  appear  the  feathers  of  the  inter- 
scapulary  region  and  shortly  afterward  those  of  the  throat  and 
crown  ;  there  is,  however,  a  good  deal  of  variation  in  the  order  of 
appearance  of  the  other  body  feathers  (in  fact,  of  all,  after  the 
development  of  the  abdominal  tracts)  in  different  sj^ecies  and  also, 
I  think,  a  good  deal  of  individual  variation.  This  will  be  seen  in  the 
table  on  page  115. 

In  the  molting  of  the  wings,  the  feathers  are  shed  one  or  two  at  a 
time,  and  symmetrically  from  the  two  wings.  The  first  of  the  quill 
feathers  to  molt  are  the  two  innermost  primaries  which  are  probably 
shed  at  almost  the  same  time,  as  they  are  at  nearly  all  stages  of  about 
the  same  size  (PI.  IV,  figs.  1,  2  and  3).  Following  these  the  prim- 
aries are  shed  at  short  intervals,  one  at  a  time,  finishing  with  the 
outermost.  The  only  exceptions  that  I  have  noticed  to  this  order 
are  in  the  Belted  Kingfisher,  Ceryle  alcyon,  and  the  Snow  Bunting, 
Plectrophenax  nivalis. 

2  The  Auk,  1894,  p.  287. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  113 

The  Kingfisher  is  strikingly  different  from  any  other  bird  exam- 
ined, in  that  the  first  wing  feather  molted  is  the  fourth  primary 
followed  successively  by  the  third,  second  and  first  (PI.  V,  fig.  3). 
Three  specimens  taken  at  Sicamous,  British  Columbia,  July  18, 1892> 
show  precisely  the  same  order  of  molt  and  are  in  almost  the  same 
stage.  How  the  molt  proceeds  after  the  first  primary  is  shed,  I  am 
unable  to  say,  though  the  fifth  is  probably  the  next  to  be  renewed, 
followed  by  the  others  in  regular  order  inward. 

One  male  Piranga  erythromelas  shows  the  7th  and  8th  primaries 
molted  first,  followed  by  the  6th  ;  while  the  9th  was  shed  simultane- 
ously with  the  5th.  This,  however,  seems  to  have  been  an  individ- 
ual exception. 

In  the  Snow  Buntings  two  molting  females  (Disko,  Greenland, 
Aug.  11th)  show  that  the  innermost  primary  is  lost  first,  followed 
by  the  next  four  almost  simultaneously  and  then  the  others  in  rapid 
succession.  The  loss  of  all  these  feathers  occurs  so  nearly  at  the 
same  time,  that  all  but  two  of  the  old  primaries  are  shed  before  any 
of  the  new  ones  have  grown  as  long  as  the  secondaries  (PI.  V,  fig.  4), 

The  first  secondary  feather  to  be  molted  is  the  outermost,  followed 
by  the  others  in  regular  order.  The  secondaries,  however,  do  not 
begin  to  molt  until  the  primaries  have  nearly  all  been  renewed,  the 
first  new  secondary  appearing  simultaneously  with  the  4th  or  5th 
primary — i.  e.  when  only  three  or  four  of  the  old  primaries  remain 
(PI.  V,  fig.  5). 

The  first  tertial  generally  appears  a  little  before  the  first  secondary. 

The  primaries  and  secondaries  seem  to  be  the  most  persistent  of 
the  bird's  feathers,  and  when  they  are  shed,  there  is  always,  so  far 
as  I  have  been  able  to  ascertain,  a  complete  molt. 

The  tertials  on  the  other  hand  are  frequently  renewed  independ- 
ently of  the  other  wing  feathers  during  the  spring,  when  there  is  a 
partial  molt  in  some  species. 

As  regards  the  molt  of  the  tail,  it  has  generally  been  stated  that 
the  feathers  are  shed  symmetrically  and  successively  a  pair  at  a  time 
while  this  may  be  true  it  is  nevertheless  a  fact  that  in  many,  prob- 
ably most,  of  our  smaller  land  birds,  the  molts  of  the  successive  pairs 
occur  in  such  rapid  succession  that  the  bird  is  for  a  brief  time  prac- 
tically tail-less,  and  the  half  grown  feathers  a[)pear  to  be  all  of  nearly 
the  same  size  as  in  the  case  of  the  first  tail  of  the  nestling,  when 
partly  grown.  In  other  words  the  first  pair  of  new  tail-feathers  does 
not  reach  a  functional  length  before  the  last  pair  of  old  feathers  is 
shed. 


114  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

In  cases  where  there  is  an  appreciable  difference  in  the  time  of 
shedding  the  different  pairs  of  tail-feathers,  it  is  the  general  rule 
that  the  outermost  pair  is  the  last  to  be  shed,  and  birds  are  not 
infrequently  found  with  the  new  central  pair  of  tail-feathers  half- 
grown,  while  the  old  outermost  pair  is  still  retained  (PI.  V,  fig.  2). 
The  swallows  are  especially  good  examples  of  this,  as  the  molt  of 
the  tail  in  this  group  seems  to  be  very  gradual  (PI.  IV,  fig.  4). 

In  Quiscahis  and  some  other  birds  the  central  pair  is  the  last  to 
be  molted,  all  the  others  having  nearly  completed  their  growth 
before  the  old  middle  feathers  are  shed. 

In  the  Woodpeckers  the  molt  begins  with  the  pair  next  to  the 
middle'  and  extends  outward  while  the  central  pair  is  the  last  to 
be  shed  (PI.  V,  fig.  1). 

In  this  family  the  tail  has  a  particular  function, — i.  e.  in  climb- 
ing; hence  the  slow  molt,  as  the  birds  would  be  at  a  great  disadvan- 
tage if  the  whole  tail  was  lost  at  once.  The  central  pair  of  feathers 
are  of  particular  importance,  and  the  old  ones  are,  therefore, 
retained  until  the  new  quills  of  the  next  pair  have  become  suffi- 
ciently developed  to  temporarily  take  their  place  during  their  own 
renewal. 

The  tail-feathers  generally  correspond  with  the  primaries  and 
secondaries  in  the  number  of  molts  which  they  undergo  during  the 
year,  but  in  some  cases  where  there  is  a  spring  molt  of  the  body 
feathers,  together  with  the  tertials,  there  is  also  a  complete  molt  of 
the  tail,  while  the  primaries  and  secondaries  are  not  renewed.  This 
takes  place — in  certain  individuals  at  least — in  the  Sharp-tailed 
Finch,  Ammodramus  caudacutus. 

Another  peculiarity  of  the  tail-feathers  is  their  renewal  at  times 
other  than  those  of  regular  molt,  when  they  have  been  lost  through 
accident.  This  does  not  occur  in  the  wing  feathers  so  far  as  I  am 
aware.  Perhaps  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  wing  feathers  are  so 
much  more  firmly  rooted  than  any  of  the  other  feathers,  they  are 
rarely  if  ever  lost  through  accident,  and  hence  the  necessity  for 
renewal  does  not  arise ;  while  the  tail-feathers  on  other  hand  are 
the  most  frequently  lost  of  any  of  the  feathers,  for,  owing  to  their 
position,  they  are  often  caught  and  pulled  out  by  beasts  or  birds 
of  prey. 

Having  considered  the  order  of  the  molt  in  the  body-feathers,  wing 
and  tail  separately,  it  remains  to  consider  the  relative  time  of  molt 

^  In  one  specimen  of  Dryohaleti  puhescens  examined,  this  pair  and  the  next 
outer  pair  were  shed  simultaneously. 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA- 


US 


in  the  three.  So  far  as  I  can  judge  from  the  material  that  I  have, 
the  first  two  or  three  primaries  are  generally  shed  before  the  feathers 
of  the  abdominal  tracts  are  expanded  and  the  outermost  primary 
is  lost  at  about  the  time  that  the  body-plumage  is  completely  renewed, 
while  the  tail  in  the  majority  of  species  is  shed  just  previous  to 
this — i.  e.  when  one  or  two  of  the  old  primaries  still  remain. 

A  knowledge  of  these  relations  is  very  valuable  in  determining 
whether  early  fall  specimens  are  adults  or  birds  of  the  year.  In  the 
former  the  outer  primary  will  be  found  not  quite  completely  grown, 
or  at  least  with  remains  of  the  embryonic  sheath  at  its  base,  while  in 
the  birds  of  the  year  no  trace  of  recent  growth  or  immaturity  will 
be  found  in  the  wing  or  tail  feathers,  except  in  a  few  species  which 
molt  the  remiges  and  rectrices  of  the  first  plumage  in  the  fall.* 

As  regards  species  in  which  the  molt  of  the  tail  occurs  gradually  the 
first  tail  feathers  are  shed  about  the  same  time  as  the  sixth  primary, 
while  the  last  are  shed  simultaneously  with  the  last  or  next  to  last 
primary. 

In  the  Tyrannid?e,  the  body  feathers  begin  to  molt  sometimes 
before  the  first  flight  feather  is  shed,  and  in  young  Sphyrapicus 
much  of  the  first  plumage  is  retained  till  long  after  the  flight  feath- 
ers have  been  renewed. 

The  following  tables  show  the  relative  molting  of  the  feathers  in 
some  of  the  specimens  examined,  and  referred  to  above  : — 

I.   RELATIVE  MOLT  OF  BODY  PLUMAGE. 


""ZT^'^^r    Interscapul 


Piranga    erythromelas, 

1,904,  W.  S just  appearing. 

Sturnella   magna,  1,191, 

W.  S nearly  complete. 

Colaptes    auratus,  1,532, 

W.  S nearly  complete 

Quiscalus  quiscula,  154,1 

W.  S ! nearly  complete 

Plectrophenax   nivalis, 

26,987,  A.N.  S complete. 

Dolichouyx  oryzivorus,! 

32,783,  A.  M.  N.  H j       complete. 


just  appearing. 

complete. 

sprouting. 

just  appearing. 

half  renewed. 

complete. 


Top  of  Head. 


half  renewed. 

half  renewed. 

just  appearing. 

no  molt. 

just  appearing. 

complete. 


Throat. 


just  sprouting. 

no  molt, 
just  appearing. 

no  molt. 

just  appearing. 

center  of  abdo- 
men not  molted. 


NUMBER   AND   TIME    OF   MOLTS. 

When  the  young  bird  emerges  from  the  egg,  it  is  enveloped  in  a 
more  or  less  complete  covering  of  down  ;  in  ptilopsedic  birds  the  cover- 

*  In  any  case,  a  specimen  showing  molt  or  evidence  of  recent  molt  in  the 
bodj'-feathers,  while  the  rectrices  and  remiges  present  no  signs  of  molt,  may 
be  regarded  with  certainty  as  a  bird  of  the  year. 


116 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 
II.  SHOWING  RELATIVE  MOLT  OF  RECTRICES. 


[1896. 


Adults  in  Annual  Molt. 


Dryobates  villosus,  26,644,  A.  N.  S Old. 

Dryobates  pubeseens,  30,750,  A.  N.  S Old. 


Middle 
Pair. 


Dryobates  villosus,  20,646,  A.  N.  S 

Colaptes  auratus,  26,694,  A.  N.  S , 

Colaptes  auratus,  26,69.3,  A.  N.  j 

Dryobates  pubeseens,  26,651,  A.  N.  S. 


Old. 
Old. 


2.5 
2.0 

E.G. 

E.G. 


2.5 
2.0 

E.G. 

E.G. 


E.G.    E.G. 


4 

5 

Old 

Old 

Old. 

Old. 

Old. 

Old. 

1.5 

1.5 

E.G. 

.2 

E.G. 

E.G. 

.1 

E.G. 
F.G. 
E.G. 
F.G. 


Tachycineta  bicolor,  28,-595,  A.  N. 
Tacbvcineta  bicolor,  1,660,  W.  S.. 
Tachycineta  bicolor,  1,921,  W.  S.. 


!      .7 

Old. 

Old. 

Old. 

Old. 

F.G. 

.3 

1.3 

Old. 

Old. 

E.G. 

F.G. 

F.G. 

F.G. 

.2 

Old. 

Old. 

1.0 


Cyanocitta  stelleri,  30,92.3,  A.  N.  S 3.2 

Spizella  pusilla,  1,170,  W.  S 2 

Plectrophenax  nivalis,  26,987,  A.  N.  S 2.0 

Passerina  cyanea,  28,516,  A.  N.  S 1.5 

Myiarchus  cineraseeus,  29,456,  A.  N.  S E.G. 

Lanius  ludovicianus,  1,429,  W.  S E.  G. 

Seiurus  aurocapillus,  1,138,  W.  S 1 

Icterus  galbula,  28,096,  A.  N.  S !  F.G. 

Melospiza  fasciata,  1,667,  W.  S '  F.G. 

Ammodramus  caudacutus,  1,155,  W.  S |  E.  G. 


3.5 

.5 

2.0 

1.5 

.3 

.5 

.1 

F.G. 

F.G. 

F.G. 

Old. 

.8 

2.0' 

1.5 

.5 

1.7 

.1 

E.G. 

F.G. 

F.G. 


Old. 
1.5 
2.0 
1.5 
1.0 
1.8 
.1 
.1 

F.G. 

E.G. 


Old. 

1.7 

2.0 

1.5 

1.5 

2.2 

.2 

.2 

F.G. 

E.G. 

Old. 

Old. 

2.5 

1.7 

2.2 

2.5 

.5 

.6 

.2 

.1 


Quiscalus  quiscula,  28,117,  A.  N.  S Old. 


3.6 


2.0 


1.5 


1.2 


1.0 


The  four  divisions  represent  four  styles  of  molting. 

Numerals  denote  the  amount  in  inches  that  the  new  feathers  lack  of  their  full  growth. 
"  E.  G."  denotes  "  Full  Grown."  Dashes  show  that  the  old  feather  has  been  shed  but  the 
new  one  has  not  yet  appeared. 

III.  SHOWING  RELATIVE  MOLT  OF  WING  FEATHERS. 


Molothrus    ater,  28,028, 

A.  N   S.* 

Agelaius  phoeniceus, 

1,.579,  W.  S 

Dolithonyx   oryzivorus, 

28,000,  A.  N.  S 

Piraiiga     erythromelas, 

1,904,  W.  S 

Colaptes  auratus,   1,.532, 

W  S 

Quiscalus  quiscula,  1,900, 

VV.  S.* 

Quiscalus  quiscula,  1,541, 

W.  S  * 

Sturnella    magna,  1,191, 

W.  S 

Chaetura  pelagica,  1,521, 

W.  S 

Plectrophenax     nivalis, 

26,987,  A.  N.  S 

Dolichonyx  oryzivorus, 

32,783,  A.  M.  N.  H..  f. 
Melospiza  fasciata,  1,667, 

W.S 

Tachycineta    bicolor, 

1,921,  W.S 


Last 

Primary 

Shed. 

Molt  in 
Secondaries. 

Molt  in 
Tertials. 

Molt  in 
Greater 
Coverts. 

Molt  in 

Lesser 

Coverts. 

6 

none. 

none. 

complete. 

nearly  comp. 

6 

none. 

none. 

complete. 

just  begun. 

5 

none. 

half  grown. 

half  grown. 

none. 

5 

none. 

mid.  shed. 

none. 

just  begun. 

5 

first  3^  gr. 

y^  grown. 

complete. 

complete. 

a 

first  sprouted. 

sprouted. 

complete. 

nearly  comp. 

4 

first  H  gr. 

sprouted. 

complete. 

nearly  comp. 

4 

none. 

inner  spr't'd 

complete. 

nearly  comp. 

4 

Vi  gr- 

sprouted. 

partly  molted. 

partly  molted. 

3 

none. 

complete. 

complete. 

partly  molted. 

2 

1st  and  6th. 

complete. 

complete. 

complete. 

1 

nearly  comp. 

complete. 

complete. 

complete. 

1 

nearly  comp. 

complete. 

complete. 

complete. 

*  Molt  from  first  plumage,    t  Spring  molt. 
All  others  are  adults  in  annual  molt. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  117 

ing  is  complete,  while  in  psilop?edic  birds  it  is  but  very  slightly- 
developed.  In  prsecocial  species  the  downy  dress  is  retained  for  a 
considerable  time  before  the  first  feathers  appear,  but  in  altricial 
birds  it  is  soon  replaced  by  what  is  known  as  the  "first  plumage." 
The  reraiges  and  rectrices  of  the  first  plumage  are  usually  the  same 
as  those  of  the  adult,  but  the  body  feathers,  while  of  the  ordinary 
structure,  are  much  more  pJumulaceous  than  the  covering  of  the 
adult. 

This  first  plumage  is  retained  for  some  time  (three  or  four 
months)  in  some  species,  but  in  others  it  is  very  soon  replaced  by  a 
more  permanent  winter  plumage  in  which  all  the  feathers  are  of  the 
same  structure  as  those  of  the  adult.  The  entire  body  plumage  is 
molted  at  this  time  as5  well  as  most  of  the  wing  coverts ;  but  the 
rectrices,  remiges  and  the  primary  coverts  are,  in  the  great  majority 
of  our  smaller  land  birds,  retained  until  the  next  annual  molt. 

The  species  in  which  all  the  first  plumage  feathers  are  molted  are 
the  following :  Otocoris  alpestris,  Cardinalis  cardinalis,  Agelaius 
phceniceus,  Quiscalus  q^dsciila,  Molothrus  ater,  Sturnella  magna,  Scole- 
cophagus  carolinus,  Tachycineta  bicolor  and  all  the  Woodpeckers. 
Of  Ceryle,  TrochUus,  Chcetura  and  a  few  Oscines  I  have  been  unable 
to  examine  sufficient  specimens  to  speak  with  certainty  on  this  point. 

In  early  spring,  probably  about  the  time  of  revival  of  sexual 
activity  and  immediately  preceding  the  vernal  migration,  there  is  in 
the  vast  majority  of  birds  a  more  or  less  complete  molt.  Some- 
times, as  in  the  case  of  the  Bobolink,  the  change  is  absolutely  com- 
plete, but  as  a  rule  the  remiges  and  rectrices  are  not  renewed, 
while  in  other  species  the  molt  may  only  amount  to  the  acquisition 
of  a  few  new  feathers  on  the  throat  or  sides  of  the  head.  The 
tertials  are  often  renewed  at  this  time  and  seem  to  correspond  more 
with  the  body  feathers  than  with  those  of  the  wing  as  regards  their 
molting.  It  is  at  this  season  that  many  birds  acquire  marks  of 
maturity  which  are  lacking  during  the  first  winter  of  their  life,  as  for 
instance,  the  yellow  superciliary  and  loral  stripes  of  certain  finches, 
while  markings  characteristic  of  the  breeding  season  as  opposed  to 
the  winter,  also  appear  at  the  time  of  spring  molt. 

In  studying  the  species  of  our  smaller  land  birds  which  molt  in 
the  spring  it  will  be  noticed  that  of  necessity,  species  which  difl^er 
radically  in  their  spring  and  fall  plumage,  have  the  most  complete 
spring  molt ;  while,  as  a  rule,  in  those  in  which  the  plumage  is  nearly 
the  same  throughout  the  year,  the  spring  molt  is  least  marked.     The 


118  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Savanna  Sparrow  and  Sharp-tailed  Finch  are  interesting  exceptions 
to  the  latter  statement. 

The  annual  molt  which  occurs  at  the  close  of  the  breeding  season, 
in  late  summer  or  early  fall,  is  common  to  all  birds,  and  is  generally- 
coincident  with  the  molt  of  the  first  plumage  of  the  young  birds  of 
the  first  broods,  varying,  however,  in  this  respect  in  diflferent  species. 
The  annual  molt  is  always  complete,  and  when  the  new  feathers 
are  assumed,  the  plumage  is  richer  in  color  and  fuller  than  at  any 
other  time.  In  the  breeding  plumage,  the  colors  may  be  in  stronger 
contrast,  but  this  is  generally  due  to  the  wearing  away  of  the  blend- 
ing colors  of  the  tips  of  the  feathers^  which  necessarily  makes  the 
plumage  rougher. 

CHANGE  OF  COLOR  BY  ABRASION. 

During  the  time  intervening  between  two  molts,  the  feathers 
undergo  a  certain  amount  of  abrasion.  In  such  birds,  specimens  taken 
just  before  the  annual  molt,  present  a  very  dilapidated  appearance, 
and  the  abrasion,  combined  with  bleaching,  has  generally  altered  the 
appearance  of  the  plumage  very  materially  from  that  of  the  preced- 
ing fall. 

While  this  effect  of  abrasion  is  seen  in  the  plumage  of  all  birds 
just  before  the  annual  molt,  the  feathers  of  some  are  so  constructed 
as  to  render  possible  a  complete  change  in  the  color  of  the  exposed 
plumage  by  abrasion,  long  before  the  time  when  the  eflTects  of  the 
general  wear  and  tear  above  described  are  apparent.  These  feathers 
have  their  terminal  portion  difierently  colored  from  the  basal,  so  that 
when  the  plumage  is  in  its  normal  "  shingled  "  position,  only  the 
terminal  part  of  each  feather  is  exposed,  and  the  general  color  of 
the  plumage  is  the  same  as  this  portion  of  the  feather.  By  the  loss 
of  this  terminal  portion,  the  diflTerently  colored  base  of  the  feather 
comes  into  view  and  the  general  color  of  the  plumage  is  thus  com- 
pletely changed  (PI.  IV,  fig.  7).  This  result  is  attained  by  general 
wear  and  tear  and  also,  doubtless,  by  the  agency  of  the  bird  itself  in 
preening  its  feathers. 

The  diflTerently  colored  tips  to  these  feathers  wear  off  very 
rapidly,  and  generally  disappear  entirely  before  any  perceptible 
wear  is  noticeable  on  other  parts  of  the  plumage  which  are  uniform 
in  color.  This  would  indicate  that  the  terminal  portions  of  these 
feathers  are  more  brittle  than  the  basal  part,  especially  as  the  breadth 


Except  when  a  complete  spring  molt  occurs. 


I 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


119 


of  the  terminal  portion  varies  on  different  feathers,  while  the  abra- 
sion always  takes  place  exactly  to  the  line  of  demarcation  of  the 
colors. 

In  the  bodyfeathers,  the  terminal  part  is  less  perfectly  pennaceous 
in  structure  than  the  base,  and  many  of  the  barbs  are  entirely  free 
at  their  tips,  which  naturally  makes  them  more  liable  to  rapid 
abrasion  down  to  the  point  where  the  strongly  pennaceous  structure 
begins.®     This  is  particularly  well  seen  in  the  Snow  Bunting.     A 


Fig.  1 .  Tips  of  several  barbs  from 
feather  of  Snow  Bunting  showing  the 
difierence  in  structure  between  the 
light  and  dark  portions  (greatly  en- 
larged )  Photograph  by  Dr.  A.  P. 
Brown. 


Fig.  2.  Same,  further  enlarged,  with 
the  barbs  undisturbed  showing  the  in- 
terlocking of  the  barbules  in  the  black 
area.  Somewhat  diagrammatic,  after 
photograph  by  Dr.  Brown. 


microscopical  examination  of  these  feathers,  conducted  at  my  request 
by  my  friend  Dr.  A.  P.  Brown,  shows  further  that  the  booklets  on 
these  terminal  parts  are  fewer  in  number  and  less  perfectly  de- 
veloped, while  the  basal  portion  of  the  feather  where  the  dark 
pigment  begins  is  thicker  and  probably  tougher  in  structure,  the 
barbules  and  booklets  being  here  well  developed  (Fig.  1  and  2). 


*  A  paper  by  Mr.  Frank  M.  Chapman  has  appeared  since  the  above  was  written 
"  On  the  Changes  of  Plumage  in  the  Snowfiake,  Plectrophenax  niralis,"  Bull. 
Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist ,  VIII,  pp  9-12.  In  this  he  reaches  exactly  the  same 
conclusions  as  are  here  set  forth  by  the  writer  and  Dr.  Brown,  and  the  fact 
that  we  were  working  entirely  independently  gives  additional  interest  to  the 
statements. 


120  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Certain  wing  feathers  show  a  still  more  interesting  phase  of  abra- 
sion. In  the  Rose-breasted  Grosbeak,  as  is  well  known,  secondaries 
and  tertials  in  autumn  and  winter  are  marked  on  their  edges  with 
spots  of  white  (Plate  V,  figs.  7,  8),  while  in  the  Meadow  Lark  and 
Curlews  at  the  same  season,  many  of  the  feathers  have  regular  tooth- 
like indentations  of  lighter  color  along  the  sides  (Plate  IV,  figs.  8, 9). 
By  the  time  the  breeding  season  has  arrived  these  light-colored 
areas  have  been  completely  lost,  while  the  dark  parts  remain  intact, 
the  line  of  demarcation  having  been  followed  as  closely  as  if  cut  by  a 
pair  of  scissors,  except  that  some  curved  lines  become  straight  owing 
to  the  whole  barb  breaking  off  beyond  the  light  colored  area  (Plate 
IV,  fig.  9).  In  these  feathers,  both  portions  are  equally  pennaceous, 
and  do  not  exhibit  any  difference  in  structure,  so  that  we  must  regard 
the  light  portions  as  peculiarly  brittle.  It  is  a  noticeable  fact 
that  in  all  the  birds  that  have  been  examined,  the  black  feathers 
or  black  parts  of  a  feather  seem  less  subject  to  abrasion  than  those 
of  any  other  color. 

In  most  cases  where  marked  abrasion  takes  place,  the  lighter  tips 
serve  to  produce  the  blended  appearance  characteristic  of  the  winter 
plumage  of  all  birds,  while  their  loss  brings  out  the  strong  contrast 
of  colors  characteristic  of  the  breeding  season,  and  produced  in 
other  species  by  actual  molt. 

The  case  of  the  Bobolink  is  of  particular  interest  in  this  con- 
nection, diflTering  from  that  of  any  other  species,  unless  it  be  some 
individuals  of  the  Rose-breasted  Grosbeak.  It  has  a  complete 
spring  molt,  but  instead  of  assuming  the  breeding  plumage  at  this 
time,  as  in  the  case  of  most  birds  which  molt  in  the  spring,  it  assumes 
a  dress  almost  as  dull  and  blended  as  its  winter  attire,  but  which  is 
transformed  to  the  breeding  plumage  by  the  abrasion  of  the  long 
buff  tips  which  adorn  all  the  feathers.' 

The  utility  of  such  a  process  is  difficult  to  see.  The  long  tips  are 
"  acquired  to  be  lost "  as  it  were ;  they  begin  to  break  off  immediately 
and  within  two  months  have  disappeared. 

SEASONAL    PLUMAGES. 

The  number  of  recognizable  plumages,  which  a  bird  may  assume, 
is  obviously  dependent  upon  the  length  of  time  that  is  required  for 
it  to  acquire  the  mature  dress.  The  simplest  case  is  where  this  is 
accomplished  when  the  first-plumage  is  molted  or  at  the  end  of  the 

'  See  Chapman,  Auk,  1890,  p.  120. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  121 

summer  in  which  the  bird  is  hatched.  In  such  a  species  then,  there 
are  only  three  plumages  :  1.  First  Plumage.  2.  Winter  Plumage. 
3.  Nuptial  Plumage ; — the  latter  being  acquired  in  early  spring, 
either  by  actual  molt  or  abrasion.  Sometimes  it  is  so  like  the  winter 
plumage  that  they  can  scarcely  be  distinguished,  but  this  is  the 
exception,  for  even  when  no  molt  takes  place,  the  abrasion  gives 
such  a  different  appearance  to  the  plumage  by  wearing  off  the 
blending  shades  that  the  spring  and  fall  birds  can  easily  be  separ- 
ated. 

In  other  species  the  winter  plumage  of  the  young  bird  is  not 
absolutely  like  that  of  the  adult,  every  shade  of  difference  existing 
from  those  that  are  scarcely  se2:)arable  to  those  that  are  radically 
difllerent. 

In  such  cases  there  are,  of  course,  four  or  five  recognizable  plum- 
ages: 1.  First  Plumage.  2.  Plumage  of  First  Winter.  3.  Plum- 
age of  First  Nuptial  season.  4.  Adult  AVinter  Plumage.  5.  Adult 
Nuptial  Plumage.  In  most  species  the  Adult  Nuptial  Plumage  is 
assumed  at  the  first  spring  molt,  in  which  case  there  will  be  only  four 
distinct  plumages.  Sometimes  the  number  of  plumages  is  still  further 
increased  by  the  fact  that  the  bird  does  not  acquire  the  complete 
adult  dress  for  three  or  four  years.  The  changes,  however,  do  not 
progress  as  regularly  in  these  instances  after  the  first  year,  a  greater 
or  less  amount  of  the  adult  plumage  being  assumed  at  each  molt 
by  different  individuals  ;  so  that  a  large  series  instead  of  being 
divisable  into  several  lots,  each  characterized  by  distinctive  marks, 
represents  on  the  contrary  a  complete  gradation  from  the  bird  of  the 
year  to  the  adult.  Such  instances  have  been  made  to  serve  as 
examples  of  the  alleged  change  of  plumage  by  direct  change  in  the 
coloration  of  the  feathers. 

Another  point  bearing  upon  the  plumages  of  species  that  require 
several  years  to  acquire  the  mature  dress,  is  the  question  whether 
there  are  not  some  individuals  which  never  do  acquire  this  plumage. 
The  fact  of  the  remarkably  small  proportion  of  birds  in  fully  adult 
plumage  in  such  species  as  the  Purple  Finch,  Pine  Grosbeak,  White- 
throated  Sparrow,  etc.,  lends  weight  to  such  a  theory,  although  its 
actual  demonstration  is,  perhaps,  impossible. 

Then  again,  there  are  occasional  peculiar  plumages,  which,  though 
they  may  be  abnormal,  are  nevertheless  by  no  means  unique,  such 
as  the  bright  orange  plumage  of  the  male  Scarlet  Tanager,  the 
Black-headed  plumage  of  the  female  Rose-breasted  Grosbeak,  and 

9 


122  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

the  occasional  extremely  brilliant  plumage  of  the  male  of  the  same 
species,  etc.  The  two  latter  instances  may  be  considered  as:  1.  Partial 
adoption  of  the  characters  of  male  plumage  by  the  female;  and  2. 
Extreme  development  of  color  in  the  male  probably  due  to  excessive 
vitality. 

Another  complicated  series  of  plumages  pointed  out  by  Mr.  F.  M. 
Chapman®  exists  in  the  case  of  the  Bobolink.  In  these  birds  there 
arefour  distinct  plumages  :  1.  First  Plumage.  2.  Winter  Plumage. 
3.  Early  Spring  Plumage.  4.  Nuptial  Plumage."  This  early  spring 
plumage  is  acquired  by  direct  molt,  and  passes  into  the  Nuptial 
Plumage  by  an  extensive  abrasion  of  the  differently  colored  tips. 

DIRECT  CHANGE  OF  COLOR  IN  FEATHERS. 

There  have  always  been,  and  are  to-day,  ornithologists  who  believe 
thoroughly  that  feathers  actually  change  their  color,  and  that  the 
change  from  the  winter  plumage  to  the  nuptial  dress  in  some  species  is 
accomplished  solely  in  this  manner  without  either  molt  or  abrasion. 

Schlegel,  one  of  the  greatest  exponents  of  this  theory,  considered 
the  phenomenon  as  nearly  universal,  and  Gtitke,  another  of  its  staunch 
supporters,  seems  to  be  of  much  the  same  mind.  Other  writers  while 
supporting  it,  have  regarded  it  as  of  much  less  general  application 
and  some  consider  it  of  very  rare  occurrence. 

If  such  a  change  actually  does  take  place,  it  would  seem  strange 
if  it  should  not  play  a  very  important  part  in  plumage-changes, 
and,  if  we  admit  that  it  does  occur  in  any  species,  we  may  as  well 
grant  its  possibility  in  a  great  number. 

The  importance  of  the  question  warrants  a  very  careful  considera- 
tion, and,  in  order  not  to  be  misunderstood,  I  may  state  at  the  out- 
set that  in  spite  of  the  instances  that  have  been  cited  to  illustrate 
this  phenomenon,  I  have  not  yet  found  a  single  case  that  cannot  be 
otherwise  accounted  for,  and,  cannot,  therefore,  admit  that  we  have 
any  proof  of  an  actual  change  of  color  in  a  feather  apart  from  what 
may  be  produced  from  abrasion  or  bleaching. 

In  most  instances  which  have  been  cited  in  support  of  this  theory, 
the  writers  have,  it  seems  to  me,  fallen  into  the  same  error — i.  e., 
they  have  taken  a  series  of  specimens,  showing  all  sorts  of  mottled 
intergrades  from  one  plumage  to  another,  as  indicating  that  each 

8  Auk,  1890,  p.  120. 

®  If  we  consider  the  birds  of  the  year  as  recognizably  distinct  from  the  fall 
adults  we  must  regard  "2"  as  First  Winter  Plumage  and  add  "5".  Adult 
Winter  Plumage. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  123 

individual  bird  passed  through  all  those  gradations ;  or  they  have 
taken  a  series  of  feathers  from  different  individuals  or  different  parts 
of  the  same  individual,  which  show  regular  gradations  from  one  style 
of  coloration  to  another,  as  proof  that  each  feather  passes  through 
all  those  gradations. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  these  mottled  plumages  are  permanent  for  the 
time  being,  and  at  each  regular  molt  a  greater  proportion  of  the 
adult  plumage  is  assumed.  Scarcely  any  two  individuals,  however, 
correspond  exactly  in  the  amount  of  change  that  is  effected  at  a  given 
molt ;'"  hence  a  series  of  breeding  birds  taken  during  the  late  spring 
or  early  summer,  representing  individuals  of  different  age,  will  often 
show  a  nearly  complete  series  of  intergrades  between  the  two  styles 
of  plumage,  and  there  will,  of  course,  be  no  signs  of  a  molt. 

A  study  of  several  of  the  more  recent  examples  that  have  been 
brought  forward  to  illustrate  the  actual  change  of  color  in  feathers, 
will  be  of  interest  in  this  connection. 

Dr.  R.  Bowdler  Sharpe,  in  the  Catalogue  of  Birds  in  the  British 
Museum,  seems  to  regard  this  alleged  phenomenon  as  of  rather 
common  occurrence,  and  in  some  instances  goes  into  much  detail 
with  regard  to  the  subject.  This  is  especially  the  case  in  treat- 
ing of  Motacilla  lugens,^^  in  which  he  claims,  not  only  a  change 
from  gray  to  black  in  the  plumage  of  the  back,  but  also  a  remark- 
able change  in  the  color  of  the  primaries  and  secondaries  from 
brownish  to  pure  white,  the  adult  plumage  being  assumed  according 
to  Dr.  Sharpe's  theory,  in  the  first  spring. 

With  the  same  material  examined  by  Dr.  Sharpe,  and  a  little 
more  showing  the  molt  in  progress.  Dr.  Stejneger'^  shows  conclusively 
that  this  species  requires  several  years  to  acquire  the  fully  adult  plum- 
age, and  that  the  changes  in  the  color  of  the  wing  feathers  is  effected 
by  actual  molt  and  not  by  a  change  in  the  color  of  each  individual 
feather.  This  shows  conclusively  the  importance  of  having  spec- 
imens in  the  molt  for  examination  and  comparison,  and  what  a 
different  aspect  they  may  put  upon  the  case. 

While  combating  the  theory  of  direct  color  change  in  Motacilla 

^"It  is  not  intended  that  only  a  part  of  the  plumage  is  changed  ;  while  this 
may  be  true  of  the  spring  molt,  the  annual  molt  is  always  characterized  by  a 
complete  change,  but,  in  the  cases  referred  to,  part  of  the  new  plumage  comes 
in  exactly  like  the  old,  while  in  other  parts  the  color  of  the  new  plumage  is 
■diflerent. 

1^  Cat.  Eds.  Brit.  Mus.,  X,  1885,  p.  474. 
12  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1892,  p.  307. 


124  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

lugens,  Dr.  Stejueger,  nevertheless  admits  it  in  the  case  of  Zantho- 
pygia  narcissina,^^  on  what  seems  to  me  insufficient  evidence. 

This  bird  he  believes  changes  without  molt  from  an  olive  plumage 
to  one  of  brilliant  orange-yellow  and  black,  while  the  wings  and  tail 
change  from  a  dull  brownish-gray  to  a  deep  black.  I  have  examined 
the  series  which  Dr.  Stejneger  had  in  hand,  and  I  fail  to  see  any- 
thing it  in  that  cannot  be  found  in  a  similar  series  of  Icterus  spur i us 
or  any  other  species  that  acquires  its  mature  plumage  by  successive 
molts,  the  mottled  plumage  being  permanent  for  the  time.  So  far 
as  1  can  see,  an  actual  molt  of  black  and  yellow  feathers  might 
occur  in  early  spring,  or  patches  of  them  might  be  acquired  at  the 
annual  molt  at  the  end  of  summer.  As  there  are  no  specimens  in 
Dr.  Stejneger's  series  taken  earlier  than  the  29th  of  April,  and  no 
fall  adults,  it  is  hardly  justifiable  to  conclude  that  the  change  in 
color  does  not  take  place  by  a  direct  molt,  either  in  early  spring  or 
in  late  summer. 

Furthermore,  a  specimen  of  the  closely  allied  Z.  tricolor,^*  which 
agrees  very  well  with  Dr.  Stejneger's  most  advanced  "transition'^ 
specimens,  having  a  few  patches  of  olive-brown  feathers  above  and 
brown  remiges,  but  otherwise  adult,  shows  by  the  presence  of 
numerous  "  pin  feathers"  that  the  yellow  breast,  and  the  black  on 
the  head  have  just  been  assumed  by  direct  molt. 

That  this  specimen  is  an  early  spring  bird  I  assume  from  the  fact 
that  the  remiges  and  rectrices  show  no  signs  of  recent  molt,  which 
they  would  do  if  it  was  the  annual  molt  that  had  just  occurred. 

In  regard  to  the  remiges  and  rectrices  of  Zanthopygia,  which  Dr. 
Stejneger  thinks  change  suddenly  from  dull  brown  to  deep  black, 
piecisely  parallel  cases  are  to  be  found  in  Piranga  erythromelas  and 
Hahia  ludoviciana,  and  a  series  of  either  collected  in  May  or  June 
will  show  just  the  same  variety  of  color  in  the  quills  as  in  the  case 
of  Zanthopygia. 

In  these  species  the  dull  colored  quills  are  retained  during  the 
first  spring  when  the  winter  body  plumage  is  molted  for  the  adult 
dress,  but  at  the  annual  molt  the  jet  black  quills  are  assumed  and 
there  is  certainly    no  direct  change  in  the  color  of  the  feathers. 

Giitke  in  his  "Heligoland,"  gives  us  the  most  recent  endorsement 
of  the  theory  of  actual  color-change,  a  theory  of  which  he  was  always 
a  strong   advocate.      The  instances  which  he  treats  in  detail  are 

"  isproc.  U.S.Nat.  Mus.,  1892,  p.  334. 
"  791,  Coll.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  125 

almost  entirely  from  the  water  birds,  and  we  are  not  informed  of  the 
exact  character  of  the  material  which  came  under  his  observation, 
all  that  we  have  is  his  interpretation  of  the  facts.  The  species  to 
which  he  calls  especial  attention  are  the  Dunlin,  Knot  and  Sander- 
ling. 

"  In  the  Dunlin  "  he  says  "  the  change  of  colour  develops  itself 
in  the  following  manner  :  In  the  ash-grey  feathers  of  the  back  the 
shaft  first  becomes  black  ;  this  color  spreads  rapidly  over  the  feath- 
ers, finally  leaving  only  broad  gray  margins.  The  latter  at  first 
change  to  a  dull  rusty-grey,  which,  however,  subsequently  passes 
into  a  beautiful  ferruginous  color.  At  the  same  time  the  dull  ash- 
grey  tips  of  the  feathers  pass  into  a  whitish-grey,  their  margins  being 
simultaneously  rounded  off  to  their  former  entirety." 

How  such  a  theory  could  have  been  advocated,  after  the  examina- 
tion of  a  large  series  of  specimens,  I  cannot  understand,  for  a  series  of 
spring  examples  of  the  American  Dunlin  taken  on  the  coast  of  New 
Jersey  show  the  black  and  rusty  feathers  coming  in  abundantly  and 
supplanting  the  worn  gray  feathers  of  the  winter  plumage.'" 

In  the  Sanderling  Giitke  states  there  is  a  change  from  a  uniform 
light  gray  to  a  deep  black,  and  from  a  beautiful  ferruginous  color 
to  a  pure  white.  Here  again  spring  specimens,  from  the  coast  of 
New  Jersey  and  Florida,  show  the  black  and  ferruginous  plumage 
molting  in  and  superceding  the  light  gray  plumage  of  winter. 

Gatke  says  (p.  163)  that  he  "  confines  his  description  to  what 
actually  takes  place,  without  embarking  on  any  hypothetical  con- 
jectures." In  this,  however,  I  cannot  agree  with  him  ;  lie  does  not 
claim  to  have  seen  the  change  in  color  actually  take  place  in  any 
individual  feather,  and  to  make  the  assertion  that  feathers  change 
from  one  style  of  coloration  to  another  when  the  only  facts  before 
him  are  that  he  has  feathers  which  represent  those  styles  of  coloration, 
one  of  which  might  change  to  the  other,  involves  entirely  too  great 
an  assumption. 

In  his  chapter  on  "colour-change  without  moulting"  Gatke  sup- 
ports another  theory,  also  originally  advanced  by  Schlegel,  but  which 

'^  Since  the  present  paper  was  presented  to  the  Academy  for  publication  (see 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1896,  p.  12),  Mr.  F.  M.  Chapman  has  published 
an  article  on  "  The  Changes  of  Plumage  in  the  Dunlin  and  Sanderling"  (Bull. 
Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  VIII,  p-  1—8),  in  which  he  criticises  Griitke's  state- 
ments on  the  same  grounds  as  above.  Here  again,  it  is  interesting  to  note 
that  Mr.  Chapman  and  the  writer  working  independently,  arrived  at  exactly 
the  same  conclusions. 


126  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

Gatke  formerly  repudiated,  and  oue  which  other  advocates  of  the 
"  color-change  "  theory  have  generally  left  untouched,  i.  e.,  the  theory 
that  simultaneously  with  the  change  in  color  there  occurs  a  rebuild- 
ing of  the  worn  edges  of  the  feathers  which  restores  all  the  even 
contours  and  gives  them  the  appearance  of  newly  molted  feathers. 

The  acceptance  of  the  theory  of  color-change  without  molt  or 
abrasion,  necessitates  the  adoption  of  some  such  theory  as  this,  since 
the  bright  spring  feathers  are  generally  much  more  perfect  in  outline 
and  often  in  striking  contrast  to  the  worn  winter  plumage  from 
which  Schlegel  and  Gatke  would  have  us  believe  they  have  been 
produced.  A  slight  knowlege  of  the  development  of  feathers  would 
tend  to  show  the  absurdity  of  such  a  theory  as  this,  since  the  barbs 
of  a  feather  do  not  continue  to  grow  out  from  the  shaft  like  the 
limbs  of  a  tree,  but  are  really  formed  from  the  tip  inward  toward 
the  shaft.  And  once  being  unfolded  from  the  sheath  of  the  "  pin 
feather,"  no  further  structural  development  can  possibly  take  place 
in  them. 

Too  many  writers  have  made  arbitrary  statements  and  then  ques- 
tioned the  accuracy  of  the  investigations  of  histologists  because  they 
did  not  support  them.  In  investigating  these  questions, we  must 
accept  at  the  outset  the  testimony  of  physiologists  and  histologists, 
that  from  the  very  nature  of  the  structure  of  a  feather  it  is  incapable 
of  renewing  its  barbs  or  barbules,  and  that  after  the  contents  of  the 
quill  have  once  dried  up  there  is  no  connection  between  the  vanes 
of  the  feather  and  the  life  fluids  of  the  bird.  This  at  once  precludes 
the  change  of  pigment,  except  by  chemical  action  from  without,  and 
it  is  difficult  to  see  how  this  should  only  exert  an  influence  during 
a  certain  short  period  and  have  no  effect  at  other  times. 

It  has  been  suggested  that  the  presence  of  innumerable  bubbles 
of  air  would  tend  to  obscure  the  pigment  in  a  feather  and  cause  it 
to  appear  white,  while  the  expulsion  of  air  from  a  white  feather 
might  bring  out  a  dark  pigment  previously  concealed.  In  the  case 
of  the  Motacilla,  however,  portions  of  the  plumage  turn  white  and 
other  parts  black  at  the  same  time  and  it  is  hard  to  understand  how 
an  external  action  could  affect  different  feathei's  in  an  exactly 
opposite  manner,  and  if  there  was  proved  to  be  exhalation  from  the 
body  into  the  feather,  the  structure  of  the  feather  would  preclude 
a  passage  of  air  into  the  barbs  from  the  quill.  It  might  further  be 
added,  that  the  yellow  feathers  of  Zanthopygia,  which  should  accord- 
ing to  this  theory  contain  a  concealed  dark  pigment,  have  really  no 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  127 

pigment  at  all,  as  has  been  ascertained  by  careful  microscopical 
examination  by  my  friend  Dr.  Thos.  H.  Montgomery. 

The  only  instance  where  I  know  of  an  actual  change  of  color  in 
the  plumage,  except  by  fading,  is  in  the  case  of  certain  delicate  pink 
tints  on  the  breasts  of  gulls,  which  disappear  after  death,  but  this 
color,  I  think,  is  probably  due  to  a  peculiar  surface  structure  which 
is  destroyed  or  altered  by  the  drying  out  of  the  plumage,  when 
removed  from  contact  with  water  or  the  oil  of  the  bird. 

PLUMAGES  AND  MOLTS  OF  THE  SMALLER  LAND  BIRDS  OF 
EASTERN  NORTH  AMERICA. 

Below  I  have  recorded  such  facts  as  I  have  been  able  to  gather 
regarding  the  molts  and  plumages  of  our  smaller  land  birds. 

In  a  number  of  species  I  have  been  unable  to  ascertain  the  exact 
extent  of  the  molts  or  their  number  from  lack  of  necessary  material, 
but  have  thought  it  best  to  give  such  facts  as  I  have  rather  than  to 
omit  the  species  altogether.  Some  species  on  the  other  hand  I  have 
been  able  to  treat  with  much  detail,  and  have  referred  to  them 
in  describing  others  with  a  similar  series  of  molts.  I  have  as 
a  rule  omitted  any  detailed  description  of  the  plumages,  as  these  can 
be  obtained  from  any  of  the  manuals  or  general  works  on  North 
American  birds,  and  have  made  my  remarks  as  to  colors,  etc., 
mainly  comparative. 

Where  I  had  sufficient  material  to  warrant  it,  I  have  given  after 
each  species  a  list  of  its  plumages,  considering  three  as  the  smallest 
number  of  plumages  exhibited  by  any  species.  In  many,  however, 
the  winter  and  nuptial  dresses  are  practically  alike  except  for  a 
slight  abrasion. 

Where  male  and  female  are  not  definitely  indicated  their  molting 
is  the  same. 

Family  CUCULIDJE. 

Coccyzus  erythrophthalmus  (Wilson).     Black-billed  Cuckoo. 
Coccyzus  americanus  (Linn.).     Yellow-billed  Cuckoo. 

I  have  been  unable  to  examine  any  adult  Cuckoos  in  the  molt. 
The  young  molt  the  body  plumage  the  last  week  in  August.  I  am 
inclined  to  think  that  there  is  no  spring  molt  in  either  species. 
Spring  and  fall  specimens  it  is  true  are  scarcely  distinguishable,  but 
I  do  not  consider  the  unworn  appearance  of  spring  birds  as  a  neces- 
sary proof  that  there  has  been  a  spring  molt,  as  an  examination  of 


128  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

late  summer  specimens,  just  previous  to  the  annual  molt,  shows 
that  abrasion  produces  scarcely  any  effect  in  the  Cuckoos.  The 
sexes  are  alike  in  molts  and  practically  so  in  plumages. 

Family  ALCEDINID^. 

Ceryle  alcyon  (Linn.).     Belted  Kingfisher. 

The  Kingfisher  presents  several  peculiarities  in  its  molting  and  I 
have  not  yet  been  enabled  to  examine  sufficient  material  to  satis- 
factorily describe  it.  So  far  as  my  material  goes  I  think  the  rufous 
edgings  to  the  breast  band  belong  only  to  the  bird  of  the  year,  as  old 
birds  in  the  annual  molt  have  the  new  feathers  of  the  breast  band 
plain  bluish  slate  or  slightly  edged  with  white.  Whether  the  young 
molt  the  flight  feathers  with  the  rest  of  their  first  plumage  I  cannot 
say,  but  the  wing  feathers  of  the  rufous  tipped  fall  birds  are  very 
fresh  and  perfect,  whicli  may  be  considered  evidence  that  they  do. 

That  there  is  a  partial  molt  in  early  spring  is  evidenced  by  the 
fresh  feathers  in  spring  specimens  which  are  in  strong  contrast  to  the 
older  worn  plumage,  especially  on  the  pectoral  band. 

The  wing  feathers  of  some  spring  birds  are  unusually  bright  with 
the  white  tips  scarcely  worn  and  one  example,  (June,  1881,  Palo 
Alto  Co.,  Iowa,  No.  26,640,  A.  N.  S.),  has  the  remiges  all  of  this 
character,  except  the  innermost  pair  of  primaries  and  one  of  the 
secondaries  on  the  leftside,  which  are  very  much  worn  and  abraded. 
This  may  indicate  a  spring  molt  of  the  wings  in  some  individuals 
but  in  the  majority  it  apparently  does  not  occur.  The  peculiar 
order  of  molt  in  the  primaries  has  already  been  noticed. 

Family  PICIDJE. 

The  North  American  Woodpeckers,^"  as  already  pointed  out  by 
Mr.  Brewster,  (Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  1878,  p.  179),  always  molt 
the  wing  and  tail  feathers  along  with  the  rest  of  the  first  plumage. 
The  molt  of  this  plumage,  especially  on  the  head  and  breast,  goes  on 
slowly  and  the  birds  start  on  their  southward  migration  before  it  has 
been  entirely  renewed.  In  some  individuals  indeed  the  molting  is 
not  completed  till  well  into  the  winter. 

Dryobates  villosus  (Linn.).     Hairy  Woodpecker. 

Male. — Three  plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

All  plumages  of  this  bird  are  very  similar.  There  is  no  spring 
molt  apparent  in  any  specimens  examined  and  but  little  effect  is 


16 


And  probably  all  of  the  family. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  129 

produced  by  abrasion.     Female  molts  exactly  as  in  the  male,  but  its 
plumage  lacks  the  red  nuchal  band. 

Dryobates  pubescens  (Linn.).     Downy  Woodpecker. 

]Molts  and  plumages  as  in  the  last.  Some  spring  specimens  show 
a  renewal  of  some  of  the  breast  feathers,  but  this  may  also  take  place 
in  v'lUosus.  A  fall  specimen  of  each  species  exhibits  a  remarkably 
worn  "  moth-eaten  "  appearance  on  the  breast  and  flanks  probably 
due  to  a  peculiarity  in  the  habits  of  these  individuals. 
Sphyrapicus  varius  (Linn.).     Yellow-bellied  Sapsucker. 

Male. — Three  plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

The  molt  of  the  first  plumage  of  the  head  and  breast  of  this  species 
continues  all  through  the  fall  and  winter  and  one  taken  April  8th, 
(Philadelphia,  Pa.),  shows  a  few  new  feathers  appearing  on  the 
crown  and  throat.  The  winter  plumage  is,  therefore,  a  mottled  one. 
The  breeding  bird  is  hardly  different  from  the  full  plumaged  spring 
individual,  as  abrasion  produces  but  little  effect.  Female  molts 
like  the  male.  Adult  plumage  diflTers  in  having  the  throat  white, 
some  individuals  have  the  crown  black,  others  red ;  whether  this 
is  due  to  age  or  .purely  individuality  I  cannot  determine. 

Ceophloeus  pileatus  (Linn.).     Pileated  Woodpecker. 

Three  plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

This  species  shows  but  little  variation  in  plumage.  There  is  no 
spring  molt,  but  the  nuptial  dress  is  somewhat  abraded  and  browner 
than  the  winter  plumage. 

Melanerpes  erythrocepbalus  (Linn.).     Red-headed  Woodpecker. 

Three  plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

The  first  plumage  is  retained  for  a  long  time ;  of  four  specimens 
showing  the  transition  to  the  adult,  only  one  has  data,!,  e.,  Haddon- 
field,  N.  J.,  Dec.  2,  1880,  No.  1,405  Coll..  W.  Stone.  This  I  think  is 
probably  the  regular  time  for  the  molt,  as  specimens  taken  in  Octo- 
ber show  no  signs  of  a  change.  The  annual  molt  of  the  adult  occurs 
during  the  middle  of  August  as  usual.  Whether  they  have  any 
spring  molt  I  am  unable  to  say  positively.  The  plumage  is  but  little 
affected  by  abrasion,  so  that  the  unworn  appearance  of  spring  birds 
is  not  necessarily  an  evidence  of  a  recent  molt.  Very  highly  colored 
individuals  have  a  red  patch  on  the  center  of  the  abdomen. 
Melanerpes  carolinus  (Linn.).     Red-bellied  Woodpecker. 

Without  a  satisfactory  series  I  am  unable  to  describe  the  molt  of 
this  bird  in  detail,  but  it  is  apparently  the  same  as  in  the  preceding 
species. 


130  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Colaptes  auratus  (Linn.).     Flicker. 

Three  plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

The  molt  from  first  plumage  begins  in  July,  a  specimen  taken 
August  9,  1893,  in  Montgomery  Co.,  Pa.  shows  it  about  half  com- 
pleted. The  annual  molt  of  the  old  birds  occurs  at  the  same  time. 
I  can  find  no  trace  of  spring  molt  and  abrasion  produces  little  effect 
upon  the  plumage  until  after  May.  Mr.  F.  M.  Chapman  has 
described  in  detail  the  variation  in  the  upper  tail  coverts  in  this 
genus." 

Unfortunately  I  have  been  unable  to  examine  a  sufificient  series 
of  the  Macrochires  to  give  a  complete  account  of  the  molting  of  any 
of  the  species,  but  have  included  such  notes  as  I  have. 

Family  CAPRIMULGID^. 

Antrostomus  vociferus  (Wils.).    Whip-poor-will. 

As  shown  in  Wilson's  figure  this  bird  has  an  early  downy  plumage 
which  almost  immediately  gives  place  to  the  usual  "  first"  plumage, 
a  specimen  taken  at  Haddonfield,  N.  J.,  July  2,  1893,  (Coll.  W. 
Stone),  shows  the  transition.  As  regards  the  number  and  time  of 
molts,  a  comparison  of  specimens  would  indicate  that  they  are  the 
same  as  the  following. 

Chordeiles  virginianus  (Gmel.).     Night  Hawk. 

Mr.  Wm.  Brewster  has  described  transition  specimens  from  the 
early  downy  plumage  to  the  first  plumage  and  similar  ones  are  in 
the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia 
from  Florida.  A  specimen  taken  Sept.  10,  is  in  the  first  plumage, 
with  many  new  feathers  appearing  on  the  breast  and  elsewhere,  but 
no  molt  of  the  flight  feathers;  how  complete  this  molt  is  I  cannot 
not  say.  An  adult  specimen  taken  Sept.  1,  shows  much  renewal 
of  the  body  plumage,  but  no  trace  of  it  in  the  wings  or  tail.  It 
would  seem  from  this  that  the  molt  was  quite  late,  and  the  loss  of 
the  flight  feathers  relatively  later  than  in  most  birds.  I  have  seen 
no  trace  of  spring  molt. 

Family  MICROPODIDJE. 

Chaetura  pelagica  (Linn.).     Chimney  Swift. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

The  annual  molt  in  this  species  occurs  from  Aug.  1  to  the  first 
week  of  September  and  there  seems  to  be  no  spring  molt.     Abrasion 

"  Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  311. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  131 

does  not  produce  much  effect  upon  the  plumage  but  it  loses  the 
bright  metallic  luster  which  characterizes  the  fresh  winter  dress. 
I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  young  do  not  renew  the  flight 
feathers  at  their  first  molt. 

Family  TROCHILIDJE. 

Trochilus  colubris  (Linn.).     Ruby-throated  Humming-bird. 

The  only  molting  specimens  of  the  Humming-bird  that  I  have 
seen  are  spring  birds  taken  at  Labna,  Yucatan,  March  15th,  in 
which  the  feathers  on  the  throat  are  being  renewed.  Probably,  tlie 
young  males  acquire  the  ruby  throat  at  this  time. 

Family  TYRANNIC^. 

The  Tyrant  Flycatchers  show  scarcely  any  seasonal  variation,  the 
first  plumage  being  nearly  the  same  as  the  adult,  while  the  feathers 
are  very  little  affected  by  abrasion.  There  are,  therefore,  as  a  rule 
only  three  plumages  ;  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

Tyrannus  tyrannus  (Linn.).     Kingbird. 

Adult  Kingbirds,  taken  August  21,  show  some  molt  on  the 
body  but  no  trace  of  renewal  of  the  flight  feathers,  which  would 
indicate  that  the  annual  molt  is  not  completed  until  quite  late. 
Some  spring  specimens  show  a  few  new  feathers  appearing  on  the 
breast  and  back,  but  whether  there  is  a  more  extensive  renewal  of 
the  plurbage  before  the  birds  start  north  from  their  winter  quarters 
I  cannot  say.  Abrasion  plays  little  or  no  part  in  changing  the 
plumage  of  this  species.  The  first  plumage  gives  way  to  that  of  the 
adult  late  in  August  but  no  molt  occurs  in  the  wing  and  tail. 

Myiarchus  crinitus  (Linn.).     Crested  Flycatcher. 

The  annual  molt  in  this  species  begins  early  in  August  and  is 
indicated  in  the  wings  before  any  new  feathers  appear  on  the  body, 
differing  in  this  respect  from  the  last.  There  seems  to  be  no  spring 
molt.  The  young  birds  of  the  first  brood  begin  to  renew  their  body 
plumage  early  in  August.  All  the  plumages  of  this  bird  are  very 
similar. 

Sayornis  phoebe  (Lath.).    Pewec. 

There  is  no  spring  molt  in  the  Pewee  but  much  abrasion  takes 
place  during  winter  so  that  the  sulphur  tint  of  the  under  surface, 
which  is  characteristic  of  fall  specimens,  is  nearly  lost  by  the  breed- 
ing season.  The  molt  of  first  plumage  in  the  young  is  restricted  to 
the  body  feathers. 


132  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Contopus  virens  (Linn.).     AVood  Pewee. 

I  am  unable  to  say,  from  an  examination  of  spring  specimens,  how 
much  of  a  molt  this  species  undergoes  before  its  northward  migra- 
tion. Compared  with  specimens  of  the  preceding  they  appear  much 
less  abraded,  which  indicates  that  a  partial  spring  molt  occurs. 

Contopus  borealis  (Swains.).     Olive-sided  Flycatcher. 

The  above  remarks  apply  equally  well  to  this  species. 
Empidonax. 

The  species  of  this  genus  all  resemble  Contopus  in  the  appearance 
of  their  seasonal  plumages.  The  freshness  of  the  spring  feathers 
seems  to  indicate  a  partial  spring  molt  at  least,  but  without  a  satis- 
factory series  of  winter  specimens ;  it  is  not  possible  to  decide  this 
point.  The  renewal  of  the  body  plumage  at  the  annual  molt,  as 
in  Tyrannus,  begins  before  there  is  any  molt  of  the  flight  feathers. 

Family  ALAUDID^. 

Otocoris  alpestris  (Linn.).     Horned  Lark. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  seems  to  be  no  spring  molt  in  this  species,  but  a  great  deal 
of  abrasion  takes  place  during  winter  and  spring,  by  which  the  light 
edgings  to  the  black  crown  and  throat  patch  are  lost  and  the  other 
colors  brought  into  stronger  contrast.  The  young  birds  molt  the 
flight  feathers  at  the  end  of  summer  along  with  the  rest  of  the  first 
plumage. 

Family  CORVIDJE. 

Cyanocitta  cristata  (Linn.).     Blue  Jay. 

Plumages,  three;  first,  winter  and  nuptial,  though,  except  for  the 
slight  effects  of  abrasion,  there  is  no  difl^erence  between  the  last  two. 

There  is  no  spring  molt  and  the  young  molt  only  the  body  plum- 
age at  the  end  of  their  first  summer. 

Perisoreus  canadensis  (Linn.).     Canada  Jay. 

Three  plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

I  have  not  been  able  to  examine  a  satisfactory  series  of  this  species 
but  feel  pretty  sure  that  its  molt  is  the  same  as  in  the  preceding. 

Corvus  oorax  principalis  RiJgw.     Raven.  ^ 

1  have  been  unable  to  prove  the  number  of  molts  in  the  raven  by 
actual  examination  of  molting  specimens,  but  such  material  as  I 
have  before  me  indicates  a  precisely  similar  molt  to  that  of  the  crow. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  133 

A  molting  specimen  from  Sitka,  Alaska,  June  15,  1895,  shows  that 
the  central  tail  feathers  are  the  first  to  be  renewed,  and  are  well 
grown  before  any  of  the  others  are  dropped, 

Corvus  ossifragus  (AVils.).     Fish  Crow. 
Corvus  americanus  (Aud.) .     American  Crow. 

Three  plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

The  Crow  has  no  spring  molt  so  far  as  I  can  ascertain  ;  the  annual 
molt  is  quite  early,  occurring  in  June  or  July,  while  the  young  birds 
molt  the  first  body  plumage  about  the  end  of  the  latter  month.  As 
in  most  black  birds  abrasion  is  but  little  marked.  Many  specimens, 
however,  are  dingy  and  have  the  tips  of  the  wings  bleached  to  a 
brown  tint.     The  Fish  Crow  apparently  molts  exactly  the  same. 

Family  ICTERIDJE. 

The  Icteridse  may  be  arranged  in  three  groups  as  regards  their 
molt. 

Doliclionyx  has  two  complete  molts  each  year  standing  alone 
among  our  smaller  land  birds  in  this  respect.  The  young  probably 
has  no  molt  of  flight  feathers  at  the  close  of  its  first  summer.  The 
two  species  of  Icterus  have  a  more  or  less  complete  spring  molt  of 
the  body  feathers  the  first  year  at  least,  and  the  young  do  not  molt 
the  flight  feathers  in  August.  The  rest  of  our  species  have  no 
spring  molt  whatever,  but  the  young  have  a  complete  molt  at  the 
end  of  the  first  summer,  including  both  wing  and  tail.  This  occurs 
in  only  three  other  instances  among  our  Passeres — i.  e.,  in  Cardi- 
nalis,  Tachycineta  and  Otocoris. 

Doliclionyx  oryzivorus  (Linn.).     Bobolink. 

Male. — Plumages,  first,  winter,  early  spring,  nuptial. 

The  molting  of  this  species  has  been  so  carefully  treated  by  Mr. 
F.  M.  Chapman  who  was  the  first  to  describe  the  early  spring  plum- 
age and  the  manner  in  which  it  is  acquired,  that  it  is  hardly  neces- 
sary to  go  into  details  in  this  connection.  When  the  young  bird 
has  acquired  the  bufl' winter  plumage  it  is  practically  undistinguish- 
able  from  the  winter  adult. 

Early  in  spring  (March  1st,)  this  plumage  is  entirely  molted 
even  to  the  wings  and  tail  and  a  new  black  plumage  is  assumed, 
all  the  feathers  of  which  are  so  broadly  edged  with  brownish  buff* 
that  the  general  plumage  appears  to  be  of  this  shade.  By  the 
breeding  season  the  aspect  of  the  plumage  is  again  changed,  this 
time  entirely  by  abrasion,  and  the  bird  appears  in  its  black  and 
white  dress. 


134  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  Bobolink  furnislies  the  only  instance  known  to  me,  among 
the  species  here  treated,  of  a  molt  of  the  remiges  in  the  spring.  The 
molt  of  the  Rose-breasted  Grosbeak,  with  this  exception,  is  almost 
parallel  for  the  first  season,  though  the  buff  edgings  which  are  lost 
by  abrasion  are  not  quite  so  much  developed.  Afterward,  how- 
ever, the  Rose-breast  has  a  winter  plumage  quite  different  from  that 
of  the  first  year  while  the  Bobolink,  year  after  year,  returns  to  the 
buff  "  Reed-bird  "  garb.  The  old  winter  birds  are  perhaps  of  a  little 
different  shade  of  buff  and  I  think  it  is  only  the  old  birds  that  show 
the  occasional  black  feathers  in  fall. 

Mr.  Chapman's  specimen  in  the  spring  molt  as  well  as  specimens 
in  the  annual  molt  have  been  examined.  I  have  been  unable,  how- 
ever, to  ascertain  whether  the  young  bird  molts  the  wing  and  tail 
feathers  with  the  rest  of  the  first  plumage  or  not. 

Female. — Plumage  always  similar  to  winter  dress  of  male.  I  have 
not  been  able  to  ascertain  whether  there  is  any  spring  molt  or  not, 
the  breeding  plumage,  however,  is  much  lighter  than  the  winter 
dress  owing  to  abrasion.  A  curious  plumage  is  shown  in  a  specimen 
from  Raleigh,  N.  C.  May  2,  1893,  No.  M,  Coll.  W.  A.  Shryock,  in 
which  there  are  many  black  feathers  on  the  breast,  belly  and  head, 
evidently  an  approach  to  the  male  pattern  of  coloration. 

Molothrus  ater  (Bodd.).     Cowbird. 

Male. — Plumages  ;  first,  winter  and  nuptial ;  the  last  two,  how- 
ever, are  scarcely  distinguishable,  owing  to  the  very  small  effect  pro- 
duced by  abrasion  in  this  species. 

There  seems  to  be  no  spring  molt  whatever,  and  almost  the  only 
effect  of  the  abrasion  is  to  emphasize  the  line  of  demarcation 
between  the  brown  head  and  the  black  back.  The  young  molt  the 
wing  and  tail  at  the  end  of  summer  with  the  rest  of  the  plumage. 

Female. — Molts  as  in  the  male.  The  adult  plumage  is  entirely 
gray  and  the  abrasion  is  very  marked  in  spring,  presenting  a 
"  clipped  "  appearance  exactly  as  in  Ammodramus  maritimus. 

There  is  no  change  in  the  coloration  of  either  sex  of  the  Cowbird 
after  the  first  winter  dress  has  been  assumed. 

Agelaius  phoeniceus  (Linn.).     Red-winged  Blackbird. 

Male. — Five  fairly  marked  plumages  may  be  distinguished: — 
first,  first  winter,  first  nuptial,  adult  winter  and  adult  nuptial,  the 
last  two,  however,  as  in  many  other  species,  differ  very  slightly. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  135 

At  the  end  of  the  first  summer  the  entire  plumage  of  the  young 
bird  is  shed,  including  the  wing  and  tail,  and  a  black  dress  broadly- 
edged  with  brown  is  then  assumed.^®  This  becomes  almost  entirely 
black  by  the  breeding  season  through  abrasion.  Owing  to  the  extent 
of  the  abrasion,  however,  the  plumage  presents  a  somewhat  worn  . 
appearance  and  there  is  always  more  or  less  trace  of  the  brown  edg- 
ings present.  The  subsequent  winter  plumages  show  much  less  of 
the  brown  borders  and  eventually  this  dress  is  nearly  pure  black  ; 
except,  of  course,  the  shoulders.  This  is  well  shown  in  a  fall  male 
of  A.  phceniceus  sonoriensis  in  the  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  Coll.  Whether  the 
brown  edges  are  ever  entirely  lost  at  the  second  annual  molt  or  whether 
birds  in  such  plumage  are  always  several  years  of  age  I  cannot  say,  but 
incline  to  latter  view.  The  less  brown  margins  to  the  winter  plum- 
age, the  less  abrasion  takes  place  and  the  nuptial  plumage  appears 
relatively  smoother.  The  depth  of  color  of  the  red  shoulder  patch 
is  not  necessarily  an  index  of  the  age,  as  some  birds  in  the  first  year 
have  deep  red  shoulders. 

Mr.  Brewster  describes  (Z.  c.)  an  occasional,  though  not  unique 
plumage,  which  has  a  "  crescentic  patch  of  pale  yellow  tinged  with 
rose-color  ujiou  the  breast,"  Avhich  he  regards  as  an  "  exceedingly 
high  phase  of  ornamentation." 

Females. — Vary  considerably  in  the  tints  on  the  throat ;  the  buff- 
est  ones  I  take  to  be  birds  in  their  first  year  and  those  with  the 
pinkest  throats  are  probably  the  oldest.  The  red  on  the  shoulder 
of  the  females  increases  in  proportion  to  that  on  the  throat.  The 
molts  are  exactly  the  same  as  in  the  male,  and  the  abrasion  in 
spring  always  well  marked. 

Sturnella  magna  (Linn.).     Meadow  Lark. 

3Iale. — Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

The  Meadow  Lark,  as  in  the  preceding  species,  molts  both  wing 
and  tail  at  the  end  of  the  first  summer.  There  is  no  spring  molt, 
the  change  to  the  breeding  dress  being  produced  entirely  by  abrasion. 
All  the  under  surface  is  veiled  in  winter  with  long  brownish  or  buff 
tips.  The  bright  yellow  and  black  tips  are  only  brought  out  when 
these  are  lost.  On  the  upper  surface  the  abrasion  affects  the  light 
margins  to  the  body  feathers  and  the  light  bands  and  indentations 
on  the  tertials,  which  become  worn  in  a  most  remarkable  manner 
(see  Plate  IV,  figs.  8  and  9).     There  is  some  variation  in  the  extent 

i«First  described  by  Mr.  Wm.  Brewster,  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  1878,  p.  175. 


136  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

of  the  brown  margins  of  the  winter  plumage,  birds  showing  the  least 
being  probably  the  oldest. 

Female. — Like  the  male  in  molts  and  plumages. 

Icterus  galbula  (Linn.).     Baltimore  Oriole. 

The  males  of  this  species  assume  four  distinct  plumages.  The 
first  plumage  is  ashy  on  the  back  passing  into  dull  orange  on  head 
and  rump  and  whitish  below,  wings  suffused  with  yellow-brown 
bordered  with  white  and  tail  dull  orange.  The  body  feathers  of 
this  dress  are  soon  shed  and  the  plumage  of  the  first  winter  assumed, 
generally  by  the  middle  of  August.  In  this  the  back  is  dull  orange, 
brightest  on  the  head  and  rump  and  mottled  with  dark-brown  on 
the  interscapulum  ;  below  nearly  uniform  bright  orange-yellow. 
These  two  plumages  are  remarkably  similar,  the  latter  being  uni- 
formly brighter  and  richer  and  easily  distinguished  by  the  different 
structure  of  the  feathers. 

In  early  spring  there  is  a  molt  which  as  usual  varies  exceedingly 
in  its  extent  in  different  individuals.  Usually  the  entire  black  body 
plumage  of  the  adult  is  assumed  covering  the  back,  entire  head  and 
throat,  also  the  reddish-orange  on  the  breast,  sides  of  the  abdomen 
and  a  certain  amount  on  the  rump.  The  middle  of  the  abdomen 
and  the  greater  part  of  the  rump,  however,  retain  the  old  yellowish 
winter  plumage.  There  is  great  irregularity  in  the  molt  of  the  tail 
as  well  as  the  tertials  and  greater  wing  coverts.  All  but  one  of  the 
specimens  examined  show  some  molt  in  these  feathers,  but  in  none 
is  it  complete. 

One  has  renewed  all  the  tail  but  the  four  outer  feathers  of  the  left 
side,  another  has  renewed  only  the  middle  pair  and  one  other;  and 
still  another  retains  three  old  feathers  on  the  right  side.  The  spec- 
imen which  shows  the  least  molt  in  the  first  spring  (No.  25,734,  Coll. 
A.  N.  S.  May  24,  1864,  Republican  Riv.,  Kas.),  has  only  acquired 
part  of  the  black  bead,  the  old  yellow  plumage  remaining  in  a  large 
nuchal  patch,  while  below  the  reddish-orange  feathers  have  appeai-ed 
only  on  the  breast.  There  has  been  no  molt,  whatever,  in  the  wing 
or  tail. 

The  black  interscapulary  plumage,  which  is  assumed  by  the 
Baltimore  Oriole  at  the  first  spring  molt,  shows  the  same  variation 
as  exhibited  in  the  Rose-breasted  Grosbeak,  i.  e.,  in  some  individuals 
the  feathers  are  uniform  black  while  in  others  they  are  bordered 
with  orange.  At  the  annual  molt  in  July  the  entire  plumage  is 
renewed   and  the  perfect  plumage  is  acquired.     This  is  like  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  137 

previous  dress,  but  the  whole  abdomen  and  rump  and  lesser  wing 
coverts  are  bright  reddish-orange,  while  the  black  is  more  intense. 
All  the  other  wing  feathers  are  jet  black  bordered  with  white  ;  the 
two  middle  rectrices  are  black,  the  next  pair  largely  black,  the  others 
orange  with  move  or  less  black  on  the  base.  The  interscapulary 
feathers  are  generally  slightly  tipped  with  orange. 

In  the  second  spring  there  is  no  molt,  unless  there  may  be  a  renewal 
of  some  of  the  scattered  feathers  but  the  light  tips  of  the  interscapular 
feathers  are  entirely  lost  from  abrasion  and  the  white  on  the  wings 
is  greatly  reduced  and  on  the  tertials  entirely  lost  from  the  same 
cause. 

Icterus  spurius  (Linn.).     Orchard  Oriole. 

Notwithstanding  the  large  amount  of  material  that  I  have  exam- 
ined, I  have  been  unable  to  procure  specimens  which  show  conclu- 
sively the  history  of  the  molts  of  this  bird.  The  large  series,  aggre- 
gating several  hundred  skins,  contained  in  the  collections  of  the  Acad- 
emy of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia, National  Museum,  American 
Museum  of  Natural  History  and  the  private  collection  of  Mr.  Wil- 
liam Brewster,  contains  all  together  only  four  specimens  in  the  molt, 
of  which  but  two  bear  the  date  of  capture.  In  view  of  this  scarcity 
of  molting  birds,  we  are  compelled  to  judge  of  the  molts  mainly  from 
comparing  specimens  taken  before  and  after  the  plumage  has  been 
renewed. 

Male. — The  young  birds  change  the  first  plumage  for  that  of  the 
first  winter  in  July  or  August.  This  dress  is  as  a  rule  scarcely  differ- 
ent from  the  first  plumage.  Some  few  individuals,  however,  show  a 
few  black  feathers  on  the  throat.  In  February  or  March  there  is  a 
molt  of  the  feathers  of  the  head  and  throat,  and  all  the  males  that  reach 
us  from  the  south  in  the  spring  have  a  black  throat,  the  extent  and 
purity  of  the  black  varying  in  different  individuals.  I  have 
no  green  males  in  the  annual  molt  nor  after  the  molt  is  completed. 
One  specimen  (No.  91,034,  U.S.Nat.  Mus.  Coll.),  taken  in  Nicaragua, 
Feb.  23,  1883,  shows  the  throat  and  head  to  be  molting.  That  this 
bird  is  not  in  its  first  spring  molt  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  some  old 
throat  feathers  which  have  not  yet  been  shed  are  black.  The  plum- 
age of  the  second  spring  is  similar  to  that  of  the  first,  but  the  black 
throat  is  more  complete  and  there  are  traces  of  chestnut  on  the  breast. 
The  tail  is  also  clouded  with  black,  but  as  the  specimen  just  referred 
to  is  not  molting  the  tail,  I  think  that  this  change  is  effected  at  the 
preceding  annual  molt.  It  is  probably  at  the  next  annual  molt  that 
10 


138 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


the  chestnut  and  black  plumage  is  acquired.  It  is  impossible  to  tell 
from  an  examination  of  spring  males  in  the  green  plumage,  how 
many  years  they  remain  in  this  dress,  as  the  individual  variation  in 
the  amount  of  change  effected  at  a  given  molt  is  so  great,  that  there 
is  a  complete  series  of  intergrades  from  one  extreme  to  the  other. 
Between  the  most  advanced  specimen  and  the  adult  chestnut  plum- 
age, however,  there  is  quite  a  gap,  and  I  have  never  seen  any  spec- 
imens like  those  figured  by  Wilson  and  Audubon. 

The  variation  in  the  marking  of  spring  birds  is  shown  by  the 
following  table : 


Males,  1st.  and  2nd. 
Years. 

Tail 
green. 

Tail 
partly  black. 

Trace  of 
chestnut 
on  rump. 

Trace  of 
black 
on  head. 

Throat-patch  incom- 
nlete  (4) 

4 

13 
5 

0 

1 

7 

1 

1 
12 

0 

Throat-patch   c  o  m- 
plete,  little  or  no 
chestnut  (14) 

Considerable   chest- 
nut on  breast  (12). 

4 
12 

The  spring  molt  is  generally  confined  to  the  head  and  throat  but 
in  some  second  year  birds  it  is  more  extensive  and  in  one,  (122,073, 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  Washington,  D.  C,  May  2,  1887),  the  body  molt 
must  have  been  nearly  complete,  while  the  tertials  and  indeed  the 
wing  feathers  show  scarcely  a  trace  of  abrasion.  Old  chestnut 
colored  birds  have  the  plumage,  especially  above,  edged  with  buff, 
which  is  lost  by  abrasion  before  the  breeding  season. 

Female. — Remains  as  the  male  in  first  winter.  Spring  specimens 
differ  in  showing  much  abrasion  but  there  is  little  if  any  spring 
molt. 

Scolecophagus  carolinus  (Miill.).     Rusty  Blackbird. 

Male. — Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

Only  one  molt  a  year,  the  change  from  winter  to  nuptial  dress  is 
effected  entirely  through  abrasion. 

Female. — Molts  as  in  the  male.  Adult  plumage  always  gray 
instead  of  black.  I  have  seen  no  molting  birds  of  either  sex,  but  Dr. 
J,  A.  Allen  writes  me  that  the  young  renew  the  flight  feathers  at 
their  first  molt,  as  in  the  allied  genera. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  139 

Quiscalus  quiscula  (Linn.).     Purple  Grackle. 

Male. — Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

The  young  birds  molt  the  wing  and  tail  along  with  the  first  body 
plumage  and  assume  the  adult  plumage  in  its  entirety  the  first 
winter.  There  is  no  spring  molt  and  very  little  effect  is  produced 
by  abrasion,  owing  to  the  uniform  color  of  the  plumage,  so  that 
the  nuptial  plumage  is  scarcely  distinguishable  from  that  of  winter. 

Female. — Molts  as  the  male.     Plumage  always  duller. 

Family  PRINGILLID^. 

A  summary  of  the  molting  of  the  species  of  finches  described 
below  shows  that  thirteen  species  have  no  spring  molt,  while  six 
species  have  a  spring  molt  of  the  body  feathers.  In  Spinus  tristis, 
Passerina  cyanea,  Ammodramus  sandivichensis  savanna,  A.  princeps 
and  A.  caudacutus,  this  seems  to  occur  regularly  every  year.  In  ^ 
the  first  two  a  radical  change  of  color  is  eflTected,  in  the  last  three  the 
new  plumage  is  the  same  as  the  old. 

In  Hahia  ludoviciana  the  extent  of  the  molt  varies,  probably 
decreasing  in  succeeding  years. 

In  four  other  species,  Zonotrichia  leucophrys,  Z.  albicollis,  Spizella 
socialis  and  Melospiza  georgiana,  a  partial  spring  molt  occurs,  less 
marked  after  the  first  year. 

Hahia  ludoviciana  molts  the  tail  the  first  spring,  Ammodramus 
caudacutus  molts  it  in  many  cases  though  probably  not  regularly. 

Cardinalis  cardinalis  molts  both  wing  and  tail  with  the  first  plum- 
age at  the  end  of  summer  and  Passerina  cyanea  and  Ammodramus 
caudacutus  molt  the  tail  at  this  time. 

Carpodacus  purpureus  (Gmel.).     Purple  Finch. 

Male. — Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  first  nuptial,  adult  winter, 
adult  nuptial. 

I  have  not  been  able  to  examine  any  molting  specimens  of  Car- 
podacus, but  a  large  series  of  winter  and  spring  specimens  shows 
that  no  spring  molt  occurs.  The  change  to  the  pink  plumage  is 
evidently  effected  at  an  annual  molt  either  the  second  year  or  still 
later.  The  birds  retain  the  brown  dress  during  the  first  breeding 
season  at  least.  Fall  specimens  in  brown  plumage  difier  from  spring 
examples  in  the  loss  of  buflf"  tints  through  abrasion,  while  pink  birds 
lose  the  gray  or  brown  edgings  of  winter  in  the  same  way.  The 
great  predominence  of  brown  birds  makes  it  seem  at  least  possible 
that  some  never  acquire  the  pink  plumage. 


140  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Female. — Retains  the  brown  plumage  permanently ;  there  is  no 
spring  molt. 
Pinicola  enucleator  (Linn.).     Pine  Grosbeak. 

So  far  as  I  can  judge  from  winter  specimens  the  account  of  the 
Purple  Finch  applies  equally  well  to  this. 

Loxia  curvirostra  minor  (Brehm).     American  Crossbill. 
Lozia  leucoptera  Gmel.     White-winged  Crossbill. 

The  molting  of  the  Crossbills  is  more  complicated  than  would  appear 
at  first  sight  and  there  is  probably  great  individual  variation  as 
to  the  time  and  extent  of  the  change  in  coloration  of  the  plum- 
age. Mr.  W.  E.  D.  Scott  has  shown  that  some  males  assume  the 
red  dress  immediately  upon  losing  the  first  plumage,  while  others  are 
known  to  breed  in  the  yellow  or  green  dress.  The  tints  are  subject 
to  great  individual  variation,  as  also  the  purity  of  the  red  plum- 
age, many  specimens  showing  a  greater  or  less  mixture  of  green. 
Furthermore,  the  red  plumage  may  be  partly  replaced  by  green  at 
a  subsequent  molt,  as  one  molting  specimen  has  the  throat  quite  red 
while  a  majority  of  the  new  throat  feathers,  just  coming  in  are 
green.  The  annual  molt  of  the  Crossbill  begins  about  August  1, 
(Somerset  Co.,  Maine).  There  seems  to  be  a  slight  spring  molt, 
most  pronounced  on  the  throat  and  breast. 

Female. — Retains  the  green  plumage  at  all  seasons. 
AcantMs  linaria  (Linn.).     Redpoll. 

While  I  have  no  molting  specimens  of  the  Redpoll  for  examina- 
tion, I  think  from  a  comparison  of  a  large  winter  series,  that  the 
change  of  plumage  is  effected  in  the  same  way  as  in  Carpodacus. 
The  variation  in  the  extent  of  the  pink  color  on  the  breast  of  males 
is  probably  largely  individual. 

It  is  generally  stated  that  the  crimson  patch  on  the  head  is  inten- 
sified by  a  "scaling  off"  of  the  surface  of  the  feathers  but  I  cannot 
furnish  any  evidence  upon  this  point. 

Spinus  tristis  (Linn.).     American  Goldfinch. 

Male. — Three  j^lumages  are  recognizable,  first,  winter  and  nup- 
tial. The  birds  of  the  year  seem  to  have  more  brown  on  the  edges 
of  the  wing  feathers  which  in  the  older  birds  are  nearly  pure  white, 
but  I  am  not  sure  that  this  is  constant.  Annual  molt  occurs  between 
the  middle  of  September  and  the  middle  of  October,  and  at  about 
the  same  time  the  young  bird  renews  its  body  feathers.  There  is  a 
complete  molt  of  the  body  feathers  in  spring  from  about  the  middle 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  141 

of  April  to  the  middle  of  May,  but  none  of  the  "wing  feathers,  not 
even  the  tertials,  are  renewed  at  this  time.  Throughout  the  winter 
and  spring  the  white  edgings  to  the  tail  and  wing  feathers  are  being 
lost  by  abrasion,  so  that  in  the  summer  breeding  dress  the  wings  are 
almost  entirely  black.  The  Goldfinch  continues  to  have  these  two 
molts  every  year  throughout  its  life,  and  the  molting  specimens  pre- 
sent a  very  peculiar  appearance  in  their  mottled  dress  of  brown  and 
yellow. 

Female. — The  female  has  exactly  the  same  number  of  molts  and 
plumages  as  the  male. 

Spinus  pinus  (Wils.).     Pine  Siskin. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  breeding. 

So  far  as  my  material  goes,  there  is  indication  of  but  one  molt  a 
year  in  this  species,  i.  e.,  the  annual  molt  at  the  end  of  summer. 
Some  abrasion  takes  place  during  the  winter  and  spring,  by 
which  the  buflf  edgings  to  the  feathers  are  lost  and  the  mark- 
ings are  thus  intensified  in  the  breeding  plumage  and  more 
strongly  coustrasted  with  the  white  of  breast.  The  white  edgings  to 
the  wings  are  also  lost  by  abrasion.  A  male  taken  Jan.  28th, 
(Cape  May,  N.  J.),  has  the  feathers  of  the  throat  and  breast  very 
much  suffused  with  brown,  so  that  the  dark  stripes  are  almost 
obliterated.  "Whether  this  is  a  peculiarity  due  to  age  or  purely 
individual  I  am  unable  to  say. 

Plectrophenax  nivalis  (Linn.).     Snow  Bunting. 

3fale. — Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

In  the  series  which  I  have  examined  I  have  not  detected  any  con- 
stant differences  between  the  young  of  the  year,  and  the  adults.  There 
seems  to  be  no  spring  molt  in  the  Snow  Bunting,  but  the  remarkable 
change  from  the  winter  to  the  nuptial  dress  is  effected  entirely  by 
abrasion,  which  probably  is  more  marked  in  this  species  than  in  any 
other.  Furthermore,  the  abrasion  is  scarcely  apparent  until  after 
the  middle  of  February .^^ 

Female. — Molts  as  in  the  male. 
Poocsetes  gramineus  (Gmel.).     Vesper  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

Molting  exactly  as  in  Melospiza  fasciata  which  it  so  closely  resem- 
bles in  plumage.  Young  of  the  year  seem  rather  buffer  than  old 
birds. 

^®See  Stone,  Science,  1893,  p.  52;  Chapman,  Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist., 
1896,  p.  9. 


142  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Ammodramus  princeps  (Mayn.).     Ipswich  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

Molting  exactly  as  in  A.  sandwichensis  savanna.  Specimens  taken 
March  15th,  Atlantic  City,  N.  J.  and  March  29th,  Cape  Charles^ 
Va.,  show  the  spring  molt  in  progress. 

Ammodramus  sandwichensis  savanna  (Wils.).    Savanna  Sparrow.  • 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

Another  winter  plumage  occurs  much  browner  than  the  usual  one 
which  may  be  characteristic  of  the  birds  of  the  year.  A  complete 
annual  molt  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  breeding  season,  and  a  more 
or  less  complete  molt  of  the  body  feathers  takes  place  in  spring. 
Birds  taken  just  before  the  spring  molt  show  eflTects  of  abrasion, 
especially  on  the  tertials  and  resemble  July  birds.  After  the 
molt  new  tertials  have  been  acquired  and  a  general  renewal  of 
the  feathers  of  the  breast,  head  and  rump  has  taken  place,  so  that 
the  birds  are  in  most  respects  indistinguishable  from  September 
specimens ;  the  yellow  stripe  over  the  eye  is  also  acquired  at  this 
molt.  Whether  this  spring  molt  is  universal  with  all  the  individuals 
or  occurs  every  year,  I  cannot  say  with  certainty.  A  series  of  speci- 
mens taken  January  25-26  (Cape  May,  N.  J).,  shows  a  good  deal 
of  variation  in  the  amount  of  abrasion. 

Ammodramus  savannarum  passerinus  (Wils.).    Grasshopper  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

After  the  annual  molt  the  plumage  of  this  species  is  subject  to 
continued  abrasion  which  materially  alters  the  depth  of  colors  by 
the  following  breeding  season,  the  under  surface  becoming  much 
lighter  and  losing  much  of  the  brown  cast  while  the  colors  elsewhere 
are  in  sharper  contrast.  In  such  material  as  I  have  examined  I  can 
find  no  trace  of  a  spring  molt.  The  spotted  first  plumage  is  retained 
until  about  the  middle  of  August.  A  specimen  taken  Aug.  10,  in 
Chester  Co.,  Pa.,  shows  the  beginning  of  the  molt  of  the  body  feath- 
ers while  another  Aug,  26,  from  the  same  locality,  shows  no  sign 
of  molt,  this,  perhaps,  belonging  to  a  later  brood, 
Ammodramus  henslowii  (Aud.).     Henslow's  Sparrow. 

Such  specimens  of  this  species  as  I  have  been  able  to  examine 
indicate  molts  and  plumages  exactly  parallel  with  the  last. 
Ammodramus  caudacutus  (Gmel.).    Sharp-tailed  Finch. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

After  the  annual  molt  the  Sharp-tailed  Finch  is  subject  to  great 
abrasion  of  plumage,  which  by  March  presents  almost  as  worn  an 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  .     143 

appearance  as  characterizes  most  birds  in  July  or  August.  In 
April  occurs  a  complete  molt  of  the  body  plumage,  together  with 
the  tertials  and  sometimes  the  rectrices ;  a  specimen  taken  April  16  at 
Atlantic  City,  N.  J.,  shows  the  new  tail  about  half  grown.  After  the 
completion  of  this  spring  molt  the  birds  are  indistinguishable,  except 
upon  close  examination  of  the  wing  feathers,  from  October  spec- 
imens. The  feathers  soon  begin  to  show  the  effects  of  abrasion  again 
and  by  August,  just  previous  to  the  annual  molt,  the  birds  present 
about  as  dilapidated  an  appearance  as  can  be  found  among  any  of 
our  species.  The  wear  and  tear  upon  the  plumage  of  this  species  is 
doubtless  due  to  its  habit  of  living  entirely  among  the  coarse  grass 
and  sedges  of  the  salt  marshes,  which  may  also  have  something  to  do 
with  the  unusual  extent  of  the  spring  molt.  The  young  birds  gen- 
erally, but,  perhaps  not  always,  renew  the  tail  when  the  first  body 
plumage  is  molted  at  the  end  of  summer.  The  remiges  are  not 
renewed  at  this  time.  The  series  of  specimens,  upon  which  the  study 
of  this  species  was  based,  consisted  of  upward  of  one  hundred  skins, 
taken  at -Atlantic  City,  N.  J.,  during  every  month  of  the  year  by 
Mr.  I.  Norris  De  Haven  and  myself 

Ammodramus  maritimus  (Wils.).    Seaside  Finch. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

In  this  species  the  spring  plumage  differs  from  the  winter  plum- 
age only  by  abrasion,  there  being  but  one  molt  a  year.  Not  only 
are  the  blending  olive  and  brown  tints  of  the  fresh  fall  dress  quite 
worn  away,  but  the  whole  plumage  presents  the  appearance  of  hav- 
ing been  trimmed  with  a  pair  of  scissors.  It  seems  strange  that  in 
this  species  there  should  be  no  spring  molt  whatever,  while  in  its 
nearest  relative,  the  Sharp-tailed  Finch,  it  should  be  so  extensive. 

Zonotrichia  albicollis  (Gmel.).     White-throated  Sparrow. 

Male. — Five  plumages  may  be  distinguished,  i.  e.,  first,  first  winter, 
first  nuptial,  adult  winter,  adult  nuptial.  The  difference  between 
second  and  third,  and  fourth  and  fifth  is  often  very  slight,  espe- 
cially in  the  case  of  the  latter  two.  After  the  change  to  the  first 
winter  plumage  the  bird  has  a  fairly  well  marked  white  throat, 
but  the  black  crown  stripes  are  much  mixed  with  brown  and  the 
central  stripe  is  quite  dull.  In  spring  a  partial  molt  occurs,  prac- 
tically confined  to  the  thi-oat  and  head.  At  this  time  many  black 
and  pure  white  feathers  appear  in  the  crown,  the  yellow  supercili- 
aries  receive  bright  fresh  feathers  and  more  pure  white  feathers  are 
acquired  on  the  throat.      The  black  stripes  of  the  crown  are,  how- 


144  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ever,  still  mixed  with  brown  posteriorly,  for  the  first  season  at  least. 
Subsequently,  whether  at  the  following  annual  molt  or  later  I  cannot 
say,  the  plumage  of  the  head  becomes  still  brighter,  with  the  crown 
stripes  iet  black  reaching  back  on  the  neck  while  the  white  throat 
is  sharply  defined  against  dark  gray  cheeks  and  breast.  I  do  not 
think  there  is  any  spring  molt  after  the  first  year,  but  subse- 
quent increase  in  the  brightness  of  the  markings  takes  place  at  the 
annual  molt.  The  bright  markings  when  once  attained  are  not  lost 
again,  as  some  of  the  handsomest  specimens  examined  are  fall  birds, 
although  it  is  possible  that  some  birds  never  acquire  the  brightest 
markings  to  which  I  have  referred.  Mr.  W.  E.  D.  Scott  states  that 
some  birds  acquire  the  highly  colored  feathers  immediately  after 
shedding  the  first  plumage,  judging  the  age  of  fall  birds  by  osteologi- 
cal  characters. 

Female. — Apparently  has  no  molt  in  spring,  and  though  it  attains 
the  yellow  eye-brow  and  partly  black  crown  stripes,  it  does  not 
approach  the  brilliancy  of  the  old  male. 

Zonotrichia  leucophrys  (Forst.).     'White-crowned  Sparrt)w. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

Besides  the  annual  molt,  a  molt  of  the  crown,  tertials  and  many 
of  the  breast  and  intescapular  feathers  occurs  in  spring.  This  is 
very  marked  in  the  first  spring  when  the  brown  and  buff  crown  is 
replaced  by  black  and  white.  Whether  it  continues  to  the  same 
extent  in  subsequent  seasons  I  cannot  say  positively,  though  the 
appearance  of  spring  specimens  would  indicate  that  some  molt 
always  occurred  at  this  season.  The  full  plumage  once  attained  is 
not  lost  again,  and  spring  and  fall  adults  are  hardly  distinguish- 
able. 

Spizella  monticola  (Gmel.).     Tree  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

There  is  only  one  molt  a  year,  though  a  few  odd  feathers  are  often 
replaced  during  spring,  probably  when  lost  or  damaged.  Breeding 
specimens  show  great  abrasion,  which  brings  the  colors  into  much 
stronger  contrast,  but  this  is  not  apparent  until  after  April  1st, 
so  that  there  is  scarcely  any  variation  in  specimens  taken  within  the 
winter  habitat. 

Spizella  socialis  (Wils.).     Chipping  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

When  the  young  bird  loses  the  spotted  first  plumage,  at  the  end 
of  summer,   it  acquires  a  winter  plumage  practically  identical  with 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  145 

that  of  the  old  birds  except  in  the  purity  and  extent  of  the  chestnut 
crown.  In  spring  the  dusky  feathers  of  the  throat  are  replaced  by 
pure  white  ones  and  those  of  the  crown  by  new  ones,  which  are 
richly  colored  and  have  no  dark  spots.  Apparently  the  older  birds 
do  not  molt  at  all  in  spring,  the  pure  chestnut  crown  being  gained 
entirely  by  abrasion  of  the  dusky  tips  of  the  feathers.  Adults  vary, 
however,  in  the  purity  of  the  chestnut  crown  acquired  at  the  annual 
molt,  some  of  them  showing  much  mottling  of  brown.  In  con- 
sequence of  this  a  partial  spring  molt  may  be  necessary  in  some 
individuals  after  the.  first  season.  Some  change  is  effected  in  the 
other  plumage  during  spring  and  winter  by  abrasion. 

Spizella  pusilla  (Wils.).     Field  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

After  the  annual  molt  the  winter  plumage  changes  gradually  by 
abrasion,  and  there  is  no  spring  molt  except  the  occasional  renewal 
of  odd  feathers.  The  contrast  between  October  and  August  spec- 
imens is  striking.  The  former  have  the  back  buff  with  reddish- 
brown  centers  and  black  shaft  streaks,  while  the  latter  have  reddish- 
brown  backs  with  distinct  black  streaks. 

Junco  hyemalis  (Linn.).     Snow  Bird. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

No  spring  molt  is  apparent  in  the  Snow  Bird.  The  brown  tints 
of  autumn  disappear  entirely  through  abrasion,  but  this  is  not 
marked  until  after  May  1st.  Birds  of  the  year  are  probably  always 
browner  than  old  birds. 

Melospiza  fasciata  (Gmel.).    Song  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

No  spring  molt  occurs  but  abrasion  is  very  marked,  all  the  buff 
tints  being  lost  in  the  spring  bird,^  while  the  black  streaks  on  the 
breast  appear  as  if  their  ends  had  been  cut  off  with  a  pair  of  scissors. 
Melospiza  georgiana  (Lath.).     Swamp  Sparrow. 

Male. — Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

The  molt  of  this  species  appears  to  be  precisely  like  that  of  Spizella 
socialis,  which  it  so  closely  resembles  in  the  pattern  of  its  plumage. 
The  chestnut  crown  is  acquired  in  spring  as  well  as  a  certain  pro- 
portion of  white  throat  feathers.  The  chestnut  crown  once  acquired 
is  not  lost  at  the  annual  molt  but  some  individuals  do  not  seem  to 
acquire  it  in  its  entirety,  at  least  until  the  second  year.  No  spring 
molt  seems  to  occur  after  the  full  chestnut  crown  is  attained.      As 


146  rROCEEDIXGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

in  most  Fringillida\  abrasion  causes  marked  change  in  the  general 
plumage  during  winter  and  spring. 

Female. — Apparently  like  the  male,  though  generally  with  the 
crown  patch  less  pure. 

Passerella  iliaca  (Merr.).     Fox  Sparrow. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

Apparently  no  spring  molt  occurs  in  this  species  apart  from  a 
slight  renewal  of  the  throat  feathers  in  some  examples.  The  rusty 
red  tints  are  to  a  great  extent  lost,  especially  on  the  head  and  neck, 
by  the  breeding  season,  but  the  abrasion  is  scarcely  noticeable  up  to 
the  time  the  bird  leaves  its  winter  habitat,  so  that  specimens  taken 
there,  from  November  to  March,  are  hardlv  distinguishable. 
Pipilo  erythrophthalmus  (Liun.).    Towhee. 

Male. — Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  is  apparently  only  one  molt  a  year  in  the  Towhee  and, 
although  the  feathei*s  are  subject  to  abrasion  during  the  winter  . 
and  spring,  scarcely  any  change  is  eflected  in  the  coloration  owing 
to  the  fact  that  they  are  not  parti-colored.  The  young  birds 
assume  the  adult  winter  plumaije  about  the  end  of  August,  when 
they  present  a  very  peculiar  mottled  appearance.  The  wing  and 
tail  as  usual  are  not  renewed  at  this  time. 

Female. — Molts  as  in  the  male,  the  only  difference  in  plumage 
being  the  substitution  of  brown  for  black  in  the  adult. 

Cardinalis  cardinalis  (Linn.).    Cardinal. 

Male. — Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  is  no  spring  molt ;  the  winter  plumage  shows  extensive 
gray  margins  to  the  feathers  of  the  back  which  are  lost  by  the  nest- 
ing season  through  abrasion.  In  some  specimens,  evidently  younger 
birds,  these  ede:iu2:sare  brownish  rather  than  grav.  Contrarv  to  the 
rule  which  governs  others  of  our  Fringillidre,  the  young  Cardinal 
renews  the  rectrices  and  remiges  at  the  end  of  the  breeding  season.  A 
specimen  obtained  Sept.  18,  1881,  at  Haddoufield,  N.  J.  shows  the 
first  plumage  nearly  lost.  The  primaries  have  all  been  renewed  as 
far  as  the  third,  while  the  new  tail,  still  showing  the  sheaths  at  base, 
is  nearly  full  grown,  except  the  middle  pair  of  feathers,  which  are 
not  quite  two  inches  in  length.  The  renewal  of  the  flight  feathers  in 
the  first  autumn  in  this  species  is  a  matter  of  great  interest  (see  p. 
117). 

Female. — Molts  as  in  the  male,  a  young  female  changing  from 
the  first  to  winter  plumage  (Tarpon  Springs,  Fla.,  Aug.  11,  1891), 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  147 

shows  the  wings  beginning  to  molt  as  described  above  in  the  case  of 
the  male.     The  adult  plumages  differ  from  those  of  the  male  in 
intensity  of  coloration,  being  generally  gray  and  brown,  though  some 
Florida  specimens  are  quite  red.      Much  of  the  brown  tint  of  the 
lower  surface  in  winter  is  lost  by  abrasion. 

Habia  ludoviciana  (Linn.).     Rose-breasted  Grosbeak. 

The  Rose-breasted  Grosbeak  exhibits  probably  the  most  compli- 
cated series  of  plumages  of  any  of  our  smaller  Xorth  American 
birds.  Five  regular  plumages  of  the  male  and  three  of  the  female 
are  recognizable,  while  the  great  range  of  individual  peculiarity  in 
the  amount  of  change  effected  at  a  given  molt  produces  many  other 
variations. 

I  have  treated  the  plumages  and  molts  of  this  species  at  ranch 
length  and  have  referred  to  them  in  other  parts  of  this  paper. 
As  some  of  my  deductions  may  not  meet  with  universal  endorse- 
ment, it  seems  proper  to  state  at  the  outset  the  nature  of  the  material 
at  my  disposal  while  writing  the  paper.  This  is  as  follows  :  First 
plumage,  1  ;  first  plumage,  molting,  2.  Males  in  first  winter,  12  ; 
in  first  spring,  10  ;  in  first  annual  molt,  2  ;  in  second  winter,  5  ;  in 
second  spring  molt,  2  ;  in  second  spring,  12.  Females  in  spring, 
8  ;  annual  molt,  1  ;  winter,  2.  Besides  this,  I  have  examined  the 
entire  series  in  the  U.  S.  National  Museum,  the  numbers  of  which  I 
have  not  recorded. 

Male. — There  is  in  this  species  a  complete  annual  molt  and  a 
more  or  less  complete  molt  of  the  body  feathers  in  early  spring, 
generally  including  a  molt  of  the  tail  in  the  first  season.  Much 
abrasion  occurs  between  these  two  molts  and  in  feathers  not  molted 
in  the  spring  it  continues  until  the  next  annual  molt.  The 
recognizable  plumages  are  as  follows  : 

First  Plumage  [30,236,  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  July  1,  1892. 
Beaverkill,  N.  Y.]. 

Beneath  white.  Above,  head  dull  black,  with  buflTy  superciliary 
and  median  stripes,  all  meeting  on  the  hind  neck.  Rest  of  upper 
surface  olive-brown,  mottled  with  blackish-brown.  Wing  and  tail 
(about  half  grown)  olive-brown  with  spots  and  bands  buffy-white. 

First  Plumage  Molting  [31,924,  A.  N.  S.  Phila.  July  6,  1891. 
E.  Hartford,  Conn.]. 

Similar  to  the  above,  but  with  wnngs  and  tail  of  full  dimensions, 
while  the  breast  and  abdominal  tracts  are  newly  molted  buff  feathers 
with  dark  centers.  The  head  and  throat  are  also  beginning  to 
change  to  the  following  plumage. 


148  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Plumage  of  First  Winter  [28,502,  A.  N.  S.  Phila.  Aug.  10, 
1879.     Winnebago  Co.,  Iowa]. 

Beneath  buff,  throat  somewhat  suffused  with  pink,  and  belly- 
white,  many  of  the  feathers  with  a  central  dash  of  blackish-brown. 
Above  much  as  in  first  plumage,  but  feathers  of  back  and  head 
more  strongly  edged  with  buffy-brown. 

No  specimens  showing  the  molt  from  this  plumage  to  that  of  the 
following  spring  have  come  under  my  observation ;  birds  in  the  lat- 
ter plumage  are  as  follows. 

Plumage  of  First  Breeding  Season  [1,029  Coll.  W.  Stone]. 

Below,  abdomen  Avhite,  breast  pink,  throat  black,  mottled  with 
pink  and  white.  Above  black,  w'ith  more  or  less  traces  of  buff  edg- 
ings, rump  white  somewhat  mottled  with  black,  flight  feathers  gen- 
erally as  in  first  plumage,  greater  coverts  and  generally  the  tertials 
black,  tail  partly  black. 

Annual  Molt  [1,028,  Coll.  Wm.  Brewster.  Aug.  20,  1874.  Up- 
ton, Oxford  Co.,  Maine]. 

Below,  as  in  the  following  specimen,  but  with  many  black 
feathers  remaining  on  the  throat,  above  as  in  first  breeding  plumage, 
except  the  back  which  has  molted  into  fall  plumage.  Wings  entirely 
molted  except  secondaries  and  outermost  primaries.  The  old 
wing  feathers  are  olive-brown,  the  new  jet  black. 

Winter  Plumage  of  Second  Year  [1,027,  Coll.  Wm.  Brewster. 
Sept.  1871.     Mt.Carmel,  111.]. 

Differs  from  first  fall  plumage  as  follows :  Belly  whiter  and 
throat  and  breast  much  more  pink,  feathers  on  back  black,  with 
comparatively  narrow  buff  edgings.  Wing  and  tail  jet  black,  with 
pure  white  spots. 

Breeding  Plumage  of  Second  Year  [34,225,  A.  N.  S.  Phila. 
Haddonfield,  N.  J.     May  16,  1882]. 

Differs  from  first  year  as  follows  :  Throat  uniform,  black  down  to 
the  breast,  which  is  brilliant  pink.  Wings  and  tail  jet  black,  with 
spots  pure  white,  head  and  back  solid  black,  rump  pure  white. 

While  the  above  descriptions  give  a  pretty  accurate  idea  of  the 
seasonal  variations  of  plumage  in  the  Rose-breasted  Grosbeak,  they 
by  no  means  cover  all  the  peculiarities  of  plumage  found  in  this 
variable  species.  It  seems  quite  possible  that  the  male  requires 
three  years  to  gain  the  perfect  plumage  described  above  as  the 
"  breeding  plumage  of  the  second  year  "  ;  but  different  individuals 
differ  so  much  in  the  amount  of  change  that  they  undergo  at  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  149 

spring  molt,  that  they  present  an  almost  unbroken  series  from  one 
extreme  type  of  spring  plumage  to  the  other.  It  is,  therefore,  quite 
impossible  to  do  more  than  separate  them  into  two  groups,  with 
brown  and  black  remiges  respectively,  the  former  representing  one 
year  old  birds,  the  latter  those  of  more  than  one  year.^" 

The  remiges,  I  think,  are  only  shed  at  the  annual  molt,  as  is  the 
rule  in  nearly  all  passerine  birds.  The  brown  wing  feathers  of  the 
fledgling  are,  therefore,  retained  until  August  of  the  next  year. 
I  think  they  are  all  replaced  by  jet  black  feathers  at  this  annual 
molt.  One  spring  specimen  (1,029  Coll.  W.  Stone),  it  is  true, 
has  one  black  feather  in  an  otherwise  brown  wing,  but  this  is 
evidently  an  exception,  and  the  black  feather  may  have  been  as- 
sumed in  spring ;  in  any  case,  it  can  hardly  be  considered  as  evi- 
dence that  the  brown  wings  are  retained  for  more  than  one  year. 
Furthermore,  all  the  brown-winged  birds  I  have  examined  which 
show  the  annual  molt  in  progress,  have  new  black  feathers  coming 
in. 

The  tertials,  as  usual,  do  not  accord  with  the  primaries  and  sec- 
ondaries in  the  time  of  their  molt.  Birds  in  the  first  winter  plum- 
age (i.  e.,  with  brown  wings)  almost  always  molt  the  tertials  with 
the  body  feathers  in  spring,  the  new  ones  being  jet  black  with  white 
spots.  Two  specimens  before  me,  however,  retained  the  old  brown 
tertials  throughout  the  breeding  season.  An  example  of  the  other 
extreme  is  a  specimen  (No.  501  Coll.  W.  Stone),  a  bird  of  the  year, 
shot  in  September,  which  has  just  completed  the  molt  from  the  first 
plumage  to  that  of  the  first  winter,  has  lost  the  brown  tertials  and 
greater  wing  coverts  and  has  a  new  set  of  black  ones  which  still 
have  the  embryonic  sheaths  adhering  to  the  base  of  the  quills. 

Old  birds,  as  a  rule,  do  not  renew  the  tertials  in  spring,  though 
some  of  the  most  highly  plumaged  examples  seem  to  have  done  so 
In  judging  of  the  renewal  of  these  tertials,  I  have  based  my  opinion 
on  the  condition  of  these  feathers  in  spring  specimens.  In  some 
birds  they  are  very  much  abraded  so  that  the  white  spots  appear  to 
have  been  cat  away,  while  in  others  they  are  fresh  and  show  no 
abrasion  at  all  (PI.  V,  figs.  7  and  8).  The  former  I  regard  as 
acquired  at  the  previous  annual  molt  and  latter  at  the  spring  molt. 

^^  As  already  stated,  the  most  perfect  plumage  may  not  necessarily  denote 
an  old  bird,  but  perhaps  one  of  exceptional  vitality.  Though  it  is  undoubt- 
edly the  fact  that  the  successive  plumages  of  an  individual  become  more  per- 
fect, up  to  a  certain  point,  at  least,  it  is  also  quite  likely  that  some  individ- 
uals never  reach  the  so-called  perfect  plumage. 


150  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  tail  is  generally  shed  at  the  first  spriug  molt  and  a  new  black 
one  assumed,^^  though  sometimes  only  a  few  of  the  feathers  are 
changed,  frequently  only  the  middle  pair.  In  these  latter  cases 
the  complete  black  tail  is  assumed  at  the  next  annual  molt. 

As  regards  the  spring  molt  of  the  body  plumage  there  is  a  great 
deal  of  individual  variation.  In  some  specimens,  especially  in  birds 
in  their  first  spring  plumage,  this  molt  is  practically  complete,  as 
far  as  the  body  feathers  are  concerned,  while  in  others,  a  good 
many  of  the  old  feathers,  showing  much  abrasion,  are  retained. 
This  often  gives  a  mottled  appearance  to  the  interscapular  region, 
while  in  the  pink  breast  patch  the  old  feathers  may  be  recognized 
by  their  worn  whitish  tips.  One  curious  specimen  (No.  31,922,  A. 
N.S.  Coll.,  E.  Hartford,  Conn.,  May  11,  1891),  has  the  pink  of 
the  breast  thickly  spotted  with  black.  Careful  examination  shows 
that  but  little  molt  has  taken  place  on  the  breast ;  the  buflf  margins, 
however,  which  bordered  the  feathers  in  the  winter  plumage,  have 
been  completely  worn  away,  while  the  black  portions  being  appar- 
ently less  brittle  have  withstood  the  abrasion  and  remain  as  promi- 
nent as  in  the  winter  bird  (see  PI.  V,  fig.  6).  Furthermore,  the 
feathers  of  the  interscapular  region,  which  are  acquired  at  the  spring 
molt,  seem  to  vary  in  character,  some  are  jet  black  throughout, 
while  others  are  bordered  with  very  light  buff  on  the  sides.  These 
might  be  considered  to  be  remnants  of  the  winter  plumage,  but  in 
many  spriug  specimens  (notably  in  1,029,  Coll.  W.  Stone,  May  8, 
1892)  the  feathers  are  fresh  and  perfect  while  if  they  had  been 
acquired  at  the  previous  annual  molt  they  would  certainly  have 
shown  more  or  less  abrasion.  These  bufl^-edged  feathers  in  spring 
birds  do  not  necessarily  denote  younger  birds  than  those  having  the 
the  pure  black  feathers,  since  in  the  specimen  (28,499,  Coll.  A.  N.  S., 
June,  1881)  which  shows  the  least  amount  of  spring  molt  of  any 
in  the  series,  such  new  feathers  as  have  been  acquired  on  the  back 
are  entirely  black. 

Female. — Molts  and  plumages  quite  different  from  male.  So  far 
as  my  material  goes,  there  seems  to  be  a  partial  molt  in  spring  in 
addition  to  the  annual  molt  at  the  end  of  the  breeding  season,  but 
in  many  individuals  the  nuptial  plumage  is  much  abraded  and 
shows  but  little  renewal  of  the  feathers.      There  is  a  curious  plum- 

'^  I  have  not  seen  any  specimen  which  shows  this  molt  of  the  tail  in  progress, 
but  I  have  seen  such  a  specimen  illustrating  an  exactly  similar  molt  in  Pir- 

anga  erythromelas. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  161 

age  of  the  female  which  I  do  not  regard  as  belonging  to  the  regular 
cycle  of  changes,  but  rather  an  abnormal  tendency  toward  the 
color  pattern  of  the  male.  This  differs  from  the  normal  female 
plumage  in  having  the  head  and  forepart  of  the  back,  sides  of  neck, 
and  chin  black,  slightly  edged  with  gray,  the  median  crown  stripe 
being  obsolete.  Below  white  slightly  tinged  with  yellow  on  the  breast, 
where  are  also  a  few  narrow  shaft  streaks.  The  specimen  described 
was  taken  in  Chester  Co.,  Pa.,  May  5,  1888  (No.  1,957,  Coll.  W. 
Stone).     A  similar  one  is  in  the  U.  S.  Nat.  Museum  Collection. 

Passerina  oyanea  (Linn.).    Indigo  Bird. 

Male. — Four  distinct  plumages  are  recognizable  in  this  species. 

First  Plumage. 

Much  like  the  following  but  distinguished  by  the  different  struct- 
ure of  the  feathers. 

Plumage  of  First  Winter.  [No.  841,  Coll.  W.  Sfone.  Sept.  30, 
1891.     Chester  Co.,  Pa.]. 

Reddish-brown  above,  with  darker  shaft  lines  on  back,  below 
quite  buff,  brownish  on  breast,  with  distinct  dark  shaft  lines. 

Breeding  Plumage. 

Brilliant  blue  above  and  below,  varying  as  described  below. 

Winter  Plumage  of  Adult. 

Reddish-brown  above,  shaft  stripes  obscure,  rump  feathers  more 
or  less  blue  with  brown  tips  below,  tinged  with  brown,  many  feath- 
■ers  with  bluish  bases,  which  give  it  a  mottled  appearance.  Some 
specimens  have  much  blue  on  the  bases  of  all  the  feathers  above. 

The  breeding  plumage  exhibits  a  great  range  of  variation  and 
the  most  brilliant  and  perfect  dress  is  certainly  not  acquired  before 
the  second  or  third  year.  The  primaries  and  secondaries  are  only 
renewed  at  the  annual  molt,  but  the  tertials  and  some  of  the  rec- 
trices  are  often  molted  in  spring,  when  the  brown  body  feathers  are 
lost  and  the  blue  plumage  acquired.  It  is  the  irregularity  in  the 
extent  of  this  molt  that  causes  the  variety  in  the  breeding  plumage 
of  different  individuals.  Old  brown  tertials  of  the  winter  plumage 
are  frequently  retained  through  the  breeding  season  and  also  many 
of  the  old  coverts  as  well  as  brown  patches  or  single  feathers  on 
various  parts  of  the  body.  The  white  belly  of  the  winter  plumage 
also  frequently  escapes  molt  in  the  spring.  Individual  variation 
in  the  extent  of  the  molt  is  so  great  that  the  specimens  cannot  be 
separated  in  definite  groups.     Fourteen  spring  and  summer  males 


152  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896. 

show  only  six  in  which  the  molt  of  body  feathers  has  been  com- 
plete and  no  trace  of  brown  feathers  remain,  but  even  some  of  these 
have  one  or  two  brown  wing-coverts.  Eight  of  the  fourteen  have 
renewed  the  tertials  in  the  spring  molt  while  three  have  partially 
renewed  them  and  three  retain  the  old  feathers.  Winter  specimens 
of  more  than  one  year  also  show  a  good  deal  of  variation  in  the 
amount  of  blue  on  the  feathers.  Some  which  appear  brown  super- 
ficially, have  the  bases  of  the  feathers  quite  blue  ;  while  others  have 
broader  brown  margins  and  but  little  blue.  Much  abrasion 
takes  place  between  the  annual  and  spring  molt  but  a  scarcity  of 
winter  specimens  and  general  lack  of  dates  on  such  as  I  have,  pre- 
vents a  careful  study  of  this  matter.  The  young  birds  of  this  spe- 
cies molt  the  tail  at  the  close  of  the  summer  when  they  renew  their 
body  plumage  but  do  not  molt  the  wing  feathers. 

Females. — Have  but  one  molt  a  year,  and  the  change  in  the  nup- 
tial plumage  is  due  entirely  to  abrasion.  Whether  the  young  renew 
the  tail  at  the  end  of  the  summer,  as  in  the  male,  I  am  uncertain. 

Spiza  americana  (Gmel.).     Dickcissel. 
Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 
No  spring  molt  occurs  in  this  species,  unless  in  the  first  season. 

Family  TANAGRIDJE. 

Piranga  erythromelas  Vieill.    Scarlet  Tanager. 

The  seasonal  changes  of  this  species  are  analogous  to  those  of  the 
Rose-breasted  Grosbeak,  though  the  individual  variations  do  not 
seem  to  be  so  great.  Five  regular  plumages  of  the  male  are  recog- 
nizable, as  follows  : 

1.  First  Plumage  [No.  1,906,  Coll.  W.  Stone.  Aug.  17,  1895. 
Chester  Co.,  Pa.]." 

Above  olive,  below  yellowish-white,  yellow  on  middle  of  the  ab- 
domen and  crissura,  breast  and  sides  of  abdomen  coarsely  spotted 
and  streaked  with  olive.  Wings  half  grown,  tail  one-quarter 
grown. 

2.  Plumage  of  First  Winter  [No.  830,  Coll.  W.  Stone.  Sept.  18, 
1891.     Haddonfield,  N.  J.]. 

Above  olive,  below  olive-yellow,  wing  and  tail  brown,  edged  with 
olive,  except  the  greater  median  and  lesser  wing-coverts,  which  are 
jet  black. 

3.  First  Breeding  Plumage  [No.  34,001,  Coll.  A.  N.  S.  Chester 
Co.,  Pa.     May  18,  1881]. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  153 

Above  and  below  scarlet,  tail  jet  black,  wings  brown,  edged  with 
olive,  except  greater  median  and  lesser  coverts  and  tertials  which 
are  jet  black. 

4.  Plumage  of  Second  Winter  [No.  19,688,  Coll.  Wm.  Brewster, 
Buncombe  Co.,  N.  C.     Sept.  15,  1886]. 

Above  olive,  below  yellow-olive,  wings  and  tail  entirely  jet  black, 

5.  Breeding  Plumage  of  Second  Year  [No.  716,  Coll.  W,  Stone. 
Harvey's  Lake,  Pa,     June  16,  1891], 

Above  and  below  scarlet,  wings  and  tail  entirely  jet  black. 

From  these  descriptions  it  will  be  seen  that  the  dull  brownish 
wing  feathers  of  the  first  plumage  are  retained  until  the  first  annual 
molt,  except  the  tertials  which  are  molted  in  the  spring  when  the 
red  body  plumage  is  first  assumed.  The  jet  black  tail  is  also  ac- 
quired at  this  time  in  all  the  specimens  that  I  have  examined,  ex- 
cept one.  In  this  the  molt  of  the  tail  has  been  incomplete,  only 
three  black  feathers  having  been  assumed.  In  many  birds  in  the 
first  breeding  plumage  a  few  olive  feathers  persist  on  the  sides  of 
the  body  and  flanks  and  more  rarely  on  the  back.  Specimens  in 
the  plumage  of  the  second  winter  also  frequently  show  a  few  red 
feathers  on  these  parts. 

A  peculiar  plumage  of  the  male  which  does  not  belong  in  the 
regular  cycle,  but  which  is  of  more  than  casual  occurrence,  has  the 
scarlet  of  the  normal  plumage  replaced  by  bright  orange.  Other 
peculiarities,  which  are  of  rather  frequent  occurrence,  are  the  pres- 
ence of  fed  or  orange  feathers  among  the  lesser  wing  coverts.  Speci- 
mens taken  in  August,  showing  the  annual  molt  in  progress,  are 
striking  looking  birds.  One  of  these  before  me  is  about  half  molted  ; 
the  crown,  ear  coverts,  interscapiilum,  throat,  sides  of  the  abdomen, 
and  spot  on  the  breast  are  olive,  while  the  hind  neck,  sides  of  head, 
rump,  breast,  center  of  abdomen  and  crissum  are  scarlet.  Speci- 
mens showing  the  spring  molt  are,  of  course,  exactly  the  reverse  of 
this,  but  the  only  one  that  I  have  seen  was  so  far  advanced  that 
nearly  all  the  green  plumage  was  lost.  It  was  a  bird  entering  upon 
its  first  spring,  and  showed  the  jet  black  tail  about  half  grown  while 
the  brown  remiges  were  retained  and  showed  no  signs  of  molt. 

Specimens  examined :  First  plumage,  1  ;  first  winter,  5  ;  spring 
molt,  2  ;  first  breeding  plumage,  14  ;  annual  molt  4  ;  second  winter 
2  ;    second  spring  molt,  1  ;  second  breeding  plumage,  11. 

Female. — I  have  been  unable  to  examine  any  specimens  in  the 
winter,  but  from   a  comparison  of  spring  and  fall  birds,  I  should 

11 


154  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

think  there  was  at  least  a  partial  molt  in  spring. 

Family  AMPELID^. 

Ampelis  cedrorum  (Vieill.).     Cedar  Waxwing. 

Plumages  :  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

Only  one  molt  a  year  occurs  in  this  species  and  but  little  effect  is 
produced  by  abrasion,  except  that  the  plumage  becomes  lighter,  es- 
pecially above.  The  molt  is  very  late  ;  in  a  specimen  taken  Sept. 
27,  it  has  just  begun  while  young  birds  molt  the  first  plumage  (?) 
of  the  body  in  November  as  shown  in  specimens  taken  Nov.  2-22. 

Family  HIRUNDINID^. 

The  swallows  exhibit  certain  peculiarities  in  their  molt  which 
have  already  been  described  (p.  111).  In  addition  to  this  they  differ 
from  most  Passerine  species  in  having  the  first  plumage  better  devel- 
oped and  more  nearly  like  that  of  the  adult.  This  plumage  is  generally 
retained  much  longer  than  in  most  birds  and  the  young  of  most  of 
our  swallows  seem  to  start  on  their  migration  with  little  or  no  molt 
having  taken  place.  Sharpe  and  Wyatt  think  that  swallows  molt 
in  their  winter  quarters,  but  in  the  case  of  Tachydneta  and  Chelidon 
this  is  certainly  an  error  and  Dr.  J.  A.  Allen^^  has  shown  that  it  is 
equally  erroneous  in  the  case  of  Stelgidopteryx.  Some  individuals 
probably  start  on  their  migration  before  the  molt  has  begun.  Cer- 
tainly great  quantities  of  swallows,  mainly  Tachydneta  smd  Chelidon, 
congregate  along  the  southern  New  Jersey  coast  in  August,  the 
majority  of  which  are  surely  migrants,  and  many  of  them  are 
molting.  In  the  same  way,  molting  Tachydneta  occur  in  abundance 
in  the  lower  Delaware  Valley  in  October,  where  there  are  none  in 
the  summer.  An  adult  Chelidon  erythrog aster,  taken  at  Philadel- 
phia, Sept.  1,  with  the  one  described  beyond,  had  just  begun  to  molt 
on  the  head,  but  showed  no  trace  of  shedding  any  flight  feathers. 
This  bird  would  hardly  have  staid  to  molt,  as  this  species  is  rarely 
seen  here  after  that  date. 

Progne  subis  (Linn.).     Purple  Martin. 

The  Martin  apparently  has  no  regular  spring  molt,  but  some 
young  males  acquire  scattered  black  feathers  on  the  under  parts  at 
this  time.  The  complete  steel-blue  plumage  is  not  acquired  till  the 
end  of  the  second  summer  (or  perhaps  the  third  ?). 

•"  Auk,  1895,  p.  37-1. 


189G.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  155 

Petrochelidon  lunifrons  (Say).     ClifT  Swallow. 

From  such  series  of  this  bird  as  I  have  examined,  I  should  judge 
that  it  had  no  spring  molt ;  whether  the  young  molt  the  flight 
feathers  at  the  close  of  the  summer  I  cannot  say,  as  none  of  my 
specimens  show  any  molt. 

Chelidon  erythrogaster  (Bodd.).     Barn  Swallow. 

The  scarcity,  in  collections,  of  adults  in  winter  plumage  or  in  the 
molt  prevents  a  complete  account  of  the  molting  of  this  species.  I 
have  only  one  specimen  showing  the  annual  molt  in  progress,  which 
was  taken  Aug.  7, 1878,  at  Philadelphia.  New  feathers  are  coming  in 
on  the  breast,  throat,  and  back,  and  the  tail  is  just  beginning  to 
molt.  None  of  the  remiges  have  been  cast.  Another  speci- 
men, taken  Sept.  1  at  the  some  locality,  shows  a  complete  molt 
just  finished.  As  I  am  not  sure  whether  the  young  molts  its 
flight  feathers  with  the  rest  of  its  first  plumage  I  cannot  say  whether 
this  is  an  adult  or  bird  of  the  year,  but  my  impression  is  that  the 
young  do  not  molt  the  wing  and  tail  at  this  time  and  that  the  speci- 
men is,  therefore,  an  adult.  In  any  case  it  presents  one  curious 
question  :  The  outer  rectrices  are  only  .35  in.  longer  than  the  next 
pair  (as  in  all  young  summer  birds).  Now  all  the  spring  birds  that 
I  have  examined  have  the  feathers  much  longer  (.75-1.25  in.  longer 
than  the  next  pair),  so  that  there  must  be  a  molt  of  part  of  the  tail 
at  least,  in  the  spring.  I  do  not  think  there  is  any  spring  molt  of 
the  wnngs  or  body  feathers. 

Tachycineta  bicolor  (Yieill.).    White-bellied  Swallow. 

Plumages  :  first,  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

Male. — A  large  series  of  this  species,  collected  in  southern  New 
Jersey  illustrates  the  changes  of  plumage  very  satisfactorily.  The 
annual  molt  in  the  adults  takes  place  from  July  20  to  September  1, 
at  which  latter  date  the  winter  plumage  is  generally  completed.  The 
birds  of  the  year  do  not  begin  to  molt  until  the  first  week  of  Sep- 
tember and  are  in  full  plumage,  indistinguishable  from  the  adults, 
by  October  15.  Apparently  there  is  no  spring  molt,  but  the  white- 
tips  to  the  wing  feathers  disappear  by  abrasion. 

Female. — Two  plumages  of  the  female  are  found,  one  indistin- 
guishable from  the  male,  the  other  much  duller  and  quite  brown  in 
the  spring.  The  latter,  I  think,  is  the  plumage  of  the  first  year  ; 
at  any  rate,  in  one  specimen,  it  is  certainly  assumed  at  the  molt  of 
the  first  plumage. 


156  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Clivicola  riparia  (Linn.).     Bank  Swallow. 

I  can  find  no  evidence  of  a  spring  molt  in  this  species,  but  the 
plumage  shows  considerable  abrasion  at  this  season.  I  have  seen 
no  molting  specimens. 

Females. — Resemble  the  males  at  all  times. 

Stelgidopteryx  serripennis  (Aud.). 

The  above  remarks  apply  equally  to  this  species. 

Family  LANIID^. 

Lanius  borealis  Vieill.     Northern  Shrike. 

There  seems  to  be  a  partial  molt  in  spring,  but  not  extensive 
enough  to  produce  a  change  in  the  plumage.  One  specimen,  taken 
March  20,  shows  new  feathers  coming  in  on  the  breast  and  head. 

Lanius  ludovicianus  Linn.     Loggerhead  Shrike. 

A  specimen  taken  October  20,  Haddonfield,  N.  J.  (No.  1 ,429, 
Coll.  W.iS.),  which  shows  no  sign  of  molt  on  the  wings,  except  the  ter- 
tials,  and  appears,  therefore,  to  be  a  bird  of  the  year,  has  nearly 
completed  the  body  molt  aud  has  likewise  renewed  the  tail.  Spring 
specimens  show  a  slight  renewal  of  feathers,  as  in  the  preceding  spe- 
cies. 

Family  VIREONID^. 

The  uniform  coloration  of  the  feathers  in  the  Vireos  helps  to  ob- 
scure what  little  abrasion  takes  place  in  the  plumage ;  and  notwith- 
standing the  fresh  appearance  of  the  spring  dress,  I  do  not  think 
there  is  a  spring  molt  of  any  great  extent.  The  few  winter  spe- 
cimens that  I  have  examined  show  no  signs  of  molt.  The  young 
in  the  first  winter  are  like  the  adults,  and  the  males  and  females  are 
alike.  There  arg,  therefore,  only  three  plumages  :  first,  winter  and 
nuptial,  the  last  two  are  often  scarcely  distinguishable. 

Vireo  olivaceus  (Linn.).     Red-eyed  Vireo. 

Spring  birds  are,  perhaps,  duller  colored,  but  show  but  little 
signs  of  wear.  A  specimen  taken  Aug.  27  has  nearly  completed 
the  molt  of  body  feathers  while  it  is  also  molting  the  tail.  The 
wings  show  no  signs  of  molt,  except  the  tertials  which  are  generally 
renewed  with  the  body  plumage,  so  that  the  specimen  must  be  a 
bird  of  the  year. 

Vireo  gilvus  (Vieill.).     Warbling  Vireo. 

Vireo  philadelphicus  (Cass.).     Philadelphia  Vireo. 

Molt  as  in  the  preceding.     The  winter  plumages  have  respectively 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  157 

more  buff  and  olive-yellow  beneath  than  the  nuptial  dress.      No 
young  birds  in  the  first  molt  have  been  examined. 

Vireo  flavifrons  Vieill.     Yellow-throated  Yireo. 
Vireo  solitarius  (Wils.).     Solitary  Vireo. 

These  two  birds  seem  to  correspond  exactly  in  the  condition  of 
their  plumages.  The  tertials  of  some  individuals  show  so  little 
abrasion  and  have  the  light  edgings  so  perfect  that  it  seems  as  if 
they  must  be  renewed  in  the  spring.  A  young  V.  flavifrons  in  the 
first  molt,  is  renewing  only  the  body  plumage. 
Vireo  noveboracensis  (Gmel.).     White-eyed  Vireo. 

A  young  bird  in  first  molt  is  renewing  its  tail  exactly  as  in  V. 
olivaceus.  Spring  specimens  show  more  abrasion  than  any  of  the 
other  Vireos,  and  the  edge  of  the  tertials  are  very  much  worn,  in 
striking  contrast  to  the  last  two  species. 

Family  MNIOTILTID^. 

A  more  or  less  complete  spring  molt  of  the  body  plumage  seems 
to  be  the  rule  in  the  Warblers  but  as  is  usually  the  case  with  spring 
molts  we  have  a  very  unsatisfactory  series  of  specimens  available 
for  study,  and  are  thrown  back  largely  upon  a  comparison  of  spring 
and  autumn  material.  Species  of  which  I  have  actually  seen  speci- 
mens in  the  process  of  molting  in  spring  are  Dendroica  blackburnice, 
D.  discolor,  D.  castanea,  D.  palmarum,  D.  tigrina,  D.  eoronata,  and 
Geothlypis  trichas.  The  question  of  course  arisesas  to  the  extent  of  this 
molt  after  the  first  year.  The  young  of  most  Warblers  in  the  first 
autumn  differ  materially  from  the  adults,  and  an  extensive  molt  is 
necessary  in  the  following  spring,  but  upon  once  gaining  the  adult 
plumage  they  do  not  change  their  appearance  materially  at  the  next 
annual  molt  and,  therefore,  a  complete  spring  molt  in  subsequent 
years  is  not  necessary.  Some  species,  however,  change  regularly, 
twice  a  year.  Probably  nearly  all  Warblers  have  some  spring  molt, 
but  in  many  it  is  restricted  to  the  head  and  breast  after  the  first 
season.  Regarding  the  relation  of  their  seasonal  plumages,  the  spe- 
cies may  be  grouped  as  follows  : 

1.  Adult  male  at  all  seasons  and  young  of  the  year  practically  alike, 
Seiurus,  Helmitherus,  Sylvania  mitrata  (winter  plumage  with 
light  tips  on  black  parts). 

2.  Winter  and  nuptial  dress  of  adult  male  different :  Mniotilta 
varia,  Dendroica  pensylvanica,  D.  maculosa,  D.  striata,  D.  castanea, 
D.  hlackhurni(E. 


158  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

3.  Adult  males  alike  at  all  seasons,  young  of  the  year  different : 
Geothlypis,  Sylvania  canadensis,  S.  pusilla,  Setophaga,  Helmintho- 
phila  pinm,  H.  ruficapilla,  Dendroica  cestiva,  D.  virens,  D.  cceru- 
lescens,  D.  vigorsii,  D.  tigrina,  D.  discolor,  Compsothlypis. 

Regarding  a  few  I  ara  in  donbt. 

So  far  as  I  know,  no  Warblers  molt  the  flight  feathers  in  spring, 
nor  do  the  young  molt  them  with  their  first  plumage. 

Mniotilta  varia  (Linn.).     Black  and  White  Warbler. 

Plumages  :  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

31ale, — The  worn  condition  of  the  plumage  of  some  birds  would 
indicate  that  the  spring  molt  is  not  as  complete  as  in  most  Warblers. 
Some  individuals  do  not  molt  the  tertials  at  this  time  while  others 
certainly  do.  The  plumage  of  the  first  winter  has  only  the  sides  of 
the  body  streaked  and  the  streaks  dull.  The  adult  winter  plumage 
is  as  heavily  marked  as  the  nuptial  dress  but  has  the  throat  white. 

Female. — Remains  in  the  plumage  of  the  first  winter. 

Helmintliophila  pinus  (Linn.).     Blue-winged  AVarbler. 

Plumages:  first,  first  winter,  first  nuptial,  adult  winter,  adult 
nuptial. 

Male. — Spring  birds  are  always  much  worn  on  the  tertials  and 
back,  and  probably  have  only  a  partial  spring  molt.  The  yellow 
cap  is  wanting  in  the  first  winter,  the  lores  are  dull  and  the  under 
surface  quite  dull.  Some  spring  males  are  dull  and  tinged  with 
olive  below,  with  the  cap  ill-defined,  these  I  take  to  be  first  year 
birds.     Adults  are  brilliant  yellow. 

Female. — Like  male,  with  the  same  two  forms  of  spring  plumage. 

Helmintliophila  chrysoptera  (Linn.).     Golden-winged  Warbler. 

Apparently  the  same  plumages  as  the  above.     What  I  take  to  be 
the  plumage  of  the  first  spring  is  tinted  with  yellow  below.      The 
female  has  the  black  replaced  by  gray. 
Helminthopliila  ruficapilla  (Wils.).     Nashville  Warbler. 

Plumages  :  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

The  plumage  of  this  species  shows  still  more  abrasion  in  spring, 
and  there  would  seem  to  be  little  or  no  spring  molt  at  this  season, 
after  the  first  year.     Birds  in  the  first  winter  lack  the  pure  gray  on 
the  head,  and  show  little  or  no  chestnut  on  the  cap. 
Helminthophila  peregrina  (  Wils.).     Tennessee  Warbler. 

Apparently  has  the  same  number  of  plumages  and  molts  as  the 
last.     Spring  birds  are  much  worn. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  159 

Helmitherus  vermivorus  (Gmel.).     Worm-eating  AVarbler. 

Plumages  :  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  is  scarcely  any  variation  in  the  plumage  of  this  species 
after  the  nestling  stage.     Spring  birds  show  but  little  abrasion. 
Compsothlypis  americana  (Linn.).     Parula  Warbler. 

Plumages  :  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

The  spring  molt  is  probably  not  very  marked,  as  the  birds  show 
much  abrasion.  Fall  adults  have  the  breast  markings  fringed  with 
yellow,  which  is  lost  by  the  breeding  season.  How  much  varia- 
tion there  is  in  the  nuptial  plumage  I  cannot  say.  I  had  thought 
the  dark-breasted  individuals  to  be  birds  of  the  second  or  third 
year,  but  Mr.  Brewster  has  shown  that  they  represent  a  geogra- 
phical race,  C.  americana  usnece.  Perhaps  the  younger  birds  of  this 
race  will  still  be  found  to  be  lighter  colored. 
Dendroica  tigrina  (Gmel.).     Cape  May  Warbler. 

Plumages  :  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

A  nearly  complete  spring  molt  of  body  plumage  takes  place  the 
first  spring,  and  a  good  deal  of  abrasion  follows  during  May,  which 
brings  out  the  spots  on  the  back  and  throws  all  the  markings  into 
stronger  contrast.  Birds  in  the  first  winter  are  very  dull  and 
tinged  with  gray,  while  adults  in  winter  diflTer  little  from  spring 
birds,  except  that  all  the  feathers  are  broadly  bordered  with  olive- 
gray  or  yellow.  This  plumage  changes  to  the  adult  nuptial  dress 
wholly  by  abrasion,  which  is  very  strongly  marked  in  spring  adults. 

Dendroica  sestiva  (Gmel.).     Yellow  W'arbler. 

Plumages :  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

There  is  a  complete  molt  of  body  feathers  the  first  spring,  but  it  is 
probably  not  so  extensive  in  subsequent  years,  as  some  spring  birds 
show  that  the  tertials  have  not  been  renewed.  Young  in  first  win- 
ter are  very  dull,  with  the  top  of  the  head  quite  green.  Adults  in 
winter  are  scarcely  distinguishable  from  spring  birds. 
Dendroica  caerulescens  (Gmel.).     Black-throated  Blue  Warbler. 

Plumages  :  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

The  freshness  of  the  flight  feathers  in  some  spring  specimens 
seems  to  indicate  that  they  are  sometimes  renewed  with  the  rest  of 
the  spring  plumage.  Others  are  so  worn  that  they  probably  molted 
but  little  at  this  time.  Most  fall  adults  have  white  edgings  to  the 
throat  feathers,  but  others  are  absolutely  indistinguishable  from  the 
the  freshest  spring  specimens.      Females  are  always  in  the  brown 


HiO  PKOCEEDIXGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

plumage,  like  the  males  in   the  first  winter.     One  old  (?)  specimen 
(May  19,  Coll.  A.  X.  S.,  No.  29,592)  is  quite  gray  above. 
Dendroica  ooronata  (Linn.).     Myrtle  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter,  adult  nuptial. 

A  good  series  of  winter  and  spring  examples  of  this  species  from 
southern  Xew  Jersey  shows  the  spring  molt  very  satisfactorilv.  The 
entire  plumage  of  the  head  and  breast  is  renewed  as  well  as  the 
greater  part  of  the  iuterscapulum.  The  tertials  are  not  molted. 
Old  birds,  in  fall,  have  more  or  less  gray  feathers  on  the  back  and 
black  centered  feathers  on  the  breast,  but  they  all  continue  to  molt 
in  spring.  A  spring  bird,  which  I  take  to  be  of  the  second  or 
third  year,  has  the  black  on  the  breast  uniform,  not  broken  up 
by  white  edgings  to  the  feathers. 

Dendroica  maculosa  (Gmel.).     Magnolia  Warbler. 

Plumages  and  molts  as  in  the  last.  Adults  in  winter  difler  from 
birds  of  the  year  in  the  heavy  stripes  on  the  sides  of  the  bodv,  and 
large  black  centers  to  feathers  of  the  back.  Spring  birds  of  the 
second  or  third  year  have  the  interscapulum  solid  black,  all  the  way 
to  the  yellow  rump. 
Dendroica  pensylvanica  (Linn.).     Chestnat-sided  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  fii-st  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

Spring  molt  rather  more  extensive  than  in  the  last  two  species, 
and  the  adult  in  fall  always  more  distinct  from  the  nuptial  plumage, 
only  difiering  from  the  bird  of  the  year  in  the  chestnut  stripes  on 
the  sides.     The  tertials  are  not  renewed  in  spring. 

Dendroica  caernlea  (Wils.).     Cerulean  Warbler. 

According  to  the  British  Museum  Catalogue,  the  winter  adult  is 
practically  like  the  spring  bird,  so  that  the  plumages  will  be  as  in 
D.  ccemle^eens. 

Dendroica  castanea  (Wils.).     Bay-breasted  Warbler. 

Exactly  like  D.  pensylvanica  in  number  and  relations  of  plum- 
age. 

Dendroica  striata  (Forst.),     Black-poU  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  nuptial,  first  winter,  adult  winter,  adult 
nuptial. 

This  species,  unlike  the  preceding,  renews  the  tertials  in  spring. 
^^  hat  I  take  to  be  the  first  nuptial  plumage  shows  remains  of  the 
olive   winter  dress  on  the  crown  and  sides   of  the  neck.     Adults 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  161 

in  fall  are  much  whiter  beneath  than  the  young  and  have  heavier 
streaks  above.      Females  remain  in  a  plumage  like  that  of  winter. 
I  am  uncertain  as  to  the  extent  of  molt  in  spring. 
Dendroica  blackburniae  (Gmel.).     Blaekburnian  AVarbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

Some  individuals  molt  the  tertials  in  spring,  others  do  not.   Adults 
differ  from  young  in    winter,  in  the  brighter  yellow  throat  and 
breast. 
Dendroica  virens  (Gmel.).    Black-tbroated  Green  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

After  the  first  season,  the  spring  molt  is  much  less  extensive  than 
in  the' species  just  preceding  and  in  some  individuals  there  seems  to 
be  little  or  no  molt.  Adults  in  fall  have  the  black  throat  as  in 
spring,  but  all  the  feathers  are  edged  with  white,  which  is  afterwards 
lost  by  abrasion. 
Dendroica  vigorsii  (And.).     Pine  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

After  the  first  year  there  is  little  or  no  spring  molt.     Winter 
adults  are  nearly  like  summer  examples. 
Dendroica  palmarum  hypochrysea  Pvidgw.    Yellow  Palm  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

The  spring  molt  is  restricted  to  the  breast  and  crown,  and  the 
back  shows  much  abrasion. 

Dendroica  discolor  (Vieill.).     I'rairie  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

The  adult  birds  in  autumn  are  practically  like  spring  specimens 
but  have  the  black  stripes  on  the  breast  obscured  by  yellow  edgings. 
Birds  in  their  first  winter  plumage  lack  the  chestnut  on  the  back 
and  have  but  few  black  streaks  below.  The  tertials  are  not  renewed 
in  spring. 
Seiurus  aurocapillus  (Linn.).     Orenbird. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

Spring  birds  are  practically  indistinguishable  from  autumn  exam- 
ples and  there  is  probably  a  pretty  extensive  spring  molt.  June  and 
July  specimens  show  much  abrasion  compared  with  those  taken 
in  April. 

Seiurus  noveboracensis  (Gmel.).     Water  Thrush. 
Seiuras  motacilla  (Vieill.).     Louisiana  Water  Thrush. 

The  above  remarks  apply  equally  well  to  these  species  but  with- 


162  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

out  a  series  of  winter  specimens  it  is  impossible  to  ascertain  the 
extent  of  spring  molt  in  any  Seiurus. 

Geothlypis  trichas  (Linn.).     Maryland  Yellow-throat. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 

The  spring  molt  seems  confined  to  the  breast,  throat  and  sides  of 
the  head.  Adults  in  winter  have  the  hood  much  obscured  by  lighter 
edgings,  while  young  have  it  reduced  to  a  patch  on  the  ear  coverts 
and  sides  of  neck. 

Female. — Sometimes  has  no  spring  molt  whatever. 
Geothlypis  Philadelphia  (Wils.).     Mourning  Warbler. 

Plumages  and  molts  apparently  as  in  the  preceding  species. 
Geothlypis  agilis  (Wils.).    Connecticut  Warbler. 

Plumages  and  molts  as  in  G.  trichas.  The  spring  molt  is  mainly 
restricted  to  the  throat.  Adults  in  spring  and  autumn  are  practic- 
ally indistinguishable  below,  but  the  former  show  abrasion  above. 
Young  in  the  first  winter  have  the  throat  and  breast  brownish  in- 
stead of  gray. 

Geothlypis  formosa  (Wils.).     Kentucky  Warbler. 

Plumages  and  molts  as  in  G.  trichas.  I  have  no  specimens  of  the 
young  in  their  first  winter  and  cannot  say  whether  the  black  mask 
is  complete  then  or  not. 

Icteria  virens  (Linn.).     Yellow-breasted  Chat. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  is  scarcely  any  difference  in  spring  and  autumn  specimens, 
except  that  the  former  show  abrasion  above.  The  spring  molt  ia 
probably  restricted  to  the  under  surface. 

Sylvania  mitrata  (Gmel.).     Hooded  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

jNIr.  Wm.  Palmer,^^  has  shown  that  the  male  of  this  species  acquires 
the  full  black  hood  the  first  year,  and  that  the  female  varies  in  suc- 
ceeding molts  in  the  amount  of  black,  finally  attaining  the  full  hood 
also. 

Sylvania  pusilla  (Wils.).     Wilson's  Warbler. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  nuptial,  adult  winter. 
Spring  and  fall  adults  are  practically  alike,  and  there  is  evidently 
a  spring  molt.      Young  of  the  year  lack  the  black  cap.     Females 


23 


Auk,  1894,  p,  237. 


1896.]  NATUKAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  163 

have  more  or  less  black  on  the  head  and  perhaps  sometimes  attain 
the  full  plumage  of  the  male,  as  in  the  last  species. 
Sylvania  canadensis  (Linn.).     Canadian  Warbler. 

Plumages  and  molts  as  in  the  last.  The  adult  in  autumn  is 
exactly  like  the  spring  bird. 

Setophaga  ruticilla  (Linn.).     American  Redstart. 

Plumages,  first,  first  winter,  first  nuptial,  adult  winter,  adult  nup- 
tial. 

Spring  molt  is  mainly  restricted  to  the  under  surface  in  the  first  sea- 
son at  least  and  probably  afterward.  Young  in  their  first  nuptialdress 
differ  from  that  of  the  first  winter  only  in  the  acquisition  of  a  few 
scattered  black  feathers ;  new  tertials  are  sometimes  acquired  in 
spring  also.  Some  winter  adults  have  gray  edgings  to  the  black 
feathers,  others  are  indistinguishable  from  spring  birds. 

Family  MOTACILLID^. 
Anthus  pensilvanicus  (Lath.).    Tit  Lark. 

PlumageSj  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  is  considerable  molt  of  the  body  plumage  in  spring.  Spec- 
imens taken  in  January  and  February  are  much  abraded  and 
resemble  June  birds. 

Family  TROG-LODYTIDiE. 
Mimus  polyglottos  (Linn.).     Mocking-bird. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

There  appears  to  be  no  spring  molt,  at  least  no  specimens  show 
traces  of  it.      April  birds  show  much  abrasion,  especially  on  the 
plumage  of  the  back,  and  the  buff"  tints  of  winter  disappear  entirely 
from  the  lower  surface. 
Galeoscoptes  carolinensis  (Linn.).    Catbird. 

Plumages  and  molt  apparently  as  in  the  last.  Some  spring  birds 
have  the  plumage  quite  fresh,  but  abrasion  produces  very  little  effect 
in  this  species,  as  shown  by  a  comparison  of  spring  and  midsummer 
examples,  so  that  I  do  not  consider  this  as  indicating  a  spring  molt. 
Furthermore,  none  of  the  winter  specimens  examined  show  any 
indications  of  molt. 
Harporliynclius  rufus  (Linn.).     Brown  Thrasher. 

Plumages  and  molt  as  in  Mimus.  Spring  birds  are  somewhat 
abraded,  especially  on  the  head,  while  the  spots  on  the  breast  appear 
"  clipped  "  at  the  tip  and  somewhat  bifurcate.      Some  fall  birds  are 


164  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

rather  pruinose  on  the  head  and  back.  One  of  these  specimens  in 
the  molt  is  proved  to  be  an  old  bird,  while  other  undoubted  old 
birds  have  the  more  tawny  plumage,  so  that  I  am  not  sure  whether 
this  slightly  different  coloration  represents  a  bird  of  any  particular 
age  or  is  merely  an  individual  variation. 

Thryothorus  ludovicianus  (Lath.).     Carolina  Wren. 

The  molts  and  plumages  of  this  bird  are  exactly  parallel  to  those 
oi  Harporhynclms  rnfxis  aud,  so  far  as  I  can  ascertain,  there  is  no 
spring  molt.  The  feathers  of  the  crown  are  much  abraded  in  all 
spring  birds,  and  in  late  summer  the  abrasion  of  the  entire  plumage 
is  extreme. 

Troglodytes  aedon  Vieill.    House  Wren. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  is  no  spring  molt  in  the  House  Wren  and  the  contrast  be- 
tween spring  and  fall  specimens,  caused  by  abrasion,  is  striking. 

Troglodytes  hiemalis  Yieill.     Winter  AVren. 

Plumages  and  molt  exactly  as  in  the  House  Wren. 
Cistothorus  stellaris  (Licht.).    Short-billed  Marsh  Wren. 

Plumages,  first,  Avinter,  nuptial. 

There  is  a  complete  spring  molt  of  the  body  feathers  in  this 
bird  as  shown  in  a  series  taken  at  Tarpon  Springs,  Fla.,  April  15th. 
They  become  very  much  abraded  by  July. 

Cistothorus  palustris  (Wils.).     Long-billed  Marsh  Wren. 

Molts  as  in  the  preceding.* 

Family  PARID^. 

Sitta  carolinensis  Lath.     White-breasted  Nuthatch. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

There  is  no  spring  molt,  and,  excepting  on  the  flight  feathers, 
abrasion  is  not  very  apparent  until  after  the  breeding  season. 

Sitta  canadensis  Linn.     Red-bellied  Nuthatch. 
Molt  as  in  the  preceding. 

Parus  bicolor  Linn.     Tufted  Titmouse. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

No  spring  molt,  and  but  little  eflfect  produced  by  abrasion. 

Parus  atricapillus  Linn.     Black-capped  Chickadee. 
Parus  carolinensis  Aud.     Carolina  Chickadee. 

Molt  as  in  the  preceding,  all  plumages  very  similar  to  each  other. 
*  Cerihia  apparently  molts  exactly  as  in  Troglodytes  aedon. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  165 

.Family  SYLVIIDJE. 

Begulus  satrapa  Licht.     Golden-crowned  Kinglet. 

Plumages,  first,  wiuter,  nuptial. 
No  spring  molt. 

Begulus  calendula  (Linn.).     Ruby-crowned  Kinglet. 

Plumages  and  molt  as  in  the  last.  Mr.  C.  W.  Beckham-*  states 
that  the  young  male  generally  acquires  the  red  crown  patch  when 
the  first  plumage  is  molted  but  not  always,  and  that  the  female  never 
acquires  it.  Several  variations  in  the  color  of  the  red  patch  have 
also  been  described. 

Polioptila  cserulea  (Linn.).     Blue-gray  Qnatcatcher. 

Plumages,  first,  Avinter,  nuptial. 

While  none  of  the  February  or  April  specimens  show  signs  of 
molt,  I  think  that  some  individuals  have  a  partial  molt  in  spring 
and  I  have  examined  a  specimen  of  P.  albiveiitris  Lawr.,  showing 
the  spring  molt  in  progress  (March  19th.). 

Family  TURDIDiE. 

Turdus  mustelinus  Gmel.     Wood  Thrush. 

Plumages,  first,  winter,  nuptial. 

Although  I  have  no  winter  or  early  spring  specimens  of  the  Wood 
Thrush,  I  consider  that  there  is  only  a  slight  spring  molt  if  any. 

Turdus  aliciae  Baird.     Gray-cheeked  Thrush. 

Turdus  ustulatus  swainsonii  (Cab.).     Olive-backed  Thrush. 

The  above  remarks  apply  equally  to  these  species. 
Turdus  aonalaschkae  pallasii  (Cab.).     Hermit  Thrush. 

I  have  examined  a  large  series  of  Hermit  Thrushes,  including 
winter  specimens,  and  can  find  no  traces  of  a  spring  molt.  The 
abrasion  is  more  marked  than  in  the  last  two  species. 

Turdus  fusoescens  Steph.     Wilson's  Thrush. 

Plumages  and  molt  as  in  the  preceding. 

Merula  migratoria  (Linn.).     Robin. 
Sialia  sialis  (Linn.).     Bluebird. 

Plumages,  first,  winter  and  nuptial. 

No  spring  molt  occurs,  but  some  abrasion  is  seen  in  spring  birds. 

2*Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1885,  p.  625. 


166  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 

Plate  IV. 

Fig.  1.  Wing  of  Merula  migratoria  with  molt  started  ;  shaded  parts 
represent  the  new  feathers.  Quill  No.  6  has  been  shed  but 
the  new  feather  has  not  yet  appeared. 

Fig.  2.  Wing  of  Tachycineta  bicolor ;  molt  of  primaries  well  ad- 
vanced. 

Fig.  3.  Wing  of  Chcetura  pelagica,  with  molt  of  primaries  well  ad- 
vanced. 

Fig.  4.  Tail  of  Tachycineta  bicolor,  with  molt  of  rectrices  half  com- 
pleted. 

Fig.  5.  Breast  feather  of  Antrostomus  vocifertis,  first  plumage,  bear- 
ing a  down  feather  at  its  tip  (much  enlarged). 

Fig.  6.  Tip  of  breast  feather  in  sheath  of  Sturnella  magna,  winter 
plumage ;  forcing  out  a  first  plumage  feather  on  its  tip  (en- 
larged). 

Fig.  7.  Feather  from  breast  of  DoUchonyx  oryzivorus  Ad.  $  show- 
ing light  border  which  is  lost  by  abrasion. 

Fig.  8.  Terminal  part  of  tertial  of  Sturnella  magna,  winter  plumage. 

Fig.  9.  Same  in  late  summer,  showing  loss  of  entire  terminal  por- 
tion even  with  the  tips  of  the  secondaries  ;  also  loss  by 
abrasion  of  all  the  light  border  and  spots,  including  the 
entire  terminal  part  of  the  barbs,  from  where  the  light  color 
beo^ins  to  their  extremities. 


■^o 


Plate  V. 

Fig.  1.  Tail  of  Dryobates  pubescens  showing  the  beginning  of  the 

molt.     The  third  quill  has  just  been  shed  and  the  tip  of  the 

new  one  has  not  yet  appeared. 
Fig.  2.  Tail  of  Galeoscoptes  carolinensis  showing  the  molt  under  way. 
Fig.  3.   Wing  of  Ceryle  alcyon  showing  the  beginning  of  the  molt 

with  the  fourth  primary,  instead  of  the   innermost   as    is 

usually  the  case. 
Fig.  4.  Wing  o^  Plectrophenax  nivalis  with  molt  of  primaries  and 

tertials  in  progress. 
Fig.  5.  AVing  of  Dendroica  cestiva  showing  molt  of  primaries  and 

tertials  almost    complete,    while  the  secondaries  are  about 

half  grown.     Dotted  line  represents  the  position  of  feathers 

when  the  growth  is  completed. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  167 

Fig.  6.  Feather  from  breast  of  Habia  ludoviciana  showing  the  un- 
worn projecting  black  tip.  Dotted  line  indicates  the 
original  size  of  feather,  the  edge  having  been  lost  by  abrasion 
(enlarged). 

Fig.  7.  Terminal  portion  of  tertial  of  Habia  ludoviciana  in  winter 
plumage  showing  white  border  spot. 

Fig.  8.  Same  from  spi'ing  specimen  with  white  portion  lost  by 
abrasion. 


168  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


February  4. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair, 

Twenty-one  persons  present. 

The  deaths  of  the  following  members  were  announced : — Peter  F. 
Rothermel,  August  15,  1895;  Henry  Hazlehurst,  January  11, 1896; 
Jesse  S.  Walton,  January  30,  1896;  H.  Ernest  Goodman,  M.  D., 
February  3,  1896. 


February  11. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-nine  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Charles  Wachsniith,  a  correspondent,  February  7, 
1896,  was  announced. 

A  paper  entitled  "  A  Note  on  a  Uniform  Plan  of  Describing  the 
Human  Skull,"  by  Harrison  Allen,  M.  D.,  was  presented  for  pub- 
lication. 


February  18. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair 

Thirty-six  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "Contributions  to  the  Life  History  of  Plants, 
No.  XII,"  by  Thomas  Meehan,  was  presented  for  publication  and 
referred  to  the  Publication  Committee. 


February  25. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Forty-five  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Owen  Jones  Wister,  M.  D.,  February  24,  1896, 
was  announced. 

Papers  entitled  as  follows  were  presented  for  publication: — 

"  The  Coloring  Matter  of  the  Aril  of  Celastrus  Scandens,"  by 
Ida  A.  Kellar. 

"The  Crystallization  of  Molybdenite,"  by  Amos  P.  Brown. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  169 

The  following  were  elected  members: — Homer  E.  Hoopes,  A. 
Feldpauch,  Vickers  Oberholtzer,  J.  Edward  Farnum,  George  L. 
Farnum,  H.  W.  Wenzel,  Morris  Earle  and  Arthur  N.  Leeds. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


12 


170  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


NOTE  ON  A  UNIFORM  PLAN  OF   DESCRIBING  THE  HUMAN  SKULL. 
By  Harrison  Allen,  M.  D. 

In  a  recent  study  of  the  human  skull  I  attempted  to  frame  a 
method  of  uniform  description  which  answers  a  useful  purpose.  As- 
suming that  the  skull  presents  a  norma  frontalis,  a  norma  basilaris, 
a  norma  lateralis  and  a  norma  verticalis,  the  followiDg  order  of  pro- 
cedure is  recommended.  Beginning  at  the  norma  frontalis  and 
proceeding  from  above  downward  I  note  the  following  : 

The  degree  of  prominence  of  the  glabella  and  supraorbital  ridges, 
by  defining  an  arc  between  nasion  and  ophryon,  by  a  piece  of  flexible 
wire,  drawing  a  chord  for  the  arc  and  measuring  the  versed  sine. 
(In  a  given  case  it  would  read  as  follows — g.  and  s.  o.  r.=5  mm.;. 
Next  the  degree  of  deflection  of  the  supraorbital  margin  is  recorded 
on  a  protractor.     (In  a  given  case  s.  o.  m.^40°). 

The  nasal  bones  yield  three  portions: — i\\Q  frontal  portion  whicH 
is  bounded  above  by  the  frontal  bone;  the  maxillary  portion,  which 
lies  between  the  frontal  bone  and  premaxilla  ;  the  jireviaxillary  por- 
tion which  lies  in  contact  with  the  premaxilla.  The  frontal  portion 
is  measured  from  the  union  of  the  nasal  bone  and  the  ascending  pro- 
cess of  the  maxilla  to  the  proximal  free  end  of  the  lateral  margin  of 
the  nasal  bone.  The  maxillary  portion  constitutes  the  greater  part 
of  the  bone  and  lies  entirely  in  contact  with  the  ascending  process 
of  the  maxilla.  The  premaxillary  portion  is  the  least  well  defined 
and  lies  on  the  lateral  margin  of  the  bone  a  few  millimeters  above 
the  free  distal  margin  of  the  bone.  The  suture  between  the  pre- 
maxilla and  maxilla  is  never  found  after  an  early  stage  of  develop- 
ment ;  notwithstanding  this,  the  manner  in  which  the  premaxilla 
and  the  nasal  bones  unite  in  the  apes,  taken  together  with  the  ranges 
of  variation  in  this  same  line,  as  noted  in  the  human  subject,  give 
the  observer  an  accurate  imj)ression  of  the  extent  of  naso-premaxil- 
lary  junction.  The  texture  of  the  naso-premaxillary  suture  is  dis- 
tinctive. The  nasal  bone  is  further  divided  into  two  parts,  that 
which  lies  in  contact  with  the  frontal  bone  and  the  ethmoid  bone 
and  is  outside  of  the  nasal  chamber,  and  that  which  lies  below  the 
one  last  named  and  is  entirely  within  the  nasal  chamber ;  the  first 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  171 

part  will  receive  the  name  of  radix  and  the  last  part  the  name  of 
salient.  The  degrees  of  angulation  of  both  radix  and  salient  being 
measured  on  a  protractor  we  have  in  a  given  ease  the  following  for- 
mulae: n.  f.  4  mm,;  n.  mx.  10  mm.;  n.  pr.  2  mm.;  r.  7  mm.,  90°; 
s.  10  mm.,  40°. 

The  next  region  in  order  is  the  vestibule  of  the  nasal  chamber, 
which  is  accepted  as  the  nasal  aspect  of  the  premaxilla  as  seen  at 
the  floor  of  the  nose.  When  the  parts  of  this  region  are  as  in 
the  child,  it  is  called  pcedomorphic,  but  when  the  psedomorphic 
features  have  not  been  retained  the  departures  from  this  type  are 
defined  as  follows :  The  height  and  elevation  of  the  vestibule  just  in 
advance  of  the  incisive  foramina  receives  the  name  of  incisive  emi- 
nence; the  degree  of  definition  of  the  line  extending  from  the  sides 
of  the  anterior  nasal  aperture  to  the  anterior  spine  receives  the  name 
of  the  alveolar  line,  since  it  defines  the  alveolus  proximally;  the 
alveolus  measured  from  the  alveolar  line  to  the  alveolar  point  of 
Broca  (a.=15  mm.).  The  nasal  vestibule  may  be  in  addition 
macrolophic,  microlophic  or  analophic,  depending  upon  the  degree 
of  development  of  the  incisor  crest.  This  is  held  to  be  a  better  clas- 
sification of  the  parts  than  that  present^  by  writers.  The  most 
primitive  type  is  the  analophic ;  the  most  frequent  in  modern  culti- 
vated races  is  the  macrolophic.  The  North  American  Indian  tends 
to  be  microlophic  and  passes  from  this  infrequently  to  the  analophic. 
He  is  rarely  macrolophic. 

Turning  to  the  norma  basilaris  and  describing  from  before  back- 
ward, the  hard  palate  is  described  in  the  terms  of  Broca  hyperbolic, 
parabolic,  or  U-shaped.  The  choanre  are  either  psedomorj^hic  or 
broader  at  base  than  at  apex  ;  the  diameter  is  to  be  taken  (ch. 
psedom.  diam.  22  mm.).  The  pyramidal  process  of  the  palatal  bone 
measures  in  length  in  a  given  case  12  mm.  (pyr.  pr.=12  mm.). 

The  spinous  process  of  the  sphenoid  bone,  whether  it  separates 
from  or  unites  with  the  tympanic  bone,  is  to  be  noted  ;  if  united  with 
this,  whether  the  line  of  union  is  posterior  to  that  of  the  Gasserian 
fissure.     In  a  given  case  (sp.  pr.  not  in  contact  with  tym.). 

The  foramen  lacerum  medium  whether  open  or  closed  is  to  be  ob- 
served. In  a  given  case  (f.  1.  m.  open).  The  petrosal  part  of  the 
tympanic  bone  whether  narrowed  or  broad,  by  being  inflated  on  the 
median  aspect.     In  a  given  case  (p.  inflated). 

Passing  now  to  the  norma  lateralis,  it  is  noted  that  the  temporal 
ridge  is  found  interrupted    at   the   stephanion  ;    in    a   given  case 


172  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

(S-interruption=10  mm.)  and  that  the  temporal  ridge  is  divided  into 
two  parts,  the  fronto-temporal  ridge  and  the  parietal-temporal  ridge 
In  a  given  case  (fr.  t.  r.  spinose:  pt.  r.  nil.).  The  parieto-temporal 
ridge  as  it  reaches  the  lambdoidal  suture  begins  to  be  slightly 
raised  above  the  plane  of  the  parietal  bone  and  is  joined  to  the 
occipital  bone  near  the  asterion  by  a  harmonic  suture ;  or,  as  it 
reaches  the  lambdoidal  suture  it  has  no  influence  in  changing  the 
serrated  character  of  this  line  which  extends  to  the  asterion  in  the 
manner  described  by  writers.  In  a  given  case  we  have  (p.  t.  r.  har- 
monic near  A.,  3  mm.).  The  posterior  margin  of  the  frontal  pro- 
cess of  the  malar  bone  may  be  produced  in  a  conspicuous  process, 
(the  marginal  process)  or  it  may  be  absent.  In  a  given  case(marg. 
pr.  trenchant.=5  mm.  high).  If  desirable  the  height  of  theprocess 
could  be  measured  by  a  line  drawn  across  its  base.  The  interrup- 
tion of  the  temporal  ridge  at  the  stephanion,  the  harmonic  char- 
acter of  the  lambdoidal  suture  near  the  asterion,  and  the  large  size 
of  the  marginal  process  correlate  with  the  size  of  the  temporal 
muscle. 

The  line  of  the  parieto-squamosal  suture  at  its  junction  with  the  por- 
tioji  of  the  temporal  bone  back  of  the  squamosa  may  be  marked  by 
a  mortise,  which  answers  to  the  summit  of  the  petrosa  as  it  joins  the 
side  of  the  skull ;  thus  we  have  (m.=:3  mm.). 

The  term  "  sconce  "  is  used  to  express  in  a  general  sense  the  region 
on  the  norma  verticalis  which  lies  between  the  parieto-temporal 
ridges.  This  diameter  at  its  narrowest  part  is  recorded,  in  a  given 
instance  as  (sc.  110  ram.). 

The  lower  jaw  yields  at  the  condyloid  process,  two  facets,  the 
lateral,  which  articulates  with  the  zygoma,  and  the  median  which 
articulates  with  the  squamosa  beneath  the  brain-case.  The  median 
facet  is  more  variable  than  the  lateral  and  may  be  horizontal  and 
inclined  upward,  or  horizontal,  inclined  downward.  In  a  given  case 
(condyl.  pr.  med.  fac.  horizontal).  The  coronoid  process  may  pro- 
ject at  base  so  far  forward  as  to  conceal  in  whole  or  in  part  the 
third  molar  when  the  parts  are  seen  in  norma  lateralis,  or  it  may  lie 
so  far  back  as  to  permit  the  third  molar  to  be  seen.  In  a  given  case 
(or.  pr.  concealing  3  mm.).  The  mental  foramen  may  be  on  a  line  with 
the  first  molar,  in  the  interval  between  premolar  and  first  molar,  on 
the  line  of  the  second  premolar,  or  on  a  line  between  the  first  and  sec- 
ond premolar.  In  a  given  case  (m.  f  on  line  of  3  m.).  The  mas- 
seteric impression  ends  on  a  line  answering  to  the  angle  of  the  jaw  or 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  173 

stops  at  a  distance  proximal  to  it ;  the  area  between  those  two  lines 
constitutes  the  lemurme  process.  In  a  given  instance  (Im.  pr.=3 
mm.  wide).  The  genial  spine  may  be  single  or  double.  The  genial 
crest  trenchant,  rudi mental,  or  absent.  In  a  given  case  (g.  s.  double : 
g.  c.  nil.). 

In  reviewing  the  characters  which  have  been  thus  employed  the 
glabella  and  supra-orbital  ridge  (g.  and  s.  o.  r.)  almost  universally 
constitute  male  characters  of  low  grade.  We  expect  in  primitive 
man,  this  character  to  be  better  developed  than  in  more  recent  man 
and  be  more  apt  to  enter  into  composition  of  the  supra-orbital  margin 
(s.  0.  m.).  No  doubt  is  felt  in  accepting  these  important  features  in 
the  descriptions  of  skulls.  The  degree  of  declination  of  s.  o.  r.  is  of 
importance  in  distinguishing  long,  slender  from  broad,  flat  faces; 
indeed,  it  stands  as  a  sign  of  character  of  face.  Analysis  of  the  nasal 
region  needs  no  defence  since  craniologists  are  of  one  mind,  that  on 
the  whole  the  best  characters  separating  crania  are  to  be  found  in 
this  region  ;  hence,  the  care  taken  to  define  the  relations  of  the  naso- 
frontal, the  maxillary  and  the  premaxillary  portions.  For  the  terms 
radix  and  salient  I  am  alone  responsible.  The  value  of  the  vestibule 
would  appear  also  to  admit  of  no  argument.  The  distinction  be- 
tween ptedomorphic  and  other  forms  in  the  writer's  judgment  is  the 
best  means  of  separating  the  types  of  the  anterior  nasal  apertures 
from  one  another. 

The  value  of  the  alveolus  and  the  shape  of  the  hard  palate  as 
defined  by  Broca  needs  no  comment  at  this  place.  The  length  of 
the  pyramidal  process  has  been  neglected  by  writers.  I  find  it  of 
value  in  the  comparative  anatomy  of  race.  The  shape  of  the  choanse 
having  been  defined  I  recognize  two  types,  one  of  which  is  psedomor- 
phic  and  is  oval  and  the  other  in  which  the  base  is  wider  than  the 
apex.  The  group  last  named  may  be  subdivided  by  the  rectangular 
form  in  which  the  basal  and  the  lateral  contour  unite  to  form  a  right 
angle;  and  the  produced  in  which  the  basal  contour  is  extended 
downward  and  outward  beyond  the  line  of  the  lateral  contour.  The 
study  of  the  choanse  is  of  importance  ;  the  limitations  have  not  been 
satisfactorily  determined.  The  degrees  of  development  of  the  spin- 
ous process  of  the  sphenoid  bone  have  likewise  been  neglected.  It 
overlaps  the  line  of  the  Gasseriau  and  the  sphenoido-tympanic  fis- 
sures forward  to  a  remarkable  extent  and,  for  the  mosl  part  sex 
can  be  distinguished,  the  process  being  large  and  prominent  in 
males,  and  rudimental  or  absent  in  females. 


174  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  divisions  of  the  temporal  ridge  ioto  two  parts,  the  fronto- 
temporal  and  the  parieto-temporal  and  an  interruption  between  the 
two  is  one  of  the  best  characters  by  which  sex  can  be  distinguished ; 
the  same  is  true  of  the  conversion  of  the  asterionic  portion  of  the 
lambdoidal  suture  from  a  serrated  to  a  harmonic  tyj^e. 

The  value  of  the  marginal  process  of  the  malar  bone  in  distin- 
guishing sex  is  conceded.  The  mortise  in  the  squamoso-parietal 
suture  and  the  division  of  the  condyloid  process  into  two  facets  are 
of  secondary  value. 

The  degree  of  concealment  of  the  third  molar  has  been  over- 
looked, considering  the  significance  that  this  relation  possesses  in 
studies  of  the  horizontal  ramus.  It  is  evident  that  the  degree  of  con- 
cealment of  the  third  molar  is  in  direct  ratio  to  the  reduction  of  size 
of  the  dentigerous  portion  of  the  bone  and  (all  things  being  equal) 
is  an  evidence  of  the  departure  from  the  primitive  type.  The  phylo- 
genetic  value  of  the  so-called  lemurine  process  of  Albrecht  needs  to 
be  defined.  I  have  noted  this  process  in  the  gibbon.  The  position 
of  the  mental  foramen  with  respect  to  the  sockets  of  the  premolars 
and  the  first  molar  teeth  is  a  character  in  osteology  not  to  be  gain- 
said. In  view  of  the  results  of  Topinard  in  studying  the  region  of 
the  mental  symphysis  in  primitive  man  it  is  necessary  to  describe 
accurately  all  structural  variation  at  this  place,  hence  peculiarities 
in  the  shapes  of  the  genial  spine  and  the  genial  crest  are  given. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILA"DELPHIA.  175 


CONTRIBUTIONS  TO  THE  ZOOLOGY  OF  TENNESSEE. 
No.  3,  MAMMALS. 

BY  SAMUEL  N.  RHOADS. 

In  the  following  annotated  list  of  the  mammalia  of  Tennessee  I 
have  pursued  the  same  plan  of  treatment  as  in  the  paper  preceding 
this^  on  the  avifouna  of  the  same  region.  The  list  comprehends  all 
the  species  known  to  belong  to  the  Tennessee  fauna,  including  not 
only  the  feral  mammals  now  existing  in  the  State  but  those  which 
have  been  exterminated  since  the  advent  of  the  white  man.  An 
itinerary  of  the  trip  made  during  the  months  of  May  and  June, 
1895,  when  I  secured  the  collection  and  field  notes  forming  the  basis 
of  this  paper,  will  be  found  on  pages  376  to  381  of  the  Proceedings 
of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  for  1895,  and 
on  the  two  following  pages  there  is  a  brief  resume  of  the  zoo-geography 
of  Tennessee  which  may  be  of  use  to  the  more  critical  reader  in  this 
connection. 

References  to  the  mammals  of  Tennessee  in  scientific  literature 
are  so  rare  and,  so  far  as  I  am  able  to  search,  are  generally  of  so  lit- 
tle value,  that  it  would  be  useless  to  attempt  to  tabulate  them  in 
this  paper.  In  popular  literature  the  hunting  stories  of  David 
Crockett  form,  perhaps,  the  most  voluminous  and  reliable  (?)  source 
of  earlier  information  on  this  topic,  and  these  have  been  supple- 
mented in  later  times  by  occasional  papers  and  notes  published  in 
Forest  and  Stream.  The  historic  literature  of  Tennessee,  so  far  as 
I  have  read  it,  adds  but  little  to  the  information  which  may  be 
gleaned  from  literature  devoted  to  the  exploits  of  the  aforementioned 
Crockett.*  When  taken  from  other  sources  the  authority  will  be 
given. 

Much  of  whatever  value  may  attach  to  this  contribution  to  our 
hitherto  meagre  knowledge  of  the  mammals  of  Tennessee,  especially 
the  following  notes  on  the  habits  of  certain  species,  is  due  to  the 
close  observations  and  generous  assistance  of  my  friend  Mr.  B.  C. 
Miles,  of  Brownsville,  Tennessee,  of  whose  labors  in  the  ornithology 
of  the  same  region  I  have  already  spoken  in  a  previous  paper. 

iProc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  1895,  pp.  463-501. 

^  With  the  exception  of  references  to  the  buffalo,  nearly  all  of  which  date 
from  Haywood's  Civil  and  Political  History  of  Tennessee. 


176  PROCEEblNGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Other  aid  in  the  preparation  of  this  paper  will  be  duly  acknowl- 
edged in  its  proper  place.  The  order  of  families  and  genera  here 
adopted  is  largely  based  on  the  classification  of  Flower  and  Lyddeker 
in  their  recent  work  on  the  mammalia. 

Order  MARSUPIALIA. 

Family  DIDELPH'SID^. 

Genus  DIDELPHIS  Linnaeus. 

1.  Didelphis  marsupialis  virginiana  (Kerr).     Virginia  Opossum. 

I  did  not  see  this  species,  but  it  is  accounted  common  all  over  the 
State  below  elevations  of  2,000  feet.  Mr.  Miles  says  the  negroes  of 
Haywood  and  Lauderdale  Counties  claim  two  species,  one  with 
black,  the  other  with  white  feet,  but  he  thinks  them  identical. 
There  is  probably  a  tendency  in  the  opossums  of  southwestern 
Tennessee  to  the  Texan  form,  D.  m.  californica. 

Order  UNO  UL  AT  A. 
ramily  BOVIDJE. 
Genus  BISON  H.  Smith. 

2.  Bison  bison  (L.).     American  Bison,  Buflalo. 

In  his  Monograph  of  The  American  Bisons^  Dr.  J.  A.  Allen 
presents  us  with  nearly  all  that  is  obtainable  in  literature  regarding 
the  history  of  this  animal  in  Tennessee.  From  these  sources  we 
know  that  they  formerly  passed  over  the  Cumberland  and  Great 
Smoky  mountain  ranges  by  Avay  of  the  Holston  and  French  Broad 
Rivers,  to  and  from  the  Valley  of  East  Tennessee. 

The  number  and  frequency  of  these  migrations,  however,  were 
not  great,  by  far  the  larger  number  of  buffalo  being  confined*  to 
the  Cumberland  Valley  and  its  tributaries  in  Middle  Tennessee  and 
no  mention  being  made  of  their  occurrence  in  Western  Tennessee. 

The  point  of  greatest  abundance  was  undoubtedly  in  the  "  blue- 
grass  region  "  of  the  vicinity  of  Nashville,  especially  about  the  salt 
and  sulphur  springs  of  Mansker's  Creek,  Madison's  Lick,  Lickton, 
etc.,  in  Davidson  County.  Buffalo  River  is  the  most  southwestern 
locality  which  appears  to  have  been  the  haunt  of  this  animal,  and  our 
authority  for  this  rests  solely  on  the  traditional  name.  The  same 
remarks  apply  to  towns  named  Buffalo  in  Humphreys  and  Law- 
rence Counties,  and  seem  to  indicate  that  the  bison  ranged  to  a 

"Mem.Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  Cambridge,  Vol.  IV.,  No.  10,  pp.  92,102,112,  114. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  177 

greater  or  less  extent  along  the  southern  boundaries  of  the  State  in 
this  region.  On  the  west  Cumberland  plateau,  there  is  Buffalo 
Valley,  in  Putnam  County,  and  in  the  Smoky  Mountain  range,  a 
Bufflilo  Ridge  in  Washington  County,  and  a  place  called  Bison  on 
the  Pigeon  River  in  Cocke  County. 

At  the  period  of  its  earliest  settlement,  the  hills  and  coves  of  the 
Allegheny  Mountains  in  Tennessee,  were  in  many  places  covered 
with  large  tracts  of  native  grasses*  which  formed  the  pasture  lands 
of  herds  of  elk,  and  attracted,  in  summer,  the  bison  from  the  low- 
lands. 

The  pristine  condition  of  the  country  around  Nashville  may 
be  gathered  from  the  following  quotation  from  Ramsey's  Annals : 
"  When  the  first  settlers  came  to  the  BluflF  [site  of  Nashville,] 
in  1779-80,  Haywood  says  the  country  had  the  appearance  of 
one  which  had  never  before  been  cultivated.  There  was  no  sign  of 
any  cleared  land  nor  other  appearance  of  former  cultivation. 
Nothing  was  presented  to  the  eye  but  one  large  plain  of  woods  and 
cane,  frequented  by  buffalo,  elk,  deer,  wolves,  foxes  and  other 
animals  suited  to  the  climate.  The  lands  adjoining  the  French 
Lick  [at  Nashville]  which  Mansker  in  1769,  when  he  first  hunted 
there,  called  an  old  field,  was  a  large  open  space  frequented  and 
trodden  by  buffaloes,  whose  large  paths  led  to  it  from  all  parts  of 
the  country  and  there  concentred." 

Numerous  accounts  from  various  sources  indicate  that  the  cen- 
tral basin  of  Tennessee  and  the  blue-grass  region  of  Kentucky, 
connecting  therewith,  were  not  inhabited  by  Indians  when  first 
discovered,  but  formed  a  sort  of  traditional  game  preserve  and 
hunting  ground  upon  which  the  hostile  tribes  of  Chickasaws, 
Natchez,  Creeks,  Cherokees  and  Shawnees  assembled  at  certain  sea- 
sous,  to  hunt  the  buflTalo  and,  incidentally,  each  other.  In  Ramsey 
(p.  193),  we  read  that  in  the  summer  of  1777,  Capt.  De  Membrune 
living  at  Easton's  Station,  near  Nashville,  "  saw  no  Indians  *  *  ^ 
but  immense  numbers  of  buffaloes  and  other  game."  In  February 
of  the  same  year,  it  is  stated  that  the  same  party  "  in  their  excur- 
sions had  seen  no  Indians,  but  immense  herds  of  buffaloes.  One  of 
their  companions,  William  Bowen,  had  been  overran  by  a  gang  of 
these  animals  and  died  from  the  bruises  he  received." 

From  "  A  short  Description  of  the  State  of  Tennessee,"  a  booklet 
printed  for  Matthew  Carey  in  1796,  the  following  paragraph  may 

*  Kamsey,  Ann.  of  Tenn.,  1853,  p.  96. 


178  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

be  cited  as  showing  the  character  of  country,  which  formed  the 
favorite  buffalo  range  in  the  early  days  of  Tennessee  :  "  The  land 
on  the  Cumberland  and  Tennessee  Rivers  is  generally  well  timbered. 
In  some  places  there  are  glades  of  rich  land  without  timber,  but 
these  are  not  frequent  or  large  *  *  *  The  glades  are  covered 
with  wild  rye,  buffalo  grass  and  pea  vine.  =i=  *  *  The  under- 
growth in  many  places  is  cane  15  to  20  feet  high,  so  close  together 
as  to  exclude  all  other  plants." 

From  the  accounts  in  Haywood's  History,  we  can  gather  that 
the  buffaloes  were  not  migratory  in  that  latitude,  but  remained 
throughout  the  year.  In  1779  a  company  of  Watauga  adventurers 
planted  a  field  of  corn  on  the  present  site  of  Nashville.  "  After 
the  crop  was  made,  Overhall,  White  and  Swanson  were  left  to  keep 
the  buffaloes  out  of  the  unenclosed  fields  of  corn,  while  the  rest  of 
the  party  returned  for  their  families."  The  abundance  of  these 
animals  and  other  game  in  Middle  Tennessee  is  proved  by  the  fol- 
lowing from  Ramsey  (p.  450).  "Michael  Stoner  this  year  [1780], 
discovered  Stoner's  Lick  and  Stoner's  Creek.  The  woods  abounded 
in  game,  and  the  hunters  procured  a  full  supply  of  meat  for  the 
inhabitants  by  killing  bears,  buffalo  and  deer.  A  party  of  twenty 
men  went  up  the  Caney  Fork  as  high  as  Flinn's  Creek,  and 
returned  in  canoes  with  their  meat  during  the  winter.  In  their 
hunting  excursion  they  killed  105  bears,  75  buffaloes  and  more  than 
80  deer."  This  record  is  interesting,  as  it  accounts  for  the  naming 
of  Buffalo  Valley  in  the  west  end  of  Putnam  County,  and  proves 
the  former  abundance  of  these  animals  in  that   and  Smith  County. 

Regarding  the  presence  of  buffaloes  in  East  Tennessee  we  have 
fewer  and  less  definite  records.  Ramsey  tells  us,  (p.  69)  that  in 
1764,  "  Daniel  Boon,  who  still  lived  in  the  Yadkin  *  *  *  came 
again  this  year  [to  Tennessee  and  Kentucky]  to  explore  the  coun- 
try— Callaway  [his  hunting  companion]  was  at  the  side  of  Boon, 
when  approaching  the  spurs  of  the  Cumberland  Mountain  and  in 
view  of  the  vast  herds  of  buffalo  grazing  in  the  vallies  between 
them,  he  exclaimed,  '  I  am  richer  than  the  man  mentioned  in  script- 
ure, who  owned  the  cattle  on  a  thousand  hills — I  own  the  wild 
beasts  of  more  than  a  thousand  vallies.'  " 

In  other  places  we  read  that  the  route  taken  by  explorers  from 
North  Carolina  and  Virginia  to  the  Cumberland  River  valley  Avas 
by  way  of  Cumberland  Gap,  which  lies  on  the  boundary  between 
Claiborne  County,  Tennessee  and  Bell  County,  Kentucky.     There 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  179 

is  little  doubt  that  from  some  commanding  point  in  that  locality, 
Boon  made  these  observations,  and  that  they  related  to  both  the 
States  upon  whose  common  boundary  line  he  then  stood. 

While  at  Allardt  on  the  high  plateau  of  Fentress  County,  I  con- 
versed with  Mr.  Bruno  Gernt,  who  stated  that  he  had  heard  from 
old  residents  in  that  country  that  buffaloes  once  abounded  in  the 
Obey  River  valleys  of  Fentress  and  Overton  Counties.  Writing  to 
Mr.  Gernt  for  more  definite  information,  he  referred  me  to  other 
gentlemen  on  the  subject  who  have  failed  to  respond  to  my  letters. 
Mr.  Gernt  says,  however,  he  is  informed  that  an  old  resident,  now 
dead,  named  John  Young,  killed  the  last  buffalo  in  Fentress  County 
but  he  does  not  give  the  date  of  its  capture. 

In  West  Tennessee  the  buffalo  seems  to  have  been  unknown,  so 
far  at  least,  as  history,  tradition  or  remains  have  given  evidence. 
This  condition  of  affairs,  if  a  fact,  seems  unaccountable  from  a 
faunal  or  geographical  standpoint,  as  the  flora  of  much  of  this 
division  of  the  State  is  almost  precisely  like  that  of  the  east  bank 
of  the  Tennessee  River,  which  was  frequented  by  buffaloes.  That  the 
river  coiild  form  any  great  barrier  to  the  passage  of  this  animal 
from  Middle  to  West  Tennessee  is  not  credible,  when  we  remem- 
ber that  they  had  already  crossed  the  Cumberland,  and  have  been 
known  to  swim  waters  even  more  formidable  in  the  valleys  of  the 
Missouri  and  Red  River  during  their  migrations. 

The  absolute  silence  of  Davy  Crockett  on  this  subject,  is  very 
significant  proof  of  the  absence  of  the  buffalo  on  the  western  border 
of  the  State.  Mr.  Miles  thus  comments  on  the  matter  :  "  I  have  often 
thought  of  and  asked  in  the  last  forty  years  about  bufialoes  in  this 
section  ;  never  met  any  one  who  ever  heard  of  a  buffalo  here,  or 
saw  indications  that  they  ever  were.  *  *  *  Blue  grass  is  not 
indigenous  to  our  section  and  I  doubt  if  buffaloes  were  ever  numer- 
ous here  as  in  Kentucky  and  Middle  Tennessee,  though  certainly 
there  must  have  been  isolated  specimens.  I  never  heard  of  the 
remains  of  one,  nor  did  they  have  roads  or  wallows,  which  the  only 
writers  on  Kentucky  and  Middle  Tennessee  tell  of." 

The  reader  is  referred  to  later  remarks  on  the  elk  for  refer- 
ence to  the  bisons  once  kept  on  the  Belle  Meade  farm  by  General 

Harding. 

Family  CERVIDJE. 

Genus  DORCELAPHUS  Gloger. 

3.     Dorcelaphus  virginianus  (Bodd.).    Virginia  Deer. 

When  we  consider  the  large  amount  of  wild  land  in  the  three 


180  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

main  divisions  of  the  State,  it  is  surprising  how  effectually  the  Vir- 
ginia Deer  has  been  exterminated  over  the  greater  part  of  Tennes- 
see. This  is  probably  owing  largely  to  the  number  of  negroes  and 
"  poor  whites,"  who  infest  these  districts,  and  spend  their  lives  in 
the  uncertain  pursuit  of  hunting,  rather  than  in  earning  an  honest 
livelihood. 

A  few  remain  in  wilder  parts  of  the  Cumberland  table-land,  but 
even  there  they  are  rarely  taken.  I  found  their  fresh  track  on  the 
bluffs  near  Sawyer's  Springs.  Mr.  Miles  refers  to  them  in  his 
vicinity  as  follows  :  "  In  my  county,  [Haywood]  as  far  as  I  can 
gather,  there  are  about  20  [wild  ones]  now  alive — one  buck  was 
killed  in  February  and  a  doe  in  August.  ^  ^  ^  We  are  mak- 
ing a  desperate  effort  to  restore  this  animal,  and  I  think,  with  the 
sentiment  now  prevailing,  will  make  a  success  of  it."  Mr.  Rags- 
dale,  proprietor  of  Cloudland  Hotel,  thinks  the  deer  have  been  ex- 
tirpated from  Roan  Mountain  and  that  one  would  have  to  go  many 
miles  into  the  mountain  valleys  of  North  Carolina  to  find  them. 

Mr.  A.  B.  Wingfield,  in  Forest  and  Stream,  for  December  14th, 
1894,  states  "  The  Cumberland  Mountain  range  has  been  almost 
entirely  depleted  of  its  stock  of  deer.  Would  you  believe  it  if  I 
were  to  tell  you  that  last  year  there  were  248  carcasses  of  deer 
shipped  from  the  small  town  of  Crossville  in  Cumberland  County 
*  ^-  *  I  am  glad  to  report  that  the  last  Tennessee  legislature 
passed  a  law  forbidding  the  killing  of  deer  in  five  of  our  mountain 
counties  (Cumberland,  Claiborne,  Scott,  Morgan  and  Anderson) 
for  a  period  of  five  years." 

Genus  CERVUS  Linnseus. 
4.    Cervus  canadensis  (Erxl.).    Wapiti  or  Elk. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  present  century,  this  noble  animal  was 
probably  a  visitant  to  every  county  in  the  State.  It  not  only 
abounded  in  the  high  passes  and  coves  of  the  southern  Alleghenies; 
but,  associated  with  the  buflfalo,  it  frequented  the  licks  near  the 
present  site  of  Nashville,  gave  its  name  to  some  of  the  rivers  and 
creeks  of  the  southern  counties  of  Middle  Tennessee,  and  roamed 
through  the  glades  and  canebrakes  of  the  Mississippi  bottoms.  The 
redoubtable  Crockett,  during  his  residence  in  Obion  and  Dyer 
Counties,  gives  repeated  instances  of  the  occurrence  of  the  Wapiti 
in  the  bottom  lands,  and  it  formed  no  small  part  of  his  larder  in 
the  period  between  the  years  1820  and  1830. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  181 

Mr.  Miles,  after  careful  inquiry  about  the  elk  in  his  region 
writes  me,  "  The  last  elk  killed  in  West  Tennessee  that  I  can  learn 
of  was  at  Reelfoot  Lake  about  1849.  The  late  David  Merri wether 
of  Madison  County,  Tennessee,  killed  it.  In  1865  I  heard  that  an 
elk  was  killed  in  Obion  County." 

In  Putnam's  History  of  Middle  Tennessee,  (page  127),  there  is 
a  foot-note  which  states  that  on  the  famous  Belle  Meade  farm,  south 
of  Nashville,  General  William  G.  Harding  had  "two  hundred  deer, 
twenty  buffaloes  and  half  dozen  elk  "  in  captivity.  I  understood  in 
a  conversation  with  gentlemen  in  Nashville,  that  these  animals  had 
come  of  native  Tennessee  stock,  and  that  their  descendants  had 
been  kept  in  this  park  until  a  recent  date.  Putnam's  note  applied 
to  a  period  anterior  to  the  year  1859.  I  have  been  unable  to  get 
any  direct  information  from  the  Harding  or  Jackson  families,  now 
living  at  Belle  Meade,  as  to  these  facts,  or  whether  the  elk  and 
bison  are  still  existing  in  their  preserve. 

Order  RODENTIA. 

Family  LEPORIDiEI. 
Genus  LEPTIS  Linnaeus. 
5.     Lepus  aquaticus  (Bachm.).     Aquatic  Hare. 

On  the  borders  of  Reelfoot  Lake,  in  the  closest  proximity  to  the 
water,  I  found  this  large  hare.  It  preferred  hiding  among  the 
half-submerged  vegetation  and  piles  of  driftwood,  and  when  it 
broke  cover  would  run  with  bold,  high  leaps  from  log  to  log  for  so 
great  a  distance  that  it  was  difficult  to  find  it  again. 

The  following,  relating  to  its  habits  in  the  vicinity  of  Browns- 
ville, is  from  the  pen  of  Mr.  Miles :  "  Though  resembling  the 
Cotton  Tail  closely  in  color  and  in  diet,  as  well  as  in  movements, 
there  the  similarity  of  the  Swamp  Rabbit,  as  we  term  him,  ends. 
Never  seen  on  the  hills  and  seldom  in  the  open,  he  is  at  home  in 
the  canebrakes  and  deep  woods,  far  from  the  homes  of  man.  The 
more  desolate  the  situation,  the  more  certain  he  is  to  be  found,  ever 
wide  awake  and  ready  to  test  his  speed  and  cunning  with  that  of 
any  enemy  ;  and  he  has  no  friends.  In.  the  overflow  [spring  freshets] 
I  have  seen  him  for  hours  seated  on  a  floating  log,  as  much  at 
home  as  a  raccoon,  and  when  disturbed  take  the  water  for  a  300 
yard  swim  as  readily  as  any  land  animal  that  I  know.  When  hotly 
pursued,  he  always  takes  the  water,  and,  once  there,  I  have  never 
seen  him  caught.     Twice  only,  while  hunting  at  night,  have  I  seen 


182  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

him  take  a  hollow  tree,  seeming  generally  not  to  resort  to  such  a 
refuge  in  the  day.  The  young  are  born  with  eyes  closed  and  with- 
out hair,  and  fewer  in  number  than  the  cottontail.^  I  have  only 
seen  one  nest,  that  in  an  old  root.  The  Swamp  Rabbit  has  fully 
held  his  own  iu  numbers  in  my  day,  though  nothing  more,  and  I 
see  about  one  specimen  a  day  when  hunting  in  our  deepest  bottoms. 
The  largest  specimen  I  ever  weighed  was  thirteen  pounds,  and 
would  say  thirteen  inches  at  the  shoulders.  Negroes  think  him 
good  eating,  and  if  properly  prepared,  I  agree  with  them." 

In  another  letter  Mr.  Miles  again  refers  to  this  hare,  as  follows  : 
"  As  to  the  aquatic  habits  of  the  Swamp  Rabbit,  they  are  very  pro- 
nounced and  he  will  take  to  water  as  readily  as  the  raccoon.  I 
have  seen  him  when  not  pursued  swim  a  slough  30  yards  wide  and 
shake  himself  when  on  the  other  side,  hopping  ofi'  as  though  it  was 
all  right  >i<  *  *  *  I  saw  one  swim  several  hundred  yards 
down  and  across  current  when  pursued  by  my  pointer,  and  the  dog 
did  not  gain  on  him,  but  was  the  most  exhausted  of  the  two 
when  he  gave  up  the  chase.  The  rabbit  makes  the  'dog  lick' 
when  in  the  water,  the  rump  rising  and  falling  as  in  the  swim- 
ming horse." 

Specimen — Samburg,  1. 

6.     Lepus  sylvaticus  Bachm.     Wood  Hare. 

In  western  Tennessee,  especially  in  the  woods  and  thickets  skirting 
the  cane-bottoms  near  the  Mississippi,  this  hare  has  almost  become 
a  nuisance  on  account  of  its  abundance.  Near  Brownsville,  Mr. 
Miles  declares  the  "  Cotton-tail  is  nearly  a  pest  with  us,  and  since  20 
years  has  increased  fully  50  per  cent,  in  my  opinion,  and  this  in 
spite  of  the  fact  that  its  young  are  destroyed  by  nearly  everybody 
and  thing.  *  >K  *  During  February  last  [1895]  I  could  num- 
ber 100  parties  who  killed  in  a  single  day's  hunt  100  each,  and 
the  same  ratio  was  kept  up  during  the  month  ;  this  too  at  the 
time  of  breeding,  but  there  are  apparently  as  many  as  ever  and  in 
the  corporation  of  Brownsville,  they  eat  up  a  large  per  cent  of 
the  gardens." 

At  Reelfoot  Lake  I  found  them  very  abundant,  their  range  in  the 
lowlands  overlapping  that  of  the  Water  Hare.  In  the  uplands  I 
rarely  met  with  them.     None  were  obtained  in  Middle  Tennessee  or 

^  Mr.  Miles  contrasts  this  condition  of  tlie  young  at  birth  with  that  of 
Lepus  syhiaHcus,  which  he  states  are  brought  forth  "with  eyes  open  and  fully 
haired." 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  183 

East  Tennessee.  Those  from  West  Tennessee  apparently  resemble 
sylvaticu8  from  Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey,  but  not  having  sum- 
mer skins  from  the  Eastern  States,  the  determination  is  unsatisfac- 
tory, Mr.  Bangs"  identified  three  winter  specimens  from  Trenton 
(Gibson  Co.  ?)  Tennessee,  as  "  perfect  intermediates  between  sylva- 
ticus  and  mearnsi,  both  in  size  and  color." 

Regarding  the  possible  occurrence  of  L.  sylvaticus  transitionalis 
Bangs,  in  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains,  its  describer  writes  me : 
"  I  examined  a  large  series  last  winter  from  Roan  Mountain,  and 
they  were  all  true  sylvaticiis." 

Specimens — Samburg,  5  ;  Raleigh,  1. 

Genus  SYNAPTOMYS  Baird. 
7.     Synaptomys  cooperi  Baird.     Lemming  Vole. 

Six  specimens,  a  lately  nursing  female  and  five  young,  the  latter 
apparently  belonging  to  a  single  litter,  and  the  former  probably 
their  parent,  were  trapped  in  a  small,  springy  place  on  the  Caro- 
lina side  of  the  summit  of  Roan  Mountain,  where  a  quantity  of 
their  favorite  tussock  rush,  Juncus,  was  growing.  The  adult  is  in- 
distinguishable from  Massachusetts  and  Pennsylvania  specimens. 
The  young  are  of  much  interest,  no  record  or  description  of  im- 
mature specimens  having  yet  been  published,  to  my  knowledge. 
They  are  about  half  grown,  their  average  measurements  being, 
total  length,  85  millimeters;  tail  vertebrae,  13;  hind-foot,  18.5. 
Above,  including  the  sides,  they  present  a  uniform  blackish  gray 
shade,  which  close  examination  detects  to  be  obscurely  mixed  with 
dull  wood  brown.  The  prevailing  hue  is  due  to  the  long  and  very 
numerous  dull  black  hairs,  which  are  sparingly  mingled  with  gray 
ones,  and  the  faint  brown  shade  arises  from  the  exposed  subtermi- 
nal  bands  of  the  shorter  fur  which  underlies  the  longer  and  coarser 
black  hairs.  The  under  parts  are  darker,but  otherwise  resemble  those 
of  the  adult  specimen.  In  the  young  skull  the  length  of  the  upper 
molar  series  is  nearly  as  great  as  in  the  adult  skulls  of  twice  the 
size,  five  millimeters  longer.  The  incisors  on  the  contrary,  correlate 
in  size  with  the  relative  bulk  of  old  and  young,  those  of  the  latter 
in  this  case  being  about  half  the  caliber  of  the  former.  The  sulcus 
of  the  upper  incisors,  which  characterizes  this  genus  so  strongly  in 
adults,  is  a  nearly  obsolete  depression  in  the  young  and  not  more 
easily  detected  than  in  occasional  specimens  of  Microtus  pennsyl- 
vanicus  which  continue   to   exhibit  this  persistent  index  of  their 

«Proc.  Bos.  Soc.  N.  Hist.,  1895,  p.  409. 


184  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ancestry.  On  cutting  away  the  premaxillary  the  exposed  base  of 
the  incisor  shows  a  constant  increase  in  the  development  of  the 
lateral  sulcus,  so  that  at  its  root  the  tooth  may  be  said  to  be  almost 
as  characteristically  grooved  as  in  the  adult.  In  the  half-grown 
skull  the  cutting  edges  of  the  upper  incisors  are  oblique,  forming 
an  acute  angle  in  each  at  their  median  line  ;  in  the  adult  skull  this 
obliquity  is  reversed,  the  outer  sides  of  the  teeth  being  longer  than 
the  inner.  In  the  young,  the  alveolar  breadth  of  the  incisor  ex- 
ceeds its  terminal  breadth  ;  in  the  old  these  dimensions  are  equal. 
The  incisive  foramina  are  wider  and  shorter,  and  the  upper  molar 
series  more  widely  separated  by  the  bony  palate  and  maxillaries, 
than  in  old  adults.  The  crown  structure  of  the  molars  in  young 
and  old  is  identical,  their  only  difference  being  due  to  the  amount 
of  wear,  shown  most  conspicuously  in  the  posterior  upper  molar, 
which  has  not  protruded  sufficiently  to  bring  its  posterior  loop  down 
to  the  triturating  plane,  and  in  consequence,  that  section  retains  its 
original  cuspidate  form. 

All  of  the  five  young  have  white-tipped  hind  feet  almost  precisely 
like  the  young  Evotomys  taken  in  the  same  locality.  This  peculiar- 
ity, is  not  confined  to  the  young  of  these  genera.  An  examination  of 
my  series  from  the  United  States  and  Canada  shows  that  several 
young  and  some  of  the  old  among  four  species  have  the  hind  feet 
so  marked.  In  an  adult  Evotomys  gapperi  from  Pennsylvania',  both 
fore  and  hind  feet  are  nearly  pure  white  and  in  E.  g.  saturatiis  from 
Mt.  Baker,  B.  C,  all  four  feet,  and  the  throat  and  the  breast  are 
similarly  pied.  Such  cases  are  rare  in  my  very  large  series  of  M. 
pennsylvanicus.  It  is  an  interesting  question  why  Synaptomys  and 
Evotomys  should  show  this  tendency  to  pedal  albinism,  while  in 
Peromyscus  and  Zapus  the  same  kind  of  variation  seems  confined 
to  the  tail.  Indeed,  in  some  of  these  instances  this  feature  has 
almost  assumed  the  dignity  of  a  diagnostic  if  not  specific  charac- 
ter, and  it  may  even  be  conjectured  whether  these  white-footed 
voles  do  not  foreshadow  color  patterns,  which  are  destined  to  figure 
in  the  days  to  come.  On  the  other  hand  it  may  indicate  their  past 
connection  with  some  harlequin  ancestry,  such  as  has  given  us 
the  variegated  pelage  of  the  Arctic  Lemmings. 

Specimens — Roan  Mt.,  Mitchell  Co.,  N.  C.  1  ad. ;  5juv. 

Genus  MICROTUS  Schrank. 
8.     Microtus  pennsylvanicus  (Ord).     Wilson's  Meadow  Vole. 

The  most  careful  search  and  systematic  trapping  failed  to  reveal 
the  presence  of  this  common  eastern  and  northern  quadruped  in  any 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  185 

part  of  Tennessee  west  of  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains.  In  this  re- 
spect its  distribution,  or  rather  its  absence,  corresponded  exactly 
"with  that  of  the  Song  Sparrow,  Melospiza  fascicda.  Wherever  I 
found  the  supposed  runways  of  this  vole,  the  traps  only  yielded 
the  Mole  Shrew,  Blarina  hreviccmda  and  the  Pine  Vole,  M.  pine- 
torum  and  even  these  in  such  small  numbers  that  the  residents  of 
the  State  may  well  congratulate  themselves  on  their  immunity  from 
these  little  pests. 

On  the  summit  of  Roan  Mountain  two  specimens  of  the  Meadow 
Vole  were  secured  in  a  little  "  bulrush  "  swamp  below  Cloudland 
hotel,  about  100  yards  from  the  Tennessee  line  in  Mitchell  County, 
N.  Carolina.  No  specimens  were  taken  in  Tennessee,  but  I  feel 
justified  in  including  it  here,  not  only  on  this  nearby  record,  but  be- 
cause similar  runways  to  those  in  which  the  Mitchell  County  spec- 
imens were  taken  were  observed  in  swampy  ground  near  the  sum- 
mit of  the  mountain  in  Carter  County,  Tennessee,  during  my  ascent 
thither  from  the  Doe  River  ravine. 

There  is  not  the  slightest  tendency  toward  any  variation  in  the 
Roan  Mountain  specimens  from  those  found  near  Philadelphia  at 
the  same. season,  and  this  is  good  proof  that  the  distribution  of 
this  vole  is  continuous  along  the  ridge  of  the  southern  Alleghenies 
and  much  farther  south  than  in  the  adjoining  lowlands. 

Specimens — Roan  Mountain,  Mitchell  Co.,  N.  Carolina  (6,300  ft.), 
2  ^s. 

9.     Microtus  pinetorum  (LeC).     Pine-woods  Vole. 

This  seems  to  be  the  only  representative  of  the  Microtinee  in 
Western  and  Middle  Tennessee.  It  may  be  said  to  be  numerous  in 
the  woods  and  their  vicinity,  forming  tunnels  in  edges  of  open  grass 
fields,  much  after  the  manner  of  Wilson's  Vole.  None  were  taken 
east  of  the  valley  of  East  Tennessee.  The  seventeen  specimens 
from  Tennessee  show  no  characters  which  are  not  to  be  found  in 
specimens  from  Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey  and  Connecticut.  Those 
from  Samburg,  however,  are  more  uniformly  dark  beneath,  the  sil- 
very sheen  seen  in  eastern  specimens  being  clouded,  in  Reelfoot 
Lake  examples,  by  muddy  brown  over  the  entire  underparts.  The 
same  may  be  said  of  those  from  Raleigh  and  Bellevue,  while  those 
from  East  Tennessee  are  similar  to  Pennsylvania  skins.  It  may 
be  remarked  that  while  the  Pine  Vole  shows  great  constancy  in 
its  characters  over  a  large  region  included  between  and  almost 
overlapping  the  Austroriparian  and  Alleghenian  faunse,  the  most 
13 


186  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

southern  and  most  northern  extremes  in  the  east  show  color  differ- 
ences which  may  eventually  be  recognized  as  subspecific.  Exam- 
ples of  this  variation  may  be  found  in  comparing  a  series  from  the 
mountains  of  northern  New  Jersey  with  samples  from  the  pine  bar- 
rens of  the  southern  part  of  that  State.  The  former  are  blackish- 
brown  above  and  plumbeous  gray  beneath,  the  latter  rusty  brown 
with  silvery  gray  sides  and  underparts. 

Specimens — Samburg,  8  ;  Raleigh,  6  ;  Bellevue,  2  ;  Harriman,  2. 

Genus  EVOTOMYS  Coues. 

10.  Evotomys  carolinensis  Merriam.     Carolina  Wood  Vole. 

My  only  specimens  of  this  large  and  interesting  woodland  mouse, 
which  Dr.  Merriam  discovered  on  Roan  Mountain  in  1877,  are  not 
much  more  than  half-grown,  and  all  of  them  were  trapped  in  the 
border  of  the  fir  belt  just  below  Cloudland  Hotel,  in  Mitchell 
County,  N.  Carolina,  two  of  the  specimens  being  taken  within  forty 
yards  of  the  Tennessee  strip.  Though  their  runways  were  abund- 
ant there,  a  strange  fate  prevented  my  securing  any  specimens  on 
Tennessee  soil.  In  my  four  young  specimens  the  color  is  much 
dai'ker  than  in  ga2)peri  of  the  same  age,  corresponding  very  closely 
to  the  shade  characterizing  E.  g.  suturatus  of  the  northwest.  In  the 
oldest  specimen  the  hoary  appearance  of  the  belly  is  untinged  with 
fulvous  ;  the  others  are  plumbeous,  with  a  scant  mixture  of  gray  and 
ochre.  In  all  the  specimens  the  claws  of  the  three  middle  hind 
toes  are  each  covered  with  a  sheath  or  brush  of  white,  bristly  hairs, 
which  exceed  the  claws  in  length  and  project  beyond  them. 

Contrary  to  my  expectations,  the  Wood  Vole  of  Roan  Mountain 
was  not  found  in  wet  places  but  seemed  to  prefer  rather  open  run- 
ways among  the  fallen  logs,  moss  and  ferns  on  the  borders  of  the 
forest,  and  one  specimen  was  taken  under  the  shelter  of  a  pigpen, 
just  below  the  hotel.  Such  situations  were  preferred  to  the  depths 
of  the  forest,  owing  to  the  variety  of  edible  grasses  and  weeds  only 
found  in  clearings.  Dr.  Merriam  writes  me  that  he  has  specimens 
taken  on  the  Tennessee  side  of  Roan  Mountain. 

Specimens— Roan  Mt.,  Mitchell  Co.,  N.  C,  3. 

Genus  FIBER  Cuvier. 

11.  Fiber  zibethicus  (L.).     Muskrat. 

Owing  to  high  water  in  the  rivers  during  my  visit  I  was  unable 
to  reach  the  mussel  shoals  and  collect  specimens  of  the  Unionidse  of 
many  streams  in  Tennessee.      This  difficulty  was  largely  remedied 


1896]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  187 

by  the  industry  of  the  muskrats  inhabiting  every  large  stream 
in  my  course  and  whose  diet  seemed  to  consist  very  largely  of  these 
mollusks,  which  they  would  collect  and  deposit  on  logs  by  the  mar- 
gin of  the  water.  When  the  mussel  dies,  the  valves  of  the  shells  re- 
lax and  the  muskrat  devours  the  contents,  dropping  the  shells  into 
the  water.  In  some  places  I  found  many  bushels  of  these  shells 
representing  ten  or  fifteen  species  and  three  genera  in  one  dumping 
place,  and  was  able  to  get  a  piuch  better  represention  of  this  part  of 
the  mollusk  fauna  in  an  hour  than  would  have  been  possible  in  a 
day's  dredging  or  wading.  In  a  fish-dam  on  the  Holston  River, 
near  its  junction  with  the  French  Broad,  I  found  these  shells  wedged 
among  the  stones  by  the  rats,  and  among  them  some  newly-devoured 
specimens  of  the  beautiful  freshwater  shell  lo  spinosa.  The  spe- 
cies most  preferred  in  the  Tennessee  River  was  a  small  clam-like, 
thick-shelled  and  corrugated  Unio,  and  it  was  noticeable  that  the 
the  same  species  was  by  far  the  most  numerous  in  the  shell-heaps  of 
the  Cherokees  on  the  river  banks.  It  was  rare  to  find  even  the 
most  fragile  species  in  these  rat-larders  broken  as  if  opened  forcibly 
by  the  rats,  a  condition  the  reverse  of  those  obtained  in  similar  de- 
posits east  .of  the  Alleghenies. 

Genus  PEROMYSCTJS  Gloger. 

12.  Peromyscus  leucopus  (Raf.).     Deer  Mouse. 

Compared  with  specimens  from  eastern  Pennsylvania  and  New 
Jersey  there  appears  to  be  nothing  to  distinguish  the  upland  Deer 
Mice  of  West  and  Middle  Tennessee  from  typical  leucopus.  No 
specimens  of  this  genus  were  taken  in  the  lowlands  of  East  Tennes- 
see, but  from  our  knowledge  of  tlie  fauna  of  that  region  it  is  quite 
certain  that  the  same  species  is  the  prevailing  form  there,  associ- 
ated in  certain  localities  with  the  Golden  Mouse,  P.  aureolus.  I 
found  this  species  numerous  at  Raleigh.  A  few  were  taken  at 
Saraburg,  where  they  seemed  to  frequent  the  intermediate  grounds 
between  the  overflowed  bottoms  and  the  bluff",  and  at  this  point  their 
habitat  overlapped  somewhat  that  of  the  large  Cane  Mouse,  P.  gos- 
■sypinus  mississippiensis,  described  below. 

Two  specimens  taken  at  the  entrance  of  Mammoth  Cave,  Ken- 
tucky, are  identical  with  those  from  West  Tennessee. 

Specimens — Samburg  6  ;  Raleigh,  8  ;  Bellevue,  1. 

13.  Peromyscus  leucopus  nubiterrae.    Cloudland  Deer  Mouse. 

Subsp.  nov.     Type,  ad.  $ ,  No.  3,664,  Coll.  of  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 


188  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Phila.     Col.  by  S.  N.  Rhoads  on  summit  of  Roau  Mountain  (6,370 
ft.),  Mitchell  Co.,  N.  Carolina,  June  19,  1895. 

Description. — Size  smaller  than  P.  leucopus,  with  much  longer 
tail  and  darker  coloration. 

Colors,  above,  blackish-brown  or  cinnamon  with  a  broad,  strongly 
defined,  black,  vertebral  stripe  from  middle  crown  to  base  of  tail. 
Sides  of  nose  and  a  wide  space  around  eyes,  sooty.  Ears  dusky. 
Hair  of  underparts  sooty  at  base,  scarce  concealed  on  parts  of  legs, 
throat  and  belly  by  the  pure  white  tips.  Tail  sooty-brown  above, 
"white  beneath,  quite  thickly  clothed  with  long  hairs  which  lengthen 
into  a  pronounced  pencil  at  tip.  Skull  smaller  than  in  leucopus, 
otherwise  very  similar. 

Measurements  (of  type  in  millimeters). — Total  length,  170  ;  tail 
vertebrse,  87  ;  hind  foot,  20.5.  Skull :  total  length,  23.8  ;  basilar, 
length,  18  ;  zygomatic  expansion,  13  ;  interorbital  constriction,  4  ; 
length  of  nasals,  9.6  :  length  of  mandible,  12.3  ;  breadth  of  mandi- 
ble, 6.  Average  measurements  of  four  adults  from  the  same  local- 
ity :  total  length,  167  ;  tail  vertebrre,  86  ;  hind  foot,  21.5. 

The  Cloudland  Deer  Mouse  seems  to  be  exclusively  a  dweller  of 
the  balsam  or  spruce  belt  which  crowns  the  summit  of  Roan  Moun- 
tain, and  is  undoubtedly  found  on  all  the  summits  of  the  southern 
Alleghenies,  which  rise  above  an  altitude  of  5,000  feet.  That  itin- 
tergrades  with  leucopus  of  the  lowlands,  a  total  lack  of  specimens 
from  intermediate  localities  prevents  me  from  determining. 

In  a  superficial  comparison  of  nuhiterroe.  with  typical  leucoptcs, 
the  smaller  size,  sooty  color  and  very  long  tail  immediately  suggest 
a  specific  diflTerence,  but  the  cranial  features  of  the  two  do  not  sup- 
port such  a  conclusion.  In  all  respects,  except  coloration  and  size, 
the  Roan  Mountain  animal  is  an  interesting  counterpart  of  the  Per- 
omyscus  leucopus  canadensis,  so  fully  described  by  Mr.  G.S.  Miller,  Jr.' 
The  diflerentiation  of  these  two  forms  from  leucopus  has  been  on 
very  similar  lines,  owing  to  the  similarity  of  the  climatic  conditions 
affecting  them.  Their  dissimilarity,  on  the  other  hand,  is  exactly 
correlated  with  the  difference  in  the  humidity  and  mean  temperature 
of  the  balsam  forests  of  Canada  and  those  of  the  Great  Smoky 
Mountains. 

Specimens— Roan  Mountain  (5,500  to  6,300  ft.),  Mitchell  Co.,  N. 
Carolina,  6  ;  Carter  Co.,  Tenn.,  2. 

^Proc.  Biol.  Soc,  Wash.,  Vol.  VIII,  1893,  pp.  55-70. 


1896,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  189 

14.    Peromyscus  gossypinus  mississippiensis.    Cane  Mouse. 

Subsp.  nov.  Type,  ad.  $  ;  No.  3,729,  Coll.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila. 
Col.  by  S.  N.  Rhoads  at  Samburg,  Obion  Co.,  Tennessee,  May  4, 
1895. 

Description — Larger  than  gossypimis,  with  much  longer  hind  feet, 
relatively  longer  tail,  lighter,  grayish-fulvcus  coloration  and  lack- 
ing the  dark  orbital  ring. 

Color  above,  yellowish-brown,  more  fulvous  along  sides,  darker 
along  back  and  mixed  with  blackish. 

Lower  parts  and  feet,  white,  shaded  by  the  plumbeous  exposed 
bases  of  hairs  on  chest,  belly  and  thighs. 

Measurements  (of  type  in  millimeters). — Total  length,  182  ;  tail 
vertebrae,  77  ;  hind  foot,  24.5  ;  ear  (from  crown,  dry  skin),  12. 
Skull :  total  length,  29  ;  basilar  length,  21.8  ;  zygomatic  expansion, 
14.7  ;  interorbital  constriction,  4.5  ;  length  of  nasals,  11.2;  length 
of  mandible,  15.2  ;  greatest  width  of  mandible,  7.  Average  meas- 
urements of  five  adults  from  same  locality  :  total  length,  182  ;  tail 
vertebrse,  80.6  ;  hind  foot,  24  ;  average  total  length  of  five  skulls, 
28  ;  average  zygomatic  breadth  of  same,  14.5. 

So  far  as  I  have  made  its  acquaintance  in  Tennessee,  the  Cane 
Mouse  is  solely  a  denizen  of  the  "  bottom  lands  "  of  the  Mississippi. 
At  Samburg  it  confined  its  wanderings  very  closely  to  the  immedi- 
ate viciuitv  of  Reelfoot  Lake,  and  was  abundant  in  the  dense  forest 
jungle  that  bordered  its  margin,  seeming  to  prefer  the  lowest  and 
wettest  parts  of  the  overflowed  lands,  from  which,  at  that  time  of 
the  year  (May),  the  waters  of  the  lake  had  receded.  It  is  quite  dis- 
tinct from  the  common  upland  Deer  Mouse  of  the  same  region,  and 
the  upper  and  lower  borders  of  their  habitats  overlap  sufficiently  to 
make  it  possible  to  capture  both  species  in  the  same  trap. 

A  comparison  of  the  Samburg  mice  with  leucopus  of  the  same 
locality  having  shown  their  differences,  as  above  stated,  to  be  spe- 
cific, the  question  at  once  arises  as  to  their  relations  to  other  south- 
ern Peromyscus  of  the  Eastern  States.  I  can  find  nothing,  in  exam- 
ining the  series  before  me,  to  separate  these  Cane  Mice  specifically 
from  (jossypinus  of  Florida  and  Louisiana,  and  of  which  I  am  so 
fortunate  as  to  have  a  large  collection,  those  from  Louisiana  being 
generously  loaned  me  by  Mr.  Outram  Bangs.  The  Louisiana  spec- 
imens are  of  interest  as  showing  the  extension  of  gossypinus  along 
the  Gulf  Coast  across  the  Mississippi  River.  A  comparison  of  some 
of  these  from  near  New  Orleans  with  specimens  from  the  west  coast 


190  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

of  Florida  shows  a  great  similarity,  the  former  averaging  darker 
and  smaller  but  the  variation  is  perhaps  too  slight  to  warrant  recog- 
nition. On  the  other  hand,  the  Tennessee  form  represents  the  max- 
imum development  of  gossypin.us,  combined  with  a  light  coloration 
which  together  render  it  easily  distinguishable  as  a  subspecies. 

The  relation  of  eastern  gossypinus  to  leucopus  has  been  a  question 
frequently  discussed  by  mammalogists,  but  the  lack  of  good  material 
from  regions  intermediate  between  N.  Carolina  and  Florida  has 
prevented  any  final  determination.  I  had  hoped  to  obtain  the  de- 
sired series  from  the  regions  in  question  in  order  to  intelligently  dis- 
cuss the  matter  now  brought  forward  in  West  Tennessee,  but  a  cor- 
respondence with  our  more  prominent  collectors  of  eastern  mam- 
mals, including  Messrs.  Miller,  Bangs  and  Brimley,  shows  that  we 
are  but  little  better  off  in  this  regard  than  thirty  years  ago,  unless 
collections  of  the  U.  S.  Dep.  of  Agriculture  contain  such  series.  I 
am,  therefore,  only  able  to  predict,  on  the  basis  of  the  relationships 
of  gossypinus  and  leucopus  of  the  lower  Mississippi  Valley,  that  they 
will  prove  to  be  as  distinct  species  in  the  east  as  in  the  west.  In 
this  connection  the  cognahis  of  Leconte  again  intrudes  itself  Le- 
conte  states  Georgia  and  South  Carolina  to  be  the  type  localities  of 
this  species.  Dr.  Coues  declares^  that  "  three  dried  specimens, 
labelled  '  eognatus  '  in  what  we  presume  to  be  Major  Leconte's  own 
handwriting,  as  it  is  the  same  as  that  upon  his  other  types  now  in 
our  possession,"  should  be  considered  the  types  of  eognatus.  One 
of  these,  from  Illinois,  Dr.  Coues  says  is  "  H.  michiganeusis  pure 
and  simple  !  "  and  adds,  "  The  other  two,  Nos.  4,708,  4,709  are  not 
marked  for  locality  but  probably  came  from  Ohio,  Wisconsin  or 
Michigan,  and  are  really  his  types !  "  It  is  very  difficult  to  reconcile 
this  statement  with  Leconte's  assertion  that  eognatus  is  a  native  of 
Georgia,  and  if  these  two  specimens  really  are  original  types  of 
eognatus,  it  is  far  more  reasonable  to  assign  them  to  Georgia  or 
South  Carolina.  On  this  basis,  Dr.  Coues'  diagnosis  of"  Nos.  4,708, 
4,709,"  viz.,  that  "  They  are  exactly  the  size  of  ordinary  leucopus, 
the  tail  a  little  shorter,  relatively,  than  the  average  of  leucopus,  but 
not  shorter  than  is  often  found  in  leucopus,  and  they  are  colored 
exactly  as  in  gossypinus,  the  upper  parts  being  very  dark,  the  under 
impure  white,  and  the  tail  indistinctly  bicolor,"  strongly  points  to 
the  conclusion  which  Prof  Baird  and  Dr.  J.  A.  Allen  have  ad- 
vanced, that  eognatus  is  a  synonym  of  gossypinus,  based,  I  might 

*  Mon.  N.  A.  Eodentia,  pp.  77,  78. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  191 

add,  on  a  somewhat  immature  specimen  of  that  species  from  near 
the  same  type  h)cality.  It  is  very  probable  that  Leconte's  positive 
statement,  in  his  introductory  paragraph  to  the  description  of 
cognatus,  that  he  had  never,  during  a  long  period  of  residence  in 
Georgia,  seen  leucopus  there,  will  be  confirmed  by  future  investi- 
gators. 

Another  species  whose  status  is  affected  by  the  foregoing  remarks 
is  Peromyscus  megacephalus  of  northern  Alabama.  Not  having  se- 
cured a  series  from  that  region  I  am  unable  to  throw  any  light  on 
the  question  of  the  affinity  of  this  species  to  gossypinus,  to  which  it 
is  most  closely  related,  and  indeed  it  may  be  found  to  be  only  a  case 
of  aberrant  and  extraordinary  individual  variation  from  typical 
gossypinus,  or  may  represent  a  mountain  or  foot-hill  race  of  that 
species.  In  either  case  the  validity  of  megacephalus  nowise  affects 
the  status  of  mississippiensis,  which  represents  the  modifications  of 
an  environment  quite  the  reverse  of  that  obtaining  in  northeastern 
Alabama. 

Specimens — Samburg,  16  ;  Raleigh,  1. 

15.     Peromyscus  aureolas  (Aud.  &  Bach.).     Golden  Mouse. 

Prof  Baird,  in  his  great  work  on  the  North  American  Mam- 
malia (p.  468),  tabulates  two  specimens  of  this  mouse  which  were 
taken  near  Kuoxville,  Tennessee,  by  Prof  J.  B.  Mitchell  and  pre- 
sented to  the  Smithsonian  Institution.  Dr.  Coues,  in  the  Mono- 
graph of  North  American  Rodentia,  specially  refers  to  one  of  these 
specimens  as  typical  of  the  peculiar  coloration  of  aureolus,  so  we 
may  reasonably  accept  the  identification  and  the  record  as  the  first 
for  the  State.  Dr.  C.  H.  Merriam  writes  me  that  his  assistant,  Mr, 
H.  C.  Oberholser  obtained  one  of  these  mice  at  Roan  Mountain 
Station.  In  view  of  these  Tennessee  records,  which  would  indicate 
the  presence  of  the  Golden  Mouse  over  the  greater  part  of  the  State, 
it  seems  strange  that  I  did  not  meet  with  it,  although  the  Deer 
Mouse  was  taken  in  considerable  numbers.  The  elevation  of  Roan 
Mountain  Station  is  about  2,500  feet.  Messrs.  H.  H.  and  C.  S. 
Brimley  inform  me  that  they  have  received  numbers  of  this  mouse 
taken  by  J.  S.  Cairns  near  Weaverville,  N.  Carolina,  about  25  miles 
east  of  the  Tennessee  line,  at  2,300  ft.  elevation,  so  it  is  reasonable 
to  expect  them  in  any  of  the  passes  of  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains 
below  that  altitude. 


192  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Genus  NEOTOMA  Say  &  Ord. 
16.     Neotoma  magister  Baird.     Allegheny  Cave  Rat. 

This  large  mountain-dwelling  rat  is  found  in  the  cliffs  of  Roan 
Mountain  and  other  peaks  of  the  Southern  Alleghenies.  I  have  no 
records  of  it  from  the  Tennessee  section  of  the  mountain  but  the 
natives  of  Carter  County  do  not  state  that  it  shows  a  decided  par- 
tiality to  North  Carolina. 

A  careful  examination  of  the  cave  deposits  which  came  into  my 
hands  from  Middle  Tennessee  failed  to  show  any  remains  of  this 


genus. 


I  have  examined  specimens  of  the  rat  which  frequents  Mammoth 
Cave,  Kentucky,  and  am  unable  to  detect  any  difference  between 
them  and  those  taken  in  Clinton  and  Cumberland  Counties,  Penn- 
sylvania. The  skull  of  an  old  specimen  forwarded  to  me  alive  from 
Mammoth  Cave  is  exactly  like  the  largest  adult  skulls  of  fossilized 
specimens  from  the  limestone  caves  of  eastern  Pennsylvania. 

After  particular  inquiry  among  the  hunters  of  southwestern  Ten- 
nessee as  to  the  existence  of  a  Wood  Rat  in  those  parts  I  am  in- 
clined to  think  that  it  has  been  noted  there,  but  the  confusion  of 
N eotoma  fioridmia  with  the  Old  World  rats  of  these  parts  makes  the 
evidence  of  questionable  value. 

Genus  MUS  Linnaeus. 

17.  Mus  decumanus  Pallas.     Norway  Rat. 

18.  Mus  rattus  L.     Black  Rat. 

Mr.  Miles  mentions  the  former  occurrence  of  the  Black  Rat  in 
West  Tennessee  but  he  has  not  seen  it  for  twenty  years.  The  Nor- 
way Rat,  however,  has  not  been  exterminated  so  successfullly,  as  the 
open  streets  of  the  larger  cities  of  Tennessee  can  frequently  testify. 

19.  Mus  musculus  L.     House  Mouse. 

Found  both  wild  and  semi-domesticated. 
Specimens — Raleigh,  1  ;  Roan  Mountain,  1. 

Family  CASTORID^. 

Genus  CASTOR  Linnaeus. 

20.  Castor  fiber  canadensis  (Kuhl).     American  Beaver. 

In  company  with  a  trapper,  I  visited  a  beaver  house  in  Reelfoot 
Lake.  This  was  situated  in  a  cypress  swamp  called  the  "  Turkey- 
roost,"  about  three  miles  west  of  Samburg.  It  was  not  tenanted, 
but  there  were  signs  that  a  beaver  had  been  at  work  there  within  a 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  193 

few  days.  Other  lodges  were  known  to  ray  guide,  and  Mr.  H.  B. 
Young  of  Samburg,  who  makes  it  his  business  to  take  some  of  these 
animals  in  the  lake  every  winter,  declared  there  were  twenty  of 
them  left,  and  contracted  with  me  to  furnish  the  gardens  of  the  Zoo- 
logical Society  of  Philadelphia  with  some  of  their  young  ones  the 
coming  winter, 

Mr.  Miles  says,  "  the  beaver,  in  limited  numbers,  has  been  here 
always  and  is  more  numerous  now  than  40  years  ago,  because  less 
hunted.  Within  9  miles  of  Brownsville,  I  know  personally  of 
a  '  house '  now  inhabited,  and  it  has  been  so  for  25  years.  I 
know  the  locality  of  two  others  by  report." 

It  is  not  likely  that  any  beavers  now  exist  in  the  eastern  half  of 
the  State,  though  their  former  distribution  over  the  whole  of  Ten- 
nessee is  well  known,  and  attested  by  the  frequency  of  the  name  for 
smaller  streams  and  meadows  throughout  the  state. 

Family  SCIURID^. 
Genus  AKCTOMYS  Schreber. 

21.  Arctomys  monax  (L.).     Woodchuck.   Ground  Hog. 

Stated  by  Mr.  Miles  to  be  "  very  rare  "  in  Haywood  Co.  A  bur- 
row, apparently  used  by  one  of  these  animals,  was  located  on  the 
banks  of  Indian  Creek  just  above  the  overflow  of  Reelfoot  Lake. 
From  the  character  of  the  signs  and  paths  leading  from  this  den  to  . 
an  adjacent  field,  it  could  have  belonged  to  no  other  animal.  I  did 
not  find  the  woodchuck  as  numerous  anywhere  in  Tennessee  as  we 
have  it  in  eastern  Pennsylvania.  It  is  found  high  up  among  the 
Great  Smoky  Mountains,  but  does  not,  so  far  as  I  could  learn,  in- 
vade the  fir  belt,  which  occupies  their  summits  down  to  an  altitude 
of  about  5,000  feet.  Dr.  Merriam  says*  of  them  in  this  region  that 
they  "  were  common  in  places  in  the  Alleghenian  belt,  about  half- 
way up  the  mountains." 

Genus  TAMIAS  Illiger. 

22.  Tamias  striatus  (L.).     Eastern  Chipmunk. 

This  Ground  Squirrel  was  very  abundant  on  that  part  of  Roan 
Mountain  lying  between  the  station  and  the  foot  of  the  fir  belt.  A 
few  casually  invade  this  belt,  but  never  to  a  great  distance.  In  the 
lowlands  of  Tennessee,  the  chipmunk  was  very  sparingly  and  ir- 
regularly distributed,  so  far  as  my  personal  observations  were  made, 

»Amer.  Jour.  Sci.,  1888,  p.  459. 


194  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

but  I  was  frequently  informed  they  were  often  seen  in  districts 
where  none  appeared  during  my  visit.  I  saw  them  at  Johnson  City, 
Greenville  and  Nashville,  and  heard  one  or  two  while  riding 
through  the  woods  in  Obion  Co.,  near  Samburg.  They  are  to  be 
found  near  the  Springs  at  Raleigh  and  on  the  road  from  Raleigh  to 
Bartlett.  None  were  seen  at  Chattanooga  or  Knoxville,  nor  on  the 
Cumberland  plateau.  Two  specimens  from  Roan  Mountain  are 
precisely  like  some  of  my  skins  from  southern  New  Jersey. 

Mr.  Miles  speaks  of  them  near  Brownsville  as  being  "  identical 
with  the  chipmunk  of  Virginia  in  color,  though,  I  think,  larger 
and  not  near  so  plentiful.  *  *  *  *  I  see  five  or.  six  every  sum- 
mer." The  Messrs.  Brimley  of  Raleigh,  N.  C,  record  two  speci- 
mens taken  at  Warner,  Hickman  Co.,  Tenn.,  in  November  and  De- 
cember, indicating  that  the  hibernation  of  this  animal  in  that  lati- 
tude is  of  short  and  irregular  duration. 

Genus  SCIHRUS  Linnaeus. 

23.     Sciurus  niger  ludovicianus  (Custis).     Western  Fox  Squirrel. 

We  do  not  find  this  species  numerous  except  in  the  heavily  tim- 
bered bottoms  of  West  Tennessee,  more  especially  west  of  the  Ten- 
nessee River  in  the  direct  drainage  of  the  Mississippi. 

A  very  interesting  account  of  this  species,  as  observed  in  Hay- 
wood and  Lauderdale  Counties  by  my  veteran  friend  and  sports- 
man, B.  C.  Miles,  is  too  valuable  to  be  lost,  and  with  some  emen- 
dations, I  give  it  here  :  "  The  Fox  or  Red  Squirrel  is  the  largest 
of  all  the  tribe  and  varies  considerably  in  size  in  diflferent  neighbor- 
hoods. Wherever  food  to  his  liking  is  found,  there  he  is,  and  al- 
ways a  glutton,  putting  in  his  whole  time  eating,  drinking,  or  snooz- 
ing on  a  cozy  limb,  in  such  a  position  that  he  attracts  attention 
neither  of  the  hunter  below  nor  of  the  hawk  above.  I  am  certain  I 
have  seen  him  clean  up  a  quart  of  mulberries  in  a  half-day  and  not 
move  ten  feet  during  the  time,  nor  give  utterance  to  a  single  sound. 
Early  in  the  morning  and  late  in  the  evening  he  chatters  much  and  can 
even  condescend  to  be  a  little  gay  in  the  mating  season.  I  doubt  his 
ever  migrating,  as  do  the  gray  and  black,  though  an  excursion  of 
a  mile  from  home  through  cultivated  fields  and  small  timber  is  no 
unusual  tramp  for  the  gentleman. 

"  He  is  a  denizen  of  big  timber  always :  more  at  home  in  the 
gums  and  cypresses  of  our  swamps  than  elsewhere,  though  he  is  not 
infrequently  found  in  the  most  unexpected  places,  on  the  hills  near 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  195 

the  house,  or  in  the  garden,  where  he  goes  for  fruit.  Of  all  the 
tribe  he  is  the  greatest  eater  of  berries  and  the  like,  and  I  have  even 
known  of  his  scratching  sweet  potatoes  out  of  the  ground  and  making 
a  dinner  off  one  of  half  a  pound  weight. 

"  When  closely  hunted  he  is  very  much  more  wary  than  the  Gray 
Squirrel  and  the  way  he  can  hug  a  limb  and  spread  himself  out 
flat  on  the  bark  is  truly  artistic.  In  his  movements  he  is  the  very 
acme  of  animated  silence,  seeming  at  all  times  to  fear  a  noise  and  it 
is  not  an  infrequent  ruse  of  hunters,  by  making  a  great  outcry,  to 
scare  him  from  a  secure  hiding  place.  As  a  table  game  he  is  much 
inferior  to  his  gray  relation,  being  tougher,  and  the  very  red  bones 
always  give  an  uncanny  appearance  to  the  dish,  cook  it  as  you  may. 
*  *  'iJ  *  As  a  caged  pet  he  is  dull,  gets  over-fat,  becomes  stu- 
pid, is  ill-natured,  has  no  gloss  to  his  hair  and  is  a  dismal  fail- 
ure. He  is  bravest  of  the  tribe,  often  refusing  to  leave  the  ground 
when  pursued  by  a  small  dog  ;  has  been  seen  to  stand  at  bay  and 
hold  off  such.  Rarely  he  mates  with  the  Gray  Squirrel,  when  the 
produce  is  called  a  '  ferrydiddle.'  I  have  killed  two  such  in  my 
forty  years  of  squirrel  hunting.  One  at  all  familiar  with  the  two 
species  would  at  once  recognize  its  hybrid  origin." 

Referring  to  the  black  phase  of  this  squirrel,  Mr.  Miles  says  :  "I 
never  saw  any  blacks  save  those  like  the  Fox  squirrel.  Have 
seen  two  killed  in  this  county,  but  when  in  Memphis,  in  1871-'74, 
my  uncle  frequently  purchased  Black  Squirrels  in  the  markets. 
We  understood  they  came  from  Mississippi  (never  from  Arkansas), 
10  or  20  miles  below  Memphis,  and  we  both  thought  them  a  dis- 
tinct species ;  no  resemblance  to  Fox  Squirrel  save  in  size  and 
that  the  tip  of  the  nose  in  each  is  gray.  Have  frequently  observed 
that  the  bones  of  Black  Squirrel  were  the  same  color  (violet)  as  in 
the  Gray  Squirrel,  while  the  bones  of  Fox  Squirrel  were  invari- 
ably a  deep  salmon  or  red  when  brought  to  table.  *  *  *  *  I 
never  saw  or  heard  of  the  black  phase  of  Gray  Squirrel  save 
through  you." 

Specimen — Samburg,  1. 

24.     t  Sciurus  niger  cinereus  (L.).     Northern  Fox  Squirrel. 

I  base  the  admission  of  this  subspecies  to  the  list,  first,  on  evi- 
dence from  hunters  of  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains  that  the  Fox 
Squirrel  is  found  there,  and  secondly,  because  Dr.  J.  A.  Allen  in- 
cludes the  Southern  AUeghenies  in  the  geographical  distribution  of 
this  form. 


196  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

26.     Sciurus  carolinensis  pennsylvanicus  (Ord).     Northern  Gray  Sqiurrel. 

Typical  examples  of  this  squirrel  are  confined  to  the  high  moun- 
tains of  the  extreme  eastern  part  of  the  State.  From  thence  west- 
ward there  will  be  found  to  be  a  gradual  transition  to  the  form,  pe- 
culiar to  the  bottom  lands  of  the  Mississippi,  which  is  next  consid- 
ered. I  saw  hunter's  skins  of  the  Gray  Squirrel,  taken  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  4,000  feet  on  Roan  Mountain.  It  is  not  common  in  the 
more  settled  parts  of  Middle  Tennessee. 

26.  Sciurus  carolinensis  fuliginosus  (Bachm.).     Louisiana  Gray  Squirrel. 

Mr.  Outram  Bangs  has  revived^"  the  Sooty  Gray  Squirrel  of 
Louisiana,  described  by  Bachman  under  the  name  fiiliginosiis,  as  a 
valid  subspecies  of  carolinensis.  I  was  able  to  make  close  examina- 
tion of  a  number  of  live  Gray  Squirrels  in  the  city  park  at  Mem- 
phis, where  they  have  become  domesticated  and  form  one  of  the 
chief  attractions  to  the  large  number  of  people  who  frequent  this 
thoroughfare.  These  squirrels  averaged  fully  up  to  the  size  of  the 
northern  Gray  Squirrel  of  Pennsylvania  and  were  distinctly  darker 
than  the  eastern  animal,  so  much  so,  in  fact,  that  I  attributed  their 
sooty  appearance  to  their  smoky  environment  in  a  city  exclusively 
burning  bituminous  coal.  Memphis,  however,  can  not  be  classed  as 
a  'smoky  city,'  and  I  am  now  satisfied  that  these  squirrels  came  by 
their  colors  legitimately,  and  represent  Bachman's  Louisiana  spe- 
cies, as  redefined  by  Mr.  Bangs. 

Writing  of  the  migrations  of  this  animal,  Mr.  Miles  informs  me  : 
"  I  have  seen  them  exhausted  and  wet  on  the  east  bank  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi River,  when  I  know  the  emigration  eastward  was  taking 
place  on  the  west  bank.  About  that  time  I  was  fishing  on  a  lake 
in  Arkansas  and  one  came  by  my  boat  headed  from  the  west  to  the 
east  bank,  looking  very  unconcerned,  with  tail  curled  over  back 
and  well  out  of  the  wet.  I  gave  pursuit,  which  he  soon  noticed, 
and  that  tail  was  then  put  up  on  the  sail  princii^le  and  very  much 
increased  his  speed,  I  thought  at  the  time,  though  I  overtook  and 
killed  him." 

27.  Sciurus  hudsonicus  (Erxl.).     Red  Squirrel,  "  Boomer." 

Owing  to  the  severe  winter  of  1894-5,  the  "  Boomer"  was  very 
scarce  in  its  usual  haunts  on  the  summit  of  Roan  Mountain.  I 
spent  parts  of  three  days  in  careful  search  of  it  and  only  saw  one  in 
the  fir  belt.     Another  was  seen  and  captured,  during  the  descent  of 


10 


Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  N.  Hist.,  Vol.  XXVI,  p.  543. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  197 

the  mountain,  at  an  elevation  of  3,500  feet.  This  species  is  not  seen 
in  Tennessee  below  an  elevation  of  2,000  feet,  so  far  as  I  could  ascer- 
tain, and  the  majority  live  above  4,000  feet.  They  are  unknown  on 
the  Cumberland  plateau.  Lack  of  suitable  specimens  prevents  me 
from  making  the  necessary  comparisons,  but  I  am  suspicious  that 
the  Red  Squirrels  of  the  Balsam  belt  of  Roan  Mountain  are  a  dark, 
local  race  of  hudsonicus  which  may  merit  separation  from  the  typi- 
cal form. 

Specimen — Roan  Mountain,  Carter  Co.,  1. 

Genus  SCIUROPTERTJS  F.  Cuvier. 
28.     Sciuropterus  volans  (L.).     Southern  Flying  Squirrel. 

From  reports  of  the  hunters,  and  what  we  know  of  its  distribu- 
tion in  other  parts  of  the  United  States,  this  elegant  squirrel  may  be 
said  to  be  common  all  over  the  State  of  Tennessee  from  the  summit 
of  Roan  Mountain  to  the  western  "  bottoms."  Specimens  from  the 
highest  altitudes  would  be  of  interest  in  determining  whether  sub- 
species sabrimis,  the  northern  form,  is  not  found  there.  In  the  low- 
lands of  Haywood  County,  Mr.  Miles  observes  that  in  the  evening 
this  species  "  makes  a  chattering  sound,  that  sooner  or  later  I  hear 
whenever  camped  in  the  woods  and  don't  think  I  ever  miss  hear- 
ing in  clear  weather,  never  in  foul  weather.  Five  years  ago,  in 
the  country,  they  took  possession  of  my  martin  box  and  ran  the 
martins  out.     I  got  after  them  and  routed  out  thirty." 

Order  CARNIVORA. 

Family  PROCYONIDJE. 
Genus  PROCYON  Storr. 

29.  Procyon  lotor  (L.).     Raccoon. 

The  "  Coon "  is  excessively  abundant  in  the  bottoms  of  West 
Tennessee  and  Mr.  Miles  thinks  their  numbers  there  are  increasing. 
In  other  parts  of  the  State  they  appear  to  be  well  represented. 

Family  MUSTELIDiE. 

Genus  LUTRA  Linnjeus. 

30.  Lutra  hudsonica  Lacep.     American  Otter. 

This  fisherman  is  often  seen  by  hunters  at  Reelfoot  Lake.  A 
specimen  was  killed  at  Open  Lake,  Lauderdale  Co.  this  winter  and 
was  seen  by  Mr.  Miles.  The  otter  is  a  rare  but  constant  inhabitant 
of  all  the  larger  streams  in  the  State. 


198  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896 

Genus  LUTREOLA  Wagner. 

31.  Lutreola  vison  Schreber.     Mink. 

32.  Lutreola  vison  vulgivagus  (Bangs).     Louisiana  Mink. 

Only  one  specimen  of  mink  from  Tennessee  has  passed  through 
my  hands.  It  is  a  skull  of  a  mink  taken  at  Open  Lake  in  Lauder- 
dale County,  by  Mr.  Miles.  This  si^ecimen  corresponds  so  closely 
to  Mr.  Bangs'  diagnosis  of  vulgivagus,  as  contrasted  with  typical 
vison,  that  I  am  induced  to  class  it  with  the  former,  but  the  cranial 
differences  in  vulgivagus,  however,  constant  they  may  have  proved, 
do  not  appear  to  me  specific.  There  is  little  doubt  that  the  minks 
of  eastern  Tennessee  are  tyjiical  vison}^ 

Specimen — Open  Lake,  Lauderdale  Co.,  1. 

Genus  PUTOEIUS  Cuvier. 

33.  Putorius  noveboracensis  Emmons.    Carolina  Weasel. 

This  weasel  is  said  to  be  common  in  West  Tennessee,  and,  from 
what  we  know  of  its  general  distribution,  is  nowhere  rare.  Regard- 
ing the  possible  occurrence  of  the  Canadian  Weasel,  Putorius  rich- 
ardsoni  cicognani  (Bonap.),  in  the  Smoky  Mountains,  Mr.  Outram 
Bangs,  who  has  been  making  a  special  study  of  the  eastern  forms, 
writes  me  that  Putorius  noveboracensis  is  numerous  on  Roan  Mount- 
ain but  that  cicognani  he  has  "  never  seen  from  any  locality  south 
of  the  lower  Hudson  Valley,  although  it  may  occur  in  Pennsyl- 
vania and  West  Virginia." 

Genus  MUSTELA  Linnaeus. 

34.  Mustela  pennanti  (Erxl.).    Fisher.     Pekan. 

There  is  little  doubt  that  the  Pekan  was  long  ago  exterminated 
in  East  Tennessee,  as  none  of  the  hunters  with  whom  I  conversed 
knew  of  such  an  animal.  Dr.  Merriam  includes  it  among  the 
Alleghenian  species  not  to  be  found  on  Roan  Mountain  in  1887. 
Audubon  and  Bachman"  speak  of  this  animal's  occurrence  in  the 
State  as  follows :  "  We  have  seen  several  skins  procured  in  East 
Tennessee  and  have  heard  of  at  least  one  individual  that  was 
captured  near  Flat  Rock  in  that  State,  latitude  35°." 

"  To  these  may  be  added  L.  vison  lutreocephalus  (Harlan)  which  Mr.  Bangs, 
(Proc.  Bos.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  1896,  pp.  1-6.)  considers  separable  from  true 
X.  vison  of  the  Boreal  zone.  The  latter  Mr.  Bangs  thinks  may  range  into 
the  higher  Alleghenies  of  North  Carolina.  On  this  basis  I  retain  the  name 
as  above  listed  under  No.  31. 

I'^Quad.  N.  Amer.,  1,  p.  314. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  199 

The  Pine  Marten,  Mustela  americana,  does  not  seem  to  have  been 
noted  farther  south  than  central  Pennsylvania  in  the  Allegheny 
Range,  no  records  for  Tennessee  or  N.  Carolina  being  extant,  to  my 
knowledge. 

Genus  MEPHITIS  Cuvier. 

35.  Mephitis  mephitica  elongata  Bangs.     Carolina  Skunk. 

Reported  to  be  rare  in  the  Mississippi  lowlands.  I  rarely  detected 
the  signs  of  this  animal  in  Tennessee,  though  every  one  seems  to  be 
acquainted  with  the  animal  in  all  localities  visited  except,  perhaps, 
on  the  summits  of  highest  mountains. 

Mr.  Bangs  has  separated^^  the  skunk  of  the  East  Canadian  fauna 
from  the  southern  animal,  giving  the  latter  a  new  subspecific  name, 
as  above. 

Family  URSID-aJ. 
Genus  URSTJS  Linnseus. 

36.  TJrsus  americanus  Pallas.     American  Black  Bear. 

Bears  are  now  very  scarce,  even  in  the  wildest  territory  of  the 
State,  but  formerly  this  species  was  wonderfully  plentiful  in  the  cane- 
brakess  of  West  Tennessee.  It  is  difficult  to  credit  the  straight  for- 
ward anecdotes  narrated  by  David  Crockett  of  his  experiences  with 
this  game  in  the  bottoms  of  Obion  County.  On  one  occasion  he 
killed  four  bears  in  one  day  and  105  in  less  than  one  year. 

The  hunters  at  Reelfoot  Lake,  think  they  are  all  killed  off  and 
say  that  none  have  been  shot  for  several  years.  Mr.  Miles  writes 
that  "  A  bear  was  killed  in  the  west  border  of  Haywood  County 
in  1865 — the  last  one  I  think — though  in  Lauderdale  County,  one 
is  occasionally  killed  now." 

Dr.  Merriam  found  bears  in  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains  in  1887, 
but  I  was  told  that  none  have  been  seen  on  Roan  Mountain  for 
several  years.  On  the  Cumberland  plateau  they  seem  to  have  been 
practically  exterminated. 

Family  CKTSTDM. 
Genus  TJROCYON  Baird. 

37.  Urocyoncinereoargenteus  (Miill.).     Gray  Fox. 

Found  all  over  the  State  but  said  to  be  supplanted  by  the  Red 
Fox  in  western  portions,  where  it  is  less  common  than  formerly.    It 


13 


Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  N.  Hist.,  1895,  pp.  1-7. 


200  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

sometimes  courses  over  the  balsam  belt  of  Roan  Mountain  when 
pursued  by  dogs,  but  does  not  reside  at  so  great  an  altitude. 

Genus  VULPES  Baird. 

38.  Vulpes  pensylvanicus  (Bodd.).     American  Red  Fox. 

Always  numerous  in  the  mountains,  the  Red  Fox  has  spread  with 
the  increasing  population  into  West  Tennessee,  where  it  was  un- 
known to  the  early  pioneers.  The  same  conditions  are  true  of  the 
Central  Basin  and  of  Middle  Kentucky. 

Mr.  Miles  calls  jt  common  in  his  locality  now,  though  it  was  intro- 
duced or  migrated  thither  only  forty  years  ago. 

Genus  CANIS  Linnfeus. 

39.  Canis  lupus  nubilus  (Say).    American  Wolf. 

In  1887  Dr.  Merriara  found  the  wolf  still  existing  in  the  Smoky 
Mountains.  One  was  seen  during  the  winter,  about  the  year  1883, 
near  Cloudland  Hotel.  A  few  may  yet  exist  in  the  southern 
Alleghenies,  but  they  are  exceedingly  rare. 

In  Middle  Tennessee  they  seem  to  be  extinct.  Their  status  in  the 
lowlands  of  West  Tennessee  may  be  gathered  from  the  following 
quotations  from  letters  sent  me  by  Mr.  Miles,  the  first  of  which  was 
the  result  of  a  publication  as  to  the  S{)ecific  identity  of  black  and  gray 
wolves  made  in  Forest  and  Stream  for  August  81,  1895:  "Since 
the  article  for  Forest  and  Stream  was  written  Major  Shaw,  an  old 
hunter  of  this  County,  tells  me  that  many  years  since  he  captured  a 
a  litter  of  seven  wolf  whelps,  three  of  which  were  gray  and  four 
black.  *  *  *  Our  present  wolf  is  larger  and  very  much  fiercer 
than  those  of  my  childhood,  at  least  those  specimens  were  which 
came  under  my  observation.  I  suppose  our  present  big  gray 
wolf  has  always  been  here  and  some  favorable  circumstance  must 
have  developed  his  numbers."  In  a  more  recent  note  Mr.  Miles 
announces  the  killing  of  two  wolves  by  poison  about  the  10th  of 
December,  1895,  within  seven  miles  of  Brownsville,  "by  a  man  who 
had  killed  hogs  and  heard  the  wolves  howling  near,  when  he  put 
out  poison  with  the  above  result." 

Summing  up  the  case  for  Lauderdale  County,  Mr.  Miles  says  the 
"  Large  Gray  "  is  "  common  "  (!)  ;  the  "  Small  Black  "  is  "  rare  " 
and  the  "Yellow  Medium,  very  rare." 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  201 

Family  PELID^. 
Genus  LYNX  Kerr. 

40.  Lynx  rufus  (Guld.).     Wild  Cat. 

This  species  is  yet  numerous  in  all  the  -wilder  tracts  of  country. 
It  is  common  in  the  swamps  and  bottoms  of  the  western  regions. 

41.  T  Lynx  canadensis  Kerr.     Canada  Lynx. 

With  no  little  hesitation,  I  include  this-  species  in  the  fauna  of 
the  Tennessee  on  the  statements  of  Prof  E  .1).  Cope.^*  He  says  : 
"  Like  the  Red  Squirrel,  the  Canada  Lynx  extends  to  the  southern 
limits  of  the  Allegheny  ranges,  occupying  the  highest  ground, 
though  apparently  not  so  restricted  to  the  elevations  as  the  first 
named.  It  is  distinguished,  by  the  name  catamount,  from  the 
Lynx  rufus  which  is  called  wild  cat  and  is  well  known  to  the 
hunters."  No  cotemporary  or  previous  writer  that  I  have  been  able 
to  consult,  confirms  these  statements  and  unless  Prof  Cope  examined 
specimens  it  is  probable  he  was  misled  by  the  statements  of  hunters. 

Genus  FELIS  Linnseus. 

42.  Telis  concolor  (L.).     Puma,  Panther. 

The  panther  appears  to  have  been  exterminated  in  all  parts  of  the 
State  except  the  most  impassable  brakes  and  "  harricanes  "  of  the 
bottoms  of  Lauderdale  County.  This  exception  is  made  on  the 
authority  of  Mr.  Miles,  who  is  confident  that  a  few  yet  exist  in  that 
locality. 

Order  INSECTIVORA. 

Family  TALPIDJE. 
Genus  SCALOPS. 

43.  Scalops  aquaticus  (L.).     American  Mole. 

No  moles  were  captured.  Their  underground  labors  in  Tennessee 
■were  in  frequent  evidence.  It  is  not  probable  that  any  other  form 
of  this  genus  is  to  be  found  in  the  State  than  the  one  prevailing  in 
our  Middle  States. 

Mr.  Miles  reports  the  mole  common  in  Haywood  County  "  where- 
ever  land  is  rich,  and  is  troublesome  in  that  he  burrows  in  the  rows 
and  destroys  growing  plants,  and  runs  tunnels  up  and  down  hill 
which  I  have  seen  in  one  season  wash  into  gullies  18  inches  deep." 
Any  one  who  has  noted  the  extreme  solubility  of  the  agricultural 


1^  Fauna  of  S.  Allegh.,  Amer.  Nat.,  1871,  p.  395. 
14 


202  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

soils  of  AVest  Tennessee  and  has  witnessed  the  complete  destruction 
of  large  areas  for  farming  purposes,  due  to  careless  tillage  and  heavy 
rainfall,  will  appreciate  the  significance  of  this  remark. 

Family  SORICID^. 
Genus  BLARINA  Gray. 

44.  Blarina  brevicauda  (Say).     Northern  Blarina. 

Specimens  from  the  summit  of  Roan' Mountain  correspond  closely 
in  size  and  color  to  Quebec  examples.  Those  taken  at  Harriman 
are  appreciably  smaller,  like  specimens  from  the  vicinity  of  Phila- 
delphia. Bellevue  skins  and  skulls  show  an  exactly  intermediate 
size  and  character  between  the  northern  animal  and  subspecies  caro- 
linensis.  As  in  the  east,  I  found  this  to  be  the  most  ubiquitous 
small  mammal  of  subterranean  habits. 

Specimens — Bellevue,  1 ;  Sawyer's  Springs,  1 ;  Harriman,  4 ; 
Roan  Mt.,  Carter  Co.,  2. 

45.  Blarina  brevicauda  carolinensis  (Bachman).     Southern  Blarina. 

The  southern  mole-shrew  inhabits  the  bottom  lands  of  West 
Tennessee  both  in  the  open  and  in  deep,  swampy  woods.  Typical 
specimens  from  the  shores  of  Reelfoot  Lake  and  Wolf  River  con- 
firm Dr.  Merriam's  recent  (1895)  diagnosis  of  this  subspecies  in 
North  American  Fauna,  No.  10.  Dr.  Merriam  records  (1.  c,  p.  14) 
a  specimen  from  Big  Sandy,  on  the  river  of  same  name  in  Benton 
County. 

Specimens — Samburg,  4;  Raleigh,  1. 

46.  Blarina  parva  (Say).     Least  Blarina. 

Prof  Baird  records  a  specimen  of  what  he  called  Blarina  exilipes 
from  Brownsville,  Tennessee,  obtained  by  Capt.  S.  Van  Vliet. 
Baird's  exilipes  being  proved  a  synonym  of  parva,  I  place  it  as  above. 
Dr.  Merriam^^  questions  if  Baird's  record  should  not  have  been 
Brownsville,  Texas.  No  evidence  to  the  contrary  being  given, 
and  the  habitat  of  parva  being  in  the  faunal  territory  occupied 
by  West  Tennessee,  I  feel  justified  in  accepting  Baird's  record  as 
it  stands.  I  did  not  secure  any  of  this  species,  nor  can  I  find  other 
records  of  its  occurrence  in  the  State. 

Genus  SOREX  Linnaeus. 

47.  Sorex  personatus  (Geoff.  St.  Hil.).     Masked  Shrew. 

In  the  deep  balsam  forests  which  crown  the  summit   of  Roan 

'*  N.  Amer.  Fauna,  No.  10,  p.  7. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  203 

Mountain  this  tiny  shrew  was  numerous.  Its  burrows  were  found 
under  decaying  logs  and  large  stones  in  moist  places  along  the 
bridle  path  leading  directly  from  Cloudland  to  the  Doe  River 
valley. 

Specimens — Roan  Mt.,  Carter  Co.,  4. 

48.  Sorex  fumeus  Miller.    Smoky  Shrew. 

Two  specimens  of  this  large  Sorex  were  taken  on  Roan  Mountain 
in  similar  situations  to  those  frequented  by  the  Masked  Shrew,  A 
large  number  of  specimens  of  both  species  were  taken  by  Dr. 
Merriam  and  his  assistants  on  the  North  Carolina  side  of  the  mount- 
ain. 

To  the  painstaking  and  intelligent  studies  of  my  friend  Gerrit  S. 
Miller,  Jr.'®  we  are  indebted  for  the  identification  and  naming  of  the 
Smoky  Shrew,  as  well  as  the  simplification  of  a  group  of  mammals 
whose  identity  and  nomenclature  had  become  so  confused  as  to  be  a 
byword  and  reproach  to  American  mammalogy. 

Specimens — Roan  Mt.,  Carter  Co.,  2. 

Order  CHIROPTERA. 
Family  VESPERTILIONID^. 

Genus  ATALAPHA  Rafinesque. 

49.  Atalapha  borealis  (Mull.).     Red  Bat. 

A  few  of  these  bats  were  noted  in  the  mountains  of  East  Tennessee. 
None  were  found  in  the  caves  nor  in  Mammoth  Cave.  Specimens 
from  Tyree  Springs  and  Kuoxville  are  recorded  in  the  catalogue  of 
the  National  Museum. 

Not  having  any  records  of  the  presence  of  the  Hoary  Bat,  Atala- 
pha  cinerea,  in  the  State,  it  may  be  mentioned  that  it  is  likely  to 
occur  either  as  a  migrant  or  resident  anywhere  east  of  the  Cumber- 
land plateau. 

Genus  VESPERTILIO  Linnaeus. 

50.  Vespertilio  lucifugus  (Le  C).     Little  Brown  Bat. 

I  am  informed  by  Messrs.  Brimley  of  Raleigh,  N.  C,  that  they 
received  four  specimens  of  this  bat  collected  by  J.  T.  Park  at  Warner, 
Hickman  Co.,  Tennessee.  One  was  taken  in  April,  another  in  July, 
the  rest  in  September. 

As  Dr.  H.  Allen  has  adopted  it,"  this  name  is  subspecifically  ap- 

^«N.  Amer.  Fauna,  No.  10,  pp.  38  and  50. 
"  Mon.  N.  Amer.  Bats,  1893,  p.  78. 


204  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

plicable  to  the  little  brown  bat  which  he  had  previously  called  stib- 
ulatus  in  the  first  monograph  and  to  which  he  now  applies  (p.  75) 
the  name  gryphus  of  F.  Cuvier.  Taking  for  granted  that  his  iden- 
tification and  choice  of  names  is  correct,  we  will  have  to  alter  their 
order  to  accord  with  sequence  of  publication,  V.  lucifugus  (1831) 
being  the  type  and  V.  lucifugus  gryphus  (1832)  the  subspecies.  But 
I  fail  to  discover  that  Dr.  Allen  has  indicated  in  what  respect  or  to 
what  geographical  or  faunal  areas  the  subspecies  in  either  case  shall 
be  distinguished  or  restricted.  The  doctor  apparently  accepts  gry- 
phus (p.  76,  last  par.)  as  "  the  name  of  the  eastern  species,"  but 
does  not  say  whether  he  means  lucifugus  to  represent  the  western 
form.  It  is  difficult  to  come  to  any  other  conclusion  than  that  he 
did  so  intend  it,  unless  the  trinomial  was  used  merely  to  indicate  a 
type  of  individual  variation  having  no  regard  to  faunal  distribution. 
Cuvier's  type  of  gr?'?//>/ms  came  from  New  York,  Leconte's  type  of 
lucifugus  appears  to  have  come  from  Georgia.  Granting  with  Dr. 
Allen  that  these  names  were  applied  to  the  same  species  of  eastern 
bat,  it  is  impossible  to  use  either  name  for  any  of  its  geographic  sub- 
species, and  hence,  Leconte's  having  priority,  Cuvier's  name  is 
merely  a  synonym. 

Genus  ADELONYCTERIS  H.  Allen. 

51.     Adelonycteris  fusca  (Beauv.).     Brown  Bat. 

I  found  this  bat  abundant  in  the  lowlands.  None  were  seen  on 
the  summit  of  Roan  Mountain.  Specimens  from  Hickman  County, 
are  recorded  by  the  Messrs.  Brimley.  It  is  found  on  the  Cumber- 
land plateau. 

Genus  VESPERTJGO  Keyserling  &  Blasius. 

62.  Vesperugo  carolinensis  (GeoflF.).    Carolina  Bat. 

This  is  a  common  form  in  the  caves  of  Kentucky  and  Tennessee 
but  is  not  as  abundant  there  as  Vespertilio  lucifugus.  Mr.  Park 
took  three  specimens  in  Hickman  County. 

Specimens — Vaughan's  Cave,  Bellevue,  3. 

Genus  NYCTICEJUS  Rafinesque. 

63.  Nycticejus  humeralis  (Raf.).     Rafinesque's  Bat. 

Five  specimens  of  this  animal,  taken  in  Hickman  County  by  Mr. 
Park  in  August  and  September,  have  been  identified  b*y  the  Messrs. 
Brimley.  . 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  205 

Genus  LASIONYCTERIS  Peters. 

54.  ILasionycteris  noctivagans  (Le  C).    Silvery  Bat. 

On  two  occasions  it  was  my  opinion  that  I  had  seen  the  Silvery 
Bat  in  Tennessee,  viz.  at  Sawyer's  Springs  and  on  Roan  Mountain. 
The  fluttering,  moth-like  flight  of  some  of  these  mountain  bats  was 
characteristic  of  the  peculiar  movements  of  noctivagans,  and  on  this 
identification  I  admit  it  here  with  a  query.  From  our  knowledge 
of  the  wide  distribution  of  this  species  in  North  America  there  is 
little  doubt  that  it  is  to  be  found  over  the  greater  part  of  the  State. 

Order  PRIMATES. 

Family  HOMINIDJE. 

Genus  HOMO  Linnaeus. 

55.  Homo  sapiens  americanus.     North  American  Indian. 

I  shall  make  no  apology  for  including  aboriginal  Man  in  a  fauna! 
list  of  the  native  and  feral  mammalia  of  Tennessee.  The  customary 
omission  of  the  genus  Homo  from  such  lists  finds  no  justification  in 
nature  or  in  science. 

For  accounts  of  the  history,  distribution  and  habits  of  the  native 
Indian  races  of  Tennessee,  the  reader  is  referred  to  Haywood's 
Natural  and  Aboriginal  History  of  Tennessee.  For  the  history  of 
their  extinction  no  references  are  necessary. 


206        *  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


March  3. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Two  hundred  and  fifty-eight  persons  present. 

Messrs  Morris  E.  Leeds  and  J.  S.  Stokes  of  Messrs  Queen 
&  Co.  gave  a  resume  of  investigations  relating  to  Roentgen  photo- 
graphy and  a  demonstration  of  the  processes  employed.  (No 
abstract). 


March  10. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Forty-nine  persons  present. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  publication  : — 
"  Summary  of  New  Liberian  Polydesmidse,"  by  O.  F.  Cook,  was 
presented  for  publication. 

"  The  Minerals  of  South  Carolina,"  by  J.  G.  Hartzell,  Jr. 

Two  Supposed  Nero  Trap  Dykes  in  Chester  County,  Pennsylvania. 
— The  following  communication  was  read  from  Dr.  Persifor 
Frazer  : — 

In  a  paper  read  before  the  Academy,  Feb.  1,  1896,  Mr.  Theo.  D. 
Rand  calls  attention  to  two  trap  dykes  which  he  thinks  have  thus  far 
escaped  notice.  The  writer  is  unable  to  ascertain  by  the  localities 
to  which  Mr.  Rand  refers,  the  beginning  of  the  one  said  to  be  in  the 
northern  half  of  the  County,  viz. :  "  Williams'  Quarry,  near  Aldham." 
The  trap  is  called  "  a  jDeculiar  porphyry  *  *  containing  the  variety 
of  silica  Vetsan  ;  "  and  it  is  said  that  "  a  rock  which  Mr.  Goldsmith 
has  pronounced  identical  occurs  near  Barneston  Station  on  the 
Waynesburg  branch  of  the  Penna.  R.  R."  In  the  working  town- 
ship map  used  by  the  writer  in  his  field  studies  of  the  geology  of 
Chester  County,  is  found  noted  a  porphyritic  quartzose  syenite.  In 
Report  of  Progress,  Second  Geological  Survey  of  Pennsylvania, 
Volume  C  4,  p.  248,  3d  paragraph  from  bottom,  a  quartz  porphyry 
is  also  noted  as  visible  in  j^lace  probably  about  half  a  mile  south  of 
Barneston  Station. 

The  second  dyke  which  begins  in  Downingtown  is  probably  the 
same  to  which  the  following  reference  is  made  (same  volume,  p. 
274).  "  At  several  points  on  the  road  leading  south  from  the 
Downington  R.  R.  station  occur  fragments  of  trap." 

Again  just  south  of  the  northernmost  apex  of  West  Marlboro'  town- 
ship and  within  a  short  distance  of  Doe  Run  the  existence  of  trap 
is  noted  on  the  working  field  township  map  of  the  writer,  as  is  also 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  207 

the  case  on  his  working  township  map  of  Cain  about  two  miles 
west  of  Downingtown. 

It  is  only  ftiirto  remark  that,  in  the  nature  of  things,  much  must 
be  discovered  as  time  goes  on  which  was  not  observed  by  the  last 
field  geologist.  New  cuts  are  made,  obscure  outcrops  are  made  dis- 
tinct by  continued  weathering,  etc. ;  yet  it  is  also  true  that  different 
observers  may  give  different  values  and  interpretations  to  the  same 
phenomena. 

The  writer  added  many  dykes  of  trap  to  those  already  recognized 
in  geological  maps  before  his  work  began,  but  he  refrained  in  a 
great  many  instances  from  connecting  together  scattered  locali- 
ties where  trap  fragments  occurred,  on  the  assumption  that  these 
represented  a  dyke,  because  he  was  often  unable  to  assure  himself  that 
these  fragments  were  anywhere  near  the  place  of  their  origin,  or 
uncertain  which  of  the  many  scattered-  localities  should  be  joined. 
In  a  country  so  much  denuded  as  that  of  Chester  Co.,  Pennsylvania, 
and  where  collections  of  surface  fragments  of  trap  occur  so  frequently, 
it  is  generally  hazardous  to  indicate  their  relations  to  each  other 
without  more  substantial  grounds  than  mere  geographical  position. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  a  very  large  number  of  such  indications 
which  appear  on  the  writer's  field  maps  were  never  transferred  to 
his  final  geological  map,  and  in  some  cases  not  alluded  to  in  the 
text,  because  of  the  difficulty  of  ascertaining  whether  or  not  they 
possessed  real  importance. 


March  17. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-eight  persons  present. 


March  24. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Twenty-nine  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Samuel  H.  Gilbert,  a  member,  March   20,   was 
announced. 


March  31. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Thirty-six  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Jean  Gundlach,  a  correspondent,  March,  1896, 
was  announced. 


208  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

A  paper  under  the  following  title  was  presented  for  publication  : — 

"  Dr.  Collett  on  the  morphology  of  the  cranium  and  the  auricular 
openings  in  the  north  European  species  of  the  Family  Strigidie; 
to  which  is  added  some  recent  opinions  upon  the  systematic  position 
of  the  Owls,"  by  R.  W.  Shufeldt,  M.  D. 

On  the  recommendation  of  the  Council  an  invitation  to  the 
Academy  from  the  University  of  Glasgow  to  participate  in  the 
celebration  of  the  fiftieth  year  of  the  Right  Honorable  Lord 
Kelvin's  tenure  of  office  of  the  Chair  of  Natural  Philosophy  therein 
was  accepted  and  General  Isaac  Jones  Wistar  was  appointed 
to  represent  the  Academy  on  the  occasion. 

On  a  Collection  of  Barnacles. — Mr.  H.  A.  Pilsbry  spoke  of  a  collec- 
tion of  barnacles  from  the  bottom  of  the  iron  ship  "  Puritan  "  of  Glas- 
gow, which  had  been  dry  docked  in  Cramp's  shipyard  after  a  voyage 
from  San  Francisco  to  Hong  Kong,  and  to  Philadelphia  via  Java  and 
India.  The  forms  represented  were  Balanus  tintinnahulum  L.,  B. 
tintinnahuluin  zebra  Darwin,  B.  tintinnahulum  spinosus  Gm.,  Tetra- 
ciitaporosa  jyatellaris  Darwin,  Lepas  anatifera  L.  and  L.  Hillii  Leach. 
The  forms  ranked  as  varieties  of  B.  tintinnahuluin  retain  their  in- 
dividuality perfectly,  although  growing  side  by  side  under  appar- 
ently identical  external  conditions,  so  that  their  differential  charac- 
teristics can  scarcely  be  attributed  to  unlike  environmental  factors. 
The  variety  of  Tetraclita  porosa  seems  to  be  a  rare  form,  originally 
described  by  Darwin  from  three  examples  taken  off  a  ship's  bottom 
in  Boston  by  Dr.  A.  A.  Gould.  It  is  very  unlike  the  ordinary  form 
of  the  species.  Specimens  of  Ostrcea  rivularis  Gld.  are  attached  to  some 
of  the  barnacles.  As  this  is  a  species  of  east  Asian  seas,  it  is  very 
probable  that  the  load  of  barnacles  was  obtained  in  China ;  although 
the  Balanidie  themselves  have  been  so  widely  diffused  by  commerce 
tliat  alone  they  afford  but  little  evidence  of  their  originnhpatria. 
The  sjDecimens  were  procured  and  presented  to  the  Academy  by 
Master  Lester  Bernstein. 

Pugnus  jyarvus. — Mr.  Pilsbry  also  spoke  of  a  remarkable  shell 
representing  a  new  genus  of  Tectibranchiate  mollusks,  Pugnus  par- 
vus Hedley,  of  which  a  specimen  from  Middle  Harbor,  near  Sydney, 
N.  S.  W.,  Australia,  was  exhibited.  The  shell  is  involute,  like  that 
oi  Bulla,  Haminea,  Ci/lichna  and  many  other  genera  of  Cephalas- 
pidea ;  but  it  differs  from  all  of  these  in  the  remarkable  features  of 
a  thickened  outer  lip  and  thrice-folded  columella.  These  characters 
caused  Mr.  Hedley,  its  describer,  to  consider  Pugnus  a  "  telescoped  " 
Ringicula.  All  other  Ringiculidre,  both  fossil  and  recent,  have  the 
spire  developed  ;  so  that  Pugnus  stands  unique  in  that  family  in  its 
depressed  and  concealed  spire.  The  generic  name  is  an  allusion  to 
the  resemblance  of  the  shell  to  a  clenched  hand. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  209 

The  following  were  elected  members : — 

E.  G.  Conklin,  Ph.  D.,  Louis  S.  Amonson,  Jacob  Reese,  A. 
Donaldson  Smith,  M.  D.,  Charles  L.  Phillips,  Walter  P.  Stokes  and 
Mary  T.  S.  Schaeffer. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed : — 


210  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


v-Y- 

2__ 

f>^ 

P 

-^\— 

r 

K^  — 

m 

V\\ 

r 

H- 

T=> 

HL__£-__/_ 

THE  CRYSTALLIZATION  OF  MOLYBDENITE. 
BY   AMOS   P.    BROWN. 

Although  molybdenite,  Mo  Sj,  has  been  known  to  mineralogists 
since  crystallography  was  first  studied,  its  crystalline  form  has  never 
been  satisfactorily  determined.  It  has  been  provisionally  assigned 
to  the  hexagonal  and  monoclinic  systems  by  different  authorities, 
the  general  opinion  being  that  it  is  hexagonal.      The  crystals  that 

have  thus  far  been  examined  can  be  ex- 
plained on  a  hexagonal  basis,  but  they 
are  not  sufficiently  lustrous  to  admit  of 
very  exact  measurement,  and  the  softness 
ofthe  substance  also  militates  against  the 
exact  determination  of  its  angles.  The 
locality  at  Frankford,  Philadelphia,  has 
long  been  known  to  mineralogists  as 
affording  well  crystallized  molybdenite,  and  I  have  for  some  years 
been  collecting  material  from  there  with  a  view  of  making  a  crystal- 
lographic  study  of  the  mineral.  Having  in  hand  some  crystals 
which  are  sufficiently  lustrous  for  measurement  on  the  reflecting 
goniometer  I  have  examined  them  and  obtained  some  positive 
results. 

The  crystals  are  hexagonal  in  habit,  consisting  of  six  sided  prisms 
and  barrel  shaped  crystals,  the  best  of  which  are  not  more  than 
6  mm.  in  diameter.  They  strongly  recall  some  mica  crystals  and 
seem  often  to  show  a  twinning  with  the  basal  pinacoid  as  the  composi- 
tion face.  A  number  of  crystals  were  examined,  the  one  giving  the 
best  results  being  a  nearly  perfect  hexagonal  plate  of  some  5  mm. 
diameter,  which  represents  a  broken  crystal,  only  one  termination 
being  preserved.  Nearly  all  of  the  faces  gave  fair  images  but  the 
basal  pinacoid  was  uneven,  due  to  slight  crumpling,  and  gave  several 
images.  By  observations  on  a  number  of  crystals  these  angles  could 
be  checked,  however.  The  pyramid  as  a  termination  was  not  ob- 
served, all  crystals  examined  showing  the  basal  termination.  The 
following  crystallographic  constants  were  observed : 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  211 

Molybdenite.     Hexagonal,  axis  c:=1.908;  0001  A1011=65°  35' 
Forms  observed  :  c  (0001,  oP),  o  (1011,  P,  0),  p  (2021,  2P,  2), 
q  (3031,  3P,  3\  m  (lOlO,  ooP,  i). 

Angles :  Observed.  Calculated. 

cp=  77°  15'  77°  13' 

(77°  17') 
(77°    7') 
e(^=:  81°  31'  81°  23' 

mm=  60°    2'  60° 

Besides  these,  the  angle  c  m  was  observed  as  89°  48'  and  several 
other  angles  near  90°  on  different  crystals,  but  in  general  the  images 
from  m  in  this  zone  were  imperfect.  The  angle  c  o=65°  35'  was 
obtained  in  the  same  crystal  in  adjacent  zones,  it  was  observed  on 
several  crystals.  Oscillatory  combination  and  probably  vicinal 
planes  render  the  measurements  ^somewhat  irregular  but  the  above 
shows  that  the  crystals  may  be  explained  on  a  hexagonal  basis. 
The  angle  commonly  observed  is  cp^=n°  13' and  has  been  reported 
as  75°.  This  seems  to  show  that  the  pyramid  2P,  (2021)  is  more 
common  than  the  others.  Many  crystals  only  show  two  pyramids 
and  the  basal  pinacoid,  in  others  the  prism  is  more  prominent. 
While  it  is  still  possible  that  better  crystals  may  show  the  mineral 
to  be  monoclinic,  the  above  results  are  of  sufficient  value  to  place 
on  record.  It  may  be  added  that  etching  figures  on  the  basal 
cleavage  seem  to  indicate  a  hexagonal,  perhaps  rhombohedral 
crystallization. 


212  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


THE  COLORING  MATTER  OF  THE  ARIL  OF  CELASTRUS  SCANDENS. 

BY   IDA    A.    KELLER. 

The  presence  of  different  pigments  manufactured  by  the  vege- 
table organism  has  forced  the  plant  world  upon  the  attention  of  the 
human  race  from  time  immemorial.  If  we  submit  the  colored 
parts  to  microscopical  examination  we  are  usually  confronted  by  one 
of  two  distinct  cases. 

Firstly,  we  may  find  that  the  pigment,  instead  of  pervading  the 
entire  cell,  is  found  only  in  certain  variously  shaped  bodies  wliich 
are  more  or  less  regularly  scattered  through  the  cell  contents.  The 
best  known  illustration  of  this  kind  is  to  be  found  in  ordinary 
leaves,  the  green  color  being  confined  to  the  chlorophyll  granule. 
Secondly,  if  we  examine  other  parts  of  plants  we  may  find  that  the 
coloring  matter  is  distributed  uniformly  throughout  the  cell  sap. 
The  blue  flower  of  the  Grape  Hyacinth  may  serve  as  one  of  the 
many  illustrations  of  the  latter  case.  Wherever  fixed  and  definite 
portions  of  protoplasm  subserve  a  special  function  within  the  plant 
cell,  these  may  be  considered  as  parts  of  a  unit  and  they  may  be 
termed  organs  of  the  cell.  In  addition,  then,  to  the  nucleus  we  may 
find  various  other  organs  as,  for  example,  the  colored  bodies  just 
referred  to.  A  distinction  must  be  made  between  such  differentiated 
portions  of  the  protoplasm  and  the  products  which  are  the  result  of 
their  activity,  between  the  colorless  protoplasmic  matrix  and  the 
colored  product  which  makes  it  conspicuous.  If  we  observe  e.  g.,  a 
living  cell  of  a  leaf  of  Elodea  Canadensis  we  find  as  organs  of  the 
protoplasmic  contents  the  nucleus  and  the  chlorophyll  granules  ;  as 
a  product  of  the  latter,  chlorophyll  and  finally  starch  as  a  result  of 
the  action  of  the  chlorophyll  in  response  tosatisfactory  external  con- 
ditions. Such  conditions  are  a  certain  amount  of  heat,  light,  moisture 
and  the  absence  of  any  injurious  factors  which  might  impede  the 
various  operations  manifested  in  life  activity. 

In  dealing  with  the  products  of  this  activity  we  come  to  a  problem 
of  great  complexity.  It  is  true  that  certain  phenomena  as 
witnessed  in  the  vegetable  cell  can  be  explained  by  known  prin- 
ciples of  physics  and  chemistry,  and  that  many  substances  for  which 
mankind  was  formerly  dependent  on  the  vegetable  organism  are  now 
manufactured  in  the  chemical  laboratory.      I  need  only  recall  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  213 

synthetic  preparation  of  alizarin,  alcohol,  indigo,  oxalic,  citric,  tar- 
taric and  salicylic  acids,  vanillin  and  finally  sugars,  to  call  to  mind 
a  host  of  further  illustrations.  On  the  other  hand  it  must  be  admit- 
ted that  this  victory,  great  as  it  is,  has  sometimes  been  overrated 
and  has  tended  to  make  the  scientist  overbearing  as  shown  by  his 
attempts  to  resolve  the  phenomena  of  life  into  a  simple  operation  of 
chemical  and  physical  forces,  without  taking  duly  into  consideration 
the  highly  organized  structure  of  the  protoplasmic  mass,  whose  har- 
monious operation  with  a  set  of  external  conditions  is  manifested  by 
what  we  call  life.  It  is  because  of  the  exceedingly  intricate  mechan- 
ism of  the  protoplasmic  structure,  of  whose  operations  we  know  very 
little,  that  our  knowledge  of  the  products  of  its  activity  is  still 
extremely  incomplete.  Only  in  such  cases,  when  we  can  obtain  pro- 
ducts capable  of  crystallizing,  can  we  with  any  certainty  state  that 
we  have  to  deal  with  chemical  individuals  whose  formulas  may  be 
ascertained.  If  amorphous  we  cannot  be  sure  but  that  we  have 
instead  of  one,  a  mixture  of  substances  more  or  less  closely  allied. 

Before  going  further  in  the  discussion  of  these  plant  products  a 
few  more  words  should  be  said  in  regard  to  the  organs  which  bear 
the  colors.  The  protoplasmic  corpuscles  have  been  appropriately 
designated  chromatophores,  which  name  is  now  generally  accepted. 
It  has  been  observed  that  as  a  rule,  yellow,  orange  and  brown 
(sometimes  blue)  coloring  matters  are  deposited  in  such  chromato- 
phores, while  white,  violet,  blue  and  red  (sometimes  yellow)  are 
usually  caused  by  a  solution  of  the  pigment  in  the  cell  -sap.  It  has 
been  found  desirable  to  make  a  distinction  between  the  kinds  of 
chromatophores.  They  are  for  convenience  classified  as  follows  : 
chloroplasts,  chromoplasts  and  leucoplasts,  the  latter  class,  which 
are  the  colorless  color  bearers,  being  one  of  the  contradictions  in 
which  the  systems  of  human  classification  abound.  The  bond  of 
sympathy  is,  however,  their  common  origin,  the  fact  that  one  may 
be  converted  into  the  other  according  to  the  conditions,  and  each 
one  can  originate  only  as  a  result  of  the  division  of  pre-existing 
chromatophores. 

Chloroplasts,  as  their  name  indicates,  are  the  green  bodies  which 
impart  the  green  color  characteristic  of  leaves  and  stems.  The 
pigment  in  this  case  can  be  readily  extracted  by  means  of  such 
solvents  as  alcohol,  ether  and  chloroform,  while  the  matrix  remains 
behind  as  a  definitely  shaped,  colorless  mass  of  protoplasm.  The 
pigment  itself  may  under  the  influence  of  various  factors,  external 
or  internal,  undergo  modifications  into  chemically  different  sub- 
stances, such  as  etiolin. 


214 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


Chromoplasts  include  all  colored  chromatophores,  not  green.  It 
may  be  seen  from  this  that  the  distinction  is  quite  an  arbitrary  one. 
Chromoplasts  may  originate  from  leucoplasts  or  chloroplasts.  This 
latter  case  can  be  easily  observed  in  the  ripening  of  many  fruits, 
as  they  change  from  green  to  red,  for  example,  apples  or  the  berries 
of  the  potato  plant. 

As  indicated  by  the  variety  of  colors  found  in  plants  we  have  to 
deal  with  a  number  of  chemically  different  substances.  The  litera- 
ture existing  on  these  pigments  is  not  very  satisfactory.  Although 
the  metamorphosis  of  the  chloroplasts  into  the  chromoplasts  may  be 
readily  observed  the  new  substances  resulting  from  this  metamor- 
phosis are  not  well  known.  This  past  summer  I  became  somewhat 
interested  in  the  red  color  of  fruits  and  collecting  among  others  those 
of  Ilex  verticillata,  I  found  that  they  turn  brown  in  50  per  cent 
alcohol,  those  of  Gaultheria  procumbens  turn  gray ;  those  of  Magno- 
lia glauca,  dark  brown ;  those  of  Lindera  Benzoin,  almost  black  ; 
those  of  Berberis  Thunbergii,  light  brown  ;  those  of  Cratcegus  cocci- 
vea,  dark  brown.  It  is  a  matter  of  general  observation  that  in  most 
cases  when  immersed  in  alcohol  the  red  color  disappears  and  changes 
to  gray,  black  or  intermediate  tints  and  this  no  doubt  is  due  to  a 
process  of  oxidation  of  the  pigment.  In  rare  instances,  however,  the 
red  color  does  not  seem  to  be  affected  by  alcohol  as,  for  examples,  the 
berry  of  Arisoeyna  triphyllum  and  the  aril  of  the  seed  of  Celastrus 
smndens.  The  latter  I  determined  to  submit  to  microscopical  and 
chemical  examination  and  the  following  are  the  results  of  my 
observations. 

The  coloring  matter  in  this  case  occurs  in  chromatophores.  The 
figure  reveals  the  following  anatomical  structure : — A  very  much 

thickened  cuticle  (c)  of  a  lemon  yellow 
color.  This  without  a  doubt  affects  to 
some  extent  the  tint  of  the  aril  which 
has  some  yellow  in  it.  Courchet'  states 
that  the  color  of  certain  fruits  is  entirely 
due  to  the  impregnation  of  pigment  in 
such  epidermal  thickenings  and  he  cites 
as  illustrations  Solatium  macrocarpum 
and  S.  racemiflorum.  Tiie  epidermis  (e) 
consists  of  a  layer  of  smaller  cells  of  a 
rather  uniform  size.     The   chromato- 


^  Courchet.  Recherches  sur  les  chromoleucites,  Annales  de  Sc.  Nat.,  Bot. 
VII,  Ser.  VII,  1888,  p.  301. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  215 

jihores  (c7i)  within  these  are  very  conspicuous.  They  are  rather 
closely  packed  together  and  lie  parallel  to  each  other.  In  color  they 
are  bright  red,  and  in  form  very  narrowly  spindle-shaped.  Below  the 
epidermis,  the  cells  constituting  the  rest  of  the  pulp  of  the  aril  are 
of  larger  dimensions,  and  the  chromatophores  seem  scattered  iri-egu- 
larly  through  the  cells.  The  drawing  shows  also  the  groove  (g)  be- 
tween the  arils  of  two  adjoining  seeds.  Attention  has  been  called  to 
the  fact  that  the  study  of  chromatophores  and  pigments  can  be  carried 
on  with  entire  certainty  only  within  the  living  cells  on  account  of 
their  ready  decomposition.  When  I  collected  my  material  I  had  not 
the  opportunity  of  careful  examination,  but  the  resistance  which 
this  tissue  manifests  to  powerful  reagents,  leads  me  to  conclude 
that  in  all  probability  the  arrangement  as  above  described  is  iden- 
tical with  that  of  the  living  material.  I  found  further  that  sections 
from  the  dried  seeds  did  not  show  any  difference  in  appearance 
from  that  represented  in  the  drawing. 

According  to  Zimmermann^  the  pigments  of  chromatophores  found 
in  phanerogams,  regarding  which  we  have  somewhat  definite  de- 
scriptions, are  as  follows : 

1.  Chlorophyll  green. 

2.  Carotin  including  chlorophyll  yellow. 

3.  Xanthin. 

4.  Coloring  matter  of  Aloe  flowers. 

Although  certain  reactions  are  characteristic  of  each  of  these  four 
pigments,  and  although  an  abundant  literature  exists,  at  least  so  far 
as  the  first  of  these,  chlorophyll  green,  is  concerned,  we  can  not  with 
any  justification  claim  even  such  knowledge  as  the  chemist  has  in 
reference  to  many  organic  compounds  of  the  various  complex  series. 
A  formula  is  attempted  only  for  carotin  which  is  said  to  be  C^g  Hjg. 
The  great  difficulty  in  investigating  these  pigments  lies  in  their  un- 
willingness to  crystallize.  Carotin  is  the  only  one  of  these  four 
which  occurs  within  the  vegetable  cell  in  crystalline  form,  and 
which  can  be  again  crystallized  when  extracted  from  the  plant.  In 
regard  to  amorphous  extractions  complete  certainty  is  always  want- 
ing as  to  the  puiity  of  the  product,  i.  e.,  whether  we  have  a  chemical 
individual  to  deal  with  or  with  a  mixture  of  more  or  less  closely 
related  compounds. 


^  Zimmermann,  Botanical  Microtechnique.  Translated  by  James  Ellis  Hum- 
phrey, N.  Y.,  1893. 


216  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

In  spite  of  these  discouraging  facts  this  field  of  research  seems  to 
me  well  worth  especial  labor  and  care  and  the  only  feasible  method 
is  to  continue  the  careful  investigations  of  Arnaud,  Courchet,  Im- 
mendorffand  Zimmermann  which  will  no  doubt  shed  further  light 
on  this  hitherto  dark  field,  of  interest  alike  to  the  botanist,  chemist 
and  physiologist. 

I  selected  the  aril  of  the  seed  of  Celastrus  scandens,  since  some  of 
the  peculiarities  of  the  pigment  are  well  marked  and  I  desired  to 
find  if  possible  its  place  in  Zimmermann's  four  pigments. 

Carotin  is  found  as  a  crystalline  secretion  in  the  root  of  Daucus 
Carota  also  in  red  flowers  and  fruits  of  other  plants.  It  imparts  a 
blood  red  color  to  carbon  bisulphide  in  which  it  is  readily  soluble 
and  from  which  it  may  be  obtained  in  the  form  of  a  crystalline  pre- 
cipitate by  the  addition  of  alcohol.  I  found  that  the  pigment  of  the 
aril  of  Celastrus  scandens  was  soluble  in  carbon  bisulphide  forming 
a  deep  red  solution,  but  no  precipitate  was  visible  in  the  addition  of 
alcohol.  After  evaporation  an  amorphous  sticky  mass  resulted  and 
it  will  thus  be  seen  that  it  differs  from  carotin  in  this  respect. 

In  using  various  well  known  solvents  I  found  their  effects  as 
follows  : 

1.  Water,  no  visible  effect. 

2.  Alcohol,  50  per  cent  no  visible  effect  on  chromatophores,  but 
the  solution  was  slightly  tinged  yellow. 

3.  Alcohol  absolute,  more  soluble;  the  solution  of  a  deeper 
tinge. 

4.  Ether,  about  like  50  per  cent  alcohol  in  color  but  a  greater 
amount  of  yellow  residue  left  on  evaporation.^ 

5.  Aceton,  about  like  50  per  cent  alcohol, 

6.  Chloroform,  much  more  soluble,  solution  deep  red. 

7.  Carbon  bisulphide,  similar  to  chloroform,  solution  deep  red. 
Carotin  "  according  to  Arnaud  is  insoluble  in  water,  almost  so  in 

alcohol,  very  slightly  soluble  in  ether,  and  most  so  in  chloroform 
and  carbon  bisulphide.  These  solutions  are  colored  yellow  to  orange 
yellow,  according  to  their  degree  of  concentration,  while  the  solution 
of  carotin  in  carbon  bisulphide  is  always  blood  red."  * 

'  It  is  possible  that  the  yellow  matter  with  which  the  cuticle  is  impregnated 
influences  to  some  extent  the  color  imparted  to  the  solvents.  This  requires 
further  attention. 

*  Zimmermann,  Microtechnique,  p.  102. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.   1896. 


PLATE  1. 


PILSBRY.    PLEUROTOMARIA    CROTALOIDES    Mort. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.,   1896. 


PLATE  n. 


PILSBRY.    NEW   SPECIES   OF    POLYGYRA. 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.   PHILA  ,   1896. 


PLATE  III. 


PILSBRY.    NEW   SPECIES    OF    POLYGYRA. 


PROC,  ACAD.  NAT    SCI.  PHILA,  1896. 


PLATE  IV 


STONE.    MOLTING  OF   BIRDS. 


PROC.   ACAD,   NAT.  SCI.   PHILA.   1896. 


PLATE  V. 


STONE.    MOLTING  OF   BIRDS. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  217 

Comparing  then  this  statement  with  what  I  have  observed  re- 
garding the  pigment  under  consideration  we  find  that  there  is  a 
close  similarity  as  to  its  solubility  and  that  of  carotin. 

With  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  the  chromatophores  changed 
first  to  a  greenish  color  and  then  to  a  decidedly  purple-blue.  This 
same  change  of  color  was  effected  when  concentrated  sulphuric  acid 
was  added  to  the  chloroform  solution.  With  iodine  (in  potassium 
iodide)  the  chromatophores  turned  blue-green,  like  the  color  char- 
acteristic of  the  Cyanophycess. 

According  to  Zimmermann*  with  a  solution  of  iodine  (e.  g.  aque- 
ous solution  of  iodine  and  iodide  of  potassium)  carotin  is  colored 
greenish  or  greenish-yellow  ;  with  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  first 
violet  and  then  indigo  blue. 

There  is  evidently,  therefore,  also  much  resemblance  between  the 
eflfect  of  iodine  and  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  upon  carotin  and 
the  red  pigment  of  Celastrus  scandens. 

Lacking,  however,  complete  correspondence  I  next  determined  to 
discover  if  it  approached  xanthin  more  closely  in  its  properties.  It 
differs  from  this  in  its  most  conspicuous,  although  on  that  account  by 
no  means'most  important  property,  its  color.  "Xanthin  occurs  in 
yellow  chromoplasts  in  amorphous  form,  and  especially  in  small 
granules.®  Its  alcoholic  solution  leaves  on  evaporation  a  wholly 
amorphous  resin-like  mass.  It  is  insoluble  in  water,  little  solu- 
ble in  ether,  chloroform  and  benzine  but  more  so  in  alcohol. 
With  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  the  isolated  pigment,  as  well  as 
the  chromoplast  takes  first  a  greenish  then  a  blue  color ;  with  iodine 
best  used  in  the  form  of  potassium  iodide  it  becomes  green.'" 

It  will  be  seen  from  this  that  while  the  red  pigment  of  Celastrus 
scandens  differs  from  xanthin  in  its  solubility  it  agrees  with  it  more 
closely  as  regards  the  eflfect  of  sulphuric  acid  than  does  carotin. 
Another  striking  resemblance  with  xanthin  is  the  resin-like  amorph- 
ous residue  left  when  the  solvents  are  evaporated. 

The  behavior  of  the  coloring  matter  of  the  aril  of  the  seed  of 
Celastrus  scandens  with  different  solvents  and  other  reagents  leads 

5  Ibid.,  p.  102. 

®  It  apj^ears  to  me  of  no  great  importance  to  distinguish  between  pigments 
occurring  in  solution  or  in  granules  so  long  as  we  know  no  more  about  solu- 
tions than  we  do  at  present.  We  consider  pigments  in  solution  if  present  in 
such  a  fine  state  of  division  that  the  individual  particles  can  no  longer  be  recog- 
nized.    It  must  be  admitted  than  such  an  distinction  is  purely  arbitrary. 

"  Zimmermann,  Microtechnique,  p.  103. 

15 


218  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

US  to  conclude  that  in  it  we  find  a  connecting  link  between  the 
crystallizing  carotin  of  red  flowers  and  fruits  and  the  amorphous 
resin-like  xanthin  of  yellow  flowers,  and  these  observations  tend  to 
confirm  Courchet's  views  that  the  pigments  of  yellow  and  red 
chromatophores  having  the  property  of  turnins:  blue  or  green  with 
sulphuric  acid,  thus  distinguished  from  all  other  pigments,  repre- 
sent a  group  of  closely  related  compounds-  whose  composition  cer- 
tainly demands  further  investigation.^ 

^  Courchet,  Eecherches  sur  les  chromoleucites.  Annales  de  Sc.  Nat,  Bot.  VII 
Ser.  VII,  1888,  p.  291. 

^  The  coloring  matter  described  in  this  paper  is  also  remarkable  for  its  resis- 
tance to  the  action  of  alkalies.  Boiling  with  potassium  hydroxide  does  not  de- 
compose it. 


1896.]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  219 

April  7. 
Mr.  Theodore  D.  Rand  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-five  persons  present. 

The  Serpentines  of  Eastern  Pennsylvania. — Theodore  D.  Rand 
called  attention  to  the  specimens  of  serpentine  presented  this  even- 
ing. They  had  been  collected  from  numerous  localities  in  south- 
eastern Pennsylvania.  He  regarded  them,  as  stated  in  a  paper  read 
before  the  Academy,  as  belonging  to  at  least  two  groups  :  one  bor- 
dering the  ancient  gneiss ;  the  other,  which  he  believed  to  be  much 
more  recent,  occurring  in  the  mica  schists  and  gneisses. 

The  former  are  altered  igneous  rocks,  either  pyroxenic  or  chryso- 
litic,  the  chief  material  being  enstatite,  found  often  but  slightly  al- 
tered ;  the  latter  of  more  doubtful  and  perhaps  varied  origin,  deter- 
mination of  which  will  require  much  more  study  of  thin  sections 
under  the  microscope. 

The  bright  yellow  serpentine  from  Easttown  Township,  Chester 
Co.,  is  probably  altered  chrysolite  chiefly,  while  that  from  Fritz 
Island,  near  Reading,  is  an  altered  dolomite.  That  from  Brinton's 
Quarry;  near  West  Chester,  contains  brouzite,  not  entirely  changed. 

The  Radnor  serpentine  is  chiefly  altered  enstatite,  but  specimens 
presented  show,  also,  a  change  from  asbestus  into  serpentine. 

No  rock  is  better  suited  than  serpentine  to  show  that  minerals 
have  a  life  history,  that  they  are  not  the  unchangeable  substances 
commonly  supposed,  for  serpentine  seems  to  be  a  stage  in  the  life  of 
many  minerals  of  which  magnesia  is  a  large  component,  while  ser- 
pentine, in  its  turn,  decomposes  into  soil,  or  occasionally,  indeed  in 
this  region  frequently,  into  quartz. 

Perido- Steatite  and  Diabase. — Dr.  Florence  Bascom  stated  that 
she  had  recently  made  examination  of  thin  sections  from  the  ser- 
pentine of  the  belt  running  northeast  and  southwest  from  Chestnut 
Hill  through  the  soapstone  quarry  to  a  point  northeast  of  Bryn 
Mawr,  and  also  of  the  trap  of  the  Conshohocken  dyke. 

The  serpentine  was  from  the  quarries  on  the  Black  Rock  road, 
between  Mill  Creek  and  the  Roberts  road.  The  belt  lies  wholly 
■within  the  mica  schists  on  the  southeast  side  of  the  Pre-Carabrian 
gneiss.  The  serpentine  proved  to  be  derived  from  a  peridotite  and 
not  from  a  dolomite  or  from  an  enstatite  rock,  as  in  other  cases 
mentioned.  The  thin  sections  show  olivine  grains  with  the  charac- 
teristic alteration  to  serpentine  on  their  peripheries ;  much  talc  or 
steatite  is  present.  The  rock  is,  therefore,  a  perido-steatite.  The 
dark  green  crvstals,  conspicuous  in  the  hand  specimens,  often 
twinned,  are  pseudomorphs  after  olivine,  and  not  after  staurolite, 
the  forms  of  each  resembling  the  other  closelv. 


220  PEOCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  rock  of  the  Conshohocken  dyke  is  medium-grained,  compact, 
of  a  gray  color  on  the  fresh  surface,  a  rusty  green  on  the  weathered 
surface.  In  thin  sections  it  shows  itself  a  typical  diabase,  with 
plagioclase,  pyroxene,  ilmenite  and  apatite,  as  primary  constituents, 
and  chlorite,  serpentine,  scanty  biotite  and  calcite,  as  secondary 
constituents.  The  structure  is  characteristically  ophitic:  slender 
idiomorphic  lath-shaped  feldspars  form  a  net  work,  while  allotrio- 
morphic  pyroxene  fills  the  angular  spaces.  The  feldspar  is  twinned 
according  to  the  albite  law,  and  its  optical  properties  indicate  that 
it  belongs  to  the  labradorite-bytownite  end  of  the  series.  The  py- 
roxene is  a  colorless  nonpleochroic  monoclinic  variety.  The  cleav- 
ages and  low  extinction  angle  point  to  diallage  as  the  species.  Apa- 
tite is  the  oldest  constituent.  Ilmenite  shows  slight  alteration  to 
leucoxene.  The  rock  is  very  like  the  Pine  Rock  diabase  described 
by  Dana  in  Amer.  Jour.  Sci.,  Vol.  42,  1891,  page  82. 


April  14. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-seven  persons  present. 


April  21. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair 

Thirty-six  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  A  Revision  of  the  Polar  Hares  of  America," 
by  Samuel  N.  Rhoads,  was  presented  for  publication. 


April  28. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Thirty-three  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  A  Remarkable  Central  American  Melanian," 
by  H.  A.  Pilsbry,  was  presented  for  publication. 

The  death  of  William  Hunt,  M.  D.,  a  member,  April  19,  1896, 
was  announced. 

Dr.  Persifor  Frazer  was  appointed  to  represent  the  Academy 
at  the  Seventh  Session  of  the  International  Congress  of  Geologists 
to  be  held  in  St.  Petersburg  in  1897. 

An  invitation  to  participate  in  the  Mining  and  Geological 
Millennial  Congress,  to  be  held  at  Budapest,  September  25th  and 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  221 

26th,  was  accepted  and  Prof.  Angelo  Heilprin  was  appointed 
to  represent  the  Academy  on  the  occasion. 

The  following  were  appointed  to  constitute  the  Hayden  Geo- 
logical Memorial  Committee  for  1896: — Dr.  Persifor  Frazer,  Prof. 
Angelo  Heilprin,  Mr.  Benjamin  Smith  Lyman,  Prof.  J.  P.  Lesley 
and  Mr.  Theodore  D.  Rand. 

Mr.  William  H.  Roberts  was  elected  a  member. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed : — 


222  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


A  BIOGRAPHICAL  SKETCH  OF  JOHN  ADAM  RYDER. 
BY    HARRISON   ALLEN,    M.    D. 


John  Adam  Ryder,^  the  first  child  of  his  parents,  was  born  Feb- 
ruary 29, 1852,  near  Loudon,  Franklin  County,  Pennsylvania.  His 
parents  are  Benjamin  Longenecker  Ryder  and  Anna  Frick  Ryder. 
On  his  father's  side  he  was  descended  from  Michael  Ryder  who  was 
one  of  three  sons  whose  father  came  from  England  and  settled 
near  Cape  Cod,  Massachusetts.  Michael  Ryder  removed  from  Mas- 
sachusetts to  Pennsylvania  where  his  descendents  have  since  lived. 
His  paternal  grandmother,  Elizabeth  Longenecker,  the  wife  of  Adam 
Ryder,,  was  of  German  origin.  She  was  born  in  Lancaster  County^ 
Pennsylvania. 

Anna  Frick  Ryder,  the  mother  of  John  Ryder,  was  born  in 
Maryland.  She  is  in  part  of  Swiss  descent.  The  maternal  grand- 
mother Anna  Kelso  was  of  Scotch  origin.  Her  great  grandfather 
was  William,  Earl  of  Kelso.  At  the  time  of  the  persecution  of  the 
Presbyterians  in  Scotland  during  the  reign  of  Charles  II,  the  Earl 
of  Kelso,  together  with  his  wife,  infant  son  and  brother  James,  were 
compelled  to  leave  Scotland.  They  sought  refuge  in  Ireland,  where 
James  Kelso  was  captured,  taken  to  London  and  executed.     The 

'  In  the  preparation  of  this  sketch  the  list  of  questions  prepared  bv  Mr. 
Gallon  in  his  monograph  on  "  Men  of  Science  "  was  sent  to  the  family  of  Dr. 
Kyder  and  the  details  in  all  respects  are  based  upon  the  answers  received. 
The  expressions  of  opinion  of  the  speakers  at  a  meeting  held  at  the  Acad- 
emy's Hall,  April  10,  1895,  have  been  frequently  quoted.  The  words  "  Me- 
morial Pamphlet,"  when  following  a  quotation  refers  to  a  brochure  entitled 
"  In  Memoriara,"  which  comprises  addresses  delivered  at  that  meeting  in 
the  following  order :  Dr.  Harrison  Allen,  Dr.  Bashford  Dean,  Prof.  Horace 
Jayne,  Prof.  E.  D.  Cope,  Mr.  H.  F.  Moore  and  Prof.  W.  P.  Wilson.  The 
brochure  was  printed  for  private  distribution  by  a  few  admirers  of  Dr. 
Byder  in  the  fall  of  1895.  The  writer  desires  to  express  his  acknowledgments 
to  many  of  Dr.  Ryder's  associates  for  information,  especially  to  Rev.  Jesse  Y. 
Burk,  Secretary  of  Board  of  Trustees  University  of  Pennsylvania,  Mr.  W.  C. 
Seal  of  Philadelphia,  Prof.  J.  S.  Kingsley  of  Tuft's  College,  Massachusetts, 
Mr.  Edward  Brooks,  Superintendent  of  the  Public  Schools  of  Pennsylvania, 
and  Mr.  Herbert  A.  Gill,  Secretary  of  the  United  States  Fish  Commission. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  223 

estates  were  confiscated.  A  grandson  of  William  Kelso,  above 
referred  to,  came  to  America. 

[t  will  be  thus  seen  that  Dr.  Ryder  was  twice  removed  from  an- 
cestors who  combined  English,  Scotch,  German  and  Swiss  traits. 

Dr,  Ryder's  father  was  by  training  a  farmer.  He  became  inter- 
ested in  horticulture  and  at  one  time  conducted  a  large  nursery. 
His  talents  for  invention  are  of  an  exceptional  order;  he  has  im- 
proved mechanical  devices  for  preserving  and  curing  fruits,  vege- 
table and  animal  products,  and  has  become  widely  known  in  con- 
nection with  their  manufacture  and  introduction. 

Dr.  Ryder's  inventive  ability  can  be  traced  in  great  measure  to 
his  father  and  remotely  to  the  Longenecker  branch  of  the  family. 
His  mother,  however,  possesses  inventive  skill  in  no  mean  degree. 
Ryder  had  no  taste  for  music  ;  in  this  respect  he  resembled  his 
mother,  since  the  taste  was  well  developed  in  the  father.  He  had  a 
natural  facility  for  drawing,  although  he  never  cultivated  it  beyond 
what  was  necessary  for  the  illustration  of  his  papers  and  for  the 
class  room.  This  talent,  also,  is  traceable  to  his  fiither.  His  taste 
for  natural  history  is  a  direct  inheritance  from  his  mother.  While 
Dr.  Ryder  never  became  much  interested  in  medicine,  many  phases 
of  his  researches  are  so  closely  allied  to  this  science  that  he  may  be 
said  to  have  inherited  the  taste  from  his  father,  who,  although  never 
having  studied  medicine  systematically,  had  that  turn  of  mind 
which  is  constantly  tending  to  contemplate  the  nature  of  disease.  A 
paternal  aunt  of  Dr.  Ryder  studied  medicine.  She  was  never  grad- 
uated. Her  medical  opinion  was  frequently  sought  for  and  valued 
in  the  community  where  she  lived.  She  was  also  of  an  inventive 
turn  of  mind. 

Dr.  Ryder  early  exhibited  a  taste  for  natural  history.  When 
three  years  old  he  was  constantly  bringing  into  the  house  brightly  col- 
ored stones,  insects  and  other  natural  objects.  At  eight  years  he 
knew  the  botanical  names  of  all  the  plants  in  his  father's  nursery. 
While  very  young  he  was  noted  for  a  habit  which  distinguished 
him  throughout  life,  namely,  of  always  having  his  mind  occupied 
with  something  apart  from  the  duties  in  hand  ;  thus,  while  helping 
his  father  at  pruning  or  grafting,  he  would  recite  aloud  passages 
from  a  favorite  author,  a  copy  of  which  would  be  found  in  his  pocket. 
On  one  occasion  his  father  hearing  hearty  laughter  asked  him  the 
cause  of  his  mirth.  The  boy  replied  he  wondered  how  Diogenes 
felt  living  in  such  a  small  place  as  a  tub,  and  what  fun  he  must 
have  had  searching  for  the  honest  man. 


224  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Every  farmer  in  those  days  kept  a  few  swarms  of  bees.  AVhile 
Mr.  Ryder  was  not  a  professional  apiculturist,  he  knew  in  common 
with  his  neighbors  a  good  deal  about  the  raising  of  bees.  Ryder 
developed  an  interest  and  without  being  specially  instructed  became 
proficient  in  the  care  of  bees,  and  throughout  life  often  reverted  to 
their  habits  for  many  points  in  the  economy  of  insects. 

At  three  years  of  age  he  began  to  receive  instruction  from  his 
maternal  grandmother  from  whom  he  early  mastered  the  rudiments 
of  German.  He  attributed  his  subsequent  fluency  in  German  (for 
he  could  speak  it  like  a  native)  to  this  early  impression.  A  little 
book  entitled  "Biblische  Naturgeschichte  fiir  Kinder"  bears  his 
name  on  the  cover  with  the  date  of  1860. 

Ryder  spent  the  life  usual  to  a  country  boy.  He  possessed  great 
energy  of  body  and  was  fond  of  walking,  rarely,  if  ever,  using  a 
horse  to  ride,  although  the  stable  was  at  his  command.  He  attended 
the  country  school  from  the  age  of  six  or  seven  until  his  fifteenth 
year,  Avhen  he  ran  away.  Soon  afterward  he  was  sent  to  the  Acad- 
emy and  then  to  the  Normal  School  at  Millersville  from  which  he 
also  ran  away,  and  did  not  return  home  but  lived  the  life  of  a  tramp 
for  some  days  before  he  was  detected.  He  was  severely  punished 
for  both  these  escapades.  It  appears  that  Ryder  Avas  always  very 
sensitive  and  never  associated  with  boys  of  his  age  in  the  sports  cus- 
tomary to  youth,  but  wandered  about  alone  through  the  woods  and 
meadows  collecting  insects  and  plants.  He  soon  earned  the  nick- 
name of  "  crazy  John."  In  the  end  his  father  prudently  inter- 
viewed the  principal  of  the  Academy  and  made  special  arrangements 
which  enabled  Ryder  to  live  on  more  agreeable  terms.  But  he  was 
unhappy  under  restraint.  Class  work  was  distasteful  to  him  and 
discipline  of  any  kind  resented.  In  order  to  secure  his  obedience 
it  was  sometimes  necessary  to  give  him  directions  adverse  to  those 
which  it  was  intended  for  him  to  obey.  Preferring  to  study  in  his 
own  way,  he  spent  the  greater  portion  of  his  time  in  the  library  of 
one  of  the  local  literary  societies.  He  read  every  book  it  contained. 
He  was  geatly  influenced  by  Horace  Mann's  "  Thoughts  for  a  Young 
Man,"^  a  copy  of  which  he  procured.  In  1875  in  writing  to  his 
brother  he  said  "  be  careful  of  this  book,  five  dollars  would  not  buy 
it,  if  I  were  unable  to  get  another."     In  1868  when  in  his  sixteenth 

^  "  A  Few  Tlionghts  for  a  Young  Man  :  a  Lecture  delivered  before  the  Bos- 
ton Mercantile  Library  Association  on  its  29th  Anniversary.  By  Horace 
Mann.     Boston  :  Ticknor,  Reed  and  Fields,  1850. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  225 

year,  he  wrote  home  asking  for  a  microscope,  books  on  natural  his- 
tory, chemical  apparatus,  etc.  His  restless  spirit  caused  him  to 
drop  out  of  the  school  for  good  after  a  few  months. 

He  taught  school  in  the  neighborhood  of  Loudon  and  afterward 
in  the  High  School  of  the  county  for  three  years.  He  was  quite  suc- 
cessful and  was  much  esteemed  by  all  who  were  brought  in  contact 
with  him. 

We  now  find  Ryder  in  his  twenty-second  year  with  the  best 
equipment  it  was  possible  to  secure  for  him  in  a  rural  district.  His 
tastes  were  defined,  and  he  at  once  made  up  his  mind  to  devote  him- 
self to  the  study  of  science.  This  decision  was  quickened  by  the 
failure  of  his  father  in  business,  so  that  Ryder  was  thrown  entirely 
upon  his  own  resources.  Of  a  proud  disposition,  he  refused  all 
assistance  from  his  relatives,  and  learning  that  the  Jessup  Fund  of 
the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  afibrded  assist- 
ance to  young  men  who  were  desirous  of  devoting  themselves  to  the 
study  of  natural  history,  he  came  to  Philadelphia  in  the  spring  of 
1874,  and  appealed  to  Mr.  Thomas  Meehan,  an  old  friend  of  his 
father,  for  advice.  Mr.  jNIeehan  states  that  Ryder  visited  him  at  his 
residence  in  Germantown.  His  funds  were  low,  and  to  save  money 
he  had  walked  the  entire  distance,  twelve  miles,  from  Philadelphia. 
Mr.  Meehan  was  interested  in  Ryder,  who  was,  however,  urged  not 
to  attempt  to  live  on  the  small  amount  of  five  dollars  a  week  per- 
mitted by  the  fund.  But  Ryder  was  not  to  be  deterred.  He  felt 
confident  that  he  could  in  some  way  manage,  and  accordingly, 
armed  with  a  letter  of  introduction,  he  visited  the  Academy  and 
made  formal  application.  This  was,  at  first,  unsuccessful,  1)ut  in 
the  latter  part  of  the  year  he  was  duly  appointed.  He  remained  in 
the  Academy  as  a  beneficiary  of  the  Fund  for  six  years. 

Little  is  known  of  his  private  life  during  the  greater  j^art  of  this 
time.  In  1879,  Mr.  J.  S.  Kingsley,  now  Professor  of  Biology  in 
Tuft's  College,  Massachusetts,  was  his  associate,  and  through  him  it 
is  ascertained  that  Ryder  lived  on  the  top  floor  of  No.  1118  Chest- 
nut Street.  His  chamber  and  laboratory  were  one.  Upper  rooms 
in  business  blocks  were  then  cheap,  and  food  at  moderate  prices, 
offered  for  the  use  of  employes  of  newspaper  offices  in,  the  neighbor- 
hood, could  be  obtained  day  and  night.  The  markets  and  restaur- 
ants of  Philadelphia  furnish  plain,  wholesome  food  at  rates  which 
compare  favorably  with  those  in  any  American  city.  Meals  at 
fifteen   cents  each  are  important  factors  in  solving  a  problem  of 


226  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

living  on  seventy  cents  a  day.  It  was  the  custom  of  the  proprietor 
of  the  restaurant  frequented  by  Ryder  to  put  aside  for  him  the  oys- 
ter shells,  which,  after  each  meal,  were  inspected  for  organisms.  In 
this  way  he  discovered  the  sponge  Camaraphysema.  Doubtless  the 
work  on  the  habits  and  food  of  the  oyster,  on  which  Ryder's  fame  in 
a  measure  rests,  began  in  these  desultory  studies. 

It  was  a  time  of  formative  plans.  Among  these  may  be  recalled — 
an  educational  scheme  by  which  the  teachers  in  the  public  schools 
were  to  be  prepared  for  imparting  the  elements  of  biology  to  their 
pupils  ;  a  course  of  popular  lectures  at  the  Wagner  Institute ;  and  a 
series  of  papers  on  natural  history  for  a  Philadelphia  J)aper.  None 
of  these  came  to  anything. 

Such  a  life  in  a  region  of  stores  and  warehouses  is  well  enough  dur- 
ing the  week.  The  days  and  nights  are  separated  by  the  changes  in 
light — but  not  by  changes  in  habit.  But  on  Sunday  the  business  part 
of  a  city  is  but  little  better  than  a  desert.  Ryder  was  in  the  habit 
of  spending  this  day,  when  the  season  favored  his  so  doing,  in  the 
suburban  districts,  or  in  Fairmount  Park.  It  was  on  such  excur- 
sions he  discovered  Scolopendrella  and  Eurypauropus. 

The  previous  education  of  Ryder  was  one  inadequately  qualifying 
him  for  the  career  of  a  naturalist.  This,  indeed,  is  not  less  than  that 
required  to  equip  a  student  for  any  intellectual  career  whatsoever. 
How  immense  the  labor  when  one  is  compelled  to  equip  himself!  The 
naturalist  must  be  a  linguist  (for  there  is  scarcely  a  modern  Euro- 
pean language  which  may  not  possess  a  treasure  for  his  needs)  ;  he 
is  all  the  better  for  being  a  draughtsman ;  he  should  command  a 
good  literary  style ;  he  should  be  a  mathematician  and  physicist. 
Ryder,  in  these  preparatory  years,  attempted  all  these  things  but  the 
last.  His  endeavors  to  acquire  new  languages  and  a  good  literary 
style  were  unending.  One  of  his  favorite  pastimes  was  to  read  an 
essay  of  Addison  twice  and  then  write  out  the  essay  from  memory. 
He  would  then  compare  his  sketch  with  the  original.  His  tastes  in 
art  were  not  formed,  and  he  rarely  alluded  to  the  subjects  embraced 
among  the  humanities. 

Mr.  W.  P.  Seal,  the  well-known  aquarium  expert,  was  of  great 
value  to  Ryder  at  this  time  in  bringing  him  all  the  unusual  speci- 
mens he  detected  while  making  collections  of  fresh  water  fishes  and 
plants  in  the  neighborhood  of  Philadelphia.  At  the  end  of  his  ser- 
vice in  the  Academy,  Ryder  had  contributed  thirty-one  papers,  most 
of  which  were  based  upon  studies  made  in  the  Museum  or  on 
low  forms  of  life. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  227 

In  1880,  the  National  Government  was  desirous  of  having  investi- 
gations prosecuted  in  behalf  of  the  United  States  Fish  Commission  on 
the  life-history  of  the  American  food-fishes  and  other  aquatic  animals, 
especially  their  embryology  and  growth,  the  character  of  their  food 
in  the  early  as  well  as  the  later  stages  of  life.  In  the  judgment  of 
Prof.  Baird,  who  was  at  that  time  Commissioner,  no  one  in  the 
country  possessed  the  qualifications  to  meet  the  provisions  of  such 
investigations  in  so  high  a  degree  as  Dr.  Ryder. 

He  was  at  once  invited  to  undertake  the  work,  which  not  only 
gave  him  an  opportunity  of  systematizing  his  studies  (these  were 
already  embracing  the  higher  problems  in  biology),  but  had  the 
advantage  of  placing  him  in  a  better  paid  position. 

It  is  true  that  up  to  this  date  Ryder  had  given  no  special  atten- 
tion to  fishes,  but  he  had  obtained  a  general  knowledge  of  the  sub- 
ject at  the  Academy,  his  inherited  talent  for  invention  lent  itself 
readily  to  the  details  of  field-work,  while  his  acquaintance  with 
the  lower  forms  of  aquatic  life  fitted  him  for  the  study  of  the  food 
of  fishes,  the  study  of  their  young  stages,  their  parasites,  etc' 

Dr.  Ryder  always  referred  to  this  period  with  interest.  His  first 
detail  was  to  the  field,  but  in  1882,  Prof.  Baird  transferred  him  to 
the  National  Museum,  occasionally  only,  assigning  him  to  field- 
work.  He  was  extraordinarily  active  during  the  six  years  he  re- 
mained on  the  Commission.  He  contributed  twenty-nine  papers  on 
the  oyster  and  oyster-culture,  and  fifty  papers  on  the  development 
of  fishes,  their  food  material  and  methods  of  development.  All  his 
contributions  were  carefully  prepared  and  showed  extensive  knowl- 
edge of  the  subjects  treated.  He  discovered,  in  1888,  a  byssus  in 
a  young  stage  of  the  long  clam  Mya  arenaria.  Prof.  Baird,  in 
commenting  on  this  discovery  in  his  report  for  that  year,  believed  "  it 
to  be  of  economic  importance  since  the  young  individuals  now  can 
be  freely  handled  and  transported."  jNIr.  Bashford  Dean  remarks  : 
"  I  have  heard  it  said  that  Dr.  Ryder  had,  in  his  scientific  work, 
grown  up  with  the  Commission  ;  it  might,  I  think,  be  said  even  as 
justly  that  the  Commission  had,  in  a  measure,  grown  up  with  him."* 
His  personality  and  methods  had  stamped  themselves  upon  every 

'(1)  The  following  papers,  prior  to  1880,  related  to  Dr.  Ryder's  contribu- 
tion to  ichthyology  :  "On  the  Origin  of  Bilateral  Symmetry  and  the  Numer- 
ous Segments  of  the  Soft  Rays  of  Fishes  ;  "  "  Phosphorescence  of  very  Young 
Fishes  ;  "  "  The  Psorosperms  found  in  Aphredodirus  sayanus." 

*  Memorial  Pamphlet. 


228  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

officer  of  the  Commission  to  which  he  had  been  originally  attached 
as  an  expert.  He  "  merited  the  confidence  and  esteem  of  every  one 
from  the  Commissioner  to  the  humblest  attendant." 

On  the  occasion  of  his  resignation,  1886,  Prof.  Baird  expressed 
hiin.self  in  a  personal  letter  in  these  words  :  "  In  view  of  the  many 
years  of  your  connection  with  the  Fish  Commission,  and  the  valu- 
able services  which  you  have  rendered  by  the  exercise  of  your  pro- 
fessional skill  and  ability,  I  accept  your  resignation  with  very 
great  regret."  His  work,  however,  on  the  Commission,  did  not  at 
once  cease.  He  was  employed  in  May  and  June,  1888,  to  investi- 
gate the  sturgeon  fisheries  in  the  Delaware  River.^  During  the 
remainder  of  the  summer  of  the  same  year,  he  had  charge  of  the 
station  at  Wood's  Hole. 

His  interest  in  the  study  of  Cetacea  began  -while  on  the  Commis- 
sion. Although  his  work  on  this  subject  was  never  extensive,  per- 
haps no  other  group  of  observations  better  illustrate  the  higher 
characteristics  of  his  mind. 

In  1886,  it  was  determined  by  the  authorities  of  the  University  of 
Pennsylvania,  at  the  suggestion  of  Prof.  Horace  Jayne,  to  found  a 
chair  of  Comparative  Histology  and  Embryology.  As  stated  by 
Prof.  Jayne,  "  It  was  seen  that  a  course  was  needed  which  would 
give  students  a  thorough  knowledge  of  comparative  microscopic 
anatomy,  together  with  the  development  of  the  tissues  and  of  the 
different  kinds  of  animal  forms.'"'  The  chair  was  offered  to  Dr. 
Ryder  and  accepted,  though  ''  he  hesitated  at  first,"  to  again  quote 
Prof.  Jayne,  "  because  he  mistrusted  his  power  to  teach  and  handle 
large  classes  of  students,  a  mistrust  which  was  never  shared  by  his 
friends."  In  many  respects,  the  change  from  the  duties  of  a  bio- 
logical expert  on  the  Fish  Commission  to  those  of  a  professorial 
position  was  beneficial.  He  was  now  enabled  to  systematize  bis 
time,  and  permitted  to  extend  the  range  of  his  inquiries.  By  re- 
newal of  associations  at  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences,  he  was 
assisted  also  in  keeping  thoroughly  in  touch  with  the  progress  of  his 
favorite  science. 

In  illustration  of  the  zeal  with  which  he  prepared  himself  for  his 
new  duties,  the  following  extract  is  taken  from  a  letter  written  to 
Mr.  Seal,  from  Chambersburg.  "  I  am  embracing  an  opportunity 
for  the  collection  of  embryos  of  warm-blooded  vertebrates,  which  I 

^Report  of  Fish  Commission,  Bulletin,  1888,  p.  231. 
*  Memorial  Pamphlet. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  "     229 

have  never  enjoyed  until  this  season,  and,  unless  one  can  give  his 
whole  time  to  the  work  of  opening  hundreds  of  females  with  great 
care,  and  have  the  means  and  time  to  preserve  the  material  ob- 
tained, it  is  but  very  little  use  to  bother  with  the  subject.  I  have 
eviscerated  about  five  hundred  rats,  mice,  field-mice,  moles,  bats  and 
musk-rats.  I  have  a  fine  lot  of  embryos  of  all  stages  nicely  pre- 
served. Besides  this  I  have  obtained  two  hundred  and  fifty  spar- 
row's eggs  in  all  stages  of  incubation,  which  I  have  also  put  in  good 
condition." 

After  an  experience  of  nine  years,  terminating  only  in  his  death, 
it  can  be  said  of  him  that  all  the  expectations  raised  at  the  time  of 
his  appointment  were  more  than  realized.  He  proved  himself  to  be 
a  diligent  teacher  and  an  esteemed  colleague.  As  matters  appear  to 
be  arranged  for  men  of  Ryder's  attainments,  a  university  position  is 
the  best  available.  Speaking  for  the  personal  side  of  his  career,  it 
may  be  said  of  him,  as  I  am  sure  he  might  have  said  for  himself, 
that  to  receive  the  respectful  admiration  and  affection  of  pupils  and 
to  influence  for  good  the  mental  development  of  youth,  is  for  any 
man  a  sufficient  reward.  A  former  pupil,  Mr.  H.  F.  Moore,  says  of 
him  :  "  What  he  may  have  lacked  in  some  of  the  usual  attributes 
of  a  successful  teacher  was  more  than  compensated  for  by  his 
keen  sympathy,  his  painstaking  care  and  his  skill  with  crayon  and 
pencil.  If  he  had  found  a  point  of  interest  in  his  work,  he  usually 
invited  us  to  enter,  and  would  unfold  to  us  his  hopes  and  aspira- 
tions with  the  enthusiasm  and  simplicity  of  youth."  Yet,  after  all 
is  said,  one  must  agree  with  his  friend,  Mr.  W.  V.  McKean,  that 
"  Ryder  was  essentially  the  kind  of  investigator  that  it  would  have 
been  a  public  benefit  to  have  established  in  an  amply  endowed  uni- 
versity chair,  so  that  he  might  be  entirely  free  to  pursue  his  re- 
searches unhindered  by  any  mere  task  work." 

Dr.  Ryder  enjoyed  perfect  health  until  1882,  when  he  contracted 
malaria  while  engaged  in  some  researches  in  connection  with  his 
work  on  the  Fish  Commission,  at  Ridge,  Maryland.  He  sufl^ered 
from  a  recurrence  in  1888,  while  residing  in  Philadelphia.  About 
this  time  dyspepsia  announced  itself.  He  suffered  greatly  and  be- 
came much  emaciated.  In  the  summer  of  1890  he  visited  Europe, 
but  returned  scarcely  at  all  improved.  He  had  an  attack  of  the  pre- 
vailing influenza  in  1894,  and  from  this  time  more  serious  and  ob- 
scure impairment  of  the  general  health  ensued.  He  died  March 
26,  1895,  after  an  acute  illness  of  a  few  days,  aged  forty-three 
years. 


230  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Dr.  Ryder's  death  was  unexpected,  and  expressions  of  regret  were 
universal.  The  daily  papers  published  detailed  accounts  of  his  life 
and  services.  Immediately  after  the  death,  theBoard  of  Trusteesof  the 
University  held  a  meeting,  at  which  Dr.  S.  Weir  ^Mitchell  made  a  feel- 
ing announcement.  The  Board  then  passed  the  following  resolution  : 
"  The  Trustees  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  deplore  the  loss 
sustained  by  it  in  tbe  death  of  John  A,  Ryder,  Ph.  D.,  Professor  of 
Comparative  Histology  and  Embryology.  Called  to  that  Chair  in 
1886,  he  quitted  for  it  a  congenial  field  of  labor  under  the  United 
States  Fish  Commission,  in  which  he  had  rendered  great  service  to 
the  Government,  and  acquired  for  himself  a  world-wide  reputation. 
Thenceforth,  he  devoted  himself  equally,  and  with  a  fidelity  and 
effectiveness  that  ended  only  with  his  life,  to  the  work  of  a  teacher 
and  that  of  an  investigator.  His  characteristic  traits  were  modesty, 
unselfishness,  and  sincerity  in  the  search  for  truth.  To  these  were 
added  a  rare  talent  for  investigation,  strong  intellectual  capacity, 
and  unremitting  industry  ;  and  these  inured  not  only  to  the  benefit 
of  the  school  in  which  he  taught,  but  to  the  distinct  advancement, 
both  in  theory  and  in  application  to  the  science  of  biology  to  which 
his  life  was  consecrated." 

The  funeral  services  were  conducted  by  Prof.  George  F.  Fuller- 
ton,  Vice-Provost,  and  the  Rev.  Dr.  H.  C.  McCook.  His  body  was 
cremated. 

A  memorial  meeting,  held  in  the  hall  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
>Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  April  10th,  was  participated  in  by  mem- 
bers of  the  faculty  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania,  representatives 
of  the  American  Philosophical  Society,  the  United  States  Fish 
Commission,  and  the  Academy.' 

Dr.  Ryder  was  elected  a  member  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sci- 
ences of  Philadelphia,  January  29, 1878,  and  of  the  Biological  Section 
of  that  body  November  15,  1886.  He  was  Director  of  the  Section 
from  1886  to  1888.  He  was  elected  a  member  of  the  American 
Philosophical  Society,  December  17,  1886.  The  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania conferred  upon  him  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy, 
1886.  He  was  also  a  member  of  the  following  societies:  The 
Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia  (life  member)  ;  the  American 
Morphological  Society ;  the  American  Society  of  Naturalists ;  the 
American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science ;  the  Asso- 
ciation of  American  Anatomists,  and  the  Historical  Society  of  Penn- 
sylvania. 

'  See  note  on  page  222. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  231 

II. 

« 

Dr.  Ryder  was  a  man  of  restless  mental  activity.  Plan  after  plan 
was  discussed  in  his  early  letters.  No  defence  was  offered  for  this 
eagerness  of  spirit.  On  the  contrary,  he  says  in  one  of  his  outbursts  : 
"  I  see  more  worlds  ahead  of  me  to  conquer,  so  that  I  have  little 
time  to  attend  to  number  one,  that  often  restive  and  troublesome 
person  who  is  always  reaching  for  toys  he  ought  not  to  have,  greatly 
to  the  disadvantage  of  more  serious  matters."  Circumstances  an- 
nulled most  of  his  numerous  enterprises,  but  the  ideas  were,  without 
exception,  admirable,  and  some  of  them  were  afterward  realized  by 
others.  In  1879,  he  proposed  to  establish  in  Philadelphia,  in  con- 
junction with  Mr.  W.  C.  Seal,  a  depot  of  material  for  biological 
laboratories  and  class-room  demonstrations.  It  was  intended  that 
Mr.  Seal  would  collect  and  preserve  the  specimens  which  Dr.  Ryder 
would  undertake  to  identify  and  to  furnish  all  other  information. 
It  was  <lesigned  to  embrace  marine  and  fresh-water,  as  well  as 
terrestrial  forms.  In  association  with  his  friend,  Mr.  J.  S.  Kingsley, 
he  at  one  time  thought  of  writing  a  book  on  the  infusoria,  a  work 
that  yet  rernains  a  desideratum.  Dr.  Ryder  had  a  ready  knowledge 
of  the  group.  In  later  years  he  constantly  reverted  to  it  for  illustra- 
tion in  his  studies  of  the  movements  of  protoplasm.  A  third  under- 
taking on  the  embryology  of  fishes  was  proposed.  It  never  went 
further  than  the  title-page.  In  1887,  he  seriously  contemplated  a 
text-book  on  general  embryology.  It  was  to  be  "  copiously  illus- 
trated and  to  set  forth  the  principles  from  new  points  of  view."  To 
this  task  he  intended  devoting  two  or  three  years.  In  1893,  he 
published,  under  the  auspices  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania,  a 
pamphlet  entitled  "  The  Synthetical  Museum  of  Comparative  x\nat- 
omy  as  the  Basis  for  a  Comprehensive  System  of  Research." 

It  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  Dr.  Ryder,  in  his  active  and  versa- 
tile career,  never  wrote  an  extended  memoir.  Everything  he  pre- 
pared for  the  press  was  the  direct  outcome  of  the  practical  tasks 
upon  which  he  was  officially  engaged. 

His  work  in  zoology^  was  not  large.  Reference  to  the  bibli- 
ography shows  that  twelve  papers  may  be  so  classified.     He  once 

®Dr.  Ryder  made  a  few  observations  in  physiological  botany.  Early  in  his 
career,  viz.,  1877,  he  noted  the  disposition  of  the  tendrils  of  Cocculus  indicus 
to  twine-  (Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1877,  3).  In  1879  he  observed  the  honey-glands 
of  the  leaves  of  Catalpa,  and  the  habits  of  bees  respecting  them.  (Proc  A.  N. 
S.,  1879,  6  ;  Pastime,  1881,  II,  8;  Am.  Nat.,  1878,  4.) 


232  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

said,  "  The  species  makers  are  caviare  to  me."  But  be  himself  did 
not  escape  the  fate  of  most  biologists  in  the  making  of  species. 

I  have  given  mj'  impressions  of  his  disinclination  to  study  species 
elsewhere  :'  "  In  competent  hands  the  elucidation  of  species  is  not,  as 
it  has  opprobriously  been  said  to  be,  a  dullard's  task  of  taking  an 
inventory  of  nature,  but  the  study  of  the  ultimate  forms  which  those 
organisms  assume  which  breed  true.  The  shifting  of  color  schemes, 
the  exhibition  of  the  effects  of  food  and  climate  on  size  iu  whole  or 
in  parts,  and  of  other  causes  by  which  minute  differentiations  are 
started  and  maintained,  are  of  unending  interest,  and  worthy  of  the 
best  powers  of  the  naturalist.  If  Ryder  had  been  more  closely  iden- 
tiOed  than  he  was  with  the  careers  of  the  great  academicians  who 
had  preceded  him,  it  would  in  no  whit  have  detracted  from  the 
value  of  his  philosophical  labors.  One  cannot  but  regret,  if  for  no 
other  reason  than  for  his  health's  sake,  that  he  discontinued  those 
fruitful  excursions  to  our  woods,  ponds  and  rivers,  by  which  he  con- 
tributed so  notably  to  our  micro-fauna." 

While  Dr.  Ryder  did  not  identify  himself  with  zoology,  his  repu- 
tation may  be  said  to  rest  in  great  part  upon  his  labors  on  the 
morphology  of  the  early  stages  of  the  development  of  fishes.  This 
work,  for  the  most  part,  represents  that  accomplished  by  him  as  an 
expert  on  the  Fish  Commission.  His  interest  in  the  subject  of  the 
nature  of  species  was,  however,  a  deep-seated  one,  and  he  was  con- 
stantly reviewing  masses  of  data  which  he  had  accumulated  in  at- 
tempting to  explain  the  tenets  of  evolution.  That  these  attempts 
should  have  been  largely  in  the  direction  of  dynamics  was  to  be  ex- 
pected, since  he  was  enabled  to  apply  to  the  problems  his  talent  for 
mechanics  and  invention.  He  also  had  at  hand  the  conclusions  of 
many  contemporaries  who  were  with  him  eagerly  seeking  for  a 
hypothesis  of  evolution  not  embraced  in  that  of  natural  selection. 

As  early  as  1874,  he  wrote  :  "  I  think  I  have  discovered  a  law 
which  offers  a  way  to  the  solution  of  the  variation  of  forms  in  animal 
life.  This  law  I  propose  to  call  the  law  of  the  dynamics  of  phylo- 
geny.  In  reading  over  Herbert  Spencer's  brilliant  essay  on  the  cir- 
culation of  sap  in  plants  and  the  formation  of  wood,  I  saw  the  solu- 
tion of  the  problem.  Here  is  field  enough  for  a  Darwin.  I  almost 
shrink  from  the  task  when  I  consider  its  magnitude.  Cleavage  of 
muscular  fibre;  the  processes  of  bone  ;  the  arrangement  of  the  bony 
layers ;  the  change  of  form  and  length  and  of  position  of  bony  pro- 

*  Memorial  Pamphlet. 


1896]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  233 

cesses;  their  relations  as  a  whole;  their  relations  to  the  muscles; 
their  form,  arrangements,  etc.,  all  proclaim  a  common  law :  while 
every  abnormality,  injury,  reparative  expedient,  still  further  strength- 
ens it  in  my  mind,  and  is  the  only  thing  that  will  demonstrate  to 
the  world  the  truths  of  the  doctrines  of  unity  of  law  and  universal 
evolution.  It  completes  Darwin's  work  on  a  grander  scale  than 
Darwin  ever  dreamed  of.  It  still  further  declares  that  there  is  one 
eternal  ever-active  cause,  operating  in  lines  of  constant  and  mathe- 
matical precision.  If  Dr.  Haughton,  of  Cambridge,  can  demon- 
strate the  mathematics  of  the  bones  and  muscles,  surely  some  one 
else  can  study  the  dynamics  that  creates  them." 

His  first  work  in  speculative  biology  was  an  attempt  to  explain 
by  such  reasoning  a  law  of  reduction  of  digits  in  the  mammalia.^" 
In  the  same  vear  he  endeavored  to  establish  a  dvnamical  theorv  to 
account  for  the  modifications  in  the  forms  of  tooth  structure  and  to 
correlate  this  structure  with  the  shapes  of  the  lower  jaw  and  other 
parts  of  the  skull.  In  the  following  year  he  discussed  the  mechanical 
genesis,  degeneration  and  coalescence  of  vertebral  centra  in  a  gigan- 
tic extinct  armadillo. 

He  developed  a  theory  on  the  origin  of  the  amnion  in  1 886,  and  his 
explanation  of  the  difierent  types  of  placentae  in  1887.  In  1889  he 
defended  the  thesis  "  that  the  segmentation  of  the  soft  rays  of  the 
fins  of  fishes  are  simply  fractures  due  to  flexures,  and  that  on  the 
caudal  fin  they  possess  probably  the  same  direction  as  the  inter- 
rayomeric  fissures."^^  Ryder's  bibliography  contains  fourteen  titles 
of  papers  which  illustrate  similar  lines  of  reasoning. 

In  the  same  year  we  have  evidence  of  additions  to  his  methods, 
for,  while  keeping  to  the  lines  already  indicated,  he  added  others  of 
a  difierent  character,  and  sustained  by  broadly  contrasted  methods 
of  expression.  Allusion  is  made  especially  to  his  studies  of  the  con- 
tractility of  protoplasm,  which  is  first  mentioned  in  his  paper,  "  On 
the  Fore  and  Aft  Poles,  the  Axial  Ditferentiation  and  a  Possible 
Anterior  Sensory  Apparatus  of  Yolvox  minor"  and  in  his  paper  on  the 
"  Origin  and  Meaning  of  Sex."  These  papers  began  a  series  which 
(included  in  the  bibliography  under  numbers  174, 186, 190  and  191) 
dealt  not  so  much  with  problems  in  dynamics  as  with  the  old  vital 
doctrines,  or,  as  would  be  expressed  in  modern  phrase,  metabolism. 
"  The  Origin  and  Meaning  of  Sex  "  appeared  in  the  Biological  Bul- 

10  Law  of  Digital  Reduction,  Proc.  A.  X.  S.,  1877. 
"  E.  D.  Cope,  Memorial  Pamphlet. 

16 


234  PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

letin,  Uuiv.  of  Penna.,  1889.  Extensions  of  opinion  were  printed 
in  tlie  Proceedings  of  the  Academy,  1889,  and  in  the  American 
Naturalist,  1889,  501.  He  held  that  over-nutrition  led  to  all  forms 
of  sexual  reproduction  ;  that  the  male  and  female  elements  are  con- 
trasted in  their  tendency  to  undergo  segmentation — the  female  ele- 
ment having  lost  the  power  to  undergo  such  segmentation  spontane- 
ously (excepting  in  parthenogenesis), — while  the  male  element  is 
accompanied  by  an  increase  of  segmental  power,  -^  ^  -^  ^ 
"  Sex  probably  arose  simultaneously  and  independently  in  both 
female  and  male  as  soon  as  certain  cells  of  coherent  groups  became 
over  nourished,  and  incapable  of  further  segmentation  unless 
brought  into  contact  and  fused  with  the  minute  male  element,  or 
one  which  is  the  product  of  an  increase  of  segmentational  power 
which  is  transferred  to  the  female  element  in  the  act  of  fertilization." 
Important  applications  were  made  of  the  hypothesis  to  the  study  of 
variation,  the  evolution  of  sexual  characters,  and,  as  the  author  be- 
lieved, a  consistent  and  simple  theory  of  inheritance  which  is  in 
harmony  with  all  the  facts  of  reproduction.  At  this  time  he  was  in 
a  state  bordering  on  exaltation.  "  I  sat  up  late  last  night  after  the 
whole  thing  flashed  across  my  mind  in  an  instant,"  he  writes,  "  and 
did  not  sleep  for  two  hours  after  I  went  to  bed  because  my  brain 
was  going  like  a  dynamo,  thinking  out  detail  after  detail  of  my  hy- 
pothesis. *  *  *  *  Wolfe  and  Schwann  mark  two  eras  in  the 
history  of  hypothesis.  I  shall  mark  a  third  if  I  live  to  complete 
the  sketch  of  the  vast  hypothesis.  *  *  *  *  My  disappoint- 
ments vanish  into  the  uttermost  inane  when  I  think  of  what  it  has 
been  possible  for  me  to  achieve." 

After  such  strong  evidence  of  his  belief  in  the  value  of  this  theory, 
it  is  hard  to  understand  how  he  practically  dropped  the  subject. 
Subsequent  to  the  dates  above  given,  I  have  come  across  no  refer- 
ence to  it,  nor  is  any  mention  made  of  the  matter  in  the  estimates 
of  his  work  that  have  appeared  since  his  death. 

It  is  impossible  to  understand  Ryder's  attitude  toward  evolution, 
without  regarding  his  disbelief  in  the  "  cult "  usually  known  as  Weis- 
mannism,  which  embraces  the  opinions  that  acquired  characters 
cannot  be  transmitted,  and  that  a  portion  of  each  organism  is  car- 
ried unchanged  from  parent  to  offspring.  He  said,  in  his  paper  on 
sex,  "  The  hypothesis  which  assumes  that  the  germ-plasma  is  pre- 
cociously set  aside  in  order  to  render  it  unmiscible  with  the  somatic 
plasma,  and  therefore  immortal,  is  based  upon  a  fundamental  error 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  235 

of  interpretation  of  the  facts  of  morphology."  In  another  place,  an 
address  entitled  "  Dynamics  in  Evolution,"  1893,  he  said,  "  experi- 
mental investigations  in  embryology  will  make  no  solid  progress 
until  the  mischievous  influence  of  such  speculations  have  been  eradi- 
cated from  the  minds  of  the  present  generation."  These  opinions 
remained  unmodified  to  the  day  of  his  death.  Perhaps  the  best  ex- 
pression of  his  views  can  be  found  in  a  lecture  delivered  at  "Wood's 
Hole,  1894,  and  a  second  lecture  entitled  "A  Dynamical  Hypothe- 
sis of  Inheritance." 

The  last  phase  of  his  scientific  life  is  the  most  instructive,  namely, 
that  relating  to  the  application  of  geometry  and  the  differential  cal- 
culus to  the  study  of  organic  forms.  The  idea  that  anatomy  and 
mathematics  can  be  of  mutual  assistance  generally  comes  to  savants 
too  late  for  practical  use.  Against  the  example  of  Helmholtz  we  cite 
many  failures.  Mathematics  came  to  John  Goodsir  too  late  for 
anatomy,  and  anatomy  to  Fechner  too  late  for  mathematics.  When 
Ryder  saw  the  necessity  of  preparing  himself  in  these  sciences 
(for  his  early  training  had  excluded  them),  he  set  to  work  to  supply 
the  defect  with  characteristic  energy.  He  studied  geometry  and  the 
calculus  in  spare  hours.  He  became  enthusiastic  for  them.  He 
declared  geometry  to  be  the  noblest  of  the  sciences.  He  read  the 
writings  of  Lord  Kelvin  carefully ;  his  admiration  for  them  was 
unbounded.  At  the  time  of  Ryder's  death,  two  works  lay  on  the 
bed,  one  was  a  text-book  on  the  diflferential  calculus,  the  other  a 
volume  of  Lord  Kelvin's  works. 

It  is  difficult  to  fix  a  time  when  the  mathematical  explanation  of 
the  mechanics  of  evolution  occurred  to  him.  We  have  seen  that  he 
was  influenced  by  Haughton  as  early  as  1874.  If  we  can  draw  an 
inference  from  the  reading  of  the  paper  entitled  "  The  Fore  and  Aft 
Poles  of  Volvox  mi)ior,"  previously  quoted,  and  again  the  essay 
"  The  Polar  Differentiation  of  Volvox  minor  "  and  "  Specialization  of 
Possible  Anterior  Sense  Organs"  (No.  174,  Bibliography),  the  idea 
apparently  suggested  itself  by  studies  in  the  early  Academy  days  on 
the  infusoria  and  later  on  the  development  of  simple  organisms. 
The  same  conception  occurs  in  his  papers  on  "  Energy  in  Biological 
Evolution  ;  "  "  Of  the  Representation  of  the  Relative  Intensity  of  the 
Conflict  Between  Organisms ;  "  "  Energy  as  a  Factor  in  Organic 
Evolution  ;  "  "  Mechanical  Genesis  of  the  Form  of  the  Fowl's  Egg  ; " 
"  The  Adaptive  Forms  and  Vortex  Motions  of  the  Substance  of  the 
Red  Blood  Corpuscles  of  Vertebrates  ;  "  "  The  Correlation  of  the 


236  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Volumes  and  Surfaces  of  Organisms."^^  One  of  the  last  demonstra- 
tions he  made  was  at  a  meeting  of  the  Bibliographical  Club  of  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania,  when  he  exhibited  contractile  films  of 
gelatin  in  illustration  of  the  mechanical  conditions  underlying  the 
problem  of  the  arrangement  of  the  convolutions  of  the  brain. 

In  January,  1890,  he  writes  :  "  It  is  my  hope  to  reduce  the  doc- 
trine of  evolution  into  a  simple  realization  of  Newtonian  principles. 
The  three  great  Newtonian  laws  of  motion  are  at  the  bottom  of  the 
whole  matter.  Some  day  I  shall  be  able  to  tell  a  great  deal  that  I 
have  kept  to  myself  in  order  to  test  its  truth.  *  *  *  *  lam 
engaged — and  will  be  hereafter  almost  entirely — in  determining  the 
factors  and  processes  which  have  effected  the  evolution  and  diverg- 
ence of  species.  *  *  *  *  I  have  at  last  worked  out  a  new 
theory  of  inheritance  which  must  ultimately  replace  those  of  Weis- 
mann  and  Darwin,  or  at  least  furnish  the  foundation  by  which  the 
data  and  phenomena  of  variation  and  inheritance  can  be  co-ordi- 
nated with  the  great  universal  principle  of  the  doctrine  of  the  con- 
servation of  energy.  The  speculations  of  Darwin,  Haeckel,  Weis- 
mann.  Brooks,  DeBries,  Strassburger  and  Nageli  looking  to  a  theory 
of  inheritance  are  irreconcilable  with  the  fundamental  postulates  of 
physical  science,  and  must  be  abandoned.  This  also  renders  the 
conflict  between  the  hypothesis  of  Darwin  and  those  of  Lamarck  one 
of  primary  importance,  and  sharply  defines  the  line  of  battle  be- 
tween the  thinkers  who  range  themselves  under  the  banner  of  one 
or  the  other  of  these  prophets  of  transform  ism." 

While  it  is  impossible  to  say  what  Dr.  Ryder  would  have  accom- 
plished in  his  attempt  to  use  mathematics  as  a  medium  of  expression 
of  biological  problems,  this  much  can  be  said,  not  only  for  him,  but 
for  all  others  similarly  placed,  that  a  course  of  training  in  geometry 
and  the  higher  mathematics  should  be  a  part  of  the  equipment  of 
the  student  in  biology.  It  does,  indeed,  seem  pitiable  that,  ascend- 
ing the  heights  of  knowledge,  he  finds,  as  he  nears  the  top,  that  the 
key  which  he  believes  can  alone  open  the  temple  erected  there  has 
been  left  behind. 

III. 

Dr.  Ryder  was  five  feet  eleven  inches  high,  of  a  slender,  slightly- 
stooping  figure.     While  spare  he  had  a  robust  physique.     He  was 

12  See  Bibliography,  Nos.  182,  184,  186,  187,  189,  and  especially  Nos.  190, 
191,  192,  195,  199,  200,  204,  205,  205  and  207. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  237 

of  nervous  temperament.  His  complexion  was  light — the  hair 
flaxen.  He  was  plain — almost  careless — in  his  dress.  He  had  a 
habit  of  sitting  cross-legged  and  swinging  one  foot  when  deeply 
engaged  in  thought  or  study.  He  was  of  a  genial  disposition  and 
enjoyed  gatherings  with  his  students  after  class  hours,  or  discussions 
with  his  colleagues  and  friends  at  the  Academy  and  other  places. 
His  learning  was  great,  especially  in  contemporary  literature,  and 
nothing  appeared  to  give  him  so  much  pleasure  as  talking  of  the 
work  of  his  co-laborers ;  but  he  disliked  what  are  called  "  social 
functions,"  and  toward  the  latter  part  of  his  life  was  rarely  present 
at  them.  From  the  beginning  of  his  scientific  career  to  his  later 
years  he  did  not  require  much  sleep,  taking  about  six  hours  daily, 
though  his  habits  in  this  resprct  were  never  regular.  He  had  great 
energy  of  mind,  and  power  of  accomplishing  a  large  amount  of  brain 
work.  His  memory  was  remarkably  retentive — he  never  forgot 
anything  he  once  heard  or  read.  In  addition  to  his  early  attain- 
ment of  German,  he  read  for  scientific  purposes  French,  Italian, 
Spanish,  Dutch,  Danish,  Swedish  and  Russian. 

His  sense  of  duty  was  highly  developed.  He  believed  that  the 
power  of  the  will  over  action  was  practically  without  limit.  Yet 
the  motive  for  the  exercise  of  the  will  must  be  from  within.  Hence 
can  be  explained  his  apparent  obstinacy  of  disposition  as  a  child ; 
his  aversion  to  class  work  at  school ;  and  his  independence  of  con- 
vention, both  as  to  thought  and  action  in  mature  life. 

Sometime  prior  to  his  appointment  on  the  Fish  Commission,  Mr. 
W.  V.  McKean  invited  him  to  write  articles  on  natural  history  for 
the  Public  Ledger.  But  Ryder  could  not  overcome  a  distrust 
that  his  essays  would  be  too  technical  for  popular  favor.  That  he 
should  have  declined  an  oflfer  apparently  so  advantageous  to  himself 
at  a  time  when  he  needed  money,  is  an  evidence  of  the  rigid  scrutiny 
to  which  he  subjected  all  his  actions.  None  but  his  most  intimate 
friends  knew  of  the  costs  he  often  paid  to  maintain  his  freedom 
of  mental  action.  They  were  met  without  a  murmur.  But  in  their 
payment  he  doubtless  drew  largely  on  that  vital  energy,  without 
which  long  life  is  impossible.  His  dearest  friend  said  of  him,  "  his 
self-sacrificing  devotion  cost  him  his  life." 

But,  under  the  stern  repression  lay  a  child-like,  affectionate 
nature.  He  was  not  happy  unless  he  had  one  or  more  of  his  family 
with  him ;  he  was  continually  writing  to  the  absent  ones.  His 
domestic  letters  contain  full  accounts  of  how  he  lived,  whom  he  met, 


238  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

and  of  his  enthusiasm  for  his  discoveries.  Those  who  knew  him 
only  as  a  scientist,  had  but  little  conception  of  the  spirit  that  actuated 
him.  His  work  was  not  a  series  of  merely  intellectual  achievements, 
but  back  of  it  all  lay  the  feeling  that  he  was  bringing  something 
bright  and  interesting  from  the  outside  world  to  adorn  the  home. 

His  affection  for  kin  extended  to  his  friends.  His  relations  with 
Prof.  Baird  were  almost  those  of  a  son.  His  anxiety  and  distress  at 
Prof  Baird's  last  illness  found  expression  in  all  the  letters  he  wrote 
at  that  time.  As  is  common  with  such  natures,  his  sense  of  justice 
was  keen,  though  no  instance  can  be  shown  in  which  his  indignation 
was  not  excited  by  the  general  sense  of  wrong  implied  in  the  situa- 
tion rather  than  by  any  personal  feeling. 

Dr.  Ryder's  religious  training  was  that  of  the  strict  oi-thodox 
Christian  faith  as  expressed  in  the  teachings  of  the  Mennonites. 
His  paternal  grandmother  who  directed  his  education  was  a  woman 
of  deep  piety.  For  the  faith  of  his  parents  he  always  entertained 
the  profoundest  respect,  and  at  least  toward  the  latter  part  of  his 
life  was  inclined  to  return  to  it.  At  the  age  of  eighteen  he  studied 
the  Bible  closely ;  and,  ever  afterward,  no  matter  how  limited  his 
travelling  effects,  a  copy  of  the  New  Testament  was  always  among 
them.  Though,  as  shown  by  his  letters,  he  departed  from  the  ten- 
ets of  his  early  education,  one  cannot  doubt  that  he  retained  all  the 
force  of  a  severe  mental  and  moral  discipline  that  such  teaching 
implies.  He  was  faithful  in  friendship ;  singularly  frank  and  sin- 
cere in  disposition  ;  and  disliked  violent  language,  dispute  or  critic- 
ism. He  was  always  severe  to  himself,  but  sacrificing  in  spirit  to 
those  whom  he  loved. 

While  a  Jessup  Fund  student  he  became  a  devoted  listener  to  the 
Rev.  Mr.  Mangasarian,  an  Armenian  preacher,  who,  at  that  time, 
held  a  pulpit  in  a  Presbyterian  church  in  Philadelphia,  but  who 
afterward  became  a  leader  in  an  independent  organization  allied  to 
the  Society  of  Ethical  Culture.  In  speaking  of  Mangasarian  in  one 
of  his  letters,  Dr.  Ryder  uses  the  following  language :  "  He  has  all 
the  charm  of  the  finished  orator  combined  with  rationalism  and 
advanced  evolution."  Ryder  greatly  admired  Emerson.  He  spoke 
of  him  as  "  the  sanest  man  of  the  nineteenth  century."  In  writing 
to  a  friend  who  was  in  mental  distress,  he  advised  him  to  read  Emer- 
son. He  carried  his  admiration  even  to  matters  of  scientific  import. 
In  his  last  paper  he  quotes  from  this  writer  the  saying :  "  To  a 
sound  judgment  the  most  abstract  truth  is  the  most  practical."     He 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILABELPHIA.  239 

was  much  influenced  by  the  teachings  of  the  Stoics.  "  I  would 
strongly  advise  you,"  said  he  to  a  friend,  "  to  get  hold  of  the 
thoughts  of  Marcus  Aurelius,  when  you  are  most  provoked  or  vexed 
in  spirit,  and  take  their  lessons  to  heart.  Epictetus  will  do  equally 
well,  only  I  think  Marcus  is  calculated  to  humble  and  content  a 
man."  His  letters  contain  many  expressions  of  trust  in  an  infinite 
beneficence,  and  he  would  have  agreed  with  Epictetus  as  to  "  whither 
dost  thou  tend  after  death,  that  is  to  nothing  dreadful,  but  to  a 
place  from  whence  thou  camest,  to  things  friendly  and  akin  to  thee." 
We  admire  Ryder  not  so  much  for  what  he  accomplished  as  for 
the  indomitable  spirit  that  actuated  hinl.  With  imperfect  equip- 
ment, with  engrossing  occupation,  and — for  much  of  his  intellectual 
life  at  least — with  impaired  health,  he  attempted  the  solution  of  the 
most  difficult  problems.  It  is  not  for  us  to  consider  in  what  degree 
he  succeeded.  Had  Bacon,  Franklin  or  Darwin  died  at  forty-three, 
or  had  their  days  been  absorbed  as  his  had  been,  in  cares  and  the 
routine  of  task  work,  how  much  less  would  have  been  their  achiev- 
raents  !  It  is  enough  for  us  to  know  that  we  are  studying  in  Ryder's 
life  phenomena  of  a  mind  of  the  first  order,  and  that  we  have  lost 
by  his  death  one  of  the  brightest  of  the  group  of  workers  to  which 
he  belonged. 

THE  PUBLISHED  SCIENTIFIC  PAPERS  OF  JOHN  A.  RYDER. 

BY  H.  F.  MOORE,  PH.  D. 

This  bibliography  was  originally  prepared  for  the  Proceedings  of 
the  Ryder  Memorial  Meeting  but  the  committee  having  that  publi- 
cation in  charge  pointed  out  that  the  importance  of  Dr.  Ryder's 
work  demanded  for  it  greater  publicity  than  that  medium  would 
afford.  It  was  suggested  that  it  would  be  most  fitting  to  publish  it 
with  the  preceding  memoir. 

The  list  of  papers  given  is  supposed  to  be  complete,  being  pre- 
pared partly  from  memoranda  left  by  Dr.  Ryder  and  partly  by 
research  in  the  bibliographies  of  the  Zoological  Record  and  of  the 
several  journals  as  well  as  in  the  sources  of  original  publication. 

The  citations,  with  one  or  two  exceptions,  have  been  verified,  and 
the  appended  notes  are  partly  from  the  Zoological  Record,  partly 
Dr.  Ryder's  and  partly  by  the  compiler.  The  list  is  given  under 
three  heads :  Original  Research,  comprising  215  titles ;  Descriptions 
of  New  Scientific  Apparatus,  4  titles;  and  Translations  and  Re- 
views, 59  titles  ;  a  grand  total  of  278  papers  published  between 
1877  and  1895. 


240  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ORIGINAL   RESEARCH. 

1 — On  the  laws  of  digital  reduction.  Amer.  'Nat,  Oct.,  1877, 
]>p.  603-607.  (Points  out  the  modes  of  modification  of  the  digits 
in  response  to  the  methods  of  use  in  the  different  forms  of  mamma- 
lia). 

2 — On  the  evolution  and  homologies  of  the  incisors  of  the  horse. 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1877,  pp.  152-154,  4  figs,  in  text. 
(Traces  the  history  of  the  "  pit "  or  '*  mark "  in  the  incisors  from 
the  early  equine  forms  to  the  existing  domestic  horse). 

3 — Note  on  the  color  variation  in  mammals.  Proc  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  Phila.,  1877,  pp.  272-273.  (Discusses  the  probable  causes 
which  lead  to  a  disturbance  of  the  symmetry  of  coloration  observed 
in  wild  animals  when  brought  under  the  influence  of  domestication, 
assigning  as  that  cause  the  protection  which  they  receive  under  the 
latter,  as  a  result  of  which  asymmetrical  and  parti-colored  individ- 
uals are  protected  and  preserved  to  perpetuate  their  peculiarities, 
wild  individuals  of  that  character  the  more  readily  becoming  the 
prey  of  enemies). 

4 — On  the  growth  of  Cocculus  indicus.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phila.,  1877,  pp.  284-285.  (Points  out  the  habit  or  tendency  of  the 
terminal  part  of  the  newer  apical  growth  to  twine). 

5 — The  significance  of  the  diameters  of  the  incisors  in  rodents. 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1877,  pp.  314-318,  1  fig.  in  text. 
(Points  out  the  fact  that  the  greatest  diameter  is  in  the  line  of  great- 
est stress  and  is  correlated  with  increased  use). 

6 — A  dog  with  supernumerary  toes.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 
Phila.,  1877,  p.  321. 

7 — On  the  mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  Phila.,  1878,  pp.  45-80,  11  figs,  in  text.  (This  paper  points 
out  for  the  first  time  the  correlation  existing  between  the  forms  of 
the  crowns  of  the  teeth  in  the  various  groups  of  mammalia  and  the 
manner  and  direction  in  Avhich  the  jaws  are  used  to  bring  stress 
upon  the  teeth). 

8 — On  Polyxenes  fasciculatus.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1878,  p.  223. 

9 — Description  of  a  new  species  of  Smynthurus.  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1878,  p.  335,  1  fig.  in  text.  Smynthurus  quadri- 
mandatns  sp.  nov. 

10 — On  the  form  of  the  stapes  in  Dipodomy^.  Amer.  Nat.,  1878, 
p.  125. 

11 — On  like  mechanical  (structural)  conditions  as  producing 
like  morphological  effects.      Amer.  Nat.,  1878,  pp.  157-160. 

12 — Discovery  of  two  remarkable  genera  of  minute  myriapodsin 
Fairmount  Park  {Polyxenes  and  Pauropus).  Amer.  Nat.,  1878, 
pp.  557-558. 

13 — Bees  gathering  honey  from  the  Catalpa.  Amer.  Nat,  1879, 
p.  648. 

14 — A  monstrous  frog.     Amer.  Nat.,  1878,  pp.  751-752. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  241 

15 — The  mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms.  Dental  Cosmos, 
XX,  1878,  pp.  465-472.  Abstract  by  Dr.  C.  N.  Pierce  of  "  On 
the  mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms."  Proceedings  of  the  Acad- 
emy of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  1878,  pp.  45-80,  3  figs. 

16 — Addenda  to  etiological  views  expressed  in  a  paper  "  On  the 
mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms."  Dental  Cosmos,  XX,  1878,  pp. 
472-474. 

17 — The  gigantic  extinct  armadillos  and  their  peculiarities,  with 
a  restoration.  Popular  Science  Monthly,  XIII,  1878,  pp.  139-145, 
4  figs,  in  text.  (Discusses  the  mechanical  genesis,  degeneration  and 
coalescence  of  vertebral  centra). 

18 — Morphological  notes  on  the  limbs  of  the  Amphiumidae  as  in- 
dicating a  possible  synonymy  of  the  supposed  genera.  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1879,  pp.  14-15.  (Points  out  the  variation  in  the 
number  of  digits  in  the  same  specimen,  rendering  the  genus  Murce- 
7iopsis  untenable). 

19 — Further  notes  on  the  mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms. 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1879,  pp.  47-51,  1  fig.  in  text. 

20 — Notice  of  a  new  pauropod.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1879,  p.  139. 

21 — Description  of  a  new  species  of  Chirocephalus.  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1879,  pp.  148-149,  3  figs,  in  text.  (Chirocephalus 
holmanii  sp.  nov.). 

22 — Honey  glands  on  Catalpa  leaves.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phila.,  1879,  p.  161. 

23 — The  larva  of  Eurypauropus  spinosus.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 
1879,  p.  164. 

24 — Description  of  a  new  branchipod.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phila.,  1879,  pp.  200-202,  1  fig.     (Streptocephalns  sealii,  sp.  nov.). 

25 — The  gemmule  vs.  the  plastidule  as  the  ultimate  physical 
unit  of  living  matter.     Amer.  Nat.,  1879,  pp.  12-20. 

26 — On  the  origin  of  bilateral  symmetry  and  the  numerous  seg- 
ments of  the  soft  rays  of  fishes.      Amer.  Nat.,  1879,  pp.  41-43. 

27 — Ryder  on  the  mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1879,  pp.  446-449.  (Abstract  with  comments  by  Prof.  E.  D. 
Cope,  of"  On  the  mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms."  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1878,  pp.  45-80.  And  "  Further  notes  on  the 
mechanical  genesis  of  tooth  forms."     Loc.  cit.,  1879,  pp.  47-51). 

28 — On  the  destructive  nature  of  the  boring  sponge,  with  obser- 
vations on  its  gemmules  or  eggs.     Amer.  Nat.,  1879,  pp.  279-283. 

29 — Strange  habitat  of  a  barnacle  on  a  garpike.  Amer.  Nat., 
1879,  p.  453.      {Platylepas  decomta  Darw.  on  Lepidosteus). 

30 — An  account  of  a  new  genus  of  minute  pauropod  myriapods 
(Eurypauropus  spinosus).  Amer.  Nat.,  1879,  pp.  603-612, 1  pi.  and 
2  figs,  in  text.  fEurypauropodidae,  fam.  nob.  Eurypauropus  spin- 
osus gen.  et.  sp.  nov.). 

31 — Successive  appearance  of  Chirocephalus  and  Strejitocephalus 
in  the  same  pond.     Amer.  Nat.,  1879,  p.  703. 


242  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

32 — A  third  locality  for  Eurypauropus.  Amer.  Nat.,  1879,  pp. 
703-704. 

33 — A  probable  new  species  of  Phytoptus  or  Gall-mite.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1879,  pp.  704-705,  1  fig.  in  text. 

34 — The  psorosperms  found  in  Aphredoderus  sayanus.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1880,  pp.  211-212,  6  figs,  in  text. 

35 — Sc'olopendrella  as  the  type  of  a  new  order  of  articulates. 
Amer.  Nat,  1880,  pp.  375-376  (Symphyla). 

36 — Note  on  a  larval  LithohiusAWe.  myriapod.  Amer.  Nat.,  1880, 
p  376. 

S7—Trickopetalmn.     Amer.  Nat.,  1880,  p.  376. 

38 — Ichthydium  ocellatum.    Amer.  Nat.,  1880,  p.  674. 

39 — On  the  course  of  the  intestine  in  the  oyster.  Amer.  Nat., 
1880,  pp.  674-675. 

40 — Phosphorescence  of  very  young  fishes.  Amer.  Nat.,  1880,  p. 
675. 

41 — On  the  occurrence  of  Freia  prodvcta  Wright  in  the  Chesa- 
peake Bay.     Amer.  Nat.,  1880,  pp.  810-811. 

42 — Rhipidodendron  splendidum.  Amer.  Nat.,  1880,  p.  811.  (The 
first  notice  of  this  monad  in  American  fresh-waters). 

43 — A  pale  variety  of  Polyxenes  faseiculatus.  Amer.  Nat.,  1880, 
pp.  811-812. 

44 — On  Camaraphysema,  a  new  type  of  sponge.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  Ill,  1880,  pp.  269-272,  1  pi.  {Camaraphysema  obscura  gen. 
et  sp.  nov.). 

45 — List  of  the  North  American  species  of  myriapods  belonging 
to  the  family  of  the  Lysiopetalidae,  with  a  description  of  a  blind 
form  from  Luray  Cave,  Virginia.  Proc.  U.S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  1880, 
pp.  524-529.     (Describes  Zygonopna^  ivhitei,  gen.  et  sp.  nov.). 

46 — The  structure,  affinities  and  species  o^  Scolopendrella.  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1881,  pp.  79-86,  2  figs,  in  text.  {Scohpen- 
drella  gratiae  sp.  nov.). 

47 — Occurrence  of  the  same  species  of  Protozoon  on  both  sides  of 
the  Atlantic.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1881,  pp.  442-443.  (The 
first  record  of  the  occurrence  of  Licnophora  cohnil  Clap,  on  the 
west  side  of  the  Atlantic). 

48— A  valuable  edible  Mollusk  of  the  West  Coast.  Bull.  U.  S. 
FishComm.,  l,1881,p.  21. 

49 — Preliminary  notice  of  the  more  important  scientific  results 
obtained  from  a  study  of  the  embryology  of  Fishes.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.,  1,1881,  pp.  22-23. 

50 — Notes  on  the  development,  spinning  habits  and  structure  of 
the  four-spined  stickleback  (Apeltes  quadracus).  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.,  1, 1881,  p.  24-29.  (Points  out  the  existence  of  a  pouch  in 
the  male  which  supplies  a  viscid  material  to  be  drawn  out  into 
threads  which  are  wound  around  plants  to  form  a  nest.  This  paper 
gives  the  first  intimation  of  the  true  source  of  the  material  of  which 
nests  of  the  Gasterosteidae  are  woven). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  243 

51 — Development  of  the  spanisli  mackerel  (Cybium  maculatum). 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish.  Comm.,  1, 1881,  pp.  135-172, 4  pis. 

52 — On  the  retardation  of  the  development  of  the  ova  of  the  shad 
(^Alosa  sapiclissiinct),  with  observations  on  the  egg  fungus  and  bac- 
teria. Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1, 1881,  pp.  177-190.  Including  an 
appendix  on  the  histological  rationale  of  retardation,  also  in  Kep. 
U.  S.  Comm.  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1881,  pp.  795-811.  (2ded.  revised). 

53 — A  contribution  to  the  development  and  morphology  of  the 
lophibranchiates  {Hippocampus  antiquonwi,  the  sea-horse).  Bull, 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,1,  1881,  pp.  191-199,1  pi. 

54 — The  micropyle  of  the  egg  of  the  white  perch.  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  1,  1881,  p.  282. 

55 — Development  of  the  silver  gar  (Belone  longirodris),  with  ob- 
servations on  the  genesis  of  the  blood  in  embryo  fishes,  and  a  com- 
parison of  fish  ova  with  those  of  other  vertebrates.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.,1,  1881,  pp.  283-301,  3  pis. 

56 — On  the  nuclear  cleavage-figures  developed  during  the  seg- 
mentation of  the  germinal  disk  of  the  egg  of  the  salmon.  Bull.  U. 
S.  Fish  Comm.,  1,1881,  pp.  335-339,1  pi. 

57 — Notes  on  the  breeding,  food  and  green  color  of  the  oyster. 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1,  1881,  pp.  403-419. 

58 — Additional  observations  on  the  retardation  of  the  develop- 
ment of  the  ova  of  the  shad.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1, 1881,  pp. 
422-424. 

59 — The  protozoa  and  protophytes  considered  as  the  primary  or 
indirect  source  of  the  food  of  fishes.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1, 
1881,  pp.  236-251 ;  and  Rep.  U.  S.  Comm.  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1881, 
pp.  755-770.    (2d  ed.  revised). 

60 — Notes  on  some  of  the  early  stages  of  development  of  the  clam, 
or  mannanose  {Mya  arenaria  Linn.).  Report  of  T.  B.  Ferguson,  a 
Commissioner  of  Fisheries  of  Maryland,  for  1881,  pp.  81-91, 11  figs. 

61 — An  account  of  experiments  in  oyster-culture  and  observations 
relating  thereto,  made  at  St.  Jerome's  Creek,  Md.,  during  the  sum- 
mer of  1880,  Report  of  T.  B.  Ferguson,  a  Commissioner  of  Fisher- 
ies of  Maryland  for  1881,  15  figs,  in  text.  Appendix  A.,  pp.  1-64 
and  76-80  (First  Series). 

62 — Structure  and  ovarian  incubation  of  the  top  minnow  {Zy- 
gonectes).  Forest  and  Stream,  Aug.  18,  1881.  (The  species  was 
afterwards  determined  to  be  Gambuda  patrue[is,a.nd  the  subject  was 
treated  of  more  fully  in  No.  65  of  this  bibliography). 

63 — Incubation  of  shad  eggs  in  brackish  or  sea-water.  Sea- 
world,  Fishing  Gazette  and  Packer's  Journal,  AVednesday,  Oct.  12, 
1881. 

64 — Observations  on  the  species  of  planarians  parasitic  on  Limu- 
lus.  Amer.  Nat.,  1882,  pp.  48-51,  10  figs,  in  text,  of  egg-capsules, 
embryos  and  adult. 

65 — Structure  and  ovarian  incubation  of  Gambusia  patruelis,  a. 
top-minnow.      Amer.   Nat.,    1882,    pp.  109-118.      (Describes  the 


244  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

mode  of  viviparous  development  of  the  species  and  points  out  the 
early  absence  of  an  egg  membrane  and  the  existence  of  an  opening 
in  the  ovarian  follicle  comparable  to  a  micropyle). 

66 — Additional  note  on  the  egg-cases  of  planarians  ectoparasitic 
on  Limuliis.     Amer.  Nat.,  1882,  p.  142-143. 

67 — Synopsis  of  the  Scolopendrellidae.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
V,  1882,  p.  234.  Old  genus  Scolopendrella  suhdiy'xded  into  1.  ScuU- 
gerel/ageu.  uov.  sp.  1,  S.  gratiae  Ryder;  sp.  2,  S.  immacalata  New- 
port. 2.  Scolopendrella  Gerv.  sp.  1,  microcaljM  Muhr;  sp.  2, 
notacantha  Gerv. 

68 — A  contribution  to  the  embryography  of  osseous  fishes,  with 
special  reference  to  the  development  of  the  cod,  Gadns  morrhaa. 
Rep.  of  U.  S.  Comm.  of  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1882,  pp.  455-605,  12 
plates,  11  figs,  in  text. 

69 — Preliminary  notice  on  some  points  in  the  minute  anatomy  of 
the  oyster.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  135-137.  (Points 
out  the  almost  complete  absence  of  connective  tissues  in  tne  body- 
mass  of  the  young  "  spat  "). 

70 — Observations  on  the  absorption  of  the  yelk,  the  food,  feeding 
and  development  of  embryo  fishes,  comprising  some  investigations 
conducted  at  the  Central  Hatchery,  Armory  Building,  Washington, 
D.  C,  in  1882.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  179-205,  1 
fig.  in  text. 

71 — The  microscopic  sexual  characteristics  of  the  American, 
Portusfuese  and  common  edible  oyster  of  Europe  compared.  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  205-215.  Reprinted  in  Ann.  Mag. 
Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  XII,  1883,  pp.  37-48. 

72 — Note  on  the  organ  of  Bojanus  in  Ostrea  vlrginica  Gmelin. 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  [I,  1882,  pp.  345-347. 

73 — On  the  mode  of  fixation  of  the  fry  of  the  oyster.  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  383-387, 1  pi.  (Points  out  the  uniform- 
ity with  which  fixation  of  the  fry  occurs  by  the  edge  of  the  left 
mantle  border,  etc.). 

74 — On  the  preservation  of  embryonic  materials  and  small  organ- 
isms, together  with  hints  upon  embedding  and  mounting  sections 
serially.  Rep.  U.  S.  Comm.  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1882,  pp.  607-629. 
75 — An  account  of  experiments  in  oyster  culture  and  observa- 
tions relating  thereto.  (Second  Series).  Rep.  U.  S.  Comm.  Fish 
and  Fisheries,  1882,  pp.  763-778.  (Journal  of  experiments  con- 
ducted at  St.  Jerome's  Creek,  Md.,  in  1882.  Mode  of  fixation  of 
oyster  spat  determined). 

7(3_The  metamorphosis  and  post-larval  stages  of  development  of 
the  oyster.  Rep.  U.  S.  Comm.  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1882,  pp.  779- 
791,  3  figs,  in  text.  (Points  out  the  mode  in  which  the  veliger  of 
O-Hi-ea  is  metamorphosed  into  the  spat  and  adult,  and  the  rotation 
of  the  body  mass). 

77 — Supplementary  note  on  the  coloration  of  the  blood-corpuscles 
of  the  oyster.    Rep.  U.  S.  Comm.  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1882,  pp.  801- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  245 

805.     (Shows  that  the  pigment  which  causes  the  coloration  is  prob- 
ably phycocyanin). 

78 — A  summary  of  recent  progress  in  our  knowledge  of  the  cul- 
ture, gi'owth  and  anatomy  of  the  oyster.  Forest  and  Stream,  Nov. 
30,  1882,  Vol.  XIX,  pp.  351-352. 

79 — Notes  on  the  breeding,  food  and  cause  of  green  color  of  the 
oyster.  Trans.  Amer.  Fish  Cult.  Assoc.  Eleventh  Ann.  Meet.,  N. 
Y.,  1882,  pp.  57-59.  Also  Forest  and  Stream,  1882,  May  25th, 
pp.  331  and  332,  and  June  1st,  pp.  349-351. 

80 — On  the  green  color  of  the  oyster.  Amer.  Nat.,  18*53,  pp.  86- 
88. 

81— A  correction.  Amer.  Nat.,  1883,  pp.  98-99. 

82 — Theodore  Gill  and  John  A.  Ryder.  Diagnoses  of  new  genera 
of  nemichthyoid  eels.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  1883,  pp.  260- 
262. 

83 — Theodore  Gill  and  John  A.  Ryder.  On  the  anatomy  and 
relations  of  the  Eurypharyngidae.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  1883, 
pp.  262-273. 

84 — On  the  thread-bearing  eggs  of  the  silversides  {Menidid). 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  Ill,  1883,  pp.  193-196,  4  figs,  in  text. 

85 — Preliminary  notice  of  the  development  and  breeding  habits 
of  the  Potomac  ca.t-^&\\  Amiurw?  alhidus  (Le  Sueur)  Gill.  Bull.  U. 
S.  Fish  Comm.,  Ill,  1883,  pp.  225-230. 

86 — Rearing  oysters  from  artificially  fertilized  eggs,  together  with 
notes  on  pond-culture,  etc.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  Ill,  1883,  pp. 
281-294.  New  Zealand  Journal  of  Science,  I,  No.  10,  1883,  pp. 
455-459. 

87 — Report  on  the  abnormal  appearance  of  some  shad  eggs  from 
a  fish  kept  in  confinement  at  Havre  de  Grace,  Maryland.  Bull.  U. 
S.  Fish  Comm.,  Ill,  1883,  p.  440. 

88 — Rearing  oysters  from  artificially  imjDregnated  eggs.  Science, 
I,  1883,  pp.  60-62. 

89 — The  law  of  nuclear  displacement,  and  its  significance  in  em- 
bryology.    Science,  I,  1883,  pp.  273-277. 

90 — Protozoan  parasites  of  the  oyster.  Science,  I,  1883,  pp.  567 
-568. 

91 — Rearing  oysters  from  artificially  fertilized  eggs  at  Stockton, 
Md.     Science,  II,  1883,  pp.  463-464. 

92 — Primitive  visual  organs.      Science,  II,  1883,  pp.  739-740. 

93 — The  nature  of  heredity.  The  Monthly  Review,  Philadelphia, 
I,  1883,  No.  11,  pp.  161-164. 

94 — The  pedunculated  lateral  line  organs  of  Gastrostomus.  Sci- 
ence, III,  1884,  p.  5.     Amer.  Nat.,  1884,  p.  547,  1  fig. 

95 — On  the  chlorophvlloid  granules  of  Vorticella.  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  1884,  pp.  9-12,  1  fig.  in  text. 

96 — Theodore  Gill  and  John  A.  Ryder :  On  the  literature  and 
systematic  relations  of  the  saccopharyngoid  fishes.  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  1884,  pp.  48-65. 


246  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

97 — On  the  origin  of  heterocercy  and  the  evolution  of  the  fins 
and  fin-rays  of  fishes.  Rep.  U.  S.  Comm.  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1884, 
pp.  981-1107,  pis.  12,  8  figs,  in  text. 

98 — On  a  new  form  of  filter  or  diaphragm  to  be  used  in  the  cul- 
ture of  oysters  in  ponds.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  IV,  1884,  pp. 
17-31,  1  pi. 

99 — On  a  skin  parasite  of  the  cunner  (^Ctenolahrus  adspersus). 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  IV,  1884,  pp.  37-42. 

100 — Journal  of  operations  on  the  grounds  of  the  Eastern  Shore 
Oyster  Company  on  Chincoteague  Bay,  near  Stockton,  Md.,  during 
the  summer  of  1883.     Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  IV,  1884,  pp.  43-47. 

101 — Carp  do  eat  young  fishes.      Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  IV, 

1884,  p.  152. 

102 — Report  respecting  the  present  condition  and  future  pros- 
pects at  St.  Jerome  Creek  for  the  work  of  oyster  culture.  Bull.  U. 
S.  Fish  Comm.,  IV,  1884,  pp.  235-237. 

103 — Floats  for  the  so-called  fattening  of  oysters.  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  IV,  1884,  pp.  302-303. 

104 — Note  on  the  regeneration  of  the  scales  of  the  German  carp. 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  IV,  1884,  pp.  345-346. 

105 — On  apparatus  for  collecting  oyster  spat.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.,  IV,  1884,  p.  373. 

106— Care  of  gold  fish.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1884,  pp. 
381-382. 

107 — A  sketch  of  the  life  history  of  the  oyster.  U.  S.  Geological 
Survey.  Fourth  Annual  Report  of  J.  W.  Powell  for  1884,  IV,  pp. 
317-333.  pis.  LXXIII-LXXXII. 

108 — On  the  development  of  Mola.  Science,  IV,  Bulletin,  Nov. 
14,  1884,  p.  V. 

109 — On  the  morphology  and  evolution  of  the  tail  of  osseous  fishes. 
(Abstract).  Proc.  American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science,  Philadelphia  meeting,  Sept.,  1884,  Vol.  XXXIII,  pp.  532 
-533, 1885.     Science,  IV,  Oct.  31, 1884,  pp.  341-342. 

110 — Theodore  Gill  and  John  A.  Ryder:  Note  on  Enrypharynx 
and  an  allied  new  genus.      Zool.  Anzeiger,  VII,  1884,  pp.  119-123. 

Ill — On  the  forces  which  determine  the  survival  of  fish  embryos. 
Forest  and  Stream,  Aug.  14,  1884  ;  and  Transactions  of  American 
Fish  Cultural  Association,  13th  Annual  Meeting  at  Washington, 
May  13th  and  14th,  1884,  pp.  195-199. 

112 — A  contribution  to  the  life-history  of  the  oyster  (Ostrea  vir- 
gin'im  Gmelin,  and  0.  edidis  Linn.).  Fisheries  Industries  of  the 
U.  S.,  Vol.  II,  4  to,  Washington,  1884,  1  pi.  pp.  711-750. 

113 — An  outline  of  a  theory  of  the  development  of  the  unpaired 
fins  of  fishes.     Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  90-97,  (abstract),  8  figs,  in  text. 

114 — The  development  of  the  rays  of  osseous  fishes.     Amer.  Nat., 

1885,  pp.  200-204. 

115 — On  the  translocation  forwards  of  the  rudiments  of  the  pel- 
vic fins  of  the  embryos  of  physoclist  fishes.  Amer.  Nat.,  1885, 
pp.  315-317. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  247 

116 — Ou  the  position  of  the  yolk-blastopore  as  determined  by  the 
size  of  vitellus.     Araer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  411-415. 

117 — Development  of  the  spines  of  the  anterior  dorsal  of  Gaste- 
rosteus  and  Lophius.     Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  p.  415. 

118 — On  the  probable  origin,  homologies  and  development  of 
the  flukes  of  cetaceans  and  sirenians.  Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  515- 
519. 

119 — On  the  formation  of  the  embryonic  axis  of  the  teleostean 
embryo  by  the  concrescence  of  the  rim  of  the  blastoderm.  1  fig.  in 
text.     Araer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  614-615. 

120 — On  the  development  of  the  mammary  glands  of  cetacea. 
Araer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  616-618. 

121 — On  the  availability  of  erabryological  characters  in  the  clas- 
sification of  the  Chordata.  Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  815-819  and  903 
-907. 

122 — On  the  genesis  of  the  extra  terminal  phalanges  in  the  cet- 
acea.    Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  1013-1015. 

123 — On  the  manner  in  which  the  cavity  of  the  heart  is  formed 
in  certain  teleosts.     Amer.  Nat,,  1885,  pp.  1015-1017. 

124— The  archistome  theory.     Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  1115-1121. 

125 — The  development  and  structure  of  Mierohydm  Rijderl  Potts. 
Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  1232-1236. 

126 — An  exposition  of  the  principles  of  a  rational  system  of 
oyster  culture,  together  with  an  account  of  a  new  and  practical 
,  method  of  obtaining  oyster  spat  on  a  scale  of  commercial  import- 
ance. Rep.  U.  S.  Coram.  Fish  and  Fisheries  for  1885,  pp.  381-423, 
3  plates. 

127 — On  the  development  of  the  cetacea,  together  with  a  con- 
sideration of  the  probable  homologies  of  the  flukes  of  cetaceans  and 
sirenians.  Rep.  Coram.  Fish  and  Fisheries  1885,  pp.  427-488,  3 
plates. 

128 — On  the  development  of  osseous  fishes,  including  marine 
and  freshwater  forms.  Rep.  Corara.  of  Fish  and  Fisheries,  1885,  pp. 
489-604,  30  plates. 

129 — Note  on  the  male  organs  of  the  eel.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Coram,,  V,  1885,  2  figs,  in  text,  pp.  1-3. 

130 — Directions  for  collecting  embiotocoid  fish  embryos.  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Coram.,  V,  1885,  p.  32. 

131 — The  rate  of  growth  of  oysters  at  St.  Jerome  Creek  Station. 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Corara.,  V,  1885,  pp.  129-131,  2  figs,  in  text. 

132 — On  the  developraent  of  the  raaramary  glands  and  genitalia 
of  the  cetacea.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Corara.,  V,  1885,  pp.  135-142,  2 
figs  in  text. 

133 — On  the  rate  of  growth  of  the  coraraon  clam,  and  on  a  mode 
of  obtaining  the  young  of  the  giant  clams  of  the  Pacific  Coast  for 
the  purpose  of  transplanting.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Coram.,  V,  1885, 
pp.  174-176. 


248  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

134 — On  the  green  coloration  of  the  gills  and  palps  of  the  clam 
(Ml/a  arenarla).  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  \,  1885,  pp.  181-185,  1 
fig.  in  text. 

135 — Answers  to  questions  about  fattening  oysters.  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish.  Comm.,  1885,  p.  416. 

136 — On  the  development  of  viviparous  osseous  fishes.  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum,  VIII,  1885,  pp.  128-155,  6 
figs. 

137 — On  certain  features  of  the  development  of  the  salmon. 
Froc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VIII,  1885,  pp.  156-162,  1  pi. 

138 — The  swimming  habits  of  the  sun-fish  (JSIola  mola).  Science, 
VI,  1885,  pp.  108-104,  1  fig. 

139 — A  new  system  of  oyster-culture.  Science,  November  27, 
1885,  pp.  465-467.     (A  practical  solution  ot  the  oyster  question). 

140 — On  some  points  in  microtomy.  The  American  Monthly 
Microscopic  Journal,  V,  No.  10,  October,  1884,  pp.  190-191 ;  Froc. 
Amer.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.,  XXXIII,  1885,  pp.  565-566. 

141 — The  oyster  problem  actually  solved.  A  new  system  of 
oyster  culture.      Forest  and  Stream,  Vol.  XXV,  No.  13,  Oct.  22d, 

1885,  pp.  249-250. 

142 — The  nectar  glands  of  the  Catalpa  tree.  The  Fastime,  III, 
No.  7,  January,  1885,  pp.  8-9. 

143 — Resting  position  of  the  oyster.  Nature,  Nov.  26,  1885,  pp. 
«0-81. 

144 — The  placentation  of  the  two-toed  ant-eater  Cycloturus  di- 
daetij/us.  Froc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Fhila.,  1886.  (Cited  from  Dr. 
Ryder's  notes  ;  original  not  found). 

145 — The  development  of  the  toad-fish.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp. 
77-80. 

146 — The  origin  of  the  amnion.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  179-185, 
8  figs,  in  text. 

147 — The  development  of  Anurida  maritima  Guerin.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1886,  pp.  299-302,  1  plate. 

148 — On  an  unusual  relation  of  the  notochord  to  the  intestine  in 
the  chick.     Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  392-394,  1  fig. 

149 — On  the  symmetry  of  the  first  segmentation  furrows  of  the 
blastodisk  of  Elasraobranchii.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  470-473,  2 
figs. 

150 — The  metamorphosis  of  the  American  lobster,  Homarus 
americmms  H.  Milne-Edwards.     Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  739-742. 

151 — The  monstrosities  observed  amongst  recently  hatched  lob- 
sters.    Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  742-743. 

152 — The  development  of  the  mud-minnow.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886, 
pp.  823-824. 

153 — The  development  of  Fundulus  heteroclitns.      Amer.  Nat., 

1886,  p.  824. 

154__^Vhy  do  certain  fish  ova  float  ?  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp. 
986-987.    (Describes  the  floatiug  egg  of  Macropodus). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  249 

155 — The  origin  of  the  pigment  cells  which  invest  the  oil-drop  in 
pelagic  fish-embryos.     Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  987-988. 

156 — On  the  value  of  the  fin-rays  and  their  characteristics  of 
development  in  the  classification  of  the  fishes,  together  with  re- 
marks on  the  theory  of  degeneration.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1886, 
pp.  71-82. 

157 — Preliminary  notice  of  the  development  of  the  toad-fish 
Batrachus  tau.     Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  VI,  1886,  pp.  4-8,  1  pi. 

158 — On  the  earlier  stages  of  cleavage  of  the  blastodi^k  of  Raia 
erinacea.     Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  VI,  1886,  pp.  8-10,  1  fig.  in  text. 

159 — On  the  intra-ovarian  gestation  of  the  red-fish  (Sebastes 
marinus).     Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  VI,  1886,  pp.  92-94. 

160 — A  theory  of  the  origin  of  placental  types  and  on  certain 
vestigiary  structures  in  the  placentae  of  the  mouse,  rat  and  field- 
mouse.     Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp.  780-784. 

161 — The  inversion  of  the  germinal  layers  in  Hesperomys.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1887,  pp.  863-864,  3  figs,  in  text. 

162 — Vestiges  of  a  zonary  decidua  in  the  mouse.  Amer.  Nat., 
1887,  pp.  1037-1038. 

163 — The  rudimentary  pineal  eye  of  chelonians.  Amer.  Nat., 
1887,  pp.  1126-1127.  (By  Geo.'  Fetterolf  under  Prof.  Ryder's 
directions). 

164 — On  a  tumor  in  the  oyster.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1887,  pp.  25-27. 

165 — On  the  homologies  and  early  history  of  the  limbs  of  ver- 
tebrates.    Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1887,  pp.  344-368. 

166 — On  the  development  of  the  common  sturgeon.  Amer.  Nat., 
July,  1888,  pp.  659-660.  (The  first  published  account  of  the  lar- 
vae of  Acipenser  sturio  developed  from  artificially  fertilized  eggs  ob- 
tained by  Caesarian  section  of  the  abdomen  of  the  female). 

167 — On  the  blunt-nosed  sturgeon  and  the  sense  organs  and 
canals  of  the  head  of  Serrajius  atripinnis.  University  Medical 
Magazine  (Philadelphia),  December,  1888,  pp.  175-177. 

168 — The  sturgeons  and  sturgeon  industries  of  the  eastern  coast 
of  the  United  States,  with  an  account  of  experiments  bearing  upon 
sturgeon  culture.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1888,  pp.  231-281, 
plates  XXXVII-LIX. 

169 — Report  of  operations  at  the  laboratory  of  the  United  States 
Fish  Commission,  Wood's  Hole,  Mass.,  during  the  summer  of  1888. 
Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1888,  pp.  513-522. 

170 — On  the  fore  and  aft  poles,  the  axial  diflferentiation  and  a 
possible  anterior  sensory  apparatus  of  Volvox  minor.  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1889,  pp.  138-140.  Reprint  in  Ann.  and  Mag. 
Nat.  Hist.  (6),  IV,  p.  253. 

171 — Heterocercy  in  batrachia.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1889,  p.  155.     (In  Amblystoma  larvae). 

172 — The  hypertrophied  hairs  on  Ampelopsis.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  Phila.,  1889,  p.  158. 

17 


250  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

173 — The  byssus  of  the  young  of  the  common  clam  {Mija  arena- 
ria).  Amer,  Nat.,  1889,  pp.  65-67  ;  abstr.  in  Jour.  Roy.  Mic.  Soc, 
1889,  p.  375.  (The  byssus  gland  is  at  the  base  of  the  foot  and  the 
clams  are  bound  together  partially  by  byssus  threads  and  partly  by 
fibres  from  Ascidians). 

174 — The  polar  differentiation  of  Volvox  and  specialization  of 
possible  anterior  sense  organs.     Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp.  218-221. 

175 — The  quadrate  placenta  of  the  common  red  squirrel.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1889,  pp.  271-274. 

176 — The  origin  and  meaning  of  sex.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp. 
501-508. 

177 — Notes  on  the  development  of  Ampullaria  depressa  Say. 
Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp.  735-737.     (Description  of  eggs,  etc.). 

178 — Karyokinesis  in  larval  Amhlystoma.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889, 
pp.  827-829.  (Pointing  out  the  clearness  of  the  karyokinetic  pro- 
cesses). 

179 — On  a  brood  of  larval  Amphiuma.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp. 
927-928. 

180 — The  acquisition  and  loss  of  food-yolk  and  origin  of  the  cal- 
careous egg-shell.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp.  928-933.  (Interpreta- 
tion of  the  various  ways  in  which  surplus  nutriment  is  elaborated 
into  numerous  small  eggs  or  into  fewer  and  larger  ones,  or  diverted 
to  the  embryo  itself). 

181 — The  i^hylogeny  of  the  sweat  glands.  Proc.  Amer.  Phil. 
Soc,  1889,  pp.  534-540. 

182 — Proofs  of  the  effects  of  habitual  use  in  the  modification  of 
animal  organisms.  Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1889,  pp.  541-549. 
(The  principle  of  over-nutrition  was  at  once  the  cause  of  sexuality, 
the  struggle  for  existence  and  the  direct  means  of  evolution  of  all 
larval  forms.  Over-nutrition,  resulting  in  sexuality,  was  the  means 
of  heaping  up  potential  physiological  energy  in  the  egg,  so  as  to  ren- 
der larval  development  and  a  larval  struggle  for  existence  a  possi- 
bility. The  mainspring  of  evolution  or  its  motive  force  is  to  be 
sought  in  sexuality). 

183 — A  physiological  theory  of  the  calcification  of  the  skeleton. 
Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1889,  pp.  550-558. 

184 — Evolution  of  the  specialized  vertebral  axis  of  the  higher 
types.     University  Med.  Mag.,  April,  1889. 

185 — The  function  and  histology  of  the  yolk-sac  of  the  young 
toad-fish  (Batrachus  tau).  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1890,  pp. 
407-408. 

186 — A  physiological  hypothesis  of  heredity  and  variation. 
Amer.  Nat.,  1890,  pp.  85-92. 

187 — The  continuity  of  the  primary  matrix  of  the  scales  and  the 
actinotrichia  of  teleosts.     Amer.  Nat.,  1890,  pp.  489-491. 

188 — The  eye,  ocular  muscles  and  lachrymal  glands  of  the  shrew 
mole  (Blarina  talpoides  Gray).  Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1890,  pp. 
16-18.     (Calling  attention,  among  other  points,  to  the  slight  attach- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  251 

ment  of  the  eye-ball  and  the  great  development  of  the  lachrymal 
gland). 

189 — The  origin  of  sex  through  cumulative  integration  and  the 
relation  of  sexuality  to  the  genesis  of  species.  Proc.  Amer.  Phil. 
Soc,  1890,  pp.  109-159. 

190 — On  the  kinds  of  motion  in  the  ultimate  units  of  contractile 
living  matter.     Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.,  Vol.  XL,  1891,  p.  328. 

191 — On  two  new  and  undescribed  methods  of  contractility  man- 
ifested by  filaments  of  protoplasm.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila., 
1891,  pp.  10-12.  (Fixed  and  reversible  spiral  contraction  in  Vor- 
tlcella  and  in  Trypanosoma  balbianii  respectively). 

192— An  attempt  to  illustrate  some  of  the  primary  laws  of  me- 
chanical evolution.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1891,  pp.  62-70. 

193 — Sherwood  and  Ryder.  Abnormal  duplication  of  urosome 
in  Rana  catesbiana.  Amer.  Nat.,  1891,  pp.  740-742.  (Remark 
upon  bifid-tailed  tadpoles). 

194 — Notes  on  the  development  of  Engy stoma.  Amer.  Nat.,  1891, 
pp.  838-840. 

195 — On  the  mechanical  genesis  of  the  scales  of  fishes.  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1892,  pp.  219-224,  3  figs.  Reprint  in  Ann. 
&  Mag.  Nat.  Hist,  XI,  pp.  243-248. 

196 — Diffuse  pigmentation  of  the  epidermis  of  the  oyster  due  to 
prolonged  exposure  to  the  light ;  regeneration  of  shell  and  loss  of 
adductor  muscle.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1892,  pp.  350-351. 
(Recording  observations  of  Prof.  R.  C.  Schiedt). 

197 — Hermaphroditism  and  viviparity  of  the  oysters  of  the  north- 
west coast  of  the  United  States.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1892, 
pp.  351-352.  (Recorded  in  behalf  of  Prof.  R.  C.  Schiedt). 

198 — On  the  cause  of  the  greening  of  the  oyster  and  its  presumed 
algous  endo-parasites.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1892,  p.  352. 

199 — The  principle  of  the  conservation  of  energy  in  biological 
evolution  :  a  reclamation  and  critique.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1892,  pp.  455-468. 

200 — A  geometrical  representation  of  the  relative  intensity  of  the 
conflict  between  organisms.     Amer.  Nat.,  1892,  pp.  923-929. 

201 — Cholera  and  flies.  Entomological  News,  Oct.,  1892,  pp. 
210-211.     (Reprint  from  Public  Ledger,  Phila.). 

202 — The  inheritence  of  modifications  due  to  disturbances  of  the 
early  stages  of  development,  especially  in  the  Japanese  domesticated 
races  of  gold-carp.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila,,  1893,  pp.  75-94. 

203 — The  vascular  respiratory  mechanism  of  the  vertical  fins  of 
the  viviparous  Embiotocidae.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1893, 
pp.  95-99,  1  fig. 

204 — Energy  as  a  factor  in  organic  evolution.  Proc.  Amer. 
Phil.  Soc,  1893,  XXXI,  pp.  192-203.  (Upon  ergogeny,  kineto- 
geny  and  statogeny,  with  an  appendix  giving  a  list  of  the  author's 
papers  on  ergogenetic  development  of  morphological  characters — 25 
titles). 


252  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

205 — The  mechanical  genesis  of  the  form  of  the  fowl's  egg.  Proc. 
Amer.  Phil.  Soc,  1893,  XXXI,  i)p.  203-209,  1  fig. 

206 — The  adaptive  forms  and  vortex  motion  of  the  substance  of 
the  red  blood-corpuscles  of  vertebrates.  Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  iSoc., 
XXXII,  No.  143,  May,  1893,  pp.  272-275.  (Bead  at  the  meeting 
commemorating  the  150th  anniversary  of  the  foundation  of  the  So- 
ciety). 

207 — The  correlations  of  the  volumes  and  surfaces  of  organisms. 
Contrib.  Zool.  Lab.  Univ.  of  Penna.,  Vol.  I,  No.  1,  1893,  pp.  3-36, 
1  plate. 

208 — The  growth  of  Euglena  viridis  when  constrained  principally 
to  two  dimensions  of  space.  Contrib.  Zool.  Lab.  Univ.  of  Penna., 
Vol.  I,  No.  1,  1893,  pp.  37-50,  1  plate. 

209 — The  synthetic  museum  of  comparative  anatomy  as  a  basis 
for  a  comprehensive  system  of  research.  Contrib.  Zool.  Lab. 
Univ.  of  Penn.,  1893.  Separate,  pp.  1-15.  (A  valuable  paper 
giving  an  outline  of  a  museum  adopted  to  modern  methods  of  re- 
search ;  now  being  realized,  in  part,  at  the  Wistar  Institute,  Univ. 
of  Penna.). 

210 — Biological  research  in  relation  to  the  fisheries.  Bull.  U.  IS. 
Fish  Comm.,  1893,  pp.  59-63.  (Bead  before  the  World's  Fisheries 
Congress,  Chicago,  1893). 

211 — Byder  and  Pennington,  Mary  E.  Non-sexual  conjugation 
of  the  nuclei  of  the  adjacent  cells  of  an  epithelium.  Anat.  Anzeiger, 
11,  Aug..  1894,  pp.  759-764. 

212 — Dynamical  evolution.  Biological  Lectures  Marine  Biol. 
Lab.,  Vol.  II,  Boston,  1894. 

213 — An  arrangement  of  the  retinal  cells  in  the  eyes  of  fishes 
partially  simulating  compound  eyes.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila., 
1895,  pp.  161-166,  2  figs,  in  text. 

214 — The  true  nature  of  the  so-called  "  nettle-cells"  of  Paramoe- 
cmm.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1895,  pp.  167-170. 

215 — A  dynamical  hypothesis  of  inheritence.  Biological  Lectures 
Marine  Biol.  Lab.,  Vol.  Ill,  Boston,  1895. 

DESCRIPTIONS    OF    NEW   SCIENTIFIC   APPARATUS. 

216 — Holman's  new  compressorium  and  moist  chamber.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1880,  p.  691.     Also  in  Journal  of  the  Franklin  Institute. 

217 — Byder's  automatic  microtome.  Amer.  Nat,  1887,  pp.  298- 
302,  2  figs.  (Description  of  rapid  cutting  section  instrument  in- 
volving new  principles  of  micrometric  adjustment). 

218 — A  new  paraflBne  embedding  apparatus.  Amer.  Nat.,  1887, 
pp.  597-600. 

219 — A  new  method  of  entrapping,  killing,  embedding  and 
orienting  infusoria  and  other  small  objects  for  the  microtome.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1895,  pp.  194-198, 1  fig.  in  text. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  253 

TRANSLATIONS   AND   REVIEWS. 

220 — Notes  on  the  recently  described  monotremes.     Amer.  Nat., 

1878,  pp.  320-321. 

221 — A   remarkable  new  genus  of  giant  sloths.      Amer.  Nat., 

1879,  pp.  590-592.  (Review  of  "  Beskriivelse  af  Hovedskallen  af 
et  Kaempedovendyr,  Grypotherium  darwini,  fra  Laplata-Landenes 
plejstocene  Dannelser."  Af.  J.  Reinhardt.  in  Vidensk.  Sel.  Skr.  5te 
Raekke.  Naturv.  og  Math.  Afd.  XII,  4,  4to  pis.  II,  Kjobenhavn, 
1879). 

New  sub  fams.  proposed  :     Aprielorhinse,  Diarhinae. 

222 — A  new  species  of  Coelodon.  Amer.  Nat.,  1879,  p.  592. 
(Review  of  "  Kaempedovendyr  Slaegten  Coelodon."  Af.  J.  Rein- 
hardt, 4  to  p.  257-349,  pis.  7.  Ext.  Vidensk.  Selsk.  Skr.  5te  Raekke, 
Naturvidensk.  og  Math.  Afd.,  XII,  3,  Copenhagen,  1878). 

223 — Growth  as  a  function  of  cells.  Amer.  Nat.,  1880,  p.  44-45. 
(Review  of  "  Growth  as  a  function  of  cells,"  by  Chas.  Sedgwick 
Minot.     Proc.  Bos.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  1878-79,  Vol.  XX,pt.  II,  p.  190). 

224 — On  the  genitalia  of  male  eels  and  their  sexual  characters, 
by  S.  Th.  Cattie  (Translation).  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  1880, 
pp.  280-284. 

225 — On  the  mature  male  sexual  organs  of  the  conger-eel  (Conger 
vnlgaris),  with  some  observations  on  the  male  of  the  common  eel 
(Aiiguilla  vulgaris).  By  Otto  Hermes.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm., 
I,  1881,  pp.  126-130.  (translation  of  "Ueber  reife  mannliche  Ge- 
schlechtstheile  des  Seeaals  [Conger  vulgaris]  und  einige  Notizen  uber 
den  mannlichen  Flussaal.  Anguilla  vulgaris").  Zool.  Anzeiger,  1881, 
No.  74,  pp.  39-44). 

226 — On  Semper's  method  of  making  dry  preparations.  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.,  1881,  pp.  224-225. 

227 — A  contribution  to  our  knowledge  of  the  development  of  the 
ovster  (Ostrea  edulis),  by  Dr.  R.  Horst.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm., 
li,  1882,  pp.  159-167,  12  figs.  (Translation  of  "  Bijdrage  tot  de 
Kennis  van  de  Ontwikkelingsgeschiedeuis  van  de  Oester  (Ostrea 
edulisy'  in  Tijdschr.  d.  Ned.  Dierk.  Vereen.  dl.  VI,  1882).  Ab- 
stract in  Zool.  Anzeiger,  3d  April,  1882. 

228 — Report  relative  to  the  generation  and  artificial  fecundation 
of  oysters,  addressed  to  the  Minister  of  Marine  and  Colonies  bv  M. 
Bouchon-Brandely.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish.  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  319- 
338.  (Translation  of  "  Rapport  relatif  a  la  generation  et  a  la  fe- 
condation  artificielle  des  huitres,  addresse  au  ministre  de  la  marine 
et  des  colonies,  in  Journ.  officiel  de  la  Republique  Francaise,"  Decem- 
ber 16-17,  1882,  pp.  6762-6764  and  6778-6782)  with  notes  by  the 
translator. 

229 — On  the  sexuality  of  the  common  oyster  (0.  edulis)  and 
that  of  the  Portuguese  oyster  (0.  angulata).  Artificial  fecundation 
of  the  Portuguese  oyster,  by  M.  Bouchon-Brandely.  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  339--341.    (Translation  of  "  De  la  sexual- 


254  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ite  chez  I'huitre  ordinaire  \_0.  eduli^']  et  chez  I'huitre  Portugaise 
(0.  angulata).  Fecondation  artificielle  de  I'huitre  Portugaise,"  in 
Comptes  Rendus  de  L' Academic  des  Sciences,  XCV,  No.  5  [31 
Juillet,  1882],  pp.  256-259,  Paris,  1882). 

230 — Researches  on  the  generative  organs  of  the  oyster  (  0.  edulis), 
by  P.  P.  C.  Hoek.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  343, 
(Translation  of  "  Recherches  sur  les  organes  genitaux  des  huitres." 
par  M.  P.  P.  C.  Hoek,  Comptes  rendus  des  seances  de  I'Academie 
des  Sciences,  Paris,  November  6,  1882). 

231 — A  simple  test  to  learn  if  fish  ova  are  impregnated,  by  Prof. 
Nussbaum.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  II,  1882,  pp.  347-348. 
(Translation  from  Deutsche  Fischerei  Zeitung,  VI,  No.  5,  Jan.  30, 
1883. 

232 — On  the  cause  of  the  gi-eening  of  oysters.  Rep.  U.  S.  Comm. 
Fish  and  Fisheries,  1882,  pp.  793-801.  (A  translation  of  "Notice 
sur  la  cause  du  verdissement  des  huitres."  Par  M.  Puysegur,  in 
Rev.  Maritime  et  Colonial e,  pp.  11,1  pi.  Paris,  Berger-Levrault 
etCie,  1880). 

233 — Development  of  the  membrane-bones  of  the  skull  of  the  pike. 
Science,  I,  1883,  p.  513. 

234 — Oyster  culture  in  Holland.     Science,  II,  1883,  p.  79. 
235 — The  development  of  the  viviparous  edible  oyster.     Amer. 
Nat.,  1885,  pp.  317-318.     (Review  of  Dr.  Horst's  paper). 

238 — The  mode  of  formation  and  the  morphological  value  of  the 
eggs  of  Nepa  and  Notonecta.  Amer.  Nat.,  1885,  pp.  615-616.  (Re- 
view of  paper  by  Ludwig  Will). 

237 — The  unpaired  fins  of  selachians.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp. 
142-143.     (Review  of  paper  by  Dr.  Paul  Mayer). 

239— The  development  of  Patella.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  563- 
564.     (Review  of  paper  by  Dr.  Wm.  Patten). 

240 — Professor  Selenka  on  the  development  of  the  opossum  (Di- 
delphys  virginiana).  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  394-396.  (Translation 
from  Biblog.  Centralbl.,  V,  No.  10,  1885,  pp.  294-295). 

241— The  development  of  Dentalium.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  p.  565. 
(Review  of  paper  by  M.  Kowalevsky). 

242— The  development  of  the  Chitonidie  or  Polyplacophora. 
Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  565-567.  (Review  of  paper  by  M.  Kowalev- 
sky). 

243 — The  development  of  the  gill  in  Fasciolaria.  Amer.  Nat., 
1886,  p.  567.     (Review  of  paper  by  Dr.  H.  Leslie  Osborn). 

244— The  early  development  of  Julus  terrestris.     Amer.   Nat., 
1886,  pp.  662-666.     (Review  of  paper  by  F.  G.  Heathcoat,  M.  A.). 
245 — The  development  of  Agaleva  naevia.     Amer.  Nat.,  1886, 
pp.  666-667.     (Review  of  paper  by  Wm.  A.  Locy). 

246— Life-history  of  Thalessema.  Amer.  Nat.,  1886,  pp.  988-989. 
(Review  of  H.  W.  Conn's  paper). 

247 — The  formation  of  the  eggs  and  development  of  rotifers. 
Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp.  93-95.     (Review  of  G.  Tessin's  paper). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  255 

248 — The  gestation  of  armadillos.  Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp.  95- 
96.    (Review  of  von  Ihering's  paper). 

249 — The  ventral  suckers  or  sucking  disks  of  the  tadpoles  of  dif- 
ferent genera  of  frogs  and  toads.  Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp.  263-264. 
(From  Dr.  Ryder's  notes.    Citation  not  found). 

250 — Haddon's  "  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Embryology." 
Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp.  292-293. 

251 — Development  of  the  carnivora.  Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp. 
394-396.     (Review  of  A.  Fleischmann's  work). 

252 — Suggestion  respecting  the  epiblastic  origin  of  the  segmental 
duct.  Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp.  587-590.  (Review  of  Prof  A.  C. 
Haddon's  paper). 

253 — The  development  of  an  eight-limbed  vertebrate.  Amer. 
Nat,  1887,  pp.  862-863.    (Review  of  S.  Watase's  paper.) 

254 — Spermatogenesis  in  mammalia.  Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp.  946- 
948.     (Review  of  paper  by  Dr.  Carl  Benda). 

255 — Development  of  the  Coecilians.  Amer.  Nat.,  1887,  pp. 
1035-1036.    (Review  of  work  of  Messrs.  Sarasin). 

256 — The  origin  of  the  segmental  duct  in  elasmobranchs.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1887,  p.  1037.     (Notice  of  Dr.  Beard's  work). 

257 — Rudiments  of  true  calcified  teeth  in  the  young  of  Orriitho- 
rhynchus.  Amer.  Nat.,  1888,  pp.  368-369.  (Review  of  paper  by 
E.  B.  Poulton). 

258 — The  ectoblastic  origin  of  the  Wolffian  duct  in  the  chelonia. 
Amer.  Nat,  1888,  p.  369.     (Notice  of  paper  by  M.  Mitsukuri). 

259 — Origin  of  the  Wolffian  duct  in  lacertilia.  Amer.  Nat., 
1888,  p.  369.     (Notice  of  paper  by  J.  von  Perenyi). 

260— The  origin  of  the  mammie.  Amer.  Nat.,  1888,  p.  370.  (Note 
upon  investigations  of  W.  Haacke). 

261 — The  several  functions  of  the  enamel  organ  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  teeth  of  mammals,  and  on  the  inheritance  of  mutilations. 
Amer.  Nat,  1888,  pp.  547-550.  (Review  of  researches  of  von 
Brunn  et  al). 

262 — Researches  upon  the  development  of  Comatula.  Amer.  Nat, 
1888,  pp.  657-659.     (Review  of  paper  by  Barrels). 

263 — Observations  on  the  development  of  cephalopods.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1888,  pp.  754-755.     (Review  of  S.  Watase's  paper). 

264 — On  the  development  of  the  calcareous  plates  of  Asterias. 
Amer.  Nat.,  1888,  p.  755.     (Note  on  J.  Walter  Fewkes'  work). 

265 — The  value  in  classification  of  the  stages  of  growth  and  de- 
cline with  proposals  for  a  new  nomenclature.  Amer.  Nat.,  1888,  p. 
755.    (Note  on  A.  Hyatt's  paper). 

266 — Development  of  the  sea-bass  (Serranus  atrarius).  Amer. 
Nat,  1888,  p.  755.     (Note). 

267 — On  the  primary  segmentation  of  the  germ-band  of  insects. 
Amer,  Nat.,  1888,  pp.  941-942.     (Review  of  Veit  Graber's  work). 

268 — Development  of  the  peripheral  nervous  system  of  verte- 
brates. Amer.  Nat.,  1888,  pp.  1132-1134.  (Review  of  Dr.  Beard's 
work). 


256  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

269 — A  new  atlas  of  embryology.  Amer.  Nat.,  1888,  p.  1134- 
1135.     (Review  of  M.  Duval's  work). 

270 — New  studies  of  the  human  embryo.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp. 
171-172.     (Review  of  work  of  M.  C.  Phisalix). 

271 — On  the  development  and  first  traces  of  the  anterior  roots  of 
the  spinal  nerves  in  selachians.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp.  172-173. 
(Review  of  Dohrn's  paper). 

272 — The  maturation  and  fertilization  of  the  egg  of  Petromyzon 
planeri.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  p.  173.  (Review  of  A.  A.  Bohm's  pa- 
per). 

273 — The  structure  of  the  human  spermatozoon.  Amer.  Nat., 
1889,  pp.  183-184  (Vol.  irregularly  paged).  (Review  of  E.  M.  Nel- 
son's paper). 

274 — Development  of  Crangon  vulgaris.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  pp. 
737-788.     (Review  of  J.  W.  Kingsley's  paper). 

275 — Development  of  Sepia  officinalis.  Amer.  Nat.,  1889,  p. 
738.     (Review  of  M.  L.  Vialleton's  paper). 

276 — Extra-ovarian  primordial  ova  in  the  human  embryo.  Amer. 
Nat.,  1889,  p.  827.     (Review  of  W.  Nagel's  paper). 

277 — Placentation  of  the  hedgehog  and  the  phylogeny  of  the 
placenta.  Amer.  Nat.,  1890,  pp.  376-378.  (Review  of  Hubrecht's 
paper). 

278 — "A  theory  of  development  and  heredity,"  by  Henry  D.  Orr. 
Amer.  Nat.,  1894,  pp.  154-156.     (Review). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  257 


SUMMARY  OF  NEW  LIBERIAN  POLYDESMOIDEA. 

BY   O.   F.   COOK. 

In  a  preceding  paper'  on  the  diplopod  fauna  of  Liberia  several  new 
species  and  genera  were  referred  to,  of  which  a  list  is  here  given  to- 
gether with  such  additional  diagnostic  characters  as  may  be  neces- 
sary for  the  separation  of  the  various  forms  from  the  territory 
explored.     Extended  descriptions  and  plates  are  in  preparation. 

Ammodesmus  granum. 

Locality,  Mt.  Coffee,  a  cluster  of  hills  in  western  Liberia,  reach- 
ing an  altitude  of  about  300  feet,  and  covered  with  dense  forest.  A 
large  part  of  the  other  forms  were  collected  in  the  same  vicinity,  all 
except  those  of  which  other  localities  are  specified. 

Cenchrodesmus  volutus. 

Length  about  2  mm.,  width  .65  mm. 
Campodesmus  carbonarias. 

Surface  of  head  and  segments  covered  with  rough  granules ;  first 
segment  scarcely  broader  than  the  head,  with  three  transverse  rows 
of  coarse  tubercles ;  second  segment  broadest  of  all ;  segments  with 
a  cluster  of  three  large  tubercles  on  each  side  of  the  middle,  five 
smaller  scattered  tubercles  on  each  side  of  these,  and  three  tubercles 
on  each  of  the  very  broad,  decurved  carinse ;  last  segment  not  con- 
cealed, rounded  at  apex,  with  three  broad,  blunt,  setigerous  tuber- 
cles on  each  lateral  edge  ;  preanal  scale  with  two  long  smooth  seti- 
gerous papillae.  Length  of  male  29  mm.,  width  5.25  mm. ;  length 
of  female  32  mm.,  width  6.5  mm. 

Tropidesmus  jugosus. 

Generally  similar  to  the  preceding,  except  that  the  segments  are 
dorsally  ornamented  with  two  transverse  rows,  each  of  six  short  lon- 
gitudinal carinie ;  also  the  tubercles  of  the  preanal  scale  are  short, 
not  papilliform.  Length  28  mm.,  width  5  mm. ;  locality  Mt.  Coifee 
and  vicinity ;  much  rarer  than  Campodesmus,  and  more  inclined  to 
burrow  in  the  ground. 

*A  New  Diplopod  Fauna  in  Liberia.   American  Naturalist,  xxx,  pp.  413- 

420,  1896. 


258  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Comodesmns  lanatas. 

Autenni>?  distinctly  clavate ;  last  segment  decurved.  the  immedi- 
ate apex  small,  projecting,  truncate  ;  lateral  carime  pre;?ent  only  as 
a  longitudinal  row  of  large  tubercles,  above  which  the  tubercles  are 
gradually  smaller ;  length  8  mm.,  width  1  mm. 

Thelydesmus  dispar. 

Antennie  distinctly  clavate ;  first  segment  nearly  as  wide  as  the 
second,  scarcely  concealing  the  head  in  front ;  segments  with  four 
regular  transverse  rows  of  conic  piliferous  granules  ;  carinoe  moder- 
ately broad,  somewhat  narrowed  toward  the  margin.  coai"sely  den- 
tate all  around  by  reason  of  the  prominent  granules,  the  largest  of 
which  is  located  at  posterior  corner ;  last  segment  triangular  in  out- 
line, the  edges  dentate  with  setiferous  tubercles,  the  apex  narrow, 
with  a  small  tubercle  ;  females  nearly  black  above,  18  mm.  long, 
B.2o  mm.  broad ;  males  quite  black  above,  less  convex  and  more 
slender  than  the  female,  and  with  proportionately  broader  carinte ; 
length  of  male  15  mm.,  width  2.75  mm. ;  locality,  Mt.  Coffee;  females 
not  rare. 

Discodesmus  senex. 

Smaller  and  more  slender  than  Comode^mu? ;  dorsum  densely 
granular-tuberculate,  the  prominences  subequal  in  size  and  setiferous  ; 
lateral  carinse  nearly  wanting,  the  segments  slightly  thicker  at  the 
sides  and  with  larger  tubercles ;  repugnatorial  pore  located  above 
the  lateral  row  of  tubercles  ;  color  white. 

Prepodesmus  tigrinus. 

This  and  its  congeners  have  the  copulatory  legs  with  a  large 
needle-like  straight  or  slightly  curved  spine  from  the  ventral  or 
median  face.  The  present  species  has  the  anterior  margin  of  the 
first  segment,  the  anterior  lateral  apices  of  the  second  and  third 
segments,  and  the  carinse,  or  at  least  the  posterior  part  of  the  carina 
of  poriferous  segments  bright  yellow,  with  the  remainder  of  the  body 
black  ;  legs  and  antennie  reddish-yellow  ;  length  of  female  42  mm., 
width  5  mm. ;  antennae  and  longest  legs  9  mm. ;  males  distinctly 
smaller. 

Prepodesmus  mimus. 

Of  the  same  form  and  size,  but  with  the  anterior  margin  of  the 
first  segment,  the  carina  of  the  second  and  third,  and  the  whole  pos- 
terior subsegments  of  the  poriferous  segments  blight  red  ;  legs  and 
antenna  reddish  ;  locality,  Muhlenburg  Mission. 


1896.]  >-ATUEAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  259 

Tylodesmus  crassipes. 

Color  entirely  black,  legs  and  antenna  yellowish  ;  copulatory  legs 
"without  the  spine  present  in  Prepodesmui;  and  with  the  interior 
lamina  broad  and  flabellate  ;  anterior  male  legs  slightly,  though 
distinctly,  crassate;  length  of  male  40  mm.,  width  4.5  mm. ;  length 
of  female  43  mm. ;  width  5.6  mm. 

Tylodesmus  amoebus. 

Anterior  half  of  first  segment,  the  carinje  of  the  second  and  third, 
and  the  whole  of  the  poriferous  segments,  except  the  last  two  or 
three,  bright  red ;  the  remainder  of  the  body  is  black ;  legs  and 
antenna  pale;  legs  of  both  sexes  distinctly  more  slender  than  in  the 
preceding  species ;  sexes  not  strikingly  unequal,  though  the  male 
is  more  slender  and  has  somewhat  longer  legs ;  length  35  mm.,  width 
of  male,  4  mm.,  of  female,  4.5  mm. ;  locality,  Muhlenburg  Mission. 
The  color  of  this  species  is  almost  exactly  that  of  Frepodesmus 
mimus. 

Lyrodesmus  nigerrimxis. 

The  genus  is  evidently  related  to  the  last,  and  has  a  closelv  similar 
copulatory  foot ;  it  is  distinct  in  being  more  slender  and  depressed, 
and  in  having  the  first  segment  lenticular  or  fusiform  in  outline, 
rather  than  hemispheric-elliptical  as  in  the  two  preceding  genera. 
The  species  is  deep,  shining  black,  including  the  legs  and  antennae ; 
length  of  male  35  mm.,  width  4  mm.,  legs  6  mm.,  antenna  8  mm.  in 
length.  Very  rare,  only  two  specimens  found.  A  third,  nearly 
white  in  color  and  somewhat  diflferent  in  form,  may  prove  to  be 
specifically  distinct. 

Cheirodesmus  ater. 

First  segment  as  in  Lyrodennu-s,  but  the  angles  not  so  pointed  ; 
body  more  slender,  narrower,  dorsum  flat ;  carina  with  square 
corners,  so  that  the  poriferous  callus  projects  from  a  nearly  straight 
edge  ;  copulatory  legs  less  complicated,  the  slender  branch  shorter; 
color  uniform  black,  legs  and  antenna  yellowish ;  length  30  mm. ; 
•width  3.75  mm. 

Cheirodesmus  discolor. 

Similar  to  the  preceding  in  size  and  form,  but  distinct  at  least  in 
color ;  an  area  around  each  pore,  and  a  moderately  broad  median 
line,  yellow ;  legs  and  antenna  reddish-yellow  ;  rare,  only  one  pair 
taken,  near  Muhlenburg  Mission. 


260  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Anisodesmus  cerasinas. 

Perhaps  doubtfully  distinct  from  A.  erythropus  (Lucas)  in  the 
greater  size  and  lighter  color,  all  the  specimens  from  the  interior 
differing  thus  from  individuals  CT)llected  at  Monrovia.  Length 
41  mm.,  width  of  male  b.b,  of  female  6.5  mm.  The  length  of  what 
I  have  identified  as  erythropus  is  about  35  mm.  The  species  can, 
however,  hardly  be  determined  with  confidence  from  Lucas'  des- 
cription. Both  forms  are  very  beautiful  in  life,  deep  wine-color, 
with  bright  cherry-pink  legs. 

Isodesmus  immarginatas. 

Resembles  Lyrodesmus  and  Cheirodesnms,  but  is  distinctly  broader 
than  either,  and  distinct  from  all  the  related  forms  in  the  absence 
of  a  distinct  poriferous  callus,  the  margin  being  sinuate.  Legs  and 
antennae  more  slender  than  in  Anisodesmus,  but  less  so  than  in 
LyrodesTmis  and  Cheirodesmus.  Color  uniform  black,  the  antennse 
and  apical  joints  of  the  legs  also  dark.  Copulatory  legs  also  very 
distinct  in  that  the  outer  ramus  is  broad  and  bifid,  while  the  inner 
is  trifid,  giving  five  distal  divisions.     Length  -42  mm.,  width  5  mm. 

Isodesmus  interraptus. 

Is  somewhat  larger  than  the  above  and  has  the  carinje  of  the 
poriferous  segments  pale  yellow.  It  is  known  from  a  female  spec- 
imen only. 

Oxydesmus  medius. 

Black  or  very  dark  %'inous ;  carinag  concolorous ;  legs  and  antennse 
also  dark  ;  length  52-66  mm,,  width  10-12  mm. 

Oxydesmus  liber. 

Dark  chocolate-brown  to  black ;  ends  of  the  carinse,  especially  the 
submarginal  ridge,  yellow  or  orange  ;  antennse  and  legs  hght  yellow 
or  orange;  length  68-80  mm,,  width  12-13  mm. 

Bactrodesmus  claviger. 

Antennae  very  long  and  slender,  clavate,  sixth  joint  longest, 
scarcely  exceeding  the  third  ;  dorsum  much  as  in  Polydesmus,  with 
three  rows  of  scattering  tubercles,  each  with  a  large  clubbed  hair; 
pores  dorsal,  of  the  usual  arrangement ;  penultimate  segment  toothed 
behind ;  first  legs  reduced,  the  second  greatly  enlarged,  especially 
the  penultimate  joint ;  last  joint  curved  ;  claw  very  short,  broad  ; 
copulatory  legs  with  the  basal  joint  much  enlarged,  galeate,  contain- 
ing the  apical  joint  when  at  rest ;  length  7  mm,,  width  1  mm. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  261 

Pterodesmus  brownellii. 

Last  segment  exceeded  and  included  by  the  penultimate,  the  pos- 
terior sinus  of  which  is  nearly  square,  longer  than  broad  ;  copulatory 
legs  excised  at  apex,  the  posterior  lobe  longer,  laterally  excised,  the 
anterior  broad,  with  three  or  four  short  t^eth  ;  length  28  mm.,  width 
7  mm. 
Gypsodesmus  prninosus. 

Dorsum  very  flat,  the  carinse  curved  gently  upward  toward  the 
posterior  corners,  and  as  high  as  the  middle  of  the  segments ;  last 
segment  subequal  to  the  penultimate  in  length,  the  sinus  of  the  latter 
broader,  the  sides  diverging ;  copulatory  legs  with  the  dorsal  ramus 
long,  strongly  decurved  and  turned  mesad ;  length  16  mm.,  width 
4  mm. 

Lampodesmns  volvatas. 

Dorsum  distinctly  convex,  the  carinse  slightly  decurved,  nearly  in 
the  direction  of  the  dorsal  arch  ;  last  segment  and  copulatory  legs 
somewhat  as  in  Gypsodesmus;  male  legs  crassate,  especially  the 
anterior ;  two  large  and  conspicuous  processes  from  the  sternum  of 
the  sixth  legs  of  males ;  length  24  mm.,  width  5.7  mm. 

Compsodesmns  pnlcher. 

About  as  convex  as  the  last,  but  the  sides  sloping  more  directly 
from  the  middle  ;  no  processes  from  the  sixth  segment ;  male  legs 
scarcely  crassate  ;  copulatory  legs  very  simple,  apically  somewhat 
cup-shaped ;  penultimate  segment  with  sinus  broader ;  length  24.5 
mm.,  width  6.5  mm. 

Clioridesmns  citus. 

Last  segment  nearly  or  quite  concealed  under  the  penultimate ; 
length  5.5  mm.,  width  1.5  mm. 

Scolodesmus  grallator. 

Dark  vinous,  a  narrow,  poorly-defined  median  spot  on  each  pos- 
terior subsegment,  giving  the  effect  of  a  pale  median  line ;  legs  and 
antenna?  pinkish  or  yellowish ;  length  28  mm.,  width  2.5  mm.,  the 
first  segment  as  broad  as  any,  the  other  anterior  segments  distinctly 
narrower ;  locality,  Monrovia. 

Habrodesmus  laetns. 

Length  of  male  27  mm.,  width  2  mm.;  width  of  female  3  mm. 
Stylodesmas  horridus. 

Length  10  mm.,  width  3.2  mm. ;  the  processes  of  the  seventeenth 
and  eighteenth  segments  project  far  behind  the  nineteenth,  which 


262  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

has  neither  process  nor  pores.      The  first  and  eighteenth  segments 
have  the  processes  united  for  more  than  half  their  length. 

Udodesmus  telluster. 

Length  8.5  mm.,  width  1.25  mm.;  penultimate  segment  project- 
ing beyond  the  last,  but  not  exceeded  by  the  processes  of  the  eigh- 
teenth, which  are  not  coalesced ;  processes  trituberculate  at  apex  ; 
first  segment  with  two  large  processes,  and  four  large  lobes  in  front, 
the  median  notch  large,  deep,  rounded. 

Hercodesmus  aureus. 

Length  6.75  mm.,  width  .75  mm. ;  last  segment  exceeded  by  the 
penultimate ;  processes  replaced  by  longitudinal  ridges ;  carinas  very 
narrow ;  first  segment  with  margin  very  faintly  lobed. 

Stiodesmus  stratus. 

Length  10  mm,,  width  1.4  mm. ;  last  segment  not  concealed ;  first 
segment  not  lobed,  but,  like  the  rest  of  the  dorsal  surface,  beset  with 
rounded  gx-anules  or  tubercles.  The  affinities  of  this  form  are  some- 
what obscure.  The  general  appearance  and  sculpture  suggest 
Comodesmus,  but  the  form  of  the  first  and  last  segments  and  the 
structure  and  location  of  the  pores  are  very  different.  It  may  prove 
to  be  one  of  the  Cryptodesmidce,  in  the  sense  of  being  more  nearly 
related  to  Cryptodesmus  olfersii  than  to  the  other  species  which  have 
been  described  under  that  much  over-worked  generic  name. 

RELATED  FORMS  NOT  FOUND  IN  LIBERIA. 
Xyodesmus  planus. 

Related  to  Thelydesmus,  but  distinctly  more  depressed,  especially 
the  male.  Last  segment  broad  at  apex  and  with  a  large,  conic, 
marginal  tubercle  on  each  side  hearly  equalling  the  apex  ;  dorsum 
densely  beset  with  conic  tubercles;  carinse  broad,  dentate,  with 
numerous  pointed-conic  tubercles;  antennse  scarcely  clavate ;  head 
not  concealed;  first  segment  narrower  than  the  second;  sterna 
granulate,  especially  in  the  female  ;  color  nearly  black  ;  length  21 
mm.,  width  of  male  3.75  mm. ;  of  female  4  mm. ;  locality,  Bismarck- 
burg,  Togo  Colony,  Dr.  K.  Biittner ;  Berlin  Museum. 

Helodesmus  porosus. 

Related  to  Comodesmus  rather  than  to  the  other  families,  but  with 
remarkable  diff'erences.  First  segment  widest,  concealing  the  head  ; 
body  tapering  caudad,  subcylindric,  not  coiled  into  a  spiral ;  dorsum 
very  convex,  rough  with  low  granules,  and  incrusted  with  earth; 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  263 

pores  with  distinct  raised  rims,  located  far  above  the  sh'ghtly  prom- 
inent carinas  of  segments  5,  7-17 ;  antennae  and  legs  very  short  and 
stout ;  copulatory  legs  of  two  simple,  equal  processes ;  segments  of 
adult  19  ;  color  above  black,  below  white  ;  length  of  female  4  mm. ; 
width  .6  mm. ;  locality,  mountains  of  Western  Java,  8,000  feet. 
This  species  may  be  considered  the  type  of  a  new  family,  Helodes- 
viidce. 
Prepodesmus  pictus. 

Suggesting  P.  tiyrinus,  but  the  yellow  areas  of  that  species  are 
here  bright ^pink  ;  legs  and  antennae  very  dark  reddish;  length  of 
male  45  mm.,  width  5.5  mm. ;  locality,  Togo  Colony ;  numerous 
specimens  in  the  BerKn  Museum. 

Anisodesmus  konakri. 

Nearly  black,  margins  of  all  carinae  yellowish ;  legs  and  antennae 
pinkish,  rather  pale ;  dorsum  less  convex  than  in  A.  cerasinus,  and 
the  posterior  corners  of  the  carinae  less  strongly  dentate  ;  copulatory 
legs  not  expanded  at  apex,  but  bent  together  at  a  right  angle ; 
locality  Konakri,  French  Gambia,  where  I  collected  a  pair  of 
mature  individuals,  January,  1896. 

Anisodesmus  gracilis. 

Very  distinct  from  the  Liberian  species  in  the  smaller  and  more 
slender  body,  and  light  pinkish  color.  Copulatory  legs  similar  in 
form  to  the  other  species,  but  much  more  slender  apically ;  length 
of  male  27  mm.,  width  3.25  mm. ;  locality,  Bismarckburg,  Togo 
Colony,  Dr.  K.  Biittner ;  Berlin  Museum. 

Lipodesmus  sublaevis. 

Legs  and  antennae  moderately  long ;  segments  faintly  granular  or 
longitudinally  rugulose  toward  the  posterior  margin  ;  pores  located 
on  a  distinct  marginal  callus  projecting  from  about  the  middle  of 
anterior  and  middle  segments ;  in  front  of  the  callus  is  a  distinct 
notch  and  tooth ;  posterior  corner  of  anterior  segments  square,  acute 
on  posterior ;  copulatory  legs  rather  robust,  a  s2)iniform  process  rising 
from  each  side  of  the  ungual  portion  and  curved  cephalad  (dorsad)  ; 
length  of  male  about  28  mm.,  width  3.8  mm. ;  locality,  Karewia, 
East  Africa,  Stuhlmann ;  two  male  specimens  in  the  Berlin  Museum. 

Scytodesmus  kribi. 

Dorsum  roughened  with  five  or  six  irregular  rows  of  close-set  dis- 
tinct granules ;  submarginal  ridge  and  last  segment  as  in  Oxydesvius ; 
copulatory  legs  not  flexed  and  inserted  under  the  edge  of  the  aper- 


264  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ture,  but  constructed  somewhat  as  in  Oxydesmiis ;  length  50  mm., 
width  9  mm. ;  locality,  Kribi,  German  Colony  of  Kamerun  ;  a  male 
specimen  collected  by  Morgen  is  in  the  Berlin  Museum. 

Mimodesmus  parallelus. 

Vertex  and  dorsal  surface  smooth  or  faintly  coriaceous,  with 
neither  granules,  tubercles  nor  areas ;  posterior  subsegments  without 
a  transverse  furrow  or  depression  ;  pores  situated  in  the  outer  slope 
of  the  submarginal  ridge,  as  in  Oxydesmus ;  last  segment  much  as  in 
Oxydesmiis,  but  the  tubercles  obsolete ;  anterior  male  legs  distinctly 
crassate ;  copulatory  legs  long  and  twisted,  apically  recifrved  against 
the  ventral  surface  of  the  segment ;  color  a  dull  brown,  with  the  sub- 
marginal  ridges  and  a  large  spot  in  the  middle  of  each  posterior  sub- 
segment,  yellowish  ;  length  46  mm.,  width  6.5  mm. ;  locality,  Kare- 
wia,  East  Africa,  Stuhlmann  ;  Berlin  Museum. 

Plagiodesmus  obliquus. 

Probably  allied  to  and  perhaps  identical  with  Stenonia  occidentalis 
Karsch,  described  from  Quango.  Distinct  from  the  species  of 
Oxydesmus  by  the  very  oblique  submarginal  ridges,  which  are  wide 
and  not  prominent  about  the  pores  ;  copulatory  legs  long  and  some- 
what twisted,  not  inserted  under  the  edge  of  the  aperture  as  in 
Oxydesmus ;  color  dark  vinous,  nearly  black  ;  length  about  75  mm., 
width  13  mm. ;  locality,  Congo  Valley ;  a  few  specimens  in  the 
British  Museum. 

Compsodesmus  perlatus. 

Length  about  20  mm.,  width  7.5  mm.,  without  the  carinae  2.3 
mm. ;  color  dark  brown,  marked  with  transparent  radiating  lines  as 
in  the  other  species  of  the  present  family ;  copulatory  legs  distally 
cupulate,  the  posterior  rim  produced  caudad  into  a  strong  curved 
spine ;  locality,  Kamerun  hinterland  ;  a  male  specimen  collected  by 
Zenker  is  in  the  Berlin  Museum. 

Tanydesmus  ordinatus. 

This  genus  is  related  to  Lampodesmus  and  the  allied  Liberian 
forms,  as  previously  noted.  Dorsal  areas  arranged  in  three  distinct 
transverse  rows ;  pores  distinct,  of  the  usual  formula,  near  the  ante- 
rior edge  of  the  carinre,  remote  from  the  lateral  margin  ;  penultimate 
segment  subequal  with  the  last,  the  sinus  rather  broad,  the  sides 
distinctly  diverging  caudad  ;  color  in  alcohol  uniform  light  reddish- 
brown  ;  length  of  male  19  mm.,  width  4.5  mm, ;  female  22  mm.  by 
5  mm. ;  locality,  Togo  Colony ;  several  specimens  in  the  Berlin 
Museum. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  265 

Scolodesmus  seeuris. 

Smaller  and  more  slender  than  S.grallator;  of  the  same  color,  but 
without  a  lighter  median  line  or  row  of  spots ;  sternum  of  fourth 
pair  of  legs  with  a  large  process  more  deeply  bilobed  than  S.  grnlla- 
tor ;  copulatory  legs  longer  and  more  slender,  reaching  to  the  fourth 
segment,  in  general  form  like  those  of  S.  grallator ;  above  the  middle 
a  curved  acicular  process  projects  from  each,  and  the  apices  of  the 
two  lie  in  contact;  apical  portion  gently  curved  mesad  and  pointed, 
with  a  large  process  from  the  inner  side  with  a  straight  inner  edge, 
its  corners  produced  proximad  and  distad,  suggesting  the  blade  of 
a  Roman  axe  ;  length  of  male  18  mm.,  width  1.6  mm  ;  locality,  Togo 
Coast ;  a  male  and  a  female  in  the  Berlin  Museum. 

Habrodesmus  falx. 

Closely  resembling  H.  Icetus  in  size  and  form,  differing  in  that 
the  copulatory  legs  end  in  a  broad,  obliquely  truncate  lamina  with  a 
small  transparent  process  from  near  the  middle  of  the  apical  edge. 
In  II.  ketus  the  distal  extremity  is  slender  and  curved,  with  two 
small  teeth  below  the  apex,  so  that  the  apical  sinus  is  shaped  like 
the  figure  3.  Color  in  alcohol,  brown  or  black  ;  the  margins  of  the 
first,  the  posterior  margins  of  the  other  segments,  the  ventral  sur- 
face and  legs,  whitish;  antennre  dark  ;  several  specimens  from  Togo 
are  in  the  Berlin  Museum.  A  label  states  that  the  legs  are  (in  life) 
pinkish-red;  a  female  specimen  is  slightly  larger  and  more  robust 
than  the  female  of  H.  Icetus. 

Napodesmus  costatus. 

Differing  from  Udodesmus,  to  which  it  is  nearest  related,  in  the 
more  depressed  body,  the  thin  margins  of  the  carinse,  and  the  four, 
fine,  slightly  elevated,. dorsal  longitudinal  ridges  or  carinse,  scarcely 
separated  into  their  component  tubercles;  surface  rough,  uneven, 
and  finely  setose,  incrusted  with  earth,  but  without  distinct  tuber- 
cles ;  pores  located  at  the  posterior  corners  of  segments  5,  7,  9,  10, 
12,  13,  15-18,  each  surrounded  by  a  frill  of  short,  fine  hairs  ;  first 
segment  with  numerous  large  conic  processes,  anteriorly  with  four 
large  subequal  lobes,  each  of  which  is  incised  along  the  margin,  the 
median  with  two  incisions,  the  lateral  with  one;  penultimate 
segment  considerably  exceeding  and  completely  concealing  the  last ; 
lobed  at  the  sides,  and  slightly  so  at  apex ;  length  6  mm.,  width 
1.1  mm. ;  locality,  the  forests  of  Western  Liberia,  along  creeks  and 
rivers  ;  rare. 

18 


266  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Pelodesmus  fossor. 

Differing  from  Udodesvius  in  the  more  robust  body,  the  squarer  and 
broader  dorsum,  and  the  more  prominent  and  stronger  dorsal  pro- 
cesses arranged  in  two  rows ;  each  process  distinctly  bifid,  instead  of 
indistinctly  trifid,  directed  obliquely  cephalad.  The  first  segment 
lacks  the  inner  pair  of  large  lobes,  which  are  apparently  replaced  by 
a  pair  of  anteriorly  directed  large  processes  similar  to  those  of  the 
other  segments ;  last  segment  much  as  in  Udodesmus.  Surface 
thickly  incrusted  with  earth;  length  7.5  mm.,  width  1,5  mm.; 
locality,  Freetown,  Sierra  Leone,  under  stones  in  a  moist,  shaded 
place. 

Stegodesmus  leonis. 

A  recently  discovered  genus  evidently  related  to  Udodesmus,  but 
distinct  by  remarkable  characters.  First  segment  nearly  as  broad 
as  any,  much  broader  than  the  second,  about  twice  as  broad  as  long, 
strongly  decurved,  the  anterior  margin  transverse,  entire,  decurved, 
completely  concealing  the  head  ;  antennae  distinctly  clavate,  genic- 
ulate; dorsum  strongly  arched,  the  carin re  depressed  ;  surfiice  finely 
roughened,  ornamented  with  four  longitudinal  ridges,  of  which  the 
part  on  each  segment  is  apparently  composed  of  three  coalesced 
tubercles  or  granules  ;  a  deep  median  longitudinal  sulcus,  giving  a 
resemblance  to  the  Platydesmidce ;  last  segment  completely  concealed 
by  the  greatly  produced  median  pair  of  ridges  of  the  nineteenth, 
which  is  canaliculate  and  deeply  bifid  when  viewed  from  above; 
pores  on  very  distinct  special  papillse  of  segments  5,  7,  9,  10, 12, 13, 
15,  16  ;  color  pale  pinkish,  concealed  by  the  adhering  soil ;  length 
5.5,  width  1.1  mm.;  a  single  female  specimen  was  found  under  a 
stone  in  a  moist  place  in  Freetown,  Sierra  Leone,  January,  1896. 

Pronodesmus  melas. 

First  segment  completely  concealing  the  head,  the  anterior  margin 
faintly  lobed  or  scalloped,  the  upper  surface  with  a  few  scattered 
conic  tubercles;  segments  with  two  conspicuous  longitudinal  ridges, 
the  prominences  of  each  segment  composed  of  two  tubercles  some- 
what coalesced  at  base ;  below  these  ridges  there  is  on  each  side  a 
row  of  three  small  tubercles  on  each  segment ;  pores  located  near 
the  posterior  corner  of  the  carina,  opening  dorsad  on  incons2:>icuous 
rounded  prominences  of  segments  5,  7,  9,  10,  12,  13,  15-18  ;  eigh- 
teenth segment  with  processes  coalesced  in  the  median  line,  the 
resulting  protuberance  projecting  as  far  caudad  as  the  apex  of  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  267 

last  segment ;  nineteenth  segment  with  distinct  carinte,  the  processes 
much  smaller  than  on  the  eighteenth  ;  last  segment  not  concealed, 
apex  very  broad  and  rounded,  dorsally  rough  like  the  other  seg- 
ments, two  distinct  notches  on  each  side ;  color  black,  legs,  antennae, 
and  anal  valves,  white;  length  7  mm,;  width  1.5  mm.;  locality, 
Gede,  West  Java,  9,000  feet. 

Myxodesmus  lobatus. 

AVith  general  resemblance  to  Pronodesmus  and  Napodesvms.  Dor- 
sum with  four  equal  longitudinal  rows,  each  of  three  conic  tubercles 
on  each  segment ;  pores  located  as  in  Pronodesmus ;  lateral  carinse 
with  three  deep,  narrow  incisions,  one  in  the  lateral  margin,  two  in 
the  posterior,  dividing  the  carina?  into  three  distinct  lobes  ;  tubercles 
of  the  caudal  segments  not  larger  than  those  of  the  others ;  last 
segment  apically  broad,  entire,  exposed  ;  color  black  above,  antennae, 
legs  and  anal  valves  white;  length  4.5  mm.,  width  .9  mm. ;  locality, 
Goenoeng  Filoe,  West  Java,  at  an  altitude  of  8,000  feet. 

Cynedesmus  formicola. 

First  segment  clypeate,  concealing  the  head,  the  surface  covered 
with  rounded  granules  of  different  sizes,  the  anterior  margin  thin, 
flattened,  forming  a  projecting  horizontal  rim ;  segments  covered 
with  rounded  granules  somewhat  regularly  arranged,  and  with  four 
equal  longitudinal  rows  of  three  larger  granules  on  each  segment ; 
pores  much  as  in  Stegodesmus,  on  a  special  process  from  the  poste- 
corner  of  the  areate  carinse  of  segments  5,  7,  9,  10,  12,  13,  15,  16 ; 
last  segment  large,  broad  and  rounded  at  apex,  with  six  small  lobes 
or  scallops;  color  pinkish-brown,  with  fine  black  points;  length 
7  mm.,  width  1.25  mm. ;  locality,  Grand  Canary,  in  the  nests  of 
ants,  at  Telde  and  at  Guia. 


268  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1896. 

May  5. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  tlie  Chair. 
Forty-five  persons  present. 


May  12. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Thirty-three  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "Remarks  on  Filaria,"  by  Fred'k  P.  Henry,  M.D., 
was  presented  for  publication. 


May  19. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair 

Ninety-eight  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  The  Planktonokrit,  a  Centrifugal  Apparatus 
for  the  Volumetric  Estimation  of  the  Food-Supply  of  Oysters  and 
other  Aquatic  Animals,"  by  Charles  S.  Dolley,  M.  D.,  was  presented 
for  publication. 

Specimens  of  mammals,  birds,  reptiles,  fishes,  insects  and  mollusks 
collected  in  western  Somali  Land  and  the  Galla  Country,  northeast- 
ern Africa,  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith,  were  presented  to  the  Acad- 
emy and  commented  on  by  Messrs.  A.  E.  Brown,  A.  Donaldson 
Smith,  Samuel  N.  Rhoads,  Witmer  Stone,  Henry  Skinner,  William 
J.  Fox  and  H.  A.  Pilsbry.     (No  abstract). 


^[ay  26. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-nine  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "Catalogue  of  the  Species  of  Cerion,  with 
Descriptions  of  New  Forms,"  by  H.  A.  Pilsbry  and  E.  G.  Vauatta, 
was  presented  for  publication. 

The  death  of  Auguste  Salle,  a  correspondent.  May  5,  1896,  was 
announced. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


269 


A  REMARKABLE  CENTRAL  AMERICAN  MELANIAN. 
BY  H.  A.   PILSBRY. 

Some  months  ago  Dr.  Wm.  H.  Dall  sent  to  the  writer  for  com- 
parison with  the  series  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  a  peculiar  Pachycheilus  from  Central 
America  which  he  believed  to  be  undescribed.    The  specimen  proved 

to  be  totally  different  from 
anything  yet  made  known, 
and  may  be  briefly  charac- 
terized as  a  species  of  the 
Pachycheilus  Icevissiinus 
group,  with  the  aperture 
characters  resembling  the 
genus  Melanatria  of  Mada- 
gascar. 

It  is  about  equally  similar 
to  P.  kevissimus  var.  indorum 
Morelet    and    P.    chrysalis 
Brot,  having  the  short  aper- 
Pachycheilus  Dalli.  ture  of  the  former,  and  the 

color-tone  and  robust  growth  of  the  latter ;  but  it  is  a  stouter  shell 
in  figure  than  either,  with  the  last  whorl  decidedly  more  convex. 
The  operculum  is  like  that  of  other  species  of  Pachycheilus. 

Pachycheilus  Dalli  n.  sp.^ 

Shell  ovate  turreted,  solid,  dusky  olivaceous-yellowish,  with  more 
or  less  distinct  irregular  and  interrupted  longitudinal  black  streaks. 
The  surface  is  covered  by  a  strong  cuticle,  beneath  which  the  shell 
substance  is  white  with  livid  stains  ;  smooth  to  the  naked  eye,  but 
showing  fine,  superficial  growth-lines  under  the  lens,  cut  by  minutely 
wavy  close  spirals  into  a  microscopic  granulation,  most  noticeable 
near  suture  and  base,  but  often  almost  obliterated  on  the  body- 
whorl.  Whorls  numerous,  but  owing  to  erosion  but  6  or  7  remain, 
the  earlier  ones  nearly  flat,  last  two  or  three  convex. 

^See  Science  (n.  ser.)  Ill,  p.  608,  April  17,  1896.  This  is  the  species  re- 
corded as  "  Pacliycheilus  walli"  in  Zoologischer  Anzeiger,  No.  502,  4  Mai, 
1896,  foot  of  p.  223.  It  is  an  unfortunate  typographical  error,  not  traceable  to 
the  record  as  officially  furnished  by  the  Academy. 


270  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Aperture  trapezoidal,  white  within,  with  livid  brown  or  purplish 
tracts.  Outer  lip  having  a  very  deep  rounded  sinus  a  short  dis- 
tance below  the  suture,  its  outer  portion  then  produced  forward  in 
a  broad  rounded  lobe,  retracted  again  on  the  lower  outer  portion, 
and  produced  in  a  more  or  less  prominent  narrow  lobe  at  base. 
Columella  concave ;  parietal  wall  covered  by  a  transparent  film, 
with  a  slight  callus  developed  near  the  posterior  angle  of  the  aper- 
ture. 

Alt.  52,  diam.  25  mm.  Alt.  54,  diam.  27  mm.  Alt.  53,  diam. 
28  mm. 

Described  from  four  adult  and  four  young  specimens  in  collection 
of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  and  one  adult 
in  collection  of  the  United  States  National  Museum.  The  latter 
specimen,  having  suffered  least  erosion,  is  figured. 

The  peculiar  sinuousity  of  the  lip  is  strictly  an  adult  character. 
In  most  specimens  it  is  not  perceptible  a  half  whorl  back  from  the 
lip-edge,  although  in  the  last  of  those  measured  above,  the  sigmoid 
contour  is  seen  in  the  growth  lines  almost  a  full  whorl  back.  Four 
young  specimens  examined  have  the  lip  hardly  more  bent  than  in 
the  ordinary  PachycheilL 

The  altitude  given  above  is,  of  course,  measured  on  decollate 
specimens.  A  young  shell  52  mm.  high  has  7  whorls  left;  one 
measuring  33  mm.  high  has  7i,  and  probably  has  lost  about  1^. 

Specimens  subsequently  received  from  Dall,  collected  by  Dr. 
Spear  in  Tehuantepec,  are  dark  chestnut  colored,  with  traces  of 
darker  streaks,  and  the  sinuation  of  the  lip  is  somewhat  less  deep 
than  in  the  types.  The  columella  is  brown.  One  very  old  speci- 
men approaches  a  cylindrical  form,  measuring,  in  its  truncated  con- 
dition, alt.  51,  diam.  of  last  whorl  27,  diam.  of  the  truncated  top  16 
mm.     Somewhat  less  than  three  whorls  are  left. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  271 


REMARKS  ON  FILARIA. 
BY    FREDERICK    P.    HENRY,   M.    D. 

The  case  which  is  the  basis  of  my  remarks  belongs  to  one  of  a 
group  of  diseases  included  under  tbe  generic  term  "  filariasis,"  by 
which  is  understood  an  affection  caused  by  one  or  other  species  of 
Filaria.  This  parasite  is  by  no  means  rare  in  the  lower  animals, 
especially  in  the  dog,  but  I  will  confine  my  remarks  to  those  Filariie 
which  infest  the  blood  of  man.  Of  these,  three  species  are  univer- 
sally recognized  :  (1)  Filaria  sanguinis  hominis  nocturna,  (2)  Fil- 
aria sangxvinis  hominis  dinrna,  (Z) Filaria perstans.  This  classifica- 
tion is  based  upon  the  habits  of  the  filarial  embryos,  the  first  species 
being  found  in  the  superficial  vessels  solely  or  chiefly  during  the 
night;  the  second  solely  or  chiefly  during  the  day,  while  the  third 
is  constantly  present  in  the  cutaneous  capillaries. 

There  is  a  fourth  species  recently  discovered  by  Dr.  Patrick 
Manson,  formerly  of  Amoy,  China,  now  of  Londop,  which  he  has 
modestly  named  Filaria  Demarquayi,  after  Demarquay,  the  dis- 
coverer of  Filaria  nocturna. 

Filaria  diurna  and  Filaria  perstans  are  confined  thus  far  to  the 
West  of  Africa  and  adjoining  districts,  while  the  Filaria  nocturna  is 
widely  prevalent  in  the  tropics  and  endemic  in  certain  sections  of  the 
United  States.  The  adults  of  Filaria  nocturna  have  been  frequently 
found ;  that  of  Filaria  perstans  never,  so  far  as  I  have  been  able  to 
ascertain.  In  the  opinion  of  Manson  the  Filaria  loa  of  the  eye  of 
the  negro  of  Old  Calabar  is  probably  the  adult  form  of  the  Filaria 
diurna.  If  it  is  not,  he  argues,  then  there  must  be  another  blood 
worm  yet  to  be  discovered,  for  the  embryos  of  the  loa  must  escape 
from  the  body  of  their  host  through  the  medium  of  the  circulation. 
Filaria  perstans  has  been  practically  proved  by  Manson  to  be  the 
cause  of  the  fatal  "  sleeping  sickness"  of  the  Congo  region. 

While  engaged  in  the  study  of  filariasis  my  attention  was  called 
by  Dr.  Charles  A.  Oliver  of  Philadelphia,  to  a  remarkable  case  of 
Filaria  loa  recently  reported  by  Dr.  Argyll  Robertson,  the  distin- 
guished ophthalmologist  of  Edinburgh.  The  patient  was  a  lady 
who  had  spent  eight  years  in  missionary  work  at  Old  Calabar  on 


272  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

the  West  Coast  of  Africa.  Without  entering  into  the  details  of  this 
most  interesting  case  I  will  merely  state  that  in  two  successive 
operations  Dr.  Robertson  extracted  two  Filarise  (species  loa)  from 
the  ocular  tissues,  the  first  a  male  the  second  a  female.  Both  of 
these  adult  parasites  are  described  by  Manson  in  the  course  of 
Robertson's  paper.  The  female  was  stuffed  with  embryos  but 
repeated  examinations  of  the  blood  failed  to  detect  any  embryonic 
Filarioe  in  that  fluid.  This  fact  seems  to  refute  Dr.  Hanson's  hypoth- 
esis that  Flaria  loa  is  the  adult  form  of  Filaria  diurna. 

The  fact  that  the  case  on  which  my  remarks  are  based  is  the  first 
of  the  kind  observed  in  Philadelphia  justifies  the  publication  of  a 
life-history  of  the  parasite,  Filaria  nodurna,  which  I  found  in  the 
blood  of  my  patient  and  of  which  living  specimens  are  placed  under 
the  microscope.  I  wish,  therefore,  to  emphasize  the  fact  that  Filarise 
in  the  blood  vessels  are  undeveloped,  embryonic,  and  that  they  are 
the  progeny  of  an  adult,  two  or  three  inches  long,  which  has  its 
permanent  abode  in  one  of  the  lymphatic  channels,  probably  the 
thoracic  duct.  Manson,  observing  the  embryonic  characters  of  the 
circulating  Filarise,  came  to  the  inevitable  conclusion  that  they  must 
reach  a  further  stage  of  development  outside  of  the  body  and,  in  all 
probability,  in  the  interior  of  some  blood-sucking  animal.  He 
naturally  thought  of  the  mosquito,  an  insect  whose  nocturnal  blood- 
sucking habits  seemed  to  render  peculiarly  fit  to  act  the  part  of 
intermediary  host.  Without  entering  into  details  I  will  merely  say 
that  Hanson's  hypothesis  was  fully  verified  by  experiment. 

In  the  case  of  Filaria  diurna  it  is  conjectured  that  certain  blood- 
sucking flies  of  Old  Calabar  known  as  Mangrove  flies  play  the  role 
of  intermediary  host. 

The  mode  in  which  the  embryos  of  Filaria  perstans  are  supposed 
to  escape  from  the  human  body  is  equally  interesting,  although  it  does 
not  involve  the  agency  of  any  blood-sucking  insect.  In  the  region 
in  which  Filaria  perdans  is  endemic  there  prevails  a  skin  disease 
called  "  craw-craw  "  attended  with  pustules,  in  the  contents  of  which 
Filarise  have  been  found.  It  is  supposed,  with  great  probability, 
that  the  embryos  escape  with  the  rupture  of  the  pustules  and,  in 
some  as  yet  unexplained  manner,  although  probably  through  the 
medium  of  drinking  water,  gain  access  to  the  human  system  in 
which  one,  or  more,  attain  maturity.  It  must  be  confessed,  how- 
ever, that  our  knowledge  of  the  life  history  of  Filaria  perstans  and 
Filaria  diurna  is  based  more  upon  analogy  thau  fact  and  that  this 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  273 

will  probably  continue  to  be  the  case  until  some  Manson  takes 
residence  in  West  Africa. 

The  presence  of  Filaria  embryos  in  the  blood  does  not  necessarily 
give  rise  to  disease,  their  transverse  diameter  (t^Vo  inch)  being  as  a 
rule  such  as  to  enable  them  to  traverse  the  narrowest  channels  of 
the  blood  and  lymph.  Occasionally,  however,  they  occlude  these 
vessels  and  this  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  embryos  are  prematurely 
born  enclosed  in  a  sac  or  sheath  of  globular  form,  the  transverse 
diameter  of  which  is  about  7^0  inch.  Disease  in  man  occasioned 
by  the  Filaria  is,  therefore,  the  result  of  disease  in  the  Filaria  itself. 
If  the  adult  female  Filaria  produces  the  young  in  a  physiological 
manner  they  are  innocuous  to  their  host;  if,  through  disease  or 
irritation,  she  brings  them  forth  prematurely,  they  obstruct  the  lymph 
channels  and  produce  one  or  more  of  the  diseases  grouped  under  the 
title  of  filariasis.  According  to  Manson,  "  it  is  very  certain  that  in 
the  great  majority  of  instances  in  which  the  blood  is  infested  with 
Filariae,  no  harm  whatever  accrues.". 

The  principal  diseases  to  which  the  Filaria  gives  rise  ai'e  abscesses, 
lymphangitis,  dermatitis  and  cellulitis,  erysipelas,  orchitis,  chyluria, 
chylous  dropsy  of  the  peritoneum,  chylous  dropsy  of  the  tunica 
vaginalis,  varicose  groin  glands,  lymph  scrotum  and  elephantiasis. 

The  disease  or  rather  the  symptom  that  induced  me  to  search  for 
the  Filaria  Avas  chyluria,  which  is  not  a  common  manifestation  of 
filariasis  even  in  the  tropics. 

It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  the  diseases  to  which  the  Filarise  give 
rise  are  entirely  due  to  mechanical  interference  with  the  circulation 
of  lymph  and  blood ;  no  toxines,  or  at  least  none  inimical  to  man 
seem  to  be  generated  by  this  parasite  and  this  fact  is  in  marked 
contrast  to  what  is  observed  in  the  ordinary  infectious  diseases.  In 
the  latter,  as  is  well  known,  the  products  of  bacterial  activity  are 
intensely  toxic.  I  would  venture  to  suggest,  in  explanation  of  this 
anomaly,  that  excretory  products  diminish  in  toxicity  to  man  in 
direct  ratio  with  the  ascent  in  the  scale  of  being  of  the  organism 
that  discharges  them. 

The  most  remarkable  fact  in  connection  with  the  habits  of  Fi7ana 
nodurna  is  that  it  is  found  in  the  suj^erficial  capillaries  solely 
or  chiefly  during  the  evening  and  night.  On  several  occasions  I 
have  examined  the  blood  of  my  patient  at  noon  or  thereabouts  and 
have  found  the  parasites  either  absent  altogether  or  very  sparsely 
present ;  whereas  at  night  they  have  always  been  abundant.      This 


274  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

"  filarial  periodicity,"  as  it  is  called,  has  been  carefully  studied  by 
Manson  who  found  that  toward  sunset  the  embryos  "  begin  to  enter 
the  general  circulation.  Gradually,  as  the  night  wears  on,  their 
numbers  increase.  About  midnight  they  are  most  numerous.  As 
morning  approaches  they  get  fewer  and  fewer,  and  by  8  or  9  A.  M. 
they  have  disappeared."  This  periodicity  is  wonderfully  adapted 
to  facilitate  the  escape  and  further  development  of  the  embryo 
through  the  medium  of  the  mosquito.  Various  theories  of  the  cause 
of  "  filarial  periodicity  "  have  been  advanced  but  none  of  them  is 
entirely  satisfactory.  The  most  satisfactory  of  them  is  that  which 
correlates  the  habits  of  the  parasite  with  the  sleeping  and  waking 
habits  of  the  host.  This,  however,  is  simply  reiterating  the  fact 
without  explaining  it.  That  the  approach  of  the  embryos  to  the 
surface  is  not  entirely  due  to  the  somnolent  condition  (>f  the  host  is 
shown  by  the  fact  that  it  begins  several  hours  before  bedtime ; 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  parasites  begin  to  retire  to  the  deeper 
vessels  hours  before  the  usual  hour  of  rising.  It  cannot  be  denied, 
however,  that  the  condition  of  sleep  has  something  to  do  with  the 
approach  of  the  Filaria  to  the  surface.  This  is  proved  by  a  celebrated 
experiment  of  Dr.  Stephen  Mackenzie  who  induced  a  patient  who 
harbored  the  Filaria  nocturna  to  reverse  his  usual  habits  as  tosleep- 
^ing  and  waking :  I.  e.  to  remain  awake  all  night,  and  sleep  during 
the  day.  While  this  experiment  was  in  progress  the  Filaria  was 
found  in  the  surface  vessels  solely  or  chiefly  during  the  day.  The 
fact  that  the  embryos  begin  to  find  their  way  to  the  surface  several 
hours  before  bedtime  would  seem  to  indicate  that  the  systemic  condi- 
tion which  induces  sleep  is  chiefly  vascular  and  that  it  is  of  gradual 
development. 

The  refuge  of  the  embryo  o^  Filaria  nocturna  during  the  day  has 
not,  as  yet,  been  discovered.  The  embryos  of  Filaria  imviitis,  a 
parasite  of  the  dog,  observe  a  modified  periodicity  and  when  fewest 
in  the  surface  vessels  are  found  in  enormous  numbers  in  the  blood 
vessels  of  the  lung.  This  is  not  the  case  with  Filaria  nocturna 
for  Manson  has  examined  blood  expectorated  from  the  lungs  of  a 
Filaria  patient  by  day  without  finding  the  embryos  and  Myers  has 
examined  blood  withdrawn  by  aspiration  from  the  spleen  and  liver 
during  the  day,  with  negative  results. 

I  have  elsewhere^  discussed  the  question    of  the  treatment   of 

1  Medical  News,  May  2d,  1896. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  275 

filariasis  and  will,  therefore,  confine  myself  to  the  statement  that 
there  is  no  drug  that  will  kill  the  adult  parasite,  and  that  even  if 
such  a  drug  were  known  it  would  be  wisest  to  refrain  from  its  em- 
ployment. When  the  adult  worm  has  its  seat  in  one  of  the  extrem- 
ities and  dies,  an  abscess  usually  results;  or  it  is  perhaps  more 
correct  to  say  that  adult  Filarise  have  been  found  in  such  abscesses,  the 
presumption  being  that  the  latter  are  caused  by  the  former.  If, 
however,  the  adult  Filaria  dies  in  the  thoracic  duct,  with  consequent 
abscess,  the  result  would  be  of  necessity  fatal.  The  only  treat- 
ment worthy  of  the  name  is  prophylaxis.  Filaria  nodurna  being 
introduced  into  the  system  through  the  medium  of  drinking  water, 
it  is  of  vital  consequence,  in  the  countries  in  which  filariasis  is 
endemic,  to  secure  a  pure  water  supply  by  filtration  or  other  means. 
As  Manson  remarks^ ;  '*  the  ultimate  disappearance  of  the  filarial 
diseases  is  entirely  a  matter  of  personal  and  municipal  education" — 
in  other  words  of  "  civilization  ....  and  if  any  municipal 
or  other  body  is  in  want  of  one  more  argument  for  a  pure  water  sup- 
ply, here  is  one  ready  made  to  their  hands." 

^  Davidson's  Hygiene  and  Diseases  of  Warm  Climates. 


276  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


THE  PLANKTONOKRIT,  A  CENTRIFUGAL  APPARATUS  FOR  THE 

VOLUMETRIC  ESTIMATION  OF  THE  FOOD-SUPPLY  OF 

OYSTERS  AND  OTHER  AQUATIC  ANIMALS. 

BY  CHARLES  8,  DOLLEY,  M.  D. 

To  Dr.  Victor  Hensen  of  Kiel  is  due  the  credit  of  being  the  first 
to  insist  upon  the  importance  of  a  quantitative  determination  of  the 
primitive  food  supply  of  marine  animals. 

In  place  of  the  terms  "Auftrieb"  and  "  pelagische  Mulder  "  (pel- 
agic tow-stuff)  introduced  by  Johannes  Miiller,  and  commonly  em- 
ployed by  zoologists  for  nearly  half  a  century,  Hensen  substituted 
the  more  comprehensive  term,  plankton,^  to  include  all  those  free- 
swimming,  or  drifting  organisms  which  make  up  the  fauna  and 
flora  of  the  sea.  As  the  result  of  the  initiative  taken  by  Hensen 
and  based  largely  upon  the  investigation  conducted  in  the  North 
Sea  and  Atlantic  Ocean  under  his  leadership,  there  has  been  devel- 
oped in  less  than  a  decade,  one  of  the  most  important  departments 
of  biological  science,  to  which  Haeckel  has  applied  the  term  plank- 
tology.  Biologists  interested  in  the  practical  solution  of  the  diffi- 
culties met  with  in  the  preservation  and  propagation  of  the  food 
supply  of  Man,  as  found  in  ocean  and  lake,  bay  and  river,  were 
quick  to  recognize  the  importance  of  planktonic  studies  ;  and  the 
broad  considerations  of  the  physiologist,  concerning  the  cycle  of 
matter  in  the  sea,  have  led  to  narrower,  but,  nevertheless,  exceed- 
ingly important  studies  regarding  the  source,  character  and  quan- 
tity of  the  food  supply  of  edible  fishes  and  mollusks. 

It  is  each  year  becoming  more  evident  to  the  fish  and  oyster  cul- 
turist  that  he  has  before  him  a  problem  of  very  considerable  com- 
plexity. He  is  awakening  to  the  fact  that  it  is  not  sufficient  that 
he  should  be  able  to  hatch  out  and  liberate  millions  of  young  fish 
fry,  or  plant  thousands  of  bushels  of  oyster  spat,  but  that  he  must 
base  his  culture  experiments  upon  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
conditions  affecting  the  survival  and  growth  of  the  planted  forms. 

To  the  very  imperfect  knowledge  of  fish  culturists  and  oyster  plant- 
ers, may  be  largely  attributed  the  fact  that  American  oysters  have  for 


1  _ 


■:lay/.T6<i,  wandering,  roaming. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  277 

years  steadily  diminished  in  abundance,  notwithstanding  the  enor- 
mous quantity  of  plants  spread  out  on  the  oyster  grounds  of  our 
seaboards,  as  well  as  that  the  fisheries  of  the  Great  Lakes  have,  in 
several  instances,  grown  steadily  less  profitable,  notwithstanding 
that  millions  of  young  fry  have  been  liberated  annually  ;  for  unless 
the  transplanted  organism  can  find  suitable  and  abundant  food, 
the  time  and  money  spent  in  rearing  it,  up  to  the  period  of  its  plant- 
ing, is  practically  wasted. 

As  the  result  of  the  planktonic  studies  of  Hensen,  aquiculture  is 
taking  on  a  new  phase  which  promises  to  mark  a  period  in  its 
history  as  important  as  has  been  seen  in  the  very  rapid  development 
of  scientific  agriculture,  directly  attributable  to  the  teachings  and 
methods  of  Sir  John  Bennett  Lawes  of  Rothamstead,  England. 

A  glance  at  recent  literature  is  sufficient  to  show  the  marked  con- 
trast between  modern  planktonic  investigation  and  the  empirical 
methods  hitherto  employed  in  aquiculture. 

Prof.  H.  B.  Ward,  in  his  paper  on  the  "  Food  Supply  of  the  Fish 
in  the  Great  Lakes,"  and  Prof.  J.  E.  Reighard,  in  his  reports  on  the 
"Biological  Examination  of  Lake  St.  Clair,"  indicate  very  clearly  that 
the  practical  failure  of  fish  culturists  to  replenish  the  rapidly  dimin- 
ishing supply  of  white  fish  in  the  Great  Lakes  may  be  directly  at- 
tributed to  a  lack  of  knowledge  on  the  part  of  those  conducting  the 
fish  hatcheries,  of  the  conditions  aflfecting  the  primitive  food  supply 
of  these  waters.  In  the  work  conducted  under  the  direction  of 
Prof.  Reighard,  we  find  the  first  recognition  in  this  country  of  the 
prime  importance  of  a  knowledge  of  the  protophytes  of  the  plank- 
ton, constituting  as  they  do  the  primitive  food  supply  upon  which 
are  dependent  all  other  forms  of  the  plankton,  as  well  as  all  higher 
aquatic  organisms. 

John  P.  Lotsy,  in  a  study  of  the  food  of  the  oyster,  clam  and 
ribbed  mussel,  confirms  what  has  long  been  known,  that  these  mol- 
lusks  feed  almost  entirely  upon  diatoms,  and  that  a  knowledge  of 
the  life  conditions  of  these  latter  must  furnish  the  basis  of  intelligent 
oyster  culture. 

In  reviewing  the  literature  pertaining  to  oysters  and  the  oyster 
industries,  frequent  mention  is  found  of  the  food  of  oysters  and  the 
importance  of  an  abundant  and  regular  supply  of  the  same,  but  no- 
where in  the  numerous  reports  of  expensive  investigations  of  oyster 
grounds,  carried  on  by  the  various  governments,  do  we  find  any  sys- 
tematic study  of  the  protophytic  plankton  of  the  waters  examined. 


278  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Other  and  much  less  important  factors,  such  as  depth  and  density 
of  the  water,  the  character  of  the  bottom,  etc.,  have  received  ex- 
haustive attention  and  are  to  be  found  disphiyed  in  lengthy  tables 
and  expensive  charts,  whereas,  the  most  important  factor  of  all, 
the  conditions  of  the  oyster's  food  supply,  are  relegated  to  brief 
paragraphs  and  have  as  yet  received  practicall}'^  no  consideration  at 
the  hands  of  those  who  have  sought  to  awaken  interest  in  scientific 
oyster  culture. 

In  this  connection  I  may  be  allowed  to  quote  briefly  from  Prof. 
Haeckel :  "  The  unicellular  plants  (Protophyta)  have  very  great  im- 
portance in  the  physiology  of  the  plankton  and  the  cycle  of  matter 
in  the  sea,  for  they  furnish  by  far  the  greater  part  of  the  primitive 
food  (Urnahrung).  The  inconceivable  amount  of  food  which  the 
countless  myriads  of  swimming  marine  animals  consume  daily  is 
chiefly  derived,  directly  or  indirectly,  from  the  plauktonic  flora, 
and  in  this  the  unicellular  protophytes  are  of  much  greater  impor- 
tance than  the  multicellular  metaphytes. 

"  Nevertheless,  the  natural  history  of  these  small  plants  has  thus 
far  been  ver}'  much  neglected.  As  yet,  no  botanist  has  attempted 
to  consider  the  planktonic  flora  in  general,  and  its  relations  to  the 
planktonic  fauna.  Oflly  that  single  class  so  rich  in  forms,  the  di- 
atoms, has  been  thoroughly  investigated  and  systematically  worked 
up  ;  as  regards  the  other  groups,  not  a  single  attempt  at  systemiza- 
tion  has  been  made  ;  and  many  simple  forms  of  great  importance 
have  lately  been  recognized  for  the  first  time  as  unicellular  plants." 

James  I.  Peck,  in  a  recent  article  on  "  The  Sources  of  Marine 
Food,"  adds  testimony  to  the  importance  of  primary  food  suj^ply, 
showing,  in  a  number  of  instances,  the  steps  in  the  series  from  the 
microscopic  plants  of  the  sea  to  the  voracious  bluefish  or  squeteague ; 
the  higher  organisms  in  the  series  being  dependent  on  the  lower. 
How  essential,  then,  to  the  plauktologist  is  a  knowledge  of  the  con- 
ditions aflecting  the  development  of  the  protophyta,  since  these 
minute  plants  form  the  primitive  organic  food,  determining  the  wel- 
fare of  a  long  series  of  higlier  forms,  ending  with  man  himself. 
Means  should  be  devised  for  establishing  planktonic  standards  based 
upon  the  ascertained  conditions  existing  in  waters  known  to  be  pro- 
lific in  higher  forms  of  life. 

Knowing  that  the  oysters,  clams  and  mussels  depend  practically 
upon  diatomaceous  food,  and  that  certain  bays,  coves  or  estuaries 
are  noted  for  the  abundance  and  quality  of  their  molluscan  fauna. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  279 

let  the  average  weight  or  bulk  of  diatoms  for  each  cubic  metre  of 
such  a  region  be  determined  and  used  as  a  standard  of  comparison, 
by  means  of  which  the  culturist  may  estimate  the  value  of  neigh- 
boring waters. 

Corporations  such  as  are  now  rapidly  securing  control  of  the  best 
oyster  grounds  of  the  coast,  will  not  long  be  content  to  work  under 
the  rule-of-thumb  methods  of  the  unscientific  oysterman.  The  ex- 
periments of  laying  out  extensive  oyster  beds,  or  establishing  fatten- 
ing parks,  are  too  costly  to  be  undertaken  on  the  basis  of  guess-work 
as  to  whether  conditions  are  or  are  not  favorable.  The  money  in- 
vested in  an  oyster  bed  of  one  hundred  thousand  bushels  is  so  great 
that  a  year's  difference  in  the  time  required  by  the  plants  to  reach 
marketable  size  means  a  very  considerable  profit  or  loss  to  the 
planters. 

How  to  turn  over  the  investment  every  two  or  three  years,  in- 
stead of  every  five  years,  is  a  question  which  affects  very  materially 
the  dividends  of  a  corporation  engaged  in  oyster  culture.  In  cer- 
tain regions,  the  oysters  grow  rapidly  in  size,  but  do  not  become 
sufficiently  fat  to  command  the  prices  paid  for  oysters  of  a  similar 
size  from  other  beds.  These  thin  oysters,  for  a  few  cents  a  bushel, 
can  be  transferred  to  parks  or  fattening  ponds,  where,  by  supplying 
them  with  waters  rich  in  diatoms,  they  will  become  "  primes  "  in 
the  course  of  a  few  weeks. 

The  advantage  of  such  fattening  is  obvious,  as  is  the  fact  that  the 
time  consumed  in  the  process  is  a  most  important  factor,  the  jii'ofit 
depending  on  whether  the  parks  can  be  emptied  of  oysters  and  re- 
filled every  three  weeks  or  every  six  weeks.  To  regulate  conditions 
of  this  kind  it  is  not  enough  to  wait  for  results,  to  judge  from  day 
to  day  whether  the  oysters  are  fattening  or  not,  and  to  judge  the 
quality  of  the  water  of  the  park  by  the  effects  seen  on  the  oysters.  This 
method  is  unprofitable  ;  it  is  either  too  slow,  too  uncertain  or  too 
wasteful.  Variation  in  rainfall,  in  temperature,  etc.,  Avill  affect  the 
relative  number  of  food  organisms  in  the  water  so  materially  that 
the  best  results  can  be  secured  only  by  a  daily  test  of  the  supply. 

Water  rich  in  diatoms  is  too  precious  to  be  allowed  to  pass 
through  the  parks  in  quantities  larger  than  necessary  to  bring  the 
oysters  to  perfection  in  the  shortest  possible  time.  How  now  shall 
the  ostreaculturist  ascertain  quickly  and  accurately  the  amount  of 
plankton  in  the  water  of  his  parks  and  claires  from  day  to  day,  or 
decide  upon  the  best  places  for  the  location  of  new  beds  as  regards 
food  supply? 


280  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  methods  adopted  by  Hensen  and  his  followers  in  estimating 
the  plankton  content  of  any  given  area  of  water,  are  tedious  in  the 
extreme,  and  hold  the  same  relation  to  practical  fish  and  oyster  cul- 
ture as  do  the  old  fashioned  methods  of  counting  blood  corpuscles 
and  milk  globules  to  the  modern  use  of  the  hematocrit  for  the 
quantitative  estimation  of  blood  corpuscles  ;  or  of  the  various  cen- 
trifugal machines  and  the  Babcock  system  for  the  determination  of 
the  fat  contents  of  milk.  To  the  use  of  the  pelagic  tow-net  we  are 
indebted  for  practically  all  our  present  knowledge  of  minute  aquatic 
organisms,  and  in  so  far  as  concerns  the  enumeration  of  the  species 
constituting  the  plankton  of  any  given  region,  no  improvement  can 
be  suggested  over  the  methods  now  employed.  Prof.  Haeckel  has, 
however,  very  clearly  pointed  out  the  difficulties  connected  with 
Hensen's  method  of  counting  the  individuals  obtained  in  each  haul 
of  the  net  and  that  such  counting  "  possesses  only  an  approximate 
and  relative  value,"  and  further,  that  "  the  only  thorough  method 
of  determining  the  yield  in  planktology  is  the  determination  of  the 
useful  substance  according  to  mass  and  weight,  and  subsequent 
chemical  analysis."  Without  undervaluing  in  any  way  the  count- 
ing methods  at  present  employed  by  planktologists,  I  desire  here  to 
call  attention  to  an  apparatus  which  I  have  devised  and  by  means 
of  which  one  may  make  a  large  number  of  plankton  estimations  in 
a  single  .day,  in  each  case  determining  the  volume  and  weight, 
rather  than  the  number  of  individuals.  By  means  of  this  apparatus 
one  is  enabled  to  judge  of  a  given  area  of  water  at  different  times  of 
the  day,  states  of  the  tide,  from  various  depths,  in  fact  of  the  plank- 
tonic  variations  as  regards  depth,  temperature,  density,  wind,  tide, 
etc. 

The  method  which  I  employ  is  that  of  the  centrifuge,  an  appara- 
tus which  consists  of  a  series  of  geared  wheels  driven  by  hand  or 
belt,  and  so  arranged  as  to  cause  an  upright  shaft  to  revolve  to 
a  speed  of  8,000  revolutions  per  minute,  corresponding  to  50  revolu- 
tions per  minute  of  the  crank  or  pulley  wheel.  To  this  upright 
shaft  is  fastened  an  attachment  by  means  of  which  two  funnel- 
shaped  receptacles  of  1  litre  capacity  each  may  be  secured  and 
made  to  revolve  with  the  shaft.  The  main  portion  of  each  of  these 
receptacles  is  constructed  of  spun  copjoer,  tinned.  To  this  is  at- 
tached the  stem  of  the  funnel  consisting  of  a  heavy  annealed  glass 
tube  of  15  mm.  in  outside  diameter  with  a  central  bore  of  2?  to  5 
mm.  These  glasses  are  held  in  place  and  protected  by  a  cover, 
such  as  is  employed  in  mounting  a  water-gauge. 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA. 


281 


The  receptacles  having  been  filled  with  the  water  to  be  examined, 
are  caused  to  revolve  for  one  or  two  nnnutes,  when  the  entire  con- 
tents of  suspended  matter  in  the  water  is  thrown  down  to  the  bottom 
of  the  tube,  from  which  the  volume  may  be  read  off  by  means  of  the 


graduated  scale  on  the  outside  of  the  tube.  The  plankton  thus  ex- 
peditiously secured  can  be  transferred  quickly  to  a  vial  or  other  re- 
ceptacle, to  be  weighed  or  otherwise  examined  at  leisure. 

The  apparatus  is  simple  and  efficient,  covering,  I  think,  some  of 
the  faults  in  the  Hensen  method,  as  pointed  out  by  Haeckel,  at  any 
rate  supplementing  the  counting  method  by  one  which  makes  it 
possible  to  secure  a  far  greater  number  of  estimations  in  a  given  time. 
It  is  free  from  many  sources  of  error  connected  with  the  use  of  a  net, 
and  for  the  practical  purposes  of  oyster  and  fish  culture  enables  the 
scientist  in  charge  to  ascertain  the  diurnal  variations  of  any  given 
area  of  water,  from  planktonic  standards  previously  established 
under  the  most  favorable  conditions.  I  have  chosen  the  name 
planktonokrit  for  this  apparatus,  and  I  am  confident  that  it  will 
facilitate  in  many  ways  the  solution  of  the  oecological  problems 
which  confront  the  student  of  aquatic  organisms,  and  at  any  rate 
free  him,  to  a  certain  extent,  from  "  the  Danaides  task  "  of  counting 
the  individuals.  19 


282  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  PLANKTOLOGY. 

Andrussow.  Remarques  biologique  et  geographique  de  la  flore 
et  de  la  faune  pelagiques.     Diatomiste,  V,  II,  p.  60. 

Apstein,  C.  Das  Plankton  des  Siisswassers  und  seine  quantitative 
Bestimmung  Apparate.  Schriften  d.  naturw.  Vereins  f.  Schleswig- 
Holstein,  Bd.  14,  p.  267-273,  1890. 

Qiiantativ  Plankton-Studien    im    Siisswasser.      Biol. 

Centrlb.,  Bd.  XII,  p.  484-512,  1892. 

Vergleich  der  Plankton-produktion  in  verschiedenen 

holsteinisclien  Seen.  Bericht  d.  naturf.  Gesellsch.  Freiburg  i.  Br., 
Bd.  VIII,  p.  79-80,  1894. 

AuRiviLLius,  C.  W.  S.  Redogorelse  for  de  svenska  hydrogra- 
fiska  undersokningarne  aren  1893-1894.  Ill  Planktonundersok- 
ningar.  Animalisk  Plankton.  Bih.  K.  Svensk.  Yet.-Akad.  Hdlgr.,  20 
Bd.  Afd.  IV,  No.  3  (30  p.,  I  Tab.,  Zusammenfassung,  p.  17-18). 
Zool.  Ctbl.,  3  Jhg.  No.  6,  p.  102. 

BiRGE,  E.  A.  A  report  on  a  collection  of  Cladocera,  mostly  from 
Lake  St.  Clair,  Michigan,  with  a  table  of  species.  Bull,  of  the 
Michigan  Fish  Cora.,  No.  4,  1894.     Ap])endix  II,  p.  45-47. 

,  assisted  by  O.  A.  Olson  and  H.  P.  Harder.     Plankton 

Studies  on  Lake  Mendota.  The  vertical  Distribution  of  the  pelagic 
Crustacea  during  July,  1894,  with  4  pi.  From  Trans.  Wiss.  Acad. 
Sc.  Arts,  Vol.  X,  p.  421-482. 

Bois-Reymond,  E.  du.  Bericht.  iiber  die  Humboldt-Stiftung  und 
die  Kieler  Plankton-Expedition  des  National.  Sitzungberichte  der 
Berliner  Akadeniie  d.  Wissensch.  vom  23  Jan.,  1890,  pp.  83-87. 

Borne,  M.  von  dem.  Das  Wasser  fur  Fischerei  und  Fischzucht. 
Neudam,  1887. 

BosE,  L.  A.  G.  La  cause  de  la  coloration  des  huitres  et  les  ani- 
malcules qui  servent  a  les  nourrir.  Institut.  Bui.  Univ.  Ferussac, 
11,319,1823. 

Brandt,  Karl.  Die  coloniebildenden  Radiolarien  (^Sphcerot- 
sen)  des  Golfes  von  Neapel,  1885. 

Ueber  die  biologischen  Untersuchungen  der  Plankton- 
Expedition.  Verhandl.  der  Gesellsch.  f.  Erdkunde  zu  Berlin,  vom 
7  Dec,  1889,  p.  515. 

Ueber  die  Schliessnetzfange  der  Plankton-Expedition. 

Verhdlgn.  Ges.  deutsch.  Naturf  u.  Arzte,  67  Vers.  2  Bd.  I  Hft.  p. 
107-112. 

Brooks,  W.  K.  The  Origin  of  Food  of  Marine  Animals.  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  Vol.  XIII,  p.  87,  1893. 

Browne,  Ed.  T.  On  the  Changes  in  the  Pelagic  Fauna'of  Ply- 
mouth during  September,  1893  and  1895,  Jour.  Mar.  Biol.  Assoc, 
N.  S.,  Vol.  4,  No.  2,  p.  168,  1896. 

Buckland,  Frank.  The  Oyster's  Food,  Young  and  Foes. 
The  Sea  World  and  Fishing  Gazette,  N.  Y.,  Oct.  12,  1880,  Vol.  II, 
No.  9. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  283 

Calderwood,  W.  L.  The  Feeding-ground  of  the  HerriDg. 
Nature,  Vol.  53,  No.  1360,  p.  54. 

Carillon,  Dr.  Bol  alimentaire  de  V  Ostrea  edulis.  Bui.  Soc. 
Ostr.  d'Auray,  105,  1881. 

Cheyney,  a.  Nelson.  Breeding  natural  food  artificially  for 
young  fish  artificially  hatched.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  Vol.  XIII, 
p.  277,  1893. 

Chierchia,  Gaetano.  Collezioni  per  studi  di  scienze  naturali, 
fatti  nel  Viaggio  intorno  al  mondo  dalla  R.  Corvetta  Vettor  Pisani. 
Anni  1882-1885. 

Chun,  Carl.  Ueber  die  geographische  Verbreitung  der  pela- 
gisch  lebendeii  Seethiere.     Zool.  Anz.,  No.  214,  215,  1886. 

Die  pelagische  Thierwelt  in  grossern  Meerestiefen  und 

ihre  Beziehungeji  zu  der  Oberflachen-Fauna.  Bibliotheca  zoologica, 
Hft.  I,  1888.  70  Jahrsber.,  Schles.  Ges.  f.  vaterl.  Cult.  allg.  Ber., 
p.  20-27. 

Bericht  iiber  eine  nach  der  Canarischen  Insel  ira  Win- 
ter 1887-88  ausgefiihrte  Reise.  Sitzuugsberichte  der  Berliner 
Akad.  der  Wiss.,  p.  519,  1889. 

Die  pelagische  Thierwelt  in  grossen  Tiefen.     Verhandl. 

d.  Gesellsch.  deutsch.  Natuf.  u.  Aerzte,  Bremen,  1890. 

—  Atlantis.     Biologische  Studien  iiber  pelagische  Organ- 

ismen.  V.  Uber  pelagische  Tiefsee  Schizopoden.  Bibliotheca  Zool. 
19,  Hft.  3,  1896. 

Clark,  Frk.  N.  History  and  methods  of  Whitefish  Culture. 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  XIII,  p.  213,  1893. 

Cleeve,  Prof.  P.  T.  Pianktonundersokningar  Cilioflagellate 
och  Diatomaceer.     Diatomiste,  Vol.  II,  p.  142. 

Dean,  Bashford.  The  Physiological  and  Biological  Character- 
istics of  the  Natural  Oyster-grounds  of  South  Carolina.  (V.  The 
Food  of  the  South  Carolina  Oyster.  Animal  Element  of  Oyster 
Food.  Plant  Element  of  Oyster  Food.  Amount  of  Oyster  Food 
occurring  in  South  Carolina  Waters  as  determined  bv  analysis). 
Bull,  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  Vol.  X,  for  1890.  Wash.  Gov. 
Printing  Office,  1892. 

The  Food  of  the  Oyster  ;   its  conditions  and  variations. 

Sec.  Rep.  of  the  Oyster  Investigation  and  of  Survey  of  Oyster  Ter- 
ritory for  the  years  1885  and  1886.  Albany,  1887,  Sup.,  pp.  49-78, 
3  pis. 

Descomt.  Sur  la  cause  de  la  coloration  violacee  des  huitres  du 
bassin  d'Arcachon.     Compt.  Rend.,  LXXXV,  967,  1877. 

Dyer,  W.  T.  Thistleton.  Greening  of  Oysters.  Nature, 
Lond.,  Sep.  6,  1877,  Vol.  XVI,  p.  397. 

Eckstein,  K.  Die  Rotatorienfauna  des  Muggelsees.  (Aus.  d. 
biol.  Station  d.  deutsch  Fischerei-Ver.)  Zeitsch.  f.  Fischerei,  1895. 
Ausz.  von  C.  Zelinke.  Zool.  Cntrlb.  2  Jhg.,  No.  24-25.  30  Dec.  (8 
Jan.),  p.  756-757. 


284  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Forbes,  S.  A.  The  First  Food  of  the  Common  Whitefish  (  Corego- 
nu-s  clupelformis,  Mitch,).  Bull.  111.  State  Lab.,  Vol.  I,  No.  6,  p.. 
95-109,  lb83. 

France,  R.  H.  Zur  Biologie  des  Planktons.  Vorliiufige  Mit- 
theilung,  Biol.  Cntrlbt.,  Bd.  XIV,  p.  33-38,  1894. 

FucHS,  Th.  Ueber  die  pelagische  Flora  und  Fauna.  Verhandl. 
d.  k.  k.  Geol.  Reichsanstalt  in  Wien,  4  Feb.,  1882,  p.  49-55. 

Gaillon,  G.  B.  Des  huitres  vertes  et  des  causes  de  leur  colora- 
tion.    Annales  generales  des  sciences  physiques,  VII,  89,  1820. 

Observations  sur  la  cause  de  la  coloration  des  huitres, 

et  sur  les  animalcules  qui  servent  a  leur  nutrition.  Mem.  Soc.  Lin- 
neenne  du  Calvados,  I,  135,  1824. 

GiESBRECHT,  W.  Ueber  pelagische  Copepoden  des  Rothen 
Meeres,  gesammelt  voni  Marineslabsarzt,  Dr.  Augustiu  Kramer. 
Zool.  Jahrb.,  Abth.  f.  System.,  9  Bd.,  2  Heft,  p.  315-327,  328. 

GooDE,  George  Brown.  The  Relation  of  Scientific  Research 
to  Economic  Problems.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  Vol.  XIII,  p.  49, 
1893. 

Graud,  S.  L'Industrie  huitriereii  Marennes.  Michelet,  Paris,^ 
1882. 

Graeffe,  Edward.  Uebersicht  der  Seethier-Fauna  des  Golfes 
von  Triest,  nebst  Notizen  iiber  Vorkonmien,  Lebensweise,  Erschein- 
ungs-und  Fortpflanzungs-Zeit.  Arbeiten  d.  Zool.  Station,  Trieste 
1881-88. 

Greef,  Richard.  Reise  nach  den  canarischen  Inseln  "  Die 
Meeresstromungen  als  Thierstrassen,"  pp.  307-309,  1868. 

Haeckel,  Ernst.     Indische  Reisebriefe.     II  Auf.  1,  1882. 

Monographie  der  Medusen.     I  Bd.     Das  System  der 

Medusen.     II  Bd.     Der  Organismus  der  Medusen,  1879. 

Xatiirliche    Schopfungsgeschichte.      Achte    Auflage, 

1889. 

Plankton  Studien.     Jenaische  Zeitschrift,  Vol.  XXV, 

Hft.  1,  2, 1890.  Published  separately  by  Gustav  Fischer,  Jena,  also 
translated  in  English  by  G.  W.  Field.  Planktonic  Studies,  a  Com- 
parative Investigation  of  the  Importance  and  Constitution  of  the 
Pelagic  Fauna  and  Flora.  Rep.  of  the  U.  S.  Com.  of  Fish  and 
Fisheries  for  1889-1891,  pp.  565-641,  Wash.,  1893. 

Monographie  der  Radiolaren.      Uebersicht  der  Ver- 

breitung,  pp.  166-193,  1862. 

Report  on  the  Radiolaria  collected  by  H.  M.  S.  Chal- 
lenger during  the  year  1873-1876,  Chronological  Section.  §§  226- 
240  (Deutsch  in  der  "  Algemeinen  Naturgeschichte  der  Radio- 
larien,"  1887,  pp.  123-137). 

Hensen,  Victor.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  des  Planktons,  oder 
des  im  Meere  treibenden  Materials  an  Pflanzen  und  Thieren.  V, 
Bericht  der  Commission  zur  wissenschaftl.  Unters.  der  deutscben 
Meere  in  Kiel,  1887. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  285 

Ergebnisse  der  in  dem  Atlantischen  Ocean  von  Mitte 

Juli  bis  Anfang  Nov.,  1889,  ausgefiihrten  Plankton-Expedition  der 
Humholdt-StiftLing  auf  Grand  von  gemeinscluiftlichen  Untersuch- 
ungen  einer  Reihe  von  Fach-Forschern  berausgegeben.  Leipzig, 
1895. 

Einige  Ergebnisse  der  Plankton-Expedition  des  Hura- 

boldt-Stiftung.  iSitzungsberichte  der  Berliner  Akad.  d.  Wissen- 
schaft,  vom  13  Miirz,  1890,  pp.  243-253.  Verhdlgn,  65  Vers. 
Oes.  deutsch  Naturf.  u.  Arzte  I,  Th.,  p.  124. 

Hodgson,  T.  V.  Notes  on  the  Pelagic  Fauna  at  Plymouth, 
Aug.-Dec,  1895.  Jour.  Mar.  Biol.  Assoc,  N.  S.,  Vol.  4,  No.  2,  p. 
173,  1896. 

Lameere,  Aug.  La  faune  des  regions  belgiques.  Feuille  des 
jeunes  Naturalistes,  (3)  26  Ann.,  No.  303,  Jan  v.  1896,  p.  58  (Tire  du 
''  IManuel  de  la  Faune  de  Belgique  "),  V.  Z.  A.,  1895,  p.  448. 

Levander,  K.  M.  Materialien  zur  Kenntniss  der  Wasserfauna 
in  der  Unigebung  von  Helsingfors,  mit  hesonderer  Beriicksichtigung 
der  Meeresfauna.  L  Protozoa.  Mit  3  Taf.  in  Acta  Soc.  Fauna  et 
Flora  Fenn.,  XII,  No.  2. 

Materialien  zur  Kenntniss  der  Wasserfauna  von  Hel- 
singfors. II.  Rotatoria.  Ausz.  von  C.  Zelinke.  Zool.  Centrlb.  2 
Jhg.,  No.  24-25.     30  Dec.  (8  Jan.),  p.  754-756,  1895. 

LoTSY^  John  P.  The  Food  of  the  Oyster,  Clam  and  Ribbed 
Mussel.  Rep.  of  the  U.  S.  Com.  of  Fish  and  Fisheries  for  1893, 
pp.  375-386, 1896. 

McCrady,  John.  Observations  on  the  food  and  reproductive 
organs  of  Ostvea  virginiana,  with  some  account  of  the  Bucephalus 
calculus,  nov.  spec.  Pro.  of  the  Boston  Soc.  of  Nat.  Hist.,  Dec.  3, 
1873,  Bost.,  1874,  Vol.  XVI,  pp.  170-192. 

McIntosh,  \V.  C.  Fish-cultural  Investigations  at  St.  Andrew's 
Marine  Laboratory,  Scotland.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.  for  1893, 
Vol.  XIII,  p.  241. 

MoBius,  Karl.  Wo  kommt  die  Nahrung  fiir  die  Tiefseethiere 
her?     Zeitschr.  f.  wissensch.  Zool.  Bd.,  XXI,  p.  294,  1871. 

How  can  the  cultivation  of  the  oyster,  especially  on  the 

German  coasts,  be  made  permanently  profitable  ?  Rep.  U.  S.  Fish 
Com.  1877,  Wash.,  1879,  Vol.  V,  p.  875-884. 

The  Oyster  and  Oyster-culture.     Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Com. 

1880,  Wash.,  1883.  Vol.  VIII,'pp.  683-752. 

Beitrage  zur  Meeres-Fauna  der  Insel  Mauritius  und 

der  Seychellen,  1880. 

Systematische  Darstellung  der  Thiere  des  Plankton  in 

der  westl.  Ostsee  und  auf  einer  Fahrt  von  Kiel  in  den  Atlantischen 
Ocean  bis  jenseit  der  Hebriden.  V.  Bericht  der  Com.  z.  wissensch. 
Unters.  der  Deutschen  Meere  in  Kiel,  1887. 

MosELEY,  H.  N.  Pelagic  Life.  Address  at  the  Southampton 
Meeting,  Brit.  Assoc.     Nature,  Vol.  XXVI,  No.  675,  p.  559,  1882. 


286  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Murray,  John.  Prelimiuary  Report  on  some  surface  organ- 
isms examined  on  board  H.  M.  S.  Challenger,  and  their  relation  to 
ocean  deposits.     Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  Vol.  XXIV,  pp.  532-537 

Narrative  of  a  cruise  of  H.  M.  S.  Challenger,  with  a 

general  account  of  the  scientific  results  of  the  expedition  (1873- 
1876).     Vol.  I,  II,  1885. 

MiJLLER,  Johannes.  Ueber  die  Larven  und  die  Metamorphose 
der  Echinodermen.  Abhaudl.  der  Berl.  Akad.  d.  Wissensch., 
1845-1855. 

Ueber  die  Thassicollen,  Polycystinen  und  Acanthome- 

tren  des  Mittelmeeres,  1858,  Ibid. 

Nelson,  Julius.  Oyster  interests  of  New  Jersey.  N.  J.  Agri- 
cultural Experiment  Station,  Special  Bulletins.  Trenton,  1889, 
1891,  1892. 

Ohlin,  a.  Bidrag  till  Kiinnedomen  ora  Malakostrakfaunan  i 
Baffin  Bay  och  Smith  Sound.  Akad.  Afhdlg.  Lund.,  1895.  Ausz. 
von  L.  A.  Jiigerskiold  in  Zool.  Centrlb.  2  Jhg.,  No.  18,  p.  565-566. 

Peck,  James  J.  On  the  Food  of  the  Menhaden.  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Com.  for  1893,  Vol.  XIII,  p.  113.     Wash.,  1894. 

The  sources  of  Marine  Food.     Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Cora 

for  1895,  pp.  351-368,  Plates  64-71,  1896. 

PuYSEGUR,  M.  Notice  sur  la  cause  du  verdissement  des  huitres, 
Berger-Lexrault,  Paris,  1880,  translated,  with  a  supplementary  note 
on  the  coloration  of  the  blood  corpuscles  of  the  oyster,  by  John  Ryder. 
Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  1882,  Wash.,  1884,  A^ol.  X,  pp.  793-805. 

Reade,  J.  B.  On  the  cilia  and  ciliary  currents  of  the  Oyster. 
(States  that  the  food  consists  entirely  of  Infusoria).  Rep.  of  the 
Brit.  Assoc,  for  the  the  Advancement  of  Science,  15th  Meet.,  1845, 
Lond.,  1846,  pp.  66-67. 

Reighard,  J.  E.      Suggestions  for  an  experimental  method  of 
determining  the  efficiency  of  quantitative  nets.     Bull,  of  the  Mich 
FishCom.,  No.  4,  1894.     Appendix  V,  pp.  57-60. 

A  Biological  Examination  of  Lake  St.  Clair.     Prelim 

inary  account  of  work  done  during  the  summer  of  1893  by  the 
the  party  maintained  by  the  Mich.  Fish  Com.     Bull,  of  the  Mich 
Fish  Com.,  No.  4,  1894,  pp.  1-41. 

Some  Plankton  Studies  in  the  Great  Lakes.     Bull.  U 

S.  Fish  Com.  for  1893,  V,  XIII,  p.  127. 

Rice,  H.  J.     The  propagation  and  natural  history  of  the  Ameri 
can  oyster.     Supplement  to  the  Rep.  of  the  Com.  of  Fisheries  of  the 
State  of  New  York,  in  charge  of  the  Oyster  Investigation.     Albany 
1885,  pp.  71-137. 

Richard,  J.  Sur  la  faune  pelagique  du  Tegernsee.  Zool.  Cen 
trlb.,  3  Jhg.,  No.  4,  p.  139. 

Ryder,  John  A  Notes  on  the  breeding,  food  and  green  color 
of  the  oyster.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  Vol.  I,  1881,  Washington, 
1882,  pp.  403-419. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  287 

An  account  of  experiments  in  oyster  culture  and  ob- 


servations thereon,  made  at  St.  Jerome's  Creek,  Maryland,  during 
the  summer  of  1880.  Appendix  A  to  a  Report  of  the  Commissioner 
of  Fisheries  of  Maryland,  Jan.,  1881,  Hagerstown,  1881,  pp.  1-64. 
Discusses  the  anatomy  and  food  of  the  oyster  (Ostrea  virg'miand) 
and  the  fauna  of  oyster  beds. 

Notes  on  the  breeding,  food  and  green  color  of  the 

oyster.  Trans,  of  the  Amer.  Fish-cult.  Assoc,  11th  Annual  Meet- 
ing, N.  Y.,  1882,  pp.  57-79. 

Notes  on  the  breeding,  food  and  cause  of  green  color  of 

the  oyster.  Forest  and  Stream,  N.  Y.,  May  25,  1882  and  June  1, 
1882,  Vol.  XVIII,  pp.  331-332,  and  pp.  349-351. 

A  contribution  to  the  life-history  of  the  oyster  {Ostrea 

virginiana  Gmelin,  and  0.  edulis  Linn,).  The  Fisheries  and  Fish- 
ery Industries  of  the  U.  S.,  Washington,  1884,  sec.  1,  pp.  711-758. 

Schenkling-Prevot.  Beitriige  zur  Tiefseeforschung.  Zool. 
Garten,  36  Jhg.,  No.  6,  p.  162.  Abbildungen  aus  Chun  und  aus 
Marshall. 

Schmidtlein,  R.  Yergleicheude  Uebersicht  iiber  das  Erscheinen 
grosserer  pelagischer  Thiere  wiihrend  der  Jahre  1875-1877.  Mit- 
theil.  der  Zool.  Station,  Neapel,  Bd.  I,  p.  119,  1879.  * 

Shimkewitsch,  Wl.  La  fauna  de  la  mer  blanc  et  les  travaux 
de  la  station  biologique  russe  de  Solovetzky.  Avec  2  incis.  in  Re- 
vue Scientifique.     T.  3,  No.  23,  p.  705. 

Seligo,  a.  Hydrobiologische  Untersuchungen,  I.  Schriften  d. 
naturf.  Ges.  Danzig,  n.  F.,  Bd.  VII,  p.  43-89,  1890. 

SiMROTH,  H.  Neue  pelagische  Schneckenlarven  und  Muscheln 
von  der  deutschen  Planktonfahrt.  Sitzgsber.  Nat.  Ges.  Leipzig, 
19-21,  Jhg.,  p.  8-10,42-3. 

Smith,  Frank.  -List  of  the  Protozoa  and  Mollusca  observed  in 
Lake  St.  Clair  in  the  summer  of  1893.  Bull,  of  the  Michigan  Fish 
Commission,  No.  4,  1894,  Appendix  1,  pp.  42-44. 

SoRBY,  H.  C.  Description  of  methods  for  collecting  and  estimat- 
ing the  number  of  small  animals  in  sea  water.  Report,  65  Meet. 
Brit.  Assoc,  Ipswich,  1895,  p.  730. 

Spangler,  a.  M.  The  Decrease  of  Food-Fishes  in  American 
Waters  and  Some  of  the  Causes.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.  for  1893, 
V.  XIII,  p.  21-35. 

Sullivan,  W.  K.  Composition  of  the  Soils  of  Oyster  Grounds. 
Appendix  to  Report  of  the  Commissioners  Ayjpointed  to  Inquire  into 
the  Methods  of  Oyster  Culture  in  the  United  Kingdom  and  France, 
with  a  View  to  the  Introduction  of  Improved  Methods  of  Cultivation 
of  Oysters  into  Ireland.     Dublin,  1870,  pp.  166-176. 

SusTA,  J.  Die  Ernahrung  des  Karpfen  und  seiner  Teichgenossen. 
Stettin,  252  pp.,  2  Taff.,  1888. 

Tanner,  Z.  L.  On  the  Appliances  for  Collecting  Pelagic  Or- 
ganisms, with  Special  Reference  to  those  Employed  by  the  U.  S. 


288  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Fish  Commission.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  Vol.  14,  1894,  p.  143- 
151. 

Thompson,  Wyville.  The  Depths  of  the  Sea.  An  account  of 
the  general  results  of  the  dredging  cruises  of  H.  M.  S.  S.  Porcupine 
and  Lightning,  1873. 

The  Atlantic.      A  preliminary  account  of  the  general 

results  of  exploring  voyage  of  H.  M.  S.  Challenger,  1877. 

Tlrbyne,  Alex.  The  Feeding  Ground  of  the  Herring.  Nature, 
Vol.  52,  No.  1356,  p.  617,  and  No.  1363,  p.  129. 

Valenciennes,  A.  Sur  les  causes  de  la  coloration  en  vert  de 
certaines  huitres.     Compt.  Rend.,  XII,  345,  1841. 

Vanhoffen,  E.  Ueber  gronlandisches  Plankton  (Vortrag.). 
In  Verhdign.  Ges.  deutsch  Naturf.  u.  Ai'zte,  66  Vers.  Wien,  2  Th., 
I  Hiilfte,  p.  133-135. 

VoGT,  Carl.     Ocean  and  Mittlemeer,  p.  303,  1848. 

AValter,  E.  Eine  praktische  verwerthbare  Methode  zur  quanti- 
tiven  Bestimmung  des  Teichplankton.  In  Forschgsber.  Biol.  Stat. 
Plon.,  Th.  3,  p.  100-187. 

Ward,  H.  B.  A  Preliminary  Report  on  the  Worms  (mostly 
parasitic)  collected  in  Lake  St.  Clair,  in  the  summer  of  1893. 
Bull,  of  the  Michigan  Fish  Commission,  No.  4,  1894.  Appendix 
III,  pp.  49-56. 

Anew  Method  for  the  Q,uantitative  Determination   of 

Plankton  Hauls.  Trans.  Amer.  ]\Iicr.  Soc,  Vol.  17,  p.  255,  1896. 
Zool.  Centrlb.,  3  Jhg.,  NR.  7,  p.  225. 

The  Food  Supply  of  the  Fish  in  the  Great  Lakes.     The 

Nebraska  Literary  Magazine,  Vol.  1,  Nov.,  1895,  No.  2,  pp.  107- 
124. 

The  Food  Supply  of  the  Great  Lakes ;  and  some  Ex- 
periments on  its  Amount  and  Distribution.  2  Plates.  Trans. 
Amer.  Micr.  Soc,  Vol.  17,  p.  242-251,  1896. 

WiNTHER,  G.  On  the  Geographical  Distribution  of  the  Common 
Oyster.  Annals  and  Magazine  of  Natural  History,  London,  March, 
1878,  5  ser.,  Vol.  1,  pp.  185-189. 

Al)stract  translation  of  Om  vore  Haves  Naturforhold 

med  Hensyn  til  konstig  Oestersavl  og  om  de  i  den  henseende  an- 
stillede  Forscig.     Kopenhagen,  1876.    Nordisk  Tidskrift  for  Fiskeri. 

AVoLCOTT,  Dr.  R.  H.  The  Insecta  and  Acarina  of  Lake  St. 
Clair,  a  preliminary  Report.  Bull,  of  the  Michigan  Fish  Com.,  No. 
4,  1894.     Appendix  IV,  pp.  55-56. 

Zacharias,  O.  Statistische  Mittheilungen  iiber  das  Plankton 
des  Grossen  Ploner  Sees.     In  Zool.  Anz.,  17  Jhg.,  No.  464,  p.  457. 

Quantitative  Untersuchungen  iiber  das  Limnoplank- 

ton.  Nebst  Anleitung  zur  Voriiahme  von  Ziihlungen  und  Volu- 
raenmessungen.     Berlin,  1896,  64  p.,  M.  2. 

Faunistische  Mittheilungen  (Ploner  See)  2  Taf.     In 

Forschungsber.  Biol.  Stat.  Plon,  Th.  3,  p.  73. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  289 

Ueber    die  wechselnde    Quantitat   des  Plankton   im 


■Grossen  Ploner  See.     Ibid.,  p.  97-117. 

Ueber  die  horizontale  und  verticale  Verbreitung  lim- 

netischer  Organismen.     Ibid.,  p.  127. 

Planktonmessungen  in  Grossen  Ploner  See.     Corr.  Bl. 

f.  Fiscbzucht,  3  Jhg.,  No.  1,  p.  7-8. 

Fauna  des  grossen   Ploner  Sees.      Forscbungsber.    d. 

Biol.  Station  zu  Plon.,  II  Tbeil,  p.  57-64,  1894. 


290  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1896. 

June  2. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Seventy  persons  present. 


June  9. 
Harrison  Allen,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair.         » 
Thirteen  persons  present. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  publication  : — 

"  Contributions  to  a  Knowledge  of  the  Hymenoptera  of  Brazil, 
No.  1.  Scoliidie,"  by  William  J.  Fox. 

"  The  Mesenteries  of  the  Lacertilia,"  by  Edward  D.  Cope. 

"  Eevision  of  the  Slugs  of  North  America :  Ariolimax  and 
Aphallariou,"  by  Henry  A.  Pilsbry  and  E.  G.  Vauatta. 


June  16. 

Mr.  Charles  Morris,  in  the  Chair. 

Nineteen  persons  present. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  pubHcation : — 
"  A  Collection  of  Fishes  obtained   at  Swatow,   China,   by  Miss 

Adele  M.  Fielde,"  bv  Cloudslev  Rutter. 

"A  Collection  of  Fishes  made  by  the  Rev.  Joseph  Seed  Robeits 

in   Kingston,   Jamaica,"   by   David  Starr  Jordan  and    Cloudsley 

Rutter. 


June  23. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-eight  persons  present. 


June  30. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-one  persons  present. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  291 

The  Ulna  of  the  Common.  Broicn  But. — Dr.  Harrison  Allen 
called  attention  to  the  ulna  in  the  common  Brown  Bat,  Adelo)njc- 
terisfusca.  The  ulna  in  the  Vespertilionidae  had  been  described  by 
some  authors  (e.  g.  de  Blainville)  as  ending  free  in  the  muscles  of 
the  forearm.  Dr.  Allen  believed  he  had  demonstrated  this  arrange- 
ment in  Adelonyderis  and  Vespertllio.  Others  assert  that  in  all  the 
bats  the  ulna  is  anchylosed  to  the  shaft  of  the  radius.  Dr.  Allen 
wished  to  revise  his  former  statement*  on  this  subject.  In  a  fully 
adult  specimen  of  the  bones  of  the  forearm  which  he  had  subjected 
to  prolonged  boiling,  Dr.  Allen  found  that  the  ulna  by  gentle  trac- 
tion could  be  separated  from  the  radius  and  be  traced  as  a  slender 
filament  along  the  entire  length  of  the  forearm  and  to  end  at  the 
wrist  joint.  The  arrangement  in  the  adult,  in  this  species  at  least, 
is,  therefore,  not  different  from  that  found  in  the  embryo. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 
iMon.  N.  A.  Bats,  1894. 


292  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


CONTRIBUTIONS  TO  A  KNOWLEDGE  OF  THE  HYMENOPTERA  OF  BRAZIL. 

No.  1,  SCOLIID^. 

BY    WILLIAM    J.    FOX. 

The  explorations  of  Herbert  H.  Smith  have  done  more  to  extend 
our  knowledge  of  the  insect  fauna  of  Tropical  America  than  those 
of  any  other  person,  with  the  possible  exception  of  the  late  Henry- 
Walter  Bates.  His  work  in  Mexico  for  the  Biologla  Centrali 
Americana  and  for  the  West  India  Committee  has  given  him  an 
extended  reputation ;  but  it  remains  for  tlie  classifying  of  his 
South  American  collections  to  show  the  real  extent  of  his  labors  in 
the  field  and  forest. 

It  has  been  my  good  fortune  to  have  IMr.  Smith's  collection  of 
fossorial  hymenoptera  placed  in  my  hands  for  identification  and 
study,  and  its  size  is  indicated  by  the  number  of  species  contained 
in  the  present  paper  on  the  Scoliidse,  which  includes  no  less  than 
thirty  species,  besides  some  half  dozen  species  of  the  genus  Tiphia, 
which,  in  consequence  of  many  faulty  descriptions  of  South  American 
forms,  I  have  been  obliged  to  leave  undetermined. 

In  1878-1875,  Mr.  Smith  worked  alone  on  the  Amazons,  and  the 
Santarem  material  was  then  gathered.  In  1881-1886,  accompanied 
by  his  wife  and  two  assistants,  another  journey  was  made.  Going 
first  to  Pant  he  and  his  wife  made  a  flying  trip  to  Santarem,  and 
then  down  the  coast,  stopping  a  week  at  Pernambuco  and  several 
months  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  ;  from  the  latter  place  they  went  to  Entre 
Rios.  Six  months  were  spent  in  Rio  Grande  do  Sul ;  but  there  are 
no  hymenoptera  in  the  collection  from  that  place.  By  steamer 
they  proceeded  up  the  Paraguay  to  Corumba  and  Cuyab^.  Head- 
quarters were  established  at  Chapada,and  there  four  years  were  spent. 
Ad  interim  Mr.  Smith  returned  to  Rio  de  Janeiro  for  a  year,  leav- 
ing his  wife  and  one  assistant  in  the  interior.  After  finally  leaving 
Chapada  they  made  a  canoe  journey  on  the  Upper  Paraguay  to 
Pedra  de  Amolas,  Pacoval,  etc.,  but  most  of  the  time  was  here  given 
to  geological  and  ethnological  work.  Subsequently  several  weeks 
were  spent  at  Corumba  and  Piedra  Blanca,  before  returning  to  the 
United  States. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  293 

Mr.  Smith  has  khidly  furnished  me  with  the  following  notes  on 
localities  visited  as  far  as  they  relate  to  the  hymenoptera. 

Santarem.  A  town  at  the  junction  of  the  Tabajos  with  the 
Amazon.  Its  immediate  vicinity  is  more  or  less  open  land,  with 
scattered  low  trees  and  a  thin  grass  growth  :  the  type  of  vegetation 
called  campo  in  Brazil.  Most  of  the  hymenoptera  labeled 
Santarem,  were,  however,  collected  a  few  miles  inland  or  down  the 
Amazon,  at  the  settlements  of  Panema,  Maruru  and  Taperinha, 
where  most  of  the  land  is  covered  with  heavy  forest  broken  by  a 
few  clearings.  The  soil  both  of  campo  and  forest  is  sandy.  The 
climate  is  moderately  warm  for  a  region  so  near  the  equator,  and 
moist,  though  not  extremely  so. 

Monte  Alegre  is  in  campo  land  very  similar  to  Santarem ;  it  is  on 
the  opposite  or  northern  side  of  the  Amazon. 

Specimens  marked  Pernambuco  are  from  the  San  Francisco  plan- 
tation, some  miles  inland  :  a  clearing  in  forest ;  land  hilly,  and  soil 
clay. 

Rio  de  Janeiro.  Land  originally  forest.  No  specimens  were  col- 
lected above  2,500  ft.  alt. 

Entre  Rios,  in  the  State  of  Rio  de  Janeiro,  is  on  the  Parabyba 
do  Sul  River,  back  of  the  Organ  Mountains.  The  soil  is  clay,  cov- 
ered with  low  and  somewhat  open  forest;  climate  rather  dry.  Mr. 
Smith  says :  "  The  insects  of  Entre  Rios,  I  have  found,  resemble 
those  of  Chapada  and  Corumba  rather  than  those  of  Rio." 

Corumbd,  in  the  State  of  Matto  Grosso,  on  the  western  bank  of 
the  Paraguay,  close  to  the  confines  of  Bolivia.  The  climate  dry  and 
hot ;  the  vegetation  open  ;  dry  forest,  full  of  cacti  and  other  thorny 
plants.  The  opposite  side  of  the  Paraguay,  where  some  collections 
were  made  (these  are  marked  "  lowland  ")  is  in  the  great  flood-plain  : 
a  vast  semi-swampy  region,  flooded  every  year  during  several  months. 
This  is  the  region  known  to  geographers  as  Lake  Xaraes,  or,  better, 
the  Xaraes  Marshes  (also  written  Charaes  or  Jaraes). 

Piedra  Blanca  (or  Pedra  Branca),  a  small  settlement  and  custom- 
house just  within  the  boundary  of  Bolivia,  on  a  lake  opening  into 
the  Paraguay,  and  only  four  miles  from  Corumba.  The  land  is  low 
and  damp  and  covered  with  heavy  forest,  very  different  from  the 
region  about  Corumba. 

Pacoval  and  Pedra  de  Amolas  are  settlements  on  the  Paraguay 
above  Corumba,  on  the  edge  of  the  flood-plain,  but  backed  by  rocky 
hills ;  land  open  or  forest. 


294  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Cuyabd  is  the  capital  of  Matto  Grosso,  on  the  River  Cuyaba,  a 
sub-branch  of  the  Paraguay  :  soil  dry  and  stony,  with  campo  growth  ; 
climate  dry  and  hot. 

Citchoeira  is  just  above  Cuyaba,  on  low.  semi-swampy  laud. 

Chapada.  Here  the  greater  part  of  the  collection  was  made.  It 
is  an  Indian  villaire,  thirtv  miles  northeast  of  Cuvaba,  on  the  plateau 
stretching  from  the  southern  tributaries  of  the  Amazon  to  the  flood- 
plains  of  the  Paraguay,  and  is  about  2,700  ft.  above  sea  level.  The 
land  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  village  is  clayey  or  stonv. 
Many  of  the  specimens  marked  from  here  are  from  the  neighboring 
settlements  of  Abrilonga,  Gloria,  etc.,  several  hundred  feet  lower, 
and  on  sandy  soil.  All  this  region  has  a  varied  vegetation  :  stretches 
of  open  land  or  campo  and  semi-forest  are  interspersed  with  large 
patches  of  heavy  forest.  The  climate  is  never  very  warm  (mean  at 
Chapada  72°  F.)  and  there  are  cold  snaps  in  June,  July  and  August, 
when  the  thermometer  frequently  sinks  to  40°  or  lower.  These  cold 
snaps  are  caused  by  southerly  winds,  which,  as  Mr.  Smith  states,  he 
has  proved  are  the  same  as  the  "  pamperos,"  which  are  so  destructive 
to  shipping  on  the  Rio  de  la  Plata.  The  latitude  of  Chapada  is 
about  14°8'.  The  hymenoptera  from  this  place  were  largely  col- 
lected on  flowers  about  the  open  lands,  and  near  the  streams,  where 
many  specimens  were  gathered  in  muddy  places. 

To  quote  from  a  letter  of  June  16,  1896,  from  Mr.  Smith:  "  I 
cannot  say  that  the  collection  of  fossorial  hymenoptera  is  a  par- 
ticularly good  one.  The  best  work  was  done  at  Chapada ;  but  even 
there  most  of  our  time  was  given  to  other  branches,  and  I  was  much 
interrupted.  In  my  opinion,  the  hymenoptera  of  Brazil  are  hardly 
touched.  The  rule  in  the  tropica,  with  all  orders  of  insects,  is  that 
a  few  species  are  common,  while  a  great  majority  are  rare,  and  re- 
quire a  long  and  patient  collecting  to  amass  a  reasonably  good  rep- 
resentation. Probably  the  Scoliidse  are  as  well  represented  as  any, 
because  most  of  the  species  are  large  and  conspicuous.  They  have 
a  very  peculiar  and  almost  indescribable  odor.  I  found  them  most 
common  on  flowers." 

The  Scoliidie  are  as  follows : 

Xyzine  flavopicta  Sm. 

Rio  de  Janeiro  (Xovember)  ;  Corumba  (February  and  April)  ; 
Chapada  (March  and  November).  Four  female  and  seven  male  speci- 
mens.    Burmeister's  M.  dujjlicata  is  a  variety  of  this  species. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  295 

Myzine  emarginata  n.  sp. 

9  . — Black  ;  basal  two-thirds  of  mandibles  ;  tibiae,  tarsi  and  apex 
of  femora  reddish  ;  a  transverse,  medially  enlarged  line  across  front, 
a  narrower  one  across  occiput ;  line  on  pronotum  posteriorly  and  a 
spot  on  each  side  anteriorly,  spot  on  dorsulum  medially,  small  one  near 
tegulse,  line  on  scutellum  and  metanotum,  tegulse  at  base,  triangular 
spot  on  mesopleurie,  a  large  one  on  each  postero-lateral  angle  of 
middle  segment,  and  a  small  elongate  one  above  in  the  middle,  rarely 
absent,  spot  on  fore  femora  beneath  near  apex,  spot  on  medial  and 
hind  femora  above  near  apex,  this  spot  sometimes  extending  on  the 
lower  surface,  fore  tibise  externally,  broad  transverse  band  on  first 
dorsal  segment,  sometimes  emarginate  anteriorly  in  the  middle,  the 
second  entirely  except  a  narrow  line  at  base  and  a  transverse  medial 
line,  these  lines  united  so  as  to  form  a  low  X,  the  medial  one  not 
extending  to  the  sides,  and  apex  of  second,  third  and  fifth  with  a 
narrow,  thrice  emarginate  line  at  apex,  yellow,  that  on  the  fifth 
irregular ;  body  sparsely  clothed  with  griseous  pubescence  ;  front 
with  large  separated  punctures,  smooth  medially,  those  of  the  vertex 
and  occiput  very  sparse ;  clypeus  rather  sharply  carinated  down  the 
middle;  pronotum  and  dorsulum  much  more  sparsely,  with  large 
punctures,  those  of  the  scutellum  and  mesopleurae  closer ;  middle 
segment  above  finely  punctured,  in  the  middle  somewhat  roughened 
posterior  face  above  and  at  the  sides  with  coarse  transverse  wrinkles, 
at  apex  the  wrinkles  are  longitudinal,  sides  very  finely  and  obliquely 
striated  ;  first  dorsal  segment  punctured  at  the  sides,  the  second 
with  fine  sparse  punctures,  strong  at  sides,  punctures  of  segments  3 
and  4  fine  and  closer,  of  the  fifth  stronger,  second  ventral  with  large 
sparse  punctures,  the  remaining  ventrals  finely  punctured  at  base, 
coarsely  at  apex ;  pygidial  area  covered  with  strong,  longitudinally 
parallel  striae,  the  apex  narrowly  reddish  ;  wings  light  fusco  hyaline, 
with  a  broad  fuscous  streak  running  from  stigma  to  apex  of  supe- 
riors.    Length  16-17  mm. 

Chapada  (March  to  May).  A  series  of  males  collected  at  Chapada 
and  Corumba  (April),  I  place  here  with  some  doubt. 

$  . — Black  ;  abdomen  iridescent ;  clypeus,  mandibles  except  apex, 
inner  orbits,  spot  on  scape  beneath,  one  over  each  antennae,  line  on 
anterior  and  posterior  margin  of  pronotum,  that  on  anterior  margin 
interrupted  medially,  dorsulum  medially,  spot  on  scutellum  and 
metanotum,  large  spot  on  mesopleurae  anteriorly  and  a  small  one 
posteriorly,  two  parallel  spots  on  upper  surface  of  middle  segment. 


296  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896".. 

postero-latei'al  angles  of  the  latter,  spot  on  all  the  cox£e  beneath,  and' 
above  on  the  posterior  pairs,  femora  except  base,  remainder  of  legs 
except  stripe  on  tibiae  beneath  and  a  ring  at  apex  of  tarsal  joints,  a 
thrice  eniarginate  fascia  at  apex  of  dorsals  1-6,  the  first  broadest, 
the  last  interrupted  medially,  and  a  elongate  spot  on  each  side  of 
ventrals  2-5,  all  yellow  ;  wings  hyaline,  faintly  dusky  at  apex,  stigma 
testaceous ;  antennae  but  little  longer  than  the  combined  length  of 
head  and  thorax ;  front  rather  strongly  and  closely  punctured,  the 
occiput  much  more  finely  so;  middle  segment  above  in  the  middle 
strongly  punctured,  the  posterior  face  closely  and  transversely  striato- 
punctate,  on  the  sides.obliquely  and  more  finely  so  ;  abdomen  above 
with  rather  strong,  separated  punctures,  beneath  the  punctures  a 
little  finer  and  sparser.     Length  15-17. 

This  sex  is  very  like  the  $  of  flavopida,  but  is,  as  a  rule,  larger,*: 
spots  on  postero-lateral  angles  of  the  middle  segment  larger,  abdom- 
inal fascise  thrice  emarginate,  and  the  sculpture  of  the  middle  seg- 
ment is  less  coarse.  The  spotted  upper  surface  of  middle  segment 
is  constant  in  all  but  two  of  the  twenty-two  specimens  before  me. 

Myzine  frontalis  Burm. 

One  specimen.     Corumbii  (April). 

Myzine  radiata  n.  sp. 

9  . — Black  ;  abdomen  iridescent ;  spot  on  each  side  of  clypeus,  at 
base  of  each  antenna,  inner  orbits,  two  dots  on  metanotum,  and  a 
small  spot  on  each  side  of  the  first  dorsal  segment,  yellow  ;  tibiie, 
tarsi,  mandibles  and  tegulse  in  part  obscurely  rufo-testaceous ; 
clypeus  with  fairly  strong  punctures  on  each  side,  in  the  middle 
longitudinally  raised  or  carinated  and  impunctate  ;  front  and  occiput 
with  large  separated  punctures,  which  ai'e  finer  along  the  occipital 
margin  ;  region  including  the  ocelli  almost  impunctate ;  scape  dis- 
tinctly punctured  ;  pronotum  and  dorsulum  with  strong,  though  not 
very  deep  punctures,  the  posterior  portion  of  dorsulum,  however, 
and  the  scutellum  are  longitudinally  rugoso-punctate ;  sides  of  pro- 
thorax  strongly  and  obliquely  striated  ;  mesopleur?e  with  the  punc- 
tures deeper  and  more  even  than  on  pronotum  ;  upper  surface  of  mid- 
dle segment  at  base  microscopically  punctured,  transversly  strigose 
posteriorly,  posterior  face  with  unusually  coarse  wrinkles  orf  olds  ra- 
diating rather  evenly  from  apex  and  covering  the  entire  surface,  and 
running  into  less  coarse  oblique  strise  on  the  sides;  calcaria  and 
spines  of  legs  white ;  dorsal  segments  1-4,  rather  finely  and  evenly 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  297 

punctured,  the  fifth  more  strongly,  the  base  of  3  and  4  transversely 
smooth ;  ventrals  with  a  series  of  strong  punctures  before  apical 
margins,  from  which  pale  hairs  project,  otherwise  sparsely  punctured; 
pygidial  area  longitudinally  and  evenly  striated  ;  pubescence  of 
body  pale,  a  rather  prominent  bunch  on  each  side  of  the  first  dorsal 
segment ;  wings  subfuscous,  the  anterior  portion  of  the  anteriors 
deeply  clouded,  nervures  black.     Length  15  mm. 

Chapada  (March).     One  specimen.     Seems  to  be  very  distinct  as 
regards  coloration  and  sculpture  of  middle  segment. 

Myzine  iridescens  n.  sp. 

9  . — Black  ;  abdomen  iridescent,  especially  the  first  dorsal  seg- 
ment; inner  orbits,  metanotum,  and  a  dot  on  each  side  of  the  first 
dorsal  segment  of  abdomen,  yellow  ;  pubescence  pale  ;  clypeus  with 
fairly  strong  punctures,  except  in  the  middle,  which  is  longitudinally 
smooth  and  raised  or  carinated  ;  front  with  large,  deep  punctures 
closer  than  in  radiata ;  occiput  with  large,  rather  sparse  punctures, 
its  posterior  margin  with  finer  and  closer  ones  ;  ocellar  region  almost 
impunctate ;  scape  distinctly  punctured ;  pronotum  with  large, 
though  not  deep,  somewhat  confluent  punctures  ;  dorsulum  with  the 
punctures  on  anterior  portion  fine  and  cl9ser,  on  the  remainder 
stronger  and  sparser  than  those  of  the  pronotum ;  scutellum  with  large, 
separated  punctures,  upper  surface  of  middle  segment  at  base  finely 
and  closely  punctured,  apically  rugose,  particularly  in  the  middle  ; 
posterior  face  covered  with  fairly  sti'ong,  close  stride  which  radiate 
from  the  apex,  become  coarser  laterally,  and  extend  on  sides  where 
they  are  finer  and  evener  ;  sides  of  prothorax  finely  striated  obli- 
quely; mesopleurffi  with  large,  deep  punctures  ;  calcaria  and  spines 
of  the  legs  white ;  the  tibiae  and  tarsi  obscurely  rufo-testaceous ; 
abdomen  above  rather  finely  punctured,  most  strongly  on  segments 
4  and  5,  and  at  the  sides,  base  of  2-4  transversely  smooth ;  ventral 
segments  with  large,  sparse  punctures,  a  transverse  series  before  the 
apical  margins  of  segments  2-5  ;  pygidial  area  longitudinally  striated  ; 
wings  subfuscous,  the  anterior  portion,  of  anteriors  deeply  clouded, 
nervures  and  tegulfe  in  part  testaceous.     Length  12  mm. 

Chapada  (December).    One  specimen.   This  is  very  similar  super- 
ficially to  radiata,  but  diflfers  in  much  finer  sculpture  of  thorax, 
particularly  the  middle  segment. 
Tiphia  parallela  Sm. 

Chapada  (December  and  January);  Santarem  (February);  Villeta 

(May).     Seven  specimens. 
20 


298  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Tiphia  solitaria  Sm. 

Chapada  (May  and  November)  ;  Santarem.  Four  specimens. 
Smith  doubtfully  referred  solitaria  to  parallela  as  the  latter's  male, 
in  which  he  was  probably  correct. 

In  addition  to  the  two  species  of  Tiphia  above  noted  the  collec- 
tion contains,  perhaps,  five  others,  which  I  have  not  been  able  to 
place  in  consequence  of  the  many  incomplete  descriptions  that  exist 
of  neotropical  forms.  Smith's  descriptions  of  Tiphia  are  almost 
useless. 

Epomidiopteron  Julii  Rom. 

Chapada  (December  and  February)  ;  Santarem.  Four  specimens, 
all  females. 

Scolia  (Discolia)  nigrescens  n.  sp. 

Deep  !)lack,  shining  ;  mandibles  red  ;  wings  black,  with  a  strong 
blue  reflection  ;  tibi?e  and  tarsi  reddish  ;  base  of  second  ventral  seg- 
ment with  two  small  tubercles. 

$  . — Head  with  deep,  sparse  punctures,  closest  at  base  of  antennae 
and  on  occiput;  anterior  margin  ofclypeus  truncate;  scape  sparsely 
punctured ;  thorax  coarsely  punctured,  tolerably  closely  so  on  pro- 
thorax  and  mesopleune,  dorsulum  and  scutellum  impunctate  me- 
dially, upper  segment  of  middle  segment  in  middle  strongly  punc- 
tured, posteriorly  depressed,  and  sparsely  punctured  ;  legs  more  or 
less  reddish,  their  amount  of  black  and  red  variable,  the  spines  black, 
longer  spur  of  hind  tibia?  equal  to  about  one-third  the  length  of  the 
first  hind  tarsal  joint ;  abdomen  strongly  punctured,  particularly  on 
the  first  and  second  dorsals,  dorsals  3-5  almost  impunctate  except  at 
base,  where  the  punctures  are  close  and  small,  dorsal  segment  six 
with  cribrose  punctures  and  coarsely  hirsute,  ventrally  the  abdomen 
has  large,  sparse  punctures,  out  of  which  project  black  hairs; 
pilosity  of  the  body  black  and  sparse  ;  base  of  second  ventral  with 
two  small,  transverse  tubercles.     Length  22-24  mm. 

$  . — Similar  to  9  in  coloration  except  that  the  legs  are  usually 
entirely  black  ;  antennae  scarcely  as  long  as  head  and  thorax,  stout ; 
abdomen  with  all  the  segments  punctured  alike,  the  punctures  being 
well  separated,  but  not  sparse ;  joints  of  medial  and  hind  tarsi  within, 
at  apex,  with  a  small  bunch  of  grayish  hairs.     Length  16-20  mm. 

Chapada  (November,  December  and  March).  Fourteen  speci- 
mens. Near  monticola  Cam.,  from  Mexico,  but  is  distinct  in  the 
tuberculate  second  ventral  segment,  the  medially  impunctate  dor- 
sulum and  scutellum  and  differently  colored  legs. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  299 

Soolia  (Discolia;  versicolor  Sauss. 

Chapada  (November  and  March.)  Four  9  and  one  S  specimen. 
Saussure  in  describing  this  species  was  in  doubt  whether  its  habitat 
was  Brazil  or  Africa.  The  specimens  before  me  agree  very  well  with 
the  description,  and  leave  no  doubt  in  my  mind  as  to  their  identity. 
The  color  of  thorax  varies  somewhat,  the  dorsulum,  tegulre  and  scu- 
tellum  sometimes  partaking  of  rufous. 

The  male  has  not  before  been  recorded.  It  may  be  briefly  diag- 
nosed as  follows : 

$  . — Colored  like  the  9  ,  but  with  four  apical  segments  reddish  ; 
antennffi  stout,  about  as  long  as  head  and  thorax ;  thorax  strongly 
punctured,  sparsely  so  on  dorsulum,  scutellum,  metanotum  and 
middle  segment,  medially ;  abdomen  with  strong  punctures,  fairly 
close,  on  dorsal  segments  4-6  in  the  middle  somewhat  sparsely,  the 
ventrals  much  more  sparsely  so  ;  second  ventral  at  base  strongly 
bituberculate ;  longer  spur  of  hind  tibia  about  half  as  long  as  the 
first  hind  tarsal  joint ;  wings  black,  with  a  strong  bluish-purple  re- 
flection ;  pilosity  of  body  black,  rather  sparse.     Length  20  mm. 

Scolia  (Discolia)  Drewseni  Sauss. 

Chapada  (March  and  April).  Eighteen  9  and  fifteen  S  speci- 
mens. The  wings  have  a  bronzy-purple  reflection,  not  violaceous  as 
described  by  Saussure. 

The  $  ,  heretofore  unknown,  may  be  described  as  follows  : 
$ . — Similar  to  9  as  to  coloration,  the  black  or  under  side  of 
thorax  more  distinct ;  antenme  about  as  long  as  head  and  thorax ; 
thorax  strongly  punctured,  sparsely  so  on  the  middle  of  dorsulum, 
scutellum,  metanotum  and  upper  surface  of  middle  segment ;  abdo- 
men with  strong  punctures  becoming  closer  toward  apex,  sparsest 
on  first  and  second  dorsal  and  on  the  ventral  segments ;  longer  spur 
of  hind  tibiae  nearly  half  as  long  as  the  first  hind  tarsal  joint; 
second  ventral  segment  at  base  indistinctly  tuberculate;  wings  black, 
with  a  strong  bronzy-purple  reflection ;  pilosity  of  body  reddish, 
rather  dense  on  apical  abdominal  segments.     Length  12-18  mm. 

Scolia  (Discolia)  decepta  n.  sp. 

Similar  to  Drewseni,  but  the  wings  are  deeper  blue,  and  not  pur- 
plish ;  clypeus  transverse,  not  produced  in  the  middle  as  in  Drewseni. 

9  . — Head  with  deep,  sparse  punctures,  almost  impunctate  above 
on  the  front,  more  closely  at  base  of  autennte  and  on  occiput ;  clypeus 
convex  and  impunctate  medially,  depressed  and  punctured  on  the 
sides,  a  small  patch  of  pale  hairs  on  each  extreme  side ;  thorax 


300  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

strongly  punctured,  very  closely  above  on  protborax,  elsewbere 
sparsely,  tbe  center  of  dorsulun,  scutelkira  and  metanotum  impunc- 
tate  or  nearly  so,  tbe  middle  segment  above  in  tbe  middle  witb  large,, 
scattered  punctures  ;  longer  spur  of  bind  tibire  less  tban  balf  as  long 
as  tbe  first  bind  tarsal  joint ;  first  and  second  dorsal  segment  strongly 
punctured,  tbe  punctures  on  second  sparsest  and  feebler,  dorsals  3-5 
almost  impuuctate,  tbe  sixtb  witb  cribrose  punctures,  ventrals 
witb  large,  mucb  scattered  punctures,  tbe  base  of  second  segment 
bituberculate  ;  venation  about  as  in  Drewseni,  the  second  transverso- 
cubital  nervure  strongly  curved  outwardly.  Body  rufous ;  flagel- 
lum  except  first  joint,  occiput  narrowly,  tborax  on  sides  and  beneatb,. 
tbe  middle  segment  entirely,  and  first  and  base  of  second  abdominal 
segments,  black  ;  legs,  including  spines,  rufous;  pilosity  black,  except 
fringe  of  mandibles  and  two  apical  abdominal  segments.  Length 
21  mm. 

Cbapada.  One  specimen.  Superficially,  decepta  sbows  a  striking 
resemblance  to  Drewseni,  from  wbicb  it  diflfers  in  tbe  bluer  wings^ 
sbape  of  clypeus  and  color  of  pilosity. 

Scolia  (Discolia)  bisignata  n.  sp. 

Similar  to  Drewseni  and  decepta  in  coloration,  tbe  tbird  dorsal 
abdominal  segment  witb  a  small  lateral  yellow  spot ;  clypeus  trans- 
verse anteriorly ;  wings  black,  witb  a  strong  purplisb  reflection. 

9  , — Head  witb  deep,  sparse  punctures,  tbose  of  tbe  occiput,  base 
of  antennse  and  on  sides  of  clypeus,  mucb  closer  ;  clypeus  strongly 
convex  and  impunctate  medially,  its  fore  margin  transverse,  at  the- 
sides  witb  a  small  buncb  or  fringe  of  pale  bairs ;  tborax  strongly 
punctured,  closest  on  protborax  and  dorsulum  anteriorly,  posteriorly 
on  dorsulum  tbe  punctures  are  large  and  sparse,  as  are  likewise  tbose 
of  the  scutellum  and  metanotum,  on  the  centre  of  upper  surface  of 
middle  segment  tbe  punctures  are  more  evenly  spaced  ;  mesopleurse 
posteriorly,  metapleurse  and  posterior  face  of  middle  segment  smooth, 
impunctate,  or  nearly  so ;  longer  spur  of  bind  tibiae  not  one-third  as 
long  as  the  first  hind  tarsal  joint;  dorsal  segments  1,  2  and  base  of 
tbird  with  strong,  separated,  though  not  sparse  punctures,  tbose  at 
base  of  second  and  tbird  segments  finest  and  closest,  apical  portion 
of  dorsals  3-5  witb  large  sparse  punctures,  sixtb  dorsal  cribrose, 
ventrals  very  sparsely  punctured,  tbe  punctures  of  the  last  segment 
finest, second  ventral  bituberculate  at  base.  Body  rufous;  flagellum 
except  basal  joints,  mandibles  at  tips,  thorax  on  sides  and  be- 
neath, and  the  dorsulum  medially  as  a  rule,  and  a  narrow,  somewhat. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  301 

indistinct  line  at  apex  of  dorsal  segments  1-3,  black  ;  pilosity  red- 
dish and  rather  sparse,  that  on  the  occiput  pertaining  to  yellow  ; 
none  of  the  abdominal  segments  fringed;  tegul?e  strongly  punctured 
on  anterior  half.     Length  16-21  mm. 

S  . — Head  strongly  and  evenly  punctured  throughout  the  front, 
shallowly  so  on  the  occiput;  antennae  scarcely  as  long  as  the  head 
and  thorax  united,  first  and  second  joints  of  flagellum  about  equal 
iri  length,  the  terminal  joint  rounded  at  apex  (the  antennse  are  de- 
cidedly stouter  than  in  the  male  of  Dreivseiii)  ;  thorax  strongly  punc- 
tured but  rather  more  closely  than  in  the  female,  and  the  posterior 
face  of  middle  segment  with  large  punctures ;  abdomen  closely 
punctured  particularly  above,  the  last  dorsal  hardly  cribrose ;  second 
ventral  bituberculate.  A  yellow  spot  in  the  emargination  of  the 
eyes,  and  the  black  on  dorsulum  and  abdomen  more  generally  dis- 
tributed.    Length  13-16  mm. 

Chapada  (January,  March  and  April).  Eleven  female  and  six 
male  specimens.  The  extent  of  black  of  abdomen  and  sides  of  thorax 
is  subject  to  variation  :  in  two  females  the  dorsal  segments  are  almost 
entirely  black.  The  yellow  spots  on  abdomen  are  constant  in  all 
specimens,  and  may  be  regarded  as  a  good  superficial  character  in 
■distinguishing  this  species  from  Drewseni  and  allied  species. 

mis  vitripennis  Sm. 

Chapada  (March).     Four  specimens, 
mis  regina  Sauss. 

Chapada  (January  to  April).  Thirty-nine  specimens,  all  females. 
Elis  nigra  Sauss. 

Chapada  (October,  February,  March  and  April).  Twenty-three 
female  specimens. 

^lis  lucida  Lep. 

Two  specimens  from  Chapada,  collected  in  December  and  INIarch 
respectively,  I  refer  with  some  doubt  to  E.  lucida.  The  larger 
specimen  measures  27  mm.  in  length,  whereas  Saussure  gives  38  mm. 
Should  my  specimens  be  correctly  determined,  there  is  no  reason  for 
considering  this  species  as  a  variety  of  costalis,  as  suggested  by 
Saussure  and  Sichel  on  p.  219  of  their  catalogue,  as  it  is  clearly 
distinct  from  that  species. 

Elis  hyalina  Lep. 

Represented  in  the  collection  by  numerous  specimens  of  both 
sexes  from  Chapada  (December,  March  and  April).    In  addition  to 


302  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896. 

the  clear  wings,  the  male  of  hyalina  is  distinguished  from  those  of 
costalis  and  Wesmaeli  by  the  unusually  prominent  and  pointed  tu- 
bercle at  base  of  second  ventral  abdominal  segment. 

Elis  costalis  Lep. 

Chapada  (March  and  April)  ;  Rio  de  Janeiro  (November).  Four- 
teen females  and  numerous  male  specimens.  The  latter  show  con- 
siderable variation  in  size  and  maculation,  the  spotted  form,  however, 
is  apparently  rare.  This  form  is  the  E.  j'allax  Saussure,  referred  by 
that  author  as  a  variety  of  £.  hyalina.  It  should  be  placed  with 
costalis,  however,  in  consequence  of  its  heavy  form  and  darker  wings 
and  also  by  the  shape  of  the  ventral  tubercle  of  abdomen. 

Elis  Wesmaeli  Lep. 

Chapada  (December,  February,  March  and  April).  Numerous 
specimens  of  both  sexes. 

Elis  cineraria  Sichel. 

A  large  series,  over  one  hundred  specimens,  is  in  the  collection 
from  Chapada  (November,  March  and  April).  The  specimens 
agree  with  the  description  of  cineraria,  except  that  there  is  no  yellow 
on  the  fourth  dorsal  or  on  any  of  the  ventral  abdominal  segnjents. 
Only  males  are  represented  ;  and  the  series  shows  considerable  vari- 
ation in  size,  specimens  measuring  16-30  mm. 

Elis  variegata  Fabr. 

Chapada  (March).  Fourteen  male  specimens.  These  only  vary 
in  that  two  specimens  have  the  spots  on  the  second  dorsal  segment 
united. 

Elis  conspicua  Sm. 

Four  males.  Santarem  ;  Chapada  (March).  These  vary  in  length 
from  12-20  mm.;  and  in  the  smaller  specimens  the  pronotum  is 
partly  yellowish,  and  in  one  the  third  dorsal  abdominal  segment  is 
bimaculated  with  that  color. 

Elis  (Dielis)  angulata  n.  sp. 

Close  to  conspicua,  but  dorsal  segments  1-4  fasciate  with  yellow- 
ish, thorax  less  shining,  and  pubescence  of  pronotum  entirely  pale 
yellowish. 

9  . — Black,  mandibles  medially,  tegulie  and  tibite  and  tarsi  more 
or  less  reddish-testaceous  ;  transverse  spot  on  metanotum  and  a  band 
on  dorsal  segments  1-4,  yellowish,  the  bands  on  first  and  fourth  seg- 
ments narrow,  those  on  second  and  third  greatly  dilated  medially 


1896,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  303 

and  emarginate  anteriorly,  at  the  sides  narrowed  ;  pubescence  pale, 
that  of  the  occiput  and  pronotum  somewhat  yellowish  ;  apical  mar- 
gins of  dorsal  and  ventral  segments  2-5  distinctly  fringed,  the  color 
of  which  fringe  is  white  except  on  the  dorsal  segments  medially  and 
the  fifth  ventral  (which  have  it  golden-brown) ;  the  first  dorsal  is 
rather  densely  pubescent;  clypeus  punctured  at  the  sides,  bearing 
two  longitudinally  parallel  carinse  down  the  middle  ;  front  strongly 
and  closely  punctured,  the  vertex  and  occiput,  with  exception  of  a 
few  scattered  punctures,  impunctate  ;  scape  with  scattered  punctures  ; 
thorax  subopaque,  the  dorsuluni  strongly  punctured  laterally  and 
anterior!}',  impunctate  medially ;  scutellum  and  metanotum  with 
scattered  punctures  ;  middle  segment  above  with  strong  separated 
punctures,  with  a  smooth,  longitudinal,  narrow  space  in  the  middle ; 
posterior  face  concave,  impunctate  at  extreme  sides,  the  lateral  mar- 
gins somewhat  sharply  carinated  ;  spines  of  the  legs  whitish-testa- 
ceous, calearia  darker ;  hind  tibite  beset  with  strong,  black  thorns 
externally,  their  longer  spur  more  distinctly  spatulate  than  in  con- 
spicua;  wings  subhyaline,  subfuscous  anteriorly  and  apically,  with 
a  purplish  iridescence,  nervures  and  stigma  testaceous,  apex  of 
second  submarginal  cell  very  sharply  angular  in  the  middle;  dorsal 
segments  punctured  tow'ard  the  sides,  rather  opaque,  ventrals  shining, 
the  second  and  third  with  two,  and  the  fourth  with  one,  transverse 
series  of  strong  punctures ;  pygidium  nude,  sculptured  in  such  a  way 
as  to  appear  shingled,  its  apical  margin  narrowly  smooth  and  testa- 
ceous.    Length  17  mm. 

Santarem.  One  specimen.  The  strongly  angulatpd  apex  of  sec- 
ond submarginal  cell  and  the  maculatiou  distinguish  this  species 
from  consplcua  and  auripilis. 

Elis  (Dielis)  auripilis  n.  sp. 

Likely  to  be  confused  with  angulata,  but  differs  in  its  golden 
pubescence  of  front  and  dorsulum,  the  semi-yellowish  wings  and 
strongly  punctured  occiput. 

9  . — Black;  mandibles  reddish  ;  transverse  spot  on  metanotum, 
and  a  fascia  on  dorsal  abdominal  segments  1-4,  or  5,  yellow,  those 
on  the  second  and  third,  or  fourth  broad,  emarginate  anteriorly  and 
narrowly  incised  with  black  at  the  sides,  else  a  small  black  spot  is 
enclosed  by  the  yellow  on  each  side,  on  the  first  segment  the  fascia 
narrow  and  sometimes  interrupted  medially,  on  the  fourth  more  or 
less  variable,  on  the  fifth  narrow  and  inconstant;  front,  occiput, 
pronotum  and  dorsulum  bearing  golden  pubescence,  that  of  cheeks, 


304  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

clypeus,  thorax  beneath  and  legsgriseous;  dorsal  segments  2-5  with 
a  fringe  of  golden-brown  pubescence  at  apex,  ventrals  2-5  with  a 
white  fringe ;  clypeus  furrowed  down  the  middle,  bearing  some 
coarse  folds  anteriorly;  front  strongly  and  closely  punctured,  the 
vertex  with  a  few  large,  scattered  punctures;  occiput  coarsely  punc- 
tured and  posteriorly,  in  addition,  bearing  coarse  folds  or  rugosities  ; 
scape  with  scattered  punctures;  pronotum  except  posterior  margin, 
strongly  and  closely  punctured,  bearing  near  each  antero-lateral 
angle  a  deep,  oblique  depression  ;  dorsulum  with  very  large,  rather 
regularly  placed  punctures,  which  are  but  little  sparser  medially  ; 
scutellum  smooth  medially,  strongly  punctured  at  each  side,  the 
metanotum  impunctate;  middle  segment  above  somewhat  prominent 
in  the  middle  at  apex,  the  median  division  with  large  punctures 
smooth  at  base,  however,  the  lateral  ones  more  finely  punctured, 
posterior  face  concave,  smooth,  at  the  sides  crenulated,  notcarinate  ; 
spines  of  medial  and  hind  tibiae  yellow,  those  of  the  tarsi  and  cal- 
caria,  whitish  ;  wings  fulvo-hyaline,  iridescent,  particularly  on  apical 
third,  nervures  and  stigma  fulvo-testaceous,  apex  of  second  submar- 
giiial  cell  angular  medially,  but  not  sharply,  the  second  transverso- 
cubital  vein  being  rather  more  sinuate  than  augulate ;  dorsal  segments 
1-4  sparsely  punctured  medially,  rather  strongly  and  closely  at  the 
sides,  segment  5  strongly  punctured  throughout,  ventrals  shiny, 
segments  2-4  with  two  transverse  series  of  punctures,  segments  5 
and  6  more  generally  punctured,  sculpture  of  the  pygidial  area  much 
as  in  angtdata,  but  finer,  and  when  held  in  certain  lights  the  pygi- 
dium  is  clothed  with  a  short  appressed  golden  pubescence.  Length 
16-17  mm. 

Three  specimens.  Chapada  (March).  This  seems  quite  distinct 
from  its  allies  in  the  color  of  the  wings,  which  approaches  that  of 
Saussure  and  Sichels  "stirps  Elidis  vespiformis ;  "  those  species  have 
the  abdomen  immaculate,  however. 

Elis  (Dielis)  Smithii  n.  sp. 

In  maculation,  similar  to  confluenta,  but  the  thorax  immaculate; 
wings  faintly  yellowish  along  costa. 

$. — Black;  mandibles  in  ])art  reddish;  narrow  transverse  spot 
on  first  and  a  large  spot  on  each  side  of  the  second  dorsal  segments 
orange,  the  spots  on  second  segment  almost  united  internallv,  thereby 
having  the  appearance  of  a  band  which  is  strongly  emarginate  in 
the  middle  anteriorly ;  otherwise  the  abdomen  black  ;  insect  with 
pale  pubescence,  that  on  the  vertex  and  dorsulum  fuscous ;  dorsal 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  305 

.segments  2-5  and  fifth  ventral  with  a  fringe  of  black  pubescence, 
ventrals  2-4  with  a  white  fringe  ;  clypeus  furrowed  down  the  middle, 
strongly  punctured  laterally  and  basally,  in  the  middle  and  ante- 
riorly smooth  ;  front  strongly  and  closely  punctured,  the  punctures 
of  vertex  large  and  scattered  ;  occiput  with  strong  separated  punc- 
tures, but  not  rugose;  scape  with  scattered  punctures;  pronotum 
except  posterior  margin  strongly  and  closely  punctured,  and  with  a 
depression  on  each  side  as  in  auripilis,  but  less  strong;  punctures  of 
dorsulum  coarse,  close  anteriorly,  sparser  at  the  sides,  and  in  the 
middle  absent;  scutellum  and  metanotum  strongly  punctured  except 
the  apical  portion  which  is  smooth  ;  middle  segment  with  the  median 
division  strongly  punctured  laterally,  stnooth  medially  and  a  little 
produced  at  apex,  on  each  side  of  this  median  division  the  middle 
segment  is  more  finely  and  evenly  punctured,  the  posterior  surface  of 
the  median  division  only  smooth  and  shining,  sides  of  posterior  sur- 
face crenulated ;  spines  of  the  tibire  and  the  middle  tarsi  black, 
calcaria  and  spines  of  hind  tarsi  whitish  ;  wings  subhyaline  irides- 
dent,  faintly  yellowish  along  the  costa,  costal  vein  black,  the  others 
testaceous,  apex  of  second  submarginal  cell  angulate  in  the  middle; 
dorsal  segments  1-3  with  sparse,  rather  indistinct  punctures,  those 
on  the  following  segments  closer  and  more  distinct,  especially  on 
segment  4,  ventrals  shining,  segments  2  and  3  with  two,  4  and  5 
with  .one,  series  of  transverse  punctures,  sixth  sparsely  punctured  ; 
pygidial  area  coarsely  longitudinally  striate,  not  pubescent.  Length 
17  mm. 

One  specimen.  Corumba  (April).  Distinguished  from  conspicua 
■which  it  resembles,  by  the  immaculate  thorax,  distinctly  punctured 
occiput,  etc. 

Elis  dorsata  Fabr. 

Rio  de  Janeiro  (November)  ;  Chapada  (January,  March  and 
April)  ;  Santarem  (February)  ;  Corumba  (April).  Nineteen  speci- 
mens, all  females. 

Elis  mutanda  S.  &,  S. 

Santarem.  One  9  specimen.  I  refer  this  specimen  here  with 
iesitation.  It  measures  but  17  mm.,  and  the  wings  are  bluish-purple  ; 
the  second  and  third  dorsals  have  a  small,  somewhat  rounded,  yellow 
spot  on  each  side. 

Elis  (Dielis)  aureoMrta  n.  sp. 

Belongs  evidently  to  Saussure  and  Sichei's  "  Stirps  EUdis  vespi- 
Jormis"  and  differs  from  other  species  of  that  group  (vespiformls, 


306  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

brasiliana  and  Gerstaeekeri)  by  the  dense  fulvous  pubescence  with 
which  the  pronotum  and  dorsulum  are  clothed. 

9  . — Black ;  mandibles  reddish  in  part ;  head  in  front,  occiput 
and  thorax  above  with  long  golden  yellow  pubescence,  particularly 
dense  on  the  pronotum  and  anterior  portion  of  dorsulum,  the  latter 
in  the  middle  nude,  as  well  as  middle  of  scutellum,  metanotum  and 
upper  surface  of  middle  segment;  thorax  beneath,  legs,  first  dorsal 
and  the  ventrals  more  or  less  with  long  griseous  pubescence,  dorsals 
1-3  with  sparse  pale  pubescence  longest  at  sides,  the  fourth,  fifth 
and  sixth  with  black  pubescence,  dorsals  1-3  and  ventrals  2-5 
fringed  with  white  pubescence  at  apex  ;  clypeus  strongly  punctured 
basally,  smooth  medially,  and  bearing  folds  or  rugoe  on  apical  por- 
tion ;  front  strongly  punctured,  transverse  smooth  space  before  the 
ocelli ;  vertex  with  larger  scattered  punctures,  which  become  closer 
on  the  occiput;  scape  with  a  few  scattered  punctures;  dorsulum 
strongly  punctured  laterally  and  anteriorly,  perfectly  smooth  and 
polished  medially;  scutellum,  metanotum  and  median  divisions  of 
middle  segment  with  large  separated  punctures  at  the  sides,  impunc- 
tate  medially  ;  outer  lobes  or  divisions  of  middle  segment  with  finer, 
shallower  punctures,  their  punctures  stronger  in  the  middle  of  their 
upper  surfaces,  the  sides  of  which  are  sharply  carinated,  the  carinse 
not  extending  on  the  posterior  surfiice  ;  spines  of  the  legs  and  the 
calcaria  black  ;  wings  fulvous,  slightly  bluish  on  a[)ical  portion,  the 
second  transverso  cubital  nervure  sinuated,  pertaining  to  angular  in 
some  specimens;  abdomen  above  with  sparse,  shallow  punctures, 
strongest  toward  the  sides  and  on  the  first,  fourth  and  fifth  segments, 
base  of  second,  and  sides  of  third,  fourth  and  fifth  ventrals  with 
strong  punctures,  the  lateral  punctures  of  third  segment,  however, 
not  reaching  its  base,  the  second  and  third  with  two,  the  fourth  and 
fifth  with  one,  series  of  transverse  punctures,  sixth  with  finer,  scat- 
tered punctures;  pygidial  area  longitudinally  and  irregularly  rugose. 
Length  16-17  mm. 

$ . — Colored  like  the  female,  but  the  abdomen  bluish,  the  pubes- 
cence of  the  body  denser  throughout,  is  finer,  less  yellow  on  the 
thorax  and  is  very  dense  in  the  middle  segment ;  form  slender,  simi- 
lar to  E.  plumipes  $  ;  antennaj  fully  as  long  as  head,  thorax  and 
first  segment  of  abdomen  united,  the  first  joint  of  flagellum  distinctly 
shorter  than  the  second  ;  thorax  on  sides  and  beneath  clothed  with 
a  silky  pile  in  addition  to  the  long  pubescence  ;  dorsulum  and  middle 
segment  on  upper  and  posterior  surfaces  punctured  throughout;  legs 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  307 

slender,  the  spines  of  hind  and  medial  tarsi  pale ;  dorsal  segments 
1-4  with  shallow,  separated  punctures,  those  of  fifth,  sixth  and  base 
of  seventh  closer  and  deeper,  the  ventrals  sparsely  punctured  ;  second 
ventral  at  base  not  at  all  tuberculate.     Length  15-17  mm. 

Chapada  (March).  Over  one  hundred  specimens.  Differs  from 
its  allies  including  E.  alhofimhriata  Smith,  by  the  color  of  the  thor- 
acic pubescence. 

Elis  plumipes  Dr. 

Chapada  (November  and  March).  Eight  female  specimens.  I 
am  uncertain  whether  a  large  series  of  male  specimens  contained  in 
the  collection  from  Chapada  (March  and  October),  Corumba  (April) 
and  Santarera  (November)  belong  to  this  species  or  to  E.  dorsata. 


308  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


THE  MESENTERIES  OF  THE  SAURIA.i 
BY   E.    D.   COPE. 

Examination  of  the  literature  shows  that  this  subject  has  been 
nowhere  adequately  treated.  The  most  considerable  paper  is  one 
by  Dr.  F.  E.  Beddard  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society 
of  London  for  1888.  This,  however,  includes  an  examination  of 
a  limited  number  of  genera,  (eight)  only.  The  present  paper  is 
founded  on  a  study  of  most  of  the  genera  of  all  the  families,  except- 
ing in  the  cases  of  the  Gecconidse  and  Agamidie,  where  my  oppor- 
tunities have  been  more  restricted.  I  am  indebted  for  this  material 
to  the  U.  S.  National  Museum,  the  collections  of  the  Academy 
of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  and  my  own. 

A  fold  suspends  the  alimentary  canal  from  the  median  dorsal  line, 
forming  the  dorsal  or  epigastric  mesentery  (E  G).  No  other  mesen- 
teries bind  the  alimentary  canal,  except  the  stomach,  and  sometimes 
the  adjacent  portion  of  the  small  intestine,  which  have  other  connec- 
tions. The  liver,  on  the  other  hand,  has  several  mesenteric  connec- 
tions, as  follows  :  Its  ventral  face  has  usually  a  single  sheet  connect- 
ing it  with  the  median  ventral  line,  but  in  rare  instances  it  is  bifurcate 
posteriorly  (Scincidffi  generally),  or  even  double  (Tiliqiia,  LHV, 
RHV).  This  sheet,  or  one  of  them,  is  continued  along  to  the  ante- 
rior abdominal  artery  to  the  ventral  wall,  and  sometimes  along  the 
gall-duct  to  the  pyloric  part  of  the  small  intestine.  Each  border  of 
the  liver  is  twice  or  thrice  concave  above,  in  adaptation  to  the 
stomach  and  lungs  in  the  types  where  the  latter  extend  so  far  poste- 
riorly, which  is  the  usual  arrangement.  From  the  left  hand  ridge 
thus  produced,  a  sheet  or  mesentery  extends  to  the  stomach,  form- 
ing the  gastrohepatic  mesentery  (GH).  It  is  sometimes  median 
in  position.  From  right  hand  superior  angle  a  mesentery  ex- 
tends to  the  right  dorsal  body  wall,  forming  the  right  hepatic 
mesentery.  The  four  mesenteries  now  described  are  the  only 
ones  which  are  universally  present,  which  bind  the  liver.  The 
following  sheets  are  present  in  various  types.  Frequently  the 
right   hepatic   and  the   gastrohepatic  give  off  sheets   to  the   right 

'  Read  before  the  American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 
Springfield  meeting,  Aug.  30th,  1895. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  309 

and  left  lungs  respectively,  constituting  the  right  hepatopulmo- 
uary  and  gastropulmonary  mesenteries  (RHP.  and  GP.).  A 
sheet  occasionally  goes  off  from  the  gastrohepatic  to  the  left  body 
wall,  forming  the  left  gastroparietal  mesentery.  This  is  frequently 
represented  by  a  narrow  band,  and  occasionally,  as  in  Dipsosaurus, 
it  joins  the  small  intestine  just  beyond  the  extremity  of  the  gastro- 
hepatic sheet.  This  is  not  represented  on  the  accompanying  dia- 
gram. In  Heloderma  a  distinct  sheet  extends  fi'om  each  border  of 
the  liver  to  the  body  walls,  forming  the  right  and  left  lateral  hepatic 
mesenteries  (LLH,  RLH).  In  Chamceleon,  Polychrus  and  Anolis, 
the  left  lung  besides  being  attached  to  the  gastrohepatic  mesentery, 
is  attached  by  a  sheet  to  the  left  border  of  the  liver,  forming  the 
left  hepatopulmonary  mesentery,  (LHP). 


Diagram  of  peritoneum  of  Sauria,  with  all  the  folds  displayed  by  a 
transverse  section  near  the  middle  of  the  liver.  L  liver ;  St.  stomach  :  E.L 
right  lung;  LL  left  lung;  EG  epigastric,  peritoneal  fold;  LHV  and  RHV, 
left  and  right  hepatoventral  folds ;  RLH  and  LLH,  right  and  left  lateral 
hepj^tic  folds;  KH,  right  hepatic;  GH,  gastrohepatic;  LHP  and  RHP  left 
and  right  hepatopulmonary  folds. 

In  Varaiius  salvator  there  is  a  short  median  gastrohepatic  sheet 
(GH).  In  Varanus,  owing  to  the  anterior  position  of  the  lungs, 
they  have  no  hepatic  or  gastric  connections.  In  no  Saurian  have 
I  observed  a  right  hepatopulmonary  sheet,  as  the  right  hepatic 
mesentery  supports  the  right  lung.  The  latter  extends  along  the 
apical  strip  of  the  right  lobe  of  the  liver  to  the  genital  mesentery  in 
many  genera.  In  Tupinamhis,  Dracoena,  and  some  others,  the  right 
hepatic  extends  as  a  strong  sheet  to  the  right  body  wall,  forming 
with  an  equally  strong  gastroparietal  of  the  left  side,  a  kind  of  dia- 


310  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

pliragm.  In  many  genera,  the  right  hepatic  sheet  is  connected  with 
the  stomach,  especially  at  its  proximal  part. 

Besides  the  hepatic  and  gastric  mesenteries,  there  are  those  which 
enclose  the  internal  genitalia,  the  urinary  bladder,  and  the  corpora 
adiposa.  The  genital  mesentery  is  sometimes  quite  extensively 
free,  and  is  always  so  anteriorly,  especially  where  it  supports  the 
wide  fontanelle  of  the  oviduct.  A  mesenteric  pouch  encloses  the 
corpora  adij^osa,  only  in  those  forms  where  those  bodies  project 
freely  into  the  abdominal  cavity,  as  is  frequently  the  case.  The 
cystic  mesentery  is  a  transverse  fold  of  the  peritoneum  whicli  lines 
the  inferior  wall  of  the  pelvic  cavity,  which  encloses  the  urinary 
bladder,  when  it  is  present. 

Beddard  has  stated  that  in  the  genus  Varanus  there  is  a  "  hori- 
zontal sheet"  of  mesentery  between  the  viscera  and  the  abdominal 
peritoneum.  This  is  an  interpretation  of  the  fact  that  the  abdominal 
peritoneum  is  loosely  attached  to  the  abdominal  muscular  sheaths, 
and  is  readily  separated  from  them.  This  sheet,  however,  presents 
the  usual  relation  of  the  abdominal  peritoneum  to  the  viscera,  as 
Beddard  states,  and  appears  to  me  to  be  homologous  with  it.*  The 
same  condition  caused  Giinther^  to  state  that  in  Regenia  ocellata  the 
corpora  adiposa  are  enclosed  in  "  a  separate  sac  of  the  peritoneum," 
whereas  the  former  are  not  enclosed  in  a  special  sac  as  in  some 
other  genera. 

In  the  Chamseleonidae  the  mesenteries  include  the  usual  hepato- 
ventral,  epigastric,  gastrohepatic  and  right  hepatic,  the  last  includ- 
ing the  right  lung.  The  left  lung  is  included  in  a  left  hepatogastric, 
a  feature  seen  in  few  other  groups,  notably  in  the  Anoline  Iguanidre. 
There  is  also  a  left  hepatolateral,  from  the  liver  to  the  left  body 
wall,  having  a  direction  diagonal  to  the  long  axis  of  the  liver  in  C. 
basiliscus. 

In  the  Nyctisaura  I  have  been  able  to  examine  the  mesenteries  in 
relatively  few  genera  of  the  superfamily.  I  find  in  both  Gecconidae 
and  Eublepharidse  the  structure  to  be  of  the  type  most  frequent  in 
the  Sauria ;  i.  e. ;  a  simple  hepatoventral ;  a  single  gastrohepa- 
tic ;  a  left  gastropulmonary ;  and  a  right  hepatic  which  embraces 
the  right  lung. 

In  the  Agamidse  the  mesenteries  present  the  usual  sheets,  hepato- 
ventral, gastrohepatic,   left   gastropulmonary  and    right    hepatic, 

'Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  London,  1888,  p.  98. 
'Loc.cit.,  1861,  March. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  311 

which  includes  the  right  lung.  I  have  noted  the  following  modifica- 
tions :  In  Agama  colonoram  the  left  gastropulraonary  has  become  a 
right  gastrohepatic  by  its  continuing  to  the  liver,  a  character  ob- 
served in  Chamceleon  and  the  Anolinse.  There  is  also  in  this  species 
a  left  hepatoraarginal.  In  Megalochilus  auritus  there  is  a  right 
hepatoventral,  as  in  Phrynosoma. 

In  the  Iguanidae  the  hej^atic  mesenteries  conform  to  the  general 
type,  with  certain  exceptions  to  be  mentioned.  Thus  there  are  no 
right  or  left  lateral  hepatic  mesenteries,  and  but  one  ventral.  The 
right  hepatic  supports  the  right  lung.  There  is  frequently  a  rudi- 
mental  right  lateral  hepatic  which  connects  the  long  right  apex  of 
the  liver  with  the  right  body  wall.  There  is  a  gastrohepatic  which 
generally  spreads  over  the  space  enclosed  in  the  bend  of  the  stomach. 
There  is  no  left  gastroparietal  sheet  or  band.  The  most  remarkable 
deviation  from  this  type  (which  I  have  verified  in  twenty  genera)  is 
found  in  the  Auolinie.  Here  the  left  lung,  besides  its  superolateral 
connection  with  the  stomach,  is  connected  by  a  special  sheet  with 
the  left  part  of  the  inferior  face  of  the  liver.  Thus  the  latter  organ 
is  suspended  by  two  sheets  to  the  left  side  of  the  middle  line.  In 
genera  where  this  is  the  case  the  two  sheets  are  sometimes  difficult 
to  distinguish  owing  to  their  easy  adhesion  together.  They  may  be 
separated  by  inserting  a  probe  from  the  free  caudad  extremity  of 
the  lung. 

Another  variation  from  the  normal  type  is  seen  in  the  presence  of 
a  right  lateral  hepatic  sheet  in  Phrynosoma  and  Polychrus  (in  Poly- 
chrus  gutturosus  it  is  wanting  in  the  one  specimen  examined).  A  left 
lateral  sheet  is  present  on  the  cephalad  half  of  the  liver  in  Cyclura 
cornuta  and  Polychrus  marmoratus.  It  is  rudimental  in  Polychrus 
aeidirosiris,  and  wanting  in  P.  gutturosus.  There  is  a  gastroparietal 
band  in  Cyclura  cornuta,  which  is  joined  by  the  apex  of  the  peritone- 
um of  the  corpus  adiposum. 

In  the  Anguidse  the  viscera  do  not  display  any  exceptional 
features,  except  as  to  the  serpen  tiform  genera.  The  mesenteries  are 
of  the  typical  character,  modified  in  Ophisaurus  by  the  reduction  of 
the  left  lung.  The  hepatoventral  sheet  is  very  near  the  left  margin 
of  the  liver  in  Pseudopus  apus,  and  the  gastrohepatic  and  right 
hepatic  are  near  together  when  slack.  ^ 

In  the  Helodermatidse  the  mesenteries  of  Heloderma  are  charac- 
teristic. There  is  a  single  hepatoventral,  and  the  gastrohepatic  has 
the  usual  position.      The  right  hepatic  goes  to  the  right  side  of  the 


312  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [ISOS"^ 

Stomach,  becoming  a  right  gastrohepatic,  and  does  not  extend  to  the 
dorsal  peritoneum,  a  character  in  which  it  is  unique  in  the  Sauria. 
Posterior  to  the  middle  of  the  liver  they  unite  on  the  middle  line, 
as  in  the  Teidte.  The  lungs  are  attached  to  the  adjacent  parts 
of  the  gastric  peritoneum  by  separate  sheets,  the  right  and  left  gas- 
tropulmonary.  Besides  these  there  is  a  strong  sheet  on  each  side 
extending  from  the  superior  side  of  the  liver  near  the  border,  to  the 
body  wall,  forming  the  right  and  left  hepatolateral.  The  right 
hepatolateral  does  not  extend  along  the  right  border  of  the  liver 
beyond  the  cephalad  half.  The  right  gastrohepatic  continues  along 
the  elongate  right  process  of  the  liver  to  the  genital  fold  of  the 
peritoneum,  and  the  apex  of  this  process  of  the  liver  sends  a  recur- 
rent sheet  backward,  which  forms  with  the  former,  a  funnel-shaped 
passage.  This  recurrent  sheet  might  be  regarded  as  a  caudad 
hepatolateral.  Dr.  Shufeldt  states*  that  Heloderma  possesses  the 
free  ventral  peritoneum  found  in  Varanus,  but  this  is  not  the  case, 
as  this  structure  is  the  usual  one. 

The  peritoneum  forms  a  transverse  fold  at  the  posterior  part  of  the 
corpora  adiposa,  supporting  the  urinary  bladder,  and  forming  the 
cystic  mesentery.  It  is  but  loosely  attached  to  the  corpora  adiposa, 
which  do  not  project  freely  from  the  body  wall  and  hence  have  no 
special  peritoneal  pouch.  They  are  elongate  and  coarsely  sub- 
divided. 

In  the  Zonuridre  the  mesenteries  in  the  genus  Zonurus  are  of  the 
usual  type.  There  are  one  hepatoventral,  a  gastrohepatic,  a  left 
gastropulmonary,  and  a  right  hepatic  which  encloses  the  right  lung. 

The  mesenteric  attachments  of  the  liver  are  very  characteristic  in 
the  Teidse.  There  is  but  one  suspensor,  a  median  gastrohepatic,  but 
this  bifurcates  above  the  middle  of  the  organ,  and  each  half  diverges, 
and  adhering  to  the  caudad  margin,  extends  to  the  lateral  inferior 
body  wall  on  each  side.  In  Tupvnmnbis  these  sheets  are  united  on 
the  median  line  for  a  distance  posterior  to  the  liver.  The  lungs  are 
each  attached  to  the  stomach  by  a  separate  sheet.  The  left  hepato- 
parietal  sheet  is  always  present  in  this  family,  but  the  right  one  is 
feeble  in  some  genera,  and  is  easily  ruptured,  as  for  instance  in 
Cnemidoplioriis.  I  have  examined  the  genera  Draccena,  Tupmam- 
bis,  Callojmtfis,  Amiva,  Cnemidophorus,  Centropy.v,  Tejus,  Anadia 
and  Oreosaurus. 

*  Proceeds.  Zool.  Soc,  London,  1890,  pp.  193-4. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  313 

In  the  Scincidse,  as  in  other  families,  in  the  serpen tiforra  types  the 
liver  and  stomach  occupy  a  position  caudad  to  the  lungs,  and  so  the 
latter  do  not  appear  in  the  mesenteric  connections  of  the  former,  e.  g, 
Siaphiis.  The  mesenteries  are  the  usual  ones,  but  one  peculiarity  is 
very  frequent  though  not  universal  in  the  family.  The  hepato- 
ventral  sheet  is  generally  divided  into  two,  a  right  and  left  sheet 
next  the  liver,  forming  a  pocket  which  opens  caudad.  In  the 
Tiliqiia  sdncoides  the  two  sheets  only  unite  at  the  cephalic  end  of 
the  liver,  remaining  separate  throughout. 

In  the  Anniellidse  the  viscera  display  the  following  characters. 
The  left  lung  is  much  smaller  than  the  right  lung  and  is  proximally 
fused  with  it,  so  that  there  is  but  a  single  lumen.  Right  lung  much 
enlarged  and  covering  the  alimentary  canal  below  (ventrad).  Liver 
considerably  posterior  to  heart,  long  and  narrow,  with  a  small  left 
lobe  and  a  long  right  lobe  extending  to  the  reproductive  cells.  Gall 
bladder  enclosed  by  the  liver  and  exposed  inferiorly,  i.  e.,  occupying 
a  foramen  as  in  the  Diploglossa.  Alimentary  canal  distinguished 
into  stomach,  and  a  small  and  large  intestine,  without  distinct  colon. 
IStomach  without  curvature  ;  small  intestine  moderately  plicated, 
with  lacertiform  mesentery.  Reproductive  cells  anterior,  symmet- 
rical ;  kidneys  symmetrical,  posterior.  There  is  a  single  gastro- 
hepatic  mesentery  from  the  middle  line  of  the. liver,  and  no  right 
hepatic  or  lateral  hepatics.  Hepatoventral  simple  ;  plates  of  epi- 
gastric very  loosely  attached  together.  No  pulmonaries  at  middle 
of  liver. 

The  fusion  of  the  lungs  is  a  peculiarity  that  I  have  not  noticed 
elsewhere  among  the  Sauria.  The  left  lung  is  Irke  a  diverticulum  of 
the  right,  and  posterior  to  the  point  of  divergence  from  the  latter  is 
bound  to  it  by  connective  tissue  to  the  extremity.  This  fusion  is  a 
step  nearer  to  obliteration  than  occurs  in  any  of  the  serpentiform 
genera  of  Teidse,  Scincidse  or  Anguidoe,  where,  though  of  reduced 
size,  it  is  distinct  from  the  right  except  at  its  proximal  extremity. 

In  the  Amphisbeenidse,  as  the  left  lung  only  is  present  in  this 
family,  there  is  but  one  gastropulmonary  mesentery.  The  liver  has 
a  crescentic  cross-section,  and  it  is  supported  by  two  gastrohepatic 
mesenteries  (A7nphisbcena  alba  and  A.  fuliginosa),  or  by  only  one, 
and  a  right  hepatic  or  hepatolateral,  as  it  may  be  :  {Rhineura  florid- 
ana).  There  is  but  one  hepatoventral.  The  last  described  structure 
also  characterizes  Euchiroies  diporus. 
21 


314  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Since  the  above  was  written  a  paper  has  been  published  in  the 
Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London  (1895,  p.  702)  by 
Mr.  G.  W.  Butler  on  the  lungs  of  snakes,  Amphisbsenidse,  etc.  Here 
the  fact  of  the  suppression  of  the  right  lung  in  the  Amphisbsenia  is 
pointed  out. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  315 


CATALOGUE  OF  THE  SPECIES  OF  CERION,  WITH  DESCRIPTIONS 

OF  NEW  FORMS. 

BY   HENRY    A.   PILSBRY    AND    E.    G.   VANATTA. 

The  genus  Cerion,  or  as  it  is  commonly  known,  Strop hia,  is  one  of 
the  most  characteristic  forms  of  West  Indian  land-molluscan  life. 
With  two  exceptions  the  species  are  all  insular ;  C.  incanum  and  C. 
Antonii  only,  the  former  from  South  Florida  Keys,  the  latter  reported 
to  be  from  Guiana,  are  continental.  The  Greater  Antilles — Cuba, 
Hayti  and  Porto  Rico,  with  the  Virgin  Is,  and  the  entire  group  of 
the  Bahamas,  are  inhabited  by  numerous  species,  with  a  multitude 
of  local  races.  South  of  the  larger  islands  named,  if  we  include 
with  Cuba  the  faunally  dependent  Cayman  group  and  Isle  of  Pines, 
but  one  single  species  is  found,  C.  uva  of  Curacoa,  singularly  isolated 
in  characters  as  well  as  geographically.  Jamaica  is  without  a 
species;  and  the  genus  also  fails  in  the  Caribbean  chain. 

In  the  main,  each  species  is  confined  to  some  single  island,  or  to  a 
series  of  adjacent  keys  or  islets  ;  but  there  are  numerous  exceptions, 
where  forms  unquestionably  conspecific  are  found  on  several  islands 
separated  by  considerable  distances. 

The  species  are  subject  to  a  remarkable  range  of  individual  and 
local  variation.  Thus,  many  species  vary  from  strongly  and  con- 
spicuously ribbed  to  entirely  ribless  and  smooth.  In  fact  this  is  a 
common  variation,  incontestably  established  by  the  series  we  have 
examined  of  Cerion  dimidiatum,  C.  columna,  C.  regina,  C.  uva,  C. 
maritimum,  C.  Sagraianum  and  many  other  species.  Color  is  equally 
variable,  pure  white  species  varying  to  heavily  brown-mottled,  and 
this  not  in  one,  but  in  many  of  the  species.  Absolute  size  of  adults 
is  almost  as  mutable  as  in  Cijprcea;  and  occasional  individuals  are 
abnormally  shortened  by  the  premature  assumption  of  the  features 
of  maturity,  giving  them  a  stunted  appearance. 

All  of  these  considerations  render  the  study  of  the  species  one  of 
unusual  difficulty ;  and  the  older  authors,  unacquainied  with  the 
protean  nature  of  the  species,  as  with  the  usually  restricted  range  of 
each,  often  failed  to  properly  discriminate  them.  Thus,  the  several 
volumes  of  Pfeiflfer's  Monographia  Heliceorum-  Viventium  are  un- 


316  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

reliable  in  dealing  with  many  species,  especially  in  respect  to  geo- 
graphic distribution. 

An  American  writer  on  natural  history,  Mr.  C.  J.  Maynard, 
some  years  ago  begun  the  study  of  this  genus,  and  to  his  earliest 
publication  on  the  subject  we  owe  the  first  clear  statement  of  some 
facts  of  prime  importance  ;  that  the  Cerions  are  excessively  plastic, 
and  locally  modified  into  a  considerable  number  of  species  and  sub- 
species ;  that  the  range  of  some  of  these  forms  is  excessively  limited  ; 
and  that  former  authors  had  failed  to  discriminate  many  really  dis- 
tinct species,  "  lumping"  them  under  a  few  old  names;  and  finally, 
that  the  aperture-armature,  or  "  teeth  "  of  the  Cerions  are  variously 
arranged,  and  furnish  ground  for  the  division  of  the  genus  into 
several  subgenera.  Mr.  Maynard,  moreover,  has  discovered  and 
described  a  large  number  of  most  interesting  species  and  varieties, 
especially  the  Cayman  Island  group  ;  so  that  his  work  on  this  genus 
has  been  an  important  one.  However,  in  our  opinion  he  has  unduly 
multiplied  species  and  subspecies,  basing  them  on  characters  we  hold 
to  be  too  slight  and  inconstant,  and  his  work  is  marred  by  inaccur- 
acies of  all  kinds  "  too  numerous  to  mention." 

Our  object  in  preparing  the  present  list  has  been  primarily  to  place 
before  students  a  moderate  estimate  of  the  species  of  the  group, 
specific  values  being  held  neither  in  extremely  narrow  nor  very 
wide  limits,  but  practically  in  conformity  with  the  views  represented 
by  the  leading  English  and  American  conchological  authors  of  to- 
day. 

We  have  taken  this  occasion  to  place  on  record  the  results  of  a 
careful  study  of  a  very  large  collection  of  shells  of  the  genus,  a 
collection  including  numbers  of  shells  which  have  been  identified  by 
Bland,  Swift,  Pfeiffer,  Dohrn,  Gruner  and  others,  as  well  as  acces- 
sions, considerable  in  the  mass,  from  Messrs.  H.  D.  Van  Nostrand, 
S.  Raymond  Roberts,  W.  H.  Dall,  C.  J.  Maynard  and  others. 

The  soft  anatomy  of  the  Cerions  is  still  but  little  known.  Dr. 
Leidy,  the  Cuvier  of  American  Zoology,  has  given  figures  of  the 
the  anatomy  of  C.  incanum  Binn.^  W.  G.  Binney  has  figured  jaw 
and  teeth  of  the  same  species^  and  C.  J.  Maynard  has  more  recently 
published  figures  of  the  jaws  and  soft  anatomy  of  a  species  from 
the  Cayman  Is.^  Leidy's  figure  unfortunately  does  not  show  the 
various  systems  of  organs  separately,  and  it  is  difiicult  to  interpret 

^  Terrestrial  Mollusks  I,  pi.  xv,  figs,  ii-iv. 

2 Terr.  Moll.  V. 

^  Contributions  to  Science,  Vol.  I. 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


317 


the  confused  masses  and  ducts  of  the  generative  and  digestive 
tracts,  shown  crowded  together.  It  appears,  however,  that  the  long 
sperraatheca  duct  bears  a  diverticulum,  and  the  vas  deferens  is  of 
unusual  length.  Maynard  does  not  seem  to  have  been  fortunate 
in  his  preparations,  and  his  figures  afford  no  data  of  assistance  to  us. 
The  only  species  seen  by  us  in  the  flesh  is  Cerion  Yumaense  P.  & 
V.  ;*  the  specimens  examined  being  part  of  the  type  lot  received  from 
Mr.  Henry  Prime  and  corresponding  to  fig.  3  of  pi.  XI. 

The  penis  (p)  is  a  moderately  stout  sack  from  the  termination  of 
which  the  short  retractor  springs.  Near  the  base  of  the  penis  the 
vas  deferens  (c.  d.)  enters  ;  and  this  is  of  extraordi- 
nary length  as  shown  in  the  figure.  The  spermatheca 
(sp.)  has  a  long  duct,  without  branch  or  diverticulum  ; 
and  there  is  a  large  talon  (t).  Ovotestis  not  ob- 
served. 

A  transverse  section  of  penis-sack  some  distance 
above  entrance  of  vas  deferens  shows  a  cavity  with 
bipartite  or  dumb-bell  shaped  section,  filled  with  a 
granular  yellowish  substance. 

It  will  be  seen  that  this  diflPers  from  Leidy's  figure 
in  lacking  the  diverticulum  of  the  spermatheca  duct. 
It  agrees  with  it  in  showing  a7i  excessively  long  free 
portion  of  the  vas  deferens,  inserted  abnormally  low  on 
the  penis ;  and  these  will  doubtless  prove  to  be  generic 
characters  widely  sundering  Cerion  from  all  other 
genera  of  which  the  genitalia  are  now  known. 

Subdivision  of  the  Genus  Cerion. 

Four  groups  of  subgeneric  value  may  be  distinguished  by  concho- 
logical  characters.     Stropihiops  only  is  known  anatomically. 

I.  Axial  and  parietal  folds  wanting,  Eostrophia. 

II.  Axial  fold  in  angle  at  root  of  columella ;  no  parietal  fold, 

Cerion  s.  str. 

III.  Axial  and  parietal  folds  present,  the  latter  near  middle  of 
parietal  wall,  single  and  short,  not  over  one-third  of  a  whorl 
long,  Strophiops. 

IV.  Axial  and  parietal  folds  present,  the  latter  very  long  and 
doubled,  or  short  and  interrupted,  with  an  accessory  denticle; 
rarely  obsolete,  Diacerion. 

*  The  dissections  and  drawing  are  by  Mr.  Vanatta. 


C  Yumaense 
P.  &V. 


318  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  first  and  second  of  these  groups  consist,  at  present,  of  one 
species  each.  Strophiops  is  by  far  the  most  numerous  in  species. 
We  are  unable  to  make  any  subgeneric  division  into  long- and  short- 
toothed  forms ;  the  various  species  present  a  perfectly  graduated 
series.  Maynardia  Dall  and  Loiujidens  Maynard  are,  therefore,  in 
our  opinion,  merely  subordinate  divisions  oi  Stroj^hioj'is. 

Genus  OERION  (Bolton,  1799.)  Morch,  1850. 

Morch,  Catal.  Yoldi,  p.  63.     Dall.  Bull.  M.  C  Z.  XXV,  No.  9,  p.  120 
Sb-ophia  Albers,  1850,  not  of  Meigen,  1832. 

Subgenus  EOSTKOPHIA  Dall,  1890. 

1.  Cerion  anodonta  Dall.*^    Trans.  Wagner  Free  Inst.  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  13,  pi.  1,  figs.  8c, 
8d. 

Miocene  :  Silex  Beds,  Ballast  Point  and  Old  Tampa  Bay,  West 
Florida. 

la.  Cerion  anodonta  floridanum  Dall.*     L.  c,  fig.  6. 

Miocene :  Ballast  Point. 

Subgenus  CERION  «.  «?/■. 

Distribution,  Curacoa.  This  is  the  most  distinct  of  the  subordin- 
ate  groups  of  the  genus.  The  teeth  of  the  inner  whorls  are  frequently 
absent. 

2.  Cerion  uva  Linne.*     Syst.  Nat.  (10),  p.  765.     Fer.,  Hist.,  pi.  153,  f.  11-14. 

Island  of  Curacoa !     The  locality  "  Guadeloupe  "  is  erroneous. 
2a.  Cerion  uva  desculptum  P.  &  V.*    PI.  XI,  fig.  1. 
Curacoa. 

Subgenus  STROPHIOPS  Dall,  1894. 

Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.     Vol.  XXV,  p.  121  (October,  1894). 

-\- Maynardia  Dall,  /.  c.  (type  S.  neglecta  Mayn.). 

-\-Senictiltis  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  17  (type  S.  niumia  Brug.). 

-f  Umhonis  Maynard,  Contrib  to  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  28  (type  S.  scalarma  Gundl  ). 

-\- Piyiguitia  Maynard,  Contrib  to  Sci._,  III,  p.  30  (type  S.  "  diinidiada  "  Pfr.). 

-\-Longidens  Maynard.  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  39  (type  S. pannosa  Mayn.). 

-\-Multostrophia  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  II,  p.  177  (type  S.  exintea  Mayn.). 

Group  of  C.  punnosum  (Longidens  Maynard). 

Distribution,  Cayman  Island.*.  Maynard  correctly  separates  this 
group  of  species  from  typical  Strophiops. 

3.  Cerion  nanum  Maynard.*     Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  27. 

Little  Cayman. 

^Species  and  varieties  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*)  are  represented  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  319 

4.  Cerion  copium  Maynard.*     Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  22. 
Cayman  Brae. 

4a.  Cerion  copium  parvum  Maynard.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  24. 
Cayman  Brae. 

5.  Cerion  glaber  Maynard.*    Contr.  to  Soi.,  i,  p.  25, 
Cayman  Brae. 

5a.  Cerion  glaber  perplexum  Maynard.*     Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  71. 
Cayman  Brae. 

6.  Cerion  levigatum  Maynard.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  12. 
Little  Cayman. 

S.f estiva  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  17,  is  a  more  variegated  form. 

6a.  Cerion  levigatum  acutum  Maynard.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  15. 

S.  nitela  Mayn.,*  t.  c,  p.  73. 
.S".  picfa  Mayn.,*  A  c.,  p.  18. 

These  seem  to  be  very  elosely  allied,  differing  from  acutum  merely 

in  size  and  degree  of  mottling. 

Little  Cayman. 

7.  Cerion  pannosum  Maynard.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  10. 

S./usca  Mayn.*  /.  c,  p.  77.     Seems  to  be  the  same  thing  differing  only  "in 
color. 

S.  intermedia  Mayn.*  /.  c ,  p.  13.     A  smaller  form. 

Little  Cayman. 

8.  Cerion  lineotum  Maynard.*     Contr.  to  Sci.,  i,  p.  20. 

Little  Cayman. 

Gronp  of  C.  maritimum. 

9.  Cerion  dimidiatum  Pfr.     Zeitschr.  f.  Mai.,  1847,  p.  16. 

F.  proteus  Gnndlach  mss.,  Pfr.,  Malak.  Bl.,  VII,  1860,  p.  19;  Novit.  Conch, 
t.  66,  f.  13-22, 

Gibara,  Cuba. 

An  altogether  ribless  form  occurs.     The  species  varies  toward  the 
following. 

10.  Cerion  incrassatum  Sowb.*    C.  Icon.,  XX,  pi.  1,  f.  6. 
Cuba,  Gibara. 

10a.  Cerion  incrassatum  microdon  P.  &  V.*    PI.  XI,  fig.  5. 
Cuba. 

11.  Cerion  multicostum  KUster.*     Conchyl.  Cab.,  p.  77,  t.  11,  f.  6,  7. 
Punta  Maisi,  Cuba. 


320  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

12.  Cerion  iostomum  Pfr  *     Malak.  B).,  1854,  p.  204. 
Southern  Cuba. 

12a.  Cerion  iostomum  Arangoi  P.  &  V.*    PI.  XI,  fig.  12. 
Cienfu  egos,  Cuba. 

13.  Cerion  Sagraianum  Pfr.*     Zeitschr.  f.  Malak.,  1847,  p.  15. 

.S".  marmorata  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  12  (not  of  Pfr.!). 
.S"  marmorata  polila  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  14. 
S.  obscura  Maynard,*  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  21. 

Cuba,  Cayo  Galindo,  Cayo  Piedra  del  Norte,  Cardenas. 

There  are  two  forms  of  C.  Sagraiamim,  one  smooth  (typical),  the 
other  with  fine  riblets ;  but  the  distinction  does  not  seem  to  be  of 
subspecific  value,  being  too  variable  in  the  series  before  us.  The 
cone  of  the  spire  is  always  minutely  sculptured.  The  intergradation 
of  S:  obscura  Mayn.  is  established  by  specimens  before  us. 

14.  Cerion  maritimum  Pfr.*     Archiv  f.  Naturg.,  1839,  I,  p.  353  ;  Conchy].  Cab.,  t. 
9,  f.  10,  11. 

14a.  Cerion  maritimum  sublaevigatum  P.  &  V.*      Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  May  4,  1895,  p. 
209  ;  Conchy].  Cab.,  t.  9,  f.  12,  13. 

Matanzas,  Cuba. 

15.  Cerion  incanum  Binn.*     Terr.  Moll.,  II,  p.  318  (1851). 
P.  detrita  Shutt.,  mss. 

Florida  Keys  ;  Eastern  Cuba. 

16.  Cerion  hyperlissum  P.  &  V.«     PI.  XI,  fig.  10. 
Cuba. 

Group  of  C.  regina. 

17.  Cerion  Weinlandi  'Kurr'  Martens.*      Malak.  Bl.,  VI,  1859,  p.  207,   Novit. 
Conch.,  t.  84,  f.  1,  2. 

Crooked  Id.,  Bahamas. 

18.  Cerion  nudum  Maynard.*     Contr.  to  Sci.,  I,  p.  29. 

Long  Island.     Near  to  C.  Weinlandi,  but  smaller. 

19.  Cerion  incanoides  P.  &  V.*   Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  May  4, 1895,  p.  209.   PI.  XI,  fig.  15. 
Turks  Island. 

20.  Cerion  regina  P.  &,  V.*     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1896,  May  4,  208.     PI.  XI,  figs.  23, 24. 
Turks  Island. 

20a.  Cerion  regina  comes  P.  &  Y*    Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  208. 
Turks  Island. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  321 

20b.  Cerion  regina  eucosmium  P.  &  V.*     Proc  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  208.  PI. 
XI,  fig.  21. 

Turks  Island. 

20c.  Cerion  regina  percostatum  P.  &  V.»    Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  208.  PL 
XI,  fig.  22. 

Turks  Island.  , 

20d.  Cerion  regina  Swiftii  P.  &  V.»     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  208. 
Turks  Island, 

20e.  Cerion  regina  brevispirum  P.  &  V.*  Pioc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  209.   PI. 
XI,  fig.  25. 

Turks  Island. 

21.  Cerion  regium  Benson.*     Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  2d.  Ser.,  IV,  p.  125 ;    Con- 
ehyl.  Cab.,  t.  17,  f.  13,  14. 

Fupa  decuviana  of  authors,  not  F^r. 

22.  Cerion  oolumna  P.  &  V.*     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  207.     PI.  XI,  fig.  17. 

Inagua,  Bahamas. 

22a.  Cerion  oolumna  validum  P.  &  V.*      Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1895,  p.  207. 
PI.  PI,  fig:  18. 

Inagua. 

23.  Cerion  calcareum  Pfr.      Zeitschr.  f.  Malak.,  1847,  p.  83;  ConchyL  Cab.,  Pupa, 
pL  19,  f.  4,  5. 

Habitat  unknown.     Probably  will  be  found  in  the  Inagua  group. 

24.  Cerion  sarcostomum  Pils.  &  Van.*    PL  XI,  fig.  16. 
Little  Inagua. 

25.  Cerion  infandum  '  Shutt.'  Poey.®      Memor.,  II,  p.  29-60 ;  Malak.  Bl.,  1854,  t. 
3,  f.  4,  5. 

Punta  Gorda  en  Matanzas,  Cuba. 

26.  Cerion  mumia  Brug.»    Eneycl.  Meth.,  I,  p.  348,  N.  87,  Fer.  Hist.,  1. 153,  f.  5,  6. 

S.fastigaia  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  1896,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  6,  7. 
S.  eurysioiiia  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  1896,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  7-9. 

Cuba. 

26a.  Cefion  mumia  chrysalis  Fer.*    Hist.,  t.  153,  f.  1-4. 

S.  scripta  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  iii,  p.  34. 

S.  scripta  obhierata  Mayn.,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  iii,  p.  5. 

S.  media  Mayn.,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  iii,  p.  18. 

Differs  from  mumia  only  in  the  insufficient  character  of  being 
mottled  in  zig-zag  pattern.  The  various  forms  described  by  Maynard 
are  well  represented  in  our  series,  with  intermediate  forms  also. 
They  have  no  racial  characters  worth  naming. 


322  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

26b.  Cerion  maniia  magister  P.  .t  V.*     PI.  XI.  fig.  4. 

Larger,  stouter,  more  cylindrical,  closely  mottled  and  variegated  ; 
aperture  large,  with  the  Up  hroadhj  jiariug,  reflexed. 

Matauziis  aud  other  localities  in  eastern  Cuba.  This  is  probably 
S.  mumia  Mayu.,  Coutrib.  to  Sci.,  I,  p.  190;  not  of  Bruguiere. 

27.  Cerion  mnmiola  Pfr.«      Arohiv  f.  Xaturg..  1869.  I,  p.  353:    Malak.  Bl..  1S54.  t. 
3,  f.  7.  8. 

^latanzas;  Bahia  Honda,  Cuba. 
27a.  Cerion  niuniiola  major  Pfr.»    Malak.  Bl.,  1854,  t.  3,  f.  (>. 
Cuba. 

28.  Cerion  sculptum  Poey.     Memorias.  II,  p.  3(i,  pi.  2,  f.  22. 

Cuba. 

Group  of  C.  scalannum. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  peculiar  groups  of  the  genus,  unique  in 
the  sculpture  of  fine  spiral  lines  crossed  by  very  prominent  ribs. 
Mayuard  proposes  for  it  the  subgeueric  name  Umboni^,  but  we 
would  hardly  accord  the  group  so  high  a  rank. 

29.  Cerion  scalarinuni  •  Gundlach'  Pfr.     Xorit.  Conch.,  p.  367,  pi.  S4.  l".  16,  17. 
Gibara,  Cuba. 

80.  Cerion  Johnsoni  Pils.  .t  Van.*      Proc.  A.  X.  S..  lS9o,  May  4,  p.  207.      PI.  XI, 
fig.  30. 

5'./<zj-^«/Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci..  iii,  p.  32. 

Cuba. 

31.  Cerion  felis  P.  .t  V.»     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1S95,  May  4,  p.  206.     PI.  XI,  fig.  29. 
Cat  Island,  Bahamas. 

Group  of  C.  glan-s. 

32.  Cerion  lentiginosnm  Mayn.*     Contr.  Sci.,  1889,  Vol.  1.  p.  75,  t.  7,  f.  IS. 
Eum  Key,  Bahamas. 

There  is  also  a  pure  white  form. 

33.  Cerion  album  Maynard.*    Contr.  Sci.,  1SS9,  Vol.  1.  p.  74.  t.  7,  f.  17. 

Rum  Key.     A  closely  allied  form  with  liver-brown  lip  occurs  on 
Eleuthera,  but  our  specimens  are  only  "  crab  shells,"  not  suitable 
for  exact  comparisons. 
33a.  Cerion  album  Brownei  M.^ynard.*    Contr.  to  Soi..  I,  p.  196. 

Rum  Key. 

34.  Cerion  Abacoense  P.  ±  V.«     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4.  p.  209.  PI.  XI,  fig.  11. 
Abaco,  Bahamas. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  323 

34a.  Cerion  Abacoense  Bendalli  Pils.  &  Van.*    PI.  XI,  fig.  13. 

Abaco. 

35.  Cerion  Kitchiei  Maynard.*    Contr.  Sci.,  1894,  Vol.  2,  p.  135,  f.  41  a.  b. 

Highburn  Key. 
36a.  Cerion  Ritchiei  eburneum  Maynard.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  1894,  Vol.  2,  p.  144,  f. 
45  a.  b.     Costte  slightly  closer. 

U  Key,  Exuma  group. 
35b.  Cerion  Kitchiei  elongatum  Mayn.     T.  c.  p.  148. 

Same  locality  as  preceding,  with  which  it  is  probably  identical. 
35c.  Cerion  RitcMei  Grayi  Maynard.*      Contr.  Sci.,  1894.  Vol.  2,  p.  138,  f.  42  a.  b. 

S.  Grayi gigantea  Mayn.,  t.  c,  p.  141,  f.  44  a-,  Grayi pumilia  Mayn.  t.  c,  p. 
143,  f.  44  b. 

Highburn  Key,  Bahamas. 
35d.  Cerion  Ritchiei  Vannostrandi  P.  &  V.» 

Similar  to  C.  Grayi  gigauteum  Mayn.,  but  smooth  and  snow-white. 
Aperture  small,  built  forward,  its  margins  not  reflexed.  Alt.  40, 
diam.  16  mm. 

36.  Cerion  Maynardi  P.  &  V.»   Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  210.   PI.  XI,  fig.  31. 

Abaco,  Bahamas. 

37.  Cerion  griseum  Maynard.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  1894,  Vol.2,  p.  159,  f.  51. 

S.  glans  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  15,  f.  50.     Fresh  Creek,  Andros. 

S.  bimarginata  Mayn.*  /.  c.,  p.  164,  f.  53.     Green  Key. 

S.  bimarginata  cera  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  168,  f.  54.     Green  Key. 

S.  Pilsbryi  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  170,  f.  53.     Goat  Key. 

S.  Pilsbryi  evolva  Mayn.*  t.  c.,  p.  173,  f.  57.     Goat  Key. 

S.  crassicostata  Mayn.*  mss.     Andros. 

Type  from  about  one  mile  N.  of  Calabash  Bay,  Andros. 
37a.  Cerion  griseum  regulum  Mayn.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  1894,  ii,  p.  161,  f.  52. 

Fresh  Creek,  Andros. 
37b.  Cerion  griseum  restrictum  Mayn.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  1894,  Vol.  2,  p.  175,  f.  58. 

Goat  Key. 

38.  Cerion  glans  Kuster.*     Conchyl.  Cab.,  p.  74,  t.  11,  f.  1,  2. 

?  Pupa  tumiditla  Desh.  in  Fer.  Hist.,  pi.  153,  f.  8. 

S.  Curlissii  Mayn.*  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  1894,  Vol.  2.  p.  107,  f.  33.  Waterloo, 
Nassau,  N.  P. 

S.  Curtissii  nivea  Mayn.*  /.  c,  p.  112,  f.  34  a,     Waterloo,  Nassau,  X.  P. 

S.  cinerea  Mayn.*  and  varieties  robuita,  tracta  and  mutata,  t.  c,  p.  119,  f. 
35-37.     N.  P. 

S,  neglecta  and  var.  agava  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  150,  f.  47.  N.  P. 

S.  Carlotta  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  156,  f.  49.     Fort  Charlotte,  N.  P. 

S.  albea  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  128,  f.  28.     Spruce  Key. 

S.  Coryi  Mayn.*  t.  c,  p.  129,  f.  39.     N.  P. 

Kassaii,  New  Providence,  may  be  considered  type  locality  for  C. 
glans. 


324  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

38a.  Cerion  glans  Thorndikei  Maynard*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  1894,  Vol. 2,  p.  116,  f.  34, 

b,  c,  d. 

Waterloo,  Nassau,  N.  P. 

This  variety,  like  the  next  is  not  trenchantly  defined. 

38b.  Cerion  glans  varium  Bonnet.*  Rev.  et  Mag.  Zool.,  XVI,  1864,  p.  71,  t.  6. 
P.  zebra  Weinland,  Sowb.,  Conch.  Icon  ,  pi.  2,  f.  12  a,  b.  (1875). 

New  Providence. 

Under  this  head  may  be  grouped  the  mottled  and  maculated  forms 
with  comparatively  delicate,  narrow  riblets.  Intergradation  with 
the  maculated  forms  with  slightly  stronger  ribs,  such  as  "  cinerea 
mutata,"  "Curtisii,"  "cinerea  tracta,"  etc.,  of  Maynard,  may  be 
expected.  Gods  and  men  may  well  stand  aghast  at  the  splitting  of 
C.  glans  recorded  above. 

C.  griseum  is  doubtfully  distinct  from  glans.  We  leave  it  separ- 
ate, because  in  the  average,  the  two  are  distinguishable,  and  they 
inhabit  different  islands. 

39.  Cerion  martinianum  Kuster.*    Conchyl.  Cab.,  p.  75,  t.  11,  f.  3,  4. 
Habitat ? 

40.  Cerion  Blandi  Pils.  &  Van.*    PI.  XI,  fig.  7. 
Turks  Island. 

Group  of  C.  Agassizii. 

41.  Cerion  Agassizii  Dall.*    Bui.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  1894,  Vol.  XXV,  p.  120. 
Nassau  Ridge,  New  Providence,  fossil  in  the  calcareous  sand-rock. 

42.  Cerion  Eleutherae  P.  &  V.*    PI.  XI,  figs.  19,  20. 
Eleuthera. 

43.  Cerion  gubernatorium  Crosse.*    Journ.  Conch.,  1869,  p.  186 ;  Journ.  Conch., 
1870,  t.  2,  f.  4,  lower  figure. 

New  Providence,  Bahamas. 

Group  of  C.  crassilahre. 

44.  Cerion  rude  Pfr.«    Malak.  Bl.,  II,  1855,  p.  102,  t.  5,  f.  1,  2. 
St.  Croix.     A  quaternary  fossil. 

46.  Cerion  Yumaense  P.  &  V.*     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  210. 

S.ferruginea  Maynard,  Contrib.  to  Sci.,  1896,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  19-21. 

Yuma  River,  Hayti. 
46.  Cerion  crassilabre  Shuttlew.*    Sowb.,  Conch.  Icon.,  20,  t.  2,  f.  14. 

Porto  Rico,  Virgin  Is. 

The  locality  given  by  Sowerby,  "  India "  is  a  mistake.  Porto 
Rico  may  be  considered  the  type  locality,  for  here  large  specimens 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  325 

such  as  that  figured  by  Sowerby  occur.  They  are  either  maculated 
or  unicolored.  On  Anagada  a  short,  egg-shaped  race  is  found.  On 
Necker  Island  the  shells  are  pure  white,  but  white  ones  also  occur 
at  Ponce  and  Puna,  Porto  Rico. 

46a.  Cerioncrassilabre  Sallei  P.  &  V.*    Pl.  XI,  fig.  6. 

Small  and  cylindrical ;  creamy,  maculated  on  the  terminal  cone. 
Alt.  19,  diam.  7-5  mill.     San  Domingo  (Salle). 

47.  Cerion  Antonii  KUster.    Conchyl.  Cab.,  Pupa,  p.  92,  pl.  10,  f.  7,  8. 
Berbice  (British  Guiana). 

This  species  is  unknown  to  us. 

Group  of  C.  cydostomum. 

48.  Cerion  cydostomum  Kuster.*     Concb.  Cab.,  II,  p.  6,  t.  1,  f.  5,  6. 
?  Ftipa  Kusteri  Pfr.,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1852,  p.  69. 

Cuba. 

49.  Cerion  pinerium  Dall.*     Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  1896,  p.  6. 
Isle  of  Pines. 

50.  Cerion  tenuilabre  Gundl.*     Malak.  Bl.,  XVIII,  1870,  p.  91. 
Barigua  en  Baracoa,  Cuba. 

50a.  Cerion  tenuilabre  pygmaeum  Pils.  &  Van.*    Pl.  XI,  fig.  9. 
Gibara,  Cuba. 

51.  Cerion  microstomum  Pfr.*    Malak.  Bl.,  1854,  p.  207,  t.  3,  f.  15, 16. 
Punta  Jiacos,  Cayo  Paredon  Grande,  Cuba. 

52.  Cerion  Cumingianum  Pfr.*    Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1852,  p.  68. 

Hab. ? 

53.  Cerion  Gundlacbi  Pfr.«     Zeitschr.  f.  Malak.,  1852,  p.  175,  t.  1,  f.  39-42. 
Punta  de  San  Juan,  Cuba. 

Group  of  C.  Martensi. 

54.  Cerion  Milleri  Pfr.*   Malak.  Bl.  XIV,  1867,  p.  129  ;  Novit.  Conch.,  t.  84,  f.  6-13. 
Duck  Key,  Exuma  group. 

55.  Cerion  Gruneri  Pfr.*    Zeitschr.  f.  Malak.,  1847,  p.  15. 
Sagua  de  la  Grande,  Cuba. 

56.  Cerion  venustum  Poey.     Memorias,  II,  p.  30. 

Cuba.     This  species  is  unknown  to  us,  and  perhaps  identical  with 

C.  Gruneri. 

67.  Cerion  Martensi  Weinl.*     Malak.  Bl.,  IX,  1862,  p.  164;  Novit.  Conch.,  t.  84,  f. 
3-5. 

Crooked  Island,  Bahamas. 


326  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

58.  Cerion  eximeum  Mayn.*    Contr.  to  Sci.,  1894,  Vol.  2,  p.  177,  f.  59. 

Cat  Island.  We  have  a  small  form  ;  alt.  145-18  mm.  from  San 
Salvador. 

58a.  Cerion  eximeum  agrestinum  Mayn.*  Contr.  to  Sci.,  1894,  Vol.  2,  p.  179,  f.  60. 
New  Providence.  A  pure  white  specimen  was  collected  by  Mr.  W. 
Bendall,  and  kindly  presented  to  the  Academy,  with  others  varying 
from  sparsely  to  heavily  marked.  The  claim  of  this  variety  to  dis- 
tinction rests  solely  on  its  locality.  The  shells  of  eximeum  and 
agrestinimi  are  often  indistinguishable. 

59.  Cerion  multistriatum  Pils.  &,  Van.*     PI.  XI,  fig.  8. 
Crooked  Island. 

Grou])  of  C.  vulneratum. 

60.  Cerion  infiatum  Mayn.     Contr.  tu  Sci.,  I,  p.  126. 
Galena  Point,  Auklin  Is. 

61.  Cerion  marmoratum  Pfr.»     Zeitschr.  f.  MaL,  1847,  p.  83:  Conch.  Cat.,  t.  19,  f. 
10-12. 

Cat  Island,  Bahamas  (according  to  Bland.). 

62.  Cerion  vulneratum  Kiister.*     Conch.  Cat.,  p.  161,  t.  19,  f.  16-18. 
Gibara,  Cuba. 

Subgenus  DIACERION  Dall,  1894. 
Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.  1804,  Vol.  XXV,  p.  122. 

Group  of  C.  striatellum  {Paracerion  Pils.  &  Van.,  1895.) 

See  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1895,  p.  206. 

Distribution,  Cuba.  Maynard's  name  Tridentistrophia  (Contrib. 
to  Sci.,  Ill,  p.  9,  1896)  is  a  synonym.  The  group  has  much  affinity 
with  Diacerion,  but  the  parietal  folds  are  short. 

63.  Cerion  tridentatum  P.  &  V.«-  Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  1895,  May  4,  p.  206.  PI.  XI,  fig  27. 
Cuba. 

64.  Cerion  striatellum  Fer.*      Icon.  Kegne  Animal,  Moll.,  1829-1843,  p.  60,  t.  6, 
f.  12. 

Cabo  Cruz,  Cuba. 

65.  Cerion  basistriatum  P.  <fe  V.*     Proc.  A.  N.  S.,  May  4,  1895,  p.  206. 
Cabo  Cruz,  Cuba. 

Group  of  C.  rubicundum  (Diacerion  Dall). 

Distribution,  Inagua.  The  species  or  forms  of  this  group  form  an 
excessively  complex  problem,  which  is  far  from  being  satisfactorily 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  327 

solved  by  the  material  yet  studied.  C.  Bryanti,  ruhicundum  and 
Dalli  appear  to  be  stages  in  a  continuous  or  almost  continuous 
series  of  variations.  C.  Dalli  is  the  largest  form,  with  the  peculiar 
armature  of  the  aperture  most  highly  developed.  €*.  ruhicundum  is 
more  slender,  often  much  smaller,  with  the  armature  less  developed 
in  many  specimens.  C.  Bryanti  is  decidedly  smaller,  thinner,  with 
the  teeth  reduced  to  a  mere  vestige  in  the  typical  form,  although 
specimens  occur  which  seem  to  establish  its  intergradation  with  ruhi- 
cundum in  tooth  arrangement.  C.  Bryanti  may  be  regarded  as  a 
stunted  race  of  Diacerion  which  has  re-assumed  the  characters  of  the 
group  Maynardia. 

C.  Dalli  varies  from  the  fine-ribbed  typical  form  with  as  many  as 
63  riblets  on  the  last  whorl,  to  a  rather  coarsely  sculptured  surface, 
27  ribs  on  last  whorl  (40  specimens  examined,  including  one  of  type 
lot). 

C.  ruhicundxim  varies  in  the  same  way,  Maynard's  S.  ianthina  and 
S.  jmllida  being  coarse  forms.  Some  examples  before  me  are  more 
elongated  and  coarse-ribbed  than  Maynard's  types  of  ianthina,  but 
theintegradation  effaces  specific  lines  for  these  forms. 

There  is  likewise  a  very  stout  variety  of  C.  Bryanti,  and  as  already 
mentioned,  the  specimens  vary  from  almost  toothless  to  the  typical 
Maynardia  dentition,  and  onward  toward  the  condition  of  C.  ruhi- 
cundum. We  are  indebted  to  Mr.  H.  D.  Van  Nostrand  for  a  large 
series  of  these  species  and  varieties. 

66.  Cerion  Bryanti  Pfr.«  Malak.  Bl.  XIV,  1867,  p.  130;   Novit.  Conch.,  t.  84,  f.  14, 
15. 

Inagua. 

67.  Cerion  rubicundum  Menke.®     Catal.  Malsb.,  p.  8 ;  Concbyl.  Cab.,  t.  9,  f.  8,  9. 

S.  ianthina  Mayn.*  Contr.  to  Sci.,  1889,  Vol.  1,  p.  69,  t.  2,  f.  13. 
S. pallida  Mayn*  Contr.  to  Sci.,  1889,  Vol.  I,  p.  70,  t.  2,  f.  14. 

Great  Inagua. 

68.  Cerion  Dalli  Mayn.*     Contr.  to  Sci.,  Vol.  1,  1889,  p.  128,  1. 13,  f.  23. 
Great  Inagua. 

69.  Cerion  cylindricum  Mayn.     Contr.  to  Sci.,  1896,  p.  34-36,  pi.  7,  figs.  3,  4. 
Great  Inagua.     We  have  not  seen  this  form  and  know  nothing  of 

its  status. 

70.  Cerion  duplodon  P.  &  V.-     PI.  XI,  fig.  26. 
Bahamas. 


328  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

UNDESCRIBED  OR  UNRECOGNIZED  SPECIES. 

S.  orbicularis  Maynard.  Contr.  to  Sci.,  I,  pi.  16,  f.  6a,  b.  Un- 
described  ;  no  locality  assigned. 

S.  viola  Maynard.  Contr.  to  Sci.,  I,  pi.  16,  f.  5a,  b.  Undescribed  ; 
no  locality  assigned. 

Pupa  capillaris  Beck.  Index  Molluscorum,  p.  82.  Undescribed. 
"  I.  Antill." 

Pupa  elegans  Beck.  Index  Molluscorum,  p.  82.  Undescribed. 
"I.  Antill." 

Pupa  conus  Beck.  Index  Molluscorum,  p.  82.  Undescribed- 
"  I.  Antill." 

Piipa  strohilus  Beck.  Index  Molluscorum,  p.  82.  Undescribed. 
"I.  St.  Domingo." 

Helix  (Cochlodonta)  decumanus  For.,  Prodr.,  p.  59  (undescribed) 
=:Pupa  decumana  Gray,  Ann.  of  Philos.,  N.  ser.,  1825,  IX,  p.  413, 
referring  to  Lister,  pi.  588,  f  47,  is  unrecognizable  with  any  reason- 
able degree  of  certainty,  but  may  be  Pupa  multicosta  Kiister. 

Turbo  alvearia  Dillwyn,  Descript.  Catal.,  II,  p.  862,^=Bulivius 
/wswsBrug.,  Encycl.  Meth.,  I,  p.  348,=Lister,  pi.  588,  f.  49,  is  an 
unrecognizable  form,  similar  to  Gibbus  palanga. 

DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  AND  LITTLE-KNOWN  SPECIES  AND 

VARIETIES.* 

Cerion  uva  desculptum.    PI.  XI,  fig.  1. 

Shell  similar  to  C.  uva,  but  differs  in  lacking  the  strong,  regular 
ribs  characteristic  of  that  species,  or  in  having  them  very  few,  weak 
and  irregular. 

Alt.  22,  diam.  9 ;  apert.  alt.  7?,  width  6J  mm. 

Alt.  19,  diam.  9  ;  apert.  alt.  7,  width  6  mm. 

Curacoa. 

A  sectionized  specimen  shows  no  internal  sets  of  laminse,  but  these 
are  frequently  wanting  in  specimens  of  the  typical  C.  uva.  Of  the 
latter  a  good  many  figures  have  been  published. 

Cerion  incrassatum  microdon  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  5. 

Shell  varying  from  cylindric  to'stout  oval,  strong  and  solid  ;  whit- 
ish with  some  inconspicuous  gray  flecks.  Whorls  85  to  9  J,  the  first 
one  smooth,  next  finely  and  regularly  costellate^  following  whorls 

*See  also  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  1895,  p.  206.  Separate  copies  issued 
May,  4,  1895. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  329 

with  coarser  riblets  becoming  regular,  curved,  moderately  coarse 
ribs  on  the  cylindrical  portion,  on  base  of  last  whorl  obsolete  or  sub- 
obsolete.  Latter  3  to  4  whorls  of  about  equal  diameter,  those  above 
forming  rather  a  long  cone.  Aperture  rounded,  truncate  above, 
white  within.  Peristome  white,  narrowly  expanded  and  reflexed, 
obtuse ;  parietal  callus  very  thin  or  moderate.  Axial  fold  incon- 
spicuous from  in  front ;  parietal  tooth  extremely  small,  short. 

Alt.  21  i,  diam.  10 J  ;  alt.  of  aperture  8?  mm. 

Alt.  195,  diam.  9?  ;  alt.  of  aperture  8  mm. 

Alt.  18?,  diam.  10  ;  alt.  of  aperture  7  mm. 

Cuba. 

While  this  species  is  very  much  smaller  than  C.  incrassatum,  and 
has  the  parietal  tooth  extremely  small  or  almost  obsolete,  still  in 
figure  and  sculpture  it  resembles  the  larger  shell,  and  may  be  con- 
sidered a  variety  of  it  until  further  information  is  received. 

C.  incrassatum,  like  the  very  closely  allied  C.  dhnidiatum,  has  a 
smooth  form  which  intergrades  with  the  stoutly  ribbed  typical 
shells.  The  earlier  whorls  have  the  minute  sculpture  as  in  the  type 
form,  but  to  the  unaided  eye  the  surface  appears  smooth. 

Cerion  iostomum  Pfeiffer.     PI.  XI,  fig.  14. 

This  species  has  not  been  figured.  It  was  described  from  the 
south  coast  of  Cuba  living  among  Prickly  Pears.  Subsequently  it 
was  reported  from  Turk's  Island  and  Great  Inagua  (see  Bland, 
Ann.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist.,  N.  Y.,  XI,  p.  85),  but  having  examined  spec- 
imens from  these  localities,  so  labelled  by  Bland,  we  find  them  to  be 
totally  distinct  species,  having  little  save  the  purplish-brown  color 
of  the  mouth,  in  common  with  the  true  Pvpa  iostoma  of  Pfeiffer's 
first  description. 

The  specimen  shown  in  our  figure  answers  to  the  description  of 
PfeiflTer  in  all  respects  save  that  the  median  whorls  are  only  obsoletely 
ribbed,  hardly  "  distanter  plicato-costata  " — more  like  the  "  var.  /5." 
The  post-nepionic  whorls  of  the  cone  are  "  conferte  costu latum ;  "  the 
cone  itself  "  corneo-marmoratum",  suture  conspicuously  '^  exserto- 
marg'mata,"  and  the  corrugation  of  last  whorl  and  color  of  aperture 
("  inius  violacea  ")  are  likewise  in  agreement.  The  specimen  figured 
is  2  mm.  shorter  than  Pfeiffer's.  Alt.  30,  diam.  12  ;  alt.  of  aperture 
12  mm. 

Pfeiffer's  type  measured,  alt.  32,  diam.  12 ;  alt.  of  aperture  13  mm. 

22 


330  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Cerion  iostomum  Arangoi  Pilsbry  &,  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  12. 

Shell  similar  to  the  type  in  form,  but  smaller.  Latter  iwo 
whorls  only  of  equal  diameter,  those  above  forming  a  rather  long 
cone.  Whorls  8?  to  9.  Surface  closely  and  regularbj  ribbed  through- 
out (except  the  smooth  uepionic  whorls),  the  ribs  mainly  white, 
interstices  purplish-brown,  mottled  with  white.  Sutures  without 
noticeably  exserted  marginatiou.  Aperture  deep,  rich  purple 
within. 

Alt.  235,  diam.  IO5  ;  alt.  of  aperture  9  mm. 

Alt.  181,  diam.  9  ;  alt.  of  aperture  8  mm. 

Alt.  24,  diam.  lOt ;  alt.  of  aperture  9f  mm. 

Cienfuegos,  Cuba  (R.  Arango). 

Strikingly  different  from  iostomum  at  first  sight,  but  we  believe  it 
to  be  closely  allied  and  probably  a  subspecies  thereof. 

Cerion  hyperlissum  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  tig.  10. 

Shell  moderately  strong,  much  elongated,  cylindrical,  the  latter 
four  whorls  of  about  equal  diameter,  those  earlier  gradually  taper- 
ing, forming  an  obtuse  cone  with  slightly  convex  outlines.  Pinkish- 
brown  (with  more  or  less  white  maculation),  the  riblets  white. 
Whorls  11  J,  weakly  convex,  those  of  the  cone  smooth,  the  rest 
sculptured  with  rather  fine  riblets  narrower  than  the  intervals, 
about  86  in  number  on  each  of  the  several  later  whorls.  Umbilicus 
a  short  rimation,  compressed. 

Aperture  ovate,  decidedly  higher  than  wide,  the  throat  flesh-tinted. 
Peristome  white,  well  reflexed  and  revolute,  thickened  ;  parietal 
callus  light,  its  edge  hardly  thickened  ;  parietal  fold  median,  very 
long,  one-fourth  to  one-third  of  a  whorl  in  length. 

Alt.  32},  diam.  10  ;  alt.  of  aperture  12  mm. 

Alt.  29?,  diam.  10;  alt.  of  aperture  11  mm. 

Cuba. 

This  species  has  the  unusually  long  parietal  tooth  of  the  Cayman 
Island  Cerions.  For  the  rest,  it  does  not  differ  remarkably  from 
such  Cuban  forms  as  C.  maritimum.  The  whorls  of  the  cone  are 
ribless. 

A  form  also  referable  to  this  species  is  much  striped  and  maculated 
with  fleshy-brown  and  white,  the  riblets  being  finer. 

Cerion  regina  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  figs.  2.3,  24. 

Shell  thick,  subcylindrical,  gradually  tapering  above,  the  long 
terminal  cone  passing  gradually  into  cylindrical  portion ;  lower  3 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  331 

whorls  of  about  equal  diameter  ;  apex  obtuse  ;  earlier  whorls  not 
striate;  chalk-white  and  dull,  the  smoothness  of  the  surface  but  little 
broken  by  slight  growth-lines,  tJie  basal  whorl  irregularhj  and  rather 
distanthj  costate,  at  least  on  its  latter  half  Whorls  10  to  lOj,  flat, 
with  superficial,  seam-like  sutures.  Last  whorl  suddenly  ascending  in 
front,  much  compressed  and  jnnched  toward  the  base.  Umbilicus 
open  or  perforate,  with  the  usual  arcuate  rimation,  below  which  it 
is  broadly  excavated  and  flattened. 

Aperture  oblong-cordate,  slightly  less  than  one-third  the  length 
of  shell,  higher  than  wide,  dark  or  light  brown  within,  rarely  pur- 
plish. Peristome  expanded  and  reflexed,  its  face  convex  but  not 
much  thickened,  whitish,  parietal  callus  moderate,  its  outer  edge  not 
raised.  Axial  lamina  situated  high,  narrow  and  inconspicuous  from 
in  front.  Parietal  tooth  low,  small,  varying  from  moderately  short 
to  long,  central  in  position. 

Alt.  31*,diam.  llf  mill. 

Alt.  33,  diam.  12i  mill,  (average  typical  specimen). 

Alt.  38,  diam.  13  mill. 

Turk's  Island,  Bahamas.     (Gabb,  Swift). 

Cerion  sarcostomum  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  16. 

Shell  solid  and  strong,  subcylindrical,  but  slightly  wider  below ; 
whitish.  Whorls  11  to  IH,  slightly  convex,  the  earlier  6  forming 
a  convexly  tapering  cone  with  extremely  obtuse  apex,  almost  dome- 
shaped  at  top;  passing  gradually  into  the  cylindrical  portion  of 
shell,  which  consists  of  5  to  6  whorls.  Sculpture,  somewhat  irreg- 
ular and  unequal,  straight  ribs,  about  as  wide  as  the  intervals,  about 
25-30  on  last  whorl.  These  ribs  are  strongly  developed  on  the 
cylindrical  portion  of  the  shell,  but  the  cone  is  very  densely,  finely 
and  sharply  striated,  the  earliest  whorl  only  being  smooth. 

Aperture  small,  less  than  one-third  the  total  length  of  shell,  pink- 
ish-flesh colored  in  the  throat;  peristome  well  reflexed,  recurved, 
more  or  less  thickened  on  the  inner  edge  of  the  face ;  parietal  callus 
thick  and  heavy,  its  edge  elevated.  Parietal  tooth  rather  strong  and 
moderately  long  ;  axial  fold  moderately  conspicuous. 

Alt.  34,  diam.  IH  ;  alt.  of  aperture  10  mm. 

Little  Inagua,  Bahamas. 

Some  specimens  are  larger  than  the  above  dimensions  ;  one  worn 
and  broken  "  crab-shell "  before  us  would  probably  be  not  less  than 
40  mm.  alt.  if  perfect.  It  is  not  unlikely  that  forms  occur  with  the 
ribs  obsolete,  as  in  the  allied  C.  columna. 


332  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

C  sarcostomuvi  clearly  belongs  to  the  immediate  group  of  C.  creta- 
ceum  and  C.  cohtmna.  The  latter  has  a  very  dark  aperture,  broadly 
flanged  lip  and  less  obtuse  apex.  G.  cretaceum  lacks  sculpture  except 
on  the  basal  whorl,  is  absolutely  cylindrical,  with  light  mouth  and 
excessively  short  terminal  cone,  while  the  present  species  is  more 
tapering,  with  the  cone  decidedly  longer,  gradually  passing  into  the 
cylindrical  portion. 

This  species  is,  we  believe,  the  first  one  to  be  reported  from  Little 
Inagua.  It  is  extremely  likely  that  C  cretaceum,  described  without 
locality,  will  prove  to  inhabit  some  part  of  the  Inagua  group,  when 
it  is  re-discovered. 

Cerion  Abacoense  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  11. 

Shell  cylindrical,  solid  and  strong,  entirely  white.  Latter  three 
whorls  of  about  equal  diameter,  preceding  one  slightly  smaller,  those 
earlier  rapidly  tapering  to  form  a  short  cone  ;  apex  obtuse.  Sculpt- 
ured with  rather  close,  strong  and  nearly  straight  riblets,  as  wide  as, 
or  narrower  than  the  interstices,  numerous  (81-38  on  last  whorl), 
part  of  the  riblets  generally  splitting  on  the  base  ;  1 5  to  If  nepionic 
whorls  free  from  riblets,  and  those  of  the  following  several  whorls 
very  fine,  though  distinct.  Whorls  9|  to  IH,  slightly  convex,  the 
last  ascending  as  usual.  Sutures  well-marked.  Umbilicus  a  nearly 
straight  rimation  terminating  in  an  almost  closed  axial  chink ;  um- 
bilical area  (back  of  columellar  lip)  small,  with  a  bounding  furrow 
below. 

Aperture  vertical,  brought  forward  almost  to  anterior  level  of  the 
cylinder  ;  rounded,  nearly  as  wide  as  high,  obliquely  truncate  above. 
Peristome  well  reflexed,  recurved,  its  face  thickened  and  convex  ; 
parietal  callus  heavy,  but  thinned  at  outer  edge.  Axial  fold  moder- 
ate, parietal  fold  deep  seated,  low,  and  rather  long. 

Alt.  34,  diam.  13  ;  alt.  of  aperture  12  mm.  (largest  specimen). 

Alt.  27i,  diam.  13  ;  alt.  of  aperture  llf  mm.  (shortest  specimen). 

Abaco,  Bahamas. 

This  beautiful  species  differs  from  C.  album  Maynard  and  C 
Maynardi  Pils.  &  Van.  in  the  characters  of  the  umbilical  region  and 
lip,  as  stated  in  our  former  paper  on  Cerion.' 

Cerion  Abacoense  Bendalli  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  13. 

A  m\n'\a.tnxe  Abacoense  (q.  v.)  in  shape  and  sculpture.  Whorls  10 
to  lOj.     White,  closely  mottled  with  brown,  the  nepionic  whorls 

^Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  1895,  p.  209. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  333 

corneous-brown.  Aperture  dark  hroxvn  tvithin ;  peristome  white, 
less  heavy ;  parietal  callus  thin,  translucent ;  parietal  tooth  very 
small,  short. 

Alt.  195,  diam.  8J  ;  alt.  of  aperture  7  mm. 

Alt.  2H,  diam.  Si  ;  alt.  of  aperture  7  mm. 

Abaco,  Bahamas. 

This  form  at  first  sight  looks  extremely  different  from  C.  Abacoense, 
and  as  we  have  seen  no  intermediate  examples  it  may  well  prove  to 
be  a  distinct  species.  However,  we  consider  it  best  to  rank  Bendalli 
as  a  subspecies,  thereby  keeping  in  sight  its  genetic  relationship  with 
the  larger  form  ;  this  might  otherwise  be  easily  overlooked,  on 
account  of  its  maculated  coloring,  Avhich  Avould  at  first  incline  one 
to  look  to  another  group  of  forms  for  its  allies. 

It  is  named  in  recognition  of  the  services  to  science  of  Mr.  Wil- 
fred Bendall,  who  has  recently  published  a  list  of  the  land  snails  of 
the  Bahamas. 

Cerion  Eleutherse  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  figs.  19,  20. 

Shell  solid  and  strong ;  smoothish  above,  ribbed  below ;  color 
lusterless  ;  white,  with  a  bluish-purple  tint,  most  obvious  around  the 
base,  cylindric-tapering,  terminating  above  in  a  rather  long  slightly 
convex-sided  cone  which  passes  gradually  into  the  cylindrical  por- 
tion. Apex  obtuse  ;  whorls  lOJ  to  12?  ;  nepionic  2J  whorls  nearly 
smooth,  slightly  convex  ;  following  whorls  of  the  cone  smoothish  to 
the  naked  eye,  showing  rather  irregularly  spaced  wrinkles  under  the 
lens,  fiat,  with  seam-like  sutures,  not  in  the  least  impressed.  Latter 
4  whorls  approaching  equality  in  diameter,  subregularly  and  rather 
strongly  costate  (at  least  the  lower  two  whorls),  the  last  one  with 
about  27  (22  to  30)  ribs,  which  do  not  split  or  double  on  the  base, 
although  sometimes  there  are  some  riblets  intercalated  there. 

Aperture  about  one-third  the  shell's  length,  oblong  or  rounded, 
obliquely  truncate  above,  liver-brown  within.  Peristome  white,  re- 
flexed,  the  outer  edge  sharp  and  somewhat  recurved,  inner  edge 
built  Jar  forward,  especially  below,  bevelled  outwardly  ;  parietal 
callus  either  very  thin  or  thick.  Axial  fold  variable  in  prominence  ; 
parietal  tooth  very  strong,  long.  Axis  perforate,  with  a  rather 
short  rimation. 

Alt.  29,  diam.  IH  ;  alt.  of  aperture  11  mm. 

Alt.  33,  diam.  11  ;  alt.  of  aperture  11  mm. 

Alt.  23?,  diam.  11 ;  alt.  of  aperture  9  mm. 

Eleuthera,  Bahamas. 


334  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

This  species  is  closely  allied  to  C.  Agasski  Dall  and  C.  gtibema- 
torium  Crosse,  of  the  island  of  New  Providence.  It  has  more 
remote  affinity  with  C.  sarcosfomum  P.  &  V.  of  Little  luagua. 

From  C.  Agassizi  it  differs  in  never  having  the  parietal  callus 
raised  in  a  strong  ridge  making  the  peristome  continuous  ;  the  ril)s 
are  less  sharp  and  narrow,  etc.  C.  guhernatorium  has  a  proportion- 
ally very  large  mouth,  less  thickened  lip,  finer  riblets  or  none,  and 
a  glossy  surface  ;  moreover,  while  nearly  white  examples  occur,  it  is 
generally  much  variegated.  There  can  be  no  doubt  of  the  close 
relationship  of  the  three  species,  but  judging  from  a  series  of  25 
examples  of  C.  Eleutherce,  a  good  series  of  C  guhernatorium  and 
author's  examples  of  C.  Agassizi,  they  are  specifically  distinct. 

A  pair  of  specimens  of  C.  Eleutherce  before  us  (from  Krebs)  are 
considerably  streaked  with  brown,  otherwise  typical.  Another  spec- 
imen, received  from  Mr.  Van  Nostrand,  is  very  small,  alt.  18i,  diam. 
8  mm.,  and  somewhat  maculated.  The  costulation  extends  further 
up,  and  the  peristome  is  not  thickened.  This  probably  represents  a 
subspecies. 
Cerion  Blandi  Pilsbry  &,  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  7. 

Shell  solid  and  strong,  cylindric-tapering,  the  latter  3  whorls  ap- 
proaching equality  in  diameter,  those  above  slowly  tapering  to  form 
a  long  cone,  gradually  passing  into  cylindrical  portion.  Light 
grayish,  with  inconspicuous  white  flecking.  Whorls  10,  the  nepionic 
2?  corneous,  smooth,  the  following  2*  weakly,  distinctly  ribbed,  later 
4J  to  5  whorls  very  sharply  and  roughly,  strongly  ribbed,  ribs  narrow 
and  high,  19  to  22  on  each  of  the  two  or  three  later  whorls.  Um- 
bilicus compressed,  rimate,  the  area  behind  columellar  lip  excavated> 
smooth. 

Aperture  ovate,  white  within  ;  peristome  reflexed  and  recurved, 
not  thickened  ;  parietal  callus  heavy,  forming  a  strong  bar  across 
the  space  between  lip  ends.  Parietal  tooth  median,  moderately 
strong. 

Alt.  27?,  diam.  11  ;  alt.  of  aperture  lOi  mm. 

Alt.  261,  diam.  11  ;  alt.  of  aperture  10  mm. 

Turk's  Island,  Bahamas. 

This  species  resembles  C.  glans  in  general  figure  and  the  stout 
parietal  callus ;  but  the  ribs  are  conspicuously  different,  peculiarly 
rough  and  unfinished  in  appearance,  somewhat  like  C.felis. 
Cerion  tenuilabre  pygmaeum  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  9. 

Shell  small  and  rather  thin,  varying  from  cyliudric  to  short  oval. 
Whorls  7  to  82,  the  latter  2  to  3  of  subequal  diameter,  those  above 


1 896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  335 

forming  a  stumpy  (often  very  short)  cone.  Rusty  brown.  Surface 
regularly  costellate;  apical  whorl  smooth,  next  whorl  finely  and 
regularly  striated.  Last  whorl  ascending  as  usual  in  front,  having 
a  very  short  umbilical  rimation  below. 

Aperture  brownish  within,  rounded,  obliquely  truncate  above. 
Peristome  white,  blunt,  slightly  expanded;  parietal  callus  thin. 
Axial  fold  inconspicuous  ;  parietal  tooth  deep  within  and  extremely 
small. 

Alt.  10,  diam.  6J  ;  alt.  of  aperture  4  mm. 

Alt.  12,  diam.  7  ;  alt.  of  aperture  5  mm. 

Alt.  15f,  diam.  7^  ;  alt.  of  aperture  6  mm. 

Alt.  14f,  diam.  6^  ;  alt.  of  aperture  5  mm. 

Gibara,  Cuba. 

The  short,  typical  form  of  this  variety  is  extremely  peculiar  in 
shape,  being  shorter  than  any  other  Cerion.  Longer  examples  are 
more  like  C.  tenuilahre,  of  which  we  consider  it  a  small  variety. 
Many  specimens  are  before  us. 

Cerion  multistriatum  Pilsbry  &  Yanatta.    PI.  XI,  fig.  8. 

Shell  small  and  rather  thin,  short  cylindrical ;  white,  longitudin- 
ally marbled  with  gray  or  chestnut-brown.  Whorls  8  to  82,  the 
latter  2  or  3  about  equal  in  diameter,  the  rest  rapidly  tapering,  apex 
obtuse.  Sculptured  with  excessively  fine,  close,  sharp  thread-like 
stride,  apical  2  whorls  smooth.  Aperture  rounded  obliquely,  trun- 
cate ;  peristome  narrowly- reflexed  ;  parietal  callys  very  thin ;  axial 
fold  median,  moderate ;  parietal  tooth  extremely  small. 

Alt.  17,  diam.  7  ;  alt.  of  aperture  6?  mm, 

Alt.  14,  diam.  7  ;  alt.  of  aperture  5  mm. 

Crooked  Island,  Bahamas. 

This  is  a  small,  extremely  fine  striated  form  with  very  small 
parietal  tooth.  It  is  represented  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy 
by  only  five  specimens,  given  by  Mr.  H.  D.  Van  Nostrand,  and 
originally  from  Bland. 

Cerion  basistriatum  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.    PI.  XI,  fig.  28. 

Shell  rather  thin,  cylindrical,  the  latter  three  whorls  of  about 
equal  diameter,  those  above  tapering  rapidly,  forming  a  straight- 
sided  cone  about  one-third  the  shell's  length.  Surface  rather  smooth 
and  glossy.  Two  corneous  nepionic  whorls  smooth  ;  succeeding  one 
or  two  turns  densely  and  regularly  striated  ;  rest  of  the  shell  smooth 
except  for  slight  irregular  growth-wrinkles,  down  to  the  last  whorl. 


336  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

wliich  is  finely  costulate.  Color  white  with  irregular  longitudinal 
streaks  and  blotches  of  brown.  Whorls  9,  hardly  convex,  the  last 
ascending  slowly  in  front,  rounded  below,  with  a  short  umbilical 
rimation.  Aperture  about  four-tenths  the  shell's  length,  rounded- 
ovate,  nearly  as  wide  as  high,  brownish  within.  Peristome  thickened, 
outer  lip  expanded  but  scarcely  reflexed,  coluraellar  lip  reflexed ; 
the  terminations  connected  across  the  parietal  wall  by  a  strong, 
elevated  callous  ledge.  Axial  lamina  small  as  seen  from  the  mouth  ; 
parietal  lamina  small,  often  double,  moderately  long;  a  small  denti- 
cle to  the  left  of,  and  an  elongated  lamina  behind  and  to  the  right 
of  its  inner  end. 

Alt.  18,  diam.  9  ;  apert.,  alt.  7,  width  Qh  mm. 

Alt.  16-2,  diam.  8;  apert.,  alt.  6,  width  52  mm. 

Cabo  Cruz,  Cuba. 

This  species  differs  from  C.  tridentatum  in  its  round  aperture  with 
strong  parietal  callus,  and  the  costulate  basal  volution ;  from  C. 
striatelluyn  it  differs  in  the  much  smoother  surface,  thinner  substance, 
etc.  The  arrangement  of  parietal  plicse  is  of  the  same  type  as  found 
in  the  two  species  mentioned. 

Cerion  tridentatum  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig.  27. 

Shell  moderately  thick,  strong,  cylindrical,  thelatter  three  whorls 
of  about  equal  diameter,  those  preceding  tapering  to  form  a  long 
cone  about  one-third  the  total  length  of  shell.  Chalky-white, 
mottled  with  corneous,  especially  on  the  cone,  rather  polished,  the 
surface  smooth  except  for  slight  growth-wrinkles,  but  a  few  whorls 
following  the  two  smooth,  corneous  nepiouic  ones  are  seen  under  a 
strong  lens  to  be  densely  striated,  and  the  base  of  the  last  whorl  has 
irregular  strite.  Whorls  10,  with  just  perceptible  convexity,  sutures 
well  marked  below.     Last  whorl  ascending  as  usual. 

Aperture  ovate,  about  four-tenths  the  total  length,  much  higher 
than  wide,  light  brown  in  the  throat;  peristome  rather  thin,  nar- 
rowly reflexed,  white ;  columellar  margin  well  reflexed ;  parietal 
callus  thin,  its  edge  indistinct,  axial  lamina  small  or  inconspicuous 
from  front  aspect.  Parietal  lamina  small,  short,  central,  with  a  still 
smaller  accessory  denticle  to  the  left  of  and  beyond  its  inner  termi- 
nation, and  another  slightly  to  the  right  and  deeper  within  ;  all 
visible  without  cutting  the  shell.  Umbilical  rimation  short  and 
curved. 

Alt.  272,  diam.  10;  apert.,  alt.  11,  width  8|  mm. 

Alt.  25,  diam.  9  ;  apert.,  alt.  10,  width  72  mm. 

Cuba  (Robert  Swift  colln.,  A.  N.  S.  P.). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  337 

This  species  superficially  resembles  closely  the  C.  incanum  of  Key 
West,  but  differs  in  the  ovate  form  of  the  aperture,  sculpture  of  the 
earlier  whorls,  and  the  teeth  of  the  aperture. 
Cerion  d'lplodon  Pilsbry  &  Yanatta.     PI.  XI,  fig,  26. 

Shell  rather  thin,  cylindrical,  the  latter  three  whorls  of  about 
equal  diameter,  those  above  slowly  tapering  to  form  a  rather  long, 
convex  cone.  White,  variegated  with  gray- white.  Whorls  lOI, 
slightly  convex,  two  nepionic  smooth,  those  of  the  cone  very  finely, 
sharply  striate,  the  latter  four  with  coarser  riblets,  much  narrower 
than  their  intervals.     Umbilicus  a  short,  compressed  rimation. 

Aperture  ovate,  large  and  open,  white,  higher  than  wide.  Per- 
istome expanded  and  recurved,  rather  thick;  axial  fold  basal; 
parietal  fold  narrow,  nearly  a  half  whorl  long  ;  an  acccessory  fold 
ascends  around  the  root  of  the  columella,  but  at  the  apertural  termi- 
nation approaches  close  to  the  main  parietal  lamella. 

Alt.  29,  diam.  lOJ  ;  alt.  of  aperture  11  mm. 

Bahamas,  exact  locality  unknown. 

This  is  an  albino  form  of  the  Diacerion  group,  differing  from  C 
rubicundum  and  its  immediate  allies  in  the  greater  distance  between 
the  two  parietal  lamellae  within. 

Plate  XL 

Fig.  1.  Cerion  uva  desculj^tum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  2,  3.      Cerion  Yumaense  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  4.  Cerion  mumia  magister  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  5.  Cerion  incrassatum  microdon  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig:.  6.  Cerion  crassilabre  Sallei  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  7.  Cerion  Blandi  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  8,  Cerion  multistriatum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  9.  Cerion  tenuilabre  pygmceum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  10.  Cerion  hyperlissum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  11.  Cerion  Abacoense  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  12.  Cerion  iostoviwn  Arangoi  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fiar.  13.  Cerion  Abacoense  Bendalli  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fiff.  14.  Cerion  iostomum  Pfr. 

Fig.  15.  Cerion  incanoides  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  16.  Cerion  sarcostomum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  17.  Cerion  columna  Pils.  &  Van, 

Fig.  18.  Cerion  columna  validum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  19,  20.    Cerion  Eleutherce  Pils.  &  Van. 


388  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Fig.  21.  Cerion  regina  eucosmium  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  22.  Cerion  regina  percostatum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  23,  24.  Cerion  regina  Pils.  <fe  Van. 

Fig,  25.  Cerion  regina  brevispirwn  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  26.  Cerion  duplodon  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  27.  .  Cerion  tridentatum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  28.  Cerion  basistriatum  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  29.  Cerion  felis  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  30.  Cerion  Johnsoni  Pils.  &  Van. 

Fig.  31.  Cerion  Maynardi  Pils.  &  Van. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  339 


REVISION  OF  THE  NORTH  AMERICAN  SLUGS:  ARIOLIMAX  AND 

APHALLARION. 

BY    HENRY   A.    PILSBRY   AND    E.    G.   VANATTA. 

The  genera  of  slugs  inhabiting  North  America  have  hitherto 
been  discriminated  by  external  characters,  and  those  of  the  jaw  and 
teeth.  We  purpose  to  indicate,  in  a  series  of  papers  of  which  this 
is  the  first,  some  of  the  more  important  of  their  internal  features, 
particularly  the  genitalia  and  alimentary  canal. 

The  genitalia  have  been  utilized  by  Mr.  W.  G.  Binney  and  others 
for  the  discrimination  of  species ;  and  we  have  already  considerable 
knowledge  of  these  organs  from  his  descri{)tions  and  drawings;  but, 
of  late,  quite  a  new  stress  has  been  laid  upon  certain  characters  of 
the  organs  of  generation.  By  Dr.  Simroth,  in  Germany,  and  the 
senior  author  of  this  paper  in  America,  characters  of  generic,  as 
well  as  of  still  higher  value,  have  been  found  in  the  genitalia.  It 
is,  therefore,  important  to  review  our  data  upon  the  anatomy  of 
American  slugs,  to  correct  the  numerous  misinterpretations  of  organs 
which  have  arisen  from  lack  of  good  material  or  other  causes,  and 
to  expose  the  true  generic  characters  and  affinities  of  these  animals, 
so  far  as  may  be  possible  in  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge. 

As  the  species  of  slugs  also  rest  largely  upon  characters  of  internal 
anatomy,  their  revision  will  be  attemjjted  ;  a  work  now  most  timely, 
in  view  of  the  fact  that  such  a  multitude  of  insufficiently  defined 
specific  and  varietal  names  have  been  proposed  that  he  who  attempts 
the  identification  of  a  West  Coast  slug  to-day  is  not  only  a  bold 
man  but  also  one  probably  doomed  to  a  miserable  failure. 

The  largest  slugs  of  America,  Ariolimax  and  Aphallarion,  are 
selected  for  the  present  essay. 

No  correct  figures  or  descriptions  of  the  genitalia  of  these  animals 
have  yet  been  published.  The  true  structure  of  the  male  organs  of 
Ariolimax  is  here  for  the  first  time  made  known ;  and  the  genus 
Aphallarion  is  proposed  for  a  new  species,  perhaps  the  largest  Amer- 
ican slug,  remarkable  in  lacking  a  penis.^ 

^  We  must  acknowledge  our  indebtedness  to  P.  B.  Kandolph,  of  Seattle, 
Washington,  and  to  Fred  L.  Button,  of  Oakland,  California,  for  large  series 
of  slugs  used  in  preparing  this  paper. 


340  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

EXTERNAL   CHARACTERS. 

The  external  characters  of  Ariolhnax  ^\\d  Aphallarion  are  de- 
scribed below.  Arion  differs  from  these  American  groups  in  the 
rounded,  not  keeled,  back,  the  anterior  breathing  pore  and  the  more 
posterior  genital  orifice. 

JAWS   AND   TEETH. 

The  jaw  in  Arlolimax  and  Aphallarion  is  of  the  ribbed  type 
usual  in  Arionidce,  and  does  not  differ  materially  from  that  of  Arion. 
The  teeth  offer  no  characters  of  generic  importance,  being  of  the 
general  type  found  throughout  Arionidce.  Those  of  the  median  part 
of  the  radula  are  of  the  Helicid  form  ;  the  marginal  teeth  develop 
long  mesocones,  simulating  somewhat  the  teeth  of  Zonitidce,  precisely 
as  those  of  some  Endodontidce  do. 

DIGESTIVE   SYSTEM. 

In  Arion,  Arlolimax  ■o.ndi  Aphallarion  the  alimentary  canal  is  dis- 
tinctly differentiated  into  fore-,  mid-  and  hind  gut.  The  short  oesopha- 
gus leads  into  a  capacious  crop,  ivhich  is  separated  by  a  decided 
constriction  from  the  stomach,  which  lies  near  the  posterior  end 
of  body.  At  the  termination  of  the  stomach  the  bile  duct  enters, 
near  the  origin  of  the  intestine.  The  latter  presents,  after  coiling 
spirally  once  around  the  visceral  mass,  an  anterior  loop,  lying  to  the 
right  of  the  albumen  gland.  Passing  backward  it  coils  in  a  reverse 
direction  around  the  visceral  mass  and  forms  a  posterior  loop,  which, 
in  the  American  forms  (PI.  XIII,  figs.  2,  4)  lies  behind,  in  the  Eur- 
opean (Arion,  PI.  XIII,  fig.  3)  above  and  anterior  to  the  main  mass 
of  the  stomach.  From  this  loop  the  intestine  passes  forward,  describ- 
ing a  spiral  coil  again  reversed  in  direction,  and  terminates  near  the 
respiratory  orifice  on  the  right  side  of  the  body  anteriorly. 

The  digestive  systems  of  the  three  genera  Arion,  Ariolimax  and 
Aphallarion  differ  only  in  subordinate  features.  In  Arion,  the 
stomach,  as  mentioned  above,  lies  behind  the  posterior  loop  of  the 
hind-gut.  In  Ariolimax  and  Aphallarion  the  posterior  loop  lies 
behind  the  stomach.  Aphallarion  differs  from  the  other  two  genera 
in  having  a  spiral  turn  less  of  the  intestine.  As  usual  in  slugs 
there  are  four  lengthwise  folds  of  the  gut. 

A  very  long  and  (for  a  slug)  complexly  disposed  intestine,  and  a 
complete  separation  of  crop  and  stomach,  are  the  peculiar  charac- 
teristics of  these  great  slugs.    This  will  become  more  apparent  when 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  341 

we  compare  it  with  the  simpler  and  very  different  digestive  tract  in 
Prophysaon,  Limax,  or  the  Helices. 

The  liver  extends  forward  nearly  as  far  as  the  anterior  loop  of  the 
intestine,  and  backward  to  the  tail  (PI.  XIII,  fig.  1),  enveloping  and 
partly  coucealing  the  convolutions  of  the  intestine  in  all  three  genera. 

The  suboral  gland  (PI.  XIII,  fig.  1)  is  about  half  as  long  as  body, 
and  lies  free,  not  imbedded  in  the  muscles  of  the  foot. 

GENITALIA. 

In  Avion,  Ariolimax  and  Aphallarion  the  genitalia  lie  quite  dif- 
ferently in  the  body-cavity  from  those  organs  in  Limax  or  Prophysa- 
on, the  whole  system  being  crowded  forward.  The  albumen  gland 
(Pl.XIII,  figs.  1  and  2)  lies  to  the  left  of  the  anterior  loop  of  the  intes- 
tine, almost  entirely  forward  of  the  middle  of  the  body-cavity.  The 
distal  end  of  the  albumen  gland  turns  down  the  left  side  and  extends 
part  way  across  the  body  beneath,  often  showing  a  longitudinal 
impression  made  by  the  suboral  gland.  (This  is  seen  at  I.  gr.  in  fig. 
14  of  Plate  XIV.)  At  the  base  of  the  albumen  gland  the  ovotestis  is 
closely  packed  (PL  XIII,  fig.  1)  in  Ariolimax  and  Aphallarion,  and 
its  duct  is  largely  imbedded  in  the  albumen  gland  ;  but  in  Arion  the 
ovi-sperm  duct  follows  the  course  of  the  mid-gut  backward,  and  the 
ovotestis  is  situated  at  the  tail,  behind  the  stomach  (PI.  XIII,  fig.  3). 

The  penis  in  Ariolimax  lies  obliquely  across  the  viscera,  overlying 
salivary  glands  and  crop.  It  is  seen  removed  from  its  natural  posi- 
tion in  PI.  XIII,  fig.  1. 

In  treating  of  Arion  and  allied  forms,  Dr.  Simroth,  the  distinguished 
German  malacologist,  has  discriminated  between  a  true  penis  and 
that  enlargement  of  the  anterior  end  of  the  vas  deferens  seen  in 
Arion,  etc.,  which  he  has  termed  the  Patronenstrecke. 

The  senior  writer,  in  dealing  with  Helices,  made  the  same  distinc- 
tion.^ The  penis  is  an  evertable  sack,  provided  with  a  retractor 
muscle.  The  "Patronenstrecke,"  or,  as  we  have  termed  it,  the  epl- 
phallus,  is  not  evertable,  and  has  no  retractor  muscle ;  its  function 
being  merely  to  gather  the  spermatozoa  into  packets  or  spermato- 
phores  ;  and  it  is  strictly  homologous  with  the  lower  portion  of  the 
vas  deferens  of  ordinary  snails.  In  the  vast  majority  of  snails  in 
which  the  vas  deferens  is  modified  into  an  epiphallus,  it  occurs  in 
connection  with  a  normally  developed  penis,  as  in  fig.  14,  PI.  XIV. 
In  Arion,  Aphallarion,  Prophysaon,  and  some  other  genera,  the  true 

2  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1892,  p.  388. 


342  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

penis  has  been  lost,  and  the  epiphaUus  directly  enters  the  atrium. 
In  these  forms  the  vagina  assumes  the  function  of  an  evertable  penis, 
an  extraordinary  but  by  no  means  unparalleled  instance  of  change 
of  function. 

These  matters  ai-e  here  dwelt  upon  somewhat  fully,  because  in  all 
former  American  work  on  slug  anatomy,  no  discrimination  whatever 
has  been  made  between  the  penis  and  the  epiphallus,  the  very  real 
and  important  morphologic  fticts  involved  being,  therefore,  entirely 


Ignored. 


The  most  prominent  general  feature  of  the  genitalia  in  the  three 
genera  is  the  crowding  of  the  main  mass  forward  into  the  anterior 
half  of  the  body-cavity. 

GENERIC   CHARACTERS. 

The  three  genera  o^  Arioiddce  mentioned  above  are  seen  by  the 
foregoing  general  description  to  present  many  common  features  in 
their  digestive  and  generative  organs,  showing  them  to  be  nearly 
allied.  Their  main  difierential  characters  are  shown  in  the  follow- 
ing analysis: 

I,  Respiratory  pore  anterior,  the  genital  orifice  below  it.  No 
caudal  mucus  pore.  Back  rounded  in  adults.  Stomach  extend- 
ing back  of  posterior  loop  of  intestine.  No  penis,  an  epiphallus 
replacing  it ;  ovotestis  widely  separated  from  the  albumen  gland, 
situated  in  the  cavity  of  tail,  behind  the  stomach  (see  PI.  XIII, 
tig.  3,  A.  hortensis),  Genus  Arion  Ferussac. 

11.  Respiratory  pore  behind  middle  of  shield.  Genital  orifice  near 
right  tentacle.  A  caudal  mucus  pore.  Back  keeled,  at  least 
toward  the  tail.  Posterior  loop  of  intestine  behind  stomach. 
Ovotestis  packed  close  to  the  base  of  albumen  gland. 

a.  No  penis,  a  short  epiphallus  replacing  it  (see  PL,  XIV.  fig. 
12)  ;  right  eye  retractor  passing  to  the  left  of  genitalia. 
Genus  Aphallarion  Pilsbry  and  Vanatta. 
aa.  A  well  developed  penis,  with  short,  fleshy  retractor  mus- 
cle; epiphallus  more  or  less  introverted  in  penis  (see  PI. 
XIV,  tigs.  7,  8,  9, 14)  ;  right  eye  retractor  passing  between 
$  and  9  branchesof  genitalia.  Genus  ApioLiMAxMorch. 
One  species  of  the  Paljearctic  genus  Arion  has  been  introduced 
by  commerce  within  our  limits,  ^4.  hortensis  Fer.     It  occurs  at  Bos- 
ton and  New  Bedford,  Mass, ;  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y. ;  Seattle,  Wash., 
etc. 

Genus  ARIOLIMAX  Morch. 

External  Characters. — Body  limaciform,  its  posterior  half 
more  or  less  keeled  on  the  back ;  foot  margin  defined  by  deep  pedal 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  343 

grooves,  deeper  toward  the  more  or  less  distinct  caudal  mucus  gland. 
Mantle  oval,  about  one-fourth  as  long  as  the  entire  body,  finely 
granular,  the  respiratory  orifice  at  its  posterior  third  near  the  right 
edge.  Genital  orifice  behind  the  right  eye  tentacle.  Orifice  of  the 
suboral  gland  very  broad.  Integument  scored  by  numerous  grooves, 
longitudinal  behind,  obliquely  descending  below  the  mantle  and  for 
some  distance  along  the  flanks.^  Sole  tripartite,  the  divisions  rather 
indistinct ;  alcoholic  specimens  having  the  median  band  smooth, 
lateral  bands  finely  transversely  wrinkled. 

The  principal  internal  characters  of  the  genus  are  mentioned 
above.  The  extraordinary  modification  of  the  penis  is  fully  de- 
scribed below. 

Key  to  species  of  Ariolimax. 

a.  jVtantle  free  anteriorly  for  about  one-third  of  its  length.  Penis 
with  terminal  retractor,  and  nearly  filled  for  its  entire  length  by 
the  invaginated  epiphallus;  vas  deferens  not  enlarged, 

ColumbictJius. 
aa.  Mantlefreeanteriorly  about  one-fourth  of  its  length.    Penis  hol- 
low, with  very  broad  retractor,  beyond  which  it  is  attenuated; 
vas  deferens  enlarged  into  an  epiphallus  external  to  the  penis, 
the  invaginated  portion  small.  Californicus. 

A.  Columbianus  Gould.     Plate  XII,  fig.  2. 

Li77iax  Columbianus  Gld.  in  Terrestrial  Moll.  U.  S.,  II,  p.  43,  pi.  66,  f.  1 
(1851);  U.  S.  Expl.  Exped.,  Moll.,  p.  3,  pi.  1,  f.  1  (1852);  Tryon,  Amer. 
Jour.  Conch.,  Ill,  p.  315  (1868). 

Ariolif?iax  Columbianus  Morcli,  Malak.  Blatter,  VI,  p.  110  (1859).  W.  G. 
Binney,  Amer.  Journ.  Conch.,  I,  p.  48,  pi.  6,  f.  11-13;  Land  and  Fresh 
Water  Sh.  N.  A.,  I,  p.  279,  f.  496-501,  (1869);  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 
Phila.,  1874,  p.  33,  pi.  2,  f.  B.  to  H;  Terr.  Moll.,  V,  p.  231,  pi.  v,  f.  E  (denti- 
tion), pi.  xii,  f.  C  (genitalia) ;  ]Man.  Amer.  L.  Shells,  p.  98,  f.  58,  59,  6'  ,"61  ; 
Third  Supplement  to  Terr.  Moll.,  V  (Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  XIX,  No.  4), 
p.  211,  pi.  vi,  f.  A  (mottled  form)  and  f.  G  (penis). 

*  Mr.  Charles  Hedley,  the  accomplished  Australian  student  of  mollusk 
morphology,  considers  the  oblique  surface  grooves  as  characteristic  of  the 
^utocopoda  generally.  I  quote  this  passage  from  a  recent  letter:  "Besides 
the  pedal  grooves,  tail  pore  and  horn,  the  typically  developed  Aulacopod  has 
a  keeled  tail  and  oblique  secondary  grooves.  The  pore  may  be  lost  by  de- 
generation, so,  too,  may  the  oblique  grooves  ;  and  the  keeled  tail  may  become 
flattened.  Nevertheless,  both  are  typical  characteristics,  and  deserve  mention 
in  the  diagnosis.  Again,  the  Holopoda  have  long  tapering  eye  tentacles,  with 
bulbous  tips,  but  the  Aulncopoda  have  shorter  cylindrical  tentacles,  less  bulb- 
ous at  tip  and  set  wider  apart." 

There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  features  mentioned  by  my  friend  are  of  very 
frequent  occurrence  in  the  Aulacopoda,  while  they  do  not  occur  in  Holopoda  ; 
but  they  are  not  invariable,  the  pedal  grooves  being,  I  believe,  the  only  strictly 
diagnostic  external  character  of  the  group. — H.  A.  P. 


344  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Ariolimax  Columbianus  fort7ia  typicus  Cockerell,  Nautilus,  V,  p.  31  (1891). 

Arivliniax  Columbianus  forma  maculatiis  Ckll.,  Nautilus,  V,  p.  31.  Binney, 
Third  Suppl.  to  Terr.  Moll,  V  (Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  XIX,  No.  4),  p.  211, 
pi.  vi,  f.  A. 

Ariolimax  Columbianus  forma  ;/4'i^r  Ckll.,  Nautilus,  V,  p.  32. 

Ariolimax  subsp.  Calijortticus  foryjia  maculatiis  Ckll.,  Nautilus,  V,  p.  31  (foot 
note). 

Ariolimary  Columbianus  var.  stramineus  Hemphill,  Nautilus,  IV,  p.  130 
(Feb.,  1891). 

Geographic  Distribution. — British  Columbia  (J.  H.  Keen)  ; 
Victoria  (H.  F.  Wickham)  ;  Washington,  at  Taconia,  and  North 
Bend,  about  25  miles  east  of  Seattle  in  the  foot-hills  of  the  Cascade 
Mts.  (P.  B.  Randolph)  ;  Nesqually  (Case)  ;  Discovery  Bay,  Puget 
Sound  (Dyes)  ;  San  Juan  Island  (Hemphill)  ;  California,  at  St. 
Helena,  Napa  Co.  (Hemphill)  ;  Santa  Cruz  Island  (Hemphill,  var. 
stramineus). 

Color  of  alcoholic  examples  a  lighter  or  darker  shade  of  reddish- 
brown,  or  sometimes  ochraceous.  Foot  margin  v/ithout  dark  vertical 
lines  (see  descriptions  of  varieties). 

Melanistic  form  :  Color  of  alcoholic  specimens  a  slightly  reddish- 
brown,  marked  with  large,  irregular  scattered  black  spots  along  the 
sides,  and  with  a  rounded  black  spot  on  the  mantle  behind  the  middle. 
In  some  specimens  the  spots  on  each  side  coalesce  into  a  large,  irreg- 
ular black  area. 

Anterior  third  of  mantle  free. 

Jaw  (PI.  XIV,  fig.  10)  with  13  to  17  ribs  and  riblets,  which  some- 
times do  not  denticulate  the  basal  margin  ;  but  there  is  variation  in 
this  respect.  Teeth  about  as  in  A.  Calijormcus  (q.  v.),  but  the  outer 
laterals  have  less  lengthened  cusps,  and  there  are  rather  fewer  bi- 
cuspid outer  marginals.  The  differences  between  the  teeth  of  the 
species  are  too  slight  to  be  of  any  practical  diagnostic  value. 

Shell  oblong,  convex  above,  calcified  in  the  middle,  but  with  a 
broad,  yellow,  uncalcified  peripheral  portion.  Nucleus  median,  near 
the  posterior  end.     Length  12,  breadth  61,  convexity  1?  mm. 

The  general  internal  structure  (pi.  XIII,  fig.  1)  and  the  digest- 
ive tract  (pi.  XIII,  fig.  2)*  have  been  sufficiently  described  above. 

The  genitalia  (PI.  XIV,  fig.  7,  typical  form,  and  figs.  8,  9,  black- 
spotted  form)  present  a  rather  long  and  stout  penis,  receiving  the 
vas  deferens  and  a  very  short  retractor  muscle  at  its  apex ;  upon 
opening  the  penis  longitudinally  (fig.  9)  it  is  seen  to  contain  a  large 


*  Compare  Binney's  figure  of  the  digestive  system  in  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,. 
Phila.,  1874,  pi.  II,  f.  D,  F. 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


345 


Tcn-ac/ffr 


epi. 


1896.] 

inner  body,  which  extends  to  the  external  orifice,  where  it  terminates 
in  a  penis-papilla  (fig.  9,  P.  papilla).     This  internal  body  consists 

of  a  fleshy  cylindrical  tube  (fig.  9,  epi.)  en- 
veloped by  a  very  thin-walled  and  minutely 
corrugated  outer  tube  (fig.  9,  sheath  of  epi.). 
This  structure  we  can  only  interpret  as  an 
introverted  epiphallus,  which  has  extended 
entirely  to  the  proximal  opening  of  the  penis, 
carrying  the  penis-papilla  at  its  summit. 
This  will  be  more  clearly  seen  in  the  annexed 
diagram.  The  clearer,  because  less  ad- 
vanced, penial  morphology  of  ^.  Californicus 
bears  out  this  view  of  the  structure  in  A. 
Colmnbianus,  which  is,  moreover,  more  read- 
Diagram  of  thepenisof  i'j  ^een  in  our  preparations  than  in  the  flat 
V.  d.  vas  def-  figures,  necessarily  complicated  by  lines  to 
show  the  ducts  and  layers  of  tissue  not 
visible  from  the  outside' 

The  female  side  shows  a  rather  long  vagi- 
na, provided  with   a  broad,  split   retractor 
Spermatheca  situated  high,  on  a  short  duct. 
Other  organs  call  for  no  special  remark. 

A.  Columbiamis  is  a  dimorphic  species  in  most,  perhaps  all,  local- 
ities. There  is  a  unicolored  form,  and  one  more  or  less  heavily 
spotted  or  blotched  with  black.  This  maculated  form  has  received 
the  name  "for7na  maculatus  "  Ckll.  It  is  in  no  sense  a  true  variety 
or  subspecies  but  merely  a  "  form,"  comparable  to  the  glaucus  form 
of  the  dimorphic  Papilio  turtucs. 

Cockerell's  "forma  niger  "  was  described  from  one  specimen  in 
which  the  black  blotches  had  coalesced,  upper  surface  entirely  blacky 

^  A  similar  penial  structure  has  very  recently  been  described  and  figured  by 
Charles  Medley  in  the  epiphallogonous  genus  Xanthomdon  of  the  Helicidse. 
In  A",  fodinalis  Tate  and  A'.  Adcockiana  Bednall,  a  tube  occupies  the  penis 
cavity.  ''This,"  writes  Hedley,  "I  interpret  with  some  hesitation  as  an  in- 
vaginated  epiphallus,  of  which  the  distal  end  has  grown  to  the  atrium  wall, 
and  which  has  drawn  after  it  into  the  penis  sac  both  vas  deferens  and  the 
retractor"  (see  Medley's  anatomical  appendix  to  Professor  Ralph  Tate's 
report  on  the  Mollusca  of  the  Horn  Expedition  to  Central  Australia). 

No  such  structure  has  been  described  before  ;  and  we  are  disposed  to  accept 
Medley's  ingenious  interpretation  of  the  morphologic  problem.  In  Xantho- 
melon  the  invaginated  epiphallus  is  attached  at  the  proximal  end  of  penis  sac. 
This  is  not  the  case  with  Ariolbnax,  in  which  the  invaginated  structure  is  to 
that  extent  clearer. 


vv- 


Ariolimax 
erens ;  fpi.  invaginated 
epiphallus  ;  /•  /.  perfo- 
rated penis  papilla,  ele- 
vated on  the  epiphallus  ; 
0.  extei-nal  opening  of  pe- 
nis. 

muscle,  inserted  high. 


28 


346  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

from  the  humid  British  Columbian  region,  in  which  melanism  is  of 
common  occurrence  in  snails,  birds  and  mammals.  In  a  series  of 
several  hundred  examples  we  find  great  variation  in  the  extent  of 
the  black  marking. 

We  hazard  little  in  assuming  that  "A.  Californieus  forma  macula- 
tus"  Ckll.  is  identical  with  the  spotted  form  of  Columhianiis,  and  has 
nothing  whatever  to  do  with  the  true  A.  Californieus  Cooper.  Like 
a  good  many  "  varieties  "  of  slugs,  this  is  "  such  stuff  as  dreams  are 
made  of." 

•We  have  opened  numerous  spotted  Californian  Ariolimaces,  and 
found  them  invariably  to  have  the  extremely  characteristic  genitalia 
of  Cohimbianus.  Proof  that  a  spotted  form  occurs  in  the  other  species 
is  lacking. 

A.  Columbianus  var.  stramineus  Hem]iliill.     PI.  XII,  fig.  1. 

Alcoholic  specimens  clear,  light  buff.  Length  59  ;  greatest  breadth 
(across  shield)  19  ;  greatest  width  of  sole  15  mm.  Genitalia  as  in 
typical  A.  columbianus. 

Habitat :  Santa  Cruz  Island,  California. 

The  specimen  figured  is  one  of  Hemphill's  original  lot. 

A.  Californieus  Cooper.     PI.  XIII,  figs.  5,  6 ;  PI.  XIV,  figs.  14-16. 

Ariolhnax  Californieus  J.  G.  Cooper,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1872, 
p.  146,  pi.  3,  f.  D,  1-3.  W.  G.  Binney,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1874,  p. 
83;  Am.  Lye,  N.  Y._,_X,  1873,  p.  297  ;  Terrest.  Moll.,  V.  p.  232,  pi.  v,  fig.  F 
(dentition),  and  pi.  xii,  f.  D  (genitalia);  Man.  Amer.  Land  Sh.,  p.  99  f.  62, 
63;  Third  Suppl.  Terr.  Moll.,  V  (Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  XIX,  No.  4),  p.  211,  pi.  v. 
f.  E  (living  animal)  and  f.  H  (penis).  Simroth,  Nova  Acta  Acad.  Caes.  Leop. 
Carol.  Germ.  Nat.  Cur.,  LVI,  1891,  p.  365,  pi.  7  [xv],  f.  9-11 ;  Malak.  Blat- 
ter (n.  F.)XI,  pl.l,  f.  5.  6. 

Distribution  :  We  have  seen  this  species  from  San  Mateo  Co., 
California,  only. 

Color  of  alcoholic  specimens  brownish  ochraceous,  sole  gray  ;  foot 
margin  uniform  with  the  upper  surface,  or  dusky  with  vertical  dark 
lines. 

The  free  anterior  portion  of  mantle  is  shorter  than  in  A.  Colum- 
bianus, less  than  one-fourth  the  entire  length  of  the  mantle. 

Jaw  (PI.  XIV,  fig.  13)  with  about  9  ribs,  denticulating  both  mar- 
gins. 

Radula  (PI.  XIII,  figs.  5,  6)  with  the  formula  67.1.67.  Rhachid- 
ian  teeth  with  well  developed  side  cutting-points ;  mesocone  long, 
reaching  to  posterior  edge  of  basal  plate.  Inner  lateral  teeth,  without 
inner  cusps,  otherwise  similar  ;  outer  laterals  becoming  oblique,  with 
Jong  mesocones,  the  ectocone  gradually  reduced  to  a  slight  sinuation. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  847 

The  transition  to  marginals  is  extremely  gradual ;  the  latter  being 
at  first  as  described  above  (fig.  5,  at  24,  25,  46),  but  about  20  at  the 
outer  edge  of  radula  are  of  the  form  shown  in  fig.  6,  with  distinct  ecto- 
cones,  and  the  short,  Helicid  form  of  basal  plates  of  other  J^rtomV/oE. 

Genitalia  (PI.  XIV,  fig.  14)  somewhat  as  in  J..  Columhianns.  The 
$  and  9  orifices  are,  as  Binney  has  remarked,  hardly  united  in  an 
atrium  (see  figure).  The  penis  is  fleshy,  with  plicate  inner  walls, 
and  its  retractor  is  short  and  fleshy,  as  in  Columbianus,  but  is  ex- 
tremely broad.  The  epiphallus  (e/>i)  is  very  stout,  nearly  as  large 
in  calibre  as  the  penis  in  sexually  mature  specimens.  Further 
downward  it  becomes  very  small  again,  approaches  the  penis,  follows 
it  to  its  apex,  turns  in  (fig.  15,  enlarged  view  of  apex  of  penis)  and 
is  introverted  and  invaginated  therein  for  some  distance,  nearly  as 
far  as  the  insertion  of  retractor  muscle  (fig.  16,  distal  end  of  penis 
opened,  showing  the  invaginated  epiphallus).® 

The  female  organs  are  as  usual,  except  that  there  is  a  broad,  stout, 
fleshy  vaginal  retractor  muscle  inserted  near  the  base  of  vagina.' 

It  will  be  seen  that  this  species  shows  a  less  advanced  stage  of 
penis  structure  than  A.  Columbianus,  although  of  the  same  kind. 
The  very  stout,  low,  vaginal  retractor  is  also  a  diagnostic  feature. 

INSUFFICIENTLY    KNOWN    ARIOLIMACES. 

Ariolimax  Columbiana  var.  Hecoxl  Wetherby  (Some  Notes  on 
American  Land  Shells,  p.  6)  from  Santa  Cruz,  California,  is  stated 
by  Wetherby  to  diflfer  from  A.  Columbianus  in  the  geuitalia,  but  no 
characters  whatever  of  the  new  form  are  mentioned.  Binney 
(Manual  American  Land  Sh.,  p.  103)  apparently  endorses  the  spe- 
cific value  of  the  form  ;  but  beyond  stating  that  it  has  about  60.1.60 
teeth  {Columbianus  varying  fz'om  56.1.56  to  67.1.67),  with  about  16 
laterals,  he  gives  no  characters.  The  form  has  been  mentioned  in 
various  lists,  etc.,  by  Cockerell  and  the  senior  author  of  this  paper, 
but  in  the  entire  absence  of  diagnosis  it  can  have  no  standing,  and 
had  better  be  dropped  until  described.  We  have  not  seen  specimens, 
nor,  in  fact,  any  specimens  of  the  genus  from  Santa  Cruz. 

Ariolimax  Costaricensis  CockereW,  Annals  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (6), 
VI,  1890,  p.  279,  described  as  a  sub-species  of  A.  Californicus,  from 

^  The  slender  distal  end  of  the  penis  has  been  erroneously  described  as  a  "  fla- 
gellum"  by  Binney,  "  Blindschlaucli  "  by  Simroth  ;  both  overlooking  the  fact 
that  the  epiphallus  runs  up  to  its  apex,  as  shown  in  our  figure  15. 

'Binney  (Man.  Amer.  Land  Sh.,  p.  100)  calls  the  structure  a  "vaginal 
prostate,"  overlooking  the  easily  ascertainable  fact  that  it  is  composed  of  solid 
muscular  tissue,  similar  to  that  of  the  penis  retractor.  All  Ariolimaces  have 
vaginal  retractors,  and  at  times  invert  and  protrude  the  vaghia,  like  a  penis. 


348  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

alcoholic  specimens  in  Brit.  Mus.     The  only  diagnostic  words  of 

Cockerell's  description  are  the  locality,  "  Costa  Rica."     The  other 

characters  mentioned  in  the  description  are  common  to  Columblanus 

and  some  CaUfornicus.     Measurements,  etc.,  as  given  therein,  look 

well  on  paper,  but  every  practical  limacologist  knows  them  to  be 

merely  an  empty  form.  We  consider  Cosfaricensis  as  probably  a  good 

species,  on  account  of  its  locality  (if  correct),  but  a  diagnosis  is  still 

wanting. 

Genus  APHALLARION  P.  &  V.  (n.  g.). 

External  characters,  jaw,  radula  and  digestive  tract,  shell,  and 
general  internal  topography,  as  well  as  female  genitalia,  as  in  Ario- 
Itmax;  jjenis  (and  its  retractor')  completely  wanting,  a  small  and 
short  epiphallus  lying  in  its  place  ;  right  eye  retractor  passing  to  the 
left  of  the  genitalia. 

We  institute  this  new  group  for  a  large  slug  like  Arion  and  Pro- 
physaon  in  the  total  lack  of  a  penis  and  its  appendages,  and  like 
Ariolhnax  in  the  other  essential  features,  internal  and  external,  ex- 
cept the  disposition  of  the  eye-retractor  mentioned  above. 

In  view  of  the  high  development  and  complicated  structure  of  the 
penis  in  ArioUmax,  the  strength  of  its  retractor,  the  large  size  and 
extraordinary  introverted  character  of  the  epiphallus,  we  can  hardly 
refuse  generic  rank  to  a  form  differing  so  radically  as  this  one.  The 
anterior  position  of  the  genital  foramen  in  Aphallarion,  the  poste- 
rior position  of  its  breathing  pore,  and  the  anterior  ovotestis,  pressed 
against  the  base  of  the  albumen  gland,  deny  to  our  slug  entrance  into 
Arion ;  and  in  the  genus  Prophysaon  the  whole  internal  topography® 
as  well  as  the  type  of  digestive  system  is  profoundly  different. 

A.  Buttoni  P.  *.  V.  (n.  sp.).     PI.  XII,  figs.  ?,,  4,  5. 

Color  of  alcoholic  specimens  light  yellow-brown,  the  shield  lighter, 
more  yellowish,  especially  anteriorly.  Foot-margin  dusky,  with  close 
vertical  black  lines,  alternately  heavier,  and  seen  under  the  lens  to 
be  impressed  and  pigmented  wrinkles.  Sole  gray,  more  or  less 
dusky.  Anterior  third  of  the  mantle  free.  Length  82  ;  length  of 
mantle  34  ;  greatest  breadth  of  sole  21  mm. 

Shell  oblong,  nearly  flat,  well  calcified  ;  white  below,  with  a 
yellowish  cuticle  above,  except  toward  the  middle.  Length  12  j, 
width  6|  mm, 

®By  this  we  mean  the  positions  of  the  organs  in  the  body-cavity,  both  rela- 
tive and  actual.  The  relative  positions  of  genitalia  and  digestive  tract  are 
greatly  varied  in  dill'erent  genera  of  slugs,  and  of  considerable  systematic 
value. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  349 

Mr.  Button  writes  of  the  living  animal  as  follows :  "  He  has  a 
way  of  occasionally  raising  up  the  mantle  over  the  respiratory 
orifice,  as  shown  in  the  sketch,  which  is  characteristic.  The  follow- 
ing are  some  measurements  of  a  very  large  specimen  :  Length,  over 
all,  when  extended,  7  inches;  width,  I  in.;  height,  i  in.;  length  of 
tentacles,  f  inch.  The  color  is  the  same  throughout,  shield  included, 
being  an  olive  brown." 

Figures  4  and  5  of  Plate  XII  were  drawn  from  sketches  of  the 
living  animal  furnished  by  Mr.  Button.  Fig.  3  represents  an  alco- 
holic specimen,  dorsal  view. 

Jaw  with  10  to  12  ribs  (PI.  XIV,  fig.  11).  Teetli  as  in  Ariolimax 
Californicus,  but  the  outer  laterals  and  marginals  have  the  cusps 
shorter,  less  thorn-like,  and  there  are  rather  fewer  bicuspid  outer 
marginals. 

General  characters  of  the  digestive  system  (PI.  XIII,  fig.  4)  as  in 
Ariolimax  Columhianus ;  but  the  ascending  gut  from  posterior  loop 
passes  under  the  stomach  (instead  of  over  it)  and  the  descending 
gut  from  anterior  to  posterior  loop  makes  one  spiral  turn  less  than 
in  that  species. 

Genitalia  (PI.  XIV,  fig.  12)  lying  in  the  body-cavity  like  that  of 
Ariolimax.  Penis  absent,  the  epiphallus  {epi.)  small  and  short. 
Vagina  very  long,  strong,  with  plicate  internal  walls,  and  provided 
with  a  band  of  retractor  fibers.  Spermatheca  large,  of  irregular 
shape,  on  a  short  duct. 

Oakland,  California  (Fred  L.  Button  !).  * 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 
Plate  XII. 

Fig.    1.  Ariolimax  Columhianus  stramineus  Hemph.,  lateral  view  of 
an  alcoholic  specimen. 

Fig.    2.  Ariolimax  Columhianus  Gld.,  lateral  view  of  an  alcoholic 
specimen  of  form  maculatus,  from  Tacoma,  Washington. 

Fig.    3.  Aphallarion  Buttoni  Pils.  &  Van.,  dorsal  view  of  an  alco- 
holic specimen  of  average  size. 

Fig.  4,  5.  Aphallarion  Buttoni  Pils.  &  Van.,  lateral  view  and  dorsal 
outline  of  a  large  living  individual  in  motion,  drawn  from 
sketches  by  Fred.  L.  Button. 
All  figures  natural  size. 


350  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Plate  XIII. 

Fig.    1.  Ariolimax  Columhianus  Gld.   General  view  of  viscera,  the 

upper  integument  removed,  viscera  turned  aside,  and  penis 

lifted  from  its  normal  position  across  salivary  glands  and 

crop. 
Fig.    2.  A.  Columbiamts.    Digestive  tract,  the  salivary  glands  and 

liver  removed ;  albumen  gland  remaining  in  place. 
Fig.    3.  Avion  hortensis  Fer.  (specimen  from  New  Bedford,  Mass.). 

Digestive  tract,  the  liver  removed  ;  also  showing  position 

of  the  ovotestis. 
Fig.    4.  Aphallarion  BuUoni  P.  &  V.   Digestive  tract,  the  salivary 

glands  and  liVer  removed. 
Figs.  5, 6.  Ariolimax  Califor n Icus  Coo])er.     Dentition. 

Plate  XIV. 

Fig.  7.  Ariolimax  Columhianus  Gld.  Genitalia  of  an  unicolored 
specimen. 

Fig.  8.  Ariolimax  Columbia7ius  G\d.  Lower  portion  of  the  genitalia 
of  a  black-spotted  specimen. 

Fig.  9.  Ariolimax  Columhianus  Gld.  Vagina  and  penis  opened, 
the  latter  showing  invaginated  epiphallus  {epi.),  its  struc- 
ture shown  by  dotted  lines. 

Fig.  10.  Ariolimax  Columbianus  Gld.     Jaw. 

Fig.  11.  Aphallarion  Buttoni  P.  &  V.     Jaw. 

Fig.  12:  Aphallarion  Buttoni  P.  &  V.  Genitalia,  epiphallus  shown 
at  epi. 

Fig.  13.  Ariolimax  Californicus  Cooper.     Jaw. 

Fig.  14.  Ariolimax  Califor mc\i.s  Cooper.     Genitalia. 

Fig.  15.  Ariolimax  Californicus  Cooper.     Enlarged  end  of  penis. 

Fig.  16.  Ariolimax  Californicus  Cooper.  Enlarged  distal  portion 
of  penis  split  to  show  the  invaginated  epiphallus. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  351 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  POLAR  HARES  OF  NORTH  AMERICA. 
BY  SAMUEL  N.  RHOADS. 

Owing  to  the  extreme  scarcity  of  specimens  of  skins  and  skulls, 
with  reliable  data,  of  our  American  Polar  Hares  in  the  museums  of 
this  country  or  of  the  Continent,  no  attempt  has  yet  been  made  to 
study  this  group  in  a  comprehensive  Avay.  To  this  fact,  together 
with  the  prevailing  opinion  that  the  Arctic  representatives  of  our 
land  mammal  fauna  retain  their  specific  constancy  throughout  the 
breadth  of  their  habitat,  the  animals  which  form  the  subject  of  this 
paper  owe  the  neglect  and  consequent  misconception  of  their  rela- 
tionships which  have  so  long  existed. 

Having  occasion  to  identify  a  summer  specimen  of  Polar  Hare 
from  Alaska,  recently  presented  to  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia  by  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp,  I  was  led  to  a  critical  ex- 
amination of  the  series  in  our  museum.  The  subject  proved  of  so  much 
interest  that  I  secured  the  loan  of  some  specimens  from  the  Smith- 
sonian Institution,  which  finally  led  to  a  general  correspondence 
with  collectors  in  this  country  and  in  England,  and  the  examina- 
tion of  a  series  of  skins,  skulls  and  alcoholic  specimens  of  American 
Polar  Hares,  representing  over  thirty  individuals,  together  with 
about  fifteen  specimens  of  Siberian  and  Swedish  Polar  Hares.  Be- 
sides these,  I  secured  data  from  correspondents,  which  covered  the 
examination  of  nearly  thirty  more  specimens,  more  than  half  of 
"which  were  American  species. 

Especial  mention  is  due  to  the  courtesy  of  Messrs.  Goode  and 
True  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  for  their  liberal  assistance  in 
the  loan  of  their  specimens  and  furnishing  of  data.  To  Mr.  Outram 
Bangs  I  am  indebted  for  a  most  valuable  set  of  Newfoundland  spec- 
imens and  the  use  of  a  set  of  drawings  of  the  type  skull  of  L.  a. 
bangsi,  executed  by  Mr.  Blake.  Messrs.  Walter  Faxon  of  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  William  De  Winton,  of  the  Brit- 
ish Museum,  and  Lud  wig  Kumlien,  of  Milton  College,Wisconsin,  have 
also  furnished  me  with  timely  aid  in  the  loan  and  examination  of  speci- 
mens and  the  use  of  private  field  notes  and  references  to  literature. 
The  illustrations  on  plates  VI,  VII  and  VIII,  are  reproductions  of  an 
exceptionally  fine  set  of  photographs  made  by  H.   Parker  Rolfe,  of 


352  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Phila(1el[)hia.  Plates  IX  and  X  contain  figures  of  the  type  skull  of 
L.  a.  bangsi  drawn  by  Mr.  J.  H.  Blake  of  Boston.  The  remaining 
figures  on  Plate  X  were  drawn  by  myself. 

Although  the  series  of  specimens  which  I  was  enabled  to  bring 
together  for  study  is  much  larger  than  any  yet  examined,  it  is  very 
deficient  in  examples  from  certain  parts  of  America,  especially 
Baffin  Land,  the  Arctic  Archipelago  and  the  interior  of  British 
America.  On  this  account  some  of  the  opinions  advanced  in  this 
paper  may  be  found  to  need  revision,  but  it  is  believed  that  suffi- 
cient material  has  been  examined  to  establish  the  main  conclusions 
arrived  at,  and  also  to  indicate  the  direction  in  which  our  further 
investigations  of  these  mammals  should  be  turned. 

HISTORY  AND  NOMENCLATURE. 

Owino-  to  the  confusion  of  some  authors  as  to  the  difference  be- 
tween  the  European  and  American  Polar  Hares,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary first  to  briefly  outline  the  nomenclature  of  the  former. 

Linnaeus,  in  the  tenth  edition  of  the  Sijstema  Naturce,^  was  the 
first  author  to  impose  a  tenable  name  upon  the  Polar  or  Arctic 
Hare  of  Europe,  the  Lepus  alhus  of  Brisson.  He  gave  it  the  name 
Lepus  timidus,  including  under  that  title  both  it  and  the  Common 
Hare,  Lepus  europcBus  Pallas.^  Pallas,  in  1778,  in  distinguishing 
between  the  two,  not  only  gave  a  new  name  to  the  Common  Hare, 
but  renamed  the  Polar  Hare,  Lejms  variabilis,^  and  by  this  name  it 
has  since  been  known  to  most  authors. 

Tlie  description  of  Linnseus  unmistakably  refers  in  all  particulars 
to  the  Polar  Hare  rather  than  to  the  Common  Hare,  which,  how- 
ever, he  included  under  the  name  timidus.  Pallas'  name  for  the 
latter  should  be  retained,  while  that  of  Linnaeus  continues  to  belong 
to  the  former. 

No  series  of  the  Polar  Hares  of  Russia,  Siberia  or  the  mountains 
of  Central  Europe  being  available  for  study  in  this  country,  attempt 
will  not  be  made  to  give  a  synopsis  of  their  status  or  nomenclature. 
While  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  Old  AVorld  is  represented  by  at 
least  three  forms  of  the  timidus  group,  for  which  there  are  available 
names  in  literature,  it  only  concerns  us,  in  this  connection,  to  fix 
the  type  form  and  habitat  of  L.  timidus  for  sake  of  comparisons  be- 

iSyst.  Nat,  1758,  p.  r,7. 
'Nov.  Sp.  Glires,  1778,  p.  30. 
Hbid,  pp.  1,30. 


1890.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  353 

tweea  it  and  the  hares  of  North  America.  A  careful  consideration 
of  the  question  induces  nie  to  adopt  the  Scandinavian  animal  as 
the  type  of  L.  timidus,  from  the  fact  that  Linnteus'  conception  of 
the  Arctic  Hare,  when  he  wrote  his  original  diagnosis,  was  based 
primarily  on  those  frequenting  the  localities  near  his  Swedish 
home.* 

Captain  John  Ross  was  the  first  author  to  publish  a  description 
:and  new  name  for  the  American  Polar  Hare.^  Owing  to  the  fact 
that  he  gave  this  animal  the  name  "  Lepus  arcticus  Leach,"  and 
that  Leach,  a  few  pages  further  on,  names  and  describes  the  same 
specimen  as  "  Lepus  glacialls"*  some  confusion  of  synonymy  has  re- 
sulted. Owing  to  the  scarcity  of  the  work  in  which  these  descrip- 
tions occur,  and  to  make  the  status  of  the  case  more  clear,  they  are 
herewith  giveu.^ 

Later  authors  recognized  the  American  Hare  as  distinct  from  the 
European,  but  none  of  them,  until  Gray,  in  1843,  used  the  name 
arcticus  for  it,  but  adopted  Leach's  later  name,  glacialis.^  In  1877, 
Dr.  J.  A.  Allen  revived  Ross'  name  on  account  of  the  priority  of 

*  Linna?us'  1758  description  refers  to  Fauna  Suecica,  1746,  No.  19,  p.  8. 
»Ross'  Voy.,  1819  (2d   [octavo]  ed.).  Appx   IV,  p.  151  (Written  by  Ross). 
^  Ibid,  p.  170  (Under  caption  :   "  Desc.  JV.  Sp.  Anim.,  Discov.    *    *    *    in 

Arc.  Keg.  by  Dr.  W.  E.  Leacli  "). 

'  Ross'  description  (p.  151,  1.  c)  is  as  follows  : 

"Genus  Lepus  {Hare). 

"Species  Le])us  arcticus  Leach.  The  only  one  of  this  species  was  shot  in 
lat.  73°  37^,  on  the  west  side  of  the  Straits.  It  was  nearly  the  same  size  as 
Lepus  timidns  (the  common  Hare)  ;  the  body  was  white,  except  that  a  few 
solitary  black  hairs,  longer  than  the  rest,  were  dispersed  over  every  part  and 
which  appeared  to  be  rapidly  coming  away  ;  the  tips  of  the  ears  and  the  short 
hairs  within  the  ears  were  black  ;  tail  short  and  white.  It  was  shot  on  the 
first  of  September.  Another,  shot  by  a  Master  of  a  Whaler,  in  May,  at  Hare 
Island  [Greenland?],  differed  very  little  from  the  above.  Dr.  Leach  thinks 
it  to  be  very  distinct  from  the  common  White  Hare  of  Scotland  ( Lepus  alhus 
Brisson)  and  equally  so  from  the  Lepus  variabilis  Pallas.  See  Appendix  No. 
V." 

Ross'  reference  to  "  Appendix  No.  V,"  is  a  mistake,  as  Leach's  descrip- 
tion comes  in  the  latter  part  of  appendi.x  IV,  page  170.     It  reads  as  follows : 

"  Genus  Lepus  of  Authors  iHare). 

''  Species  Glacialis.  Albus,  vertice  et  dorso  pilis  nigricante  fuscis  albo  fas- 
ciatis  sparsis,  collo  lateribus  nigricante  abloque  raixtis,  auribus  apice  extremo 
nigris. 

''This  animal,  which  will  neither  agree  with  the  iepn-s  aZ^M.s  of  Brisson 
nor  the  Lepus  variabilis  of  Pallas,  both  of  which  are  now  before  me,  is  of  the 
size  of  the  common  Hare  {Lepus  timidas  and  of  a  white  color.  The  back  and 
top  of  the  head  are  sprinkled  with  blackish-brown  hair  which  is  banded  with 
white  ;  the  sides  of  the  neck  are  covered  with  hairs  of  the  same  color,  inter- 
spersed with  white.  The  extreme  tips  of  the  ears  are  tipped  with  black,  in- 
termixed with  white  ;  the  insides  of  the  ears  have  a  few  black  hairs  mingled 
with  the  white. 

"  I  am  sorry  that  the  skeleton  (which  would,  in  all  probability,  have  fur- 
nished a  good  specific  distinction)  was  not  brought  home." 

*  See  Baird,  Mam.  N.  Amer.,  1857,  p.  577  (foot  note). 


354  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

paging  of  bis  description  of  arctlciis.  Dr.  Allen  further  gave  Leach 
sole  credit  for  this  name  and  was  induced,  by  the  difficulty  of  spe- 
cifically separating  the  American  from  the  European  Hare,  to  con- 
stitute the  former  a  "  variety  "  of  the  latter,  so  as  to  make  it  stand 
trinomially,  Lepus  timidus  arcticus,  (Leach).  As  I  have  already 
attempted  to  show^  our  American  forms  are  quite  distinct  from 
those  of  Europe,  and  the  most  proper  formula  for  typical  arcticus 
north  of  Baffin  Land  is  Lepus  arcticus  "  Leach  "  Ross.  In  the 
same  paper  I  have  described  two  new  forms,  Lepus  arcticus  bangsi, 
representing  the  dark  southeastern  race  of  arcticus,  and  Lepus 
grmnlandkns,  a  strongly  characterized  species  which  appears  to  be 
peculiar  to  Greenland  and  Grinnell  Land.  To  these  is  now  added 
a  fourth,  Lepus  tschuktschoncm  (Nordquist),  from  the  west  coast  of 
Alaska. 

A  skin,  without  skull,  feet  or  limbs,  from  near  Great  Slave  Lake, 
N.  W.  Territory,  dated  May,  1877  (No.  13,350,  Sm.  Inst.),  and  in 
full  summer  pelage,  indicates  the  existence  of  an  interior  geograph- 
ical race,  so  much  lighter  in  color  than  L.  a.  bangsi,  as  to  indicate 
that  it  should  be  separated  under  another  name.  The  most  diligent 
search  in  this  country,  however,  has  failed  to  reveal  another  sum- 
mer skin  from  that  region,  and  the  condition  of  the  one  in  hand  does 
not  warrant  its  use  in  this  connection. 

GEOGRAPHICAL  DISTRIBUTION  AND  VARIATION. 

The  American  Polar  Hares  confine  their  habitats  very  closely  to 
the  faunal  areas  designated  by  Dr.  J.  A.  Allen'"  as  the  "  Barren 
Ground"  and  "Alaskan  Arctic."  The  most  southern  points  of 
their  distribution  yet  recorded,  beginning  in  the  east,  are  Bay  St. 
George,  Newfoundland  (1.  c.),"  Solomon  Island  and  Ungava, 
Labrador  (1.  c.)  ;  Fort  Churchill,'^  Fort  Rae  (1.  c),  Great  Bear 
Lake,'^  Yukon  Valley  and  mouth  of  Kuskoquim  River,'*  Alaska. 
A  line  connecting  these  points  runs  northwest  from  latitude  47°  in 
Newfoundland  to  latitude  57°  in  northern  Labrador,  thence  directly 
west  across  Hudson  Bay  to  Fort  Churchill,  and  northwest  along 

9  Araer.  Nat.,  1896,  pp.  251,  252. 

10  Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  1892,  PI.  VIII 

"And.  &  Bach.,  Quad.  N.  Amer,  1846,  I,  p.  248,  state  it  is  reported  from 
Nova  Scotia.     Tliis  is  not  authenticated. 

'-Richardson,  Faun.  Bor.  Amer  ,  iSliO,  I,  p.  221. 
'3  Nelson,  Rep.  N.  Hist.  Alasita,  1887,  p.  271. 
"Richardson,  1.  c,  p.  222. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  355 

the  eastern  drainage  of  the  Mackenzie  to  its  mouth  in  latitude  67°. 
The  distribution  between  Great  Bear  Lake  and  Nulato  is  uncertain, 
but  may  be  restricted  to  the  Yukon  drainage  southwestward  to 
Kuskoquim  Bay,  BehringSea,  in  latitude  60°.  North  of  this  line, 
the  Polar  Hare  is  likely  to  be  found  in  greater  or  less  abundance, 
as  far  as  explorations  have  reached.  The  Greenland  Hare,  ac- 
cording to  Fabricius,'^  abounds  throughout  that  country.  His 
observations  were  probably  restricted  to  the  southern  half  of 
Greenland,  but  they  equally  apply  to  the  nortliern  sections.  It  is 
also  found  on  the  west  side  of  Robeson  Channel  and  Hall  Basin  in 
Grinnell  Land,^®  and  on  the  northeast  coast  of  Greenland  in  lati- 
tude 75°."  The  Baffin  Land  Hare,  in  its  typical  form,  occupies  the 
northern  half  of  the  Barren  Ground  Fauna  of  America,  north 
of  latitude  70°,  exclusive  of  Alaska  and  the  habitat  of  grcenlandicus. 
Its  subspecies,  bangsi,  may  be  provisionally  restricted  to  the 
country  east  of  Hudson  Bay,  including  south  Baffin  Land.  The 
Polar  Hares  of  the  southern  interior,  west  of  Hudson  Bay,  as  al- 
ready stated,  probably  constitute  another  race  of  ardicus,  while  the 
Siberio-Alaskan  species  occupies  the  remaining  portions  of  the 
"  Alaskan  Arctic  "  range  of  the  Polar  Hare  in  the  northwest. 

The  causes  of  geographic  variation  in  arcticus  and  its  subspecies 
are  nowadays  so  well  understood,  as  far  as  they  relate  to  color  char- 
acters, as  to  need  little  comment.  It  is  interesting  to  note,  however, 
how  they  are  correlated  with  the  variations  of  some  other  animal  forms 
inhabiting  the  same  areas.  In  the  extreme  north,  where  it  is  never 
dissociated  from  snow-covered  areas,  ardicus  practically  retains  its 
winter  coat  throughout  the  year.  In  those  southern  areas  where 
snow  largely  disappears  for  a  short  summer  season,  we  find  an  as- 
sumption of  colors  to  correspond  with  the  environment,  blackest  in 
rocky,  fog-clouded  Newfoundland,  and  hoary  in  the  arid,  gray 
wastes  of  the  interior.  On  the  verdant,  humid  shores  of  Alaska,  a 
very  distinct  Old  World  species,  in  sooty-brown  summer  dress,  takes 
the  place  of  its  eastern  congener. 

When  we  come,  however,  to  inquire  into  the  origin  of  the  Green- 
land species,  with  the  peculiar  dental  characters  which  seem  to  sep- 
arate it,  not  only  from  its  Polar  allies,  but  from  all  other  members 
of  the  genus,  the  problem  is  more  difficult.      It  is  not  unlikely  that 

>5Faun.  Gronl.,  1780,  p.  25. 

'Teilden,  in  Nares'  Voy.,  1878,  II,  Appx.,  p   204. 

^"  Zweite  Deutsche  Nordpolarf.,  II,  1874,  pp.  165-167. 


o56  PROCEFDTXOfS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [l8iU>. 

the  character  of  the  food  procurable  in  extreme  nortliern  K>oalities, 
as  compared  with  that  ot'  tlie  more  southern,  has  been  a  factor  in 
the  devehipnient  of  the  sUnider  protruding  incisors.  In  northern 
Greenhuui.  phuit-life  is  not  only  greatly  reduced  in  size  and  num- 
ber of  species  from  that  of  Labrador,  but  the  ditticulty  of  procuring 
it  is  enhanced  by  the  depth  and  long  continuance  of  the  snow  in  the 
former  locality.  For  many  months  in  the  year  the  Greenland 
Hare  must  subsist  entirely  on  dwarfed  plants,  whicli  it  uncovers 
auil  reaches  by  scratching  away  the  snow,'*  while  the  Labrador  ani- 
mal is  living  without  exertion  on  the  twigs,  leaves  and  branches  of 
a  large  variety  of  bushes  and  shrubs.  The  character  of  the  iliet  in 
each  instance  naturally  accounts  for  the  relatively  weaker  dentition 
of  the  northern  animal  and  we  may  believe  that  the  projecting  form 
of  incisor  was  the  outcome  of  the  needs  of  the  animal  in  rooting 
among  snow  and  stones  for  its  scant  repast.  To  insure  such  an  ar- 
mature the  arc  of  the  tooth  must  have  a  larger  radius  and  hence 
the  tooth  itself  a  greater  length,  bringing  its  root  farther  back  upon 
the  maxillary  than  the  sharply  curved,  perpendicular,  massive  form 
of  the  twig-eating  animal.  Again  we  see  how  the  projecting  form 
of  incisor  tooth,  meeting  its  opposing  member  at  a  triturating 
angle  of  45°.  must,  of  necessity,  have  a  greater  relative  vertical  re- 
sistance than  opposing  pairs  of  teeth  which  meet  on  the  same  plane 
or  at  an  angle  scarcely  appreciable.  As  a  result,  we  have  the  nar- 
row, deep  incisors  of  granlandicus  and  the  long,  slender  premaxil- 
lary  and  ramus  enclosing  them.  By  this  means,  the  incisor  sulcus 
is  not  only  diminished  but  the  weakness  resulting  from  its  possession 
is  remedied  by  a  special  functional  provision  which  tills  it  with  the 
cenientum-like  scale  as  the  animal  approaches  maturity. 

It  may  be  stated  that  the  Polar  Hares  of  America,  contrary  to 
the  rule  of  specific  stability  in  circumpolar  animals  have  proved  no 
exception  to  the  protean  character  of  the  many  members  of  the 
genus  Lepus  on  this  continent.  On  the  other  hand,  they  emphasize 
that  fact,  and  form  a  group,  apparently  more  sensitive  to  the  min- 
ute alterations  of  a  Polar  environment  than  any  other  of  the  Arctic 
vertebrata. 

Contrary  to  what  we  should  expect,  it  does  not  appear  that  our 
Arctic  Hares  decrease  in  size  as  we  go  south.  The  average  meas- 
urements of  ;Xorth  Greenland  Hares  are  less  than  those  of 
the  series  taken  in  Newfoundland  and  it  will  be  noted   that  the 

^*See  Feilden.  in  Appx.  Nares'  Voy,.  1S7S.  11.  pp.  204,  205. 


1896.]  XATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  3o7 

west  Alaskan  Hares  are  considerably  larger  than  any  others  from 
either  liigher  or  lower  latitudes.  The  length  of  ear,  which  the  laws 
of  variation  lead  us  to  suppose  would  increase  southwardly,  is  actu- 
ally less  in  Newfoundland  than  in  Labrador,  Baffin  Land  and 
Greenland,  while  the  hind  foot  follows  a  reverse  order,  being  longer 
in  the  south  than  in  the  north. 

GENERAL   OBSERVATIONS    ON   SEASONAL,    8E5UAL    AND    JUVENILE 

PHASES  OF  COLOR. 

The  Polar  Hares  of  all  countries  and  latitudes  undergo  a  double 
annual  moult  of  the  entire  pelage,  taking  place  during  late  spring 
and  early  autumn.  Throughout  their  more  southern  distribution, 
the  contrast  between  the  perfect  summer  and  winter  coats,  in  color, 
texture  and  quantity  is  very  marked.  As  their  habitat  nears  the 
Pole,  these  sea.sonal  differences  diminish,  so  that  it  is  difficult  to  dis- 
tinguish at  a  distance  the  midsummer  hares  of  North  Greenland 
and  the  Arctic  Archipelago  from  the  same  animals  in  their  snowy 
winter  dress.  There  is  but  one  color  character  which  remains  con- 
stant to  all  members  of  the  group  at  all  ages  and  seas^jns  the  world 
over,  namely,  the  black  extreme  lips  of  the  ears.  In  winter  this  is 
the  only  exception  to  the  prevailing  whiteness  which  characterizes 
every  American  form  of  Polar  Hare. 

In  Scotland,  Ireland  and  parts  of  Europe  and  Asia,  the  au- 
tumnal change  of  color  is  incomplete  in  the  Polar  Hares  which  in- 
habit the  more  temperate  parts  of  the  range  of  Lepus  timidia  of  the 
Old  World.  This  peculiarity  scarcely  assumes  the  dignity  of  a 
racial  or  geographical  character,  owing  to  its  inconstancy,  some  in- 
dividuals in  a  given  neighborhood  changing  to  a  pure  white  winter 
pelage  while  others  acquire  the  grayish-brown  or  hoary  dress  which 
was  named  canescens.  by  Nilsson,'*  for  the  Swedish  variety,  and  hi- 
bernicus,  by  Bell,'^**  for  the  Irish  animal. 

In  America  I  have  found  no  instances  which  may  be  said  to  be 
analogous  to  this  variation.  The  Newfoundland  Polar  Hare  reaches 
a  more  southerly  distribution  than  any  of  the  Old  World  forms,  but 
I  have  seen  no  specimens  nor  know  of  authentic  instances  of  its  fail- 
ing to  become  pure  white  in  winter,  unless  a  few  gray  hairs  on  the 
fore  part  of  the  ears  may  be  called  an  exception. 

The  number  of  skins  showing  intermediate  stages  of  the  molt, 
which  would  enable  me  to  outline  the  process  of  change  from  winter 

>"  Ofver.  Ved.  Akad.,  1844,  p.  1.33. 
20  Brit.  Quad.,  18.37,  p.  -341. 


358  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

to  summer  and  from  summer  to  winter  dress  is  very  small  in  the 
series  available,  and  those  which  I  have  seen  appear  to  differ  in  the 
manner  of  moltinfj;  from  that  outlined  by  Dr.  J.  A.  Allen  for  the 
American  Varying  Hare,  Lepus  amerieanus.^^  An  adult  female, 
taken  at  Bay  St.  George,  Newfoundland,  October  16th,  1895  (No. 
3,756,  Col.  of  E.  A.  &  0.  Bangs),  appears  to  be  undergoing  a  bleach- 
ing process  which  affects,  with  remarkable  uniformity,  every  part 
simultaneously.  There  is  no  ragged  appearance,  caused  by  the  pres. 
ence  of  patches  of  old  hair,  anywhere.  The  summer  fur  appears  to 
have  uniformly  about  half  fallen,  giving  place  to  a  growing,  but 
still  short,  under-fur  of  white,  which  will  speedily  lengthen  into  the 
mature  winter  fur.  The  feet  and  hinder  bases  of  ears  are  unmixed 
white.  The  leaden  gray  of  inner  flanks  and  lower  head  and  neck 
and  the  ashy-gray  head  are  little  changed  from  midsummer  shades, 
but  the  whole  back,  sides  and  ears  are  about  two  shades  lighter 
throughout,  owing  to  the  disposition  of  the  old  over  fur  and  the 
outgrowth  of  the  new.  There  are  no  specimens  in  the  series  illus- 
trating the  style  of  spring  molt. 

In  general  terms,  the  spring  change  of  more  southern  American 
examples  consists  in  the  acquisition  of  black  ears,  a  tawny  gray 
head  and  dark  ashy-gray  upper  parts,  including  the  chin,  throat, 
neck  and  breast ;  the  feet  and  belly  are  also  more  or  less  shaded 
with  gray  and  leaden  hues  but  the  greater  part  of  the  belly  and  tail 
remain  white.  This  diagnosis  applies  to  the  eastern  subspecies,  L. 
ardicus  bangsi,  and  in  great  measure  to  the  pallid  form  which  fre- 
quents the  southern  Barren  Grounds  west  of  Hudson  Bay.  In 
species,  L.  tschuktschorum  of  Alaska  and  northeast  Siberia,  the 
ears  are  marbled  blackish-brown  and  white,  and  the  upper  parts, 
head  and  neck  are  blackish-brown,  resembling  much  more  closely 
the  colors  of  the  Asiatic  and  European  than  the  American  type. 
In  typical  northern  arcticus  and  grcenlandicus  the  summer  coat 
never  (?)  attains  a  dark  appearance  except  in  the  young,  but  close 
examination  shows  a  greater  or  less  admixture  of  clear  gray  hairs 
over  the  upper  parts,  most  numerous  on  the  head  and  ears,  where 
it  is  generally  accompanied  by  a  tawny  suffusion.  In  some  in- 
stances these  gray  hairs  are  so  sparse  as  to  make  the  animal  prac- 
tically indistinguishable,  save  in  texture  and  density  of  fur,  from 
winter  specimens. 

2>Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  N.  Hist,  1894,  pp.  107-128. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  359 

So  far  as  I  am  able  to  determine,  there  are  no  secondary  sexual 
color  characters  in  the  Polar  Hares  of  America. 

The  young,  at  birth,  as  well  as  in  the  more  advanced  foetal  stage, 
are  as  dark  or  even  darker  colored  than  their  parents  in  full  sum- 
mer pelage.  In  grcenlandicus  they  are  fully  and  thickly  haired 
some  time  before  birth,  and  resemble  in  color  and  color  pattern 
much  faded  summer  skins  of  arctlcus  from  Great  Slave  Lake.  The 
inner  posterior  half  of  the  ears  is  white,  their  tips  and  inner  borders 
broadly  marked  with  black,  the  remainder  of  the  ear  rusty  gray. 
The  pelage  is  remarkably  long  and  well  developed  for  an  embryo. 
The  soles  of  the  hind  feet  are  as  dark  as  the  back,  their  uppers 
white.  The  fore-feet  and  the  tail  are  white  throughout.  With  in- 
creasing age,  the  young  of  the  northern  forms  assume  a  lighter  col- 
ored pelage  and  it  becomes  nearly  as  white  as  that  of  their  parents 
ere  the  winter  fur  begins  to  replace  it.  In  the  south  the  half-grown 
young  are  marked  very  similarly  to  their  adult  associates,  but  with 
a  stronger  fulvous  or  brownish  tinge  among  the  gray. 

HABITS. 

I  find  very  few  satisfactory  accounts  of  the  habits  of  any  of  our 
American  species  of  Polar  Hare.  The  literature  on  this  subject 
mainly  consists  of  brief  allusions  to  the  animal  by  Arctic  explorers, 
and  some  of  the  most  observing  of  these  seem  to  have  formed  a  very 
imperfect  acquaintance  with  the  animal.  Richardson's  account  in 
the  Fauna  Boreali  Americana  is  the  best  one  relating  to  Lepus  arc- 
ticus  of  the  interior  of  British  America.  He  says :  "  It  is  not  found 
in  wooded  districts,  hence  it  does  not  come  further  south  on  the 
line  of  the  Mackenzie  and  Slave  Lake,  than  latituds  64°.  It  was 
found  in  latitude  75°,  on  the  North  Georgian  Islands.  Although 
it  does  not  frequent  thick  woods,  it  is  often  seen  near  the  small  and 
thin  clumps  of  spruce  fir,  which  are  scattered  on  the  confines  of  the 
Barren  Grounds.  It  seeks  the  sides  of  the  hills,  where  the  wind  pre- 
vents the  snow  from  lodging  deeply  and  where,  even  in  the  winter, 
it  can  procure  the  berries  of  the  Alpine  arbutus,  the  bark  of  some 
dwarf  willows,  or  the  evergreen  leaves  of  the  Labrador  tea-plant 
(ledum).  It  does  not  dig  burrows,  but  shelters  itself  amongst  large 
stones  or  in  the  crevices  of  rocks,  and  in  the  winter  time  its  form  is 
generally  found  in  a  wreath  of  snow,  at  the  base  of  a  cliff".  The 
Polar  Hare  is  not  a  very  shy  animal,  and  on  the  approach  of  a 
hunter  it  merely  runs  to  a  little  distance,  and  sits  down,  repeating 


360  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896^ 

this  manoeuvre  as  often  as  its  pursuer  comes  nearly  within  gunshot. 
*  *  *  According  to  Indian  information,  the  Polar  Hare  brings 
forth  once  in  the  year  and  from  two  to  four  young  at  a  time." 

Respecting  the  Greenland  Hare,  Captain  Koldewey  of  the  Ger- 
man-Arctic Expedition  of  1869-70,  writes:-'  "The  European  hare 
is  remarkable  for  its  long  and  rapid,  hasty  flight.  The  Greenland 
Hare,  on  the  contrary,  sits  as  if  nailed  down  in  its  rocky  refuge, 
however  near  the  hunter  may  pass  to  him.  Sometimes  one  sees  the 
mountain  slopes  dotted  with  white  spots,  which,  from  their  motion- 
lessness,  might  be  taken  for  snow  ;  but  they  are  only  white  hares. 
They  are  about  the  size  of  our  own  hares,  but  their  flesh,  like  that 
of  the  Alpine  Hare,  is  insipid.  Hare  hunting  in  Greenland  often 
gives  rise  to  the  drollest  scenes.  Their  hearing  appears  to  be  even 
weaker  than  their  sight.  Payer  once  stood  near  a  hare  which  was 
startled  by  repeated  firing,  but  had  confined  its  flight  to  a  few  steps. 
The  creature  was  nibbling  the  moss  quietly.  Payer  took  out  his 
sketch  book  and  drew  it  in  all  the  different  positions  which,  in  its 
uneasiness  at  the  conversation  and  laughter  of  his  companions,  it 
assumed." 

This  relates  to  the  hares  of  northeastern  Greenland.  H.  W. 
Feilden,  in  the  Appendix  to  Nares'  Voyage  to  the  Polar  Sea,  thus 
describes  the  Hares  of  north  Grinnell  Land  :  "  The  Polar  hare  was 
found,  though  in  scanty  numbers,  along  the  shores  of  Grinnell  Land 
and  its  footprints  were  seen  on  the  snow-clad  ice  of  the  Polar  Sea, 
by  Captain  Markham  and  Lieutenant  Parr,  in  lat.  83°  10'  N.,  a 
distance  of  about  20  miles  north  of  the  nearest  land.  *  *  *  *  On 
February  14,  two  weeks  before  the  sun  reappeared  at  midday,  the 
temperature  minus  56°,  I  started  one  from  its  burrow,  a  hole  about 
four  feet  in  length,  scraped  horizontally  into  a  snowdi'ift.  I  have  no 
doubt  the  same  burrow  is  regularly  occupied,  as  this  one  was  dis- 
colored by  thefeet  of  the  animal  and  a  quantity  of  the  fur  was  sticking 
to  the  sides  ;  all  around,  the  hare  had  been  scratching  up  the  snow 
and  feeding  on  Saxifraga  opposUifolia.  Even  where  exposed  to  the 
wind,  this  hardy  plant  had  delicate  green  buds,  showing  on  the  brown, 
withered  surface  of  last  year's  growth.  The  hare  does  not  tear  up 
this  plant  by  the  roots,  but  nibbles  off"  the  minute  green  shoots. 
The  number  of  young  that  we  found  in  gravid  females  varied  from 
seven  to  eight,  which  is  much  in  excess  of  that  produced  in  Great 
Britain  by  Lepus  variabilis,  from  whicli  naturalists  have  found  dif- 


22 


Germ.  Arc.  Exp.,  Mercier's  transl.,  1874,  p.  483. 


1896.]  NATUEAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  361 

ficulty  in  separating  the  Arctic  species.  *  *  *  *  We  find  Lepus 
glacially  inhabiting  the  most  northern  land  yet  visited,  and  attain- 
ing its  normal  weight,  eight  to  ten  pounds,  under  apparently  very 
adverse  circumstances.  Still,  I  must  say,  it  is  sparsely  diffused,  and 
we  found  that  after  killing  a  pair  or  two  out  of  each  valley  that  af- 
forded any  vegetation,  the  race  seemed  to  be  extirpated  in  that  dis- 
trict." 

Referring  to  the  Alaskan  Polar  Hare,  Lepus  tscJmktschorvm,  Mr. 
E.  W.  Nelson  says  :'^  "  The  open  country  of  the  Yukon  delta  is 
their  place  of  greatest  abundance,  so  far  as  I  was  able  to  learn. 
There,  in  May,  1879,  I  found  thern  very  common.  The  snow  was 
nearly  gone,  and  while  travelling  along  the  small  channels  between 
the  islands,  in  the  pale  twilight  which  marks  the  nights  at  that  sea- 
son, we  saw  many  hares  playing  about  on  the  banks.  They  were 
often  in  small  parties  of  from  three  to  five  or  six,  and  were  not  very 
shy.  *  '1^  *  While  camped  in  this  vicinity,  at  that  time,  I  found 
them  to  be  almost  entirely  nocturnal  in  their  habits,  rarely  moving 
about  in  day-time,  even  during  the  gloomy  days,  when  the  sky  was 
obscured  by  dense,  low  lying  clouds.  Although  they  are  nocturnal 
in  their  habits,  they  see  very  well  in  the  day,  and  it  is  extremely 
difficult  to  surprise  one  in  its  form.  Usually  it  spies  the  hunter  be- 
fore he  gets  within  gunshot  and  leaves  the  spot  in  great  haste. 

"  During  most  of  the  year,  these  animals  are  essentially  solitary, 
but  during  April  and  May  they  gather  into  small  parties,  and  some- 
times as  many  as  a  dozen  or  more  may  be  found  on  a  single  hill- 
side." After  declaring  that  he  is  sure  this  hare  voluntarily  takes  to 
the  water,  and  crosses  streams  30  yards  in  width  in  its  wanderings, 
Mr.  Nelson  continues  :  "  In  severe  winter  weather  they  seek  the 
shelter  of  willow  or  alder  patches  on  the  slopes  of  sheltered  ravines, 
or  in  other  comfortable  situations,  but  as  a  rule  they  are  character- 
istic of  the  open  Arctic  barrens,  and  on  the  wide  expanse  of  deso- 
late snow,  their  tracks  are  among  the  few  evidences  of  life  the  trav- 
eller finds  in  crossing  the  Alaskan  tundras  in  winter." 

KEY  TO  SPECIES  AND  SUBSPECIES, 

Cranial  characters. 

I.  Upper  and  lower  incisors  strongly  and  regularly  curved,  meet- 
ing within  the  arc  of  a  circle  mutually  described  by  their  ex- 

«  Eep.  Nat.  Hist.  Col.  Alaska,  1887,  pp.  271-273. 
24 


362  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

posed  outer  faces.  Upper  incisors  rooted  ou  the  inferior  bases 
of  the  premaxillaries.  Diameter  of  upper  incisor  wider  than 
deep,  its  face  strongly  and  broadly  grooved. 

la.  Nasals  Compressed  and  narrowed  anteriorly  ;  bony  palate 
longer  than  width  of  postpalatal  fossa  ;  narrow  incisive 
foramina  terminating  opposite  anterior  alveolus  of  pm.  1  ; 
narrow  premaxillary  process  falling  short  of  base  of 
nasal ;  breadth  of  rostrum  ojjposite  bases  of  pm.  T  shorter 
than  distance  from  alveolus  of  W^_\  to  alveolus  of  poste- 
rior incisor;  total  length  of  adult  skull  never  exceeding 
100  mm.  (95  to  99  mm.),  molars  narrow,  rounded — 

arcticns. 
lb.  Similar  to  la —  hangd. 

Ic.  Nasals  broad,  equilateral,  flattened  ;  bony  palate  shorter 
than  width  of  postpalatal  fossa  ;  the  wide  incisive  fora- 
mina reaching  nearly  opposite  base  of  P5L^2;  broad  pre- 
maxillary process  reaching  to  or  beyond  base  of  nasal  ; 
breadth  of  rostrum  equal  to  or  greater  than  distance  be- 
tween alveolus  of  pm.  1  and  the  base  of  corresponding 
secondary  incisor  ;  total  length  of  adult  skull  always  ex- 
ceeding 100  mm.  (101  to  115  mm.)  ;  molars  very  broad 
and  angular —  tsehuktschorum. 

II.  Jaws  prognathous ;  upper  and  lower  incisors  meeting  at  angles 
of  35  to  50  degrees.  Upper  incisors  rooted  on  the  anterior 
floor  of  the  maxiliaries.  Diameter  of  upper  incisor  deeper  than 
wide,  its  slender  sulcus  filled  with  a  functional,  indurated,  stri- 
ate cementum  approaching  the  consistency  of  enamelled  dentine 
at  the  cutting  edge. 

2a.  Nasals  compressed  and  narrowed  anteriorly  ;  bony  palate 
shorter  than  width  of  postpalatal  fossa  ;  incisive  foramina 
reaching  opposite  anterior  alveolus  of  pm  J  ;  narrow  pre- 
maxillary process  falling  short  of  base  of  nasal  ;  breadth 
of  rostrum  opposite  bases  of  pm.  1  equal  to  or  shorter  than 
distance  between  the  base  of  pm.  1  and  the  apex  of  the 
incisive  foramina  ;  total  length  of  adult  skull  exceeding 
100  mm. ;  molars  broad,  angular,  very  massive  as  com- 
pared with  slender  incisors —  grcenlandicus. 

External  characters. 

I.  Size  medium,  length  of  hind  foot  \h  times  that  of  ear  from 
crown.  Tail  always  white.  Upjier  body  fur  in  summer,  dark 
tawny  gray  to  nearly  pure  white. 


1896,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  363 

la.  Summer  fur:    ears  black;    hack  and  sides  dark  gray; 

rump  blackish —  bangsi. 

lb.  Summer  fur  :  ears  grayish-black  ;    back  and  sides  hoary 

gray,  belly  and  vent  pure  white — (Interior  subspecies  ?) 

Ic.  Summer  fur  :    ears  grayish-white  ;  back,  rump  and  sides. 

white,  sprinkled  with  gray  ardicus. 

Id.  Similar  to  Ic —  grcenlandicus. 

II.  Size  very  large  ;    hind  foot  1|  times  as  long  as  ear  from  crown. 

Tail  dusky  above   in  summer.      Upper  body  fur  in  summer 

grayish  or  blackish-brown. 

2a.  Summer  fur :  ears  sooty  brownish-black  and  gray,  their 
posterior  margins,  white;  back  blackish  smoke-brown, 
becoming  grayish-brown  on  sides,  rump  darker — 

tschuktschoi'uni. 

Genus  LEPUS  Linna?us. 

Lepiis  Linnaeus,  Systema  Naturae,  1758,  p.  57.  (Type  L.  tiniidus  L.) 

1.  Lepus  aroticus  ''  Leach  "  Ross.     Baffin  Land  Polar  Hare. 

Lepiis  arctictis'Ros?,,  Ross'  Voy.,  8vo  ed.,  II,  1819,  appx.  iv,  p.  151.  Type 
from  lat.  73°  87^,  Baffin  Land,  southeast  of  Cape  Bowen. 

Lepus  glacialis  Leach,  Ibid  ( Under  Chap. 'Descr.  N.  Sp.  Anim.  Disc,  in  Voy. 
to  Arc.  Keg.'),  p.  170.     (Same  type). 

Lepus  timidiis  var.  arcHcus,  J.  A.  Allen,  Mon.  N.  Amer.  Rod.,  1877,  p.  288 
(in  part). 

Lepus  arcticus  "  Leach  "  Ross,  Rhoads,  Amer.  Nat.,  1896,  p.  252. 

Geographic  distribution. — Northern  Baffin  Land  and  the  Arctic 
Archipelago ;  intergrading  southeastward  into  subspecies  bangsi, 
and  south-centrally  into  a  gray,  pallid  race. 

Habitat. — Open  rocky  barrens  and  tundras,  preferring  in  sum- 
mer the  borders  of  thickets  ;  most  abundant  on  rocky  and  hilly  sea 
coasts  ;  always  avoiding  the  shelter  of  trees  or  bushes,  but  retreat- 
ing to  rock  crevices  for  escape  from  an  enemy. 

Color. — Summer  pelage  white,  interspersed  over  back  moie  or 
less  sparsely  with  long,  gray-black  and  brown-pointed  hairs,  but  not 
sufficiently  to  greatly  alter  the  prevailing  whiteness.  Ears  and  face 
grayer,  with  a  tawny  shade,  the  former  with  black  tips.  ^\^nter 
pelage  pure  white  everywhere,  except  tips  of  ears,  which  are  black. 
Summer  pelage,  in  more  southerly  districts,  darker,  intergrading 
into  subspecies  bangsi. 

Cranial  characters. — Total  length  of  skull  twice  the  greatest 
breadth.  Nasals  broad  and  flattened  posteriorly,  narrowed  and 
compressed   anteriorly,   their  greatest   breadth  2i   times  greatest 


364  PKOCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

length,  their  bases  reaching  behind  the  superior  prolongation  of 
premaxillaries.  Supraorbital  frontal  processes  widely  and  deeply 
indented  posteriorly,  highly  and  broadh'  arched  and  upraised  above 
the  frontal  plane.  Posterior  interorbital  constriction  tumid,  arched 
high  above  anterior  frontal  plane  and  wider  than  alveolar  length  of 
molar  series.  Upper  anterior  incisors  rooted  at  the  inferior  max- 
illo-preraaxillary  sutures,  the  termini  of  incisor  roots  marked  by 
decided  lateral  osseous  convexities  of  the  rostrum.  Incisors  broader 
than  deep  (transverse  exceeds  the  longitudinal  diameter),  the  ante- 
rior upper  pair  each  deeply  and  widely  grooved  by  a  single  sulcus 
on  the  inner  face.  With  the  skull,  minus  mandibles,  resting  on  a 
pilane,  horizontal  surface,  the  chord  of  the  arc  described  by  the  ex- 
posv?d  incisors  is  vertical  and  the  radius  of  this  arc  is  about  one- 
eight.h  (iVo)  ^^6  basilar  length  of  skull.^*  Lower  incisors  rootedi 
anterior  to  proTI.  Incisive  foramina  reaching  to  pm.  1,  suddenly 
broadening  and  then  contracting  at  base.  Palatal  bridge  longer 
than  width  of  incisive  foramina.  Palatal  foramina  opposite  divid- 
ing alveoJus  of  second  and  third  premolars. 

For  measurements,  see  table,  pages  374,  375, 

General  remarks. — As  only  one  specimen  of  the  Baffin  Land' 
Hare,  and  that  consisting  merely  of  head  and  neck  skin  with  the 
skull  of  a  j'oung  adult  animal,  has  come  to  hand,  it  is  impossible  to 
furnish  a  description  and  measurements  of  typical  adult  arcticus,  as 
compared  with  its  southeastern  subspecies,  bangsi.  The  descrip- 
tions of  older  authors  who  have  handled  summer  specimens,  how- 
ever, agrees  substantially  with  the  above  diagnosis.  The  skull, 
which  was  taken  from  the  above  mentioned  skin  by  myself,  I  have 
considered  typical  of  the  form  described  by  Ross,  and  on  this  basis 
rests  the  separation  of  the  Greenland  Hare  from  arcticus. 

Mr.  Ludwig  Kumlien,  referring  to  the  hares  of  south  Baffin 
Land,  states  that  "  Many  do  not  undergo  any  change  of  color  dur- 
ing summer,  and  I  doubt  if  it  be  more  than  a  partial  change  with 
any.  I  have  seen  pure  white  specimens  during  all  the  summer 
months,  and  occasionally  one  about  half  gray. ""^  In  a  communica- 
tion dated  Milton,  Wis.,  March  4,  1896,  Mr.  Kumlien  writes  me  : 
"  I  saw  no  gray  hares  at  any  season  and  I  was  told  at  Washington, 
by  Dr.  Emil  Bessel,  that  Capt.  Hall  made  [the  same]  observation 

^*For  a  comparison  between  the  cranial  and  external  characters  ot  arcticus 
and  timklus,  see  Amer.  Nat.,  1.  c,  pp.  252,  253. 
*^  Notes  on  Mam.  of  Cumb.  Sd.,  Smiths.  Misc.  Coll.,  No.  15,  1879,  p.  53. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  365 

as  regards  the  hares  of  Baffin  Land.  This  [statement]  was  included 
in  my  mss.  of  Bulletin  No.  15  [1.  c.]  and  crossed  out  by  the  final 
proof-reader,  leaving  my  bare  statement."  Mr.  Kumlien  brought 
four  specimens  of  Cumberland  Gulf  hares  to  the  United  States. 
One  of  these  (No.  12,946,  Sm.  Inst.),  a  skin  in  white  pelage,  lacking 
head,  is  the  only  one  remaining,  the  rest  having  been  lost  or  acci-^ 
dentally  destroyed  by  fire  at  the  Wisconsin  University. 

No  other  Baffin  Land  specimens  being  discoverable,  we  are 
forced  to  rest  our  assumptions  of  the  cranial  characters  of  the  hares 
of  that  region  on  the  single  skull  which  has  come  to  hand.  The  ap- 
parent discrepancy  between  the  dark  color  of  this  summer  speci- 
men and  that  reported  by  Mr.  Kumlien  in  the  above  quotations  is 
explainable.  An  examination  of  the  itinerary  of  the  Howgate 
Polar  Expedition  shows  that  Mr.  Kumlien  was  absent  from  Baffin 
Land  between  the  6th  of  July  and  the  31st  of  August,  which  more 
than  covers  the  short  period  in  "which  the  Polar  Hares  of  that  lati- 
tude retain  their  full  summer  pelage.  The  "  gray  "  phase  noted  by 
him  was  the  intermediate  condition  of  molt.  Cajjtain  Hall's  state- 
ment may  have  related  to  the  more  northern  form. 

Lepus  ardicHS  and  its  subspecies,  bangsi,  may  be  cranially  dis- 
tinguished from  timidus  of  Sweden  by  the  greater  relative  height 
and  breadth  of  skull  to  its  length,  by  the  upraised  anvil-shaped  su- 
praorbital processes  and  the  relatively  short,  broad  incisive  fora- 
mina. Taking  summer  specimens  of  southern  Sweden  and  Labra- 
dor, strictly  comparable  on  account  of  latitude,  the  external  charac- 
ters separating  arcticus  from  timidus  are  striking,  the  former  being 
dark  plumbeous-gray  above,  with  black  ears,  and  unicolor  white  tail, 
the  latter  rusty  brownish-black,  with  darker  ears  of  the  same  color, 
and  bicolor  gray  and  white  tail.  Typical  arcticus  undoubtedly  re- 
sembles closely,  in  summer  pelage,  the  hare  of  North  Greenland,  L. 
yrcenlandicus. 

Specimens  examined. — Baffin  Land,  Niatilik,  1  bead  and  neck 
skin,  with  skull.     Interior  form,  N.  "W.  Territory,  1  skin,  2  skulls. 

Lepus  arcticus  bangsi  Rhoads.  Newfoundland  Polar  Hare.  PI.  IX,  figs.  1,  2  <fe  3. 
PI.  X,  figs.  1  &  2. 

Lepus  arcticus  3««ifj?V  Rhoads,  Araer.  Nat ,  1896,  p.  253.  Type  from  Codry, 
Newfoundfound,  No.  3,752,  ad.  ?,  Col.  of  E.  A.  &  O.  Bangs.  Collected  by 
Ernest  Doane,  Aug.  3,  1895. 

Geographic  distribution. — Newfoundland,  northeastern  Labrador 
and  southern  Baffin  Land. 


366  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Habitat. — Hiding  by  day  in  rock  piles  on  the  coasts  of  Cumber- 
land Gulf.  Starting  up  out  of  range  and  running  up  the  mountain 
sides  to  escape  the  hunter. — Kumlien.  High  rocky  hills  of  New- 
foundland, descending  in  severe  winters  to  lower  grassy  levels,  but 
never  in  woodland.  Hiding  by  day  among  rocks  or  under  a  bush. 
— Doane. 

Color. — Adult  summer  pelage:  entire  back  and  upper  sides,  in- 
cluding neck,  shoulders  and  outer  surfaces  of  thighs,  uniform,  dark, 
grizzled  gray,  faintly  suffused  with  tawny.  A  pinch  of  hairs  from 
near  the  middle  of  back  shows  the  following  color  pattern  :  under 
fur  fine,  tawny-white  basally,  becoming  tawny  at  distal  end  ;  over- 
fur  white  or  black  at  base  in  about  equal  proportions,  the  coarser 
black-based  hairs  black  throughout,  the  finer  white-based  hairs 
with  terminal  half,  black,  interrupted  by  a  subterminal  band  of 
white  or  pale  tawny.  Lower  head  (including  chin),  lower  neck, 
nape,  forebreast  to  forelegs,  lower  sides,  edges  of  thighs  and  rump, 
dark,  pluhibeous  gray,  flecked  with  very  long,  slender,  white  hairs. 
Lower  breast,  belly,  vent  and  tail  white,  bordered  by  a  nearly  clear 
plumbeous  edging  which  separates  the  ventral  from  the  abdominal 
regions  and  joins  the  dark  rump  along  the  inside  of  thighs.  Inner 
anterior  border  of  hams,  sides  of  hind  feet  and  toes,  and  lower  sur- 
faces of  forelegs,  white,  thinly  intermixed  with  leaden.  Outer  sur- 
faces of  fore  and  hind  legs  and  superior  surfaces  of  the  feet,  tawny 
gray.  Ears  and  space  between  them,  black,  becoming  grayish  at 
base  and  with  a  narrow,  whitish  outer  posterior  margin  from  near 
base  to  tip.  Upper  head,  including  cheeks  and  nose,  grizzled  huffy 
gray,  appreciably  lighter  than  the  gray  shades  of  the  back.  Eye- 
lids wliitish,  edged  with  black.  Whiskers  weak  and  sparse,  white 
and  black  in  equal  proportions,  the  longer  black  hairs  tipped  with 

white. 

Winter  pelage:  entire  fur,  exclusive  of  ears,  white.  Extreme 
tips  of  ears,  black,  the  median  anterior  borders  of  ears,  grayish  ;  in- 
side of  ears,  blackish. 

Summer  young,  two-thirds  grown,  very  similar  to  adults  of  same 
season  but  more  fulvous  above,  the  ears  grayer,  the  basal  half  of 
back  hairs  leaden,  their  terminal  half  tawny  brown  with  gray  and 

black  tips. 

Cranial  characters.— '^ ot  distinguishable  from  those  already  given 

for  arcticns. 

Measyrementi^  (taken  in  flesh)  :    average  of  four  adults;    total 


26 


For  measurements  of  type  hangsi  see  table,  pp.  374,  375. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  367 

length  600  millimeters,  hind  foot  164;  ear,  from  crown,  84  ;  tail 
vertebrre  60.  Skull:  total  length  97  ;  greatest  breadth  49  ;  great- 
est diagonal  length  of  nasal  41  ;  greatest  length  of  mandible  76 ; 
greatest  breadth  of  mandible  47  ;  alveolar  length  of  upper  molar 
series  17.8. 

General  remarks. — This  form  has  the  most  southern  distribution 
of  the  Arctic  Hares  of  America.  It  is  found  about  eight  degrees 
farther  south  than  the  most  southerly  locality  inhabited  by  the 
Lepns  timidus  group  of  the  Old  World,  and  twelve  degrees  south  of 
the  southernmost  habitat  of  our  Alaskan  representative.  As  al- 
ready stated,  it  is  quickly  distinguishable  from  timidus  by  its  clear, 
blackish-gray  summer  coat  and  black  ears.  It  owes  its  separation 
from  arcticus  to  the  greater  average  temperature  and  humidity  of 
its  environment,  intergrading  with  the  parent  stock  across  the  bar- 
ren grounds  of  Baffin  Land.  From  L.  tschaktschonim  it  is  easily 
separable  on  account  of  smaller  size,  and  its  black  ears  and  bluish, 
grizzled  cast  contrast  decidedly  with  the  sooty-brown  shades  of  the 
Pacific  coast  animal.  From  the  form  inhabiting  central  British 
America  the  exact  amount  of  difference  is  not  determinable,  owing 
to  lack  of  specimens. 

Specimens  examined. — Newfoundland,  5  skins,  6  skulls  ;  Labra- 
dor, 5  skins,  10  skulls. 

Lepus  groenlandicus  Rhoads.      Greenland  Polar  Hare.      Pis.  VI,  VII  &,  VIII,  figs. 
1.  Pi.  X.  figs,  a,  6  &7- 

LepHs  ^lacialis  Peters,  Die  Zweite  Deutsch  Nordpolarf.,  II,  1874,  pp.  164- 
167,  pi.  2. 

Lepus grmilandiais  Rhoads,  Amer.  Nat.,  1896,  p.  254.  Type  from  Robert- 
son's Bay,*  lat.  78°,  Greenland.  No.  1,486,  ad.  ^  (?),  Col.  of  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 
Phila.     Collected  by  C.  E.  Hite  for  the  Peary  Relief  Exp.,  Aug.  2,  1892. 

Geografhic  distribution. — Greenland  and  Grinncll  Land.  Ice- 
land ? 

Habitat. — Everywhere  quite  numerous  in  southern  Greenland, 
but  preferring  secluded  places  and  the  snowy  mountains. — Fabri- 
cius.  Rocky  hillsides,  keeping  closely  to  snow  patches  in  summer. 
— Heilprin.  On  the  plains  and  mountains  at  all  seasons,  though 
never  numerous. — Dr.  Pansch  (fide  Peters  1.  c). 

Color. — Adult  summer  pelage  (of  type)  white,  suffused  anteriorly 
with  light  tawny  and  sparingly  sprinkled  with  gray  over  upper 
head  and  ears ;  back  with  scattering  black,  gray  and  tawny-tipped 
hairs.  Tip  of  ears  black.  Tail,  sides  and  lower  surfiices,  pure 
white.     Whiskers  black  and  white.      Half-grown  young  in  July 

*Misspelled  '  Robinson's  Bay '  in  the  original  description. 


368  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

and  August,  like  adult,  but  darker,  owing  to  greater  abundance  of 
gray  and  tawny  hairs  and  the  leaden  under-fur.  Appearance  of 
young  and  old,  at  a  distance,  at  all  seasons,  white.  A  pinch  of  hairs 
from  near  middle  back  presents  the  following  color  pattern  :  short 
under-fur  very  fine  and  silky  white  ;  over-fur  silky  white  with  rarely 
scattering  black-pointed  hairs  and  a  few  very  long  spinous  hairs 
with  the  basal  two-thirds  black,  and  the  terminal  one-third  white 
with  a  black  tip. 

Winter  pelage  (No.  1,047,  A.  N.  S.,  Phila.  Port  Foulke,  Green- 
laud)  pure  white  throughout,  except  the  black  ear  tij^s,  which  are 
mixed  with  white  hairs.    Whiskers  white. 

Cranial  characters.— ToioX  length  of  skull  twice  the  greatest 
breadth.  Nasals  narrow,  compressed,  their  greatest  breadth  half 
their  greatest  (diagonal)  length.  Superior  premaxillaries  barely 
reaching  bases  of  nasals.  Supraorbital  processes  more  greatly  de- 
veloped and  widely  flaring  than  in  arcticus.  Posterior  interorbital 
constriction  narrow,  its  width  considerably  less  than  alveolar  length 
of  upper  molar  series.  Upper  anterior  incisors  rooted  on  the  max- 
illaries  nearly  halfway  from  the  inferior  maxillo-preraaxillary  sutures 
to  pm.  1,  the  termini  of  roots  lying  within  the  inferior  lateral  plane  of 
the  rostrum,  but  forming  a  marked  interruption  of  the  inferior  ros- 
tral profile,  viewed  laterally.  Incisors  slender,  prolonged,  deeper 
than  broad  (transverse  less  than  longitudinal  diameter),  the  ante- 
rior upper  pair  in  adults,  multistriate,  the  normal  sulcus  of  inner 
face,  peculiar  to  all  other  members  of  the  genus,  being  so  filled  with 
a  calcareous  process  as  to  obliterate  the  depression,  the  face  of  tlie 
tooth  presenting  a  more  or  less  even,  rounded  and  enamelled  con- 
tour, marked  where  the  groove  normally  belongs  by  irreg- 
ular longitudinal  striae."      With  the  skull,  minus  mandibles,  resting 

''■'•  I  have  submitted  teeth  oi (jrrvnlandicus  to  my  friend  Dr.  J.  C.  Curry,  a  dentist 
of  Philadelphia,  for  examination  of  this  character.  He  defines  it  in  the  fol- 
lowing words  :  "  The  groove  on  the  face  of  the  tooth  is  filled  with  a  grayish, 
opaque,  homogeneous  substance,  which,  on  first  examination,  would  appear  to 
be  continuous  with  the  enamel.  As  it  approaches  the  cutting  edge  its  density 
increases  and  it  is  more  striated  in  appearance.  A  continued  maceration  of 
the  tooth,  however,  will  enable  the  operator  to  separate  this  structure  from 
the  enamel  groove  with  a  clear  line  of  cleavage,  and  with  care  the  part  may 
be  removed  entire.  In  the  alveolus  this  structure  is  not  contintious  through- 
out the  length  of  the  root,  but  seems  to  have  its  beginning  in  a  little  triangu- 
lar flap,  about  one  quarter  of  an  inch  from  the  entrance  of  the  tooth  pulp  into 
the  base  of  the  incisor.  Like  the  tooth  itself,  this  sulcus  filling  has  a  higher 
per  cent  of  inorganic  matter  as  it  approaches  the  cutting  edge,  varying  from 
about  40  per  cent  organic  at  base  to  10  per  cent  at  tip.  At  the  incisive  edge, 
its  composition  seems  more  closely  allied  to  that  of  the  cementum  of  the  osse- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  369 

upright  on  a  horizontal  plane,  the  chord  of  the  arc  described  by 
the  exposed  incisors  forms  an  angle  to  the  horizon  of  45  to  50  de- 
grees, and  the  radius  of  this  arc  is  about  one-fifth  ( l^o)  the  basilar 
length  of  the  skull.  Roots  of  lower  incisors  extending  to  base  of 
pra.  2.  Incisive  foramina  terminating  opposite  pm.  1  ;  widest  at 
or  near  base.  Palatal  bridge  shorter  than  greatest  width  of  in- 
cisive foramina.     Palatine  foramina  opposite  middle  of  pm-  3. 

Meaaurements.'^^ — Average  of  four  adults:  hind  foot  147  millime- 
ters ;  ear,  from  crown,  98.  Skull :  total  length  102  ;  greatest 
breadth  48  ;  greatest  diagonal  length  of  nasal  41  ;  greatest  length 
of  mandible  75  ;  greatest  breadth  of  mandible,  49  ;  alveolar  length 
of  upper  molar  series  19. 

General  remarks. — The  peculiar  incisor  dentition  of  this  species, 
so  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  compare  it  with  other  members  of  the 
genus  Lepus,  is  quite  unique,  not  only  in  the  obliteration  of  the  sul- 
cus of  the  upper  anterior  pair  but  in  the  extension  of  the  roots  of 
both  upper  and  lower  incisors,  the  former  being  planted  far  behind 
the  inferior  anterior  maxillary  border  and  the  latter  reaching  the 
bases  of  the  second  premolars. 

Externally  grwnlandicus  will  probably  not  be  found  to  differ 
materially,  even  in  its  summer  dress,  from  typical  northern  arctieus. 
Pabricius,  whose  experience  was  mainly  confined  to  southern  Green- 
land, twice  asserts  that  its  summer  coat  does  not  change  in  color 
from  that  of  winter.  Whether  green landicus  will  prove  to  be  en- 
tirely distinct  from  the  hares  inhabiting  Iceland  and  the  extreme 

ous  tooth  than  anything  else." 

While  a  formation  analogous  to  this  structure  is  seen  in  some  adult  speci- 
mens of  all  the  species  of  Polar  Hares  I  have  examined,  in  no  case  does  it  as- 
sume the  prominent  and  functional  character  which  it  invariably  attains  in 
adult  gnenlandi.cus.  In  the  others  it  manifests  itself  as  a  liomogeneous  de- 
posit along  the  bottom  of  the  sulcus  ;  in  the  Greenland  animal  it  is  a  laminate 
bistriate  structure,  having  its  inception  near  the  base  of  the  tooth  in  a  honey- 
combed hastate  flap  which  lies  within,  but  does  not  touch  the  sides  of  the  sul- 
cus and  which,  as  it  extends  toward  the  crown  of  the  tooth,  increases  in  den- 
sity and  calibre  and  is  closely  cemented  within  the  groove.  Un  the  exposed 
surface  of  the  incisor  it  often  overtops  the  contour  of  the  face  of  the  tooth 
and  widens  up  on  the  tooth  face  in  the  form  of  a  protuberant  lamina,  with 
from  one  to  three  irregular  longitudinal  striae  upon  its  enamel-like  surface. 

In  nearly  mature  foetal  specimens  of  gnenlandicus  there  is  not  the  slightest 
indication  of  this  incisor  groove  layer.  In  young  gra:nlandicus,  one  month 
old,  the  cementum  has  begun  to  form  closely  along  the  bottom  of  the  groove 
and  reaches  along  the  median  third  of  its  length  to  the  alveolar  edge  of  the 
premaxillary.  At  this  period  its  consistency  is  that  of  indurated  cartilage. 
In  specimens  apparently  but  lately  arrived  at  maturity,  the  sulcus  is  partly 
filled  to  the  tip,  and  in  very  old  skulls  the  groove  is  obliterated,  as  described 
above. 

^^For  measurements  of  type  gr«nlandicus,  see  tables,  pp.  374,  375. 


370  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

North  Polar  regions  westward,  is  an  interesting  problem,  which 
lack  of  specimens  prevents  me  from  answering.  That  it  is  radically 
distinct  from  any  American  or  Old  World  species  represented  in 
the  collections  at  my  disposal,  is  certain. 

Through  the  courtesy  of  Mr.  William  De  Winton,  of  the  British 
Museuu),  I  am  in  receipt  of  the  following  information  about  the 
hares  of  Grinnell  Land  :  "  The  collection  is  rich  in  specimens  of 
old  and  young  from  more  northern  localities,  and  those  from  Dis- 
covery Bay,  Lincoln  Bay,  etc.,  have  the  characters  [of  grcenlandi- 
cus]  mentioned  [in  your  letter],  viz. :  the  pi'ojecting,  narrow,  slightly 
grooved  incisors."  Accompanying  this,  Mr.  De  Winton  sends  a 
full  length  tracing  of  an  upper  incisor  from  a  skull  from  Lincoln 
Bay,  82°  7',  Grinnell  Land,  which  unmistakably  belongs  to  the 
grcenlandlcus  type.  He  further  says  that  these  incisor  "  characters 
are  not  so  marked  in  the  small  brown  young,"  and  that  "  Green- 
land specimens  are  more  curved,  so  far  as  our  collection  shows,  but 
they  seem  to  me  to  get  straighter  with  age,  till  the  angle  of  meeting 
is  considerably  less  than  a  right  angle."  In  all  particulars  Mr. 
De  Wiuton's  examinations  not  only  confirm  but  emphasize  my  own. 
Respecting  the  color  of  the  young,  which  he  incidentally  mentions 
as  "  brown,"  it  is  of  interest  to  note  that  while  hali-grown  individ- 
uals are  very  light  bluish-gi'ay  (nearl}'  white),  the  newly  born 
young  and  fully  developed  embryos  collected  by  Dr.  Hays  at  Port 
Foulke,  Greenland,  in  the  Academy's  collection,  are  quite  dark  and 
resemble  in  color  and  color  pattern  miniature  summer  specimens  of 
L.  timidus,  but  are  grayer.  The  embryos  are  densely  clothed  with 
long  hair.  The  number  of  specimens  in  each  litter  above  mentioned 
is  four.  Whether  the  full  complement  in  each  case  was  preserved, 
I  am  unable  to  state.  The  most  satisfactory  and  reliable  account 
of  the  Greenland  Hare  that  I  have  seen  is  the  one  by  H.  W. 
Feilden,  already  referred  to,  in  which  he  treats  of  these  animals  in 
Grinnell  Land  as  observed  by  the  Nares  Expedition.  The  speci- 
mens secured  by  Mr.  Feilden  are  those  referred  to  above  by  Mr. 
De  Winton,  which  I  have  identified  as  grcenlandicus.  Feilden 
found  the  young  of  the  year  to  have  become  nearly  pure  white  by 
the  end  of  July.  The  number  of  young  in  a  litter  was  seven  to 
eight.  Tracks  of  this  Hare  were  seen  on  the  Polar  Sea  in  lat. 
83°  10',  twenty  miles  north  of  the  nearest -land. 

Specimens  examined. — Port  Foulke,  Greenland,  1  mounted  skin 
and  skull,  1  skull  and  8  embryos  in  alcohol.  Robertson's  Bay,  Green- 
land, 3  skins,  7  skulls. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  371 

Lepus  tschuktschorum  (Xordquist).       Bering  Sea  Polar  Hare.      Pis.  VI,  VII  & 
VIII  figs.  3.     PI.  X,  figs.  3  cfe  -i. 

Lepus  iimidus  var  tschuktschorum  Nordquist,  Vega  Exped.,  II,  1883,  pp.  84 
-90;  tigs.  8,  9,  10,  p.  88.  Type  locality,  Pitlekaj,  lat.  67°,  Ion.  173°,  N.  E. 
Siberia. 

Geographic  didribution. — Northwestern  Alaska,  from  the  mouth 
of  the  Kuskoquim  River,  northward.'^     (Northeast  Siberia.) 

Habitat. — Aboiiuding  in  the  open  coast  country  and  in  the  inte- 
rior open  barrens  of  the  river  valleys  ;  seeking  the  shelter  of 
ravines  and  willow  scrub  in  severer  weather  but  often  found  at  such 
times  in  the  open  barrens. — Nelson. 

Color, — Adult  summer  pelage  (No.  3,780,  A.  N.  S.,Phila.,  Choris 
Peninsula,  Alaska)  ;  upper  surfiices  of  head  and  body,  blackish 
smoke  brown,  becoming  grayish-brown  on  the  sides  of  body,  neck 
and  head.  iMedian  line  of  back  smoky-black,  sparsely  tipped  with 
dull  tawny  ;  rump  purer  black.  Crown  to  nape  like  median  line 
of  back.  Region  around  eyes,  cheeks  and  nose  dull  rusty-black, 
grayer  on  lower  jaws  and  with  a  white  orbital  ring.  Chin  and  fore- 
throat,  lower  surfaces  of  limbs  and  feet,  lower  neck,  chest,  belly, 
vent  and  tail,  white.  Lower  abdominal  region  clouded  by  a  faint 
band  of  black  hairs.  Lower  neck  blackish-gray,  suffused  with 
tawny.  Upper  limbs  and  feet  tawny  gray,  the  hind  feet  nearly 
white.  Median  outer  surface  of  ears  sooty  brownish-black,  sprinkled 
with  dull  tawny,  tawny  gray  and  black  on  the  inner  surfaces,  and 
white  along  the  posterior  borders  ;  tips  of  ears  black  with  brown 
and  gra}'  intermingled.  Whiskers  white.  A  few  black  hairs  at 
upper  base  of  tail.  A  pinch  of  hairs  from  near  middle  of  back,  about 
two  inches  from  the  vertebral  line,  shows  the  following  color  pat- 
tern :  under-fur  coarse,  grayish-white  at  base,  brown  or  sooty  at 
distal  end.  Overfur  black,  with  or  without  a  subterminal  brown 
zone,  intergrading  into  black  spinous  hairs,  which  form  nearly 
twenty  per  cent  of  the  dorsal  pelage. 

Winter,  pelage  (No.  13,887,  Col.  Smiths.  Inst.,,  St.  Michaels, 
Alaska),  pure  white,  except  extreme  tips  of  ears,  which  are  black, 
■with  rusty-based  hairs.   Whiskers  white. 

Cranial  characters. — Total  length  of  skull  less  than  twice  its 
greatest  breadth.  Nasals  very  wide,  flattened,  nearly  as  wide  ante- 
riorly as  at  base,  their  greatest  breadth  more  than  half  their  great- 
est (diagonal)  length.     Superior  premaxillaries  heavy,  broad,  reach- 


■29 


See  Nelson,  Rep.  Nat.  Hist.  Col.  Alaska,  1887,  p.  271. 


372  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ing  behind  bases  of  nasals.  Supraorbital  processes  as  in  bangsi. 
Posterior  interorbital  constriction  narrow,  its  relative  width  to  al- 
veolar length  of  upper  molar  series  as  in  grcenlandicus.  Upper  an- 
terior incisors  rooted  as  in  arcticus,  their  roots  not  forming  decided 
maxillar  convexities,  owing  to  the  great  relative  width  of  rostrum. 
Form  and  position  of  incisors  as  in  arcticus,  but  heavier.  Molars 
much  heavier.  Incisive  foramina  as  in  arcticus.  Palatal  bridge  as 
in  grcenlandicus.     Palatine  foramina  as  in  grcenlandicus. 

Measurements. — Average  of  three  adults:  bind  foot,  176  milli- 
meters; ear,  from  crown,  96.  Skull:  total  length  103.5  ;  greatest 
breadth  54  ^  greatest  (diagonal)  length  of  nasal  42.5 ;  greatest 
breadth  of  nasals  23;  width,  at  tip,  of  upper  incisors  66;  alveolar 
width  of  upper  incisors  9.8  ;  alveolar  length  of  upper  molar  series 
20  ;  greatest  length  of  mandible  80  ;  greatest  width  of  mandible  51. 

General  remarks. — The  Polar  Hare  of  West  Alaska,  as  will  be 
seen  by  its  measurements,  represents  the  maximum  development  of 
the  Arctic  group  in  America.  Added  to  great  size  we  have  in 
tschuktschorum  several  cranial  and  external  characters  which  sepa- 
rate it  from  arcticus  and  its  eastern  subspecies  so  plainly  that  there 
is  little  doubt  of  their  specific  value.  Among  these  we  may  note 
an  approach  in  color  to  timidus  of  Sweden,  but  the  uniformly  broad 
flattened  nasals,  the  great  relative  width  of  skull  and  large  calibre 
of  the  dental  armature  and  the  anvil-shaped,  upraised  supraorbital 
processes  induce  me  to  specifically  distinguish  it.  A  skull  from 
Plover  Bay  (Smith.  Inst.,  No.  7,180)  should  be  classed  strictly  as 
tschuktschorum.  Reference  to  the  table  of  measurements  shows 
its  dimensions  to  be  of  the  largest.  The  relative  zygomatic  width 
is  narrower,  but  in  all  other  respects  the  Siberian  skull  is  typical  of 
the  Alaskan  as  contrasted  with  the  Scandinavian  and  Baffin  Land 
animals.  The  researches  of  Radde'"  and  Middendorff""  show  that 
the  Polar  Hares  of  east  Siberia  do  not  specifically  diflfer  from  the 
European  species  either  in  color  or  in  cranial  characters,  the  latter 
mentioning  the  occurrence  of  this  species  in  the  Stanovoi  Range 
which  extends  into  the  Tschuktschee  country.  Four  skulls  from 
Karatchatka,  in  the  collection  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  show 
beyond  question  that  the  small  timidus  type  of  Polar  Hare  inhabit- 
ing that  region  is  very  different  from  the  hare  which  frequents  the 

'"Reisen  im  Ost-Sibirien,  I,  1862,  pp.  207-211. 
''^  Sibirische  Reise,  II,  1853,  p.  115. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  373^ 

Plover  Bay  territory.  Brandt^^  says  that  "  Wossenessenski  ob- 
served the  true  form  of  Lepus  variabilis  iu  Kaintchatka  and  the 
coast  provinces  of  Okotsk  Sea,  to  be  entirely  white  as  far  as  the  tipa 
of  the  ears  ;  "  but  the  reference  is  of  little  value  except  in  regard  to 
the  distribution  and  winter  pelage  of  this  hare  in  the  maritime 
provinces  of  southeast  Siberia.  Schrenck^*  says  the  Amoor  Land 
hares  are  not  separable  from  the  Polar  Hare  of  Europe  except  that 
he  regards  the  southern  form  as  a  variety  of  the  northern,  applying 
to  it  the  name  canescens  of  Nilsson,  in  which  the  normal  change 
from  the  dark  summer  pelage  to  the  white  of  winter  presents  an  in- 
termediate gray  phase  of  coloration  which  is  retained  the  whole 
winter  season.  As  we  would  naturally  expect,  from  the  known 
character  of  the  west  Alaskan  fauna,  it  furnishes  us  not  only  with 
the  largest  of  our  American  Polar  Hares,  but  with  the  darkest  col- 
ored example  of  the  whole  group  of  Arctic  Leporidce,  I  have  yet 
seen. 

*  Nordquist's  description  of  the  Tscuktschee  Hare  leaves  no  room 
for  doubt  as  to  its  specific  identity  with  the  Alaskan  animal.. 
Owing  to  my  lack  of  summer  skins  of  this  hare  from  Siberia  it  is 
impossible  to  say  whether  the  Alaskan  animal  is  separable  as  a 
darker  race,  though  such  a  state  of  affairs  is  likely  to  exist. 

The  elaborate  table  of  measurements  given  by  Nordquist  confirms 
my  own  conclusions  regarding  the  great  size  of  the  Bering  Sea 
Hare,  the  relative  shortness  of  its  ears,  the  great  length  of  the  hind 
foot  and  the  strong  peculiarities  of  the  cranium. 

I  am  informed  that  this  hare,  in  common  with  some  other  species 
of  the  mammal  fauna  of  these  regions,  is  frequently  known  to  cross 
Bering  Strait  on  the  ice  in  the  winter. 

Specimens  examined. — Alaska,  3  skins,  4  skulls  ;  Siberia,  2  skins 
(winter  furs,  without  feet),  1  skull. 

^'Eeisen  im  Amur.-Lande,  1,  159,  p.  1845. 
^^  Bern.  Wirbelth.  Nord.  Eur.  Kussl.,  p.  44. 


374 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


Pi 

< 
K 

o 
iz; 

hH 
> 
< 
g 

s 

o 

hH 

a 


;25 
<1 
o 

h1 

o 

o 
hJ 

h:i 
& 
M 

CO 

> 

I 

>^ 
H 
tzi 

(^ 
O 

03 

H 

iz; 

M 

en 
(^ 


■2 
a 


•aiqip 
■uBra  JO  qip'Bajq  ^s81'B9J£) 


■8Tq 
■ipuBra  JO  q:)&naj  isajBajo 


•S8IJ8S  juiora 
jaddn  jo   mSnai  juioaAiy 


•sjosioni 
jaddn  jo  qipi.u.    JBioaAjy 


•SJOSIO 

■nt  J8ddn  jo  (do;  -ye)  qjpiM. 


■siBsun  JO  mpeajq  ;s3(>'Baj£) 


•siBSBn  JO 


•qjpcajq  ^sa^Bajr) 


•qjSnai  jb^ox 


•xag 


o 


.a 
o 

u 

'S. 


a 

»   m  S 

<u 

"■"  <u 

^ 

ZL-  M 

^   w  0 

i. 

-ots  S 

<1  ^  ^  ^  )^ 


■c:  a 


•■C-J3    o 

a  -  o 
5  5'S 

«5    a   O 
>-    >^    - 


i'  s. 


?s  a  a  s 


._  ~.  u  ^1  ^ 

-s;  "^  -5:  <;  ^  <o  <f 


^  J   %   5.  _=-«>-<.■<.<.  -^  -<i  -^    ^  ^. 
^;    .  ^,  tj  S  «'  «■  ««"«■«  «■  ~,  Z 

'S+J..t^;* 'Sec 

Of—  '^ 00 

-■^  =  ,5  *;  -  i'  -  -S'  fS  .c  .0  -  S 


^  .^     '^    "o    Vj 


a  a 


■  ^  u  >■  ff-  c- 


a  a  a 

11 .5 

•V.  -K,  -d 


"^^^i=~?>*^^^' 


'    -V,    ts.    ■»«   -v*     C 


ts.  -^  i,  ;i,  ^ 


»o  ^  ^  '^  ^  '^  ^  "?*  "^  '^ 


CO  t^  lo  ^  o  00  10 


18.8 
19.2 
19.1 

19 
17.2 
17.8 
17.8 

18 
17.4 

18 

18 
17.5 

19 

19 
20.7 
20.5 
19  7 

to  t^  l^        IC 

06  CO  =d  =C  0  00  00  00  QO  0  06  CC  00  C5  X  tH  S  oi 

_  c^  to  C<I  ^       ^ 

0     .          .0       0 

T-  0-.  m  m  r-  G-.  rt 

to  ■*  Tfi      CO  CO      c-j  a,      ^_                       ic « 
icio  10  »o  to  ic  to  to  ic  eo  0  :o      to  to  t^  to  to* 

to  to  t-CCOl  !N 

t^  to  to  CO  to  to'  a; 

10  lOlOiO  CCICCO  C^  XGO 


C^  Lt  iC         IC  00  li?         10         GO  C-1 

^^      Tf  3i  ^  ^  ^  2 -f  ;j  Tf  Tp  jc      ^i22'^ii^Sl^=^^^  ^ 


CO  c^       10       C^  L-^ 

>xcoQOcoo5C>iwa5'oaioo-<-'C^ixi'CN,-:cc-.-:oococ^o^ 


S^!z;5^toooooiOtoQOr^t^c^ootorc--o;o^r^ooO'^^oio 

OOOO05C5CS<^0^asfl^as^CTi05OOOOOOwi0saiOOa5 


0«DCh-0+ 


'SdO 


(►>  t*.  fc-,  t>>  C8 

ci  oi  e!  cs::" 

K   X    cc   u;      r 

"c  c  =  = :« 
0000^ 

EC     «     X     X        • 

"T  t^  t^ '^■5  ' 

0  Qj  0^  a;  ^ 

O    O   O    O  r~) 

«  e5  K  w    . 

.    .    .    ."C 

c  a  =  =  " 
=4  tS  cs  cs 

"a  c  a  a  a 

a;  OJ  Qj  a;  ^ 
t.  K  ^  t.  cj 

cooom 


V  0^  1^ 
bo  be  W) 
h  ^  M 
coo 
0)  a;  oj 

^J  *j  *^    - 

S  ?  s*  ^(Sma  ° 

>    S*    t-    >-hHHHf-i^_ 
CS    Oj    CS    Cj       .      -     .      . 

bxj  bjD  be  bjo-^  'O  TD  frt 
.ccacaaac 

-TO-s-r -d 
a  a 


-^      .2 


(H      --  —  .ii 


*  «  c3  rS 


ra  a  a 


t.  t.      ..a.^: 


b  h  h 

000 

'2'H'3'2?ooo 

M  cs  «  CS  .'I'  Jl'  <i^  «^ 

hJ  J  hj  hj  >?;  :z  ^;  Z 


t:  t  a  a  a  a  £  a'-"^"^ 


a  a  a  a  oj  a 

I  5  =  5  =  5:  o 

^^ 

Z:  - 


'J:   X 

-S  cs 

<:<:ZZ 


•0 

0 

te 

TI 

rn 

a* 

rt 

"^ 

01 

a> 

a 

3  V  v.u^  .. 

a  a  5 


o  rt  ^  s;g  : 


a  a 

q;  qj  OJ 
■C3~ 
aj  ?  ^  a  o  Qi  aj 
-So  5  «Ss  ^  & 


wcococo 


X    W    tf3    W 

bobebc  bo 

a  a  a  s 

cS  r!  tS  c« 


•no{;o8noo 


;z;;2;;z;;z;  .'":..  .0000^0 
.   .   .   .cocBcnccict'=a=y^^jcc    . 

WWW  a 


ftO. 
OQ     _        M   X 03 

^  hH  hH*  W  W  H-i  hH  hH  hH*  hH*  hH*  y^ 

.ojco  gjgjcocdcdxcoa)   . 


•jaquinn  aiiSoiBjBQ 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  FHILADELPHIA. 


375 


BODY  MEASUREMENTS  OF  TWENTY  ADULT  AMERICAN,  SIBERIAN  AND 
SCANDINAVIAN  POLAR  HARES. 


S3 

a 

a 

^ 

d 

g 
0 

i 

0) 
3 

a 

Locality. 

J5 

0 

g 

Remarks. 

S) 

^ 

s 

a 

& 

t4 
4) 

o 
"S 

"3 

0 

□ 

C3 

> 

'3 

0 

0 

w 

B 

£ 

H 

H 

1,486 

A.  N.  S. 

Greenland,  Robertson's  Bay.|  9? 

143;  97 

Type  o{  L.  ^^rceii/itnt/icus 

! 

(relaxed). 

1,520 

A.  N.  S. 

Greenland,  Robertson's  Bay. 

? 

144  100 

Dry. 

3,779 

A.  N.  S. 

Greenland,  Robertson's  Bay. 

520  1.55 

Skeleton  only  (ligamen- 

tous). 

1,047 

A.  N.  S. 

Greenland,  Port  Foulke. 

d 

148 

100 

Mounted  (dry). 

12,456 

S.I. 

Baffin  Land,  Niautilik. 

95 

Head  and  neck  (dry). 

14,151 

S.L 

Labrador,  Solomon  Is.,  Da- 

1 

vis  Inlet. 

145 

95 

Dry. 

14,149 

S.I. 

Labrador,  Ft.  Chirao. 

140 

102' 

Relaxed. 

14,79.3 

S.I. 

Labrador,  Ft.  Chimo. 

140 

100  53  Dry. 

1,187 

E.  A.&O.Bangs  Newfcxmdland,    Bay    Samt 

t    George. 

0 

586  170 

85  45|Meas.  in  flesh. 

3,7.52 

E.  A.  &  0.  Bangs  Newfouudland,  Codry. 

§ 

626  160 

8563  Type  ot  L.  a.  bangsi. 

3,754 

E.  A.  &  0.  Bangs  Newfoundland,    Bay    Saint 

1 

George. 

? 

603  167 

85,67 

Meas.  in  flesh. 

3,756 

E.  A.  &  0.  Bangs  Newfoundland,    Bay    Saint 

George. 

583  159 

82 

65  Meas.  in  flesh. 

3,780 

A.  N.  S. 

Alaska,  Kotzebue  Sound. 

180 

98 

Relaxed. 

13,886 

S.  I. 

Alaska,  St.  Michaels. 

? 

175 

95 

Dry. 

13,887 

S.I. 

Alaska,  St.  Michaels. 

d 

173 

95 

Dry. 

Vega  Exp. 

N.  E.  Siberia,  near  Pitlekaj. 

9 

747  179 

110 

75  Typical  L.  tschuktschor- 

1 

um,  tide  Nordquist. 

Vega  Exp. 

N.  E.  Siberia,  near  Pitlekaj. 

d 

720  170 

100 

80 

Typical  L.  tschuktscltor- 

um,  fide  Noruquist. 

408 

S.L 

Sweden,  near  Stock liolm. 

9 

165 

114 

Relaxed. 

409 

S.L 

Sweden,  Helsingland. 

^ 

165 

108 

Relaxed. 

411 

S.L 

Sweden,  Hellestad. 

d 

160 

112 

Relaxed. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 
Plate  VI. 

Fig.  1.  Lepxis  groenlandiciis^hodidis,.     Robertson's  Bay,  Greenland. 

(Topotype,  No.  3,779,  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.). 
Fig.  L  Lepustimiduslj.     Near  Stockholm,  Sweden.  ^No.  408,  U.S. 

Nat.  Mus.). 
Fig.  3.  Lepus   tschuktschorum    (Nordq.).      St.   Michael's,   Alaska. 

(No.  1,588,  U.  S.  Nat.  Mu.s.). 

Plates  VII  &  VIII. 

Figs.  1,  2  and  3.  Inferior  and  sujjerior  views  of  the  same  skulls  fig- 
ured in  Plate  VI,  in  the  order  there  named. 

Plate  IX. 

Figs.  1,  2  and  3.  Lateral,  superior  and  inferior  views  of  Lepus  arc- 
ticua  bangsi  Rhoads.  Codry,  Newfoundland.  (Type,  No. 
3,752,  9  .     Col.  E.  A.  and  O.  Bangs). 


376  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Plate  X. 

Figs.  1  and  2.  Lepiis  arcticus  bangsi  Rhoads.  (Type).  Mandible 
and  super  anterior  view  of  rostrum. 

Fig.  3.  Lejms  tsckuktschorum  (Nordq.).  (No.  1,588,  1.  c).  Man- 
dible. 

Fig.  4.  Upper  incisor  typical  of  tiniidi(s  and  arcticus  types.  (From 
a  specimen  of  Alaskan  L.  tschuktschorum). 

Fig.  5.  Lepus  grcenlcmdicus.     (No.  3,779,  1.  c).     Upper  incisor. 

Fig.  6.  Lepus  g7-cenlandicus.     (No.  3,779,  1.  c).     Mandible. 

Fig.  7.  Lepus  gnenlandicus.  (No.  3,779,  1.  c).  Super  anterior  view 
of  rostrum. 

Fig.  8.  Lepus  timidus  L.     (No.  408,  1.  c).     IMandible. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  377 


July  7. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Thirteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  New  and  little-known  Mammalia  from  the 
Port  Kennedy  Bone  Deposit,"  by  Edward  D.  Cope,  was  presented 
for  publication. 


July  14. 

Mr.  Charles  Morris,  in  the  Chair. 

Fourteen  persons  present. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  publication : — 
"Insular  Landshell  Faunas  as  illustrated  especially  by  the  data 

obtained  by  Dr.  G.  Baur  in  the  Galapagos  Islands."     By  William 

Healey  Dall. 

"  New  Species  of  Fungi  from  various  localities."   By  J.  B.  Ellis 

and  B.  M.  Everhardt. 


July  21. 
Mr.  Charles  Morris,  in  the  chair. 
Eleven  persons  present. 


July  28. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Fifteen  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled,  "  The  Hemipenes  of  the  Sauria,"  by  Edward 
D.  Cope,  was  presented  for  publication. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


25 


378  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


NEW  AND  LITTLE  KNOWN  MAMMALIA  FROM  THE  PORT  KENNEDY 

BONE  DEPOSIT. 

BY  E.  D,  COPE. 

The  notes  contained  in  tiae  following  pages  are  based  on  mate- 
rial acquired  by  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia 
from  the  locality  above  mentioned,  and  are  preliminary  to  a  com- 
plete and  illustrated  report  which  I  hope  to  be  able  to  publish  after 
a  full  investigation  of  all  accessible  material.  This  paper  extends 
and  modifies  the  conclusions  communicated  to  the  Academy  at  the 
meeting  of  December  5th,  1895,  where  a  general  survey  of  the  results 
was  given.  After  a  fuller  study  of  the  material  presented,  I  have 
been  compelled  to  reduce  the  relative  number  of  existing  species 
whose  remains  have  been  recovered.  While  the  total  number  of 
species  of  mammalia  is  thirty-eight,  the  number  of  existing  species 
is  only  six.      They  are  as  follows  : 

Erithizon  dorsatmn  L. 

Castor  fiber  L. 

Lepus  sylvaticus  Bachm. 

Ursus  americanus  L. 

Fells  eira  Desm. 

Lynx  rufus  Guld. 

The  remains  of  birds  are  not  abundant,  and  consist  chiefly  of  a 
species  of  turkey  (Meleagrls).  Of  reptiles  there  are  a  snake  of  the 
genus  Zamenis  and  three  species  of  turtles.  One  of  the  latter 
seems  to  be  identical  with  the  existing  Clemmys  insculpta  Lee. 
while  the  others  are  apparently  new.  One  is  a  large  form,  perhaps 
referable  to  Clemmys,  and  the  other  is  a  box  tortoise. 

BRUTA. 

Megalonyx  wheatleyi  Cope. 

This  species  was  extremely  abundant  at  the  period  when  the  fissure 
was  open,  fragments  of  at  least  sixty  individuals  having  been  ob- 
tained. The  species  is  uniformly  smaller  than  Al.jeffersonii, and  diflTers 
from  it  constantly  in  the  form  of  the  canine  molars.  Material  for 
determination  of  the  cranial  characters  has  been  found. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  379 

Study  of  the  specimens  shows  that  M.  dissimilis  Leidy  was  founded 
on  inferior  canine  molars  of  M.  jeffersonii,  and  that  the  teeth  so 
named  by  me  are  the  corresponding  teeth  of  M.  xvheatleyi.  M. 
sphenodon  was  founded  on  teeth  of  young  individuals  of  71/.  wheat- 
leyi.     M.  loxodon  and  M.  tortulus  are  sustained  as  distinct. 

GLIRES. 

Anaptogonia  hiatidens  Cope.     Proc.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc,  1871,  p.  91,  fig.  18. 

I  have  described  from  the  Wheatley  collection  several  species  al- 
lied to  or  belonging  to  the  voles,  and  in  this  paper  I  add  two  others. 
These  forms  are  referable  to  those  genera,  which  are  defined  as  fol- 
lows : 
Pulp  cavity  and  lateral  grooves  closed  below ;  teeth  rooted  ; 

Anaptogonia  Cope. 
Lateral  grooves  and  pulp  cavities  open  below  ;  no  roots  ; 

MicROTUs  Selys. 

The  first  term  in  the  Microtine  series  of  genera  is  the  genus  Anap- 
togonia, where  the  crowns  of  the  molars  are  short  at  maturity,  and 
there  are  rather  elongate  roots.  This  is  naturally  the  primitive 
genus,  and  it  is  interesting  now  that  two  fossil  species  referable  to  it 
have  been  discovered.^ 

But  one  species  of  Anajjtogonia  has  been  obtained  from  the  cave 
formations  of  this  country,  Anaptogonia  hiatidens  Cope.  It  is  rep- 
resented by  two  series  of  the  inferior  molars  of  the  right  side,  a  first 
inferior  molar  separate,  and  some  superior  molars.  The  prism-for- 
mulse  of  these  teeth  are  as  follows  :  (1)  1  six-lobed  |  1  ;  (2)  |  1  ; 
(3)  111.  The  first  molar  is  larger  than  both  of  the  others  together. 
Its  triangles  |  are  isolated,  but  anterior  to  these,  one  on  each  side  is 
well  defined,  but  the  dentine  is  continuous  with  that  of  the  anterior 
lobe.  This  lobe  consists  of  two  prominent  basal  loops,  and  two  less 
prominent  terminal  rounded  lobes,  all  unsymmetrical.  There  are 
thus  six  keels  on  each  side  of  the  crown  and  a  rounded  front  bor- 
der. The  triangles  of  the  M.  ^  are  acute,  and  the  anterior  of  the 
opposite  sides  are  not  fully  separated  from  each  other,  a  strip  of 
dentine  connecting  them.  In  the  M.  ^  the  triangle  of  one  side  is 
less  developed  than  the  other,  and  the  one  extremity  of  the  last  col- 
umn is  smaller  than  the  other,  forming  rather  a  curved  process  of 
a  terminal  triangle  of  the  opposite  side.  The  pulp  cavity  is  well 
enclosed  below,  and  the  two  roots  are  rather  small  and  divergent. 

^See   Merriam,   North    American  Fauna,  No.   2,  1889,  p.  28;  On  anew 
Genus  and  Four  new  Species  of  Arvicolina\ 


380  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

As  compared  with  A.  rutila  of  the  northern  parts  of  the  earth, 
this  species  has  double  the  linear  dimensions  of  the  teeth. 

Measureynents.  m.m. 

C  longitudiual  of  crown  ;  6 

Diameters  of  M.  y  I  anteroposterior  ;  4 

( transverse  posteriorly  ;  1.6 

J  longitudinal  of  crown  ;  5 

anteroposterior ;  2 

transverse  posteriorly  ;  1.5 

(  longitudinal  of  crown  ;  5 

Diameters  of  M.  ^  <.  anteroposterior  ;  2 

( transverse  posteriorly  ;  1 

The  teeth  of  the  second  specimen  are  a  little  larger  than  those 
above  measured.  They  are  in  a  decayed  jaw,  with  the  incisor  in 
place,  and  they  agree  with  the  types  in  all  details,  excepting  only 
that  the  external  column  of  the  anterior  lobe  is  not  grooved. 

The  first  inferior  molar,  which  was  originally  described  and  fig- 
ured, is  peculiar  in  the  failure  of  the  anterior  triangles  to  isolate 
themselves  from  each  other.  This  character  turns  out  to  be  incon- 
stant, as  in  two  other  corresponding  teeth  the  triangles  are  closed. 
The  name  Anaptogonia  was  applied  to  the  species  in  a  subgeneric 
sense,  and  although  based  on  a  worthless  character,  must,  under  the 
rules,  be  retained.  It  antedates  the  Evotomys  of  Cones,  which  was 
proposed  in  1874  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  p.  186,  for  voles  with  rooted  molars. 

Anaptogonia  cloacina  Cope  sp.  nov.    ^ 

Crowns  prismatic,  the  common  pulp  cavity  with  lateral  walls 
which  close  the  lateral  grooves,  but  do  not  close  the  pulp  cavities  ; 
no  roots. 

The  dentition  of  this  species  is  that  which  is  regarded  by  G.  S. 
Miller  as  that  of  the  immature  stage  of  the  species  which  were  termed 
by  Merriam  Phenacomys.  I  do  not  see  that  this  dentition  can  be 
distinguished  from  that  of  Anaptogonia.'^ 

Two  individuals  of  this  species  are  indicated  by  the  specimens 
preserved  by  Mr.  Mercer.  These  include,  the  first,  the  M.  ^  and 
M.  -  ;  the  second,  the  M.  i  and  M.  ^.  As  usual  in  this  group, 
the  molars  diminish  in  size  posteriorly.  The  triangle  formulae  are  : 
M.  -L,  1  I ;    M.  ^,  1  ^  ;    M."^,  1  ^+3  lobes. 


2  North  American  Fauna,  No.  12,  1896,  p.  40. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  381 

In  the  M.  i  the  triangles  of  one  side  are  acute  angled  ;  and  of  the 
other,  obtuse-angled.  The  posterior  triangle  presents  an  angle  pos- 
teriorly as  well  as  laterally.  In  the  M.  ^  the  same  characteristics 
exist,  with  the  addition  that  the  anterior  (terminal)  triangle  has  its 
acute  column  pinched  together,  but  not  so  as  to  exclude  the  dentine. 
In  the  M.  -  the  entering  angle  (groove)  of  one  side  enters  the  tri- 
angle of  the  other  side  opposite  to  it,  so  as  to  destroy  its  triangular 
character.  The  second  triangle  of  the  same  side  is  also  reduced  by 
the  deep  inflection  of  the  opposite  groove.  Opposite  the  apex  of 
the  second  groove,  a  rudiniental  third  triangle  is  present  in  the  form 
of  the  section  of  a  keel  of  the  surface.  This,  I  reckon  as  one  of  the 
three  divisions  of  the  terminal  lobe.  The  other  two  are  not  well 
distinguished,  one  opposite  to  the  keel  just  mentioned  is  an  acute 
angle,  and  the  terminal  one  is  strongly  convex.  Thus  on  this  tooth 
there  are  three  keels  on  one  side  and  four  on  the  other.  The  ante- 
rior (terminal)  column  is  flattened.  Excepting  on  the  M.  ^,  all  the 
triangles  are  well  isolated. 

Measurements.  m.  m. 

f  longitudinal ;  7.5 

Diameters  M.  ^  sp.  no.  1  ^  anteroposterior ;  3.3 

1^  transverse  ;  2 

f  longitudinal ;  6 

Diameters  M.  ^  sp.  no.  2  \  anteroposterior  ;  2.7 

i^  transverse  :  2 

f  longitudinal ;  5.5 

Diameters  M.  ^  sp.  no.  2  \  anteroposterior  ;  3 

(^transverse;  1.7 

The  walls  of  the  common  pulp  cavity  are  broken  off"  in  most  of 
the  teeth  of  this  species  above  described,  but  portions  remain  in  most 
of  them,  and  in  the  M.  -  they  are  so  far  perfect  as  to  show  that  the 
pulp  cavity  is  not  closed  below  as  in  Evotoviys. 

Miorotus  diluvianus  sp.  nov. 

The  numerous  species  of  the  genus  Microtus  are  distinguished 
into  groups  by  various  characters,  e.  g.,  those  of  the  molar  teeth,  of 
the  size  of  the  ears,  tail,  etc.  The  extinct  species  can  be  most  read- 
ily determined  by  dental  characters,  and  as  these  are  in  all  the  spe- 
cies less  matters  of  proportion,  and  more  a  question  of  the  number 
of  parts,  they  are  to  be  preferred  as  possessing  greater  fixity. 
Thanks  to  the  excellent  work  of  Blasius  on  the  Mammalia  of 
Europe  (1859),  it  is  possible  to  determine  the  relation  of  the  Amer- 


382  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ican  species  to  the  types  of  the  divisions  proposed  by  European 
authors.       I  am  also  much    indebted    to    my  friend,    Mr.    S.   N. 
Rhoads  for  the  opportunity  of  examining  skulls  of  a  number  of  rare 
North  American  species,  and  especially  those  described  by  himself 
from  the  Pacific  coast. 

The  species  differ  as  to  the  number  of  triangles  in  the  first  inferior 
premolar.  There  is,  however,  some  lack  of  constancy  in  the  relations 
of  the  anterior  triangles  to  the  treffle  so  that  I  have  depended 
rather  on  the  characters  of  the  second  molars  in  both  jaws  for  con- 
venience of  definition  of  the  larger  groups.  Thus,  in  the  species  of 
the  M.  pinetorum  group,  the  last  two  triangles  on  one  side  fuse  to  a 
median  position  similar  to  that  of  the  first  column.  In  the  other 
groups,  where  this  tooth  has  two  triangles  on  each  side,  the  second 
superior  molar  differs  in  the  number  of  its  triangles.  There  are  al- 
ways two  on  the  external  side  ;  but  the  posterior  outer  may  be  pro- 
longed to  the  inner  side,  or  this  prolongation  may  be  cut  off  into  a 
distant  triangle.  These  divisions  include  the  following  species  : 

A.  Second  inferior  molar,  triangles,  |  1. 

1.  Second  superior  molar,  triangles,   1    §,  Agricola  Blasius.      M. 

agrestis  Europe. 

2.  Second  sup.  molar  triangles,  111,  Myonomes  Raf.,  M.  riparius, 

E.  N.  Amer. ;  M.  principalis,  N.  W.  N.  Amer. 

3.  Second  sup.  molar  triangles,  1  f ;  Morof  »s  Selys  (=Hemiotomys 
Seljs,  Paludicola  Bias.,  Tetramerodon  Rhoads).  31.  amp  hi  bins ; 
M.  nivalis;  M.rattieeps;  31.  campedris ;  3I.arvalis;  31.subterra- 
neus;  31.  savii,  Europe;  31.  xaniJiognathus ;  31.  fownsendii;  M. 
arvicoloides,  N.  America  ;  31.  speothen  ;  3f.  sigmodus ;  31.  invo- 
lutus;  31.  diluviami-s  Extinct,  N.  Amer. 

A  A.  Second  inferior  molar,  triangles,  1  t  1. 

4.  Second  super,  molar,  triangles,  1  f,  Pitymys  McMur.  31.  pine- 
iorum,  N.  Amer.  ;  3J.  didelta,  Extinct,  N.  Amer. 

The  large  size  of  3Iicrotus  diluvianus  Cope  distinguishes  it  from 
all  the  extinct  and  recent  American  members  of  the  genus.  It  is 
only  represented  by  the  M.  i-^  of  both  sides,  so  that  many  of  its 
characters  remain  to  be  discovered.  The  triangle  formula  of  these 
teeth  is  M.  i  1  I,  M.  ^  1!.  In  both  molars  the  triangles  are  acute 
and  are  well  closed,  and  the  posterior  one  presents  an  angle  poste- 
riorly. The  lateral  keels  are  |  and  |.  The  valleys  are  wide  open  below. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  383 

in.  m. 

f  longitudinal ;  9 

Diameters  M.  ^  ■{  anteroposterior  ;  3.75 

(^transverse;  2.50 

( longitudinal  ;  7.5 

Diameters  M.  ^  -j  anteroposterior  ;  3 

[  transverse ;  "                            2.2 

Miorotus  speothen  Cope.  Proceeds.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc,  1871,  p.  87,  fig.  13.  Arvicola 
(Pitymyg)  tetradelta,  1.  c,  1871,  pp.  87-8,  fig.  14. 

Arvicola  tetradelta  was  founded  on  the  M.  i  and  ^  of  an  in- 
dividual of  smaller  size  than  the  types  of  A.speothen,  but  not  other- 
wise different. 

The  species  Microtus  involutus  from  the  Port  Kennedy  deposit  is 
allied  to  M.  sigmodus,  while  M.  didelfa  is  more  nearly  related  to 
M.  pinetorum. 

CARNIVORA. 

TJrsus  haplodon  sp.  nov.  Ursus  jiristinus  Leidy,  Cope,  Proceeds.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc, 
1871,  p.  96,  not  Arctodis priatinus  Leidy,  Proc.  Acad.  Philada.,  185-1,  90  ;  Holmes, 
Postpliocene  Foss.  So.  Carolina,  1860,  115,  pi.  xxiii,  figs.  3-4. 

There  are  contained  in  the  Academy's  collection,  remains  of 
thirty-six  individuals  of  this  large  bear  from  the  Port  Kennedy  fis- 
sure, and  parts  of  several  others  are  included  in  the  Wheatley  col- 
lection. Study  of  this  material  has  led  me  to  the  conclusion  that 
Ursus  pristinus  of  Leidy  is  a  distinct  though  allied  species.  The 
latter  was  founded  on  a  single  tooth,  the  first  inferior  true  molar  of 
the  left  side.  This  tooth  cannot  now  be  found,  but  Leidy  has  given 
a  figure  which  is  of  much  excellence  from  an  artistic  point  of  view, 
and  judging  from  other  figures  in  the  same  Avork,  is  probably  trust- 
worthy, especially  as  it  corroborates  the  description  in  every  par- 
ticular. I  should  have  hesitated  to  distinguish  the  present  animal, 
however,  had  it  not  been  that  the  Port  Kennedy  material  includes 
fourteen  teeth  from  the  same  position  in  the  jaw,  three  of  which  are 
in  the  Wheatley  collection.  These  all  agree  closely  and  differ 
from  Leidy's  animal. 

Leidy  notes  that  in  U.  pristinus  the  anterior  width  of  the 
tooth  exceeds  the  posterior,  and  the  figure  confirms  this  statement. 
In  U.  haplodon  the  extremities  of  the  crown  are  of  equal  width. 
The  grinding  surface  of  the  crown  is  in  U.  pristinus  rough  with 
tubercles,  while  it  is  smooth  in  U.  haplodon.  This  character 
might  be  supposed  to  be  due  to  the  attrition  of  use,  but  it  is  uni- 
versal in  the  teeth  of  TJ.  haplodon  without  regard  to  age.  The 
trigon  in    U.  pristinus  is  triangular  ;  in  U.  haplodon  it  is  a  semi- 


384  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

circle.  The  apex  of  the  triangle  is  in  U.  pristinus  internal,  and 
it  is  split  by  a  fissure  which  separates  paraconid  from  metaconid. 
In  U.  haplodon  the  paraconid  is  wanting.  In  this  respect  U. 
pristinus  more  resembles  the  modern  bears.  I  suspect  that  U.  pris- 
tinus is  distinct  from  U.  haplodon,  but  of  the  same  group ;  more 
approaching  the  typical  Ursi.  It  is  of  smaller  size,  about  equaling 
the  grizzly. 

Ursns  haplodon  belongs  to  the  American  type  of  the  Plistocene 
and  present  ages,  which  is  distinguished  from  the  typical  Ursi  by 
the  greater  development  of  the  sectorial  part  of  the  first  inferior 
true  molar.  This  is  due  to  the  more  anteroposterior  direction  of  the 
paraconid,  the  larger  size  of  the  protoconid  and  the  smaller  size  of 
the  metaconid.  The  tooth  makes  a  sensible  approach  to  that  of 
Hyctnarctos.  To  this  group  belong  the  following  species,  and  they 
diflfer  in  the  following  ways  : 

I.  Superior  premolars  crowded,  overlapping.  (South  American.) 
Large  species  ;  U.  ornatus  Cuv.,  U.  bonaerensis  Gerv. 
Smaller  species  ;  U.  brasiliensis  Linn. 

II.  Superior    premolars    uninterrupted,   not   overlapping.      (Cali- 
fornian.) 

Muzzle  very  short ;  U.  sirnus  Cope. 

III.  Superior  premolars  spaced.     (E.  N.  America.) 

Muzzle  moderate ;  U.  haplodon  Cope. 

Where  U.  pristinus  should  be  placed  in  this  series  can  only  be 
ascertained  by  future  discovery.  The  three  species  first  named 
are  separated  from  Ursus  under  the  name  of  Treniardus  (Gerv- 
Arctotherium  Brav.),  as  the  humerus  exhibits  an  entepicondylar 
foramen.  It  is  not  known  whether  the  last  two  species  possess  this 
character  or  not. 

A  conspicuous  character  is  common  to  the  living  Tremardus 
oDiatus  and  Ursvs  (J  Tremardus)  haplodon,  which  is  not  present  in 
Tremardus  bonaerensis  of  the  Pampean  beds.  There  are  two  mas- 
seteric fossae  of  the  mandible,  which  are  separated  by  a  crest  which 
extends  obliquely  downward  and  backward  from  below  the  coro- 
noid  process. 

The  size  of  the  teeth  of  this  species,  as  well  as  that  of  the  jaws 
preserved,  exceed  the  average  dimensions  of  the  grizzly  bear 
{Ursus  horribilis).      U.   haplodon  was  evidently  one  of  the  most 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  385 

formidable  of  its  genus,  and  it  probably  found  an  abundant  supply 
of  food  in  the  sloths  of  the  genus  Megalonyx,  which  were  the  most 
abundant  of  the  contemporary  mammalia. 

Osmotherium  spelaeum  Cope. 

This  genus  is  characterized  by  inferior  dentition  as  in  Mephitis, 
but  the  dental  formula  Pm.  4,  M.  2.  Metaconid  well  developed  ; 
heel  of  sectorial  large,  cupped. 

The  inferior  dental  formula  of  this  genus  is  that  of  the  extinct 
form,  Potamotherium,  which  intervenes  between  Mephitis  and 
Lutra.  The  typical  species  of  Osvxotherium,  however,  resembles 
Mephitis  so  greatly  in  its  inferior  dentition  that  I  suspect  that  the 
superior  molar  formula  will  be  found  to  be  Pm.  3,  M.  2,  as  in  Me- 
phitis, instead  of  Pm.  4,  M.  2,  as  in  Potamotherium.  The  latter 
genus  is  of  the  Miocene  age  in  Europe  and  North  America,  the 
genus  Brachypsalis  Cope  from  the  Loup  Fork  formation  of  Ne- 
braska being  probably  founded  on  a  species  of  Potamotherium, 
The  presence  of  an  additional  premolar  is  important  in  the  Musteli- 
dse,  but  might  in  some  case  prove  to  be  a  mere  individual  variation, 
but  in  the  present  instance  this  is  clearly  not  the  case. 

Osmotherium  spelaeum  Cope  is  represented  by  a  left  mandibular 
ramus  which  contains  alveoli  or  roots  of  the  C.  and  Pm.  4-2,  with 
Pm.  1  and  Ms.  1-2  perfectly  preserved. 

The  ramus  is  robust,  and  its  inferior  border  rises  from  below  the 
heel  of  M.  1  upward  and  posteriorly  ;  in  Mephitis  mephitica  the 
ramus  is  less  robust,  and  the  inferior  border  begins  to  ascend  below 
the  posterior  part  of  the  M.  II.  The  anterior  border  of  the  mas" 
seteric  fossa  is  not  sharply  defined.  There  are  three  mental  fora- 
mina, the  first  and  second  below  Pm.  2,  and  the  third  below  Pm. 
1,  the  anterior  being  the  largest.  The  molar  teeth  are  much  like 
those  of  31.  mephitica,  but  are  more  robust.  The  metaconid  is 
considerably  smaller  than  the  protoconid  as  in  Mephitis  putorius, 
and  smaller  than  in  M.  mephitica.  The  borders  of  the  heel  are 
strongly  and  equally  elevated,  enclosing  the  basin  completely.  The 
Pm.  I  differs  from  that  of  31.  mephitica  in  presenting  a  flat  face 
inward  and  posteriorly,  which  is  bounded  externally  by  an  angu- 
lar ridge,  as  in  31.  fossidens.  The  crown  of  the  Pra.  2  is  mostly 
lost,  but  a  short,  flat  transverse  heel  remains,  which  is  similar  to 
but  smaller  than  that  of  the  Pra.  I.  The  anterior  root  of  Pm.  II 
is  opposite  the  posterior  root  of  the  Pm.  Ill ;  while  the  Pm.  IV  is  en- 
tirely and  directly  in  front  of  the  anterior  root  of  Pm.  II,  and  ex- 


386  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ceeds  it  in  size.  The  dental  foramen  enters  at  a  point  as  far  poste- 
rior to  the  M.  II  as  the  long  diameter  of  the  latter,  about  as  in  M. 
mephitica. 

Measurements.  m.  m. 

Length  of  ramus  from  M.  II  inclusive,  29 

I^eugth  of  molar  series  ;  25 

Length  of  true  molars  ;  13 

Length  of  sectorial ;  10 
Width  of  sectorial  at  heel ;  5.5 

Length  of  heel  of  sectorial ;  4.5 

Length  of  crown  of  M.  II ;  -3 

Depth  of  ramus  at  Pm.  IV ;  9 

Depth  of  ramus  at  posterior  body  of  M.  I  ;  9 

The  only  question  as  to  the  validity  of  this  form  that  can  arise,  is 
due  to  its  similarity  to  Mephitis  fossidens.  See  the  description  of 
the  latter  below. 

Mephitis  fossidens  sp.  nov. 

Two  species  of  the  genus  Mephitis  Linn,  occur  in  the  bone  de- 
posit in  considerable  abundance.  After  a  cursory  examination 
I  referred  both  of  them  to  M.  mephitica,^  but  a  thorough  study 
convinces  me  that  this  reference  must  be  reconsidered.  I  give  a 
table  by  which  they  may  be  distinguished  from  the  best  known  re- 
cent species,  M.  mephitica  and  M.  putorius.  I  add  here  that  Dr. 
Merriara  has  endeavored  to  substantiate  the  reference  of  the  latter 
species  to  a  separate  genus  under  the  name  of  Spilogale.*  He  gives 
a  list  of  characters  which  he  regards  as  generic,  but  which  are  to 
me  specific  only,  as  they  only  consist  of  proportions  of  the  skull  and 
teeth. 

I.  M.  1  with  para-  and  metaconule  forming  a  straight  longi- 
tudinal crest ;  no  posterior  ledge. 
Metaconid  small,  low  ;    inferior  premolars  2-3  overlapping  ;  ento- 
conid  low  ;  31.  fossidens  Cope. 

II.  M.  X  with  distinct  V-shaped  para-  and  metaconules  sepa- 
rated by  a  fossa  inwardly. 
Metaconid  small,  low  ;    inferior   premolars   2-3  not  overlapping  ; 
ramus,  lower  border  rising  posteriorly  ;  entoconid  low  ; 

M.  orthostichus  Cope. 

^Proceeeds.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  1895,  p.  447. 
*  North  American  Fauna,  No.  4.  1890,  p.  5. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  387 

III.  M.  i  without    metaconule,    but  with    a  broad    posterior 
ledge ;  paraconule  V-shaped. 
Metaconid  small  ;    premolars  not  overlapping  ;    ramus  not  rising 
posteriorly  ;  smaller  ;  31.  pxdorius  L. 

Metaconid  large  ;    premolars  not  overlapping  ;  ramus  rising  poste- 
riorly ;  smaller  ;  entoconid  elevated  :  larger  ;  M.  mephitica  L. 

The  characters  above  assigned  to  the  species  of  Mephitis  are  es- 
tablished by  numerous  specimens.  There  are  twenty-eight  individ- 
uals represented  by  jaws  and  teeth  in  the  Port  Kennedy  collection. 
Of  them  I  can  only  determine  fifteen.  My  own  collection  and  that 
of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  include  a  number  of  skulls 
of  M.  mephitica,  while  the  collection  of  Mr.  S.  N.  Rhoads  includes 
as  many  more,  which  he  has  kindly  placed  at  my  disposal.  For 
my  knowledge  of  the  cranial  dentition  of  M.  putorius  series  I  am 
also  indebted  to  Mr.  Rhoads,  and  to  the  monograph  by  Dr.  Mer- 
riam  above  cited. 

A  species  of  this  genus  was  found  by  me  in  a  cave  breccia  in 
Wythe  County,  Virginia,  and  a  left  mandible  ramus  with  complete 
dentition  was  obtained.  I  described  it  under  the  name  Galera  per- 
dicicla.^  Dr.  Coues  has  suggested  that  this  species  was  founded  on 
a  specimen  of  Mephitis  putorius,  and  on  a  reexamination  of  the 
specimen  I  am  inclined  to  believe  that  he  is  correct. 

Mephitis  fossidens^  is  represented  by  parts  of  the  jaws  with  teeth 
of  eight  individuals.  In  only  one  of  these  do  superior  and  inferior 
molars  occur  together,  and  this  one  is,  therefore,  regarded  as  the 
type.  The  species  is  of  the  same  size  as  31.  mephitica,  and  was 
supposed  at  first  to  be  identical  with  that  animal,  until  further  study 
revealed  several  important  differences. 

The  peculiarities  of  the  dentition  have  been  already  pointed  out 
in  the  synopsis  of  species.  These  are  found  in  the  relations  of  the 
paraconule  and  metaconule  of  the  M.  -,  in  the  small  metaconid  of 
the  inferior  sectorial,  and  iu  the  overlapping  of  the  premolars. 
The  character  of  the  M.  4-  is  seen  in  three  specimens  ;  of  the  ante- 
rior premolars  in  one,  and  of  the  inferior  sectorial  in  six.  The  an- 
terior portions  of  the  mandibular  rami  are  often  injured,  and  the 
canine  teeth  are  preserved  in  only  two  specimens,  and  the  incisors 
in  none. 

*  Proceeds.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc,  1869,  p.  177,  PI.  Ill,  fig.  1. 

*  Fur  Bearing  Animals,  1877,  p.  2  i. 


388  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

The  inferior  molars  resemble  those  of  M.  mephitica  but  differ 
in  the  following  points  :  The  metaconid  is  much  smaller,  resem- 
bling that  of  M.  putoy-ius.  The  entocouid  is  small  and  low.  The 
Pm.  1  has  a  flat  face,  presenting  backward  and  inward  and  is 
bounded  by  a  ridge  on  the  external  side.  This  face  is  rounded  in 
M.  mephitica.  The  overlapping  of  the  Pm.  2  and  3  does  not  oc- 
cur in  the  latter.  The  inferior  border  of  the  ramus  rises  gently 
from  below  the  posterior  part  of  the  M.  y.  The  angle  is  prominent 
and  the  condyle  occupies  a  position  inferior  to  that  seen  in  Mephitis 
mephitica  and  M.  putorius,  in  the  two  jaws  in  which  this  part  is  pre- 
served. It  does  not  rise  above  the  level  of  the  molars  as  it  does  in 
M.  mepjhitica. 

The  M.  i  is  the  most  characteristic  part  of  the  dentition.  The 
crown  is  traversed  by  two  parallel  anteroposterior  crests ;  the  ex- 
ternal consisting  of  the  paracone  and  metacone,  and  the  internal  of 
the  paraconule  and  metaconule.  The  posterior  border  is  deeply 
notched  between  the  two,  and  the  anterior  border  less  so.  The  pro- 
tocone  is  represented  by  a  cingulum  which  occupies  the  anterior 
half  of  the  interior  base  of  the  crown,  enclosing  a  fossa  with  the 
paraconule.  Its  border  then  rises  vertically  to  the  inner  longitu- 
dinal crest  which  it  joins  about  the  middle.  Just  exterior  to  this 
crest  is  a  small  tubercle  which  may  represent  a  metaconule.  An 
external  cingulum  except  at  the  base  of  the  metacone.  No  ante- 
rior or  posterior  cingula. 

In  the  existing  species  of  Mephitis  the  protocone  is  continued 
into  a  wide  ledge  round  the  posterior  side  of  the  crown  as  far  as  the 
base  of  the  metacone.  The  paraconule  is  V-shaped  and  does  not 
reach  the  posterior  part  of  the  crown. 

Measurements.  m.  m. 

Diameters  of  M.  1  j  anteroposterior  (greatest)  ;  8 

( transverse  ;  y.o 

Length  of  inferior  sectorial ;  11 

Depth  of  mandibular  ramus  at  ^  ;  6 

No.  2  (with  angle  of  mandible). 

Length  of  M.y;  11 

Length  from  M.  y  to  condyle  ;  26 

Length  from  M.  7  to  angle ;  23.5 

Depth  of  ramus  at  M,  y  ;  7,5 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  389 

No.  3  (with  canine).  m.  m. 

Length  of  dental  series  ;  31 

Length  of  true  molars  and  Pm.  1 ;  21 

Length  of  M-t;  v  11.5 

Depth  of  ramus  at  M.  y  ;  8 

This  species  represents  a  section  of  the  genus  distinct  from  M. 
mephitica,  with  which  it  is  connected  by  M.  orthostichus  Cope. 
Mephitis  orthostichus  sp.  nov. 

This  species  is  represented  by  superior  first  molars  of  five  individ- 
uals and  mandibular  rami  of  two  others.  Unfortunately  in  no  case 
are  inferior  and  superior  dentition  of  the  same  individual  preserved 
together.     In  one  individual  both  rami  are  preserved. 

This  species  is  intermediate  in  size  between  M.  mephitica  and  M. 
putorius,  and  resembles  the  latter  species  in  the  small  raetaconid. 
It  resembles  M.  mephitica  in  the  rising  inferior  outline  of  the  man- 
dibular ramus,  and  differs  widely  from  both  species  in  the  character 
of  the  superior  M.  i 

The  superior  M.  i  instead  of  presenting  two  parallel  longitudinal 
crests,  has  a  slightly  curved  crest  representing  the  paraconule, 
which  reaches  a  trihedral  cusp,  the  metaconule.  Thus  is  produced 
an  internal  longitudinal  crest  which  presents  a  convexity  anteriorly 
and  an  angle  posteriorly,  and  an  entrant  angle  between  the  two. 
The  protocone  is  a  mere  cingulum  which  rises  to  the  apex  of  the 
metaconule,  and  extends  no  further,  so  that  there  is  no  posterior 
ledge  as  in  the  existing  species.  AVhile  the  internal  crest  is  quite 
different  in  its  zig-zag  character  from  that  of  31.  fossidens,  the  species 
further  differs  from  the  latter  in  the  inferior  premolars  which  do  not 
overlap,  and  in  the  inferior  size.  The  posterior  border  of  the  M.  f 
is  not  so  deeply  notched  as  in  M.  fossidens. 

The  inferior  dentition  does  not  differ  from  that  of  M.  mephitica 
except  in  the  small  metaconid  and  entoconid,  and  the  flatter  pos- 
terointernal face  of  the  Pm.  1,  in  which  it  resembles  M.  fossidens. 
The  third  premolar  is  in  contact  with  the  canine,  and  has  two  roots 
which  do  not  overlap  those  of  the  second.  The  crown  is  longer 
than  either  and  has  a  heel  with  a  recurved  rim.  The  third  has  the 
same,  while  the  fourth  is  a  narrow  heel,  with  a  recurved  rim  all 
around  it.     In  no  specimen  is  the  angle  of  the  mandible  preserved. 

Measurements.  m.  m. 

No.  1  ;  superior  M  i 

T.-        .  f  anteroposterior ;  8 

Diameters,    i  x  ^        /       \    ^\  c 

transverse  (greatest)  8 


390  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

No.  2  ;  both  mandibular  rami.  m.  m. 

Length  of  premolar  series  ;  1 1 

Length  of  molar  series;  13.5 

Diameters  M.  y    |  f  "teroposterior ;  10 

*     (  transverse  of  heel.  3 

Diameters  M.^    j  anteroposterior  ;  3.5 

^    I  transverse ;  2.5 

Depth  of  ramus  at  Pm.  1  ;  9 

Depth  of  ramus  at  Pm.  2  ;  10 

No.  3  ;  smallest  ramus. 
Length  of  last  three  molars  ;  17 

Length  of  M.  -j- ;  9.5 

Depth  of  ramus  at  Pm.  1  ;  6 

Depth  of  ramus  at  M.  2 ;  '  8 

In  two  last  superior  molars  the  short  angle  connecting  the 
metaconule  with  the  paraconular  crest  is  rudimental  or  wanting,  so 
that  the  arrangement  only  differs  from  that  of  iV. /ossic?e/is  in  the 
greater  separation  of  the  metaconule  from  the  crest.  Such  teeth 
are  nearly  transitional  between  the  two  species,  but  they  maintain 
the  inferior  size  of  M.  orthostichiis.  The  two  types  of  molars 
might  be  regarded  as  representing  male  and  female,  but  for  the 
difference  in  the  relations  of  the  inferior  premolars,  as  pointed  out 
in  the  analytical  table  of  species. 
Pelyciotis  lobulatus,  gen.  et  sp.  nov. 

Char.  gen. — Dental  formula  Pm.  ^,  M.  ^.  Sectorial  with  basin- 
shaped  heel,  and  without  metaconid.  Premolars  without  posterior 
lobe. 

The  genus  Pehjcictis  is  only  known  from  the  mandible.  The 
dentition  agrees  in  number  of  teeth  with  both  Mephitis  and  Puto- 
rius.  From  the  former  it  differs  in  the  absence  of  metaconid,  and 
from  the  latter  in  the  basin-shaped  heel  of  the  sectorial  molar. 
From  Gulo  it  differs  in  the  presence  of  but  three  premolars.  But 
one  species  is  known,  P.  lobulatus  Cope,  represented  by  an  entire 
left  mandibular  ramus  containing  all  the  teeth  excepting  the  third 
premolar  and  the  incisors. 

Char,  specif. — This  weasel  is  larger  than  any  of  the  existing 
species  of  Putorius  of  North  America,  but  equals  P.  vittatus  of 
Brazil.  In  some  respects  the  parts  preserved  resemble  the  corre- 
sponding ones  of  Mephitis  orthostichiis,  but  the  differences  are  also 
conspicuous.  The  ramus  is  rather  robust,  and  the  symphysis  is 
short.     The  inferior  border  is  regularly  convex,  and  rises  to  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  391 

angle,  latter  projects  as  far  posteriorly  as  the  condyle.  The  condyle 
is  rather  elevated,  its  inferior  border  being  in  the  horizontal  line  of 
the  apices  of  the  cusps  of  the  sectorial.  The  coronoid  process  pre- 
serves its  anteroposterior  width  to  near  the  apex,  which  is  broadly 
rounded,  and  not  contracted,  as  in  Lutra  species.  There  is  a  longi- 
tudinal keel  on  the  inner  side  of  the  angle,  distinct  from  the  inferior 
margin. 

The  teeth  form  a  continuous  series,  the  anterior  premolars  not 
overlapping.  The  canine  is  rather  small ;  the  crown  is  somewhat 
compressed,  and  is  not  grooved  or  facetted,  but  is  smooth.  The 
second  premolar  has  the  heel  produced  backward.  In  the  first  pre- 
molar the  heel  is  a  cingulum,  and  is  not  produced.  The  metaconid 
of  the  sectorial  is  represented  by  a  convexity  of  the  internal  edge  of 
the  protocone.  Heel  concave,  with  an  elevated  border  on  the 
internal  edge  only.  This  consists  of  a  larger  lobe  or  entoconid,  and 
a  smaller  between  it  and  the  lobe  representing  the  metaconid. 
Entoconid  not  elevated,  resembling  that  of  the  extinct  species  of 
Mephitis  alreiidy  described.  No  cingula.  The  tubercular  molar 
has  a  semicircular  concave  grinding  surface,  and  no  cingulum. 

Measurements.  m.  m. 

Length  of  ramus  from  canine  to  condyle  inclusive  ;  42 

Depth  of  ramus  at  Pm.  j  ;  7 

Depth  of  ramus  at  M  .  ^  8 

Depth  at  condyle ;  7.5 

Depth  at  coronoid  process  ;  22 

Length  of  dental  series  ;  25 

Length  of  true  molars  ;  12 

Diameters  of  base  of  crown  of  canine  ;  3.5 

Elevation  of  crown  of  canine  ;  4 

!  elevation ;  3.5 

anteroposterior;  8.5 

width  of  heel.  3.5 

The  jaw  described  is  about  the  size  of  that  of  the  common  skunk. 
Lutra  rhoadsii  sp.  nor. 

Portions  of  both  mandibular  rami  with  the  right  superior  tuber- 
cular molar  represent  this  otter.  The  right  ramus  supports  part  of 
one  of  the  premolars,  a  large  part  of  the  sectorial,  and  the  tubercular. 
The  left  ramus  supports  the  tubercular.  In  the  right  ramus  the 
alveoli  of  the  premolars  and  part  of  that  of  the  canine  are  preserved. 
All  belong  to  one  individual,  aud  were  found  in  place  in  the 
matrix. 


392  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

This  species  differs  from  Liitra  canadensis  in  two  conspicuous 
points  ;  first,  the  inferior  border  of  the  mandible  is  a  nearly  straight 
line  to  the  angle  ;  second,  the  third  premolar  is  nearly  transverse  to 
the  long  axis  of  the  jaw  in  position,  in  consequence  of  the  much 
shorter  mandibular  symphysis. 

The  coronoid  process  is  at  right  angles  to  the  horizontal  ramus 
and  its  anterior  and  posterior  borders  are  straight  and  of  equal  in- 
clination to  the  obtuse  apex  ;  the  posterior  border  is  convex  in  L. 
canadensis.  The  angle  is  opposite  the  base  of  the  sectorial ;  in 
L.  canadensis,  it  is  opposite  the  apices  of  the  cusps  of  the  sectorial. 
The  anterior  border  of  the  masseteric  fossa  is  below  the  middle  of 
the  tubercular  molar.  The  inner  side  of  the  ramus  is  flat  and  not 
grooved,  except  immediately  above  the  angle.  The  mental  foramina 
are  below  the  middle  of  the  first,  and  the  anterior  root  of  the  second 
premolars. 

Both  the  internal  and  external  borders  of  the  inferior  tubercular 
molar  are  elevated,  the  former  as  a  low  cusp.  The  crown  is  hori- 
zontal in  position  and  is  not  tipped  forward  as  in  L.  canadensis. 
An  external  basal  cingulum  on  both  this  tooth  and  the  sectorial. 
In  the  latter  the  metacouid  is  well  developed  ;  the  protoconid  and 
paraconid  are  broken  away.  The  basin  of  the  heel  has  the  form  of 
of  that  of  L.  canadensis,  and  the  external  cutting  edge  is  notched 
in  front.  The  first  premolar  is  longitudinal  in  position,  but  the 
anterior  root  of  the  second  premolar  is  interior  to  the  middle  line. 
The  internal  root  of  the  third  premolar  is  near  the  middle  of  the 
superior  face  of  the  ramus,  but  the  interior  root  is  anterior  to  the 
internal  border  of  the  anterior  root  of  the  second  premolar.  Both 
are  close  to  the  canine  alveolus.  The  crown  of  a  premolar  was  dis- 
placed and  adherent  in  the  alveolus  of  the  root  of  the  paraconid  of 
the  sectorial.  The  crown  probably  belongs  to  the  second  premolar. 
It  has  no  lobe  on  its  posterior  edge,  and  is  expanded  posteriorly  at 
the  base.  The  superior  tubercular  has  lost  its  paracone  and  meta- 
cone.  The  interior  part  of  the  crown  is  a  broad  table  with  the 
protocone  as  an  obtuse  cusp  on  the  interno-anterior  border,  with  a 
cingulum  at  its  base.  This  part  of  the  tooth  is  much  like  that  of 
L.  canadensis,  but  is  not  so  convex  posteriorly. 

Unoia  mercerii  Cope.      Proceeds.    Academy   Nat.  Sciences  Phila.,    1895,  p,    448. 
Crocuta  inexpecUtta  Cope,  1.  c,  ji.  449. 

Additional  material  of  this  large  feline  confirms  its  distinctness. 
The  sectorial  tooth  referred  to  the  genus  Crocuta  as  above  cited, 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  393 

with  reservation  that  it  might  be  found  to  pertain  to  a  feline  animal, 
must  be  referred  here.  The  superior  sectorial  is  peculiar  in  the 
small  indication  of  protocone  as  in  the  Smilodons. 

DIPLARTHRA. 

Cariacus  laevicornis  sp.  nov. 

A  series  of  superior  molars  of  the  right  side  lacking  the  last  one, 
represents  this  species.  There  Avere  obtained  at  about  the  same 
time  the  basal  parts  of  the  antlers  of  two  deer  of  the  same  size, 
which  I  suspect  to  belong  to  this  species.  There  are  various  bones 
of  the  skeleton  of  probably  the  same. 

The  true  molars  have  internal  basal  columns,  and  the  internal 
crescents  send  backward  and  outward  processes  into  the  lakes,  as 
in  the  existing  North  American  species  of  the  genus.  The  molars 
are  of  the  size  of  those  of  C.  virginianus,  but  the  premolars  are 
smaller.  The  first  and  second  are  especially  reduced  in  anteropos- 
terior diameter,  and  while  the  third  is  larger  than  these,  its  form  is 
different  from  that  of  the  corresponding  tooth  in  any  species  of  this 
genus  or  of  Coassus.  The  anteroposterior  diameter  of  the  crown 
does  not  exceed  the  transverse,  and  there  is  no  ridge  of  the  external 
face  such  as  is  present  in  all  the  Cervi,  but  only  a  slight  convexity. 
This  ridge  is  present,  but  indistinct  in  the  other  premolars.  It  is  very 
strong  on  the  paracone  of  the  true  molars,  but  weak  on  the  meta- 
coue.  The  horns  of  all  the  crescents  are  well  developed.  The  width 
of  the  base  of  the  crowns  of  the  true  molars  is  greater  anteriorly 
than  posteriorly.  There  are  no  processes  entering  the  lakes  of  the 
premolars  such  as  are  usual  in  the  species  of  Cariacus. 


Diameters  of  Pm.  1 
Diameters  of  M.  1 
Diameters  of  M.  2 


Measurements.  m.  ni. 

I  anteroposterior ;  11 

I  transverse ;  12 

f  anteroposterior  ;  15 

I  transverse ;  16 

[anteroposterior;  16 

\  transverse  ;  16.5 

The  fragments  of  horns  both  include  the  bur.  This  is  not  very 
prominent,  and  the  beam  is  quite  smooth.  There  are  indications  of 
tines,  but  they  are  broken  off  at  the  bases.  In  the  shorter  fragment 
a  tine  is  given  off  on  the  internal  side,  but  it  is  broken  off  near  the 
base,  and  the  beam  beyond  its  base  is  also  lost.  In  the  second  frag- 
ment the  position  corresponding  to  the  internal  tine  is  split  away 
26 


394  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Above  it  the  beam  is  somewhat  compressed  anteroposteriorly,  and 
sends  oflf  a  smaller  tine  directly  anteriorly.  The  beam  in  both  is 
entirely  smooth. 

Measurements.  m.  m. 

Diameters  of  beam  No.  1  at  base  j  anteroposterior ;  18 

( transverse  ;  16 

Elevation  to  internal  tine  ;  13.5 

Anteroposterior  diameter  of  beam  No.  2  at  base ;  17.5 

Anteroposterior  diameter  of  beam  No.  2  at  superior 

base  of  anterior  tine ;  15.5 

Transverse  diameter  of  anterior  tine  ;  14 

Elevation  of  anterior  tine  above  base ;  27 

The  smoothness  of  the  beam  of  the  horns  distinguishes  this  species 
from  the  existing  species  of  Cariacus  of  both  North  and  South 
America,  and  resembles  the  condition  seen  in  the  species  of  Coassus, 
where  the  horns  are  unbranched.  The  inferior  tine  originates 
nearer  the  bur  than  in  the  known  species  of  Cariacus,  while  the 
anterior  tine  is  present  only  in  species  (C*.  campestris)  where  the 
interior  tine  is  absent.  The  longer  beam  preserved  shows  no  tend- 
ency to  an  anterior  curvature  such  as  is  present  in  most  of  the 
species  of  the  genus. 

The  true  molar  teeth  of  this  species  are  of  about  the  same  size  as 
those  of  the  Virginia  deer. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  395 


INSULAR  LANDSHELL  FAUNAS,  ESPECIALLY  AS  ILLUSTRATED  BY  THE 
DATA  OBTAINED  BY  DR.  G.  BAUR  IN  THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS. 

BY   WILLIAM    HEALEY    DALL. 

INTRODUCTORY. 

The  Galapagos  Islands,  lying  under  the  equator  about  90°  west 
of  Greenwich,  comprise  two  principal  groups  separated  by  nearly 
1,200  fathoms  of  water.  One  of  these  groups,  northwest  of  the  other, 
contains  only  Culpepper  (550  ft.)  and  Wenraan  (830  ft.  elevation) 
Islands  and  a  few  insignificant  rocks.  Culpepper,  owing  to  its 
small  elevation,  is  nearly  barren,  while  Wenman  shows  on  its  upper 
surface  a  thin  coating  of  grass  and  other  vegetation.  From  neither 
of  these  has  any  collection  been  made  or  is  any  land  shell  known. 

The  main  group  of  the  Galapagos  rests  on  an  elevation  of  the  sea 
bottom  included  within  the  1,000  fathom  line.  It  may  be  provision- 
ally divided  into  three  groups,  a  southeastern,  a  central  and  a  north- 
eastern, in  all  about  a  dozen  islands  and  some  smaller  islets  and 
rocks. 

The  southeastern  group  comprises  Charles,  Chatham,  Hood  and 
Barrington  Islands.  Hood  is  destitute  of  water  in  the  dry  season 
and  green  only  in  the  wet  season,  owing  to  its  small  elevation  which 
does  not  bring  it  into  the  region  of  condensing  clouds.  Much  of 
the  surface  is  covered  with  blocks  of  lava.  Chatham  and  Charles 
are  among  the  most  fertile  islands  of  the  group. 

The  central  islands  include  the  largest  of  the  whole,  Albemarle, 
which  appears  to  consist  of  several  primitive  islands  united  by  low 
areas  of  volcanic  material ;  Narborough,  which  exhibited  volcanic 
activity  as  lately  as  1836 ;  James  ;  Indefatigable,  and  the  much 
smaller  Duncan  Island,  besides  a  number  of  islets. 

The  northeastern  group  comprises  three  comparatively  small 
islands  Abingdon,  Biudloe  and  Tower. 

The  floral  characteristics  of  the  Galapagos  have  been  mentioned 
by  Darwin,  fully  discussed  by  Hooker  and  well  described  by  Wolf, 
while  Tanner,  Baur  and  Agassiz  have  added  the  facts  gathered  by 
later  explorations.  I  shall,  therefore,  merely  briefly  suoimarize  the 
characteristics  which  these  writers  have  noted. 


396  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  vegetation  of  the  islands  appears  to  be  divided  into  three 
distinguishable  zones.  Near  the  sea-level  the  basaltic  or  tufaceous 
volcanic  rocks  of  which  the  islands  are  exclusively  composed,  appear 
almost  devoid  of  plants,  especially  in  the  dry  season,  except  dry 
grayish-white,  apparently  dead  brushwood  which  grows  thickly  be- 
tween the  blocks  of  ash  and  lava,  and  which  on  close  inspection 
exhibits  inconspicuous  small  leaves  and  flowers.  The  most  common 
according  to  Wolf^  and  Agassiz^  are  a  Verbena  bush  and  an 
Acacia,  with  an  occasional  tree  known  as  the  Palo  Santo.  Near  the 
beaches  are  a  few  species  of  salt  loving  plants,  probably  all  identi- 
cal, with  forms  also  known  from  similar  localities  on  the  mainland. 
Cacti,  Opuntia  and  Cereus,  are  found  among  the  blocks  of  lava, 
where  nothing  else  grows.  This  zone  extends  to  a  height  of  800- 
1,000  feet,  the  rains  in  general  being  limited  even  during  the  rainy 
season  (February  or  later,  to  July)  to  the  higher  levels  above  500- 
600  feet.  The  change  to  the  second  zone  is  sometimes  very  abrupt, 
but  on  the  leeward  side  of  the  islands  the  arid  region  extends  higher 
than  on  the  southern  side  from  which  the  moisture-bearing  winds 
come. 

The  second  zone  is  green  and  wooded,  the  Acacia  and  Palo  Santo 
increase  in  size,  the  Verbena  disappears,  and  the  region  shows  num- 
erous open  grassy  spaces.  The  volcanic  rocks,  under  the  influence 
of  moisture,  have  become  decomposed  into  a  soft  reddish  earth. 

The  last  and  highest  region  is  bare  of  trees,  having  the  aspect  of 
an  undulating  plateau  covered  with  a  rather  coarse  grass,  Avhich  ex- 
tends to  the  highest  summits  of  many  of  the  islands.  Here  even  in 
the  dry  season,  there  is  a  more  or  less  constant  deposition  of  moist- 
ure from  the  mists  which  sweep  over  the  islands.  However,  both 
above  and  below,  on  several  of  the  islands,  extremely  barren  local- 
ities or  areas  occur  of  strangely  desolate  aspect ;  in  some  instances 
the  arboreal  vegetation  of  the  second  zone  is  supplemented  at  the 
sea-level  by  thickets  of  mangroves  or  other  shrubby  trees,  so  that 
there  is,  among  the  island  floras,  no  absolute  rule  without  an  excep- 
tion or  two. 

The  sea  currents  about  the  islands  and  between  them  and  the 
mainland  are  very  complicated.  In  a  general  way  it  may  be  said 
that  two  currents  converge  upon  the  islands,  one  from  an  east-north- 

^  EinBesuch  der  Galapagos  Insein  mit  drel  Kiirtchen,  1870. 
*  General  sketch  of  the  expedition  of  the  Albatross,  Feb. -May,  1891 ;  Bull. 
M.  C.  Zool.,  XXIII,  No.  1.  1892. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  397 

easterly  direction  from  tbe  Gulf  of  Panama,  and  another  from  a 
southeasterly  direction  from  the  Peruvian  coast.  Both  are  strong 
currents,  both  have  doubtless  contributed  their  aid  in  populating 
the  Galapagos,  but  in  this  the  Panama  current  seems  to  have  pre- 
dominated, not  only  because  it  has  a  shorter  traverse,  but  because 
around  the  Gulf  of  Panama  and  on  the  banks  of  the  rivers  falling 
into  it,  a  luxuriant  fauna  and  flora  are  found  close  to  the  sea,  while 
along  the  Peruvian  coast  only  in  time  of  freshet  could  any  large 
quantity  of  debris  be  expected  to  reach  the  waters  of  the  current, 
owing  to  the  aridity  of  the  immediate  shores.  The  two  currents  join 
forces  at  some  distance  eastward  from  the  islands,  and  pour  through 
the  passages  between  them  with  considerable  force.  Professor  Alex- 
ander Agassiz  has  shown  how  much  terrigenous  material  the  Panama 
current  bears,  and  that  there  is  no  reason  to  doubt  that  trees  still 
bearing  leaves  and  with  some  of  their  branches  above  water  might 
be  carried  from  the  Gulf  and  cast  upon  the  islands,  and  that,  at  least 
during  the  rainy  season  and  in  favorable  years,  there  would  be  op- 
portunities for  animals  so  carried,  especially  land  shells  glued  by  the 
epiphragm  to  the  bark  of  branches,  to  gain  vegetation  on  the  shores 
where  they  could  support  life  and  propagate  their  kind.  Though 
unproven,  yet  there  can  be  little  doubt  that  in  this  way  the  land 
mollusk  fauna  of  the  islands  was  introduced  and  preserved.^ 

The  first  explorer^  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  for  land  shells  was 
Hugh  Cuming,  about  1830,  who  collected  Bidimuhcs  nux  Brod.,  B. 
utsiulatus  Sby.,  and  B.  unifasciatiisShj.,  on  Charles  Island  ;  B.  rugi- 
ferus  Hve.,  B.  calvus  Sby.,  and  B.  jacobi  Sby.,  on  James  Island  ; 
while  from  his  collection  at  a  later  time  were  described  B.  eschari- 
ferus  Sby.,  B.  rugulosus  Sby.,  B.  verrucosus  Vfr.,  B.  nucula  Pfr.,  and 
B.  galapaganus  Pfr.,  without  definite  reference  to  a  particular 
island.  Assuming  that  the  last  three  mentioned  were  collected  by 
Cuming  and  not  obtained  from  later  collectors,  this  comprises  eleven 
species. 

The  next  collection  was  made  by  Darwin  in  1835,  who  obtained 
Buliviulus  Daru'ini  Pfr.,  B.  sculpturatus  Pfr.,  a  Helix  (not  named 
or  subsequently  reported  for  over  half  a  century  but,  perhaps, 
Trochomorpha  Bauri)  and  thirteen  other  species  not  specified  at  the 
time,  as  well  as  a  "  Paludina  "  (probably  an  Amnicola)  which  has 

'  Attention  has  already  been  called  to  these  facts  by  Dr.  Stearns,  but  in  or- 
der to  make  the  present  discussion  complete  I  have  been  obliged  to  restate 
them  briefly  here. 


398  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

never  been  described  or  found  since.  Reeve  mentions  that  Darwin 
collected  Bulimulus  riigulosus  on  Chatham  Island,  but  this  is  the 
only  species  of  Darwin's  which  I  have  been  able  to  find  in  print 
referred  to  any  particular  island.  Darwin  says  in  his  journal 
(Chapter  XVII),  "  Of  land  shells  I  collected  sixteen  kinds  (and 
two  marked  varieties)  of  Avhich,  with  the  exception  of  one  Helix 
found  at  Tahiti,  all  are  peculiar  to  this  archipelago.  A  single  fresh 
water  shell  {Paludina)  is  common  to  Tahiti  and  Van  Diemen's 
Land,"  With  the  much  closer  drawn  specific  lines  of  the  present 
day,  it  is  probable  that  both  the  "  Helix  "  and  "  Paludlna  "  would 
be  discriminated  as  distinct  from  their  allies  mentioned  by  Darwin. 
A  part  at  least  of  Darwin's  Galapagos  shells  went  into  the  Cuming- 
ian  collection,  but  I  have  been  unable  to  discover  any  trace  of  the 
remainder,  which  were  probably  scattered. 

The  next  recorded  expedition  to  touch  at  the  islands  and  bring 
back  land  shells,  was  that  of  Kellett  and  Wood  in  1846.  The  col- 
lection was  worked  up  by  Professor  Edward  Forbes,  who  reports 
seven  species  from  Chatham  Island,  namely,  Bulhmdus  nux,  calvus, 
eschariferus,  unijasciatus,  and  rugulosus  already  known,  and  B. 
clievinitzioides  and  achatellinus  Fbs.,  which  he  described  as  new. 

Subsequently  whalers  and  sealers  frequently  touched  at  the  islands 
either  for  water  or  other  necessaries,  and  a  certain  number  of  land 
shells  reached  Europe  from  the  Galapagos  Islands  without  positive 
data  in  regard  to  their  origin,  and  have  been  described  by  various 
authors.  Of  these  Bulimulus  asperatus  Albers,  B.  incrassatus  Ffr., 
B.  nuciformis  Petit,  B.  amastroides  Ancey,  and  several  varieties  of 
riigulosus  and  eschariferus  may  be  mentioned. 

In  later  years  collections  have  been  made  by  Dr.  Simon  Habel  in 
1868,  who  added  one  new  species  {Bidimulus  Habeli  Stearns)  to  the 
fauna  of  Chatham  Island  and  collected  B.  chemnitzioides  at  Chatham, 
B.  Darivini  at  Bindloe  and  B.  achatellinus  at  Hood  Island.  He 
also  collected  Atiricula  stagnalis  Petit,  and  Pedipes  angulatus  C.  B. 
Adams  at  Bindloe  ;  Melampus  trilineatus  C.  B.  Adams,  Tralia  pan- 
amensis  C.  B.  Adams,  at  Hood  ;  Willia7nia  pelfoides  Dall  and  Onchi- 
della  Steindaehneri  Semper,  all  new  to  the  fauna. 

In  1872  the  U.  S.  S.  Hassler  with  the  Agassiz  party  on  board, 
spent  ten  days  among  the  islands,  but  no  list  of  the  species  collected 
has  been  published. 

In  1875  Dr.  Theodor  Wolf,  geologist  of  Ecuador,  visited  the 
islands  and  collected  a  few  land  shells  subsequently  described  by  P. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  399 

Reibisch  in  1892,  as  will  be  more  particularly  discussed  later.  Dr. 
AVolf  obtained  the  following  species,  mostly  represented  by  a  small 
number  of  individuals,  and  too  often  in  an  imperfect  state  of  preser- 
vation. From  Charles  Island,  B.  tmifasciatus,  nucula,  asperatus, 
mix,  nudformis,  iishdatus  and  calvus,  known  forms,  and  B.  invalidus, 
venustus,  cinereus  and  nudus,  described  by  Reibisch  as  new.  From 
Chatham  Island,  among  known  species,  Wolf  found  B.  incrassatus, 
rugulosus,  achatellmus,  chemniizioides,  Succmea  Bettii,  and  the  fol- 
lowing supposed  to  be  new:  B.  terebra,  ventrosus  var.,  acutus,  curtus, 
lima,  canaliferus,  Leptinaria  cymatoferus,  Helidna  Wolfi  and  Succi- 
nea  Wolfi,  described  by  Reibisch.  From  Albemarle  Island,  B.  pal- 
lidus,  Simrothi  and  Pupa  munita,  all  regarded  as  new  by  Reibisch  ; 
Indefatigable  Island  supplied  the  new  B.  Wolfi  and  Pupa  clausa 
Reibisch  ;  and  Barrington  Island  5.  ('e?i<rosixs  Reibisch.  These  spe- 
cies will  submit  to  some  additions  from  data  furnished  by  letter 
through  the  politeness  of  Herr  Reibisch,  who  has  also  sent  me  for 
examination  a  number  of  his  types. 

H.  M.  S.  Peterel,  Commodore  Cookson,  visited  Charles  Island  in 
1875,  obtaining  B.  mix  in  numerous  varieties,  B.  tmifasciatus, 
eschariferus  and  the  Succinea  described  by  E.  A.  Smith  as  S.  Bettii 
and  var.  brevior,  in  honor  of  Staff-Surgeon  Bett,  who  collected  the 
specimens. 

In  1888,  the  U.  S.  S.  Albatross,  Captain  Tanner,  of  the  U.  S.  Fish 
Commission,  during  her  voyage  from  Norfolk,  Virginia,  to  San 
Francisco,  California,  spent  a  short  time  in  the  Galapagos  group, 
and  obtained  a  good  many  specimens  of  a  few  species  of  land  shells, 
■which  have  been  discussed  by  Dr.  Stearns  in  the  Proceedings  of 
the  U.  S.  National  Museum  for  1892.  The  collection  from  Chatham 
Island  comprised  BuUmulus  nux,  nxicijormis,  amastroides,  chemnitzi- 
oides,  Habeli,  and  Succinea  Bettii;  from  Charles  Island  B.  nux  in 
numerous  varieties,  rw^/u^osMS,  eschariferus,  Siphonaria  gigas,  Onchi- 
della  Steindachneri  Semper,  and  the  new  0.  Lesliei  Stearns  ;  Albe- 
marle Island  afforded  B.  nux  and  the  two  Onchidiums,  while  at 
Hood  Island  Williainia  peltoides  was  obtained.  The  Albatross  again 
visited  the  Galapagos  under  the  direction  of  Professor  Alexander 
Agassiz  in  1891,  but  no  land  shells  appear  to  have  been  collected  on 
this  occasion. 

The  most  thorough  and  important  exploration  for  land  shells 
which  has  yet  been  made  is  that  upon  which  this  paper  is  essentially 
based,  namely,  the  expedition   of  Dr.  G.  Baur  in  1890,  in  which 


400  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896. 

careful  notes  were  made  as  to  the  occurrence  of  the  different  species, 
not  only  as  to  the  particular  island,  but  the  altitude  above  the  sea, 
the  sort  of  vegetation,  rock  shelter,  etc.,  where  the  species  were  col- 
lected. The  results,  tabulated  by  islands,  of  Dr.  Baur's  labors  are 
as  follows : 

CHATHAM    ISLAND. 

Bulimuhis  nuz  var.  incrassahis,  1,600  feet  on  leaves. 

B.jacohi,  typical  form,  1,600  feet. 

B.  achatellimis,  1,600  feet,  under  leaves. 

B.  unifasciatus,  1,600  feet,  under  leaves. 

B.  Bauri,  n.  s.,  1,600  feet,  under  leaves. 

B.  curtus,  1,600  feet,  under  leaves. 

B.  nucula,  1,600  feet,  under  leaves. 

B.  chemnitzioides,  1,600  feet,  under  leaves. 

B.  eschariferus,  near  seashore  under  stones. 

B.  Haheli,  near  seashore  under  stones. 

Conulus  galapaganus,  1,600  feet,  on  leaves  of  plants. 

Vitrea  chathamensis,  1,600  feet,  on  leaves  of  plants. 

Succinea  produda,  typical,  1,600  feet,  on  mossy  rocks. 

Leptinaria  chathamensis,  1,600-2,000  feet,  on  ferns. 

Helicma  nesiotica,  1,600  feet,  on  leaves. 

CHARLES   ISLAND. 

Bulimulus   rugulosus..  B.  galapaganus. 

B.  planospira.  Succinea  brevior. 

SOUTH    ALBEMARLE   ISLAND. 

Bu limuliis  jaco hi.  Trochomorp ha  Bauri. 

B.  Simrothi.  Succinea  Bettii  and  corbis. 

Pupa  Woljii.  Leptinaria  chathamensis. 

DUNCAN   ISLAND. 

Bulimulus  olla.  B.  duncanus. 

BARRINGTON    ISLAND. 

Bulimulus  eschariferus  var.  ventrosus.  B.  olla. 

JAMES    ISLAND. 

Bulimulus  jacobi  var.  cinereus.      Succinea  Bettii,  typical. 

INDEPATIGABLE  ISLAND. 

Bulimulus  olla. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  401 

The  total,  after  suppressing  a  number  of  synonymous  names, 
amounts  to  twenty-seven  discriminable  forms  collected  from  seven 
out  of  the  twelve  principal  islands  by  Dr.  Baur. 

Dr.  Baur's  results  leave  little  room  for  doubt  that  a  thorough  ex- 
ploration of  all  the  islands,  and  especially  of  Albemarle  and  Nar- 
borough,  would  add  materially  to  the  number  of  determinable  forms 
and,  therefore,  that  the  time  for  finally  discussing  or  speculating 
upon  the  distribution  of  the  species  among  the  several  islands  has 
not  arrived.  Albemarle,  much  the  largest,  should  when  explored 
yield  a  larger  harvest  than  the  much  smaller  Charles  or  Chatham 
Islands,  which  seem  to  have  been  better  explored,  because  they  have 
better  anchorages  for  a  vessel.  Narborough,said  to  be  very  fertile, 
has  not  been  explored  at  all  for  land  shells;  we  have  nothing  at  all 
from  Abingdon  or  Tower,  and  only  three  species  from  Bindloe. 

Nearly  all  the  land  shells  of  the  Galapagos  are  more  or  less  arbo- 
real and  pass  much,  if  not  the  whole,  of  the  dry  season  attached  to 
branches  of  shrubs  or  trees  by  a  deposit  of  tough  dry  mucus  form- 
ing a  hermetic  seal  to  the  aperture,  as  well  as  a  means  of  fixation. 
So  tough  is  this  material,  that,  when  dry,  the  bark  or  the  shell  will 
break  easier  than  the  epiphragm  if  one  tries  to  dislodge  a  specimen. 
The  mucus  is  poured  out  in  such  quantity  as  not  only  to  close  the 
aperture  of  the  shell  with  a  brownish  parchment-like  membrane, 
but  to  fill  the  minor  irregularities  of  the  surface  upon  which  the 
aperture  rests  and  to  rise  around  the  outer  margin  nearly  a  milli- 
meter above  the  edge  of  the  shell.  About  a  third  or  half  a  turn 
further  inside  the  shell,  the  animal  constructs  a  second  epiphragm, 
behind  which  it  rests  in  a  torpid  state  until  a  change  in  the  season 
leads  to  its  awakening.  Several  specimens  of  Bulimulus  planosjnra 
which  had  been  gathered  more  than  a  year  and  kept  in  a  corked 
vial,  when  they  reached  my  hands,  still  contained  the  living  animal 
in  his  self  constructed  refuge,  and  doubtless  other  species  would  have 
done  the  same  if  they  had  not  been  put  in  alcohol.  Nearly  all  of 
Dr.  Baur's  living  Bulimuli  were  collected  during  the  hibernating 
season  as  indicated  by  the  remains  of  bark  and  epiphragm  still  ad- 
adhering  to  them. 

Of  the  species  not  known  to  construct  an  epiphragm  there  are 
only  a  few  identifie<l  from  the  islands,  three  small  forms  of  Helici- 
dee,  a  Leptinaria  and  HeUclna,  besides  the  semi-amphibious  salt- 
marsh  loving  Auriculldce,  etc.  The  Helidna  has  a  shelly  operculum 
with  which  it  can  hermetically  seal  its  shell.     Both  it  and  the  Hel- 


402  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ices  are  forms  which  would  be  apt  to  hide  in  minute  crevices  of  bark 
or  holes  in  decaying  timber.  The  Leptinaria  lives  on  ferns,  and  its 
minute  size  renders  it  possible  that  it  might  be  carried  on  dead- 
leaves,  etc.,  which  an  exceptionally  high  wind  blowing  for  eight  or 
ten  hours  might  carry  to  the  islands.  Such  winds  are  not  unknown,, 
especially  in  the  tropics,  and  a  single  hurricane  blowing  in  the 
right  direction  might  introduce  a  large  number  of  seeds,  insects, 
fern  spores  and  minute  land  shells,  to  say  nothing  of  larger  objects. 

It  is  obvious,  therefore,  that  the  derivation  of  the  island  flora  and 
land  shell  fauna  does  not  present  us  with  serious  difficulties.  Its 
distinctively  American  type  indicates  the  point  of  origin.  Before 
discussing  this  branch  of  the  subject  further,  it  may  be  well  to  refer 
to  the  characteristics  of  the  several  islands,  in  order  that  the  rela- 
tions of  the  fauna  to  the  fertile  area  may  be  considered. 

The  islands  which  lie  most  directly  in  the  track  of  currents  and 
winds  are  those  of  the  southeastern  group.  Chatham  is  one  of  the 
best  known  and  most  fully  explored  in  the  whole  group,  and  is  nota- 
ble for  the  clean  cut  development  of  the  three  zones  and  the  fertility 
of  its  upper  portion.  On  Charles  there  is  less  vegetation  on  the 
lower  levels  but,  according  to  Agassiz,  the  beach  shows  many  planta 
common  to  Panama  and  Guayaquil.  Hood  is  so  much  lower  than 
the  others  (640  feet)  as  to  be  chiefly  in  the  barren  zone,  covered 
with  lava  blocks  destitute  of  water  in  the  dry  season,  and  partially 
green  only  in  the  rainy  season. 

Of  the  Central  group,  Indefatigable  is  first  in  the  track  of  the 
current,  and  much  resembles  Charles  and  Chatham  with  a  vast  tract 
of  arable  upland.  Duncan  is  comparatively  small  with  abrupt  sides, 
and  has  no  living  water,  though  its  upper  part  is  somewhat  verdant. 
The  south  and  east  parts  of  James  Island  seem  partly  sheltered  by 
Charles  and  Indefatigable  from  the  prevailing  trade  winds  ;  at  all 
events  they  are  dryer  and  less  fertile  than  the  portion  north  of 
James  Bay.  Much  of  Albemarle  Island  is  low  and  consequently 
barren,  having  a  desolate  burnt  aspect.  The  highlands  of  the 
southern  portion  are  covered  with  rich  vegetation,  and  there  are 
elevated  green  patches  near  the  northern  end.  Although  there  is 
actually  a  larger  area  of  vegetation  on  Albemarle  than  on  either  of 
the  other  islands,  yet  the  fertile  region  is  not  as  large  in  proportion 
to  the  total  area  as  the  size  of  the  island  on  the  chart  would  lead 
one  to  expect. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  403 

Narborough,  from  which  no  land  shells  have  yet  been  collected, 
has  a  rich  and  abundant  vegetation  with  a  luxuriant  growth  of  man- 
groves on  the  eastern  shore.  This  island  was  the  last  to  exhibit  its 
volcanic  activity,  and  the  fauna  may  prove  meagre,  yet  it  can  hardly 
be  doubted  that  it  will  afford  a  certain  number  of  species  and  pos- 
sibly some  novelties. 

The  islets  of  the  northeastern  group  are  small  and  comparatively 
barren.  Tower  and  Bindloe  are  not  high  enough  to  profit  much  by 
the  mists.  Abingdon  is  higher,  and  with  Bindloe  shows  a  certain 
proportion  of  green.  No  land  shells  are  known  from  Tower  and 
Abingdon.     From  Bindloe  only  the  following  are  yet  reported : 

Bidimulus  Darwini,  Auricula  stagnalis,  Pedipes  angulatus. 

From  the  central  group  come : — Bidimulus  Wolji,  B.  duncanus,^ 
B.  calvus,  B.  jacobi,  B.  jacobi  var.  cinereus,  B.  olla,  B.  Tanneri, 
B.  imifasciatus,  B.  Simrothi,  B.  n.  sp.,  near  to  Habeli,  B.  rugiferus,'^ 
B.  Reibischi,  B.  nesioticus,  Trochovioryha  Bauri,^  Pupa  clausal 
Pupa  Wolfii,  Succinea  Bettii,  Succinea  corbis,  Leptinaria  chatha- 
mensis,  Leptinaria  sp.  larger  than  chathamensis,  Helicina  nesiotica. 

In  all  21  forms,  of  which  none  is  common  to  the  northeastern 
group  of  islands  ;  14  are  peculiar  or  not  yet  reported  from  either 
the  northeastern  or  southeastern  group  of  islands  ;  one  is  of  doubt- 
ful locality  but  provisionally  placed  here  on  account  of  its  similar- 
ity to  B.  rugiferus ;  and  the  remaining  six  are  common  to  the  south- 
eastern group.      Onchidium  is  not  counted. 

In  the  southeastern  group  are  found  thirty-three  forms  (not  count- 
ing Onchidium),  of  which  the  following  are  peculiar  to,  or  not  yet 
found  outside  of  this  group  of  islands : — Bulimidus  nux,  B.  achatelli- 
nus,  B.  rugtdosus,  B.  nudus,  B.  planospira,  B.  ustidatus,  B.  eschari- 
ferus  and  var.  ventrosus,  B.  galapaganus,  B.  perspectivas,  B.  jacobi 
var.  aciduH,  B.  nueida,  B.  amastroides,  B.  curtus,  B.  Bauri,  B, 
canaliferus,  B.  chemnitzioides,B.  Habeli,  Vitrea  chathamensis,  Conulus 
galapaganus,  Succinea  producta,  S.  brevior. 

To  which  may  be  added: — Melampus  trilineatus,  Tralia  pana- 
mensis,  Williamia  peltoides,  Siphonaria  gigas. 

Omitting  the  Auriculidce  and  Siphonariidce,  we  have  as  supposed 
peculiar  forms  in  each  group  of  islands,  twenty-one  characteristic  of 
the  southeastern,  fourteen  from  the  central  and  one  from  the  north- 
eastern group  of  islands,  which  agrees  well  with  the  hypothesis  that 
the  species  originated  with  forms  brought  by  winds  and  currents 
which  impinge  first  on  the  southeastern  group. 


404  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  certain  that  the  southeastern  islands  are 
much  better  known  than  either  of  the  other  groups  and  that  the  area 
and  fertility  of  the  central  group  are  such  that  there  is  every  reason 
to  suppose  many  more  forms  remain  to  be  discovered  there,  perhaps 
including  some  of  those  so  far  known  only  from  the  southeastern 
islands.  Prudence  strongly  urges  that  we  know  too  little  of  the 
mollusk  fauna  yet  to  intelligently  discuss  its  inter-island  distribution. 
Taking  the  forms  enumerated  in  the  table  showing  the  distribu- 
tion of  the  species  and  omitting  the  Onchidium  and  species  of  A^iric- 
tilidce  and  Siplwnariidce.,  all  of  which  are  denizens  of  the  salt  marshes 
or  beaches,  we  have  forty-six,  of  which  fifteen  are  found  on  more 
than  one  island,  five  on  more  than  two  islands  and  three  are 
found  without  material  change  on  four  islands ;  all  of  the  latter  are 
found  in  both  the  central  and  southeastern  groups  of  islands.  One 
of  the  species,  and  perhaps  two,  are  probably  common  to  the  main- 
land of  South  America  as  well  as  the  Galapagos,  and  all  of  them 
doubtless  have  been  derived  from  the  fauna  of  the  Panamic  and 
South  American  region. 

The  following  table  will  show  the  distribution  of  the  various  spe- 
cies among  the  several  islands,  as  far  as  known,  their  presence  being 
indicated  by  an  initial  letter  in  the  column  devoted  to  the  island 
concerned.  A,  stands  for  the  Albatross  expedition  ;  B,  for  Dr. 
Baur;  C,  for  Hugh  Cuming;  D,  for  Darwin  ;  H,  for  Dr.  Habel ; 
K,  for  Kellett  and  Wood ;  P,  for  the  Peterel,  Captain  Cookson  ;  and 
W,  for  Wolf  as  reported  on  by  Reibisch,  with  some  additions  to  his 
printed  list.  The  names  are  given  in  the  left  hand  column,  the  col- 
umns for  the  islands  follow  in  the  order  of  their  distance  from  the 
source  of  supply,  approximately  ;  the  last  column  sums  up  the  num- 
ber of  specimens  actually  examined  by  the  writer  in  preparing  this 
paper. 

One  or  two  species  are  noted  as  new,  which  Herr  Reibisch  has 
mentioned  in  his  letters  as  now  in  his  possession,  in  addition  to 
which  are  several  Pupas  which  he  regards  as  new,  but  has  not  in- 
formed me  to  which  islands  they  should  be  assigned. 

Habits  and  environment. — With  the  exception  of  Dr.  Baur  no  one 
seems  to  have  noted  very  particularly  the  exact  location  of  the  spe- 
cies collected,  either  with  regard  to  altitude  or  situs.  A  few  of 
Wolf's  species  are  so  noted,  but,  as  most  of  his  specimens  were  dead, 
their  value  in  such  a  discussion  is  impaired.  Cuming  noted  the  situs 
but  neglected  the  altitude.      The  matter  really  needs  the  attention 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


405 


TABLE  OF  DISTRIBUTION  OF  GALAPAGOS  LAND  SHELLS. 

A,  Albatross  ;    B,  Baur  ;    C,  Cuming ;    D,  Darwin  ;    H,  Habel ;    K,  Kellett  ;  P,  Peterel  ; 
W,  Wolf ;  collectors  or  authorities. 


Names  of  the  forms. 


Bulimiilus  mix 

Bulimulus  achatellinus.. 

* 


Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 

Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 


Darwini 

Wolti 

duucanus ... 

*    * 

rugulosus.... 
var.  uudus . 
planospira.. 
ustulatus.... 

calvus 

nucula 


Bulimulus  eschariferus.  ... 
Bulimulus  var.  veutrosus. 
Bulimulus  var.  pileatus.... 
Bulimulus  galapaganus.... 
Bulimulus  perspectivus 


Groups  of  the  Islands. 


Southeastern. 


Chatham. 


Bulimulus  jacobi 

Bulimulus  var.  ciuereus. 
Bulimulus  var.  acutus.... 

Bulimulus  olla 

Bulimulus  Tanueri 

* 


Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 

Bulimulus 

Bulimulus 

Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 

* 

Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 

* 

Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 
Bulimulus 


amastroides 

var.  curtus 

* 

unifasciatus 

* 

Simrothi 

*  * 

Bauri 

caualiferus 

*    * 

seulpturatus.... 

nesioticus 

rugiferus 

Keibischi 

*  *    * 

chemnitzioides. 

Habeli 

n.  sp 


Trochomorpha  ?  Bauri 

Vitreachatliamensis 

Conulus  galapaganus 

Pupa  Woltii 

Pupa  clausa 

Succinea  Bettii 

Succinea  brevier 

Succinea  producta 

Succinea  corbis 

Leptinaria  chathamensis. 

Leptinaria  sp 

Helicina  nesiotica 

Auricula  stagualis 

Melampus  trilineatus 

Tralia  pauameusis 

Pedipes  angulatus 

Siphonaria  gigas 

Williamia  peltoides 

Onchidium  Lesliei 

Onchidella  Steindachneri. 


Number  of  forms,  54. 


Charles. 


Hood. 


KABW 
KWB 


DKC 


K 
B 

DKWAB 


W 

B  W 

W 


A 
W  AB 

KB 


B 
W 


KH  W  AB 
H  W  AB 


D7 
B 
B 


W 
WB 
WB 
WB 


H 


CPW  A 


D  A  W  B 

W 

B 

C 

CW  A 

w 
p 

B 


C  P 


H 


P  A 
P  B 


A 

H 

A 

AH 


25 


17 


Bar. 


WB 


Central. 


Indf. 


W 


B 


H 
H 


B 
A 


W 


W 


Dun. 


B 


BA 


Alb. 


B  W 


WB 


B 

WB 
B 


B 
B 

W 
W 


Jas. 


C 

WAB 
C 


A 

C 


w 


A 
A 


11 


B 


N.E. 


Bindl. 


H 


H 
H 


406 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


of  a  person  sufficiently  expert  to  recognize  the  species  when  col- 
lected, and  to  collect  with  judgment  in  all  the  zones.  Dead  speci- 
mens are  so  easily  carried  down  hill  by  wind  or  temporary  rills  of 
water  in  the  rainy  season,  or  transported  and  dropped  by  birds  in 
places  which  they  did  not  originally  inhabit,  that  no  weight  can  be 
gfven  to  the  place  of  their  occurrence  in  such  a  discussion  as  this. 
In  regard  to  some  of  the  species,  no  information  is  available ;  some 
of  the  others  have  been  collected  in  a  dead  condition  from  the  dry 
zone  below  800  feet,  which  are  known  to  live  in  the  wooded  zone 
above,  hence  these  may  be  eliminated  from  the  local  population  of 
the  dry  zone.  Making  such  eliminations,  the  known  population  of 
the  dry,  the  wooded  and  the  grassy  upper  plateau  regions,  respec- 
tively, are  as  follows : 


Bulimulus    Wolfi. 
B.  rugulosus. 
B.  planosjnra. 
B.  ustulatus. 
B.  calvus. 


DRY   ZONE. 

B.  eschariferus  and  var.  ventrosus. 
B.  galapaganus. 
B.  perspectivus. 
Pupa  elausa. 
P.  mimita. 


WOODED     ZONE. 


Bulimulus  nux 
and  varieties. 
B.  achatellinus. 
B.  jacobi. 
B.  acutus. 
B.  nucula. 
B.  amastroides. 

Bulimulus  olla. 


B.  cuHus. 

B.  unifasciatus. 

B.  Bauri. 

B.  canaliferus. 


Conulus  galapaganus. 
Succinea  Bettii. 
S.  brevior. 
S.  producta. 


B.  chemnitzioides.        Leptinaria  chathamensis. 


B.  Kabeli. 

Vitrea  chathamensis. 


Helieina  nesiotica. 


GRASSY   ZONE. 


B.  Simrothi. 


It  is  not  at  all  improbable  that  some  of  the  species  of  the  wooded 
zone  extend  downward  into  the  dry  or  partially  dry  zone,  and  that 
the  singular  variations  observed  in  some  of  the  species  may  be  due 
to  the  direct  action  of  the  differing  conditions  in  which  they,  respec- 
tively, exist.  Making  allowance  for  this,  the  chief  distinction  which 
presents  itself  between  the  species  of  the  dry  zone  and  those  of  the 
wooded  zone,  is  that  the  Bulimuli  of  the  dry  region  show  a  tendency; — 
1,  To  a  pupiform  shape  (such  as  might  facilitate  their  entry  into 
narrow  crevices  beneath  the  lava  blocks)  ;  2.  To  reddish-brown  col- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  407 

oration  with  rather  conspicuous  peripheral  color  bands  (forming  a 
■combination  not  unlike  the  reddish  streaked  lavas  and  hence,  possi- 
bly protective)  ;  and  lastly  3.  To  a  rugose,  peculiar  crenulation  or 
wrinkling  of  the  surface  of  those  species  not  characteristically 
.smooth.  This  last  character  which,  for  reasons  which  will  presently 
be  shown,  is  correlated  with  aridity  or  alkalinity  of  environment, 
may  be  regarded  as  having  been  impressed  upon  species  which  first 
gained  a  foothold  in  the  arid  region  and  as  having  persisted  to  some 
-extent  in  their  descendants  when  the  latter  succeeded  in  reaching 
the  upper  and  more  congenial  zones  of  the  islands.  It  is  character- 
istically developed  in  the  following  species:  Bulimulus Darivini, 
nesioticus  and  Wolji,  Bvlimulxis  sculpturatus,  Bulimulus  rugiferus, 
partially  in  Bulimulus  Simrothi,  and  traces  of  it  are  perceptible  in 
some  specimens  of  Bulimulus  Bauri.  The  external  appearance  is 
such  as  to  suggest  that  the  shell  when  soft,  had  been  pecked  at  with 
a  pointed  object,  leaving  small  irregular  depressions  scattered  more 
or  less  closely  over  the  surface.  It  never  appears  in  the  nuclear 
whorls,  rarely  in  the  earlier  ones  following  the  nucleus,  and,  when 
a  sufficient  number  of  specimens  is  examined,  some  will  be  found 
in  each  species  which  do  not  exhibit  it.  The  latter  often  look  very 
unlike  the  commoner  form  of  the  species,  and,  by  those  unacquainted 
with  the  relation  between  them  and  unsupplied  with  a  sufficiently 
large  series  for  study,  might  easily  be  regarded  as  specifically  dis- 
tinct. 

The  wrinkling  or  indenting  of  the  surface  is  distinct  from  the 
longitudinal  turgid  plications,  or  narrow  warty  prominences  seen  in 
Bulimulus  mix  var.  incrassaius,  Bulimulus  rugulosus  and  B.  ylano' 
spira;  nor  is  it  the  same  as  the  granular  sculpture  found  in  the  two 
last  mentioned  species,  in  some  specimens  of  Bulimulus  jacobi  and 
in  cinereus,  B.  Simrothi,  rugiferus,  and  numerous  Lower  Californian 
and  Peruvian  arid  region  species,  such  as  B.  proteus  and  B.  monte- 
zuma.  This  sculpture  is  more  ancient  in  the  history  of  the  group, 
its  elements  may  often  be  detected  on  the  nuclear  whorls  and  their 
subsequent  development  on  later  turns  is  often  correlated  with  the 
presence  of  epidermal  cirrhi  or  hairs,  sometimes  numerous  enough 
to  form  veritable  fringes.  Something  of  this  is  visible  in  a  perfectly 
preserved  young  B.  Simrothi;  in  the  full  grown  shell  the  delicate 
hairs  have  fallen  or  been  lost  through  abrasion.  Nevertheless,  the 
extra  development  of  this  and  the  above  mentioned  plicate  sculpture 
are  generally  associated  in  arid  regions  with  the  dryness,  and  in  moist 


408  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

regions  with  the  presence  of  some  alkaline  salt,  which  accentuates  the 
action  of  those  factors  in  the  organism  which  are  concerned  in  the 
formation  of  the  minor  irregularities  of  the  shell  surface.  The  man- 
ner in  which  this  is  brought  about  is  one  of  the  prettiest  illustrations 
of  the  direct  action  of  the  environment  which  I  know,  and  seems  to 
be  sufficiently  established  by  both  geological  and  physiological  evi- 
dence. 

In  the  arid  region  of  the  far  west,  especially  in  the  desiccated  lake 
basins  of  Utah,  Nevada  and  California,  it  has  long  been  observed  by 
the  writer,  Dr.  R.  E.  C.  Stearns  and  others,  that  in  the  successive 
beds  of  fresh  water  marl,  which  the  now  dried  up  lakes  deposited  in 
Pliocene  and  Pleistocene  times,  the  shells  indicate  a  progressive 
change  in  surface  characters  as  the  alkalinity  of  the  water  increased, 
until  at  last  the  amount  of  alkali  became  so  great  that  the  mollusks 
were  exterminated  or  found  a  precarious  refuge  in  the  fresh  water 
streams  which  fell  into  the  basins  in  question.  The  shells,  without 
regard  to  genus  or  systematic  relations,  showed  a  unanimous  ten- 
dency to  become  ridged,  plicated  or  rugose ;  the  regularity  of  the 
gastropod  coil  was  interfered  with,  abnormalities  became  more  com- 
mon, and,  toward  the  last,  almost  general.  Projecting  sculpture, 
spiral  threading,  carinse,  riblets,  etc.,  were  exaggerated  :  size  gener- 
ally diminished,  the  height  of  the  spire  relatively  to  the  diameter 
became  less,  and  general  degeneration  curiously  combined  with  ex- 
treme accentuation  and  irregularity  of  surface  characters.  Some- 
thing of  the  same  sort  is  visible  at  the  present  time  in  the  shells  of 
fresh  water  gastropods  in  the  irrigating  ditches  of  farms  in  the 
alkaline  arid  region  ;  those  shells,  in  the  ditches  where  the  water 
has  leached  out  alkaline  matter  from  the  soil,  showing  evidences  of 
change  in  the  same  direction  in  surface  sculpture,  as  I  have  person- 
ally observed  in  the  Honey  Lake  Valley,  Nevada. 

In  Whitfield's  observations  on  the  degeneration  of  Limncea  mega- 
soma — kept  for  many  generations  in  an  aquarium  where  the  water 
lost  by  evaporation  was  constantly  replenished,  the  old  residual  sup- 
ply not  being  emptied,  so  that  a  concentration  of  the  salts  contained 
in  the  much  greater  bulk  of  the  original  water  took  place  in  the 
aquarium — somewhat  analogous  but  less  marked  changes  are  re- 
corded. 

The  dynamical  origin  of  these  changes  may  be  explained  by  con- 
sidering the  origin  of  the  surface  characters  of  the  shell.  The  de- 
position of  the  shell  substance  and  epidermis  takes  place  from  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  409 

surface  and  the  edge  of  the  mantle.      The  process  is  not  absolutely 
continuous,  but  is  carried  on  at  more  or  less  frequent  intervals  when 
the  animal  is  in  a  state  of  rest.     At  times  when  deposition  is  going 
on,  the  margin  of  the  mantle  is  in  a  more  extended  state  than  usual, 
reaching  to  a  point  where  the  extremely  thin  and  delicate  mem- 
brane is  in  contact  with  the  extreniest  margin  of  the  already  formed 
shell.     The  glandular  epithelium  of  the  edge  of  the  mantle  secretes 
less  lime  than  that  of  the  surface  behind  it,  and  is  chiefly  responsi- 
ble for  the  periostracum  of  the  shell,  while  the  rest  of  the  mantle 
has  the  task  of  secreting  the  more  limy  matter  which  makes  up  the 
bulk  of  the  calcified  shell.      As  the  margin  expands  or  contracts 
over  the  still  viscous  secretion,  the  ornamentation  of  the  mantle 
edge,  cilia,  papillse,  fringes,  etc.,  everything  which  by  its   form  or 
bulk   varies  the  flatness  of  the  filmy  membrane  itself,  mechanically 
influences  the  form  of  the  surface  over  which  it  passes,  as  the  teeth 
of  a  rake  leave  shallow  furrows  over  the  gravel  of  a  garden  walk. 
Essentially  in  this  way  are  the  spiral  stride,  the  revolving  threads 
and  similar  ornamentation  developed  on  the  surface  of  a  fresh  water 
gastropod.     The  transverse  sculpture,  usually  known  as  incremental 
lines,  arises  from  the  periodicity  of  secretion,  while  ribbing  or  spin- 
ose  ornamentation  originates  in  a  periodic  turgidity  of  the  mantle 
(how   induced  normally  is  not  known)  which   rhythmically  affects 
that  organ,  and  by  its  tidal  rise  and  subsidence  causes  the  shell 
secreted  during  such  epochs  to  be  more  inflated  or  capacious  than 
at  the  corresponding  intervals.     These  features  and  modes  of  growth 
can  be  observed  in  an  aquarium  with  the  more  common  fresh  water 
gastropods. 

It  is  a  matter  of  common  observation  that  alkaline  salts,  dust  and 
dryness  are  very  inimical  to  land  and  fresh  water  mollusks.  Salts  of 
chlorine  and  lime  or  soda  will  destroy  slugs  or  snails  subjected  to 
their  influence ;  the  creature  exudes  a  copious  protective  mucus  up 
to  a  point  when  exhaustion  results  and  death  soon  follows.  The  tis- 
sues under  the  action  of  such  agents  contract  violently,  shrivel,  and 
finally  die.  Against  hot  pure  dry  air  and  dust  the  slug  protects 
himself  by  burrowing  and  secreting  a  protective  coccoon  of  limy 
mucus,  which  dries  to  a  leathery  substance  preventing  further  evap- 
oration. The  shell-bearing  snail  retreats  into  its  house  and  closes 
the  door  with  a  succession  of  almost  air-tight  epiphragms  of  which 
the  outer  one,  is  often  applied  to  a  stone,  a  bit  of  bark,  or  the  sur- 
face of  a  tree  or  shrub,  either  on  the  branches  or  leaves.     The  com- 

27 


410  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

atose  condition  •which  follows  is  only  broken  up  bv  the  presence  of 
moisture  in  the  air,  which  the  prisoner  perceives  and  takes  advant- 
age of  to  return  to  active  life.  The  state  of  torpor  may  occasionally 
last  for  years,  but  is  general  among  land  shells  during  the  dry  sea- 
son in  the  tropics  and  during  the  winter  of  the  colder  zones.  Most 
of  the  collections  made  at  the  Galapagos  seem  to  have  been  made  in 
the  dry  season.  This  was  the  case  with  Darwin's  work  and  all  the 
Bulimuli  collected  in  a  living  state  by  Dr.  Baur  retain  the  whole  or 
portions  of  the  epiphragm,  showing  that  they  were  in  retirement 
when  taken  from  the  trees.  If  the  creature,  by  an  early  diminution 
of  humidity,  is  forced  into  its  state  of  hibernation  before  its  normal 
period  of  growth  is  absolutely  completed,  it  frequently  happens  that 
the  portion  of  the  shell  about  the  aperture  is  irregular  and  bears 
indications  of  having  been  secreted  under  abnormal  conditions.  The 
incremental  rugse  in  the  vicinity  of  the  margin  will  be  exaggerated 
or  crowded,  the  color  of  this  part  of  the  shell  absent  or  different 
from  the  rest,  the  pillar  irregularly  tuberculose  or  keeled  at  the 
base ;  abnormal  thickenings  or  tubercles  may  appear  on  the  outer 
lip  or  on  the  parietal  portion  of  the  aperture,  and  the  margin  of  the 
lip  will  take  on  an  irregular  form,  presumably  to  adapt  itself  to  the 
irregularities  of  the  surface  to  which  the  creature  is  about  to  attach 
itself  for  hibernation.  Reeve's  figure  of  Bulimulus  Danvini  shows 
a  state  of  affairs  such  as  I  have  described,  so  does  the  form  figrured 
under  the  name  of  ^.  Simrothi  by  Reibisch,  and  similar  indications 
are  afforded  by  specimens  of  5.  nux,  B.  rugulosus,B.  tortuganus  and 
B.  Bauri.  An  understanding  of  these  facts  is  necessary  in  order  to 
avoid  the  use  of  these  temporary  and  individual  dynamic  mutations 
as  specific  characters,  an  error  several  authors  have  not  succeeded 
in  escaping. 

To  return  to  the  modification  of  the  surface  of  the  shell  by  local 
conditions,  the  facts  above  cited  enable  us  to  understand  how  under 
normally  favorable  conditions  the  organism  deposits  the  mucus  mat- 
ter, which,  by  a  process  analogous  to  the  crystallization  of  salts  in  a 
colloid  medium,  hardens  into  the  shell  substance,  which  then  forms 
a  compound  of  crystallized  lime  (aragonite)  and  conchioline  (not 
chitine  as  stated  by  Osborn*  and  others). 

2s  ow  if  we  assume  the  attenuated  film  of  secretive  tissue  constitu- 
ted by  the  margin  of  the  mantle  expanded,  in  order  to  divest  itself 

*  Studies  from  the  Biol.  Laboratory,  Johns  Hopkins  University,  II,  p.  431, 
1883. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  411 

by  the  usual  process,  of  the  products  of  secretion,  to  be  suddenly- 
brought  in  contact  with  alkaline  salts  either  as  dust  or  in  solution 
in  the  moisture  about  the  animal,  the  result  will  be  a  sudden  con- 
traction of  the  portion  of  the  mantle  affected,  consequently  the 
mucus  deposit  either  will  not  be  laid  down  evenly  on  the  margin  of 
the  shell  or  its  deposition  may  be  for  the  moment  retarded.  In 
either  case  an  irregularity  will  result.  The  mantle,  turgescent  with 
secretion,  cannot  indefinitely  retain  the  secreted  fluids,  and,  after  a 
time,  even  if  the  alkaline  irritant  is  still  active,  the  mucus  must  be 
exuded.  But  if  this  is  done  by  a  film  of  tissue,  more  or  less  irregu- 
larly contracted,  the  deposition  will  be  correspondingly  irregular  in 
its  location.  As  the  epidermis  is  first  laid  down,  and  the  more  cal- 
careous matter  subsequently  upon  its  elastic  surface,  it  follows  that 
an  irregular  surface  of  the  epidermis  will  be  reinforced  by  shelly 
matter  and,  as  it  were,  petrified  in  its  irregularity,  which  will  be 
exhibited  permanently  in  the  external  surface  of  the  shell.  If  a 
minute  process  of  the  mantle  edge  would  normally  produce  a  spiral 
thread  on  the  surface  of  the  shell,  and  its  regular  deposition  is  inter- 
rupted by  the  alkalinity  of  dust,  air  or  moisture  about  it,  the  tissue 
will  be  obliged  to  contract  after  a  short  period  of  expansion,  and  the 
spiral  thread  will  consequently  appear  broken  up  into  a  series  of 
granules.  The  more  violent  the  induced  contraction  the  greater  will 
be  the  amount  of  undeposited  mucus  contained  in  the  respective 
glandular  cells,  and  which  must  be  got  rid  of  at  the  next  period  of 
expansion,  and,  consequently,  the  coarser  will  be  the  granules  formed 
by  its  exudation  at  the  next  opportunity.  The  coil  of  the  shell  is 
determined  partly  by  that  portion  already  existing,  against  which 
the  new  deposit  must  be  laid  down,  and  partly  by  the  form  and  mass 
of  the  body  of  the  animal  within  the  shell.  The  direction  of  the 
coil  is  a  resultant  of  the  reactions  between  these  two  factors,  guided 
to  a  limited  extent  by  gravity  which  pulls  the  shell,  pendant  from 
the  extruded  animal  to  one  side  or  the  other,  while  the  animal  is 
active.  Yet  as  the  deposition  of  shelly  matter  takes  place  chiefly, 
if  not  entirely,  when  the  animal  is  contracted  and  at  rest,  mostly 
within  the  shell,  it  cannot  be  expected  that  the  action  of  gravity 
should  have  much  influence  on  the  form  of  the  shell.  But,  if  the 
growth  of  the  soft  pai-ts  be  accelerated  so  that  they  increase  in  length 
of  coil  disproportionately  to  the  growth  of  the  shell,  the  direction  of 
the  coil  is  correspondingly  less  dependent  on  the  form  of  the  existing 
whorls  and  more  dependent  on  the  posture  assumed  by  the  extruded 


412  PEOCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

soft  parts,  so  that  if  the  suggested  growth  be  sudden,  as  if  forming 
a  climax  during  which  maturity  is  rapidly  assumed  (a  state  of  things 
readily  induced  by  changes  in  the  reproductive  organs  and  the  ripen- 
ing of  their  contents),  a  sudden  change  in  the  direction  and  form 
of  the  whorl  may  be  induced  dynamically.  This  is  what  I  believe 
takes  place  in  such  forms  as  Holospira,  Cylindrella  and  various 
Cydostomatldce.  If  we  picture  the  animal  on  a  twig,  holding  on  by 
the  foot  and  partially  retracted,  the  spire  heavy  with  contained  ova 
and  the  animal  at  rest,  pending  secretion  of  shell  matter,  it  is  easy 
to  imagine  the  manner  in  which  the  mature  aperture  may  be  built 
up  on  the  margin  of  a  perpendicularly  pendant  immature  shell, 
without  following  the  cycloidal  curve  of  the  earlier  whorls. 

The  influence  of  a  very  dry  warm  atmosphere  on  the  expanded 
mantle  will  be  analogous  to  that  of  alkaline  matter,  but  likely  to 
act  with  less  irregularity.  A  particle  of  alkaline  dust  might  affect 
a  small  part  of  the  margin  of  the  mantle  and  not  the  rest,  while  the 
air  might  be  expected  to  act  on  the  whole  expanded  margin.  It  is 
probable  even  then,  however,  that  some  portions  of  the  edge  might 
dry  quicker  than  others  and  more  or  less  irregularity  would  almost 
certainly  result.  Of  course,  if  the  margin  of  the  mantle  were  to  be- 
come actually  desiccated,  secretion  would  cease  and  could  not  go  on 
again  until  the  dry  tissue  had  been  cast  off  and  replaced.  But  it  is 
probable  that  the  tissue  is  too  sensitive  for  such  an  event  to  occur 
under  ordinary  conditions.  It  would  probably  ojierate  so  that  when 
the  animal  felt  the  mantle  becoming  uncomfortably  dry,  it  would 
simply  retract,  and  temporarily  cease  secretion  as  in  the  presence  of 
alkali.  But  enough  has  been  said  to  indicate  the  mode  by  which 
drought  and  alkaline  matter  may  act  upon  the  growing  mollusk  and 
directly  modify  its  secretions,  and,  by  consequence,  its  hard  parts. 
That  this  action  takes  place  substantially  as  suggested  I  have  little 
doubt,  and  that  its  results  may  be  differentiated  from  those  of  nor- 
mal growth  in  continuously  favorable  conditions,  I  think  will  be 
shown  to  be  probable. 

Let  us  consider  the  features  presented  by  Bulhnulus  Simrothi  and 
see  how  far  they  exemplify  the  processes  above  described.  The  de- 
position of  ova  may  take  place  with  the  opening  of  the  wet  season. 
No  data  are  available,  but  none  of  the  specimens  collected  in  the 
hibernating  state  by  Dr.  Baur,  and  of  which  the  soft  parts  were  ex- 
amined, contained  any  developed  ova.  It  would  be  in  accordance 
with  what  we  know  of  species  in  other  regions  if  the  ova  were  rapidly 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  413 

developed  and  deposited  in  the  early  part  of  the  wet  season.  The 
nuclear  portion  of  the  shell  presents  the  features  so  characteristic  of 
many  continental  Bulimuli  in  that  the  first  whorl  is  angulated  above 
and  the  vertex  is  consequently  concave  or  even  funicular.  The  sur- 
face of  the  nucleus  is  evenly,  closely,  transversely  ribbed,  with  fine 
spiial  strife  perceptible  between  the  ribs  upon  magnification.  The 
sculpture  of  the  nuclear  whorl  merges  gradually  into  that  of  the 
succeeding  whorls,  the  ribbing  becoming  finer  until  it  is  lost  in  the 
incremental  sculpture.  The  spiral  strife  become  stronger  and  prac- 
tically cover  the  whole  shell.  Four  delicate,  fine  spiral  threads  are 
evenly  spaced  on  the  whorls  between  the  periphery  and  the  suture, 
somewhat  broken  by  the  rather  regularly  spaced  incremental  eleva- 
ted lines.  Where  the  two  intersect,  the  epidermis  is  raised  in  micro- 
scopic cilia  only  visible  in  finely  preserved  young  specimens.  In 
this  condition  there  are  four  or  five  whorls  besides  the  nucleus. 
They  are  of  a  reddish-brown  with  a  pale  olive-greenish  narrow 
peripheral  band.  Up  to  this  point,  unless  it  be  that  the  shell  is 
slightly  narrower,  the  species  is  indistinguishable  from  B.  unifaseia- 
tus.  About  this  time,  earlier  in  some  later  in  others,  the  peculiar 
indented  irregularities  of  the  surface  begin  to  appear  ;  at  first  exag- 
gerated slightly  irregular  incremental  lines,  then  irregular  broken 
surface  markings  recalling  rusted  metal  which  has  been  cleaned  but 
preserves  the  maculse  of  oxidation.  Finally  the  aperture  shows  a 
slightly  reflected  lip,  a  pillar  thickened,  keeled  at  the  base,  tubercu- 
lar with  a  single  tubercle  set  anywhere  along  its  length  ;  the  outer 
lip  with  one  or  two  adjacent  tubercles,  the  umbilicus  from  large  and 
ample  to  very  contracted,  almost  closed. 

The  peripheral  baud  persists  in  some  cases;  the  warty  prominen- 
ces are  whiter  than  the  shell  normally  would  be,  having  a  bleached 
aspect.  I  should  read  the  developmental  history  of  this  species  gen- 
erally as  follows :  The  species  sprang  from  a  form  not  unlike  B. 
Xantudi  of  Lower  California,  the  superficially  more  similar  Peru- 
vian B.  rhodacvie  and  pruinosus  having  a  different  nucleus.  The 
ova  hatching  in  the  height  of  the  rainy  season  grew  normally,  and, 
if  the  rainy  season  had  been  long  enough,  would  have  developed  into 
shells  with  the  color  and  sculpture  of  B.  unifasciatus  and  the  form 
of  a  small  slender  B.  jacobi.  Some  of  the  specimens  almost  attain 
this  ideal.  Toward  the  end  of  the  season  either  occasional  hot  spells 
or  the  influence  of  salts  leached  out  of  the  decomposed  lava  soil  by 
the  rains  began  to  effect  the  growing  shells,  some  more  and  some  less, 


414  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

and  continued  to  do  so  until  they  completed  their  shells,  or  were 
forced,  immature,  to  go  into  hibernation.  Completing  their  shells 
under  pressure  and  affected  by  the  environment  the  thickening  of 
the  aperture  was  more  or  less  irregularly  deposited,  and  the  excess 
of  shell  matter  appears  in  the  form  of  tubercles  or  lumps  of  callus 
disposed  about  the  aperture.  As  might  be  expected,  so  far  as  we 
know  the  situs  of  the  various  species,  these  peculiar  deformations 
occur  chiefly  among  the  species  of  the  dry  zone  below  or  the  grassy 
zone  above,  the  conditions  of  the  intermediate  wooded  zone  are 
probably  more  uniform,  or,  perhaps,  species  living  on  the  ground  or 
on  low  herbage  are  more  likely  to  be  affected  by  alkaline  efflores- 
cences than  those  which  live  at  a  greater  height  on  trees  and  shrubs. 

If  these  views  are  correct,  we  should  expect  to  find  analogous 
effects  produced  on  similar  mollusks  in  similar  situations  throughout 
the  world.  They  should  be  produced  without  reference  to  the  line  of 
descent  of  the  species,  that  is,  species  of  the  European  Buliminus  or 
the  African  Achatina  should  in  analogous  situations  exhibit  practi- 
cally the  same  sort  of  deformation  as  has  just  been  described  in  spe- 
cies of  Bulimulus  isolated  on  the  Galapagos.  Is  this  the  case? 
Analogous  situations  are  not  very  numerous.  Wanted,  an  island 
habitat  with  volcanic  rocks,  a  climate  combining  periodical  dryness 
with  occasional  wet  mists  and  a  regular  rainy  season.  In  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  we  have  something  of  the  sort,  but,  owing  to  their 
larger  size,  there  is  a  much  more  continuous  flow  of  water  in  streams, 
the  climate  is  not  so  hot  and  the  parallel  is  far  from  exact.  The 
island  of  Fernando  de  Noronha  has  been  said  to  have  a  remarkable 
resemblance  to  the  Galapagos,  and  so  did  St.  Helena  before  it  was 
deforested.     A  glance  at  the  fauna  will  be  of  interest. 

The  island  of  Fernando  de  Noronha  like  the  Galapagos  is  volcanic, 
with  a  soil  formed  by  decomposition  of  the  basalt,  and  is  well  sup- 
plied with  vegetation  and  water.  Smith  says  of  the  mollusk  fauna^ 
"  Of  the  land  shells  two  are  well  known  West  Indian  species,  one 
has  been  recorded  from  Brazil,  Peru  and  the  island  of  Opara,  and 
the  remaining  four,  up  to  the  present,  appear  to  be  peculiar  to  the 
island.  One  of  these,  however,  Bulimus  Ramagei  suggests  a  faunis- 
tic  similarity  to  Brazil,  as  the  section  of  Bulimus  to  which  it  belongs 
(Tomigerus)  with  one  exception  occurs  only  in  that  country." 

The  species  are  as  follows  according  to  Smith  : 

1.  Helix  (Polygyratia)  quinquelirata  Smith. 

5  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  Zool.,  Vol.  XX,  p.  484,  1890. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  415 

2.  B.  (  Tomigerus  f)  Eamagei  Smith. 

3.  B.  (Bulimulus)  Ridleyi  Smith. 

4.  Pwpa  solitaria  Smith. 

5.  Stenogyra  (  Opeas)  octonoides  C.  B.  Ads. 

6.  S.  (^  Opeas)  siibula  Pfr. 

7.  S.  (  Opeas)  Beckiana  Pfr.  var. 

This  fauna  is  of  South  American  type.  While  there  are  some 
Australasian  forms  which  recall  Polygyratia  in  their  shell  charac- 
ters, their  anatomy  is  still  unknown.  The  nearest  relatives  of  this 
species  appear  to  be  the  continental  if.  po/foc?o?ifa  Orbigny,  and  such 
forms  as  H.  endodonta  of  Ecuador.  It  is  curious  that  the  Helices 
of  oceanic  islands  so  frequently  belong  to  groups  which  have  the 
throat  of  the  shell  armed  with  spiral  lamellie,  and  the  fact  will  be 
considered  later  in  connection  with  the  St.  Helena  fauna.  None  has 
yet  been  described  from  the  Galapagos,  yet  one  cannot  help  wonder- 
ing if  the  Helix  not  specifically  named,  found  by  Darwin,  and  sup- 
posed by  Cuming  and  himself  to  be  identical  with  a  Tahitian  spe- 
cies, might  not  have  been  of  this  type.  It  is  obvious  that  the 
Noronha  fauna  is  too  small  to  admit  of  basing  much  upon  its  char- 
acters, but  small  as  it  is,  they  are  quite  suggestive.  The  second 
species  is  referred  with  some  doubt  to  Tomigerus  by  Smith.  It 
seems  to  the  writer  that  the  doubt  is  well  founded,  and  that  the 
curious  species  in  question  is  hardly  more  different  from  B.  Ridleyi 
than  B.  Darwini  is  from  B.jacobi  or  Simrothi. 

Bulimuhis  Ridleyi  is  fuscous  with  a  pale  peripheral  line.  The 
incremental  lines  are  cut  by  slender  spiral  stride  and  the  shell  is  umbili 
cated.  The  aperture  recalls  that  of  B.  Simrothi  and  in  some  respects 
that  of  the  fossil  Bulimali  of  the  Oligocene  silex  beds  of  Tampa, 
Florida.  It  is  found  on  trees  and  under  stones  rather  widely  dis- 
tributed on  the  island.  According  to  Smith  "  It  resembles  some- 
what in  form  certain  species  of  Par  tula ;  it  faintly  recalls,  chiefly  on 
account  of  color,  Bulimulus  jaeobi  from  the  Galapagos  Islands."  It 
will  be  observed  that  all  the  forms  with  which  it  is  compared  are  of 
insular  habitat,  Florida  in  Oligocene  times  having  been  an  island, 
while  in  the  Oligocene  beds  of  the  continent,  of  the  same  horizon  as 
the  silex  beds,  no  Bulimuli  have  been  found. 

Pupa  solitaria  Smith,  is  so  similar  to  the  variable  P.  Wolfii  Mil- 
ler of  Guayaquil  (P.  munita  and  P.  clausa  Eeibisch  of  the  Galapa- 
gos) that,  bearing  in  mind  the  wide  dispersion  of  these  minute  spe- 
cies, I  strongly  suspect  a  sufficient   number  of  specimens  would 


416  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

demonstrate  their  identity.     The  species  of  Stenogyra  are  obviously 
West  Indian  or  continental  and  call  for  no  special  remark. 

The  land  shells  of  St.  Helena  have  been  described  by  Smith  (P. 
Z.  S.,  1892,  pp.  258-270),  from  collections  by  Captain  W.  H.  Tur- 
ton  R.  E.  The  National  Museum  is  indebted  to  Captain  Turtonfor 
a  nearly  complete  series  of  his  St.  Helena  shells,  including  one 
or  two  species  accidentally  introduced  since  the  settlement  of  the 
island.  These  have  proved  of  great  value  for  comparison,  as  the 
best  figures  fail  to  give  the  peculiarities  of  surface  texture  with 
which,  in  this  discussion,  we  are  largely  concerned.  Omitting  syn- 
onyms, mere  varieties  and  recently  introduced  species,  the  land  shell 
fauna  of  St.  Helena  comprises  four  species  of  helicoid  shells  without 
lamellae,  which  have  been  referred  to  Patula  but  which  may  prove 
to  be  edentulous  species  of  Endodonta,  ten*  species  of  Endodonta 
(section  Helenoconcha  Pilsbr}'^)  with  more  or  less  complicated  oral 
lamellre  ;  Achatina  (PacJujottis)  auris-vulpina  Dillw.,  and  two  or 
three  related  species  ;  Achatina  {Cleostyla)  exulataand  suhtriincata ; 
Bulimulus  {Pachnodus')  helena  and  two  related  species  ;  a  Tomigerus- 
like  sheW,  Papa  {Camp olaemus)  perexilis  (Smith)  Pilsbry,  and  two 
minute  species  of  Pupa ;  and,  lastly,  three  species  of  Succinea,  in  all 
twenty-nine  species.  Of  these,  by  the  gradual  desiccation  of  the 
island,  twenty-two  are  become  extinct. 

The  native  forms  found  living  comprise  two  species  of  Endo- 
donta, Pachyotus  melanoides  and  P.  Turtoni,  and  three  species  of 
Succinea.  The  mollusk  fauna  as  a  whole,  is  Oceanic,  and  shows  no 
strong  affinity  with  either  America  or  West  Africa,  especially  the 
former.  The  manner  in  which  these  mollusks  reached  the  island  is 
a  mystery,  the  more  so  as  it  is  said  that  the  flora  and  insect  fauna 
also  show  no  special  relationship  with  those  of  South  America. 
Nevertheless,  the  contours  of  the  sea  bottom  as  well  as  certain  feat- 
ures of  the  fauna  indicate  a  previous  more  intimate  relation  between 
South  America  and  Africa  than  has  recently  existed,  and,  whatever 
this  bond  may  have  been,  it  is  not  improbable  that  St.  Helena  par- 
ticipated in  it.  Any  ordinary  means  of  transport  would  seem  to  be 
insufficient  to  account  for  the  presence  of  Pachyotus,  of  which  even 
the  eggs  are  six  millimeters  long.  We  are  not  obliged  for  present 
purposes  to  concern  ourselves  with  this  problem  of  origin.     The  in- 

*  H.  Alexandri  Forbes  and  polyodon  Sby.,  are  both  represented  in  Captain 
Turton's  series  and  are  distinct  species  ;  a  single  specimen  of  a  species  appar- 
ently undescribed  also  occurred  among  those  sent  to  the  National  Museum. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  417 

timate  structure  of  these  animal  as  related   to  the  conditions  in 
which  they  live  is  the  object  of  consideration. 

The  Helices  are  of  less  importance  in  this  discussion  because  we 
do  not  know  what  species  may  be  found  to  inhabit  the  Galapagos  on 
thorough  search.  But  we  may,  in  passing,  note  that  the  species 
have  certain  characteristics  which  are  almost  exclusively  found  in 
members  of  insular  founas,  of  which  the  most  remarkable  are  the 
parallel  spiral  lamellae  running  inward  from  the  aperture.  They 
are  obviously  protective  and  their  presence  would  suggest  a  peculiar 
enemy,  entering  the  aperture  to  devour  the  inhabitant  of  the  shell, 
as  prevalent  in  island  faunas. 

If  we  examine  PfeifFer's  list  of  species  belonging  to  the  section  of 
Patula  called  Endodonta,  to  which  these  Helices  were  referred  by 
him,  we  shall  find  that  of  those  with  basal  lamellae  all  are  insular 
species,  the  largest  body  of  land  to  which  any  species  is  referred  be- 
ing Tasmania.  Of  the  eighteen  forms  with  parietal  lamellae  all  are 
insular  on  tropical  islands  from  New  Caledonia  to  Hawaii.  Of 
those  with  both  parietal  and  basal  lamellae,  omitting  those  described 
from  St.  Helena,  the  entire  thirty-three  species  are  insular  and  from 
mountainous  tropical  islands,  most  of  which  are  known  to  be  vol- 
canic. 

Of  the  other  land  shells  the  singular  P(?j;a  or  Tomigerus  perexilis 
appears  to  be  a  local  development,  but  there  are  two  ordinary 
Pupas  one  of  which  is  very  similar  in  its  general  features  and  type 
of  lamellation  to  the  Noronha  and  Galapagos  species,  a  likeness 
already  noted  by  Smith.  The  Succiueas  again,  over  and  above  the 
general  similarity  of  the  species  everywhere,  exhibit  certain  pecu- 
liarities, which  appear  to  be  associated  with  an  insular  habitat.  The 
Siiccinea  brevior  of  the  Galapagos  can  hardly  be  discriminated  from 
S.  hekmce  from  St.  Helena.  S.  Bettii  is  parallel  with  S.  pida,  and 
S.  Wolfi.  with  Bensoniana.  In  endeavoring  to  find,  in  our  large 
collection  of  domestic  and  foreign  Succineas,  some  species  with 
sculptured  surface  to  compare  with  S.  corbis,  the  only  forms  of  the 
kind  which  the  National  Museum  afforded  wex'e  insular,  from  Samoa, 
Martinique,  St.  Helena,  etc.  Doubtless  the  peculiar  vermicular  or 
dichotomous  impressed  lines  which  these  species  show  are  due  to 
causes  similar  to  those  already  described  which  modify  the  surface 
sculpture  in  Bullmulus.  Not  all  them  show  it,  but  those  which  do 
show  it  are,  so  far  as  I  have  yet  observed,  either  insular  or  subjected 
to  locally  arid  conditions.  Those  species  in  which  this  sort  of  sculpt- 
ure has  become  habitual  are  all  insular  and  tropical. 


418  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896.. 

There  remain  only  the  Bulimoid  forms ;  these  being  mostly  fossil 
have  received  little  attention  in  the  usual  works  of  reference.  The 
well  known  Bulimus  miris-vulpina  o^J)i\\\syn  (sp.)  was  erected  into 
a  genus  by  Beck  as  early  as  1837  under  the  name  of  PachyotusJ 
With  it  Beck  associated  a  number  of  species  of  the  type  oi  Bulimus 
bilabiatus  and  melanostomus,  which  arrangement  was  followed  by 
PfeifFer  and  most  subsequent  writers.  There  are  distinct  points  of 
resemblance,  but  these  are  probably  dynamic  rather  than  ontogen- 
etic. To  the  writer  the  relations  of  Pachyotus  are  directly  with  a 
certain  number  of  its  associates  of  St.  Helena. 

The  Bulimiform  Helicacea  of  St.  Helena  may  be  divided  into  two 
groups*: — one  (Achatiuoid)  typified  by  the  Pachyotus  auris-vulpina 
and  characterized  by  a  closed  or  nearly  closed  umbilicus  and  a  cork 
screw  twisted  axis,  the  other  (Bulimuloid)  by  a  straight  axis  and 
more  or  less  open  umbilicus.  The  last  group  comprises  Bnlimulus 
Blofieldi  and  Seleanus  of  Forbes  and  B.  lielena  Quoy  and  Gaimard. 
The  Pachyotus  group^  comprises  all  the  other  species  of  the  island. 

'  The  type  was  selected  from  among  Beck's  species  by  Gray  in  1847.  In 
1848  Fischer  de  Waldheim  named  it  CJdlonopsis. 

*  According  to  Mr.  H.  A.  Pilsbry,  whose  opinion  on  the  subject  is  entitled 
to  the  greatest  weight,  the  two  principal  groups  are  probably  referable  to  the 
AchatinidiE  {Pac]iyotus  ^xiA  Cleostyla)  an\i  the  BuliiiiulidcE  [Fachnodiis) .  The 
former  would  be  nearest  to  Ferideris,  and  the  latter  to  Pachnodus  as  typified 
bj'  P.  vehdhiHs.  As  the  so-called  To7>iigerus  oi'^t.  Helena  is  probably  a  mod- 
ified Pupa  [Cai/ipolamics  Pilsbry)  analogous  to  Boysidia  and  Hypelostoma,  ii 
would  seem  that  the  affinities  of  the  St.  Helena  fauna  are  West  African,  Ori- 
ental or  Oceanic,  rather  than  South  American,  in  spite  of  the  presence  in 
South  America  of  the  Achatinoid  "  B^  coronatus  and  "  B."  HanUyi  Pfr. 

^  The  teeth  of  the  radula  of  P.  melanioides  are  in  nearly  straight  transverse 
rows,  and  the  rhachidian  teeth  are  narrow,  with  a  single  small  cusp,  as  in 
typical  Achatinidu-.  The  laterals  are  bicuspid.  On  the  marginal  teeth  the  outer 
cusp  splits,  forming  two  or  three  denticles  on  the  inner,  four  or  mo^e  on  the 
uter  teeth.  The  formula  is  14.12.1.12.14.  The  arcuate  jaw  (distorted  in  my 
preparation)  is  very  closely  and  finely  striated,  as  in  Liniicolaria. 


XV        2S-       26 


t^^  rj:  ■  -^1^  W"^' — 


Teeth  of  Pachyotus  melanioides.  Jaw  of  P.  melanioides. 

The  main  character  of  the  dentition  different  from  other  genera  of  Acha- 
tinidcr  is  the  multiple  splitting  of  the  outer  cusp  on  the  marginals,  as  in  Cion- 
ella^  Pupidcr,  Vallonia,  etc. — H.  A.  P. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  419^ 

Those  who  are  not  accustomed  to  recognize  the  flexibility  of  organ- 
isms nor  to  discriminate  ancestral  from  dynamic  characters  will^ 
perhaps,  be  astonished  at  any  arrangement  which  includes  in  one 
group  species  apparently  so  dissimilar  as  auris-vulpina  and  melani- 
oides,  but  I  think  a  little  unprejudiced  study  of  the  specimens,  in 
connection  with  B.  subplieatus,  will  convince  any  one  of  the  likeli- 
hood of  their  genetic  relationship. 

To  treat  the  simplest  and  smallest  group  first,  we  may  take  the  B, 
helena  and  its  allies.  This  species  was  placed  in  the  section  Ncesio- 
tus  by  Pfeiffer  in  1856  (Mai.  Blatt.,  II,  p.  161);  and  it  is  quite  similar 
in  several  respects  to  some  of  the  Galapagos  species,  but  is  probably 
derived  from  another  shoot  of  the  genus  Bulimulus.  The  nucleus 
in  this  species,  in  B.  Blofieldi  and  Seleanus,  is  swollen  and  almost 
smooth.  It  has  no  axial  dimple  and  the  surface  seems  not  to  have 
had  any  coarse  sculpture.  The  species  show  the  microscopic  irreg- 
ularity of  the  incremental  lines,  the  undue  thickening  of  the  shell 
and  the  broken  lines  of  spirally  disposed  granulations  which  indicate 
the  influence  of  an  arid  or  alkaline  habitat.  Full  grown  specimens 
generally  show  the  irregularities  of  the  aperture  characteristic  of 
individuals  which  have  been  forced  into  long  continued  hibernation 
before  the  mantle  had  discharged  all  its  surplus  calcareous  salts,  or 
had,  by  reason  of  long  continued  aridity,  to  caulk  the  vicinity  of  the 
aperture  with  shelly  matter  in  order  not  to  be  absolutely  desiccated 
by  evaporation.  These  characters  are  precisely  those  we  find  im- 
posed upon  the  Galapagos,  Lower  California  and  other  arid  region 
species. 

The  Achatinoid  group  though  possessing  many  dynamic  charac- 
ters in.  common  is  probably  derived  from  two  sources.  B,  exulahis 
Benson  and  B.  siibtruncatus  Smith  have  an  imperforated  twisted 
axis,  a  plump  small  nucleus  followed  by  a  few  small  and  then  sev- 
eral rapidly  enlarging  whorls,  a  flaring  aperture  angulated  below 
and  with  a  keel  or  angle  on  the  edge  of  the  pillar.  They  show  les& 
than  any  of  the  others  the  effects  of  aridity  and  have  rather  thin 
shells.  They  originally  had  translucent  or  brownish  shells  with  a 
pale  tracery  of  opaque  white  or  yellowish.  The  aperture  is  regular 
and  there  is  but  little  callous  deposit.  For  this  section  the  name 
Cleostyla  may  be  used.  Its  resemblance  to  Pseudachatina  seems  to 
be  slight  and  superficial. 

The  second  group,  Pachyotus  of  Beck,  with  C.  auris-vulpina  asr 
type,  comprises  also  B.  melanioides,  B.  subplieatus  and  probably  B^ 


420  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Turtoni,  though  the  latter  is  less  certain  and  may  possibly  belong  to 
a  third  section.  The  typical  Pachyotus  has  a  dimpled  nucleus, 
though  it  is  not  keeled  like  that  of  N<xsiotus  and  the  Lower  Califor- 
nian  and  Peruvian  Bulbmdi.  In  its  sculpture  the  transverse  pre- 
dominates over  the  spiral.  The  surface  of  the  shell  is  everywhere 
transversely  wa-inkled  and  toward  the  suture  is  more  or  less  gathered 
into  short  rounded  plaits,  stronger  in  the  younger  whorls.  The 
colors  are  dark,  more  or  less  translucent  tesselated  with  paler  opaque 
markings  or  streaks.  The  axis  is  minutely  tubular  and  twisted, 
especially  as  the  last  whorl  is  being  finished  off,  where  at  maturity 
a  plait  is  more  or  less  distinctly  developed. 

The  aperture  has  a  simple,  somewhat  expanded,  more  or  less  thick- 
ened edge,  which,  in  old  specimens  which  have  hibernated,  may 
show  heavy  deposits  of  callus,  which  is  always  angulated  or  obscurely 
channelled  at  the  base  of  the  pillai'.  Specimens  which  have  sur- 
vived hibernation  have  the  usual  irregularities  about  the  margin. 
A  careful  inspection  reveals  no  reasons  for  supposing  that  P.  auris- 
vulpina  might  not  have  been  the  descendent  of  a  form  like  P. 
melanioides.  I  have  seen  no  completely  adult  specimens  of  the  lat- 
ter or  of  B.  Turtoni,  but  see  no  reason  to  suppose  that  the  lip  would 
not,  under  suitable  conditions,  be  thickened  in  them  as  it  is  in 
P.  subpHcatus.  Perhaps  at  present  P.  vielamoides  inhabits  a  region 
where  it  does  not  now  suffer  from  aridity,  which  would  account  for 
the  difference  in  the  deposit  about  the  mouth.  It  is  well  known 
that  great  fluctuations  have  taken  place  in  the  rainfall  on  the  island 
due  to  variations  in  the  woods  and  forests,  their  destruction  and 
partial  restoration.  However  this  maybe,  the  living  species  of  the 
group  have  but  little  callous  deposit  about  the  mouth  ;  P.  suhplicatus 
which  evidently  from  the  freshness  of  its  colors,  cannot  have  been 
long  extinct,  has  a  greater  amount,  and  P.  auTis-vulpina  in  addition 
to  the  marginal  thickening  shows  a  parietal  tubercle  of  callus  often 
of  large  size,  and  the  irregularities  of  form,  size,  and  margin  of  the 
aperture  are  such  as  to  indicate  clearly  degeneration  leading  to  ex- 
tinction by  increasing  aridity  of  its  habitat. 

Curiously  enough,  according  to  Mr.  Smith,  only  one  Helix,  an 
introduction  from  other  regions,  has  been  found  in  Ascension  Island  ; 
the  other  known  terrestrial  mollusk  is  Limax  ascensio)iis  Quoy, 
which  may  well  be  an  introduction  also.  The  explanation  of  this 
difference  between  St.  Helena  and  Ascension  lies  in  the  greater 
aridity  of  the  latter.      Though  thorough  search  might  reveal  some 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  421 

extinct  species,  it  is  higbly  probable  tliat  this  island  was  never 
wooded  and  has  always  been  much  dryer  than  St.  Helena. 

It  would  carry  us  too  far  afield  to  undertake  a  discussion  of  the 
characteristics  of  the  terrestrial  mollusk  fauna  of  those  Pacific 
islands  which  by  their  elevated  and  volcanic  character  and  geo- 
graphic situation  might  be  comparable  with  those  we  have  already 
reviewed.  A  comparison  of  other  highland  subtropical  faunas  where 
the  situation  is  complicated  by  seasonal  or  general  aridity,  will 
throw  much  light  on  the  principles  involved.  I  have  elsewhere 
examined  the  Lower  Californian  Bulimxdi  (Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
1893)  a  group  which,  like  that  of  the  highlands  of  Peru  and  Chili, 
offers  an  excellent  field  for  study.  But  the  absence  of  detailed  knowl- 
edge of  the  situs  affected  by  the  several  species  is  a  great  drawback 
to  safe  generalization.  A  species  which  spends  its  existence  bur- 
rowing in  the  succulent  fronds  of  cactuses  can  hardly  be  said  to  be 
subject  to  arid  conditions,  even  if  the  cactus  stands  in  a  desert,  and 
similar  doubts  and  difficulties  are  encountered  at  every  turn,  when 
one  would  investigate  a  general  question  of  this  kind.  On  isolated 
islands  like  the  Galapagos  and  St.  Helena,  the  conditions  are  com- 
paratively simple,  but  on  the  continents  it  is  different,  and  there  the 
complexity  of  conditions  is  too  great  to  allow  us  with  safety  to  take 
much  for  granted. 

Fischer  has  pointed  out  that  existing  faunas  are  most  nearly 
related  to  the  antecedent  tertiary  faunas  of  the  same  region  (Man. 
Conch.,  p.  118),  the  writer  has  shown  that  this  is  true  for  the  Amer- 
ican and  Antillean  regions,  and  others  have  recognized  the  same 
truth  in  other  parts  of  the  world.  In  pursuance  of  the  same  idea, 
the  writer  believes  that,  in  the  majority  of  cases,  a  circumscribed 
local  fauna  of  land  shells  will  be  found  in  the  main  to  be  most 
nearly  related  to  geographically  adjacent  groups  from  which  it  has 
probably  been  derived  ;  that  the  conditions  of  the  environment  are 
capable  of  inducing  directly  and  without  the  aid  of  natural  or  any 
other  kind  of  selection,  certain  changes  in  the  form  and  surface 
characters  which,  on  the  present  basis  of  classification,  are  generally 
taken  as  of  systematic  value ;  that  these  characteristics  may  be  so 
loosely  worn  as  to  disappear  in  the  individual  or  in  the  whole  group 
if  the  pressure  of  the  environment  inducing  them  be  altered  or  re- 
moved ;  that  in  time,  and  especially  if  the  characters  be  of  useful 
nature,  they  may  become  fixed  by  hereditary,  transmission  or  natural 
selection,  or  both  combined  ;  that  similar  factors  in  the  environ- 


422  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ment  if  not  too  intimately  complicated  with  others,  will  produce  in 
organisms  of  the  same  general  nature  similar  results  wherever  situa- 
ted ;  and,  lastly,  that  the  resulting  features  strikingly  similar 
though  they  may  be,  are,  conversely,  no  evidence  of  ontogenetic 
relationship.  In  any  census  undertaken  with  a  view  to  determin- 
ing systematic  relationship,  such  characters  must  be  eliminated  in 
order  to  avoid  an  erroneous  conclusion. 

It  is  only  by  close  and  minute  study  of  the  details  of  the  situs  of 
species  and  of  their  minor,  though  by  no  meaus  unimportant,  char- 
acters of  form  and  surface,  that  we  shall  be  able  to  recognize  those 
features  which  may  be  classed  as  dynamic  as  opposed  to  those  which 
even  if  dynamic  also  in  their  ultimate  origin,  have  become  geneti- 
cally constant.  The  noxious  and  stupefying  multiplication  of  spe- 
cific names,  which  has  been  characteristic  of  a  certain  school  of 
workers  during  the  last  twenty  years,  could  never  have  gained  scien- 
tific recognition  had  there  been  any  general  appreciation  of  the 
extent  to  which  dynamic  modifications  affect  all  organisms.  It  is 
much  easier  to  describe  and  name  a  character  than  it  is  to  search 
out  its  reason  for  existence.  It  is  even  easier,  with  proper  appara- 
tus, to  count  the  cells  in  an  organism  of  moderate  size  than  it  is  to 
recognize  and  discriminate  the  influence  of  the  environment  upon 
the  organic  total  of  those  cells.  By  inspecting  the  fragments  of  a 
building  one  may  learn  something  of  construction,  but  it  is  only  by 
contemplating  it  as  a  whole  that  the  higher  elements  of  architecture 
can  be  recognized. 

Recognizing  the  imperfection  and  inadequacy  of  our  knowledge, 
even  of  the  limited  groups  discussed  in  this  paper,  the  writer  thinks 
that  some  glimmerings  of  light  may  be  had  on  the  subject  of 
dynamic  characters  from  the  accompanying  study  of  insular  land 
shells. 

The  following  summary  will  express,  tentatively,  such  of  the  con- 
clusions as  appear  justified  from  the  study  of  the  specimens: 

A.  Given  a  region  of  volcanic  origin  and  mountainous  character, 
with  local  or  seasonal  aridity,  more  or  less  arboreal  vegetation  as 
well  as  herbage  and  a  tropical  or  nearly  tropical  climate,  moderate 
isolation  and  safety  to  propagate  and  increase. 

B.  Into  this  region  let  land  shells  of  the  principal  continental 
types  be  introduced,  and  allowed  the  necessary  time  to  become  dis- 
persed over  the  region,  multiply  abundantly  and  respond  to  the 
■environment. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  423 

C.  What  results  in  the  shape  of  dynamic  modifications  may  be 
anticipated  ? 

Answer. — The  first  result  of  room  to  spread,  safety  and  plenty  of 
food,  would  be  to  release  the  species  from  the  shackles  of  the  en- 
vironment from  which  they  had  been  transplanted  and  to  promote 
general  variability. 

(Ex.  Wonderful  variability  of  insular  shell  faunas,  such  as  those 
■of  Madeira,  Galapagos  and  St.  Helena  Islands). 

Secondly,  the  particular  features  likely  to  indicate  local  dynamic 
•influence  under  the  assumed  conditions  would  be : 

On  the  surface:  wrinkling,  corrugation  or  shagreening. 

(Ex.  The  great  majority  of  land  shells  in  such  situations,  as  the 
Selicidce  in  Madeira,  the  Bulimuli  in  the  Galapagos,  Succinea  in 
!inany  islands,  etc.). 

At  the  suture:  plaiting  or  wrinkling  more  or  less  rhythmical. 

(Ex.  B.  achatellinus  Forbes  and  B.  nux  Brod.  of  the  Galapagos  ; 
•many  Achatinella ;  all  the  Pachyntis,  etc.). 

At  the  vertex:  loose  coiling  or  dimpling  of  the  nuclear  coil. 

(Ex.  Bulimuli  of  Lower  California,  Galapagos,  Peru,  St.  Helena, 
etc.). 

Of  the  axis  :  Exhibition  of  a  tendency  to  irregularity,  cork  screw 
twisting,  or  outward  (internal  to  the  tube  of  the  axis,  but  external 
to  the  tube  of  the  shell)  grooving  in  shells  of  elongated  form,  result- 
ing in  a  tendency  to  form  an  angle  or  keel  at  the  anterior  edge  of 
the  pillar  within  the  aperture  and  an  obscure  channel  at  its  extrem- 
ity. 

(Ex.  All  the  Pachijotis,  many  of  the  Ncesioti,  Cleostyla,  Pleuro- 
pyrgus,  Achatinella,  etc.). 

Of  the  aperture:  Thickening  of  the  margin  in  connection  with 
hibernation,  the  formation  of  ill  defined  tubercles  on  the  lips  or  par- 
ies, irregularity  of  the  margin  with  respect  to  the  plane  of  incre- 
iment,  and  a  tendency  to  contraction  at  the  full  grown  aperture  dur- 
ing or  after  hibernation. 

(Ex.  Pachyotus,  many  Ncesioti,  some  Bulimuli  of  Lower  Califor- 
•nia,  etc.). 

Of  these  characters  some  are  more  likely  than  others  to  be  selected 
as  beneficial  to  the  species,  and  these  relate  chiefly  to  general  form 
and  coloration.  In  the  matter  of  form  the  particular  situs  of  the 
species  has  a  preponderating  influence,  small  and  slender  shells  be- 
ing easier  to  manage  in  the  narrow  fissures  under  stones  frequented 


424  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

by  many  species ;  short  and  stout  forms  apparently  succeeding  bet- 
ter among  dead  leaves  and  the  short  herbage  in  stony  places,  while 
more  elongated  medium-sized  forms  are  more  in  vogue  among  those 
which  live  on  trees  and  high  shrubs.  It  may  also  be  the  case  that 
■when  hibernating,  affixed  to  a  branch  or  leaf  stalk,  a  form  simulat- 
ing a  bud  or  spine  would  to  a  certain  extent  be  protected  from 
thrushes  and  other  mollusk-eating  birds. 

In  the  matter  of  color,  selection  undoubtedly  has  much  influence. 
Subtranslucent  browns  and  pinkish  flesh-color  harmonize  with  dead 
leaves,  and  the  opaque  tracery  of  yellowish  streaks  so  common  on  the 
ground  loving  species  obviously  adds  to  the  difficulty  of  recognizing 
the  snail  in  such  localities.  Among  the  lava  rocks  sienna  browns 
flecked  with  white  are  common  and  unquestionably  protective.  On 
trees  everywhere  the  tendency  is  to  spiral  stripes  of  color,  the  sur- 
face is  frequently  more  polished,  the  color  brighter,  with  a  tendency 
to  the  development  of  green  among  the  colors,  which  is,  so  far  as  I 
know,  never  found  in  species  living  on  the  ground.  In  Achatinella 
these  tendencies  may  be  studied  with  advantage,  and  they  can  be 
recognized  in  the  Ncesioti  and  other  Bulhmdi  almost  everywhere. 
They  are  recognizable  also  among  the  Helices.  In  insular  faunas 
the  Helices  which  seem  to  persist  most  effectively  are  small  with 
many  whorls,  a  wrinkled  surface,  yellowish  or  olive  coloration  often 
with  reddish  radiating  flecks  when  fresh,  or  wholly  reddish-brown. 
Many  of  them  have  a  protective  armature  of  lamellre  obstructing 
the  aperture,  perhaps  against  the  hard  round-bodied  millipedes,  like 
Julis,  which  eat  snails  and  are  not  uncommon  in  insular  faunas. 

In  an  insular  or  isolated  fauna,  under  the  conditions  we  have 
assumed,  we  should  expect  to  find  under  the  bulimoid  forms  (even 
in  a  limited  number  of  species  derived  from  a  still  more  restricted 
number  of  ancestral  types)  a  globose,  a  medium  and  a  very  attenu- 
ated type.  This  is  well-illustrated  in  almost  all  the  faunas,  as  in 
the  Hawaiian  Islands  (Achatinellidce),  Bulimuli  of  Lower  Califor- 
nia, Galapagos  Islands  and  St.  Helena.  Leaving  out  the  more  nor- 
mal or  medium  type,  a  few  examples  may  be  mentioned  : 

Locality.  Globose.  Very  slender. 

Hawaii,  A.  kauiensis,  etc.  A.  s^ibula,  plicata,  etc. 

Galapagos,  B.  Darivinii,  nux,  B.  Haheli,  chemnitzoides. 

St.  Helena,  B.  auris-vulpina,  B.  melauioides. 

Lower  Cala.  B.  suffiatus,  pilula,  B.  artemesia. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  425' 

There  is  no  reason  why  such  exceptional  forms  should  maintain 
themselves,  unless  there  is  a  niche  in  the  environment  which  they 
are  especially  qualified  to  fill. 

The  small  Zonitidce,  commonly  known  as  Hyalinia,  Conulus,  etc.,  ■ 
are  especially  fitted  by  their  size  and  lightness  to  be  transported  by 
winds,  adhering  to  dead  leaves  or  other  light  objects.  They  are  also 
well-adapted  to  maintain  themselves  under  adverse  circumstances, 
excepting  against  extreme  aridity.  Consequently  it  is  not  surpris- 
ing that  they,  and  the  small  Pupidce  of  which  the  same  is  true, 
should  be  found  as  members  of  nearly  all  insular  faunas  where  many 
other  common  types  are  wanting. 

Other  small,  thin  and  light  shells  like  Leptinaria,  Balea,  Suhu- 
lina,  etc.,  are  so  easily  transported  that  their  presence  in  insular 
faunas  excites  no  surprise,  though  the  mystery  as  to  how  any  of 
these  shells  reached  their  ])reseut  habitat  remains  as  provoking  as 
ever.  The  distribution  of  laud  shells  is  full  of  such  mysteries,  to- 
ward the  solution  of  which  so  little  has  been  done.  Thus,  the  Helix 
(Tachea)  suhglobosa  of  Binney  is  apparently  not  distinguishable 
from  the  pale  unicolorate  variety  of  the  H.  hortensis  of  Europe  and 
has  been  confidently  asserted  to  have  been  introduced  by  commerce. 
It  is  the  only  representative  of  its  particular  group  in  America,  and 
is  known  only  from  the  extreme  northeastern  border  of  the  United 
States  from  Massachusetts  to  Cape  Breton  Island,  living  everywhere 
close  to  the  sea  or  even  on  small  islands  off  the  coast.  The  suspi- 
cion that  this  species  is  an  importation  is  very  natural,  but  never- 
theless it  is  found  in  the  clays  of  the  Champlain  epoch  of  the  coast 
of  Maine  and  in  prehistoric  shell-heaps  of  the  same  region,  so  that, 
if  it  was  imported,  Leif  Ericsen  had  a  predecessor  in  the  glacial 
epoch.  The  banded  forms  of  hortensis,  since  imported,  do  well  and 
multiply  varieties  without  difficulty  and  in  profusion.  How  did  it 
happen,  then,  that  the  importer  of  the  subglobosa  brought  only  one 
of  the  rarer  varieties  and  planted  it  along  a  thousand  miles  of 
coast  ?  And  why  should  it  appear  living  chiefly  on  rocky  islets, 
never  occupied  or  tilled  by  man  ?  The  answer  to  such  questions  in- 
volves matters  of  the  greatest  interest  and  importance  in  the  history 
of  the  distribution  of  life  on  the  globe.  Ap^^lied  to  the  Galapagos 
Islands,  it  is  evident  that  occupation,  especially  by  sheep,  will  ren- 
der it  impossible  forever  to  get  any  complete  data.  May  it  not  be 
hoped,  therefore,  that  some  one  will  undertake  to  make  a  thorough 
and  complete  survey  of  the  malacology  of  these  islands  before  it  is 

28 


426  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

too  late.  The  study  of  the  development  of  specific  forras  can  never 
be  made  complete  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  because  the  sheep  and 
goat  have  preceded  the  investigator.  There  is  still  a  chance  to  study 
the  problem  in  the  Galapagos  Islands,  and  it  should  not  be  lost. 

SUMMARY  OF  THE  LAND  SHELL  FAUNA  OF  THE  GALAPAGOS 

ISLANDS. 

Genus  BULIMULUS  Leaoh. 
Section  NAESIO  TUS  Alters. 

NcBsiotm  Albers,  Heliceen,  p.  162,  1850.     Type  B.  nux. 

Rhaphiellus  Pfr.,  Versuch  einer  Anordnung  der  Heliceen  nach  natiirlichen 
Gruppen.  Malak.  Blatter,  II,  p.  160,  1855.  Type  B.  achatinellinus.  Martens 
in  Albers,  Ed.  ii,  p.  238.  1860  (Sect.  Bulimini). 

Omphalostyla  H.  &  A.  Adams,  Gen.  Rec.  Moll.,  ii,  p.  161,  1855;  not  of 
Schleuter,  Syst.  Verz.,  p.  7,  1838. 

Nesiotes  Martens,  in  Albers,  ed.  ii,  pp.  220-21,  1860. 

Nesiotus  Clessin,  in  Pfeiffer,  Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  254,  1881. 

Ataxus  sp.  Clessin,  op.  cit.^  p.  253. 

Pelecostoma  Beibisch  (exparte)  in  Isis,  Abh.  3,  p.  13,  1892. 

The  nomenclature  of  this  section  has  had  serious  vicissitudes,  as 
indicated  by  the  above  synonymy. 

The  group  was  named  Ncesiotus  by  Albers  who  gave  no  derivation 
for  it,  though  the  sound  of  the  word  naturally  inclined  the  hearer 
to  suppose  that  it  was  suggested  by  v>jfft<«r>j9,  islanders,  and  on  this 
assumption  von  Martens  proceeded  to  modify  the  spelling  to  Nesiotes, 
which  would  be  a  proper  latinization  of  that  Greek  word.  There  is 
no  rule  of  nomenclature  which  authorizes  any  one  to  supply  a  gratu- 
itous derivation  for  a  word  published  without  any ;  still  less  because 
the  original  does  not  agree  with  the  later  assumption  is  any  one 
authorized  to  modify  or  destroy  a  name  properly  proposed  in  other 
respects.    Consequently  von  Marten's  substitute  cannot  be  accepted.*" 

In  describing  his  Bulimus  achatellinus,  Forbes  says  that  it  "is 
unlike  any  known  Bulimus,  and  its  characters  distinctly  indicate 
affinity  with  the  Achatmellince."  Elsewhere  he  speaks  of  it  "  dis- 
tantly," indicating  "  affinity  with  the  fauna  of  the  Sandwich  Is- 
lands." This  was  not  an  unnatural  conclusion  when  drawn  from  a 
few  specimens,  but,  as  is  elsewhere  shown  in  this  paper,  rests  upon 
purely  superficial  characters.  Actually  the  species  is  American  in 
its  relations,  and  is  very  closely  related  to  some  varieties  of  B.  nux, 
from  which  protean  species  it  may  even  be  an  ofl^shoot.    Conse- 

*"  This  Beeras  to  be  a  suitable  occasion  to  protest  against  the  unauthorized 
meddling  with  generic  names  which  has  lately  been  fashionable  among  writers 
from  whom  more  sensible  things  would  have  been  expected. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  427 

quently  the  sectional  name  proposed  for  it  must  fall  into  the  syn- 
onymy of  that  given  earlier  to  B.  nux  and  its  allies.  It  is  probably 
•due  to  the  great  rarity  of  this  species  that  its  situation  in  accepted 
systems  has  not  been  challenged  before  this  ;  certainly  if  it  had  been 
as  common  as  B.  nux,  the  facts  could  hardly  have  escaped  attention 
so  long.  I  have  not  found  anywhere  any  reasons  stated  for  putting 
the  species  into  Buliminus  rather  than  Bulimulus  where  it  really 
belongs. 

The  name  Omphalostyla  was  applied  by  Schliiter  to  Bulirni  with 
the  pillar  vertically  twisted,  and  his  sole  example  was  the  African 
shell,  since  better  known  under  the  name  Achatina  ustulata  (Lam.) 
Menke.  It  was  probably  to  some  accidental  confusion  of  the  spe- 
cies with  the  Bulimus  ustulatus  Sby.  of  the  Galapagos,  that  is  due 
the  application  by  the  brothers  Adams  of  Schliiter's  name  to  the 
Ncesioti. 

The  type  of  the  section  Pelecostoma  Reibisch,  is  a  Ncesiotus  which 
shows  a  ridge  at  the  base  of  the  pillar  which  gives  a  peculiar  chan- 
nelled aspect  to  the  adjacent  part  of  the  aperture.  This  feature  will 
be  found  more  or  less  distinctly  present  in  some  specimens  of  almost 
any  Galapagos  species  of  which  a  large  number  is  examined,  show- 
ing that  it  is  dynamic  or  individual,  and  not  of  systematic  value. 
The  second  species  of  this  "  section  "  is  Leptinaria  chathamensis,  a 
species  belonging  to  a  totally  distinct  group.  The  name  Pelecostoma, 
therefore,  may  be  safely  laid  away  on  the  synonymic  shelf. 

The  question  remains  as  to  whether  the  section  Ncesiohis  has  any 
just  claims  to  be  separated  from  Thaumastus,  Scutalus  and  other 
nominal  sections  of  Bulimulus  into  which  so  many  diverse  forms 
have  been  gathered.  The  diagnostic  characters  given  by  von  Mar- 
tens in  his  second  edition  of  Albers  are  certainly  not  distinctive  or 
•even  characteristic  of  the  whole  group,  or  even  of  several  separate 
species  of  the  same  group.  The  shells  are  by  no  means  always 
*'  aperte  perforata,"  even  in  the  same  species ;  the  columella  is  as 
often  "  plicata "  as  "  recta,"  and  the  peristome,  while  generally 
"simplex,"  and  sometimes  ** acutum,"  is  not  seldom  denticulate  or 
tuberculous  and  more  or  less  distinctly  reflected.  The  anatomical 
details,  as  elsewhere  shown,  oflfer  no  characters  by  which  the  species 
may  be  differentiated  from  many  of  the  Bulimuli  of  the  mainland. 
The  utmost  that  can  be  said,  therefore,  is  that  Ncesiotus  is  a  con- 
venient terra  for  the  geographical  group  inhabiting  the  Galapagos 
Islands,  and,  as  such,  we  may  retain  it,  without  giving  way  to  the 
■delusion  that  it  stands  for  anything  more  important. 


428  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

In  the  recent  revision"  by  Prof.  H.  A.  Pilsbry  of  the  genus  Buli- 
mulus  Leach,  the  subgenus  Bulimulus  s.  s.  is  defined  as  having  the 
apex  irregularly  wriukled  or  with  the  wrinkles  broken  into  granules 
or  dislocated,  while  the  subgenus  Orthotomium  has  regular  vertical 
riblets.  Ncesiotus  is  referred  to  the  former.  The  South  American 
Bostryx  has  the  apex  smooth  aud  slightly  swollen,  not  fuuiculate. 

An  examination  of  the  entire  series  of  Ncesiotus  in  the  National 
Museum  shows  that  the  apex  is  nearer  to  that  of  Orthotomium  than 
to  that  of  Bulimulus  s.  s.  It  is  characterized  invariably  by  vertical 
riblets  sometimes  strong  and  with  subequal  furrowed  interspaces; 
sometimes  distant  with  wider,  flat  interspaces,  and  sometimes  ex- 
tremely delicate  and  fine  ;  but,  except  when  worn,  always  unbroken 
and  regular  and  with  extremely  fine  spiral  striae  visible  in  a  good 
light,  between  the  riblets.  The  apex  always  has  a  dimple  or  funicle 
over  the  axis,  but  the  upper  margin  of  this  is  rounded,  never  keeled 
as  in  some  species  of  Orthotomium.  This  is  an  important  point,  as 
it  indicates  the  origin  of  the  Ncesioti  from  the  more  northern  stock, 
or  from  the  same  source  as  the  more  northern  stock. 

It  often  happens,  especially  among  those  species  which  have  the 
riblets  low  and  fine,  that  they  are  broken  by  wear  on  the  periphery 
of  the  nepionic  whorls,  thus  suggesting  the  Bulimulus  type  ;  or  even 
that  they  may  be  entirely  removed,  while  the  polished  surface  shows 
no  traces  of  erosion.  But  in  young,  fresh  specimens,  they  may 
always  be  found  unbroken  and  regular,  except  in  the  case  of  rare 
abnormal  individuals.  Of  the  latter,  I  have  come  across  only  one 
or  two  in  all  my  series  of  several  hundreds  of  specimens. 
Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  achatellinus  Forbes.     Plate  XVII,  figure  13. 

Btdimidiis  achatellinus  Fbs.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1850,  p.  56,  pi.  IX,  figs.  5  a-b. 

Btdinmlus  achaiinellmus  Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel.  viv..  Ill,  p.  429,  1853;  Kiister,  in 
Chemn.  Conch.  Cab.  ed.  ii,  Bulimus,  No.  112,  pi.  31,  figs.  19-20.  Pfr.  Mon., 
IV,  p.  492,  1859. 

Bulimus  {RAaphiellus)  achatinellinus  Pfr.,  Vers,  in  Malak.  Bliitt.,  II,  p.  160, 
1855. 

Bulimulus  [Oniphalostyla)  achaiinellus  H.  &  A.  Ads.,  Gen.  Kec.  Moll.,  II,  p. 
161,  1855;  Wimmer,  Sitz.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien.,  Ixxx,  p.  43,  1879. 

Buliminus  [Rhaphielhis\  achatinellinus  Martens,  in  Albeis,  Heliceen,  ed.  ii, 
p.  238,  1860.     Reibisch,  I'sis,  1892.  p.  15,  t.  ii,  fig.  8. 

Bulimma  [Rhap/iielhts)  achatinellitia  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel   viv.,  p.  300,  1881. 

Bulitnulus  [Rhaphiellus)  nchatinellinus  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI, 
p.  428,  1893. 

Habitat.  Upper  levels  of  Chatham  Island  on  trees  and  bushes, 
Kellett,  Wolf  and  Baur;  Hood  Island,  Habel,  fi^de  Wimmer. 

■  »  Nautilus,  IX,  No.  10,  p.  114,  1896. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  429 

Three  specimens  examined,  of  which  one,  collected  by  Dr.  Baur, 
contained  the  soft  parts.  Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  specimen  had 
been  partially  dried  up,  it  was  impossible  to  examine  the  genitalia. 

The  jaw  was  like  the  jaw  oiB.  nux,\vith  about  18  irregular  flat  plate- 
like ribs,  whose  blunt  ends  denticulate  the  margin,  especially  the  cut- 
ting edge.  The  outer  margin  of  these  plates  is  a  little  raised  and  thick- 
ened, the  color  is  pale  amber,  darker  where  thickest.  The  radula 
was  rather  broad,  the  single  teeth  did  not  differ  in  outline  from  those 
of  B.  nux  more  than  those  of  one  specimen  of  wmx  differs  from  those 
of  another.     The  number  of  laterals  is  14,  of  marginals  23,  the 

formula  J 

23+14-14  +  23 

It  will  be  observed  from  these  facts  that  nothing  in  the  dentition 
of  B.  achatelliniis  justices  the  presumption  that  it  deserves  a  section 
to  itself.  In  Dr.  Baur's  specimen,  the  nucleus  is  delicately  trans- 
versely ribbed,  the  vertex  almost  umbilicate,  the  earlier  whorls 
nearly  white  and  opaque,  pinched  up  into  irregular  little  tubercles 
at  the  suture ;  the  later  whorls  have  revolving  dark  brown  color 
bands,  separated  by  whitish  interspaces  covered  with  a  yellowish 
epidermis.  The  base  is  mostly  pale,  with  a  dark  band  around  the 
umbilicus.  The  outer  lip  is  sharp-edged,  and  the  umbilicus  small. 
The  pillar  is  short  and  straight. 

A  specimen  sent  by  Cuming  to  Dr.  Lea  is  not  so  large,  and  is 
darker  colored,  the  ground  color  being  an  olivaceous  brown  with  a 
narrow  chestnut  band  at  the  periphery ;  the  base  pale  and  the  um- 
bilicus entirely  closed.  The  nodulous  band  in  front  of  the  suture  is 
present  and  of  a  whitish  color. 

The  name  applied  by  Forbes  was  achatellinus,  which,  by  several 
authors,  on  the  assumption  that  it  was  intended  as  a  diminutive  of 
Achatinella,  has  been  emended  to  achatinellinus,  a  most  awkward 
and  clumsy  word.  But  it  is  just  as  likely  that  he  intended  the  word 
as  a  diminutive  of  the  same  root  as  Achatina ;  and,  at  any  rate,  no 
one  has  the  right  to  make  changes  on  an  unsupported  assumption, 
for  which  reason  the  original  form  is  retained  here. 

Bulimulus  (Nsesiotus)  nux  Broderip.     Plate  XVI,  figure  6;  Plate  XVII,  figure  10. 

Bulinus  mix  Brod.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1832,  p.  125,  (Charles  Id.) ;  Sby.,  Conch.  111.,  p. 
6,  figs.  37,  37*,  1833. 

Bulimtis  nux  Desh.  in  Lam.  An.  s.  Vert.,  ed.  ii,  vol.  viii,  p.  276, 1838 ;  Pfr., 
Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  II,  p.  183,  1848;  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  xxiii,  fig.  150  (not 
typical) ;  Smith,  P.  Z.  S  ,  1877,  p.  72. 

Bulinimiis  nux  Beck,  Ind.  Moll.,  p.  70,  1838. 

Bulimus  {Nasioius)  nux  Albers,  Heliceen,  p.  162,  (Type  of  section). 


430  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

Bulimulus  {Omphalostyla)  nux  H.  &  A.  Adams,  Gen.  Rec  Moll.,  II,  p.  161,. 
1855. 

Bulimulus  {Nesiotes)  nux  Martens,  in  Albers  ed.  II,  p.  220,  1860. 

Bulimulus  {NcFsiotus)  nux  Pfr.,  Nona.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254,  1881. 

Bulimus  nuciformis  Petit,  Journal  de  Conchyl.,  IV,  p.  365,  pi.  xi,  fig.  7,, 
1853;  Pfr  ,  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  IV,  p.  410,  1859. 

Bulimus  {Nasiotus)  nuciformis  Pfr.,  Mai.  Blatt.,  ii.  Vers.,  p.  161,  1854. 

Bulimulus  {Nesiotes)  nuciformis  Martens  in  Albers,  ed.  ii,  p  220,  1860. 

Bulimulus  {Nasiotus)  nuciformis  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  254,  1881. 

Bulimus  incrassatus  Pfr.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1852,  p.  157;  Kiister  in  Cheran.  Conch. 
Cab.,  ed.  ii ;  Bulimus,  No.  88,  pi.  30,  figs.  13,  14;  Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  Ill, 
p.  415,  1853. 

Btdimulus  [Omphalostyla)  incrassatus  H.  &  A.  Ads.,  Gen.  Rec.  Moll.  II,  p. 
161,1855. 

Bulimulus  unifasciatus  Reibisch  (non  Sby.)  Isis,  1892,  p.  20,  pi.  i,  fig.  1,  not 
p.  3. 

Bulimulus  [NcEsioius)  nux  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  3. 

Bulimulus  {Nasiotus)  incrassatus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  4,  t.  i.  fig.  4a;  var. 
sulcatus  Reib.,  Ibid,  p.  4,  t.  i,  figs.  4b  c:  var.  tiuciformis  Reib.,  Ibid.,  p.  4,  t.  i^ 
fig.  4d. 

Bulimulus  {Nasiotus)  nux  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  pp.  376-381,. 
425,  426,  1893. 

Variety  verrucosus  Pfeiffer. 

Bulimus  verrucosus  Pfr.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1885,  p.  116,  (Gal.  Is.) ;  Mon.  Hel.  viv.,. 
IV,  p.  475,  1859. 

Bulimus  [Acpsiotus)  ve^-rucosus  Pfr.,  Mai.  Bliitt.  ii,  Vers.,  p.  161,  1854. 

Bulimulus  {NcBsiotus)  wrr«f0JM5Pfr.,Nom.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254,  1881;  Reibisch^ 
Isis,  1892,  p.  3. 

Bulimulus  asperatus  Reibisch  (non  Pfr.),  Isis,  1892,  pi.  1.  fig.  3,  (syn.  excl). 

Variety  asperatus  Albers. 

Bulimus  asperatus  Albers,  Malak.  Bliitt.,  IV,  p.  98,  1857;  Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel. 
viv.,  IV,  p.  475,  1859:  VI,  p.  121 ;  Novit.  Conch.,  IV,  p.  145,  pi.  133,  figs.  8^ 
9. 

Bulimulus  {Nesiotes)  asperatus  Martens  in  Albers  Heliceen,  ed.  ii,  p.  220, 
1860. 

Bulitnulus  {NcEsiotus)  asperatus  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254,  1881 ;  not  of 
Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pi.  1,  fig.  3,  =  verrucosus  var. 

Bulimulus  invalidus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  5,  t.  i,  fig,  6. 

Habitat.  Original  typical  nux  of  Broderip  on  bushes,  Charles 
Island,  in  the  upper  wooded  region;  mut.  nuciformis,  Chatham  Island^ 
U.  S.  Fisli  Commission  ;  Mxni.  incrassatus,  on  the  under  side  of  leaves 
hibernating,  1,600  feet  above  the  sea,  on  the  S.-W.  end  of  Chatham 
Island,  Baur  ;  mut.  figured  by  Reeve  in  Conch.  Icon.,  abundant  on 
Charles  Island,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  ;  variety  verrjicosvs,  Chatham 
Island  ;  var.  asperatus,  Charles  Island,  abundant,  AVolf  and  U.  S. 
Fish  Commission.  The  reference  to  Albemarle  Island  for  this  spe- 
cies in  Stearns'  list  appears  to  be  due  to  some  accidental  misplace- 
ment of  labels,  as  no  specimens  from  that  locality  are  in  the  collect- 
ion or  among  the  duplicates.  Number  of  specimens  examined,  three 
hundred  and  seventy-four. 

The  synonymy  exhibits,  almost  as  clearly  as  the  specimens,  the 
great  variability  of  this  species.     Tlie  facts  also  seem  to  indicate 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  431 

quite  positively  that  a  great  proportion  of  this  variability  in  this 
instance  is  due  quite  as  much  to  an  intrinsic  tendency  to  vary  in  the 
matter  of  color  and  form  as  to  any  direct  influence  of  the  environ- 
ment promoting  by  special  circumstances  any  special  variation.  At 
least,  while  it  is  not  questionable  that  some  of  the  variations  might 
easily  be  made  permanent  by  natural  selection,  it  is  probable,  as 
yet,  that  matters  have  not  reached  that  stage,  since  the  evidence  of 
collectors  seems  to  establish  the  fact  that  the  different  variations  of 
color  and  form  are  found  indiscriminately  in  the  same  region  and 
under  the  same  conditions.  Further  and  more  precise  observation 
is  needed  to  establish  this  beyond  controversy,  but  at  present  there 
seems  no  escape  from  this  conclusion. 

An  examination  of  several  specimens  by  Mr.  Binney  afforded  the 
following  anatomical  data :  "  Genitalia  with  a  short,  stout,  linguiform, 
bluntly  pointed  ovary  ;  testicle  of  numerous  bunches  of  long  blunt 
cseca  ;  epididymis  long,  convoluted  along  nearly  its  whole  length ; 
oviduct  long ;  genital  bladder  small,  oval,  on  a  long  stout  duct ; 
penis  sac  long,  narrow,  subcylindrical,  white,  with  a  silken  lustre, 
receiving  the  retractor  muscle  at  its  upper  third,  the  vas  deferens  at 
its  apex." 

Jaw  low,  wide,  ends  rather  blunt,  but  little  arcuate,  anterior  sur- 
face with  about  20  broad,  flat,  crowded  ribs,  squarely  denticulating 
both  margins.  It  is  thin,  membranaceous,  light  horn-colored,  of 
equal  height  throughout,  with  the  outer  edges  of  the  ribs  reinforced. 

Radula  long  and  narrow,  formula         ^         ;  rhachidian  with  a 

31.9+9.31 

long  central  and  two  shorter  lateral  cusps,  the  whole  narrower  than 
the  base  ;  true  laterals  bicuspid,  the  outer  cusps  shorter,  9  in  number 
on  each  side  ;  marginals  low,  wide,  with  one  long  wide  bifid  inner 
cutting  point  and  one  outer  short  bifid  cutting  point,  the  latter  in  the 
extreme  marginals  becoming  irregularly  serrate.  In  the  figure 
(plate  XVI,  fig.  6)  of  the  genitalia,  the  proximal  orifices  are  sepa- 
rated, an  accident  of  dissection,  the  two  canals  actually  open  into  a 
single  atrium. 

Bulimulus  (Nsesiotus)  rugulosus  Sowerby.     Plate  XYII,  figure  1. 

Bulinus  rtigulostis  Sby.,  Conch.  111.  Part  142,  fig.  87  (a,  b),  1839. 

Bulimus  rugulosus  Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  II,  p.  113,  1848. 

Bulimus  eschatiferus  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  xx,  fig.  121,  (text,  figure  ex- 
cluded), 1848,  not  of  Sowerby. 

Bulimuluz  [Omphalostyla)  rugulosus  H.  &  A.  Adams,  Gen.  Rec.  Moll., II,  p. 
161,  1855. 


432  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Bulimuhts  {Ncesiotus)  ruqulosus  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254,  1881 ;  Ancey, 
Bull.  Soc.  Mai.  France,  IV,  p.  294,  1887,  (Chatham  Island) ;  Stearns,  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  pp.  381,  426,  1893.  _ 

B.  rugulosus  var.  infuscafa  Ancey,  op.  cit.,  p.  294,  1887, 

? Bulimulus  [Aasio'lus)  midus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  9,  t.  i,  fig.  15. 

Not  B.  rugulosus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  7,  t.  i,  figs.  11  a-b,  =  B.perspec- 
tivus  Pfr. 

Under  stones  near  the  shore,  Blackbeaeh  Road,  Charles  Island, 
Dr.  Baur ;  Charles  Island,  Darwin  and  Wolf;  Chatham  Island, 
Darwin,  Kellett  and  Cuming. 

Jaw  thin,  membranaceous,  light  horn-colored,  low,  wide,  arcuate, 
of  equal  height  throughout,  ending  bluntly ;  anterior  surface  with 
about  20  broad,  flat  ribs,  their  outer  edges  reinforced,  the  margins 
of  the  jaw  squarely  denticulated  by  the  projecting  ends  of  the  ribs. 

Some  varieties  of  B.  nux  approach  this  species  quite  closely,  espe- 
cially that  to  which  Reibisch  gave  the  name  of  invalidus. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  planospira  Ancey,  Plate  XVI,  figure  3. 

Bulimus  eschariferus  Reeve,  Conch  Icon.,  pi.  xx,  fig.  121  (bad,  text  excL), 
1848. 

Bulimulus  rugulosus  var.  planospira  Ancey,  Bull.  Soc.  Mai.  de  France,  IV, 
p.  294,  1887. 

Bulimulus  rugulosus  Reeve  (Smith,  in  lilt.)  ex  parte. 

Northeast  end  of  Charles  Island,  at  about  200  feet.  Dr.  Baur. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  elegant  species  of  the  group.  It  is  very 
closely  related  to  B.  rtigulosus  from  which  it  may  be  discriminated 
by  its  larger  size  and  greater  number  of  whorls,  and  by  the  deeper 
suture  and  more  lax  manner  in  which  the  last  whorl  is  coiled.  In 
B.  planospira  the  spiral  sculpture  is  usually  more  elevated  and  con- 
spicuou.s.  It  has  been  found  only  on  a  limited  portion  of  Charles 
Island,  while  rugulosus  is  common  on  both  Charles  and  Chatham. 
As  this  form  has  not  been  figured  I  include  a  figure  of  it. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  ustulatus  Sowerby. 

Bulinus  ustulatus  Sby.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1833,  p.  72,  (Charles  Island)  ;  Conch.  111., 
p.  6,  fig.  42,  1833.. 

Buhmus  ustulatus  Desh.in  Lam.  An.  s.  Vert.,  ed.  II,  vol.  viii,  p.  279, 1838; 
Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  II,  p.  217,  1848 ;  Kuster,  in  Chemn.  Conch.  Cab.,  ed. 
II,  Bulii7ius,  t.  62,  figs.  16-18;  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  xxi,  fig.  130,  1848. 

Buliminus  ustulatus  Beck,  Ind.  Moll.,  p.  70,  1838. 

Bulimtdus  [Ompkalostyla)  ustulatus  H.  &  A.  Ad.,  Gen.  Rec.  Moll.,  II,  p. 
161,1855. 

Bulimus  [Nirsiotus^  ustulatus  Albers,  Heliceen,  p.  162,  1850. 

Bulimulus  iNesiotes)  ustulatus  Martens  in  Albers,  ed.  ii,  p.  221,  I860. 

Bulimulus  [Na-siotus)  ustulatus  Vir.,  Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  254,  1881;  Stearns, 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  p.  427,  1893. 

Bulimulus  {NtFsiotus)  venustus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  5,  t.  i,  fig.  7  ;  not  B. 
ustulatus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  4,  t.  i,  fig.  5,  =  nux  var. 

Charles  Island,  Cuming. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  433 

This  species  is  notable  for  the  yellowness  of  its  paler  parts  and  the 
bright  sienna  brown  of  its  darker  portions.  It  is  closely  related  to 
B.  calvus  Sby.,  which  is  a  smaller  and  more  streaky  shell.  The 
form  figured  by  Reeve  and  Reibisch  under  this  name  is  larger  than 
the  true  ustulatiis,  and  is  considered  by  Dr.  Stearns  to  be  a  banded 
variety  of  B.  mix. 

Balimalus  (NaesiotuB)  calvus  Sowerby. 

Bulinus  calvus  Sby.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1833,  p.  72  (James  Island) ;  Conch.  111.,  p.  6, 
fig.  41,  1833. 

Bulitnus  calvus  Desh.  in  Lam.  An.  s.  Vert,  ed.  ii,  vol.  viii,  p.  179,  1838; 
Pfr.,  Mon,  Hel.  Viv.,  II,  p.  225,  1848;  Kuster,  in  Chemn.  Conch.  Cab.,  ed. 
ii,  Bulimus,  t.  62,  figs.  37,  38. 

Buliminus  calvus  Beck,  Ind.  Moll.,  p.  70,  1838. 

Btdimulus  {Omphalostyla)  clavus  H.  &  A.  Ad.,  Gen.  Kec.  Moll.  II,  p.  161, 
1855. 

Bulimus  calvus 'Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  xx,  fig.  126,  1848. 

Bulimulus  [Nesiotes)  calvus  Martens  in  Albers,  ed.  ii,  p.  221,  1860. 

Bulimulus  {Ncvsioius)  calvus  Vh.,'^om.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  254,  1881 ;  Reibisch, 
Isis,  1892,  p.  6,  t.  i,  fig.  8;  Stearns,  Proc.U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  p.  427,  1893, 
ex  parte. 

James  Island,  Cuming  ;  Charles  Island,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Cuming  and  Wolf;  Chatham  Island,  Kellett, 

Specimens  sent  under  this  name  by  Cuming  and  Reibisch  agree 
well  with  those  collected  by  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission.  It  is 
closely  related  to  B.  ustulatm  and  is  rather  nearly  approached  by 
certain  dwarfish,  unusually  smooth  specimens  of  B.  rugulosus.  B. 
nueula  Pfr.  is  also  closely  allied. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  nueula  PfeifFer. 

Bulimus  nueula  Pfr.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1852,  p.  60  (Gal.  Is.) ;  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  Ill, 
p.  415,  1853;  IV,  p.  475,  1859. 

Bulimus  {Na-siotus)  nueula  Pfr.,  Mai.  Blatt.  II.  Vers.,  p.  161,  1854. 

Bulimulus  {Omphalostyla)  tiucula  H.  &  A.  Ads.,  Gen.  Kec.  Moll.,  II,  p.  161, 
1855. 

Bulimulus  [Nesiotes)  nueula  Martens,  in  Albers  Heliceen,  ed.  ii,  p.  221, 
1860. 

Bulimulus  (Mrsiotus)  nueula  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p  254, 1881 ;  Eeibisch, 
Isis,  1892,  p.  3,  t.  i,  fig.  2. 

Bulimulus  {Ncesiotus)  nux  var.  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  pp.  380, 
426,  1893. 

Charles  Island,  Wolf,  fide  Reibisch ;  Chatham  Island  near  the 
S.-W.  end,  at  a  height  of  1,600  feet,  Baur. 

A  specimen  submitted  to  Mr.  Edgar  A.  Smith  of  the  British 
Museum,  was  said  to  be  somewhat  darker  colored  and  more  coarsely 
striated  than  the  type  of  nueula  in  that  collection.  These  are,  how- 
ever, trivial  difl^erences  under  the  circumstances.  It  agrees  closely 
with  a  specimen  sent  by  Reibisch  under  the  name  of  nueula.      It  is 


434  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896^ 

a  smoother,  smaller  and  more  compact  shell  than  rugulosus,  and 
shows  a  somewhat  attenuated  and  dark  colored  apex,  resembling  that 
of  galapaganus  Pfr.  It  is,  perhaps,  most  closel}'  related  to  B.  ustu- 
latus  or  B.  calvus  Sby.,  and  a  sufficient  series  might  very  likely  con- 
nect them.  No  living  specimens  of  this  species  were  collected,, 
though  there  are  some  fresh  shells. 

Bulimulus  (Nsesiotus)  eschariferus  Sowerby. 

Btdinus  eschariferus  Sby.,  Conch.  111.,  figs.  85  (a,  b),  1833. 

Bulimus  eschariferus  Pfr.,  Symb.,  II,  p.  45 ;  Mon.  Hel.  Viv.,  II,  p.  115, 
1848;  Smith,  P.  Z.  S..  1877,  p.  72. 

Bulimulus  [Ncrsiotus)  eschariferus  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  Viv.,  p..  254,  1881 ;  Kei- 
bisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  2. 

Bulimus  rugulosus  Reeve  (not  Sby.),  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  xx,  fig.  123,  1848 
(citation,  diagnosis  and  figure  refer  to  eschariferus). 

Bulimulus  {  Omphalostyla)  eschariferus  H.  &  A.  Ad.,  Gen.  Rec.  Moll.  II,  p. 
161,  1855. 

Bulirnulus  eschariferus  Ancey,  Bull.  Soc.  Mai.  France,  IV,  p.  295,  1887. 

B.  eschariferus  var.  bizofialis  Ancey,  op.  cit.,  p.  295,  1887. 

B.  eschariferus  var.  subconoidalis  Ancey,  op.  cit.,  p.  295,  1887. 

Bulimulus  [Nasiotus)  eschariferus  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  pp. 
381,426,1898. 

Chatham  Island,  Darwin,  Kellett,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  and 
Dr.  Baur,  under  stones  near  the  shore  at  Wreck  Bay  and  elsewhere ; 
Charles  Island,  H.  M.  S.  Peterel. 

Though  this  species,  as  usually  received,  is  apparently  smooth  and 
polished,  it  has  minute  more  or  less  granular  spirals,  which  it  is 
probable  in  the  young  state  bear  hairs.  Among  the  living  speci- 
mens obtained  at  Chatham  Island  by  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission 
were  some  rather  smaller  than  the  average  and  covered  with  a  dense 
brown  epidermis,  which  bears  numerous  spiral  lines  more  or  less 
minutely  granulose,  a  small  hair  or  process  of  the  epidermis  pro- 
jecting from  each  granule,  giving  the  shell  a  pilose  appearance. 
These  specimens  measure  about  12  mm.  in  length  and  5  mm.  in 
diameter,  the  color  of  the  shell  is  browner  than  in  the  type,  and, 
when  denuded  of  theperiostracum,  the  shell  is  seen  to  be  marked  by 
numerous  fine  sharp,  almost  microscopic  spirals.  It  may,  perhaps, 
form  a  variety  pileatm,  of  the  typical  eschariferus. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  eschariferus  var.  ventrosus  Reibisch.  Plate  XVII,  figure  3. 

Bulimulus  [A^LCsiotus)  ventrosus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  7,  t.  i,  fig.  12  a-b. 

Barrington  Island,  common  ;  Wolf,  fide  Reibisch,  also  Dr.  G. 
Baur,  who  found  it  under  stones  near  the  shore. 

A  specimen  of  this  form  was  sent  to  Mr.  Smith  at  the  British 
Museum,  aud  by  him  compared  with  the  type  of  jB.  eschariferics  with 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  435- 

which  he  identified  it.  In  color,  form  and  range  of  variation  the 
Barrington  Island  shells  agree  perfectly  with  those  from  Chatham 
and  Charles  Island  (eschariferus),  but  the  latter  are  always  a  little 
more  slender  if  the  specimens  I  have  seen  can  be  taken  as  a  criterion. 
Twenty -four  of  them  averaged  16  mm.  long  by  5  mm.  in  diameter 
above  the  aperture,  while  the  diameter  of  the  most  slender  of  forty- 
two  Barrington  Island  specimens  was  6  mm.  The  latter  have  the 
spire  less  attenuated  and  slightly  more  compact.  On  the  whole,  it  is 
doubtful  if  this  form  can  rank  higher  than  as  a  local  race  of  eschari- 
ferus. 

Jaws  light  horn-colored,  low,  wide,  thin,  slightly  arcuate,  of  equal 
height  throughout,  with  blunt  ends  ;  anterior  surface  with  about  16 
irregularly  wide  flat  ribs,  their  outer  edges  reinforced,  their  ends 
bluntly  denticulating  the  upper  and  lower  edges  of  the  jaw. 

Radula  long  and  narrow;  formula  13-f9.9j-|-13;  rhachidian  tooth 

X     2     2     X 
tricuspid,  the  lateral  cusps  shorter  ;  lateral  teeth  bicuspid ;  margin- 
als with  one  longer  inner  bifid  cutting  point  and  the  outer  short, 
wide  cusp  broken  up  into  three  or  four  denticles, 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  galapaganus  Pfeiffer. 

Bulimulus  galapaganus  Pfr.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1854,  p.  58.  Mon.  Hel.  viv.  IV,  p. 
503,  1859. 

Bulimttlus  {Ncrsiotus)  galapaganus  Pfr.,  Mai.  Blatt.  II,  Vers.,  p.  160, 1854. 

Btdimuhis  [Nesiotes)  galapaganus  Martens,  in  Albers  Heliceen,  ed.  ii,  p. 
221,  1860. 

Bulimulus  [Ncrsiotus)  galapaganus  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  1881 ;  Keibisch, 
Isis,  1892,  p.  8;  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  427,  1.-93. 

Charles  Island,  at  about  200  ft.  elevation,  near  the  northeast  end 
of  the  island.  Dr.  Baur. 

This  is  very  closely  related  to  B.  ustulatus  Sby.,  is  slightly  longer 
and  more  pupiform,  and  wants  the  bright  yellowish  bands.  The 
whorls  are  more  rounded  in  B.  galapaganus  than  in  B.  per- 
spectivus,  and  the  latter  is  darker  and  more  uniformly  colored. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  perspectivus  Pfeiffer. 

Bulimiis  perspectivus  Pfr.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1846,  p.  33  ;  Mon.  Hel.  viv.,  ii,  p.  97, 
1848 ;  Keeve,  Conch.  Icon ,  Bulimus,  pi.  63,  fig.  485. 

Bulimulus  {^Ataxus)  perspectivus  Pfr.,  Clessia,  Nomencl.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  253, 
1881. 

Bulimulus  {Ncesiotus)  rugulosus  Reibisch,  Isis.,  1892,   p.  7,  t.  i,  figs.  11  a-b. 

Chatham  Island,  Galapagos,  300-600  ft..  Wolf,  fide  Reibisch,  on 
rocks  and  under  stones. 


436  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

This  species  is  in  the  British  Museum,  and  appears  in  the  litera- 
ture, without  a  known  habitat,  but  Herr  Reibisch  has  courteously 
forwarded  two  specimens  for  inspection,  with  the  information  that 
they  are  from  Chatham  Island,  Wolf,  collector. 

The  species  resembles  B.  eschariferus  in  form,  but  it  is  of  a  deep, 
reddish,  instead  of  an  olivaceous  brown,  and  is  more  rudely  striated. 
One  specimen  shows  traces  of  a  narrow,  pale  band  on  the  last  whorl, 
the  other  does  not.  The  lip  is  dark  colored.  One  of  the  specimens 
has  the  base  of  the  pillar  very  prominent,  almost  channelled,  the 
other  is  quite  normal.  The  shell  is  midway  between  the  typical 
eschariferus  and  the  var.  ventrosus  in  size.  The  first  reference  of  it 
to  B.  rugalosus  by  Herr  Reibisch  was  undoubtedly  an  error,  which 
that  gentleman  detected  upon  examining  the  specimens  in  the  Brit- 
ish Museum. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  jacobi  Sowerby. 

Bidimns  jacobi  Sby.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1833,  p.  74  (James  Id.)  Conch.  111.,  p.  7,  figs. 
45,  45  (2  vars.)  1833. 

Bulimus  jacobi  Desh.  in  Lam.  An.  S.  Vert.,  ed.  ii,  vol.  viii,  p.  281,  1838; 
Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel.  viv.,  II,  p.  98,  1848  (not  of  Keeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  XXI, 
fig.  135,  1848  =  B.  olla). 

Bidimintis  jacobi  Beck,  Ind.  Moll.,  p.  70,  1838. 

Bulimulus  {Omphalostyla)  jacobi  H.  &  A.  Ads.,  Gen.  Eec  Moll.,  ii.  p.  161, 
1855. 

Bulimus  [N(Esioius)  jacobi  Albers,  Helic,  p.  162,  1850;  Pfr.,  Vers.,  p.  160. 

Bulimulus  [Nesiotes)  jacobi  Martens,  in  Albers,  ed.  ii,  p.  221,  1860. 

Bulimulus  {Altesiolus)  jacobi  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254,  1881.  Reibisch. 
Isis,  1892,  p.  6.  Not  B.  jacobi  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  381, 
1893. 

Bulimulus  {NcBsiotus)  pallidus  Eeibisch.  Isis,  1892,  p.  6,  t.  i,  fig.  9. 

Bulimulus  [Ncesiotus)  acutus  Reib.,  op.  cit.,  p.  8,  t.  i,  fig.  13,  1892. 

James  Island,  Cuming ;  Charles  Island,  Cuming;  typical,  in  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.,  from  original  specimens  received  by  Dr.  Lea;  1,600 
ft.  near  Wreck  Bay,  Chatham  Island,  on  the  under  side  of  leaves  of 
plants  (var.  pallidus'),  and  on  East  Albemarle  Island,  Dr.  Baur  ; 
Albemarle  Island,  200-800  ft.  on  bushes  and  stones.  Wolf,  fide 
Reibisch  (var.  pallidus)  ;  Chatham  Island,  900-2,000  ft.,  in  damp 
places  and  on  the  trunks  of  trees  (var.  acutus)  Wolf 

The  variety  pallidus  differs  from  the  typical  form  in  being  slightly 
smaller  and  more  slender  without  the  wrinkles,  and  it  is  probable 
that  a  large  series  would  show  no  dividing  line  between  the  variety 
and  the  type. 

The  variety  acutus  differs  from  pallidus  in  the  almost  entire  ab- 
sence of  the  spiral  granulated  sculpture,  leaving  much  of  the  surface 
polished  and  smooth,  except  for  incremental  lines.    Reibisch's figure 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  437 

shows  one  whorl  more  in  the  same  length  than  the  specimen  he  was 
kind  enough  to  send  me  for  examination,  but  slight  differences  of 
this  kind  are  common  among  these  very  variable  forms.  It  also 
comes  very  close  to  some  varieties  of  B.  nucula  and  B.  amastroides, 
the  latter  being  slightly  smaller  and  more  spindle-shaped. 

The  typical  B.  jacobi,  sent  by  Cuming  to  Dr.  Lea  in  1838,  is  a 
small,  stout  shell,  with  rather  inflated  whorls,  covered  with  fine 
granulations,  minute,  obliquely  transverse  broken  wrinkles,  and  fine 
granular  spirals,  hardly  visible  without  magnification.  The  shell  is 
pale  reddish-brown,  sometimes  with  a  narrow,  pale  peripheral  band. 
The  pillar  and  body  are  without  fold  or  tubercular  callus.  Those 
collected  by  Dr.  Baur  on  Charles  Island  are  the  smallest  I  have 
seen  which  can  be  positively  referred  to  this  species.  The  larger, 
smooth  form  figured  by  Reeve  under  this  name  is  distinct,  and  will 
be  found  referred  to  under  the  name  of  B.  olla. 

Bulimulus  (Nsesiotus)  jacobi  var.  oinereus  Reibiscb.     Plate  XVI,  fig.  14. 

Btdimulus  {Ncrsiotus)  cinereiis  Keibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  7,  t-  i,  fig.  10. 
Bulimulus  jacobi  var.  vermiculatus  Dall,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  53,  Sept.,  1893. 

James  Island  at  James  Bay,  Dr.  Baur  and  Wolf.  No  living 
specimens  of  this  species  appear  to  have  been  collected. 

This  variety  is  hardly  separable  from  the  smaller  B.  jacobi, 
though  the  dead  and  the  fresh  shells  appear  quite  dissimilar.  It  is 
somewhat  smaller  than  the  smallest  undoubted  jacobi,  and  the 
granular  sculpture  is  more  dense  and  uniform.  I  have  not  seen 
any  specimens  with  a  spire  as  long  and  pointed  as  in  Reibisch's  fig- 
ure. A  specimen  sent  by  him  agrees  in  every  way  with  those  col* 
lected  by  Dr.  Baur. 

Bulimulus  (Nsesiotus)  olla  Dall.     Plate  XVI,  fig.  2. 

Bidimus  jacobi  Keeve,  Conch.  Icon.  Bulimus,  pi.  XXI,  fig.  135,  1848. 
Bulimulus  olla  Dall,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  53,  September,  1893.  ' 

James  Island,  Cuming,  Lea  Collection ;  Duncan  Island,  all  dead, 
but  fresh,  Dr.  Baur  ;  Barrington  Island,  dead.  Dr.  Baur ;  Conway 
Bay,  Indefatigable  Island,  Dr.  Baur. 

This  shell  is  closely  related  to  B.  jacobi,  and  was  figured  by 
Reeve  under  that  name.  B.  olla  is  larger,  and  wants  the  granula- 
tions oi  B.  jacobi,  its  surface  is  nearly  smooth  and  almost  polished, 
marked  with  faint  incremental  lines,  has  seven  whorls  (against  six 
in  the  other  species)  and  a  very  bulbous  pillar.  The  present  species 
inhabits  the  grassy  upper  zone,  while  B.  jacobi  is  found  in  the  wooded 
area. 


438  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Bnlimulus  (Nsesiotus)  Tanneri  Ball.    Plate  XVI,  fig.  5. 

Bidimulus  {NcFsiotus')  Fanneri  Dall,  Nautilus,  VIII,  p.  127,  March,  1895 
i(err.  typ.  pro  Tanneri,  corrected  in  the  index,  p.  iii,  April,  1895). 

Shell  short,  stout,  pointed,  with  two  nepionic  and  four  subsequent 
whorls  ;  nucleus  rather  coarsely  transversely  ribbed,  the  interspaces 
somewhat  wider;  the  subsequent  whorls  marked  by  incremental 
lines  and  obsolete  traces  of  fine,  partly  granulose,  inconstant  spiral 
threads,  only  perceptible  under  a  lens ;  color  pinkish  or  brownish- 
white  with  no  traces  of  a  peripheral  paler  band  ;  whorls  somewhat 
inflated,  suture  conspicuous,  umbilicus  large  and  deeply  pervious  ; 
aperture  large  with  a  widely  expanded  lip,  the  outer  lip  much  bent 
over  at  the  body,  closely  approaching  the  pillar  and  united  to  it  by 
a  distinct  callus ;  length  11  ;  max.  diameter  10  mm. 

Indefatigable  Island,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 

This  is  about  the  size  of  B.  cinereus  Reib.,  but  is  more  conical,  in- 
flated and  stouter,  with  a  very  diff'erently  shaped  aperture,  the  lip 
teing  more  expanded  and  reflected  than  in  any  other  species  yet 
■described  from  these  islands.  It  is  named  in  honor  of  Capt.  Z.  L. 
Tanner,  U.  S.  N.,  commanding  the  U.  S.  S.  Albatross  during  the 
Oalapagos  explorations.  None  of  the  specimens  were  living, 
lulimulus  (Naesiotus)  dunoanus  Dall.    Plate  XVI,  fig.  7. 

Bulimulus  {Ncesiotus)  duncanus  Dall,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  52,  September,  1893. 

The  shell  is  short,  stout,  inflated,  thin,  with  two  nepionic  and  four- 
and-a-half  subsequent  whorls.  The  apex  is  rather  pointed,  the 
axial  dimple  small,  the  whorls  rapidly  enlarging,  with  the  suture 
behind  the  last  whorl  deeper  than  the  rest  and  more  oblique  to  the 
axis ;  the  aperture  is  relatively  small  and  rather  oblique,  the  lip 
simple,  sharp,  not  reflected,  connected  across  the  body  with  a  thin 
callus,  a  single  tubercle  on  the  body,  well  within  the  aperture,  and 
about  equidistant  from  either  lip ;  umbilicus  perforate,  narrow  ; 
height  of  the  shell  18,  of  the  last  whorl  125  ;  diameter  of  shell  11 


mm. 


Dead  specimens  only  were  found  on  Duncan  Island,  by  Dr. 
Baur. 

The  sculpture  comprises  only  incremental  lines  and  faint  wrinkles 
in  harmony  with  them,  especially  just  in  front  of  the  suture  and 
near  the  end  of  the  last  whorl.  When  perfectly  fresh,  there  were 
probably  microscopic  granules  spirally  arranged  and  sparsely  dis- 
tributed, but  these  are  now  represented  only  by  minute  spots  of 
erosion.     Except  the  largest  specimens  of  B.  mix,  these  shells  are 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  439 

the  largest  Bulimuli  described  from  the  islands.  They  are,  however, 
thinner  than  any  specimens  of  5.  mix,  in  this  respect  resembling  B. 
unifasdatus  Sby. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  Darwini  Pfeiffer. 

Bulimus  Darwini^ix.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1846,  p.  29  (Gal.  Ids).  Mon.  Hel.,  viv.  ii, 
p.  199,  1848;  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  XXI,  fig.  136  (Gal.  Ids.),  1848. 

Bulimulus  (Omphalostyfla)  Darwini  H.  &  A.  Ad.,  Gen.  Eec.  Moll.,  II,  p. 
161,  1855;  Wimmer,  Sitzb.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  Ixxx,  p.  44,  1879. 

Bitlimulzis  {Nesioles)  Darwini  Martens,  in  Albers,  Heliceen,  ed.  ii,  p.  220, 
1860. 

Btdimulus  {NcBsiotus)  Darwini  Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel.  viv.  p.  254, 1881  ;  Reibisch, 
Isis,  1892,  p.  10;  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  427, 1893. 

Bulimus  manini  "  Pfr."  Carpenter,  Rep.  Brit.  Assoc,  1856,  p.  359  ;  Stearns, 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  pp.  405,  427,  1893  (Err.  typ.). 

Bindloe  Island,  Habel,  fide  Wimmer. 

The  type  specimen  of  this  species  has  disappeared  from  the  Cum- 
ingian  Collection,  and  I  have  been  unable  to  obtain  a  specimen 
for  examination.  The  only  reference  to  the  particular  island  upon 
which  it  lives  is  derived  from  Habel, 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  Wolfi  Reibisch. 

Bulitnulus  {Nasiotus)  Wolfi  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  10,  t.  ii,  figs.  1  a-b; 
Stearns,  op.  cit.,  pp.  414,  427,  1893. 

Indefatigable  Island,  Wolf,  fide  Reibisch. 

A  specimen  of  this  species  kindly  forwarded  for  examination 
by  Herr  Reibisch  is  clearly  distinct  from  anything  I  have  seen. 
It  resembles  B.  Simrothi  Reib.,  but  is  more  robust,  the  surface  of  the 
upper  whorls  smoother  and  more  regular  in  sculpture,  the  pillar- 
tooth  is  more  prominent  and  stronger,  the  parietal  tooth,  apparently 
normal,  is  not  found  in  any  Simrothi  I  have  seen,  the  umbilicus  is 
larger  than  in  the  latter  species.  It  resembles  Reeve's  figure  of  j5. 
Darwini  somewhat,  but  the  latter  is  17  mm.  long,  while  B.  Wolfi 
only  reaches  a  length  of  13'5  mm. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  unifasciatus  Sowerby.    Plate  XVII,  figs.  6,  II. 

Bulimus  unifasciatus  Sby.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1833,  p.  37  (Charles  Id. ).  Conch.  111., 
fig.  55,  1833. 

Bulimus  uni/ascialus  Desh.  in  Lam.  An.  s.  Vert.,  Ed.  ii,  vol.  viii,  p.  277, 
1838,  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  XXIII,  fig.  149  (bad)  1848.  Pfr.,  Mon.  Hel. 
viv.  II.  p.  195,  1848.     Smith,  P.  Z.  S.,  1877,  p.  72. 

Bulimulus  unifasciatus  Beck,  Index,  p.  67,  1838. 

Bulimulus  (  Oniphalostyla)  unifasciatus  H.  &  A.  Ads.,  Gen.  Rec  Moll.,  II, 
p.  161,1855. 

Bulimulus  {Nesiotes)  unifasciatus  Martens,  in  Albers,  ed.  ii,  p.  220,  1860. 

Bulimulus  {Ncesiotus)  unifasciatus  Pfr.  Nom.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254,  1881; 
Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  427,  1893. 

Bulimulus  unifasciatus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892.  p.  3,  syn. ;  but  not  p.  20,  pi.  i, 
fig.  1  {=nux  var.). 


440  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

James  Island,  under  lava,  Cuming  in  Lea  Collection  ;  Chatham 
Island,  near  the  southwest  end,  at  a  height  of  about  1,600  feet,  Dr. 
Baur ;  Chatham  Island,  Kellett ;  Charles  Island,  Cuming  and  H. 
M.  S.  Peterel. 

Jaw  thin,  horn  colored,  arcuate,  of  equal  height  throughout,  with 
blunt  ends  ;  anterior  surface  with  about  14  broad,  crowded,  flattish 
ribs,  reinforced  along  their  outer  edges ;  the  ends  of  the  ribs  broadi 
squarely  denticulating  the  upper  and  lower  margin  of  the  jaw. 

Radula  long,  thin,  narrow  ;  formula  1 ;  rhachidian  tooth 

84-12-12+8 

stout,  tricuspid,  with  very  short  lateral  cusps ;  perfect  laterals,  about 
tvvelve  in  number,  bicuspid,  with  very  short  outer  cusps;  marginals 
low,  wide,  with  a  long  bifid  inner  cusp  outside  of  which  the  cutting 
edge  is  broken  up  into  four  or  five  denticles  of  nearly  equal  length. 
In  its  thin  and  ample  shell,  uniform  reddish-brown  color,  and 
narrow,  well-defined  peripheral  pale  band,  this  form  resembles  the 
species  of  the  mainland  more  than  any  other  Galapagos  species.  The 
transverse  riblets  on  the  nepionic  shell  are  very  fine  and  almost 
always  decorticated ;  the  granular  spirals  are  almost  microscopic, 
and  when  fresh  and  perfect,  bear  small  projections  of  the  perio- 
stracum. 

Bnlimulus  (Nsesiotus)  Simrothi  Reibisch.  Plate  XVI,  figs.  11,  12, 13 ;  Plate  XVII, 
fig.  2. 

Biilimn/us  { A'cFsioiits)  Siinrothi  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  11,  t.  2,  fig.  2; 
Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  pp.  414,  428,  18H3. 

Bulimuhis  {Nccsiotits)  tortuganus  Dall,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  54,  1893. 

La  Tortuga,  grassy  zone.  South  Albemarle,  Baur;  1,000-2,000  feet, 
in  the  moist  region,  Albemarle  Island,  Wolf. 

Herr  Reibisch  has  kindly  furnished  a  photograph  of  one  of  his 
types  of  B.  Simroihi  with  which  I  have  compared  my  specimens  of 
tortuganus.  Wolf's  shell  in  the  photograph  appears  smoother,  with- 
out the  deeply  indented  markings,  and  exhibits  color  streaks  in 
harmony  with  the  lines  of  growth  which  none  of  the  specimens  of 
tortuganus  do.  Nevertheless,  the  two  forms  should  probably  be 
united,  especially  as  Reibisch's  description  agrees  better  than  the 
photograph  as  respects  surface  and  color.  As  the  specimens  collected 
by  Wolf  were  more  or  less  immature,  the  original  diagnosis  needs 
some  additional  data. 

Jaw  light  horn  colored,  thin,  membranaceous,  arcuate,  of  equal 
height  throughout  and  with  the  ends  blunt;  anterior  surface  with 
about  17  rather  narrow,  flat  crowded  ribs,  with  thickened  outer 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  441 

edges,  the  upper  and  lower  margins  of  the  jaw  bluntly  denticulated 
by  the  squarish  ends  of  the  ribs.  Radula  of  the  same  type  as  in  the 
species  previously  mentioned. 

I  have  figured  several  specimens  to  show  the  variations  of  form 
and  sculpture.  When  mature  the  shell  always  has  a  pretty  solidly 
thickened  peristome.  The  young  are  more  translucent  and  show 
projecting  points  of  epidermis  along  the  minute  granular  spiral  lines, 
as  in  B.  wdfasciatus,  and  like  that  species  show  a  distinct  peripheral 
paler  band. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  Bauri  Dall.     Plate  XV,  fig.  12;   Plate  XVII,  figs.  7,  15. 

Bulimuhis  {Nicsiotus)  Bauri\)2X\.,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  54,  September,  1893. 

Hibernating  on  the  under  side  of  leaves  of  plants  at  the  south- 
west end  of  Chatham  Island,  1,600  feet  above  the  sea.  Dr.  Baur. 

Jaw  thin,  light  horn  colored,  arcuate,  of  equal  height  throughout, 
with  blunt  ends  ;  anterior  surface  with  about  12  broad,  flat,  crowded 
ribs,  their  outer  edges  reinforced  and  their  ends  bluntly  denticulat- 
ing  the  upper  and  lower  edges  of  the  jaw. 

Radula  long  and  narrow ;  formula  about  1  ;  rachidian 

15+9-9+15 
tooth  and  nine  perfect  laterals,  differing  little  from  those  of  the 
other  species  already  described  ;  marginals  with  the  inner  cusp 
broad  and  bifid  or  at  the  extreme  margin  trifid,  the  outer  cusp 
broken  up  more  or  less  irregularly  into  several  denticles  or  groups 
of  denticles. 

Genitalia  essentially  as  in  B.  mix. 

This  is  a  very  distinct  little  species,  with  a  pale  yellow-brown 
body  whorl  darkening  toward  the  tip  of  the  spire,  with  conspicuous, 
lighter  transverse  wrinkles  on  the  upper  whorls,  and  fine  ribbing 
on  the  nepionic  shell  which  is  of  a  livid  purple,  almost  black.  In 
specimens  which  have  survived  hibernation,  the  aperture  is  usually 
produced,  contracted,  and  conspicuously  thickened.  Many  speci- 
mens have  a  narrow,  pale  line  in  front  of  the  suture.  There  is  no 
spiral  sculpture. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  amastroides  Ancey.     Plate  XV,  fig.  16. 

Bulinmlus  {Nesiotm)  amastroides  Ancey,  Bull.  Soc.  Mai.  de  France,  IV,  p. 
293,  1887. 

Bulimuhis  jacobi  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  pp.  381,  426,  1893, 
not  of  Sby. 

Bulimulus  calvus  var.  ?  Stearns,  op.  cit.,  p.  427. 

Chatham  Island,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 

This  is  the  smooth  form  of  which  the  plicate  aspect  is  B.  curtus  of 
.Reibisch  and  Anceyi  of  Dall.     Jaw  membranaceous,  horn  colored, 
29 


442  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

low,  wide,  thin,  of   equal   height    throughout,   ends    terminating 

bluntly ;  anterior  surface  with  about  22  broad,  crowded  ribs,  their 

outer  edges  thickened,  their  ends  bluntly  denticulating  the  upper 

and  lower  margins  of  the  jaw. 

The  shell  has  an  olivaceous  tint  which  distinguishes  it  at  once 

from  the  mostly  reddish  or  yellowish-brown  species  of  which  the 

fauna  contains  so  many. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  curtus  Reibisch.     Plate  XV,  fig.  13;  Plate  XVII;  fig.  8. 

Bulifntihis  [Ncrsioitis)  curttis  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  9,  t.  i,  fig.  14. 
Bulwiulns  {Nasioiiis)  aniastroides  Ancey,  var.  Anceyi Dall,  Nautilus,  VII, 
p.  53,  September,  1893. 

Chatham  Island,  near  Wreck  Bay,  at  a  height  of  1,600  feet,  Baur ; 
usually  on  the  under  surface  of  the  leaves  of  plants.  Also  reported 
from  Chatham  by  Wolf  (Reibisch)  in  grassy  places  and  on  the 
trunks  of  trees,  at  from  900  to  2,000  feet,  and  by  the  U.  S.  Fish  Com- 
mission. 

This  is  very  closely  related  to  B.  amastroides  Ancey,  of  which  it 
is  probably  an  offshoot.  It  has,  in  general,  a  more  plicate  surface, 
ruder  aspect,  smaller  mouth,  and  more  angular  periphery.  Speci- 
mens submitted  by  Herr  Reibisch  as  representing  his  curtus  agree 
exactly  with  the  types  of  my  variety  Ancey i. 

Jaw  as  in  typical  amastroides.    Radula  long  and  narrow ;  formula 

1  ;    rhachidian  tooth  tricuspid  ;    laterals   tricuspid ;    both 

11+9-9+11 

with  the  lateral  cusps  quite    short ;    marginals  subquadrate,  low, 
widej  with  a  longer  bifid  inner  cusp  and  an  outer,  shorter  cutting 
edge  with  three  or  four  denticles  upon  it. 
Genitalia  essentially  as  in  B.  nux. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  canaliferus  Reibisch.    Plate  XV,  fig.  14. 

Bulimuhts  [Pelecosloma)  canaliferus  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  13,  t.  ii,  fig.  6; 
Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  pp.  415,  428,  1893. 

Chatham  Island,  in  moss  and  on  ferns,  900-2,000  feet,  Wolf,  fide 
Reibisch. 

This  is  a  peculiar  shell,  characterized  by  its  many-whorled  spire, 
short  aperture,  and  a  large  umbilicus  with  its  walls  deeply  exca- 
vated, so  that  the  groove  shows  as  a  prominent  ridge  on  the  pil- 
lar within  the  aperture.  In  the  specimen  sent  by  Herr  Reibisch 
the  edge  of  the  aperture  is  hardly  thickened  and  not  at  all  reflected, 
there  is  a  thin  callus  deposit  over  the  body,  but  no  trace  of  a  parie- 
tal tooth.  The  species,  with  a  totally  different  surface,  has  some- 
what the  form  of  B.  rugiferus,  but  with  a  less  slender  and  shorter 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  QF  PHILADELPHIA.  443 

spire.     Reibisch's  figure  gives  the  impression  of  a  more  slender  shell 
than  the  specimen  I  have  examined. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  sculp turatus  Pfeiffer. 

Bulinms  sculptnratus  Pfr.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1846,  p.  29  (Gal.  Is.).  Mon.  Hel. 
viv.,  II,  p.  183,  1848  ;  IV,  p.  476,  1859. 

Bidimus  {Ncesiottis)  sculptnratus  Pfr.,  Mai.  Blatt.  ii.    Vers.,  p.  161,  1854. 

Bulimus  sculptnratus 'ReQve,  Conch.  Icon.,  pi.  XX,  fig.  125,  1848. 

Bulimulus  ( Omphalostyla)  sculpturatui  H.  &  A.  Ads.,  Gen.  Eec.  Moll.,  ii,  p. 
161,  1855. 

Bulimulus  [Nesiotes]  sculptnratus  Martens,  in  Albers,  Heliceen,  Ed.  ii,  p. 
220,  1860. 

Bulimulus  {NcBsiotus)  sctdptui atus  Pfr.,  Nona.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254,  1881  ;  Kei- 
bisch,  Isis,  p.  10,  1892 ;  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  p.  427,  1893. 

The  particular  island  to  which  this  species,  collected  by  Darwin, 
belongs,  is  not  known.  I  have  not  been  able  to  obtain  a  specimen 
for  examination.  Reeve's  figure  recalls  a  specimen,  of  B.  Simrothi 
in  which  the  lip  has  not  yet  been  developed  fully,  but  if  his  meas- 
urement is  correct,  the  shell  should  be  a  little  larger  as  well  as  more 
slender  than  in  B.  Simrothi. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  rugiferus  Sowerby. 

Bulimus  rngi/erns  Shy.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1833,  p.  36  (James Id.),  Conch.  111.,  fig. 
40,  1833. 

Cochlicellns  rugifer'SiQck,  Index,  p.  63  No.  11,  1838. 

Bulimus  rtigiferus  Desh.  in  Lam.  An.  s.  Vert.,  Ed.  ii,  vol.  viii,  p.  276. 
1838.  Pfr.  Mon.  Hel.  viv.,  II,  p.  115,  1848.  Reeve,  Conch.  Icon.,  XX,  fig. 
118,  1848. 

Bulimulus  {Omphalostyla)  rugiferus  H.  «fe  A.  Ad.,  Gen.  Eec.  Moll.,  II,  p. 
161,  1855. 

Bulimulus  [Nesiotes)  rugiferus  Martens,  in  Albers,  ed.  ii,  p.  220,  1860. 

Bulimulus  [JVcFsictus)  rugiferus  Pfr.,  Nom.  Hel.  viv.,  p.  254, 1881.  Reibisch, 
Isis,  1892,  p.  9.    Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  427,  1893. 

James  Island,  Cuming. 

This  species  is  related  to  B.  nesioticus  and  B.  Reibischi  from  both 
of  which  it  is  distinguished  l)y  details  of  form.  I  have  seen  a  num- 
ber of  specimens,  but  all  were  from  the  original  series  in  the  Cumin, 
gian  Collection. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  nesioticus  Dall  n.  s.     Plate  XVI,  fig.  1. 

Shell  small,  thin,  pale  brown,  with  two  nepionic  and  five  subse- 
quent whorls ;  spire  slender,  suture  distinct,  umbilicus  small  or  ob- 
solete, apex  rather  blunt  with  an  axial  dimple,  nepionic  whorls 
transversely  ribbed  with  fine,  even  regular  riblets  with  about  equal 
interspaces ;  the  next  whorl  is  sculptured  with  fine  spirals,  close  set, 
under  which  are  fine  transverse  wrinkles;  the  subsequent  whorls 
show  a  more  or  less  variable  transverse  ribbing,  in  which  the  ribs 
have  a  tendency  to  break  up  and  vary  in  direction  ;  these  are  crossed 


444  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896. 

by  fine,  often  granulose  spirals,  which  are  swollen  where  they  cross 
the  riblets ;  aperture  small,  throat  yellowish,  the  pillar  white,  widely 
reflected  without  any  terminal  plait  or  callus,  outer  lip  thickened, 
somewhat  expanded,  continuous  with  the  pillar  and  a  slight  callus 
on  the  body.     Length  12,  breadth  5  mm. 

James  Island, 'U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 

This  interesting  species  was  obtained  on  James  Island  in  small 
numbers,  one  specimen  fresh  but  none  living,  the  one  figured  has 
rather  sparser  ribbing  than  the  best  preserved  specimen.  Most  of 
them  are  bleached  white.  The  shell  appears  to  be  intermediate  in 
character  and  size  between  B.  sculpturatus  as  figured,  and  B.  rugi- 
ferus  Sby.  It  was  at  first  referred  to  the  latter  species,  but  further 
study  showed  B.  nesioticus  to  have  two  whorls  less  in  the  same 
length  and  to  be  a  perceptibly  stouter  shell. 

Bulimulus  (Nsesiotus)  Reibischi  Dall.    Plate  XVI,  fig.  4. 

Buliiimhcs  {Nasiottis)  Reibischi  T)di\\,  Nautihis,  viii,  p.  126,  March,  1895. 

Shell  elevated,  slender,  with  nine  whorls  of  a  pale  ferruginous 
color  and  rather  solid  consistency  ;  sculpture  like  that  of  B.  nesioti- 
cus but  rather  more  closely  ribbed  ;  the  suture  distinct,  somewhat 
appressed,  whorls  little  inflated  but  not  flattened  ;  umbilicus  a  mere 
chink  ;  aperture  oval,  higher  than  wide,  rounded  in  front,  the  pillar 
simple,  the  margins  thickened  but  not  reflected;  length  11.0,  diame- 
ter 2.5  mm. 

Indefatigable  Island,  two  specimens,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 

This  shell,  though  shorter,  is  intermediate  between  such  forms  as 
B.  chemnitzioides  and  the  more  normal  Niesioti.  It  is  named  in 
honor  of  Herr  Paul  Reibisch,  of  Dresden,  who  recently  worked  up 
the  land  shells  collected  by  Wolf  in  these  islands,  in  a  paper  to 
which  I  have  made  frequent  reference. 

Bulimulus  new  species.     Plate  XV,  fig.  15. 

Shell  of  about  nine  whorls,  small,  slender,  with  flattish  sides, 
almost  cylindrical,  transversely  finely  wrinkled,  suture  distinct; 
aperture  small,  the  outer  lip  sharp,  the  pillar  lip  short,  broadly  re- 
flected, without  plait  or  projecting  callus  ;  length  11.5,  breadth  2.5 
mm. 

One  specimen  found  on  James  and  two  on  Indefatigable  Island, 
Reibisch  m  litt. 

The  above  description  and  figure  are  taken  from  a  photograph 
kindly  submitted  to  me  by  Herr  Reibisch.      I  refrain  from  naming 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  445 

the  species  as  the  last  mentioned  gentleman  had  over  two  years  ago 
announced  his  intention  of  describing  it,  but  has  so  far,  I  believe, 
published  nothing  referring  to  it.  As  a  distinct  form  from  any  pre- 
viously reported  from  these  islands,  I  have  thought  best  to  briefly 
indicate  it. 
Bulimulus  (NsBsiotus)  chemnitzioides  Forbes.    Plate  XVII,  fig.  4. 

Bulimus  chemttUzioides  Fbs.,  P.  Z.  S.,  1850,  p.  55,  pi-  ix,  fig.  6;  Pfr.,  Mon. 
Hel.  Viv.,  Ill,  p.  303,  1853;  Kiister  in  Chemn.  Conch.  Cab.,  ed.  ii,  Bulimus 
No.  113,  pi.  31,  figs.  21-23. 

Bulimus  {N(esioius)  chemnitzioides  Pfr.,  Vers.  Malak.  Blatt.,  p.  160,  1855, _^ 

Bulimulus  (  Omphalostyda)  chemnitzioides  H.  &  A.  Ads.,  Gen.  Rec.  Moll.,  ii, 
p.  161,  1855. 

Bulimulus  {Pleuropyrgus)  chemnitzioides  Martens  in  Albers  Heliceen,  ed.  ii, 
p.  221,  1860;  Pfr.,  Norn.  Hel.  Viv.,  p.  254, 1881 ;  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  12,  t. 
ii,  fitr.  4;  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  381,  1893. 

Bulimulus  [Fleuropyrgus)  lima  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  p.  13,  t.  ii,  fig.  5. 

On  Chatham  Island,  at  300-600  feet  elevation,  with  B.  perspec- 
tivus  Pfr.,  on  rocks  and  under  stones,  Wolf;  on  the  leaves  of  plants 
at  1,600  feet  elevation,  near  the  southwest  end  of  Chatham  Island, 
Dr.  Baur ;  also  Kellett,  Habel  and  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 

The  younger  specimens  named  lima  by  Reibisch  though  appar- 
ently differing  somewhat  in  form,  appear  to  grade  directly  into  the 
others.  This  species  sometimes  shows  a  small  but  distinct  parietal 
tooth  or  callosity,  but  this  is  quite  exceptional. 

Jaw  almost  membranous,  thin,  light  horn-colored,  slightly  arcu- 
ate, of  almost  equal  height  throughout,  low,  wide,  with  blunt  ends 
and  margins  bluntly  denticulated  by  the  broad  ends  of  the  ribs ; 
anterior  surface  with  about  20  broad,  flat  ribs,  reinforced  at  their 
outer  edges  and  separated  by  very  narrow  interstices. 

Radula  long  and  narrow,  formula  about  1  ;  rhachidian 

22+8-8+22 

tooth  tricuspid  as  in  the  other  species  ;  perfect  laterals  about  eight 
on  each  side,  bicuspid  ;  marginals  low,  wide,  with  one  inner  long 
bicuspid  cutting  point  and  a  shorter  wide  outer  cutting  edge  broken 
up  into  three  or  more  denticles. 

The  specimens  examined  anatomically  were  so  much  shrunken 
by  the  alcohol  and  had  genitalia  so  little  developed  that  they  could 
not  be  satisfactorily  dissected.  This  species  is  connected  so  closely 
by  such  forms  as  B.  Relbischi  and  B.  rugiferus  with  the  typical 
Ncesioti  that  it  is  obvious  that  they  should  be  referred  to  the  same 
section  of  the  genus.  The  nepionic  whorls  are  usually  decorticated 
and  smooth,  but  when  perfect,  show  the  usual  transverse  ribbing. 


446  PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Bulimulus  (Naesiotus)  Habeli  Stearns, 

Bidimulus  {Pleuropyrgus)  Habeli  (Stearns  MS.)  Dall,  Nautilus,  Jan.,  1892, 
p.  99;  Stearns,  Nautilus,  Dec,  1892,  p.  86;  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
xvi,  pp.  382,  428,  1893. 

Bulimulus  {Pleuropyrgus)  /frf^raReibisch,  Isis,  (Oct.)  1892,  p.  14,  t.  ii,  fig. 
3. 

Chatham  Island,  Habel,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  Steamer  Alba- 
tross and  Dr.  G.  Baur,  under  stones  near  the  shore,  at  the  southwest 
end  of  the  island  (typical  form)  ;  Chatham  Island,  under  stones  and 
on  mossy  rocks  in  the  moist  region,  900-2,000  feet  above  the  sea, 
"Wolf  fide  Reibisch  {B.  terehra). 

The  specimen  of  B.  terehra  submitted  by  Herr  Reibisch  is  slightly 
larger,  more  dull  colored  and  has  a  more  evident  umbilicus  than  the 
typical  specimens  of  Habeli  which  were  obtained  in  a  more  unfavor- 
able station,  but  the  differences  do  not  appear  to  be  sufficient  to  be 
worthy  of  a  specific  name,  at  least  judging  from  the  material  I  have 
been  able  to  study.  No  specimens  of  B.  Habeli  contaiuing  the  soft 
parts  have  been  received  by  me.  The  nepionic  whorls  are  usually 
decorticated  and  smooth,  but  when  perfect  show  extremely  fine 
transverse  ribbing.  In  the  single  specimen  I  have  seen  of  the 
variety  terehra  Reibisch  the  nepionic  ribbing  is  coarser  and  more 
evident. 

Pupa  (Leucooheila  !)  Wolfii -Miller.    Plate  XVII,  fig.  14. 

Pupa  {Leucochila')  Wolfii  Miller,  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pt.  3,  p.  15,  t.  ii,  fig. 
11. 

Ptipa  {Leucochila')  munita  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pt.  3,  p.  15,  t.  ii,  fig  9. 

?  Pupa  Eyriesii  Drouet,  Essai  Moll.  Terr.  Guyane  Franfaise,  p.  71,  pi.  ii,  fig. 
16-17,  1859. 

Guayaquil,  Ecuador,  Wolf,  fide  Reibisch,  op.  cit. ;  Albemarle 
Island,  on  bushes  near  the  shore.  Wolf;  on  bones  of  dead  tortoises, 
Albemarle  Island,  Baur  ;  on  the  trunks  of  trees,  Ilet-la-Mer,  French 
Guiana,  Drouet. 

Several  specimens  of  a  minute  Pwpa  were  obtained  by  Dr.  Baur 
adhering  to  dry  bones  picked  up  on  Albemarle  Island,  According 
to  their  age  these  show  the  following  denticles  in  the  aperture  :  1. 
On  the  body  is  a  deeply  grooved  prominent  tooth  which  in  some 
specimens  is  so  far  bifid  as  to  appear  like  two  slender  teeth  close  to 
each  other,  this  is  present  on  all  the  specimens ;  2.  On  the  pillar, 
well  up  near  the  body  a  small  but  very  distinct  horizontal  lamella, 
present  in  all  specimens,  but  less  developed  in  the  younger  ones  ;  3. 
Well  within  the  lip  is  a  series  of  small  short  denticles  side  by  side, 
longer  in  the  direction  of  the  whorls  ;  the  first  almost  vertically  be- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  447 

low  the  parietal  denticle  is  small,  the  next  to  the  right,  close  to  it, 
is  higher,  slightly  bifid  at  the  tip  when  most  completely  developed 
and  longer  in  an  antero-posterior  direction  than  either  of  the  others ; 
the  third  is  small  like  the  first,  and  the  fourth  and  last  (in  any  of 
the  specimens  seen)  is  still  smaller  and  appears  only  after  the  others 
are  well  developed.  The  figure  of  P.  Wolfii  given  by  Reibisch 
shows  the  parietal,  columellar  and  three  basal  denticles;  in  the  fig- 
ure of  P.  viimita  the  fourth  basal  and  another  denticle  in  the  angle 
between  the  body  and  the  pillar  have  appeared.  Drouet's  figure  of 
P.  Eyriesii  has  the  parietal  tooth  represented  as  double,  while  the 
columellar  tooth  is  present  only  two  of  the  basal  denticles  appear. 
All  these  figures  are  poor  and  the  resemblance  between  them,  allow- 
ing for  bad  drawing,  are  so  close  and  the  diflferences  between  the  ac- 
tual specimens  I  have  studied  are  so  great,  that  I  am  strongly  inclined 
to  believe  they  will  all  prove  to  be  the  stages  of  one  and  the  same 
species.  Even  Reibisch's  P.  clausa  which  is  somewhat  smaller  than 
those  above  referred  to,  shows  differences  of  denticulation  from  P. 
Wolfii  not  greater  than  are  observable  in  the  different  ages  of  some 
North  American  species. 
Pupa  (Leucocheila  ?)  clausa  Reibisch. 

fupa  {Leucochila)  clausa  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pt.  3,  p..  15,  pi.  II,  fig.  10. 

On  bushes  near  the  sea.  Indefatigable  Island,  Wolf. 

This  form  differs  from  the  most  fully  developed  P.  Wolfii  in  hav- 
ing one  more  denticle  on  the  pillar  near  its  base,  in  having  the 
other  teeth  more  strongly  developed,  and  in  being  slightly  smaller. 
According  to  Reibisch  it  has  4t  whorls,  while  P.  Wolfii-munita  has 
from  5  to  5i  turns.  It  is  so  diflScult  to  fix  on  a  common  point  in 
settling  where  the  first  apical  whorl  ends,  that  I  do  not  put  much 
confidence  in  differences  of  less  than  a  full  turn.  It  can  only  be 
decided  by  study  of  a  large  number  of  specimens  whether  this  spe- 
cies is  distinct  from  the  P.  Wolfii  or  not,  and  at  present  the  material 
is  not  accessible, 

Herr  Reibisch  wrote  in  February,  1894,  that  he  had  three  or  four 
Avell  differentiated  species  of  Pupa  from  different  islands,  but,  so  far, 
I  have  not  noticed  any  publication  of  them,  and  have  not  been  able 
for  eighteen  months  to  obtain  any  information  as  to  the  whereabouts 
of  Herr  Reibisch  himself. 
■?  Trochomorpha  Bauri  Dall.     Plate  XV,  figs.  8,  9. 

Zonites  {Hyalinia)  Bauri  Dall,  Nautilus,  V,  p.  98,  Jan.,  1892. 

South  Albemarle  Island,  on  weathered  bones  of  tortoises.  Dr. 
Baur. 


448  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896. 

The  single  specimen  of  this  interesting  form  is  not  quite  adult, 
and  the  slight  angulation  at  the  periphery  may  be  lost  in  the  fully 
mature  shell.  The  fine  spiral  striation  which  characterizes  the  spe- 
cies recalls  that  of  several  Polynesian  species.  The  close  resem- 
blance to  T.  calculosa  Gould,  of  Tahiti,  leads  to  the  query  as  to 
whether  the  unnamed  "  Helix  "  collected  by  Darwin,  and  said  to  be 
identical  with  a  Tahitian  species  not  named,  may  not  have  been  this 
species.  It  can  only  provisionally  be  referred  to  the  group  Trocho- 
morpha,  as  the  animal  is  unknown. 

Conulus  galapaganus  Dall.    Plate  XV,  fig.  11. 

Conuhis  galapagajius  Dall,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  55,  Sept.,  1893. 

Under  leaves  at  1,600  feet  elevation,  southwest  end  of  Chatham 
Island,  Dr.  Baur. 

This  species  is  close  to  C.  fulvus  but  has  five  whorls  to  four  in  a 
specimen  of  fulvus  of  the  same  diameter.  It  has  a  very  well  marked 
suture  and  the  whorls  between  the  sutures  are  more  convex  than  in 
fulvus.  The  height  is  greater  in  C.  galapaganus  in  proportion  to  the 
number  of  whorls.  It  seems  to  differ  from  C.  fulvus  and  related 
forms  by  its  smaller  size,  very  brilliant  surface,  inflated  whorls  and 
number  of  turns.  It  has  no  spiral  striation  like  that  of  T.  Bauri, 
and,  in  short,  seems  like  an  elevated,  dwarfed  inflated  C.  fulvus. 

Vitrea  chathamensis  Dall.    Plate  XV,  figs.  3,  10. 

Hyalinia  Chatham etisis  Dall,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  54,  1893. 

On  dead  leaves  at  an  elevation  of  1,600  feet,  southwest  end  of 
Chatham  Island,  Dr.  Baur. 

This  is  a  small,  thin,  straw  colored  shell,  much  like  V.  arborea 
Say,  depressed,  with  four  rounded  whorls,  a  distinct  suture,  the 
polished  surface  sculptured  with  numerous  slightly  flexuous  radial 
indented  lines ;  the  umbilicus  is  deep,  exhibiting  all  the  volutions, 
but  rather  narrow.     The  aperture  is  like  that  of  H.  arborea. 

Sucoinea  Bettii  Smith.     Plate  XV,  fig.  6. 

Succinea  Bettii  Smith,  P.  Z.  S.,  1877,  p.  72,  t.  xi,  fig.  8. 
Succinea  Wolfi  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pt.  3,  p.  16,  t.  2.  fig.  12  a-b. 

Charles  Island,  H.  M.  S.  Peterel,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  ;  James 
Island  at  James  Bay,  Dr.  G.  Baur  ;  Chatham  Island,  900-2,000  feet 
in  the  moist  region,  among  moss  and  stones  and  on  herbage.  Wolf; 
South  Albemarle  Island  ?  on  dry  bones  of  turtles,  young  specimens 
only,  Dr.  Baur. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  -PHILADELPHIA.  449 

This  species  very  closely  resembles  the  British  S.  putris,  the  spec- 
imen figured  by  Jeffreys  in  his  British  Conchology  might  almost  be 
interchanged  with  a  specimen  from  James  Island  as  regards  its  gen- 
eral form.  The  Galapagos  shell,  however,  has  a  less  even  surface, 
being  somewhat  irregularly  wrinkled  with  a  dull  unpolished  aspect. 

Succinea  brevior  Smith.     Plate  XV,  fig.  4  ;  Plate  XVI,  fig.  8 ;  Plate  XVII,  fig.  9. 

Succinea  Bettii  var.  brevior  ^xa\\\\^  P.  Z.  S.,  1877,  p.  77. 
Succifiea  brevior  jy^W,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  56,  Sept.,  1893. 

Found  near  Black  Beach,  Charles  Island,  at  about  1,000  feet  ele- 
vation on  the  stems  of  sJirubbery  ;  the  stems  were  of  a  grayish-brown 
color,  covered  with  small  lichens.  Dr.  Baur. 

Jaw  arched,  high,  thick,  horn-colored,  the  ends  acuminate  and 
recurved;  anterior  surface  Avithoutribs,  cutting  edge  with  a  median 
projection  ;  upper  interior  margin  with  a  quadrate  insertion  plate  as 
usual  in  the  genus. 

Radula  long  and  narrow,  formula  1         ;  rhachidian  tooth 

24+6-6+24 

tricuspid  ;  on  each  side  six  bicuspid  laterals,  each  with  the  usual 
thinning  on  the  lower  edge  of  the  base  of  attachment ;  marginals 
low  and  wide,  the  inner  cusp  larger  and  longer,  bifid,  the  outer 
cusp  with  several  denticles ;  the  extreme  laterals  lose  the  distinction 
between  the  cusps  and  show  a  somewhat  irregularly  serrate  cutting 
edge. 

This  species  closely  resembles  a  small  specimen  oi  S.  obliqua  Say, 
its  color  is  less  ruddy  and  paler  than  in  S.  producta,  but  the  apex  is 
even  more  vividly  rosy ;  the  axis  is  pervious  in  the  last  whorl,  but 
not  as  in  S.  Bettii  clear  to  the  summit  of  the  shell.  It  is  readily 
distinguished  from  either  of  the  other  Galapagos  species  by  its  short 
rather  blunt  spire. 

Succinea  producta  Reibisch.  Plate  XV,  fig.  7 ;  Plate  XVI,  fig.  10 ;  Plate  XVII,  fig.  5. 

Succinea  (  Tapada)  Wolfi  var. /r^j^'^/iYrt  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pt.  3,  p.  16,  t.  ii, 
fig.  12  c. 

Chatham  Island,  900-2,000  feet  elevation,  in  moist  places  among 
moss  and  stones,  Wolf;  southwest  end  of  Chatham  Island,  on  damp 
lava  rocks  of  a  blackish  color  often  covered  with  very  small  lichens. 
Dr.  Baur. 

Jaw  light  horn-color,  strong,  thick,  high,  strongly  arched  with 

the  ends  rapidly  shortened  to  a  point,  the  interior  upper  margin 

with  the  usual  quadrate  insertion  plate ;  anterior  surface  without 

ribs,  the  cutting  edge  with  a  short,  wide,  mesial  projection. 

Radula  long  and  narrow,  formula  about  1  ;  rhachidian 

26+14-14+26 


450  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896. 

tooth  tricuspid  ;  14  perfect  laterals  with  two  rather  widely  separated 
cusps,  the  outer  shorter ;  the  lower  edge  of  the  base  of  attachment 
thinned  out  as  usual  in  the  genus ;  marginals  low,  wide,  bicuspid, 
the  cusps  subdivided  into  minor  denticles  giving  a  serrate  look  to  the 
outer  marginals. 

This  species  is  of  a  reddish-yellow  color,  with  the  apex  of  a  pro- 
nounced rosy  tint,  the  surface  somewhat  rough  as  in  S.  Bettii,  from 
which  it  differs  by  its  more  produced  spire  and  the  manner  in  which 
the  outer  lip  is  bent  over  so  as  to  reach  the  body  whorl  vertically 
instead  of  obliquely.  Only  young,  and  very  few  even  of  the  young, 
are  quite  as  slender  as  the  one  figured  by  Reibisch.  The  outer  lip 
in  fully  adult  specimens  is  more  expanded  than  in  S.  Bettii,  both 
have  a  gyrate  and  pervious  axis,  but  the  S.  Bettii  has  it  more  open 
than  the  other  species. 

Succinea  corbis  Dall.     Plate  XV,  fig.  6. 

Succhiea  corbis  Dall,  Nautilus,  VII,  p.  55,  Sept.,  1893. 

South  Albemarle  Island,  on  dry  bones  of  turtles,  Dr.  Baur. 

Shell  small,  of  two  and  a  half  whorls,  to  which  a  black  mould  ad- 
heres with  tenacity.  The  first  whorl  and  a  half  are  salmon-pink  in 
the  adult,  but  in  the  young  of  that  size  are  pale  amber  colored. 
The  shell  resembles  S.  produeta  in  form,  but  is  smaller  and  has  a 
more  contracted  aperture,  it  is  instantly  recognized  when  examined 
with  a  good  lens,  by  its  surface,  which  is  minutely  shagreened  all 
over  with  an  excessively  fine  network  of  closely  reticulated  incised 
lines.  Alt.  of  shell  7,  max.  diam.  4*5,  extreme  length  of  aperture  4 
mm. 

The  remarkable  sculpture  is  not  visible  to  the  naked  eye  except 
as  a  sort  of  hoary  bloom  on  the  surface  ;  under  a  compound  micro- 
scope it  looks  like  closely  woven  basket  work.  I  have  examined  a 
great  many  Succineas  without  finding  any  other  species  possessing 
this  character,  but,  from  the  description,  S.solidula  Pfr.  from  Christ- 
mas Island,  in  the  Indian  Ocean,  must  have  somewhat  such  a  sur- 
face. Mr.  Edgar  A.  Smith  (P.  Z.  S.,  1887,  p.  518)  states  that  S. 
solidula  has  "  the  texture  of  very  fine  linen,  or  minute  criss-cross 
lines,"  which  fairly  well  describes  the  surface  of  S.  corbis.  S.  soli- 
dula exhibits  the  further  peculiarity  of  having  a  slight  but  evident 
internal  thickening  of  the  peristome,  but  as  the  specimens  of  S.  cor- 
bis are  all  evidently  immature  or  not  fully  grown,  they  would  show 
nothing  of  such  a  character  even  if  the  fully  adult  possesses  it.  A 
close  examination  of  the  black  earthy  substance  with  Avhich  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  451 

shells  are  nearly  covered,  leads  to  the  suspicion  that  it  is  composed 
of  the  execreta  of  the  animal  itself,  as  it  is  laid  on  in  little  sausage- 
like or  subcylindrical  masses  and  attached  by  a  dry  substance,  re- 
calling the  silvery  streaks  left  by  crawling  slugs. 

Leptinaria  chathamensis  Dall.    Plate  XVI,  fig.  9;  Plate  XVII,  fig.  16. 

Leptinaria  chathamensis  Dall,  Nautilus,  V,  p.  98,  1892 ;  Stearns,  Proc  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  pp.  418,  428,  1893. 

BiiHmulus  {Felecostoma)  cymatoferiis  Reibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pt.  3,  p.  14,  t.  ii, 
fig.  7. 

Chatham  Island,  on  ferns  1,600-2,000  feet  above  the  sea,  Dr, 
Baur  ;  also  on  dry  bones  of  tortoises.  South  Albemarle  Island,  Baur. 

Shell  small,  horn-colored,  with  a  blunt  apex  and  six  rounded 
whorls  ;  suture  very  distinct,  surface  polished,  delicately  marked 
with  lines  of  growth  ;  base  rounded,  relatively  rather  widely  umbil- 
icated ;  aperture  with  the  margin  hardly  thickened,  rounded  in 
front  and  at  the  suture  ;  pillar  broad,  thin  ;  body  with  a  single  ele- 
vated, thin,  sharp  lamina,  extending  spirally  inward  from  a  point  a 
little  behind  the  peristome  and  nearly  equidistant  from  the  inner 
and  outer  lips^  alt.  of  shell  3.0,  max.  diani.  1.6  mm. 

Analogous  forms  are  found  in  the  mountains  of  the  Panamic 
resrion  and  on  several  of  the  Pacific  Islands.  As  all  the  American 
species  are  believed  to  belong  to  Leptinaria,  as  distinguished  from 
Tornatellina,  I  have  no  hesitation  in  referring  this  species  to  the 
American  type.  The  radula  of  this  form  is  extremely  minute  and 
difficult  to  find  when  boiled  out  in  liquor  potassse.  I  sacrificed  sev- 
eral specimens  without  success,  and  the  tooth  figured  is  from  a 
sketch  by  Mr.  Binney.  His  slide  has  deteriorated  so  much  in  keep- 
ing that  I  have  been  unable  to  find  the  radula  upon  it  after  long 
scrutiny. 
Helicina  (Idesa)  nesiotica  Dall.     Plate  XV,  figs.  1,  2  ;  Plate  XVII,  fig.  12. 

Helicma  {Idesa)  nesiotica  Dall,  Nautilus,  V,  p.  97,  Jan.,  1892;  Stearns,  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  p.  418,  1893. 

Helicina  Wolfi  Keibisch,  Isis,  1892,  pt.  3,  p.  17,  t.  ii,  fig.  13;  Stearns,  Proc. 
U.  S,  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  p.  416, 1893. 

On  the  leaves  of  plants  1,600  feet  in  elevation,  near  the  S.-W.  end 
of  Chatham  Island,  Dr.  Baur  ;  Albemarle  Island,  Reibisch  in  Hit. 

Shell  small,  depressed,  with  rounded  periphery,  base  moderately 
convex,  and  peristome  not  thickened  nor  reflected  ;  epidermis  of  a 
bright  reddish  chestnut,  polished,  but  with  obvious  regular  incre- 
mental lines ;  base  with  a  thin  white  callus  merging  into  the  lower 
lip  without  notch  or  angle ;  spire  depresssd,  suture  very  distinct. 


452  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

not  channelled ;  operculum  smooth,  whitish,  angulated  only  at  the 
upper  extreme ;  alt.  of  shell  2.3,  max.  diam.  3.3  mm. 

This  was  the  first  species  of  the  family  to  be  reported  from  the 
Galapagos.  The  type  is  not  known  from  the  west  slope  of  the 
Andes,  though  it  would  be  rash  to  infer  that  it  may  not  yet  be  found 
there  ;  it  is  present  in  the  Panamic  province.  Though  first  obtained 
from  Chatham  Island  Herr  Reibisch  writes  that  he  has  now  received 
examples  from  the  Albemarle  Island, 

An  examination  of  the  radula  shows  points  of  interest.  The  rha- 
chidian  tooth  has  a  distinct  cusp  which  is  wanting  in  the  Helicinas 
heretofore  figured;  there  are  one  major  and  three  minor  laterals. 
The  inner  pair  are  channelled  on  the  back  and  have  a  simple  out- 
wardly directed  cusp  ;  the  next  is  smaller,  with  the  cusp  pointing 
inward.  The  major  lateral  appears  very  differently  according  to 
the  position  in  which  it  is  viewed.  In  the  normal  position  the  cusp 
is  large,  short  with  about  seven  subequal  denticles,  the  base  is  plain 
and  without  accessory  projections ;  the  uncini  are  numerous,  close- 
set,  simple  and  very  small.     Formula  1 . 

X  y  3'3  ?■  X 
Auricula  stagnalis  Orbigny. 

Auricula  stagnalis  Orbigny,  Mag.  de  Zool.,  1835,  p.  23,  No.  3. 
Auricula  gratiidina  Anton,  Verz.,  p.  48,  1839. 
Auricula papillifera  Kiister,  Auric,  p.  25,  t.  3.  figs.  9,  10,  1844. 
Ellol>i7t?n  grafiuiimrm  H.  &  A.  Adams,  P.  Z.  S.,  1854,  p.  7. 
Ellobium  sta^nale  H.  &  A.   Adams,  Gen.  Rec.  Moll.,  ii.,  p.  238  ;  Wimmer, 
Sitzb.  k.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Wien,  Bd.  Ixxx,  p.  44,  No.  87,  1879. 

Panama  and  Guayaquil,  Orbigny  and  Adams ;  Tumaco  Island, 

Cuming ;  Bindloe  Island,  Habel  fide  Wimmer. 

Melampus  trilineatus  C.  B.  Adams. 

Auricula  trilitteata  Adams,  Pan.  Shells,  Ann.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist.,  N.  Y.,  Y,  pp. 
436,  543,  1852. 

Melampus  trilineatus  Pfeiffer,  Men.  Auric,  p.  44,  1856;  Wimmer,  Sitzb.  k. 
Akad.  Wiss.,  Wien,  Ixxx,  p.  44,  1879. 

Panama,  Adams;  Hood  Island,  Habel,  fide  Wimmer. 

Tralia  panamensis  C.  B.  Adams. 

Auricula  panamensis  Adams,  Pan.  Shells,  Ann.  Lye  Nat.  Hist.,  N.  Y.,  V, 
pp.  433,  542,  1852. 

Tralia  panamensis  H.  &  A.  Adams,  P.  Z.  S.,  1854,  p.  10  ;  Wimmer,  op.  cit., 

p.  45,1879. 

Hood  and  Charles  Islands,  Habel,  fide  Wimmer;  Panama  and 
Taboga,  C.  B.  Adams;  Cocos  Island,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 

Genus  PEDIPES  (Adanson)  Scopoli. 
Pedipes  (Adanson)  Scopoli,  Intr.  Hist.  Nat.,  p.  392, 1777. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  453 

Pedipes  angulatus  C.  B.  Adams. 

Pedipes  angiilata  C.  B.  Adams,  Pan.  Shells,  Ann.  Lye  Nat.  Hist.,  N.  Y.,  V, 
pp.  431,  542,  1852. 

Pedipes  angulatiis  Pfeiffer,  Novit.  Conch.,  I,  p.  24,  t.  6,  figs.  26-28,  1854; 
Wimmer,  op.  cit.,  p.  45,  1879. 

Panama,  Adams ;  Bindloe  Island,  Galapagos,  Habel,  fide  Wim- 
mer. 

Genus  SIPHONARIA  Sowerby.12 

Siphonaria  gigas  Sowerby. 

Stp/ionaria  gigas  Sowerhy,  Tank.  Cat.,  p.  vi.  No.  808,  1825;  Keeve,  Conch. 
Icon.,  S/p/ionarza,  pi.  1,  fig.  3. 

SipAonaria  characterhtica  Reeve,  op.  cit.,  pi.  2,  figs.  8  a-b. 

Charles  Island,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  ;  Peru,  Coeos  Island,  Pan- 
ama and  north  to  the  Gulf  of  California. 

Genus  WILLIAMIA  Monterosato. 

Ancylus  sp.  (  Gussoni)  Costa,  Cat.,  p.  20,  1829;  Scacchi,  Cat.,  p.  18,  1836. 

Patella  sp.  Phil.,  Enum.  Moll.  Sicil.,  I,  p.  255,  1836;  II,  p.  84,  1844. 

Nacella  sp.  Cpr.,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1864,  I,  p.  474,  No.  15;  Cooper, 
Geogr.  Cat.  Moll.,  Gala.,  p.  23,  1867. 

Siphonaria  {Liriola)  sp.  Dall,  Am.  Journ.  Conch.,  VI,  p.  37,  1870. 

Pilisats  subg.  Allerya  Morch,  Journ.  de  Conchyl.,  Vol.  XXV,  p.  210,  1877. 
Not  Allerya  Bourguignat,  Atti  Accad.  Sci.  Let.  ed.  Arti.  di  Palermo,  VI,  pp. 
1-7, 1876. 

Scutulnm  Monterosato,  Ann.  Mus.  Civ.,  Genova,  IX,  p.  427,  1877. 

Not  Sciitulum  Tournouer,  Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  de  France,  1869  {Echinidce). 

Liriola  sp.  Dall,  Journ.  de  Conchyl.,  XXVI,  p.  68,  1878. 

Anisomyon  ?  Dall,  Journ.  de  Conchyl.,  XXVII,  p.  287, 1879 ;  (?  Meek.  Am, 
Journ.  Sci.  &  Arts,  2,  XXIX,  p.  33,  pi.  1,  1860).  _ 

Gadinia  sp.  Jeflfreys,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1870,  p.  11. 

Williamia  Monterosato,  Nom.  Conch.  Medit.,  p.  150,  1884. 

Umbrella  sp.  Cossmann,  Cat.  Coq.  Fos.  env.  Paris,  IV,  p.  326,  1891. 

Parascutuju  Cossmann,  Cat.  Coq.  Fos.  env.  Paris,  V,  p.  78,  1892. 

Type  W.  Gussoni  (Costa)  of  the  Mediterranean  and  Azores; 
other  species  are  the  W.  Krebsii  Morch,  West  Indies,  W.  vernalis 
Dall,  Monterey,  Cala.,  W.  peltoides  Cpr.,  of  the  Gulf  of  California 
and  south  to  the  Galapagos. 

The  synonymy  of  this  interesting  little  genus  of  Sip ho7iariid(E  had 
become  so  complicated  that  it  seemed  best  to  take  this  opportunity 
of  clearing  it  up.  The  wide  distribution  of  the  species  is  partly  due 
to  their  habit  of  perching  on  floating  sea-weeds. 

12  Siphonaria  saitelltan  Deshayes,  was  referred  to  the  Galapagos  Islands  by 
Carpenter,  owing  to  a  confusion  between  its  true  locality,  Chatham  Island.  New 
Zealand,  with  the  Galapagos  Chatham  Island.  This  species  according  to 
Deshayes  is  identical  with  S.  obliquata  Sby.  described  sixteen  years  earlier  in 
the  Tankerville  Catalogue. 


454  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Williamia  peltoides  Carpenter. 

Nacella peltoides  Carpenter,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1864,  i,  p.  474,  No.  15; 
Suppl.  Kep.  Brit.  Assoc,  1863,  pp.  418,  545. 

Nacella  sttbspiralis  Carpenter,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.  Sci.,  iii,  p.  213,  1866  ;  Suppl. 
Rep.  Brit.  Assoc,  1863,  pp.  612,  640. 

Siphonaria  [Liriola)  peltoides  Dall,  Am.  Journ.  Conch.,  vi,  p.  37,  1870; 
Journ.  de  Conchyl.,  xxvi,  p.  68,  Jan.,  1878. 

Anisomyon peltoides  Dall,  Journ.  de  Conchyl.,  xxvii,  p.  288,  Oct.,  1879. 

A'acella  subspiralis  Wimmer,  Sitzb.  k.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Wieri,  Ixxx,  p.  41, 
1879. 

Siphonaria  (  Williamia')  peltoides  Stearns,  Proc  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xvi,  p- 
584,  1893. 

Chatham,  Charles  and  Hood  Islands,  dead  on  the  beach,  Dr. 
llabel ;  northward  to  Panama,  Mazatlan,  Cape  St.  Lucas,  San  Diego 
and  the  Santa  Barbara  Islands,  California.  The  variety  vernalis 
Dall,  which  will  require  to  be  specifically  separated  from  peltoides, 
extends  from  the  Santa  Barbara  Islands  northward  to  Monterey, 
Purissima,  Lobitas  and  Crescent  City,  California.  It  is  much  larger 
than  either  of  the  others. 

The  Nacella  subspiralis  and  peltoides  of  Carpenter  are  undoubt- 
edly conspecific  with  the  Galapagos  shell,  which  from  its  perching 
habit  on  fronds  of  Laminaria  may  be  widely  distributed  by  ocean 
-currents.  The  well  known  Ancylus  Gussoni  of  Costa  belonging  to 
the  South  European  fauna  is  congeneric,  and  from  the  shells  alone 
it  is  doubtful  if  the  species  could  be  separated.  The  W.  Krebsii  of 
Morch  is  extremely  similar,  and  it  is  possible  that  all  three  should 
be  specifically  united,  but  until  the  anatomy  has  been  compared  it 
is  probably  best  to  keep  them  distinct.  I  figured  the  dentition  and 
jaw  of  W.  vernalis  and  W.  Gussoni  in  the  Journal  de  Conchy liologie 
in  1878  and  1879,  showing  specific  differences  between  them,  but 
the  West  Indian  and  West  American  tropical  .forms  have  not  yet 
been  examined. 

M.  Cossmann  has  described  a  species,  W.  Raincourti,  from  the 
Eocene  of  Chaumout,  Paris  Basin,  which  differs  from  the  recent 
species  in  being  radially  striate  ;  this  seems  to  partially  bridge  the 
gaj)  between  the  latter  and  the  upper  Cretaceous  Anisomyon. 

Onchidium  Leslie!  Steams. 

Onihidiitm  Lesliei  Stearns,  Nautilus,  VI,  p.  87,  Dec,  1892;  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  No.  942,  p.  383,  pi.  51,  figs.  2,  3,  1893. 

Living  between  tide  marks  on  Charles  and  Albemarle  Islands,  U. 
S.  Fish  Commission. 

Dr.  Stearns'  description  is  as  follows : 

"  Form  rounded  ovate,  nearly  as  broad  as  long.  Dorsum  coria- 
ceous, nearly  black,  shiny,  closely  irregularly  reticulated  with  finely 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  455 

incised  lineation,  and  otherwise  characterized  by  somewhat  distant, 
flatly  rounded  papillae.  Under  side  dingy,  yellowish  white  ;  margin 
of  mantle  wide,  nearly  smooth  ;  edge  of  same  simple.  Anal  open- 
ing posterior  near  edge  of  mantle  and  somewhat  produced.  Respir- 
atory orifice  smaller,  in  median  line  with  and  in  front  of  anus ;  sex- 
ual orifice  anterior,  on  the  right  side  under  the  edge  of  the  large 
oral  hood  or  collar;  labial  palpi  thin,  largely  expanded.  Dimen- 
sions: Length  37.5  ;  breadth  31.5  millimeters.  These  proportions 
vary  slightly  in  different  individuals." 

Onohidella  Steindachneri  Semper. 

Onchidella  Steindachneri  Semper,  Arch.  Phil.  Bd.  Ill,  Heft.  VI,  p.  295, 
1883;  Stearns,  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  384,  pi.  51,  figs.  4,  5,  1893. 

Charles  Island,  Habel ;  Charles  and  Albemarle  Islands,  between 
tide-marks,  U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 

Dr.  Stearns'  remarks  are  as  follows  : 

"  A  well  marked  species ;  edge  of  mantle  prettily  fringed  on  the 
under  side  with  rather  regularly  placed  trifoliate  processes  ;  dorsum 
entirely  covered  with  closely  set,  rounded,  granular  papillse,  which 
also  cover  the  surface  of  the  wide  mantle  margin  beneath,  up  to  the 
«dge  of  the  creeping  disk.  Color  dark  grayish  or  smoky  black 
above  ;  dingy  whitish  on  the  under  side.  Anal  orifice  posterior, 
central  just  behind  the  end  of  the  creeping  disk?  Respiratory  ori- 
fice on  the  right  side  near  the  vent ;  sexual  orifice  anterior  near  the 
tentacle  or  oral  appendage,  under  the  edge  on  the  right  side.  Length 
about  20,  breadth  about  17  millimeters.  These  proportions  vary 
somewhat  in  different  specimens.  Some  allowance  must  be  made  for 
the  contraction  caused  by  the  alcohol  in  both  the  above  and  0. 
Lesliei. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

SowERBY,  George  Brettingham.  Conchological  Illustrations, 
Bulinus,  parts  31,  34, 35  and  142, 1833-41.  London,  G.  B.  Sowerbv, 
1841,8°. 

This  work  was  issued  in  parts  and  when  completed  the  letter 
press,  or  portions  of  it,  was  reprinted  and  the  whole  ic-sued  as  a  vol- 
ume dated  1841.  The  parts  in  the  copies  which  I  have  seen  do  not 
have  any  dates,  but  Pfeiffer  cites  the  list  of  Bulinus  as  1833  (Mon. 
Hel.  Viv.,  i,  p.  xxxii,  1848).  It  is  probable  that  part  142,  contain- 
ing B.  rugulosvs  was  issued  in  1839,  but  the  plates  containing  the 
other  Galapagos  species  may  be  as  early  as  1833. 

SowERBY,  George  Brettingham.  Descriptions  of  new  species 
of  shells  collected  by  Hugh  Cuming.  Proc.  Zool.  Society  of  Lon- 
don, 1833,  part  i,  pp.  72-74. 


456  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

This  article  contains  descriptions  of  several  species  of  Bulimulus 
afterward  figured  in  the  Conchological  Illustrations. 

Broderip,  William  John.  Description  of  new  species  of  shells 
collected  by  Hugh  Cuming.  Proc.  Zool.  Society  of  London,  1832, 
p.  125. 

Though  this  is  the  first  reference  to  Cuming's  Galapagos  land 
shells,  only  one  species,  B.  mix,  is  described  from  Charles  Island. 

Pfeiffer,  Dr.  Ludwig.  Description  of  thirty  new  species  of 
Helicea  belonging  to  the  collection  of  H.  Cuming,  Esq.  Proc.  Zool. 
Society  of  London,  1846,  pp.  28-29. 

This  article  describes  two  new  species  of  Bulimulus  collected  by 
Charles  Darwin  at  the  Galapagos  Islands. 

Darwin,  Charles.  Journal  of  Researches  into  the  Natural 
History  and  Geology  of  the  countries  visited  during  the  voyage  of 
H.  M.  S.  Beagle  round  the  world,  under  the  command  of  Captain 
Fitz  Roy,R.  N.  New  York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1882,  8°.  X,  519 
pp.  from  the  second  English  edition  of  1860.  See  Chapter  xvii,  pp. 
872-401,  and  especially  the  notes  on  mollusca,  pp.  390-91. 

This  celebrated  work  first  appeared  in  parts  1844-45,  and  was 
published  by  Murray.  The  "  Zoology  of  the  Beagle  "  edited  by 
Darwin,  contains  no  reference  to  the  mollusca  collected. 

Forbes,  Prof.  Edward.  On  the  species  of  mollusca  collected 
during  the  surveying  voyages  of  the  Herald  and  Pandora  by  Cap- 
tain Kellett,  R.  N.  C.  B.,  and  Lieutenant  Wood,  R.  N.  Proc.  Zool. 
Society  of  London,  1850,  pp.  53-56. 

In  this  article  the  Bidimulus  chevinifzioides  and  achatellinus 
Forbes,  upon  which  two  subgenera  have  subsequently  been  founded, 
are  described  and  other  species  collected  at  the  Galapagos  Islands  are 
enumerated  with  comments.  All  are  said  to  have  been  collected  on 
Chatham  Island. 

Albers,  Johann  Christian.  Die  Heliceen,  nach  naturlicher 
Verwandtschaft  systematisch  geordnet.  Berlin,  Enslin,  1850,  8°, 
262  pp. 

In  this  volume,  pp.  162-3,  the  Galapagos  Bulimuli  are  grouped 
together  under  the  name  of  Nossiotus.  In  the  second,  posthumous 
edition,  (Leipzig,  Englemann,  1860)  issued  under  the  supervision  and 
revision  of  von  Martens,  Nesiotes  is  substituted  for  the  earlier  name, 
and  two  of  the  species  set  off  into  new  sections  ;  for  chemnitzioides  the 
name  Pleuropyrgus  is  proposed,  and  Forbes'  achatellinus  is  removed  to 
Buliminus  (where  it  does  not  belong)  and  made  the  type  of  the  sub- 
genus Rhaphiellus,  following  Pfeiffer  (Vers,  einer  Anordnung  der 
Heliceen,  Malak.  Bliitt,  ii,  pp.  112-160,  1856). 

Reeve,  Lovell.  Conchologia  Iconica,  v,  Mon.  Bulimus,  1848- 
50.     London,  Reeve,  Ben  ham  &  Reeve,  1850,  4to. 

Most  of  the  species  described  at  that  time  from  the  Galapagos  are 
more  or  less  accurately  figured  in  this  work. 

Carpenter,  Dr.  Philip  Pearsall.  Report  on  the  present 
state  of  our  knowledge  with  regard  to  the  mollusca  of  the  west  coast 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  457 

of  North  America.  Rei^rt  of  the  British  Association  for  the  Ad- 
vancement of  Science  for  1856.  London,  Taylor  &  Francis,  1857, 
8°. 

The  mollusks  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  are  discussed  and  enum- 
erated pp.  358-62.     These  include  twenty  species  of  Pulmonates. 

Smith,  Edgar  A.  Account  of  the  Zoological  Collection  made 
during  the  visit  of  H.  M.  S.  Peterel  to  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Mol- 
lusca.     Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  London,  1877,  pp.  72-3. 

Three  of  the  already  known  species  are  enumerated,  and  Suecinea 
Bettli  Smith  with  its  variety  hrevior  are  described  as  new. 

Ancey,  C.  F.  Nouvelles  contributions  malacologiques,  vi; 
Etudes  sur  la  faune  malacologique  des  iles  Galapagos.  Bull.  Soc. 
Malac.  de  France,  iv,  pp.  293-299,  July,  1887. 

A  new  species  and  several  new  varieties  are  described  and  the 
fauna  briefly  discussed. 

WiMMER,  August.  Zur  Conchylien-Fauna  der  Galapagos  In- 
seln.  Sitzber.  der  k.  Akad.  der  Wissenschaften,  Wien  Bd.  Ixxx, 
pp.  1-50,  Dec,  1879. 

This  paper,  based  chiefly  on  the  shells  collected  by  Dr.  Habel, 
refers  to  two  species  of  Bulimulus  and  four  Auriculidce,  the  latter  all 
new  to  the  fauna. 

Dall,  William  Healey.  On  some  types  new  to  the  fauna  of 
the  Galapagos  Islands.     Nautilus,  Jan.,  1892,  Vol.  v,  pp.  97-99. 

In  this  short  article  the  presence  of  Pupa  is  announced,  and  Hel- 
ichia  {Idem)  nesiotica,  Lept'maria  chathamensis,  Zonites  {Hyalinia) 
Bauri  and  Bulimulus  (Pleuropyrgus)  Habeli  (Stearns,  MS.)  are 
described  from  collections  made  by  Drs.  Habel  and  Baur. 

Reibisch,  Paul.  Die  conchyliologische  Fauna  der  Galapagos 
Inseln.  Abh.  Ges.  Isis  in  Dresden,  iii,  pp.  1-20,  taf.  i-ii,  October, 
1892. 

This  paper  discusses  the  land  shells  of  the  group  and  is  chiefly 
based  upon  the  collections  of  Dr.  Wolf,  Government  geologist  of 
Ecuador,  though  referring  to  collections  made  by  others.  A  large 
number  of  forms  supposed  to  be  new  are  described  and  figured. 

Stearns,  Dr.  R.  E.  C.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by  the 
U.  S.  Fish  Commission  Steamer  Albatross,  No.  xxv.  Report  on  the 
mollusk  fauna  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  with  descriptions  of  new 
species.  Proceedings  of  the  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xv,  No.  942,  pp.  353- 
450,  pi.  50-52,  August,  1893. 

This  important  paper  discusses  the  mollusk  fauna  of  the  islands 
at  large,  both  land  and  marine  forms,  especially  those  of  shallow 
water  and  the  shores.  The  deeper  dredgings  from  the  last  expedi- 
tion are  not  included  and  will  be  worked  up  later.  References  to 
previous  lists  of  the  fauna  are  very  full  and  the  discussion  of  the 
land  shells  includes  sonae  suggestions  of  serious  importance. 

Dall,  William  Healey.  Preliminary  notice  of  new  species  of 
land  shells  from  the  Galapagos  Islands  collected  by  Dr.  G.  Baur. 
Nautilus,  September,  1893,  Vol.  vii,  pp.  52-56. 

30 


458  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

In  this  article  Bulimulus  (Ncesiotus)  duncanus,  B,  amastroides 
Ancey  var.  Anceyi,  B.  jacobl  var.  vermiculatus,  B.  olla,  B.  tortu- 
ganus,  B.  Bauri,  Hyalinia  chathamensis,  Conulus  galapaganus  and 
Succinea  corbis  are  described  as  new,  and  the  relationship  of  the 
Ncesioti  to  the  North  American  Bulimuli  of  the  type  of  serperastrus 
is  pointed  out. 

Dall,  William  He  ale  y.  New  species  of  land  shells  from  the 
Galapagos  Islands.     Nautilus,  March,  1895,  Vol.  viii,  pp.  126-7. 

Bidimulus  {Ncesiotus)  Reibischi  and  B.  Tannerl  are  described  as 
new. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 

Note. — Since  the  figures  are  of  different  degress  of  magnification, 
the  length  of  each  shell  in  millimeters  follows  the  reference  to  each 
figure. 

Plate  XV. 

Helicina  (Idesa)  nesiotlca  Dall,  base,  lat.  3.7  mm. ;  p.  451. 
Hellcina  (Idesa)  nesioticaDaU,  j^rofile;  p.  451. 
Vitrea  chathamensis  Dall,  base,  lat.  3  mm. ;  p.  448. 
Succinea  brevior  Smith,  alt.  12  mm. ;  p.  449. 
Succinea  corbis  Dall,  alt.  7.0  mm. ;  p.  450. 
Succinea  Bettii  Smith,  alt.  12  mm. ;  p.  448. 
Succinea  producta  Reibisch,  alt.  11.5  mm.  ;  p.  449. 
Trochomorpha f  Bauri  Dall,  alt.  1.5  mm.;  p.  447. 
Trochomorpha  f  Bauri  Dall,  base,  lat.  2.2  mm. ;  p.  447. 
Vitrea  chathamensis  Dall,  lat.  3  mm. ;  p.  448. 
Conulus  galajKiganus  Dall,  lat.  2.5  mm. ;  p.  448. 
Bulimulus  Bauri  Dall,  alt.  10  mm. ;  p.  441. 
Bulimulus  curtus  Reibisch,  alt.  9.6  mm. ;  p.  442. 
Bulimulus  canalijerus  Reibisch,  alt.  9.5  mm. ;  p.  442. 
Bulimulussp.  n.,  alt.  11.5  mm.,  from  photograph  ;  p.  444. 
Bulimulus  amastroides  Ancey,  alt.  10  mm. ;  p.  441. 

Plate  XVI. 

Bulimulus  nesioticus  Dall,  alt.  12  mm. ;  p.  443. 
Bulimulus  olla  Dall,  alt.  15  mm.;  p.  437. 
Bulimulus  planospira  Ancey,  alt.  19.25  mm. ;  p.  432. 
Bulimulus  Reibischi  Doll,  alt.  10.5  mm. ;  p.  444. 
Bulimulus  Tanneri  Dall,  alt.  11  mm.;  p.  438. 
Genitalia  o^  Bulimulus  nnx  var*  incrassatus  Pfr.  consider- 
bly  magnified ;  the  male  and  female   orifices    (IX,  X) 
open  into  a  single  vestibulum  and  are  separated  here  by 
an  accident  of  dissection  ;  I,  albumen  gland ;  II,  herma- 
phoditic  duct ;  III,  ovotestis  ;  IV,  oviduct  or  uterus  ;  V, 
prostate ;    VI,  retx'actor    penis ;    VII,  jDCnis  sac ;    VIII, 


Fig. 

1. 

Fig. 

2. 

Fig. 

3. 

Fig. 

4. 

Fig. 

5. 

Fig. 

6. 

Fig. 

7. 

Fig. 

8. 

Fig. 

9. 

Fig. 

10. 

Fig. 

11. 

Fig. 

12. 

Fig. 

13. 

Fig. 

14. 

Fig. 

15. 

Fig. 

16. 

Fig. 

1. 

Fig. 

2. 

Fig. 

o 
O. 

Fig. 

4. 

Fig. 

5. 

Fiff. 

6. 

1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  459 

vas  deferens;  IX,  male;  and  X,  female  orifice,  accidentally 
parted  ;  XI,  duct  of  spermatheca ;  XII,  spermatheca. 
From  a  drawing  by  W.  G.  Binney,  Esq.,  p.  429. 

Fig.     7.     Bulimulus duncanus  Dall,  alt.  17.5  mm.;  p.  438. 

Fig.  8.  Succinea  6rei>ior  Smith,  camera  lucida  outline  of  jaw,  con- 
siderably magnified  ;  p.  449. 

Fig.     9.     Leptinaria  chathamensis  Dall,  alt.  3.5  mm.;  p.  451. 

Fig.  10.  Succinea  producta  Reibisch,  outline  of  jaw,  magnified,  from 
camera  lucida  sketch  ;  p.  449. 

Fig.  11,  12,  13.  Bulimulus  Simrothi  Reibisch  (tortuganus  Dall) 
showing  variation  in  individuals  and  character  of  surface  ; 
alts,  respectively  12.25,  11.0  and  10.75  mm. ;  p.  440. 

Fig.  14.     Bulimulus  cinereus  Reibisch,  alt.  8.5  mm. ;  p.  437. 

Plate  XVII. 

Figures  all  drawn  from  camera  lucida  sketches. 

Fig.     1.     Jaw  of  Bulimulus  rugulosiis  Sby.,  much  magnified;  p. 

431. 
Fig.     2.     3 ?i^  oi  Bulimulus  Simrothi  J)di\\;  -p.  AAO. 
Fig.     3.     Teeth  of  Bulimulus  ventrosus  Reibisch,  central  and  inner 

lateral,  3a  two  exti'eme  outer  laterals  or  marginals ;  p. 

434. 
Fig.     4.     Rhachidian  and   innermost  lateral    teeth   of  Bulimulus 

chemnitzioides  Forbes  ;  4a,  three  of  the  outermost  laterals  ; 

p.  445. 
Fig.     5.     Rhachidian,  inner  lateral  and  5a,  two  outer  lateral  teeth 

of  Succinea  producta  Reibisch  ;  p.  449. 
Fig.     6.     Rhachidian  and  adjacent  laterals  and  6a,  one  of  the  outer- 
most laterals  of  Bulimulus  unifasciatus  Sby.;  p.  439. 
Fig.     7.     Rhachidian  tooth  and  adjacent  laterals  and  7a,  two  outer 

laterals  of  Bulimulus  Bauri  Dall ;  p.  441. 
Fig.     8.     Rhachidian  tooth,  adjacent  laterals  and  8a,  two  outer 

laterals  of  Bulimulus  citrtus  Reibisch  ;  p.  442. 
Fig.     9.     Rhachidian  tooth,  adjacent  lateral  and  9a,  two  more  mar- 
ginal laterals  oi Succinea  brevior  Smith;  p.  449. 
Fig.  10.     Rhachidian   and  two  adjacent  lateral  teeth  and  10a,  an 

outer  lateral  and  marginal  tooth  of  Bulimulus  nux  var. 

incrassatus  Pfr. ;  p.  429. 
Fig.  11.     Javf  of  Bulimulus  U7iifasciatus  Qhj.;  p.  439. 
Fig.  12.     Rhachidian  tooth,  laterals  of  one  side  and  part  of  the 

uncini  of  Helicina  nesiotica  Dall ;  p.  451. 
Fig.  13.     Jaw  of  Bulimulus  achatellinu.-<  Forbes  ]  p.  428. 
Fig.  14.     Pupa    Wolfii  Miller  (5a hH  Dall,  MS.)  alt.  2.5  mm.;  p. 

446. 
Fig.  15.     Jaw  of  Bulimulus  Bauri  Dall ;  p.  441. 
Fig.  16.     Single  tooth   of  Leptinaria   chathamensis  Dall,  from   a 

sketch  by  W.  G.  Binney,  much  magnified;  p.  451. 


460  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1896. 

August  4. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Twelve  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "  New  and  Interesting  Eocene  Mollusea  of  the 
Gulf  States,"  by  Gilbert  D.  Harris,  w^as  presented  for  publication. 


August  11. 
Mr.  Benjamin  Smith  Lyman,  in  the  Chair. 
Seven  persons  pi'esent. 


August  18. 
Mr.  Benjamin  Smith  Lyman,  in  the  Chair. 
Seven  persons  present. 


August  25. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Thirteen  persons  j^resent. 

Mr.  Thomas  Chalkley  Palmer  was  elected  a  member. 
The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed : — 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  461 


ON  THE  HEMIPENES   OF  THE  SATJRIA. 
BY   E.    D.    COPE. 

In  the  course  of  preparation  of  a  work  on  the  scaled  reptiles  of 
North  America  for  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  it  has  become  nec- 
essary to  examine  some  neglected  parts  of  the  anatomy.  This  I 
have  recently  done  for  the  hemi penes  of  the  Ophidia,  with  results 
of  considerable  importance  to  the  systematic  indications.^  In  the 
present  paper  I  give  the  results  of  a  similar  investigation  into  the 
corresponding  part  of  the  anatomy  of  the  lizards.  Very  little  at- 
tention has  been  given  to  the  subject  hitherto,  and  our  knowledge 
up  to  1856'  is  thus  summarized  by  Stannius:  "A  duplication  or 
bifurcation  of  each  organ  is  present  in  Lacerta  and  in  Platijdactylus 
guttatus.  The  copulatory  organs  of  the  Chamaeleonidte  are  distin- 
guished by  their  shortness.  In  various  Varanidae  which  have  been 
investigated  the  internal  cavity  (external  when  protruded)  has 
transverse  concentric  folds.  A  fissure  interrupts  these  folds  so  that 
they  are  not  complete  annuli.  The  extremity  is  acuminate  and  ex- 
pands at  the  base,  forming  a  kind  of  glans." 

In  1870^  J.  E.  Gray  describes  and  figures  this  organ  of  Vuramis 
heraldicus,  giving  the  best  illustration  that  I  know  of.  Besides 
these  references  I  know  of  nothing  later. 

As  was  to  have  been  anticipated,  I  have  found  these  organs  to 
correspond  with  the  rest  of  the  structure,  and  to  furnish  invaluable 
aids  to  the  determination  of  affinities  among  the  Sauria.  Reference 
to  them  cannot  be  omitted  henceforth  in  cases  where  the  other 
characters  render  the  question  of  affinity  uncertain. 

In  the  Sauria  the  male  intromittent  organ  or  hemipenis,  presents 
much  variety  of  structure,  showing  some  parallels  to  the  correspond- 
ing part  in  the  snakes.  It  is,  however,  rarely  spinous,  as  is  so  gen- 
erally the  case  in  the  Ophidia,  the  only  spinous  forms  being,  so  far 
as  I  have  examined,  the  American  Diploglossinge  and  genera  allied 
to  Cophias.      The  higher  Sauria  have  the  apical  parts  modified  as 

1  Transactions  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society,  1895,  p.  187. 

^  Zootomie  der  Amphibien,  p.  266. 

» Annals  Magaz.  ^^at.  History,  1870,  VII,  p.  283. 


462  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

in  the  Ophidia,  by  the  presence  of  calyculi.  Such  are  characteris- 
tic of  the  Rhiptoglossa  and  Pachyglossa.  The  Nyctisaura  possess 
the  same  feature.  The  Diploglossa,  Helodermatoidea  and  Theca- 
glossa  have  the  organ  flounced,  the  flounces  often  pocketed  or 
repand  on  the  margin.  In  the  Leptoglossa  we  have  laminae  only ; 
in  the  Tiid^  mostly  transverse,  and  in  the  Scincidae  mostly  longi- 
tudinal. In  various  genera  terminal  papillre  are  present.  The 
organ  may  be  simple  or  bifurcate  or  merely  bilobate.  I  have  not 
met  with  the  case  so  common  in  Ophidia,  where  the  sulcus  spermati- 
cus  is  bifurcate  and  the  organ  undivided. 

The  structures  of  the  hemipenis  have  a  constant  systematic  value. 
As  in  the  Ophidia,  the  value  differs  with  the  character,  but  it  varies 
from  generic  to  superfamily  in  rank. 

In  the  Chamaeleonidfie  the  greater  part  of  the  surface  of  the  hem- 
ipenis is  coarsely  calyculate,  generally  in  a  transvere  direction. 
There  are  remarkable  papillae  at  the  apex,  which  differ  in  the  differ- 
ent forms.  In  C.  2)ardalis  there  is  a  kind  of  membranous  apron 
proximad  of  the  papillse  which  presents  an  apex  proximad  opposite 
to  the  sulcus  spermaticus.  In  C.  vulgaris  and  C.  gracilis  the  papil- 
lae are  erect,  laminiform  and  transverse  and  serrate  on  the  edges. 
The  principal  pair  have  a  few  papillse  in  front  of  and  behind  them, 
and  in  C.  gracilis  there  is,  behind  these,  on  each  side,  an  oval  l)ody 
which  is  composed  of  three  serrate  laminse  packed  obliquely  together. 
In  C.  gracilis  the  proximal  lamiuse  are  low  and  have  a  margin  of 
acute  tubercles,  and  each  serves  as  a  collar  to  a  much  larger  papilla. 
The  latter  is  largely  free  and  tongue-shaped,  with  the  apex  proxi- 
mad, and  its  flat  external  surface  is  covered  with  three  or  four  rows 
of  conic  papillse. 

I  have  had  the  opportunity  of  examining  the  hemipenis  of  a 
relatively  small  number  of  species  of  the  Agamidae ;  the  surface  is 
generally  calyculate.  I  have  not  found  terminal  papillre  in  the 
genera  Uromastix,  Agama,  Liolepis,  Pkysignathus  or  Calotes.  The 
general  construction  is,  that  opposite  the  sulcus  spermaticus  is  a 
strong  longitudinal  welt.  Near  the  apex  this  welt  becomes  adher- 
ent to  the  side  on  which  the  sulcus  runs,  dividing  the  organ  into  two 
apical  portions.  The  sulcus  bifurcates  and  passes  along  the  base  of 
this  partition.  In  Liolepis  there  are  two  welts  enclosing  a  smooth 
space  between  them.  In  Calotes  cristatellus  there  is  a  lesser  welt  on 
each  side  of  the  principal  one.  In  all  the  genera  the  basal  part  is 
smooth,  and  it  is  sometimes  thrown  into  longitudinal  folds. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES' OF  PHILADELPHIA.  463 

I  have  examined  the  bemipenis  in  thirty  species  of  the  Iguanidse 
of  the  following  genera  :  Anolis,  Xiphocercus,  Polychrus,  Basiliscus, 
Ctenosaura,  Cyelwa,  Iguana,  Corythophanes,Sauromalus,  Crotaphy- 
tus,  Dipsosaurns,  Sceloporus,  Callisaurus,  Holhrookia,  Enyalioides, 
Doryphorus,  Microlophus,  Uraniscodon  and  Phryrwsoma.  These 
differ  in  the  bifurcation  of  the  organ,  varying  from  undivided 
(Cyclura,  Iguana)  to  deeply  bifurcate  (Anolis,  Doryphorus,  Micro- 
lophus, Uraniscodon).  Other  differences  are  seen  in  the  number  of 
welts  and  their  surface  structure,  and  the  distribution  and  size  of  the 
calyces.  Thus  the  calyces  extend  to  the  base  in  Anolis,  but  are 
confined  to  the  apex  in  Crotophytus.  They  exist  in  series  only  in 
Cyclura,  Iguana,  Ctenosaura,  Corythophanes  and  Sauromalus.  They 
cover  most  of  the  organ  in  Sceloporus  and  Phrynosoma.  The  syste- 
matic arrangement  of  the  genera  in  accordance  with  the  characters 
is  as  follows : 

I.  Calyces  always  present. 

A.  Three  welts,  one  opposite  the  sulcus  sperraaticus  and  one 
^         parallel  on  each  side  of  it  transversely  laminate :  Cteno- 
saura, Cyclura,  Iguana,  Corythophanes,  Sauroma- 
lus, Crotaphytus. 

B.  Three  welts ;  one  opposite  sulcus,  the  others  on  each  side 
of  sulcus  converging  to  median  welt,  and  enclosing  spaces 
with  it ;  surfaces  calyculate. 

a:  Median   welt  confluent  proximad  :  Dipsosaurus, 
Liocephalus,  Phrynosoma. 
a:    a  Median  welt  projecting  free  proximad :  Callisau- 
rus,   HOLBROOKIA. 

C.  No  median  welt ;  lateral  welt  from  sulcus  :  Sceloporus. 

D.  A  median,  no  lateral  welts ;  calyculate.    • 

cc  Not  bifurcate  ;  welt  wide  :  Enyalioides  (calyces 
coarse). 
cc    «   Bifurcate ;  welt  long  and  narrow :  Anolis  (caly- 
ces minute). 

E.  No  welts. 

cc  Deeply  bifurcate;  calyces  confined  to  branches: 
Microlophus,  Uraniscodon,  Doryphorus. 
s    a:  Shortly  bifurcate ;  calyces  extending  proximad  of 
branches :  Basiliscus. 

II.  No  calyces  or  welts. 

cc   Bifurcate ;   surface   coarsely  wrinkled :    Polych- 
rus. 


464  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

In  the  genera  Ctenosaura,  Cyclura,  Iguana,  Sauromalus  and 
Enyalioides  (latlceps)  the  organ  is  entire;  in  the  others  it  is  bilobate 
or  bifurcate. 

Of  the  Nyctisaura  I  have  examined  the  hemipenis  in  the  genera 
Thecadadylus,  Platydadylus,  Phyllodactylus  and  Gymnodadylus. 
In  these  this  organ  is  short  and  wide,  appropriately  to  the  fragility 
of  the  tail.  It  is  also  more  or  less  deeply  divided  into  two  branches. 
The  entire  surface  is  calyculate,  generally  minutely  so.  In  Thecadac- 
tylus  each  fork  has  three  strong  welts.  In  Platydadylus  there  is  a 
welt  opposite  the  sulcus  which  is  very  large  in  P.  aegyptiacus,  and 
divides,  sending  a  half  into  each  branch.  In  Gymnodadylus  pul- 
chellus  the  welts  are  not  so  heavy,  below  the  bifurcation  is  a  welt 
which  encloses  a  circular  area  which  is  incomplete  proximad.  In 
Euhlepharis  the  hemipenis  is  closely  similar  to  that  of  the  Gecconidre. 
It  is  short  and  deeply  bifurcate ;  it  has  a  single  prominent  welt. 
The  surface  of  this  is  smooth,  but  the  remainder  of  the  surface  is 
calyculate. 

Of  the  Zonuridse  I  have  only  seen  the  hemipenis  of  Z.  cordylus. 
It  is  short  and  swollen,  so  that  the  spiral  structure  is  accentuated  ; 
there  is  a  rigid  welt  opposite  the  sulcus,  which  leaves  a  triangular 
space  at  one  side  proximad,  which  is  finely  calyculate.  On  the  oppo- 
site side  of  the  welt  distad,  is  a  wide  space  with  radiating  laminae 
from  a  smooth  center.  The  presence  of  calyculi  noted  is  excep- 
tional in  the  Diplogossa,  and  indicates  approximation  to  the  Pachy- 
glossa  as  far  as  it  goes. 

In  the  Anguidie  the  hemipenis  presents  well  mai'ked  characters, 
which  distinguish  the  genera  and  perhaps  the  subfamilies.  In 
Celest'us  the  extremity  carries  an  osseous  spicule  of  relatively  large 
size.  Distad  of  the  flounces  are  more  (C.  stenurus)  or  less  (C 
hadius)  numerous  longitudinal  series  of  recurved  osseous  spines 
which  are  longer  near  the  sulcus  sperm aticus.  In  C.  stenuras  the 
flounces  are  apiculate  at  regular  intervals  ;  organ  undivided.  In 
the  Gerrhonotinse  the  flounces  are  cupped  and  continue  to  the  apex 
without  spines  ;  in  Barissia  and  Gerrhonotus  the  organ  is  bifurcate, 
in  Elgaria  simple.  In  Angtiisa.  welt  on  each  side  of  the  sulcus  has 
tubercular  cross-ridges,  and  the  remainder  of  the  surface  is  marked 
with  oblique  folds  with  tubercular  margins  forming  a  chevron 
which  is  directed  distad.  In  Pseudojms  apus  the  organ  is  not  sym- 
metrical. Opposite  the  sulcus  is  a  low,  broad,  smooth  welt,  and  on 
each  side  the  sulcus  is  margined  by  a  thin  welt  or  lip.      This  is 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  465 

coarsely  plicate  transversely,  the  plicae  extending  to  the  welt.  On 
the  other  side,  the  transverse  plicae  terminate  at  a  band  of  fine  lon- 
gitudinal folds.  In  Ophisaurus  the  organ  is  undivided,  and  there 
is  a  welt  with  one  edge  and  the  proximal  end  free.  It  is  covered 
with  robust  papillae. 

In  Xantusiidae  the  hemipenis  is  bifurcate  and  is  shortened  as  in 
many  Gecconidae,  appropriately  to  the  fragile  tail.  There  is  a  welt 
on  each  side  of  the  sulcus  spermaticus  which  follows  a  short  spiral 
direction.  Opposite  to  the  sulcus  are  two  short,  thick  welts,  which 
have  the  direction  of  parts  of  consecutive  threads  of  a  screw.  All 
of  the  welts  are  deeply  cross-folded. 

In  the  Tiid?e  two  types  may  be  observed  of  the  structure  of  the 
hemipenis,  but  I  have  not  had  access  to  sufficient  materia!  to  enable 
me  to  refer  all  the  genera  to  the  one  or  the  other.  In  the  typical 
members,  as  in  the  genera  Dracaena,  Tupmavibis,  Amiva  and  Cne- 
midophorus,  the  pattern  consists  of  numerous  delicate,  imbricate, 
transverse  laminae  which  are  closely  applied  to  each  other.  Oppo- 
site the  sulcus  all  the  genera  display  a  welt,  which  has  free  borders. 
These  are  entire  in  Dracaena  and  pectinate  in  Amiva  and  Cnemido- 
phorus ;  between  these  and  the  borders  of  the  sulcus  is  a  rounded 
welt  on  each  side.  The  laraince  are  sublongitudinal,  diverging  prox- 
imad  from  the  sulcus  ;  on  the  first  welt  they  turn  sharply  distad  ; 
between  this  and  the  welt  they  make  a  second  chevron  distad,  turn- 
ing proximad.  Proximad  of  the  median  welt  these  lamina  meet, 
forming  a  curve  or  chevron  turned  proximad.  In  Oiemidophorus 
there  is  one  less  chevron.  In  this  genus  and  Amiva  there  is  a 
strong,  fleshy  papilla  at  the  apex  of  each  tract  between  the  welt  and 
sulcus. 

A  modification  is  seen  in  Centropyx  (pelviceps).  Here  there  is  a 
narrow  welt  opposite  the  sulcus  ;  on  each  side  of  the  sulcus  a  prom- 
inent welt  diverges  from  it  proximad  and  approaches  the  proximal 
end  of  the  median  welt,  so  as  to  enclose  a  space  with  it.  It  is  trans- 
versely plicate  and  the  enclosed  space  on  each  side  the  median  welt 
has  the  delicate  transverse  lamination  characteristic  of  the  Tiidse. 
What  is  entirely  peculiar  is. the  presence  at  the  apex  of  each  of  the 
laminate  spaces  of  a  large  patch  of  acute  flexible  papillse. 

The  plan  is  the  same  in  Anadia  bogotensis,  but  the  details  are  dif- 
ferent. The  organ  is  bifurcate.  A  strong  welt  opposite  the  sulcus 
is  divided  into  fine  longitudinal  folds,  which  are  crimped  trans- 
versely.     The  space  between  this  and  the  sulcus  is  marked  with 


466  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

folds  which  diverge  distad  from  the  welt  and  become  longitudinal, 
and  are  transversely  crimped.  In  the  longitudinal  direction  of  the 
plicie  this  genus  differs  from  the  Tiidee,  and  it  is  likely  that 
Ecpleopus  and  other  allied  genera  are  similar. 

In  a  third  type  represented  by  Heteroclonium  bicolor*  a  welt 
bounds  the  sulcus  on  each  side.  The  space  between  these  is  marked 
by  a  few  feeble  cross  folds,  and  the  borders  support  a  single  series 
of  closely  placed  recurved  spines.  Genera  allied  to  Cophias  are 
likely  to  present  this  structure. 

Of  the  Lacertidae  I  have  examined  the  hemipenis  in  the  genera 
Lacerta,  Acanthodactylus  and  Latasiia.  They  are  bifurcate  and 
bilobate.  In  each  division  and  proximad  to  it  is  an  oval  area  with 
transverse  laminae  surrounded  by  a  welt.  In  Acanthodadyhis  one 
of  the  areas  is  marked  by  longitudinal  folds. 

Among  the  Gerrhosauridae,  the  hemipenis  of  Gerrhosaiirusnigro- 
lineatus  has  on  its  distad  third,  three  welts  opposite  the  sulcus,  the 
median  larger,  all  finely  cross  folded.  Between  one  of  these  and  the 
sulcus  is  a  tract  of  coarse  papillse  ;  between  the  other  and  the  sul- 
cus the  surface  is  smooth. 

Of  the  Scincidae  I  have  examined  the  hemipenis  in  Trachysaurus, 
Lepldothyris  (femandii),  Euprepu  (carinatus),  Eumeces  and  Ma- 
huia.  They  are  smooth  and  with  more  or  less  numerous  longitudinal 
folds,  excepting  in  Trachysaurus.  Here  the  laminae  diverge  from 
the  sulcus  proximad  and  turn  to  a  horizontal  direction,  meeting 
opposite  the  sulcus  in  a  chevron  directed  distad.  In  Eitprepis  cari- 
natus and  Eumeces  ohsoletus  some  of  the  plicaB  are  cross-ribbed.  In 
Lepidothyris  fernandii  the  organ  is  shortly  bifurcate,  and  each 
division  has  a  membranous  welt  next  the  adjacent  division. 

In  the  Anniellidae  the  genus  Anniellahas  the  entire  surface  from 
one  side  of  the  sulcus  to  the  other,  thrown  into  transverse  folds  or 

*  Heteroclonium  bicolor  gen.  et.  sp.  nov. 

C}uir.  gen.  Frontonasal  plates  separating  nasals  ;  prefrontals  and  frontoparie- 
tals absent ;  nostril  in  suture  between  nasal  and  first  labial  plate ;  no  interparie- 
tal. Limbs  rudimental,  two  pairs ;  digits  4-1,  the  anterior  clawed.  No  femoral 
pores.  Different  from  Sesqaipes  (type  Cop]tias  lieteropm  Licht.  Blgr. )  which 
has  the  digits  4-2 ;  and  Microdactylus  when  tliey  are  3-3.  Char,  specif.  Scales 
in  annuli  of  28  scales,  which  are  angular  at  the  extremities,  and  alternate  with 
those  of  the  adjacent  rows.  Labials  5-6 ;  temporals  2-2-2.  Three  large  pre- 
anal  plates,  longer  than  wide.  l"'ail  long  obtuse,  hind  legs  minute.  Anterior 
digits  short,  subequal.  Brown  above,  separated  abruptly  on  each  side  from 
the  darker  brown  of  the  sides  and  lower  surfaces.  Chin  and  throat  yellowish. 
Scales  of  upper  surface  each  with  a  bluish  spot.  Total  length  130  mm.,  length 
to  vent  78  mm.     Bogota  ;  Philadelphia  Museum  Coll.    Two  specimens. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  467 

flounces,  which  are  so  wrinkled  as  to  be  more  or  less  pocketed,  much 
as  in  Gerrhonotus  (Elgaria).     Organ  undivided. 

Of  the  Amphisbaenidae  the  only  species  of  which  I  have  obtained 
a  satisfactory  heniipenis  is  the  African  Monopeltls  galeatus  Hallow. 
The  organ  is  bifurcate;  each  branch  is  marked  with  fine,  close, 
transverse  folds,  while  the  region  proximad  of  these  has  coarser 
folds  directed  transversely  and  obliquely. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.   PHILA.   1896. 


PLATE  VI. 


\] 


\  X 


;^ 


RHOADS  ON  AMERICAN   POLAR   HARES. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.   PHILA.    1896. 


PLATE  VII. 


'■*»»#»«->*l8J^ 


RHOADS  ON   AMERICAN   POLAR   HARES. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.   1896. 


PLATE  VIII. 


t- 


JjRj^ai,  ii.,-iiii>iiH8#WM' 


RHOADS  ON   AMERICAN   POLAR   HARES. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.  189.6. 


PLATE  IX. 


RHOADS  ON    AMERICAN   POLAR  HARES. 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.   PHILA.    1896. 


PLATE  X. 


RHOADS  ON   AMERICAN    POLAR   HARES. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.  1896. 


PLATE  XI. 


PILSBRY   AND   VANATTA  ON   CERION. 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.   1896. 


PLATE    XII 


PILSBRY  AND   VANATTA:    ARIOLIMAX  AND  APHALLARION. 


PROC    ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.   189R. 


PLATE  Xni. 


PILSBRY   AND    VANATTA:    ARIOLIMAX  AND  APHALLARION 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.  1896. 


PLATE  XIV. 


PILSBRY   AND   VANATTA:    ARIOLIMAX   AND   APHALLARION. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.   1896. 


PLATE  XV. 


DALL.    INSULAR    LAND    SHELL    FAUNAS 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.  1896. 


PLATE   XVI. 


DALL.    INSULAR   LAND    SHELL    FAUNAS. 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.   PHI  LA.    1806. 


PLATE    XVII. 


DALL.     INSULAR    LAND    SHELL    FAUNAS. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  467 

flouuces,  which  are  so  wrinkled  as  to  be  more  or  less  pocketed,  much 
as  in  Gerrhonot'us  (Elgaria).     Organ  undivided. 

Of  the  Amphisbaeuidae  the  only  species  of  which  I  have  obtained 
a  satisfactory  hemipenis  is  the  African  Monopeltis  galeatus  Hallow. 
The  organ  is  bifurcate;  each  branch  is  marked  with  fine,  close, 
transverse  folds,  while  the  region  proximad  to  these  has  coarser 
folds  directed  transversely  and  obliquely. 


31 


468  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1896. 

September  1. 

Mr.  Charles  Morris,  in  the  Chair. 

Eleven  persons  present. 

The  deaths  of  Henry  C.  Ford,  August  17,  and  of  George  M. 
Conarroe,  August  25,  members,  were  announced. 


September  8. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Fifteen  persons  present. 


September  15. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Twelve  persons  present. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  publication  : — 
"  Fossil    Bones    of    Birds   and   Mammals    from    Grotto   Pietro 

Tamponi  and  Greve  St.  Alban."      By  R.  W.  Shufeldt,  M.  D. 
"  Contributions  to  the  Zoology  of  Tennessee.    No.  4.    Mollusks." 

By  Samuel  N.  Rhoads  and  Henry  A.  Pilsbry. 


September  22. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Fifteen  persons  present. 


September  29. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-three  persons  present. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  publication  : — 
"Mammals   collected  by  Dr.  A.   Donaldson  Smith   during   his 
Expedition  to  Lake  Rudolf,  Africa."     By  Samuel  N.  Rhoads. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  469 

"The  Hymenoptera  Collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith  in 
Northeast  Africa."     By  William  J.  Fox. 

The  following  were  elected  members  : — J.  Howard  Breed, 
Effingham  B.  Morris,  Curwin  Stoddart,  Jr.  and  Mrs.  F.  G.  Dixon. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed : — 


470  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 


NEW  AND  INTERESTING  EOCENE  MOLLUSCA  FROM  THE  GULF  STATES. 

BY    GILBERT    D.    HARRIS. 

The  following  new  or  interesting  fossils  belonging  to  the  Lea 
Memorial  Collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Phila- 
delphia have  been  put  into  ray  hands  for  description  and  illustra- 
tion by  Rev.  L.  T.  Chamberlain,  of  New  York  City.  The  greater 
part  of  them  were  collected  by  Mr.  Q.  W.  Johnson  during  the 
summers  of  1894  and  1895.  They  are  not  all  new  species ;  but 
many  are  in  such  an  excellent  state  of  preservation  that  it  has 
seemed  worth  while  to  have  them  figured  by  the  skilled  pen-artist, 
Dr.  J.  C.  McConnell,  of  Washington,  B.C. 

JACKSON   STAGE. 

Pecten  claibornensis  Con.     PI.  XVIII,  figs.  1  and  2. 

This  species  has  been  frequently  referred  to,  but  has  not  hereto- 
fore been  figured. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Leda  regina-jacksonis  n.  sp.     PI.  XVIII,  fig.  3. 

This  fine  species  is  the  Jackson  representative  of  L.  opidenta 
Con.  of  the  Claiborne  sand.     It  differs,  however,  from  that  species 

(a)  in  having  finer,  rounder  and  not  depressed  concentric  strise  ; 

(b)  in  having  directly  below  the  umbo  a  peculiar,  straight,  ventral 
margin  for  some  distance;  (c)  in  being  less  nasiite  posteriorly,  and 
(d)  in  having  the  concentric  lines  on  the  post-umbonal  slope  less 
strongly  marked  and  less  distinctly  interrupted  and  deflected  by  a 
radiating  depression. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Meretrix  pearlensis  n.  sp.    PI.  XVIII,  figs.  4  and  5. 

The  general  characters  of  the  species  are  shown  by  the  figures. 
The  concentric  striation  is  precisely  that  of  Meretrix  perovata  var. 
aldrichi  (Bull.  Am.  Pal.,  No.  1,  p.  48,  pi.  1,  fig.  1)  and  the  young  of 
these  two  forms  sometimes  approach  each  other  closely  in  outline, 
yet  there  is  always  noticeable  in  pearlensis  a  tendency  to  become 
elongate,  like  M.  Icevigata  of  the  Paris  Basin. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  471 

Instead  of  making  this  a  new  species,  we  might  speak  of  it  as  a 
marked  variety  of  aldricJii,  which  itself  is  a  variety  of  perovata  Con. 
It  seems  to  us,  however,  better  to  designate  it  by  a  new  name.  A 
variety  of  this  species  shows  concentric  liroe  over  its  entire  outer 
surface. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Tellina  eburneopsis  Con.    PI.  XVIII,  fig.  6. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 
Mactra  mississippiensis  Con.  var.     PI.  XVIII,  fig.  7. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. ' 
Periploma  sp.     PI.  XVIII,  fig.  8,  8a,  8b. 

Owing  to  the  descriptions  by  Lea  and  Meyer  of  two  fragmentary 
specimens  of  Periploma,  it  is  now  unsafe  to  propose  a  new  name  for 
this  specimen.  It  differs  considerably  from  either  Lea's  or  Meyer's 
figures  and  diagnoses,  but  Meyer  has  stated  (Ber.  iiber  die  Senck. 
Nat.  Ges.  in  Frank.  A.  M.,  1887,  p.  16)  that  his  P.  compHcata  occurs 
at  Jackson, 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Eucheilodon  creno-carinata  Heilp.     PI.  XVIII,  fig.  9.     Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Vol. 
3,  1880,  p.  150. 

Several  specimens  of  this  species,  of  a  moderate  size  and  rather 
imperfect,  are  among  the  Jackson  material  of  this  collection.  A 
specimen,  perhaps  the  adult  of  this  species,  is  shown  by  fig.  9,  pi. 
XVIII.  The  humeral  carina,  instead  of  being  simply  finely  crenu- 
late,  is  regularly  nodular ;  moreover,  there  are  thin,  strong,  revolv- 
ing ribs  on  the  part  of  the  whorl  below  the  carina.  It  is  quite 
possible  this  should  be  regarded  as  a  distinct  species,  yet  it  is  unsafe 
to  propose  a  new  name  until  more  material  is  at  hand. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 
Pleurotoma  (Ancistrosyrinx)  columbaria  Aid. 

Aldrich  described  this  species  (Geol.  Surv.  Ala.,  Bull.  1,  1886, 
p.  31,  pi.  6,  fig.  9)  from  a  fragment.  The  Lea  Memorial  Collection 
possesses  a  least  one  perfect  specimen.  Hence,  in  continuation  of 
Aldrich's  description  it  may  be  said  :  aperture  slightly  exceeding 
the  spire  in  length ;  from  the  dentate  carina  downward  on  the  body 
whorl  to  the  end  of  the  canal,  there  are  many  granular  spiral  lines; 
from  the  dentate  carina  toward  the  suture  above,  two  coarse  granu- 
lar spiral  lines  are  found  ;  inside  of  these  spirals  the  humeral  zone 
is  smooth,  save  faint  traces  of  deeply  curved  longitudinal  lines,  the 
retral  curvature  is  confined  to  this  smooth  zone. 


472  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Harpa  jacksonensis  n.  sp.     PI.  XVIII,  fig.  10. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figure;  volutions  8  ;  1  and  2  very  minute,  smooth;  3  much 
larger,  smooth  ;  4  somewhat  larger  than  3,  showing  vertical  costse 
in  its  first  half,  then  assuming  the  characteristic  markings  of  the 
remaining  whorls;  costse  on  the  body-whorl  nine  in  number,  some- 
what deflected  below  the  suture,  as  in  i)?'t//ia;  between  the  costse 
the  shell  is  finely  cancellated  with  a  net-work  of  raised  lines ;  ante- 
rior canal  slightly  larger  than  usual  for  the  genus. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Fusus  insectoides  n.  sp.    PI.  XVIII,  fig.  11. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  outline  as  figured  ; 
whorls  12  or  13 ;  apex  acute  ;  upper  whorls  broadly  costate  and 
with  strong  and  weak  alternating  spiral  lines;  5  spiral  lines  on  the 
shoulder,  decreasing  in  strength  toward  the  suture ;  sides  of  the 
whorls  with  two  or  three  strong,  raised  spiral  lines,  with  two  weaker 
ones  above  and  two  or  three  weaker  ones  below;  longitudinal  lines 
faint,  showing  only  between  the  coarse  spirals  ;  columella  twisted 
below;  labium  sharp  and  extending  some  distance  away  from  the 
columella ;  sutures  most  remarkably  constricted. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Fusus  mortoni  Lea,  var.  near  carexiw  Har.     PI.  XVIII,  fig.  12. 

We  have  already  called  attention  to  the  variation  that  this  species 
undergoes  (Proc.  A.  N.  S.  Phila.,  1895,  p.  72)  in  the  lower  Claiborne 
beds.  Now  we  have  it  from  Jackson  showing  a  moderately  large 
size  in  many  diflferent  forms.  The  specimen  figured  is  unusually 
smooth  ;  others  show  stronger  spiral  lines,  especially  below  the 
carina. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Latirus  leaensis  n.  sp.     PI.  XVIIT,  fig.  1.3. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figure  ;  whorls  11  ;  1  and  2  smooth  ;  3  rather  finely  costate,  re- 
maining spiral  whorls  with  eight  rather  low  costse,  considerably 
wider  than  the  interspaces,  and  arranged  so  that  those  on  each 
succeeding  larger  whorl  are  a  little  behind  those  of  the  preceding 
or  smaller  whorl,  and  hence,  although  in  line,  the  line  falls  back 
perhaps  i  revolution  from  apex  to  base ;  spiral  lines  on  each  whorl 
6,  large,  with  an  equal  number  of  intermediate  strise.  Body  whorl 
ornamented  by  8  costse  and  alternate  spiral  lines  to  the  end  of  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  •  473 

canal.     Aperture  contracted  above  and  below ;   columella  with  2 
fairly  well  defined  plaits. 
Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Mazzalina  inaurata  var.  Con.    PI.  XVIII,  fig.  14. 

This  is  very  near  to,  if  not  identical  with,  Conrad's  Mazzalina 
pyrula  from  the  lower  Claiborne  beds  of  Alabama.  We  have  already 
shown  in  our  report  on  the  Tertiary  of  Arkansas  how  many  forms 
this  species  assumes. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Murex  marksi  Harris.     PI.  XVIII,  fig.  15. 

This,  as  well  as  typical  marksi  from  the  Eocene  of  Arkansas,  ap- 
proaches very  closely  to  3f.  engonatus,  and,  when  specimens  enough 
shall  have  been  collected,  the  two  will  doubtless  be  proven  identical. 
This  has  seven  costse  instead  of  six. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 
Monoceras  jacksonium  n.  sp.    PI.  XVIII,  fig.  16. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figure  ;  whorls  about  6  ;  the  upper  2  or  8  smooth  ;  4  and  5 
strongly  costate  medially  and  below  ;  spiral  strise  about  8  in  num- 
ber; body  whorl  nearly  smooth,  with  a  strongly  marked  humeral 
zone  on  which  are  found  about  6  spiral  lines ;  medially  smooth  ; 
basaliy  more  or  less  strongly  spirally  striate,  with  a  depressed  band 
across  which  the  lines  of  growth  arch  forward,  hence  giving  rise  to 
a  tooth  like  projection  on  the  subcentral  portion  of  the  labrum  ; 
columella  smooth,  labrum  lirate  within,  though  the  lirse  do  not  ex- 
tend far  in  the  interior;  anterior  canal  peculiarly  truncated  below. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 
Levifusus  branneri  Harris.    PI.  XIX,  fig.  1. 

This  species  was  described  from  a  young  specimen  found  in  south- 
ern Arkansas.  Fragments  of  larger  specimens  were  found  by  the 
writer  at  White  Bluff  on  Arkansas  River,  and  still  others  in  the 
Jackson  beds  of  Mississippi.  This  is  by  far  the  most  perfect  large 
specimen  yet  known.  Its  close  relationship  to  Fulgur  must  be  evi- 
dent to  all. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Siphonalia  jacksonia  n.  sp.     PI.  XIX,  fig.  2. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figure;  whorls  7  or  8  ;  marked  by  10  rounded,  longitudinal 
costse,  each  in  width  a  little  over  one-half  that  of  the  intermediate 


474  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

spaces,  strong  from  lower  suture  to  greatest  diameter  of  shell,  and 
from  there  decreasing  rapidly  in  size  and  vanishing  before  reaching 
the  suture  above ;  strong  spiral  strise  about  S-  on  each  whorl,  with  an 
equal  number  of  finer  alternate  lines ;  columella  sharply  bent  as  in 
Strepsidura. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Amauropsis  jacksonensis  n.  sp.     PL  XIX,  fig.  3. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  shown  by  the 
figure  ;  whorls  10,  the  upper  4  to  5  small,  the  other  increasing  in 
size  rapidly  and  becoming  shouldered  ;  body  whorl  large,  shouldered  ; 
umbilicus  none  or  entirely  hidden  by  a  labial  callosity.  This  differs 
from  A.  perovata  Con.  by  its  greater  height,  the  well-defined  shoulder 
on  each  whorl,  and  the  absence  of  an  umbilicus. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Cypraea  pinguis  Con.     PI.  XIX,  figs.  4,  4a. 

The  specimen  herewith  figured  shows  a  few  spiral  whorls.    Gener- 
ally, however,  they  are  covered  over. 
Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

Cypraea  dalli  Aid.     PI.  XIX,  figs.  5a,  6a. 

This  was  originally  described  from  the  Red  Bluff  horizon  of  Mis- 
sissippi, yet  it  is  quite  abundant,  and  shows  many  varietal  forms 
at  Jackson,  Miss. 

Locality,  Jackson,  Miss. 

CLAIBORNE   STAGE. 

Papillina  staminea  Con.  var.     PI.  XX,  figs.  1,  2,  .3,  4. 

F7^sus  siaminetts  Con.,  Foss.  Shells  Tert.  Form.,  1833,  p,  43,  pi.  18,  fig. 
14,  of  2d  ed.,  1835. 

There  is  great  confusion  among  the  Claiborne  species  of  Fxmi8 
and  its  allies,  and  here  is  a  most  typical  example.  Papillina  stomi- 
?iea  is  quite  fulgurate  in  appearance,  having  a  row  of  compressed 
tubercles  on  the  carina  and  a  long  beak.  The  specimens  herewith 
figured  show  how  greatly  these  features  vary.  These  specimens 
have  some  parts  in  common  with  F.  irrasus  Cob.,  and  we  are  inclined 
to  think  all  will  prove  to  be  one  and  the  same  species.  The  apices 
of  this  and  related  species  are  smooth  and  blunt. 

Locality,  Claiborne,  Ala. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  475 

Fapillina  papillata  Con.     PI.  XX,  fig.  5. 

Fusus  papillatiis  Con.,  Foss.  Shells  Tert.  Form.,  1833,  p.  29 ;  p.  53,  pi  18, 
fig.  3,  of  2d  ed. 

This  large  and  beautiful  specimen  came  from  near  Jackson,  Ala., 
from  the  Claiborne  sand  horizon.  Conrad's  figure  of  the  species 
does  not  show  well  some  of  its  important  characters,  hence  it  is  re- 
drawn. Conrad  remarks  that  it  is  rare  at  Claiborne.  It  is  certainly 
so  in  a  perfect  state  of  preservation,  but  portions  of  its  huge  colum- 
ella are  quite  common  in  some  places. 

Locality,  Jacksou,  Ala. 

LIGNITIC   STAGE    (UPPER). 

Astarte  smithvillensis  var.  Har.     Pl.  XX,  fig.  6. 

A.  smithvillensis  Har.,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  1895,  p.  48,  pl.  1,  figs. 
8a,  9a,  b,  c 

This  species  is  extremely  variable,  and  we  have  little  doubt  but 

that  this  Wood's  Bluff  specimen  may  be  referred  to  it. 

Locality;  Wood's  Bluff,  Ala. 

Protocardia  virginianaT  Con.     Pl.  XX,  figs.  7  and  8. 

This  is  probably  a  variety  of  the  form  described  by  Conrad  as  P. 
lene  or  P.  virginiana ;  but  since  we  have  no  specimens  of  that  spe- 
cies, it  is  impossible  to  speak  with  certainty  on  the  subject.  Several 
species  of  this  genus  have  been  described  from  the  Eocene,  and  it 
will  be  a  serious  matter  to  properly  work  out  their  synonymy.  This 
form  differs  from  nieolletti  by  its  smaller  umbones  and  smaller  size. 

Locality,  Wood's  Bluff,  Ala. 

Pleurotoma  vaughani  var.     Pl.  XX,  flg.  9. 

P.  vaug/iafii  Har.,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1895,  p.  57,  pl.  4,  fig.  8. 

The  fine  large  specimens  in  the  Lea  Memorial  Collection  differ 
somewhat  from  typical  vaughani  as  found  in  the  lower  Claiborne 
beds  of  Texas.  The  latter  is  smaller,  less  strongly  costate,  with  lirse 
within  the  labrum.  The  upper  carinal  spiral  whorl  is  slightly 
higher  in  this  variety  than  in  the  type. 

Cancellaria  tortiplioa  Con.     PL  XX,  fig.  10. 

C.  iortipHca  Con.,  Am.  Jr.  Conch.,  1865,  p.  145,  pl.  21,  fig.  8. 

Conrad  cites  this  from  Te.xas,  but  the  Alabama  specimens  ap- 
proach the  outlines  of  his  fig.  8,  Pl,  21,  more  nearly  than  the  Texan 
forms  do.  Aldrich  refers  this  form  to  evulsa  Brander  (Bull.  Geol. 
Surv.  Ala.,  1886,  p.  52). 


476  PROCEEDINGS  OF. THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Cancellaria  silvaerupis  n.  sp.     PI.  XX,  fig.  11. 

Specific  characterization. — General  form  and  size  as  indicated  by 
the  figure  ;  whorls  about  6  ;  3  embryonic  smooth  ;  others  with  about 
8  strong  spiral  lines  between  the  suture  above  and  the  suture  below  ; 
incremental  lines  especially  prominent  between  the  strong  raised 
spirals  ;  labrura  sharp  at  edge  but  abruptly  thickening  and  varicose 
a  slight  distance  within  ;  columella  concave,  two  plaits  on  its  sub- 
central  portion  and  one  marginal  below. 

This  species  reminds  one  somewhat  of  C.  quadrata  of  England  and 
C.  ulmula  of  Texas. 

Locality,  Wood's  Bluff,  Ala. 

Murex  morulus  Con.     PI.  XX,  fig.  12. 

In  this  collection  there  are  specimens  of  various  sizes,  and  they 
show  one  marked  peculiarity.  When  small  and  young  the  anterior 
canal  is  long  but  curved  ;  afterwards  it  seems  to  grow  no  more  in 
length,  but  becomes  extremely  bent  or  twisted,  and  a  large  umbili- 
cus is  formed. 

Locality,  Wood's  Bluff,  Ala. 

Latirus  imbricatulus  n.  sp.     PI.  XXI,  fig.  2. 

Specific  characterization. — General  form  and  size  as  indicated  by 
the  figure;  whorls  10;  1-4  embryonic,  smooth;  the  remaining 
spiral  whorls  with  about  7  costre  crossed  by  about  6  very  strong  re- 
volving strise  between  which  there  are  an  equal  number  of  fine 
spirals.  Labrum  lirate  within  ;  columella  very  much  twisted  and 
showing  signs  of  plications,  especially  at  the  basal  angle.  Umbilicus 
not  large,  but  well  defined.  The  most  peculiar  feature  of  this  spe- 
cies is  the  imbricate  appearance  of  the  incremental  lines.  This 
strongly  reminds  one  of  some  of  the  Muricidse.  The  general  form  of 
the  species  is  much  like  Latirus  rugatus  Dall  from  the  Ballast 
Point  Silex  beds. 

Locality,  Wood's  Bluff. 

Pyropsis  perula  Aid.     PI.  XXI,  fig.  la. 

This  is  such  an  unusually  large  and  fine  specimen,  it  has  seemed 
worth  while  to  have  it  figured,  although  it  comes  from  the  typical 
locality. 

Sipho  ■?  erecta  AUl.     PI.  XXI,  fig.  .3. 

We  are  inclined  to  regard  this  beautiful,  though  imperfect,  speci- 
men as  an  adult  form  of  Aldrich's  S.  erecta.  The  punctate  appear- 
ance in  the  indented  spiral   lines  indicates  a  relationship  to  the 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  477 

Tectibranchs.     The  matter  can  only  be  decided  when  more  perfect 
material  is  at  hand. 

Locality,  Wood's  Bluff,  Ala. 

Cyprsea  smithi  Aid.     PI.  XXI,  fig.  4. 

This  is  broader  posteriorly  than  typical  smithi,  and  has  a  less  con- 
spicuous posterior  termination  of  the  labium,  yet  it  is  most  likely  of 
the  same  species.     It  seems  to  be  the  forerunner  of  C.  dalli  Aid. 

Locality,  Wood's  Bluff,  Ala. 

Solarium  huppertzi  var.  Har.     PI.  XXI,  fig.  5. 

The  markings  on  this  specimen  are  somewhat  finer  than  those  of 
typical  huppertzi,  but  this  may  be  only  a  varietal  feature.  Again, 
huppertzi  was  described  from  a  young,  small  specimen  ;  this  is  more 
nearly  full  grown. 

Solarium  sylvaerupis  n.  sp. 

Syn.  S.  texanum  Dall,  Tr.  Wag.  Free  Inst.  Sci.,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  326. 

After  examining  the  type  of  texanum  in  the  Academy's  collection, 
it  was  found  to  be  the  same  as  Conrad's  scrobiculatian.  Hence  the 
larger,  beautiful  form  described  by  Dall  under  the  name  "Texauwn 
Gabb  "  from  Wood's  Bluff,  must  have  another  name. 

Solariella  sylvaerupis  n.  sp.     PI.  XXI,  tig.  6, 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figures;  whorls  about  6,  with  about  5  strise  on  each;  slightly 
shouldered  at  the  suture,  bearing  there  a  row  of  beads  or  tubercle;-  ; 
nacreous  within;  umbilicus  crenate  at  the  periphery,  granularly 
striate  within. 

Locality,  Wood's  Bluff,  Ala. 

LIGNITIC   STAGE    (lOWER). 
Meretrix  mortoniopsis  var.  Hp.     Plate  XXII,  figs.  1  and  2. 

The  figures  represent  two  well-preserved  specimens  of  this  species 
from  the  lower  Lignitic.  It  seems  well  to  have  them  accurately 
figured,  since  their  relationship  to  the  species  of  this  genus  described 
by  Rogers  and  Conrad  from  Virginia  is  still  in  an  unsettled  state. 

Locality,  Bell's  Landing,  Ala. 

Tellina  lignitica  n.  sp.    PI.  XXII,  fig.  3a. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figures  ;  substance  of  shell  very  thin  ;  smooth  ;  2  cardinal  teeth 
in  each  valve  ;  a  furrow  in  the  upper  anterior  margin  of  the  left 
valve  causes  the  same  to  form  two  obscure  teeth. 

Locality,  Gregg's  Landing,  Ala. 


478  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Panopsea  porrectoides  var.  AM.     PI.  XXII,  fig.  4. 

By  comparing  our  figure  with  Aldrich's,  it  will  be  seen  that  typi- 
cal _/9o/TecioiV/e.'>'  is  much  larger,  more  developed  anteriorly,  and  with 
urabones  nearer  the  center  of  the  shell.  Yet  they  both  belong  to  the 
same  section  of  the  genus,  and  it  is  almost  certain  that  the  one  is 
the  ancestor  of  the  other. 

Locality,  Gregg's  Landing,  Ala. 

Lucina  greggi  n.  sp.     PI.  XXII,  figs.  6  and  6. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figure;  marked  exteriorly  with  concentric  lines  not  deeply  in- 
cised;  interior  with  two  diverging  cardinal  teeth  and  an  anterior 
lateral ;  anterior  muscular  scar  very  large  and  extending  from  the 
anterior  lateral  tooth  to  the  basal  margin  of  the  shell;  posterior 
muscular  scar  comparatively  small,  rotund  ;  interior  naturally  (or 
by  disease)  much  thickened  or  calloused,  a  shallow  channel  extend- 
ing from  a  little  above  the  upper  margin  of  the  posterior  muscular 
scar  obliquely  to  near  the  base  of  the  anterior  scar. 

A  small  specimen,  magnified  in  fig.  5,  and  probably  of  this  spe- 
cies, shows  an  extremely  deeply  excavated  ligament  pit,  reminding 
one  of  Lucina  elaytonia.  In  the  old  type  specimen  this  pit  broadens 
out  and  the  ligament  seems  to  be  attached  very  much  as  in  Dodnia. 

Locality,  Gregg's  Landing,  Ala. 

Pleurotoma  nasuta  Whitf.     Plate  XXII,  fig.  7. 

This  species  is  extremely  variable  in  ornamentation.  Sometimes 
the  spiral  lines  are  few  and  coarse;  at  other  times  they  are  many 
and  fine.     Our  figure  shows  a  specimen  of  the  latter  type. 

Locality,  Gregg's  Landing,  Ala. 

Fusus  rugatus  Aid.     PI.  XXII,  fig.  S. 

The  specimen  figured  is  more  perfect  than  the  type  ;  it  shows  well 
the  characters  of  the  anterior  canal,  especially  its  ornamentation. 

Locality,  Gregg's  Landing,  Ala. 

Pseudoliva  vetusta.     PI.  XXII,  fig.  9. 

P.  vehista  Con.  Foss.  Sh.  Tert.  Form.,  1833,  p.  44. 

The  large  size  to  which  certain  species  described  originally  from 
Claiborne  often  attain  in  the  Bell's  Landing  Lignitic  has  already 
been  the  subject  of  various  observations.  Perhaps  no  species  shows 
to  better  advantage  this  tendency  than  does  the  present.  Note  the 
great  sutural  callosity  in  connection  with  like  developments  on 
Volatilithes  petrosus  and  Rostellaria  trinodifera. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  479 

Cassidaria  brevidentata  Aid.  var.     PI.  XXII,  fig.  10. 

This  specimen  shows  an  unusually  large  number  of  nodules  on 
the  luimeral  carina.  In  front,  the  two  lower  carinse  are  without 
nodules,  while  on  the  back  all  three  carinse  are  strongly  nodular. 

Locality,  Bell's  Landing,  Ala. 

Levifusus  trabeatus  Con.     PI.  XXII,  fig.  11: 

Here  is  one  of  the  largest  and  the  most  compact  varieties  of  this 
species.  The  labral  lirse  are  unusually  well  marked;  the  carinal 
nodules  are  very  large  but  imperfectly  defined. 

Locality,  Bell's  Landing,  Ala. 

Triton  (Ranularia)  eocenensis  Aid.     PI.  XXIII,  fig.  1. 

Upon  the  whole,  this  is  the  most  perfect  specimen  of  this  species 
yet  found.  Its  apex  is  somewhat  eroded  and  might  be  represented 
a  little  more  acute.  Strangely  enough,  it  does  not  show  varices  on 
the  whorls  as  is  usual  in  specimens  of  this  species. 

Locality,  Gregg's  Landing,  Ala. 

Caricella  podagrina  Dall.    PI.  XXIII,  fig.  2. 

The  specimen  herewith  figui'ed  is  so  exceptionally  fine  that  it  has 
seemed  worth  while  to  have  it  thus  specially  noticed  in  our  paleon- 
tological  literature. 

From  the  type  locality,  Bell's  Landing,  Ala. 

Fusus  bellanus  n.  sp.     PI.  XXIII,  fig.  .3. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  of  the  shell  as 
indicated  by  the  figure  ;  whorls  8  or  9  ;  embryonic  3  smooth  ;  others 
marked  by  from  8  to  10  sharp,  flattened  peripheral  spines,  at  whose 
base  or  immediately  at  the  suture  a  subordinate  series  of  spines  oc- 
cur on  the  larger  whorls;  canal  nearly  closed,  long,  straight ;  labial 
callus  thin. 

At  first  sight  this  seemed  like  a  large,  well-formed  F.  mohri,  but 
on  comparing  details  it  was  found  to  be  very  distinct. 

Locality,  Bell's  Lauding,  Ala. 

Cyllene  bellana  n.  sp.     PI.  XXIII,  fig.  4. 

Specific  characterization. — Size  and  general  form  as  indicated  by 
the  figure;  whorls  about  8;  embryonic  3  small,  smooth,  others 
finely  costate  and  with  fine  revolving  lines  ;  cost!?e  strongest  on  the 
central  portion  of  the  whorls  (t.  e.,  on  the  shoulder)  vanishing  above, 
reaching  the  suture  below  ;  columella  twisted,  Strepsidura-\WQ  below  ; 
labrum  lirate   within ;    exterior  of  body  whorl  with  extremely  fine 


480  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

revolving  lines  on  its  central  portion,  and  with  coarser  lines  above 
the  carina  and  near  the  base. 
Locality,  Bell's  Landing,  Ala. 

Solarium  greggi  n.  sp.     PL  XXIII,  fig.  5,  5a. 

Whorls  about  5.  Nuclear  whorls  rounded  smooth  ;  remaining 
whorls  with  three  crenulate  spiral  lines  and  one  smooth,  strong 
spiral  line  just  above  the  suture.  Periphery  above  the  body  whorl 
with  one  deeply  incised  spiral  line,  thus  rendering  the  periphery  of 
the  body  whorl  obtuse.  Umbilicus  small,  with  radii  extending  from 
its  periphery  about  i  way  across  the  body-whorl,  and  having  a 
raised  spiral  coarsely  crenulate  carina  medially  located. 

Locality,  Gregg's  Landing,  Ala. 

MIDWAY  STAGE. 
Pleurotoma  (Cithara  ?)  leania  Harris.    PI.  XXIII,  fig.  7. 

This  species  is  rather  remarkal)le  for  the  extreme  shallowness  of 
the  retral  sinus.  It  seems  never  to  attain  a  much  greater  size  than 
that  indicated  by  the  figure  (X  2i). 

Type,  Lea  Memorial  Collection,  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia. 

Locality,  Matthew's  Landing,  Ala, 

Pleurotoma  (Surcula)  ostrarupis  Harris.     Plate  XXIII,  fig.  8. 

This  species  was  described  from  a  peculiar  looking  fragment  from 
the  Midway  beds  on  Brazos  River,  Texas.  It  proves  to  be  quite 
common  in  the  upper  Midway  of  Alabama. 

Locality,  Matthew's  Landing,  Ala. 

Natica  mediavia  T  Harris.     PI.  XXIII,  fig.  8. 

N.  mediavia  Har.,  Bull.  Am.  Pal.,  No.  4,  1896,  p.  117,  pi.  12,  fig.  15. 

While  working  over  a  large  amount  of  material  from  the  upper- 
most Midway  limestone,  as  exposed  on  the  Chattahoochee,  several 
fragments  of  N.  mediavia  were  found  of  the  size  indicated  by  the  fig- 
ure of  the  type  in  Bulletin  4.  It  was  soon  found  that  fragments,  too, 
indicated  a  considerably  larger  size  for  some  specimens  as  found  H 
miles  northeast  of  Clayton.  Fragments  of  the  body  whorl  of  what 
would  seem  to  be  the  same  species  occur  at  Matthew's  Landing. 
They  certainly  belong  to  the  species  herewith  figured.  Hence  it  is 
quite  probable  that  this  larger  specimen,  much  compressed  vertically, 
belongs  to  the  same  species  as  the  smaller  specimen  figured  in  Bul- 
letin No.  4. 

Locality,  Matthew's  Landing,  Ala. 


1896,]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  481 

Explanation  of  Plates. 

Plate  XVIII. 

Figs.    1  and  2.  Pecten  claibornensis  Con. 

Fig.     3.  Leda  reg Ina-jacksonis  n.  sp. 

Fig.     4  and  5.  3Ieretrix  pearlensis  n.  sp. 

Fig.     6.   Tellina  eburneojisis  Con. 

Fig.     7.  Mactra  mississipjnensis  Con. 

Figs.   8a.  Periploma  sp. 

Fig.     8b.  Periploma,  hinge  magnified. 

Fig.     9.  Eucheilodon  creno-carinata  Heilpr. 

Fig.  10.  Harpa  jacksouensis  n.  s\). 

Fig.  11.  Fusus  insectoides  n.  sp. 

Fig.  12.  Fusus  mortoni  Lea  var.  near  earexus  Har. 

Fig.  13.  Latirus  leaensis  n.  sp. 

Fig.  14.  Mazzalina  inaurata  var.  Con. 

Fig.  15.  Murex  marksi  Harris. 

Fig.  16.  Monoeeras  jachsonlum  n.  sp. 

Plate  XIX. 

Fig.  1.  Levifusus  branneri  Harris  X  |. 
Fig.  2.  Slphonalia  jacksonia  n.  sp. 
Fig.  3.  Amauropsis  jacksoiiensis  n.  sp. 
Fig.  4  and  4a.   Cyprcea  pinguis  Con. 
Fig.  5,  5a,  6,  6a.   Cyprcea  dalli  Aldr. 

Plate  XX. 

Figs.    1,  2,  3  and  4.  Papillina  staminea  Con.  var. 

Fig.     5.  Papillina  papillata  Con. 

Fig.     6.  Astarte  smithvillensis  Har.  X  |- 

Figs.    7   and  8.  Protocardia  virginiana  f  Con.  X  I- 

Fig.     9.  Pleurotoma  vaxighani  Har. 

Fig.  10.   Cancellaria  tortipliea  Con.  X  3. 

Fig.  11.   Cancellaria  sylvcerupis  n.  sp. 

Fig.  12.  Murex  morulus  Con. 

Plate  XXI. 

Figs.  1  and  la.  Pyropsis  perula  Aid. 

Fig.  2.  Latirus  imbricatulus  n.  sp. 

Fig.  3.  Sipho  erecta  Aid. 

Fig.  4.   Cyprcea  smithi  Aid. 

Fig.  5.  Solarium  huppertzi  var.  Har.  X  2. 

Fig.  6.  Solariella  sylvcerupis  n.  sp. 


482  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Plate  XXII. 

Figs.    1  and  2.  Meretrix  nuttalUopsis  Heilpr. 

Fig.     3.  Tellina  greggi  u.  sp. 

Fig.     4.  Panopoea  porredoides  var.  Aid. 

Figs.    5  and  6.  Lncina  greggi  n.  sp. 

Fig.     7.  Pleurotoma  nasuta  Wliitf. 

Fig.     8.  Fasus  rugatus  Aid. 

Fig.     9.  Pseudoliva  vetasta  Con. 

Fig.  10.   Cassidaria  brevldentata  Aid.  X  |> 

Fig.  11.  Levlfusus  trabeatus  Con. 

Plate  XXIII. 

Fig.  1.   Triton  {Ranularia)  eoceneiisis  AU. 

Fig.  2.    Carieella  podagrina  T)siU. 

Fig.  3.  Fusus  bellanus  n.  sp. 

Fig.  4.   Cyllene  bellana  u.  sp.  X  2. 

Figs.  5,  5a.  Solarium  greggi  n.  sp.  XV. 

Fig.  6.  Pleurotoma  (Sarcula)  ostrarupis  Har.  X  2, 

Fig.  7.  Pleurotoma  (Cithara)  leania  Har.  X  f. 

Fisf.  8.  Natica  mediavia  ?  Har. 


1896,]  natural  sciences  of  philadelphia.  483 

October  6, 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D,,  in  the  Chair. 

Forty  persons  present. 

The  Committee  on  the  Hayden  Memorial  Award  reported  in 
favor  of  conferring  the  recognition  for  1896  on  Professor  Giovanni 
Capellini  of  Bologna. 

Giovanni  Capellini  was  born  in  Spezia,  August  23,  1833.  He 
studied  in  the  college  of  his  native  city  and  in  the  University  of 
Pisa.  While  yet  a  student  he  had  made  important  paleontological 
discoveries  and  was  in  correspondence  with  illustrious  scientists, 
both  Italian  and  foreign. 

After  obtaining  his  degree  in  science  he  made  frequent  trips  in 
France,  England,  Switzerland,  Belgium  and  Germany.  In  Sep- 
tember, 1859,  he  was  appointed  Professor  of  Natural  History  in  the 
National  College  of  Genoa. 

In  September  of  the  following  year  he  was  made  Professor  of 
Geology  and  Paleontology  in  the  University  of  Bologna. 

In  1863  he  visited  North  America.  The  rich  collections  then 
made  by  him  in  Nebraska  and  elsewhere  are  now  in  the  Geological 
Institute  of  Bologna.  In  1864  he  made  interesting  scientific  discov- 
eries in  the  petroleum  lands  of  Wallachia. 

As  President  of  the  Second  Extraordinary  Reunion  of  the  Italian 
Naturalists  in  Spezia  in  1865,  he  founded  the  International  Congress 
of  Anthropology  and  Prehistoric  Archeology. 

In  1872  he  travelled  in  Greece,  and  in  the  autumn  took  an  im- 
portant part  in  the  International  Anthropological  Congresses  in 
Brussels.  He  then  travelled  in  Switzerland,  Holland,  Austria, 
Hungary,  Germany,  Spain  and  Portugal,  and  returned  through 
France  and  England. 

He  was  made  Vice-President  of  the  First  International  Geologi- 
cal Congress  in  Paris  in  1878,  and  obtained  its  assent  that  the 
second  meeting  should  take  place  in  Bologna  in  1881.  Elected 
actual  President  (in  conjunction  with  Quintino  Sella  as  honorary 
President)  of  this  Congress,  he  inaugurated  the  commission  for  the 
unification  of  geological  nomenclature  and  a  commission  for  the 
production  of  a  geological  map  of  Europe,  outlined  at  Berlin.  To- 
gether with  Sella,  he  founded,  on  that  occasion,  the  Italian  Geologi- 
32 


484  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

cal  Society.  In  1885  he  directed,  in  great  part,  the  Third  Inter- 
national Geological  Congress  in  Berlin,  and  contributed  not  a  little 
to  its  success,  as  also  to  that  of  the  Fourth  Session  in  London  in 
1888. 

He  had  now  published  140  scientific  communications. 

Having  served  as  Rector  of  the  University  of  Bologna  at  intervals 
from  1874  to  1888,  in  the  latter  year  he  organized  and  directed  a 
celebration  of  its  Eighth  Century,  for  which  he  received  letters  of 
congratulation  from  all  the  universities  of  the  world.  He  has 
been  decorated  by  the  Emperor  of  Germany  and  other  sovereigns. 
The  University  of  Edinburgh  conferred  upon  him  through  its  Rector 
the  diploma  of  Doctor  "  Honoris  Causa."  The  University  of 
Moscow  nominated  him  honorary  Professor.  Seventy  of  the 
principal  academies  of  Europe  and  America  have  registered  his 
name  among  their  members.  He  was  elected  a  Correspondent  of 
the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  in  1863. 

He  is  President  of  the  International  Commission  for  the  Unifica- 
tion of  Geological  Nomenclature  and  President  of  the  Royal  Geo- 
logical Survey  of  Italy. 

Mica  Schists  of  the  Schuylkill  River. — Theodore  D.  Rand  pre- 
sented specimens  of  mica  schist  from  the  river  road  near  Strawberry 
Mansion,  Fairmount  Park.  The  nodules  resemble  very  imperfect 
andalusite  crystals,  but  appear  to  be  almost  wholly  quartz  with  a 
little  kyanite  or  sillimanite,  resembling  closely  those  described  by 
the  late  Dr.  George  H.  Williams,  in  the  Fifteenth  Annual  Report  of 
the  United  States  Geological  Survey,  p.  665,  as  occurring  on  Sligo 
Branch  (probably  Fairfax  Co.,  Va.)  and  as  suggesting  contact 
metamorphism  of  included  fragments. 


October  13. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Twenty-three  persons  present. 

The  deaths  were  announced  of  Alexander  H.  Green,  August  19, 
1896,  and  Josiah  Dwight  AVhitney,  August  19, 1896,  Correspondents. 


October  20. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-seven  persons  present. 


1896,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  485 

The  Occurrence  of  Macaciis  leoninus  (Blyth)  in  Eastern  Bur- 
mah. — Arthur  Erwin  Brown  stated  that  a  young  male  moukey 
nearly  allied  to  Maeacus  nemestrinus  was  purchased  by  the  Zoologi- 
cal Society  of  Philadelphia  iu  April,  1894,  from  a  person  who  had 
procured  it  at  Mongnai,  in  the  southern  Shan  states,  Upper  Burmah. 
At  the  time  this  animal  was  received,  certain  peculiarities  led  him  to 
refer  it  provisionally  to  M.  leoyiimis  (Blyth),  but  it  is  only  lately 
that  he  had  fully  determined  this  identification  to  be  correct.  It  has 
now  lived  in  the  garden  two  years  and  a  half  and  he  would  suppose 
it  to  be  about  four  years  old,  but  it  has  not  yet  assumed  the  full 
colors  of  the  male  of  this  species  as  shown  in  Mr.  Sclater's  plate' 
the  resemblance  between  it  and  the  female  being  still  close.  The 
general  color  is  pale  brown,  resulting  from  the  yellow  and  brown 
annulation  of  the  hairs  ;  the  sides  of  the  body  and  outside  of  the  limbs 
are  rather  paler  and  somewhat  grayish  ;  the  horse-shoe  mark  on  top 
of  the  head  is  well  defined  in  a  darker  shade  of  brown  which  shows 
also  along  the  back  and  upper  side  of  the  tail  and  slightly  appears 
on  the  back  of  the  hands  and  feet.  The  characteristic  red  line  in 
the  bare  skin  from  the  outer  corner  of  the  eye  is  well  marked,  and 
it  is  interesting  to  observe  that  it  becomes  much  brighter  in  color 
when  the  animal  is  excited  than  at  other  times.  It  is  doubtful  if 
this  mark  would  be  at  all  evident  in  skins.  The  specimen  is  now 
about  twenty  inches  in  length  from  nose  to  base  of  tail ;  the  tail 
being  about  six  and  a  half  and  without  a  tuft. 

As  compared  with  nemestrinus  of  like  age  leoninus  has  the  muz- 
zle shorter,  the  superciliary  ridges  more  prominent,  the  ischial  callos- 
ities smaller,  the  hair  about  the  cheeks,  neck  and  shoulders  much 
longer,  the  spreading  whiskers  being  conspicuous  when  looked  at 
from  in  front,  the  face  and  ears  are  paler  and  the  iris  is  distinctly 
hazel  brown,  while  in  nemestrinus  it  is  of  a  paler  yellowish-brown. 

It  would  appear  that  M.  leoninushas  heretofore  been  only  known 
to  occur  in  the  Province  of  Arracan,  in  Western  Burmah,  on  the 
Bay  of  Bengal,  and  from  a  few  localities  in  the  Valley  of  the  Irra- 
waddy,  the  present  specimen,  therefore,  extends  the  range  of  the 
species  eastward  across  Upper  Burmah  to  the  borders  of  Yunnan. 
Dr.  Griggs,  from  whom  the  specimen  was  procured,  fully  assured 
the  speaker  as  to  the  locality. 

The  characters  of  this  monkey  are  very  distinct  and  at  its  present 
age,  when  placed  side  by  side  with  specimens  of  the  southern  form 
of  pig-tailed  monkey,  M.  nemestrinus,  there  is  no  possibility  of  con- 
fusing them. 

October  27. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Thirty-one  persons  present. 

1  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  of  London,  1870,  pi.  XXXV. 


486  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Papers  under  the  following  titles  were  presented  for  publication  : — 

"New  Species  of  Fresh- water  Mollusks  from  South  America," 
by  Henry  A.  Pilsbry. 

"  Geology  of  the  Mussel-bearing  Clays  of  Fish  House,  N,  J.," 
by  Henry  A.  Pilsbry. 

The  death  of  Baron  Ferdinand  Von  Mueller,  a  Correspondent, 
October  9,  1896,  was  announced. 

The  following  were  elected  members : — 

Henry  A.  Laessle,  George  C.  Harlan,  M.  D.,  William  M. 
Singerly  and  Henry  Beates,  Jr.,  M.  D. 

Prof,  W.  C.  Roentgen  of  Wiirzburg,  was  elected  a  Correspondent. 

The  following  were  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  487 


CONTRIBUTIONS  TO  THE  ZOOLOGY  OF  TENNESSEE. 
No.  4,  MOLLUSKS. 

BY  HENRY  A.  PILSBRY  AND  SAMUEL  N.  RHOADS.^ 

The  following  paper  concludes  the  annotated  lists  of  the  animals 
of  Tennessee,  collected  and  observed  by  Mr.  Rhoads,  which  have 
appeared  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of 
Philadelphia,  beginning  with  page  376,  in  the  volume  for  1895. 
The  reader  is  referred  to  this  article  for  an  itinerary  of  the  journey 
through  Tennessee,  during  which  the  collection  of  mollusks  here 
enumerated  was  secured. 

The  list  is  restricted  exclusively  to  the  collection  made  by  Mr. 
Rhoads  in  May  and  June,  1895,  no  attempt  being  made,  as  in  pre- 
vious papers  of  this  series,  to  complete  the  list. 

The  literature  of  Tennessee  mollusks  is  extensive,  nearly  all  gen- 
eral works  on  the  North  American  land  and  fresh  water  forms  con- 
taining descriptions  of  or  references  to  species  from  the  state. 
There  are,  however,  but  few  special  papers  on  shells  of  this  area. 
Dr.  James  Lewis  published  in  the  American  Journal  of  Conchol- 
ogy,  VI,  1870,  p.  188-191,  "  Notes  on  the  Land  Shells  of  East  Ten- 
nessee," based  on  specimens  collected  by  Miss  Annie  E.  Law. 
Pases  216-226  contain  an  article  "  On  the  Shells  of  the  Holston 
River,"  by  the  same  author,  likewise  from  Miss  Law's  collection. 
Tryon,  in  Amer.  Jour.  Conch.,  VII,  p.  86,  reviews  Dr.  Lewis'  notes 
on  Holston  River  Strepomatid(e.  A  third  paper  by  Lewis,  "  Shells 
of  Tennessee  (No.  2),"  collected  by  Miss  Law,  appears  in  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  for  1872, 
pp.  108-115.  A  number  of  other  papers  by  Dr.  Lewis,  in  the  same 
Proceedings,  and  by  Prof.  A.  G.  Wetherby,  in  the  Journal  of  the 
Cincinnati  Society  of  Natural  History,  deal  mainly  with  Tennessee 
mollusks. 

In  species  of  Unionidce,  Tennessee  is  wonderfully  rich.  The 
western  part  of  the  state,  represented  in  the  collection  here  recorded 

^  Prof.  H.  A.  Pilsbry,  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia, 
and  his  assistant,  Mr.  E.  G.  Vanatta,  identified  the  entire  collection.  Chas. 
T.  Simpson,  of  the  National  Museum,  has  kindly  examined  and  reported  on  a 

number  of  ambiguous  and  difficult   Unionidse.      All  annotations  are  made  by 

Mr.  Pilsbry. 


488  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896. 

by  the  forms  taken  at  Reelfoot  Lake,  has  the  typical  northern  Missis- 
sippi fauna,  with  a  few  southwestern  species.  The  special  character 
of  the  Tennessee  River  system  is  well  known  to  conchologists ;  but 
among  the  species  herein  catalogued  from  middle  and  east  Tennes- 
see will  be  found  a  number  of  forms  described  from  Alabama, 
Louisiana  and  other  localities  to  the  south  and  west,  such  as  Unio 
propinquus,  U.  }>ybasii,  U.  turgidus,  U.  tiimescens,  U.  caliginosus, 
etc. 

PULMONATA. 

AGNATHA. 

Family  CIRCINARIID^  Pilsbry. 
Selenitidse  Fischer  =  Macrocyclis  and  Selenites  Auct. 

1.  Circinaria^  concava  (Say). 

Bellevue  (68677)^  Banks  of  Emory  Riv.,  Harriman  (68676); 
Johnson  City  (68679)  ;  Road  to  Cloudland,  Roan  Mt.,  5000  ft. 
(68675). 

AULACOPODA. 

Family  ZONITID^. 

2.  Vitrea  arborea  (Say). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68689) ;  Raleigh  (69104)  ;  Sawyer's 
Springs  (69105)  ;  Banks  Emory  Riv.,  Harriman  (68688,  68692) ; 
Allardt  (68691)  ;  5  m.  S.  W.  Greeneville  (68693) ;  Greeneville 
(68694)  ;    road  to  Cloudland,  Roan  Mt.,  3500  to  5000  ft.  (68690). 

3.  Vitrea  indentata  (Say). 
Bellevue  (68696,  68697). 

4.  Omphalina  kopnodes  (W.  G.  Binn.). 

Samburg,  Obion  Co.  (69106)  ;  Bellevue  (69107). 

5.  Omphalina  fuliginosa  (Griff.). 

Banks  of  Emory  Riv.,  Harriman  (68635). 

6.  Omphalina  laevigata  (Pfr.). 

Raleigh  (68639)  ;  bank  Richland  Creek  ("  Belle  Mead  "),  David- 
son Co.  (68642)  ;  Bellevue  (68637)  ;  Sawyer's  Springs,  AValden's 
Ridge  (68638) ;  bank  Emory  Riv.,  near  Harriman  (68641)  ;  John- 
son City  (68643). 

*  Clrcinaria  Beck,  1837  —  Macrocyclis  Binney  =  Selenites  Fischer,  1878, 
not  Selenites  Hope,  1840. 

*  Braketed  numbers  refer  to  the  catalogue  entries  of  the  Academy  of  Natu- 
ral Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  489 

7.  Omphalina  rugeli  (W.  G.  Binn.). 

Koan  Mt.,  Carter  Co.,  4000  to  6000  ft.  (69108,  69109,  69110). 

8.  Vitrinizonites  latissimus  (Lewis). 

Rock  Creek,  Roan  Mt.,  3500  to  5000  ft.  (68698). 

9.  Gastrodonta  acerra  (Lewis). 

Roan  Mt.,  Carter  Co.,  5000  ft.  (69084). 

10.  Gastrodonta  intertexta  (Binn.). 
Chattanooga  (68670). 

11.  Gastrodonta  ligera  (Say). 
Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68673). 

12.  Gastrodonta  demissa  (Binn.). 

Bellevue  (69086). 

13.  Gastrodonta  oapsella  (Gld.). 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (69089)  ;  Emory  Riv.,  near 
Harriman  (69090)  ;  Roan  Mt.,  Rock  Creek  (69091). 

14.  Gastrodonta  gularis  (Say). 

Sawyer's  Springs  (69092)  ;  Emory  Riv.,  near  Harriman  (69093)  ; 
Nolachucky  Riv.,  near  Greeneville  (68094)  ;  Roan  Mt.,  Carter  Co., 
4000  to  6000  ft.  (69095,  69096). 

16.  Gastrodonta  collisella  Pils. 

Emory  Riv.,  near  Harriman  (69097)  ;  Johnson  City  (69098). 

16.  Gastrodonta  interna  (Say). 

Bellevue  (68666) ;  Chattanooga  (68667) ;  Sawyer's  Springs, 
Walden  Ridge  (68668)  ;  bank  Emory  Riv.,  Harriman  (68669). 

Family  LIMACID^. 

17.  Limax  campestris  Binn. 

Reelfoot  Lake  (69056)  ;  Bellevue  (69055)  ;  Holston  Riv.,  near 
French  Broad  Junction  (69054). 

Family  PHILOMYCID^. 

18.  Philomycus  carolinensis  (Boec). 

Reelfoot  Lake  (69057)  ;  Raleigh  (69078)  ;  Sawyer's  Springs 
(69059)  ;  Harriman  (69058). 

Family  ENDODONTICS. 

19.  Pyramidula  perspectiva  (Say). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68650)  ;  "  Belle  Mead  "  farm,  near 
Nashville  (68649)  ;  Bellevue  (68646)  ;  Chattanooga  (68645)  ;  Saw- 


490  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

yer's  Springs,  Waldeu  Ridge  (68653)  ;  bank  Emory  Riv.,  Harri- 
man  (68644)  ;  Knoxville  (68651)  ;  Johnson  Citv  (68647)  ;  Roan 
Mt.,  5000  ft.  (68652). 

20.  Pyramidula  alternata  (Say). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68661)  :  Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nash- 
ville (69079)  ;  Bellevue  (68663)  ;  Williams  Isl.,  near  Chattanooga 
(68664);  Chattanooga  (69080)  ;  Sawyer's  Springs  (69081)  ;  Knox- 
ville (68662)  ;  Greeneville  (68657)  ;  Johnson  City  (69082) ;  Rock 
Creek,  Roan  Mt.  (68655)  ;    Doe  Riv.,  Roan  Mt.,  4000  ft.  (68656). 

21.  Pyramidula  alternata  carinata  (Auct.). 
Emory  Riv.,  near  Harriman  (69083). 

Most  Tennessee  specimens  of  this  species  are  more  coarsely  and 
strongly  ribbed  than  northern  and  western  examples,  and  there  is 
often  a  more  or  less  pronounced  peripheral  keel.  The  culmination 
of  this  type  of  shell  is  P.  alternata  mordax,  of  which,  however,  no 
specimens  were  taken  at  localities  recorded  above.  The  form  called 
var.  carinata  contrasts  with  these,  being  very  fine-ribbed  and  dis- 
tinctly carinated,  and  not  at  all  of  the  mordax  type.  Peculiarly  de- 
pressed, but  not  keeled,  specimens  occurred  at  Sawyer's  Springs. 

22.  Helicodiscus  lineatus  (Say). 

Belle  Mead  farm,  near  Nashville  (68681)  ;  bank  Emory  Riv., 
Harriman  (68682). 

HOLOPODA. 

Family  HELICIDJE. 

23.  Polygyra  plicata  Say. 

Emory  Riv.,  near  Harriman  (69060). 

24.  Polygyra  troostiana  Lea. 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (69061). 

25.  Polygyra  inflecta  (Say). 

Raleigh  (68579,  69062);  Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville 
(68581);  Bellevue  (68577);  Williams  Isl.,  near  Chattanooga 
(68574)  ;  Chattanooga  (68584,  68572)  ;  bank  Holston  Riv.,  above 
junction  of  French  Broad  Riv.  (68573)  ;  Knoxville  (68575)  ;  Green- 
ville (68576)  ;  Johnson  City  (69583). 

26.  Polygyra  rugeli  (Shutt.). 

Sawyer's  Springs,  AValden  Ridge  (68571);  bank  Emory  Riv., 
near  Harriman  (68570). 


1896.J  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  491 

27.  Polygyra  fraudulenta  Pils. 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68565)  ;  Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nash- 
ville (68566)  ;  Williams  Isl.,  near  Chattanooga  (68569)  ;  bank 
Emory  Riv.,  Harriman  (68567)  ;  bank  Doe  Riv..  4000  ft.,  Roan 
Mt.  (68564). 

28.  Polygyra  tridentata  (Say). 

Sawyer's  Springs,  Walden  Ridge  (68557)  ;  Greeneville  (68561)  ; 
5  m.  8.  W.  Greeneville,  bank  Nolachucky  Riv.  (68558)  ;  Allardt 
(68562)  ;  near  junction  Holston  and  French  Broad  Rivs.  (68559)  ; 
Johnson  City  (68560)  ;  banks  Doe  Riv.,  Roan  Mt.,  4000  ft. 
(68563). 

29.  Polyg/ra  palliata  (Say). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68555) ;  Johnson  City  (68556). 

30.  Polygyra  obstricta  (Say). 

Bellevue  (68553)  ;  bank  Emory  Riv.,  Harriman  (68552). 

31.  Polygyra  appressa  perigrapta  Pils. 

Samburg  (68547)  ;  Raleigh  (68544)  ;  Belle  Mead  Farm,  near 
Nashville  (6^557) ;  Chattanooga  (68542) ;  Sawyer's  Springs,  Wal- 
den Ridge  (68549)  ;  bank  Emory  Riv.,  Harriman  (68548)  ;  Knox- 
ville  (68541). 

32.  Polygyra  subpalliata  Pils. 

Roan  Mt.,  3000  to  6000  ft.  (69064,  69065,  69066). 

This  is  the  "  Mesodon  wetherhyi "  of  most  collections.  It  is  a  far 
more  common  species  in  museums  than  that,  occurring  abundantly 
at  Roan  Mt. 

33.  Polygyra  wetherbyi  (Bid.). 

Emory  Riv.,  near  Harriman,  Roane  Co.  (69067). 

The  specimens  of  this  excessively  rare  species  agree  with  one  of 
the  original  lot  collected  by  Prof.  A.  G.  Wetherby.  It  has  been 
found  before  in  Whitley  (and  Campbell?)  counties. 

34.  Polygyra  wheatleyi  (Bid.). 

Roan  Mt.,  3000  to  6000  ft.  (69068,  69069,  69070). 

35.  Polygyra sp.  ? 

Allardt  (69071). 

A  single  specimen,  defective  in  the  umbilical  region,  of  an  appar- 
ently new  species. 


492  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

36.  Polygyra  elevata  (Say.). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68606) ;  Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nash- 
ville (68604)  ;  Bellevue  (68619)  ;  Chattanooga  (68607),  faintly, 
broadly  chestnut- banded  at  the  periphery;  bank  of  Emory  Riv., 
Harriman  (68605)  ;  junction  French  Broad  and  Holston  Rivers 
(68608,  68618). 

37.  Polygyra  exoleta  (Binn.). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68614)  ;  Bellevue  (68613);  bank  Em- 
cry  Riv.,  Harriman  (68616). 

38.  Polygyra  andrewsae  (Binn.). 

Ten  miles  east  of  Allardt  (68624)  ;  Roan  Mt.,  Doe  Riv.  valley^ 
3000  ft.  (68625,  66305)  ;  top  of  Roan  Mt.  (68629)  :  road  to  Cloud- 
land,  3500  to  5000  ft.  (68626,  68628). 

Mr.  E.  G.  Vanatta,  who  dissected  specimens,  found  that  the  small 
thin-shelled  typical  form  agrees  with  the  very  large,  solid  shells  in 
soft  anatomy,  confirming  Binney's  observations. 

39.  Polygyra  albolabris  (Say). 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (68621)  ;  Chattanooga  (68620). 

40.  Polygyra  albolabris  major  (Binn.). 

Vaughan's  Cave,  near  Bellevue  (68623) ;  Johnson  City  (68629). 

Very  large  specimens.  Dissections  of  them  by  Mr.  E.  G.  Yanatta 
fully  confirm  the  anatomical  distinctions  indicated  by  Mr.  Binney 
between  this  species  or  variety  and  the  large  form  of  P.  andreii'8(B. 

41.  Polygyra  thyroides  (Say). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68611);  Raleigh  (68601);  Belle  Mead 
Farm,  near  Nashville  (68598)  ;  Bellevue  (68610)  ;  Chattanooga 
(68603)  ;  Knoxville  (68602) ;  2  m.  E.  Watauga  Sta.,  AVashington 
Co.  (68599)  ;  Johnson  City  (68609). 

42.  Polygyra  clausa  (Say). 

Williams  Isl.,  near  Chattanooga  (68631)  ;  Johnson  City  (68630). 

43.  Polygyra  downieana  (Bid.). 

Sawyer's  Springs  (69072)  ;  Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville 
(69073). 

44.  Polygyra  monodon  fraterna  (Say). 
Raleigh  (69074). 

45.  Polygyra  leai  (Ward). 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (68596). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  493 

46.  Polygyra  hirsuta  altispira  Pils. 

Road  to  Cloudland,  Roan  Mt.,  Doe  Riv.,  4000  ft.  (68586)  ;  top 
Roan  Mt..  6000  ft.  (68585). 

47.  Polygyra  stenotrema  (Fer.). 

Chattanooga  (68588)  ;  Sawyer's  Springs,  Walden  Ridge  (68592)  ; 
bank  Emory  Riv.,  Harrimau  (68587)  ;  Allardt  (68593). 

48.  Polygyra  stenotrema  depilata  Pils. 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (68594)  ;  Bellevue  (68590)  ; 
Johnson  City  (68595). 

Family  BULIMULIDJE. 

49.  Bulimulus  dealbatus  (Say). 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (68632). 

ELASMOGNATHA. 
Family  SUOOINEID^. 

60.  Suocinea  obliqua  Say. 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68686). 

51.  Succinea  ovalis  GUI. 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68683)  ;  Mouth  of  Wolf  Riv.,  Memphis 
(68684)  ;  Richland  Creek,  Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville 
(69282). 

52.  Succinea  avara  Say. 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (68687)  ;  Chattanooga  (69281). 

LIMNOPHILA. 

Family  LIMN^ID^. 

53.  Limnsea  desidiosa  Say. 

Samburg  (69297)  ;  Bellevue  (69295)  ;  Johnson  City  (69298) ; 
Knoxville  (69075). 

54.  LimnSea  columella  Say. 
Knoxville  (69076). 

55.  Limnaea  humilis  Say. 
Johnson  City  (69299). 

66.  Planorbis  trivolvis  Say. 

Samburg  (69250,  69301). 
57.  Planorbis  bicarinatus  Say.  , 

Emory  River,  near  Harriman  (69302). 


494  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

58.  Planorbis  dilatatus  Gld. 

Knoxville,  in  a  spring  (69303). 
69.  Ancylus  diaphanus  Hald. 

Knoxville  (69334). 

Family  PHYSIDJE. 

60.  Physa  gyrina  Say. 

S.  Harpeth  River,  6  m.  from  Bellevue  (69266)  ;  Knoxville 
(69077). 

61.  Physa  heterostropha  Say. 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (69267)  ;  Nolachucky  River, 
near  Greeneville  (69269)  ;  Watauga  River,  near  Watauga  (69270)  ; 
Johnson  City  (69268). 

62.  Physa  Integra  Hald. 

Samburg  (69271)  ;  Johnson  City  (69272). 

63.  Physa  microstoma  Hald. 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (69275).  Also  taken  in  Ken- 
tucky, at  Mammoth  Cave  (69276)  ;  west  bluff  of  Kentucky  River, 
opposite  Frankfort  (69277)  ;  Shelbyville,  Clear  Creek  (68278). 

This  seems  to  be  a  distinct  and  well  characterized  species,  readily 
distinguishable  at  fir.-;t  sight  from  all  other  American  forms  of  this 
genus,  in  which  specific  lines  are  so  difficult  to  define.  Judging 
from  the  rare  occurrence  of  this  name  in  the  literature,  the  species 
must  be  comparatively  rare  and  local. 

PROSOBRANCHIATA. 

KHIPIDOGLOSSA. 

Family  HELICINID^. 

64.  Helicina  orbiculata  (Say). 
Chattanooga  (68633). 

65.  Helicina  occulta  (Say). 

Bank  Emory  Riv.,  near  Harriman  (68634). 

This  species  was  first  found  living  in  the  West  by  Messrs.  Pilsbry 
and  Shimek,  but  has  subsequently  occurred  to  conchologists  in 
many  localities  in  Iowa,  Minnesota  and  Wisconsin.  In  the  East  it 
occurs  living  in  "Western  Pennsylvania"  (Green),  near  Pittsburg 
(Stupakoff),  in  Virginia,  western  North  Carolina  and  eastern  Ten- 
nessee.    Its  range  is  apparently  interrupted  by  the  Ohio  Valley,  and 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  495 

the  special  localities  east  and  west  are  more  or  less  isolated.  Its  distri- 
bution is,  on  the  whole,  more  markedly  discontinuous  than  that  of 
any  American  land  snail  known  to  me.  It  probably  lives  in  higher 
latitude  than  any  other  member  of  the  Helicinidce.  H.  occulta  is  an 
omnipresent,  and  therefore  characteristic,  fossil  of  the  Mississippi 
Valley  loess  ;  and  during  the  formation  of  that  deposit  was  exten- 
sively diffused  and  excessively  numerous  over  a  large  area  where  it 
is  now  extinct. 

T^NIOGLOSSA. 

Family  AMNICOLID^  Try  on. 

66.  Somatogyrus  aureus  Tryon, 

Nolachucky  River,  near  Greeneville  (69284). 

67.  Pomatiopsis  lapidaria  (Say). 

Banks  of  Emory  River,  near  Harriman  (69283). 

Family  VIVIPARID^  Gill. 

68.  Vivipara  intertexta  (Say). 
Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (69249). 

69.  Campeloma  ponderosum  (Say). 

Tennessee  River,  near  Chattanooga  (69232,  69236,  69237); 
Holston  River,  1  mile  above  French  Broad  (69259,  69260) ;  Ten- 
nessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (69258) ;  Clinch  River,  below  Pat- 
ton's  Ferry  (69261)  ;  Indian  shell  heap,  Williams  Island  (69231). 

70.  Campeloma  subsolidum  (Anth.). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake  (69233,  69234,  69235) ;  Big  Harpeth 
River,  near  Bellevue  (69263). 

71.  Campeloma  geniculum  (Conr.). 

Emory  River,  near  Harriman  (69262). 

72.  Lioplax  subcarinata  (Say). 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (69238). 

Family  PLEUROCERID^  Fischer. 

This  has  long  been  recognized  as  one  of  the  most  difficult  families 
of  American  mollusks.  Tryon  made  a  good  beginning  in  the  in- 
tricate study  of  its  species  in  his  monograph  published  by  the  Smith- 
sonian Institution  in  1872.  His  conclusions  were  based  upon  a 
study  of  material  from  all  the  principal  collections  of  that  time  ; 
and  his  extensive  synonymy  has  proved  in  nearly  every  case  which 


496  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

has  since  been  tested  to  be  singularly  well  judged.  It  was  a  splen- 
did piece  of  work,  considering  the  time  and  material  available. 
But  Tryon  himself,  in  his  later  years,  saw  as  clearly  as  anyone  that 
a  vastly  greater  reduction  of  species  must  be  made.  He  told  me,  in 
1888,  that,  as  he  now  saw  these  shells,  there  were  not  more  than  a 
tenth  as  many  good  species  as  names.  Whether  the  particular 
ratio  mentioned  was  deliberately  said  or  not,  I  do  not  know  :  but  I 
incline  to  the  belief  that  it  will  prove  near  the  truth. 

These  shells  must  be  collected  and  studied  by  river-systems  ;  and 
it  then  appears  that  often  the  same  species  occurs  in  some  localities 
sculptured  throughout,  in  others  only  on  the  upper  portion,  while 
in  still  other  places  only  the  earlier  whorls  may  show  the  character- 
istic sculpture.  Some  of  the  species  described  from  one  or  two 
decollate  examples  will  be  recognized  with  great  difficulty,  if  at  all, 
in  cases  where  the  type  locality  is  not  known. 

A  cursory  glance  at  the  generic  scheme  in  current  use  reveals 
some  inaccuracies  which  call  for  correction.  The  genera  are  un- 
equally related,  and,  as  Tryon  has  shown,  fall  into  three  main 
groups.     They  are  as  follows : 

lo  Lea,  1831,  type  Fus^is  fluvialis  Say.  Melafusus  Swainson, 
1840,  is  a  synonym. 

LiTHASiA  Hald.,  1840,  type  Anculosa  (Ldthasia)  geniculata 
Hald. 

A  section  of  Lithasia  is  Angitrema  Hald.,  1841,  type  Melania  ar- 
migera  Say;  Glotella  Gray,  1847,  same  type,  being  a  synonym  of 
Angitrema. 

It  will  be  observed  that  this  reverses  Tryon's  usage,  as  he  places 
geniculata  in  Angitrema,  and  restricts  Lithasia  to  smooth  species. 

Angitrema  is  a  connecting  link  between  lo  and  Lithasia,  and 
seems  conchologically  about  intermediate  between  the  two  groups. 

Pleukocera  Ratinesque,  1818,  type? 

Synonyms:  Ceriphasia  Swains.,  1840,  type,  C.  sulcata  Swains. 
(=P.  canaliculatum  Say);  Trypaiiostoma  Lea,  1862,  type  31.  canal- 
ieulata  Say,  Teleseopella  Gray,  1837,  type  Melania  undulata  Say. 

Strephobasis  Lea,  1861,  types  S.  spillmani,  cornea  and  clarhii  Lea 
(all  =plena  Anth.),  is  a  section  o^  Pleurocera. 

Elimia  H.  &  A.  Adams,  1854,  type  M.  acutocarmata  Lea. 

Synonyms :  Melasma  H.  &  A.  Adams,  Juga  H.  &  A.  Adams, 
Megara  H.  &  A.  Adams,  and  Goniobasis^luea,,  1862. 

The  group  of  Adams  brothers,  Elimia,  contains  incongruous  ele- 
ments, although  most  of  the  species  named  are  Goniobases.     E.  ele- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  497 

ivata  "  Lea,"  filum  Lea,  spinaUs  Lea  and  torta  Lea  belong  to  the 
the  prior  genus  Pleurocera  Rat".,  and,  therefore,  are  to  be  eliminated 
from  Elimia.  Holstonia  Lea  belongs  to  the  prior  genus  Lithasia 
Hald.  Apis  Lea  is  a  Pachychilus.  The  other  species  are  true  Go7i- 
io  bases. 

Gyrotoma  Shuttlew.,  1845,  ♦ 

Synonyms  Schizostoma  and  Schizocheilus  Lea  (preoc).  Apella 
Mighels,  MS.,  1860. 

Anculosa  Say. 

73.  lo  spinosa  Lea. 

Holston  River,  3  miles  from  Knoxville  (69258) ;  Tennessee 
River,  near  Knoxville  (69252)  ;  Nolaehucky  River.,  5  miles  south 
of  Greeneville  (69251)  ;  in  the  Indian  shell  heaps,  Williams 
Island,  Tennessee  River  (69255)  ;  Indian  mound,  junction  Holston 
and  French  Broad  (69254)  ;  Indian  mound,  Patton's  Ferry,  Nola- 
chucky  River  (69265). 

74.  Lithasia  geniculata  Hald. 

Indian  shell  heaps,  Williams  Island,  Tennessee  River  (69240) ; 
Emory  River,  near  Harriman  (69242)  ;  Tennessee  River,  near 
Knoxville  (69241)  ;   Clinch  River,  below  Patton's  Ferry  (69239). 

75.  Lithasia  verrucosa  (Raf.). 

Tennessee  River,  near  Chattanooga  (69332)  ;  Tennessee  River, 
near  Knoxville  (69247)  ;  Aboriginal  shell  heaps,  Williams  Island 
(69248) ;  shell  heap,  junction  Holston  and  French  Broad  Rivers 
(69264). 

76.  Lithasia  venusta  Lea. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (69293,  69294). 

77.  Lithasia  stygia  (Say). 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (69333). 

These  shells,  while  worthy  of  the  Styx  when  unwashed  and  black 
with  iron  deposit,  are  of  a  beautiful  green  with  darker  bands  when 
this  incrustation  is  removed. 

78.  Pleurocera  undulatum  (Say). 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (69313)  ;  Holston  River,  1 
mile  above  French  Broad  (69312,  69314). 

Pleurocera  undulatum  is  here  understood  to  cover  the  following 
nominal  species,  all  of  which  seem  to  be  connected  by  inappreciable 
degrees  when  a  large  series  is  examined  :    Melania  excurata  Con., 


498  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

M.  rorata  Rve.,  Trypanostoma  spilbnani  Lea,  T.  moniliferum,  lo 
nodosa,  lo  variabilis,  lo  nobilis  and  lo  robusia  Lea.  There  are  still 
other  forms  which  will  doubtless  fall  under  undulatum  as  varieties 
or  synonyms. 

79.  Pleurocera  undulatum  nobile  (Lea). 

Tennessee  River,  near  Chattanooga  (69317)  ;  Emory  River,  near 
Harriman  (69316). 

80.  Pleurocera  undulatum  moniliferum  (Lea). 

Aboriginal    shell    heaps,    Williams    Island,     Tennessee    River 

(69315). 

81.  Pleurocera  canaliculatum  (Say). 

Clinch  River,  below  Patton's  Ferry  (69368)  ;   Tennessee  River, 
near  Knoxville  (69264), 

82.  Pleurocera  gradatum  (Anth.). 

Tennessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (69310)  ;  Holston  River,  1  mile 
above  junction  with  French  Broad  (69309). 

83.  Pleurocera  filum  (Lea). 

Tennessee  River,  near  Chattanooga  (69306)  ;  Emory  River,  near 
Harriman  (69308)  ;  Tennessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (69305). 

84.  Pleurocera  filum  var  ? 

South  Harpeth  River,  6  miles  from  Bellevue  (69307). 
86.  Pleurocera sp.  ? 

Patton's  Ferry,  Clinch  River  (69324). 

A  peculiar  species,  not  corresponding  with  any  described  form, 
but  it  may  be  described  in  a  much  worn  or  truncated  condition. 

86.  Pleurocera  cylindraceum  (Lea). 

Emory  River,  near  Harriman  (69304.) 

It  was  described  from  Roane  County.      Trypanostoma  roanense 
Lea  is  a  synonym  of  cylindraceum. 

87.  Pleurocera  hastatum  (Anth.). 

Watauga  River,  below  Watauga  Station  (69318). 

88.  Pleurocera  alveare  (Con.). 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (69311). 

89.  Pleurocera  unicale  (Ilald.). 

Nolachucky,  four  and  a  half  miles  south  of  Greeneville  (69319). 

90.  Strephobasis  lyonii  Lea. 

Tennessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (69335)  ;  Holston  River,  1  mile 
above  French  Broad  (69336). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  499= 

91.  Strephobasis  plena  (Anth.). 

Tennessee  River,  Chattanooga  (69337) ;  Clinch  River,  above 
Patton's  Ferry  (69338). 

S.  plena  includes  as  synonyms  S.  spilbnani,  clarkii  and  cornea  of 
Lea,  all  from  the  same  region  and  in  the  same  river  system. 

Strephobasis  is  a  mere  section  of  Pleuroeera,  and  is  reducible  to 
some  two  or  three  species. 

92.  Goniobasis^  proxima  (Say). 

Watauga  River,  Watauga  Station  (69290),    . 

93.  Goniobasis  proxima  symmetrica  (Hald.). 

Doe  River,  Roan  Mountain,  2800  to  4000  ft.  (69292)  ;  Rock 
Creek,  Roan  Mountain  3500  ft.  (69291). 

The  same  form  occurs  plentifully  around  Cranberry,  Mitchell  Co^ 
N.  C.  (Dr.  H.  Skinner). 

94.  Goniobasis  laqueata  (Say). 

Richland  Creek,  Belle  Mead,  near  Nashville  (69289);  South 
Harpeth  River,  6  miles  from  Bellevue  (69348,  69286,  69347)  ;  Big 
Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (69287,  69288). 

The  specimens  are  not  typical,  being  more  like  the  synonym  or  vari- 
ety G.  deshayesiana  Lea ;  but  there  are  at  least  ten  other  names, 
probably  referable  to  the  same  species,  leading  terms  being  plica  tula 
Lea,  costulata  Lea,  cinerella  Lea,  sparus  Lea,  cei'ea  Lea,  rugosa  Lea, 
corrugata  Lea,  circinata  Lea,  athleta  Anth.,  glaiica  Anth.,  lyonii 
Lea,  etc. 

95.  Anculosa  subglobosa  Say. 

Nolachucky  River,  6  miles  southwest  of  Greeneville  (69342)  ; 
Watauga  River,  below  Watauga  Station  (69343)  ;  Doe  River,  2800 
4000  ft.  (69344). 

96.  Anculosa  harpethensis  Pils.    Sp.  nov. 

Mr.  Pilsbry's  description  is  herewith  given  : — Shell  globose,  with 
very  short  spire  and  rounded  periphery ;  olivaceous  brown  or  yel- 
lowish, the  surface  with  slight  growth  lines.  Whorls  5,  the  body 
whorl  very  convex,  impressed  in  the  umbilical  region.  Aperture 
livid  purplish  within  the  outer  lip  but  slightly  sinuous,  parietal  wall 
and  columella  heavily  calloused,  purple;  face  of  columella  con- 
cave, a  projecting  angle  at  union  of  columellar  and  basal  lips.   Alt. 

'The  familiar  generic  name  is  used  here  for  convenience,  but  it  must  be  re- 
placed eventually  by  Elimia  H.  &  A.  Adams. 

33 


600  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

9?,  diam.  19  mm.:  alt.  12,  diam.  llram.  The  globular  form  and 
angulation  at  base  of  columella  separate  this  form  from  A.  subglo- 
bosa. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (69357). 

97.  Anculosa  praerosa  Say. 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  French  Broad  (69244) ;  Tennessee 
River,  near  Chattanooga  (29246)  ;  Tennessee  River,  near  Knox- 
ville  (69245).     Indian  mound,  Williams  Island  (69248). 

98.  Anculosa  ornata  Anth. 

Tennessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (69340)  ;  Holston  River,  1  mile 
above  French  Broad  (69339). 

PELECYPODA. 

Family  OYRENIDJE  Fischer. 

99.  Sphaerium  striatinum  (Lam.). 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (69325);  Johnson  City  (69326). 

100.  Sphaerium  fabale  Prime 

Belle  Mead  Farm,  near  Nashville  (69328). 

101.  Sphserium  transversum  (Say). 
Samburg,  Obion  Co.  (69327). 

102.  Sphaerium  partumeium  (Say). 

Samburg,  Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (69330). 

103.  Pisidium  abditum  Ilald. 
Knoxville  (69331). 

Family  UNIONID^. 

104.  TJnio  acuens  Lea. 

Tennessee  River,  Williams  Island  (67371);  Tennessee  River, 
near  Knoxville  (69372) ;  Holston  River,  1  mile  above  French 
Broad  (69373). 

105.  TJnio  alatus  Say. 

Tennessee  River,  above  Knoxville  (68341). 

106.  TJnio  anodontoides  Lea. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue,  Davidson  Co.  (68327).  Wolf 
River,  below  Shelby  Co.  (68701). 

107  TJnio  arcaeformis  Lea. 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  Tennessee  River 
(68317). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  501 

108.  Unio  asperrimus  Lea. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (68340). 

109.  Unio  biangulatus  Lea. 

Tennessee   River,   above  Knoxville  (68361) ;    Watauga  River, 
below  Watauga  Station  (69370). 
Described  from  Caney  Fork. 

110.  TJnio  caliginosus  Conr. 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (69203). 
Described  from  the  Red  River  at  Alexandria,  La. 

HI.  Unio  capsseformis  Lea. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue,  Davidson  Co.  (68369). 
112  Unio  circulus  Lea. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (68381)  ;  Tennessee  River, 
near  Knoxville  (68362). 

An  Ohio  drainage  species. 

113.  Unio  conradianus  Lea.    {Oo7iradicus  Lea). 

Emory  River,  Harriman  (69222)  ;  AVatauga  River,  near  John- 
son City  (69226). 

The  specimens  are,  for  the  greater  part,  only  very  slightly  plicate 
on  the  posterior  slope,  far  less  so  than  Lea's  types. 

114.  Unio  cooperianus  Lea. 

Tennessee  River,  near  Williams  Island,  below  Chattanooga 
(68375)  ;  2  miles  above  Knoxville  (69211)  ;  Clinch  River,  above 
Patton's  Ferry  (68363). 

115.  Unio  cornutus  Barnes. 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry,  Roane  Co.  (68330). 

116.  Unio  crassidens  Lam. 

Holstou  River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  Tennessee  River 
(68365)  ;  Tennessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (68327)  ;  Tennessee 
River,  near  Williams  Island,  Chattanooga  (68347)  ;  Clinch  River, 
above  Patton's  Ferry  (68337). 

117.  Unio  cuneolus  Lea. 

Emory  River,  Harriman  (69201). 
Described  from  the  Holston. 

118  Unio  cylindricus  Say. 

Holston    River,    1    mile   above  junction    with  Tennessee  River 

(68342). 


502  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

119.  TJnio  dromas  Lea. 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  Tennessee  River 
(68313) ;  Tennessee  River,  near  AVilliams  Island,  Chattanooga 
(68323)  ;  Tennessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (68326). 

120.  TInio  edgarianus  Lea. 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (69206). 

One  of  the  specimens  collected  has  the  lateral  teeth  reversed. 

121.  Unio  elegans  Lea. 
Reelfoot  Lake  (68376). 

The  specimens  have  numerous  greenish  rays  in  place  of  the  usual 
V-like  maculation, 

122.  TJnio  fascinans  Lea  (fassinans). 

Watauga  River,  below  Watauga  Station  (68387). 

123.  Unio  gibbosus  Barnes. 

Tennessee  River,  near  Williams  Island,  Chattanooga  (68315)  ; 
Tennessee  River,  above  Knoxville  (68324)  ;  Holston  River,  1  mile 
above  junction  with  Tennessee  River  (68370)  ;  Clinch  River,  above 
Patton's  Ferry,  Roane  Co.  (68314)  ;  Emory  River,  near  Harriman, 
Roane  Co.  (68339) ;  Watauga  River,  near  Johnson  City,  Washing- 
ton Co.  (68325). 

Shells  smaller  than  those  of  the  northern  Mississippi  Valley,  and 
often  light  salmon  inside,  especially  in  the  Holston  River  speci- 
mens. 

124.  Unio  glans  Lea. 

Emory  River,  near  Harriman  (69377). 

Two  specimens  of  somewhat  doubtful  specific  identity. 

125.  Unio  gracilis  Barnes. 

Wolf  River,  below  Raleigh,  Shelby  Co.  (68700)  ;  Holston  River, 
1  mile  above  junction  with  French  Broad  (69200). 

126.  Unio  haysianus  Lea. 

Tennessee  River,  2  miles  above  Knoxville  (69199). 
Described  from  the  Cumberland  River. 

127.  Unio  irroratus  Lea. 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  Junction  with  Tennessee  River 
(68354). 

128.  Unio  kirtlandianus  Lea. 

Watauga  River,  near  Johnson  City  (69204). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  503 

129.  Unio  lawi  Lea. 

Emory  River,  Harriman  (69223). 

Described  from  the  Tennessee  River,  Tuscumbia,  Ala.,  and  the 
Holston. 

130.  Unio  ligamentinus  Lam, 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  Tennessee  River 
(68335)  ;  Tennessee  River,  near  Williams  Island,  Chattanooga, 
(68348) ;  Tennessee  River,  above  Knoxville  (68368) ;  Clinch 
River,  above  Patton's  Ferry,  Roane  Co.  (68360)  ;  Harpeth  River, 
6  miles  south  of  Bellevue  (68699). 

The  shells  are  constantly  smaller  and  rounder  than  in  specimens 
of  Illinois  and  Iowa. 

131.  Unio  muMfeldtianus  Lea. 

Watauga  River,  near  Johnson  City  (69225). 
Described  from  the  Cumberland  River. 

132.  Unio  multiradiatus  Lea. 

Emory  River,  near  Harriman,  Roane  Co.  (68318) ;  Clinch 
River,  above  Patton's  Ferry,  Roane  Co.  (68338)  ;  Watauga  River, 
near  Johnson  City,  Washington  Co.  (68336). 

133.  Unio  obliquus  Lam. 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  French  Broad 
(69217)  ;  Tennessee  River,  near  Chattanooga  (69214). 

134.  Unio  ovatus  Say. 

Tennessee  River,  2  miles  above  Knoxville  (69279)  ;  Holston 
River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  French  Broad  (69218). 

135.  Unio  parvus  Say. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (68359). 

136.  Unio  phaseolus  Hild. 

Tennessee  River,  near  Chattanooga  (69202)  ;  Emory  River,  near 
Harriman  (69369). 

137.  Unio  pictus  Lea. 

South  Harpeth  River,  6  miles  from  Bellevue  (68385). 
This  was  described  from  Harpeth  River  specimens. 

138.  Unio  pilaris  Lea. 

Tennessee  River,  2  miles  above  Knoxville  (69213);  Holston 
River,  1  mile  above  junction  of  French  Broad  (69219);  Clinch 
River  above  Patton's  Ferry. 


504  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

139.  Unio  plicatus  Lesueur. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Samburg,  Obion  Co.  (68377). 

140.  Unio  propinquus  Lea. 

Tennessee  River  2  miles  above  Knoxville  (69212);  Holston 
River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  French  Broad  (69220)  ;  Clinch 
River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (68353). 

This  species  was  described  from  Florence  and  Tuscumbia,  Ala- 
bama, localities  far  to  the  southwest  of  the  above. 

141.  Unio  purpuratus  Lam. 

Wolf  River,  near  Raleigh  (68702). 
Characteristic  specimens  of  this  southwestern  form. 

142.  Unio  pustulosus  Lea. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (68366)  ;  Holston  River,  1  mile  above 
junction  with  Tennessee  River  (68367)  ;  Clinch  River,  above  Pat- 
ton's  Ferry  (68363). 

143.  Unio  pybasii  Lea. 

Emory  River,  Harriman  (69196)  ;  South  Harpeth  River,  6  miles 
from  Bellevue  (69195)  ;  Watauga  River,  near  Johnson  City  (69193). 
Lea's  specimens  were  from  Tuscumbia,  Ala. 

144.  Unio  pyramidatus  Lea. 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  French  Broad  (68364)  ; 
Tennessee  River,  2  miles  above  Knoxville  (69205)  ;  Clinch  River, 
above  Patton's  Ferry  (69207). 

145.  Unio  rectus  Lam. 

Holston  River,  1  mile  above  junction  with  Tennessee  River 
(68372). 

146.  Unio  rubiginosus  Lea. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (68358) ;  South  Harpeth 
River,  6  miles  south  of  Bellevue  (68316). 

147.  Unio  securis  Lea. 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (68331). 

148.  Unio  sphaericus  Lea  (?). 

Tennessee  River,  near  Williams  Island,  Chattanooga  (68373). 

149.  Unio  subrostratus  Say. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Samburg,  Obion  Co.  (69194). 
160.  Unio  subtentus  Say. 

South  Harpeth  River,  6  miles  from  Bellevue  (68704) ;  Tennessee 
River,  above  Knoxville  (68371). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  505 

151.  Unio  texasensis  Lea. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Samburg  (69215). 

INIuch  larger  than  the  typical  form  from  central  Texas,  length 
56,  breadth,  30  mm. 

152.  Unio  trapezoides  Lea. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Samburg  (69216). 

Two  young  specimens.  The  species  has  not  before  been  reported 
from  so  far  north,  east  of  the  Mississippi,  so  far  as  I  know. 

153.  TJnio  triangularis  Barnes. 

Tennessee  River,  above  Knoxville  (68378). 

154.  Unio  tuberculatus  Barnes. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Belle vue,  Davidson  Co.  (68345)  ;  Wolf 
River,  below  Raleigh,  Shelby  Co.  (68703). 

The  specimens  from  the  Big  Harpeth  belong  to  the  large,  densely 
pustulose,  white  nacred,  northern  race. 

155.  Unio  tumescens  Lea. 

Tennessee  River,  near  Knoxville  (69374)  ;   Emory  River,  Harri- 
man  (69375)  ;  Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (69376). 
Described  by  Lea  from  Alexandria,  La, 

156.  Unio  turgidus  Lea. 

Wolf  River,  near  Raleigh  (68384). 
Described  from  New  Orleans. 

157.  Unio  undulatus  Barnes. 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (69209)  ;  Big  Harpeth  River, 
near  Bellevue  (68344). 

On  account  of  the  prior  Unio  undulatus  Say  (now  Alasmodonta 
undulata),  the  name  of  this  well-known  species  must  be  changed, 

158.  Unio  ventricosus  Barnes. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue,  Davidson  Co.  (68328). 

159.  Unio  verrucosus  Barnes. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue,  (68343)  ;  Tennessee  River, 
above  Knoxville  (68349)  ;  Holston  River,  1  mile  above  junction 
with  Tennessee  River  (68350), 

160.  Alasmodonta  complanata  Barnes.  5 

^The  diverse  origin  of  various  elements  of  the  so  called  genus  Margaritana 
has  been  demonstrated  by  Mr.  C.  T.  Sinapson.  It  is  practically  certain  that 
the  group  of  M.  complanata,  rugosa,  etc.,  arose  from  a  different  stock  of  Unio 


506  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (68346). 

161.  Alasmodonta  confragosa  Say. 
Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (68356). 

162.  Alasmodonta  edentula  Say. 

Big  Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (68380)  ;  Watauga  River, 
near  Johnson  City  (68379). 

Very  large  specimens,  length  12.7  cm.,  from  the  Big  Harpeth. 
Probably  not  specifically  distinct  from  A.  pennsylvanica  Lam.  of 
the  Middle  States. 

163.  Alasmodonta  marginata  Say. 

Clinch  River,  above  Patton's  Ferry  (68332)  ;  Watauga  River, 
near  Johnson  City  (68321), 

164.  Alasmodonta  minor  (Lea). 

South  Harpeth  River  River,  6  miles  from  Bellevue  (69228). 

165.  Alasmodonta  rugosa  Bar. 

Tennessee  River,  2  miles  above  Knoxville  (69229)  ;  Big  Harpeth 
River,  near  Bellevue  (68333)  ;  Watauga  River,  near  Johnson  City 
(68320). 

166.  Anodonta  grandis  Say. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (68382). 

167.  Anodonta  harpethensis  Lea. 

Harpeth  River,  near  Bellevue  (69230). 

168.  Anodonta  suborbiculata  Say. 
Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (68351). 

169.  Anodonta  imbecilis  Say. 

Reelfoot  Lake,  Obion  Co.  (68322). 

Summary  :  Pelecypoda,  71  species  ;  aquatic  Gasirojjoda,  41  spec- 
ies ;  terrestrial  Gastropoda,  54  species. 

from  the  M.  inargaritifera  and  monodonta ;  and  Simpson  finds  numbers  of 
otlier  incongruous  elements. 

We  are  hardly  prepared,  however,  to  merge  the  various  groups  of  "  Mar- 
gariinna"  in  Unio.  Among  other  disadvantages,  a  great  many  specific  names 
would  require  change,  such  as  the  first  one  of  this  list ;  and  then,  tliere  is  a 
Teal  difference  (in  the  hinge  teeth)  which  would  be  without  recognition  in 
nomenclature.  It  seems  to  us  that  although  there  are  a  few  forms,  such  as 
Unio  preKnus,  in  which  this  distinction  is  obscure,  still  in  the  great  majority  it 
holds.  The  subject  is  a  complex  one,  which  should  not  be  decided  hastily, 
and  we  can  well  afford  to  postpone  wholesale  changes  in  specific  nomenclature 
until  Simpson,  von  Ihering  and  other  specialists  who  are  now  working  upon 
the  Unionidn'  with  such  gratifying  results,  shall  have  arrived  at  a  thoroughly 
mature  classification. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  507 


FOSSIL  BONES  OF  BIRDS  AND  MAMMALS  FROM  GROTTO  PIETRO 
TAMPONI  AND  GRIVE-ST.  ALBAN. 

BY    R.    W.   8HUFELDT,   M.  D. 

For  some  time  past  the  writer  has  had  in  his  possession  a  small 
collection  of  fossil  bones  that  were  kindly  submitted  to  him  by  Mr. 
Jno.  Eyerman,  of  Easton,  Pennsylvania,  to  whose  cabinet  they  be- 
long. 

These  fossil  bones  are  from  birds  and  mammals,  and  were  ob- 
tained from  two  very  different  localities,  the  smaller  lot  of  the  two 
having  been  collected  at  the  Grotto  Pietro  Tamponi,  and  the  re- 
mainder of  them  at  Grive-St.  Alhan,  in  France.  In  his  letter  of 
transmittal,  Mr.  Eyerman  invites  my  attention  to  the  fact  that  the 
celebrated  locality,  Grive-St.  Alban,  *'is  situated  in  the  department 
of  Isere,  France,  the  deposits  belonging  to  the  upper  division  of  the 
Middle  Miocene.  European  geologists  have  arranged  the  Middle 
Miocene  into  two  divisions,  of  which  the  upper  is  distributed  princi- 
pally in  isolated  patches  throughout  France,  although  these  deposits 
are  also  found  in  Germany  and  in  the  Vienna  Basin." 

"  Grive-St.  Alban  is  justly  famous  for  the  large  number  and  great 
variety  of  mammalian  remains  found  in  its  beds,  of  which  we  have 
Listriodon,  Hyotherium,  Palaeomeryx,  Micromeryx,  Dicroceros  of  the 
Artiodactyla,  as  well  as  the  earliest  antelope,  Profra^oceros.  Of  the 
Perissodactyla  there  are  the  hornless  rhinoceros,  Aceratherium, 
Chalicotherium.  Of  the  Proboscidea  there  is  the  Mastodon  augusti- 
dens.  The  Rodentia  is  represented  by  Lagomys,  Myoxus,  Sciurus, 
Chalicomys  and  the  large  Dormouse,  Cricetodon.  The  Carnivora 
by  Viverra,  Lxdra,  D'lnocyon;  the  sabre-tooth  tiger,  Machaerodus ; 
the  mongoose,  Berpestes,  and  the  disputed  genus  Haplogale  of 
Sclosser.  The  Insectivores  by  Plesiosorex,  Erinaceus  and  Talpa, 
and,  finally,  the  fossil  Gibbon,  Hylobates." 

In  the  second  locality,  or  that  of  Tavolara,  we  find  the  "  Grotto 
Pietro  Tamponi,  consisting  of  several  chambers,  and  situated  on 
the  small  Island  of  Tavolara,  in  the  Gulf  of  Terranova,  a  few  miles 
off  the  northeast  coast  of  Sardinia.  The  upper  chamber  of  this 
grotto  contains  numerous  remains  of  the  rodent  Lagomys  sardus 
{Giebel's  variety  corsicanus).  The  lower  chamber  has  produced  the 
avian  remains." 


508  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Taking  these  specimens  by  their  original  numbers,  I  find  them  to 
be  as  represented  in  the  following  list : — 

1.  The  left  carpo-metacarpus  of  a  bird. 

2.  The  left  radius  of  a  bird. 

3.  The  right  tibio-tarsus  of  a  bird. 

4.  The  right  ulna  of  a  bird. 

5.  Right  and  left/emora;  birds. 

6.  Right  and  left  humeri;  birds. 

7.  The  right/em?(r  of  a  mammal. 

8.  The  right  coracoid  of  a  bird. 

9.  The  right  tibio-tarsus  of  a  bird. 

10.  The  right  tarso-metatarsus  of  a  bird  ;  also  the  right  ulna  of  a 

mammal. 

11.  The  right  itJio-iarsMS  of  a  bird. 

12.  Portion  of  the  upper  third  of  the  right  tibio-tarsus  of  a  bird. 

13.  The  distal  moiety  of  the  left  tarso-inetatars\Ls  of  a  bird. 

14.  The  proximal  moiety  of  the  ungual  phalanx  of  a  small  mam- 

mal (carnivore). 

15.  The  proximal  third  of  the  left  carp)o-vietacarpus  of  a  bird. 

16.  The  distal  extremity  of  the  left  tarso-metatarsus  of  a  bird. 

17.  The  left  humerus  of  a  bird. 

18.  The  upper  two-thirds  of  the  right  tarso-metatarsus  of  a  bird  (in 

two  fragments). 

19.  The  right  carpo-metacarpus  of  a  bird  (not  perfect). 

20.  Two  carpo-metacarpi  of  birds,  both  from  right  side,  perfect  and 

very  small. 

21.  The  right  humerus  of  a  bird. 

22.  The  right  humerus  of  a  bird. 

23.  The  proximal  moiety  of  the  right  humerus  of  a  bird. 

24.  The  proximal  moiety  of  the  left  tarso-metatarsus  of  a  bird. 

25.  The  left  humerus  of  a  bird. 

26.  The  left  ulna  of  a  bird. 

27.  The  distal  extremity  of  the  left  (J)  femur  of  a  mammal. 

28.  Not  received. 

29.  Not  received. 

30.  The  distal  extremity  of  the  right  tarso-metatarsus  of  a  bird 

(two  fragments). 

31.  The  distal  extremity  of  the  left  tarso-metatarsus  of  a  bird  (in 

two  fragments). 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  509 

These  specimens  are  all  from  adult  individuals  of  the  various  spe- 
cies they  represent;  they  are,  furthermore,  thoroughly  fossilized  ; 
free  from  any  matrix,  save  in  a  few  instances  where  a  thin  layer  of 
a  dark-colored  incrustation  spreads  over  the  ends  of  some  of  the 
long  and  other  bones.  They  are  very  light  in  color,  and,  upon  the 
whole,  quite  perfect.  Some  are  thoroughly  so,  as,  for  example,  Nos. 
1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10  and  20,  others  exhibit  a  little  chipping  at 
the  extremities,  or  have  other  slight  imperfections,  as,  for  example, 
Nos.  11,  17,  19,  21,  22,  25  and  26;  while,  finally,  the  balance  are 
more  or  less  fragmentary,  as  set  forth  in  the  above  list. 

No.  7  is  a  femur  that  apparently  belonged  to  a  medium-sized 
rodent,  but  as  I  have  not  the  proper  material  wherewith  to  compare 
it,  it  is  impossible  fur  me  to  identify  the  species.  It  has  a  total 
length  of  4.9  centimeters,  and  presents  the  usual  characters  seen 
in  a  small  rodent's  femur,  as  that,  for  example,  of  one  of  the 
Seiuridse,  or  some  of  their  near  allies. 

The  vIna  in  lot  No.  10,  and  the  end  of  the  femur  in  No.  27,  also 
belong  to  small  mammals,  but,  from  lack  of  material,  I  am  unable 
to  identify  them.  The  first-mentioned  specimen  has  a  length  of  4 
centimeters,  while  the  last  is  fragmentary,  and  I  take  it  to  be  a 
mammal  from  the  fact  that  no  fibular  notch  exists  in  the  posterior 
aspect  of  the  external  condyle — a  common  avian  character. 

A  study  of  specimens  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  8,  9,  the  tarso-metatar- 
sus  of  lot  No.  10  and  No.  11,  convinced  me  that  they  had  one  and 
all  belonged  to  species  of  Shearwater  (Puffinus).  This  conviction 
was  arrived  at  after  comparing  the  bones  with  those  of  a  skeleton  of 
Puffinns  borealis,^  and  with  the  figures  and  descriptions  given  us  by 
Professor  Alf  Milne-Edwards  in  his  Recherches  sur  les  Oiseaux  Fos- 
siles  de  la  France.^  Furthermore,  the  tibio-tarsus  No.  3  agreed  ex- 
actly in  length  and  in  characters  with  the  specimen  No.  9,  while  in 
the  case  of  the  femora  in  lot  No.  5,  and  the  humeri  in  lot  No.  6, 
although  they  agreed  in  characters,  differed  in  either  case,  somewhat 
in  length.  This,  however,  amounted  to  but  very  little  ;  for  example, 
one  of  the  femora  measured  4.0  cms.  in  length,  and  the  other  3.9 
cms.  in  length,  whereas,  in  the  case  of  the  humeri,  this  difference  is 
a  little  greater,  one  having  a  length  of  7.9  cms.  and  the  other  only 
7.5  cms. 


1  Mounted  Coll.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  No.  17,772. 

'  Planches  49-53  incl.    Atlas  I,  where  the  bones  of  Puffinus  cinereus  are 
figured,  and  in  Texte  I,  p.  301,  et  seq.  where  they  are,  with  others,  described. 


510  PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OP  [1896, 

Disregarding  the  cnemial  projection  or  process,  and  measuring 
the  length  of  the  bone  from  the  summit  to  the  lowermost  point  of  the 
outer  condyle,  we  found  that  the  tibio-tarsus  of  No.  3  has  a  length 
of  6.7  cms,,  while  a  similar  measurement  of  the  tibio-tarsus  No.  11 
is  found  to  be  7.4  cms.  In  this  latter  specimen  the  cnemial  process 
has  been  broken  off  and  lost.  So  great  a  distance  as  this  leads  me 
to  believe  that  this  longer  bone  belonged  to  a  different  species  of 
Ptiffinus,  and  that  the  tarso-metatarsus,  marked  No.  10,  probably 
belonged  to  the  same  species.  Indeed,  I  believe  that  the  bones  Nos. 
10  and  11  belonged  to  the  same  individual,  inasmuch  as  they  articu- 
late perfectly  when  brought  together. 

So  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  discover,  there  have  been  but  few 
remains  of  fossil  bones  of  the  genus  Puffinus  described.  Two  of  these 
are  to  be  found  in  M.  Milne-Edwards's  work  (Oiseaux  Fossil es  de  la 
France,  T.  II),  where,  upon  page  588,  he  says,  "  Le  Puffinus  conradi 
provient  du  Miocene  du  Maryland  ;  ses  dimensions  se  rapprochaient 
de  celles  du  Puffin  cendre  {Puffi)ma  cinereus  Gmelin),  de  la  cote  oc- 
cidentale  d'Amerique;"  and  again,  on  page  572,  in  speaking  of 
Puffinus  arvernensis  (  rare  a  Langy),  be  says,  "  Cette  espece,  ayant 
ete  decouverte  depuis  la  publication  du  chapitre  relatif  aux  oiseaux 
fossiles  de  cette  famille,  sera  decrite  et  figuree  dans  un  travail  sup- 
piemen  taire."  Upon  comparing  the  bones  before  me  with  the  fig- 
ures of  the  corresponding  ones  of  Pvffimis  cinereus  as  given  us  by 
Milne-Edwards,  I  find  that  the  latter  species  is  very  considerably 
larger  than  were  either  of  the  former,  so  that  bones  Nos.  10  and  11 
did  not  belong  to  a  specimen  of  Ptiffinus  conradi.  In  order  to  make 
certain  that  M.  Milne-Edwards  had  not  described  Puffinus  arvern- 
ensis, I  wrote  him  concerning  that  species,  and  received  the  follow- 
ing reply,  accompanied  by  the  drawings  he  mentions  (Plate  XXIV, 
figs.  1  and  2),  for  both  of  which  distinguished  favors  my  most  sincere 
thanks  are  here  tendered. 

Museum  D'Histoire  Naturelle,    Direction, 

9  Juillet  1896. 
Cher  Monsieur : 

Je  m'  empresse  de  vous  envoyer  un  dessin  du  tarso-metatarsien  du 
Puffinus  arvernensis  de  St,  Gerand  le  Puy.  Je  dois  decrire  cette 
espece  dans  un  supplement  a  mon  Oiseaux  fossiles  mais  yous  pouvez 
faire  tel  usage  qui  vous  conviendrai  du  dessin  etle  publier  si  vous  le 
desirez;  il  est  fait  de  grandeur  naturelle. 

Croyez,  cher  Monsieur,  a  mon  sentiments  tres  distingu^s. 

A.  Milne-Edwards. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  511 

Unfortunately,  among  the  bones  of  the  smaller  species  of  Piiffinns 
before  me  there  occurred  no  specimen  of  a  tarso-metatarsus,  so  that 
I  am  unable  to  say  whether  they  belong  to  the  species  described 
by  Professor  Milne-Edwards  naPuffinus  arvernensis,  or  not.  Never- 
theless, upon  measuring  across  the  condyles  at  their  lower  aspects^ 
and  taking  a  similar  transverse  diameter  of  the  summit  of  the  tarso- 
metatarsus  in  Professor  Milne-Edwards'  drawing,  it  becomes  evident 
that  Paffinns  arvernensis  must  have  had  a  tibio-tarsus  quite  like  the 
one  shown  in  figure  9  of  the  plate.  In  other  words,  I  believe  the 
fossil  bones  of  the  smaller  species  of  Puffinus  in  Mr.  Eyerman's  col- 
lection very  probably  belonged  to  one  or  two  individuals  of  the 
type  referred  to  by  Professor  Milne-Edwards  as  P.  arvernensis,. 
which  species  is  based  upon  the  tarso-metatarsus  shown  in  figures  1 
and  2.  In  any  event,  there  is  so  much  likelihood  of  this  being  the 
case,  that  I  do  not,  at  present,  feel  justified  in  describing  these  bones^ 
as  having  belonged  to  a  species  unknown  to  science  up  to  the  pres- 
ent writing.  These  bones  have  all  the  characters  of  the  correspond- 
ing ones  as  found  in  the  skeleton  of  the  Shearwater  (P.  horealis)  be- 
fore me,  with  the  exception  of  some  differences  in  the  tibio-tarsi  and 
the  humeri.  In  the  former  the  cnemial  crests  are  much  produced 
upward,  as  in  Puffinus  cinereus,  and  call  to  mind  this  bone  in 
the  Grebes ;  while  in  the  latter,  there  is  a  very  remarkable  flatten- 
ing of  the  bone  in  the  same  plane  in  which  the  radial  crest  lies. 
This  flattening  is  well-shown  in  figure  7  of  the  plate. 

As  has  already  been  said  above,  the  tarso-metatarsus  in  lot  No. 
10  and  the  tibio-tarsus  No.  11,  undoubtedly  belonged  to  a  larger 
species  of  Puffinus,  and  one  probably  smaller  than  the  P.  conradi  of 
Marsh  :  in  fact,  to  a  form  having  a  size  between  P.  arvernensis  and 
P.  conradi  and  hitherto  undescribed.  Therefore,  I  propose  the  fol- 
lowing for  this  species  : — 
Puffinus  eyermani  n.  sp. 

Based  on  a  tibio-tarsus  and  a  tarso-metatarsus,  both  of  the  right 
side.  They  belonged  to  adult  individuals,  or,  what  is  more  likely, 
to  the  one  and  same  individual,  as  the  bones  articulate  together 
perfectly.  Disregarding  the  fractured  remains  of  the  cnemial  crest 
of  the  tibio-tarsus,  and  measuring  between  summit  and  lowest  point 
of  condyle,  this  bone  has  a  length  of  7.4  cms,  while  the  tarso-meta- 
tarsus is  5.2  cms.  long.  They  both  present  characters  agreeing  in 
the  main  with  the  corresponding  ones  in  Puffinus  cinereus  GmeL 


512  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  shaft  of  the  tibio-tarsus  is  somewhat  flattened  or  compressed  in 
the  antero-posterior  direction,  and  its  distal  third,  to  some  degree, 
curves  gently  mesiad.  The  fibular  ridge  is  well-marked,  and  occu- 
pies rather  more  than  the  upper  third  of  the  external  border  of  the 
bone.  Distal!}',  we  find  the  usual  osseous  bridgelet  spanning  the 
deep  tendinal  groove  upon  the  anterior  aspect.  In  the  intercondy- 
lar space,  posteriorly,  there  is  a  faint  indication  of  a  median  longi- 
tudmal  lidge,  that  is  also  visible  in  Piiffinus  borealis  (fig.  8).  The 
tarso-metatarsus  (Plate  XXIV,  figs.  3  and  4)  is  straight,  and  is  grooved 
for  tendons  the  entire  length  of  its  anterior  face,  and  faintly  so  upon 
its  posterior  aspect.  Distally  the  mid-trochlear  process  is  placed  the 
lowest  on  the  end  of  the  shaft,  while  the  internal  one  is  the  highest, 
and  is  directed  backward  and  slightly  inward.  The  hypotarsus  is 
well-developed  and  is  twice  vertically  pierced  for  the  passage  of 
tendons,  while  faint  groovings  also  exist  upon  its  postero-external 
surface.  In  the  fossa  at  the  proximal  end  of  the  bone,  just  below 
the  summit,  are  two  small  foramina  piercing  the  shaft  from  before 
backward.     The  sides  of  the  shaft  are  flat. 

These  bones  were  discovered  in  the  Grotto  Pietro  Tamponi,  Tavo- 
lara,  an  island  in  the  Gulf  of  Terranova,  a  few  miles  off"  the  north- 
east coast  of  Sardinia. 

The  species  is  extinct,  and  it  gives  me  pleasure  to  name  it  in 
honor  of  the  well-known  paleontologist,  John  Eyerman,  Esq.,  of 
Easton,  Pennsylvania,  in  whose  collection  the  specimens,  at  the 
present  writing,  belong. 

The  specimen  marked  No.  12,  represents  the  upper  part  of  the 
right  tibio-tarsus  of  a  bird  of  some  considerable  size  (see  fig.  1  of 
the  text).  Its  procneniial  process  is  slightly  broken  away  above, 
and  the  free  margin  of  the  summit  of  tlie  bone  behind  is  also  chipped 
away. 

We  have  in  the  National  Museum  a  great  number  of  specimens 
of  the  fossil  bones  of  birds  received  several  years  ago  from  Professor 
Alf.  Milne-Edwards,  and  among  these,  numerous  examples  of  the 
long  bones  of  Palceolodus  crassipes,  P.  amhiguus  and  others  of  the 
genus,  but  this  bone  did  not  belong  to  a  Palceolodus.  Upon  com- 
paring with  such  material  as  I  had  of  Pelecanns  gracilis,  it  was 
quickly  seen  that  it  never  came  from  a  Pelican,  and  the  fact  was 
further  confirmed  by  carefully  comparing  it  with  the  tibio-tarsi  of 
numerous  species  of  existing  forms  of  that  group.  In  short  it  has 
been  compared  by  me  with  every  figure  of  the  larger  birds  where 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


513 


the   tibio  tarsus   has  been   figured,  in  all  the  works   at  hand,   as 

well  as  with  the  tibio-tarsi  of  representative 
groups  of  existing  types. 

By  differential  diagnosis,  I  am  satisfied 
that  its  owner  was  a  Tantalus,  and  that  too, 
very  near  Tantalus  loculator.  Moreover  it 
was  a  T'a?ito^«.sof  almost  precisely  the  same 
size  as  T.  loculator,  and  its  ti  bio-tarsus  pre- 
sents characters  agreeing  very  closely  with 
that  species.  The  agreement  is  so  close 
that  it  would  appear  unnecessary  to  remove 
it  from  that  genus,  I  therefore  propose  the 
following  : 
Tantalus  milne-edwardsii  n.  sp. 

Based  upon  the  upper  part  of  the  right 

tibio-tarsus  (nearly  complete).     Characters 

as  in    Tantalus   loculator,  to  which   latter 

species,   the  present  one  must  have    been 

closely  related.      This  species  I  name    in 

honor   of  the  very   distinguished    French 

savant  Professor  Alphonse  MilueEdwards, 
Fig.   1.     Anterior  aspect      i  t       i     i  •  a    i  •     j.i  . 

of  the  tibio  tarsus  of  Tan-  ^^'^^^  "^^  only  has  assisted  me  in  the  present 

talus  mUne-edwnrdsli,  being  paper,  but  to  whom  modern  science  owes  so 

the  upper  part   from  the  ^^^^^^^  j^  ^^  ^         departments. 

right   leg.       rsatural   size;  .        •'        ^ 

drawn  by  the  author.^  The  specimen   was  collected    at  Grive- 

St.  Alban  (Isere),  and   it  is  at  this  writing  in   the   collection    of 
Mr.  Jno.  Eyerman,  of  Easton,  Pennsylvania,  U.  S.  A.* 

Specimen  No.  13,  (the  lower  half  of  a  bird's  tarso-metatarsus, 
from  the  right  pelvic  limb),  evidently  belonged  to  some  adult,  me- 
dium sized  species  of  a  falconine  form,  probably  now  extinct.  As  I 
have  not  the  proper  material  in  sufficient  quantity  to  compare  this 
specimen  with,  I  do  not  feel  warranted  in  naming  it. 

^  After  this  drawing  was  made,  two  other  small  fragments  were  found  that, 
when  placed  in  .situ,  simply  completed  the  distal  broken  part  of  this  fragment. 

*  In  comparing  this  bone,  the  following  works  and  the  plates  and  figures 
thereto  were  also  examined.  Cuvier :  Recherches  sur  les  ossements  fossiles, 
t.  Ill,  p.  327,  pi.  LXXIII,  fig.  14  {Ibis)  ;  P  Gervais  :  Oiseaux  fossiles,  these, 
1844,  p.  39;  Idem,  Jour.  1.  Iiistitut.,  1844,  p.  293;  Ide7n,  Zoologie  et  Palaeon- 
tologie  franpaises,  1st  edit.,  p.  230,  pi.  XLIX,  figs.  2,  3,  p.  L,  fig.  1  {Nume- 
nius  gypsorum)  ;  2d  ed.,  1859,  p.  410;  Giebel :  Fauna  der  Vorwelt,  1847,  t. 
II,  p.  28  (Tantalus  fossitis).  I  think  the  specimen  here  alluded  to  is  either 
a,  Numenius  or  an  Ibis,  surely  not  a  Tantalus. 


514  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

For  specimen  No.  14,  see  list  above  ;  too  fragmentary  for  correct 
identification.  To  be  named  with  certainty,  No.  15  is  also  too  frag- 
mentary; while  the  remarks  about  specimen  No,  15,  apply  with 
equal  truth  to  No.  16,  though  this  last  has  hardly  anything  beyond 
the  trochlear  processes,  the  distal  part  of  the  shaft  having  been 
broken  off,  but  a  few  millimeters  above  the  usual  foramen  found  in 
this  locality. 

Specimen  No.  1 7  is  a  very  perfect  one,  being  the  left  humerus  of 
an  adult  Partridge,  Palceortyx  brevipes  of  Milne-Edwards.*  It  de- 
mands no  special  description. 

In  specimen  No.  18,  we  have  the  fragments  of  the  upper  two- 
thirds  of  the  right  tarso-metatarsus,  (probably)  of  some  small  pas- 
serine bird,  which  my  meagre  material  for  comparison  will  not 
admit  of  my  identifying.  On  this  bone  the  hypofai'sus  is  short,  be- 
ing composed  of  two  lateral  portions  enclosing  a  tendinal  foraminal 
canal  between  them.  Both  of  these  lateral  portions  are  distinctly 
grooved  in  the  vertical  direction,  upon  their  posterior  aspects,  by 
tendinal  channels.  To  identify  such  a  minute,  fragmentary  speci- 
men as  this,  one  should  have  before  him  for  comparison  the  skele- 
tons of  a  representative  series  of  the  small  birds  of  France  in  its 
existing  avifauna,  as  well  as  access  to  such  fossil  forms  as  have  been 
discovered  or  described  up  to  date.  To  appreciate  the  difficulty  of 
diagnosis  of  this  nature  one  has  but  to  make  the  trial  to  distinguish 
the  complete  skeleton  of  any  one  of  our  American  Warblers  from 
those  of  its  near  allies  in  other  genera,  and  my  meaning  will  be 
made  clear.  How  much  more  difficult  is  it  then  to  name,  with  any 
hope  whatever  of  being  near  the  truth,  the  bits  of  bones  of  birds  of 
no  greater  size  that  existed  in  a  former  geologic  age  of  the  earth. 
With  skulls,  sterna,  pelvis  and  perfect  bones  all  absent  this  really  be- 
comes impossible — absolutely  so  in  the  absence  of  the  material  above 
indicated. 

These  remarks  apply  with  equal  truth  to  specimens  Nos.  19-23 
inclusive ;  the  small  pair  of  carpo-nietacarpi  (No.  20)  in  this  series 
are  the  smallest  fossil  bones  of  this  part  of  the  skeleton  I  have  ever 
seen  ;  either  one  of  them  is  as  small  as  the  unidentified  specimen  of 
this  bone  in  Milne-Edwards'  great  work,  and  figured  on  Plate  155, 
(Atlas  2,  fig.  11)  ;  they  are,  however,  from  a  difierent  species. 

*  See  Recherches  siir  les  Oiseaux  fossiles  de  la  France,  Atlas  2,  Plate  130,  fig. 
13. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES    OF  PHILADELPHIA.  515 

The  fi-agment  of  bone  in  specimen  No.  24  is  from  an  Owl — the 
extinct  Bubo  arvernensis  of  Milne-Edwards  (see  Oiseaux  fossiles,  At- 
las 2,  Plate  192,  figs.  11  and  15). 

No.  25  is  the  humerus  of  some  medium-sized  bird  equal  to  about 
that  of  Tringa  gracilis  of  Milne-Edwards,  but  it  did  not  belong  ta 
that  species.  It  is  non-pneumatic,  with  characters  in  niuay  re- 
spects agreeing  with  the  humeri  of  small  water  birds,  as  plovers  or 
sand  pipers,  but  it  lacks  the  epicondyloicl  jwocess  possessed  by  this 
bone  in  both  Gulls  and  Tringce.  It  has  a  length  of  3.5  centimeters. 
I  do  not  care  to  pronounce  upon  it  before  comparing  with  fuller 
material. 

No.  26,  a  small  bird's  ulna,  but  2.1  centimeters  long  and  -with  a 
very  sharp  olecranon  process,  comes  in  the  same  category  as  Nos. 
19-23,  (see  remarks  above).  Its  shaft  is  distinctly  marked  by  6 
papillse  for  the  quill-butts  of  the  secondary  feathers,  they  being 
about  2  mm.  apart. 

The  bones  in  Nos.  30  and  31  are  the  distal  ends  of  the  tarso- meta- 
tarsi of  small  Gulls  of  the  genus  Larus.  The  first  I  take  to  have 
belonged  to  an  individual  of  the  extinct  species  Larus  totanoides^ 
and  the  other  to  the  somewhat  smaller  species  Larus  elegans  both  of 
Milne-Edwards.'  I  am  the  more  convinced  of  this,  inasmuch  as  I 
have  compared  them,  at  least  in  the  case  of  Larus  elegans,  with  a 
number  of  the  fossil  tarso- metatarsi  of  that  extinct  form  in  the  pal- 
seontological  collections  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum,  and  the 
agreement  is  altogether  too  close  to  admit  of  any  doubt. 

Explanation  of  Plate  XXIV. 

Fig.  1,  Left  tarso-metatarsus  of  P((^nus  aryernensis,  anterior  aspect, 
natural  size.  From  a  drawing  by  Prof.  Alphonse  Milne- 
Edwards. 

Fig.  2.  Left  tarso-metatarsus  of  P?f^/r»s  arverne?ists.  Same  bone  as 
shown  in  figure  1.  Natural  size,  and  viewed  upon  its  exter- 
no-lateral  aspect. 

Fig.  3.  Right  tarso-metatarsus  of  Pi/^ntts  eyermani,  anterior  aspect,, 
natural  size.     Drawn  by  the  author. 

Fig.  4.  Right  tarso-metatarsus  of  Puffinus  eyermani.  Same  bone  as 
shown  in  figure  3.  Natural  size  and  viewed  upon  its  exter. 
no-lateral  aspect.     Drawn  by  the  author. 

^  Oiseaux  foKsiles,  Atlas  1,  Planche  57,  fig,  12. 
'  Loc.  cit.,  Planche  56,  fig.  II. 
34 


516  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Fig.  5.  Right  coracoid  of  Puffinus  arvernensis  (?),  anterior  aspect, 

natural  size. 
Fig.  6.  Anconal  aspect  of  the  left  humerus  of  Puffinus  arvernensis 

(?),  natural  size. 
Fig.  7.  Ulnar  surface  of  the  left  humerus  of  Puffinus  arvernensis  (_?), 

natural  size. 
Fig.  8.  Right  tibio-tarsus  of  Puffinus  eyermani,   natural  size   and 

viewed  upon  its  anterior  aspect.      Cnemial  process  restored 

in  dotted  line. 
Fig.  9.  Right  tibio-tarsus  of  Puffinus  arvernensis  (?),  natural  size, 

and  viewed  upon  its  anterior  aspect.     Figures  5-9  inclusive, 

drawn  by  the  author. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  517 


MAMMALS   COLLECTED    BY  DR.   A.  DONALDSON    SMITH    DURING   HIS 

expedition  to  lake  rudolf,  africa. i 
By  Samuel  N.  Rhoads. 

In  the  following  annotated  list  of  the  mammals  collected  by  Dr. 
A.  Donaldson  Smith  during  his  African  expedition  of  1894-95 
across  Somaliland  to  Lake  Rudolf,  I  have  included  all  the  species 
coming  under  my  observation  which  were  brought  back  by  Dr. 
Smith  to  Philadelphia. 

The  greater  part  of  the  collection  was  most  generously  given  to 
the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  but  a  large  part 
of  the  skulls,  mounted  heads  and  skins  of  the  larger  game  have  been 
reserved  by  Dr.  Smith,  and  at  present  form  an  exhibition  at  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania.  Those  species  in  the  list  not  repre- 
sented in  the  donation  to  the  Academy  are  preceded  by  an  aster- 
isk. 

The  entire  collection  represents  50  genera  and  77  species,^  seven  of 
which  are  here  described  as  new. 

Dr.  Smith  is  to  be  congratulated  on  having  brought  to  Philadel- 
phia by  far  the  largest,  most  comprehensive  and  best  preserved 
faunal  collection  of  African  mammals  ever  acquired  by  an  Ameri- 
can institution,  and  not  only  many  species,  but  several  genera  are 
for  the  first  time  made  accessible  to  students  on  this  side  of  the 
Atlantic. 

Owing  to  the  almost  total  lack  of  specimens  in  this  country  for 
comparison,  and  the  widely  scattered  literature  relating  to  African 
mammalogy,  the  author  has  been  severely  handicapped  in  his  study 
of  the  collection,  and  it  is  hoped  that  the  paper,  as  now  presented, 
will  be  judged  accordingly. 

1  At  the  request  of  Dr.  Smith  this  paper  was  originally  prepared  for 
publication  in  his  forthcoming  book  on  the  Lake  Rudolf  expedition.  Less 
than  three  months  were  alloted  the  writer  for  its  preparation.  The  mss.  was 
subsequently  returned,  with  other  papers  of  scientific  character  intended  for 
the  work,  on  account  of  lack  of  space  and  was  then  accepted  for  publication 
in  the  Proceeoings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 

^This  includes  four  genera  and  live  species  of  bats,  which  have  been  worked 
up  by  Dr,  Harrison  Allen  in  a  separate  paper,  viz  :  Megaderma  frons,  Meg- 
derma  cor,  Nycteris  capensis,  Scotophilus  miaiinus  and  Adelonyderis  sp.  ? 


518  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

*1.  Hippopotamus  amphibius  L.     Hippopotamus. 

A  skull  and  several  incisor  teeth  are  in  the  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania series. 

*2.  Phacochoerus  afrioanus  (Gmel.).     ^Elian's  Wart  Hog. 

A  skull  and  a  mounted  head  are  in  the  University  of  Pennsylva- 
nia exhibit. 

*"3.  GirafFa  camelopardalis  (L.).     Ethiopian  Giraffe. 

The  skull  of  a  female,  with  full  head  and  neck  skin  to  shoulders, 
was  mounted  at  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 
It  exhibits  the  peculiarities  defined  by  Mr.  Thomas'  for  the  northern 
form.  The  application  to  this  form  of  the  name  cethiopica  of  Sun- 
devall*  is,  however,  incorrect,  as  the  camelopardalis  of  Linnaeus  is 
assigned  by  that  author  to  "  Ethiopia  and  Sennar."^  This  makes 
Sundevall's  name  a  synonym,  the  southern  race  remaining,  so  far  as 
I  can  ascertain,  unnamed.  I  would  propose  for  the  latter  the 
name    Giraffa  camelopardalis  australis,  Nom.  nov. 

*4.  Bubalis  swaynei  Scl.     Swayne's  Hartebeest. 

Represented  by  five  (?)  skulls  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania 
series. 

5.  Bubalis  cokei  (Giintb.).     Coke's  Hartebeest. 

One  pair  of  horns  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia  (No.  3,933),  and  four  mounted  heads  in  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania. 

*6.  Damaliscus  jimela  (Mtsch.).    Topi  Antelope. 

One  mounted  head  and  one  skull  in  the  University  of  Pennsylva- 
nia represent  this  species. 

7.  Madoqua  guentheri  Thos.     Gunther's  Dik-dik. 

A  mounted  male  specimen,  entire,  with  skull  separate,  in  the 
Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  series  (No.  3,900),  be- 
longs to  this  very  distinct  species.  While  the  colors  of  the  back 
and  head  closely  resemble  those  of  the  following  (M. phillipsi),  the 
tawny  ochraceus  tints  of  the  belly  oi'  jjhillipsi  constantly  distinguish 
it  from  the  white  bellied  (juentheri.  In  the  Academy's  specimen 
of  the  latter,  the  back  is  quite  as  gray  as  in  Thomas'  and  Sclater's 
figure  of  phillipsi,^  not  rufous,  as  there  figured. 

^Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1894,  p.  135. 

♦K.  Vet.  Akad.  Handl.,  1844,  p.  175. 

«Syst.  Nat.,  1758,  p.  66 

«  Book  of  Antelopes,  1896,  part  V,  pi.  XXXI. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  519 

8.  Madoqua  phillipsi.     Phillips's  Dik-dik. 

Six  flat  skins  and  four  skulls  (Nos.  3,901-3,904),  the  latter  being 
in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadel- 
phia. 

*9.  Oreotragus  oreotragus  ("Forst.,"  Sehreb.).     Klippspringer  Antelope. 

A  mounted  head  and  an  entire  skin  of  this  antelope  are  in  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania  series. 

*10.  ?  Kobus  ellipsiprymnus  (Ogilb.).     Common  Waterbuck. 

One  mounted  head  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  exhibit. 

*11.  Kobus  defassa  (Rupp.).     Defassa  Waterbuck. 

A  skull  is  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  series. 
•••12.  Cervicapra  sp.  ? 

Two  pairs  of  horns  with  portions  of  attached  skulls  indicate  this 
genus  too  imperfectly  to  determine  the  species  they  represent. 

13.  Gazella  thomsoni^  Gunth.     Thomson's  Gazelle. 

Two  skulls  of  males  and  two  skins  (Nos.  3,898, 3,934,  3,935,  3,994) 
were  given  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  The 
skull  of  a  young  male  agrees  exactly  with  Peters'  figure*  of  a  young 
granti  which  Gunther  made  the  type  of  G.  petersi.  A  comparison 
with  our  series  of  granti  and  thomsoni  convinces  me  that  petersi  is  a 
young  thomsoni. 
*14'  Gazella  soemmerringi  berberana  (Mtsch.).     Soemmerring's  Gazelle. 

Several  specimens  which  adorn  the  University  of  Pennsylvania 
collection  belong  to  this  race. 
15.  Lithocranius  walleri  (Brooke).     Waller's  Gazelle. 

Two  skulls,  male  and  female,  (Nos.  3,896,  3,897),  were  presented 
to  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  Three  male 
heads  are  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  series. 

*16.  Oryx  beisa  (Rupp.).     Beisa  Antelope. 

Two  mounted  heads  and  four  skulls  in  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania series.      0.  callotis  Thos.  does  not  seem  to  have  been   met 
with. 
*17.  Strepsiceros  strepsiceros  (Pall.).     Greater  Kudu. 

The  University  of  Pennsylvania  contains  one  mounted  head  of 
this  species. 

'Syn.,  Gazella  petersi  Gunth  ,  Ann.  Mag.  N.  H.,  1884.  p.  426. 
8Monatsb.  Akad.  Wis.  Beri.,  1879,  p.  832,  PI.  V. 


520  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

*18.  Strepsiceros  imberbis  BIyth.     Lesser  Kudu. 

A  head  of  this  animal  was  taken  by  Dr.  Smith.  It  is  now  beauti- 
fully mounted. 

19.  Equus  grevyi  M.  Edw.     Grevy's  Zebra. 

A  remarkably  large  skull  was  added  to  the  already  fine  collection 
of  zebra  crania  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia.  Its  greatest  length,  from  the  anterior  edge  of  the 
premaxillary  to  the  superior  rim  of  the  occiput,  measured  in  a  straight 
line,  is  633  mm.  Its  greatest  zygomatic  width  is  220  mm.  The 
alveolar  length  of  the  upper  molar  series  is  170  mm.,  and  the  great- 
est length  of  mandible  is  507  mm.  The  specimen  is  of  an  old  male 
and,  compared  with  a  skull  of  E.  hurchelli  of  same  age,  is  100  mm. 
longer,  and  is  nearly  50  mm.  longer  than  the  largest  skull  of  E. 
caballus  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of 
Philadelphia.  Compared  with  that  of  hurchelli  the  skull  of  grevyi  is 
remarkably  long  for  its  width,  due  to  the  great  relative  proh)ngation 
of  the  rostral  and  occipital  regions.  In  hurchelli  the  length  of 
skull  is  2.63  times  the  width,  in  grevyi  it  is  nearly  three  (2.88)  times 
the  width.  The  lower  molar  series  differ  markedly  from  hurchelli 
in  their  uniformly  massive  size  and  great  width,  the  same  series  in 
btirchelli  becoming  much  narrowed  posteriorly.  In  the  last  named, 
the  postpalatal  fossa  reaches  opposite  middle  of  m.  2,  in  grevyi  it 
barely  reaches  opposite  the  anterior  alveolus  of  m.  3. 

*20.  Rhinoceros  bicornis  L.     Round-eared  Rhinoceros. 

Of  the  smaller  two-horned  species  there  is  a  mounted  head  and 
six  pairs  of  horns  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  collection. 
With  the  exception  of  one  pair,  the  horns  more  closely  resemble 
those  figured  by  Smith**  in  his  plate  of  Rhinoceros  simus  than  those  of 
bicornis  figured  by  the  same  author  on  plate  2. 

Dr.  Smith  informs  me  that  while  he  encountered  B.  siinus,  no 
specimens  were  brought  by  him  to  this  country. 

21.  Procavia  brucei  somalica  Thomas.    Somali  Tree  Hyrax. 

An  adult  female  (No.  3,818)  taken  at  "Shebeli"  September  4, 
1894,  and  another  female,  two-thirds  grown,  taken  March  3,  1894, 
fully  confirm  Dr.  Thomas'  diagnosis'"  of  this  subspecies  of  brucei. 
Compared  with  an  adult  female  specimen  of  brucei  from  the  Kyahn 
Mountains,  near  Mount  Kilima-Njaro,  kindly  loaned  'me   by  the 

9  111  list.  Zool.  S.  Afr. 
">  P.  Z.  S.,  1892,  p.  71. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  521 

Smithsonian  Institution,  the  paler  sandy  cast  of  the  Somali  speci- 
mens is  very  noticeable,  and  the  dorsal  spot  is  almost  white  instead 
of  ochraceus.  The  difference  in  size  of  skulls,  between  the  type  and 
the  subspecies,  although  the  Shebeli  specimen  is  the  older,  is  very 
marked,  but  no  specific  distinctions  are  noticeable. 

*22.  Elephas  africanus  BIbch.    African  Elephant. 

Ten  small,  and  one  large  pair  of  tusks  adorn  the  University  of 
Pennsylvania  collection. 

23.  Sciurus  sp.  ? 

An  adult  male  specimen  (No.  3,810)  from  Marsabit,  taken  Sep- 
tember 11,  1895,  differs  in  many  particulars  from  any  African  squir- 
rel which  I  can  find  described.  It  may  be  characterized  as  follows  : 
Colors — Upper  head,  back  and  the  slender  tail,  dull  black,  grizzled 
with  tawny  brown  ;  half  the  hairs  of  back  wholly  black,  the  remain- 
der black-based  with  light  brown  ring  and  black  tip.  Brown-ringed 
hairs  more  numerous  on  sides,  giving  a  lighter  shade  to  those  parts. 
Upper  and  lower  sides  of  tail  colored  alike,  blacker  toward  distal 
end  ;  hairs  at  base  black  with  one  to  three  light  brown  rings,  termi- 
nal hairs  longer  and  blacker  with  now  and  then  a  subterminal  brown 
ring.  Upper  feet  and  scrotum  rusty  haired.  Whisker  patch, 
cheeks,  line  around  eyes,  chin,  throat,  breast,  inside  of  legs,  and  a 
narrow  abdominal  line  dirty  tawny  white  or  fawn.  Ears  sub  tri- 
angular, colored  like  back.  Fur  rather  short  and  harsh.  Whis- 
kers sparse,  weak,  black.     Color  of  sides  encroaching  on  abdomen. 

Measurements  (from  skin). — Total  length  320  mm. ;  tail  verte- 
brae 160;  i^encil  43;  hind  foot  40.  Skull— Total  length  40  ram.; 
greatest  breadth  24;  length  of  nasals  11  ;  length  of  mandible  23.5. 

This  squirrel  apparently  comes  nearest  S.  poensis  A.  Smith,  but  it 
lacks  any  trace  of  greenish  color,  is  smaller  and  the  tail  and  body 
are  of  equal  lengths.  Like  poensis  the  five  upper  molars  on  each 
side  are  well  developed  and  permanent. 

It  appears  too  small  and  dark  for  S.  cepapi  A.  Smith.  With  any 
of  the  recently  described  species  it  seems  to  have  no  close  affinities- 

24.  Sciurus  sp.  ? 

A  young  male  squirrel  in  alcohol,  from  the  Ganana  River  (Feb- 
ruary 18,  1895),  is  colored  somewhat  like  S.  annulatus  Desm.  and 
S.  cepapi  Smith.  Like  cepapi  it  has  five  upper  molars,  but  unlike 
either  of  the  above,  its  tail  vertebrae  are  more  than  IV  times  the 
length  of  the  body  without  the  head.      The  specimen  is  about  two 


522  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

thirds  grown  ;  its  total  length  is  269  ram.,  tail  vertebrae  150,  hind 
foot  37,  tail  tuft  40. 

25.  Sciurus  ganana  sp.  nov.     Ganana  Jungle  Squirrel. 

Type,  ad.  9  ,  No.  3,809  ;  collection  of  Academy  of  Natural  Sci- 
ences of  Philadelphia,  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith  Collection ;  taken 
February  18,  1895,  on  the  Ganana  River  at  Bar  Madu. 

Description — Size  smallest  (?)  of  the  East  African  squirrels ;  tail 
1}  times  length  of  head  and  body  ;  head  long  and  very  slender ;  ears 
large,  rounded  and  somewhat  pointed,  without  tufts.  Fur  soft  and 
rather  short.  Above,  uniform  tawny  ochre,  faintly  grizzled  with 
black  ;  below,  tawny  white. 

Upper  tail  colored  like  back,  lower  tail  with  broad  mesial  stripe 
of  clear,  rusty  ochre. 

The  dorsal  hairs  are  black-based  and  black-tipped,  with  a  sub- 
terminal  ring  of  ochre,  as  are  also  those  of  the  upper  head.  On  the 
sides  the  hairs  are  black  at  base  with  long  ochre  tips,  and  on  the 
limbs  and  feet  and  sides  of  neck  the  ochre  almost  obscures  (exter- 
nally) the  darker  basal  color.  The  tawny  white  hairs  of  lips,  cliiu, 
throat,  breast,  abdomen  and  inner  legs  are  unicolor  to  their  bases. 
The  region  just  above  and  below  eyes  is  of  the  same  color.  The 
whiskers  reach  to  tip  of  recumbent  ears  and  are  sparse  and  black. 

The  hairs  of  upper  tail  are  ochre  and  black,  ringed  by  four  to  six 
alternating  zones  of  equal  width,  the  basal  one  being  ochre,  the 
minute  terminal  one  black.  The  lower  mesial  tail  hairs  appear  to 
be  uniform  rusty  ochre,  but  a  glass  reveals  a  narrow,  subterminal 
black  ring.  The  outer  border  and  tip  of  lower  side  of  tail  is  like  the 
upper  side. 

The  skull  is  remarkably  narrow  and  deep  for  its  length,  the  post- 
orbital  process  very  short  and  blunt,  the  brain-case  highly  and  nar- 
rowly arched  and  the  audital  bulla?  widely  separated  from  the 
pterygoid  processes,  owing  to  the  strong,  indented  constriction  of 
the  inner  anterior  border  of  the  bullre.  The  auditory  meatus  is  also 
oom pressed  within  the  outer  lateral  plane  of  the  overhanging  squa- 
mosal.    Upper  molar  series  with  permanent,  cylindric  pm-  2. 

Measurements  (taken  by  collector,  in  the  flesh) — Total  length, 
S20  mm.;  tail  vertebra?,  170;  hind-foot,  38;  height  of  ear  (from 
<;rown,  dry),  9  ;  tail  pencil,  40. 

Skull— Total  length,  39  mm.  ;  basilar  length  (of  Hensel),  32 ; 
greatest  breadth,  21-5;  greatest  depth  (occiput  to  planeof  bullre  and 
incisors),  17  ;  length  of  nasals,  11 ;  post-orbital  constriction  (behind 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  523 

processes),  12  ;  breadth  between  auditory  meatus  (lower  border), 
15  ;  greatest  length  of  mandible,  22  ;  greatest  breadth  of  mandible, 
14. 

One  specimen,  a  skin  of  an  old  female,  with  skull,  in  good  condi- 
tion, represents  this  distinctly  marked  little  squirrel.  So  far  as  I 
am  able  to  distinguish,  it  differs  in  size,  color  and  cranial  characters 
from  any  described  species.  Its  relationships  are  with  S.  cepapi, 
but  its  smaller  size,  light  color  and  high,  narrow,  brain  case,  with 
long  compressed  zygorase,  separate  them. 

On  the  accompanying  label  the  specimen  is  stated  to  have  been 
"shot  in  the  thick  jungle  on  River  Ganana.  Was  accompanied  by 
4  young  ones."  The  well-developed  teats,  2  pectoral,  2  abdominal, 
3  inguinal,  show  evidence  of  recent  nursing. 

26.  Xerus  rutilus  (Cretzsch.).     Abyssiniiin  Spiny  Squirrel. 

Three  adult  skins,  with  skulls,  from  Hargesa,  taken  between  the 
17th  and  28th  days  of  July,  1894,  are  very  similar  in  their  colors, 
being  tawny  ferruginous,  lined  with  black  on  crown  and  along  mid- 
dle back.  The  rostrum,  sides  of  body  and  outer  sides  of  limbs  are  a 
peculiar  fleshy  cinnamon,  each  hair  being  white  tipped.  Underparts 
white,  with  tawny  cast  due  to  exposed  skin.  Hind  feet  whitish 
above.  Tail,  above  faded  rusty,  below  brownish  black  with  faded 
border.  Hairs  worn  and  ragged,  with  new,  brown-black,  white- 
tipped  hairs  sprouting  beneath  the  old,  but  no  evidences  of  molt  on 
body. 

In  another  specimen  (Ad.  9  ,  No.  3,806),  taken  August  29,  1894, 
at  Shebeli,  the  cinnamon  of  sides  is  almost  obscured  by  the  white 
hair  tips,  the  back  is  clear,  black-grizzled  fawn  and  the  hind  head  and 
limbs  like  sides.  The  tail  in  this  specimen  has  quite  recently 
molted  and  is  a  beautiful  black  above,  broadly  margined  and  tipped 
with  glistening  white.  Below  there  is  a  mesial  stripe  of  fleshy 
brown  bordered  with  black  and  the  latter  is  fringed  with  white,  as 
above. 

In  a  very  old  male,  taken  March  23,1895,  the  back  and  hind 
bead  are  much  blacker,  and  the  forehead,  sides  and  limbs  nearly 
chestnut-red  ;  the  whisker  patch,  throat  and  sides  of  head,  neck  and 
a  narrow  lateral  marginal  line,  fulvous.  The  tail  is  in  the  molt  to 
the  black  and  white  pelage  and  the  old  pelage  is  much  darker 
{brown-black)  than  in  the  other  specimens  and  lacks  any  sign  of 
the  mesial  band. 


524  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896, 

Two,  quarter-grown  young,  male  and  female,  in  alcohol,  are  colored 
like  the  adults  on  head  and  fore-limbs,  the  rest  of  the  body  above  is 
sandy-brown,  the  outer  tail  hairs  are  dull  white,  the  upper  vertebral 
line  of  tail  showing  short  black  and  rusty  hairs.  The  tail  (without 
hairs)  is  about  the  length  of  body  without  head.  Its  tip  is  blunt 
and  the  whole  organ  viewed  from  above  is  remarkably  triangular,, 
measuring  across  base,  in  the  spirit  specimen,  about  30  mm.  and 
tapering  evenly  to  the  point.  The  tail  is  much  flattened  and 
a  strongly  depressed  vertebral  line  above  and  below  separates  the 
thickened,  rounded  fleshy  sides.  The  external  sexual  organs  of  the 
young  male  are  very  strongly  developed. 

In  adult  suckling  females  the  teats  are  very  long  (8  to  12  mm.),^ 
2  abdominal,  2  inguinal. 

Specimens  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia. 

No.  3,804  S  ,  El  Dere, March,  23,  1895. 

No.  3,805  ^,Milmil, July  27,  1894. 

No.  3,806  9,  Shebeli, August, 29, 1894. 

No.  3,807  9  ,  Hargesa, July  17,  1894. 

No.  3,808  9  ,  Hargesa, July  18,  1894. 

No.  3,859  Juv.  9  ,  Hargesa, July  18,  1894. 

No.  3,860  Juv.  ^  ,  Hargesa July  18,  1894. 

27.  Lophiomys  smithi  sp.  nov.     Smith's  Maned  Rat.     Plate  XXV. 

Type,  Ad.  $  ,  No.  3,803,  Museum  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of 
Philadelphia.  Collected  at  Sheikh  Husein,  West  Somaliland  (about 
lat.  N.  8°,  long.  E.  41°),  Africa,  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith,  Sept. 
30,  1894. 

Description — Smaller  than  L.  imhausi ;  tail  shorter  than  body 
without  head,  not  tufied.  White  crown  and  ear  patch  separated  by 
a  black  band.  Nasals  narrow  at  base  ;  interorbital  width  of  frontals 
less  than  half  their  postorbital  width.  Jugal  and  frontal  processes 
not  separated  by  the  squamosal. 

Color— above,  from  neck  to  base  of  tail  and  down  to  dividing 
lateral  band  of  brown,  iron-gray,  the  fur  composed  of  two  kinds: 
first,  a  very  fine  silken  under  fur  about  20  mm.  long,  composed  of 
white  hairs,  a  few  of  which  are  wholly  white  but  about  70  per  cent, 
are  brownish-black  at  the  basal  half  Among  these  are  evenly  in- 
terspersed, in  the  proportion  of  about  one  to  eighty,  slender  bristling 
hairs,  60  to  65  mm.  long.     The  basal  fifth  of  these  hairs  is  black. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  525 

followed  by  a  similar  length  of  white,  then  a  much  longer  subter- 
minal  one  of  black,  the  tip  being  white.  The  same  style  of  pelt  and 
coloration  is  found  on  the  sides,  tail,  belly  and  legs,  except  that  the 
bristling  hairs  become  fewer,  almost  disappearing  on  the  shoulders 
and  sides  of  neck  and  becoming  obsolete  on  the  underparts.  The 
tail  is  unicolor,  except  a  short  white  tip.  There  is  a  well-defined 
occipital  band  of  black  between  the  anterior  bases  of  ears,  forming 
a  V-shaped  extension  into  the  middle  of  the  white  crown  patch  and 
connecting  across  the  anterior  base  of  ear  with  the  black  area  of 
cheeks,  nose,  lower  head  and  supraorbital  stripe.  There  is  a  faint 
isolated  patch  of  white  half  way  up  between  the  eye  and  the  mouth, 
and  a  conspicuous  patch  of  the  same  in  front  of  and  below  each  ear. 
The  feet  are  sparsely  clothed  with  coarse,  black  hair,  becoming 
bristly  on  the  toes  and  exceeding  them  in  length.  The  whiskers 
reach  almost  to  shoulders  and  are  wholly  jet-black.  The  backs  of 
ears  are  very  sparsely  clothed  with  short  brownish  and  white  hairs, 
but  their  margins  and  inner  surfaces  are  thickly  set  with  bristly 
white  hairs,  3  to  5  mm.  long.  The  lateral  band  of  short  spinuous 
hairs,  which  divides  the  dorsal  from  the  costal  mane  areas,  begins 
broadly  and  sharply  at  the  base  of  the  neck  on  a  line  with  the  ear, 
and  terminates  indefinitely  near  the  sacrum  in  a  slender  point  of 
hairs.  The  larger  of  the  hairs  measure  about  20  mm.  long  and  are 
olivaceous  brown,  becoming  rusty  near  the  tips,  with  whitish  sub- 
terminal  ring  and  minute  black  tip.  The  median  abdominal  and 
pectoral  areas  are  blacker  than  the  sides. 

Measurements  (of  body,  taken  in  flesh  before  skinning,  by  the 
collector)— Total  length,  380  mm  ;  tail  vertebrae,  140  ;  hind  foot  40  ; 
ear  (from  crown,  dry  skin),  12.5. 

Skull — Total  length,  52  ;  basilar  length  (of  Hensel),  46  ;  greatest 
breadth,  31;  interorbital  constriction,  10;  length  of  nasals,  16; 
greatest  breadth  (anterior)  of  nasals,  6.8  ;  basal  breadth  of  nasals, 
5  ;  length  of  upper  molar  series  (alveolar),  12.2  ;  length  of  mandi- 
ble, 34;  breadth  of  mandible,  15.2. 

A  fine  skin  of  a  male,  with  perfect  skull,  forms  one  of  the  most 
valuable  treasures  in  Dr.  Smith's  collection.  It  was  taken  at  Sheikh 
Husein,  September  30,  1894,  and  is  now  mounted  and  deposited  in 
the  Museum  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 
The  skull  forms  a  separate  presentation  (No.  3,803)  in  the  Acad- 
emy's collection. 


,526 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


According  to  Giglioli,"  there  were  only  four  specimens  of  ioj^/tto- 
mys  known  to  have  been  taken,  up  to  1881  : 

1.  Skin,  skeleton  and  viscera  (Aden,  18d6).  Type  in  Paris  Mu- 
seum. 

2.  Skull  (Maman,  1867).  Type  of  Phractomys  cethiopicus  Veters, 
in  Berlin  Museum. 

3.  Mounted  skin  and  skeleton  (Keren,  Bogos  1870).  In  the  Ge- 
noa Civic  Museum. 

4.  Skin  and  skull  (Erkanid  near  Suakin,  1881).  In  the  Flor- 
ence Zoological  Museum. 

Dr.  Smith's  specimen  appears  to  be  the  fifth.  It  is  certainly  the 
first  to  reach  an  American  museum. 

Compared  with  Milne-Edwards'  illustrations'^  of  the  type  of  im- 
hausi,  the  Smith  specimen  is  somewhat  younger  and  smaller,  with 
much  shorter  tail,  though  fully  adult.  The  pelage  is  more  worn  or 
naturally  shorter  than  in  the  type,  and  consequently  is  appreciably 
lighter  colored  throughout,  owing  to  the  more  exposed  bases  of  the 
fur.  The  tail  almost  wholly  lacks  the  white  tip,  and  the  head  the 
small  white  patch  under  eye,  of  imhausi. 

The  most  marked  color  difference  in  the  Sheikh  Huseiu  example 
is  seen  in  the  division  of  the  white  of  upper  head  by  a  distinct  black 
band  joining  the  dark  area  of  occiput  with  that  of  the  side  of  head 


"Zool.  Anz.,IV,  p.  45. 

i^\rcluv.  du  Mus.,  1867,  pi.  VI  and  VII. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  527 

at  the  upper  anterior  base  of  ear.  There  is  a  large  white  spot  25 
mm.  long  and  10  ram.  wide  reaching  around  lower  base  of  ear  to 
angle  of  jaw,  and  the  ears  are  broadly  tipped  and  fringed  with 
white ;  both  these  characters  not  being  shown  in  Milne-Edwards 
plate  of  imhausi. 

Cranially,  the  Smith  specimen  differs  specifically  in  its  narrow 
interorbital  width,  the  less  produced  expansion  of  the  occipital  re- 
gion beyond  posterior  line  of  the  interparietal  and  the  almost  com- 
plete suppression  of  the  forward  extension  of  the  squamosal.  In  the 
type  of  imhausi  this  bone  forms  an  exterior  rectangular  keystone 
about  3  mm.  square,  at  the  junction  of  the  frontal,  parietal  and 
jugal  bones,  distinctly  separating  the  superior  wing  of  the  jugal 
from  contact  with  the  lateral  wing  (postorbital  process)  of  the 
frontal ;  in  the  Smith  example  these  bones  touch  each  other,  being 
only  separated  anteriorly  by  a  slender,  irregular  extrusion  of  the 
squamosal  5  mm.  wide  and  2  mm.  long. 

The  dentition  of  smithi,  making  allowance  for  the  difference  in 
age,  appears  to  be  almost  identical  with  Edwards'  figures"  of  imhausi^ 
except  that  the  posterior  upper  molar  lies  wholly  outside  the  median 
longitudinal  axis  of  the  anterior  molars.  In  the  latter  the  nasals 
are  broader  posteriorly  than  anteriorly,  these  proportions  being  re- 
versed in  smithi.  In  imhausi  the  postpalatal  notch  is  opposite  ante- 
rior base  of  posterior  molar ;  in  smithi  it  only  reaches  the  middle  of 
that  tooth.  The  paroccipital  processes  in  smithi  are  directed  forward 
against  the  audital  bullse ;  in  imhausi  they  are  directed  backward 
and  separated  from  the  bullse  by  a  distinct  space.  The  mandible  of 
smithi,  while  exactly  the  same  length  as  that  of  imhausi,  is  very 
much  more  slender,  the  greatest  breadth  of  the  latter  being  4  mm. 
greater.  The  three  recorded  specimens'^  all  came  from  a  tract  on  the 
Red  Sea  north  of  the  15th  parallel ;  smithi  was  taken  on  a  mount- 
ain 5,000  feet  high,  in  the  Indian  Ocean-drainage  about  700  miles 
southeast  of  the  most  southern  recorded  locality  of  an  imhausi  spe- 
cimen. 

For  an  account  of  the  capture  of  the  specimen  and  of  the  nature 
of  its  habitat,  the  reader  is  referred  to  Dr.  Smith's  narrative. 

28.  Acomys  spinosissimus  Peters.     Peters'  Acomys. 

A  series  of  Spiny  mice,  taken  between  the  12th  of  March  and  the 
17th  of  April,  1895,  and  preserved  in  alcohol,  seem  to  correspond 

"  Milne  Edwards'  type  was  purchased  alive  at  Aden.     Its  locality  was  ap- 
parently near  that  of  the  others,  as  they  are  regarded  as  the  same  species. 


528  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

most  closely  to  spinosissimus.  One  specimen  (No.  3,872),  a  young 
adult  male,  resembles  Peters'  figure,^''  except  that  it  wholly  lacks 
any  rufous  tinge  ou  the  uniformly  olive-black  upper  pelage.  The 
skull  of  this  specimen  is  so  like  that  of  several  others  taken  about 
the  same  time  that  I  am  induced  to  consider  them  the  same  species. 
Two  very  old  adults  (Nos.  3,868,  3,873),  $  and  9  ,  are  blackish- 
chestnut  on  back  and  upper  head,  and  bright  rusty  cinnamon  along 
the  sides,  the  under  parts  and  feet  white.  The  total  length  of  the 
old  male  is  195  mm. ;  length  of  the  tail,  93  ;  of  hind  foot,  17.  The 
length  of  the  skull  is  29  mm.,  while  that  of  the  dark  specimen  (I.  c.) 
is  2  mm.  shorter.  Two  other  hardly  adult  specimens  (Nos.  3,863, 
3,864)  are  somewhat  intermediate  in  color  between  the  dark  and 
light  examples,  with  which  their  cranial  characters  affiliate  them. 
Their  bellies  and  feet,  however,  are  as  white  as  in  the  old  adults. 

Briefly  stated,  this  series,  if  representing  one  species,  as  I  am  in- 
clined to  think  it  may,  indicates  an  animal,  which  in  the  old  adult 
stage,  is  much  redder  above  and  whiter  below  than  Peters's  descrip- 
tion of  spinosissimus,  which  corresponds  with  the  n)ore  immature 
forms.  It  is  possible  that  the  dark  specimen  only  is  referable  to 
Peters's  species  and  the  others  to  some  andescribed  form. 

The  adult  female  contained  three  large  embryos.  As  the  animal 
grows  older  the  tubercles  on  the  feet  become  more  prominent  and 
interspersed  with  granulations.  The  two  specimens  from  Fiuik 
near  Webi  Shebeli  (Nos.  3,877,  3,878)  are  not  different  from  the 
other  rusty  specimens.  The  young  one  is  pale  fawn  and  seems  to 
show  that  the  dark  olive  coloration  is  not  a  character  of  immatur- 

Specimens  in  alcohol ;  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sci- 
ences of  Philadelphia: 

No.  3,863  .?,  Aimola, March,  12,  1895. 

No.  3,864  9,  LakeAbaya,  .    .    .  May  10,  1895. 

No.  3,865  9  ,  Aimola,  .....  March,  12,  1895. 

No.  3,866  S,  BerMadu,  ....  February  16,  1895. 

No.  3,867  ^,  Aimola, March  14,  1895. 

No.  3,868  9  ,  Aimola March  14,  1895. 

No.  3,869    Foetal,  Aimola, March  14,  1895. 

No.  3,870    Foetal,  Aimola, March  14,  1895. 

:5fo.  3,871    Foetal,  Aimola, March  14,  1895. 

"  Reise  n.  Mossamb.,  1852,  pi.  XXXIV,  fig.  1. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  529 

No.  3,872  $ ,  Argasa,  ....'.  April  17,  1895. 

No.  3,873  ^,  Airaola, March  14,  1895. 

No.  3,877        Juv.  Finik, December  14,  1894. 

No.  3,878  9  ,  Finik, December  14,  1894. 

29.  Acomys  sp.? 

A  male  specimen,  (No.  3,862),  the  only  one  of  this  genus  from 
Sheikh  Husein,  is  lighter  colored  than  any  of  the  foregoing  listed 
under  spinosisshnus,  and  the  tail  is  not  longer  than  the  body.  The 
ears  are  much  larger  than  in  any  Acomys  I  have  examined.  The 
skull  differs  in  the  great  width  of  the  audital  bullae  and  the  abrupt 
compression  of  the  jugal  at  its  squamosal  insertion. 

The  total  length  of  this  mouse  is  150  mm. ;  the  tail,  60  ;  the  hind 
foot,  16.5;  the  ear  from  crown,  11. 

30.  Acomys  wilsoni  Thos.     Short-tailed  Spiny  Mouse. 

A  spirit  specimen  of  an  old  male,  (No.  3,861),  corresponds  so  ex- 
actly with  Oldfield  Thomas's  description'^  of  ivilsoni  as  to  leave  no 
doubt  of  its  identity.  The  tail  is  only  47  mm.  long  ;  the  body,  182  ; 
the  hind  foot,  13.  The  skull  is  24.5  mm.  long  by  11.2  in  breadth. 
The  corouoid  process  is  well  developed  as  compared  with  the  other 
Acomys  in  the  collection. 

This  specimen  was  taken  at  Burga  Camp,  Amara. 

31    Steatoniys  parvus  sp.  nov.     Lesser  Fat  Mouse. 

Type,  No.  3,879,  ad.  9  ;  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  Collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith, 
July  14,  1895,  at  Rusia,  Lake  Rudolf,  Africa. 

Description — Size  small,  tail  short  and  slender,  less  than  one-third 
the  length  of  head  and  body.  Colors  similar  to  Steatomys  pratensis 
Peters  {^^S.  edulis  Ptrs.). 

Above,  uniform  tawny  brown,  lined  with  black,  slightly  darker 
on  back  and  hind  head  ;  sides  more  tawny.  Underparts,  including 
feet,  uniform  soiled  white.  Upper  and  lower  tail,  colored  like  cor- 
responding parts  of  body.     A  white  spot  at  base  of  ear. 

Measurements — Total  length,  107  mm.;  tail  vertebrae,  33 ;  hind 
foot,  13  ;  ear,  from  crown,  8. 

Skull — Total  length,  20  mm;  basilar  length  (of  Hensel)  17; 
greatest  breadth,  11  ;  interorbital  constriction,  3.4  ;  length  of  nasals, 
7.8;  length  of  upper  molar  series,  3.2;  length  of  mandible,  11.3; 
breadth  of  mandible,  6.6. 

>5  Ann.  Mag.  N.  Hist.,  1892,  p.  22. 


530  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Ouly  one  specimen  of  this  genus  is  in  the  collection.  It  is  an 
adult  female  with  teeth  well  worn  and  showing  plainly  three  pairs 
of  teats,  pectoral,  abdominal  and  inguinal. 

The  specimen  is  in  spirit.  It  differs  decidedly  from  S.  pratensis 
and  S.  krebsi,  as  figured  and  described  in  Peters'  work  on  the 
mammals  of  Mozambique,  in  its  diminutive  size.  Its  tail  is  also 
relatively  much  shorter  and  the  ears  smaller  than  in  either  of  these 
species.  Its  colors  resemble  those  given  in  Peters'  plate  (I.  e.)  of 
"  edulis,"  but  lack  the  fawn  tint  of  that  species. 

32.  Mus  barbarus  L.     Greater  Striped  Mouse. 

Six  specimens,  all  in  alcohol,  except  an  adult  female,  are  in  the 
collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 
They  may  be  tabulated  as  follows: 

No.  3,846  Ad.    9  ,  Dumbola  Kalta,  .    .    April  20,  1895. 

No.  3,913  Juv.  $,  LakeAbaya,    .    .    .   May  10,1895. 

No.  3,914  Juv.         Higo, '  .    .    April   8,  1895. 

No.  3,915  Juv.         Higo, April   8,  1895. 

No.  3,916  Juv.         Higo, April   8,  1895. 

No.  3,817  Juv.         Higo, April   8,  1895. 

33.  Mus  microdon  Peters  ? 

One  specimen,  (No.  3,908),  a  female,  taken  April  24,  1895,  agrees 
very  well  with  the  figures  of  Peters'  types,  and  the  measurements 
also  coincide  very  closely  with  bis.  The  tail  is  unicolor,  naked, 
shiny  brown,  tessellated  with  geometrically  arranged  scales.  The 
belly  and  feet  are  whitish,  the  lateral  stripe  fulvous,  the  back  dark, 
grizzled,  brown-black. 

34.  Mus  sp.  ? 

Two  immature  males,  (Nos.  3,884,  3,891),  with  plumbeous  body, 
white  feet  and  naked  tail  of  the  length  of  the  body  without  head, 
comes  from  Sheikh  Husein  ;  October  12, 1894.  They  diflfer  from  any 
other  species  in  the  collection. 

35.  Mus  sp.  ? 

A  series  of  four  skins  with  skulls,  and  five  specimens  in  alcohol, 
represent  a  pretty  large  rat  which  was  only  seen  and  taken  on  grassy 
hills  at  Sheikh  Mahomet. 

They  correspond  closely  to  the  Mm  albipes  of  Riippell. 

No.  3,848  9,  ■' 

No.  3,849  9, November  9,  1894. 

No.  3,850  S, November  4,  1894. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  531 

No.  3,851  9  , -    •    •  November  7,  1894. 

No.  3,883  Juv.  9  , 

No.  3,892  Juv.  9 November  1,  1894. 

No.  3,893  Juv.  9  , November  1,  1894. 

No.  3,906  i  , 

No.  3,908  9  , 

Pseudoconomys  Subgen.  nov.     Type  J/(/»p)-oco)ioo?o)!  (infra). 

Sul)generic  characters.  Alveolar  length  of  anterior  upper  molar 
nearly  thrice  the  greatest  width  of  tooth.  The  two  posterior  sets  of 
transverse  tubercles  of  this  tooth  as  in  the  genus  J/«.s,  but  the  ante- 
rior base  of  the  median  anterior  cusp  is  remarkably  produced  for- 
ward one-third  the  whole  length  of  the  tooth,  and  terminates  ante- 
riorly just  above  the  descending  tooth  root  in  a  false,  rounded  tuber- 
cular cone,  which  lies  so  far  below  the  grinding  plane  of  the  molars 
as  never  (?)  to  become  functional. 

36.  Mus  (Pseudoconomys)  proconodon  sp.  nov.     False-cusp  Mouse. 

Type,  No.  3,880,  ad.  9  ;  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  Collected  by  Dr.  A.Donaldson  Smitli  at 
Sheikh  Husein,  Western  Somaliland,  Africa,  October  13,  1894. 

Description — Size  small,  tail  minutely  and  sparsely  haired,  as 
long  as  body  \\jithout  head,  unicolor,  very  slender  and  finely  annula- 
ted.  Pelage  fine,  silky,  tricolor,  mouse  brown  above,  ochraceous- 
fawn  along  sides,  beneath  white.  Anterior  soles  of  feet  thickly  set 
with  granulated  points,  the  hind  foot  with  two  anterior,  two  median 
and  two  posterior  tubercles,  the  fore  foot  with  three  anterior  and  two 
posterior  tubercles.     Ears  very  small  and  rounded. 

Color  above,  including  head  and  tail,  almost  exactly  as  in  Mus 
musculus,  the  sides  slightly  tinged  with  fawn.  A  well  defined  red- 
dish-fawn stripe  along  sides,  from  shoulder  to  hip-joint,  distinctly 
separates  the  color  of  back  from  the  pure  white  of  belly.  Whole  of 
under  side,  including  upper  lips,  pure  clear  white  to  the  bases  of  the 
hairs.  Feet  whitish-brown  ;  soles  naked  to  heel.  Mammae,  2  pec- 
toral, 2  axillary,  2  abdominal,  2  inguinal.  Skull  characters  as 
above  defined  for  the  subgenus. 

Measurements — Total  length,  128  mm. ;  tail  vertebrae,  56  ;  hind 
foot,  16  ;  ear,  from  crown,  6. 

Skull— Total  length,  22;  basilar  length,  19;  greatest  width,  11  ; 
interorbital  constriction,  4  ;  nasal  length,  8.8  ;  alveolar  length   of 
upper  molar  series,  4.2  ;  length  of  mandible,  13;  greatest  width  of 
mandible,  6.4. 

35 


532  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

One  specimen  in  alcohol  represents  this  distinctly  marked  species. 
Should  it  prove  that  its  peculiar  tooth  pattern  is  shared  by  some 
previously  named  but  imperfectly  described  species,  the  propriety 
of  its  subgeueric  (if  not  generic)  valuecertainly  justifies  the  possible 
synonym.  The  specimen  is  an  old  adult  with  the  teeth  well  worn, 
but  not  enough  so  to  destroy  the  pattern  of  tuberculation  exhibited 
by  earlier'maturity. 

37.  Mus  minutoides  Smith.     Smith's  Lesser  Mouse. 

I  follow  Oldfield  Thomas'®  in  applying  Smith's  earlier  name  to  a 
small,  fawn  colored  mouse  which  corresponds  to  Peters'  admirable 
figures  of  Mus  minimus  in  his  Mammalia  of  Mozambique. 
Specimens  (in  alcohol)  : 

No.  3,910  Juv.  9  ,  Sogida  Volcano,  .  .  April  7,  1895. 
No.  3,911  Juv.  ^^ ,  Sogida  Volcano,  .  .  April  7,1895. 
No.  3,912  Ad.    ^  ,  Jire,  Sakuyu,  .    .    .    .   March  20,  1895. 

38.  Mus  mahomet  sp.  nov.     Sheik  Mahomet  Mouse. 

Type,  No.  3,881,  ad.  $  ;  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  Collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith  at 
Sheikh  Mahomet,  Western  Somaliland,  Africa,  Nov.  (?),  1895. 

Description — Size  small,  slightly  larger  than  Mus  minutoides  (I.  c). 
Tail  well  haired,  slender,  nearly  equal  to  length  of  head  and  body. 
Ears  small,  rounded  and  thickly  haired  ;  pelage  dense,  slightly  his- 
pid, tricolor. 

Color  above,  dark,  black-brown,  becoming  dark  fulvous  brown  on 
sides  and  lower  cheeks.  Lower  parts  grayish-white,  tinged  with 
fulvous  on  breast,  neck  and  throat.  A  distinct  lateral  band  of  deep 
fulvous  extends  along  sides  from  shoulder  to  hip  and  along  ham  al- 
most to  heel,  separating  the  colors  of  upper  and  lower  body.  Feet 
hoary  brown  ;  tail  above,  like  back,  below,  like  feet.  Basal  halves 
of  body  hairs  everywhere  bluish-black.  Hind  feet  with  three  pairs 
of  tubercles,  fore  feet  each  with  three  anterior  and  two  ^josterior 
tubercles.     AVhiskers  medium,  black. 

Skull  as  in  typical  Mus  musculus,  except  that  the  inner  anterior 
face  of  upper  incisors  is  flattened  and  the  bases  of  nasals  extend 
some  distance  beyond  the  upper  posterior  sutures  of  the  premaxil- 
laries.     Coronoid  process  of  mandible  strongly  hooked. 

Measurements — Total  length  103  mm.;  tail  vertebrae,  49;  hind 
foot,  14.5  ;  ear,  from  crown,  6.5. 


16 


P.  Z.  S.,  1888,  p.  13. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  533 

Skull — Total  length,  19.3  rara. ;  greatest  breadth,  9.8  ;  interorbital 
constriction,  3;  length  of  nasals,  7.2;  length  of  mandible,  11.5; 
width  of  mandible,  5.7. 

Two  specimens  of  this  minute  mouse,  both  males,  taken  at  Sheikh 
Mahomet,  appear  to  be  undescribed.  In  some  respects  they  resem- 
ble the  characters  given  by  Riippell  for  Mus  iniberbis,  but  they 
are  much  smaller  with  relatively  longer  tails  and  have  well  devel- 
oped whiskers. 

The  so-called  whiskerless  character  of  Riippell's  animal  appears 
to  me  to  be  an  anomaly  due  to  abnormal  rather  than  natural  cir- 
cumstances. In  any  event,  this  question  in  no  wise  affects  the 
status  of  the  mouse  which  owes  to  an  accident  of  birth  and  locality, 
rather  than  to  its  possession  of  whiskers,  the  august  specific  name 
which  I  have  imposed  upon  it. 

39.  TMus  arborarius  Peters.     Long-tailed  Wood  Mouse. 

Two  specimens,  both  females,  (No.  3,847,  ad.  skin  and  skull ;  No. 
3,890,  juv.  in  alcohol),  from  River  Darde,  September  12,  1894,  are 
of  interest. 

Mr.  Oldfield  Thomas  considers"  M.  arborarius  of  Peters  synony- 
mous with  M.  dolichurus.  If  this  is  the  case,  the  River  Darde  mice  are 
perhaps,  a  good  subspecies  characterized  by  the  excessively  long  tail 
and  smaller  size.  In  our  oldest  specimen  (No.  3,847),  with  molars 
more  worn  than  in  the  adult  type  skull  of  arborarius  figured  by 
Peters,^^  the  skull  is  markedly  smaller  and  shallower. 

After  examining  their  descriptions  it  seems  to  me  that  Peters  has 
plainly  set  forth  good  distinctions  between  his  arborarius  and 
Smuts'  dolichurus.  The  most  marked  character  of  arborarius  is 
the  jDure  white  feet  and  belly,  which  in  dolichurus  are  fulvous.  The 
absence  of  a  preocular  spot  in  arborarius  is  also  to  be  considered. 
In  these  respects  the  Smith  specimens  resemble  arborarius.  The 
feet  and  under  parts  are  immaculate  white  to  the  roots  of  the  hairs. 

In  the  adult,  the  total  length  is  100  mm.,  that  of  the  tail  vertebrae 
being  150  mm.  In  the  younger  one,  contrary  to  the  general  rule 
in  young  murines,  the  proportional  size  of  tail  to  head  and  body  is 
even  greater  than  in  the  adult,  the  former  being  122  mm.  long  and 
the  latter  76  mm. 

In  the  type  of  dolichurus  the  length  of  head  and  body  is  125  mm. 
and  the  tail  145  mm.     In  arborarius  the  head  and  body  of  the  female 

"P.  Z.  S.,  1891,  p.  186. 

'SEeise  n.  Mossam.,  1852,  pi.  XXXV,  fig.  7. 


534  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

is  given  by  Peters  as  120  mm.,  of  the  tail,  160  mm.  These  figures, 
combined  with  the  color  ditferences,  convince  me  of  the  proprietv  of 
sepurating  arborarius!  from  dolicJiurus,  and  at  the  same  time  class- 
ing the  Kiver  Darde  specimens  with  the  former  species.  The  char- 
acter of  the  tail  in  the  alcoholic  specimen  seems  to  indicate  clearly 
its  use  as  a  prehensile  organ. 

40.  Lophuromys  sikapusi  (Temm.).     Sikapusi  Rat. 

Making  allowance  for  the  change  of  color  likely  to  occur  in  spirit 
specimens,  there  is  no  doubt  that  two  hispid  rats  taken  by  Dr. 
Smith  at  Sheikh  Mahomet  are  specifically  the  same  as  the  animal 
minutely  described  by  Peters''"*  as  LasiomyK  afer. 

The  upper  pelage  of  No.  3,909,  a  very  old  female,  is  like  that  of 
the  younger  one  (No.  3,894,  $  ),  a  grizzled,  black,  reddish-brown, 
the  under  parts  light  ochraceous  sharply  defined  against  dark  color 
of  sides.  The  tail  of  the  older  specimen  is  wanting ;  in  the  other 
one  it  is  deep  black  above  and  rusty  beloAv.  The  basal  half  of  up- 
per pelage  is  colored  like  belly,  the  belly  hairs  being  unicolor.  The 
older  specimen  is  very  large,  the  head  and  body  being  130  mm.  long. 

The  skull,  compared  with  Peters'  illustration  (/.  c),  differs  in  the 
shape  of  the  pterygoid  fossa  which,  in  our  examples,  is  widest  at  the 
postpalatal  notch  and  contracts  at  the  pterygoid  processes,  widening 
again  in  a  vase-shaped  outline  as  viewed  from  above. 

The  semi-spinous  character  of  the  pelage  in  this  species  is  inter- 
mediate between  that  of  Mus  and  Acomys. 

41.  Golunda  reichardi  (Xoack).     Reichard's  Bush  Rat. 

Six  fine  skins  and  one  specimen  in  alcohol,  of  a  "  grass  or  bush 
rat,"  were  taken  at  Sheikh  Mahomet.  They  answer  Noack's  descrip- 
tion of  reichardi^-'*  as  contrasted  with  that  of  Peters  for  "  PeJomys 
fallax,"  so  well  that  I  cannot  hesitate  to  assign  them  to  the  former 
and  confirm  the  correctness  of  Noack's  separation  of  the  two.  The 
entire  absence  of  a  sulcus  from  the  incisors  of  any  of  our  specimens 
instantly  distinguishes  them  from  fallax.  The  black  dorsal  streak 
is  plain  in  some,  in  others  nearly  absent. 

The  general  body  color  may  be  said  to  be  ochraceous  to  tawny 
brown,  grizzled  coarsely  with  black.  Sides  of  nose  and  eye-ring 
pure  ochraceous. 

A  note  on  one  of  the  labels  states  this  rat  "  makes  a  prehensile 
[sic]  nest  in  bush  ;  habitat  in  thick  grass." 

19  Monatsb.  Akad.  Berl.,  1S66,  p.  409. 
»«Zool.  Jahrb.,  18S7,  p.  235. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  535 

Specimens  :  Nos.  3,820,  3,821, 3,822, 3,823, 3,824, 3,825, 3,920 :  ^ 

5  ^  s,  2  9  s. 

42.  Dendromys  mesomelas  (Brants).     Long-tailed  Tree  Mouse. 

Three  Dendromys,  all  apparently  taken  at  Sheikh  Mahomet,  were 
presented  to  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelpliia  by 
Dr.  Smith.  Two  of  these,  a  half-grown  young  (No.  3,876)  and 
an  adult  male  (No.  3,874),  are  in  spirits;  the  third,  an  adult 
male  (No.  3,853),  is  a  finely  prepared  skin  with  skull,  and  field  meas- 
urements taken  by  the  collector.  The  two  adults  correspond  so  ex- 
actly with  Smith's  beautiful  plate"  of  D.  typicus,  in  both  color 
and  dimensions,  I  am  unable  to  note  any  differences  of  even  sub- 
specific  value.  The  fact  that  typicus  is  a  South  African  species 
would  lead  to  the  supposition  that  the  Galla  animal  diflfered  there- 
from. In  the  absence  of  specimens  for  comparison,  these  will  be 
classed  under  mesomelas,  Wagner,  Heuglin  and  Trouessart  agreeing 
that  typicus  is  a  synonym  of  that  species.  Matschie^  names  the 
long- tailed  Dendromys  of  East  Africa  D.piimilio  Wagner,  quoting 
"  Munch,  gel.  Anz.,  XII,  1820,  p.  437."  I  am  unable  to  find  this 
publication,  but  would  suppose  some  mistake,  as  Wagner  states 
three  times  in  his  description  of  piimilio  in  Weigmanu's  Archiv.  fur 
Naturgesehichte,  1841,  p.  135,  that  it  is  a  "new  species,"  no  refer- 
ence being  made  to  a  previous  description.  The  chief  distinction 
between  jyumilio  and  mesomelas  (if  any,  Trouessart  and  Heuglin 
considering  them  the  same)  is  the  absence  of  the  dark  dorsal  stripe 
in  the  former. 

From  D.  mystacalis  Heugl.,-'  of  Abyssinia,  the  Sheikh  Mahomet 
specimens  are  distinguished  by  greater  size,  relatively  longer  and 
less  hairy  tail  and  the  presence  of  the  dark  dorsal  stripe. 

In  No.  3,853  (I.e.)  the  total  length  is  177  mm.;  tail,  100;  hind 
foot,  21.  In  No.  3,874  these  measurements  are  respectively  163,  92 
and  22  ;  the  ear  from  crown  is  11.5. 

43.  Dendromys  sp. 

A  young  spirit  specimen  (No.  3,876),  whose  skull  shows  it  to  be 
about  two-thirds  grown,  diflfers  so  markedly  in  the  black  color  of 
the  ears  and  orbital  region  and  the  white  spot  at  the  bases  of  ears 
and  the  tail  being  only  equal  to  the  head  and  body  in  length,  that 
there  is  little  doubt  of  its  belonging  to  a  diflferent  species  from  the 

^i  Illiist.  Zool.  S.  Afr.,  1849,  pi.  34,  fig.  1. 

2=  Die  Saug.  Ost  Afr.,  1895,  p.  49. 

23  Nov.  Act.  Acad.  Cse-s.  Leop.,  1863  (Sept.  1862),  p.  5. 


536  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

foregoing.     Its  date,  November  12,  1894,  would  show  it  to  have 
been  taken  at  Sheikh  Mahomet. 

44.  Gerbillus  sp.  ? 

Two  examples  (No.  3,858,3,929),  both  females  of  early  maturity, 
the  former  taken  on  the  route  to,  and  the  latter  at.  Lake  Rudolf, 
come  nearer  G.  schlegeli  than  to  G.  h'ohmi  or  G.  le.ucogader,  with 
which  they  also  seem  closely  allied.  They  are  darker  and  smaller 
than  leucogaster,  and  have  much  larger  audital  bullse  than  bohrni. 

A.  Smith  considers  G.  ofer  of  Gray  a  synonym  of  G.  schlegeli.  In 
this  connection  I  may  remark  that  the  above  specimens  correspond 
almost  exactly  to  Smith's  plate  (pi.  35)  of  afer  in  the  Illustrations 
of  the  Zoology  of  South  Africa. 

45.  Gerbillus  (sp.  nov  ?). 

So  desperately  involved  is  the  nomenclature  and  classification  of 
the  numerous  African  members  of  this  genus,  I  hesitate  to  impose  a 
name  on  what  appears  to  me  an  undescribed  form,  No.  3,857,  Ad. 
9  ,  from  Hargesa,  taken  July  18, 1894.  While  resembling,  in  gen- 
eral characters  of  skull  and  skin,  Peters'  leucogaster,  it  is  essentially 
different  from  any  Gerbillus  I  have  examined,  in  the  entire  absence 
of  the  posterior  cusp  of  m-  3,  that  tooth  consisting  merely  of  the 
normal  semicircular  loop  with  anterior  curve  and  single  posterior 
crenation.  The  tooth  is  not  much  worn,  so  that  any  trace  of  the 
posterior  cusp  would  be  easily  distinguished,  neither  is  there  the 
faintest  indication  of  it  at  the  base  of  the  tooth,  the  posterior  crena- 
tion nearly  reaching  the  alveolus. 

The  specimen  is  a  dry  skin ;  the  upper  body  colors  are  a  rich, 
dark  fawn,  becoming  tawny  along  sides  and  lined  along  upper  back 
and  head  with  coarse  black-tipped  hairs.  The  ears  and  upper  tail 
are  blackish-fawn,  the  latter  becoming  nearly  black  toward  tip  and 
ochraceous  white  on  the  lower  side.  The  feet  and  under  side  of 
body,  including  lower  cheeks  and  upper  lips,  white  to  the  bases  of 
hairs.  Shorter  whiskers  white,  longer  ones  blackish.  Bases  of 
upper  body  hairs  light  slate. 

The  measurement  of  the  dry  skin  gives  the  total  length  280  mm. ; 
the  tail,  155  ;  the  hind  foot,  37  ;  the  ear  from  crown,  14.  The 
skull  is  60  mm.  long  and  20  wide,  the  nasals  16  long  and  very  slen- 
der, the  supraorbital  bead  very  strong  and  with  an  anterior  flange. 
The  ascending  ramus  of  the  lower  jaw  is  longer  and  more  erect  than 
in  leucogaster  and  its  allies.  The  audital  bullae  are  large,  as  in  leu- 
cogaster, but  the  auditory  meatus  is  compressed. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  537 

46.  Gerbillus  sp.  ? 

Three  young  specimens  (Nos.  3,854,  3,855,  3,928),  two  in  skins  and 
one  in  alcohol,  all  taken  at  Sheikh  Husein,  October  12,  1894.  I  am 
unable  to  even  conjecture  about,  except  to  say  they  differ  specifically 
from  any  others  in  the  collection. 

They  are  about  two-thirds  grown  ;  the  tail  is  just  equal  to  head 
and  body  in  length,  and  the  size  of  skull  and  hind  foot  Avould  indi- 
cate a  species  smaller  than  leiicogaste?:  This  species  is  remarkable 
for  the  blackness  of  the  ears,  back,  rump,  upper  tail  and  soles  of  the 
feet.  The  upper  ground  color  is  brownish-fawn  fading  to  purer 
fawn  on  the  sides.     The  underside  and  feet  are  clear  white. 

No.  3,855  measures  180  mm.  in  length;  tail,  90;  hind  foot,  30. 
The  skull  is  27  mm.  long, 

47.  Gerbillus  pulvinatus  sj).  nov.     Cushioned  Gerbillus. 

Type,  No,  3,930,  ad,  S  ;  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sci- 
ences of  Philadelphia,  Collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith  at 
Rusia,  Lake  Rudolf,  Africa,  August  5,  1895. 

Description — Size  medium,  tail  with  pencil  nearly  li  times 
length  of  head  and  body.  Soles  and  toes  of  fore  and  hind  feet  cush- 
ioned throughout  with  hairs  like  those  of  the  upper  surfaces  of  the 
feet. 

Color  (from  type  alcoholic  specimen)  above,  from  hind  nose  to 
tail,  fawn,  sparingly  lined  with  black  tipped  hairs,  much  blacker 
across  hind  rump  and  thighs.  Upper  tail  fawn,  becoming  blackish- 
brown  toward  penicillate  tip,  the  underside  white  almost  to  tip. 
Hind  feet,  including  lower  portion  of  hind  leg,  white;  forelegs  and 
feet,  lower  parts,  including  sides,  lower  cheeks,  upper  lips,  to  eyes, 
nose,  hinder  bases  of  ears,  superciliary  stripes  and  spots  between  eyes  ' 
and  ears,  white,  the  white  greatly  encroaching  on  the  paler  fawn  of 
upper  sides  and  lower  outer  half  of  hams.  Ears  fully  and  coarsely 
haired  on  outer  surface  with  golden  fawn  anteriorly,  becoming 
darker  on  the  hinder  parts. 

Skull  (teeth  worn,  3  anterior  cusps  of  m.  1  yet  distinct)  ;  first  sec- 
tion of  m-  1  consisting  of  a  single  rounded  oval  cusp,  without  fold  or 
division  and  distinct  from  its  neighbor  ;  second  (median)  transverse 
section  of  same  tooth  consisting  of  two  distinct  circular  cusps  of  equal 
size;  third  (posterior)  section  of  same  is  a  single  elliptic  transverse 
cusp  forming  the  widest  portion  of  the  tooth.  Audital  bullae  large, 
tumid,  widely  separated  from  the  slender  basi-occipital.  Incisive 
foramina  not  reaching  anterior  plane  of  molars. 


538  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Measurements — Total  length,  234  mm. ;  tail  vertebrse,  135  ;  hind 
foot,  26.5;  ear,  from  crown,  10. 

Skull — Total  length,  30.6  mm. ;  basilar  length,  25  ;  greatest 
width,  16;  interorbital  constriction,  6;  length  of  nasals,  12;  length 
length  of  upper  molar  series,  4;  length  of  mandible,  16;  width  of 
mandible,  7.8. 

An  old  adult  male,  in  spirit,  which  I  have  made  the  type,  two 
immature  specimens,  male  and  female  (Nos.  3,926,  3,925)  also  in 
spirit,  and  another  immature  specimen,  a  skin  with  skull  (No.  3,856) 
fully  represent  a  species  which  was  collected  on  the  route  to  and 
from  Lake  Rudolf  between  June  2d  and  August  5, 1895.  The  more 
pallid  pelage  of  the  dry  skin  would  indicate  it  either  to  be  a  desert 
race  of  the  type  or  that  the  specimens  in  alcohol  of  same  age  have 
become  darkened  by  their  immersion.  In  either  case  the  species  is 
lighter  colored  than  any  other  in  the  collection.  I  have  ventured 
its  sepai'ation  because  of  the  remarkable  and  apparently  unique 
character  of  the  hairy- soled  feet.  This  is  quite  as  marked  in  the  old 
as  in  the  young.  These  sole  hairs  form  a  sort  of  cusliion  on  and 
just  behind  the  anterior  tuberculated  part  of  the  bind  and  fore  feet, 
and  even  the  plantar  excrescence  of  the  heel  is  furnished  with  scat- 
tering bristling  hairs.  The  toes  are  almost  as  fully  haired  beneath 
as  above.  The  character  of  the  tuberculation  of  i^i- Jj  as  above 
given,  is  also  strongly  diagnostic. 

48.  Gerbillus  ruberrimus  sp.  moy.     Little  Red  Gerbillus. 

Type,  No.  3,927,  ad.  $  ;  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sci- 
ences of  Philadelphia.  Collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith  at 
Finik  near  Webi  Shebeli,  Somaliland,  Africa,  December  14,  1894. 

Description — Size  smallest  (?)  of  the  African  species  of  the  genus. 
Tail  nearly  IJ  times  the  length  of  head  and  body;  color  above  bril- 
liant red-brown  to  orange-yellow.  Ears  relatively  very  small  and 
round. 

Color  (of  type)  above,  clear  rich  reddish-cinnamon  with  slight 
admixture  of  black  tipped  hairs.  Sides  scarcely  paler,  a  strong  line 
of  demarkation  between  red  of  upper  and  white  of  lower  parts.  Base 
of  ear,  patch  over  eye,  upper  lips,  feet  and  under  parts  pure  white; 
ears  well  haired  and  colored  like  upper  head.  Tail  unicolor,  red- 
dish-fawn throughout,  becoming  blackish  on  the  distal,  penicillate 
hairs  and  terminal  tuft. 

Skull — Basi-occipital  and  audital  bullre  but  slightly  separated  ; 
•ncisive  foramina  not  reaching  the  anterior  plane  of  molar  series. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  539 

Anterior  cusp  of  ml  strongly  indented  by  an  enamel  fold  on  the 
anterior  inner  face  and  connected  by  a  continuous  enamel  wall  with 
inner  median  cusp  of  the  same  tooth.  Outer  median  cusp  of  m.  1 
isolated.  Inner  and  outer  cusps  of  transverse  sections  of  m.  2  and 
*"•  3  coalescent.  Single  anterior  and  median  pair  of  cusps  of  i^i 
forming  a  coalescent  trefoil. 

Measurements — Total  length  160  mm. ;  tail  vertebrae,  95  ;  hind 
foot,  20;  ear,  from  crown,  6. 

Skull — Total  length,  24  mm. ;  greatest  breadth,  12.5  ;  interorbital 
constriction,  4.5;  length  of  nasals,  9.8;  length  of  mandible,  12; 
with  of  mandible,  5. 

The  type  above  described,  is  in  alcohol  and  is  a  well-aged  individ- 
ual with  teeth  worn  half  way  to  the  cusp  bases.  Another  specimen 
(No.  3,852)  a  dried  skin  with  skull,  taken  on  the  same  day  as  type 
is  an  adult,  but  less  aged,  female.  It  differs  only  in  being  deep 
ochraceous  instead  of  being  reddish  above. 

Compared  with  G.  pusillus  Peters,"  to  which  it  appears  most 
nearly  allied,  the  type  of  smithi  is  distinguished  by  its  splendid  red 
color,  by  the  very  small  ear,  relatively  longer  tail  and  smaller  body. 
The  skull  is  of  the  same  length  as  that  of  the  type  ofpvsillus. 

49.  Otomys  irroratus  Brants.     Brants'  Otomys. 

A  young  specimen,  labeled  from  Sheikh  Mahomet,  was  brought 
back  in  alcohol.  It  is  a  female  and  apparently  about  two-thirds 
grown.  It  is  light  brown,  darkly  grizzled  with  black,  the  tail  deep 
black  above,  its  underside  being  grayish.  The  hind  feet  are  black 
with  brownish  hairs  along  the  outside  near  heel.  The  upper  incis- 
ors have  two  distinct  (median  and  inner)  anterior  grooves  and  a 
slightly  concave  flattening  of  the  convex  intervening  space.  The 
lower  incisors  present  one  deep  groove  dividing  the  face  of  the  tooth 
into  an  outer  third  and  an  inner  two-thirds ;  along  the  inner  edge 
of  the  tooth  face  is  a  faint  sulcus,  and  the  intervening  convexity  is 
faintly  flattened  medially.  Owing  to  the  immaturity  of  the  tooth 
these  sulcations  are  less  strongly  developed  than  would  ensue  with 
greater  age,  the  fainter  grooves  only  appearing  at  the  alveolar  sur- 
face. 

50.  Heterocephalus  glaber  Riipp.     Hairless  Mole  Rat. 

An  old  adult  female  (No.  3,923)  in  perfect  condition,  preserved 
in  alcohol,  is  included  in  the  exceptionally  fine  collection  of  small 

"Monatsb.  Acad.  Berl.,  1878,  p.  201. 


540  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

rodents  brought  back  by  Dr.  Smith.  It  was  taken  at  Milmil,  Som- 
aliland,  July  24,  1894.  It  appears  to  be  the  third  recorded  specimen 
in  existence  and  the  second  belonging  to  the  type  species  of  this 
remarkable  genus.  Riippell's  type  of  glaher  came  from  Shoa  and 
was  described"^  in  1845.  It  now  exists  in  the  Senckenburg  Museum 
in  the  form  of  a  mounted  skin  with  the  skull  separate,  the  mandi- 
bles missing.  In  1885  E.  Lort  Phillips  sent  another  specimen  of 
Heterocephalus  inspirits  to  the  British  Museum  from  Central  Somali- 
land.  This  was  made  the  subject  of  a  communication  by  Mr.  Old  field 
Thomas  before  the  London  Zoological  Society,  and  in  the  Proceed- 
ings of  that  Society^**  was  described  as  new  under  the  uame  pJiillipsi, 
after  its  discoverer.  Subsequently  Mr.  Thomas  publi.shed"'  a  more 
complete  account  and  description,  with  figures,  of  the  new  animaU 
and  made  detailed  comparisons  with  glaher. 

It  was  with  no  small  curiosity  that,  after  having  a  photograph 
made  of  Dr.  Smith's  specimen,  I  removed  the  skull  and  com- 
pared it  with  the  figures  of  Riippell  and  Thomas.  Except  in  its 
greater  age  and  size  there  are  no  difl^erences  between  the  animal 
from  Milmil  and  the  Shoa  type. 

The  color  of  the  skin  is  pale  ochraceous  with  a  fleshy  tinge,  be- 
coming pale  livid  on  the  upper  sides  of  head,  neck,  belly,  rump  and 
tail.  The  scattered  hairs  are  a  silvery,  transparent  white.  The 
underparts  are  somewhat  lighter  than  the  upper.  The  skin  of  head 
is  very  thick  and  tough,  more  so  for  example  than  that  of  the  oldest 
and  toughest  Mas  decumanus  that  I  ever  dissected.  The  inner 
finger  of  manus  is  much  shorter  relatively  than  figured  by  Thomas 
for  phillipsi.  Two  mammae  15  mm.  apart  are  faintly  indicated  at 
the  sternum  immediately  between  the  fore  legs  when  they  are  drawn 
down  at  right  angles  to  the  body.  A  series  of  seven  pairs  of  teat- 
like excrescences,  each  bearing  in  its  pitted  center  a  bristling  hair 
5  mm.  long,  extend  along  the  sides  to  the  groin  in  the  position  of 
the  regular  teat  series. 

The  "  wrinkled,  warty"  appearance  of  the  skin,  which  Mr.  Thomas 
thinks  may  be  due  to  the  action  of  spirits  on  the  specimen  of  phil- 
lipsi, I  am  confident  is  perfectly  normal,  as  our  specimen  plainly 
indicates  in  many  ways,  and  it  will  be  seen  that  these  pits,  warts 
"and  furrows  are  closely  correlated  with  the  anatomy  of  the  animal 

^^  Abhand.  Mus.  Senckenb.,  p.  99. 

'«  P.  Z.  8.,  1885,  pp.  HI  1,  612.' 
"  Ibid,  1885,  pp.  845-849. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  541 

as  it  exists  in  life  and  with  the  skin  coloration  and  the  distribution 
of  the  pelage.'^* 

The  skull  of  the  Milrail  animal  is  from  H  to  2  mm.  larger  in  its 
exterior  dimensions  than  that  of  the  type  o^  glaber.  It  belongs  to  a 
much  older  animal,  and  on  this  account  the  differences  in  dimen- 
sions and  formation  of  the  teeth  are,  perhaps,  largely  attributable. 
Among  these  the  most  noticeable  are  found,  1st,  in  the  upper  incis- 
ors each  bearing  upon  their  inner  anterior  surftices  a  distinct  shal- 
low sulcus,  bordered  on  the  inner  side  by  a  sharp  ridge  and  merging 
outwardly  into  the  convexity  of  the  lateral  two-thirds  of  the  face  of 
tooth.  Riippell  states  clearly  that  his  animal  had  unchanneled  in- 
cisors ;  Thomas  says  the  incisors  of  phillipsi  are  "  somewhat  flattened 
and  bevelled  on  their  interior  halves,"  but  does  not  define  a  sulcus. 
The  upper  molars  of  the  specimen  in  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences 
of  Philadelphia  number  six,  as  in  glaber.  Unlike  those  figured  fur 
glaher  their  crown  surfaces  are  of  unequal  dimensions,  m-  2  being 
one-third  larger  than  m-  1  and  m-  3  considerably  smaller  than  m-  ^. 
In  the  two  first  upper  molars  the  crowns  have  worn  down  until  the 
enamel  folds  are  obliterated.  In  the  last,  which  evidently  erupted 
at  a  much  later  date  than  the  anterior  pair,  the  crown  shows  a  tri- 
foliate surface,  due  to  the  impinging  of  the  enamel  walls  of  the  lat- 
eral and  posterior  sides  of  the  tooth  nearly  to  its  center.  Of  the 
three  mandibular  molars,  m72  and  m.  3  are  about  equal  in  size,  m.  1 
being  about  half  as  large  ;  the  latter  is  circular  in  outline  and  shows 
no  enamel  folding  ;  in  m7~2  there  is  a  pretty  deep  indentation  on  the 
outer  wall  and  a  shallow  curve  of  the  inner  ;  in  m.  3  these  indenta- 
tions are  exaggerated,  nearly  equal,  and  nearly  divide  the  tooth  into 
two  sections,  the  anterior  section  being  rectangular,  the  posterior 
hemispherical  in  outline.  If  we  were  to  apply  the  standard  of  specific 
separation  generally  recognized  to-day  as  governing  the  classifica- 
tion of  rodents,  it  would  be  consistent,  perhaps,  to  make  tlie  third 
specimen  of  Heterocephalus  a  third  species  on  the  dental  characters 
above  defined,  and  on  similar  grounds  establish  a  new  genus  for  the 
light-molared  H.  phillipsi,  but  I  fully  agree  with  Mr.  Thomas 
that  the  known  individual  variations  in  other  species  of  the  Bath- 
yergincd  are  quite  as  marked  as  any  yet  attributed  to  Heterocepha- 
lus. 


^^  A  plate  of  the  specimen  is  being  prepared  for  Dr.  Smith's  book  on  the 
Expedition. 


542  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  measurements  of  Dr.  Smith's  specimen  are  as  follows — Total 
length,  143  mm. ;  tail  vertebrse,  42  ;  hind  foot,  24'' ;  fore  foot,  16. 

Skull — Basilar  length  (of  Hensel),  23.5  mm. ;  end  of  nasals  to 
occipital  ridge,  23  ;  zygomatic  width,  20.5  ;  interorbital  constriction, 
6.5  ;  length  of  nasals,  9.8  ;  base  of  upper  incisors  to  m.  1,  9  ;  length 
of  mandible,  22.2  ;  breadth  of  mandible,  15. 

52.  Rliizomys  splendens  (Riipp.).     Lesser  African  Mole  Rat. 

A  specimen  (No.  3,924)  of  a  male  Mole  Rat,  from  "  Gineer," 
(Gineh  ?)  preserved  in  alcohol,  is  in  the  collection.  Its  size  and  col- 
oration place  it  with  the  first  species  described  by  Riippel  from 
Dembea. 

63.  Pectinator  spekei  BIyth.     Brush-tailed  Rat. 

A  pair  of  these  interesting  rodents,  male  and  female,  (Nos.  3,921, 
3,922)  taken  at  Sheikh  INIahomet,  December  4,  1894.  They  corre- 
spond closely  to  Blyth's  original  diagnosis  of  the  type  taken  in  east- 
ern Somaliland. 

The  female,  a  full  aged  adult,  measures  (from  spirit  specimen)  190 
mm.  in  total  length  ;  the  tail,  30;  the  hind  foot,  36;  the  ear,  from 
crown,  10. 

54.  Lepus  sp.  ? 

An  apparently  young  hare  (No.  3,811)  without  skull,  and  labeled 
"  The  Haud,"  July  22,  1894,  is  the  only  representative  of  this  genus. 
Its  alliance  seems  to  be  with  L.  ochropus  Wagner,  as  quoted  by 
Matschie  in  the  Mammalogy  of  East  Africa. 

*55.  Felis  leo  somaliensis  Noack.     Somali  Lion. 

Two  very  fine  skins  of  male  and  female  are  in  the  University  of 
Pennsylvania  exhibit. 

*"56.  Felis  pardus  nimr  (Ehrenb.).     Steepe  Leopard. 

Five  leopard  skins  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  exhibit  may 
be  classed  with  the  form  designated  by  Ehrenberg  and  revived  by 
Matschie. 

67.  Felis  caracal  nubica  (Fitz.).     African  Caracal. 

A  half  grown  specimen  (No.  3,931)  of  a  male  taken  October 
2,  1895,  is  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of 
Philadelphia. 

■     ^^The  hind  foot  of  glaber  is  given  as  21.2  mm.,  but  the  fact  of  its  being 
taken  from  a  dried  specimen  would  largely  account  for  the  difference  in  size. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  543 

58.  Felis  maniculata  RUpp.     Manacled  Cat. 

A  flat  skin,  (No.  3,812)  with  accompauyiug  skull,  of  a  fully  adult 
animal,  corresponds  exactly  with  Riippel's^"  figure  of  maniculata,  of 
Avhich  name  I  consider  caligata  a  synonym.  It  would  appear  that 
F.  cafer  ("  caffer"  Auct.)  of  Desmarest  is  a  distinct  species. 

*59.  Cynailurus  jubatus  guttatus  (Herm.,  Hamm.).     African  Cheetah. 

A  flat  skin  is  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  library  donation. 

60.  Helogale  undulata  (Peters).     Undulaied  Mongoose. 

An  adult  and  a  young  female  (Nos.  3,815,  3,816),  the  latter  from 
Hargesa,  July  21, 1894,  the  former  taken  March  3, 1895,  are  similar 
in  their  deep  chocolate  tints  as  comjjared  with  Peters'  plate  and 
Thomas'^'  diagnosis  of  the  typical  form.  The  young  animal  is  grayer 
and  more  tawny  than  the  adult  above,  but  the  lower  parts  of  the 
two  are  very  similar. 

61.  Herpestes  gracilis  ochraceus  (Gray).     Abyssinian  Mongoose. 

The  skin  and  skull  of  an  old  male  Herpestes  (No.  3,817),  taken 
November  25, 1894,  shortly  after  leaving  Sheikh  Mahomet,  evidently 
belong  to  the  Abyssinian  animal,  which  Mr.  Thomas  considers  a 
variety  of  gracilis.  Compared  with  Gray's  plate  of  ochraceus,  the 
Smith  specimen  is  redder  and  more  darkly  annulated  with  black. 
The  form  and  color  pattern  of  the  tail  is  very  similar  to  Gray's  in 
our  specimen,  except  that  the  slender  portion  adjoining  the  black 
tip  is  bright  rusty.     The  black  tip  is  about  35  mm.  long. 

The  following  legend  appears  on  the  label  attached  to  this  skin  r 
"  Shot  in  amongst  bushes.  It  eats  insects,  and  had  a  dragon-fly  in 
its  mouth  when  shot.     Irides  yellow." 

62.  Genetta  tigrina  (Sehreb.).     Tiger  Genette. 

Accepting  Matschie's  identification^^  of  Mr.  True's  diagnosis'^  of 
a  Genette  from  Kilima-Njaro  to  belong  to  tigrina  instead  of  pardina, 
I  am  induced  to  place  a  skin  and  skull  from  Milmil  under  the 
former  name.  The  black  of  posterior  hind  legs  and  feet  and  the 
bristling  black  dorsal  mane  and  rufous-centered  body-markings 
place  it  with  tigrina.  The  specimen  is  an  old  female.  No.  3,844. 
The  skull  is  86  mm.  long  and  40  broad. 

*63.  Hyaena  crocuta  Erxl.     Spotted  Hyaena. 

A  mounted  skull  is  among  the  University  specimens. 

3"Keis.  N.  Afr.  Zool.,  1826,  p.  1,  pi.  1. 
»•  P.  Z.  S  ,  1882,  p.  80. 
^^Saugeth.  Ost  Afr.,  1895,  p  74. 
33Proc.  Nat.  Mus.,  1892,  p.  454. 


544-  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

64.  Canis  mesomelas  Schreb.     Black-backed  Jackal. 

A  skin  of  this  species  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  is  repre- 
sented by  a  skull  (No.  3,845)  in  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of 
Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia.     Locality  not  given. 

65.  Mellivora  ratel  (Sparrm.).     Ratel. 

A  skin  with  skeleton  (No.  8,814)  was  received  by  the  Academy  of 
Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  Another  skin  was  retained  by 
Dr.  Smith.  They  both  came  from  Gebas  near  the  Shebeli,  and  were 
taken  January  6,  1895. 

66.  Erinaceus  albiventris  atratus  subsp.  nov.     Galla  Hedgehog. 

Type — No.  3,831,  Yg.  Ad.  ^  ;  collection  of  the  Academy  of 
Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  Collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson 
Smith  at  Ngare  Nocbor,  Lake  Eudolf,  Africa,  August  26,  1895. 

Description — Similar  to  E.  albiventris  Wagner,  as  defined  by 
Dobson,^*  but  with  hoary  black  limbs,  feet,  tail,  ears  and  face- patch, 
the  remaining  pelage  pure,  clear  white.  Extreme  tips  of  spines 
sooty  black. 

Color — Spinous  region  covered  evenly  with  spines  20  mm.  long, 
whose  extreme  tips  are  dusky,  followed  by  a  subapical  zone  of  dull 
white  5  mm.  wide,  then  by  a  horn-black  zone  8  mm.  wide,  fading 
into  a  lighter  zone  and  darkening  again  into  a  black  base.  Facial 
area,  bounded  by  edges  of  upper  lips  and  lines  drawn  from  corners 
of  mouth  to  eyes  and  thence  connecting  across  forehead,  thinly- 
haired  anteriorly  by  sooty  black,  more  thickly  and  lengthily  haired 
posteriorly,  and  with  a  decided  moustache  below  eye  across  cheeks, 
of  pure  black.  A  triangular  spot  of  black  on  lower  lips  and  chin, 
to  corners  of  mouth.  Region  between  dark  facial  patch  and  spines 
of  hind-head  and  ears,  cheeks,  throat,  breast,  belly  and  sides  nearly 
to  ventral  region,  pure  silky  white  with  an  occasional  black  hair. 
Fore-legs  from  body  to  feet  black,  well  intermixed  with  white,  es- 
pecially on  inner  side  of  arm.  Fore-feet  and  soles  black  with  a  few 
gray  hairs.  Hind-limbs  and  feet  colored  like  fore-limbs,  with  a  de- 
cided whitish  patch  on  inner  side  of  pes  near  heel.  Tail  and  vent 
hoary  black.  Formation  of  feet  as  is  minutely  described  by  Dobson 
for  albiventris  (I.  c).  The  rounded,  thickly-haired  ears,  grayish, 
sooty  black,  inside  and  out. 

Measurements  (of  type  by  collector  in  field) — Total  length,  118 
mm.;  tail  vertebra^,  10;  hind-foot  23  ;  ear  from  crown  (dry)  13.5. 


31 


Monog.  Insectiv.,  1882,  p.  11. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  545 

■Skull:  total  length,  35 ;  zygomatic  breadth,  22;  interorbital  con- 
striction, 10.6;  length  of  nasals,  11.8;  length  of  mandible,  27; 
breadth  of  mandible,  12. 

The  immaturity  of  the  specimen  which  I  have  made  to  represent 
this  newly-described  race  of  albiventris  can  in  nowise  account  for  its 
color  characters  as  contrasted  with  the  typical  form,  whose  habitat 
Dobson  places  as  "  northern  tropical  Africa."  In  aj^pearance,  as 
well  as  in  habitat,  this  race  may  be  said  to  show  some  approach  to 
the  South  African  E.  diadematus  Fitz.,  but  closer  examination 
shows  its  affinities  to  be  with  the  northern  animal. 

The  single  skin  and  skull  brought  back  by  Dr.  Smith  indicate  an 
individual  closely  approaching  maturity,  the  posterior  molar  and 
the  canine  just  cutting  through  the  gums. 

67.  Macroscelides  rufescens  Peters.     Rufescent  Jumping  Shrew. 

This  shrew,  whose  cranial  characters  so  closely  ally  it  to  M.  in- 
tufi  Smith,  is  represented  by  an  adult  female  and  an  immature  male 
(Nos.  3,829,  3,830),  taken  respectively  at  Ehrer  and  Lanimo  on  the 
12th  and  16th  of  August,  1894.  The  adult  is  somewhat  blacker  and 
less  ruddy  than  Peters'  specimens,  but  the  measurements  and  color 
pattern  are  identical.  Both  specimens  are  skins  with  skulls,  full 
data  and  measurements. 

68.  Macroscelides  sp.  ? 

A*  half  grown  individual  (No.  3,828),  labeled  Waleuso,  October 
26,  1894,  is  so  dark  and  has  such  a  short  tail  compared  with  body 
that  it  is  probably  distinct.  Its  skull,  however,  shows  near  relation- 
ship to  rufescens.     It  is  preserved  in  alcohol. 

69.  Crocidura  doriana  Dobson.     Shoa  Shrew. 

An  alcoholic  specimen  of  an  adult  shrew  (No.  3,826)  in  the  col- 
lection was  taken  at  Sheikh  Mahomet,  October  28, 1894.  The  skull 
and  dentition  are  identical  with  Dobson's  Shoa  species  as  figured  in 
the  Monograph. 

70.  Crocidura  sp.  ? 

A  rather  young  example  (No.  3,827),  in  alcohol,  from  Lake  Ru- 
dolf, the  skull  of  which,  unfortunately,  was  lost  after  being  ex- 
tracted for  examination,  is  of  interest.  The  skin  and  sparse  hairs 
of  tail  and  feet  are  white.  Tail  about  half  the  length  of  head  and 
body.  Color  of  body  dark  bluish-gray,  lighter  beneath.  Total 
length  about  100  mm.,  hind-foot,  12.5.  Ears  conspicuous.  The 
small  size  of  this  specimen  makes  it  improbable  that  it  is  C.  leucura 


546  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896.. 

Matschie,  its  immaturity  not  being  sufficient  to  account  for  the  dif- 
ferent measurements. 

71.  ?  Cercopithecus  rufoviridis  Is.  Geoff.     Reddish-green  Guenon. 

A  skin  with  skull  (No.  3,932)  separate,  of  a  not  fully-mature 
monkey,  agrees  somewhat  with  the  species  al)Ove-named.  Its  re- 
semblance to  C.  flavidus  Peters,  from  Mozambique,  which  Forbes* 
considers  a  synonym  of  rufoviridis,  is  quite  close.  On  the  label  is 
written  :  "  Skin,  pale  Prussian  blue  ;  face  skin  brown  ;  irides  light 
brown." 

72.  Colobus  guereza  Riip|i.     Mop-tailed  Guereza. 

Three  skins  and  one  skull  (No.  3,899),  taken  at  Lake  Rudolf^ 
were  brought  to  America.  One  of  these  was  subsequently  mounted 
for  the  University  of  Pennsylvania.  Another  skin  (No.  3,905)  is 
in  the|Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  series.  They 
are  all  typical  guereza,  as  described  and  figured  by  Riippell. 


35 


Allen's  Nat.  Lib.,  II,  1894,  p.  65. 


( 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  547 


THE  HYMENOPTERA  COLLECTED  BY  DR.  A.  DONALDSON  SMITH  IN 

NORTHEAST  AFRICA. 

BY   WILLIAM    J.    FOX. 

The  following  list  includes  only  the  Aculeate  Hymenoptera 
brought  home  by  Dr.  Smith.  The  collection  includes,  besides  these, 
perhaps  thirty  species  of  ants  and  parasitic  forms  which  I  am  obliged 
to  pass  unnoticed  for  the  present.  Inasmuch  as  I  have  had  to  rely 
entirely  on  descriptions  in  classifying  the  collection,  I  beg  to  offer 
that  fact  as  an  apology  for  any  erroneous  identifications  that  may 
have  been  made. 

The  specimens  were  collected  on  a  journey  from  Berbera  through 
Somaliland  to  Lake  Rudolf,  thence  to  a  point  on  the  east  coast,^  and, 
with  many  other  specimens,  have  been  presented  to  the  Academy 
of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia  by  Dr.  Smith. 

MUTILLID^. 

Apterogyna  Latreillei  Klug. 

One  specimen  (  9  ).     Berbera,  July  6,  1894. 
Mutilla  pedunculata  Klug. 

Two  male  specimens.  Berbera,  July  4,  1894,  and  Shebeli,  Sep- 
tember 1. 

Mutilla  sinuata  Oliv.  (==i-iUo8a  King.). 

One  specimen  (9  ).     Sheikh  Husein,  October  22,  1894. 
Mutilla  tricolor  Klug. 

One  9  specimen.     Sheikh  Husein,  October  29,  1894. 
Mutilla  guineensis  Fabr. 

One  9  specimen  from  Sheikh  Husein,  October  1,  1894. 
Mutilla  mephitis  Sm. 

One  specimen  (  9  ).     Laga,  November  30,  1894. 
Mutilla  leda  n.  sp. 

9  . — Head,  legs  and  abdomen  black,  the  latter  velvety ;  thorax 
obscure  rufous ;  head,  except  a  longitudinal  medial  streak  and  the 

1  See  an  article  by  Dr.  Smith  in  The  Geographical  Journal  for  August  and 
September,  1896. 

36 


548  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

cheeks,  medially,  sides  of  thorax,  legs,  transverse  spot  at  apex  of 
first  dorsal,  three  spots  on  second  dorsal  (one  anteriorly  in  the 
middle  somewhat  ovate,  and  two  larger  ones  placed  transversely 
near  the  apical  margin  of  the  segment),  a  medial  spot  on  the  third, 
fourth  and  fifth  coalescing  more  or  less,  the  second  segment  along 
the  extreme  sides,  a  small  spot  on  the  apical  margins  of  the  second, 
third  and  fourth  at  the  sides  and  the  apical  margins  of  ventrals  2- 
4  entirely,  of  silvery  pubescence ;  above  the  body  is  clothed  with 
long,  erect,  sparse  black  hairs,  which,  on  the  ventral  surface,  are 
pale ;  head  about  as  wide  as  the  broadest  part  of  the  thorax,  with 
deep,  coarse  punctures ;  eyes  subovate ;  mandibles  furrowed  longi- 
tudinally and  toothed  within  before  the  apex ;  flagelliim  strongly 
acuminate,  the  first  and  second  joints  about  equal  in  length  ;  occi- 
put not  cristate ;  thorax  long,  somewhat  pyriform,  broadest  a  little 
anterior  to  the  middle,  the  lateral  borders  not  dentate;  the  thorax 
above  scabrous ;  evidently  no  scutellar  scale  present,  or  else  it  is 
indistinguishable  from  the  coarse  sculpture  of  the  upper  surface  of 
thorax  ;  spines  of  the»legs  black,  calcaria  pale  testaceous,  those  of 
the  hind  and  medial  tibise  pectinate  within  ;  first  segment  of  abdo- 
men constricted  at  apex,  not  continuous  with  the  base  of  the  follow- 
ing ;  in  the  middle  transversely  cristate,  the  portion  before  the  crista 
very  flat,  ventrally  with  a  short  and  strong  carina,  which  is  some- 
what emarginate  medially;  second  segment  with  very  large  punc- 
tures, ventrally  shining  with  the  punctures  more  distinct  and  at  the 
base  with  a  short,  central,  longitudinal  carina  ;  last  dorsal  smooth 
and  shining,  at  least  medially,  without  a  pygidial  area.  Length, 
12  mm. 

One  specimen.     Near  Gelani,  October  27,  1894. 

This  species  is  apparently  close  to  M.  dorice  Magr.,  but  differs  in 
the  non-cristate  occiput  and  absence  of  scutellar  scale. 

Mutilla  somalica  n.  sp. 

$  . — Head ?  ;  thorax  obscurely  rufous  ;  legs  and  abdomen 

black,  the  latter  red  beneath ;  the  second  dorsal  segment  in  greater 
part  with  reddish-orange  pubescence  forming  a  maculatiou  as  shown 
in  the  figure  ;  a  spot  in  the  center  of  dorsals  3-5,  a  narrow  transverse 
one  on  the  apical  margins  of  doxsals  2-5  at  the  sides,  and  apical 
margins  of  ventrals  2-5  with  silvery  pubescence ;  legs  with  pale  pube- 
scence, the  rest  of  the  body  clothed  with  long,  erect  hairs,  those 
above  dark,  those  below  pale  ;  thorax  robust,  not  twice  as  long  as  it 
is  broad  at  base,  coarsely  cribrose  above,  the  lateral  margins  irregu- 


1896,]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  549 

lar;  scutellar  scale  wanting;  tibiae  and  tarsi   strongly  spinose,  the 
spines  black;  calcaria   white,  pectinated  within;  first  segment  of 

abdomen  constricted  at  apex,  beneath  with  a 
strong,  bidentate  or  emarginate  carina  ;  second 
ventral  with  a  short,  median,  longitudinal 
carina  basally  and  together  with  the  sides  of 
its  dorsal  moiety  with  large  separated  punc- 
tures, those  of  the  remaining  ventrals  much 
finer  and  closer,  pygidial  area  large,  convex, 
longitudinally  striato-punctate,  the  sculptures 
strongest  basally  and  becoming  obsolete  at 
Fig.  1.  apex.     Length  (without  head)  10  mm. 

Abdominal  markings,  One  specimen,  from  which  the  head  is,  un- 
Mutilla  somalica.  fortunately,  missing.  The  maculation  of  the 
second  dorsal  segment  is  apparently  so  different  from  any  of  the 
African  Mutillids  that  I  have  thought  it  well  to  describe  the  species, 
even  though  the  specimen  be  in  poor  condition. 
From  Finik,  December  15,  1894, 

SCOLIIDJE. 

Soolia  ruficornis  Fabr. 

Two  9  and  two  $  specimens,     Hargesa  and  TheHaud,  July  21  ; 
Sheikh  Huseiu,  October  3,  1894. 

Ells  aureola  Klug, 

Two  females  from  Sheikh  Husein,  collected  on  September  21  and 
27. 
Cosila  Donaldsoni  n.  sp, 

9  . — Deep  black,  shining,  the  last  two  abdominal  segments  ru- 
fous ;  wings  black,  strongly  violaceous ;  pubescence  grayish  ;  head 
strongly  punctured,  closely  so  on  the  front,  sparsely  on  the  vertex 
and  occiput;  clypeus  more  finely  punctured  than  the  front,  some- 
what carinate  down  the  middle,  its  anterior  margin  tridentate  ;  man- 
dibles scarcely  punctured,  scape  and  pedicellum  shining,  sparsely 
punctured,  the  flagellum  opaque,  the  joints  slightly  prominent  at 
apex  beneath  ;  ocelli  deeply  pitted,  indistinct ;  pronotum  scabrous ; 
dorsulum  with  irregular,  coarse  punctures,  transversely  smooth  just 
behind  the  pronotum,  and  a  little  shorter  than  the  scutellum  ;  scu- 
tellum  scabrous,  somewhat  triangular,  truncate  posteriorly  ;  middle 
segment  above  very  finely  striato-punctate,  becoming  more  coarsely 
so  posteriorly  ;  posterior  face  with  shallow  punctures  and  indistinct 


550  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

striatious,  sides  obliquely  striated,  the  central  longitudinal  furrow  of 
the  middle  segment  is  wider  by  far  on  the  upper  surface,  fore  tarsi 
distinctly  combed  ;  tarsal  claws  cleft ;  hind  femora  somewhat  angu- 
lar beneath  ;  third  submarginal  cell  larger  than  the  second,  the 
third  transverso-cubital  nervure  received  by  the  marginal  cell  at  its 
apex  ;  abdomen  with  strong,  sparse  punctures,  those  at  the  apex  of 
2,  5,  and  bases  of  3,  5  closer  ;  punctures  of  ventral  segments  larger  : 
pygidial  area  striato-punctate ;  first  dorsal  truncate  anteriorly,  not 
carinate  ;  spines  of  the  legs  and  calcaria  whitish.  Length,  18  mm. 
Sheikh  Husein,  October  8,  1894.  Easily  distinguished  by  the 
red  tip  of  abdomen.  In  the  cleft  claws  and  pectinate  fore  tarsi  this 
species  appears  more  closely  allied  to  the  American  than  to  the 
Australian  species  of  Cosila. 

POMPILIDJE. 

Pompilus  dimidiatus  Fabr. 

Berbera,  June  5;  Laga,  November  80.     Two  specimens. 
Pompilus  viaticus  Fabr. 

One  specimen.     Daro  Mountains,  November  19. 
Pompilus  pulcher  Fabr. 

One  specimen.     Terfa,  August  13. 
Pompilus  umbrosus  Klug. 

Berbera,  July  4 ;  Lafarug,  December  7.     Three  specimens. 
Pompilus  Tamisieri  Guer. 

One  specimen.     Aimola,  March  16,  1895. 
Pompilus  (Pedinaspis  ?)  somalicus  n.  sp. 

9  . — Head,  autennse,  thorax  and  legs  ferruginous ;  mandibles  at 
tip  and  abdomen  black  ;  wings  yellow,  a  slender  black  fascia  cross- 
ing the  anteriors  in  the  region  of  the  basal  vein  and  a  very  broad 
fascia  just  before  the  apex  ;  the  apex  pale  ;  head  rather  flat,  the 
occiput  bearing  a  sharp,  transverse  ridge;  frontal  impressed  line 
feeble;  clypeus  flat,  shining,  its  fore-margin  slightly  emarginate  or 
incurved,  as  is  likewise  the  labrum,  which  projects  a  little  and  is 
fringed  sparsely  with  long  hairs  ;  antennae  inserted  at  base  of  cly- 
peus, tolerably  long  and  slender,  much  shorter  than  the  thorax* 
however,  the  first  joint  nearly  as  long  as  the  scape,  which  is  com- 
pressed ;  thorax  elongate;  pronotum  a  little  longer  than  the  dor- 
sulum,  its  hind  margin  arcuate  ;  scutellum  shorter  than  dorsulum, 
somewhat  more  than  twice  as  long  as  the  metanotum   (postscutel- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  551 

lum)  ;  middle  segment  subtruncate  posteriorly,  entire,  above  with  a 

central  longitudinal  impressed  line,  posteriorly  with  rather  coarse 

transverse  strise,  which  extend  partly  on 

the  sides;  legs  tolerably  stout,  scarcely 

spinose  ;  fore  tarsi  without  comb  ;   claws 

with  a  large,  sharp  tooth  within,  almost 

cleft ;  longer  spur  of  hind  tarsi  less  than 

one-third  as  long  as  the  first  hind  tarsal 

joint ;  marginal  cell  pointed  at  tip;  second 

and   third  submarginals  about  equal   in 

size,  both  receiving  their  recurrent  nerv- 

TT    J   r  n     1-7  '         1-  ure  slightly  before  the  middle;  basal  vein 

Head  oi  Fompilus  somalicus,  .  . 

joining  the  sub  median  cell  before  its 
ai)ex ;  submedian  cell  of  hind  wings  terminating  before  the  origin 
of  the  cubital  vein  ;  abdomen  not  compressed,  obscurely  testaceous 
beneath  ;  dorsals  1,  3  and  4  with  a  large  lateral  spot  of  pale  pubes- 
cence, which  is  also  indicated  laterally  on  the  ventral  segments. 
Length,  17  mm. 

One  specimen.  Near  Finik,  December  6,  1894.  Is  apparently 
distinct  from  all  the  African  species  of  Pompilus  in  the  bifasciate 
fore-wings.  I  refer  it  to  Kohl's  subgenus  Pedinaspis  with  some 
doubt,  inasmuch  as  the  abdomen  is  not  compressed,  and  the  claws 
rather  more  cleft  than  dentate. 

Salius  (Cyphonyx)  fiavicornis  Fabr. 

One  specimen.  Sheikh  Husein,  October  5,  1894.  In  this  speci- 
men, a  9  ,  only  the  tibiae  are  reddish. 

Salius  (Hemipepsis)  atropos  ?  Sm. 

I  refer,  with  some  doubt,  two  $  specimens  taken  at  Sheikh  Hu- 
sein, October  10,  1894.  Smith  only  describes  the  female,  his  speci- 
mens having  come  from  Sierra  Leone. 

SPHECID^. 

Sphex  (Chlorion)  xanthocerus  var.  maxillaris  Pal. 

One  9  specimen.     The  Hand,  July  21,  1894. 
Sphex  (Chlorion)  regalis  Sm.  var. 

Two  females.  Ardeh,  July  14  ;  Hargesa,  July  18,  J  894.  In  this 
form  the  thorax  is  entirely  black  ;  the  wings  black  with  violaceous 
reflections,  the  apex  of  the  hind  pair  not  pale  ;  head,  anteunse,  fore- 
legs entirely,  and  the  femora  and  tibite  of  the  medial  pair,  reddish  ; 
abdomen  metallic  and  purplish-blue.* 


552  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Sphex  (Parasphex)  marginatus  Sm. 

Sheikh  Husein,  October  1,  1894.  One  specimen.  The  petiole  is 
black  in  this  specimen. 

Sceliphron  Spinolae  Lep. 

Two  females.     Sheikh  Husein,  October  15,  1894. 
Sceliphron  spirifex  Linne. 

Two  females.     Sheikh  Husein,  October  1  and  15,  1894. 
Sceliphron  violaceum  Fabr. 

One  specimen.     Sheikh  Husein,  October  15,  1894. 
AmmopMla  ferrugineipes  Lep. 

One  9  specimen.     Sheikh  Husein,  October  8,  1894. 
Ammophila  lugubris  Gerst. 

Two  females.     Sheikh  Husein,  September  20  and  28,  1894. 
Ammophila  holosericea  Fabr. 

Dabulli,  September  16,  1894.     Two  ^  specimens. 
Ammophila  insignis  Sm. 

Turfer.     One  specimen,  August  13,  1894. 
Ammophila  beninensis  ?  Pal.-Bve. 

I  refer  doubtfully  to  this  species  two  specimens  from  Sheikh 
Husein,  September  30  and  October  5.  They  agree  fairly  well  with 
Beauvois'  description  and  figure  of  beninensis,  but  the  tibiae  and  tarsi 
and  four  anterior  femora  are  reddish. 

Bembex  Dahlbomi  Hdl. 

Milmil,  July  28,  1894.     Four  specimens. 
Sphecius  Quartinae  Grib. 

Only  the  male  of  this  species  has  been  described,  and  it  is  not  cer- 
tain that  the  female  specimen  before  me  from  Berbera,  July  4,  1894, 
is  really  Quartince.     I  venture  to  describe  it  as  such,  however. 

5  . — Short  and  stout,  ferruginous,  except  the  clypeus,  labrum, 
mandibles,  except  apex  (which  is  black),  front  beneath  and  scape  and 
apical  antennal  joints  beneath,  which  are  yellow  ;  apical  margins  of 
the  dorsal  abdominal  segments  narrowly  fuscous  ;  wings  testaceo-hya- 
line,  nervures  reddish,  marginal  cell  lanceolate  and  narrow  ;  second 
submarginal  greatly  narrowed  above,  its  width  at  this  point  slightly 
greater  than  that  between  the  stigma  and  the  first  transverso-cubital 
nervure  on  the  marginal  nervure  ;  third  submarginal  scarcely  nar- 
rowed above  ;  clypeus  convex,  transverse,  its  fore-margin  a  little  in- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  553 

curved  ;  autennse  scarcely  as  long  as  thorax,  thickened  apically,  the 
first  joint  of  flagellum  as  long  as  the  two  following  united  ;  the  head, 
as  a  whole,  is  fairly  well  punctured ;  dorsulum  and  scutellum  im- 
punctate  or  with  exceedingly  fine  punctures,  the  middle  segment 
with  more  distinct  punctures ;  legs  robust,  strongly  spinose  ;  abdo- 
men finely  and  rather  closely  punctured,  the  apical  margins  of  the 
segments  smooth  in  a  transverse  sense  ;  sixth  dorsal  strongly  punc- 
tured, not  very  strongly  ridged  laterally,  ventrals  rather  flat,  the 
second  feebly  convex.     Length,  22  mm. 

Liris  haemorrhoidalis  Fabr. 

Sheikh  Husein,  September  30,  1894.     One  male  specimen. 
Notogonia  apicalis  n.  sp. 

$  . — Black  ;  last  three  or  four  abdominal  segments  red  ;  mandi- 
bles and  tegulse,  in  part,  obscurely  rufotestaceous  ;  face,  clypeus, 
cheeks,  fore-femora  and  thorax  beneath,  and  apex  of  middle  seg- 
ment with  dense  silvery  pubescence  ;  the  sides  of  thorax,  legs  and 
abdomen-with  a  sericeous  pile,  which,  when  the  insect  is  held  in  cer- 
tain lights,  appears  on  the  abdomen  to  form  apical  bands  on  the 
segments  ;  head  finely  and  closely  punctured  ;  distance  between  the 
eyes  above  nearly  as  great  as  the  length  of  the  third  and  fourth 
antennal  joint?,  much  greater  than  the  length  of  the  second  and 

third  ;  flagellum  acuminate  apically, 
thickest  toward  base,  the  first  joint  a 
little  longer  than  the  second  and  some- 
what curved  ;  clypeus  depressed  trans- 
versely before  the  anterior  margin,  the 
/  latter  a  little  prominent  in  the  middle  ; 

^^^-  '^-  dorsulum   with    tolerably  strong  and 

Venation  (fore  wing),  Noto-       ^j^^^    punctures,    the    scutellum   with 
S[oma  ap2calis.  .  ,  ,     „  , 

the  punctures  much  nner  and  sparser, 
shining;  mesopleurse  with  shallow,  somewhat  separated  punctures, 
the  episternal  suture  of  the  mesothorax  distinct  and  strongly  foveo- 
lated ;  middle  segment  truncate  behind,  above  coarsely  and  trans- 
versely rugose,  divided  longitudinally  by  a  strong  medial  carina, 
which  terminates  before  the  apex,  sides  coarsely  and  obliquely  stri- 
ated ;  legs  simple,  not  peculiarly  modified ;  wings  fusco-hyaline, 
nervures  black  ;  marginal  cell  obliquely  truncate  at  tip  ;  second 
submarginal  almost  triangular,  much  narrowed  above,  the  width  at 
the  top  equal  to  about  one-half  the  distance  between  the  recurrent 
nervures  on  the  cubital  nervure;  abdomen  impunctate,  the  second 


554  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

ventral  segment  with  the  transverse  basal  depression  well  marked. 
Length,  12  mm. 

One  specimen.  Sheikh  Husein,  September  30,  1894.  Is  appar- 
ently related  to  N.  radamce  Saussure,  from  Madagascar,  and  may  be 
identical  with  the  var.  b.,  mentioned  by  that  author.  The  radial 
(marginal)  cell  of  radamce  is  said  to  be  perpendicularly  truncate, 
whereas  in  apicalis  it  is  obliquely  so.  It  also  agress  fairly  well  with 
the  description  of  Larra  rubella  Smith,  of  which  only  the  female  is 
described. 
Miscophus  ctenopus  Kohl. 

Berbera,  July  4,  1894.     One  9  specimem. 
Tachysphex  fluctuatus  Gerst. 

One  male  specimen.     Same  locality  as  the  preceding  species. 
Helioryctus  melanopyrus  Sm. 

One  specimen,  a  female.  Near  Lake  Stephanie,  June  20,  1895. 
It  is  somewhat  larger  than  the  specimen  described  by  Smith,  and 
measures  14  mm.  in  length.  Helioryctus  is,  perhaps,  synonymous 
with  Sericophorus  Sm.  (uou  Shuck.)  =  Tachyrhostus  Sauss.  Seri- 
cophorus  Sm.  has  priority  over  TachjrJiostus,  having  been  described 
on  p.  33,  Ann.  &  Mag.  Nat.  Hist,  1851,  VII. 

Astatus  boops  Schr. 

One  male  specimen  from  Sheikh  Husein,  October  5,  1894. 
Oxybelus  lamellatus  Oliv. 

Berbera,  July  4,  1894.     One  specimen. 

EUMENIDJE. 

Eumenes  Lepeletierii  Sauss. 

Three  specimens.     Sibbe,  August  2;    Terfa,  August  15;   River 
Darde,  September  9,  1894. 
Eumenes  maxillosa  DeG. 

One  large  female.     Berbera,  July  3,  1894. 
Eumenes  dimidatipennis  Sauss. 

One  9  specimen  without  precise  locality  or  date  of  capture. 
Synagris  calida  Linne. 

Luku,  September  17,  1894.     Two  specimens. 
Synagris  tropidia  Schlett. 

Sheikh  Husein,  October  8,  1894.     One  9  specimen. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  555 

Rhynchium  laterale  Fabr. 

Sheikh  Huseiu,  October  7.     One  male. 
Odynerus  metemmensis  Magr. 

One  specimen,  without  date  of  capture  or  locality. 

VESPIDJE. 

Polistes  marginalis  Fabr. 

Sheikh  Husein,  October  5  and  9.     Two  specimens. 
Belonogaster  colonialis  Kohl. 

One  male  specimen.     Terfa,  August  21. 
Belonogaster  Meneleki  Grib. 

Sheikh  Husein,  October  1  and  5 ;  Laga,  November  30,  1894. 

APID-S3. 

Colletes  sp. 

Two  specimens  of  a  species  having  the  base,  apex  and  sides  of  the 
first  dorsal  segment  and  the  apex  of  the  three  following  with  pale 
ochraceous  pubescence,  beneath  which  the  segments  are  brownish- 
testaceous.     From  Sheikh  Husein,  September  29,  1894. 

Nomia  nulpina  Qerst. 

A  S'  specimen  which  is  probably  this  species.  Sheikh  Husein, 
October  7,  1894.  Another  species,  perhaps  new  and  from  the  same 
locality,  has  the  hind-legs  almost  simple  and  the  apical  margin  of 
dorsal  segments  1-5,  whitish. 

Anthophora  quadrifasciatus  DeG. 

Sheikh  Huseiu,  September  29,  1894.     A  specimen  of  the  variety 
alternans  King. 
Anthophora  concinnus  Klug. 

One  specimen  ;  no  precise  locality  or  date  of  capture. 

Anthophora  albigenus  Lep. 

One  specimen,  a  variety,  of  this  species.      Daro  Mountains.    No- 
vember 19,  1894. 
Eucera  ruficornis  Fabr. 

Sheikh  Huseiu,  October  7,  1894.     One  male  specimen. 

Crocisa  abyssinica  Rads. 

One  female  specimen.     The  Haud,  July  21,  1894. 

Xylocopa  oblonga  Sm. 

One  specimen.     Sheikh  Husein,  October  3,  1894, 


556  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Xylocopa  fulvohirta  DeG. 

Two  females.     Meo,  October  25,  1894. 
Xylocopa  cafra  Latr. 

One  female  specirrien.     Same  locality  and  date  as  the  preceding. 
Xylocopa  inconstans  Sm. 

One  female  specimen.     Sheikh  Husein,  October  1,  1894. 
Xylocopa  olivacea  Fabr. 

One  male.     Near  Lake  Stephanie,  June  20,  1895. 
Xylocopa  aestuans  Fabr. 

Berbera,  July  4.     One  female  specimen. 
Xylocopa  Gribodoi  Magr. 

Sheikh  Husein,  October  10;  Meo,  October  25,  1894.  Three  fe- 
male and  one  male  specimens.  The  latter  sex  is  apparently  imde- 
scribed. 

<? . — Black  ;  head,  thorax,  anteriorly  and  beneath,  dorsal  seg- 
ments at  the  sides,  particularly  segments  1,  4,  5,  6,  and  ventrals  3- 
6,  with  pale  pubescence,  that  on  the  clypeus  white  ;  the  legs  with 
black  pubescence,  the  anterior  pair  in  addition  with  a  streak  of 
white  pubescence,  which  is  more  evident  at  first  joint  of  tarsi; 
wings  hyaline  at  base,  the  apical  third  fuscous  with  purplish  irides- 
cence ;  nervures  black  throughout ;  antennie  entirely  black  ;  eyes 
large  ;  face  narrow ;  the  ocelli  are  an  equilateral  triangle  ;  dorsulum 
sparsely  punctured  medially,  as  are  likewise  dorsal  segments  2-4, 
which  at  the  sides  are  closely  punctured  ;  dorsal  5  and  6  closely 
punctured  throughout ;  the  sixth  segment  medially,  and  the  last  at 
the  sides  with  black  pubescence,  that  on  the  fore-tarsi  beneath 
slightly  brownish.     Length,  20  mm. 

With  the  exception  of  the  wings  and  pale  color  of  the  pubescence 
on  anterior  part  of  thorax,  the  male  is,  superficially,  similar  to  the 
female. 

Ceratina  fastigiata  n.  sp. 

9  . — Blue-green,  the  head  and  thorax  slightly  the  darker  ;  legs 
black  ;  the  base  of  the  hind  tibiae  externally  and  a  broad  oblong 
spot  on  the  clypeus  yellowish  ;  head  with  large,  deep  and  more  or 
less  confluent  punctures,  which  on  the  clypeus  are  separated  and 
rather  sparse;  mandibles  and  labrum  black,  the  latter  convex  and 
coarsely  rugose ;  antennae  black,  the  flagellum  clavate  and  slightly 
testaceous  beneath  ;  pronotum  not  dentate  laterally,  rather  sharply 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  557 

margined  ;  dorsulum  convex,  its  punctures  larger  than  those  of 
head  and  distinctly  separated  ;  scutellum  similarly  punctured,  the 
mesopleurse  a  little  less  strongly  so  ;  upper  and  posterior  surfaces  of 
middle  segment  separated  by  a  ridge,  above  the  ridge  finely  rugose, 
on  the  sides  with  large  punctures,  similar  to  those  on  the  fourth  dor- 
sal segment,  below  the  ridge,  the  punctures  finer,  closer  and  evener ; 
abdomen  with  the  segments  rather  strongly  constricted  at  the 
sutures,  the  apical  segment  suddenly  constricted  and  drawn  out  into 
a  point  apically,  the  first,  second  and  third  segments  punctured 
about  like  the  dorsulum,  the  remaining  dorsals  decidedly  more  finely 
punctured  ;  the  ventrals  are  punctured  like  the  first  dorsal,  the 
apical  margin  of  the  second,  and  the  base  and  apex  of  the  second  to 
fifth,  smooth  and  black ;  fore  legs  naked  and  shining,  the  others 
with  pale  pubescence,  as  are  likewise  the  ventral  abdominal  seg- 
ments, but  sparsely ;  wings  hyaline,  darker  apically,  nervures  and 
stigma  black  ;  tegulie  and  shoulder  tubercules  dark  testaceous. 
Length,  8  mm. 

One  specimen  from  Daro  Mountains,  November  20,  1894. 

Allodape  canina  Sm. 

Two  specimens.     Tulu,  November  23,  1894. 
Megachile  basalis  Sm. 

One  female  specimen.     lie,  April  9,  1895. 
Megachile  colorata  n.  sp. 

9  . — Black  ;  scape  of  antennae,  tegulse,  legs  except  coxse,  and  the 
first  three  segments  of  abdomen  red  ;  wing  yellow  at  base  and 
broadly  along  the  costa,  otherwise  fuscous' with  purplish  iridescence, 

the  veins  included  in  the  yellow  portion,  red- 
dish, those  in  the  fuscous  portion  dark ;  head 
with  strong  confluent  punctures,  posteriorly 
deeply  incurved,  the  occiput  margined ;  face 
between  the  antennse  prominently  convex,  and 
meeting  the  clypeus  so  as  to  appear  continuous 
with  it ;  the  clypeus  slopes  from  its  middle  to 
apex,  which  is  broadly  truncate,  the  sloping  por- 
FiG.  4.  tion  smooth  (or  nearly  so)  and  shining,  other- 

Mandible,  Megachile     ^j^^  ^^  clypeus  is  coarsely  punctured  ;  man- 
dibles striato-punctate,  furrowed  from  middle 
to  apex,  slightly  broader  at  apex  than  at  base,  narrowest  medially, 
bearing  a  tooth  within  and  four  at  apex  ;    dorsulum  with  strong 


658  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

punctures,  which,  when  the  insect  is  held  in  certain  positions,  give 
the  dorsulum  a  transversely  and  irregularly  striated  appearance; 
punctures  of  the  scutellutri  a  little  closer,  those  of  the  mesopleurse 
more  distinct ;  legs  robust,  the  hind  tibise  much  thickened  toward 
apex ;  abdomen  sparsely  punctured,  the  apical  margins  of  dorsals 
1-4  transversely  depressed  at  apex,  at  which  place  the  punctures 
are  closer;  front,  base  of  clypeus,  a  fringe  on  labrum,  thorax  above, 
on  center  of  mesopleurse  and  bat^e  of  middle  segment,  and  a  fringe 
at  apex  of  dorsals  1-3,  ochraceous  ;  beneath  the  wings,  extending 
to  sides  of  middle  segments,  a  spot  on  each  side  of  the  first  three 
or  four  dorsals  and  the  ventral  scopa,  whitish ;  on  the  cheeks  and 
thorax  beneath  the  pubescence  is  pale  ;  legs  and  last  two  or  three 
dorsals  covered  with  a  short  ochraceous  pubescence,  that  on  the  tarsi 
the  longer.     Length,  13-16  mm. 

Two  specimens.  One  without  precise  locality  or  date  of  capture ; 
the  other,  the  larger  specimen,  is  marked,  "  From  nest  in  insect  tin, 
November  28, 1894,"  and  is  from  near  Laga.  The  red  color  on  abdo- 
men in  the  larger  specimens  is  more  distributed  than  in  the  smaller. 

Megaohile  crenulata  n.  sp. 

$. — Black;  first  joint  of  fore  tarsi  whitish;  head  strongly  and 
closely  punctured  above,  more  finely  so  on  the  front ;  mandibles 
longitudinally  striato-punctate,  tridentate  at  apex ;  dorsulum  and 
scutellum  strongly,  closely  and  evenly  punctured  ;  mesopleurse  per- 
haps a  little  more  strongly  punctured; 
tibise  cribrose  externally ;  fore  coxse 
with  a  long,  obtuse  tooth  ;  fore  tarsi 
with  the  first  joint  flattened  and 
Fig.  5.  broadened,  its  anterior   margin   sinu- 

Last  dorsal  abdominal  segment,    ated  medially  ;  abdomen  closely  punc- 
Megachile  crenulata.  tared  above,  beneath  more  sparsely,  the 

apical  margin  of  all  the  segments  (except  the  last)  strongly  depressed 
and  testaceous;  last  dorsal  strongly  emarginate  and  strongly  crenu- 
lated  ;  at  the  base  of  the  last  ventral  on  each  extreme  side  is  a 
strong  tooth;  head  in  front,  dorsulum,  middle  segment  and  base  of 
first  dorsal  with  long,  brownish  or  fulvous  pubescence,  which  also 
appears  to  a  certain  extent  on  scutellum,  apical  segments  and  the 
legs,  where  it  is  more  or  less  mixed  with  paler  hairs  ;  cheeks,  fore  tarsi, 
thorax  beneath,  first  dorsal  laterally,  and  the  ventrals  more  sparsely, 
with  long,  pale  pubescence  ;  the  first  medial  and  hind  tarsal  joints 
have  a  fringe  of  this  pubescence  ;  apical  margins  of  dorsals  2-5  with 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  559 

obscurely  fulvous  pubescence,  wbich  above  in  the  middle  becomes 
paler ;  wings  subhyaline,  nervures  and  stigma  black.  Length,  13 
mm. 

Sheikh  Husein,  September  24, 1894.  The  only  specimen  obtained 
is  somewhat  the  worse  for  wear,  thereby  making  an  accurate  descrip- 
tion of  the  pubescence  rather  difficult. 

Trigona  Beccarii  Grib. 

One  specimen.     Sheikh  Husein,  September  29,  1894. 

Apis  mellifioa  Linne. 

Terfa,  August  15,  16,  1894.     Four  specimens. 


560  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1896. 

November  3. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-three  persons  present. 


November  10. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Twenty-six  persons  present. 

A  paper  entitled  "The  Bones,  Muscles  and    Teeth   of  Tarsius 
fusco-manus,"  by  Harrison  Allen,  was  presented  for  publication. 


November  17. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  theChair. 

One  hundred  and  nine  persons  present. 

Mr.  Edwin  S.  Balch  read  a  paper  entitled  "  Ice  Caves  and  the 
Causes  of  Subterranean  Ice,"  (No  abstract.) 


November  24. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Thirty-seven  persons  present. 

R.  A.  Philippi  of  Santiago,  Chili,  was  elected  a  Corres])ondent. 
The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  561 


NEW  SPECIES  OF  FRESH  WATER  MOLLUSKS  FROM   SOUTH  AMERICA. 

BY    HENRY    A.   PILSBRY. 

The  forms  described  below  were  encountered  in  the  course  of 
identifying  a  series  of  mollusks  collected  by  Dr.  Wm.  H.  Rush,  U. 
S.  N.,  in  Uruguay  and  Argentina,  a  list  of  which  will  be  found  in 
The  Nautilus  for  November  of  this  year.  To  the  forms  collected  by 
Dr.  Rush  have  been  added  several  others,-  apparently  undescribed, 
from  the  collection  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadel- 
phia, 

To  the  above-mentioned  paper  in  The  Nautilus  the  reader  is  re- 
ferred for  some  account  of  the  localities  represented  by  specimens 
here  described,  and  for  notes  on  the  species  associated  with  them, 

CHILINIDiE. 

Chilina  RusMi  n.  sp.     PI.  XXVI,  fi^s.  6,  7. 

Shell  oval,  strong,  yellowish-olivaceous  with  five  girdles  of  dusky, 
narrow  spots  alternating  with  lighter  ones.  Spire  produced,  ter- 
raced, but  flat-topped,  the  whorls  strongly  keeled  around  the  shoul- 
der, flat  above  the  keel.  Aperture  long-ovate,  white  with  chestnut 
spots  inside  ;  outer  lip  thin ;  columellar  lip  white,  callous,  with  a 
strong,  acute  entering  fold  at  the  root,  and  a  very  inconsijicuous  fold 
in  the  middle  ;  the  parietal  wall  with  a  strong  entering  fold  which 
is  abrupt  below,  and  filled  in  above  with  a  heavy  callus. 

Alt.  16,  diam.  lOj  mm. ;  alt.  of  aperture  12  mm. 

Uruguay  River  at  Fray  Bentos  (Dr.  Rush  !). 

The  conspicuously  angular  spire  is  a  peculiar  feature  of  this  shell. 
The  apex  is  considerably  eroded,  so  that  the  number  of  whorls  can- 
not be  stated. 

LIMW^IDJE. 
Planorbis  castaneonitens  Pilsbry  &,  Vanatta,  n.  sp.     PI.  XXVII,  figs.  10,  11, 12. 

Shell- thin,  chestnut  brown,  very  smooth  and  glossy;  growth-striae 
light ;  right  and  left  sides  showing  4  whorls,  about  equally  and 
quite  shallowly  concave ;  spire  on  right  side  less  than  half  the 
diameter  of  shell,  inner  1  h  whorls  more  sunken  ;  spire  on  left  side 
decidedly  wider  than  on  the  right.     Last  whorl  wide  on  the  right, 


562  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

narrow  on  the  left  side,  the  periphery  very  obtusely  angular  near 
the  left  side.  Aperture  quite  oblique,  cordate,  the  peristome  thin 
and  fragile,  produced  forward  on  the  right  side. 

Alt.  r7,  diam.  7  mm. 

Ponds  and  small  streams  near  Maid  on  ado,  Uruguay  (Dr.  Rush  !). 

Compared  with  P.  heloicus  d'Orb.,  this  species  is  flatter  and  more 
glossy,  has  the  spire  much  narrower  on  the  right  side,  the  outer 
whorl  wider  and  less  cylindrical ;  the  color  is  darker  and  the 
periphery  rounded-angular. 

Planorbis  heteropleurus  Pilsbry  &  Vanatta,  n.  sp.     PI.  XXVI,  iags.  1,  2,  3. 

Shell  moderately  solid,  corneous-white,  rather  opaque,  the  surface 
with  fine,  close  growth-lines ;  earlier  whorls  rather  deeply  and 
about  equally  sunken  on  the  two  sides ;  convex,  and  strongly  angu- 
lar or  keeled  in  the  middle,  on  the  right  side  ;  periphery  conspicu- 
ously carinated  on  the  left  side,  which  is  shallowly  vortex-shaped, 
the  whorls  nearly  flat.  Last  whorl  slightly  wider  on  the  right  than 
on  the  left  side.  Whorls  3  J,  all  visible  on  both  sides,  the  last  wider 
than  the  spire.  Aperture  very  oblique,  rounded-pentagonal,  the 
right  margin  produced  forward. 

Alt.  4i,  greatest  diam.  11  J,  lesser  8}  mm. ;  oblique  alt.  of  aper- 
ture 5J,  diam.  4  mm. 

Lake  Titicaca  (A.  Agassiz !).  Types  No.  69,645,  collection  of 
the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 

This  remarkable  species  is  totally  unlike  P.  titicacensis  Cless.,'  P, 
montanus  d'Orbigny^  and  P.  andicola  d'Orbigny,^  species  already 
known  from  this  Andean  lake.  It  is  most  like  P.  andicola,  but 
much  flatter  with  diflferently  placed  keels,  and,  in  fact,  so  diverse  in 
characters  that  no  profitable  comparison  can  be  made.  Described 
from  eight  specimens,  which  are  alike  in  all  essential  characters. 

CYRENID^. 

Corbicula  Coloniensis  n.  sp.     PI.  XXVI,  fig.  9. 

Shell  subtriangular,  rather  ventricose,  slightly  inequilateral ;  an- 
terior and  posterior  margins  obtusely  angular,  the  slope  above  the 
rounded  angles  slightly  convex ;  posterior  slope  decidedly  longer ; 
basal  margin  well  curved,  rounded ;  beaks  moderately  projecting. 
Hinge  ligament  very  convex,  short  and  yellowish.     Surface  nearly 


^  Conchylien  Cabinet,  Planorbis,  p.  147,  pi.   1 2,  f.  23-25.     Clessin  locates 
Lake  Titicaca  in  Ecuador  I     On  p.  175  lie  calls  the  species  P.  titicacaensis. 
"■  Voy.  Am.  Merid.,  p.  345,  pi.  44,  f.  5-8. 
Ubid.,^.  346,  f.  1-4. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  563 

smooth  in  the  middle,  finely,  irregularly  striate  at  the  ends  and 
basal  margin.  Green,  duskier  above,  with  narrow,  widely  spaced 
and  inconspicuous  blackish  rays,  the  eroded  beaks  deep  purple. 
Interior  deep  purple,  clouded  with  whitish  purple  within  the  pallial 
line,  the  teeth  of  the  same  light  tint.  Pallial  line  with  a  short  triangu- 
lar sinus  ;  right  valve  with  three  divergent  cardinal  teeth,  median  and 
posterior  teeth  bifid  at  tip  ;  median  tooth  wide,  anterior  and  poste- 
rior teeth  long  and  oblique ;  left  valve  with  three  cardinals,  the 
median  bifid  at  tip.  Laterals  crenulated,  long,  the  anterior  slightly 
curved,  posterior  straight ;  double  in  right,  single  in  left  valve. 

Length  32*,  alt.  27J,  diam.  15i  mm. 

Length  28,  alt.  24,  diam.  15  mm. 

La  Plata  River  above  Colonia,  Uruguay  (Dr.  Rush). 

Larger  and  more  triangular  than  C.  limosa.  The  lateral  teeth 
are  unusually  long,  and  the  cardinals  widely  divergent. 

MUTELID^. 

Glabaris  latomarginatus  Lea  var.  felix  n.  r.     PI.  XXVI,  fig.  8. 

Similar  in  form  to  Anodonta  latomarginata  Lea,  but  epidermis 
light  yellowish-green,  closely  painted  with  short  radiating  dichoto- 
mous  or  simple  lines  or  narrow  V's  of  green,  and  two  green  rays  on 
the  posterior  slope.  Interior  pale  pink  within  pallial  line,  prismatic 
border  faint  olive  buflf".  Some  black  zig-zags  along  pallial  line  or 
outlining  muscle  impressions. 

Length  53,  alt.  38,  diam.  20  J  mm. 

Length  49,  alt.  35,  diam.  18  mm. 

Colonia,  Uruguay  (Dr.  Rush). 

Glabaris  trapesialis  var.  cygneiformis  n.  v.     PI.  XXVI,  figs.  4,  5. 

Shell  similar  to  some  forms  of  Anodonta  eygnea,  such  as  that  fig- 
ured by  Rossmiissler,  Iconogr.,  I,  fig.  280,  in  the  elongate  form,  long 
and  up-curved  posterior  end,  but  hinge-line  straight  and  produced  in 
a  small  wing  anteriorly,  terminating  angularly.  Very  thin  and 
fragile,  even  in  specimens  14  cm.  long.  Green  and  smooth  in  mid- 
dle, blackish  and  roughened  at  ends  and  basal  margin  ;  nacre  blue- 
white,  iridescent,  dark-stained  in  the  cavity  more  or  less,  and  often 
with  some  zig-zag  blackish  markings  around  the  muscles. 

Length  142,  alt.  75,  diam.  36  cm. ;  alt.  52-53  %,  diam.  26  %  of 
length. 

More  compressed  than  G.  riograndensis  Iher.,  with  the  hinge-line 
more  angular  at  the  ends  and   the  posterior  end  peculiarly  up- 

37 


564  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

curved,  as  in  certain  middle  European  forms  of  A.  cygnea.  The 
specimens  are  also  even  thinner  than  examples  of  riograndends  be- 
fore me,  of  equal  size. 

Pond  and  a  small  creek  near  Maldonado,  Uruguay  (Dr.  Rush). 

The  differences  between  this  form  and  typical  trapesialis  are  mani- 
fest when  we  compare  the  typical  figures  of  the  latter  in  Encycl. 
Meth.,  pi.  205,  which  agree  perfectly  with  specimens  before  me.  The 
divergence  between  the  several  geographic  races  of  G.  trapesialis, 
such  as  riograndensis,  exoticus  and  cygneiformis  render  it  necessary, 
in  my  opinion,  to  recognize  these  as  of  subspecific  rank.  The  ex- 
treme "  lumpers  "  do  not  seem  to  understand  that  if  evolution  of 
species  by  divergence  is  granted,  "  subspecies  "  are  a  necessary  con- 
sequence, whether  we  distinguish  them  by  name  or  not.  Every 
practical  zoologist  knows  that  they  exist,  and  are  neither  more  nor 
less  artificial  or  subjective  conceptions  than  "  species ;  "  and  it 
seems  a  truer  method  to  recognize  certain  races  in  which  more  or 
less  definite  characters  are  correlated  with  geographic  range,  than 
to  lose  sight  of  the  differences  induced  by  causes  acting  over  whole 
districts  or  river-systems  by  lumping  unlike  forms  under  "species" 
which  are  equally  with  subspecies,  arbitrary  groupings. 

Glabaris  Simpsonianus  n.  sp.     PI.  XXVII,  fig.  13. 

Shell  oblong-oval,  ventricose,  very  inequilateral,  thick,  solid  and 
heavy  ;  greatest  diameter  about  in  the  middle  ;  basal  margin  gaping 
from  the  anterior  extremity  nearly  two-thirds  the  distance  to  poste- 
rior end  ;  dorsal  margin  gaping  slightly  from  the  end  of  hinge  to 
the  posterior  end  of  shell ;  externally  green  toward  the  beaks,  the 
greater  part  of  the  surface  olivaceous,  blackish  brown  at  the  ends 
and  basal  margin,  the  posterior  dorsal  slopes  biradiate  with  green  ; 
the  surface  smooth  and  polished,  with  rather  coarse,  low  wrinkles  of 
growth,  more  crowded  and  somewhat  lamellose  at  the  ends  and  basal 
margin.  Upper  and  basal  outlines  about  equally  curved  ;  hinge 
margin  long,  wide,  somewhat  sloping,  gently  curved,  rounded  or 
hardly  angular  at  the  ends ;  posterior  margin  sloping  above, 
rounded  below ;  anterior  end  somewhat  narrower,  rounded  ;  beaks 
wide  and  low. 

Interior  silvery  or  salmon-tinted,  very  pearly,  usually  showing 
irregular  black  parallel  lines  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  muscle  im- 
pressions and  pallial  line.  Cavity  of  valves  deep,  of  beaks  shallow 
and  wide  ;  muscle-scars  well  impressed,  the  foot  protractor  scar  un- 
usually long ;  posterior  adductor  scar  situated  very  near  to  the  sinus 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  565 

at  end  of  hinge  line,  and  connected  therewith  by  a  short  impression  ; 
prismatic  layer  at  margins  of  valves  narrow  and  bluish-green. 

Length  14,  alt.  7'8,  diam.  5*4  cm. 

Length  14*5,  alt.  8'1,  diam.  5"5  cm. 

Kio  de  la  Plata.  Described  from  seven  specimens  in  the  collection 
of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia. 

This  species  is  named  in  honor  of  Mr.  Charles  Torrey  Simpson, 
whose  valuable  papers  upon  the  Unionidce  have  been  of  great  ser- 
vice to  students  of  this  intricate  and  difficult  group. 

G.  Simpsonianus  belongs  to  the  group  of  G.  trapesialis  Lam.  It 
differs  from  typical  trapesialis  (Encycl.  Meth.,  pi.  205)  in  being  oval 
rather  than  subtriangular ;  the  beaks  are  far  less  inflated,  low  and 
wide  ;  the  nacre  is  peculiarly  pearly,  having  the  luster  of  that  of 
the  pearl  oyster ;  the  hinge  line  is  more  nearly  parallel  with  the 
basal  margin  and  is  far  longer  in  proportion  to  the  length  of  the 
shell ;  the  posterior  large  muscle-scar  is  close  to  the  sinus  at  end  of 
hinge-line,  not  distant  from  it  as  in  trapesialis ;  the  foot  protractor 
scar  is  of  a  very  different  shape.  Finally,  the  shell,  while  smaller, 
is  much  more  ponderous  and  thick  than  trapesialis.  Well-grown 
specimens  of  trapesialis  measure  19  cm.  long,  and  are  thinner  than 
Simpsonianus  14  cm.  in  length. 

Anodon  penicillatus  Gray*  apparently  resembles  this  species  in 
the  internal  markings  (which  are  common  to  many  species  of  Gla- 
haris),  but  it  is  described  as  "Antice  suhcompressa,  rotundata,  sub- 
gracili,"  terms  applying  well  to  some  forms  of  G.  trapesialis  var. 
exoticus. 

The  great  solidity  of  the  shell  for  a  Glabaris  will  separate  the 
species  from  G.  trapesialis  var.  exoticus  Lam.  and  var.  riogranden- 
sis  V.  Iher.  It  resembles  G.  Forbesianus  Lea  in  the  thickness  of  the 
shell,  but  is  more  oblong,  with  longer  hinge-line,  wider  beaks, 
differently  shaped  protractor  pedis  scar,  and  wider  ventral  gape. 

*Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  Lond.,  1834,  p.  57. 


566  proceedings  of  the  academy  of  [1896. 

December  1. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Thirty-seven  persons  present. 


December  8. 
The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-seven  persons  present. 


December  15. 
Mr.  Charles  Morris  in  the  Chair. 
Twenty-five  persons  present. 


December  22. 

The  President,  Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D.,  in  the  Chair. 

Thirty-one  persons  present. 

The  death  of  Auguste  Louis  Brot,  a  Correspondent,  August  30, 
was  announced. 


December  29. 

Rev.  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D.,  Vice-President,  in  the  Chair. 

Forty-four  persons  present. 

The  following  papers  were  presented  for  publication : — 

"  Certain  Aboriginal  Mounds  of  the  Georgia  Coast,"  by  Clarence 
B.  Moore.     (By  title). 

"Descriptions  of  New  South  American  Bulimuli,"  by  Henry  A. 
Pilsbry. 

The  following  was  ordered  to  be  printed  : — 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  567 


GEOLOGY  OF  THE  MUSSEL-BEARING  CLAYS  OF  FISH-HOUSE, 

NEW  JERSEY. 

BY  HENRY  A.  PILSBRY. 

The  deposit  containing  fresh-water  mussels  of  the  genera  Uriio 
and  Anodonta,  situated  at  Fish-house,  Camden  County,  New  Jersey, 
on  the  Delaware  River,  about  5  miles  north  of  Camden,  was  first 
noticed,  so  far  as  we  know,  by  Professor  E.  D.  Cope,  who  placed  a 
series  of  the  fossil  Unionidce  in  the  hands  of  Dr.  Isaac  Lea  for  de- 
scription^ in  1868.  In  Dr.  Lea's  paper  the  bed  containing  these  re- 
mains is  said  to  be  "subordinate  to  the  Green  Sand  >!«*** 
belonging  to  that  portion  of  the  cretaceous  group  which  furnished 
*     *     *     *     Hadrosaurus  Foulhii  Leidy,"  etc' 

The  species  of  Unionidce,  twelve  in  number,  were  fully  redescribed 
and  illustrated  in  1886  by  Professor  R.  P.  Whitfield,^  who,  relying 
upon  the  above  statement  in  Dr.  Lea's  paper,  considers  the  deposit 
as  "  from  near  the  base  of  the  Cretaceous  series  of  the  State."  Pro- 
fessor E.  D.  Cope,*  in  a  brief  consideration  of  "  The  Fresh-water 
Clays  of  the  Pea  Shore,"  in  1869,  gave  an  excellent  section  of  the 
beds,  which  may  be  consulted  with  advantage  in  connection  with 
the  present  communication.  He  held  that  they  were  "  much  later" 
than  the  Cretaceous,  and,  in  fact,  Pliocene ;  basing  this  conclusion 
largely  upon  the  finding  of  a  large  part  of  the  cranium  of  a  horse 
believed  to  be  Equus  fraternus  Leidy.  The  late  H.  Carvill  Lewis, 
on  the  contrary,  held  the  Fish-house  clay  to  be  "of  interglacial 
age,"  ^  and  this  estimate  of  the  age  of  the  deposit  is  shared  by  Dr. 
C.  A.  White,®  who  considers  the  fossils  as  of  post-Tertiary  date. 
This  is  also,  I  believe,  the  opinion  of  most  Philadelphia  geologists 
who  have  recently  examined  the  subject. 

iProc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  1868,  p.  162. 

'  It  is  diflBcult  to  account  for  this  statement,  which  finds  no  justification  in 
the  stratigraphy  of  the  region  in  question,  so  far  as  I  can  see. 

^  Brachiopoda  and  Lamellibranchiata  of  the  Raritan  Clays  and  Green  Sand 
Marls  of  New  Jersey,  pp.  243-252. 

*  Trans.  Amer.  Philos.  Soc,  XIV,  N.  Ser.,  pp.  249,  250. 

^  Professor  Lewis  did  not,  I  believe,  formally  publish  this  view,  but  taught 
it  in  his  lectures  at  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  synop- 
ses of  which  were  published  in  the  "  Public  Ledger,"  April-June,  1884.  The 
above  quotation  is  from  one  of  these  newspaper  reports. 

*  A  Review  of  the  Non-Marine  Fossil  Mollusca  of  North  America,  1883. 


568  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  view  that  the  Fish-house  clay  is  of  Pleistocene  age  is  materially 
strengthened  by  the  discovery  therein  of  several  horse  teeth  by  Mr. 
Lewis  Woolman,  and  by  the  recognition  of  the  identity  of  at  least  a 
portion  of  the  Umonida  with  living  species,  a  subject  referred  to 
below. 

The  fossils  occur  only  in  a  layer  of  black  clay,  which  is  used  for 
brick  and  tile  making.     This  deposit  is  capped  by  a  layer  of  coarse 
sand.     Under  the  black  clay  is  a  much  thinner  stratum  of  yellow 
or  reddish  clay,  containing  considerable  sand  and  deeply  stained 
with  iron  oxide.     Below  this  stratum,  which  is  about  two  feet  thick 
where  observed,  there  is  coarse  gravelly  sand,  which  forms  the  foun- 
dation of  the  superimposed  clays.     This  sand  deposit  is  of  consider- 
able thickness,  and  the  various  sections  exposed  show  it  to  be  dis- 
___^____.:^_^r:;_r2^^^;^;r:2   tluctly  stratified,  the  strata  being  obliquely 
\UM7^'^&(0A^'H.i^^u-'%   laminated,  as  shown  in  the  annexed  dia- 
%^0M^'''''^^^''''-^^  gram.     The  character  of  these  strata  is 

^l^s^r-    ;,.;;;*^j^,,e  A^  completely  that  of  arenaceous  deposits  in 

jj^  .,:  ■^:..^.■J■;'•■^v:^^:■x''^^■>^     river-beds.      So   far   as  I  know,  such   a 
...v^i.,-.-:-.=--.---"'<^-"-'-» '^^••'^•-  disposition    of  the  materials  is  not  pro- 

^^^-  1-  duced  by   any   other  means.      No  such 

Obliquely  laminated  strata.      .      .-a     4.-  i      i  r  i       •      t- 

^     ■^  stratincation  and  oblique  lammation    is 

to  be  seen  in  the  coarse  sand  at  the  summit  of  the  clays.  This 
difference  indicates  a  diverse  origin  for  the  two  deposits.  In  the 
opinion  of  the  writer,  the  peculiarities  of  the  Fish-house  clays  may 
be  explained  by  the  supposition  that  the  deposit  has  been  purely  a 
result  of  river-action.  The  phenomena  are  exactly  paralleled  by 
processes  now  in  progress  in  the  rivers  of  the  Mississippi  system, 
where  similar  deposits  containing  a  similar  fauna  may  be  seen  in 
every  stage  of  formation. 

Upon  this  theory  the  sands  underlying  the  red  clay  were  de- 
posited in  a  former  Delaware  River  bed,  the  river  at  that  time  flow- 
ing in  a  direction  practically  parallel  to  its  present  course,  as  shown 
by  the  direction  of  the  oblique  lamination  of  the  strata.  A  change 
in  the  river's  course,  such  as  cutting  across  the  neck  of  an  "  ox-bow," 
or  some  similar  shifting,  left  the  former  bed  at  this  point  a  lagoon, 
similar  to  the  so-called  "  sloughs  "  of  the  Mississippi  River.  A  la- 
goon of  this  nature,  while  it  quickly  becomes  dammed  at  the  up- 
stream end,  for  a  time  receives  a  portion  of  the  current  in  time  of 
high  water.  In  the  case  under  consideration,  the  layer  of  red,  more 
or  less  arenaceous,  clay  was  probably  deposited  during  this  period  of 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  569 

partial  isolation.  Further  separation  of  the  slough  from  the  stream 
is  effected  by  the  growth  of  willows  and  other  vegetation  upon  the 
alluvial  ridge  at  its  head,  which  rapidly  gains  in  height  by  the  debris 
collected  thereby.  The  lagoon  of  quiet  water  thus  formed  is  a  very 
favorable  station  for  molluscan  and  other  aquatic  life,  sedentary 
animals,  or  those  of  weak  locomotive  powers  becoming  far  more 
numerous  than  in  the  active  current  of  the  parent  stream.  Such  a 
lagoon  thus  gradually  fills  up  with  fine  mud  partly  composed  of  or- 
ganic material.  In  the  case  under  consideration,  the  black  clay 
represents  this  period.  During  this  time  the  mussels  flourished  in 
the  still  water.  Finally  the  lagoon  or  "  slough  "  became  dry  land, 
this  being  the  ordinary  result  of  the  process. 

The  naiad  fauna  of  the  Fish-house  deposit  is  precisely  similar  in 
general  character  to  that  of  the  "  sloughs  "  of  the  Mississippi  River 
to-day. 

The  cap  of  sand  upon  the  black  clay  may  be  regarded  as  a  later 
deposition  of  more  general  geographic  distribution,  while  the  forma- 
tions it  overlies  in  this  place  are  believed  to  be  the  result  of  strictly 
local  causes,  and  antedating  by  a  lapse  of  time,  greater  or  less  in 
duration,  the  overlying  gravels. 

As  to  the  fossils  themselves,  it  must  be  admitted  that  their  diver- 
gence from  living  forms  is  very  slight  in  most  cases — a  fact  which 
Dr.  Lea  significantly  indicated  by  his  choice  of  specific  names. 
Some  of  the  species  are  really  not  distinguishable  from  modern  shells. 
Thus  Unio  nasutoides  has  no  characters  which  can  not  be  readily 
paralleled  in  the  living  Unionasutus  or  fisherianus.  Anodonta  cor- 
pulentoides  is  equally  indistinguishable  from  A.  corpulenta.  The  ab- 
solute counterpart  of  Unio  radiatoides  may  be  selected  from  any 
collection  of  U.  radiatus,  and  so  on.  The  remarkable  feature  of  the 
series  of  fossil  forms  is  that  certain  of  them  have  no  modern  repre- 
sentatives in  the  Atlantic  drainage  south  of  the  Great  Lake  and  St. 
Lawrence  system.  The  following  "  species  "  exemplify  this  state- 
ment :  U.  ligamentinoides,  alatoides,  prceanodontoides,  rectoides,  Ano- 
donta grandioides  and  corpulentoides.  Although  the  affinities  of 
some  of  these  may  have  been  wrongly  estimated,  owing  to  imperfec- 
tion of  the  specimens,  still  a  portion  of  them  unquestionably  bears 
out  the  relationships  affirmed  by  Dr.  Lea.  The  majority  of  these 
species  foreign  to  the  modern  Atlantic  drainage  have  their  living 
allies  in,  or  are  identical  with,  species  of  the  Great  Lake  system,  ex- 
tending also  into  the  northern  Mississippi  drainage  in  which,  more- 


570  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

over,  they  are  better  developed.  Still,  the  characteristic  Mississippi 
Kiver  types  of  Unionidce  are  not  represented  in  the  Fish-house  fauna. 
None  of  the  triangular  or  round  Unios  with  heavy  teeth  are  found  ; 
no  member  of  the  great  tuberculate  or  plicate  groups  occur.  The 
Fish-house  fauna  is  therefore  to  be  assimilated  rather  with  the  Great 
Lake  system  than  with  the  Mississippi  or  Ohio  drainages.  The  spe- 
cies probably  found  their  way  into  the  Atlantic  system  in  New 
York  State,  where  the  Lake  and  Atlantic  waters  are  in  close  prox- 
imity. They  may  then  have  become  extinct  on  the  Atlantic  slope 
during  the  glacial  period  when  the  rivers  north  of  Delaware  Bay 
wex'e  so  profoundly  affected.' 

Summary. — The  writer  has  attempted  to  show  (1)  that  the  Fish- 
house  clay  is  a  Pleistocene  deposit,  as  held  by  Lewis,  White  and 
some  others,  not  belonging  to  the  Cretaceous  or  Tertiary  as  Lea, 
Whitfield  and  other  geologists  have  claimed;  (2)  that  it  is  either 
interglacial  or  preglacial,  and  probably  the  latter ;  (3)  that  it 
is  purely  local  and  fluviatile ;  and  (4)  that  the  structure  of  the 
sand  underlying  the  clay,  now  first  made  known,  gives  a  clue  to  the 
true  explanation  of  the  several  geologic  features  of  the  deposit. 

The  position  of  this  deposit  in  the  post-Pliocene  series  is  one  of 
some  difficulty,  but  materials  bearing  upon  the  question  are  not 
wanting.  We  know  that  the  immediately  post-glacial  mollusk  fauna 
of  New  Jersey  was  similar  to  the  modern,  except  that  it  contained 
forms  of  more  northern  distribution  ;  but  there  were  no  distinctively 
trans-AUeghenian  types  such  as  the  Fish-house  beds  contain.*  The 
very  difl^erent  character  of  the  latter  fauna  would  therefore  indicate 
an  earlier  period.  It  was  therefore  either  interglacial  or  preglacial, 
and  the  divergence  of  a  part  of  the  species  from  the  most  allied 
living  forms,  as  well  as  the  fact  that  the  fauna  was  an  abundant  one, 
composed  of  large  and  well-developed  individuals,  point  rather  to 
preglacial  than  to  interglacial  conditions. 

'  Those  interested  in  the  former  distribution  eastward  of  the  trans-AUe- 
ghenian Unionidse  should  consult  Simpson,  On  some  Fossil  Unios  from  the 
Drift  at  Toronto,  Canada.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  591. 

*  White  Pond,  in  Sussex  Co.,  N.  J  ,  a  typically  glacial  lake,  furnishes  abund- 
ant evidence  in  support  of  the  above  statement,  and  also  shows  the  changes 
which  have  taken  place  from  post  glacial  to  recent  times  in  the  mollusk  fauna. 
This  evidence  the  writer  proposes  to  publish  as  soon  as  engagements  permit. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  571 


The  following  annual  reports  were  read  and  referred  to  the  Pub- 
lication Committee  : — 

REPORT  OF  THE  RECORDING  SECRETARY. 

The  average  attendance  at  the  meetings  of  the  Academy  during 
the  past  year,  from  December  1,  1895,  to  November  30,  1896,  was 
forty.  Verbal  communications  were  made  by  Messrs.  Woolman, 
Goldsmith,  Rand,  Mercer,  Brinton,  Sharp,  Vaux,  Heilprin,  Cope, 
Chapman,  Allen,  Pilsbry,  Carter,  Keeley,  Lyman,  Holman,Sangree, 
Egbert,  Sommerville,  Dixon,  Leeds,  Stokes,  Campbell,  Wistar,  A. 
P.  Brown,  Willcox,  Frazer,  Morris,  Skinner,  A.  E.  Brown,  Rother- 
mel,  Henry,  Leonard,  Morsell,  Dolley,  A.  D.  Smith,  Rhoads,  Stone, 
Fox,  Reese,  Ball,  Horn,  McCook,  Seiss,  Calvert,  Balch,  Hamilton, 
Richardson  and  Miss  Bascom.  Those  that  were  reported  by  their 
authors  were  published  in  the  Proceedings. 

Six  hundred  and  nine  pages  of  the  Proceedings,  illustrated  by  23 
plates,  and  297  pages  of  the  Journal,  with  53  plates,  forming  Parts 
III  and  IV  of  the  tenth  volume,  have  been  issued.  We  are  indebted 
to  Mr.  Clarence  B.  Moore  for  the  illustrations  of  both  numbers. 

The  publication  of  the  MmiMal  of  Conchology  has  been  continued 
by  the  Conchological  Section.  During  the  year  Parts  63,  64  and 
64a  of  the  1st  Series  (Marine  Univalves),  and  Parts  39  and  40  of 
the  2d  Series  (Pulmonata)  have  been  issued.  The  former  consists  of 
157  pages  illustrated  by  44  plates,  and  the  latter  121  pages  illus- 
trated by  27  plates.  The  first  parts  of  Vols.  XVII  and  XI  respect- 
ively of  the  two  series  are  now  in  press.  The  expense  of  publication 
of  the  Manual,  copiously  illustrated  as  it  is  with  colored  plates,  is  so 
great  that  the  Section  would  be  unable  to  continue  it  were  it  not  for 
the  support  received  from  conchologists  throughout  the  world. 

The  Entomological  Section  and  the  American  Entomological  So- 
ciety have  published,  during  the  same  period,  288  pages  and  7  plates 
of  the  Entomological  News  and  386  pages  and  11  plates  of  the 
Transactions. 

This  makes  a  total  of  1,858  pages  and  165  plates  issued  under  the 
auspices  of  the  Academy  since  the  first  of  last  December. 

Forty  papers  have  been  presented  for  publication,  as  follows: — 
H.  A.  Pilsbry,  5  ;  Harrison  Allen,  M.  D.,  3  ;  Samuel  N.  Rhoads,  3 ; 
Edw.  D.  Cope,  3 ;  Ida  A.  Keller,  2  ;  Wm.  J.  Fox,  2 ;  R.  W.  Shu- 


572  PBOCEEDIXGS  OF  THE  ACADEMT  OF  [1896. 

feldt,  M.  D.,  2  ;  H.  A.  Pilsbrv  and  E.  G.  Vanatta,  2  ;  E.  L.  Green,  1 ; 
Witmer  Stone,  1 ;  Theo.  Holm.  1  ;  Thomas  Meehan,  1  ;  Amos  P. 
Brown,  ]  ;  O.  F.  Cook,  1  ;  J.  C.  Hartzell,  Jr.,  1  ;  Fredk.  P.  Henry, 
M.  D.,  1 ;  Chas.  S.  DoUey,  M.  D.,  1 ;  Frank  C.  Baker,  1 ;  Cloudesley 
Rutter,  1 ;  D.  S.  Jordan  and  Cloudesley  Butter,  1  ;  Wm.  H.  Dall,  1 ; 
J.  B.  Ellis  and  B.  M.  Everhart,  1 ;  GUbert  D.  Harris,  1 ;  S.  K 
Rhoads  and  H.  A.  Pilsbrv,  1  ;  Charles  Morris,  1 ;  Edw.  S.  Balch,  1. 
Four  of  these  have  been  returned  to  the  authors,  two  have  been 
withdrawn,  four  are  held  for  publication  next  year,  and  the  others 
have  been  issued  in  the  current  volume  of  the  Proceedings.  In  view 
of  the  occasional  appearance  in  newspapers  of  communications 
offered  to  the  Academy,  on  the  recommendation  of  the  Publication 
Committee  a  resolution  was  adopted  declining  to  print  papers  of 
which  more  than  a  brief  abstract  had  appeared  elsewhere  than  in  the 
publications  of  the  society. 

Thirty-five  members  and  two  correspondents  have  been  elected. 
The  deaths  of  thirteen  members  and  ten  correspondents  have  been 
reported,  and  the  resignations  of  ten  members  have  been  accepted,  as 
follows  :  S.  Emlen  Meigs,  Annesley  R.  Govett,  Eugene  Delano,  John 
C.  Sims,  Jos.  C.  Harrison,  Francis  B.  Reeves,  Theo.  Presser,  James 
Y.  McAllister,  Frank  T.  Patterson  and  Adele  M.  Fielde,  leaving  a 
gain  of  twelve  members  during  the  year. 

The  contributors  to  the  Building  Fund  having  made  their  final 
report  setting  forth  the  completion  of  the  new  lecture-hall  and 
museum  building,  the  expenditure  of  the  fund  and  the  discontinu- 
ance of  the  organization,  the  action  was  approved  by  the  Academy 
and  the  Recording  Secretarv  was  authorized  to  receive  all  the  books, 
paper?  and  other  assets  of  said  contributors,  and  of  the  Board  of 
Trustees  established  by  them. 

The  resignation  of  Dr.  Dixon  as  Professor  of  Histology  and  Mi- 
croscopic Technology,  presented  in  consequence  of  a  press  of  official 
duties,  was  accepted  January  28. 

Dr.  Henry  Skinner  was  elected  Professor  in  the  Department  of 
Insecta,  March  21. 

General  Isaac  J.  Wistar  was  appointed  the  representative  of  the 
Academy  at  the  celebration  of  the  fiftieth  anniversary  of  Lord  Kel- 
vin's tenure  of  office  as  Professor  in  the  University  of  Glasgow. 

Prof  Angelo  Heilprin  representee!  the  Society  at  the  Alining  and 
Geological  Millenial  Congress  at  Buda  Pest. 

Dr.  Persifor  Frazer  was  appointed  to  represent  the  Academy  at 
the  .Seventh  Session  of  the  International  Geological  Congress. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  573 

In  response  to  an  invitation,  Dr.  Charles  S.  Dollev  was  requested 
to  contribute  to  the  proceedings  of  the  Congres  International  de 
Peches  Maritimes  at  Ville  des  Sables  d'  Olonne. 

The  report  of  the  Committee  on  the  Hayden  Memorial  Award 
conferring  the  recognition  for  1S96  on  Prof.  Giovanni  Capellini,  hav- 
ing been  adopted,  the  medal  and  interest  on  the  fund  were  forwarded 
to  the  distinguished  geologist  through  the  Italian  Consul,  and  their 
receipt  has  been  duly  acknowledged. 

An  important  addition  to  the  educational  facilities  of  the  Acad- 
emy was  formally  provided  for  by  the  adoption  of  the  following 
resolution,  June  30  : — 

Resolved,  That  the  Committee  on  Instruction  and  Lectures  of  the 
Academy  be  authorized  to  cooperate  with  the  Ludwick  Institute  in 
the  delivery  of  free  courses  of  lectures  on  the  natural  sciences,  pri- 
marily to  the  teachers  in  schools,  and  that  the  Academy  expresses 
its  satisfaction  with  the  plan  proposed  by  the  Institute  for  the  ad- 
vancement of  public  education. 

A  resolution  was  adopted  December  24,  1895,  empowering  the 
President  to  designate  annually  two  members  of  the  Academy  to  the 
electors  of  the  Wistar  Institute  of  Anatomy  and  Biology  to  serve  as 
manaorers  of  the  Institute  under  the  deed  of  endowment  until  their 
successors  shall  have  been  appointed. 

A  resolution  urging  the  Commissioner  of  City  Property  to  take 
timely  measures  for  the  extermination  of  the  tussock  moth  from 
squares  and  city  trees  was  adopted,  and  the  subject  referred  to  a 
committee  of  entomologists  who  drew  up  and  submitted  to  the 
Commissioner  a  set  of  suggestions  which,  if  carried  out.  would  un- 
doubtedly eflect  the  very  desirable  object  contemplated. 

The  Academy's  attention  having  been  called  to  a  bill  before 
Congress  for  the  prevention  of  vivisection,  a  series  of  resolutions  pre- 
pared by  a  Committee  consisting  of  Messrs.  Cope,  Sharp  and  H.  F. 
Moore,  deprecating  its  adoption,  was  ordered  to  be  sent  to  "Washing- 
ton as  an  expression  of  the  Academy's  views  on  the  subject. 

The  fourth  Tuesday  of  each  month  has  been  assigned  to  the 
Anthropological  Section  for  cooperation  with  the  meetings  of  the 
Academy. 

All  of  which  is  respectfully  submitted. 

Edw.  J.  XOLAN, 
Recording  Secretary. 


574  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

REPORT  OF  THE  CORRESPONDING  SECRETARY. 

The  Corresponding  Secretary  respectfully  reports  that  during  the 
past  year,  commencing  December  1,  1895,  there  have  been  received 
from  eighty-seven  societies,  museums,  libraries,  etc.,  one  hundred 
and  eighty-two  acknowledgements  of  the  receipt  of  the  publications 
of  the  Academy  ;  and  from  forty-five  societies,  libraries,  etc.,  fifty- 
seven  notices  that  their  publications  have  been  forwarded  to  the 
Academy,  together  with  eighteen  applications  to  exchange  publi- 
cations for  Reports,  Proceedings,  etc.,  and  asking  for  missing  num- 
bers of  the  publications  of  the  Academy. 

Twenty-five  letters  on  various  subjects  have  been  received,  and 
twenty-six  written.  Twenty-one  circulars  and  invitations  extended 
to  tlie  Academy  to  participate  in  Congresses  or  meetings,  and  an- 
nouncements of  the  deaths  of  scientific  men  have  been  received 
and,  when  necessary,  acknowledged. 

During  the  year  two  correspondents  have  been  elected  and  notified. 

The  deaths  of  the  following  correspondents  have  been  reported : — 

M.  S.  Bebb,  of  Rockford,  Illinois,  elected  in  1881,  died  December 
5,  1895. 

Don  Antonio  del  Castillo,  of  Mexico,  elected  1874,  died  October 
27,  1895. 

Prof.  Gabriel  Auguste  Daubree,  of  Paris,  France,  elected  1884, 
died  May  29,  1896. 

George  Edward  Dobson,  of  London,  England,  elected  1884,  died 
November  26,  1895. 

Prof.  Alexander  Henry  Green,  of  Oxford,  England,  elected  1877, 
died  August  19,  1896. 

Dr.  Juan  Gundlach,  of  Havana,  Cuba,  elected  1867,  died  March, 
1896. 

Sir  Ferdinand  von  Mueller,  of  Melbourne,  Victoria,  elected  1876, 
died  October  9,  1896. 

Auguste  Salle,  of  Paris,  France,  elected  1888,  died  May  5,  1896. 

Charles  Wachsmuth,  of  Burlington,  Iowa,  elected  1886,  died  Feb- 
ruary 7,  1896. 

Prof.  Josiah  D wight  Whitney,  of  Boston,  Mass.,  elected  1852, 
died  August  19,  1896. 

Seven  hundred  and  fifty-eight  acknowledgements  for  gifts  to  the 
library  and  eighty-three  for  gifts  to  the  museum  have  been  for- 
warded. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Benj.  Sharp, 
Corresponding  Secretary.  . 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 

REPORT  OF  THE  LIBRARIAN. 


575 


The  additions  to  the  library  of  the  Academy  since  the  last  of  Nov- 
ember, 1895,  have  numbered  5,372,  of  which  4,357  are  pamphlets  and 
parts  of  periodicals,  985  volumes,  22  maps  and  8  photographs. 

They  have  been  received  from  the  following  sources : — 


Societies, 

I.  V.  William som  Fund 

Editors, 

Authors, 

U.  S.  Dept.  of  Agriculture 
J.  A.  Meigs  Fund,  .     . 
U.  S.  Dept.  of  the  Interior 
PennsylvaniaState  Library 
Geological  Surv.  of  Sweden 
Charles  P.  Perot,      .     . 
H.  A.  Pilsbry,     .     .     . 
Wilson  Fund,       .     .     . 
Comite  Geologique  Russe 
Ministry  of  Public  Works 

France, 

Thomas  Meehan, 
U.  S.  Dept.  of  State,     . 
East  Indian  Government 
Geological  Surv.  of  Canada 
Trustees  of  British  Museum 
U.  S.  Dept.  of  Labor, 
General  Appropriation 
Geological  Survey  of  India 
Tennessee  State  Board 

Health, 

Department  of  Mines,  New 

South  Wales,   .     . 
Stewart  Culin,     ... 
U.   S.   Treas.  Department, 
Cal.  State  Mining  Bureau 
Geological  Survey  of  Mis 

souri, 

U.  S.  Fish  Commission, 
Benjamin  Sharp, 
Bentham    Trustees,    Kew 

Garden, 


2,399 

1,140 

1,084 

166 

112 

62 

45 

44 

35 

34 

33 

16 

15 

14 

13 

12 

11 

10 

10 

7 

7 

7 


of 


7 
6 
6 
4 

4 

4 
3 


Conchological    Section    of 

the  Academy, .  .  . 
Chas.  E.  Smith,  .  .  . 
Department  of  Agriculture 

Victoria,      .... 
Geological  Comm.  Mexico 
Geological  Survey  of  Ala 

bama, 

Geological  Survey  of  New 

Jersey,   

Henry  C.  Chapman, 
Rev.  Francis  Barnum, 
Secretary  of  State,  Mexico 
Secretary  of  Works,  Mex. 
U.  S.  War  Department, 
William  E.  Meehan,     . 
Wm.  J.  Fox,  .... 
Messrs.  Appleton  &  Co. , 
Messrs.  C.  E.  Howe  &  Co. 
Cochin  Government,     . 
F.  M.  Comstock,      .     . 
Department    of   Mines 

Nova  Scotia,     .     . 
Geological    and    Natural 

History  Survey,  Minn. 
Geological  Survey  of  Iowa 
Geological  Survey  of  Mis 

souri, 

Geological  Survey  of  Penn 

sylvania,      .... 
Geological  Survey  of  Rou 

mania, 

Mrs.  John  Gilbert,  .  . 
Guy  Hinsdale,  .  .  . 
Angelo  Heilprin,  .  , 
Harold  Wingate,     . 


3 

2 

2 

2 


2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 


1 
1 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 


576 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


Illinois  State  Board  of  Ag- 
riculture,      

Benj.  S.  Lyman,       .     .     . 

Cyrus  H.  JNIcCormack, 

Maryland  State  Weather 
Service, 

Massachusetts  State  Board 
of  Agriculture, 

J.  C.  Morgan,      .... 

Metropolitan  Park  Com- 
mission,  Massachusetts, 


1 
1 
1 


Minister  of  Education,  On- 
tario,        1 

Edw.  J.  Nolan,    .     .     ,     .  1 

South  African  Govern- 
ment,        1 

Geological  Survey  of  Por- 
tugal,        1 

U.  S.  Coast  and  Geodetic 

Survey,  1 

W.  H.  Harned,  ....  1 


These  accessions  were  distributed  to  the  several  departments  of 
the  library,  as  follows : — 


Journals, 4,420 

Geology, 187 

Botany, 155 

General  Natural  History,  .  127 

Agriculture, 73 

Anthropology,     ....  43 

Voyages  and  Travels,    .     .  38 

Anatomy  and  Phj'siology,  37 

Entomology, 37 

Conchology, 33 

Encj^clopedias,     ....  31 

Mammalogy, 28 


Ornithology,   . 
Mineralogy,    . 
Physical  Science 
Geography,     . 
Ichthyology,  . 
Medicine,  . 
Helmintliolog}', 
Herpetology,  . 
Bibliography, 
Chemistry, 
Miscellaneous, 


26 

25 

21 

13 

13 

9 

8 

7 

5 

4 

69 


As  heretofore,  all  additions  have  been  promptly  catalogued  and 
placed  for  use,  the  geographical  arrangement  of  periodicals  being 
still  retained,  although  the  crowded  condition  of  many  of  the  cases 
makes  it  difficult  to  preserve  the  classification,  and,  for  the  conven- 
ience of  the  student,  it  is  proposed  to  arrange  the  journals  devoted 
to  special  subjects  in  connection  with  the  special  departments  of  the 
library.  A  number  of  new  cases  are  being  prepared  which  will 
partly  occupy  space  gained  by  the  removal  of  tlie  stock  of  the 
Academy's  Proceedings  and  Journal  to  a  storage-room  in  the  base- 
ment of  the  new  building,  thus  giving  an  opportunity  for  some  con- 
templated improvements  in  classification. 

A  shelf  list  of  the  general  Meigs  library  is  nearly  completed,  and 
a  card  catalogue  of  the  portions  arranged  in  connection  with  the 
special  departments  of  the  Academy's  library  is  proceeding  as 
rapidly  as  our  very  scant  clerical  assistance  will  permit. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  577 

Six  hundred  and  forty-nine  volumes  have  been  bound  and  sixty- 
nine  are  now  in  the  hands  of  the  binders.  This  does  not  half  com- 
plete the  work  on  the  accumulation  of  unbound  journals,  and  a 
much  more  liberal  appropriation  than  the  Academy  is  at  present 
able  to  make  is  necessary  to  place  the  remainder  of  this  most  im- 
portant section  of  the  library  in  good  working  condition. 

Renewed  effort  has  been  made,  as  the  several  sets  of  journals  have 
been  prepared  for  the  bindery,  to  obtain  a  supply  of  deficiencies.  In 
many  cases  the  replies  to  applications  have  been  gratifyingly  liberal, 
special  acknowledgment  being  due,  in  this  connection,  to  the  Im- 
perial Academy  of  Science  of  St.  Petersburg,  from  which  170  vol- 
umes, extending  back  to  1726,  and  not  heretofore  in  the  library  of 
the  Academy,  have  been  received. 

Important  additions  have  been  made  to  the  collection  of  lantern 
slides,  the  formation  of  which  was  noted  last  year.  Dr.  Charles 
Schaeffer  has  given  163  ;  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp,  36  ;  Wm.  Stevenson, 
12  ;  Silas  L.  Schumo,  3  ;  while  26  were  purchased,  making  the  en- 
tire collection  566. 

We  are  indebted  to  Mr.  William  E.  Haydock  for  a  fine  crayon 
portrait  of  Mr.  John  G.  Meigs,  whose  legacy  to  the  Academy  was 
recorded  in  my  last  annual  report. 

On  retiring  from  the  Presidency  at  the  expiration  of  his  four 
years  of  office.  General  Isaac  J.  Wistar  contributed  his  portrait  in 
oil,  by  Vonnah,  to  the  gallery  of  Presidents,  thus  completing  a  col- 
lection of  much  value  and  interest. 

I  am  glad  to  again  acknowledge  the  efficient  services  of  my  as- 
sistant, Mr.  William  J.  Fox. 

Edw.  J.  Nolan, 

Librarian. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CURATORS. 

The  year  just  passed  is  especially  noteworthy  in  the  history  of  the 
Academy  on  account  of  the  opening  of  the  new  museum  building  to 
the  public.  It  has  been  impossible  to  prepare  the  entire  building 
for  exhibition  this  year ;  yet  it  was  considered  desirable  to  open  a 
portion  of  it  to  the  public  without  further  delay,  and,  in  accordance 
with  this  plan,  the  first  and  second  floors,  comprising  the  depart- 
ments of  Mineralogy,  Archaeology  and  Mammalogy,  were  formally 
opened  October  20th  with  appropriate  ceremony. 


578  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Much  time  has  necessarily  been  consumed  in  arranging  and  label- 
ling the  collections  in  their  new  quarters.  In  addition  to  the  Wm. 
S.  Vaux  Collections,  representing  Mineralogy  and  Archaeology,  and 
the  Clarence  B.  Moore  Archseological  Collection,  which  were  ar- 
ranged on  the  first  floor  of  the  new  building  during  the  present  year, 
all  the  other  archaeological  material  has  been  arranged  in  new  cases 
procured  for  its  reception,  the  majority  of  them  uniform  with  those 
containing  the  Moore  Collection.  Prof.  F.  W.  Putnam,  of  Cam- 
bridge, devoted  some  days  to  helping  us  in  the  general  arrangement 
and  classification  of  the  collections,  after  which  they  were  finally 
placed  and  labelled.  The  Peruvian  and  Egyptian  mummies  were 
also  arranged  in  new  cases  and  displayed  on  this  floor. 

The  entire  collection  of  mammals  was  transferred  from  the  old 
building  to  the  second  floor  of  the  new  museum,  the  old  cases  being 
necessarily  retained  in  use  until  new  and  more  suitable  ones  can  be 
substituted. 

The  series  of  mounted  mammals  is  now  displayed  in  a  thoroughly 
systematic  manner  and  carefully  labelled,  with  the  families  and 
orders  indicated  in  each  case,  an  arrangement  that  was  quite  im- 
possible in  the  former  crowded  galleries.  Many  recently  mounted 
specimens  have  been  exhibited  for  the  first  time,  and  a  number  of 
badly  mounted  duplicate  specimens  have  been  removed  from  the 
cases  to  the  study-collection  of  skins.  Other  poorly  mounted  speci- 
mens are  being  removed  as  fast  as  new  and  better  examples  can 
be  obtained.  In  this  way  the  inferior  work  of  the  old  time  taxider- 
mists is  being  rapidly  replaced  by  the  life-like  mounts  that  charac- 
terize the  modern  art. 

The  large  collection  of  mammalian  osteological  material,  which 
was  formerly  so  crowded  as  to  render  it  inaccessible,  has  been  care- 
fully arranged  in  storage-cases  on  the  first  floor  of  the  new  museum, 
where  it  can  be  consulted  with  great  convenience,  while  an  exhibi- 
tion series,  comprising  skulls  or  articulated  skeletons  of  the  princi- 
pal types,  is  exhibited  on  the  mammalogical  floor.  The  large  Baleen,' 
optera  skeleton  has  been  placed  along  the  eastern  end  of  this  floor 
and  the  smaller  whale  skeletons  from  the  old  building  mounted  and 
placed  near  by. 

Notwithstanding  the  time  required  to  prepare  the  new  building 
for  exhibition,  the  work  accomplished  in  other  departments  has  been 
considerable.  The  removal  of  so  much  material  from  the  old  build- 
ing has  made  it  possible  to  arrange  the  cases  containing  thepalseon- 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  579 

tological  collections  to  much  better  advantage,  while  the  vacant 
space  under  the  south  gallery  has  been  partitioned  off  uniform  with 
the  Entomological  room,  to  furnish  apartments  for  the  Biological 
and  Geological  Sections.  Two  additional  commodious  rooms  have 
been  fitted  up  for  the  Botanical  Section  on  the  library  floor. 

During  the  year  the  cataloguing  of  the  mineral  collection  has 
been  continued,  and  a  series  of  minerals  from  Pennsylvania  and 
New  Jersey  selected  from  the  general  exhibit,  has  been  arranged  in 
the  department  of  local  natural  history. 

Work  on  the  invertebrate  fossils  has  been  mainly  confined  to  the 
Lea  Eocene  Collection.  Through  the  liberality  of  the  Rev.  L.  T. 
Chamberlain,  D.  D.  a  third  fine  case  has  been  procured  for 
the  display  of  the  collection,  and  Mr.  C.  W.  Johnson  has  been 
enabled  to  spend  much  time  in  arranging  and  labelling  the  speci- 
mens and  in  carrying  on  valuable  exchanges,  besides  making  a  short 
trip  to  the« Potomac  Valley,  where  a  large  collection  was  made. 

In  the  Department  of  Vertebrate  Palaeontology  a  valuable  addi- 
tion has  been  made  to  the  museum  by  the  final  arrangement  and 
labelling  of  the  Port  Kennedy  Collection.  Work  at  the  cave  has 
been  actively  and  successfully  pushed  forward  during  the  year  by 
Dr.  Dixon  and  Mr.  H.  C.  Mercer. 

Great  progress  has  also  been  made  in  cataloguing  and  renovating 
the  collection  of  birds,  so  that  this  work  is  rapidly  nearing  comple- 
tion. Many  valuable  additions  have  also  been  received,  especially 
to  the  Delaware  Valley  Ornithological  Collection  of  local  birds,  the 
increase  of  which  has  necessitated  the  addition  of  a  new  plate-glass 
case  for  its  accommodation.  Further  particulars  of  Avork  in  this 
department  will  be  found  in  the  report  of  the  Ornithological  Section. 

In  other  departments  the  work  has  been  mainly  restricted  to  cata- 
loguing and  arranging  the  large  additions  received  during  the  year, 
and  looking  after  the  general  condition  of  the  specimens,  which  is 
now  excellent. 

The  additions  to  the  museum  during  the  year  have  been  note- 
worthy. One  of  the  most  important  of  these  is  the  archseolog- 
ical  and  zoological  material  obtained  by  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp  dur- 
ing a  cruise  along  the  coast  and  among  the  islands  of  Alaska  and 
Siberia  in  the  U.  S.  Revenue  Cutter  "  Bear,"  during  the  year 
1895.  Besides  fine  series  of  native  implements,  there  are  valuable  col- 
lections of  mollusks  and  birds,  and  a  Pacific  walrus  ;  also  three  fur 
seals,  which  now  make  one  of  the  most  attractive  groups  in  the  mu- 

38 


580  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

seum.  Another,  and  one  of  the  most  valuable  accessions,  is  a  series 
of  mammals,  birds,  fishes  and  reptiles  collected  in  Somali-laud  by 
Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith  on  his  expedition  through  that  country. 

Valuable  collections  of  birds,  mollusks  and  plants  were  likewise 
obtained  for  the  Academy  by  Mr.  George  Russell  in  British  Guiana. 
Another  important  addition  is  the  collection  of  marine  invertebrates 
prepared  in  formaline  by  our  preparateur,  Mr.  F.  W.  Walmsley. 
Many  other  donations  have  been  received,  special  mention  of  which 
will  be  found  in  the  appended  list  of  accessions,  including  a  number 
of  rare  specimens  from  the  Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia. 

The  various  collections  under  the  care  of  special  conservators 
have  received  careful  attention  during  the  year,  and  to  the  gentle- 
men who  have  rendered  this  important  service  the  Curators  would 
express  their  indebtedness — to  Messrs.  Thomas  Meehan  and  Steward- 
son  Brown  of  the  Botanical  Section  ;  Dr.  Henry  Skinner  of  the 
Entomological  Section,  and  William  W.  Jefferis,  Curator  of  the 
Wm.  S.  Vaux  Collections. 

Valuable  assistance  has  also  been  rendered  in  various  departments 
of  the  museum  by  the  students  of  the  Jessup  Fund :  Miss  Helen  Hig- 
gins,  Miss  Jennie  Letson,  Messrs.  H.  W.  Fowler,  William  J.  Ger- 
hard, E.  G.  Vanatta  and  S.  H.  Hamilton. 

Henry  C.  Chapman, 

Chairman  of  the  Curators. 


REPORT  OF  THE  BIOLOGICAL  AND  MICROSCOPICAL 

SECTION. 

The  Section  has  held  the  usual  number  of  meetings  during  the 
past  year,  and  the  attendance  has  been  up  to  the  average. 

Connuunications  pertaining  to  the  subject  of  the  Section,  have  been 
made  at  each  meeting  and  usually  specimens  have  been  exhibited 
under  the  microscope.  The  cabinet  has  been  enriched  by  158  botan- 
ical slides,  principally  fungi,  belonging  to  the  late  Dr.  Rex  and  pre- 
sented by  his  sister  through  Mr.  Wingate. 

The  microscope  of  the  late  Dr.  Wm.  Hunt,  and  forty  slides,  were 
given  by  his  widow. 

A  room  on  the  second  floor  of  the  Academy  has  been  fitted  up 
by  the  Section  and  will  soon  be  ready  for  occupancy.     Aquariums 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  581 

and  work  tables  will  be  at  the  disposal  of  the  members,  and  it  is 
hoped  will  be  used  for  scientific  investigation. 
The  oflicers  of  the  Section  are  as  follows : — 


Director, 
Vice- Director, 
Treasurer, 
Conservator,  . 
Corresponding  Secretary, 
Recorder, 


J.  Cheston  Morris,  M.  D. 

John  C.  Wilson, 

Chas.  P.  Perot. 

F.  J.  Keely. 

John  G.  Rothermel. 

M.  V.  Ball. 

M.  V.  Ball, 

Recorder. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CONCHOLOGICAL  SECTION. 

The  arrangement  of  the  conchological  collection  remains  substan- 
tially as  reported  last  year,  want  of  space  preventing  the  progress 
of  the  systematic  rearrangement  in  the  exhibition  cases  of  the  families 
of  mollusks  studied  and  relabelled  during  the  year,  in  connection 
with  the  monographic  work  in  the  Manual  of  Conchology.  The 
remainder  of  the  Tectibranch  gastropods,  including  the  Aplysiidce, 
Pleurohranchidce  and  Umbraculidce,  and  of  the  land  mollusks  a 
considerable  Tpavt  of  the  Bulimulidce,  have  been  revised  and  prepared 
for  arrangement  in  the  cases.  The  genus  Cerion  has  been  studied 
by  Mr.  Vanatta  and  the  Conservator,  and  the  collection  relabelled 
and  arranged  according  to  a  complete  catalogue  of  the  species  pub- 
lished in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy.  It  is  gratifying  to  state 
that  out  of  seventy  described  species  of  Cerion  we  are  in  possession 
of  all  but  seven,  and  have  extensive  series  of  most  of  the  species. 

A  portion  of  the  American  Slugs  have  been  studied,  and  large 
additions  to  the  collection  made ;  partial  results  being  given  in  a 
paper  published  by  the  Academy,  the  greater  part  of  this  work  be- 
ing due  to  Mr.  Vanatta's  industry. 

A  considerable  collection  of  mollusks  from  Uruguay  and  adjacent 
regions  has  been  received  from  Dr.  Wm.  H.  Rush,  U.  S.  N.,  com- 
prising many  species  new  to  the  collection,  and  about  twenty  new  to 
science. 

A  valuable  collection  of  Alaskan  mollusks,  made  by  Dr.  Benj. 
Sharp,  has  been  presented  to  the  Academy,  but  not  yet  wholly  de- 
termined. The  remainder  of  Prof.  Heilpriu's  Bermuda  collection 
has  been  placed  in  the  cases,  and  with  what  we  already  had,  forms 


582  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

probably  the  most  extensive  series  of  Bermuda  mollusks  in  any 
museum. 

The  additions  to  our  series  of  American  molkisks  have  been  very 
numerous,  the  most  extensive  accessions  being  Mr.  S.  N.  Ehoads, 
collection  of  Tennessee  shells,  the  series  collected  by  Mr.  C.  W.  John- 
son and  the  Conservator  in  Florida  in  1894,  and  a  collection  of  marine 
forms  from  Pugefc  Sound,  which  we  owe  to  the  Young  Naturalist's 
Society  of  Seattle,  Washington  ;  also,  a  large  series  of  the  recent  and 
post-tertiary  mollusks  of  White  Pond,  New-Jersey,  collected  by  Mr. 
Rhoads  and  the  Conservator.  Eighty-three  persons,  a  list  of  whom 
is  given  in  the  record  of  additions  to  the  Museum,' have  contributed 
smaller  numbers  of  mollusks  to  the  collection. 

The  Conchological  Section  and  the  Academy  have  purchased  291 
species  new  to  the  collection  during  the  year. 

The  Officers  of  the  Section  are  as  follows : — 

Director, Benjamin  Sharp,  M.  D. 


Vice- Director, 
Recorder  and  Librarian, 
Correspo7iding  Secretary, 
Treasurer, 


.  John  Ford. 

.  Edw.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 

.  Chas.  W.  Johnson. 

.  S.  Raymond  Roberts. 

Henry  A.  Pilsbry, 

Conservator. 


REPORT  OF  THE  ENTOMOLOGICAL  SECTION. 

The  Section  moved  into  the  apartments  provided  by  the  Acad- 
emy, which  it  now  occupies,  February  27,  1895,  and  immediately 
thereafter  work  was  commenced  on  the  rearrangement  of  the 
collections  and  library.  Owing  to  the  crowded  condition  of  the  old 
rooms,  it  was  impossible  to  attempt  any  proper  arrangement,  but,  at 
the  present  time,  all  our  possessions  are  in  a  very  satisfactory  condi- 
tion, and  can  be  properly  studied  and  used  to  advantage.  The 
members  of  the  Section  now  feel  that  they  are  in  a  position  to  do 
good  work,  as  they  have  the  space  for  growth  of  the  collections  and 
library,  and  an  incentive  to  advance.  There  has,  undoubtedly, 
been  a  greatly  increased  interest  in  our  study  among  the  members 
of  the  Section  which  is  likely  to  continue.  During  the  past  year 
important  additions  have  been  made  to  the  cabinet.  Many  species 
have  been  presented  to  the  display  collection  representing  the  fauna 
of  Pennsylvania  and  southern  New  Jersey.      The  meetings  have 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  583 

been  well  attended,  the  smallest  number  of  persons  present  at  any- 
meeting  being  eleven,  and  the  largest  seventeen.  The  scientific 
communications  have  been  of  interest  and  of  practical  value  in 
the  advancement  of  entomology. 

At  the  annual  meeting,  held  December  17th,  the  following  were 
elected  officers  to  serve  during  the  coming  year: — 

Director, George  H.  Horn. 


Vice- Director, 

Treasurer, 

Co7iservator  anH  Recorder, 

Secretary, 

Publication  Committee,    . 


C.  S.  Welles. 
C.  T.  Cresson. 
Henry  Skinner. 
W.  J.  Fox. 
C.  W.  Johnson. 
J.  H.  Ridings. 

Henry  Skinner, 

Recorder. 


REPORT  OF  THE  BOTANICAL  SECTION. 

'  The  Director  of  the  Botanical  Section  respectfully  reports  that  this 
department  of  the  Academy  is  in  a  prosperous  condition.  It  is  free 
from  debt,  and  has  a  small  surplus  in  its  treasury.  Meetings  have 
been  held  regularly  at  stated  times  when  many  matters  of  importance 
to  botanical  science  were  brought  forward  and  discussed. 

The  progress  and  needs  of  the  herbarium  are  well  set  forth  in  the 
statement  of  the  Conservator,  Mr.  Stewardson  Brown,  which  is  sub- 
mitted as  a  part  of  this  report.  It  is  hoped  that  the  Redfield  Mem- 
orial Herbarium  Fund,  efforts  to  enlarge  which  from  outside  sources 
have  been  held  in  abeyance  the  past  year,  may  soon  be  increased. 
The  income  from  this  should  be  immediately  available  to  aid  in 
securing  additional  collections,  while  the  principal  sum  is  growing 
so  as  to  secure  the  essential  services  of  a  Curator.  The  voluntary 
labors  of  Messrs.  Crawford,  Beringer,  Brown  and  Meehan,  in  arrang- 
ing the  herbarium  and  preparing  the  specimens  for  fastening  down, 
have  been  continuous  the  past  two  years.  It  will  take  some  five  or 
six  years,  at  the  same  rate  of  proceeding,  to  complete  the  task,  even 
if  no  additions  were  made  to  the  collection.  It  is  a  question  whether 
it  is  wise  to  depend  greatly  on  this  assistance,  and  it  is  earnestly 


584  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

hoped  that  the  Redfield  Herbarium  Memorial  Fund  may  secure  the 
active  interest  of  the  Academy. 

The  officers  for  the  ensuing  year  are : — 

Director, Thomas  Meehan. 

Vice-Director, Charles  E.  Smith. 

Conservator  and  Treasurer,    .         .         .     Stewardson  Brown. 

Recorder,       ......     Chas.  Schiiffer,  M.  D. 

Corresponding  Secretary,        .         .         .Jos.  Crawford. 

Thomas  Meehan, 

•  Director. 

In  presenting  this  report  for  the  year  your  Conservator  is  glad  to  be 
able  to  announce  that  the  work  of  permanently  mounting  the  general 
herbarium  has  been  carried  on  steadily,  and  is  completed  nearly  to 
the  end  of  the  Compositse,  which  should  be  a  matter  of  congratula- 
tion to  all  those  interested  in  this  very  important  work. 

Such  an  advance  has  been  made  possible  through  the  untiring 
efforts  of  the  Director  of  the  Section,  Mr.  Thomas  Meehan,  who  has 
devoted  a  large  amount  of  his  time  to  the  work  during  the  past 
year. 

In  this  connection  the  Conservator  wishes  to  acknowledge  the 
services  of  the  Assistant  in  the  herbarium,  Mrs.  E.  F.  Hochgesang, 
who  has  rendered  most  valuable  aid  in  mounting  and  redistributing 
the  plants,  fully  ten  thousand  sheets  having  been  handled  during 
the  year. 

In  additions  this  year  has  not  been  behind  former  ones,  as  2,450 
species  and  varieties  have  been  added  to  the  herbarium,  of  which 
803  are  lower  Cryptogams  and  1,647  Phanerogams  and  Ferns.  They 
are  distributed  as  follows  :  North  America,  1,500  ;  Tropical  x\merica, 
299  ;  Asia,  241 ;  Australia  and  Polynesia,  410 — adding  about  600 
species  new  to  the  collection. 

Among  these  may  be  specially  mentioned  the  following:  The 
unique  collection  of  Myxomycetes,  forming  tlie  herbarium  of  the 
late  Dr.  George  A.  Rex,  comprising  some  400  species,  and  presented 
to  the  Academy  by  his  sister ;  500  species  of  the  North  American 
Grasses  from  the  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture,  through 
Prof.  F.  Lamson  Scribner  ;  150  species  of  Alaskan  and  Siberian 
Plants  from  Dr.  Benj.  Sharp;  90  species  of  Jamaica  Ferns  from  U. 
C.  Smith  ;  Centuries  34  and  35  of  North  American  Fungi  from  Dr. 
J.  B.  Ellis ;  172  species  and  varieties  of  Sphagna  Boreali-Americana 
Exsiccata  from  Mr,  George  F.  Eaton ;  375  species  of  Hawaiian 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OP  PHILADELPHIA.  585 

Island  plants,  collected  in  1895  by  Mr,  A.  A.  Heller,  and  purchased 
for  the  herbarium  ;  209  species  of  Mexican  Plants,  collected  by 
Prof.  G.  C.  Pringle,  and  purchased  for  the  herbarium  ;  and  241 
species  of  Asia  Minor  Plants,  collected  by  Prof.  Bornmiiller,  and 
purchased  for  the  herbarium. 

The  attention  of  the  Academy  is  respectfully  called  to  the  fact  that 
the  825  species  purchased  during  the  past  year,  were  paid  for,  not 
from  the  funds  of  the  Section,  but  entirely  by  two  of  its  members. 
Many  very  desirable  collections  were  declined  on  account  of  the 
lack  of  funds ;  this  is  particularly  to  be  regretted  as  regards  the 
plants  of  our  own  country,  in  which  we  are  in  many  cases  very  defi- 
cient. 

The  creation  of  a  fund  for  the  purchase  of  such  collections  is  im- 
mediately desirable. 

Since  the  last  report  the  Academy  has  placed  at  the  disposal  of 
the  Section  two  rooms  formerly  occupied  by  the  Department  of 
Entomology.  The  one  on  the  gallery  floor  has  been  partially  fitted 
up  as  a  work-room. 

The  room  on  the  library  floor,  which  it  is  designed  to  use  for  addi- 
tional herbarium  space,  has  not  as  yet  been  occupied  to  any  extent, 
owing  to  the  lack  of  funds  for  furnishing.  Additional  cases  for  the 
accommodation  of  the  herbarium  are,  however,  an  absolute  neces- 
sity, as  the  present  cases  are  crowded  to  an  extent  that  is  damaging 
to  the  specimens ;  it  is  therefore  earnestly  hoped,  that  before  the 
close  of  the  next  year,  this  most  pressing  need  will  have  been 
supplied. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Stewardson  Brown, 

Conservator. 


REPORT  OF  THE  MINERALOGICAL  AND  GEOLOG- 
ICAL SECTION. 

Ten  meetings  of  the  Section  have  been  held  during  the  year,  with 
an  average  attendance  of  ten  members.  A  notable  addition  to  the 
facilities  of  the  Section  has  been  the  laboratory  erected  on  the  first 
floor  of  the  Museum  by  contributions  from  the  Section  and  its  indi- 
vidual members  and  from  the  Academy.  This  removes  a  serious 
difficulty  under  which  we  have  labored,  and  cannot  fail  to  facilitate 
its  work. 


586  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Few  additions  have  been  made  to  the  mineral  collection  of  the 
Academy,  except  to  the  local  collection,  which  has  been  arranged  in 
part  and  displayed  to  advantage.  It  seems  to  have  attracted  the 
attention  of  visitors.  It  is  hoped  that  this  collection  may  be  much 
increased  in  the  near  future,  and  that  we  may  also  have  the  means 
of  displaying  a  representation  of  the  rocks  of  the  vicinity  of  Philadel- 
phia of  which  the  Academy  has  a  fair  supply,  while  there  has  been 
promised  to  the  Section  for  the  Academy  a  very  large  and  nearly 
complete  series. 

Although  not  in  the  care  of  the  Section,  it  may  not  be  inoppor- 
tune to  call  attention  to  the  William  S.  Vaux  Collection,  which  is 
now  displayed  to  advantage  in  the  new  building.  The  Conservator 
of  the  Section  holds  the  same  relation  to  tliis  collection,  and  to  him 
is  due  much  credit  for  its  condition.  As  he  accepts  no  salary  the 
entire  income  of  the  fund  has  been  applied  to  the  improvement  of 
the  collection.  During  the  year  many  valuable  specimens  have  been 
added  to  it.     The  officers  of  the  Section  are : — 

Director,    .......         Theo.  D.  Rand. 

Vice-Director  and  Conservator,  .         .         W.  W.  Jefferis. 

Recorder,  .......         Chas.  Schaffer. 

Treasurer,  ......         John  Ford. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Theo.  D.  Rand, 

Director. 


REPORT  OF  THE  ORNITHOLOGICAL  SECTION. 

Owing  to  the  opening  of  the  new  museum  building  and  the  work 
which  it  necessitated  in  other  departments,  the  Conservator  has  been 
able  to  devote  but  little  personal  attention  to  the  ornithological  col- 
lections. Under  his  direction,  however,  Mr.  Henry  W.  Fowler  has 
carried  on  the  work  of  cataloguing  the  collection  with  such  success 
that  quite  as  much  progress  has  been  made  as  in  previous  years, 
while  Mr.  McCadden,  the  taxidermist,  has  been  enabled  to  proceed 
with  the  remounting  of  the  exhibition  series  during  several  months 
of  the  year. 

Since  the  last  report,  7,386  mounted  specimens  have  been  identi- 
fied and  catalogued,  and  most  of  the  specimens  intended  for  the  ex- 
hibition cases  remounted,  while  the  types  and  a  part  of  the  du])li- 
cate  specimens  have  been  unmounted  and  placed  in  the  study  series. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  587 

These  specimens  aggregated  3,192,  and  all  of  them  have  been  care- 
fully labeled.  Besides  the  7,386  specimens  entered  on  the  rough 
catalogue,  1,980  entries  have  been  copied  into  the  permanent  cata- 
logue. 

The  groups  catalogued  during  the  year  comprised  all  the  remain- 
ing families  of  the  Picon  Passeres,  except  the  Trochilidse,  together 
with  the  Picarise  and  Scan  sores.  The  exhibition  series  of  all  these 
families  has  been  remounted  except  the  Coccyges,  Psittaci  and 
Trochili,  so  that  it  will  be  an  easy  matter  to  complete  the  renova- 
tion of  the  ornithological  collection  during  the  ensuing  year. 

Owing  to  the  liberality  of  friends  of  the  Academy,  we  have  been 
enabled  to  procure  nineteen  air-tight  cases  for  the  reception  of  the 
study  series  of  skins  similar  to  those  already  in  use.  This  has  en- 
abled us  to  arrange  almost  all  the  unmounted  specimens  in  syste- 
matic order  in  the  Section-room  where  they  are  easily  accessible  to 
the  student. 

The  exhibition  series  of  Passeres,  Picarise,  etc.,  has  been  arranged 
in  order  in  the  large  cases  in  the  middle  of  the  ornithological  gallery 
following  the  Rapacious  birds,  thus  entirely  clearing  the  wall  cases, 
except  a  few  duplicate  specimens  which  are  placed  there  temporarily 
until  they  can  be  unmounted. 

The  additions  to  the  collection  during  the  year,  while  not  as  great 
numerically  as  those  of  the  previous  year,  comprise  some  exceed- 
ingly valuable  collections  containing  many  species  not  before  repre- 
sented. 

The  most  important  of  these  are  the  Donaldson  Smith  Collection 
of  African  birds  from  Somali-land,  containing  duplicates  of  many  of 
the  new  species  discovered  by  Dr.  Smith,  and  the  collection  of 
Alaskan  and  Siberian  birds  obtained  by  Dr.  Benj.  Sharp,  which 
well  supplements  the  five  series  of  the  Arctic  birds  from  the  north 
Atlantic  already  in  the  Academy's  collection.  Other  noteworthy 
accessions  were  a  collection  of  British  Guiana  birds  obtained  through 
Mr.  Russell,  and  a  small  collection  from  Nova  Scotia  presented  by 
Mr.  Robt.  T.  Young. 

The  general  condition  of  the  collection  is  excellent,  and  the  in- 
creased facilities  for  study  offered  by  the  new  arrangement  have  been 
taken  advantage  of  by  a  number  of  students,  while  specimens  have 
been  loaned  to  specialists  in  various  other  institutions. 

The  Delaware  Valley  Ornithological  Club  has  held  its  meetings 
regularly  at  the  Academy,  and  aided  materially  in  keeping  up  a 
lively  interest  in  the  Ornithological  Department,     The  collection 


588  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

formed  by  the  Club  has  steadily  increased  during  the  year,  and  now 
fills  four  large  cases,  one  of  them  a  handsome  plate-glass  case  de- 
signed as  a  model  for  the  cases  needed  for  the  display  of  the  general 
ornithological  collection  in  the  new  building.  As  soon  as  these 
can  be  procured,  the  entire  collection  of  birds  can  be  immediately 
transferred  to  its  allotted  position  on  the  third  floor  of  the  new  build- 
ing, as  the  work  of  renovation  is  now  practically  completed. 

At  the  annual  meeting  of  the  Section,  held  December  21, 1896^ 
the  old  board  of  oflScers  was  reelected,  as  follows : — 

Director, Spencer  Trotter,  M.  D. 


Vice-Director, 

Recorder, 

Secretary, 

Treasurer  and  Conservator, 


Geo.  S.  Morris. 
Stewardson  Brown. 
Wm.  A.  Shyrock. 
Witmer  Stone. 
Respectfully  submitted, 

Wither  Stone, 

Conservator, 


REPORT  OF  THE  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  SECTION. 

The  Anthropological  Section  has  been  fully  organized  during  the 
present  year  by  the  adoption  of  By-Laws  and  the  election  of  officers 
in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  the  By-Laws  of  the  Academy. 
It  has,  at  present,  a  membership  of  thirty-four,  and  during  the  year 
has  held  eight  monthly  sessions.  The  principal  communications 
received  have  been  from  Dr.  D.  G.  Brinton  on  "  The  Relations  of 
Race  and  Culture  to  the  Degeneration  of  the  Reproductive  Organs 
in  Woman,"  and  on  "  Hybridization  ;  "  Dr.  Harrison  Allen  on 
"  The  Prenasal  Foss£e  ;  "  Prof  F.  C.  Kavanagh  on  "  Right  Hand- 
edness;" Prof  Lightner  Witmer  on  "Psycho-Physical  Measure- 
ments ; "  Dr.  M.  V.  Ball  on  "  Tattooing ;  "  Dr.  Chas.  K.  Mills  on 
"  Nerves  of  the  Sense  of  Taste,"  and  by  Stewart  Culin  on  "Divin- 
atory  Diagrams."  In  addition,  minor  communications  were  on 
various  subjects. 

The  officers  of  the  section  are  as  follows : — 

Director, Harrison  Allen,  M.  D. 

Vice- Director,         ....         Dr.  Newlin  Peirce. 

Treasurer  and  Corresponding  Secretary,  M.  V.  Ball,  M.  D. 

Recorder  and   Conservator,     .         .         Chas.  Morris. 

Charles  Morris, 

Recorder. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  589 

REPORT  OF  THE  PROFESSOR  OF  GEOLOGY. 

The  Professor  of  Geology  respectfully  reports  that,  as  in  former 
years,  he  has  delivered  the  usual  course  of  spring  lectures,  accom- 
panied by  Saturday  field  excursions.  It  is  gratifying  to  be  again 
able  to  state  that  the  interest  in  the  study  of  geology,  as  evidenced 
by  the  attendance  at  the  lectures  and  participation  in  the  excur- 
sions, shows  no  diminution,  but  the  reverse.  In  addition  to  the 
regular  Academy  course,  a  special  course  of  six  lectures,  introduc- 
tory to  the  study  of  rocks  and  minerals,  was  delivered  under  the 
auspices  of  the  Ludwick  Institute,  the  attendance  at  which  was  sig- 
nificantly large. 

In  his  capacity  of  Professor  of  Geology,  the  undersigned  was  ap- 
pointed by  the  Council  and  Academy  to  represent  the  institution 
at  the  Millennial  Mining  and  Geological  Congress  held  at  Budapest, 
Hungary,  on  September  25th  and  26th.  A  report  of  this  mission 
has  been  presented  to  the  Council.  The  report  makes  reference  to  a 
special  journey  in  the  north  of  Africa,  where  a  superficial  study  was 
made  of  the  rock  formations  of  the  Atlas  Mountains,  with  particular 
reference  to  the  determination  of  the  existence  of  glacial  phenomena 
such  as  had  been  alleged  to  be  found  there.  No  evidences  of  past 
glaciation  could  be  detected.  As  a  result  of  this  journey,  a  fairly 
extensive  and  representative  collection  of  fossils  was  obtained  from 
the  Atlas  confines  of  the  Sahara  ;  these,  when  properly  studied  and 
determined,  will  be  placed  with  the  collections  of  the  Academy. 

The  additions  to  the  Academy's  geological  collection  made  dur- 
ing the  year  have  been  neither  particularly  large  nor  important,  the 
most  noteworthy,  in  the  department  ot  Paleontology,  being  the  ani- 
mal remains  obtained  from  Port  Kennedy,  Pa.,  by  Mr.  H.  C.  Mer- 
cer. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Angelo  Heilprin, 
Prof,  of  Geology. 

REPORT   OF   THE   PROFESSOR  OF  ETHNOLOGY  AND 

ARCHEOLOGY. 

I  have  the  honor  to  report  that,  during  the  year  1896, 1  delivered 
a  course  of  six  lectures,  public  and  gratuitous,  on  subjects  connected 
with  the  study  of  anthropology.  They  were  well  attended  and  in- 
creased the  general  interest  in  this  branch  of  science. 


590  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

The  ethnological  collections  of  the  Academy  have  been  rearranged 
and  labeled  through  the  attention  of  the  Curator,  whose  report  will 
supply  the  information  required  on  that  subject. 

I  have  the  honor  to  remain, 

Daniel  G.  Brinton, 
Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Archceology. 


KEPORT  OF  THE  PROFESSOR  OF  INVERTEBRATE 

ZOOLOGY. 

The  Professor  of  Invertebrate  Zoology  respectfully  reports  that 
during  the  past  year  he  has  delivered  eight  lectures,  six  on  "  The 
Action  of  the  Environment  Upon  Animals,"  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Ludwick  Institute,  and  two :  "A  Summer  in  Alaska  and  Si- 
beria "  and  "Alaskan  and  Siberian  Natives,"  in  the  Popular  Friday 
Evening  Course. 

The  additions  to  the  Museum  have  been  neither  numerous  nor 
important. 

A  course  of  ten  lectures  on  "  Invertebrate  Zoology  "  will  be  de- 
livered in  January,  February  and  March,  in  the  Ludwick  Institute 
Course,  and,  during  the  spring,  a  lecture  on  "  The  Sea  and  Its  In- 
fluence on  Animal  Life,"  in  the  Popular  Friday  Evening  Course. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Benj.  Sharp, 
Professor  of  Invertebrate  Zoology. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PROFESSOR  IN  THE  DEPARTMENT 

OF  MOLLUSCA. 

The  Professor  in  the  Department  of  Mollusca  respectfully  reports 
that  during  the  year  he  delivered  a  course  of  five  lectures  upon  the 
morphology  of  Mollusca  and  two  upon  "  Economic  Uses  of  Mol- 
lusca" and  "  Mollusks  of  the  Atlantic  Coast." 

In  the  Museum  considerable  progress  has  been  made  in  the  revis- 
ion of  the  land  mollusks,  and  many  additions  to  the  collection  have 
been  received  as  noted  in  the  report  of  the  Conchological  Section. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Henry  A.  Pilsbry, 
Prof,  of  Malacology. 


1896.]  NATUEAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  591 

REPORT  OF  THE  PROFESSOR  IN  THE  DEPARTMENT 

OF  INSECTA. 

Having  been  elected  to  the  Professorship  of  the  Department  of 
Insecta  on  the  thirtieth  day  of  March,  1895,  I  have  the  honor  to 
submit  this,  my  first  report.  Some  idea  of  the  field  covered  in  this 
department   may   be   derived   from  the  fact   that  we  have  about 


ded  as  follows  : — 

33,600  specimens. 

43,800  specimens. 

36,240  specimens. 

2,400  specimens. 


126,000  specimens  in  the  collection,  div 

Lepidoptera,  .... 

Coleoptera,      .... 

Hymenoptera, 

Neuroptera,     .... 

Diptera,       ~\ 

Hemiptera,  |- 10,000  specimens. 

Orthoptera,  3 
These  collections  are  believed  to  be  in  a  better  state  of  arrange- 
ment and  preservation  than  ever  before,  and  museum  pests  have  been 
almost  annihilated.  The  Conservator  of  the  Entomological  Sec- 
tion has  been  greatly  aided  by  members  interested  in  the  several 
orders,  and  much  valuable  work  has  been  done  by  them  in  the  de- 
partments in  which  they  make  special  studies.  It  is  hoped  that  the 
fine  collection  of  local  insects  will  soon  be  completed  by  the  aid  of 
the  Feldman  Collecting  Social  of  Philadelphia  and  individual  mem- 
bers. The  department  needs  new  cases  to  replace  the  older  ones 
that  are  not  absolutely  safe,  and,  in  the  future,  metal  cases,  which 
can  be  practically  hermetically  sealed  against  dust  and  pests,  should 
be  secured. 

A  course  of  five  lectures  has  been  delivered  covering  the  general 
subject,  including  the  classification,  anatomy,  orders,  technic,  and 
economic  or  practical  entomology. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Henry  Skinner. 


REPORT  OF  THE  CURATOR  OF  THE  WM.  S.  VAUX 

COLLECTIONS. 

The  Curator  of  the  William  S.  Vaux  Collections  reports  that  dur- 
ing the  year  there  have  been  added  to  the  mineralogical  cabinet,  by 
purchase,  185  specimens.  A  nugget  of  native  gold  from  Alaska 
was  presented  by  C.  B.  Moore,  bringing  the  number  of  specimens 


592  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

in  the  collection,  November  30,  1896,  to  7,966.  Several  of  the 
specimens  thus  added  are  new  to  the  collection.  Attention  is  espe- 
cially called  to  a  superb  crystal  of  green  tourmaline  with  pink  ter- 
minations. It  is  probably  the  finest  specimen  yet  found  at  Haddam, 
Conn.  The  collection  is  in  good  order.  No  addition  has  been  made 
to  the  archseological  section. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Wm.  W.  Jefferis, 

Curator. 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


593 


The  election  of  Officers,  Councillors  and  Members  of  the  Finance 
Committee  to  serve  during  1897,  was  held  with  the  following  re- 
sult :  — 


President, 
Vice-Presidents, 

Recording  Secretary, 

Corresponding  Secretary, 

Treasurer, 

Librarian, 

Curators, 


Councillors  to  serve  three  years, 


Finance  Committee, 


Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D. 
Thomas  Meehan. 
Rev.  Henry  C.  McCook,  D.  D. 
Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 
Benjamin  Sharp,  M.  D. 
George  Vaux,  Jr. 
Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 
Henry  A.  Pilsbry. 
Henry  C.  Chapman,  M.  D. 
Arthur  Erwin  Brown. 
Samuel  G.  Dixon,  M.  D. 
Thomas  A.  Robinson. 
Harrison  Allen,  M.  D. 
Chas.  Morris. 
Isaac  J.  Wistar. 
Charles  Morris. 
Chas.  E.  Smith. 
Uselma  C.  Smith. 
William  Sellers. 
Charles  P.  Perot. 


ELECTIONS  DURING  1896. 


MEMBERS. 


January  28. — James  C.  Corry,  P.  Calvin  Mensch,  M.D.,  Ph.D. 
J.  Norris  De  Haven,  Edw.  Gideon,  A.  M.,  Geo.  de  Schweinitz,  M.  D., 
Ruth  Clement,  M.  D.,    Chas.  E.  Hite,  Henry  Trimble,  C.  Howard 
Colket,  Sarah  Y.  Stevenson. 

February  25. — Arthur  N.  Leeds,  Morris  Earle,  H.  W.  Wenzel, 
George  L.  Farnum,  J.  Edward  Farnum,  Vickers  Oberholtzer,  Ph.D., 
Homer  E.  Hoopes,  A.  Feldpauch. 

March  SI. — Jacob  Reese,  Louis  S.  Amonson,  E.  G.  Conklin, 
Mary  T.  S.  Schaeffer,  Walter  P.  Stokes,  Charles  L.  Phillips, 
A.  Donaldson  Smith,  M.  D. 

April  28. — Wm.  H.  Roberts. 

August  25. — Thomas  Chalkley  Palmer. 


694  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

September  29. — J.  Howard  Breed,  Mrs.  F.  G.  Dixon,  Effingham 
B.  Morris,  Curwin  Stoddart,  Jr. 

October  27. — Henry  A.  Laessle,  George  C.  Harlan,  M.  D., 
William  M.  Singerly,  Henry  Beates,  Jr.,  M.  D. 

CORRESPONDENTS. 

October  27. —  W.  C.  Roentgen  ofWiirzburg,  Germany. 
November  24- — R.  A.  Philippi  of  Santiago,  Chili. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  595 


ADDITIONS  TO  THE  MUSEUM. 

1896. 

Archeology,  Ethnology,  Etc. 

Alaskan  Expedition  (collected  by  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp).  Large  collec- 
tion of  native  implements  from  Alaska  and  Siberia. 

Arthur  Erwin  Brown.     Indian  Tepee  Door,  Colorado. 

Clarence  B.  Moore.  Large  collection  of  implements,  etc.,  from  the 
Florida  Indian  mounds. 

Dr.  W.  H.  McGrath.     Arrow-head  from  the  interior  of  Brazil. 

Dr.  H.  C.  McCook.     Several-  Indian  mortars  and  pestles. 

Mammals. 

Alaskan  Expedition  (collected  by  Dr.  Benj.  Sharp).  Eighteen  skins 
and  two  alcoholic  mammals,  Alaska  and  Siberia,  also  three  skins 
and  skulls  of  fur  seal,  Gallotaria  ursina  (mounted  in  group). 

Wm.  L.  Baily.  Sciurus  carolinensis  pennsylvanicus  (mounted),  Penn- 
sylvania. 

Geo.  B.  Benners.     Five  skulls  of  Texan  mammals. 

Chas.  Bradley.     Putorius  noveboracensis. 

M.  Corley.     Desiccated  specimen  of  rat  (Mus  decumanus). 

Edmund  Coxe.     Mounted  specimen  of  Omithorhynchus  anatinus. 

Dr.  H.  C.  Chapman.  Seven  skulls  of  mammals,  and  vicera  of  ikf acro- 
rhinus. 

I.  N.  DeHaven.  Alcoholic  specimen  of  Blarina  hrevicauda  floridana, 
Florida. 

Exchange.     Two  skins  of  Peromyscus  niveiventris. 

J.  Edward  Farnum.     Three  skulls  of  African  mammals. 

Fesquet  Estate.     Horns  of  chamois  and  whale's  tooth. 

Wm.  J.  Gerhard.     Si^eciinen  of  Scalops  aquaticus,  Pennsylvania. 

David  McCadden.     Sciurus  niger  einereus  (mounted),  West  Virginia, 

Purchased.  Skin  and  skeleton  of  Anoa  depressicornis  Celebes,  and 
Ovis  cervina  (mounted). 

Purchased  through  Mr.  Russell  in  British  Guiana.  Four  skulls  and 
three  skins  of  mammals. 

Saml.  N.  Rhoads.  Eight  rodents  from  Wisconsin  (two  mounted,  six 
in  alcohol) ;  nine  alcoholic  mammals,  Mammoth  Cave,  Kentucky  ; 
39 


-596  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

twentv-five  mammals,  Clinton  Co.,  Pa.  ;  six  mammals,  Warren  Co., 
N.  J.  ;  skull  of  Putorius  vison,  Maine  ;  skull  of  Fells  domestica. 

Dr.  Benj.  Sharp.     Jaw  of  Dolphin,  Nantucket,  Mass. 

Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith,  One  hundred  and  thirty-five  mammals  (al- 
coholic and  skins)  from  N.  E.  Africa. 

Tennessee  Expedition,  1895  (collected  by  S.  N.  Rhoads).  One  hun- 
dred and  twenty  mammals  (skins  and  alcoholic). 

James  Upton.     Mounted  specimen  of  Plthecus  satanus. 

Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia.  Mounted :  Coelogenys  paca,  Tra- 
gulus  meminna,  Semnopithecus  ohscurus,  Cercopithecus  callitrichus, 
Macacus  nemestrinus,  Choloepus  didadylus,  Meles  meles,  Cephalophus 
coronatus,  Belideus  sciureus,  Hahnaturus  dorsalis.  Skins  and  skulls  : 
Proeyon  cancrivorus,  Petaurus  sciureus,  Macropus  rufus  bennetti, 
Sciurus  hadging  (2),  Dasyprocta  prymnolopha,  Trichosurus  vulpinus, 
Capromys  foumieri,  Midas  sp.  Skeletons:  Fells  pardalis,  Hyasna 
striata,  Hyasna  crocuta.     Viscera  of  Hyxna  crocuta. 

Birds. 

Alaskan  Expedition  (collected  by  Dr.  Benj.  Sharp).     One  hundred  and 

two  bird  skins  and  forty-eight  eggs  from  Alaska  and  Siberia. 
E.  A.  Barbour.     Skin  of  Trogon  resplendens. 
G.  B.  Benners.     Skin  of  Peucxa  ruficeps  eremoeca,  Texas. 
Dr.  H.  C.  Chapman.     Penguin  and  Toucan  in  alcohol. 
Edmund  Coxe.     Mounted  specimen  of  Apteryx  oweni. 
Delaware  Valley  Ornithological  Club.      Twelve  mounted  birds,   ten 

nests,  nine  sets  of  eggs.     Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey. 
Mrs.  B.  W.  Douglass.     Skin  of  Paradisea  apoda. 
Exchange.     Nine  skins  of  Liberian  birds. 
Dr.  Wm.  E.  Hughes.     Seven  skins  of  birds,  Quebec. 
David  McCadden.     Corvus  corax  principalis,  Virginia  (skin). 
George  S.  Morris.     Passer  domesticus  albino  (skin). 
Dr.  Wm.  Pexjper.     Two  skins  of  Ptarmigan. 
Purchased.     Aquila   chrysxtos    (mounted),  Virginia;    three  skins  of 

Conurus  carolinensis,  Florida. 
Purchased  through  Mr.  Russell  in  British  Guiana.    Forty-two  skins  of 

birds  and  skeleton  of  Opisthocomus. 
Saml.  N.  Rhoads.     Skin  oi  Ceophloeus  pileatus,  Clinton  Co.,  Pa. 
Leander  Rogers.     Ardea  herodias,  New  Jersey  (skin). 
John  Siner.     Three  mounted  birds. 
Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith.    One* hundred  and  thirty-eight  skins  of  birds 

and  twelve  nests  from  north-eastern  Africa. 
Uselma  C.  Smith.     Nest  of  Trochilus  coluhris. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  597 

Mrs.  J.  M.  Thomas.     Pair  of  mounted  wood  ducks. 

Visitor.     Twelve  skins  of  South  American  birds. 

R.  T.  Young.     Sixty-two  skins  of  birds  from  Nova  Scotia. 

Archiclaus   Willets.      Tringa   maritima   for   D.   V.   0.    C.    Collection 
(mounted). 

Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia.  Mounted:  Ibis  stictipennis,  Dro- 
')nius  novx-hollandix,  Penelope  super ciliaris,  Chrysolophiis  aviherstiee, 
Phasianus  reevesi,  Penelope  sp.  Skins  :  Callcenas  nicobarica,  Pterocles 
arenarius,  Ocyphaps  lophotes,  Aramides  mangle,  Chenopsis  abrata, 
Phlogenas  lugonica,  Caccabis  sp. ,  Gennxus  swinhoei,  Cereopsis  novx 
hollandix,  Chrysolophus  amhherstige,  Turacus  buffoni,  Turtur  turtur. 
Skeleton  :  Casuarius  casuarius,  Olor  cygnus.  Skulls  and  sterna  :  Olor 
cygnus,  Anhinga  anhinga,  Dendrocygna  sp. ,  Dacelo  gigas.  Egg  of 
Emu. 

Eeptiles  and  Batrachians. 

H.  C.  Borden.     Two  specimens  of  Rana  clamitans,  Pennsylvania.' 
Dr.  S.  G.  Dixon.     Specimens  of  Bitfo  lentiginosus  and  Liopeltis  vernalis, 

Maine. 
Exchange.     Ten  jars  of  reptiles,  Argentina,  S.  A. 
E.  B.  Hendricks.     Toad  with  five  legs,  Philadelphia. 
Philip  Laurent  and  Dr.  Castle.     Twelve  reptiles  and  batrachians  from 

Enterprise,  Fla. 
H.  A.  Pilsbry  and  C.  W.   Johnson.     Specimen  of  Rana  pipiens  and 

twenty-one  eggs  of  gopher  turtle,  specimen  Rana  sp. 
Purchased  (through  Mr.  Russell).     Specimen  of  Ela])s  lemniscatus. 
Dr.  Benj.  Sharp.      Gonatodes  albogularis,  Tobago. 
Fredk.  Sterns.     Two  lizards,  Japan. 
S.  N.  Rhoads.     Sixty-four  reptiles,  Pennsylvania ;  three  from  British 

Columbia. 
Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith.     One  hundred  and  forty-eight  reptiles  from 

north-eastern  Africa. 
J.  S.  Wills.     Ambhjstoma  opacum,  New  Jersey. 
H.  W.  Wenzel.     Seventeen  reptiles  and  batrachians  from  Cranberry, 

N.  C. 
E.  G.  Vanatta.     Hyla  sp.,  Aromochelys  odoratus,  Maryland. 
Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia.     Python  reticularis,  Caimon  sclerops, 

Vipera  ammodytes. 
Lt.  Hugh  Willoughby.     Eggs  of  Florida  crocodile. 

Fishes.. 

Dr.  H.  C.  Chapman,  Myxine  glutinosa,  Petromyzon  marinus  and  Lepido- 
siren  paradoxa. 


598  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

Seth  E.  Meek.      Two  hundred  and  sixty-two  fresh-water  fish   Irom 

Iowa,  Arkansas  and  Indian  Territory. 
Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith.     Collection  of  fish  from  N.  E.  Africa. 
Edw.  H.  Williams.     Dried  fish  from  Japan. 
T.  W.  Walmsley.     One  flounder  in  formaline. 

LowEE  Invertebrates. 

Alaskan  Expedition  (collected  by  Dr.  Benjamin  Sharp).  A  large 
series  of  marine  invertebrates  from  coasts  of  Alaska  and  Siberia. 

F.  \V.  Walmsley.  Thirty  jars  of  specimens  from  the  Atlantic  coast 
preserved  in  formaline. 

Mrs.  Corlies.     Case  of  corals. 

Crustacea. 
F.  W.  Walmsley.     Very  large  specimen  of  lobster,  Newport,  R.  I. 

Insecta. 

C.  W.  Johnson.     One  case  of  Diptera,  Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey. 
Philip  Laurent.     Five  cases  of  Neuroptera,   Pennsylvania  and  New 

Jersey. 
Feldman  Collecting  Social.      One  case  of  Coleoptera,  Pennsylvania 

and  New  Jersey. 
Dr.  William  Pepper.     Nest  of  trap-door  spider. 

Recent  Mollusca. 

Mrs.  George  Andrews.  Twenty-two  species  from  Tennessee  and 
Florida. 

D.  D.  Baldwin.  Ten  species  Hawaiian  land  shells;  ten  bottles  al- 
coholic mollusks. 

F.  C.  Baker.     Bythinella  and  Vertigo  from  Chicago,  111. 

W.  T.  Bednall.     Ten  species  of  S.  Australian  Polyplacophora. 

Wilfred  Bendall.     Cerion,  etc.,  New  Providence,  Bahamas. 

Charles  P.  Berkley.     Pleistocene  (shell-marl)  fossils  from  Minnesota. 

Wesley  Browning  (in  exchange).     Limnseidae  from  Utah. 

Fred  L.  Button.     Collection  of  slugs  from  Oakland,  Cal.,  including 

types  of  AphaUarion  Buttoni  (see  Proceedings,  p.  339). 
Dr.  P.  Ellsworth  Call.      Carychmyn  and  Unio  from  Kentucky. 
Mrs.  Julia  E.  Campbell.     Punctum  pasadenx,  types. 
John  H.  Campbell.     Two  species  of  mollusks. 
Mrs.  G.  W.  Carpenter.     Twenty -seven  species  marine  shells. 
L.  T.  Chamberlain,  D.  D.     Seventy-nine  trays  of  land  and  fresh  water 

shells  from  Mississippi  and  Louisiana,  collected  by  C.  W.  Johnson. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  599 

Geo.  H.  Clapp.  Omphalina  inornata  Say  (Albino)  and  other  shells 
from  western  Pennsylvania. 

T.  D.  A.  Cockerell.  Land  shells  from  Colorado,  New  Mexico  and 
Mexico  (see  Nautilus,  X,  p.  59). 

Dr.  J.  C.  Cox.     Ten  species  of  Australian  mollusks. 

Wm.  H.  Dall.  Sixteen  species  Californian  and  Lower  Californian 
land  shells  (alcoholic). 

0.  Debeaux  (in  exchange).     Collection  of  N.  African  Helices. 

W.  H.  DeCamp.     Bythinella  from  Grand  Rapids,  Mich. 

John  Ford.     Thirteen  species  of  shells  new  to  the  collection. 

Wm.  J.  Fox.     Two  species  of  mollusks. 

A.  H.  Gardner.     Eight  species  of  Canadian  shells. 

Mrs.  E.  M.  Gaylord.     Living  Helices  and  alcoholic  slugs  from  Oregon. 

Langdon  Gibson.     Six  species  of  marine  shells  from  Greenland. 

G.  K.  Gude.     Gorilla  fry se,  n.  sp. 

A.  W.  Hanham.  Five  species  land  and  fresh  water  shells  from  Can- 
ada. 

Charles  Hedley.     Four  species  Australian  mollusks. 

Angelo  Heilprin.  One  hundred  and  fifty-seven  species  of  shells  from 
Morocco  and  Bermuda. 

A.  U.  Henn.     Specimen  of  Pugnus  parvus  Hedley,  n.  sp. 

H.  von  Ihering.     Ten  species  of  S.  American  snails. 

Illinois  State  Laboratory  of  Natural  History.  Collection  of  aquatic 
Gastropods  from  Havana,  Illinois. 

W.  W.  Jefferis.     Campeloma,  Unionidse  and  Limnssidse  from  New  York. 

C.  W.  Johnson.  Corbula  and  eleven  other  species  from  Florida  (see 
also  Pilsbry  and  Johnson). 

F.  R.  Latchford.     Nineteen  species  Canadian  shells. 

Miss  Jennie  E.  Letson.     Two  species. 

H.  Loomis  (in  exchange).     Japanese  mollusks. 

J.  G.  Malone.     Slugs  from  Oregon. 

Wm.  B.  Marshall.     Succinea  from  Cape  May,  N.  J. 

E.  H.  Matthews.     Ephippodonta,  Mylitta,  etc.,  from  S.  Australia. 

D.  N.  McCadden.     Two  land  shells  from  Virginia. 

Edmund  S.  Meany.  Specimens  of  Saxicava  arctica  and  Littonna  scu- 
tulata. 

Clarence  B.  Moore.     Four  species  Georgia  and  Florida  shells. 

Geo.  H.  Pepper.  Limnsea  hulimoides  Lea  (through  G.  H.  Clapp).  See 
Nautilus,  X,  p.  96. 

Miss  Caroline  Phoebus.     Mya  arenaria  from  Maryland. 

H.  A.  Pilsbry.  Seventy-eight  species  fresh  water  and  marine  shells 
from  Pennsylvania  and  Texas. 


600  PROCEEDINGS  OP  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

H.  A.  Pilsbry  and  C.  W.  Johnson.  Two  hundred  and  fifty-three  trays 
land  and  aquatic  mollusks  from  the  St.  John's  River,  Fla. 

H.  A.  Pilsbry  and  S.  N.  Ehoads.  One  hundred  and  sixty-eight  trays 
fossil  and  recent  shells  from  White  Pond,  N.  J.,  and  adjacent  coun- 
try. 

John  Ponsonby.  Seven  species  of  Helices  new  to  the  collection  (in 
exchange).     See  Proceedings,  p.  15,  etc. 

E.  J.  Post  (in  exchange).     Collection  of  Tampa  Silex  beds  fossils. 

P.  B.  Randolph.     Collection  of  slugs,  etc.,  from  Washington. 

W.  J.  Raymond.     Types  of  Ischnochiton  aspidaulax. 

S.  Raymond  Roberts.     Sixteen  species  of  land  and  marine  shells. 

Edw.  W.  Roper.     Sixteen  species  of  land  shells. 

Dr.  Wm.  H.  Rush.  One  hundred  and  three  species  of  mollusks  from 
Cape  Verde  Is.  and  South  America. 

H.  E.  Sargent.     Fifteen  species  Alabama  mollusks. 

Dr.  Benj.  Sharp.     Thirteen  species  West  Indian  shells. 

Morris  Shick.     Sixteen  species  local  mollusks. 

Miss  C.  A.  Shepard.     Goniobasis  from  Florida. 

Ida  M.  Shepard.     Collection  of  West  Coast  American  shells. 

Howard  Shriver.     Seven  species  land  shells  from  Maryland. 

Edw.  Simpson.     Two  species  marine  shells. 

Dr.  Henry  Skinner.     Eight  species  of  land  shells  from  North  Carolina. 

Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith.     Seven  species  African  shells. 

U.  C.  Smith.     Shells  from  Jamaica. 

Frederick  Stearns.     Twenty  species  Japanese  mollusks. 

Dr.  V.  Sterki.     Four  species  Ohio  mollusks. 

C.  P.  Streator.     Three  species  from  Cayman  Is. 

L.  H.  Streng.     Bythinia,  etc.,  from  Michigan. 

E.  R.  Sykes.     Eight  species  of  Chiton  from  Port  Phillip,  Australia. 

Rev.  Geo.  W.  Taylor.      Three  species  British  Columbian  shells. 

Tennessee  Expedition,  collected  by  S.  N.  Rhoads.  Five  hundred  and 
fourteen  trays  of  mollusks,  mainly  from  Tennessee. 

Lancaster  Thomas.     Five  species  land  shells.  North  Carolina. 

E.  G.  Vanatta.     Thirteen  species  shells  from  Maryland. 

H.  D.  Van  Nostrand.  Fifty-two  species  of  West  Indian  land  shells 
(through  S.  Raymond  Roberts). 

Dr.  J.  W.  Velie.  Thirteen  species  Florida  shells  with  types  of  Mar- 
ginella  Veliei  (see  Proceedings,  p.  21). 

Bryant  Walker.     Forty-five  species  from  Michigan. 

Robert  Walton  Collection,  176  species. 

A.  G.  Wetherby.    Twenty-four  species  land  shells  from  North  Carolina. 

H.  W.  Wenzel.     Six  species  land  shells  from  Cranberry,  N.  C. 


1896.]  NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA.  601 

J.  J.  White.     Eight  species  Florida  shells. 

Joseph  Willcox.     Thirty-five  trays  of  Fulgur,  etc. 

Mrs.  M.  Burton  Williamson.     Five  species  Californian  mollusks. 

B.  H.  Wright.     Four  species  Florida  mollusks. 

Young  Naturalists'  Society,  Seattle,  Wash.    Collection  of  marine  shells. 

Purchased  by  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  and  the  Conchological 

Section:  Two  hundred  and  ninety-one  species  new  to  the  collection ; 

also  a  small  collection  made  by  G-.  F.  Russell  in  British  Guiana. 

Invertebrate  Fossils. 

Uselma  C.  Smith.     Thirty-nine  trays  of  fossil  mollusca  from  Jamaica. 

Vertebrate  Fossils. 

Dr.  S.  G.  Dixon  and  Henry  C.  Mercer.  A  large  collection  of  mam- 
malian remains  from  the  deposit  at  Port  Kennedy,  Pa. 

Plants. 

Dr.  Aldridge.     Seven  species  of  North  American  plants. 

Lucien  H.  Alexander.     Thirty -five  species  of  Hawaiian  Island  ferns. 

George  M.  Beringer.     Six  species  of  North  American  plants. 

Stewardson  Brown.  Three  hundred  and  seventy-five  species  of  Ha- 
waiian Island  plants  and  twenty  species  of  Underwood  and  Cook's 
Hepaticse.  americanx. 

George  F.  Eaton.  One  hundred  and  seventy-two  species  Sphagna 
Boreali- Americana  Exsiccati. 

J.  B.  Ellis.     Centuries  34  and  35  of  North  American  fungi. 

Benjamin  Heritage.     Seven  species  of  North  American  plants. 

W.  W.  Jefferis.     Five  species  of  North  American  plants. 

Charles  Lippincott.     Specimen  of  Grindelia  squarrosa.. 

Thomas  Meehan.  Forty  species  of  North  American  plants,  two  hun- 
dred and  nine  species  of  Mexican  plants  collected  by  Pringle,  and 
two  hundred  and  forty-one  species  of  Asia  Minor  plants  collected  by 
Bornmiiller. 

Miss  Rex.  Five  hundred  species  of  Myxomycetes,  Collection  of  Dr. 
G.  A.  Rex. 

Benjamin  H.  Smith.     Specimen  of  Rhamnus  smithii. 

Uselma  C.  Smith.     Ninety  species  of  Jamaica  ferns. 

Baron  Ferdinand  Von  Miiller  (through  Mr.  Meehan).  Thirty-five 
species  of  Australian  plants. 

Minerals,  Etc. 

Alaska  Expedition  (collected  by  Dr.   Benjamin  Sharp).      Five  speci- 
mens of  minerals,  Alaska. 
Fesquet  Estate.     Fourteen  boxes  of  minerals  and  ores. 


602  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  [1896. 

German  Kali  Works.     Salts  from  Strassfurt  Mine. 
L.  A.  Gettys.     Monagite. 

Geographical  Club.     Twenty-three  trays  of  rocks  from  Greenland. 
E.  A.  Groth.     Two  specimens  of  minerals. 
John  C.  Johnson.     Kaolinite  and  limonite. 
Benj.  Smith  Lyman.     Jade. 

Gibson  H.  Prindle.     Meteorite  and  small  collection  of  minerals. 
Theo.  D.  Rand.     Singing  sand,  Massachusetts. 
J.  E.  Richardson.     Thinolite,  Nevada. 
Dr.  H.  A.  Slocum.     Small  collection  from  Nova  Scotia. 
Joseph  Walton.     Marcasite  and  galena,  Kansas. 
Chas.  J.  Wister.     Collection  of  minerals  from  various  localities. 
Wm.  S.  Vtuix  Fund.     One  hundred  and  eighty-five  specimens  of  min- 
erals for  the  William  S.  Vaux  Collection. 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


603 


INDEX  TO  GENERA,  ETC. 
1896. 


Acanthocalcis        ....  37 

Acanthodactylus  ....  466 

Acanthis 140 

Aceratherium  .....  507 

Achatina     ....       414,  416 

Achatinella       .     .     .      424,  429 

Acomys 527,  529 

Adelonycteris  .     .  204,  291,  517 

Agama    .     .     .     .     .       311,  462 
Agapostemon  ....      38-40 

Agelaius      .     .     .  116,   117,  134 

Agnatha 488 

Alasmodonta    .      .     .      505,  506 

Allodape 557 

Amauropsis      .     .     .     .     .  474 

Amiva 812,  465 

Ammodesmus       ....  257 

Ammodramus  111,  114,  116,  139 

142,  143 

Ammophila 552 

Amnicola 397 

Amnicolidse 495 

Ampelis 154 

Amphisbsena 313 

Amphisbsenidse     ....  467 

Anadia 312,  465 

Anaptogonia     .     .     .       379,  380 

Anculosa     .    496,   497,   499,  500 

Ancylus 494 

Andrena      .      33,  38,  40,  61,   81 

Angitrema 496 

Anguis 464 

Anisodesmus    .      .     .       260,  263 

Anniella 466 

Anniellidse 466 

Anodonta    ....       506,  569 

Anolis 309,  463 

Anthidium 34 

Anthophora   34,  37,  40,  97,  555 

Anthus 163 


Antrostomus 130 

Apella 497 

Aphallarion      ....  339-349 
Aphilanthops   .     .     .     .     35,  37 

Apidse 555 

Apis 38,  497,  559 

Apterogyna 547 

Arctomys 193 

Arctotherium 384 

Ariolimax 339-349 

Arion 340 

Arionidse 340 

Arissema 214 

Artiodactyla 507 

Aspilota 42 

Astarte 475 

Astatus 554 

Aster  .  32,  33,  37,  38,  41,  60,  94 

Aulacopoda 488 

Auricula      .     .     .    398,  405,  452 

Atalapha 203 

Ataxus 426 

Bactrodesmus 260 

Balanus 208 

Balea 425 

Barissia 464 

Basilicus 463 

Belonogaster 555 

Bembex 38,  552 

Berberis 214 

Bidens 39 

Bigelovia  32,   33,   36,  37,  40,  41, 
62,  78,  82-92 

Bison 176 

Blarina 185,   202 

Boerhaavia 33 

Bombus 35,  41,  61 

Bovidse 176 

Boysidia 418 

Bruta 378 


604 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


Bubalis 518 

Bubo 515 

Bulla 208 

Bulimulidaj 493 

Bulimulus   .     .     .    397-446;  493 

Bulimus 418 

Calliopsis     ....    30,  34,  40 

Callisaurus 463 

Callopistes 312 

Calotes 462 

Campeloma 495 

Campodesmus 257 

Campolaemus 418 

Cancellaria  ....      475,  476 

CanidfB 199 

Canis 200,   544 

Cardinalis  111,  117, 133,  139,   146 

Cariacus 393 

Caricella 479 

Carnivora    .     .     .   197,  383,  504 

Carpodacus 139 

Cassidaria 479 

Castor 192,   378 

Castoridse 192 

Celastrus     .     .     .    214,  216,  217 

Celestus 464 

Cenchrodesmus  ....  257 
Centropyx   ....       312,  465 

Ceophlceus 129 

Ceratina 556 

Cercopithecus 546 

Cereus 396 

Cerion 315-338 

Ceriphasia 496 

Cervicapra 519 

Cervidae 179 

Cervus 180 

Ceryle  .  .  .  .111,  117,  128 
Chsetura       .     .     .   116,  117,   130 

Chalicomys 507 

Chalicotherium  ....  507 
Chamajleon  .  .  .  309,  311 
Chamseleonidee  .  .  461,  462 
Chamagsaracha  .  .  35,  65,  66 
Chauliougnathus  ....  37 
Chelidon      ....      154,  155 

Cheirodesmus 259 

Chilina 561 

Chilinidse 561 

Chilonopsis 418 

Chiroptera 203 

Chondrophora       ....       33 


Chordeiles 130 

Choridesmus 261 

Chrysopsis  ....    37,  95,  96 

Circinaria 488 

Circinariidse 488 

Cirrus 10,   11 

Cistothorus 164 

Cladothrix  ....    82,  33,   82 

Clemmys 378 

Cleome    .     34,  35,  39,  42,  69,  70 

Cleostyla 418 

Clerus 37 

Clivicola  .  .  .  '.  .  .  156 
Cneinidophorus     .     .       312,  465 

Coassus 393,   294 

Coccyzus 127 

Coelioxys 40 

Colaptes  .  .  .  115,  116,  130 
Colletes  .     .     35,  40,  66,  97,  555 

Colobus 546 

Comodesmus  .  .  .  258,  262 
Compsodesmus  .  .  261,  264 
Compsothlypis       .     .       158,   159 

Contopus 132 

Conulus  400,  403,  405,  425,  448 
Cophias        ....       461,  466 

Corbicula 562 

Coreopsis 32,  60 

Corvus 132,   133 

Corythophanes      ....     463 

Cosila 549,   550 

Covillea 33 

Cratsegus 214 

Cricetodon 507 

Crocidura 545 

Crocisa 555 

Crocuta 392 

Crossidius 37 

Crotaphytus 463 

Croton 34,   65 

Ctenosaura  .  .  .  463,  464 
Cyanocitta  ....  116.  132 
Cyclura  ....   311,  463,  464 

Cylichna 208 

Cylindrella 412 

Cyllene 479 

Cynailurus 543 

Cynedesmus 267 

Cypra;a  ....    315  474,  477 

Cyprenidse 500 

Cyrenidse 562 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


605 


111,  115,  116, 


309,  312, 
116,  128, 


Damaliscus 

Daucus 

Deilephila 

Dendroica 157- 

Dendromys 

Diaeerion 

Diabase  

Diadasia 35 

Dicrocerus  

Didelphis 

DideliDhyida^ 

Dinocyon 

Diplarthra 

Diploglossa 

Diploglossinaj 

Dipsosaurus 

Discodesmus 

Dolichonyx 
Dorcelaj^hus 
Doryphorus 
Di-ac'a?na 
Dryobates   . 
Ecphopus    . 

Elasmognatha 

Elephas 

Elgaria 464, 

Eliniia 

Elis 301-307, 

Elodea    

Empidonax 

Endodonta  ....       416, 
Endodontidaj    .     .     .       340, 
Enyalioides      .     .     .       463, 
Epeolus       ....    25, 39, 
Epoinidiopteron    .... 
Erinaceus     ....       507, 

Erithizon 

Equus 520, 

Eublepharis 

Eucera 

Eumeces 

Euchirotes 

Eumenes 

Eucheilodon 

Euraenidffi 

Euprei:)is 

Eurypaurus 

Evotomys  .  .  .  184,  186, 

Ffilidaj 

Felis  .  .  .   201,  378,  542, 

Fiber 

Filaria 271- 


518 
216 

oo 
OO 

•161 
535 
326 
219 

53 
507 
176 
176 
507 
393 
464 
461 
463 
258 
133 
179 
463 
465 
129 
466 
493 
520 
467 
496 
549 
212 
132 
417 
489 
464 

40 
298 
544 
378 
567 
464 
555 
466 
313 
554 
471 
554 
466 
226 
381 
201 
543 
186 
■275 


Fusus       .     .    472,  478,  479,    496 

Galeoscoptes 163 

Gastrodonta 489 

Gaultheria 214 

Gazella 519 

Gecconidas  ....       464,  465 

Genetta 543 

Geothlypis  .  .  .  157,  158,  162 
Gerbillus  ....  536-538 
Gerrhosauridse       ....     466 

Gerrhosaurus 466 

Gerrhonotina^ 464 

Gerrhonotus     .     .     .       464,  467 

Giraffa 518 

Glabaris 563-565 

Glires 379 

Glotella        496 

Golunda 534 

Goniobasis  ....  496,  499 
Gutierrezia  32,  35,  36,  61,  83,  85 

86,  91,   92 
Gynnodactylus      .     .     .     .  _  464 

Gypsodesmus 261 

Gyrotoma 497 

Habia  ....  124,  139,  147 
Habrodesmus  .  .  .  261,  265 
Halictus  33,  38, 40,  53,  66,  81,  91 

Haminea 208 

Haplogale 507 

Harpa 472 

Harporhynchiis  .  .  163,  164 
Helenoconcha       ....     416 

HelicidfB 490 

Helicina      .      399-406,  451,  494 

Helicinid^ 494 

Helianthus  38,  41, 43,  69,  104,  106 

Helioryctus 554 

Helix  23,  398,  414,  415,  420,  425 

448 

Helmintherus 15^ 

Helminthophila    ....     158 

Helmitherus 157 

Heloderma  .  .  309,  311,  312 
Helodermatoidea  ....  462 
Helodesmus      .     .     .       262,  263 

Helogale 543 

Heriades 97 

Hereodesmus 262 

Herpestes  ....  507,  543 
Heterocephalus  .  .  539-541 
Heteroclonium  ....  466 
Hippopotamus      .     .     .     .     518 


606 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


Holbrookia 463 

Holopoda 490 

Holospira 412 

Holstonia 497 

Homo 205 

Hvpena 543 

Hyalinia      ....       425,  447 
Hvdrocotyle     ....     35,  59 

Hylobates 507 

Hyothenum. 507 

Hypselostoma 418 

Icteria 162 

Icterus   111,    116,   124,   133,   136 

137 

Iguana 463,  464 

Iguanidse 463 

Ilex 214 

Insectivora 201 

lo 187,  496,  497 

Ischnochiton 22 

Isodesmus 260 

Juga 496 

Junco 145 

Juncus 183 

Kobus 519 

Laccrta 461,  466 

Lacertilidse 466 

Lagomys 507 

Lanipodesmus .     .     .       261,  264 

Lanius 116,   156 

Larrea     ,     .     .     .83,  34,  62-64 

Larus 515 

Lasionycteris 205 

Latastia 466 

Latirus 472,  476 

Leda 470 

Lepachys  ' 38,  106 

Lepas      .    ' 208 

Lepidothyris 466 

Lei^oridse 181 

Leptinaria  .      399-406,  425,  451 
Lepus     .     .      352-376,  378,  542 

Leueocheila 446 

Levifusus     ....       473,  479 

Liiuacidae 489 

Limax 420,  489 

Limicolaria 418 

Limna^a       ....       408,  493 

Limnseidaj 493 

Limnoidfe 561 

Linniophila 493 

Lindera 214 


Liocephalus 463 

Liolepis 462 

Lioplax 495 

Lipodesmus 263 

Liris 553 

Listriodon 507 

Lithasia 496,  497 

Lithocranius 519 

Lophiomys 524 

Loj^buromys 534 

Loxia 140 

Lucina 478 

Lutra   .    .  197,  385,  391,  392,  504 

Lutreola 198 

Lycsena 39 

Lynx 201,  378 

Lyrodesmus 259 

Mabuia 466 

Macacus 485 

Machserodus 507 

Macroscelides 545 

Mactra 471 

Madoqua 518,  519 

Magnolia 214 

Margarii.ana 505 

Marginella      21 

Marsupialia 176 

Mastodon 507 

Mazzalina 473 

Megachile       ...     40,  557,  558 

Megaderma 517 

Megalochilus 311 

Megalonyx 378 

Megara 490 

Melafusus 496 

Melampus  .    .  398,  403,  405,  452 

Melanatria      269 

Melanerpes 129 

Melania 496 

Melasma 496 

Meleagris 378 

Melecta 34,  97 

Melissodes 35,  38,  40 

Mellivora 544 

Me]ospizalll,116,  139,  141, 

145,  185 

Mentzelia   ...    32,  35,  61,  62 
Mephitis      ....    199,  385-391 

Meretrix 470,  477 

Merula 165 

Microdactylus 466 

Microlophus 463 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


607 


Micromeryx 507 

Microtus     183-185,  379,  381-383 

Mimodesmus 264 

Mimus 163 

Miscophus      554 

Mniotilta 157,  158 

Molothrus  ....   116,  117,  134 

Molybdenite 210 

Monoceras      473 

Monopeltis 467 

Motacilla 123,  126 

Murex 473,  476 

Mus      192,  530-533 

Musca      39 

Mustela 198,  199 

MustelidH'  .    : 197 

Mutelidas 563 

Mutilla 547-549 

Mutillida> 547 

Mya 227 

Myiarchas       116,  131 

Myoxus 507 

Myxine   '. 294,  297 

Myxodesmus      267 

Niesiotus 426,  427 

Napodesmus 265,  267 

Natica 480 

Neotoma 192 

Nesiotes 426 

Nomia 40,  555 

Notogonia 553 

Nycteris      517 

Nycticejus 204 

Nyctisaura 462,  464 

Odynerus 97,  555 

Omphalina 488 

Omphalostyla     ....    426,  427 

Onchidella  .      398,  399,  405,  455 

Onchidium 403-405 

Opeas 415 

Ophidia 461,  462 

Ophisaurus 465 

Opuntia 396 

Orasema 37 

OreosanrUiS 312 

Oreotragus      519 

Orgyia 12 

Orthotomium 428 

Oryx 519 

Osmotherium 385 

Ostrava 11,  208 

Otocoris  .    .    .  Ill,  117,  132,  133 


Otomys 539 

Oxybelus 97,  554 

Oxydesmus 260,  263 

Pachnodus 418 

Pachycheilus 269 

Pachychilus 497 

Pachyglossa 462,  464 

Pachyotus  ....    416,  418--423 

Palseolodus 512 

Palseomeryx 507 

Pala3ortyx 514 

Paludina 397 

Panopaea 478 

Panurgus 38--40 

Papillina 474,  475 

Partula 415 

Parus 164 

Passerella 146 

Passerina 116,  139,  151 

Patula 416,  417 

Pecten 470 

Pectinator 542 

Pectis  ....    32,  39,  82,  91,  92 

Pedipes    .    .   .  398,  403,  405,  452 

Pelecanus 512 

Pelecostoma 426 

Pelecypoda 500 

Pelodesmus 266 

Pelycictis 390 

Perdita 25--107 

Perido-Steatite 219 

Periploma 471 

Perissodactyla 507 

Perisoreus 132 

Peromyscus    .    .    .    184,  187--191 

Petrochelidon 155 

Phacochoerus 518 

Philanthus      97 

Philomycidse      489 

Philomycus 489 

Phrynosoma 311,  463 

Phyllodactylus 464 

Phymata    .      37,  38,  89,  43,  104 

Physa      494 

Physida?      494 

Physignathus 462 

Phthiria       37 

Pinicola 140 

Pipilo       146 

Piranga    113,  115,  116,  124,  152 

Pisidium 500 

Plagiodesmus 264 


608 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


Planorbis  ....  493,  561, 
Platydactylus  .  .  .  .461, 
Plectrophenax  112,  115,  116, 

119, 

Plenoculus 

Plesio.sorex 

Pleurocera      496- 

PleuroceridEe 

Pleurotoma  .  471,  475,  478, 
Pleurotomaria    ....     10, 

Pleurotrenia 

Plicatula 

Polioptila 

Polistes 

Polvchrus  ....  309,  311, 
Polygyra     .   .    .    15--19,  490- 

Polygyratia 

Pomatiopsis 

Pompilidse 

Poinpilus 

Poocsetes 

Potamotherium 

Prepodesmus     ....    258, 

Primates 

Proboscidea 

Procavia     

Proeyon      

Procyonidse 

Progne    

Pronodesmus     ....    266, 

ProiDhysaon 

Prosobranchiata    

Prosopis  ...    33,  34,  40,  81 

Protocardia    

Protragoceros 

Pseudopis 

Pseudopus      

Pseudoliva      

Pseudoconomys 

Pterodesmus 

Puffinus      509- 

Pugnus    

Pulmonata 

Pupa  .      399--406,  415-418, 

Pupidse 

Putorius      

Pyramidula 489, 

Pyropsis 

Quiscalus     ....  114--117, 

Ranularia 

Regenia 


562 
464 

141 

30 

507 

498 

495 

480 

11 

11 

11 

165 

555 

463 

493 

415 

495 

550 


Regulus 


550 
141 
385 
263 
205 
507 
520 
197 
197 
154 
267 
341 
494 

,  97 
475 
507 
464 
311 
478 
531 
261 

-512 
208 
488 
446 
425 
198 
490 
476 
139 
479 
310 
165 


Rhaphiellus 426 

Rhineiira 313 

Rhinoceros 520 

Rhipidoglossa 494 

Rhiptoglossa 462 

Rhizomys 542 

Rhynchium 555 

Riiigicula 208 

Rodentia 181,  507 

Rostellaria      478 

Sagda  ..." 23,  24 

Salius 551 

Salix :     .    .    .        33 

Sauria 461 

Sauromalus    .    .     ,   .    .    463,  464 

Saxifraga 360 

Sayornis 131 

Scalops 201 

Sceliphron      552 

Sceloporus      463 

Schizocheilus 497 

Schizostoma 497 

Scincidae 402,  466 

Sciuridse 193 

Sciuropterus 197 

Sciurus    116,   157,  161,  194- 

197,  507,  521,  522 
Scolecophagus  ....    117,  138 

Scolia 298-300,   549 

Scoliidae 549 

Scolodesmus 261,  265 

Scolopendrella 226 

Scotophilus 517 

Scutalus      427 

Scytodesmus      263 

Senecio •'>9,    94 

Sericophorus      554 

Setophaga 158,  163 

Sialia 165 

Siaplius 313 

Sipho 476 

Siplionalia      21,  473 

Siphonaria      .  399,  403,  405,  453 

Sisymbrium 39 

Sitta 164 

Solanum 214 

Solariella 477 

Solarium 477,   480 

Solidago  32,  36,   39,  41,   60,  69- 

73,  92,  97 

Somatogyrus      495 

Sorex 202 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


609 


35,  53,  67, 

■     ■    ■    28, 


Soricidse  .  .  . 
Sphteralcea  .  . 
Sphseriuni  .  .  . 
Sphferophthalma 

Sphecidae 

Sphecius 

Sphecodes  

Sphex      •   

Sphyrapicus 115, 

Spinus 139- 

Spizella   .    .    .116,  1B9,  144, 

Steatomys 

Stegodesnius 266, 

Stelgidopteryx   ....    154, 

Steuogyra 415, 

Stiodesmus 

Strephobasis  .    .    .    496,  498 

Strepsiceros 519, 

Streptanthus 

Strophia 

Strophiops      

Sturnella  . .     .  112,  115-117, 

Stylodesmus 

Subulina 

Succinea  399,  400,  403,  405, 
416,  417,  448, 

Succineida? 

Sylvania    112,  157,  158,  162, 

Synagris      

Synaptomys 183, 

Tachea    

Tachycineta    116,  117,  133, 

154, 

Tachyrhostus 

Tachysphex    

Taenioglossa 

Talpa 

Talpidae 

Tamias 

Tantalus 

Tanydesmus 

Tapinoma 

Tejus 

Telescopella 

Tellina 471, 

Tetraclita 

Thaumastus 

Thecadactylus 

Thecaglossa 

Thelydesmus 

Thiyothorus 

Thysanophora 


202 

68 
500 

37 
551 
552 

41 
551 
129 
141 
145 
529 
267 
156 
416 
262 
499 
520 

39 
315 
318 
135 
261 
425 
406 
493 
493 
163 
554 
184 
425 

155 
554 

554 
495 
507 
201 
193 
513 
264 

36 
312 
496 
477 
208 
427 
4()4 
462 
258 
164 

24 


Tiidae 465 

Tiliqua 308,   313 

Tiphia 297,  298 

Tomigerus      415-417 

Trachysaurus 466 

Tralia  ....  398,  403,  405,  452 

Tremarctus 384 

Tribulus 32,  34,  83 

Trigona 559 

Tringa 515 

Triton 479 

Trochiliis 117,  131 

Trochomorpha  397, 400,  403, 

405,  447 

Troglodytes 164 

Tropidesmus 257 

Trypanostoma 496 

Tupinambis    .    .    .    309,  312,  465 

Turdus 165 

Tylodesmus 259 

Tyrannus 131 

Udodesmus 262,  265 

Uncia 392 

Ungulata 176 

Unio  187,  488,  500-505,  569,  570 

Unionidae 500,  567 

Uraniscodon 463 

Urocyon 199 

Uromastix      462 

Ursidse 199 

Ursus  ....  199,  378,  383,   384 

Varanidae 461 

Varanus  .    .    .  309,  310,  312,  461 
Verbesina  32,  33,  36,  44,  91, 

99-106 
Vespertilio      .    .    .    203,  204,  291 

VesiDertilionidse 203 

Vesperugo      204 

Vespidae    • 555 

Vireo 156,  157 

Vitrea    400,  403,  405,   406, 

448,   488 

Vitrinizonites 489 

Viverra 507 

Vivipara 495 

Viviparidse 495 

Volutilithes 478 

Volvox 233 

Vulpes 200 

Wedelia 32,  33,  83 

Williamia398,  399,  403,  405,  453 
Xantusiidse 465 


610 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OP 


[1896. 


Xerus     •    • 523 

Xiphocercus 463 

Xylocopa 555,  556 

Xyodesmus 262 

Zamenis 378 

Zanthopygia       ....    124,  126 


Zapus      184 

Zonites 447 

Zonitidae      ....  340,  425,  488 
Zonotrichia    .    .    .  139,  143,  144 

Zonuridte 464 

Zonurus      312 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


611 


GENERAL    INDEX, 


1896. 


Additions  to  Museum,  595. 

Allen,  Harrison,  M.  D.  A  note 
on  a  uniform  plan  of  describing 
the  human  skull,  168,  170.  A 
biographical  sketch  of  John 
Adam  Eyder,  222.  The  ulna 
of  the  common  brown  bat,  291. 
The  bones,  muscles  and  teeth 
of  Tarsius  fusco-manus,  560  (in 
next  volume). 

Anthropological  Section,  report 
of,  588.' 

Balch,  Edwin  S.  Ice-Caves  and 
the  causes  of  subterranean  ice 
(no  abstract),  560. 

Ball,  M.  v.,  M.  D.  Report  of  Bio- 
logical and  Microscopical  Sec- 
tion, 580. 

Basconi,  Florence.  Perido-Stea- 
tite  and  Diabase,  219. 

Biological  and  Microscopical  Sec- 
tion, report  of,  580. 

Botanical  Section,  report  of,  583. 

Brinton,  Daniel  G.,  M.  D.  Report 
of  the  Professor  of  Ethnology 
and  Archfeology,  589. 

Brot,  Aug.  L.,  announcement  of 
death  of,  566. 

Brown,  Amos  P.  The  crystalliza- 
tion of  Molybdenite,  168,  210. 

Brown,  Arthur  Erwin.  The  oc- 
currence of  Macacus  leoninus 
'Blyth)  in  Eastern  Burmah,  485. 

Brown,  Stewardson.  Report  of  Bo- 
tanical Section,  583. 

Capellini,  Giovanni,  conferring  of 
Havden  Memorial  Award  on, 
483"'. 

Castillo,  Antonio  del,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  12. 

40 


Chapman,  Henry  C,  M.  D.  Re- 
port of  Curators,  577. 

Cockerel],  T.  D.  A.  The  bees  of 
genus  Perdita  F.  Smith,  25. 

Committees,  Standing,  for  1896,  9. 

Conchological  Section,  report  of, 
581. 

Conarroe,  George  M.,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  468. 

Cook,  O.  F.  Summary  of  new 
Liberian  Polydesmidte,  206, 
257. 

Cope,  Edw.  D.  The  mesenteries 
of  the  Sauria,  290,  308.  New 
and  little  known  mammalia 
from  the  Port  Kennedy  bone 
deposit,  377,  378.  The  hemi- 
penes  of  the  Sauria,  377,  461. 

Corresponding  Secretary,  report 
of,  574. 

Curators,  report  of,  577. 

Dall,  William  Healey.  Insular 
land-shell  faunas,  as  illustrated 
especially  by  the  data  obtained 
by  Dr.  G.  Baur  in  the  Galapagos  . 
Islands,  (Plates  XV,  XVI, 
XVII),  377,  395. 

Dobson,  George  Edward,  an- 
nouncement of  death  of,  12. 

Dolley,  Charles  S.,  M.  D.  The 
Planktonokrit,  a  centrifugal  ap- 
paratus for  the  volumetric  esti- 
mation of  the  food  supijly  of 
oysters  and  other  aquatic  ani- 
mals, 268,  276. 

Elections  during  1896,  593. 

Ellis,  J.  B.,  and  B.  M.  Everhardt. 
New  species  of  fungi  from  va- 
rious localities,  377  (in  next 
volume). 


612 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


Entomological  Section,  report  of, 
582. 

Ford,  Henry  C,  announcement  of 
death  of,  468. 

Fox,  William  J.  Contributions  to 
a  knowledge  of  tlie  Hymenop- 
tera  of  Brazil,  No.  1,  Scoliida?, 
290,  292.  The  Hymenoptera 
collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson 
Smith  in  Northeast  Africa,  469, 
547. 

Frazer,  Dr.  Persifor.  Two  sup- 
posed new  trap  dykes  in  Chester 
Co.,  Penna.,  206.  Appoint- 
ment as  delegate  to  the  7th 
International  Congress  of  Geol- 
ogists, 220. 

General  Index,  611. 

Gilbert,  Samuel  H.,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  207. 

Goodman,  H.  Ernest,  M.  D.,  an- 
nouncement of  death  of,  168. 

Gorgas,  A.  C,  M.  D.,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  9. 

Green,  Alexander  H. ,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  484. 

Gundlach,  Juan,  announcement 
of  death  of,  207. 

Haines,  R.  B.,  announcement  of 
death  of,  9. 

Harris,  Gilbert  D.  New  and  in- 
teresting Eocene  mollusca  from 
the  Gulf  States  (Plates  XVIII, 
XIX,  XX,  XXI,  XXII,  and 
XXIII),  470. 

Hartzell,  J.  G.,  Jr.  The  minerals 
of  South  Carolina,  206  (not  pub- 
lished). 

Hayden  Geological  INIemorial 
Committee  for  1896,  221.  Re- 
port of,  483. 

Hazlehurst,  Henry,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  168. 

Heilprin,  Angelo,  appointment  as 
delegate  to  the  IVIining  and  Geo- 
logical INIillennial  Congress  at 
Budapest,  220.  Report  of  the 
Professor  of  Geology,  589. 

Henrv,  Fred.  D.,M.  D.,  Remarks 
on  Filaria,  268,  271. 

Hunt,  Wm.,  M.  D.,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  220. 


Index  to  Genera,  603. 

JefFeris,  Wm.  W.  Rei^ort  of  the 
the  Curator  of  the  William  S. 
Vaux  Collections,  591. 

Jordan,  David  Starr.  A  collection 
of  fishes  made  bj^  the  Rev. 
Joseph  Seed  Roberts  in  Kings- 
ton, Jamaica,  290  (in  next  vol- 
ume). 

Kellar,  Ida  A.  The  coloring  mat- 
ter of  the  aril  of  Celastrus  scan- 
dens,  168,  212. 

Leeds,  Morris  E.,  and  J.  S.  Stokes. 
Communication  on  Roentgen 
photography  (no  abstract),  206. 

Lewis,  Samuel  G.,  M.  D.,  an- 
nouncement of  death  of,  10. 

Librarian,  rejjort  of,  575. 

Meehan,  Thomas.  Contributions 
to  the  life  history  of  plants.  No. 
XII,  168  (withdrawn  by  author). 
Report  of  the  Botanical  Section, 
583. 

Mineralogical  and  Geological  Sec- 
tion, report  of,  585. 

Moore,  Clarence  B.  Certnin  abo- 
riginal mounds  of  the  Georgia 
coast,  566  (for  the  Journal). 

Morris,  Charles.  Report  of  the 
Anthropological  Section,  588. 

Mueller,  Ferdinand  von,  an- 
nouncement of  death  of,  486. 

Nolan,  Edw.  J.,  M.  D.  Report  of 
Recording  Secretary,  571.  Re- 
port of  Librarian,  575. 

Ofhcers,  etc.,  for  1897,  593. 

Orgyia  leucostigma,  extermina- 
tion of,  12. 

Ornithological  Section,  report  of, 
586. 

Pilsbry,  H.  A.  New  species  of 
the  Helicoid  Genus  Polvgvra 
(Plates  II  and  III),  107l5. 
Pleurotomaria  crotaloides  Mor- 
ton in  the  New  Jersey  Creta- 
ceous (Plate  I),  10.  Descriptions 
of  new  species  of  Mollusks,  12, 
21.  On  a  collection  of  barnacles, 
208.  Pugnus  parvus,  208.  A 
remarkable  Central  American 
Melanian,  220,  269.  New  spe- 
cies  of    fresh    water   mollusks 


1896.] 


NATURAL  SCIENCES  OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


613 


from  South  America,  486,  561. 
Geology  of  the  mussel-bearing 
clays  of  Fish  House,  N.  J.,  486, 
567.  Description  of  new  South 
American  Bulimuli,  566.  Re- 
port of  the  Conchological  Sec- 
tion, 581.  Report  of  the  Pro- 
fessor in  the  Department  of 
MoUusca,  590. 

Pilsbry,  Henry  A.,  and  Samuel 
N.  Rhoads.  Contributions  to 
the  Zoology  of  Tennessee,  No.  4. 
Mollusks,  468,  561. 

Pilsbry,  H.  A.,  and  E.  G.  Vanatta. 
-Catalogue  of  the  sj^ecies  of  Cer- 
ion,  with  descriptions  of  new 
forms  (Plate  XI),  268,  315. 
Revision  of  the  slugs  of  North 
America:  Ariolimax  and  Aphal- 
larion  (Plate  XII),  290,  239. 

Professor-  in  the  Department  of 
Insecta,  report  of,  591. 

Professor  in  the  Department  of 
MoUusca,  report  of,  590. 

Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Archse- 
olog}^,  report  of,  589. 

Professor  of  Geology,  report  of, 
589 

Professor  of  Invertebrate  Zoology, 
report  of,  590. 

Rand,  Theo.  D.  The  serpentines 
of  Eastern  Penns^dvania,  219. 
Mica  schists  of  the  Schuylkill 
River,  484.  Report  of  the  Min- 
eralogical  and  Geological  Sec- 
tion, 586. 

Recording  Secretary,  report  of, 
571. 

Report  of  the  Anthropological 
Section,  588. 

Report  of  Biological  and  Micro- 
scopical Section,  580. 

Report  of  the  Botanical  Section, 
583. 

Report  of  the  Conchological  Sec- 
tion, 581. 

Report  of  Con-esponding  Secre- 
tary, 574. 

Report  of  the  Curator  of  the  Wil- 
liam S.  Vaux  Collections,  591. 

Report  of  Curators,  577. 


Report  of  the  Entomological  Sec- 
tion, 582. 

Report  of  Librarian,  575. 

Rei^ort  of  the  Mineralogical  and 
Geological  Section,  585. 

Report  of  Ornithological  Section, 
586. 

Report  of  the  Professor  in  tlie 
Department  of  Insecta,  591. 

Report  of  the  Professor  in  the 
Department  of  MoUusca,  590. 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Ethnol- 
ogy and  Archfeology,  589. 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Geology, 
589. 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Inverte- 
brate Zoology,  590. 

Report  of  Recording  Secretary, 
571. 

Rhoads,  Samuel  N.  Contribu- 
tions to  the  Zoology  of  Tennes- 
see, No.  3,  Mammals,  12,  175. 
A  revision  of  the  Polar  Hares 
of  Nortli  America  (Plates  VI, 
VII, VIII,  IX  and  X),  220,  351. 
Mammals  collected  by  Dr.  A. 
Donaldson  Smith  during  his 
expedition  to  Lake  Rudolf, 
Africa  (Plate  XXV),  468,  517. 

Rothermel,  Peter  F. ,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  168. 

Rutter,  Cloudesley.  A  collection 
of  fislies  obtained  at  Swatow, 
China,  by  Miss  Adele  M.  Fielde, 
290  (in  next  volume). 

Ryder,  John  Adam,  biographical 
sketch  of,  222. 

Salle,  Auguste,  announcement  of 
death  of,  2(>8. 

Sharp,  Benjamin,  M.  D.  Second 
commvmicatinn  on  Alaslca  and 
Siberia  (no  abstract),  10.  Re- 
port of  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 574.  Report  of  the  Pro- 
fessor of  Invertebrate  Zoology, 
590. 

Shufeldt,    R.     W.,   M.    D.       Dr. 
CoUett  on  the  morphology   of 
the  cranium  and  the  auricular 
openings  in  the  north  European 
species  of  the  Family  Strigidas, 


614 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF 


[1896. 


208  (not  published).  Fossil 
bones  of  birds  and  mammals 
from  Grotto  Pietro  Tamponi  and 
Grive-St.  Alban  (Plate  XXIV), 
468,  507. 

Skinner,  Henry,  M.  D.   Report  of 
the  Entomological  Section,  582. 
Report  of  the  Professor  in  the 
Department  of  Insecta,  591. 

Skinner,  Henry,  M.  D.,  and  Wm. 
J.  Fox.  Report  on  extermina- 
tion of  Tussock  Moth,  12. 

Smith,  A.  Donaldson,  Communi- 
cations on  collections  presented 
by,  (no  abstract),  208. 

Stone,  Witmer.  The  molting  of 
birds  with  special  reference  to 
the    plumage   of    the    smaller 


birds  of  Eastern  North  America 
(Plates  IV  and  V),  12, 108.  Re- 
port of  the  Ornithological  Sec- 
tion, 586. 

Wachsmuth,  Charles,  announce- 
ment of  death  of,  168. 

Walton,  Jesse  S.,  announcement 
of  death  of,  168. 

Whitney,  Josiah  Dwight,  an- 
nouncement of  death  of,  484. 

William  S.  Vaux  Collections,  re- 
port of  the  Curator,  591. 

Wistar,  Isaac  J.,  resolution  of 
appreciation  tendered  to,  10. 
Appointment  as  delegate  to  Kel- 
vin Jubilee,  208. 

Wister,  Owen  Jones,  M.  D.,  an- 
nouncement of  death  of,  168. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.    SCI.    Ph'ILA.    IS9H 


PLATE  XVIII. 


HARRIS.     EOCENE  MOLLUSCA  OF  GULF  STATES. 

(JACKSON   SPECIES.) 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.    SCI.    PHI  LA.    1S96. 


PLATE  XIX. 


HARRIS.     EOCENE  MOLLUSCA  OF  GULF  STATES. 

(JACKSON   SPECIES.) 


PROC.  ACAD.    NAT.   SCI.    PhlLA.  d806. 


PLATE  XX. 


HARRIS.    EOCENE  MOLLUSCA  OF  GULF  STATES. 

(i-5  CLAIBORNE  SPECIES.) 
(6-12  UPPER  LIGNITIC  SPECIES.) 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.    SCI.    PrilLA.    1896. 


PLATE  X.KI 


HARRIS.    EOCENE  MOLLUSCA  OF  GULF  STATES. 

(LIGNITIC  SPECIES.) 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.    SCI.    PHI  LA     ISOr 


PLATE  XXII. 


HARRIS.    EOCENE  MOLLUSCA  OF  GULF  STATES. 

(LOWER  LIGNITIC  SPECIES.) 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.    SCI.    PIIILA,   1896. 


PLATE  XXIII. 


HARRIS.    EOCENE  MOLLUSCA  OF  GULF  STATES. 

(LOWER  LIGNITIC  AND  MIDWAY  SPECIES.) 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.  SCI.  PHILA.  1896. 


PLATE  XXIV. 


R.  W.  Shufeldt,  ad.  Nat.  Del. 


SHUFELDT.    FOSSIL  MAM  MALS  AND  BIRDS. 


PROC.  ACAD.   NAT.  SCI.    PHILA.   1896. 


PLATE  XXVI 


PILSBRY    DEL. 


PILSBRY.    NEW  SOUTH  AMERICAN  MOLLUSKS. 


PROC.  ACAD.  NAT.   SCI.    PHILA.  1896. 


PLATE  XXVII. 


PILSBRY    DEL. 


PILSBRY.    NEW  SOUTH  AMERICAN   MOLLUSKS. 


r 


PROCEEDINGS 


-4  \  X. 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1896. 


FART  I,  JAJ^UAEY,  FEBRUARY  and  MARCH. 


'•-N 


•^J 


r 


Pl!)BL1CATI0N  COMMITTEE. 


Thomas  Meehan,  Charles  E.  Smith, 

Edw.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  George  H.  Horn,  M.  D  , 

Henry  Skinner,  M.  D. 

EDITOR  :  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES, 

LOGAN   SQUARE. 
1896. 


^1? 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 

ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 

OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


Nine  volumes  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Jourxal,  and  Parts  1,  2  and  3  of  Volume  X 
(Quarto)  have  been  issued — 1847  to  1896.  The  price  per  volume  of  four  parts  is  .SIO,  or  .§3 
per  ]iart  to  subscribers,  and  to  others  SI  2.50  per  volume,  or  S3. 75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains 
"  The  Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna  of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mam- 
malian Remains  of  North  America."  Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.  By  Joseph  Leidt, 
M.  D.,  LL.  D. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Journal,  1817  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  public,  S48. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy,  published  in  octavo,  1841  to 
1856,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to  mem- 
bers, and  to  the  public,  .S36. 

The  Second  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  may  be  obtained  at  .S42  to  members,  or  .SB 
per  volume  separately,  and  to  the  public  S3. 75  per  volume. 

The  Third  Series  op  the  Proceedings,  illustrated,  commencing  January  1, 1871,  (of 
which  twenty-five  volumes  were  completed  Dee.  31,  1895),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum  to 
subscribers,  jjayable  in  advance:  single  volumes,  S6.25. 

American  Journal  of  Concholoby,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8  vo.  Containing  2,500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  S70.  Price  reduced  to  $40  for  the  set.  Separate 
volumes,  SIO  each. 

BOOKS  ROR  SALE. 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  affixed. 
Description  of  Shells  of  North  America,  with  68  colored  plates.     By  Thojiias  Sat. 

18.30-34.     S10.50. 
Monograph  of  the  Terrestrial  Mollcsca  of  the  United  States.      With  illustrations  of 

all  the  species.      By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.      Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  S20 ;  colored  edition,  S13.50  :  plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 
Monograph  of  the  Fresh  Water  Univalve  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.     By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  1840-44.     With  Continuation  to  1871.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2  vols., 

with   many   colored  plates.     Fine  edition,  duplicate  plates,  S40 ;  with  colored  plates, 

$25  :  with  plain  plates,  .S19. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonyms  of  the  Species  of  Strepomatid*  (Melanians)  of  the  United  States.      By  Geo. 

W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  S2 :  paper,  .$1.75. 
List  of  American  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  the  Memoirs  and  Dates 

of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  S2:  paper,  .SI. 75. 
Monograph  of  thf  Order  Pholadacea  and  other  Papers.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth, 

$2:  paper,  SI. 75. 
Complete  Writing  on  Recent  and  Fossil  Conchology  of  C.  S.  Rafinesque.      Edited  by 

Wm.  G.  Binney  and  G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     $2.50. 
Observations  on  THE  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  tol3.     With  Index, 

Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.      Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographic  Plates. 

$60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  $5. 
Synopsis  OF  the  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.    $5. 
Contributions  to  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.    $3. 
Fossil  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.     $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  cents. 

Notice  to  Booksellers— All  the  publications  of  the  Society  will  be  supplied  to  Book- 
sellers at  a  discount  of  20  per  cent  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public. 

Application  to  be  made  to  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  at  the  Hall  of  the  Academy, 
Logan  Square. 

May,  1896. 


Hayden  Memorial  Geological  Fund. 

Mrs.  Emma  W.  Hayden  has  given  to  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia  in  trust  the  sum  of  $2,500  to  be  known  as 
the  Hayden  Memorial  Geological  Fund,  in  commemoration  of  her 
husband,  the  late  Prof.  Ferdinand  V.  Hayden,  M.  D.,  LL.  D.  Ac- 
cording to  the  terms  of  the  trust,  a  bronze  medal  and  the  balance  of 
the  interest  arising  from  the  fund  are  to  be  awarded  annually  for  the 
best  publication,  exploration,  discovery  or  research  in  the  sciences 
of  geology  and  paleontology,  or  in  such  particular  branches  thereof 
as  ma;y  be  designated.  The  award  and  all  matters  connected  there- 
with are  to  be  determined  by  a  committee  to  be  selected  in  an  appro- 
priate manner  by  the  Academy.  The  recognition  is  not  confined  to 
American  naturalists. 


f 


CONTENTS. 


PiLSBRY,  Henry  A.      Pleurotomaria  crotaloides  Mort.  in  the  New  Jersey 

Cretaceous.     (Plate  I) 10 

Skinner,  Henry,  M.  D.,  and  Wii,i.iam  J.  Fox.     Report  on  Extermination 

of  Tussock  Moth 12 

Pilsbry,  Henry  A.     New  Species  of  the  Helicoid  Genus  Polygyra.     ( Plates 

Hand  HI) 15 

Pilsbry,  Henry  A.     Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Mollusks     ...        21 
CoCKEREivL,  T.  D.  A.     The  Bees  of  the  Genus  Perdita  F.  Smith    ...         25 
Stone,  Wither.     The  Molting  of  Birds,  with  Special  Reference  to  the  Plu- 
mages of  the  Smaller  Land  Birds  of .  Eastern  North  America.     (Plates 

IV  and  V)  108 

Allen,   Harrison,   M.   D.      Note  on  a  Uniform  Plan  of   Describing  the 

Human  Skull 17© 

Rhoads,  Samuel  N.     Contributions  to  the  Zoology  of  Tennessee.     No.  3, 

Mannnals •         •       175 

Frazer,  Dr.  PerSifor.      Two  Supposed  New  Trap  Dykes  in  Chester  Co., 

Penna ■ 206 

PiLSBRY,  Henry  A.     On  a  Collection  of  Barnacles 208 

Pilsbry,  Henry  A.     Pugnus  parvus 208 

Brown,  Amos  P.     The  Crystallization  of  Molybdenite 210 

Keller,  Ida  A.,  Ph.  D.    The  Coloring  Matter  of  the  Aril  of  Celastrus  scan- 
dens      212 


PROCEEDINGS 


^rat(c«|tt   of  ^atiu'iil  ^tii^itti^^ 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1896. 


PART  II,  APRIL- A  UG  UST. 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 

Thomas  Meehan,  Charles  E.  Smith, 

Emv.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  George  H.  Horn,  M.  D  , 

Henry  Skinner,  M.  D, 

EDITOR :  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA  : 

ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES, 

LOGAN   SQUARE. 
1896. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 

ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 

OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


Nine  volumes  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Journal,  and  Parts  1,  2  and  3  of  Volume  X 
(Quarto)  have  been  issued — 1847  to  1896.  The  price  per  volume  of  four  parts  is  $10,  or  $3 
per  part  to  subscribers,  and  to  others  $12.50  per  volume,  or  $3.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains 
"  The  Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna  of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mam- 
malian Remains  of  North  America."  Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.  By  Joseph  Leidy, 
M.  D.,  LL.P. 

The  First  Series  op  the  Journal,  1817  to  1842,  in  eight  volumes  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  public,  $48. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy,  published  in  octavo,  1841  to 
1856,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to  mem- 
bers, and  to  the  public,  $36. 

The  Second  Series  op  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourtee  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  may  be  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately ,  and  to  the  public  $3.75  per  volume. 

The  Third  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  illustrated,  commencing  January  1, 1871,  (of 
which  twenty-five  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1895),  is  published  at  $5  per  annum  to 
subscribers,  payable  in  advance ;  single  volumes,  $6.25. 

AifERicAN  Journal  of  Conchology,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8  vo.  Containing  2,500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $40  for  the  set.  Separate 
volumes,  $10  each. 

BOOKS  KOR  SALK.  , 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  affi.xed. 
Descrii'tion  or  Shells  op  North  America,  with  68  colored  plates.     By  Thomas  Say. 

1830-34.     $10.50.  -     • 

Monograph  op  thr  Terrestrial  Mollusca  of  the  United  States.      With  illustrations  of 

all  the  species.       By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.       Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20  ;  colored  edition,  $1.^.50:  plain  edition,  $8.60.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 
Monograph  of  the  Fresh  Water  Univalve  Mollusca  of  the  United  StathJs.      By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  1840-44.     With  Continuation  to  1871.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2  vols., 

with   many  colored  plates.     Fine  edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40 ;  with  colored  plates, 

.$25  ;  with  plain  plates,  $19. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonyms  of  the  Species  op  Strepomatid^  (Melanians)  of  the  United  States.      By  Geo. 

W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
List  of  American  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  the  Memoirs  and  Dates 

of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2;  paper,  $1.75. 
Monograph  op  thf  Order  Pholadacea  and  other  Papers.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth, 

$2;  paper,  $1.75. 
(y'oMi'LETE  AVriting  on  Reoent  and  Fossil  Conchology  op  C.  S.  Rafinesque.      Edited  by 

Wm.  G.  Binney  and  G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     $2.60. 
Observations  ON  the  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  to  13.     With  Index, 

Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.      Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographic  Plates. 

$60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  $5. 
Synopsis  of  the  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.     $6. 
(Jontriiiutions  to  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.    $3. 
Fossil  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.    $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  cents. 

Notice  to  Booksellers — All  the  publications  of  the  Society  will  be  supplied  to  Book-  ■ 
sellers  at  a  discount  of  20  ])er  cent  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public. 

Api)lication  to  be  made  to  Edward  J,  Nolan,  M.  D.,  at  the  Hall  of  the  Academy, 
Logan  Square. 

May,  1896. 


Hayden  Memorial  Geological  Fund. 

Mrs.  Emma  W.  Hayden  has  given  to  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia  intrust  the  sum  of  $2,500  to  be  known  as 
the  Hayden  Memorial  Geological  Fund,  in  commemoration  of  her 
husband,  the  late  Prof.  Ferdinand  V.  Hayden,  M.  D.,  LL.  D.  Ac- 
cording to  the  terms  of  the  trust,  a  bronze  medal  and  the  balance  of 
the  interest  arising  from  the  fund  are  to  be  awarded  annually  for  the 
best  publication,  exploration,  discovery  or  research  in  the  sciences 
of  geology  and  paleontology,  or  in  such  particular  branches  thereof 
as  may  be  designated.  The  award  and  all  matters  connected  there- 
with are  to  be  determined  by  a  committee  to  be  selected  in  an  appro- 
priate manner  by  the  Academy.  The  recognition  is  not  confined  to 
American  naturalists. 


CONTENTS. 


KELI.ER,  Ida  A.,  Ph.  D.    The  Coloring  Matter  of  the  Aril  of  Celastrus  scan-     . 

dens     (Continued.) -"'' 

Rand,  Theodore  D.     The  Serpentines  of  Eastern  Pennsylvania.         .         .       2J9 

Bascom,  Fi^orence.    Perido-Steatite  and  Diabase 219 

Allen,  Harrison,  M.  D.     A  Biographical  Sketch  of  John  Adam  Ryder.     .       223 

Cook,  O.  F.     Summary  of  New  Liberian  Polydesmoidea 257 

PiLSBRY,  Henry  A.     A  Remarkable  Central  American  Melunian.         .        .       269 

Henry,  Frederick  P.     Remarks  on  Filaria •      271 

DoLLEY,  Charles  S.,  M.  D.    The  Planktonokrit.a  Centrifugal  Apparatus 

for  the  Volumetric  Estimation  of  the  Food -supply  of  Oysters  and  other 

Aquatic  Animals. 276 

Allen,  Harrison,  M.  D.     The  Ulna  of  thfe  Common  Brown  Bat.        .        .       291 
Fox,  William  J.     Contributions  to  a  Knowledge  of  the  Hjmienoptera  of 

Brazil.    No.  I,  Scoliidse '         *         '       "^^ 

Cope,  E.  D.     The  Mesenteries  of  the  Sauria '       •       308 

PiLSBRY,  Henry  A.  and  E.  G.  VanaTTa.      Catalogue  of  the  Species  of 

Cerion,  with  Descriptions  of  New  Forms.     (Plate  XI)     ....      315 
PiLSBRY  Henry  A.  and  E.  G.  VanaTTa.     Revision  of  the  North  American 

Slugs :  Ariolimax  and  Aphallarion.     (Plates  XII,  XIII,  XIV)  .       339 

RnoADS,  Samuel  N.      Synopsis  of  the   Polar.  Hares  of    North   America. 

(Plates  VI,  VII,  VIII,  IX,  X) 351 

Cope,  E.  D.     New  and  little  known  Mammalia  from  the  Port  Kennedy 

Bone  Deposit ^^^ 

Dall,  William  HealEY.     Insular  Landshell  Faunas,  especially  as  illustra- 
ted by  the   Data  obtained  by  Dr.   G.   Baur  in  the   Galapagos   Islands. 

(PlatesXV,  XVI,  XVII) 395 

Cope,  E.  D.     On  the  Hemipenis  of  the  Sauria 461 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF  THE 


^fiulenia  of  ^atiUMl  ^mwm 


OF 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1896. 


PART  III,  SEPTEMBER,  OCTOBER,  JVOf  EMBER, 


PUBLICATION  COMMITTEE. 

Thomas  Meehan,  Charles  E.  Smith, 

Edw.  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  George  H.  Horn,  M.  D  , 

Henry  Skinner,  M.  D. 

EDITOR :  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES, 

LOGAN   8QUAEE. 

1897. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE 

ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 

OF  PHILADELPHIA. 


Ten  volumes  of  the  New  Series  of  the  Journal  (Quarto)  have  been  issued — 1847  to 
1896.  The  price  per  volume  of  four  parts  is  $10,  or  $3  per  part  to  subscribers,  and  to  others 
$12.50  per  volume,  or  $3.75  per  part.  Vol.  VII  contains  "  The  Extinct  Mammalian  Fauna 
of  Dakota  and  Nebraska,  with  a  Synopsis  of  the  Mammalian  Remains  of  North  America." 
Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.      By  Joseph  Leiby,  M.  D.,  LL.  D. 

The  First  Series  OP  THE  Journal,  1817  to  18-12,  in  eight  volumes  octavo,  may  be 
obtained  at  $40  to  members,  and  to  the  public,  $48. 

The  First  Series  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  Academy,  published  in  octavo,  1841  to 
1856,  of  which  eight  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1856,  may  be  obtained  at  $24  to  mem- 
bers, and  to  the  public,  $36. 

The  Second  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  commencing  January  1,  1857  (of  which 
fourteen  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1870),  may  be  obtained  at  $42  to  members,  or  $3 
per  volume  separately ;  and  to  the  public  $3.75  per  volume. 

•  The  Third  Series  of  the  Proceedings,  illustrated,  commencing  January  1, 1871,  (of 
which  twenty-sis  volumes  were  completed  Dec.  31,  1896),  is  published  ai  $5  per  annum  to 
subscribers,  payable  in  advance;  single  volumes,  $6.25. 

American  Journal  of  Conchology,  1865-71.  Seven  vols.,  8  vo.  Containing  2,500 
pages,  illustrated  by  one  hundred  and  fifty  plates,  many  of  them  colored,  besides  about  a 
thousand  wood  engravings.  Published  at  $70.  Price  reduced  to  $40  for  the  set.  Separate 
volumes,  $10  each. 

BOOKS  KOR  SALE;. 

The  Academy  has  the  following  works  for  sale  at  the  prices  affixed. 
Description  of  Shells  of  North  America,  with  68  colored  plates.     By  Thomas  Say. 

1830-34.     $10.50. 
Monograph  of  the  Terrestrial  Mollusca  op  the  United  States.      With  illustrations  of 

all  the  species.      By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.      Fine  edition,  plate  paper,  with  duplicate 

plates,  colored  and  tinted,  $20 ;  colored  edition,  $13.50  ;  plain  edition,  $8.50.      Only 

one  hundred  copies  printed,  which  have  been  mostly  sold. 
Monograph  of  the  Fresh  Water  Univalve  Mollusca  op  the  United  States.     By  S.  S. 

Haldeman,  1840-44.     With  Continuation  to  1871.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     2  vols., 

with   many  colored  plates.     Fine  edition,  duplicate  plates,  $40;  with  colored  plates, 

.$25  ;  with  plain  plates,  $19. 

Either  the  original  work  or  the  continuation  furnished  separately,  if  desired. 
Synonyms  of  the  Species  of  Strepomatid^g  (Melanians)  of  the  United  States.      By  Geo. 

W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2  ;  paper,  $1.75. 
List  op  Amkuican  Writers  on  Recent  Conchology,  with  the  Titles  of  the  Memoirs  and  Dates 

of  Publication.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth,  $2 ;  paper,  $1.76. 
Monograph  op  the  Order  Pholadacea  and  other  Papers.     By  Geo.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     Cloth, 

$2  ;  paper,  $1 .75, 
Complete  AWiting  on  Recent  and  Fossil  Conchology  op  C.  S.  Rapinesque.      Edited  by 

Wm.  G.  Binney  and  G.  W.  Tryon,  Jr.     $2.50. 
Observations  on  the  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     4to,  Vols.  1  to  13.     With  Index, 

Nos.  1,  2  and  3,  complete.      Illustrated  with  several  hundred  fine  lithographic  Plates. 

$60. 

Same,  Vols.  2  to  13  inclusive,  except  Vols.  4  and  12.     Each  volume  separately,  .$5. 
Synopsis  OF  the  Genus  Unio.     By  Isaac  Lea,  LL.  D.     Fourth  edition.    $5. 
Contributions  to  Geology.     By  Isaac  Lea.    $3. 
Fossil  Foot-Marks.     By  Isaac  Lea.     Large  folio,  text  and  plate.    $2. 

Same,  plate  alone.     50  cents. 

Notice  to  Booksellers — All  the  publications  of  the  Academy  will  be  supplied  to  Book- 
sellers at  a  discount  of  20  per  cent  on  the  prices  charged  to  the  public. 

Apj)lication  to  be  made  to  Edward  J.  Nolan,  M.  D.,  at  the  Hall  of  the  Academy, 
Logan  Square. 

February,  1897. 


Hayden  Memorial  Geological  Fund. 

Mrs.  Emma  W.  Hayden  has  given  to  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia  in  trust  the  sum  of  $2,500  to  be  known  as 
the  Hayden  Memorial  Geological  Fund,  in  commemoration  of  her 
husband,  the  late  Prof.  Ferdinand  V.  Hayden,  M.  D.,  LL.D.  Ac- 
cording to  the  terms  of  the  trust,  a  bronze  medal  and  the  balance  of 
the  interest  arising  from  the  fund  are  to  be  awarded  annually  for  the 
best  publicatioD,  exploration,  discovery  or  research  in  the  sciences 
of  geology  and  paleontology,  or  in  such  particular  branches  thereof 
as  may  be  designated.  The  award  and  all  matters  connected  there- 
with are  to  be  determined  by  a  committee  to  be  selected  in  an  appro- 
priate manner  by  the  Academy.  The  recognition  is  not  confined  to 
American  naturalists. 


><i^' 


CONTENTS. 


Harris,  Gii^bERT  D.     New  and  Interesting  Eocene  Mollusca  from  the  Gulf 

States.     (Plates  XVIII,  XIX,  XX,  XXI,  XXII,  and  XXIII).         .        .  470 

Committee  on  Hayden  Memoriai.  Award,  report  of         ...        .  483 

Rand,  Theodore  D.     Mica  Schists  of  the  Schuylkill  River.         .         .         .  484 
Brown,  Arthur  Erwin.    The  Occurrence  of  Macacus  leoninus  (Blyth)  in 

Eastern  Burmah. 485 

PiLSBRY,    Henry  A.   and  Samuei,    N.   Rhoads.        Contributions  to  the 

Zoology  of  Tennessee.     No.  4,  Mollusks. 487 

ShufeItDT,  R.  W.,  M-  D.     Fossil  Bones  of  Birds  and  Mammals  from  Grotto 

Pietro  Tamponi  and  Grive-St.  Alban.     (Plate  XXIV) 507 

Rhoads,   Samuei*  N.       Mammals  collected  by   Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith 

during  his  expedition  to  Lake  Rudolf ,  Africa.     (Plate  XXV).        .         .  517 
Fox,  Wii^liam  J.     The  Hymenoptera  collected  by  Dr.  A.  Donaldson  Smith 

in  Northeastern  Africa 547 

Pii,sbry,  Henry  A.     New  Species  of  Fresh  Water  Mollusks  from  South 

America.     (Plates  XXVI  and  XXVII) 561 

PiLSBRY,  Henry  A.     Geology  of  the  Mussel- Bearing  Clays  of  Fish-House, 

N.J 567 

Report  of  the  Recording  Secretary. 571 

Report  of  the  Corresponding  Secretary. 574 

Report  of  the  Librarian 575 

Report  of  the  Curators 577 

Report  of  the  Biological  and  Microscopical  Section 580 

Report  of  the  Conchological  Section. 581 

Report  of  the  Entomological  Section 582 

Report  of  the  Botanical  Section 583 

Report  of  the  Mineralogical  and  Geological  Section 585 

Report  of  the  Ornithological  Section 586 

Report  of  the  Anthropological  Section 588 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Geology.         . 589 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Ethnology  and  Archaeology 589 

Report  of  the  Professor  of  Invertebrate  Zoology 590 

Report  of  the  Professor  in  the  Department  of  Mollusca 590 

Report  of  the  Professor  in  the  Department  of  Insecta.  .        .        .         .591 

Report  of  the  Curator  of  the  Wni.  S.  Vaux  Collections.          ....  591 

Officers,  Councillors  etc.  for  1897 593 

Elections  during  1896 593 

Additions  to  the  Museum. 595 

Index  to  Genera 603 

General  Index. 611 


Wi  I        "■•■"■••■^ Ilium 
H    IflRU    T